总目录

英文语法作文大全

翻译的基本知识

翻译的技巧

英文疑难详解

英文疑难详解续篇

英文语法作文大全

钱歌川　著

版权信息

书名：英文语法作文大全

作者：钱歌川

书号：978-7-5100-9344-9

版权：后浪出版咨询（北京）有限责任公司

目录

第一编 语法之部

一 语法自修

（1）语法和造句

（2）语句的构成

（3）语句的成分

（4）语句的扩大

（5）语句的种类

（6）语句的解剖

（7）语句的合成

（8）语句的变换

（9）额外的因素

（10）单词和词性

（11）名词和冠词

（12）补语的用法

（13）代词概要

（14）人称代词

（15）指示代词

（16）疑问代词

（17）关系代词

（18）动词的变化

（19）规则动词（Regular Verb）

（20）不规则动词（Irregular Verb）

（21）动词的种类

（22）动词的时态

（23）语态和语气

（24）助动词用法

（25）三种动状词

（26）being 的用法

（27）形容词用法

（28）比较的法则

（29）副词的用法

（30）介词的用法

（31）类别的介词

（32）词后的介词

（33）连词和感叹词

二 语法练习

（1）人称和数（Person and Number）

（2）疑问句（Interrogatives）

（3）疑问短语（Interrogative Phrases）

（4）否定句（Negatives）

（5）被动语态（Passive Voice）

（6）格（Case）

（7）人称代词的位置（Position of Personal Pronoun）

（8）指示代词（Demonstrative Pronouns）

（9）代词与先行词（Pronouns and Antecedents）

（10）关系代词及疑问代词（Relative and Interrogative Pronouns）

（11）形容词与副词（Adjectives and Adverbs）

（12）比较（Degrees of Comparison）

（13）冠词（The Articles）

（14）名词所有格（Nouns in Possessive Case）

（15）所有格形容词（Possessive adjectives）

（16）反身代词（Reflextive Pronouns）

（17）将来时态（The Future Tenses）

（18）现在时态（The Present Tenses）

（19）过去时态（The Past Tenses）

（20）将来完成时态（The Future Perfect Tense）

（21）现在完成时态（The Present Perfect Tense）

（22）过去完成时态（The Past Perfect Tense）

（23）完成进行时态（The Perfect Continuous Tenses）

（24）时之一致（Sequence of Tenses）

（25）直接叙述和间接叙述（Direct and Indirect Narration）

（26）条件句（Conditional Sentences）

（27）Wish 后面的虚拟式（The Subjunctive After“Wish”）

（28）Should 的特别用法

（29）Ought to

（30）Should 和 have to

（31）助动词的特别用法——避免重复（Special Use of Auxiliary Verbs—Avoidance of Repetition）

（32）不定词（The Infinitive）

（33）分词（The Participles）

（34）动名词（The Gerund）

（35）不定词乎？动名词乎？（Infinitive or Gerund？）

（36）介词（Prepositions）

（37）词的顺序（Word-Order）

（38）副词的位置（The Position of Adverbs）

（39）常易混淆的副词（Adverbs often Confused）

（40）常易混淆的形容词（Adjectives often Confused）

（41）常易混淆的动词（Verbs often Confused）

（42）词类的构成（Word-formation）

（43）语句的结合（Combination of Sentences）

（44）语句的转换（Transformation of Sentences）

英文语法练习手册习题解答

第二编 作文之部

一 造句例解

（1）名词与冠词的关系

（2）代词应注意的用法

（3）形容词应注意的用法

（4）动词时态的用法

（5）动词语气的用法

（6）主动语态与被动语态的用法

（7）助动词的用法

（8）动状词的用法

（9）副词的用法

（10）介词的用法

（11）连词的用法

（12）时的一致与叙述转换

二 作文批改

A POET IN THE THEATRE

MY BEST FRIEND

BUYING A NEW PAIR OF SHOES

MEI-LI

MY FACE

THE ROYAL TUTOR

ON BOOKS

MY HOME

MOUNTAIN CLIMBING

THE ORIGIN OF LIFE

CUTTING DOWN THE DAILY EXPENSES

THE SPURTING FOUNTAIN NEAR THE RAILWAY STATION

THE SPRING IN TAIWAN AS COMPARED WITH THAT IN THE MAINLAND

MY FIRST VISIT TO TAIWAN

MR. CLEVER

A GIRL WHOM I KNOW

THE MAN WHO KNOWS ONLY ONE MEANING OF A WORD

THE HEALING POWER FROM ABOVE

MY PROFESSION

SEEING MY BROTHER OFF

THE MOST INTERESTING EXPERIENCE OF MY LIFE

MY WEAKNESS IN WRITING ENGLISH

ONE MOONLIT NIGHT

WHEN A LIE IS NECESSARY

A GAS METER

DON’T LET YOUR OPPORTUNITY SLIP

MY FAMILY

ON EYES

A LETTER TO THE EDITOR

NATURE AND KNOWLEDGE

三 英文正误

（1）主语和动词不一致的错误

（2）动词过多的错误

（3）动词变化上的错误

（4）时态（Tense）的错误

（5）及物动词和不及物动词的错误

（6）语态的错误

（7）助动词的错误

（8）条件句中动词的错误

（9）不定词的错误

（10）分词修饰语的错误

（11）动名词的错误

（12）名词的数的错误

（13）名词的性的错误

（14）代词性的错误

（15）代词数的错误

（16）代词位的错误

（17）代词所有格的错误

（18）代词太多的错误

（19）代词的错用

（20）关系代词的格的错误

（21）关系代词 that，which 和 who 间的错用

（22）省略关系代词的错误

（23）关系代词的地位的错误

（24）感叹句的错误

（25）并列连词的错误

（26）介词误作连词的错误

（27）连词误作介词的错误

（28）关联词的错误

（29）几个极易用错的连词

（30）对于连词的意义辨认不清楚所发生的错误

（31）连词过多或被放在不必要的地方所发生的错误

（32）省略连词 that 所发生的错误

（33）比较时易犯的错误

（34）普通容易误用的形容词

（35）几对互相误用的同根的形容词

（36）几对容易互相误用的形容词

（37）形容词当副词用的错误

（38）形容词当动词的错误

（39）属性形容词和谓语部分形容词易犯的错误

（40）形容词的位置的错误

（41）冠词间的错用

（42）多用冠词的错误

（43）省略冠词的错误

（44）副词被用作补语的错误

（45）两个容易误用的副词

（46）几对容易互相误用的副词

（47）副词当名词用的错误

（48）副词在句中的位置的错误

（49）省略介词的错误

（50）多用介词的错误

（51）名词前误用介词的错误

（52）动词后误用介词的错误

（53）形容词后误用介词的错误

（54）名词后误用介词的错误

（55）几对容易互相误用的介词

练习题

习题解答

出版后记

返回总目录

第一编 语法之部

一 语法自修

（1）语法和造句

任何一种语言，都有它的语法，但说那种语言的人，却不知道什么是语法。他们从牙牙学语的时候开始，就跟着人们这样说，从来没有注意到他说的话，是合乎语法的规则的。

有些研究语言现象的人，把那种语言中常用的表现方式归纳起来，编定一些通则，这便是所谓语法。但语言是自然发展而成的，没有人肯依照一些固定的规则去说话，他们随便说，只求能表现他们的意思也就满足了。编语法的人却要从这些漫无标准的语言当中，去找出它的标准来，所以只能求得一个大概的规则，而每条规则总是有例外的。

因此我们知道语法非将就语言不可，语言的发展是绝不管什么语法规则的。没有人肯削足适履，依照语法来说话，除非他是一个外国人。我们学一种外国语，因为不是从小自然养成的习惯，而要凭记忆和理解去学习，所以一定要先学语法，才有规则可循，才能类推心得。儿童的记忆力和模仿力都很强，学任何语言，或同时学几种语言，都用不着学语法。成人记忆力差了，但理解力却增加起来，所以学了语法，就可依据一条规则，而推论到其他的说法，自然比茫无头绪地去学习要便利得多了。

英文既不是我们的国语，我们中国人来学英文，也非学语法不可。我们在学语法之初，应当了解语法并无高初之别，只有繁简之分。初中学的语法，和大学学的语法，还是一种东西，不过愈学愈复杂而已。如果你对于简单的语法没有学通，又去学繁杂的语法，只有愈弄愈糊涂，永远学不好的。所以不问你是初中学生也好，大学学生也好，如果语法没有弄清楚的话，仍得从头学起。任何一个学英文的人，都得把基本的语法学通，才能深造，正像造房子一样，基础不固，随便你把房子造得多高，也会要倒的。

我主张语法愈简单愈好，不过无论它怎样简单，却要规模全备，所谓麻雀虽小，肝胆俱全，不可见树不见林，详其一端而略去其大体。要使初学语法的人，一眼就能看透整个的树林，而不是只见一花一木，去研究它的枝节问题。你总记得群盲摸象的故事吧，那些盲人，谁都没有看见整个的像是一个什么样子，所以各执一词，没有一个人知道真正的事实。我们学语法一定要从简单的入手，就是要使我们看到个整的象，知道语法到底是什么。

你把大概的英文语法学会了，你就知道普通造句的法则，你就可以简单地用英文表达你的意思，否则，你即令对某种词类研究很深，你还是不能正确地写出一个普通的句子来。

（2）语句的构成

关于语句的构成，可分形式和内容两方面来讲。现在先讲形式。我们知道任何一个词，都有它的意义，任何一个语句，都能表达一种思想，但为什么有些人写出来的文章，像天书一样，使我们看不懂它的意思呢？这就是因为不通的人，点金成铁，把那些分明有意义的字，胡乱地凑在一起，反而使它们失去了意义。正好像一群乌合之众不能成为军队一样，许多杂凑在一起的字，也绝不能成为语句。例如 hard boy the works 或 the hard boy works 或 boy the works hard 或 works boy the hard 等，都不是语句，一定要写成 the boy works hard 才行，而这样还不够完善，还得把第一个字母大写，在各词的最后加上一个句点，即“The boy works hard.（那男孩用功。）”才算是一个完善的语句。

由此看来，我们可以知道，一个完善的语句，一定是要把各词依照语法排列，加上必要的大写和标点，然后才可以成立的。你如果对这种形式加以忽视，而不注意词的排列，那么，你写出来的文章自然不通了。

在语句的构成上，比这种形式问题更为重要的，自然是它的内容了。内容就是说它所包含的要素。一个完整的语句，起码要具备一个主语（Subject）和一个谓语（Predicate），例如“Birds fly.（鸟飞）。”前者为主语，后者为谓语，虽则简单，却已成为一个完整的语句了。如上举的“The boy works hard.”也是一样，the boy 是主语，works hard 是谓语。这是第一种句型，其公式是“Subject + Predicate”。其次是有宾语（Object）的语句，例如，“He has a book.”。因用 have 这个及物动词，一定要接上一个宾语，才能完成意义，你单说“他有”，听者便将产生疑问：他有什么呢？所以必须说出他有的东西来，才算是表达出一个完全的思想来了。这是第二种句型，其公式是“Subject + Predicate + Object”。有时在不及物动词后面，也接上一个词，但不是宾语，因不及物动词是不能有宾语的。比方说，“I am a boy.”。句中的 boy，并不是宾语，而是补语（Complement）。补语一定要和主语一致，如上句 I 就是 boy，boy 就是 I；而宾语和主语，则必然是两件事。宾语一定要是名词，而补语便不一定要是名词，有时形容词也可以，如“The flower is beautiful.”，便是用形容词做补语的。这是第三种句型，其公式是“Subject + Predicate + Complement”，我们又可以把宾语和补语，同时用在一句中，例如“We made him happy.”。句中的 we 是主语，made 是谓语，him 是宾语，happy 是补语。这是第四种句型，其公式是“Subject + Predicate + Object + Complement”。

构成英文语句的要素，不外是上述的“主语”“谓语”“宾语”和“补语”四种字眼，其他都无关重要，只是用作修饰而已。所以我们对于其他那些无关紧要的字，就叫作修饰语（Modifier）。语句中成为要素的字眼，就好像房子的干架，成为修饰语的字眼，就好像房子的装饰；没有干架房子便建不起来，更无从加以装饰了。正像房子的建成全在干架一样，语句的构成也非有那些要素不可。

（3）语句的成分

在上讲“语句的构成”中我们所讲的，是构成语句的一些要素，即所谓主语、谓语、宾语和补语。在本讲中，就打算讲构成那些要素的成分，即单词（Word）、短语（Phrase）和分句（Clause）。一个主语不一定是一个单词，它也可以是一个短语，也可以是一个分句。任何一个主语，都应该是一个名词，不过有时我们可以不用名词而用别的词来代替它，例如用代词，用不定词，用短语，或用分句都可以。这些代替来用的词，我们可统称之为相当语（Equivalents）。

凡有意义的一个字母（letter），或两个字母以上结合而成的文字，就叫作单词。英文的单词，依其词性可分为八大词类（Eight Parts of Speech），即所谓名词（Noun）、代词（Pronoun）、动词（Verb）、形容词（Adjective）、副词（Adverb）、介词（Preposition）、连词（Conjunction）、感叹词（Interjection）。

两个以上的单词组合而成的短辞，就叫作短语。一个短语中是不包含主语和谓语的，但它却有一定的意义。依照它的作用，我们可以把短语分为四类：①名词短语（Noun Phrase），②形容词短语（Adjective Phrase），③副词短语（Adverb Phrase），④其他短语。现就以上四类，分别举例说明如下：

名词短语：To tell a lie is wrong.（撒谎是不对的。）

Now I must decide what to do.（现在我必须决定怎么办。）

例句中 to tell a lie 是 is 的主语，what to do 是 decide 的宾语，凡主语和宾语都是要用名词的，所以这是名词短语。

形容词短语：He is a man of courage.（他是一个勇者。）

A man without courage is a knife without an edge.（人而无勇犹刀之无锋。）

Be always in time；too late is a crime.（要常守时；迟误为罪。）

所谓 man of courage = courageous man，可见都是用来修饰 man 的；without courage 也是修饰 man 的，without an edge 就是修饰 knife 的；in time 是 be 的补足语，也是当作形容词用的，所以以上都是形容词短语。

副词短语：He studies with diligence.（他勤读。）

I was born in this town.（我生在此城。）

There is a book on the desk.（桌上有一本书。）

例句中的 with diligence、in this town 和 on the desk，都是副词短语，第一个短语是修饰动词 studies，第二个短语是修饰动词 was born，第三个短语是修饰动词 is 的。

其他短语：

1. 动词短语（Verb-phrase），如：a. Take good care of yourself.（好生保养。）b. He did not take part in the meeting.（他未曾参加那会。）

2. 介词短语（Prepositional-phrase），如：a. He is cheerful in spite of illness.（他不顾生病还是很快活。）b. He was obliged to leave the office on account of ill health.（他因病不得不停止办公。）

3. 连词短语（Conjunction-phrase），如：a. I shall lend you the book as soon as I have done with it.（等我读完了这本书，我就借给你。）b. Any will do，so long as it is interesting.（只要是有趣味的什么都可以。）

4. 感叹词短语（Interjection-phrase），如：a. You are not going to pay the money？For shame！（你不付钱吗？真不要脸！）b. Come now，don’t joke.（喂，喂，不要开玩笑。）

语句中的小语句，就叫作分句。每个分句都是有一个主语和一个谓语的。分句可分为①名词分句（Noun Clause），②形容词分句（Adjective Clause），③副词分句（Adverb Clause）三种。现分别举例说明如下：

名词分句：What he says is true.（他所说的是真的。）

He asked me where I was going.（他问我往何处去。）

例句中的 what he says 是动词 is 的主语；where I was going 是动词 asked 的宾语，所以都是名词分句。

形容词分句：This is the house where he lives.（这就是他住的屋子。）

Students who are diligent are sure to succeed.（勤勉的学生一定会成功的。）

例句中的 where he lives 是修饰 house 的，而 who are diligent 是修饰 students 的，所以都是形容词分句。

副词分句：I did as he told me.（我照他说的做了。）

Look before you leap.（看好再跳。）

例句中的 as he told me 是修饰动词 did 的，before you leap 是修饰动词 look 的，所以都是副词分句。

（4）语句的扩大

照第二讲所述，语句的构成有四种句式，最简单的就是“主语 + 谓语”，例如 Birds sing. 但英文中毕竟很少见到这样简单的句子。为什么少呢？因为句式尽管简单得只有一个主语和一个谓语，但文字绝不限于两个字。我们可以在那主语和谓语上，加添许多修饰语（Modifier），那句子自然就变长了。例如上举的“Birds sing.”这个句子，我们就可以说“Little birds sing sweetly”，又可以说“The little birds in my garden sing sweetly every morning”，诸如此类，尽可以拉长，但在句式上看来，它还是“主语 + 谓语”的一个简单句子。

一个句子比方作人体的话，其中的主语就是人体的头。这头上可以插花，可以戴帽，可以御眼镜，可以戴耳环，这些装饰在头上的东西，就通称为装饰品，在句子的主语上，就叫作修饰语。修饰语是限定那个主语等的意义的，可大别为名词修饰语和动词修饰语两类。名词修饰语是形容词，而动词修饰语就是副词。修饰语放在那主词的前面或是后面的时候，就称为附加的用法（Attributive Use），作为动词的补足语时，就叫作叙述的用法（Predicative Use）。现在分别举例说明一下。

Ⅰ. 形容词的“附加的用法”和“叙述的用法”：

（a）附加的用法：A heavy shower fell today.

I see something white in the distance.

（b）叙述的用法：This rose smells sweet.

Happy is the man who is contented.

Ⅱ. 副词的“附加的用法”和“叙述的用法”：

（a）附加的用法：I missed the last up train last night.

I met him on my way back.

（b）叙述的用法：The stars are out.

Off the train goes.

形容词的修饰语用来修饰主语，而副词的修饰语就用来修饰谓语。主要的主语修饰语（Subject Modifier），有下列四种：

①A national flag is the symbol of a country.（以 Adjective 为修饰语。）

②The best way to learn English is learning by heart.（以 Adjective Infinitive 为修饰语。）

③The book on the desk is not mine.（以 Adjective Phrase 为修饰语。）

④The house which he lives in is at the top of the hill.（以 Adjective Clause 为修饰语。）

句中的宾语和补语，如果是名词的话，也同样地可以加上述的四种修饰语，例如：

I know the best way to learn English.（宾语修饰语。）

This is the best way to learn English.（补语修饰语。）

主语修饰语除上述的以外，还可以用同位语（Appositive），例如：

My friend，Wang，is very honest.（同位单词。）

Chang，the moniter of our class，is a star football player.（同位短语。）

My wish，that she would come to the party，was gratified.（同位分句。）

主要的谓语修饰语（Predicate Modifier），同样地也有四种，即：

①He speaks English fluently.（以 Adverb 为修饰语。）

②He goes to see his mother.（以 Adverb Infinitive 为修饰语。）

③I usually study in my study.（以 Adverb Phrase 为修饰语。）

④I will wait till he comes.（以 Adverb Clause 为修饰语。）

在副词上还可以再加副词短语来修饰，以补充其意义，而扩大其语句。例如“He is out in the garden. ”。

（5）语句的种类

关于英文语句的分类，我们可以从构造上和从机能上两方面来看。由构造上，即依句法（Sentence Structure）来看，语句的种类有三：即单句、复句和并列句。由机能上，即依叙述的方式来看，语句可大别为四：即陈述句、疑问句、祈使句和感叹句。

Ⅰ. 构造上语句的分类

1. 单句（Simple Sentence）

只包含一个 Subject Word（主语）和一个 Predicate Verb（谓语）的 Sentence（语句），就叫作单句。例如：

I like an honest man.（我喜欢诚实的人。）

These flowers bloom all the year round.（这些花一年到头都开的。）

2. 复句（Complex Sentence）

凡包含一个主句（Main Clause）和一个或几个从句（Subordinate Clause）的语句，就叫作复句。例如：

I know that he is honest.（我知道他是诚实的。）

The man who came yesterday was my uncle.（昨天来的那人是我的叔父。）

Though he went to the movies，I stayed at home.（他去看电影，我却留在家里。）

在上举的三个例句中用黑体字印的，全是从句。每个从句中也有其独自的主语和谓语，如果把它的引导用的关系词，即是 that、who、though 等拿掉，而让它脱离主句，它就成为一个单句了。

3. 并列句（Compound Sentence）

由并列连词（Coordinate Conjunction）连接的两个或两个以上的独立分句所构成的语句，就叫作并列句，例如：

This is black and that is white.（此黑彼白。）

He went to the movies，but I stayed at home.（他去看电影但我留在家里。）

Neither my brother nor I know French.（我弟弟和我都不懂法文。）

并列句如主语相同时，可将第二个独立分句中的主语，乃至谓语省略：

He speaks well，but（he）writes badly.

He is poor but（he is）honest.

Ⅱ. 机能上语句的分类

1. 陈述句（Declarative Sentence）

把事物平铺直叙地说出来的，就叫陈述句。句尾的标点要用句号（Period）。

He works hard.（他很用功。）

I do not want it.（我不要这个。）

在否定句中，除用动词 be（即 is、am、are 等）及 have 可直接接否定词的 not 外，其余的动词都得加上一个 do（或 does、did）再接否定词的 not，并且要放在那动词的前面，如上举的第二例。

2. 疑问句（Interrogative Sentence）

凡问什么的语句，就叫作疑问句。疑问句有两种，一是要回答 Yes 或 No 的；一是用疑问词开始而不要回答 Yes 或 No 的。句尾的标点要用问号（Interrogation Mark），例如：

Do you want a pen？（你要笔吗？答：Yes，I want one.）

What do you want？（你要什么？答：I want a pen.）

疑问句除加用助动词（如 do、will 等），和以疑问词作主语用（如“Who came to see you yesterday？”“Which is taller，you or your brother？”“How many boys failed in the examination？”）外，普遍都要将谓语置于主语之前，例如“Is he a good boy？”。

3. 祈使句（Imperative Sentence）

用动词的原形（Root）而省去主语，以表示命令、请求、禁止等的，就叫作祈使句。句尾用句号，要加强意味时，则用感叹号（Exclamation Mark），例如：

Be quiet！（不要闹！）

Do not read novels all day long.（不要一天到晚读小说。）

在祈使句的前后，有时可加用呼唤的人名，如“Tom，work hard.（汤姆，要用功呀。）”。又，对第一人称和第三人称的祈使就用 let 一字开始，如“Let me bear this in mind.（让我把这个记在心上。）”“Let young men bear this in mind.（让青年们把这个记在心上。）”。普通对第二人称的祈使句则为“Young men，bear this in mind.（青年人，把这个记在心上吧。）”。

4. 感叹句（Exclamatory Sentence）

常用副词的 how 或形容词的 what（后加不定冠词）开始，而表示感叹的，就叫作感叹句。句尾用感叹号，例如：

How kind he is！（他多么亲切呀。）

How the stars twinkles！（星何其摇闪。）

What a kind man he is！（他是一个何等亲切的人。）

感叹句有时可将主语和不及物动词省略，不必说“What a fool he is！”，单说“What a fool！”也行了。

（6）语句的解剖

依照前面所说的，所有的语句，从构造上看来，可分为三类，即单句、复句和并列句。我们现在不妨再进一步，将这三种句子来解剖一下，便可更加明白它们的构造和内容了。

Ⅰ. 单句的解剖

现试举出三句形式不同的单句，作为解剖的实例。

1. You will succeed by diligence.

2. It is not right to tell a lie.

3. Do not tell him such a foolish story.

单句是只有一个 Subject 和一个 Predicate 的，所以我们现在就得把句中的这两种要素找出来。第一句一见而知主语是 you，谓语是 succeed。第二句的主语是 it，不过它是代表后面的 to tell a lie 的，所以这两个都要视为主语。第三句字面上没有主语，因为祈使句多半是将主语的 you 略去了的，所以我们在解剖时应该补上，句子的构造才可显明地看得出来。

现再详细列表说明如下：

Subject | Predicate
Verb | Object | Complement | Adverb
①you | will succeed |  |  | by diligence
②it（to tell a lie） | is |  | right | not

③you

do tell

him

story

such

a

foolish

not

Ⅱ. 复句的解剖

现试举出二句形式不同的复句，作为解剖的实例。

1. When I was a boy at school，I was often very idle.

2. My parents did not know that I seldom attended school.

复句包含一个主句（Principal Clause）和一个或几个从句（Dependent Clause），而这种从句，可能有三种，即副词从句（Adverb Clause）、形容词从句（Adjective Clause）和名词从句（Noun Clause）。上例第一句中的“When I was a boy at school”就是一个副词从句，因为它是形容动词 was 的。第二句中的“that I seldom attended school”，就是一个名词从句，因为它是 know 的宾语。

现用表解说明如下：

| Connective | Subject | Predicate
Verb | Object | Complement | Adverb
① | Principal Clause |  | I | was |  | idle | often very when…
Adverb Clause | when | I | was |  | boy a at school |
② | Principal Clause |  | my parents | did know | that... |  | not
Noun Clause | that | I | attended | school |  | seldom

Ⅲ. 并列句的解剖

现试举出两句形式不同的并列句，作为解剖的实例。

1. The crow took a pebble and dropped it into the pitcher.

2. All men are mortal；all kings are men；therefore all kings are mortal.

并列句是由两个以上的同等分句所构成的，有时那些分句因为同一主语，所以可以将后面的主语略去，如谓语也相同时，也同样可以省略。上例第一句中第二个从句中 dropped 的主语也是 the crow，所以略去了。

现用表解说明如下：

|  | Connective | Subject | Predicate
Verb | Object | Complement | Adverb
① | A |  | the crow | took | a pebble |  |
B | and | （it） | dropped | it |  | into the pitcher
② | A |  | all men | are |  | mortal |
B |  | all kings | are |  | men |
C | therefore | all kings | are |  | mortal |

（7）语句的合成

读过“语句的种类”之后，我们已经知道了语句可分为单句、复句和并列句三种。单句是语句的基础，在任何一种句型中，至少都非包含一个单句不可。只有极短的句子，才是一个单句所构成的，稍长的句子，不问它是单句也好，复句也好，并列句也好，多半包含两个以上的单句。所以两个单句，可合成一个单句，也可合成一个复句，也可合成一个并列句。复句和并列句都得包含两个分句，单句就只可有一个分句。在一个分句所构成的单句上，再加短语，并不影响句型，所以合拼两个单句为一句的时候，有三种不同的方式。也可以说，因造句的方式不同，而发生三种不同的结果。兹分别举例说明如下：

1. 两个单句合成一个单句

把其中一个不大重要的单句，改为短语，附在另外一较为重要的单句上，便合成一个单句了，例如：

① | （You）turn to the right. You will find the post office on your left.

= Turning to the right，you will find the post office on your left.

（向右转走去，你就会看见邮政局在你的左边呢。）

② | He labours very hard. He is still poor.

= In spite of all his labours，he is still poor.（尽管他非常努力，他还是很穷。）

③ | He has a large family. He must provide for them.

= He has a large family to provide for.（他有一个大家庭要赡养。）

2. 两个单句合成一个复句

把其中一个不大重要的单句，改为从句（名词从句、形容词从句或副词从句皆可），附在另外一个较为重要的单句上，便合成一个复句了，例如：

A. 用名词从句的

① | He will come again. I am sure of it.

= I am sure that he will come again.（我确信他会再来。）

② | Will he come here again？ I asked him the question.

= I asked him if he will come here again.（我问他是不是还要再到这里来。）

③ | I am going to a certain place. He does not know it.

= He does not know where I am going.（他不知道我要到什么地方去。）

B. 用形容词从句的

① | The canary sings sweetly. I caught it in our garden.

= The canary which I caught in our garden sings sweetly.

（我在花园里捉来的那只金丝雀歌声很美。）

② | This is the house. He lives in it.

= This is the house where he lives.（他就住在这所房子里。）

③ | He had received a good education. This raised him above many men of his age.

= The good education that he had received，raised him above many men of his age.

（他受了很好的教育，所以使他比同年辈的人的地位都高。）

C. 用副词从句的

① | He is very rich. He is never happy.

= Though he is very rich，he is never happy.（他虽则很有钱，但他从来不快乐。）

② | He is diligent. No other boy in the class is more diligent.

= He is more diligent than any other boy in the class.（他是同班中最勤励的。）

③ | The signal was given. Every one immediately raised a shout.

= Every one raised a shout as soon as the signal was given.

（信号一发，所有的人都大声地喊出来。）

3. 两个单句合成一个并列句

把两个单句用连词把它们结合起来，便成为一个并列句了，例如：

① | It was getting late. I will go home.

= It was getting late，and so I will go home.（时间很迟了，所以我要回家了。）

② | I did not go out. I stayed at home.

= I did not go out，but stayed at home.（我没有出去，而留在家里。）

③ | Energy is necessary to success in life. Patience is also necessary to it.

= Not only energy，but patience is also necessary to success in life.

（人生的成功，不仅需要精力，而且需要耐性。）

（8）语句的变换

语句在构造上有单句、复句和并列句之分，不过这些不同的句式，完全是属于语法上的，与意义无关。同一种意义，可以用好几种句式表示出来，说明尽管不同，意思可以不变。为求彻底明了这三种句式的构成起见，我们不妨试将句式变换，例如将复句改为单句，将并列句改为单句，或将复句改为并列句。对于语句的各种构造运用自如之后，写作时就不会有何困难了。

1. 由复句改成单句

A. 将名词从句换用其他单词或短语的

① | 告诉我你出生的时间和地点。 Tell me when and where you were born.（复句） Tell me the time and place of your birth.（单句）

② | 我们不能相信他说的话。 We can place no confidence in whatever he says.（复句） We can place no confidence in any of his words.（单句）

③ | 我一定可以使你满足。 I am certain that I shall give you satisfaction.（复句） I am certain of giving you satisfaction.（单句）

④ | 我很高兴听见你回来了。 I was glad to hear that you had come back.（复句） I was glad to hear of your having come back.（单句）

⑤ | 我确信他会成功。 I am sure that he will succeed.（复句） He is sure to succeed.（单句）

⑥ | 一般相信他是肺病死的。 It is generally believed that he has died of consumption.（复句） He is generally believed to have died of consumption.（单句）

B. 将形容词从句换用其他单词或短语的

① | 我们现在住的这房子对我们很适合。 The house in which we live at present suits us exactly.（复句） Our present house suits us exactly.（单句）

② | 他们的说明不可靠。 The explanation they gave cannot be true.（复句） Their explanation cannot be true.（单句）

③ | 他给了我一张他自己画的画。 He gave me a picture which he had drawn.（复句） He gave me a picture of his own drawing.（单句）

④ | 他不是一个说谎的人。 He is not a man who tells a lie.（复句） He is not a man to tell a lie.（单句）

⑤ | 那是一个不可宽恕的过失。 That was a fault which should not be forgiven.（复句） That was a fault not to be forgiven.（单句）

C. 将副词从句换用其他单词或短语的

① | 他们听到他的自白非常惊异。 They were much surprised when they heard him confess.（复句） They were much surprised to hear him confess.（单句）

② | 因屡次失败所以他就不再试了。 As he had made many failures，he made no further attempt.（复句） Owing to repeated failures，he made no further attempt.（单句）

③ | 那少年很诚实不肯撒谎。 The boy is so honest that he cannot tell a lie.（复句） The boy is too honest to tell a lie.（单句）

④ | 他工作如此优秀使大家为之吃惊。 He worked so well that every one was astonished.（复句） He worked very well，to the astonishment of everyone.（单句）

⑤ | 为求生活舒服他努力工作了。 He worked hard that he might live in comfort.（复句） He worked hard for the purpose of living in comfort.（单句）

⑥ | 他夜里动身以免被人看见。 He started by night for fear he might be seen by any one.（复句） He started by night to escape being seen by any one.（单句）

⑦ | 如果我能助你，我很高兴。 I should be very glad if I could help you.（复句） I should be very glad to be able to help you.（单句）

⑧ | 如果没有了水，什么都不能生存。 If there were no water，nothing could live.（复句） Without water，nothing could live.（单句）

⑨ | 他虽富有，但不满足。 Though he is rich，he is never contented.（复句） In spite of all his riches，he is never contented.（单句）

⑩ | 尽管他有很多的经验，他仍然是无能。 Though he has much experience，he is still incompetent.（复句） For all his experience，he is still incompetent.（单句）

⑪ | 那栋屋子和其紧邻一样高。 That house is as high as the next one.（复句） The height of that house equals that of the next one.（单句）

⑫ | 地势愈高，空气愈冷。 The higher the ground，the cooler the air.（复句） The air becomes cooler in proportion to the height of the ground.（单句）

⑬ | 他完全照着指示地做了。 He acted precisely as he was instructed.（复句） He acted precisely according to instructions.（单句）

⑭ | 种瓜得瓜，种豆得豆。 As you sow，so you will mow.（复句） The harvest will depend upon the sowing.（单句）

⑮ | 吃完了饭，他们又出发了。 When they had finished their dinner，they started off again.（复句） Having finished their dinner，they started off again.（单句）

⑯ | 她把一切都准备好，只等他回来。 She made everything ready before he arrived.（复句） She made everything ready previous to his arrival.（单句）

⑰ | 我将留此，等他到来。 I shall stay here till he arrives.（复句） I shall stay here till his arrival.（单句）

2. 由并列句改成单句

A. 用 Participle 的

① | 太阳出来，雾就散了。 The sun rose and the fog dispersed.（并列句） The sun having risen，the fog dispersed.（单句）

② | 强盗一见警察就逃走了。 The robber saw the policeman and took to his heels.（并列句） Seeing the policeman，the robber took to his heels.（单句）

B. 用 Preposition 的

① | 他身体不好不能工作。 He was in bad health，and so he could not work.（并列句） Owing to bad health，he could not work.（单句）

② | 他不但允诺而且实行了。 He not only made a promise，but kept it.（并列句） Besides making a promise，he kept it.（单句）

C. 用 Infinitive 的

① | 我虽用了功，却未考取。 I worked hard，but failed.（并列句） I worked hard only to fail.（单句）

3. 由复句改成并列句

① | 他虽穷，但很诚实。 He is honest，though poor.（复句） He is poor，but honest.（并列句）

② | 时间一到灯就熄了。 As soon as the clock struck the hour，the lights were put out.（复句） The clock struck the hour，and the lights were put out at once.（并列句）

③ | 揿铃即响。 If you press the button，the bell will ring.（复句） Press the button，and the bell will ring.（并列句）

④ | 你要吵闹，我就罚你。 Unless you keep quiet，I will punish you.（复句） Keep quiet，or I will punish you.（并列句）

（9）额外的因素

我们在第二讲“语句的构成”中，已将一个语句应具备的要素说过了。那即是说，“主语”和“谓语”是最基本的要素，其次是“宾语”和“补语”，此外则为“修饰语”。但无论是要素也好，修饰语也好，在语法上都是互相关联的。唯有一种独立的因素，有时可以和句中其他的词，没有语法上的关联，只有意义上的联系。这原是语句的要素之外的因素，这种因素我们在英文中也可以找出四种不同的形式来，一为“独立的因素”，二为“同位的词句”，三为“呼唤格”，四为“填补语”。现分别举例说明如下：

1. 独立的因素

独立的因素是和句中其他的部分没有语法上任何关系的单词，或短语，或从句，这种因素又称括弧的字句，通常是用标点符号隔开的。

A. 独立的单词

Hurrah！I have passed my examination.（好呀！我考取了。）

Oh！We arrived at last.（啊！我们终于到了。）

This，however，is not what I asked for.（虽然，这并不是我所要的。）

Besides，I can’t walk that far.（而且，我走不得那么远。）

B. 独立的短语

In any case，you are not at fault.（无论如何你都不错。）

The climate of Taiwan，generally speaking，is very good.（一般地说来，台湾的气候很好。）

Between you and me，I think him a fool.（我们私下说一句，我想他是一个智力障碍者。）

After all，it wasn’t your fault.（毕竟，这不是你的过错。）

C. 独立的从句

You will，I suppose，do as you want to.（我想你可以为所欲为。）

You are entirely right，I must admit.（你是完全对的，我必得承认。）

Bob will，I fear，fail in this contest.（在这竞赛中，我恐怕鲍勃会失败。）

You have，I agree，a good alibi.（我同意你不在场。）

2. 同位的词句

同位的词句是一个名词，置于其他名词或代词后，来描写或说明它的。这种同位的词句，一定要用逗号来和句中其他的部分隔开。

A. 同位的单词

My friend，John，is very loyal.（我的朋友约翰很忠实。）

B. 同位的短语

Bob Jones，the president of our class，is a star football player.（我们的班长琼斯是足球选手。）

C. 同位的从句

My wish，that she would come to the party，was gratified.（我望她到会，已如愿以偿。）

3. 呼唤格

对于人、地或物，都可加用呼唤的字眼，这可能是名词也可能是代词，但都是独立的。普通用得很多的是对人的呼唤，尤其是在省略主语的句中：

Mary，（you）come here right now.（玛丽，快到这里来。）

Here，Dad，are your slippers.（爹爹，这是你的拖鞋。）

Well，folks，（you）step right up.（好呀，朋友，你们站起来吧。）

Do you know，Martin，why I come here？（马丁，你知道我为什么到这里来吗？）

Listen，girls，to what I say.（女孩子们，听我说呀。）

4. 填补语

填补语是用来引出那真正的主语的，这时的主语是在谓语之后。填补语有两种，即 it 和 there。

It is easy to swim in salt water.（在盐水中游泳是容易的。）

（注）这个 it 是代表 to swim 以下的字句。即“To swim in salt water is easy.”。可知真正的主语是 to swim 以下的字句，而不是 it，因为把主语倒装在后，所以在前面主语的地位空了，应有一个词来填补。

There are ten books on the table.（在桌上有十本书。）

（注）这个 there 就是一个填补词，真正的主语是 books 而不是 there。这个句子正常的排列法是“Ten books are on the table. ”。

（10）单词和词性

依照单词在它句中所担负的职责，我们就可以决定那个单词的词性，因而得以把所有的词分成八类，即所谓八大词类（Eight Parts of Speech）。

八大词类包括名词（Noun）、代词（Pronoun）、形容词（Adjective）、动词（Verb）、副词（Adverb）、介词（Preposition）、连词（Conjunction）和感叹词（Interjection）。

名词主要是用作①主语：“A dog is a faithful animal.（狗是忠实的动物。）”。②宾语：“I keep a very faithful dog.（我养了一条很忠实的狗。）”。③补语：“Blackie is a faithful dog.（小黑是一条忠实的狗。）”。

代词是用来代替名词的。例如：“The girl has a pretty doll. She likes it very much.（那女孩有一只漂亮的洋囡囡，她很喜欢它。）”。

形容词是用来修饰名词的。例如：“The pink rose is a beautiful flower.（红玫瑰是美丽的花。）”。句中的 the 和 a 这种形容词，又称为冠词（Article）。

动词是表示主语的动作，或其所在的地位或状态的。①动作：“He walked to school.（他走到学校去了。）”。②地位：“I am in the garden.（我在园中。）”。状态：“She felt much better.（她觉得好多了。）”。另外有一种助动词（Auxiliary Verb），是不能单独成立，而要和主动词连用的，例如：“You may stand up.（你可以站起来。）”“They have left the room.（他们已经离开这房间了。）”。助动词有 can、be、do、have、shall、will、may、must、ought 等词，有时 dare、need、let 也可作助动词用。助动词大部分后面接省去“to”的不定词（如 can go；shall come），但也有接不省去“to”的不定词（如 ought to go），有的后接过去或现在分词（如“Babylon is fallen. He is building a house.”），有的接过去分词（如“I have written a letter.”）。

副词是用来修饰动词、形容词，或别的副词的。例如：“The boy works hard.（那孩子很用功。）”“He is very careful.（他很谨慎。）”“You walk too quickly.（你走得太快。）”。

介词是用来和名词或代词组合起来而作成副词或形容词用的。例如：①作副词用的：“I put the book on the desk.（我把那书放在桌上。）”。②作形容词用的：“A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush.（多得不如现得。）”。

连词是用来连接单词或词句的。例如：“Tom and John are hardworking，but their sister is not.（汤姆、约翰两兄弟都很用功，但是他们的妹妹则否。）”“I know that he will come.（我知道他会来。）”“I will wait till he comes.（我要等他来。）”。

感叹词是单为表白感情的，例如，“Alas！He is dead！（哎唷！他死了！）”“Ouch！My hand is hurt.（哦呀！我的手受伤了。）”“Hurrah！The Japanese have surrendered.（好呀！日本投降了。）”。

同一词因在句中的地位不同，而词性亦异。现举几例说明如下：

He ran fast.（副词）

It was a fast race.（形容词）

My fast will begin today.（名词）

I shall fast when Lent opens.（动词）

Wrong seldom prospers.（名词）

You have taken the wrong road.（形容词）

He often spells words wrong.（副词）

You wrong me by your suspicions.（动词）

What did you say？（代词）

What（= partly）with one thing and what with another.（副词）

I do not doubt but what（= that）you are right.（连词）

What！Have you no better reason than this？（感叹词）

I am waiting for the train.（介词）

You have plenty of time，for the train is late.（连词）

He trembled as he spoke.（连词）

I can do it as well.（副词）

You are wrong as（= which）was to be expected.（代词）

Some animals，as the fox and the squirrel，have bushy tails.（介词）

I will not accept either proposal.（形容词）

Either the cat or the dog is a thief.（连词）

If you do not stay，I will not stay either.（副词）

（11）名词和冠词

1. 名词（Noun）的种类

名词可分五种，计有形的四种（共同名词、固有名词、物质名词、集合名词），无形的一种（抽象名词）。

A room without pictures is like a room without windows. 没有画的房间就好像没有窗的房间一样。（句中黑体字都是共同名词。）

The Victory was the flagship of Nelson. 胜利号是纳尔逊的旗舰。（句中黑体字都是固有名词。）

Gold is a precious metal. 黄金是一种贵金属。（句中的黑体字是物质名词。）

He has a large family to support. 他有一个大家庭要赡养。（句中的黑体字是集合名词。）

Industry is essential to success. 勤励是成功所不可缺少的。（句中的黑体字都是抽象名词。）

2. 名词的数（Number）

名词有单数（Singular Number）和复数（Plural Number）两种。在上举五大类名词中，只有共同名词才能变成复数。集合名词形单义复，如再加成复数，就和共同名词的用法无异。其他三种名词变成复数时，也同样地要变成共同名词。

复数的做法一般是在单数名词上加一个 s 或 es，但也有加 en 等，或以变更元音来表示的。

3. 名词的性（Gender）

名词分男性（Masculine Gender）、女性（Feminine Gender）、通性（Common Gender）和中性（Neuter Gender）四种不同的性别。

男性：father、man、lion、cock

女性：mother、woman、lioness、hen

通性：parent、child、animal、person、bird

中性：house、table、pencil、book、tree

4. 名词的格（Case）

名词的格有主格（Nominative Case）、宾格（Objective Case）及所有格（Possessive Case）三种。

That man has a dog. 那人有一只狗。（主格）

I know that man. 我认识那人。（宾格）

This is that man’s dog. 这便是那人的狗。（所有格）

“属性”可用于①所有者，如 my brother’s hat；②著者，或发明发现者，如 Dickens’ novels、Marconi’s wireless telegraph；③目的物，如 a girls’high school、a children’s hospital；④行为者，如 father’s death、brother’s speech；⑤接受行为者，如 Julius Caesar’s assassination、“No one came to my father’s rescue.”。

5. 冠词（Article）

冠词分定冠词（Definite Article）和不定冠词（Indefinite Article）两种。不定冠词是 a 和 an，定冠词是 the。

A.“a”“an”的用法

①用于 one 的意义时：He came here a week ago.

②用于 a certain 的意义时：A Mr. Lee came to see you.

③用于 any 的意义时：A horse is a useful animal.

④用于 per 的意义时：The postman calls twice a day.

⑤用于 the same 的意义时：Birds of a feather flock together.

⑥用于固有名词前有“像……那样的人或地”的意义时：A Newton cannot become a Shakespeare at will.（a Newton = a great scientist like Newton；a Shakespeare = a great dramatist like Shakespeare）

在辅音前用 a，在元音前用 an，但以发音为准，如 an hour、a useful thing、a one-eyed man、an M. P.。

B.“the”的用法

①再提到前所说过的名词时：I met a gentleman and a girl in the park. I thought the gentleman must be the father of the girl.

②虽为第一次出现的名词，但所指的东西很明显时：Shut the door please. He is the principal of our school.

③在代表某一种类的名词前：The horse is a useful animal.

④由于修饰语而得确定那名词何所指时：I remember the time we first met.

⑤在独一无二的东西前：The earth moves round the sun.

⑥加在普通名词前造成抽象名词：The pen（= the power of a pen）is mightier than the sword（= the power of a sword）.

⑦在如下的短语中：in the morning、in the sun、in the right、in the country、by the hour、by the pound、etc

⑧在特殊的固有名词前：the Thames、the Pacific、the Empress of Japan（江河、海洋、舰艇）；the University of Taiwan、the Foreign Office、the Grand Hotel（公共建筑物）；the Times、the Pacific English Fortnightly、the Year Book（书报杂志）；the Alps、the Philippines（山脉、群岛）；the United States of America（复数国名）；the Americans（复数国民）；the Browns（复数家族）

（12）补语的用法

我们在第二讲“语句的构成”中，已经略为说到了补语，尤其是补语和宾语不同的地方，在及物动词后，必然要接一个宾语，这是很容易了解的，如果补语只用在不及物动词后也就容易了，但及物动词后有时也接补语，所以就不免使人感到混乱。现在特将补语的用法，专题来讲一下。

在讲动词之前，来讲补语的用法似乎有点不大方便，因为补语是和动词有连带关系的。不过我们只要注意地看看下例句中不同的地方，也就不难了解了。

（A）He is rich.（主语 + 不及物动词 + 补语）

（B）They elected him mayor.（主语 + 及物动词 + 宾语 + 补语）

用在不及物动词后面的补语，是说明主语的；用在及物动词后面的补语，是说明宾语的。可见用在及物动词后的补语，绝不会与宾语混乱。所谓补语，是用来修饰主语或宾语的，以补足那动词的叙述不完全的地方。无论不及物动词也好及物动词也好，需要加补语的，都是不完全的。称为“不完全不及物动词”及“不完全及物动词”。

用在不完全不及物动词后的，是主语补语（Subjective Complement）；而用在不完全及物动词后的，是宾语补语（Objective Complement）。现再分别举例讲解一下。

1. 主语补语

（1）Custom is almost a second nature. 习惯为第二天性。

（2）A good medicine tastes bitter. 良药苦口。

在（1）中的 nature 和在（2）中的 bitter，是修饰主语 custom 和 medicine 的，同时又是补足不及物动词 is 和 tastes 的不完全的意思的，所以这个名词的 nature 和形容词的 bitter，都是补语。这种补语，即是修饰主语的，所以就叫主语补语。通常应加主语补语的不及物动词，有：be、taste、look、smell、sound、feel、sit、grow、get、fall、come、become、prove、turn 等。现各举一例如下：

He looks very pale. 他面色苍白。

This flower smells good. 此花甚香。

That explanation sounds true. 那说明听上去属实。

I feel ill this morning. 今晨我不舒服。

The food sits heavy on my stomach. 食物停滞在我胃中。

The tree grew taller and taller. 这树愈长愈高了。

He has got rich. 他阔了。

He fell sick. 他病了。

His prediction has come true. 他不幸而言中。

He has now become a rich merchant. 他现在变成一个阔商人。

The rumor proved true. 那谣言是真的。

My hair has turned gray. 我的头发白了。

2. 宾语补语

（1）People call him the father of the radio. 人们称他为无线电之父。

（2）Learning makes a good man better，and a bad man worse. 学问使好人更好，使坏人更坏。

在（1）中的 father 和（2）中的 better、worse 是修饰宾语 him 和 man 的，同时又是补足及物动词 call 和 makes 的不完全的意思的，所以这名词 father 和形容词 better、worse，都是补语。这种补语，既是修饰宾语的，所以就叫宾语补语。通常应加宾语补语的及物动词有：call、make、find、think、consider、elect、appoint、believe、imagine 等，这些动词又称使役动词（Factitive Verb）。

I find the book very useful. 我觉得这本书很有用。

Don’t think a country walk a waste of time. 不要以为到乡下散步是浪费时间。

I consider him worthy of confidence. 我认为他很值得信任。

They elected him president. 他们选他为社长。

He appointed him secretary. 他委他为秘书。

The jury believed him innocent. 法官们相信他无罪。

I imagined him safe. 我猜想他平安无事。

3. 补语的位置

（1）主语 + 不及物动词 + 补语

Brevity is the soul of wit. 要言不烦。（格言）

（2）主语 + 及物动词 + 宾语 + 补语

Great wealth makes us neither more wise nor more healthy.

财富既不能使我们更聪明，也不能使我们更健康。（格言）

（3）补语 + 动词 + 主语

What are the general foundations of our belief？什么是我们信仰的一般的根据？（补语为疑问代词时）

How is she today？她今天怎样？（补语为疑问副词时）

Happy indeed is he who has a sound mind in a sound body.（= He who...is indeed happy.）

有健全心身的人实在是幸福的。（补语用于加强语气时）

Wide is the gate and broad is the way that leads to destruction.

到毁灭的门广开，到毁灭的路宽敞。（补语用于加强语气时）

4. 补语和副词

（A）I found the book easy.

（B）I found the book easily.

英语的动词，不论是及物动词或不及物动词，常有几种不同的含义，而影响后面或接补语或接副词。上例中的 find 一个及物动词，也有二义；一为“找到”（get or discover something as the result of search），一为“（由经验而）知觉”（learn or become informed of something by experience）。上举（A）例为后者之义，（B）为前者之义，即：

（A）我觉得那本书容易读。

（B）我很容易就找到了那本书。

我们如果把（A）句中的 easy 去掉，即成为“I found the book.（我找到了那本书。）”的意思，所以要使这个动词 find 发生“（由经验而）知觉”的意思，就非补上 easy 一词不可。所以这个 easy 便是补足 find 的不完全的意思的补语。

至于（B）例中的 find 作“找到”解时，意思已经完全了，不用再加什么补语，要加只能加上一个修饰的副词，如例中的 easily。所以这个 easily 一词要或不要，都无关系，因为根本不会影响动词 find 的意义的。

以上是及物动词，现在再举一个不及物动词的例。

（C）He remained silent.

（D）He remained long.

英文的不及物动词 remain 一词，也有两种用法：一是用作普通的不及物动词，意为“停留在原来的地位或情形当中”（stay in the same place or condition）；一是用作连接动词（Linking Verb）。意为“继续是”“仍系”（continue to be），用作连接动词时，意思不完全，必得加一补语，这和普通不及物动词可以自立不同。

（C）他一直是没有作声。

（D）他停留了很久。

在（C）句中的 remain，既作“继续是”解，自然非有一个补语，意思就不完全，所以主格补语 silent，正是补足不及物动词 remain 的意义的。在（D）句中的 remain 便是“停留”的意思，说某人停留了，已经是一句完整的句子，用不着要加补语，一定要加也只能加副词。现就此动词再各举两例句如下：

He remained unmarried（= single）. 他一直没有结婚。

The exhibition will remain open till the end of the month. 展览会一直要开到月底。

One incident remains very vividly in my mind. 那事情历历在目（很生动地停留在我心中）。

The good will not long remain lonely. 德不孤，必有邻。

（13）代词概要

英语中用代词的地方很多，我们说中国话所不要用的，他们都非加上不可，例如：“我今天是在哥哥家里吃早饭”一句话，说成英语时，在“哥哥”及“早饭”前都非加上代词所有格的 my 不可，即“I took my breakfast at my brother’s. ”。又，“我决心这样做”，也要说，“我决定我的心这样做”，即“I made up my mind to do this. ”。

1. 代词的种类

代词（Pronoun）
人称代词（Personal） | I，you、he、she、it、we、you、they、us、our
指示代词（Demonstrative） | this、that、such、one、each、these、there、both、some
疑问代词（Interrogative） | who、whom、whose、what、which
关系代词（Relative） | who、which、that、what、whose

物主代词（Possessive Pronoun）和反身代词（Reflexive Pronoun）是属于人称代词的项下的，至于指示代词有时又叫作形容词性代词（Adjective Pronoun）。

现将上述四种代词各举一例如下：

① You look for hot water under the ice. 缘木求鱼。（句中的 you 为人称代词。）

② One must form one’s good habits when young. 一个人一定要在年轻时养成良好的习惯。（句中的 one 和 one’s 为指示代词。）

③ Which is the shortest way？最近的是哪一条路？（句中的 which 为疑问代词。）

④The man whom I met just now is Dr. Jones. 我刚才遇见的那人是琼斯博士。（句中的 whom 为关系代词。）

2. 代词和先行词

一个代词在人称、性、数上面，一定要和它的先行词一致，例如：

The boy lost his book. 那孩子把他的书失掉了。（句中的 his 是代表 the boy 的，所以是男性第三人称单数。）

Tom and Jack did their best. 汤姆和杰克尽了他们的力量。（句中的 their 是代表 Tom and Jack 的，所以是男性第三人称复数。）

Each of the girls has her bicycle. 每个女孩子都有她的单车。（句中的 her 是女性第三人称单数，与先行的 each of the girls 一致。）

Everybody brought his lunch. 人人都带了便当。（everybody 中虽包括女性，但英文中就没有一个兼具男女两性的单数所有格的词，所以只好以男性的 his 代表，正如以 man 代表人类一样。）

One never gets into trouble when one minds one’s own business. 少管闲事，绝无麻烦。（在主语为 one 时，后面要接 one’s，但主语为限定的 one 时，后面才接 his，例如：“One of the girls lost her book. ”“Every one of us gave his all to the cause. ”“No one may use his books for the test.”。）

3. 不定代词

如前一节所说的，代词都需要有先行词，才可以前后取得一致。但也有不需要先行词的代词，那就是不定代词（Indefinite Pronoun），或称为无人称代词（Impersonal Pronoun）。因为它不是固定地指某个人或某些人，而只是当作无固定人称来用的，所以有漠然不定的意味。

这种不定代词，本是属于人称代词的，但因其并不固定指某人，所以特别提出来，在此先加以叙述，不列入人称代词项下。

用于这种不定代词的有 we、you、they 三字，统作 people in general 解，即指一般的人。兹举例说明如下：

①What must we do on such occasion？在那种情形下要怎样办才好？

② You do not like to be told the same thing over and over again. 谁也不愿听人说同样的话。

③ They sell dear at that shop. 那店东西卖得贵。

（14）人称代词

人称代词（Personal Pronoun）有所谓人称（Person）、格（Case）、数（Number）、性（Gender）四点变化。人称有第一人称、第二人称、第三人称的区别；格有主格、宾格、所有格三种；数有单数及复数；性有男性、女性、通性和中性，现列表如下：

人称 | 数 性 | 格
主格 | 宾格 | 所有格
第一人称 | 单数 复数 | I we | me us | my our
第二人称 | 单数 复数 | you you | you you | your your

第三人称

单数　男性

　　　女性

　　　中性

复数　通性

he

she

it

they

him

her

it

them

his

her

its

their

关于代词的所有格（Possessive Case），如上表中所示有 my、our、their 等词，例如：“I made up my mind to stop their coming. ”句中的 my、their 皆是。

代词的所有格是形容词而物主代词（Possessive Pronoun）才是将名词合并在所有格中的用法，例如：“This watch is mine（= my watch）. ”“Your socks are black，but mine（= my socks）are white. ”。这种物主代词，只有第三人称，是单数复数同形的，现列表如下：

人称 | 数 | 主格及宾格
第三人称 | 单复同形 | my + 名词 = mine our + 名词 = ours

your + 名词 = yours

your + 名词 = yours

his + 名词 = his

her + 名词 = hers

their + 名词 = theirs

此外又有所谓复合人称代词（Compound Personal Pronoun），又称反身代词（Reflexive Pronoun），其人称、数、格的变化如下表：

人称 | 数 | 主格及宾格 | 所有格
第一人称 | 单 复 | myself ourselves | my own our own
第二人称 | 单 复 | yourself yourselves | your own your own
第三人称 | 单 | himself herself itself | his own her own its own
复 | themselves | their own
一般通称 | 单 | oneself | one’s own

反身代词主要有两种用法，即①反身的用法和②加强的用法，现分别例解如下：

①反身的用法

这是用作动词的宾语的。主语和宾语为同一体。

She concealed herself behind the door.（她躲在门背后。）

He picked himself up.（他自己爬起来了。）

Please make yourself at home.（请随便些。）

I cannot make myself understood.（我不能使人了解我的意思。）

He killed himself.（他自杀了。）

He thought little of himself.（他全不为自己着想。）

One should not praise oneself.（不宜自己称赞。）

It is hard to know oneself.（自知是很难的。）

She bought a ticket for herself.（她为她自己买了一张票。）（注意：如果用 for her，就可能误会是为另外一个女人买的票。）

反身代词可以和介词连用而构成成语，例如：

Between ourselves，I am going to resign my post.（我只告诉你，我将辞职。）

I went there all by myself.（= alone）（我独自去那里的。）

I do everything for myself.（我一切都是自己做。）

The light went out of itself.（灯光自灭。）

A thing good in itself may become bad by its use.（本来好的东西也许可以用坏。）

He is beside himself with anger.（他狂怒不已。）

在这种用法中，包括许多惯用的成语，是不宜将 oneself 一字译出来的，例如：

Did you enjoyed yourself yesterday？（昨天玩得痛快吗？）

Seat yourself.（请坐。）

He absented himself from school yesterday.（他昨天没去上学。）

I avail myself of the opportunity of speaking English.（我利用这机会说英语。）

I resolved to revenge myself on him.（我决心对他报仇。）

He made himself sick by overeating himself.（他吃得太多而吃病了。）

Do not overwork yourself.（不要过劳。）

I overslept myself this morning.（我今晨睡得太多了。）

He excused himself for coming late.（他因迟到而道歉。）

Help yourself.（请随便用。）

②加强的用法

这不是用作宾语，而只是加强意味罢了。

I did it myself.（我亲自做的。）

It was the king himself.（那原是国王本人。）

The teacher himself（= Even the teacher）could not have done it.（老师也做不出来。）

I am a Chinese myself.（我就是一个中国人。）

That is his own house.（那是他的家。）

He has a house of his own.（他自己有一栋房子。）

（15）指示代词

指示代词是拿来指示某物的，又称形容词性代词，因为如果在它后面加上一个名词的话，它就成为形容词了。只有在单独用的时候，它才是指示代词，如：

1. This is now the mango season.（代词）

2. This golden mango is my favourite.（形容词）

1. Each of the pupils has his own bag.（代词）

2. Each boy has his own bag.（形容词）

1. Have you read any of his books？（代词）

2. Any school boy knows it.（形容词）

1. this、that、these、those 的用法

a. this 是指近处的东西，其复数为 these；而 that 是指远处的东西，其复数为 those。

① This is a shirt；that is a collar.

② These are mine，and those are yours.

b. 两个名词分别指示时，前者用 that（复数用 those），后者用 this（复数用 these）。

①Work and play are both necessary to health；this（= play）gives us rest，and that（= work）gives us energy.

②Dogs are more faithful animals than cats；these（= cats）attach themselves to places，and those（= dogs）to persons.

c. 为避免重复用同一名词，可用 that（复数用 those）来代替前面说过的名词。

①The air of lowlands is not so cool as that of hills.

②The ears of a horse are shorter than those of a rabbit.

d. 又可用 this、that 来代表前面的 clause 或 sentence。

①You suppose him to be a miser，but that is certainly a mistake.

②You paid your debts；and this is quite sufficient to prove your honesty.

e. that 不仅可以代表前面的 clause 或 sentence，而且可以加强其意义，但须用 and that 的形式。

I must consult with him，and that at once.

He will come，and that soon.

I studied English literature when I was young，and that at Oxford.

f. this、that 可以用来归纳既述的几个名词，但须与 all 连用。

①But all this was nothing to what followed.

②What is all that done for？

2. one、ones 的用法

a. 代表前面说过的不定的普通名词，就用 one（复数时用 ones）。

Have you a knife？Yes，I have one（= a knife）.

但在 one 之前如有形容词时，就应再加冠词。如系复数的 ones，就可用 some 代替冠词。

Have you any knives？Yes，I have a sharp one. 或 Yes，I have some sharp ones.（但如果没有形容词时，则连名词也不要，只说 Yes，I have some. 就行了。）

b. 代表前面说过的“不定的普通名词”要用 one，但代表前面说过的“特定的单数普通名词”，就要用 it 才对。换句话说，即是 it 用于“同名同物”的场合，而 one 用于“同名异物”的场合。

Is this knife yours？No，it（= the knife）is my brother’s.（同名同物）Mine is the one（the knife）on the table.（同名异物。）

①Have you ever seen an elephant？（不定的普通名词）

No，I have never seen one.

②Is this elephant from India？（特定的普通名词）

Yes，it is；it is very gentle.

c. one 如果是指一般人（men in general）的时候，后面的所有格就要用 one’s，如系限定的时候，就用 his、her 等。

① One must be careful not to break one’s word.

②To love one’s enemies is a Christian duty.

但 any one、some one、every one、each one、no one 等的场合就要接 he 或 his 了。

① Every one loves his mother.

②I saw some one in the distance，but could not tell in what direction he was going.

3. another、other 的用法

a. another 是 an + other 所构成的，含有两个意思：①另外的（different）。②也是一个（also one）。但都不指固定的事物。

①This shirt isn’t nice；show me another.（different）

②He is a fool，and his wife another.（also one）

b. one...the other 的用法。

在两件事物之中，随便取一件说 one，其余一件则说 the other。

Both my brothers are abroad，one in England and the other in America.

c. the one...the other 的用法。

在二者之中，说其一及其二，而 the one 更常用以指其次所提出之事物，不一定照原说的次序。

①Virtue and vice are before you；the one（指前者的 virtue）leads to happiness，the other（指后者的 vice）to misery.

②The bee and the snake draw material from the same plant. The one（指后者的 snake）transmutes it into deadly poison；the other（指前者的 bee）into delicious honey.

注意：the one...the other 又可作形容词用，如“With the one hand he held aloft the child and with the other（hand）he was making for the shore. ”。

d. others 及 the others 的用法。

有冠词和无冠词意思不同，others = other people，即“别人”，而 the others = the rest，即“其余的人”。

①Do as others do，and few will laugh at you.

②One of them was an American，but the others were Englishmen.

e. each other 及 one another 的用法。

二者之间用 each other，三个以上之间就要用 one another。

①Both of them helped each other.

②The three men helped one another.

f. one after another 及 one after the other 的用法。

前者表继续不断进行，即“逐渐”，后者为“轮流”。

① One falsehood after another falls off of itself.

②He raised one of his hands after the other.

4. each 的用法

① Each of them wanted to try.

②They each have a book.

但“They have a book each ”就是副词，而“Each boy has a book”就是形容词。

5. either 和 neither 的用法

either 是“二者中任何一个”，而 neither 是“二者皆非”。

① Either will do.

②I know neither of his parents.

6. both 和 all 的用法

双方就说 both，三者以上就用 all。

① Both of my parents are tired out.

②They were both tired out.

③They both were tired out.

① All of the chickens are dead.

②They are all dead.

③They all are dead.

7. some 和 any 的用法

some 用于肯定，any 用于否定、疑问及条件句。

①Are there any staying at the hotel？（疑问）

②Yes，there are some.（肯定）

③No，there are not any.（否定）

④Give me a sheet of paper if you have any.（条件）

8. none 的用法

none 原是 no one 合拢来的，单复皆可，现今通常用作复数。又 no = not any 或 not a，而 none = no + Noun。

①Have you a book？No，I have none.（= no book）（单数）

②Have you any sisters？No，I have none.（= no sisters）（复数）

③ None but the brave deserve the fair.（复数）

比较 | None of the girls are present. No one is present.

9. such 的用法

a. 用来代替前面提过的名词

①If you are a gentleman，show yourself such.（such = a gentleman）

②He was a great scholar，and was respected as such.（such = a great scholar）

b. such = such men

Prosperous men are much exposed to flattery，for such（= such men）alone can be made to pay for it.

c. such as = those who

Such as（= those who）have plenty will never want friends.

10. the same 的用法

same 前可以加 the、this 或 that 用

He bought a dictionary，but soon sold the same.

（16）疑问代词

疑问代词用于问人及物的场合，共有 who、what、which 三个词。这三个疑问代词，是单复数通用的，what、which 没有所有格，其主格及宾格同形，惟有 who 在其格（Case）上有些变化。

主格 | 所有格 | 宾格
who | whose | whom
what | — | what
which | — | which

1. who 是用于人的，问人的姓名及血族关系，例如：

① Who is he？He is Mr. Chang.（姓名）

② Who is she？She is my aunt.（血族关系）

2. what 可用于人或物，用于人的时候，就不是问其姓名，而是问其职业，用于物的时候，当然是问物名。

① What is that man？He is a doctor.（职业）

② What do you want？I want some ink.（物名）

3. which 也是人或物都可以用的，常表选择之意，即“孰”的意思。白话说“哪一个”。

① Which do you like better，novels or poems？（二者择其一）

② Which do you like best，beer，wine or spirit？（多数中择其一）

4. 疑问代词通常置于语句的开头，可与助动词同用。

① Whom do you want to see？

② Which do you want？

③ What ought we to do？

但用 be 及 have 时，则不要助动词，如：

① Which of the two sisters is the prettier？

比较：Which of the two sisters do you like better？

② What have you in your hand？

比较：What did you say？

注意：have 的这种用法是含有“所有”的意思，如无所有的意思，例如在 to have dinner（用餐），to have a good time（行乐）等 phrase 中，则仍须加用助动词，现举例比较如下：

①What has he in his left hand？（有所有意）

②What will you have for dinner？（无所有意）

① Have you any sports books？（有所有意）

② Did you have a fine time yesterday？（无所有意）

还有以疑问代词为主语的肯定句可不用助动词，但在否定句中则仍须用。

① Who told you that？

② What happened next？

③ Who among these merchants does the largest trade？

④ Which of these trees does not bear fruit？

5. 疑问代词为介词的宾格时，那介词可置于疑问词之前，也可置于反问词之后，也有置前置后皆可的。

① | To whom does this belong？ Whom does this belong to？

② With whom did you speak？

③ Whom are you looking for？

6. 疑问句有两种，一种是以基本助动词（例如 be、have 等）开头的，另一种是以疑问词（例如 what、who、which、where、whom、how、why）开头的，通常无论哪一种，都是要把动词或助动词置于主语之前的，但如果这疑问句只是一个从句接在其他主句上时，主语和动词就不必颠倒，如：

Tell me which you like best？

比较：Which do you like best？

在上面以 which 为主语的句中，do（助动词）置于主语 you 之前，以表示主语和动词的颠倒。

又，以疑问词开头的疑问句，与其他分句结合时有两种方式，①为接于主句之后，②为把其他的分句插入疑问句之间，例如：

①Do you know who is ill？Yes，I do.

②Who do you know is ill？I think his father is ill.

在第一例句，可以回答 yes 或 no，第二例句就不能回答 yes 或 no，通常是 know、hear、tell、ask 等动词的分句，置于疑问词之前，而 think、suppose、believe 等动词的分句，置于疑问词之后，但 say 一字则置前置后皆可，不过意思不同罢了。

① Did you say what you wanted？Yes，I did.

②What did you say wanted？I said I wanted some money.

第一句主要是问你说了没说，故有回答 yes 或 no 的必要，但第二句主要是问你要什么，所以只能答要的东西，不能回答要与不要。

7. 有关 what 的 phrase。

① What if I should fall sick now？（倘若……将如何）

② What though I fall sick now？（纵令……又何妨）

③He talked of rights and duties，and rights and wrongs，and what not.（此外等等）

④ What by threatening，and what by coaxing，he finally accomplished his purpose.（半以……半以……）

⑤ What with the high price of provisions，and what with the occational sickness，the family found it very difficult to live on their income.（或因……或因……）

后二例中的 what 不是代词，而是副词。

（17）关系代词

关系代词不仅是用以代理其先行的名词，而且要拿来连接前后两个语句，所以它是“代词而兼连词”的。比方“This is a bird. ”和“I caught it（= the bird）. ”两句，用连词 and 连接起来，便成为“This is a bird，and I caught it. ”再进一步可使这两句更密切地结合拢来，就是将句中的代词（it）及连词（and）换用一个关系代词的 that。即：“This is the bird that（= and it）I caught. ”。

（注）因为这时的 bird 已受到 that 以下字句的限制，所以要将冠词 a 改为 the。

1. 关系代词及其先行词（Antecedent）

上例中的 bird 一词便是关系代词 that 的先行词，因为那是它所代理的其先行的名词。关系代词在“人称”及“数”上，一定要和它的先行词一致，例如：

I，who am a poor man，cannot do such a thing.

You，who are a rich man，may do anything you like.

Heaven helps those who help themselves.

Heaven helps him who helps himself.

句中的 who 为关系代词，随其先行词而变换它的人称和数。

先行词不一定是一个单词，它有时也可能是一个短语，或一个分句，例如：

He tried to win the prize，which，however，was found impossible.（短语）

We missed the train，which prevented us from reaching there in time.（分句）

2. 关系代词的格（Case）

用途 | 格
主格 | 所有格 | 宾格
（人） | who | whose | whom
（物） | which | （whose）of which | which

That is the man who teaches me English.（主格）

That is the man whose son I teach.（所有格）

That is the man whom I teach.（宾格）

（注意）用于人的关系代词，主格、所有格、宾格各有一词，一见分明，不至弄错，但用于物的关系代词是 which（有时 that），词的本身无变化，初学者也许在句中就不容易看出它的格来了。须知决定它的格的，不在它前面的词，而在它后面的词，例如：“Success will come to him who is always honest and diligent. ”一句中的 who 的格，和它前面那宾格的 him 没有关系，而只是后面 is 的主格罢了。还有一点要注意的，就是关系代词若系主格时，后面便直接接上动词；如系宾格时，后面的动词前就得另外加上一个主语。

3. 关系代词的用法

（a）who 的先行词是人。

This is a man who will never tell a lie.（主格）

Those whom the gods love die young.（宾格）

A man whose husband is dead is called a widow.（所有格）

（b）which 的先行词是物。

That is the house which belongs to him.（主格）

That is the house which he brought last year.（宾格）

That is the house the roof of which we saw from beyond the river.（所有格）

（注意）先行词为短语或从句时，关系代词要用 which，例见前。

（c）that 的先行词是人或物，可代替 who、whom、which 用，但不能用于所有格。

He is the American that（= who）teaches us English.（主格）

The man that（= whom）I met just now is my uncle.（宾格）

The book that（= which）has a red cover is mine.（主格）

This is the knife that（= which）I lost yesterday.（宾格）

（注意）that 不可接用介词。

误：The house in that he lives is not his own.

正：The house that he lives in is not his own.

正：The house in which he lives is not his own.

（d）that 的特殊用法。

① 先行词的形容词为最高级的场合：

He is the best tennis player that I know.

② 在疑问词 who 之后：

Who is the man that is speaking there？

③ 先行词既是人又是物的场合：

He sketched a driver and his cows that were passing over the bridge.

④ 在 the only、the same、the very 等之后：

He is the only man that can be trusted.

This is the very man that I wanted to see.

This is the same watch that I lost yesterday.

⑤ 在 indefinite pronouns 之后：

All that glitters is not gold.

No thing that he does is badly done.

Energy will do anything that can be done in the world.

I have something that I wish to tell you.

There is little that remains to be said.

⑥ 在数字之后：

He is the third person that has found out the secret.

⑦ 在 emphatic use 的 it is...that 的场合：

It is not ease but effort that makes man.

（e）what 是包含有先行词在内的关系代词。

What（= that which）is beautiful is not always good.

They are what（= those which）you call blue stockings.

I did what（= all that）I could.

What money（= all the money which）he gets he spends on drink.

（f）but 是含有否定在内的。

There is no rule but（= which...not）has exceptions.

There was no one present but（= who...not）saw the deed.

（g）as 和 than 原来是连词，如其后的代词省略时，则成为关系代词了。

As many men as came were caught.

This is more money than is needed.

4. 关系代词的特殊用法

① 限定的用法（Restrictive use）

He is the man who gave me this English magazine.

The gentleman who is standing over there is our teacher.

I received the letter which you sent me yesterday.

将整个的分句看作一个形容词来修饰先行的名词，而限定它的意义的，就叫作限定的用法。在这种关系代词前不要逗号（Comma）。这种 who 和 which，都可以用 that 来代替，因为 that 有限定的意思。

② 继续的用法（Continuative Use）

I met a man，who（= and he）gave me this English magazine.

He slew all the prisoners，which（= and this）was a very barbarous act.

I received a letter this morning，which（= and it）I have forgotten to bring here.

这并无形容词的效果，而用逗号使之与其先行的名词或短语或分句切断，等于用并列连词（Coordinate Conjunction）结合起来的两个对等句子。这就是说，没有这个从句，单只留下那个主句也能成立。

③ 副词的用法（Adverb Use）

I will let off this man，who（= because he）has been sufficiently punished already.

A man was sent，who should（= that he might）deliver the message.

One who（= if one）wishes to be in good health should not neglect to take a moderate amount of exercise.

The man，who（= though he）was very poor，never complained of his lot.

凡关系代词不属于上举两种用法，而引导一个表示“理由、目的、条件、让步”等的副词从句的，就属于副词的用法。

（注意）以 that 代 who 或 which 只限于“限定的用法”，而在“继续的用法”时则不可以用 that 来代替。有时因意义上的关系，也不能用限制的 that，例如说“I have heard from my brother that is in America. ”一句是对的，因为限制写信的是在美国的那个兄弟，不是在其他地方的兄弟。但是如说“I have heard from my father that is in America. ”就是笑话，因为父亲只有一位，不能加以限制，而暗示除在美国的那位以外另外还有，这时的 that 应改为 who 才对。通常是以 which 表不限定的，而以 that 表限定的：

The boy that practices will win the race.

The river，which is tidal，is full of shipping.

5. 作为介词宾语的关系代词

The house of which you speak is sold.

The house in which he lives is sold.

The chair on which you are sitting is too small.

The man with whom I live is Mr. Chang.

6. 关系代词的省略

上面第5项中所举各例，如将其中的介词移置于动词之后，便可将关系代词省略，例如：

The house（which）you speak of is sold.

The house（which）he lives in is sold.

The chair（which）you are sitting on is too small.

The man（whom）I live with is Mr. Chang.

又，在其他没有介词的句中只要词不害意，也同样可将关系代词省略，例如：

Is this the book（which）you want to read？

There is no one（who）knows it.

It is not the fine coat（that）makes the fine gentleman.

7. 复合的关系代词

Whoever（= Any one who）wishes to succeed must persevere.

Bring whoever（= anyone who）wants to come.

He flatters whosever（= anyone whose）father is rich.

Bring whomever（= any one whom）you like.

He succeeds in whatever（= anything that）he undertakes.

Choose whichever（= either that）you like.

8. 关系副词（Relative Adverb）

这当然应该属于副词部分，不过因为它的用法完全和关系代词一样，为区别计，特附此说明一下。关系副词有 when、where、why、how、that 等。

① 引导一个 Adjective Clause 的。

This is the city where I was born.

This is the reason why he has done so.

（注）the city 为关系副词 where 的先行词，the reason 为关系副词 why 的先行词。where I was born 及 why he has done so 都是形容词从句。

② 省略先行词而引导一个 Noun Clause 的关系副词的用法，和关系代词中那兼先行词的 what 的用法相同。

Let me know（the time）when he will come.

Tell me（the place）where you found it.

This is（the reason）why he did it.

This is（the way）how he did it.

（18）动词的变化

英文的动词有三种主要的形式（Three Principal Parts of the Verb），即原形（Root）、过去式（Past）和过去分词（Past Participle）。这便是动词的变化。

Ⅰ. 原形（Root Form）

动词的基本的形态，有下列五种用法：

① 作为现在时态

I speak English.（我说英语。）

We write in English.（我们用英文写作。）

但动词 be 是例外，其本身因人称而有变化，即第一人称的 I 用 am，第二人称的 you 用 are，第三人称的 he 用 is。

② 用于 shall、will、may、can、do、must、need、dare 等助动词之后

I shall go.（我会去。）

He will come.（他会来。）

I do not go.（我不去。）

You must go at once.（你必得马上就去。）

③ 作为不定词

（a）原形不定词（Root-Infinitive）

He bade me sit down.（他命令我坐下。）

We felt the earth quake.（我们感到地震。）

（b）有 to 的不定词（to-Infinitive）

He likes to work.（他喜欢工作。）

It was a day to be remembered forever.（这是一个永远难忘的日子。）

④ 在字尾加-ing 作成现在分词（Present Participle）

He was writing a letter while his sister was reading a book.（他在写信，他妹在读书。）

Have you seen the sleeping child？（你看见那睡着的孩子吗？）

⑤ 作为命令形的动词

Be silent！（不要作声！）

Do it at once.（马上去做。）

Ⅱ. 过去式（Past Form）

作为过去时态（Past Tense）：

I walked three miles.（我步行了三里路。）

He wrote a letter.（他写了一封信。）

Ⅲ. 过去分词（Past Participle Form）

这种形态有下列三种用法：

① 以 have + 过去分词，作成完成时态（Perfect Tense）

I have written a letter.（我写了一封信。）

② 以 be + 过去分词，作成被动语气（Passive Voice）

I was spoken to by an old gentleman.（有一位老先生来对我讲话。）

③ 作为形容词

A retired officer.（退役军官。）

The languages spoken in Switzerland are French，German and Italian.（在瑞士说的语言有法语、德语和意大利语。）

（19）规则动词（Regular Verb）

在动词原形上加-ed，作成过去式和过去分词的，就叫作规则动词，否则为不规则动词。

①原形 + ed 的

（原形） | （过去式） | （过去分词）
call（呼唤） | called | called
walk（走路） | walked | walked

② 去掉原形上的词尾 e 而再加-ed 的

like（喜欢） | liked | liked
waste（浪费） | wasted | wasted

③ 词尾为辅音 + y 时，则将 y 变 i 再加-ed 的

carry（携带） | carried | carried
try（试） | tried | tried

（但词尾为元音 + y 时，则不变而直接加-ed）

stay（逗留） | stayed | stayed
play（游戏） | played | played

④ 词尾为“短元音 + 单辅音”的单音节词时，应先将辅音重复一个后再加-ed

stop（停） | stopped | stopped
beg（乞） | begged | begged

⑤ 以辅音结尾，而重音落在最后一个音节上时，也得将辅音重复一个后再加-ed

omit（省略） | omitted | omitted
occur（发生） | occurred | occurred
permit（允许） | permitted | permitted

（20）不规则动词（Irregular Verb）

不规则动词却不像规则动词那样，可以有一定的法则，它的变化很多，现勉强分为下列四种：

① 原形、过去式、过去分词三者同形的

（原形） | （过去式） | （过去分词）
cast（投） | cast | cast
cut（切） | cut | cut
hit（打） | hit | hit
shut（关） | shut | shut
put（放） | put | put
cost（费） | cost | cost
knit（编织） | knit | knit
hurt（伤） | hurt | hurt
burst（爆炸） | burst | burst
set（安放） | set | set
shed（流） | shed | shed
spread（扩大） | spread | spread
read（读） | read | read

② 只有元音有变化的

（a）过去式及过去分词同形的

bleed（出血） | bled | bled
breed（养育） | bred | bred
feed（饲养） | fed | fed
lead（领导） | led | led
meet（相遇） | met | met
shoot（射击） | shot | shot
find（寻找） | found | found
bind（缚） | bound | bound
wind（旋） | wound | wound
fight（战） | fought | fought
hold（保持） | held | held
lay（放） | laid | laid
stand（立） | stood | stood
spin（纺） | spun | spun
sting（刺） | stung | stung
hang（悬） | hung | hung
swing（摇） | swung | swung
get（得） | got | got
sit（坐） | sat | sat
spit（吐痰） | spat | spat
shine（光耀） | shone | shone
win（赢） | won | won

（b）只有过去式的元音不同的

come（来） | came | come
run（跑） | ran | run

（c）原形、过去式、过去分词的元音全不相同的

begin（开始） | began | begun
drink（饮） | drank | drunk（drunken）
ring（摇铃） | rang | rung
sing（唱歌） | sang | sung
swim（游泳） | swam | swum
sink（沉） | sank | sunk（sunken）

③ 词尾有变化的

（a）元音不变的

have（有） | had | had
make（做） | made | made
burn（烧） | burnt | burnt
learn（学） | learnt | learnt
dwell（住） | dwelt | dwelt
smell（嗅） | smelt | smelt
bend（弯曲） | bent | bent
lend（借） | lent | lent
send（送） | sent | sent
build（建筑） | built | built
spend（花费） | spent | spent
show（表示） | showed | shown

（b）元音变化的

bear（生） | bore | born
bear（负担） | bore | borne
tear（裂） | tore | torn
wear（穿） | wore | worn
swear（誓） | swore | sworn
forget（忘） | forgot | forgotten
freeze（冻） | froze | frozen
feel（感） | felt | felt
kneel（跪） | knelt | knelt
blow（吹） | blew | blown
grow（生长） | grew | grown
know（知道） | knew | known
lie（躺下） | lay | lain
drive（驱） | drove | driven
give（给） | gave | given
bid（令） | bade | bidden
write（写） | wrote | written
ride（乘） | rode | ridden
rise（起立） | rose | risen
see（看见） | saw | seen
fall（落） | fell | fallen
take（取） | took | taken
shake（摇） | shook | shaken
keep（保持） | kept | kept
sleep（睡） | slept | slept
weep（哭） | wept | wept
lost（失） | lost | lost
speak（说） | spoke | spoken
steal（偷） | stole | stolen
break（破） | broke | broken
choose（选择） | chose | chosen
catch（捉） | caught | caught
teach（教） | taught | taught
buy（买） | bought | bought
bring（带） | brought | brought
think（想） | thought | thought
sell（卖） | sold | sold
tell（告） | told | told
say（说） | said | said

④ 特殊变化的

be（存在） | was（or | were）been
do（做） | did | done
go（去） | went | gone
eat（吃） | ate | eaten

（21）动词的种类

语句的基本形式有下列五种：

〔第一形式〕Subject + Predicate

〔第二形式〕Subject + Predicate + Complement

〔第三形式〕Subject + Predicate + Object

〔第四形式〕Subject + Predicate + Indirect Object + Direct Object

〔第五形式〕Subject + Predicate + Object + Complement

以动词为主来分类的话，就是：

动词 | 不及物动词 | 完全不及物动词 | 〔 第一形式〕
不完全不及物动词＋补语 | 〔 第二形式〕
及物动词 | 完全及物动词 | ＋一个宾语 | 〔 第三形式〕
＋两个宾语 | 〔 第四形式〕
不完全及物动词＋宾语＋补语 | 〔第五形式〕

如上表所示，动词有不及物动词和及物动词两种，不及物动词又有完全不及物动词和不完全不及物动词之别，及物动词也同样地有完全及物动词和不完全及物动词之别。

1. 完全不及物动词（Complete Intransitive Verb）和不完全不及物动词（Incomplete Intransitive Verb）

a. 完全不及物动词

Pride goes before a fall. 骄者必败。

We sat under the shade of a tree. 我们坐在树荫下。

b. 不完全不及物动词

Health is wealth. 健康即财富。

Practice makes perfect. 熟能生巧。

2. 完全及物动词（Complete Transitive Verb）和不完全及物动词（Incomplete Transitive Verb）

a. 完全及物动词（有采用一个宾语的或采用两个宾语的）

Nobody can trust a liar. 谁也不相信撒谎者。

Waiter，bring me two eggs. 茶房，拿两个蛋给我。

He showed me the way to the science museum. 他指示了我去科学博物院的路。

When we parted，he wished me a good journey. 当我们离别时他祝我一路平安。

上例中的 me 为 Indirect Object，而 the way 和 journey，则为 Direct Object。间接宾语常置于直接宾语之前，但如置于直接宾语之后时，就得在其前面加用一个 to 字（如动词为 buy、get、make 等时，则加用 for）。

He sent me a photo. He sent a photo to me. | 他送我一张照片。

Father bought me a camera. Father bought a camera for me. | 父亲买了一架照相机给我。

Get me the book. Get the book for me. | 拿那书给我。

但直接宾语如为 it 时，则口语中常将 to 略去，如：

He told it to me. He told it me. | 他告诉了我那事。

He gave it to me. He gave it me. | 他把那个给我了。

b. 不完全及物动词（有时需要加补语）

His father made him a merchant. 父亲使他成为商人。

I found the book interesting. 我觉得那书很有趣。

比较:

I made him a present. 我送了他一件礼物。

（完全及物动词，Dative Verb）

I made him a servant. 我把他做佣人了。

（不完全及物动词，Factitive Verb）

比较:

I found the way easy. 我觉得那方法容易。

（不完全及物动词，easy 为补语）

I found the way easily. 我很容易地懂得那方法了。

（完全及物动词，easily 为副词）

c. 反身动词（Reflexive Verb）

在动词后面加 oneself 字样，但意义上常不要译出来。

I have enjoyed myself very much. 我玩得很快活。

The young man exerts himself to please his employer. 那青年勉力从事以博雇主的欢心。

He devoted himself to his work. 他献身于工作。

He absented himself from school for that day. 他那天没有上学。

He prides himself on his knowledge of English. 他对于他的英文颇为骄傲。

I shall avail myself of your kind offer. 我将拜领（利用）你的盛情。

I am afraid I’ve overslept myself. 我恐怕我睡得太多了。

I don’t want to overeat myself. 我不要过分地吃得太多了。

He applied himself closely to the study of French. 他孜孜不倦地在学法文。

Take care not to overwork yourself. 当心不要过劳。

How do you amuse yourself in rainy weather？下雨天你怎样消遣的？

He shouted（talked，sang）himself hoarse. 他大声地叫，喉咙都叫哑了。

试比较下列用 oneself 与不用 oneself 之例句：

He associated（= kept company）with pleasant companions. 他交际愉快的朋友。

He associated himself（= entered into partnership）with that firm. 他加入那公司做股东了。

He broke off（= discontinued）the habit. 他戒断了那种习惯。（一般的说法）

He broke himself off the habit. 他断然地戒绝了那种习惯。（加强的说法）

Guard against（beware of）that vice. 要戒备那种恶习。

Guard yourself（= take special precautions）against that vice. 要特别注意那种恶习。

He prepared for a lesson. 他准备功课。

He prepared himself for the examination. 他孜孜努力准备应考。

3. 英文动词大多数是不及物动词而兼及物动词的

They open the doors at nine. 他们九时开门。（及物）

School opens at eight o’clock. 学校八时上课。（不及物）

Bad men hide their faults. 坏人隐藏其恶。（及物）

Bats hide during the day. 蝙蝠昼伏夜出。（不及物）

He turned me out of the room. 他把我逐出室外。（及物）

He turned to me and spoke. 他转向我说。（不及物）

He feeds the horse with grass. 他以草饲马。（及物）

Many people feed on rice. 多数人以米为生。（不及物）

He spread his garment. 他铺开他的衣。（及物）

The mist spread over the earth. 地上满笼着雾。（不及物）

He closed the business. 他歇业了。（及物）

The day closed at six p. m. 天在六时断黑。（不及物）

The wind dispersed the clouds. 风吹云散。（及物）

The clouds have dispersed from the sky. 云从天散。（不及物）

那些只限于作不及物动词用的动词，例如：be、come、go、become、fall 等，是没有被动语态（Passive Voice）的。

4. 不及物动词作及物动词用的场合

a. 采用同源的名词作宾语的，即 Cognate Verb，其宾语就称为 Cognate Object。

He died a sad death. 他死得惨。

He lived a long life. 他命很长。

He preyed an earnest prayer. 诚心祈祷。

He slept a sound sleep. 熟睡。

He dreamed a pleasant dream. 做了一个愉快的梦。

He sighed a deep sigh. 长叹了一声。

He laughed a hearty laugh. 开心地笑了。

It is blowing a gale. 刮大风。

He struck a hard blow. 重击一下。

He fought a good battle. 打了一场好仗。

He ran a race. 他赛跑了。

He shouted his loudest（shout）. 他大声呐喊。

He fought his best（fight）. 他竭力奋斗了一场。

She sang her sweetest（song）. 她唱了她最拿手的歌。

He ran his fastest（run）. 他最快地跑了。

He breathed his last（breath）. 他呼出了最后一口气。

b. 不及物动词用作使动（to cause）之意的。

He boils the water.（= He causes the water to boil.）他烧开水。（及物）

Cf. Water boils. 水沸。（不及物）

He grows wheat in the field. 他种小麦。（及物）

Cf. Wheat does not grow in Taiwan. 台湾不长小麦。（不及物）

He flew the kite. 他放风筝。（及物）

Cf. The kite flew in the air. 风筝飞上天。（不及物）

c. 不及物动词与介词同用时，便有及物动词的意味。这又称为 Prepositional Verb。例如：

The boys laughed at him. 孩子们笑他。

Please look after my little boy in my absence. 我不在家时请照顾我的小孩。

Have you sent for the doctor？你已经去请医生了吗？

5. 及物动词作不及物动词用的场合

a. 用作一般意义（general sense）的

The cat can see in the dark. 猫能在暗中看见。（不及物）

Cf. I can see nothing. 我什么也看不见。（及物）

We eat in order to live. 为生而食。（不及物）

Cf. I ate some beef at supper.晚餐吃了牛肉。（及物）

Man can speak. 人能说话。（不及物）

Cf. He can speak English very well. 他能说一口好英文。（及物）

He can neither read nor write. 他既不能读，也不能写。（不及物）

Cf. He is reading a novel while I am writing a letter. 他读小说我写信。（及物）

b. 及物动词用作不及物动词而具有被动意义（passive sense）的

This fruit tastes sweet.（= It is sweet when it is tasted.）此果甚甜。（不及物）

Cf. Have you tasted the fruit？你尝了那水果么？（及物）

The flower smelled fragrant. 此花甚香。（不及物）

Cf. The girl smelled the flower. 少女嗅花。（及物）

The article reads well. 那文章很好读。（不及物）

Cf. I shall read the article. 我将读那文章。（及物）

A villa is building.（= is being built）一座别墅在建筑中。（不及物）

Cf. They are building a villa. 他们在建筑别墅。（及物）

The guns are firing. 在放大炮。（不及物）

Cf. They are firing the guns. 他们在放大炮。（及物）

The book is printing. 那书在印刷中。（不及物）

Cf. They are printing the book. 他们在印那书。（及物）

c. 及物动词加副词作不及物动词用的

He made off（= ran away）with the money. 他卷款潜逃。

He set out（= started）at 4 p. m. 他下午四时出发了。

He turned out（= became）a prosperous merchant. 他变成一个富裕的商人了。

He got off（= escaped）unharmed. 他平安逃出。

He pushed on（= hurried forward）as fast as he could. 他尽速地前进。

Cholera has broken out（= suddenly appeared）. 发生了霍乱。

He gave in（= yielded）after a short struggle. 挣扎了一下他就屈服了。

（22）动词的时态

表示动作和状态之时的动词的形式，就叫作时态（Tense）。在英语中一共有十二种不同的时态，如下表：

Primary Tenses （常态） | Progressive （进行） | Perfect （完成） | Perfect Progressive （完成进行）
Present （现在） | I do | I am doing | I have done | I have been doing
Past （过去） | I did | I was doing | I had done | I had been doing
Future （将来） | I shall do | I shall be doing | I shall have done | I shall have been doing

但动词 to be，是没有进行式和 Passive 的，现将其时态及三种人称举出如下：

|  | （单数） | （复数）
Primary Tenses （常态） | Present （现在） | （第一人称）I am （第二人称）You are （第三人称）He is | We are You are They are
Past （过去） | （第一人称）I was （第二人称）You were （第三人称）He was | We were You were They were
Future （将来） | （第一人称）I shall be （第二人称）You will be （第三人称）He will be | We shall be You will be They will be
Perfect Tenses （完成） | Present （现在） | （第一人称）I have been （第二人称）You have been （第三人称）He has been | We have been You have been They have been
Past （过去） | （第一人称）I had been （第二人称）You had been （第三人称）He had been | We had been You had been They had been
Future （将来） | （第一人称）I shall have been （第二人称）You will have been （第三人称）He will have been | We shall have been You will have been They will have been

1. PRESENT（现在）

①Present Tense 是用 Verb 的 Root-form（原形），不过在第三人称单数的时候，要加 s 或 es。

The flowers fall. 花落。

He goes to school. 他上学。

②Present Tense 的用法。

a. 表示现在的动作（present action）。

I see a ship in the distance. 我看见远处有一只船。

〔注〕表示现在的动作，多用现在进行时。

b. 表示习惯的动作（habitual action）。

I always play baseball in the afternoon. 我常在下午打棒球。（个人的习惯）

He keeps his promise. 他是守约的。（人格）

He deals in earthenwares. 他做陶器生意。（职业）

c. 表示一般的真理（general truth）。

The sun shines by day and the moon by night. 白天有阳光照耀夜里有月光照亮。

d. 代替将来时（Future Tense）用。常在 go，come，leave，start 等动词连有未来的副词时。

The steamer leaves here tomorrow. 轮船明日离此。

e. 在以 if、when、while、before、after、till 等连词引导的条件句，或表时的副词从句中，以现在代未来。

We shall not go out if it rains tomorrow. 明天下雨的话，我们就不出去。

Please wait till I come back. 请等我回来。

〔注一〕如果这个副词从句是表示“意志”的话，仍然要用 will。即“I shall be glad if you will do so. ”（如果你肯这样做，我就高兴了）。

〔注二〕如果不是副词从句，而是名词从句时，也仍然要用将来的时态，即“Let us inquire if he will go today. ”（问问他今天是不是要去）。

f. 代替过去时（Past Tense）用。这是要使读者产生活生生的感觉，故用现在动词，仿佛目前发生的事情一样。又称历史现在时（Historical Present）。

Caesar leaves Gaul，crosses the Rubicon，and enters Italy with 5,000 men. 恺撒率五千之众，由高卢出发，渡过泸河，进入了意大利。

g. 代替现在完成时（Present Perfect）用。

I hear（= have heard）she is going to marry. 听说她要结婚了。

I read（= have read）in the newspapers that he has been elected Mayor of Tainan. 我在报上看到他被选为台南市长了。

2. PRESENT PROGRESSIVE（现在进行）

① 表示正在进行中的事。

He is now teaching English in the next room. 他现正在隔壁的教室教着英文。

〔比较〕He teaches English in that school. 他在那个学校教英文（用现在时态表示他的职业）。

② 与未来的副词同用，表示未来及预定之意。常用 go、come、leave、start、stay 等动词的进行时。

He is going（= will go）to America next month. 他下月赴美。

Are you staying（= Will you stay）here till next week？你将停留到下星期才走吧？

比较: | I go to school every day.（习惯的行动） I am going to school now.（动作的进行中） I am going to school now.（动作的进行中）

③ 用 to be going + Infinitive 的形式，表示最近未来想要做的事。

I am going to start for Europe. 我正打算动身到欧洲去。

I am just going to advise him to go out for a walk. 我正预备劝他出去散步一回。

比较: | He writes well. 他文章写得好。（现在） He is writing a letter. 他正在写信。（进行的现在） He is writing a letter. 他正在写信。（进行的现在）

④ 用 Present Tense 来表示现在正进行的动作或状态。因为 have、resemble、like、see、hear、remember、need、understand、possess、belong 等词，是没有进行时的。“我有钱”，只消说“I have money. ”就行了，不可以说“I am having money. ”“我只认识他的面孔”应说“I know him only by sight. ”不可说“I am knowing him only by sight. ”其他如“He has a good constitution. ”（他体格很好。）“He closely resembles his father.”（他很像他父亲。）也都是如此。试比较下列各句：

I see something white in the distance.

I am looking at the sky.

I hear him singing.

He is listening to the music.

He has no money with him now.

They are having a jolly time.

We are having a terrible hot summer.

He is having his supper.

〔注一〕因 see 无进行时，要表示正在看，只能说 be looking at。同样地要用 be listening to 代替 hear。

〔注二〕动词 have 作“有”解时，没有进行式，用作进行式时必另有含义，如 have jolly time（玩得很快乐），have a terrible hot summer（今夏酷热），have one’s supper（在吃晚饭）等。

3. PAST（过去）

① 表示过去的动作或状态。

We met him at the station.（动作）

We were there all summer.（状态）

② 表示过去一种习惯的动作。

He used to sit every day under that tree. 他从前老是每天坐在那棵树下。

He would spend whole hours in examining its various parts. 他老是要花好几个钟头来检查各部分。

〔注〕以 would 表过去的习惯时，多与 often、sometimes 等副词同用。

4. PAST PROGRESSIVE（过去进行）

表示过去某个指定的时候所发生的进行中的动作。

Once two men were traveling together. 从前有两个男子正在一块儿旅行中。

I was reading a novel when you came. 你来时我正在读着一本小说。

5. FUTURE（未来）

表示未来有下列种种形式。

I shall go to Tainan.

I am going to Tainan.

I am going to leave Taipei.

I am about to leave Taipei.

I am to go to Tainan.

6. FUTURE PROGRESSIVE（将来进行）

表示未来某个指定的时候将发生的进行中的动作。

He is much interested in reading that book. He will be still reading it if you look in at his room.

他对那本书很感兴趣。你到他房里去看看，他仍然还抱着那本书在读着。

7. PRESENT PERFECT（现在完成）

现在完成有下列种种用法。

①表示到目下刚完成的事。

I have just written this letter. 我刚把这信写完了。

②表示动作已完，其结果则成为现在的状态。

He has gone to Taipei.（= He is not here. He is in Taipei now.）他到台北去了。

③表示过去的经验。

I have seen him before. 我以前见到过他。

④表示继续到现在为止的状态。

He has been ill since last Monday. 他自上星期一以来就生病了。

8. PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE（现在完成进行）

表示从过去到现在，也许还要继续到将来的动作。

What have you been doing all this while？你这一晌在做些什么呀？

I have been studying English for five years.（继续）

I have studied English for five years.（经验）

〔注〕have been studying 表示过去学了，现在正在学，将来还要学。

9. PAST PERFECT（过去完成）

表示过去某个指定的时候以前所发生的事。

They had known each other before they got married. 他们在结婚以前早就相知有素了。

比较: | 1. He borrowed the book and returned it. 2. He returned the book that he had borrowed.

〔注〕如第一句，照动作的顺序排列，即先借后还，就可用 Past，但如第二句，把顺序颠倒，即先说还再说借时，就得用 Past Perfect 了，had borrowed 是表示在 returned 以前发生的动作。

10. PAST PERFECT PROGRESSIVE（过去完成进行）

表示某动作继续到过去的某个时候为止。

I had been waiting about an hour when he came. 我等待了差不多一个钟头他才来。

I had been studying English before I went to bed. 我在就寝以前读了英文。

11. FUTURE PERFECT（将来完成）

表示到未来某个时候为止已经会做好了的事。

I shall have finished it by the time school begins. 在上课以前我就会把它做好的。

注意：在 Adverb Clause 中应以 Present Perfect 来代替 Future Perfect，如 Wait till I have finished eating.（等我吃完饭再说。）

12. FUTURE PERFECT PROGRESSIVE（将来完成进行）

表示继续到未来某个时候为止就要完成的事。

He will have been teaching in this school full ten years（by）next July. 到明年七月，他就在本校足足教了十年的书了。

（23）语态和语气

Ⅰ. 语态

1. 动词的语态有两种，一种是主动语态（Active Voice），另一种是被动语态（Passive Voice）。

主动语态是以句中的主语为主动的，而被动语态就是以那主语为动作的对象的，例如：

① A dog bit the boy.（Active Voice）

狗咬了小孩。

② The boy was bitten by a dog.（Passive Voice）

小孩被狗咬了。

大部分的情形是可以把语态互相改写的，只有极少数的动词，如 happen 等，才没有被动语态。

2. 由主动改成被动时，是要把原来的宾语用作主语，而动词就用 be + Past Participle 的形式，然后加 by，再加宾语（即原来的主语）。

3. 主动改被动应注意下列各项：

a. 用 people，they，you，we，one 为主动语态的主语，而指一般人的场合，改作被动语态时，通常将这主语略去，不必再加 by people 的字样：

People say that he is rich.（Active）

It is said that he is rich.（Passive）

They speak English all over the world.（A）

English is spoken all over the world.（P）

What do you call this flower？（A）

What is this flower called？（P）

One does not feel a burden of one’s own choice.（A）

A burden of one’s own choice is not felt.（P）

b. 如有两个宾语的话，被动就有两种写法：

He gave me this advice.（A）

I was given this advice by him.（P）

This advice was given me by him.（P）

c. 带有介词的动词，改为被动时，介词仍不可少：

They take care of him.（A）

He is taken care of by them.（P）

She laughed at me.（A）

I was laughed at by her.（P）

We sent for the doctor.（A）

The doctor was sent for.（P）

d. 命令法的场合，要加用 let 一词：

Do it at once.（A）

Let it be done at once.（P）

Take this letter to the post-office.（A）

Let this letter be taken to the post-office.（P）

e. 动词为 know 的时候，后不接 by，而要接 to：

Everybody knows him.（A）

He is known to everybody.（P）

f. 动词的数及时态，应随之改变：

Virtue makes life happy.（A）

Life is made happy by virtue.（P）

I will pay the money.（A）

The money shall be paid by me.（P）

I shall pay the money.（A）

The money will be paid by me.（P）

They can not have said such a thing.（A）

Such a thing can not have been said.（P）

g. 有时中国话说的主动语态，英文却要用被动语态：

I am delighted to see you in good health.

I was surprised at his ignorance.

I am interested in learning English.

I am satisfied with the result.

I was disappointed then.

The train was derailed near Taipei.

（注）被动语态不一定要用 by，如果是指工具就要用 with，只有指行为者才用 by，例如：

He was killed by the robber.

He was killed with a sword.

Ⅱ. 语气

1. 动词的语气有三种，即直陈语气（Indicative Mood），祈使语气（Imperative Mood）和虚拟语气（Subjunctive Mood）。

2. 直陈语气是不问现在、过去、未来而只是直述某种事实的，一般普通的语句，大都是用的这种语气。

He studies hard.

He is very diligent.

Dead man tells no tales.

What is the best formula for success in life？

3. 祈使语气是用于表示命令、请求、祈祷等的，普通常将主语的 you 省略不说，而动词就用 Root form，否定句时则在动词前加 do not 或 don’t 字样。

Boys，be ambitious！（命令）

Bring me some water，please.（请求）

Lead us not into temptation，but deliver us from evil.（祈祷）

否定时则可说：

Do not sleep in the classroom.

Don’t yawn before others.

有时在普通动词的 Root form 前再加上一个 do 字以加强语气，如

Do save us！

对第一人称及第三人称的祈使语气，就是用 let：

Let me go！

Let him do it！

Let us take a walk！

4. 在祈使语气之后，接有 and 或 or 时，就是表示条件的。

Sow virtue，and the harvest will be virtue.（= If you sow virtue，then the harvest will be virtue.）

Keep quiet，or I will punish you.（= If you do not keep quiet，I will punish you.）（= Unless you keep quiet，I will punish you.）

5. 祈使语气有时可用来表示让步。

Be the work what it may，always do your best.（= Whatever the work may be，...）（= No matter what the work may be，...）（= Let the work be what it may，...）

Try as you may，you will not be able to master English in a few months.（= However hard you may try，you will not...）

Call when you will，you will find him out.（= whenever you may call，you...）

6. 将 suppose 和 say 用于祈使语气时，则 suppose 当 if 解，say 当 for instance 解，例如：

Suppose you were in his place what would you do？

What do you say to going there in a week or so，say next Sunday？

7. 虚拟语气的时态有四种，Present 用 If I be；Future 用 If I should be；Past 用 If I were；Past Perfect 用 If I had been。

8. Present Subjunctive（虚拟语气的现在），表示对现在或未来的不确实的想象，第三人称单数不加 s。

If he be good-mannered，he may also be good-natured.

（注）若将上句 Present Subjunctive 改为 Present Indicative 时，则成 If he is good-mannered，he is not good-natured. 在虚拟语气的说法，意为“他的仪容好不好”尚不确实，若是“仪容很好的话，其性情可能也是好的”，不妨作此想象。至于直陈语气的说法，则对“他仪容之好”已无疑义，而断定“他仪容虽好，性情却不好”。一则说的想象，一则说的事实。目下英美的口语，颇有以 Present Indicative 代替 Present Subjunctive 的倾向。

9. Future Subjunctive（虚拟语气的将来），表示对现在或未来的强大的疑义。不论是何人称，都用 should + Root 的形式，意为“万一的话”，后接 should，would + Root 或 will，shall + Root 或命令句。

If he should be found older than I think，I would not employ him.（I don’t think he is old.）

If I should fail，I would try again.（I shall not fail.）

If it should rain tomorrow，the swimming meet will be postponed.

（注）第一句是对现在的，第二、三句是对未来的强大的疑义。

10. Past Subjunctive（虚拟语气的过去），表示与现在的事实相反的假设，动词常用过去式，但动词 be 则要用 were，三个人称都是一样。后接的主句中的动词，就要用 should（或 would，或 could）+ Root。

If I were rich，I could do so.（= As I am not rich，I can not do so.）

If I were you，I would go abroad.（= As I am not you，I do not go abroad.）

If he were with us，we should be delighted.（= As he is not with us，we are sorry.）

If it were not for the sun，we could not live at all.（= As there is the sun，we can live.）

11. Past Perfect Subjunctive（虚拟语气的过去完成），表示与过去的事实相反的想象，动词用 Past Perfect，后接 would，should + have + Past Participle 的形式。

If he had been diligent，he would have passed the entrance examination.（= As he was not diligent，he did not pass the entrance examination.）

If I had had money，I would have helped you.（= As I had no money then，I could not help you.）

If it had been fine，I should have been glad.（= As it was not fine，I was sorry.）

If it had not been for your help，I should have been drowned.（= As you helped me，I was not drowned.）

12. 除以上四种虚拟语气之外，还有一些在语句中须用或代替虚拟语气的地方，现分条举出如下：

a. 表示与未来的事实相反的想象。如大家都知道阳光是永远不会消逝的，现若假定太阳无光的话，就要用 If + were to 的形式，后接 should，would + Root。例如：

If the sun were to be extinguished，the whole earth would be fast bound in a frost in a day or two.

If I were to go abroad，I would go to America.

b. 在 wish 后面应该用虚拟语气的 Past 或 Past Perfect，表示对于现在，过去将来的事难以达到的愿望。

I wish I were a musician.（= I am sorry that I am not a musician.）（现在）

I wish I had been there.（= I am sorry I was not there.）（过去）

I wish he could come.（= I am sorry he will not come.）（将来）

I wish to be a sailor.（将来的志愿）

I wish I were a bird.（现在未达成的志愿）

I wish I had been a statesman.（过去未达成的志愿）

I wish the rain would stop tomorrow.（将来的切望）

c. 在 as if 后应该接虚拟语气，由 as if 引导的从句，不论主语的单复，常要用复数形。

He speaks as if he were my friend.（= He speaks as he would speak if he were my friend.）

He looks as if nothing had happened.

d. 省略 if 的场合。要将主语和助动词或基本助动词颠倒。

Were I rich（= If I were rich），I would buy it.

We may lie down there，should we fall ill.（= if we should fall ill.）

Were it not for freezing（= If it were not for freezing），the stars would not be so bright.

Had you been more careful（= If you had been more careful），you would not have fallen ill.

Had it not been for your advice（= If you had not given me your advice），I should have grown desperate.

e. 在虚拟语气中用 would 的话，表示那主语有“肯做不肯做，原不知道，如果肯做的话”之意。

If you would only do your best，you would be sure to succeed.

If you would lend me the book，I should be much obliged.

但是如下的说法，又可以表示与现在相反的事实：

He could do it，if he would.

f. 用 Infinitive 来表示虚拟语气的：

It would be wrong to tell a lie.（= It would be wrong if I were to tell a lie.）

I should be happy to be of service to you.

g. 用 Preposition 来表示虚拟语气的：

I would go abroad，but for my poverty.（Were it not for my poverty，I would go abroad.）

Without water the plants and trees would all die.（= If there were no water，the plants...）

With an army of such soldiers，I could conquer the whole world.

h. 用 Conjunction 来表示虚拟语气的：

He worked very hard，otherwise（or else）he would have failed.（= If he had not worked hard，he would have failed.）

Life would be short，but that hope prolongs it.

i. 用 Noun 来表示虚拟语气的：

A wise man would not do such a thing.（= If he were a wise man，he would not do such a thing.）

j. 将条件句省略的场合：

I should like to go with you.（= I should like to go with you，if I could.）

He must be over fifty，I should think.（= He must be over fifty，I should think if I were to think about it.）

I could have come last evening.（= I could have come last evening if I had wanted to.）

Would you kindly lend me your pen？（= Would you kindly lend me your pen，if I were to ask you.）

Might I as k you to show me the way？（= Might I ask you to show me the way，if you didn’t mind.）

Could you spare me a copy？（= Could you spare me a copy，if I were to ask you.）

（24）助动词用法

加在动词之前以补足其意的词就叫做助动词（Auxiliary Verb），其主要的动词，就称主动词（Principal Verb）。有些助动词是有过去的变化的，如 do-did，will-would，shall-should，may-might，can-could，dare-dared（durst），其他如 must，ought to，need，则只有一个形式没有任何变化。兹将各助动词分别举例说明如下：

1. Do（后接略去了 to 的不定词）

a. 在问句及否定句中通常要用 do。

① Do you take exercise everyday？（问句）

你每天都要运动吗？

② Don’t count your chickens before they are hatched.（否定句）

鸡卵未孵勿先数雏。（格言）

但在 to be，to have 的时候，则不用 do，如：

① Have you friends or relatives in this city？

你在本城有亲戚朋友吗？

②Life is not a picture.

人生并不如画。

b. who，what 等疑问词用作宾语时要 do，但用作主语时则不要 do，如：

① Whom do you want to see？（宾语）

你要找谁？

② Who knocked at the door？（主语）

有谁敲门啊？

（注意）如说“Who did knock at the door？”便错了。

c. 在用有疑问词的问句中要 do，但在从句中则不要 do，如：

① Where did you buy it？

你在哪里买的？

②Will you tell me where you bought it？

你可以告诉我你在哪里买的吗？

d. 加强动词的意思时要用 do，如：

①I do hope that you will succeed this time.

我真希望你这次会成功。

②When he does come，he is generally late.

他即令来，也总是到得很迟的。

e. 在倒装语句中要加用助动词：

①Not for a moment did he falter in his purpose.

他的志向坚定不移，一会儿都不动摇。

②He stood still，nor did I move.

他静立，我也不动。

f. 用 do 来做代动词（Pro-Verb），以避免重复使用动词：

①We need not be ashamed if others know more than we do（= know）.

如果别人知道得比我们多，我们也用不着羞耻。

②The ostrich does not build a nest as most birds do，but lay its eggs in the sand.（do = build a nest）

鸵鸟和别的鸟不同，是不筑巢的，它把卵产在沙中。

2. May（后接略去了 to 的不定词）

a. 许可：

① May I swim in this pool？

我可以在此池中游泳吗？

②You may take anything you like.

你喜欢什么就可以拿什么。

b. 可能：

①As it is very cold today，we may have rain tomorrow.

因为今天非常的冷，明天可能下雨。

②Young men may die；old men must.

年轻人也可能死，老年人则必死。

c. 可能不是（加否定用）：

The news may not be true.

那新闻可能不是真的。

d. 祈愿：

① May you succeed！

愿你成功！

②Long may live the Republic！

共和国万岁！

e. 目的（连 that 用）：

He spoke very slowly that we might understand him better.

他说得很慢，好使我们听懂。

3. Can（后接略去了 to 的不定词）

a. 能够：

①What cannot be cured must be endured.（格言）

不能治好的病只好忍受。

②Never defer till tomorrow what you can do today.

今天能够做的事绝不要拖到明天。

b. 不可能：

①He cannot be over fifty.

他不可能有五十岁以上。

② Can the report be true？

那传说不可能是真的。

c. 可以（= may）：

You can go or not，as you like.

你或去或留一任尊便。

（注意）can 不能与 will 或 shall 连用，用时要得将 can 改为 be able to，如：

I shall be able to go abroad.

我将能出洋。

4. Will（后接略去了 to 的不定词）

a. 将来（第二、三人称）：

①You will hear from me in a day or two.

一两天之内，你就会接到我的信的。

②He will succeed in his enterprise.

他将在事业上成功。

b. 许诺（第一人称）：

I will do exactly as you wish.

我会完全照你的意思做的。

c. 决心（第一、二、三人称）：

①I will go，whatever you may say.

不管你怎样说我都要去。

②If you will behave like that，what can you expect？

如果你行为如此，你还期望什么呢？

③He will have things done in the right way.

他一定会把事情做好。

5. Shall（后接略去了 to 的不定词）

a. 将来（第一人称）：

I shall be returning to town on Tuesday.

我礼拜二就回到城里来。

b. 许诺（第二、三人称）：

①You shall have the goods at once.

你定的货立刻送上。

②He shall not be kept waiting very long.

不会让他久等的。

c. 强迫（第一、二、三人称）：

①They say that we shall agree to their terms.

他们说我们非同意他们的条件不可。

②You shall do as I say.

你非得照我说的做不可。

③He shall pay you every cent he owes you.

他借你的钱每个子儿都得还你。

6. Would（后接略去了 to 的不定词）

a. 过去的习惯：

Passers-by would often take pity on this blind beggar and drop coppers into the basket.

路人常要同情这瞎叫花，而丢铜板在篮子里。

b. 坚强的意志（= wish to）：

Men who would succeed must be abreast of the times.

想要成功的人必得与时代并进。

c. 愿望（= I wish）：

① Would that I were young again.（= I wish I were young again.）但愿青春可再。

② Would I were a bird.（= I wish I were a bird.）我愿做一个小鸟。

d. 选择（加 rather 用）：

I would rather die than live without you.

我宁死也不愿失掉你。

e. 过去的决心：

He said he would do his best.（= He said，“I will do my best. ”）他说他一定尽力。

f. 过去的拒绝：

I offered him some money，but he would not take it. 我给他钱，他绝对不受。

7. Should（后接略去了 to 的不定词）

a. 应当（义务）：

You should obey your parents.

你应当服从你的父母。

b. 在 lest 之后，无论主句是现在或过去均可：

He works（又 worked）hard lest he should fail.

他很用功，以免失败。

c. 在假定与现在或过去事实相反的条件句的主句中叙述现在所存留的那种结果：

I should not be alive at this moment，if it were not for him.

如果不是他的话，我这时早已没有命了。

d. 在条件句文将前提分句省略，只留下一个归结分句（即主句）时；这常表示客气的说法：

①I should like to ask you to do me a favor.

我想请你帮我一个忙。

②You find her rather troublesome to teach，I should be afraid.——Gissing，Life’s Morning

我恐怕你教她，会感到很麻烦的吧。

③The apple-woman is a hundred，I should think，and yet she is out there when it rains even.

那卖苹果的老太婆恐怕有一百岁了，但是甚至天下着雨她还是要跑出外面来的。

④I should suppose any one would be proud of such a fine thing.

我想任何人对于这样一件好东西，都会觉得骄傲的。

⑤We are pretty good companions，I should say.

我想我们是很好的朋友吧。

e. 在 that 引导的，内容并非事实而全出于想象的从句中，三个人称皆用 should，并无别特意义：

①It is very surprising to me that you should know so little about it.

你对于那事竟不知道，真使我大吃一惊。

②It is better for him that the boy should not be told until he is much older.

等那孩子长大了再告诉他，对他更好。

③After the excitement of the last few days it was natural he should be tired.

在过去几天那般兴奋之后，他当然要感到疲倦的。

④It was right that these problems should have the first consideration.

这个问题要先考虑是对的。

⑤What a pity that a man with so good a heart should be so weak in the head.

那样一个好心肠的人会有这样迟钝的头脑，真是一件遗憾的事。

f. 在表示“决定”“意向”“命令”“建议”等主要从句后所接的 that-clause 中，不论任何人称都用 should：

①It was decided that the wretched hovels should be pulled down and new houses should be built.

决定把破房子拆掉而建筑新房子。

②He was anxious that his son should have a good education.

他切望他的儿子能受到良好的教育。

③The girl made a sign that he should come to her.

那女郎做个手势要他到她跟前去。

④He had ordered that the child should be sent alone into his room.

他命令将孩子一人送回房间去。

⑤After dinner，he proposed that we should smoke in the garden.

饭后他提议我们到花园里去抽烟。

g. 接在过去的主句后的形容词从句中，三个人称都用 should，表示从过去来看未来的：

①He longed for the morning to come，when he should see her again.

他期待着再见到她的早晨到临。

②Alexander hoped to make one mighty empire of the world，in which men of every race should be as brothers.

亚历山大希望把世界做成各民族亲如兄弟一般的一大帝国。

③Napoleon set to work to build a huge fleet which should be able to defeat the British fleet.

拿破仑着手建立一个足以击破英国舰队的强力的舰队。

h. 接在过去的主句后的副词从句中，三个人称都用 should，表示从过去来看未来的：

①She wanted to keep a little shop while her husband should be away.

她打算在丈夫不在家的时候，经营一个小店。

②It was necessary to live his days somehow until death should come.

到死为止总得想办法度日。

③She had to look nice and fresh for her patient；when the next day should start.

在第二天开始的时候，她必得为她的病人们做出新鲜活泼的样子来。

④He ran down lest rain should begin to fall.

他怕下雨匆匆跑下去了。

⑤Hester would not set him free，lest he should look her sternly in the face.——Hawthorne，Scarlet Letter

赫斯脱讨厌他严厉地望着她的脸，所以不放他走。

8. Must（后接略去了 to 的不定词）

a. 强烈的意志：

I must finish this before I go.

在走之前我一定要把这个做完。

b. 推思：

He must be crazy to talk like that.

他一定发了癫，竟说出那样的话。

c. 禁止（与否定连用）：

You may look at it，but you must not touch it.

你可以看，但不许动手。

（注意）must 的否定，是 need not，而不是 must not（这是 prohibition 禁止之意）。如 You must pay the money，but you need not do so at once.（你必得还钱，但你不必马上就还）。

9. Ought（后接不略去 to 的不定词）

a. Ought to + 意志动词 = 应当：

You ought to pay back your debts.

你应当偿还你的债务。

b. Ought to + 无意志动词 = 当然：

Such an able man ought to succeed.

那样有能力的人成功是当然的。

10. Need（后接略去了 to 的不定词）

在问句及否定句中作为助动词，用第三人称单数也不加 s（但作为一般动词用时要加 s）：

①Why need I hurry？

我为什么要赶紧呢？

②You need not hurry like that.

你用不着那么急。

（注意）He need not work.（助动词）He needs no money.（一般动词）又 need not 的过去，要用 had not to，如：I had not to do it.

11. Dare（后接略去了 to 的不定词）

用法与 need 相同：

①How dare you do such a thing？（问句）

你怎敢做这样的事？

②He dare not speak.（否定句）

他不敢说话。

③I dare say there are mistakes.

大概有错误。（I dare say = probably）

12. Be，Have 也可以作助动词用，be 后接现在分词或过去分词，have 后接过去分词。

比较: | He is reading a certain novel.（助动词） He is respected by all.（助动词） He says that there is a god.（is = exists）（一般动词）

比较: | School has begun.（助动词） We have two dogs.（have = possess）（一般动词）

13. Used 在问句中也可作助动词用。

Used you to have this sort of thing in your young days？——Galsworthy，Swan Song

你在年轻的时候常做这样的事吗？

14. Come 在问句中也可作助动词用。

　①How come you to be rambling about and lose yourself？——Eliot，The Mill on the Floss

你怎样会散步而迷了路的？

　②How comes he in such a pickle？

他怎样会遭遇这种困难的？

　③But how comes it that such a great gentleman walks？——Fielding，Tom Jones

这样一位伟大的人，怎样会要走路的呢？

（25）三种动状词

英文中有一些字眼，由动词变化而来，有“动词 + 名词”，“动词 + 形容词”，“动词 + 副词”的作用，但不能正式作谓语动词（Predicate Verb）用，这些字眼，便叫作动状词（Verbal）。动状词共分三种，即不定词（Infinitive）、分词（Participle）及动名词（Gerund）。

（1）To obey the laws is your duty.（Infinitive）

（2）Obeying the laws，he lived happily.（Participle）

（3）By obeying the laws you do your duty.（Gerund）

（一）不定词

1.“一般的形式”：to + Root-form = Infinitive

不定词头上的这个 to，原来是一个 Preposition，表示与 for 相同的意义，而其后所接的原形动词，那时还是一个名词，意为所做的那回事，后来逐渐失去本意，到现今则只是不定词的一个符号（sign），另无他意了。

2.“不定词的用法”：

（a）用于 Noun 的场合（Noun Infinitive）

（1）To teach is to learn.（Subject）

（2）I like to teach.（Object）

（3）To teach is to learn.（Complement）

〔注〕当不定词用作 Subject 或 Factitive Verb（作为动词，即如 find，make，think 等）的 Object 时，常可用 it 来做形式上的 Subject 或 Object，而把不定词放在后面去，如：

（1）It is never too late to mend.（Subject）

（2）I make it a rule to go out every day.（Object）

又在 Noun Infinitive 之前用有 what、how、where 等疑问词时，可将它作成 Noun Phrase，如：

（1）He did not know how to swim.（= the way to swim）

（2）I wish I know where to go.（= the place for going）

（3）She scarcely knows what to do.（= what she ought to do）

（b）用于 Adjective 的场合（Adjective Infinitive）

（1）I have no friend to help me.

（2）He has no food to eat.

（3）There is much to enjoy in the life of a sailor.

〔注〕省略了关系代词的时候，Preposition 就要移到不定词的后面去，如：

（1）We need a house to live in.（= in which to live）

（2）He had no money to buy food with.（with which to buy food）

（c）用于 Adverb 的场合（Adverb Infinitive）

① 目的（Purpose）

（1）We have come here to study.（= We have come here for the purpose of studying.）

（2）This water is not good to drink.（= not good for drinking）

〔注〕第一例的不定词是修饰动词 come 的，第二例的不定词是修饰形容词 good 的。这种不定词可用 in order to，so as to 来代替。

I got up early to be in time for the first train.

I got up early in order to be in time for the first train.

I got up early so as to be in time for the first train.

以上都是表“目的”的，如改为下面的说法，便成表“结果”的了。

I got up so early as to be in time for the first train.

I got up so early that I was in time for the first train.

② 结果（Result）

（1）I awoke to find my suitcase gone.（= I awoke and found that my suitcase had gone.）

（2）He rose to his feet again，only to fall as before.

③ 原因（Cause）

在表喜怒哀乐等感情的字眼之后接不定词时，大都是表示原因的。

（1）I am glad to hear of your success.

（2）I was surprised to see such a curious sight.

④ 理由（Reason）

（1）He must be crazy to talk like that.

（2）What a careless person to forget such an important matter.

⑤ 条件（Condition）

I should be very happy to be of any assistance to you in any way. = I should be very happy if I were to be of any assistance to you in any way.

⑥ 程度（Degree）

（1）He is old enough to go to school.

（2）She is too young to marry.

〔注〕上面①至⑤主要是拿不定词来修饰动词或形容词的，⑥便是拿来修饰副词的。

（d）独立的不定词（Absolute Infinitive）

与句中其他的词毫无语法的关系，完全处于独立地位，用来修饰全句的，就叫作独立的不定词。

（1）To tell the truth，I do not like him.

（2）He is，so to speak，a book-worm.

（3）To be frank with you，you are a man of weak will.

（4）To do him justice，he is not without some merits.

（5）He fell nearly 100 feet；but，strange to say，the fall did not kill him.

（6）To make the matters worse，thick sleet was driving across the sea.

（7）He knows German and French，not to mention English.

3.“不定词的时态”：

不定词的 Tense 共有 Simple Infinitive 和 Perfect Infinitive 两种。

| Active | Passive
| Indefinite | Progressive
Simple | to do | to be doing | to be done
Perfect | to have done | to have been doing | to have been done

（a）Simple Infinitives

不定词用于 seem、appear、be said、be thought 等动词之后时，表示其动作是和其动词同时的，即动词为 Present 的话，其不定词也是 Present，如：

（1）He seems to be rich.（= It seems that he is rich.）

（2）He seemed to be rich.（= It seemed that he was rich.）

（3）He seemed to be studying hard.（= It seemed that he was studying hard.）

又如在 wish、hope、intend、expect、promise 等含有将来之意的动词之后用的不定词，也具有将来的意思，如：

（1）He promises to work hard.（= He says he will work hard.）

（2）I intend to do it.（= I think I will do it.）

（3）I expect him to succeed.（= I think he will succeed.）

（b）Perfect Infinitives

在 seem、appear、be thought 等动词之后，接用完成不定词的时候，就表示是这些动词的时态以前发生的事，或是到那时为止已完成、或经验过、或继续了的动作。

（1）He seems to have been idle.（= It seems that he was 〔or has been 〕idle.）

（2）He seemed to have been idle.（= It seemed that he had been idle.）

比较: | He seemed to be rich.（= It seemed that he was rich.） He seems to have been rich.（= It seems that he was rich.）

在 wish、hope、intend、expect 等的 Past 之后，接用完成不定词时，就表示那希望未成事实。

He expected to come.（实际来了没有不明）

He expected to have come.（实际未能来）

4. for + Object + Infinitive

不定词虽无语法上的主语，却有意味上的主语，如：

I expect to succeed.（= I think I shall succeed.）

I expect him to succeed.（= I think he will succeed.）

在第一句中不定词的意味上的主语，是和全句的主语同一的，所以不写出，但在第二句中不定词的意味上的主语，就不是和全句的主语同一的，而是动词 expect 之宾语的 him，所以这个宾语的 him，就成了不定词的意味上的主语了。在及物动词的场合，就可直接把那不定词意味上的主语作为全句的动词的宾语，但在不及物动词时，就常用 for + object + Infinitive 的形式，如：

（1）For him to fail to come would be fatal to our plan.（名词的用法）

（2）It was an easy thing for Lord Byron to be a great poet.（名词的用法）

（3）She held the baby up for them to see.（副词的用法）

（4）It is time for us to be up and doing.（形容词的用法）

5. 不定词的 to 的记号，有时可以略去。用在动词 see、hear、feel、find、make、let、have、observe、watch、notice、please 等等之后，便是如此，如：

（1）I never saw any one cry for joy before.

（2）I have never heard her sing.

（3）I feel the cold air strike against my face.

（4）I made him come and sit beside me.

（5）I will have him come at once.

（6）I let him go back to his own house.

（7）Please have a seat.

〔注〕这些动词如果改为 Passive 时，to 便不能省略。

I saw the dog run.（Active）

The dog was seen to run.（Passive）

6. 在 than 后的不定词：

普通在主句中的不定词省略了 to 的话，在 man 后从句中的不定词也要将 to 省略，反之亦然，不过例外很多，尤其是前后两个不定词意义相反，成为对照的时候，例如：

（1）It is better to whistle than whine；

It is better to laugh than to cry；

For though it be cloudy，the sun will soon shine

In the blue，beautiful sky.

（2）I can do no otherwise than laugh.

7. 不定词略去 to 的惯用句：

（1）I could not but feel sorry for what you had said.

（2）You had better not work after you have tired yourself.

（3）It’s nearly one，and we had best get a few hours’ sleep.

（4）I had rather be a doorkeeper in the house of Lord，than dwell in the tents of wickedness.

（5）I would rather walk than run.

（6）He does nothing but study.

8. 不定词不略去 to 的惯用句：

（1）All you have to do is to try hard.（= All you must do）

（2）In order to know a man，you have only to travel with him for a week.

（3）We are to meet again on Sunday evening.（= It is fixed that we shall meet again...）

（4）Not a star was to be seen in the sky.（= could be seen）

（5）Many hardships are to be endured.（= must be endured）

（6）I am going to tell you about that person.

（7）I am about to start on a trip to Europe.

（二）分词

1. 分词有现在分词（Present Participle）和过去分词（Past Participle）两种，都是作为形容词用的。

| Active | Passive
Present | doing | being done
Past | ——— | done
Perfect | having done | having been done

2. 形容词与分词的异同。

作为名词的修饰语，紧接在其前或后的附加的用法，又作为主语的补语或宾语的补语时的叙述的用法，二者是完全相同的。

（1）There are a lot of beautiful flowers in it.（Adjective）

（2）In some parts of the country，there is not much flowing water.（Participle）

但分词是兼有“动词 + 形容词”的作用，所以具有动词的种种特色，可以加用宾语、补语或副词，又具有 Tense 和 Voice。它虽无语法上的主语，却有意味上的主语，形容词便不能如此。这便是分词和形容词不同的地方。

（1）This is a chart showing the results of the examination in English.（下接宾语的）

（2）The weather being fine，the party was held in the garden.（下接补语的）

（3）Walking rapidly，she reached the gates of the Hall.（下接副词的）

（4）I have received a letter written in English.（下接副词短语的）

（5）Being written in an easy style，the book was adapted for beginners.（被动语态）

（6）Having been there once before，I had no difficulty in finding his house.（完成时分词）

（7）I am sorry to have kept you waiting so long.（Sense-Subject）

（8）This is the camera given me by my uncle.（Sense-Subject）

3. 分词的用法：

（a）现在分词是用作 Progressive Form 的，而过去分词则是用作 Passive Voice 和 Perfect Tense 的。

（b）分词用作形容词的场合，现在分词含有 Active，过去分词含有 Passive 之意。

（1）Men living in town do not know rural pleasure.（= Men who live in town...）（Active）

（2）This is a house built some hundred years ago.（= This is a house which was built some...）（Passive）

（3）Rolling stones gather no moss.（Active）

（4）There were some distinguished men among the guests.（Passive）

〔注〕不及物动词的过去分词用作名词的修饰语法时，已无“被动”之意，仅作“已经”解释而已，如：sunken rocks，fallen trees，withered flowers。

（c）用以缩短副词从句：

（1）Time（时间）

Walking along the street，he met an old friend.（= When he was walking along the street，...）

（2）Cause or Reason（原因或理由）

Living so remote from town，I rarely have visitors.（= As I live so remote from town...）

（3）Condition（条件）

Turning to the right，you will find the house you want.（= If you turn to the right，...）

（4）Concession（让步）

Admitting what you say，I still think you made a mistake.（= Though I admit what you say，...）

（5）Connection（连续）

The flames rose higher and higher，throwing their light far and wide.（= The flames rose higher and higher，and threw their light...）

（6）The boy，having been praised，worked the harder.（= The boy，as he had been praised，worked the harder.）

以上所举各例，都是副词从句的 Subject 和分词从句的 Subject 为同一的场合，才可以这样换用的。又主句的主语为名词时，用分词开始的短语，置于主语的前后都可以，但主语如为代词时，就只能置于主语之前，不能置于主语之后。例如：

Hearing a footstep outside，the burglar at once ran away. 或 The burglar，hearing a footstep outside，at once ran away.（主语的名词）

Having finished my home task of algebra，I went out for a walk.（主语的代词）

〔注意〕第二例不能说成 I，having finished...，went out for a walk. 因为主语是代词。

又两个分句如果主语不同的话，改成分词后仍须保留其主语，以构成独立结构（Absolute Construction）。因为独立分词（Absolute Participle）虽无语法上的主语，却有意味上的主语，即 Sense-Subject，它和主句的主语不是同一的，所以不能共用而将此省略，例如 When the sun had set，we started for home. 一句，其副词从句中的主语为 the sun，其主句中的主语为 we，二者并非同一，若改为独立构造时，两个主语都得保存，即 The sun having set，we started for home. 兹再举一个 Sense-Subject 的例如下：

The teacher absenting himself，there was no school.（= As the teacher absented himself，there was no school.）

另外还有一种略去 Sense-Subject 的独立分词的例：

（1）Strictly speaking，this is not correct.（= If we speak strictly，this is，...）

（2）Talking of steamers，how many have we in our country？（= Now that we are talking of steamers，how many...）

（3）Assuming that he had some excuse，he still acted harshly.（= Though we assume that he...）

（4）Judging from his accent，he seems to be a man from Kwangtung.（= If we judge from his accent...）

分词可以表示现在也可表示过去，全依后面主句的动词时态而定：

Living（= As I live）so remote from town，I rarely have visitors.

Living（= As I lived）so remote from town，I rarely had visitors.

Having lived（= As he has lived）abroad，he is proficient in English.

Having lived（= As he had lived）abroad，he was proficient in English.

（d）分词用于补语的场合：

1. 主语的补语（Subjective Complement）

a. Present Participle：

（1）He went begging from door to door.

（2）She stood gazing at the scene.

b. Past Participle：

（1）He died loved by all.

（2）Soon it became known to the villagers.

2. 宾语的补语（Objective Complement）

a. Present Participle：

（1）He kept me waiting.

（2）I found my friend sleeping on a rock.

b. Past Participle：

（1）She wept to see him killed.

（2）I had my shoes stolen.

（e）关于分词的特别用法：

1. have... Past Participle

（1）I had my purse stolen in the bus last night.

（2）I had my foot severely trodden upon in the car.

（3）He had his arm sprained.

〔注〕这种 Passive 都是无意志的，所以是单纯的“被动”，如果加入意志进去，就变成“使动”了。

2. Get... Past Participle

（1）He has got a new house built.（使动）

（2）He got（= had）his arm broken.（被动）

（3）I must get my work finished by the evening.（做完）

（三）动名词

1. 动名词（Gerund）和现在分词同形，但兼有动词和名词的双重性质所以可代 Noun 用，而分词是兼有动词和形容词的双重性质，所以可代 Adjective 用。

Who is the man reading at the table？（分词）

He spends most of his time in reading.（动名词）

在第一句中作分词用的 reading = that is reading，是 man 的形容词，在第二句中作动名词用的 reading，只是“读书那回事”，而且是介词 in 的宾语。

动名词虽说可代 Noun 用，但它究竟与 Noun 有别。

A. 动名词是有“动词 + 名词”性质的，所以在其后面可接“宾语”、“补语”或“副词”，普通的名词便办不到。

（1）Doing nothing is doing ill.（加宾语）

（2）He is proud of his son being a clever boy.（加补语）

（3）He excused himself for coming late.（加副词）

（4）Excuse me for not having answered your letter at once.（加副词短语）

B. 动名词既有动词的性质，所以它有 Tense 和 Voice，普通的名词便没有。

（1）I am sorry for having broken the glass.（完成时态）

（2）I just missed being run over.（被动语态）

C. 在 Gerund 之外，又还有一种 Verbal Noun，是和 Gerund 同形的，但用法却不同，不仅在其前可加冠词或形容词，其本身上也可加 s 作成复数，但不能如 Gerund 一样伴用宾语、补语或副词。

1. | a. Rising early is good for the health.（Gerund） b. Early rising is good for the health.（Verbal Noun）

2. | a. Writing novels is not an easy task.（Gerund） b. The writing of novels is not an easy task.（Verbal Noun）

在1. 的 a. 句中的 early 是副词，修饰 Gerund 的 rising 的，在 b. 句中的 early 是形容词，修饰 Verbal Noun 的 rising 的，在2. 的 a. 句中的 novels 为 writing 的宾语，所以这个 writing 为 Gerund，在 b.句中的 writing 前加有冠词，又伴有 of novels 的形容词短语，所以是 Verbal Noun。

2. 动名词既能有 Noun 的作用所以它可作主语、宾语及补语用。

（1）Sleeping is necessary to life.（主语）

（2）Seeing is believing.（主语和补语）

（3）I like sleeping in the open air.（动词的宾语）

（4）I am fond of sleeping.（介词的宾语）

比较: | Sleeping is necessary to health.（Gerund） To sleep is necessary to health.（Infinifive） Sleep is necessary to health.（Noun）

由于用的动词不同，后面有的要接动名词，有的要接不定词，有的二者都可以接，如：

（1）I like getting（to got）up early.

（2）I don’t care to go abroad.

（3）Would you mind shutting the window？

（4）I forbid you to smoke.

（5）The law prohibits minors from smoking.

（6）Illness prevented me from attending school.

（7）I could hardly keep from smiling.

（8）I have not quite finished packing yet.

（9）I stopped（= ceased from）smoking.（戒烟）

（10）I stopped（= halted）to smoke.（= in order to smoke. 抽烟）

又 Gerund 可作介词的宾语，而 Infinitive 则不可，如 He has come to Taiwan with the object of seeing（不能说 to see）sights.

3. 动名词虽无明确的 Tense，但从前后的关系可以判断。

（1）I have no doubt of your succeeding.（= I have no doubt that you will succeed.）

（2）I am sure of your being able to solve this question.（= I am sure that you are able to solve this question.）

（3）I am sure of his having said so.（= I am sure that he has said 〔或 said〕 so.）

（4）I was not aware of his being such a rich man.（= I was not aware that he was such a rich man.）

（5）He denied having done it.（= He denied that he had done it.）

比较: | He repents of having been idle.（= He repents that he was 〔或 has been 〕idle.） He repented of having been idle.（= He repented that he had been idle.）

4. 动名词的 Sense-Subject。

（1）I regret having said so.（= I regret I said〔have said〕so.）

（2）I regret his having said so.（= I regret that he said 〔has said〕so.）

用动名词来缩短的分句中，主语如系有生物时，就要加所有格的 s，无生物时便不要加 s，如

（1）His father’s being rich is known to all.（= That his father is rich is known to all.）

（2）I am glad of examination being over.（= I am glad that the examination is over.）

5. 关于动名词的主要成语。

（1）There is no going out in such dirty weather.（= It is impossible to go out in...）

（2）On waking up，he saw that another caravan had arrived.

（3）It is no use complaining.（= It is of no use to complain.）

（4）Let us go boating together this afternoon.

（5）The place is worth visiting.

（6）It is worth your while to visit the place.

（7）He adorned the walls with pictures of his painting.（= He adorned the walls with pictures painted by himself.）

（8）I came near being drowned.（= I was nearly drowned.）

（9）I felt like crying.（= I felt inclined to cry.）

（26）being 的用法

莎士比亚的名句：“To be，or not to be，that is the question. ”初学者对于这个 be 的意思，很难捉摸。其实这并不是晦涩难于理解的。原因只在我们把它的基本意义忽视了。Be 的原义是“存在”，这点应该牢记。Be 加上-ing 之后，这基本意义，来得更加显明。许多学生说他们一直读到大学，对于 being 的意义和用法，还是弄不清楚，也只是因为忽略了这基本意义的缘故。进行时中用 being，表示“正在”，不也是这意义的应用吗？

现在我想拿 being 这个字做个代表，来看看这-ing 形式的字，到底有些什么用法。我们只消把这个 being 的各种用法完全弄明白，对于其他一切动词加-ing 的用法，也就再不会有什么疑问了。

Being 的用法一共可以分成五个项目，我们不妨举例说明。

（1）作为名词（Verbal Noun）：

After all，man is a selfish being.（人毕竟是自私的。）

This is some strange being.（这是一个怪物。）

〔注〕这个 being 的用法完全与名词无异，前面可以加冠词，本身又可以加-s 做成复数，如 human beings。在下二项中，则 being 不能加 -s 做成复数。

（2）作为被动的动名词（Passive Gerund）：

I don’t mind being laughed at.（我不在乎别人笑骂。）

Being made a fool of is no proof that one is a fool.（被人愚弄的，并不见得就是愚人。）

〔注〕在这用法中可注意的，就是在 being 这个名词之后，一定接上一个过去分词，以构成被动的成分。

（3）作为完全的动名词（Perfect Gerund）：

She is proud of being the mother of eight children.（她很骄傲她是八个孩子的母亲。）

He knew that being punctual meant being on the point of time.（他知道准时到达就是守时。）

〔注〕这个 being 虽然也是用作名词，但后面并不接有过去分词，所以其中不包含被动性。

（4）作为形容词（Qualificative Adjective）：

He serves on trial for the time being.（他暂时是试用性质。）

His clothing being in shreds，he presented a sorry sight.（他衣衫褴褛，现出一副可怜相。）

〔注〕这个 being 既非名词，也非动词，而是形容词，第一例句形容“时间”，第二例句形容“衣服”。

（5）作为现在分词（Present Participle）：

He was being held prisoner in the Legation.（他正被囚禁在公使馆里。）

The work is being done.（这工作正在进行。）

〔注〕这个 being 之后虽然也是接有过去分词，但 being 是动词的一部分，表示进行时。

（27）形容词用法

形容词是用来形容名词的字眼，它有两种用法，一是置于名词之前的“附加的用法”，一是作为动词补语的“叙述的用法”。

He is the greatest conquerer who has conquered himself.

曾克服了自己的人是最伟大的克服者。（附加的用法）

Happy is the man who sees his folly in his youth.

在青年时代便已看出自己的愚行的人是幸福的。（叙述的用法）

形容词既有各种各样，同置于名词之前，谁先谁后，颇费斟酌，兹就通常的用法，定出顺序如下。

① 指示形容词或冠词，② 数量，③ 性质，④ 大小，⑤ 新旧，⑥ 形状，⑦ 颜色，⑧ 材料。

There are many ② big ④ white ⑦ birds on the pond.

A ① pickpocket robbed me of my ① new ⑤ gold ⑧ watch.

The ① lion is a ① wild ③ animal.

I bought an ① old ⑤ square ⑥ table at that ① store.

如果同一类的形容词用了好几个的话，就把音节少的词置于前面，或是看怎样念来顺口地排列。用二词时中加 and，三词以上用逗号隔开，只在最后一个形容词前才加用 and，有时不加 and 也可以。

The people of Switzerland were not always free and happy.

How good it was，in the hot summer days，to drink the clear，cold，sparkling water from the well！

形容词通常是置于名词之前，但在下列四种情形时，则又置于名词之后：

① 形容短语： | a basket full of fruit a wall ten feet high a child three years old

② thing 的复合词： | There is something noble about the man. Nothing great is easy. Tell me anything interesting.

③ 惯用的成语： | heir apparent poet laureate from time immemorial

④ 重叠使用形容词时： | A man poor but content is to be envied. I never heard a tale，so sad，so tender and so true.

形容词可分为性质形容词（Qualifying Adjective）、数量形容词（Quantitative Adjective）和代名形容词（Pronominal Adjective）三种。如 wise、idle、blue、old、gold、wooden、European 等为性质形容词，many、much、few、little、some、all、first、second 等，为数量形容词，而 this、that、such、the、same、some、any、each、every、both、what、which、my、your 等，则为代名形容词。

“性质形容词”是表示性质或状态的，它又可分为：

1. 固有形容词（Proper Adjective）。

这是由固有名词做成的，首字必须大写，如 The Chinese flag、the English language、the French people。但地名可不变形即作形容词用，如 a London paper、a Taipei man、China tea。

2. 物质形容词（Material Adjective）。

这是由物质名词做成的，有时用原形，有时加 -en。如 a gold watch、a silver medal、an iron will、a brick building 及 the golden age、a golden opportunity、a wooden house、woolen goods、earthen ware 等等。

3. 动词形容词（Verbal Adjective）。

这是由动词做成的，可分现在分词和过去分词两种。

a. 现在分词（Present Participle）：

Close to the meadows is a shining river.

The rising sun，a flying bird，an interesting book，a puzzling question，a rolling stone.

b. 过去分词（Past Participle）

The king carried the wounded man into the hut.

A broken watch、a learned man、lost time、sunken eyes、withered flowers.

4. 副词也可用作形容词，如 an up -train、a down train、a through train、the house here、the people there、the above address、the then premier。

“数量形容词”分不定数量（Indefinite）形容词及数词（Numeral）两种。不定数的形容词有 many、few、a few、some、all 等，不定量的形容词有 much、little、a little、some、all 等。数词则又分基数（Cardinal），如 one、two、three、four；序数（Ordinal），如 first、second、third；及倍数（Multiplicative），如 half、double、twice。

A. 不定数量形容词的用法。

① many 和 much：many 是表“数”的，与复数普通名词连用，而 much 是表“量”的，与物质名词或抽象名词连用，例如：

Many men are poor.（复数普通名词）

Much rain has fallen.（物质名词）

He has much knowledge of English.（抽象名词）

又有 many a 的说法，是加强语气的，many a man（is）= many men（are）。例如 Many a father has learned to his sorrow，what it is to have a boy idle.（许多父亲深知养子不教结果可悲。）

此外在 many 或 much 之前，又可加 as 或 so，即 as many 为“同数的”，as much 为“同量的”，so many 及 so much 用于不定的数量，例如：

I found six mistakes in as many lines.

When he was sentenced to death，he seemed as calm as if he had expected as much.

Apples are sold at so many for a dollar.

This article is sold at so much a catty.

但 so many 用于 as、like 之后时，与 as many（同数的）同义，如 The boys climbed the trees like so many monkeys.

② few 和 a few；little 和 a little：few、a few 是表“不定数”的，通常接复数普通名词，而 little、a little 则是表“不定量”的，通常接物质名词或抽象名词。在 few 或 little 之前加用 a 时，意为“稍有”，不加 a 时意为“几无”，例如：

There are few grammatical mistakes in your composition.（你的作文“差不多没有”语法上的错误。）

I have little money left.（存款所余无几）。

Not a few boats have been sunk by the storm.（暴风沉船“不少”。）

He has made not a little money on account of the business activity.（因为生意兴隆他赚钱“不少”。）

Please stay with us a few days more.（请跟我们多住几天。）

There is a little hope in the enterprise.（那事业有一点儿希望。）

③ several：三四个乃至五六个的意思，比 a few 要多数些。

They have collected several kinds of tropical trees，I hear.（听说他们搜集好几种热带植物。）

④some、any、no、all 这些不定数量形容词的用法，容在代名形容词的用法中说明。

B. 数词的用法。

① 基数：关于基数应注意事项，分述如下：

a. 要注意拼写的变化，如“四”及“十四”都有 u（four、fourteen），但“四十”便无 u（forty）。

b. 在二十以上十位数上加一位数时，先加短划（-），再加 one、two、three 等词。

c. 在 hundred 后再接数字时，必须加用 and（在 thousand 后如无 hundred 时同样），如

200——two hundred

250——two hundred and fifty

2245——two thousand two hundred and forty-five

2060——two thousand and sixty

234,567,898——two hundred and thirty-four million，five hundred and sixty-seven thousand，eight hundred and ninety-eight

d. 年号有三种读法，但以第一种为最普遍。

1955 | 1. Nineteen fifty-five 2. Nineteen hundred and fifty-five 3. One thousand nine hundred and fifty-five

e. 在 hundred、thousand 之前，即便有 two，three 等多数的数字，也不说 two hundreds 或 three thousands，只有在说几百、几千的不定数时才加 s，如 hundreds of people（好几百人）、thousands of students（好几千学生）、hundreds of thousands（几十万）等。

f. million 之前加有一定的数字，而其后接有名词时，仍不要加 s，只有在后面不接名词时才用复数。

three million men

three millions of men

g. 基数作名词用时也可以加 s，例如：

There are three twos in six.

The boys went out by twos.

She married while still in her teens.

He is a young officer in his twenties.

② 序数：

a. 应注意拼写及发音。

first（1st），second（2nd），third（3rd），fourth（4th），fifth（5th），sixth（6th），seventh（7th），eighth（8th），ninth（9th），tenth（10th），eleventh（11th），twelfth（12th），twentieth（20th），twenty-first（21st）.

eighth 的发音为〔eitθ〕，twentieth 的发音为〔twentiiθ〕。写略字时，应注意 st，nd，rd，th 的分别，如

11th，12th，13th，14th

21st，22nd，23rd，24th

31st，32nd，33rd，34th

b. 在序数前必得加定冠词 the，但如所加者为不定词 a 时，则不是表顺序，而是表 another 之意。

This is the first time I have heard of it.

One was deaf，another was blind，and a third was lame.

c. 有时可将基数代序数用。

No. 1（Number one）= The first

Book Two = The Second Book

World War Ⅱ = The Second World War

George V = George the Fifth

下列各点，附记于此，以资参考。

·April 12th，读时应读 April the twelfth。

·公元说基数，年号说序数，如1955 = nineteen fifty-five；“中华民国”三十四年 = the thirty-fourth year of the Republic of China。

·年龄有各种说法，如 I am twenty year old；I am twenty years of age；I am in my twentieth year。

·货币等的读法，如＄2.35 = two dollars thirty-five cents；£ 2 5s 2d = two pounds，five shillings and two pence；90° = ninety degrees；4. 30 p. m. train = four thirty p m train；Telephone No. 1203 = one two naught three。

·分数是分子用基数，分母用序数，当分子在 two 以上时，分母的序数要再加 s，如

⅓ = a third 或 one third

⅔ = two thirds

2 ⅔ = two and two thirds

¼ = a quarter

¾ = three quarters

·小数的读法：28.372 = twenty eight | decimal point | three seven two

·加减乘除的说法：

Two and（plus）three is（或 are）five.

Three from（minus）five is two.

Three times four is（或 are）twelve.

Fifteen divided by three equals five.

d. first 作副词用，有下列各种说法：

The king arrived first，and next came his retinue.

He first went to Paris，and then to London.

I found English difficult at first，but I liked it from the first.

He was only ten years of age when he went to America for the first time.

e. 基数上加用 first 或 last 时。

Please look over the first two chapters.（指同一本书中头两章。）

Compare the two first chapters.（两本不同的书中第一章。）

Examination will be held on the last two days of this month.（最后两天。）

③ 倍数：

a. double 有“二重”或“二倍”之意，单复名词前皆可用。

He has the double capacity of preacher and teacher.（二重资格）

On Sunday，we have to pay double the usual fare.（二倍票价）

b. half 可用在冠词之前或后，如 half a mile；half an hour；two hours and a half；She repaid him half the total sum。

c. 除 once（= one time），twice（= two times），及间或用 thrice（= three times）外，三倍以上通常都说 three times，four times 等。

The oysters in which pearls are found are twice the size of those used for food.

Your estate is twice as large as mine. Your estate is as large again as mine. | （大两倍）

This is half as large as that.（一半大）

This is half as much again as that.（一倍半）

This is twice and a half as heavy as that.（二倍半）

They have three times as many ships as we have.（多三倍）

The earth is forty-nine times as large as the moon.（大四十九倍）

〔注意〕与倍数连用的比较字为 as...as，而不是 more 或 -er...than，我们若说“China is twenty times larger than Japan. ”就错了，应改为“China is twenty times as large as Japan. ”才对。

“代名形容词”是具有代词的性质的，可分下列四种：

1. Possessive（所有）

2. Demonstrative（指示）

3. Interrogative（疑问）

4. Relative（关系）

①所有代名形容词。

This is my dictionary.

That is your dictionary.

Those are their books.

②指示代名形容词。

a. such：在单数普通名词前用 such a 或 such an，但在复数普通名词或在抽象名词前，就单用 such，如：

We had never witnessed such an interesting game.（单普）

There are many such men.（复普）

I have never heard such music in my life.（抽象）

b. the same：加强语气时还可说 the very same。

These are all（of）the same prices.

The girl was born on the very same day that he returned.

c. some：表不定数时接复数普通名词，表量时接物质名词。有时 some 又可接抽象名词用。

The custom is still observed in some places.（复普）

Give me some water.（物质）

This operation requires some skill.（抽象）

用于单数普通名词前，some 表不定之意，如 He is suffering from some disease.（他害着什么病。）Some student must have written it.（一定是那个学生写的。）I will tell you some day next week.（下星期哪一天我告诉你。）

此外，some 还有下面几种用法：

Some fish can fly.（有的鱼能飞。）

He owes me some 200 dollars.（他欠我二百元光景。）

You like some tea？（你要点茶吗？）

d. any：some 是用于肯定句的；否定句、疑问句及条件句就用 any，对于数或量皆可。

Have you any letters or telegrams for me？（疑问句）

Yes，we have some letters.（肯定句）

No，we have not any（= no）telegrams.（否定句）

If any friends should call，I would see them.（条件句）

如果把 any 用于肯定的叙述句中，即表示“无论何人、何处、何事”之意，单复数都可用。

Any man could do that.

You may take any books that you like best.

e. some 和 certain：

①He is reading some novel.

②He is reading a certain novel.

第一句意为他在读小说，什么小说不明；第二句的意思则为，说话的人是知道他在读的是什么小说的，不过没有说出的必要，或是不欲说出时，便只说“某某小说”。

f. any 和 either：either 为二者之一，any 为三者以上的人或物中间的一个。

Any pen will do.（任何一支笔都行。）

Either pen will do.（两支笔中哪支都行。）

这个 either 除二者之一（one of two）的意思外，还有两个（each of two）的意思，如 There are trees on either side（= both sides）of the river. 又作“也”解时肯定句用 too，否定句用 either，如

I have seen him too.

I have not seen him either.

g. any 和 every：any 普通与表示“动作”的动词连用，多指“未来”而言；every 接单数名词，比 all 的意思更强，与表示状态的动词连用，多指“现在”及“过去”而言。every 不可作代词用。

Any boy can solve such an easy problem.（谁都可以）

Every man has his weak side.（人人都有弱点。）

又 not any 是三个以上“全部否定”，与 no 或 none 同义，not every 是“部分否定”，与 very few 或 some 同义。

I do not want any money.（= I want no money.）（完全不要）

Every man can not be a poet.（= Very few can be poets.）（未必人人能成诗人。）

误：He can teach everything.（all at a time）

正：He can teach anything.（one at a time）

误：Anyone can not understand him.

正：No one can understand him.

h. every 和 each：every 是“全部都”之意，比 all 或 each 的意义皆强；each 是“各个”之意。

Every dog has its day.（所有的狗）

Each country has its own customs.（各国）

关于 every 的常用词句，尚有 every day（每天），every other day（隔日），every three days（三天一次），every seven days 或 every seventh day（每隔七日），every now and then（时常）。

i. another：

Have another cup of coffee.（one more）

That is quite another matter.（different）

To know is one thing，to teach is another.

One man’s meat is another man’s poison.

j. every 和 all：all 是接复数普通名词的，冠词或代词要置于与名词之间；every 是接单数普通名词的，比 all 的意思更强。

All the sailors got on board the ship.

Every sailor has a knife.

All of us are happy.

We are all happy.

Every one of us is happy.

k. all 和 both：all 是用于三者以上，both 是用于二者或双方的。all 后接复数普通名词、物质名词或抽象名词时，表数量的整体。后接单数普通名词或固有名词时，表 whole 之意。

All boys like play.（比说 Boys like play 意强）（复普）

He has run through all his money.（物质）

Pines are green all the year round.（单普）

Keelung is the best sea-port in all Taiwan.（单固）

Both his parents are dead.

All the students did not go.（不是全体都去）

No student went.（全都未去）

Both his parents are not living.（不是双方都在）

Neither of his parents is living.（双方都不在）

又 not all 为“部分否定”，如果是全部否定就用 not any，又 not both 是“部分否定”，即 one 之意，双方都否定时则用 not either。

Not all good men will prosper，nor will all bad men fail.（善人未必皆繁昌，恶人未必皆败亡。）

Both his brothers are not diligent.（他两兄弟并非都用功。）（即有一个不用功）

关于 all 的常用字句，尚有：

If you do it at all，do it well.（条件句）（要做就好好地做。）

Are you going to do it at all？（疑问句）（你到底要不要做？）

Do not do it at all.（否定句）（一点也不要去做。）

For all（或 With all）his wealth，he is not a happy man.（他虽富而不幸福。）

He was all but drowned.（他几乎溺死。）

After all，it does not matter to us whether we win or not.（毕竟，我们胜败都无关系。）

③疑问代名形容词。

What color is her new dress？

Which way shall we take？

④关系代名形容词。

What money（= all the money that）we had with us barely sufficed for our railway fares.

He spoke to me in German，which language I do not understand.

（28）比较的法则

形容词的比较（Comparison），分原级、比较级和最高级三种。原级是用形容词本来的写法，比较级是单音节及少数常用的二音节词加 -er，或三音节以上的词在词前加 more，最高级是单音节及少数常用的二音节词加 -est，或三音节以上的词在词前加 most，但这里所谓二音节词，是说原来的词，前面加的接前缀是不计算在内的。又单辅音前面的元音如读短音时，在加 -er 或 -est 之前，应将其辅音重复一下。

1. 比较级与最高级的构成法。

a. 单音节词：

rich | richer | richest
big | bigger | biggest

b. 二音节词：

-y： | happy | happier | happiest
-ly： | holy | holier | holiest
-le： | noble | nobler | noblest
-er： | clever | cleverer | cleverest
-ow： | narrow | narrower | narrowest

其他如 polite、profound、secure、precise、concise、abrupt、sincere、severe、common、cruel、wicked、pleasant、quiet、handsome 等等。

c. 加接前缀的二音节词：

ignoble | ignobler | ignoblest
unpleasant | unpleasanter | unpleasantest
incomplete | incompleter | incompletest

d. 多音节词：

beautiful | more beautiful | most beautiful
comfortable | more comfortable | most comfortable

凡词尾有 ful、less、able、ive、ing 的二音节词或多音节词，如 useful、famous、careless、interesting 等，都属于此类。

e. 不规则变化：

good well | better | best
ill（evil） bad | worse | worst
much many | more | most
little | less | least
old | older elder | oldest eldest
late | later latter | latest last
far | farther further | farthest furthest

2. 比较级的用法。

a. 用于二人或二物的比较，通常加用 than。

（1）A good friend is better than a near relation.

（2）His nose is much wider than that of a dog，but he has smaller ears than some dogs.

上举的例（1）是在比较级后没有名词的，但例（2）便是有 ear 一个名词，这个名词是复数，故不用冠词，如系单数，在比较级的形容词前，就要冠以 a 或 an，如在比较级之后用有 of the two 的字眼，则前面要用 the，如：

（1）Henry is smaller than Frank.

（2）Henry is a smaller boy than Frank.

（3）Henry is the smaller boy of the two.

比较: | Which do you think the better，spring or autumn？ Which do you think better，spring or autumn？

第一句的 better 为形容词，后略去一个名词（season）；第二句的 better 为副词。

又 He is three years younger than I. =

He is younger than I by three years.

b. 普通的比较都是说“优于”或“多于”的，如果是“劣于”或“少于”时，就不问音节的多少，都是用 less（least）。

（1）Chen is less clever than Wang.

（2）Lee is the least clever of the three.

不过一般说话不大喜欢用这种向下的比较，所以与其说“His elder sister is less beautiful than his younger sister.”不如说“His elder sister is not so beautiful as his younger sister. ”或是说“His younger sister is more beautiful than his elder sister. ”。

c. 绝对比较级。

（1）The greater part of my apple apple trees trees have no fruit this year.

（2）These toys are meant for older children.

（3）The old linen-weaver in the neighboring parish of Tarley being dead，his handicraft made him a highly welcome settler to the richer housewives of the district，and even to the more provident cottagers，who had their little stock of yarn at the year’s end.——Eliot，Silas Marner

d. 有一种来自拉丁文的比较，如 superior、inferior、prior、senior、junior 等；后面不接 than，而要接 to，例如：

（1）This book is superior to（= better than）the other in style.

（2）This article is inferior to（= worse than）the sample.

注意：动词 prefer 也属于这一类，后要接 to。

3. 最高级的用法。

a. 在最高级的形容词上，要加 the 的：

（1）Still waters are the deepest.

（2）The elephant is the largest land animal.

（3）China is the greatest of（or among）these powers.

（4）China is the greatest power among them.

注意：在最高级之后接有名词时，通例不用 of，而用 among（后接复数名词）或 in（后接单数名词），如 He is the biggest boy in his class. 或 He is the biggest boy among them.

在最高级的前面用有 one of 或 among 时，并非专指某人，而是泛说的，不过此种情形最高级的名词一定是复数的，如

（1）He is | one of among | the tallest boys in his class.

（2）Shanghai is among the greatest cities in the world.

b. 在最高级的形容词上，不要加 the 的：

（1）Most people are aware of the fact.

（2）Who has most books？

（3）Who made fewest mistakes？

（4）The island is loveliest at night.

（5）He is my greatest friend.

（6）O dearest one，when shall we see you again？

（7）With earliest day I was up.——Brontê，Jane Eyre

（8）“Is it so，Emily？” he asked，with deepest tenderness.—Gissing，Life’s Morning

注意：最高级有时可加一个 even，如 By the law of nature the stream will run down，and the strongest man cannot stop it. = ...and even the strongest men...

比较: | Most learned men 大多数的学者 the most learned man 最有学问的人 a most learned man 一个很有学问的人

比较: | Yours is the best of all.（形容词的最高级） I like it best of all.（副词的最高级） He does his best.（名词的最高级）

c. 绝对最高级。

（1）The dog would lie at his feet，looking up into his face，following with keenest interest each fleeting expression.——London，Call of the Wild

（2）I should be ashamed the longest day I lived.——Gissing，The House of Cobwebs

（3）She bursts into tears，declaring herself the wretchedest，the most deceived，the worst-used of women.——Dickens，Our Mutual Friend

（4）The Germans are a most thorough and painstaking people in all their undertakings.

（注）以上这种 Absolute Superlative，并无多数事物相比较的意味，而大致是等于 very + 原级。

d. 最高级作为名词用（绝对最高级的一种）。

（1）Let us do our best（= utmost）.

（2）Malthus calls it the survival of the fittest.

（3）His style is of the clearest.

（4）She was looking her best that day.

（5）The cherry-blossoms are now at their best.

（6）Here was overcrowded England，at its most dismal.——Galsworthy，Silver Spoon

（7）He tried his hardest to persuade them to buy the picture.

（8）After the cold of the night the birds were singing their clearest in the sunshine.——Galsworthy，Captures

（9）He did not run，but he walked his hardest.——Galsworthy，White Monkey

（10）He breathed his last.

其他如 at best、at last、at most、at least、at the latest、in the least、to make the most of、to make the best of、to make the best of a bad bargain、to make the best of one’s way 等等，都属于这一类。

e. 用比较级来表示最高级的意味。

He is more diligent than any other boy in the class. = He is the most diligent boy in the class.

注意：other 一词不可少，如果单说 any boy，则他本人也包括在 any 之内，自己与自己比较，岂不是笑话，所以一定要说 any other boy。这后面的名词可单可复，如果 any 后不用 other，就一定要在那名词后加限制的形容词句，如

（1）The Mississippi is longer than any other river in the world.

（2）The Mississippi is longer than any river in China.

f. 在比较级上加否定词也可表示最高级的意味。

Nothing is more precious than time，yet nothing is less valued. = Time is the most precious，yet it is least valued.

比较:

Iron is the most useful metal.

Iron is the most useful of all metals.

Iron is more useful than any other metal.

Nothing is more useful than iron.

g. 仅有叙述用法（Predicative use）的形容词，是不加 er 或 est 的，而要用 more 或 most，如

He was more fond of her than her sister.

The boy was more aware of the danger than the girls.

h. 在修饰法时要用 er 或 est 的形容词，变成叙述用法时，就多半要用 more 或 most 了，如

（1）He was far more sad than she was.

（2）I shall be most happy to do so.

（3）If I had been less cautious I might have been more wise.——Doyle，Memoirs

（4）He was more clever and cold than they were.

（5）He looked more good than ever.

i. 有时为语调的关系，甚至同时二者并用的也有。

（1）We two grew dearer and yet more dear to each other.——Haggard，She

（2）He was the sternest and most severe of masters.——Dickens，David

（3）The coffins are something narrower and more shallow than they used to be.——Dickens，Oliver Twist

j. 在口语中哪怕是说二者的比较，也常用最高级。

（1）The part was certainly in the best hands of the two.——Austen，Mansfield Park

（2）She expects me to go to her，instead of her coming to me！And yet who’s the busiest？——Bennett，Old Wives’ Tale

k. 再要加强比较级或最高级的意味时，就用 much 或 far 等副词。

（1）Gold is much more valuable than silver.

（2）He is much the best student in the class.

（3）The air is far hotter today than yesterday.

此外又可用 by far the better，by far the best，the very best 等，如

（1）In the village the money-lender is by far the most powerful man.

（2）I did the very best I could.

l. 类似单词及短语用法辨异。

（1）elder，eldest；older，oldest.

His elder brother is two years older than I.

（2）later，latest；latter，last.

This is the latest news.（time）

This is the last boy in the class.（position）

He came later than I expected.

A man and a dog turned up. The latter was a Pekinese.

（3）nearest，next.

This street is the nearest to my house.（空间或距离）

This house is next to mine.（顺序或位置）

（4）farther，farthest；further.

Our school is farther from the city than yours.（距离）

I have something to say further.（更加）

（5）last，next.

He fell ill on Sunday last.

He fell ill last Sunday.

Our athletic meet will be held on Friday next.

Our athletic meet will be held next Friday.

比较: | I went there last Sunday. I went there the last Sunday of last month.

（6）not more than，no more than.

not less than，no less than.

He has not less than ＄1,000.（= ＄1,000 or more）

He has no less than ＄1,000.（= just as much or many as）

He has not more than ＄1,000.（= only about）

He has no more than ＄1,000.（= just）

（7）no more than，not any more than.

一般形式： | A is no more B than C is D. A is not B any more than C is D.

A home without love is no more a home than a body without a soul is a man.

You can not injure such a man any more than you can throw a stone at the sun.

（29）副词的用法

用来修饰动词、形容词或其他副词的，就叫作副词。有时副词也可用来修饰名词、或代词、从句或整个的句子，例如：

He lives comfortably on his pension.（动词）

The weather is very fine today.（形容词）

She does not rise very early.（副词）

Even | a boy he | can carry this small parcel.（名词或代词）

One is really happy only when one is in sound health.（从句）

Unfortunately the thief was not caught.（全句）

副词与形容词有时是同形的，如 first、hard、fast、early、late、well、much、little、high、low、long、wide、right、straight、enough 等，如“He was very tired，because he had been busy since early morning. ”（用作形容词）又“He that would thrive must rise early. ”（用作副词）

有时加上 -ly 与不加 -ly，同为副词，不过意义不同而已。

比较: | hard（勉力）：I study hard all day long. hardly（几不）：I hardly ever see him now.

比较: | high（高）：The waves ran high. highly（非常）：He is highly amused.

比较: | late（迟）：You should not sit up so late. lately（近来）：I have lately been very busy.

比较: | wide（宽）：The fire spread far and wide. widely（大大地）：His opinion differs widely from mine.

1. 副词的种类（Kinds of Adverbs）

① 普通副词（Simple Adverb）

a. 表时间的：before、ago、early、lately、soon、at once、today、yesterday、tomorrow、long ago、

sooner or later 等。

b. 表地点的：here、there、far、near、close by、over there、to and fro、far away 等。

c. 表次数的：once、twice、sometimes、seldom、often 等。

d. 表方式的：well、thus、kindly、bravely、wisely、well of 等。

e. 表分量的：little、more、greatly、enough、every、too、almost、more or less 等。

f. 表肯定的：yes、certainly 等。

g. 表否定的：no、not、never 等。

② 疑问副词（Interrogative Adverb）

a. 表时间的：

When shall we meet again？（何时）

How long has your throat been like this？（好久）

How often do you write to him a month？（几次）

b. 表地点的：

Where do you plan to spend the summer？（何处）

How far is it from here to your house？（距离）

c. 表方式的：

How is your family？（状态）

How is he useful？（如何）

d. 表程度的：

How do you like my new house？（好恶）

How do you like your tea？（浓度）

e. 表理由的：

Why do you ask that question？（何故）

How is it that you are always behind time？（怎样）

f. 表感叹的：

How beautiful she looks today！（美貌）

How it blows！（烈风）

③ 关系副词（Relative Adverb）

关系副词是 Adverb 而兼 Conjunction 的作用的，如 when、where、why 等皆是，用法如下：

a. 表时间的：

The summer holidays were the only part of the year when（in which）he was really happy.

b. 表地点的：

He led us to a joyous land where（in which）waters gushed and fruit trees grew.

c. 表理由的：

The reason why（on account of which）it happened is told in Browning’s poem.

d. 表方式的：

This is the way how he did it.

上面例句中所用的 when、why、where 等关系副词，都可以用 that 来代替，有时甚至可以完全省略。

His father died on the day（when）（that）he was born.（或用 that 代替 when，或全不用）

That is the reason（why）men seek fame and fortune.

又关系副词的先行词（Antecedent），有时颇不寻常，有时全然略去。

a. There are cases when politeness cuts deeper than impertinence.——Gardiner

There are cases，of course，where the clash of liberties seems to defy compromise.——Gardiner，Leaves in the Wind

This is the point where we stuck.

Americans have passed out of the period where they care about petty economies.

b. He asked me（the time）when I had arrived.

This is（the place）where we dwell.

That must be a long way from（the place）where we were.

She returned it to（the place）where it had been before.

A banana-skin was lying，like a bedraggled starfish，in the gutter，just in front of（the place）where they were standing.——Huxley，Antic Hay

关系副词的继续的用法。

We waited for half an hour when（= and then）the storm passed over.

They walked together to the entrance，where（= and there）they stopped.

④ 复合关系副词（Compound Relative Adverb）

在普通关系副词上加 ever 一词时，便成为复合关系副词，如 whenever = at any time when 及 wherever = in or to any place where 等。此种副词有时含有让步的意思（However 只能用于让步句中）。

a. 普通的：

Come whenever（= at any time when）it is convenient to you.

My dog follows me wherever（= to any place where）I go.

b. 让步的：

Whenever（= No matter when）I（may）go，I find him writing something.

Wherever（= No matter where）you（may）go，you will find the same thing.

However（= No matter how）careful you may be，accidents will happen.

2. 副词的比较（Comparison of Adverbs）

副词的比较（Comparison），其构成方式大概与形容词相仿，不过 no sooner than 和 more than 的用法，以及 the + Comparative 的用法，值得注意。

① 单音节及少数二音节的副词，比较级加 -er，最高级加 -est:

soon，sooner，soonest

fast，faster，fastest

near，nearer，nearest

late，later，latest

often，oftener，oftenest

② 字尾为 -ly 的副词，就用 more，most（less，least）来作成比较：

quickly，more quickly，most quickly

gently，less gently，least gently

但 early 一字则变成 earlier、earliest。

③ 不规则的比较：

well，better，best

ill（badly），worse，worst

much，more，most

little，less，least

far，farther，farthest

（注意）形容词的最高级要加 the，副词的最高级不加 the，但口语中也常加 the。

He is the best man alive.（形容词）

Take any book that you like best.（副词）

I like spring the best.（副词口语）

④ no + Comparative + than：

No sooner had he done so than he uttered a cry of disappointment.

The whale is no more a fish than a horse is.

The hen loves her chickens no less than our mother loves us.

An inattention to our persons implies a disrespect to others，and may often be traced no less to a want of good nature than of good sense.

⑤ 用于形容词、动词、名词等前的 more than:

You have already more than repaid me.——Stevenson，New Arabian Nights

Rose’s cheeks were more than touched by the sun.——Gissing，House of Cobwebs

Her plain features expressed a simplicity and gentleness which more than compensated for the lack of conventional grace in her manners.——Ibid.

I prayed to heaven in my heart that my boy，my more than son，might live.——Haggard，She

⑥the + Comparative（此 the = in that or what degree，原非冠词，而系关系副词的一种）：

a. the + 比较级（因而更加）

I love him all the better for his faults.

He worked the harder，because he had hopes of success.

The danger makes the sport only the pleasanter.——Thackeray，Vanity Fair

Learning makes a man wise，but a fool is made all the more a fool by it.

b. the + 比较级...the + 比较级（愈……愈）

The sooner，the better.

The more men have，the more they desire.

The older a man gets，the less exercise he takes.

3. 副词的位置（Position of Adverbs）

一般的原则是置于最接近其所修饰的词旁，约可分为五种，即被修饰词的紧前，被修饰词的紧后，主语与谓语的中间，语句的头上，语句的末尾。

a. 修饰形容词或别的副词时，置于该词之前：

We live in a very beautiful world.

You are doing your lessons very well.

但 enough 一个副词，便永远要置于形容词、副词或动词之后的，如：

The book is easy enough for you to read.

He spoke highly enough of what you had done.

I have slept enough.

b. 修饰动词时，有时在前，有时在后：

（i）修饰不及物动词时，副词置于动词之后：

He landed safely at the foot of the precipice，and looked anxiously around in search of Pierre.

You acted foolishly.

（注意）但 always、never、often、sometimes、seldom、generally、rarely 等副词，就要置于动词之前：

He always laughed at a good joke.

Never speak ill of others.

Even Homer sometimes nods.

（ii）修饰及物动词时，副词置于动词之前或宾语之后：

She bitterly reproached herself for having believed reports.

When you have done your best，wait the result calmly and with hope.

（iii）如系复合动词，则副词置于助动词与主动词之间：

I have never seen anything more beautiful.

He may well be said to have been a fortunate man.

但 You never can tell 的说法，是因发音关系而产生的变则。

c. 修饰不定词时，除 never、always 等副词外，一般皆置于不定词之后：

The teacher ordered the boy to study diligently.

Cf. I hope never to see his face again.

d. 修饰整个的语句，副词通例是置于句首：

Unfortunately he was not listened to.

Luckily no one was inside，when the roof fell in.

比较: | Happily he did not die. = It was a happy result that he did not die. He did not die happily. = He did not die a happy death.

e. 表示定时的副词常置于句首或句尾：

Last Sunday we made a trip to Tapeihu.

The students’ athletic meet will be held tomorrow.

f. 表示地点的副词置于动词之后，但与表示时间的副词同用时，则地点副词在先，时间副词在后：

She will be here soon.

A big fire broke out in Simon on the morning of the 20th inst.

g. only 一个副词最足代表，因所置的地位不同，而意义因之而异：

比较:

Only he lost his purse.（别人没有）

He only lost his purse.（只失去钱包并未失钱）

He lost only his purse.（没有失去别人的钱包）

He lost his purse only.（未失去别的东西）

He lost his only purse.（失去唯一的钱包）

h. 加强语气的副词置于句首：

Scarcely had I passed through the gate before I heard a cry from the house.

Little did I expect that he would succeed so well.

4. 副词的用法（Special Uses of Adverbs）

① very 和 much

a. 形容词和副词的原级用 very，比较级和最高级用 much。

This novel is very instructive.（原级）

You read very slowly.（原级）

The air is much hotter today than yesterday.（比较级）

He is much the best student in the class.（最高级）

但为加强语气，在最高级之前也可用 very，如 He is the very best student in the class.

b. very 是修饰形容词、副词的，而 much 是修饰动词的。

He is very clever for his age.（形容词）

A polite bow will very often do.（副词）

He studies history very much.（动词）

c. 现在分词用 very，过去分词用 much:

The news is very surprising.

I am much surprised at the news.

（例外）very tired、very pleased、very delighted、very frightened、very rejoiced 等。

②yes 和 no

肯定的回答用 yes，否定的回答用 no。

Do you take a walk every day？

Yes，I do. No，I do not.

Did you not go on an excursion yesterday？

Yes，I did. No，I did not.

Is he not diligent？No，he is idle.

Is he not severe？No，he is very kind.

（注意）“你不晓得我已经搬了家吗？”“是的，我不晓得。”用英文说时，肯定的回答，应改为否定的回答，即“Don’t you know that I have moved？No，I don’t. ”

③否定词（Negation）

a. 否定的副词 not，普通置于助动词与主动词之间；如无助动词时，就得临时在否定词前加用一个 do 字，如：

I shall not see it again.

I have not seen him of late.

He does not tell me his name.

I did not tell him my name.

I do not like him.

但是动词的 be 和 have 却是例外，not 要置于主动词之后，如：

He is not a man of wit.

I have not that picture post card.

如 have 不做“有”解时，则应加用 do 字，如：

比较: | Did you have a fine time yesterday？ No，I did not have a fine time yesterday.

You do not have to go. = You need not go.

b. no 和 not（no 是形容词，not 是副词）

I have no dictionary.（have 意为“有”）

I have not your dictionary.（have 意为“拿”）

但加强语气时也可说 I have not a dictionary. 普通说 Wealth can not buy happiness. 如加强语气时，就可以说 No wealth can buy happiness.

c. never 和 nothing（never = not ever，nothing = not anything 都是加强语气的说法）

Never tell a lie，either for fun or from fear.（比说 Do not tell a lie，...语气要强些）

I know nothing except this.（比说 I do not know anything except this. 语气要强些）

d. seldom，hardly，scarcely，rarely（都是作“几乎没有”解的否定副词，不须再加 not 字样）

He seldom is absent.

I hardly ever see him now.

He scarcely ever opens a book.

e. little（这词也作“几乎没有”解，尤其是与 think，dream，know，expect 等动词，或 as，so，how 等副词同用时）

I little think that he would die.

Little did I dream of seeing such a fine scenery.

This shows how little he knows the world.

He knows the world as little as a new-born baby.

f. 部分否定（Partial Negation）

否定词的 not 和 all，every，both，always，necessarily 等词同用时，仅表示部分的否定。

All that glitters is not gold.（未必皆是）

Every man can not become great.（非人人所能）

Such things do not occur every day.（非日日发生）

The rich are not always happy.（未必）

Both his parents are not living.（非二人全死）

g. 二重否定（Double Negation）

There is nothing that he cannot do a little of，yet nothing he can do thoroughly.

It never rains but it pours.

There is nothing so strong but it is in danger from what is weak.

Nothing can be attained in this world without exertion.

There are few children who do not go to school.

④ once 和 ever（肯定句用 once，疑问句、条件句及否定句则用 ever）

I have been there once.

Have you ever been there？

If you ever go that way，don’t fail to call on me.

I don’t think he will ever do so.

但最高级的肯定句中要用 ever，如 He is the richest man that ever lived.

又在纯粹的肯定句中用 ever 是 always 之意，较之语气更强，如“Fortune was ever on his side I have ever thought so. ”。

⑤ already 和 yet（肯定陈述句用 already，否定句及肯定疑问句用 yet）

He has almost recovered already.

I have never failed yet.

Has the train arrived yet？No，not yet.

注意：如说“Has the train arrived already？”便错了。

⑥too 和 either（肯定句用 too，否定句用 either）

I know him too.

I don’t know him either.

⑦ago，before 和 since（从现在以前说 ago，从过去某个时间以前说 before，所以 ago 是和 Past Tense 同用的，before 是和 Past Perfect 同用的。since 作副词用，意为以前，对 ago 或 before 二者皆可以用）

A century ago people did not know airplanes.

I came back yesterday，but he had come back two days before.

The tree cast their leaves a month since.

He said his father had died two years since.

Those were friends long since dead.

⑧there（用于表示人或物的有无）

There was a fire last night.

There may be some money in my drawer.

They say there is going to be war.

There has been no war between the two nations.

In the northern part of France there used to be a painting school.

It is necessary for there to be a change.

We became the more intimate from there being many resemblances of character between us.

At that moment there came a knock at the door.

Once there lived a farmer in this village.

（30）介词的用法

介词通常是置于名词或代词前的，所以又称为前置词。其形态不一，大多数是单词，但很多却是短语构成的，如 as for，as to，because of，by means of，in front of，in spite of，instead of，on account of，out of，owing to，up to，but for，for the benefit of，in honor of 等，另外又有双重的介词（Double Preposition），即并列的两个介词共着一个宾语时，就可省去一个宾语，如 on the ground 和 to the ground 就可并成 on to the ground，其他例如：

We stayed there till after sunset.

He picks the reticule from off Jack’s shirt-front.——Galsworthy，Silver Boz

The old citizen first emerged his round red face from out of the door.——Irving. Rural England

She loved to see every one gay and happy round about her.——Thackeray，Vanity Fair

介词有时可以略去，如

He walks at the rate of two miles（in）an hour.

He writes home two times（in）a month.

You may come to see me（at）any time between 4 and 5.

It will have been raining（for）a whole week（by）tomorrow.

He left here（on）this morning 或（on）last Sunday.

兹将主要介词的用法及意义，举例说明如下：

1. about

①附近：He lives somewhere about Yun Chiau.

②到处：They wander about the world.

③从事：What are you about？

④关于：Please tell me about yourself.

2. above

①在上：The sun was seen above the horizon.

②优越：There is no riches above a sound body.

③超脱：He is above such mean actions.

④Phrase：Above all，beware of illness.

3. after

①后（时间）：After dark，we went back to out home.

②后（顺序）：After a storm comes a calm.

③追求：He thirsts after knowledge.

④模仿：The son takes after the father more than the mother.

⑤不顾：He failed after all his labours.

⑥Phrases：One after another all my plans have failed.

He is a man after all.

Please look after my little boy in my absence.

4. against

①反对：I am against the plan.

②相靠：He stood leaning against the wall.

③冲突：He ran his boat against the bank.

④对照：The number of applicants this year is fifty against thirty last year.

⑤准备：We should always lay up against a rainy day.

5. across

①横断：He made several journeys across the continent.

②那边：He lives across the river.

6. at

①小地方：At the edge of a forest there grew a great oak.

②短时间：We generally dine at eight.

③接近：The servant is now at the well.

（注）自愿的接近用 at，偶然的接近用 by，如 There is a willow tree by the well.

④比率：I walk at the rate of four miles an hour.

⑤代价：At what price did you buy that hat？

⑥从事：He was busily at work all day.

⑦状态：Please call on me tomorrow if you are at leisure.

⑧目标：The hunter fired at a fox.

⑨看到：I am surprised at the sight.

⑩听到：He was frightened at the news.

⑪限度：The examination is at an end.

⑫Phrases：He was at a loss for a suitable reply.

She was not ignorant at any rate.

He did it at the expense of his character.

The ship was at the mercy of wind and waves.

I tried to save him at the risk of my own life.

7. before

①前（时间）：Call on me again before the day of your departure.

②前（地点）：Don’t stand before me.

③选择：Death before dishonour.

④Phrase：The rainy season will set in before long.

8. behind

①后面：My box is behind your chair.

②背后：Do not speak ill of a man behind his back.

③遗下：He has left a great fortune behind him.

④迟延：I was a little behind time today.

9. below

①在下：There is a pool below the bridge.

②劣于：His scholarship is below his cousin’s.

③以下：He cannot be below thirty.

10. beneath

①底下：Many heroes sleep beneath those tombstones.

②下位：Do not associate with them:it is beneath you.

11. beside，besides

①并行：There is a path beside the river.

②比较：This is a poor work beside yours.

③Phrase：He was beside himself with anger.

④之外：We nearly all take German besides English.

12. beyond

①那边：There is a tea-house beyond the hill.

②不能：It was dreadful beyond description.

13. but

①除开：You may take anything but this.

②Phrases：He has nothing but a few French books.

He is anything but a wild man.

14. by

①旁边：We rested at a tea-house by the wayside.

②创作者：Moving pictures were invented by Edison.

③手段：Are you going by train or by steamer？

④标准：Time is measured by the hour.

⑤相差：He is my senior by two years.

⑥计算：In America they board by the week.

⑦为止：He will certainly come by four o’clock.

⑧累加：They came in one by one.

⑨发誓：By Heavens.

⑩Phrases：Let’s go on，by all means.

I will by no means consent.

By the way I have something to tell you.

I am going to Europe by way of America.

He has succeeded by dint of perseverance.

It looks as if it would clear up by and by.

I work by day，not by night.

He is not the man to do things by halves.

15. for

①去处：He left Keelung for Japan.

②目的：Never study only for wealth.

③交换：I bought it for ten dollars.

④原因：Jan angry with you for doing such a thing.

⑤期间：I have not seen you for a long time.

⑥比较：He knows a good deal for a lad of ten.

⑦不顾：For all his wealth，he is discontented.

⑧赞成：I am for the bill，but he is against it.

⑨同情：I am sorry for you.

⑩找寻：He is looking for some good excuse to give up school.

⑪Phrases：The life of man in this world is，for the most part，a life of work.

I took him for a poet.

Please send for the doctor.

As for fame，it is but little matter.

That ship is bound for San Francisco.

16. from

①地点：How far is it from here to the airfield？

②时间：I have known him from the child.

③推想：Judging from reports，he seems to be rich.

④分离：He has recovered from his illness.

⑤区别：It is hard to know flatterers from friends.

⑥材料：Gas is made from coal.

⑦起源：He comes from Ireland.

⑧妨害：His illness prevented him from working.

⑨禁止：I have been ordered by the doctor to abstain from wine.

⑩保护：Let us take shelter from the rain.

⑪原因：I often suffer from a severe headache.

⑫Phrases：He lives from hand to mouth.

He was trembling from head to feet.

17. in

①长时间：Nightingale was born in 1820.

②大地方：When in Rome，do as the Romans do.

③状态：We should keep our body in good health.

④方式：Please send a telegram in haste.

⑤目的：The Greeks held games in honor of the Olympian gods.

⑥同一：I have found a good friend in Mr. A.

⑦程度：This seems to have lightened the load in some measure.

⑧实际：In fact，there is not much chance for the man whose courage fails.

⑨在某点上：He is the first in arithmetic.

⑩衣服：The gentleman in a morning coat is Dr. B.

⑪Phrases：Let one of us go in your stead.

Still，in the main，choice of companions can be made and must be made.

Real ability will win in the long run.

In short，I want some money.

Apply in person.

I was in season for the fair.

I was just in time for the express.

The boy will become a useful man in time.

18. into

①从外入内：He plunged into the water.

②变化：Water changes into ice at 32°by Fahrenheit.

③制作：Bamboo is made into various kinds of things.

④研究：Look into your dictionary.

19. off

①港外：The steamer is at anchor off Keelung.

②脱离：The wind blew a tile off the roof.

20. of

①所有关系：The cover of this book is yellow.

②同格：Newton was born at the small village of Woolsthorpe.

③形容词句：Nothing of importance resulted from the movement.

④部分：Some of the boys returned by train.

⑤内容：He takes a glass of wine every evening.

⑥材料：Formerly all ships were made of wood.

⑦起源：Your illness comes of eating too much.

⑧关于：What became of your servant？

Does your father know of this？

⑨原因：He died of consumption.

⑩剥夺：Ill temper will rob you of peace and happiness.

⑪Phrases：The weather has been very changeable of late.

I am of opinion that the step is wrong.

His horse sprang forward all of a sudden.

21. on，upon

①在某日：A poster exhibition was held on the 10th of this month.

②定时：On the morning of the 15th inst.，there was a slight earthquake in this city.

③表面接触：There hangs a map on the wall.

④题目：Mr. Lee wrote an essay on electricity.

⑤实际状态：The house was on fire. He is on duty.

⑥为着某事：Sometimes I run to the town on errands.

⑦基础：You must act on this theory.

⑧理由：He resigned on account of his poor health.

⑨依赖：Your success or failure depends on your exertion.

⑩界线接触：Chicago is on Lake Michigan.

⑪支持：He wished only to have enough to live on.

⑫奏乐：Can you play on the piano？

⑬随即：On arriving there，we drove to the restaurant.

⑭Phrases：He left Taipei for America on board the steamer Gordon.

It takes 20 minutes from here to the station on foot.

On an average，ten vessels enter the port every day.

He was killed on the spot.

My opinion is on the whole the same as yours.

The young man who expects to get on must work very hard.

He carries on a retail trade.

22. out of

①in 的反对：He is a fish out of water.

②into 的反对：Many people were so frightened that they ran out of their house.

③动机：I saved him out of pity for his family.

④部分：This is only one instance out of many.

⑤材料：We make many things out of paper.

⑥Phrases：Out of sight，out of mind.

His hat is out of fashion.

I am quite out of breath.

23. over

①悬在上面：We have a roof over us.

②支配：He had no control over his appetites.

③超过：He seems to be over fifty.

④同时发生：He went to sleep over his work.

⑤原因：I wept over his death.

⑥覆盖：Please spread the blanket over the grass.

⑦跳过：The bad boy climbed over the hedge and went into the garden.

⑧反复：We talked over it till midnight.

24. through

①贯通：The train has passed through a tunnel.

②媒介：They speak through an interpreter.

③原因：He lost his position through neglect of his duty.

④继续：He slept through the lesson.

25. to

①时间：He remembered it to his dying day.（与 till 同）

②方向：Anping is situated to the northwest of Tainan.

③附加：Add three to four.

④程度：Snow fell to the depth of 2 feet.

⑤结果：The building was burnt to ashes.

⑥比例：Ten to one he will fail in the new enterprise.

⑦比较：Man’s life is often compared to a candle.

⑧适合：This work was not to his taste.

⑨关系：He is the heir to that property.

⑩Phrases：Let us be up and doing to the purpose.

He used his talent to the best advantage.

26. toward （ s ）

①向着：I saw the boys run towards the river.

②时近：Towards evening，the wind abated a little.

③对于：We must fulfill our duty towards our community.

27. under

①正下面：There is a cat under the table.

②部下：Under him were three petty officials.

③在……中：The new machine is under examination.

④负担：The old man bent under the load.

⑤不到：He must be under 30 years of age.

⑥假装：He cheated me under the mask of friendship.

⑦口实：He did not come under the excuse of illness.

⑧境遇：It is impossible under such circumstances.

28. with

①所有：I have no money with me today.

②工具：We see with our eyes，and hear with our ears.

③原因：Hearing the news，she is mad with joy.

④同时：I rise with the lark，go with the lark to bed.

⑤比较：Few writers can compare with Scott as creators of romance.

⑥一致：He acted in accordance with rule.

⑦同居：I lived with my uncle for many years.

⑧边说边做：With this he left the room.

⑨反抗：I have to contend with difficulties.

⑩密切关系：I am very intimate with him.

⑪Phrases：I accept your help with all my heart.

He worked with a will.

Study with all your might and main.

Deal honestly with all men.

29. within

①时间内：I will come back within an hour.

②地区内：My house stands within a mile of the school.

30. without

①with 的反对：He went without his dinner.

②代 if...not：Without air，we cannot live.

③Phrases：If I cannot get what I want，I will do without it.

Nobody can see the scenery without admiring it.

You must pay your debt without delay.

（31）类别的介词

1. 表时间的介词：

① at，in，on

at 用于黎明、正午、夜半、何时、何分等短时间，即指 a point of time（时的一点）的场合；in 用于年、月、四季、世纪等长时间，即指 a period of time（时的期间）的场合；on 用于表示固定的时日。

A fire broke out at dawn.（在黎明时）

The meeting adjourned for an hour at noon.（正午）

The temperature is mild in spring.（在春天里）

Our school holds a regatta in April.（在四月中）

We went on an excursion on Wednesday.（在礼拜三）

Columbus discovered America on the 12th of October，1492.（在十二日）

比较: | I take a walk early in the morning. I did not take a walk on the morning of the 10th.

② in，within，after

in 用以表示“期间的经过”，within 用以表示“期间内”，after 用以表示“以过去为起点的期间的经过”。

He will be here in a week.（再过一礼拜他就会到这里来。）

He will be back within a week.（他在一礼拜内就会回来的。）

After a week he came back.（过了一礼拜他回来了。）

③ till，by；since，from

till 是表示继续的终止点，作“直到”解；by 是表示完结的时限，作“到……为止”解；since 是表示继续到现在为止的出发点，作“从……以来”解；from 是表示事情开始的出发点，作“从”解。since 要和“现在完成”同用，而 from 则多是和“过去”同用的。

My brother will stay there till the end of next year.（我哥哥要在那里住到明年年底。）

My brother will come back by the end of next year.（我哥哥到明年底为止就会回来的。）

He has lived here since 1900.（从1900年以来。）

He lived in Japan from 1900 to 1910.（从1900到1910年。）

④ before，after；past，to

都是表示时间的前后的，不过 past 和 to 系用于钟表上的时刻。

I started before noon and arrived after dark.

It is a quarter past seven by my watch.

He left home at a quarter to seven.

⑤ for，during，through

for 是表示“期间”，during 是表示“状态的继续中”，而 through 就是表示“从头到尾”的意思。

His lecture lasted for an hour.（继续一小时。）

He was very kind during my stay in London.（滞留伦敦的时期。）

He worked hard through the summer.（整个夏季。）

2. 表地点的介词：

① at，in

at 用于比较狭小的地方，in 用于比较宽大的地方，如村镇等用 at；都市、国家等用 in。

He lives at a small village near Tainan.（住在台南附近一小村中）。

Radio is all the rage in Europe and America.（无线电在欧美大为流行）。

② on，beneath；above，below；ever，under；up，down

on 表示“表面的接触”，beneath 表示“底下的接触”；above 表示“高”（higher than），below 表示“低”（lower than），是说高低的；over 表示“顶头上面”，under 表示“直接下面”；而 up 和 down 便单是表上下的。

There is a book on the table.

He took it from beneath his coat.

A beautiful full moon rose above the horizon.

The sun has just sunk below the horizon.

I saw several airplanes flying over the city.

We took shelter from the rain under a pine tree.

At dawn he went up the hill.

We sailed down the river.

③ in，into，out of

in 是表示在中间的一种静止的状态，into 是表示从外入内的运动，out of 是表示在外面的状态，或是出到外面来的运动。

Fish live in the water；they cannot live out of it.

He came into the room when we were going out of it.

④ along，across，through

along 是表示“沿着”一个长东西的位置，across 表“交叉”或“横断”，through 表“贯通”。

The ship sailed along the coast.

A road runs across the plain.

The river flows through the city.

⑤ in front of，behind

in front of 是“在前”，behind 是“在后”。

There is an automobile in front of the school.

He hid himself behind the door.

⑥ on，off

on 是说表面的接触，off 则相反地，为离去之意。

You should not put your elbows on the table.（勿置肘于桌。）

The glass rolled off the table.（玻璃杯从食桌上滚下去了。）

⑦ between，among

between 是说二者之间，among 则为多数之间。

He lives about half-way between Taipei and Taichung.

The robins were playing among the trees.

⑧ around，round，about

around 表示周围静止的位置，round 表示在周围回转的运动，about 则为漠然地说那周围。

We sat around the fire.

Let us walk round the pond.

We rowed about the pond.

（注）在美国 around 与 round 二词常混用。

⑨ by，beside，at

by，beside 是表示“偶然的接近”，at 是表示“有意志的接近”。

There is a pinetree by（beside）the gate.

Wives are chatting at the well.

⑩ to，for，toward

to 用于 go，come 等动词，for 用于 start，leave 等动词，二者都是表目的地的。toward 便有“向着”之意，单表示运动的方向。

He went to Europe last week.

He left Taipei for America.

He ran toward the seashore.

3. 表来源的介词：from，of

What part of the country does he come from？

That young man is of a noble family.

4. 表材料或原料的介词：from，of（from 表原料，of 表材料）

Brandy is made from grapes.

Her clothes are made of muslin.

He makes many things out of paper.

（注）make 如与 of 分离的话，就常要用 out of 代替 of。

5. 表行为者及手段的介词：by，with

by 用于 Passive 之后，行为者之前；with 表示用什么工具，而 by 则表示用什么手段。

He was killed by a burglar.（行为者）

He was killed with a pistol.（工具）

He left Taipei for America by Pan American Clipper.（手段）

比较: | You must write your dictation with pen and ink. But you must not write it in red ink.

6. 表原因的介词：from，of，through，at，over，with，for

①from 表直接的原因

He is suffering from influenza.

②of 表死因，但如说出 cause 一字来，便要用 from 了

His brother died of typhoid fever.

Cf. He died from unknown cause.

③through 表存在的原因，主要指不注意、疏忽等的原因

It was entirely through your neglect that your child was run over by a motorcar.

④at 用于见闻及喜怒哀乐等场合，over 则用于表示成为原因的事情

The whole nation rejoiced at the news of victory.

The nation rejoiced over the victory.

⑤with 是表由外界而及于肉体的原因，for 是表于心灵的无形的原因

He is shivering with cold on the ice.

I tremble for your safety.

7. 表目的的介词：for，after，on

Some work for money，others for fame.

What is he after？

He has gone to America on business.

8. 表理由的介词：for，on

California is famous for its oranges.

He declined on the ground of previous engagement.

9. 表结果的介词：to，into

表一般的结果都是用 to，表变化的结果才用 into。

To his great surprise，he found the house quite neat and clean.

Wheat is ground into flour.

10. 表比较的介词：with，to

同类相比用 with，异物相比用 to。

The Thames is not to be compared with the Yangtze River.

We compare life to a voyage.

（32）词后的介词

这是讲接用在形容词和动词等后的介词，即令是同一个词，只因后面接的介词不同而意义就变了，所以初学者应特别注意这些不同的介词，用在同一词后的时候：

absent | （形）from school （动）oneself from school | 不去上学

abstain from wine 戒酒

admit | of no excuse 不容宽恕 to or into a secret 准其与闻机密

afraid of doing 怕做

agree | with a person 同意某人 to a proposal 同意某事

angry | with a person for saying something at one’s remark | 对别人说的话生气

anxious | at the news 听到而担心 for one's weliare 深望 about a person on the result 悬念

ask

a person about something 向人询问其事

a favour of a person 有求于人

after a person 问候起居

a person for something 向人乞物

attent | on a person 侍候 to what a person says 留心听

beg | pardon of a person 乞恕 for something from someone 向人乞物

believe | in God 信仰上帝 in a person 信任某人 something on insufficient evidence 证据不足也相信

belong

to a person 某人所有

among such writers as

in business

with Newton

（分类上）属于（美国用法）

break | into a house 穿窬 to pieces 粉碎 with a friend 绝交

buy | of a person 从某人买 at a store 在某店买 for ten dollars 用十元买

call

at a house 访人于其家

on a person 访人

to a person 高声唤人

up a person 打电话给某人

careful | of health 注意 about one's dress 讲究

compare | with 比较 to 譬如

complain of 抱怨，不平

comply with the rules 遵守，依从

congratulate a person on his success 祝贺

consist | of materials 构成 in facts or results 在

consult with a person on or about something 商量

correspend | to something 相当 with a person 通讯

deal

in tea，cloth 买卖

with a person 对付

with a firm 与之交易

with a subject 讨论

depend on 依赖，靠

daprive a person of something 夺取

despair of success 绝望，无成功之望

devote oneself to study 献身于学问，专心从事

die | of a disease 病死 from some unknown cause 死因不明 by violence 横死

differ | from something 与之不同 with a person on a subject 在某问题上不同意

distinguish | one thing from another between two things | 区别二者之不同

divide | a thing into many parts 分为许多部分 money among many 分配给大家 money belween two 二人平分

dwell | in a place 住 on a subject 详论

engage | in some work 从事 to a person 订婚

enter | into conversation 交谈起来 upon a career or one's duties 开始

entrust | a person with a thing a thing to a person | 托人以物

excel in languages 精通语文

familiar | with a thing 熟知其事 to a person 熟知其人

famous for his learning 以有学问著名

fond of wine 好酒

free | from mistakes 无误 of charge 免费

full of water 充满了水

get | to a place 达到某处 over on illness 病愈 on in life 入世

good | at tennis 善于打网球 to everybody 对谁都好 for nothing 无用之长物

graduate from（or at）a college 从大学毕业

grieve | at the news 听到那消息而悲伤 for a person 为人悲叹 over one's failure 为其失败而忧伤

hear

of a person 听到关于某人的消息

of some event 听到讲起某事情

about a person 听到关于某人的情形

from a peroon 接到某人的信

ignorant of something 全然不知

independent of somebody 独立，不倚赖

inferior to a person 劣于，不及

inquire

for a person 问某人在不在

after a person 问候某人安否

of a person about some matter 关于某事问某人

into a matter 调查

insist on doing something 坚持要做（好的方面）

interfere | in the matter 干涉 with the work 妨害

keep | from wine 戒酒 an affair from a person 对人守秘 on doing something 继续做某事

know | of a person 闻知其人(know a person 认识某人） about a person 知道某人的事 a wise man from a fool 区别贤愚

laugh at a person（thing）笑某人或某事

lean | on a desk 凭在桌上 against a wall 靠在墙上 over a book 伏案读书

listen | to a person 听人说话 in the radio 听广播

live on rice 以米为生

look

at something 看某物

into a matter 调查某事

for a missing child 寻找迷失的小孩

after a child 照顾

over the papers 调阅

maed | of wood 木造（不变形） from grapes 由葡萄做成（变形）

moved | with pity 哀怜 at the sight 见之感动 to tears 感泣

noted for its temples 以庙宇驰名

order a book from America 向美国定购

participate in an action 参加

pass | by a man 在其身边走过 through a gate 经过一张门 for a hero 当作英堆

persist in doing something 坚持要做（不好的方面）

play | at a game 游戏 on a musical instrument 奏弄

prefer tea to coffee 更喜欢

prepare for examination 准备考试

present | a book to a person a person with a book | 赠人以书

prevent a person from going 阻止

protect a person from harm 保护某人免其受伤

provide | with something 供给 for one's family 养家 against accidents 防备

recover from illness 恢复

rejeice | at the news 闻之而喜 over the victory 祝贺胜利

remind a person of something 提醒

rescue a person from drowning 救人于溺

result in a consequence 成为结果

retire from business 隐退，告老

rid the house of mice 驱除老鼠

rob a person of his money 抢夺金钱

run

after a hare 追逐

into debt 负债

over a child 碾过

against a person 冲突

search | for a house 寻觅房屋(search a house 搜查家宅） into a matter 调查

seek for happiness 追求幸福

sick | with a fever 发烧 of life 厌世 for one's native country 怀念故国

smile | at a person's threat 嘲笑别人的威胁 on a person 对人表示好感

sorry for a person 为某人难受

speak

of a person 谈及某人

about the matter

on the subject

谈话某事

to a person 对人说话

with a person 与人交谈

spend | money on books 花钱买书 one's time in reading 费时读书

stare at a man 凝视

start | for England 启程赴英 on a journey 出发旅行

struggle | for existence 生存竞争 with adversity 与逆境奋斗

succeed | to the throne 继承王位(succeed a person 成为某人的后继者） in an undertaking 事业成功

suffer from consumption 害着肺病

sympathize with a person 同情

take | after his father 相似 a man for a spy 弄错 to gambling 耽于

talk | of resigning 谈到辞职的事 over a matter 商量 to（with）a person 对谈

tell | a person of another's death 告人以某某之死 a person about the war 谈及战争 a good picture from a bad one 分别好坏

think

of home 思家

of a good idea 想出

about a matter

over a matter

熟思

tired | of work 厌倦 with walk 疲倦

trust | in a person 信任某人 a person with something (power）托人以物，授人以权 to chance 碰运气

wait | for a person 等待 on a person 侍候

watch | for an opportunity 警戒 with the invalid 看护 ovor the land 防守

weary | of one's tale 厌倦 with a long walk 疲劳

weep | at the news 闻之哭泣 for a person 为人而泣 over one's death 因某人之死而哭

worthy of praise 值得

write | to a person 写信与人 for something 写信索物

（33）连词和感叹词

（一）连词

1. 连词的种类：

连词是用以连接语句中的两个部分的，如单词和单词，短语和短语，分句和分句等，要把它们连接起来就得用连词。连词有两种：一为并列连词（Coordinate Conjunction），一为从属连词（Subordinate Conjunction）。并列连词是用以连接同等关系的字句的，而从属连词所连接的，便有主从之分，即一为主句，一为从句。这里所谓从句，即是名词从句，形容词从句，或是副词从句，在复句中，处于从属地位。兹各举几个实例如下：

a. A woman and a melon are hard to choose.

b. Do you go by land or by sea？

c. Speech is great，but silence is greater.

以上句中的 and、or、but 为并列连词。

d. That we shall win is certain.（名词从句）

e. People who live in glass house should never throw stones.（形容词从句）

f. Let us be silent that we may hear the whispers of the gods.（副词从句）

以上句中的 that、who 为从属连词。

2. 并列连词的用法：

（a）表结合的连词：

and | Fifty houses were entirely destroyed and ten were partly destroyed.
and... also | He is guilty，and you also.
both... and | He is both proud and poor.

as well as

He is not

only

merely

proud，but

also

likewise

poor.

as well as | He is poor as well as proud.

〔说明〕单是把两个词句结合拢来，可用 and；要加强双方的意思，就用 both...and；至于用 not only...but also 来连接时，就是后者的意思比前者更强；用 as well as 时便要反转来说，因后者的意思是弱于前者的。

比较: | not only A but also B. B as well as A.

He is not only a knave，but a fool. = He is a fool as well as a knave.

（b）表反对的连词：

but | Please call the servant. Yes，but she went early to the station.
and yet | He made great efforts，and yet he failed to gain his end.
still | He was unsuccessful；still he did not lose heart.
nevertheless | All men were against him；nevertheless he persevered.
indeed... but | He recovered indeed，but his health has never been so good since.
it is true... but | It is true he is old，but he is still strong.

（c）表推论的连词：

therefore | A is equal to B，which is in turn equal to C. Therefore A is equal to C.
so | It was raining，so I could not go out.

〔说明〕therefore 用于证明议论等场合，至于日常单纯的事柄就用 so。

（d）表选择的连词：

either... or | Either you or I must be out of our senses.
neither... nor | Neither he nor they are mistaken.

He will not go，and I will not go，either.

He will not go，neither will I.

He will not go，nor will I.

3. 从属连词的用法：

（a）表时间的连词：

when | When the cat is away，the mice will play.
while | Make hay while the sun shines.
as | Just as I got to the station，the whistle was heard.

〔说明〕when 可用于过去、现在、未来的任何时候，while 表示继续的意思，as 用以表时，有“同时”之意。

比较: | 1. Every one listens when he speaks. 2. I was just going to explain，when the bell rang.

〔说明〕（1）句中的 when 为“从属连词”，（2）句中的 when，其前有逗号时为 and then 之意，所以是“并列连词”。

as soon as | As soon as it was light enough in the morning to see，he was up and reading.

scarcely...when

I had

scarcely

hardly

finished my work

when

before

a friend of mine called on me.

no sooner... than | No sooner had we started for the excursion than it began to rain.

〔说明〕以上三者全是“随即”的意思，as soon as 的动词前后皆可用 Past；其他二者就是前用 Past Perfect，后用 Past。

as long as | I will take care of you as long as I live.
so long as | So long as a youth has true respect，vice has little attraction for him.

（b）表条件的连词：

if | If you are hungry，I will give you something to eat.
unless | Unless you read it again you will not understand it.
in case | I will leave a note in case he is absent.
so that | You may go there so that（if only）you come back in time.
provided | I will pardon him provided he acknowledge his fault.

（c）表地点的连词：

where | Where there is smoke，there is fire.

（d）表方法的连词：

as | Do not act as he did.
as if | I felt as if I were going to die.

（e）表程度的连词：

as far as | As far as the eye can react，nothing is to be seen but sand.
as much as | It is as much as he can do to keep out of debt.
the more... the more | The higher the steed，the greater the fall.

（f）表原因的连词：

because | He has been promoted because he is able and industrious.
for | He must have passed this way，for here are his footprints.
since | Since it has come to that，there is no help for it.
as | As prices are going up daily，poor people are in great distress.
now that | Now that you have finished your work，you may go.

〔说明〕because 表直接的原因；for 表推论；since 表自然的推论，可译作“既然……就”；as 多用于口语，意较 because，since 为弱。又 since，as 常置于句首，now that 与 since 用法相同。

（g）表结果的连词：

such...that | He was in such a condition that we all felt anxious about him. His eloquence was such that we could not but be moved.
so...that | He was so kind that he was loved by all. Laziness travels so slowly that poverty soon overtakes it.
so that | A great part of Belgium is flat，so that the country is not particularly pretty.

〔说明〕such...that 和 so...that 同义，不过在 such 后接名词（有时可略去），在 so 后接形容词或副词。

（h）表让步的连词：

though | Though love cannot plant morals in the human breast，it cultivates them when there.
even if | Even if he has never been abroad，he speaks good English.
however | However hard you may try，you will not be able to solve this question in a day or two.
as | Old as he is，he is very active.

〔说明〕as 用作 though 之意时，其前可接（1）Noun（无冠词的），或（2）Adjective 或（3）Adverb，或（4）Past Participle；后接 Subject 及 Verb，例如：

（1）Hero as he was，he was surprised at the news.（Noun）

（2）Important as sugar is as an article of food，we cannot live upon it.（Adjective）

（3）Much as I want to do so，father will not allow me to do so.（Adverb）

（4）Surrounded as he was by the enemy，he was not afraid.（Past Participle）

whether... or not Students must study，whether they like it or not.

（i）表目的的连词：

that... may | We usually praise only that we may be praised.
so that... may | We sent for him at once so that we might talk it over with him.
in order that | He labors day and night in order that he may become rich.
lest | The old man walks with a cane，lest he should stumble.

（j）表其他的连词：

（1）as... as 用于不同的二物或二人所有的相同的程度时，否定时用 not so...as。

The ice was as smooth as glass.

She is not so beautiful as her sister.

（2）as... as any，as... as ever，the Superlative... that ever 三者全是表最高级。

He can ride on horseback as well as any man in the country.

You see in him as complete a villain as ever disgraced humanity.

He is the worst boy that I have ever seen.

（3）as...，so

As the human body is nourished by the food，so is a nation nourished by its industries.

（4）as far as（表范围），so far as（表限制或条件）

As far as he could see was a turbulent flood.

I will go with you as far as London.

So far as I know，there is no such word in English.

Progress has been very slow indeed，so far as the social life of the people is concerned.

（5）not so much... as（与 rather than 相同，但顺序不同，如 not so much A as B = rather B than A）

A man’s worth lies not so much in what he has as in what he is.

（6）no matter how（或 who 或 whether）may

Those who have achieved good results kept on trying，no matter how great the obstacles.

I shall always obey your order，no matter what it may be.

You should go to the country for a change，no matter where.

（二）感叹词

感叹词是表示强烈感情的叫声的。用在语句之前，与语句全无语法上的关系。有时又可插入语句当中任何一部分。

表喜悦的：Hurrah！Huzza！

表笑声的：Ha！ha！Aha！

表悲哀的：Alas！Ah！Oh！

表惊讶的：Oh！Ah！Hah！What！Why！Dear me！Oh dear！Good Heavens！Lo！Behold！

表赞赏的：Bravo！Well done！Good！Nice！Excellent！

表轻蔑的：Pooh！Pshaw！Tut-tut！Fie！For shame！

表注意的：Look！Hark！Look here！

表呼唤的：Ho！Hallow！Hullo！Hello！Ahoy！Hey！

表赞成的：Hear！hear！

表欢迎的：Welcome！

表道别的：Good-bye！Farewell！Adieu！

表拟声的：Bang！Bow-wow！Mew！

二　语法练习

（1）人称和数（Person and Number）

1. 动词的人称和数必须与其主语（Subject）一致，即主语为单数时，动词也必须是单数，例如：The girl smiles. 主语为复数时，动词也必须是复数，例如：“The girls smile. ”。

一切名词都为第三人称（the third person），人称代词除 I、we（第一人称）、（thou）、you（第二人称）之外，亦概为第三人称。动词的人称，必须与主语一致；故 I、we、you 以外的一切主语，其动词概为第三人称。

thou 本为第二人称单数，但现在普遍不用了；现在即使指的只是一个人也用 you，而其动词亦用复数，如：You、my boy、are playing too much.

练习题（1）

A. 将下列句中之 is、am 改为复数（注意其主语亦必须改）：

1. He is here.

2. The gate is locked.

3. I am very tired.

4. Where is he going？

5. I am very sorry for it.

6. My book is lost.

7. The fish is swimming.

8. My foot is sore.

9. My tooth is aching.

10. The child is happy.

B. 将 was 改为复数：

1. A sheep was grazing here.

2. That was a cool valley.

3. The child was asleep.

4. The egg was cracked.

5. When was I admitted？

6. How old was he？

7. A deer was in the wood.

8. A goose was standing there.

9. There was no proof.

10. A wolf was seen there.

C. 将 are 改为单数：

1. The loaves are baked.

2. The rats are caught.

3. No boxes are here.

4. Where are the boxes？

5. Flies are very harmful.

6. We are very tired.

7. The oxen are resting.

8. Why are they so careless？

9. We are fond of play.

10. Birds are roosting.

D. 将 were 改为单数：

1. Some men were hurt.

2. Were the thieves caught？

3. The horses’ tails were cut.

4. These mice were caught.

5. The geese were not found.

6. The ponies were sent away.

7. The loaves were served up.

8. The ladies were seated.

9. There were five girls in this class.

10. Here were the houses.

E. 将 have、has 改为复数：

1. He has long been gone.

2. Have I seen you before？

3. Has the cat been found？

4. The thief has been caught.

5. I have done my best.

6. The glass has been broken.

7. The roof has been mended.

8. The loaf has been cut.

9. The wolf has been shot.

10. The mouse has run away.

F. 将 have 改为单数：

1. The geese have been found.

2. My teeth have been aching.

3. His sons have left him.

4. We have left school.

5. The oxen have come back.

6. We have arrived.

7. The deer have fled.

8. The birds have flown.

9. The sheep have been lost.

10. My feet have been in pain.

G. 将 do、does 改为复数：

1. I do not like him.

2. He does not like me.

3. Does the boy work hard？

4. The boy does not know me.

5. A goose does not fly.

6. Does my friend know me？

7. Does the fire burn well？

8. He does not learn much.

9. Does he keep a dog？

10. The man does not work.

H. 将 do 改为单数：

1. We do not go today.

2. Do they keep a horse？

3. They keep a horse；so do we.

4. We do not understand you.

5. They do not go to school.

6. Do they wish to see me？

7. Wolves do not come here.

8. Our cows do not thrive.

9. We do not see you often.

10. We do not want your help.

2. 两个单数主语用 and 连接起来时，则动词为复数；但两主语之前若有 each、every 时，则动词用单数：

例：Time and tide wait for no man.

James and I were both absent.

Each plant and each animal has its own parasite.

Every word and every phrase is indispensible to this sentence.

例外：若两个名词所指者为一人或一物，则此主语认为是一整体，在意义上为单数，故动词需单数。

例：Truth and honesty is best policy.

The poet and statesman is dead.

This carriage and pair costs four hundred pounds.

注：上第二例若为 The poet and the statesman，由于重复使用冠词之故，则表示 The poet 和 the statesman 为两个不同的人，然则动词须为复数。

例：The statesman and the poet are dead.

练习题（2）

用 is、am 或 are；has 或 have；was 或 were；do 或 does 填入空白处：

1. Bread and butter____a good kind of food at tea-time.

2. A woman and a child____standing by the door.

3. A time of peace and plenty____coming to all of us.

4. The black and the white kitten____dead.

5. You and he____late for school today；why____that？

6. The black and white kitten____asleep.

7. Snow mixed with rain____falling，when I started.

8. James and I____had a long walk today in the fields.

9. The sum and substance of all he says____no effect.

10. A bay and a grey horse____just been bought.

11. The cat and the dog____long been good friends.

12. The horse and its rider____not seem to be tired.

13. A short and unbound book____not cost much.

14. A bunch of roses____not satisfy him.

15. Bread and cheese____not suit his taste.

16. Potatoes____not grow well in heavy soil.

17. The cow and her calf____not belong to me.

18. My pen____been lost；____you seen it？

19. Youth and experience____not exist together.

20. The best painter and poet of this century____lately died.

21. A needle and thread____found on the floor.

22. Trial and error____the source of our knowledge.

23. Romeo and Juliet____one of his favorite plays.

3. 两单数主语由 or、nor 连接时，即由 either...or 或 neither...nor 连接时，动词为单数：

例：Either James or John is to be promoted.

Neither James nor John is to be promoted.

附则：

（a）当主语一为单数，一为复数时，则将复数主语放在后，而用复数动词。

例：Neither he nor his parents were present.

（b）如主语的人称各异时，则动词与其最接近的主语一致。

例：Either James or I am to get the prize.

Either you or James is to get the prize.

练习题（3）

将 is、am 或 are；was 或 were；has 或 have；do 或 does 填入空白处。

1. That cloud shows that snow or rain____about to fall.

2. Neither the cock nor the hens____in the yard.

3. By what time____your father or you decided to go？

4. One or two apples____been picked ripe.

5. Neither the man nor his wife____much work.

6. Neither moon nor stars____visible in this dark night.

7. To what place____the man or his son wish to go？

8. Neither the master nor his pupils____idle.

9. Neither he nor you____heard this before.

10. No girl or boy____allowed to play in school.

11. Either the boy or I____to be blamed for this.

12. Neither you nor he____the work required.

13. Neither my partner nor I____ever seen you before.

14. Either he or you____to blame；perhaps both of you.

4. 两个单数的主语为 as well as 连接时，动词用单数。

例：A box as well as a book has been lost.

副则：若两主语的人称或数各异时，则动词和最初的主语一致。

例：My partners as well as I were ruined.

I as well as they am tired of this work.

练习题（4）

将 is、am 或 are；was 或 were；has 或 have；do 或 does 填入空白处。

1. The horse as well as the rider____hurt by the fall.

2. This horse as well as that____for sale，which will you have？

3. James as well as I____won a prize this term.

4. I myself as well as James____won a prize this term.

5. Beauty as well as wealth____fallen to her lot in life.

6. The cock as well as the hens____calling for food.

7. The hens as well as the cock____calling for food.

8. A garden as well as a stable____attached to the house.

9. A garden as well as stables____attached to the house.

10. Stables as well as a garden____attached to the house.

11. Her good looks as well as her voice____much admired.

12. John as well as his friends____present on that day.

13. The moon as well as the stars____shining brightly.

14. He as well as you____to be blamed for this.

15. The pupils as well as the master____worked hard.

16. My father as well as I____a stranger in this place.

17. A horse as well as cows____needed for this farm.

18. The keeper as well as the cows____drenched with rain.

5. 两个单数的主语为 not only... but（also）连接时，动词用单数：

例：Not only England，but all the world feels the loss.

副则：若两主语的人称或数各异时，则动词和最后的主语一致。

例：Not only he，but his servants were blamed for that.

练习题（5）

将 is 或 are，has 或 have，was 或 were，do 或 does 填入空白处：

1. Not only silver，but gold____dug in this country.

2. Not only my sister，but I myself____much surprised.

3. Not only my sister，but my brothers____been invited.

4. Not only the Thames，but the Severn____frozen over.

5. Not only cows，but a horse____grazing in that field.

6. Not only a horse，but cows____grazing in that field.

7. Not only elm-trees，but ivy____growing well here.

8. Not only I，but my children____been disappointed.

9. Not only hope，but confidence____been restored.

10. Not only bread，but tea and buns____provided.

6. 单数集体名词（Collective Noun）为主语时，其动词有单复两者：

a. 就团体全体言时，动词用单数。

b. 就构成团体的个别分子而言时，动词用复数。

例：His family is a large one.

His family are all well.

练习题（6）

用 is 或 are，was 或 were，has 或 have，does 或 do 填入空白处：

1. All the audience____satisfied.

2. That fleet____not consist of more than ten ships.

3. Your pack of hounds____larger than mine.

4. The pack____scattered about in various places.

5. The people____much amused at that sight.

6. That gang of seven thieves____been broken up.

7. The gang____nearly all caught：only two escaped.

8. The choir____not contain more than ten choristers.

9. The choir____all here and____taken their usual seats.

10. The audience____too large for a hall of that size.

11. The company____so excited that they rose from their seats.

12. The A. B. C. Company____formed a few years ago.

13. The cattle____out grazing in the field.

14. The fourth class with few exceptions____done well.

15. The class____too large to be taught by one man.

16. The poultry____much mischief among flowers.

17. The gentry of this place____not like dirty roads.

18. The mass of mankind____much influenced by their surroundings.

19. The crew____not consist of more than twenty sailors.

20. The crew____standing in different parts of the ship.

21. The jury____divided in their opinions.

22. The jury____not consist of more than twelve persons.

7. 特别应注意事项：

a. 形式上为复数的名词，而动词应用单数者：

1. 凡有“-ics”为语尾的学科名词如 ethics、physics 等。

2. 其他如 news、means、tidings、measles、gallows、innings 等。

3. 看作一个概括的观念时：

Ten years was too long a time to her.（十年的期间）

Forty miles is a good distance.（四十里的距离）

4. 国名，书名等：

The Adventures of Robinson Crusoe is an interesting book.

The United States is a republic.

b. number、variety：虽然形式是单数，但用为复数之意时，则动词用复数：

A great variety of articles were sold.（因被卖者不是 variety，而是 articles of various kinds［各种的货物］）

A large number of them were present.（因在场者不是数［number］而是 they who made the number［构成数目的人们］）但此二词用为单数的意时，则动词仍为单数：

The number of workman is small.

Variety of scene pleases the eye.

c. half、part、rest. 用于量（quantity）时动词用单数，用于数时，动词用复数：

Part of my work was done.

About half of the passengers are missing.

The rest of the money was spent then and there.

The rest of the children were killed.

d. none 为 no one 结合起来的，不应用单数，但其后若用复数名词或代词时，则动词应为复数：

None of them have come.

e. each、every；either、neither 动词概为单数：

Each （man）of them was present.

Neither of these men was wanted.

Every bush and every tree was in bud.

练习题（7）

a. 动词的人称和数与主语不一致者，改正之：

1. You was rather late in coming to school today，wasn’t you？

2. Good news have come today；the enemy’s troops are beaten.

3. Neither reward nor punishment are to be expected from him.

4. A carrier with his horse and dog have just entered the yard.

5. Every man and every horse were urgently needed.

6. Are either of these horses yours？No，neither of them are.

7. Not a word of these lectures were read out from a book.

8. None of the men selected was found fit for that purpose.

9. A large number of cattle is grazing in that field.

10. The audience was not agreed on that point.

11. The carriage and the horse is both worth a good deal.

12. When pain or grief attacks us，we know true friends from false.

13. The poultry in our yard is picking up seed.

14. There’s four or five persons coming over today.

15. A white and a grey rabbit has run across the field.

16. There’s as many as fifty sheep grazing on this moor.

17. The poet and the painter that lived here are dead.

18. Either James or you is sure to win the first prize.

19. My box as well as my book have been taken away.

20. The sum of twenty shillings a week were paid to him.

21. A garden full of flowers look very beautiful.

22. They，and not he，has to pay the fine.

23. Both are clear writers；neither of them make mistakes.

24. Every man of the boat’s crew except two were taken ill.

25. A large number of men has come asking for work.

26. To write well，to speak well，or to act well are difficult.

27. Energy and hopefulness，like faith，removes mountains.

28. Each and all of them was shocked at what they heard.

29. Nothing but rain and clouds were seen on that day.

30. The sum and substance of the matter were that he was wrong.

b. 用 is 或 are，was 或 were，has 或 have，does 或 do 填入空白处：

1. The number of new members____risen from ten to fifteen.

2. Everyman who saw that____expected to give evidence.

3. Either wine or beer____less refreshing than pure water.

4. A man and his wife____about to take the house opposite.

5. A cat with two kittens____making much noise in the night.

6. Each of my brothers____made a good start in life.

7. There____still ten people asking for tickets：____we any left？

8. Some people____not like being told，when they are wrong.

9. The taste of these apples and pears____excellent：buy some.

10. A number of boys____come to see the cricket match.

11. The number of boys present____about fifty.

12. The apples on every tree____now ripe enough to be picked.

13. Either the farmer or his men____not understand their work.

14. Either you or he____to be dismissed tomorrow.

15. A large quantity of fruit of various kinds____been bought.

16. A red and white handkerchief____found in my drawer.

17. A red and a white handkerchief____found in my drawer.

18. That woman with a child in her arms____in need of help.

19. Industry，not ability，____the secret of success.

20. The band of musicians____all here，ready to begin.

21. The black and white kitten____a great favorite in the house.

22. The black and the white kitten____been given away to a neighbour.

23. The farmer as well as the laborers____hard at work.

24. Not only the farmer，but the laborers____hard at work.

25. Neither my son nor I____pleased with this climate.

26. Either of these books____well worth buying and reading.

27. The number of spectators____not less than four thousand.

28. A bunch of grapes as well as two apples____given him.

29. The committee____divided in their opinions.

30. The Tales of a Grandfather ____one of Scott’s novels.

31. Thirty dollars a week____good pay for a laborer.

32. A large number of waggons____captured.

33. The number of student in this class____too large.

34. None of the prisoners____released on that day.

35. The audience____much pleased with her singing.

36. The cattle____grazing in the field.

37. The great orator and statesman____dead.

38. There____about sixty students in this school.

39. Either he or his friends____to be invited.

40. Either his friends____to be invited，or he____

（2）疑问句（Interrogatives）

陈述句 | 疑问句
（1）I am a boy. | Am I a boy？
（2）Mary has a bicycle. | Has Mary a bicycle？ Does Mary have a bicycle？（美）
（3）He went to Boston yesterday. | Did he go to Boston yesterday？
（4）John can speak English. | Can John speak English？
（5）There are two girls in the room. | Are there two girls in the room？
（6）Here is a house. | Is here a house？

由上诸例可知，疑问句是将主语和动词的位置颠倒而构成的。

例（1）（2）仅限于 be 和 have 两动词，即它们不需助动词，但在 have 的场合，美国人常用助动词 do 来构成疑问句，又 dare、need、used 等亦不需用 do。

例（3）表示凡无助动词的句子变为疑问句时，必须用助动词 do。

例（4）表示凡有助动词的句子变为疑问句时，则将（第一个）助动词放在主语之前即可。

例（5）和（6）表示 there 和 here 虽非主语，但在疑问句时，仍将动词放在它们之前。

有疑问词的疑问句

1. 主语为疑问代词，或为疑问形容词所修饰时，则句法与陈述句者同，只加一问号（？）于句尾即可。

例：Who made that voice？

How many pieces are left？

2. 但在疑问副词（why、when、what time，etc）的场合，则主语和动词的位置仍须颠倒，而将疑问副词放在句首。

例：Why（when、what time，etc）did John go to school？

注意：1. 否定陈述句改为问句时，通例将动词放在主语前即可，但也有将 not 随动词置于主语之前者，在此等场合，最好用缩短形，如 Didn’t、Haven’t、Aren’t 等。

I did not read much. →Didn’t I read much？Did I not read much？

Jack is not ill. →Is not（Isn’t）Jack ill？Is Jack not ill？

2. have 用为“吃、学习”等意时，则概用 do 来作成疑问句。

例：Do you have dinner at seven？Does Bessie have any lessons in the afternoon？

练习题（8）

A. 将下列句子改为问句：

1. This man weighs more than that one.

2. You usually wear a coat.

3. A box of matches costs a cent.

4. Ants lay eggs.

5. Trees lives for thousands of years.

6. A coolie earns a lot of money.

7. Wasps make honey.

8. He takes the letters to the post office every day.

9. The sun shines everywhere each day.

10. We like lemonade.

11. This seat is made of leather.

12. These machines are driven by steam.

13. Flowers are grown in these fields.

14. I am often punished.

15. There are twelve months in a year.

16. John has left for Chicago.

17. This book belongs to her.

18. I think it is going to rain.

19. He drives to work every day.

20. Their class meets on the tenth floor.

21. The prisoner told the truth.

22. She dressed herself in her best clothes.

23. The sun shone brightly this morning.

24. The gardener threw a stone at the dog.

25. The soldiers fought well.

26. The boy laughed at them and thought he was very witty.

27. The servant put the lamp on the table.

28. The wind blew very hard last night.

29. The plate was broken to pieces.

30. The doctor came to see him yesterday.

B. 将下列句子依例改为问句：

例：He isn’t studying English now.

a. Isn’t he studying English now？

b. Why isn’t he studying English now？

1. William isn’t taking English lessons now.

2. Helen won’t be in class tomorrow.

3. She won’t be here on Thursday either.

4. He did not take his examination yesterday.

5. Mary does not like to study in the morning.

6. She didn’t attend the lesson this morning.

7. They don’t like to come to class so early.

8. They aren’t going to the movies tonight.

9. Mr. Smith did not come to class yesterday.

10. He will not be here on Sunday.

11. He doesn’t like to read aloud.

12. John hasn’t delivered the mail yet.

13. She does not like New York.

14. I did not study my lessons last night.

15. Marry never comes to class on time.

16. I didn’t bring my copybook with me.

17. John isn’t making goody progress.

18. John and Mary are not going to Washington.

19. Robert doesn’t eat breakfast in the cafeteria.

20. You did not speak to him this morning.

21. Mary wasn’t promoted to the next class.

22. There are not 20 persons in the house.

23. The book is not in the drawer.

24. They did not go for a walk in the park.

C. 将下列问句改为陈述句（Declarative Sentence）:

1. Have you found that kind of plant which grows in sand？

2. Did he see the event that he has described so well？

3. Does he like the scent of the rose as much as the flower？

4. Will they remain much longer in this lovely place？

5. In hot countries do men chiefly wear cotton garments？

6. Did the shepherd drive away the wolf from the flock？

7. Did he shear as many as ten sheep yesterday？

8. Will she wear the same dress that she wore before？

9. Did he write those splendid lines that I have just heard？

10. Does an elephant live for a hundred years？

11. Is an elephant the largest of all land-animals？

12. Does this seem to be fit reward for all your work？

13. Could he have done all this without assistance？

14. Did not the shepherd say that the sheep had strayed？

15. Should he not take his place among the rest？

16. Must we really start at this early hour？

17. Did he stand all day in the open air？

18. Does the sun rise at six in the season of the year？

19. Did she awake and get up when she was called？

20. Did you see by chance someone passing this way？

（3）疑问短语（Interrogative Phrases）

Isn’t she？Don’t you？etc.

这是一种缩短的问句形式，用在句尾以要求对方确认所言之事，否定句时用肯定的形式，如“does she？”等，肯定句时用否定形，如“isn’t she”等。

例：John is a good student——isn’t he？

She speaks English well——doesn’t she？

He was here at three o’clock——wasn’t he？

You didn’t enjoy the movie——did you？

注意：文中有助动词时，在缩短的问句中用该助动词；若文中无助动词时，则用 do，但动词 be 及 have 除外。

练习题（9）

用适当的缩短问句于下列句尾：

1. You wrote that letter____

2. She speaks English very well____

3. You live in Taipei____

4. You mailed that letter for me____

5. She is a very pretty girl____

6. He works on the fourth floor____

7. He doesn’t work on the third floor____

8. He has already left for America____

9. You studied English with Miss Smith last year____

10. He said he would be here at noon____

11. She is Mr. Smith’s secretary____

12. You work in the import department____

13. You are not married____

14. Your wife doesn’t speak English____

15. This pencil is yours____

16. These exercises are not difficult____

17. This bus stops at 4th Street____

（4）否定句（Negatives）

肯定句 | 否定句
（1）I tell a lie. | I do not tell a lie.
（2）I have a book. | I have not a book. I do not have a book.（美）
（3）I am a student. | I am not a student.
（4）I can speak English. | I can not speak English.

例（1）表示凡无助动词的肯定句变为否定句时，须补上助动词 do，然后在 do 后加上 not。但用 never 时，则不需加 do。

例（2）和（3）表示 have 和 be 两动词，其否定句可不用助动词，只将 not 放在它们之后即可。

have 用 do 来构成否定句，系美国的用法。

例（4）表示凡有助动词的肯定句变为否定句时，只在第一个助动词之后加上 not 即可。

英文中只有十二个动词或助动词，not 可放在其后，兹举出以供参考：have、be、do、shall、will、can、may、must、ought、need、dare、used。

但其中 do 用为动词时，则与一般动词同，须用 do 来构成否定，如“Why don’t you do it？”。need 和 dare 亦然，如“I don’t need any more help now. ”，“I didn’t dare to go. ”。又，used not 之缩短形为 usen’t 或 usedn’t（d 不发音）。

注意：（1）用 never 来构成否定句时，则不需用 do。如“I never tell a lie. ”neither...nor 之时亦同，如“I like neither this nor that. ”。

（2）一切命令句，不论何种动词，概用 do not（don’t）来构成否定句，如“Don’t be silly！”“Do not go！”等。

（3）have to（= must）的否定形为 do not have to，绝不可误为 have not to。

（4）不定词及分词之否定形：将 not 放在前，如“to be or not to be”；“not knowing，I cannot cry. ”。

练习题（10）

A. 用 not 于适当的地方，变下列句子为否定句：

1. He has gone out of town.

2. They will be in class tomorrow.

3. I can meet you tonight.

4. I may be able to go with you.

5. We are going to the seashore on our vacation.

6. He will leave on the five o’clock train.

7. He is an engineer.

8. Mr. Smith has studied English for a long time.

9. You must write your exercise in pencil.

10. Mary is taking lessons from Miss Reese.

11. He will be here at five o’clock.

12. I have finished writing my exercise.

13. He is making much progress.

14. We shall see you tomorrow.

15. John used to study hard.

16. I dare ask him.

17. Mary will be promoted to the next class.

18. He has been in class since last month.

19. You ought to go.

20. I have a good library.

21. He is a man of honor.

B. 将下列句子变为否定句：

1. I felt much surprised at what I saw.

2. You sang better yesterday than today.

3. We heard of your success from your father.

4. It rained hard at twelve o’clock.

5. The sun rose at six o’clock this morning.

6. The fox fell into the trap last night.

7. The bees gathered much honey from those flowers.

8. This tree strikes its roots deep into the ground.

9. Some trees die before they are a hundred years old.

10. They told the boy to keep watch over the flock.

11. He strove to do his very best in his new class.

12. He gave as much as sixpence for that little book.

13. John made many mistakes in his examination.

14. It rains every day in New York.

15. I had time to study my lesson last night.

16. I understood everything he said.

17. He eats his lunch at twelve o’clock.

18. She wants to learn English.

19. He began his new work on the fifteenth.

20. Our classroom has three windows in it.

21. I am afraid in the dark.

22. He stayed in Taipei for a long time.

23. We need a rag in our room.

24. We use many books during our lesson.

25. John came to class ten minutes late.

26. Mary likes to study French.

27. They moved to Taichung.

28. William speaks English well.

C. 将下列否定句改为肯定句：

1. He did not see me secretly entering the room.

2. The sun does not rise at five o’clock.

3. The watchman did not run away from the thief.

4. We did not think John to be as clever as James.

5. He did not speak about the coldness of the classroom.

6. She does not think that a complaint should be made.

7. He did not feel ill during his absence from home.

8. The lightning did not strike the top of the house.

9. The noise in the street did not break my sleep.

10. He does not come here in time for his dinner.

11. They did not seek for the lamb that had been lost.

12. The dog did not hunt the deer without success.

13. The master does not expect me to finish this all at once.

14. This book does not seem to be as interesting as that.

15. He did not hear，I think，all that I said to him.

16. The child，walking along the bank，did not fall into the river.

17. This student did not strive to keep at the head of the class.

18. Bees do not gather much honey from these flowers.

19. I will not give this man any money.

（5）被动语态（Passive Voice）

be + past particple + by【with，at，in，to】

Active | Passive
（1）I respect him. | He is respected by me.
（2）I gave him a book. | A book w as given him by me. He was given a book by me.
（3）The gentleman made her his servant. | She was made his servant by the gentleman.
（4）They say he is a scholar. | It is said that he is a scholar.
（5）They have sent for the doctor. | The doctor has been sent for.
（6）Who invented the radio？ | By whom was the radio invented？
（7）Do not forget it. | Let it not be forgotten.

注意：例（4）的主语 they，系指一般的人，凡属此用法的 we、you、one、they 等代词为主语的句子，变为被动句时，by us、by you、by them 等通例省去。

例（5）系表示“动词 + 介词” = 及物动词一类的成语，变为被动句时绝不可将介词忘掉，如 sent for 应视为一个词处理。

例（6）疑问句时，疑问词须放在句首。

例（7）命令句时须用 Let。

练习题（11）

A. 将下面的句子改为被动语态（Passive Voice）：

1. The movie disappointed us very much.

2. Mr. Jones manages the export division.

3. The teacher teaches us English.

4. They started a dancing class last week.

5. He bought me this book yesterday.

6. Smith has to finish that report tomorrow.

7. Who has broken this glass？

8. The police arrested five workers.

9. Columbus discovered America in 1492.

10. The doctor ordered him to take a long rest.

11. A guide showed us the city.

12. If a cat may look at a king，it may look at me too.

13. The city welcomed them back on their return from the battlefield.

14. Don’t disturb me.

15. Will not a sense of duty persuade him to work better？

16. The meeting called upon me to give my reasons.

17. Should he find me at home，I would not receive him.

18. The language that he used quite shocked me.

19. Whom did they blame for that unfortunate accident？

20. The people elected him president.

B. 将下面的句子改为自动语态（Active Voice）：

1. The town was captured by the enemy.

2. The money was stolen by an unknown person.

3. I was much hurt by his voice and manner.

4. He was struck by lightning，as he sat under a tree.

5. My brother and I were attacked by a bull.

6. The shops are closed by all the teachers.

7. The soil of India is made fertile by the annual rains.

8. The walls of the house were cracked by an earthquake.

9. Has the door been shut by you？

10. Food is being cooked by me.

（6）格（Case）

1. 主格（Nominative Case）

a. 名词的主格和宾格同形。

b. 代词的主格和宾格：I、me；he、him；she、her；we、us；they、them；who、whom；thou、thee（很少用）；you（两者同形）；it（同形）。代词主格的用途：

（1）用为主语 I will come.

（2）用在 be 动词之后为补语，That is he. 但 It is me. 现在白话中是通用的了，但只限 me 一词而已，其他的代词则不可。

练习题（12）

代词的格有错误者改正之：

1. I have no doubt at all that it was her who spoke.

2. Her and Mrs. C. were expected here today.

3. It was her who wrote that letter，not him.

4. Him and his father were both taken ill that day.

5. Whom do men say that I am？

6. I would not do it，if I were him.

7. I was quite certain that it could not be her.

8. Who made that noise？Not him，sir，but me.

9. Were you there，or was it him that I saw？

10. Them that are idle are not wanted here.

11. Her father and me will soon find out where she is.

12. Tom，William，and me went out for a ramble.

13. Him and me were playing at marbles outside the school door.

14. May Robert and me go out for a walk by ourselves？

15. I have a son，whom I intend shall learn Greek.

2. 宾格（Accusative Case）

宾格的用途：

a. 为动词的目的语：I like her.

b. 为介词的目的语：They are laughing at me.

c. 用在“to be”之后，而“to be”之前有及物动词和其目的语时：

That man is so like Tom that I took it to be him.

d. 用在 like、unlike、near 等形容词之后，The portrait is very like him.

练习题（13）

A. 下列句中之代词，其格（case）有错误者，改正之：

1. He asked John and I to go to lunch.

2. I knew it to be he.

3. I knew that it was her who called me.

4. He hurried Tom and I out the back door.

5. The lucky ones who received the prizes are Jenny，Collins，and me.

6. He wishes Henry and I to remain this evening.

7. We believe you and he to be entirely above suspicion.

8. The superintendent wishes to see you and I at five o’clock.

9. If I were him，I wouldn’t ask for a vacation at this time.

10. Why didn’t you tell Ira and I that you weren’t going？

11. It must have been Ella and him who rang up when we were out.

12. When he got off the train，there were John and myself waiting to greet him.

13. The secretary and myself will prepare a statement for the meeting.

14. The Entertainment Committee holds it’s meetings in Room 13.

15. For the life of me I can’t think of who to recommend.

16. John called the secretary and I into his office.

B. 用第一人称或第三人称代词填入空白处。

1. He thought the burglars were____.

2. He mistook the burglars for____.

3. William is better at his lessons than____.

4. It is____.

5. The portrait is very like____.

6. Nobody volunteered except Edward and____.

7. ____boys have formed a debating club.

8. Mr. Jones is going to give____boys a baseball field.

9. Who is there？____.

10. Between you and____I am not sorry that he has resigned，

11. If I were____I would study art.

12. Arthur likes you better than____.

13. Behind Ruth and____came the guest of honor.

14. Automobiles are not for such as____.

15. It was____that Joseph meant.

16. ____two are always together.

17. Richard dislikes everybody，____most of all.

3. Case of pronoun after“than”or“as”

用在连词 than 或 as 之后的人称代词，其格须与为其比较对象的名词或代词一致。

（1） | He is as wise as she（is）. He is wiser than she（is）. | （He 为 She 的比较对象）
（2） | He loves her better than（he loves）me. He loves her as well as（he loves）me. | （her 为 me 之比较对象）
（3） | He loves her better than I（loves her）. He loves her as well as I（loves her）. | （He 为 I 之比较对象）

故 | He likes you better than I. He likes you better than me. | 都是不错的，若在 I 后补上 like you，在 me 前补上 he likes，

则知何以要用 I 或 me 了，因一为省去的动词 like 之主语，而一则为省去的动词 likes 之目的语。

至于动词为 be 之场合，则如例（1）所示，代词概为主格，因其为省去的动词 is 的主语，自不能用宾格，所以 He is taller than me. 和 He is as tall as me. 皆是错的，me 必须改为 I。

注意：用在 than 之后的关系代词“who”，必须用宾格 whom。

练习题（14）

A. 将下列句中省去的动词补出，勿改变 than 或 as 之后的代词的格：

1. He is as clever as I，but not so clever as Tom.

2. I have not written so much or so clearly as he.

3. Tom has seen that man quite as often as I.

4. Tom has seen that man quite as often as me.

5. They take as much pleasure in work as he in idleness.

6. The dog barks more fiercely at you than at them.

7. The writer understood the subject better than they.

8. He is better off than I in money，but I am better off than he in knowing how to spend it.

9. None are so blind as they who will not see.

10. The mother likes to be admired as much as he.

11. So brave a man as he was never seen before.

12. That book impressed me more than him.

13. Few men have been more witty than Dickens.

14. He is more true to his friends than they to him.

15. In one lesson I made more faults than he in two.

B. 代词的格有错者改正之，且将省去的动词补出：

1. You had quite as good a chance of success as me.

2. A and B are better off than us in everything.

3. My partners have gained more than me by this plan.

4. Though her brother has studied more books than her，he has not so much common sense as her

in daily life.

5. He rides better than her，but she sings better than him.

6. That author wrote a much better book than him.

7. He is richer than me in cash，but not in reputation.

8. None are so deaf as them that refuse to hear.

9. I never before saw any girl so pretty as her.

10. Very few persons spoke so well as him at the meeting.

11. He is more convinced than me of the truth of that saying.

12. No one is more to be pitied than him for what has happened.

（7）人称代词的位置（Position of Personal Pronoun）

说到自己和他人时，应最后说“我”。

如 James and I had a long walk.（正）

但不可说 I and James had a long walk.（误）

至于第二人称“you”的位置，虽无一定的规则，但普遍都先说，以对对方表示恭敬。

如 You and James must be back by four o’clock.

练习题（15）

A. 将每对句子变为一句，注意代词的位置的先后次序。

例 | I can go tomorrow. You can go tomorrow. | = You and I can go tomorrow.

1. I rowed the boat. The boatman rowed the boat.

2. You must work harder. James must work harder.

3. You have been invited. Your father has been invited.

4. He saw the horse kick. I saw the horse kick.

5. The guests were glad of that. We were glad of that.

6. I was not afraid. The boatman was not afraid.

7. The noise alarmed us. The noise alarmed him.

8. The music delighted me. The music delighted you.

B. 代词的位置、数和格，有错误者改正之。

1. Them and me had a great deal of fun that day.

2. Me and my sister are much pleased with that song.

3. I hope you will invite my sister and I again.

4. Who have been invited？William and us.

5. Us and the three boys went out to fly the kite.

6. Me and Smith will play James and he.

7. This heavy road has tired out my pony and I.

8. It is fine now；me and my sister want to go out.

（8）指示代词（Demonstrative Pronouns）

指示代词的数，必须与其所指的名词一致。

The climate of England is cooler than that（= the climate）of India.（单数）

The fish of the sea are larger than those（= the fish）of rivers.（复数）

如果先行词名词有不定冠词且系泛指者，则须用不定指示代词 one 以代之，如 A box made of wood is larger than one（= a box）made of iron.

练习题（16）

用适当的代词填入空白处。

1. A house built of brick lasts longer than____built of wood.

2. Do you want a knife？Yes，I want____.

3. The voice of woman is softer than____of a man.

4. He has no coat，and no money to buy____.

5. The men of Rome were more warlike than____of Athens.

6. The sting of a wasp gives less pain than____of a hornet.

7. The air of hills is cooler than____of lowlands.

8. The horns of these oxen are less crooked than____of stags.

9. The ceiling of my room is higher than____of yours.

10. I prefer your singing to____of your sister.

11. I like books on science better than____on language.

12. A glass of plain water will suit you better than____of wine.

13. He bought a knife，and lent____to me.

（9）代词与先行词（Pronouns and Antecedents）

1. 代词的人称、数及性须与其先行词一致。

2. 先行词为 one 时，其代词亦用 one。

3. 先行词为 you and I 或 he and I 时，其代词用 we；先行词为 you and he 时，代词用 you，先行词为 he and James 时代词用 they。

练习题（17）

用适当的代词填入空白处。

1. If one is ambitious____will work hard.

2. One does not like____motives to be doubted.

3. If anybody wishes to go，____may go.

4. Every member of this class must hand in____composition.

5. Each hurries toward____home.

6. Each of us must lead____own life.

7. Miss Smith is teaching____class now.

8. Mr. and Mrs. Smith are living in____new apartment.

9. John is on____vacation.

10. Give a list of the things you wish，and I will telephone for____ .

11. Everybody thinks____own way is wise.

12. If anybody has a better plan，now is the time for____to speak.

13. It was an old-fashioned picnic，every person furnishing____share of the provisions.

14. When anybody is talking，it is bad manners to interrupt____.

15. I know both you and he have done____duty.

16. You and I have done____best.

（10）关系代词及疑问代词（Relative and Interrogative Pronouns）

1. same 之后的关系代词须用 that。

2. such 之后的关系代词须用 as。

例：This is the same man that came before.

He is not such a man as I wanted.

3. 当 as 之后的动词省略时，则 same 之后用 as。

例：This book is the same as mine（is）.

练习题（18）

A. 用适当的关系代词填入空白处：

1. This is the boy____I recommended.

2. The boy____I recommended is a Swede.

3. The boy____brought the letter is，not the one____I recommended.

4. I told Anna，____I knew would keep my secret.

5. I told Anna，____I knew I could trust.

6. I told Anna，____I knew to be trustworthy.

7. I told Anna，____I knew intimately.

8. No one____you know lives in this street.

9. All____I can say is，I am sorry.

10. Give me the same horse____I had yesterday.

11. A dog，____showed his teeth and growled，blocked the way.

12. Choose the partner____you like best.

13. The policeman was leading a little child____had lost its mother.

14. Take such measures____you deem necessary.

15. Take____measures seem necessary.

16. Take the measures____seem to you necessary.

17. My hat is of the same size____yours.

18. This is the picture____I am so fond of.

19. This is the picture of____I am so proud.

20. The man____is talking to Henry is the one____owns this house.

B. 将 who（ever）或 whom（ever）填入空白处：

1. ____do you think will be the next Mayor of Taipei？

2. He is the student____was chosen to speak for his class.

3. Students____some teachers would call“naughty”are often very clever.

4. ____shall we have for the president of our English Club？

5. ____is that man standing on the platform？

6. To____are you sending the letter？

7. It was they____visited our school last month.

8. The company wants a man____it can trust.

9. To____did you give the book？

10. We never discovered____the thief was.

11. ____was it？

12. ____do you think will help us？

13. ____did you promise？

14. ____shall we choose secretary？

15. I know____you are.

16. You may work with____you wish.

17. You are the person____I wish to see.

18. There will be a price for____makes the highest score.

19. ____could it have been that broke the window pane？

20. We sent invitations to all____we believed to be interested in the school.

21. He asked me____was elected.

22. ____do you regard as the better scholar of the two？

23. ____did you see when you called？

24. ____do you think is the best physician in town？

25. ____do you suppose I am？

C. 用 which 或 what 填入空白处：

1. Is this the book____you want？

2. The man refused to tell me____he wanted.

3. This is the one____he means.

4. She wants to know____you are going to do tonight.

5. He took everything____he wanted.

6. She didn’t believe anything____I said to her.

7. Did he tell you____he wanted you to do？

8. I’ll do anything____he asks me to do.

9. Is this the letter____you are referring to？

10. He asked me____I was doing.

11. This is the book____Mr. Smith sent me.

12. That is the one____he wants.

13. I told him____the word meant.

14. This was a development____no one had expected.

15. These are the ones____I want.

16. Is this the book____he asked you for？

17. I couldn’t imagine____he was trying to say.

18. She has all the money____she needs.

19. He took with him everything____he needed for his trip.

20. A man is judged by the books____he reads.

21. He lost all the money____he had so carefully saved.

22. Have you taken everything____you need？

D. 依例句所示将下列句中的关系代词省去（注意变更介词的位置）：

例： | He is the man to whom I spoke. He is the man（whom）I spoke to.
| That is a problem on which we must spend some time. That is a problem we must spend some time on.

1. The man to whom you spoke is here now.

2. I have bought the book about which I spoke to you yesterday on the telephone.

3. He is the man whom I mean.

4. I should like to buy the book at which I was looking yesterday.

5. Is this the letter for which you asked me yesterday？

6. That is a subject on which we will have to spend considerable time and money.

7. That is a question about which I must speak to you.

8. Which is the door at which you knocked？

9. That is the file out of which I got the letter.

10. That is the shelf from which I took the book down.

11. Which is the tree under which they hid the money？

12. That is the question over which they argued.

13. That is the story at which we were laughing so hard.

14. This is the room about which he enquired.

15. This is the one which he wants.

16. He is the man that I saw in the room.

17. Was Mr. Smith the man to whom you talked？

18. A simple relative pronoun must always have an antecedent to which it refers.

E. 将省去的关系代词补出：

1. It was a bold step she had taken.

2. I am not altogether unqualified for the business I have in hand.

3. His taste of books is a little too just for the age he lives in.

4. Censure is the tax a man pays to the public for being eminent.

5. Who is the wittiest man you know？

6. Morton was the only friend I had.

7. That sonata was the first piece I learned.

8. Ten dollars is the price he asks.

9. Are you the man I bought the coat of？

10. This is the book we are reading evenings.

11. Take any seat you like.

12.“Faust” is the only opera I care for.

13. I have done all I can.

练习题（19）

A. 用适当的代词填入空白处：

1. She behaved____like a lady.

2. ____must be nice to have all your sons and daughters around you.

3. Was____you who sent me the box？

4. He flattered____that he had told that tale very well.

5. ____was possible that they might not return till late the next day.

6. I think____highly probable that she should come to help us at once.

7. ____is very kind，that aunt of yours.

B. 用适当的指示代词填入空白处：

1. Our greeting was like____of old friends.

2. You must help him，and____immediately.

3. There was no objection on the part of____present.

4. ____which is good to be done must be done at once.

5. ____who believe it are very stupid.

C. 将括号中错误的词划去：

1. Have you | some any | lessons to prepare？

2. I haven’t | some any | lessons to prepare.

3. Will you ring me | some any | water？

4. I have | some any | new books at home.

5. The street was lined with spectators on | either both | side.

6. Have you ever seen an airship？Yes，I have seen | one. it. |

7. Each of us has | his our | claims.

D. 将括号中错误的关系代词划去：

1. My older brother | whose who | name is Daniel，is a Christian preacher.

2. It was a poor weapon，but perhaps the best | that which who | he could lay his hands on at the moment.

3. Among his friends in the town there was one man | who that whom | he loved dearly.

4. People endeavoured to improve the society in | that which | they lived.

5. She had already refused several offers of marriage with a grand air， | which that | had got her hard　names among the neighbours.

6. The dogs，not one of | which that | he recognized for an old acquaintance，barked at him as he passed.

7. The expression with | that which | he regarded me had much intelligence.

8. People came to hear | what that | he had to relate.

9. He never saw such big ships | that as | you may see any day at our seaports.

10. I cannot repeat all | which what that | I heard.

E. 用疑问代词填入空白处：

1. ____began the quarrel？

2. About____were you speaking？

3. ____book is this？

4. ____of the two players do you like better？

5. ____do you think I wanted？

6. ____play of Shakespeare do you like best？

7. ____did you say won the prize？

8. ____was she，do you suppose？

9. ____do you think has done it？

10. ____do men say that I am？

F. 代词的用法有错误者，改正之：

1. The grass as grows in this lawn is very coarse.

2. Such a man who came today is not fit for the work.

3. I return the book what you lent me three days ago.

4. I do not like any one as does not speak truth.

5. The class what you teach is getting on well.

6. The carpenter as made that box is a very good workman.

7. I will tell you everything what I know about it.

8. Such things which they say are not to be believed.

9. The mason as built that wall built it crooked.

10. The matter what you inquire about does not concern you.

11. Such news that you brought spread quickly through the town.

12. Friendship is the virtue what I admired most.

13. He，not I，was the man as deceived you.

14. Most of all I like such scent that comes from roses.

15. A boy as is always talking can neither learn nor work.

16. The man what does not pay his debt is not honest.

17. The same book what you read last week I am reading now.

18. A bad potato is the worst thing as you will find anywhere.

19. This is the thing as he was meaning all the time.

20. Such things that do harm should be avoided.

（11）形容词与副词（Adjectives and Adverbs）

1. 副词不一定以 -ly 为语尾，如 fast、near、hard、long、much、ill、little 等，“形”“副”同形。

2. 形容词有以 -ly 为语尾者，如 friendly、manly、cowardly，此类形容词不能加 -ly 为副词，须用副词短语的方式如 in a manly way。

练习题（20）

A. 改正下列句中之错误（形容词或副词）：

1. He writes excellent：no one in the class can write as neat and clear as he does.

2. There is no fear：he will do it easy，even if you can’t.

3. She walks very feeble after that long illness.

4. The man who said that will pay for it dear.

5. He reads rather indistinct，and requires practice.

6. He will help you considerable，if you ask him.

7. They came to school very regular all last week.

8. He treated us all free and fair，so we can’t complain.

9. The battle raged fierce from morning till evening.

10. That was noble spoken；it pleased me to hear it.

11. They were all marvellous angry on hearing this.

12. He did it quite accidental；for he was more than half asleep.

13. I will act agreeable to your wishes in all things.

14. He spoke very intelligent；we all understood him.

15. He treated us handsome，and we ought to feel gratified.

16. I am sure he did not upset the chair intentional.

B. 将括号内错误的词划去：

1. The medicine tasted（bad，badly）.

2. You will feel（safe，safely）with him.

3. He felt（quick，quickly）in his pockets for the money.

4. He feels（strong，strongly）about that question.

5. He feels（strong，strongly）again after his illness.

6. John looked（uneasy，uneasily）standing before the class.

7. Mary kept looking（uneasy，uneasily）at the teacher.

8. The air certainly smells（fresh，freshly）this morning.

9. This cake tastes too（sweet，sweetly）for me.

10. A stranger appeared（sudden，suddenly）at the door.

11. I felt（awkward，awkwardly）standing there before everyone.

12. The man felt（awkward，awkwardly）in his pockets for the keys.

13. The man looked very（suspicious，suspiciously）to me.

14. The policeman also looked at him（suspicious，suspiciously）.

15. The flower smells（sweet，sweetly）.

16. John looks（bad，badly）after his illness.

17. This cream tastes（sour，sourly）to me.

18. Look（careful，carefully）at the picture，and you will understand what I mean.

C. 将括号内的词用为形容词或副词填于空白处：

1. The dog was quite____（friendly）.

2. He did the exercise very____（thorough）.

3. He could do it more____（easy）if he wanted.

4. He is a very____（fast）worker.

5. John worked very____（hard）this semester.

6. John did the work very____（fast）.

7. He will remain in his country____（temporary）.

8. Come____（quick）. We need your help.

9. George appears to be a very____（systematic）worker.

10. You should work more____（systematic）if you wish results.

（12）比较（Degrees of Comparison）

1. 比较的语尾变化：

a. 一音节词及某些二音节词：

比较级 + er。如 long→long er，wise→wis er，big→big ger，dry→dr ier，noble→nobl er，often→often er。

最高级 + est。 如 long→long est，wise→wis est，big→big gest，dry→dr iest，noble→nobl es t，often→often est，happy→happ iest。

b. 二音节以上的词：

比较级：加 more 在前，如 honest→ more honest，happily→ more happily，interesting→ more interesting。

最高级：加 most 在前，如 useful→ most useful，carefully→ most carefully，honest→ most honest，以上为有规则的变化，至于不规则变化如 good→better→best 之类，则如不规则动词一样，须一一记住方可。

2. 比较变化的用法：

a. 比较级用于比较二者之事物。

A is bigger than B.（比较级常与 than 连用）

b. 三者以上之比较时，用最高级。

He is the biggest of all.（最高级常有定冠词 the）

练习题（21）

A. 将括号中的形客词用为比较级或最高级：

1. He is the（strong）boy in the whole school.

2. Of the two sisters Mary is the（beautiful）.

3. Ann is the（young）of my four sisters.

4. John is the（old）of all my friends.

5. This is the（good）story I have ever read.

6. Which do you like（good）tea or coffee？

7. Iron is the（useful）of all metals.

8. The Yangtse is the（large）river in China.

9. Which of the two boys is（tall）？

10. George is（bad）than his brother.

B. 下列文中有错误者，改正之：

1. Keelung is smaller to Taipei.

2. New York is the larger city in the United States.

3. He is the better student from all.

4. John is more stronger than his brother.

5. I am two years elder than my sister.

6. Which is the heaviest，you or I？

7. Which of the three girls is the elder？

8. This boy’s manners are more good than his brother’s.

9. Which of the boys is the taller to the class？

10. Mount Everest is the higher mountain of the world.

C. 将括号中正确的词填入空白处：

1. He sat down and said nothing____（farther，further）.

2. Is that the____edition of the Times（last，latest）.

3. Wash your hands if they are not____（clean，clear）.

4. A prize was given to____one of the two best students（each，every）.

5. He knows____words than his brother（less，fewer）.

6. I was____when I heard of his father’s death（angry，sorry）.

7. John is____than his cousin（higher，taller）.

8. Tom is five years old，he is too____to go to school（small，young）.

9. George is my____brother（older，elder）.

10. My brother George is____than I am（older，elder）.

（13）冠词（The Articles）

1. a 和 an 的用途：

（1）a 用于辅音之前（所谓辅音系指该词的实际读音而言）。

例：a b ox，a u seful thing（因 u = 〔ju：〕），a ew e lamb（因 ew = 〔ju：〕），a o ne-eyed man（因 o = 〔wʌ〕）

（2）an 用于元音之前（所谓元音指实际的读音而言）。

例：an o x，an h ou r，an h ei r，an h o nest man（因 h 不发音）

练习题（22）

下列举句中的不定冠词（a、an），如有用错者改正之。

1. There is a inkspot on that paper. Ink is an useful article.

2. He was shot by a arrow while riding an horse.

3. I never allow a organ to be played in front of my window.

4. A box of tools would be an useful present to him.

5. He gave a apple to one of them，and a orange to the other.

6. He is a untidy man，both in his work and in his dress.

7. Have you an history of America to lend me？

8. He was a African by birth，not an European.

9. He was kept two months laid up in an hospital.

10. I never saw such a thing before，it was an unique sight.

11. He was looked upon as an hero by all who knew him.

12. He was cheered with an universal shout of applause.

13. Have you a umbrella that you could lend me？

2. 关于冠词特别注意事项：

（1）冠词之反复：

a. 两个名词之前各别用冠词时，表示所指者为各别的两物（人）。

例：The poet and the statesman are dead.（两个不同的人）

The poet and statesman is dead.（同一人）

b. 修饰同一名词的两个形容词之前，各有冠词时，则指两个不同之物（人）。

例：I have a black and a white cat.（黑猫和白猫各一）

I have a black and white cat.（黑白花纹的一猫）

c. 但只用一次冠词，亦可指不同之二物（人），但名词须变为复数。

例：1. Bring me the black and the white cat.（两猫）

2. Bring me the black and white cats.（两猫）

3. Bring me the black and white cat.（一猫）

　　上例中1和2同表示黑和白的两只猫，3则为黑白花的一只猫。

（2）不定冠词之用法：凡指一般者而非特殊者时：

公式：A（n）+ 单数名词 = 复数名词

例：A man cannot live long without food and drink.

Men cannot live long without food and drink.

（3）定冠词之用法：指特定者用之，名词单复数皆可：

例：The book on the table is a dictionary.（特指在桌上的那本书）

The honesty of my servant is doubtful.（专指我的仆人的忠实）

The waves at that time were very rough.（专指那个时候的浪）

但“定冠词 + 单数名词”有时表示该种类全体，此时则在意义上与“不定冠词 + 单数名词”没有多大分别。

例：The horse is a noble animal.（马这种动物）

此时 The horse 改为 A horse 亦未尝不可。

练习题（23）

A. 用适当的冠词填入空白处：

1. ____chair on which you are sitting is not comfortable.

2. There is____pencil on the desk.

3. ____customer whom Mr. Smith telephoned this morning is here now，waiting to see him.

4. There is____customer waiting to see Mr. Smith.

5. I should like to find____good book to read tonight.

6. ____book which I am reading now is a very good one.

7. ____book which gave me the greatest pleasure was“Les Miserable”.

8. ____good book is always a pleasure to me.

9. Have you____cigarette？

10. John angrily threw away____cigarette he was smoking.

B. 下列句子的空白处，若需要冠词时，用适当者填入之。

1. ____coal is mined in____many countries.

2. ____fresh air is necessary for____health.

3. ____water must be pure when used for drinking purposes.

4. ____water in the ocean is very salty.

5. Plenty of____rain and____sun are necessary for the raising of cotton.

6. ____tea will not keep you awake at night.

7. ____tea which is imported from____China is of good quality.

8. ____tea in this pot is weak.

9. ____cotton is one of____important products of____South.

10. ____tea，____cotton，and____rice come from____India.

11. ____steel in this building came from____Pittsburgh.

12. ____copper is a good conductor of____electricity.

13. New York city is____largest city in____United States.

C. 将下列句中的冠词补出：

1. Rhone River flows through Lake Geneva，which acts as filter for river.

2. Most of Chinese live on plain of Yang-tse Kiang. Many live on plain of Hwan Ho.

3. Mt. Everest is highest mountain in world.

4. In order to reach Philippine Islands from Hong Kong one must cross China Sea.

5. Mississippi is longest river in north America.

6. Panama Canal joins Pacific and Atlantic oceans.

7. First World War began in month of August，1914.

8. President of United States is elected every four years.

9. Himalayas are greatest mountain range.

10. Wolf is animal of same family as dog.

D. 将下列句子变为单数，注意加上适当的冠词：

1. Camels travel across the desert.

2. Coolies work very hard.

3. Sharks are dangerous creatures.

4. Cows do not eat flesh.

5. Monkeys have long tails.

6. Footballs are filled with air.

7. Rats are larger than mice.

8. Bicycles have two wheels.

9. Kangaroos do not lay eggs.

10. Fire engines carry ladders.

练习题（24）

补出必需的冠词，或划去多余的冠词，或依冠词之必要而变更名词之数。

1. I have just bought a fresh copy of the Old and New Testament.

2. The five elements，according to the Hindoos，are the earth，the air，the fire，the water，and

the ether.

3. Burnt child shunts the fire.

4. The old and new method of cure failed equally with him.

5. A cool and a bracing air suits me better than anything.

6. The black and the white horse that he rides fell with him.

7. I have to keep two servant-maids for this house，a cook and housemaid.

8. The just and the merciful general spared the conquered.

9. A live ass is better than dead lion.

10. The men have a higher degree of reason than the brutes.

11. He was much respected both by the civil and military officers.

12. The greatest traders in Europe are the English，Germans，and Dutch.

13. The loyal and disloyal members were agreed on this point.

14. The two parties，the Whig and Tory，were nearly equally balanced.

15. There are in this town a club，public library，and swimming bath.

16. This book is the work of a patient and an acute observer.

（14）名词所有格（Nouns in Possessive Case）

名词的所有格由加’s（apostrophe s）于名词而构成，但在如下的场合，s 可省去，仅用“’”。

（1）有复数语尾 s 的复数名词：

如 A girls’ school；the students’ rooms.

（2）最后音节为“s + 元音 + s”的固有名词：

如 Mo ses ’ laws；for Je sus ’ sake.

（3）有 s 或 ce 语尾的单数名词，用在 for...sake 之间者。

如 For appearance’ sake；for goodness’ sake.

合成语的所有格，’s 应加在最后一字上。

如 My mother-in-law’s child；the Queen of England’s yacht；his brother George’s wife.

练习题（25）

将下列句子的所有格名词改为复数或单数，并作其他必要之更改。

1. My niece’s book has been left on the shelf：she is careless.

2. The thief’s trick was found out through his own carelessness.

3. The horse’s hoof will be hurt if it is not shod.

4. Did you see any lady’s cloak in this room？

5. A mistress’s order must be obeyed by her pupils.

6. Many an ox’s hide was brought into the market and sold.

7. Try to rescue that ship’s crew before the ship is lost.

8. We have found the robbers’ cave；they will soon be caught.

9. A man’s muscles are stronger than a woman’s.

10. A librarian’s salary is seldom as high as it should be.

11. The witnesses’’evidence was not to be believed.

12. The lioness’s roar was heard far and wide.

13. A hero’s exploits will always be remembered.

14. The dwarf’s arm was as short as that of a child.

15. The wife’s quarters were well planned and well built.

16. The duchess’s jewel has been found by the police.

17. I dislike to hear the goose’s cackling.

（15）所有格形容词（Possessive adjectives）

人称代词的所有格的两种用法：

1. 放在名词之前作为形容词用者，如 my、（thy）、his、her、its、our、your、their；My book、her book、our books。

2. 作为代词用者，如 mine、（thine）、his、hers、its、ours、yours、theirs（既系代词，故其后不用名词）。

例：a. This book is mine. That house is theirs.

b. My horse and yours（= your horse）are both tired.

c. That horse of yours is tired.

注意：所有格不能与 a（n）、the、some、any、no、this、that 等词连用，故有（c）例的表现法，因 That your horse 不是英语的语法，必须将所有格放在名词之后，而用 of 与名词相联结，但此时的所有格，系一种代词了。

练习题（26）

A. 将括号中的代词用为适当的所有格：

1. That manner of（you）is not as good as it should be.

2. The book which you are reading is（I），not（he）.

3.（I）horse is not so strong as（you）or（he）.

4.（He）cow gives much more milk than（I）or（you）.

5. What he calls（he）property is not really（he）.

6. The poet prefers（he）own poem to（you）or（she）.

7. That house of（they）is very handsomely furnished.

8.（I）house and（you）were built on precisely the same plan.

9.（She）wishes are of no importance compared with（you）.

10. That face of（she）looks more wrinkled than（I）.

11. I wish I had seen that letter of（you）before I posted（I）.

B. 下列句子有错误者，改正之：

1. He is a my friend.

2. That your shilling is very old.

3. This his coat is well made.

4. We will lend you those our books.

5. Her that manner surprised me.

6. May I borrow some your magazines？

（16）反身代词（Reflextive Pronouns）

反身代词虽可用为动词或介词的目的语，但不可用为主语：

例：I did it myself.（正）

Myself did it.（误）（将 myself 改为 I 或在其前加上 I）

反身代词虽不能为动词的主语，但可用来加强代词或名词的意义。

例：I myself did it.

She is beauty itself.

练习题（27）

下列句子有错误者，改正之：

1. Himself and she hurt themselves badly in falling over that rock.

2. You must have seen him；myself saw him distinctly.

3. Bees provide their selves with honey against the winter.

4. He sold umbrella，and has bought his self a new one.

5. The girl is seated in the field：herself brought the chair.

6. They，not himself，paid the penalty of his faults.

7. Both herself and Mary were wandering in the woods.

8. John his self will pay for the book that he lost.

9. Why do they injure their self in that way？

10. War，as himself avowed，was necessary to his hold on France.

11. They dressed them self out in all their best clothes.

12. Jane was waiting for them：himself saw them go in.

13. He never acted thus when himself was in office.

14. That is his book：he paid for it his self.

15. Himself and Smith witnessed it.

（17）将来时态（The Future Tenses）

（1）单纯将来

I We | shall | you will go | He They | Will go

注意：you will go 单复同形，但在古文则单数形为 Thou wilt go. 又第二人称的疑问形有二，只表示将来时，须将 will 换为 shall，含有意志之时方用 will。

shall 用于第二、三人称时，则有发言者的意志、威胁、承诺、决心、希望、决定等意，will 用于第一人称则有意志之意。

如“He shall（= I will let him）live. ”。

练习题（28）

A. 用 will 或 shall 填入空白处：

1. I____be glad to see you.

2. We____be obliged to go home early.

3. I____help you whenever you wish.

4. I promise that he____not trouble you again.

5. You____be kind enough to take your seat.

6. We____miss our train，I fear.

7. I must hurry or I____be late.

8. Robert____have as much as is good for him.

9. Arthur____disobey me in spite of all I can do.

10. Arthur____obey you，I am sure.

11. Arthur____obey me，or I____punish him.

12. If we reject these offers，we____regret it.

13. I____no longer endure his insolence.

14. ____they return in season for dinner？

15. I____have to excuse you this time，I suppose.

16. You____not leave this room until you have confessed.

17. I____gladly see you at any time.

18. He____give you the money，I feel confident.

19. He____give you the money，or I____have nothing do with him.

20. ____we allow them to do as they please？

B. 用 will 或 shall 填于空白处，并用 will 或 shall 写出答句：

1. ____you promise to do better？

2. ____you make any promise if he insists？

3. ____we miss our train？

4. ____we go？Just ask us！

5. ____I go now？I fear I am wearying you.

6. ____I tell you what I really think？

7. ____you call a cab for me，if you please？

8. ____you be glad to see him？

9. ____you see me if I call at one o’clock.

10. ____we see you this evening？

11. ____you be kind enough to open that door，or____？

12. ____you miss your brother？

13. ____we wait here，or____you relent and let us go with you？

14. ____we allow this evil to continue？

15. ____you forgive me？

C. will 或 shall 有用错者，改正之：

1. A few years hence we will find him very much improved.

2. It shall go hard with our generals，if they are misjudged by their fellow-countrymen.

3. We expect that the Government shall do what is necessary.

4. If the rain falls in time，we and our countrymen shall not suffer.

5. Who can tell what shall be the greatest event in the new century？

6. I feel assured that I will not be misunderstood.

7. The money has been stolen，but the owner thinks that he shall get it back in a day or two.

8. Great dangers are before us，unless it shall be found possible to demand a remedy.

9. This has happened before，and no doubt we will see it happen again.

10. So long as the army is mismanaged，we will never be prepared when the time of danger comes.

（2）将来进行时（The Future Continuous Tense）

shall（will）be taking

此时制不用被动态。

此时制用来叙述未完成的动作而仍要继续者。

例：This time tomorrow，I shall be travelling home.

此句意为明天此时旅行不会终了，而仍要继续旅行，即“明日此时我将在回家的途上”。

练习题（29）

将括号中的词用为将来进行时：

1. In ten minutes the train（cross）the new bridge.

2. This time next week the new lift（work）.

3. You（rest）all next week？

4. Next summer we（construct）the new road.

5. I cannot come tomorrow because I（shoot）.

（18）现在时态（The Present Tenses）

Ⅰ. 单纯现在时态（The present tense simple）可用来表示：

a. 现在的动作：See！The bird flies.

b. 永久不变之真理：The earth goes round the sun.

c. 习惯的行为，反复的事件：He teaches English. She keeps her word. The boy goes to school everyday.

d. 将来时的代用：（1）I leave here tomorrow.（2）（在表示时及条件的副词节中）I shall not start if it rains. Please tell him so when he comes. 但在名词节时则仍须用将来时：I do not know if it will rain. I cannot tell when he will come.

e. 现在完成时的代用：（say、tell、hear、be told、write、read、find 等）My father writes（= has written）to say that I may go to Tainan. I hear（= have heard）that he will soon be married.

f. 过去事件用现在时来叙述，使其跃如眼前，故又称为历史的现在（Historical Present），或剧的现在（Dramatic Present）。

Caesar leaves there，crosses the Rubicon，and enters Italy with 5,000 men.

Ⅱ. 现在进行时态（Present continuous tense）用来表示：

1. 现在进行中的事：He is reading a book.

2. 以现在为中心而反复继续的行为：He is writing a book on electricity.

3. 动作之开端：She is dying.

4. 将来时的代用：He is coming to see me tonight.

5. 以现在为中心的习常行为：My father is always smoking.

练习题（30）

将括号中的动词用为单纯现在或现在进行时：

1. The train（leave）the station at 4 p. m. every day.

2. At present I（stay）with my aunt.

3. Every morning I（stay）in bed.

4. The sun（rise）in the morning.

5. The monks（hold）a service now.

6. These tourists（travel）round the world.

7. The Chinese（inhabit）a large region.

8. Hark！The bells of the temple（ring）.

9. Letters（write）very quickly on a typewriter.

10. He（play）tennis better than you do.

11. They（have）a big sale on shoes at Macy’s today.

12. John often（stay）in a hotel when he（come）to town，but tonight he（stay）with us.

13. John seems very busy，I guess he（prepare）his English lesson.

14. The sun always（rise）in the east.

15. The sun（rise）in the east now.

16. The rain（fall）heavily today.

17. Listen！The clock（strike）.

18. This afternoon the children（play）in the park.

19. This careless child（lose）his clothes too often.

20. Our side（lose）in this game.

21. When you（leave）for Europe？I understand that Mr. Smith（leave）next Saturday.

22. My mother（come）to see me next week.

23. I（go）to the seashore on my vacation.

24. On what train your friends（arrive）？

25. At present they（build）many new highways in New York State.

（19）过去时态（The Past Tenses）

1. 过去时表示过去某时发生之事，其动作在当时已完成终了。

2. 过去进行时则表示在过去某时未完成未终了之行为，故此进行时，常与其他过去时连用。

如：While I was walking to work，I met Mr. Smith，I was studying when he came.

练习题（31）

A. 将括号中的词用为过去时或过去进行时：

1. As I（walk）home yesterday，I（meet）a beggar who（ask）me for some money.

2. It（rain）hard when I（leave）home this morning.

3. John（fall）and（hurt）himself when he（ride）his bicycle yesterday.

4. At five o’clock，when I（call）at the Smith’s home，they（have）dinner.

5. When the world war（break）out，John（live）in Venice.

6. We（sit）on our front porch when Mr. Smith（drive）his new car.

7. As Mary（get）off the bus，she（slip）and（break）her leg.

8. Smith（drive）at about forty miles an hour when the accident（happen）.

9. Your telegram（come）just as I（leave）my home.

10. John（talk）with his boss when I last（see）him.

B. 将括号中的动词用为过去时或过去进行时：

（study）I____very hard last night.

I____last night when you called me on the phone.

（take）While John____his English lesson，his friend arrived.

John____his English lesson yesterday.

（sleep）I____soundly when the phone rang.

I____soundly last night.

（blow）The wind____hard when I came to work this morning.

The wind____hard this morning.

（play）Mary____the piano when I arrived.

Mary____the piano for her guests.

（20）将来完成时态（The Future Perfect Tense）

shall（will）have taken.

此时制用来叙述一种在将来某时发生的动作，但此动作到该时将被认为是过去的已完成的动作。

例：By next September we shall have visited thirty different countries.

这句话意为：到了九月十五号时，访问三十个国家的动作将是过去的、完了的事了。

We shall have finished all the exercises in this book by June.（到了六月，所有本书中的练习将是做完的了。）

练习题（32）

A. 将括号中的动词用为适当的时态（Tense）：

1. By this time next month all the roses（die）.

2: He says that before he leaves he（see）every show in town.

3. When you are my age，you（learn）much about the weakness of man.

4. A century from now，wars，I hope，（become）a thing of the past.

B. 将下列句子改为未来完成时态，关于时的副词亦须作必要的更改：

例： | In 1950 he had worked in that office for 2 years. In 1958 he will have worked in that office for 10 years.

1. By last April he had read most of the books in the library.

2. He has almost recovered from his illness now.

3. He had finished his work at eight o’clock.

4. By the end of last year he had learnt to speak French well.

5. At this time last week we had just arrived.

6. He is paying for his house now.

7. The concert starts at six o’clock.

8. In 1940 they had been married ten years.

9. He has been living in this house for six months now.

10. The games had finished when we arrived.

（21）现在完成时态（The Present Perfect Tense）

A.（1）现在完成时指过去的行为，而其结果及于现在者，即过去的动作成为经验或完成之状态以及于现在，又过去的状态一直继续至现在者，皆用现在完成时来表示。

a. | I have writte n a letter. I have read the book already. | （完成状态）

（此时常用 already、just、now、yet、not yet 等副词以使意义明了）

b. | I have seen her many times. Have you ever seen a warship？ | （经验，反复）

（此时多用 ever、never、often、once、seldom、before 等副词）

c. | I have lived here for five years. He has been upstairs all this while. | （继续）

（此时常用 all、for、these、since、from、how long 等所诱导的副词短语或 always 等词以使意明确）

（2）现在完成时不能与表示过去的副词共用，但 today、this week、this month、this year、lately、recently 等则可。

（3）疑问副词 when 不可与现在完成时共用，但用为连词时则可。

如 I shall go out when I have written these letters.

但在强意的问句时，疑问副词的 when 亦可用。

如 When have I said so？（= I have never said so.）

B. 现在完成进行时（The present perfect continuous）

此时制仅表示过去到现在的行动的继续而已。

注意：以下各种动词不可用为进行时：

状态动词　be、resemble、stand、have、possess、need、belong 等。

知觉动词　see、hear、smell 等。

感情动词　love、like、hate、fear 等。

知能动词　know、remember、understand、suppose、believe 等。

练习题（33）

将括号中的动词，视需要用为过去或现在完成时态：

1. I（visit）Sun Moon Lake many times.

2. He（go）to Tainan last week.

3. I（read）that book several times.

4. I first（read）it while I was on my vacation last summer.

5. Smith（have）little experience in teaching that subject.

6. John（fall）as lie was crossing the street.

7. I（see）Mary a few days ago.

8. I（try）that restaurant again and again but I do not like the food there.

9. When I was a boy I often（go）fishing with my father.

10. I（complete）writing my exercise at last.

11. I hear that you（give）up the idea of studying German.

12. He（start）to study English this month.

13. I never（be）to America.

14. Mr. Smith is not in his office. I suppose he（go）out of town.

15. I（be）in Taichung many times.

16. We are now living on 72nd Street where we（live）for two years.

17. We（live）in Washington from 1925 to 1930.

18. You are very late. I（wait）a whole hour for you.

19. I myself（study）English steadily since 1950.

20. Up to the present time，I never（be）farther west than Chicago.

21. Smith（join）our English class two weeks ago. He says that he（study）English during 1952 and 1954，but not（study）since then.

（22）过去完成时态（The Past Perfect Tense）

此时制用来叙述某过去事件发生前所发生之事件，即在过去有两件事发生时，先发生者用过去完成时，但若依事件发生之先后叙述时，则两者皆用过去时亦可。过去完成时不可单独使用，须与其他过去时共用。

例：German was prepared for war by 1914. In the previous years she had made many secret alliances. She also had developed a very strong army.

Nobody knew where Smith had gone.

练习题（34）

将括号中的动词斟酌用为过去或过去完成时态：

1. When I（call）for John，his mother told me that five minutes before.

2. When I（ask）what he（do）with the book，he refused to answer me.

3. John assured me that he（look）everywhere for the letter.

4. I saw clearly that we（take）the wrong road.

5. By the time we（reach）there all the other guests（leave）.

6. When we（reach）home，we found that someone（break）into our home and（steal）some of our furniture.

7. When they（open）the chest，the men found that someone already（take）the map.

8. How did your chief find out that you（come）to work late？

9. The message（arrive）five minutes after John（leave）the house.

10. John（spend）much time when he was in Europe visiting the places where he（stay）as a boy.

（23）完成进行时态（The Perfect Continuous Tenses）

Present perfect continuous：I have been taking.

Past perfect continuous：I had been taking.

Future perfect continuous：I shall have been taking.

此三种时态，被动态（Passive Voice）是不用的。

此三种时态的用法，与现在完成、过去完成、将来完成三者相同，不过指继续长时期的动作。

练习题（35）

视情形需要，将括号中的动词用为现在、过去或将来完成进行时态：

1. I am sure that this youth（smoke），for I can smell tobacco.

2. Most people feel hungry when they（work）hard.

3. These girls（bathe），for they are still carrying their towels.

4. After I（read）for a long time，my eyes become tired.

5. What you（do）all the morning？

6. I（visit）my friend in hospital.

7. Your business（prosper）lately？

8. Yes，it（make）good profits.

9. Next week this building（stand）for a hundred years.

10. By December I（attend）school for ten years.

11. The rider felt stiff and sore because he（travel）all day.

12. A leak was discovered in the hull when the vessel（sail）for a few hours.

练习题（36）

将括号中的动词用为适当的时态（Tense）：

1. Friends who（tell）us the truth are often less appreciated than those who（flatter）us.

2. I（see）Helen last Saturday but not（see）her since then.

3. Have you any idea what she（do）when I（call）her tomorrow？

4. He says the trial（take）place tomorrow.

5. When we came in，John obviously（feel）the effects of the wine he（drink）with us earlier.

6. We moved slowly but on every side the taxis（speed）along.

7. On the stage there was a magician who（do）tricks as we entered.

8. Today we（witness）a struggle between two ideologies.

9. The newspaper states that the police（capture）the kidnapper at last.

10. By the time of the summer the hardest part of our work（be）completed.

11. What you（do）when I called you last night？

12. The minute when John came in，Henry（leave）.

13. He（be）appointed last June and（be）in charge ever since.

14. While living in France，we often（take）trips by car to the Riviera.

15. When you（go）on your vacation next month？

16. We（have）very hot weather at present. It not（rain）in several weeks.

17. The Civil War（begin）in 1861，and it（end）in 1865 but not before many thousands of men（meet）their death.

18. What Mary（do）when you telephoned her？

19. She said that she（leave）before the news came.

20. I（take）a cold bath every morning during the summer.

（24）时之一致（Sequence of Tenses）

Ⅰ. 主句的动词为现在或将来时态时，从句的动词任何时态皆可用：

I know that he was，is，or will be angry.

I shall soon hear what he says，said，or will say.

Ⅱ. 主句的动词为过去时态时，从句的动词必须为过去时态：

He says he will bring the money tomorrow.

He said he would bring the money tomorrow.

破例：a. 若从句的动词指的是普遍的真理或现在仍然存在的习惯或事实，则仍用现在时态。

He was taught that the earth moves round the sun.

We were informed that his character is good.

b. 在 than 或 as much as 之后的从句，其动词任何时制皆可。

He liked you better than（or as much as）he likes，or liked or will like me.

c. 形容词从句可用任何时态。

He did not himself see the event that he has described so well in the book which I was reading yesterday and which I shall read again tomorrow.

d. 副词从句若其所指之时异于主句者，则任何时态皆可用。

I did not hear the story because I do not listen to gossip.

e. 表示目的的副词从句中的 may，则必须依主句的时态而变化。

I am doing it so that you may benefit.

I did it so that you might benefit.

练习题（37）

A. 将下列句子改为过去时：

1. She says she cannot do this work.

2. I think I shall finish this report by five o’clock.

3. The weatherman predicts that it will rain tomorrow.

4. She says her name is Smith.

5. She complains that she has a headache.

6. He promises that the error will not occur again.

7. I do not think I can complete this report on schedule.

8. The students think they are making sufficient progress.

9. He hopes he can get there on time.

10. I don’t think I shall see you again.

11. I am certain that the price will go up soon.

12. He tells me that prices are sure to rise.

13. She says she has lived here three years.

14. The jury declares that the prisoner is guilty.

15. They feel sure the battle will be won before nightfall.

16. I wonder what changes the new chairman will introduce.

17. He swears he has never seen the man before.

18. She says she may be late.

19. He says he is taking English lessons from Miss Smith.

20. He says that by next Tuesday he will have worked here two years.

B. 将括号中错误的词划去：

1. They told me he（will，would）be back tomorrow.

2. She said she（does not，did not）feel well today.

3. He said that he（has been，had been）a soldier for two years.

4. He promised he（will，would）come to the lesson.

5. I asked him what time it（is，was）.

6. The paper says it（will，would）rain tomorrow.

7. I didn’t know you（can，could）speak English.

8. He said he（has，had）found his book.

9. They told us they（are，were）ready to shoot.

10. She promised faithfully she（will，would）try to do better work.

11. Did he say he（will，would）call again？

12. They thought they（have，had）found the thief but they（are，were）mistaken.

（25）直接叙述和间接叙述（Direct and Indirect Narration）

改直接叙述为间接叙述应注意事项。

1. 关于时态（Tense），应遵守时之一致的各项规则。

2. 须酌量改变代词。但传达动词的主语和被传达文的主语同为 I 时，则无变更。

例： | He said，“I will come to you. ” He said that he would come to me.
| I said，“I am wrong. ” I said that I was wrong.

3. 被传达文为疑问文时，应将传达动词 say 改为 ask 或 inquire，同时将疑问句法改为陈述句法。

例： | He said to me，“Where are you staying？” He asked me where I was staying.

但若疑问文中没有疑问词如 where、when、how 等时，则须用 if 或 whether 等词诱导名词节。可用 yes 或 no 作答时用 if，否则用 whether。

例： | He said to me，“Did you see my dog？” He asked me if I had seen his dog.

4. 被传达文为命令文时，则将传达动词 say 变为 tell、ask、order、bid 等，而将被传达文的动词变为不定词（Infinitive）。

例： | I said to them，“Don’t make such a noise. ” I told them not to make such a noise.

5. 被传达文为感叹文时，则将传达动词 say 改为 cry、shout 等表示惊叹的动词，或用 very。

例： | He said，“How glad I am！” He said that he was very glad.
| He said，“Hurrah！My friends，we have won. ” He shouted with joy and told his friends that they has won.

6. 其他关于时间、场所等的副词，有时亦须看情形而做适当的改变，如 now、ago 变为 then、before；here、there 变为 there、here 等。（参考）直接叙述和间接叙述时间之关系列表如下：

She said，

直接叙述

“I read a book. ”（现在→过去）

“I am reading a book. ”

（现在→过去）

“I have read a book. ”

（现在完成→过去完成）

“I have been reading a book. ”

（现在完成→过去完成）

“I read a book. ”

（过去→过去完成）

“I was reading a book. ”

（过去→过去完成）

“I had read a book. ”（不变）

“I had been reading a book. ”（不变）

“I shall read a book. ”

（shall→should）

“I shall be reading a book. ”

（shall→should）

“I shall have read a book. ”

（shall→should）

“I shall have been reading a book. ”

（shall→should）

She said that

间接叙述

she read a book.

she was reading a book.

she had read a book.

she had been reading a book.

she had read a book.

she had been reading a book.

she had read a book.

she had been reading a book.

she should read a book.

she should be reading a book.

she should have read a book.

she should have been reading a book.

但从从句所表现之事为永不变之真理，或习常行为而现在仍然者，则仍保留原来时态，又历史的事实者亦然，如“He said that Columbus discovered America in 1492.”中之 discovered，不可改为 had discovered。

直接叙述的 shall 和 will，在间接叙述中不管人称之如何，仍援用原来者，但在无意志的场合，则依人称而变化亦可。如

He says to me，“If you work hard，you will succeed. ”

He tells me that if I work hard，I shall succeed.

被传达文为条件文时，仅用现在时态者依时之一致须有改变，其他用过去时态者则无须变动。

例： | He said，“If you come I shall see you. ” He said that if they came he would see them.
| He said，“If you came I should see you？ He said that if they came he would see them.

练习题（38）

A. 将下列句子改为间接叙述：

1. The sailor said，“The tide is ebbing. ”

2. The teacher said，“The class will not be punished. ”

3. The librarian said，“The book has been taken out. ”

4. The newspaper said，“A serious fire has occurred. ”

5.“Anybody can ride a bicycle，”he said.

6.“Nobody may leave this room，”said the detective.

7. The commitee reported，“Shansi is suffering from a drought. ”

8.“The town was destroyed by an earthquake，”said the historian.

9.“James works in the University，”said his father.

10. The farmers said，“A shower will help the crops. ”

11. The secretary said to the manager，“Somebody is waiting to see you. ”

12. The dentist told his patient，“Several of your teeth are decayed. ”

13. The guide said to the explorer，“We shall have to camp near the river. ”

14. The lady said to the cook，“There are four people coming to dinner. ”

15. The reporter said to the editor，“I have not been able to get an interview. ”

B. 将下列语句改为直接叙述：

1. They told us that we were on the wrong road.

2. I said to him that he was wrong.

3. We said to them that we had enjoyed ourselves.

4. We heard you say that you did not understand.

5. I told them that their roof would leak.

C. 将下列问句改为间接叙述，用在 He asked her...之后：

1. Where are you going？→He asked her where she was going.

2. What are you doing？

3. How are you？

4. When do you have tea？

5. Which is the best way？

6. Are you going to the pictures？

7. Why don’t you take more trouble？

8. Is your sister still going to school？

9. Is this work important？

10. When does the next train leave？

11. Did you tell him the whole story？

12. Have you been to Sun Moon Lake？

13. How far is it from Taichung？

14. Did you have a pleasant holiday？

15. May I have some milk in my tea？

D. 将下列句子改为直接叙述：

1. He asked me at what time I got up. → He said to me，“At what time do you get up？”

2. They asked us if we could hear clearly.

3. The children asked their mother if they could stay up late.

4. They asked me which was the best hotel.

5. We asked the monks if many people visited the temple.

6. I asked her if I could get her a chair.

7. I asked the stranger if he spoke English.

8. They asked the coast guard where the ship was going.

9. We asked the policeman if we might stand there.

10. They inquired where the nearest telephone was.

E. 将下列直接命令句改为间接命令句，用在 He told him 或 He asked him 之后：

1. Leave that book alone. → He told him to leave that book alone.

2. Don’t do that.

3. Write those words in your notebook.

4. Put that pen in your desk.

5. Tell that boy to put his topee on.

6. Give that book to me.

7. Be quick！

8. Don’t let the snake get away.

9. Take of those cups.

10. Drive more carefully.

11. Lend me fifty cents.

12. Don’t be fooled by them.

13. Come to the office at once.

14. Stop that man.

15. Buy a ticket for me.

16. Don’t let that door bang.

17. Send that coolie to me.

18. Stop making that noise.

19. Throw the ball to Chang.

20. Wait a moment.

（26）条件句（Conditional Sentences）

条件句有三种，即将来、现在、过去三者，每种皆由条件部和结论部而构成：条件句的动词用虚拟式（Subjunctive Mood）。

（1）将来——表示可能之事：条件从句（if-clause）用现在时，结句用将来时。

If it is（be）true，I shall be glad.

If it rains（rain）tomorrow，he will not come.

注：括号中的形式，只在文语及慎重的文体中使用。

（2）现在：表示事实现在并未如此者 if-clause 用过去时，结句用 should、would、could、might + 动词原形。

If you studied hard，you would learn English quickly. 实际含有“事实上你并不用功，所以你不会学得快”之意。

（3）过去：表示过去事实并未如此者 if-clause 用过去完成时，结句用 should、would、could、might、must + have + 过去分词。

If you had studied hard、you would have learned English quickly.

此外还有一种虚拟式，系在 if-clause 中用 should 或 would 者。

If | I you it | should + 动词原形（无意志之时）

If | I you it | would + 动词原形（有意志之时）

此种条件句，用来假设未来或现在极可怀疑之事。

If you should meet him，please give him this book.

If you would succeed，you would have to do your best.

注意二：条件句不一定以 if 开始，有时条件句常可省去。例如：

Were I rich，I would buy that book.（= If I were rich，...）

I should like to go with you（if I could）.

练习题（39）

A. 将括号内的动词用为虚拟式的将来、现在、过去式：

例：If John（study）hard，he certainly（succeed）.

a. If John studies hard，he will certainly succeed.

b. If John studied hard，he would certainly succeed.

c. If John had studied hard，he would certainly have succeeded.

1. If I（have）the money，I（buy）that suit.

2. If Mary（study）her lessons well，she surely（pass）.

3. If Mr. Smith（call）me on the telephone，I（speak）to him.

4. If I（get）a holiday，I（return）to my native place.

5. If I（see）her，I（give）her your message.

6. If I（find）the book，I（give）it to you.

7. If you（turn）out the lights，we（be）in the dark.

8. If you（save）your money，you（be）able to go on a vacation.

9. If he（come），I（see）him.

10. If I（know）the number，I（ring）up the theater.

B. 将括号中的动词用为适当的虚拟式：

1. Your head would stop aching if you（rest）.

2. If Napoleon had crossed the Channel，England（conquer）.

3. The airman（kill）if his parachute had failed.

4. Unless they hurry they（miss）the boat.

5. The hunter（shoot）the lion if he had had his rifle.

6. The streets would be dirty，if gutters not（provide）.

7. If lightning struck your house，damage（occur）.

8. If you changed your mind，I（surprise）.

9. If the dam had collapsed，the whole district（flood）.

10. The room will be cleaner if the floor（polish）.

11. If he（die）next Thursday he（bury）on Friday.

12. If he（die）last Thursday he（bury）last Friday.

13. If the sun not（rise）tomorrow everybody（surprise）.

14. If pigs（possess）wings they（fly）.

15. If the people not（warn）they（perish）in the flood last year.

C. 将下列句子缺少的部分补出，成为完全的条件句：

1. If I were you，I____

2. If John had studied harder，he____

3. If I will drive to the country on Sunday，I____

4. If I had been in your place，I____

5. If Mary works hard，she____

6. If you had asked me，I____

7. I would gladly have lent you the money if____

8. If I had the time，I____

9. If I had known it was going to rain，I____

10. If it doesn’t rain next Sunday，we____

D. 依例所示，完成下列句子：

（现在）例：I don’t have a car，but if I had one I would（should）drive to Sun Moon Lake on my vacation.

1. I am not in Shanghai now，but if I____

2. I don’t like to swim，but if I____

3. I can’t typewrite well，but if I____

4. I have to work，but if I____

5. He doesn’t have much free time，but if he____

（过去）例：I didn’t have a car last winter，but if I had had one I would（should）have driven to Taipei on my vacation.

1. There was not a doctor present at the time of the accident，but if there____

2. I didn’t know your telephone number，but if I____

3. John didn’t study before taking his examination，but if he____

4. I wasn’t in her position，but if I____

5. I couldn’t speak English at that time，but if I____

6. He didn’t study English before he came here，but if he____

7. He didn’t wear his overcoat，but if he____

8. He didn’t come to class on time，but if he____

9. I was in Venice last winter，but if I____

10. I couldn’t afford to take a vacation last summer，but if I____

（27）Wish 后面的虚拟式（The Subjunctive After“Wish”）

（1）wish 后面的从句常用虚拟式，以表示所愿望者并非事实。

I wish I had wings，and could fly to you.（现在）

I wish I had been there.（过去）

I wish it would stop raining.（将来）

（2）wish 后面的从句为 I wish you would（n’t）...之形时，则系客气的命令句法。如：

Wait for me！

I wish you would wait for me.

Don’t make so much noise.

I wish you wouldn’t make so much noise.

练习题（40）

A. 将括号中的动词用为虚拟式：

1. I wish I（own）an automobile.

2. John wishes he（be）a mechanical engineer.

3. I wish I（go）to the movie with you last night.

4. I wish I（have）today off. I’d go swimming.

5. I wish I（have）yesterday off. I’d have gone swimming.

6. I wish you（live）nearer me.

7. I wish I（be）in Shanghai now.

8. I wish I（can）help you but I can’t.

9. Mary wishes she（can）drive a car.

10. I wish，when a boy，I（study）Latin instead of Greek.

B. 依（2）例所示，将下列句子用在 I wish you would（n’t）之后：

1. Come back in an hour.

2. Miss Smith，please write this letter right away.

3. Write your exercises in ink.

4. Don’t write your composition in pencil.

5. Wait a few minutes.

（28）Should 的特别用法

should 表示“义务”即应该之意时，通用于三种人称，常含有否定之意。

现在 | I should study tonight.（but I probably shall not） John should obey his parents.（but he never does） You should not smoke cigarettes.（but you do）

过去 | He should have studied before his examination.（but he did not） You should not have sent that cable to Paris.（but you did） You should have sent it to London.（but you didn’t）

练习题（41）

将括号中的动词用为 should 的现在或过去：

1. I（go）to Chicago next week.

2. I（go）to Chicago last week.

3. John（do）his homework more carefully if he wishes to pass.

4. I（call）Mr. Smith yesterday，but I forgot.

5. Everyone（do）his part to make the program a success.

6. You（begin）the study of English a long time ago.

7. You（prepare）your exercises every night，if you wish to make good progress.

8. You not（work）so hard. You（take）a vacation every once in a while.

9. You（answer）that letter as soon as you received it.

10. You（ask）permission before you took that book.

11. You（notify）the police as soon as your purse was stolen.

12. You not（smoke）so much. It is bad for your health.

13. You（hear）the President’s speech last night. It was very good.

（29）Ought to

ought 的用法和前项的 should 同，两者常可通用，但 ought 需接有 to 的不定词。

注意 ought 的过去式，系将其后的不定词变为完形，绝不是加 had 在 ought 之前。

现在 | I ought to I should | study tonight.（but I probably shall not）

过去 | You ought to have prepared your homework before coming to class.（but you didn’t） I ought to have telephoned Mr. Smith this morning.（but I forgot to do so）

练习题（42）

用 ought 于下列句中，并作必需的改动：

1. I____（stay）at home and study tonight.

2. You____（go）to the opera with us last night. It was very good.

3. You____not（work）so hard. You____（take）a vacation.

4. John____not（smoke）so much.

5. You____not（send）that cable to paris. You____（send）it to London.

6. You____（ask）permission before leaving the room.

7. You____（notify）your teacher if you could not come to class.

8. John____（study）harder if he wishes to pass.

9. I____（visit）my friend who is sick in the hospital.

10. I____（stay）at home tonight and study for my examination.

11. I____not（drink）so much coffee. It is bad for my nerves.

12. I____（begin）to study English a long time ago.

（30）Should 和 have to

should 和 have to 同表示“义务”，但 should 常含否定之意，而 have to 则为肯定。

I had to work last night.（I worked）

I should have worked last night.（but I didn’t work）

练习题（43）

看情形之需要，用 Should 或 have to 于空白处，并作其他必需的变动：

1. I____（call）Mr. Smith yesterday，but I forgot to do so.

2. I am sorry that I am so late for our appointment，but I____（go）to the bank before I came here.

3. I am sorry I couldn’t visit you last night，but I____（work）very late.

4. I really____（study）my English lesson tonight，but I am so tired that I think I shall go home and go to bed.

5. John____（take）his examination last June，but he was away on his vacation at the time.

6. I could not come to my English class yesterday because I____（attend）an important committee meeting.

7. I shall also be unable to attend class next Saturday because I____（attend）another meeting on that day.

8. I____（go）shopping this afternoon，but I think I shall wait until I am not so busy.

9. I____（write）this letter several days ago，but it entirely slipped my hand.

10. I wanted to go to the movie last night，but I____（stay）at home and prepare my English lesson.

（31）助动词的特别用法——避免重复（Special Use of Auxiliary Verbs—Avoidance of Repetition）

A. 两个句子可用 too、so、either、neither（nor）结合起来，而动词的重复则可用助动词代替而避免。

例：Mary read the book. John read the book.

a. Mary read the book and John did too.

b. Mary read the book and so did John.

c. Mary didn’t read the book and John didn’t either.

d. Mary didn’t read the book and neither（nor）did John.

练习题（44）

将下列句子照上例结合起来：

1. He likes her. And I like her.

2. He speaks English. And his wife speaks English.

3. He can go. And we can go.

4. You are wrong. And he is wrong.

5. Mr. Wang has gone to America. And his wife has gone to America.

6. Mary left right after lunch. And John left right after lunch.

7. She is going. And you are going.

8. I like movies. And my sister likes movies.

9. She is making good progress. And her brother is making progress.

10. He will be here at ten o’clock. And I will be here at ten o’clock.

11. My watch is fast. And your watch is fast.

12. He wanted to do it. And Mr. Jones wanted to do it.

13. Smith was arrested. And his assistant was arrested.

14. He saw the accident. And I saw the accident.

15. She likes to read novels. And I like to read novels.

B. 在同样结构的句子中，第二分句中的动词因与第一分句者相同，免重复通例可用助动词代之：

例：Mary doesn’t like to study，but I do.

I’m not going to the party，but Mary is.

练习题（45）

用适当的助动词填入空白处，以使陈述完全：

1. Mary can’t go tonight，but John____.

2. Mary will go，and so____Mary.

3. Mary isn’t going to the party and neither____John.

4. Mr. Smith didn’t attend the meeting，but Mr. John____.

5. Smith doesn’t want to go and neither____I.

6. John has gone away and so____Smith.

7. John studied his lesson，but I____.

8. Mary went to the movies last night and I____too.

9. John will be in class tomorrow and so____Mary.

10. John will be in class and Mary____too.

11. She won’t go，but I____.

12. Smith can speak English，but his wife____.

13. At first he thought he couldn’t go，but now he thinks he____.

14. John says he won’t go，but if we coax him，I am sure he____.

15. At first I didn’t like living in New York，but now I____.

16. My wife likes living in Taipei，but I____.

17. I knew John wouldn’t come，but I thought Mary____.

18. He shouldn’t miss so many lessons and neither____his wife.

C. 回答问题时，使用助动词作答，即无须重复问话的内容：

比较: | Can you lend me five dollars？ Yes，I can.（不必说 I can lend you five dollars.）
| Have you read this book？ No，I haven’t.（不必说 I haven’t read this book.）
| Who discovered America？ Columbus did.

练习题（46）

依上例用适当的助动词回答下列问句：

1. Ought we to study these books carefully？

Yes，of course you____.

2. Does he go fishing every Sunday？

Yes，except when it rains，he____.

3. Will they have enough money？

No，I don’t think they____.

4. Need you leave so soon？Well，no，I____.

5. Will the weather be fine tomorrow？

No，if the forecast is right，it____.

6. What is the capital of U. S. A？Washington____.

7. Which do you think are better：these or those？

Oh，these____.

8. Which ask more questions：clever children or dull children？

Clever children____.

9. What caused the fire？A Spark from a train____.

10. Who came in just now？Nobody____.

（32）不定词（The Infinitive）

不定词的各种时态如下：

自动语气（to take）

现在：to take；not to take.

现在进行：to be taking；not to be taking.

现在完成：to have taken；not to have taken.

现在完成进行：to have been taking；not to have been taking.

被动语气（进行时不用）

现在：to be taken；not to be taken.

现在完成：to have been taken；not to have been taken.

注意：在使役及知觉动词（如 see、feel、make、let）后的不定词，to 可不用。

练习题（47）

A. 用适当的现在不定词填入空白处，以使句子完全。

1. I told him____.

2. We warned the swimmers not____.

3. I saw the monkey____.

4. They advised us____.

5. The rider made his horse____.

6. We heard the gun____.

7. He forced his father____.

8. The robbers made the peasants____.

9. They allowed us____.

10. The father let his son____.

11. You ought not____.

12. I do not want____.

13. You must not____.

14. He begged us____.

15. You should not____.

B. 1. 凡自身无现在进行时的动词，则用进行时不定词以表示之。

例：He ought to be working.

She seems to be getting better.

seem，appear，is said，is believed 等皆无进行时。

2. 现在时的不定词表示习常的行为，现在进行时的不定词则表示现在一时的行为。

The pupils ought to do their homework.（usually）

The pupils ought to be doing their homework.（now）

You seem to read a lot.（usually）

You seem to be reading a lot.（now）

C. 凡自身无过去时的动词，则用完形不定词以表示过去时。

例：You ought to have finished your work.

They should not have released him.

又用在 seem，appear，is said，is believed 等后的不定词，若其所指动作发生在主动词所指动作之先者，则不定词用完形。

例：He seems（now）to have been hurt（before）.

He seemed（then）to have been hurt（before）.

练习题（48）

将括号中动词用为不定词的适当时态：

1. It seems（rain）every day in the summer.

2. It seems（rain）at present.

3. It seems（rain）here yesterday.

4. The rain seems（stop）already.

5. The rain seems（stop）now.

6. This child ought（send）to bed earlier at night.

7. This child ought（send）to bed ealier last night.

8. The balloon appears（descend）rapidly now.

9. The balloon is said（descend）in Poland last night.

10. He describes Hang-chow so inaccurately that I am sure he can never（visit）that place.

11. You are talking so much that you cannot（attend）to the lecture.

12. You know so little about this experiment that you cannot（attend）to the demonstration.

13. The rich banker’s son who disappeared is believed（kidnap）for ransom.

14. Everybody believes the prisoners（escape）from the country.

15. Marco Polo is said（reach）Japan.

16. The rebel army is supposed（increase）since then.

17. You should not（neglect）your work last night.

18. The rainbow is said（place）in the sky as a sign.

19. The Princes in the Tower are said（murder）by their uncle.

20. I am sorry（make）that mistake yesterday.

21. This country is supposed（prepare）its army for a war next year.

22. The prisoners should not（punish）when they had confessed.

23. You ought not（swim）while the weather is so cold.

24. This building ought（finish）soon.

25. This building ought（finish）long ago.

（33）分词（The Participles）

a. 现在分词可用来叙述与主动词同时发生的事：

例：He walked along swinging his stick.

b. 完形现在分词（如 having taken）用来叙述在主动词所指动作之前发生的事。

例：Having locked the door，they went to bed.

c. 过去分词单独使用时，则有被动之意，故不及物动词的过去分词普通不单独使用。

例：The photographs taken yesterday have come out well.

d. 名词可由分词短语和其动词分开，但代词则不可。

例：The secretary，have finished all the letters,went home.

Having finished all the letters，he went home.

练习题（49）

A. 将括号中的动词用为适当的分词：

1. Does anybody（call）Wong live here？

2.（Start）from Venice，Marco Polo travelled to China.

3. The army，（defeat）by the enemy，ran away.

4.（Die）on 13th April，he was buried next day.

5. The（lose）money cannot be found.

6.（Arrive）at the town，we looked for a hotel.

7. I met your cousin（walk）along Chun-shan Road.

8. The burglars，（open）the safe，took away all the jewels.

9. His money all（spend），he had to beg for a living.

10. The string（break），my kite flew away.

11. Our plans（discover）by the enemy，we were defeated.

12.（Finish）all the work，they closed the shop.

13. A meeting（hold），the firm decided to close.

14. She stuck the（loose）paper together.

15. I saw an aeroplane（fly）overhead.

B. 用适当的分词填入空白处：

1. He walked down the street____a tune.

2. The____man wanted to make his will.

3. The____tree will be cut up.

4. We heard a dog____somewhere.

5. The ship____on the rock cannot be repaired.

6. A man____a black hat passed by.

7. I saw a man____in strange clothes.

8. I caught a thief____my purse.

9. The news____by the messenger was false.

10. The grass____there is very green.

11. Letters____on a typewriter are clear.

12. A house____of stone is very strong.

13. I picked up a dollar note____in the road.

14. They found some bodies of men____by bandies.

15. The room was full of girls____merrily.

16. I received the message____by my friend.

17. What is the kind of oil____in this lamp？

18. A coolie____a heavy load passed by.

19. The wounded man lay on the ground____.

20. The____points should be noted.

（34）动名词（The Gerund）

动名词的形式，完全与现在分词者同，但用法则异。

英语的动词如 enjoy、mind、stop、consider、avoid、appreciate、finish、deny、admit、risk、dislike 等，其后专用动名词而不用不定词，动名词意义上的主语，须为所有格，但名词之时则不用亦可。

练习题（50）

A. 用一个适当的动名词填于空白处：

1. The audience enjoyed____to the orchestra.

2. No goods can enter the country without____a tax.

3. After____by all the other schools our team was in despair.

4. The athlete’s friends are astonished at his____the competition.

5. By____over the wall the convicted escaped from prison.

6. After____water on the fire for three hours the firemen put it out.

7. The car upset on account of a wheel’s____off.

8. Good advice will never prevent others from____mistakes.

9. He could not succeed in____secret.

10. Exercise is good for____fat.

11. This machine is capable of____forty cans a minute.

12. Nobody succeeded in____the puzzle.

13. The pilot could not stop the aeroplane from____.

14. I have bought some land for the purpose of____a cottage.

15. He spent all his time in____himself instead of____for the race.

B. 将括号中的动词用为动名词，注意补上必需的介词：

1. Were you successful（see）Mr. Chang？

2. Is Mary fond（swim）？

3. He needs much more drill（spell）.

4. There’s no use（telephone）Mr. Chang. He’s not at home now.

5. There is little chance（see）him today.

6. That book is well worth（read）.

7. He was prevented（finish）his work by his illness.

8. It is a question（find）the right man for the position.

9. Mr. Smith always takes great pleasure（help）others.

10. We are thinking（move）to Taichun.

11. He insisted（help）me with the report.

12. He has had very little experience（teach）.

13. Mr. Smith spoke this morning（start）a new class.

14. We are all looking forward（see）Mr. Jones next week.

（35）不定词乎？动名词乎？（Infinitive or Gerund？）

a. 可接不定词或动名词的动词：start、begin、fail、continue、regret、like、neglect、hate、cease、love、prefer、intend、decline 等。

b. 只接不定词的动词：choose、care、refuse、forget、hope、seek、persuade、forbid 等。

c. 接动名词而需加介词的动词：think of、decide on、succeed in、persist in，insist on、despair of、repent of、refrain from、abstain from、prohibit from、prevent（keep、hinder）from。

练习题（51）

将括号中的动词看情形之需要，用为不定词或动名词：

1. Who can help（laugh）at his folly？

2. I shall refrain（express）my opinion.

3. I have forbidden the boy（smoke）.

4. I tried to persuade him（adopt）some other course.

5. I prohibited the boy（smoke）.

6. Help me（put）away these books.

7. He assists me（edite）the paper.

8. He persisted（refuse）my request.

9. He insisted（know）what I had done with the money.

10. I began to despair（attain）my object.

11. Men used（fight）with bows and arrows.

12. This boy is quite used（answer）the telephone.

13. I regret（say）that I am not in a position to help you.

14. He carefully avoid（give）me offence.

15. I think（go）home very soon.

16. I remember（meet）him somewhere.

17. I forget（tell）you about it.

18. They failed（find）me in the crowd.

19. The child never ceases（cry）till it has ceased（wonder）.

20. It has stopped（rain）.

21. It is no use（try）to deceive him.

22. It is not worth while（make）a trial.

23. I felt like（cry）.

24. There is no（account）for tastes.

25. A book that is worth（read）at all，is worth（read）twice.

26. Such book are not worthy（read）by students.

27. He is quite capable（do）such a thing.

28. He is content（live）in obscurity.

29. I am anxious（know）the result.

30. I am confident（get）an appointment.

（36）介词（Prepositions）

练习题（52）

A. 用适当的介词填入空白处：

1. A wise man profits____experience.

2. I have a picture similar____yours.

3. You may rely____what he says.

4. He has no taste____music.

5. You will be sorry____your mistake.

6. His face is familiar____me.

7. His sister died____consumption.

8. He is married____my cousin.

9. The jury found him guilty____murder.

10. Take care____your health.

11. My sister is fond____fairy tales.

12. The dog is faithful____his master.

13. This house is suitable____a large farm.

14. He is always in need____money.

15. Never yield____temptations.

16. His face reminds me____his father.

17. This rose differs____that.

18. He is very different____what I expected.

19. I cannot agree____your proposal.

20. Wisdom is often compared____gold.

21. He was born____Shanghai____humble parents.

22. I prefer coffee____tea.

23. We should be thankful____god____all his gifts.

24. He was warned____the danger.

25. The old woman is weary____life.

26. Attend____your work.

27. I must inquire____the matter.

28. I congratulate you____your success.

29. I will comply____your request.

30. I am obliged____you—your kindness.

B. 补出任何省去的介词：

1. Morning school begins half past eight.

2. Christmas Day is December.

3. The western sky is very beautiful sunset.

4. I come school by bus every day.

5. The birds begin to twitter sunrise.

6. It is healthy to have a swim early the morning.

7. He was born the fourh of June the year 1894.

8. We have a half holiday Wednesday.

9. The ship left midnight.

10. Summer begins June 21st.

11. We have breakfast eight o’clock.

12. The farmers plant their rice February and July.

13. You should not work so late night.

14. It is very cold winter.

15. In the tropics it is good to rest the afternoon.

16. I will search my lost pen.

17. I suffered a painful disease.

18. I live No. 52，Hopen road.

19. We are satisfied our new servant.

C. 将错误的介词划去：

1．You don't object | to at | my going there,do you?

2.Taiwan's insular position gave it a security | against for | the perils of invasion．

3.Men startled | on at | the news of his death.

4.He was never at a loss | for on | a subject to talk about.

5．Who would be satistied | of with | the success which may be had | at for | the wishing？

6.I am accustomed | to with | hot weather.

7.He accused the man | for of | stealing.

8.The teacher was angry | with against | his student.

9.He is now ashamed | for of | his conduct.

10.My brother is good | at in | mathematics.

11.I divided the cake | in into | four parts.

12.He divided the apple | in into | half.

13.The woman was dressed | with in | black.

14.The jar was full | with of | oil.

15.I shall be glad to get rid | from of | him.

16.He is glad | of at | having received a good mark.

17.He is glad | with of | the news.

18.He was found guilty | for of | murder.

19.They are leaving | to for | America soon.

20.He took his brother | by on | the hand.

21.The girl is afraid | at of | the dog.

22.The boy aimed | on at | the bird.

23.He often boasted | of for | his riches.

24.He is very careful | of for | his health.

25.He came | on by | foot yesterday.

26.My mother came to Taipei | by on | train.

27.Mary people complain | for of | the heat.

28.Our class is composed | by of | twenty boys.

29.I congratulate you | for on | your success.

30.The man was cured | of from | his illncss.

31.He was deprived | of from | his freedom.

32．Many people have died | by of | malaria.

33．My book is different | to from | yours.

34.He failed | in at | arithmetic last year.

35．He always insisted | to on | his opinion.

36.He persisted | on in | his foolish ideas.

37.She is interested | in for | music.

38．She is jealous | to of | her sister.

39.He lives | by on | his brother's money.

40.Look | to at | this beautiful picture.

41.She was married | with to | a rich man.

42.I shall pass | from by | the post office.

43.The teacher is pleased | with at | me.

44.They were pleased | at by | his gentleness.

45.I prefer English | than to | geography.

46.He is very oroud | of for | his promotion.

47.He takes great pride | in for | his work.

48.He repented | for of | his wrongdoing.

49.He feels repentance | for of | his sin.

50.Are you satisfied | to with | your marks?

51．I spend a lot of time | on for | it.

52.He succeeded | at in | the examination.

53．This is superior | than to | that.

54.I am quite sure | of for | his honesty.

55.I was surprised | for at | his failure.

56.We are tired | of from | boiled eggs.

57.Sir,shall we write | with in | ink?

58.I write | with in | a piece of chalk.

59.The teacher is sitting | in on | his chair.

60.The old man sat | in on | an arm-chair.

61．Tables are usually made | of from | wood.

62.Bread is usually made | of from | wheat.

63.He arrived | to at | the station yesterday.

练习题（53）

填入适当的介词或副词：

1. The man who spoke was standing____me.

2. There are others____me who believed that.

3. Put the two books side____side.

4. Everyone was listening____him.

5. He lived here____the year 1950 and 1953.

6. Their plans have completely broken____.

7. The soldiers came in two____two.

8. That book was written____Dickens.

9. That is a book____Greece and the Greek people.

10. I ran____the thief but couldn’t catch him.

11. He who is not for us is____us.

12. He has written ten books and there is not a single good one____them.

13. The mother divided the apple____the two boys.

14. Who is looking____you？

15. Jane is very good____English.

16. He did that____my wishes.

17. I bought that____the butcher’s.

18. He put his hand____his back.

19. That ought to cost sixpence or____the very most ninepence.

20. I hoped it would be fine but it poured____all afternoon.

21. My shoes are made____leather；beer is made____barley.

22. I can’t get this ring____my finger.

23. He put the book____the table and sat____a chair.

24. He has 10,000 men working____him.

25. What country do you come____？

26. He walked____the room and sat____his desk.

27. I shan’t be away long；I’ll be back____a year.

28. The ship rocked____side to side.

29. I don’t like to be____debt；that is to be____danger.

30. It is cold____this room now that the fire has gone____.

31. You must make the best____it.

32. The petrol is all running____；turn the tap____.

33. There are houses____both sides____the street.

34. I bought a bicycle____＄30.

35. You must try to look at it____my point of view.

36. I shouldn’t be____such a hurry if I were____your place.

37. A friend____mine went with me to the Tower____London.

38. Help me____my coat.

39. I went there____business；I have to work____my living.

40. ____reply____your letter____the 15th of November，we wish to state that we are____need____a traveler____the London district.

41. Someone left a box____the garden and I fell____it____the dark.

42. I stood____the corner____the road and hundreds____cars went____.

43. Walk____the town____me and then we will come home and sit____the fire.

44. I have been____London____the 25th____July.

45. We went____France____our way____Spain.

46. This coat is wet. Hold it____the fire____a few minutes.

47. That is the first step____getting the matter cleared____.

48. I can’t use my office____business____present；it is____repair.

49. I had never had a lesson____English until I came____London.

50. That stream never dries____even____the middle ____summer.

51. Come and stay____us____a few days____Christmas and bring your wife____you.

52. I did not approve____his action and what he did was done____my consent.

53. You need not to pay____the money you borrowed all____once. The payment can be spread____a number____years.

54. Drake sailed____the world____the reign____Queen Elizabeth.

55. The motor boat cut____the water____a terrific speed.

56. I have been____America____six months but have had lessons only____April.

57. I lived quite close____the church；in fact next door____it.

58. It was somewhere____five o’clock____the afternoon when he called____me.

59. ____the circumstances，I will not give you any extra work.

60. You could see____a glance there was someone____home；the house was all lit____.

（37）词的顺序（Word-Order）

基本原则：

1. Subject + Verb.

2. Verb + Object.（动词和其宾语之间，不可有任何字句介入）

3. Adjective（participle）+ Noun.

4. Antecedent + Relative.（关系代词应尽可能靠近其先行词）

5. Noun + Demonstrative Pronoun（指示代词所指之事物需先提到）

6. not...but，not only...but also，not more...than，both...and，either...or，neither...nor 之后，必须用同一的词类。

总则：凡意义上应联在一起的事，应放在一起。

练习题（54）

下列句子若有安排不妥之处，改正之（参照副词的位置）。

1. The chair cost ten shillings on which he sat.

2. He shot the mad dog after driving it out of the house with a gun.

3. He left the house where he had slept next morning mounted on a horse.

4. He repeated those lines after he had read them only once with perfect accuracy.

5. The judge saw more clearly that the man was innocent than the jury did.

6. English is not only difficult to speak，but also to spell.

7. I am neither an ascetic in theory nor practice.

8. His daily custom is to tell anecdotes which amuse or excite the company after dinner.

9. Some paintings by lady artists，well worthy of inspection，will be exhibited tomorrow.

10. The general ordered the deserters to be shot indignantly.

11. In European languages we keep more the tongue in the bottom of the mouth.

12. He has been two years here，or perhaps it is more even than that.

13. I have read Platon’s writings，who was a disciple of Socrates.

14. A gang of robbers entered the house at night armed from head to foot.

15. The daughter of a civil officer retired from India，brought up in England，seeks employment.

16. His body was found floating lifeless on the water at a short distance from where the boat was upset by a fisherman.

17. His last journey was to Madrid，whence he was never destined to return.

18. Our correspondent saw several soldiers dead or wounded riding over the battlefield.

19. Paradise Lost is the name of Milton’s great epic poem on the loss of Paradise divided into twelve separate parts.

20. Before we pay them，let us see what work the men have done.

（38）副词的位置（The Position of Adverbs）

1. Adverb + Adjective（或 Preposition，Conjunction，Adverb）

即副词之修饰形容词、介词、连词或其他副词者，必须放在其所修饰的词类之前。

例： | We are half pleased and half sorry. He seems to be a good deal annoyed. | 修饰形容词或分词
| By that time he was half across the river. He came three hours before the time. | 修饰介词
| He spoke as he did only because he was angry. He came three hours before the door was opened. | 修饰连词
| This news reached us very lately. Four days later other news was received. | 修饰其他副词

2. Intransitive Verb + Adverb.（但指不定时的时间的副词则放在动词之前）

例：He always laughed heartily at a good joke.

3. | Transitive Verb + Object + Adverb. Adverb + Transitive Verb.

（即在及物动词时，副词或放在动词之先，或其宾语之后）

例：He bore his losses cheerfully.

He briefly explained his meaning.

4. 有助动词之时，则副词可放在助动词和主动词之间。

5. 句中有两个以上的副词时，其顺序为：

Adverb of Place + Adverb of Manner + Adverb of Time.

例：You came here quickly yesterday.

注：时间的副词常在句末，但在强意时，也有置于句首者。

6. 副词和及物动词连用时，其宾语若为名词，则放在宾语之前或后皆可，但若系代词，则必须放在副词之前。

例：Take your hat off 或 Take off your hat

The box is heavy；help me to lift it up.（绝不可说 lift up it）

练习题（55）

A. 将括号中的副词放在适当地方：

1. This work is new to me.（entirely）

2. The aeroplane flew to the landing ground.（straight）

3. I went to London to see my friend.（yesterday）

4. John is coming.（tomorrow，here）

5. You came.（quickly，on Friday，here）

6. We went.（yesterday，there）

7. Take your hat.（off）

8. I want to write these notes.（down）

9. Pick it.（up）

10. Write them.（down）

11. I do that.（never）

12. I have done that.（always）

13. He will speak.（badly，always）

14. She has been here.（often）

15. They have been early before.（never，so）

16. Food like this is good for me.（always，enough）

17. The children felt happy.（soon，quite）

18. If he likes you he will ask you to stay.（perhaps，longer）

19. What I like,you like.（most，least）

20. I stay at my office working.（often，late）

B. only 的位置有错误者，改正之：

1. We have only lost one game.

2. He only was married yesterday.

3. I am only left.

4. These people only seem to live for pleasure.

5. We only had one orange between us.

6. She only writes on one side of the paper.

7. Only I drink water.

8. John was only punished；the others were not.

9. I only have one dollar left.

10. Please lend me your newspaper；I only want to read it.

C. 副词或副词短语（Adverbial phrase）的位置有错误者，改正之：

1. I can speak very well English.

2. I like very much music.

3. A beginner cannot speak correctly English.

4. The teacher explained very well the problem.

5. The hunter shot with his gun a lion.

6. He put into his pocket the money.

7. I sent to my mother a letter.

8. He learnt by heart the poem.

9. I received from my uncle a nice present.

10. He shut quickly the book.

11. I always am on time.

12. It rains seldom in the desert.

13. We went yesterday there.

14. I am not enough tall.

15. He begged the teacher to not punish him.

16. I told him many times to not get angry.

17. He will have not finished his work by tomorrow.

18. The question is asked often by student.

19. John yesterday did not come to school.

20. I won almost the game.

（39）常易混淆的副词（Adverbs often Confused）

练习题（56）

A. 用 very 或 too 填入空白处：

1. It is____cold today.

2. He is____old to work.

3. I can’t drink the milk：it’s____sweet.

4. Sugar is____sweet.

5. This hat is____small for me.

6. The aeroplane flies____fast.

7. My little brother____young to go to school.

8. I felt____tired to study.

9. He is____rich：he is a millionaire.

10. The tower is____high.

B. 用 very 或 much 填入空白处：

1. I am____sorry that you cannot come.

2. I was____pleased to meet him.

3. She was____afraid of failing in English.

4. It was a____amusing game.

5. I feel____tired.

6. He plays____better than his brother.

7. His composition is____worse than yours.

8. It is a____interesting book.

9. I was____interested to hear what he said.

10. We are____astonished at the news.

C. 用 very much 或 too much 填入空白处：

1. I like oranges____.

2. Thank you____.

3. I can’t study here：there is____noise.

4. Ten shillings is____for that book.

5. He drank____and became sick.

6. I was____astonished to hear of his coming.

7. She speaks____：she is a chatterbox.

8. I am____obliged to you.

9. She was____interested in the subject.

10. He helped us____.

（40）常易混淆的形容词（Adjectives often Confused）

练习题（57）

A. 用 some 或 any 填入空白处：

1. I have____new books at home.

2. There are not____flowers in the garden.

3. Have you____brothers in school？

4. Did you buy____stamps from him？

5. Have I____letters this morning？

6. This magazine has____beautiful pictures.

B. 用 interesting 或 interested 填于空白处：

1. I am____in English.

2. Was the film____last night？

3. The book is____from beginning to end.

4. She is a most____lady.

5. Are you____in sports？

6. Stamps are____only to those who are____in them.

C. 将括号中不正确的词划去：

1. He sat down and said nothing（farther，further）.

2. This girl is（older，elder）than I am.

3. My（older，elder）brother is called John.

4.（Every，each）one of the two boys was wrong.

5. They have（less，fewer）books than I have.

6. What is the（last，latest）news of the war？

7. Wash your hands if they are not（clean，clear）？

8. John is（higher，taller）than his cousin.

D. 用 much 或 many 填入空白处：

1. How____does this book cost？

2. ____drops of water go to make up the stream.

3. There isn’t____food in the house.

4. He hasn’t____money.

5. Are there____pupils absent today？

6. He doesn’t know____English.

E. 用 few 或 a few，little 或 a little 填入空白处：

1. Will you have____wine？

2. He is very ill；there is____hope for him.

3. There are____apples in the basket，help yourself to some.

4. He did____work and got____prizes.

5. As he did not speak clearly，____people understood what he said.

6. A clever student has____difficulty in doing this.

7. ____days ago there was an accident at this corner.

8. There were still____books to be sold.

9. Though the wind was strong____damage was done.

10. It was so cold that there were____people about.

（41）常易混淆的动词（Verbs often Confused）

练习题（58）

A. 用 lie 或 lay 的恰当形式填入空白处：

1. I shall go and____down.

2. The book was ____on the floor.

3. The hen____five eggs in the grass.

4. She should have____in bed for two weeks.

5. ____the paper on my desk，please.

6. The jewels have____in the box for many years.

7. I____the book on the table.

8. He ordered his men to____down.

9. He____to the teacher yesterday.

10. My sister____down on the sofa and caught a heavy cold.

B. 用 sit、set、seat 的恰当形式填入空白处：

1. The sun rises in the east and____in the west.

2. The sailor____the sails to catch the wind.

3. Did you____your watch this morning？

4. The clock____quietly on the shelf.

5. Please____it on the table.

6. Please____down.

7. Please____yourself.

8. Please be____.

9. The teacher____the boys as they came in.

10. The boat will____twenty people.

C. 用 rise 或 raise 的恰当形式填入空白处：

1. Many great men had____from the poor families.

2. He promised to____the man’s wages.

3. The river____from a spring in the mountain.

4. The price of rice has____recently.

5. Should we____the price of our goods？

6. He was too weak to____.

7. The balloon____high in the sky.

8. The students____their hats to the teacher.

9. He____from his seat and left the room.

10. The teacher told him to____his voice.

D. 用 hung 或 hanged 填入空白处：

1. He was found guilty and____.

2. The maid servant____the clothes up to dry.

3. The picture____on the wall.

4. The criminal was____.

5. He____his hat up.

E. 用 borrow 或 lend 的恰当形式填入空白处：

1. May I____your pen for a minute？

2. From whom did you____the money？

3. Please____me your book.

4. He is willing to____you his knife.

5. You should avoid____things from others.

F. 用 steal 或 rob 的恰当形式填入空白处：

1. They____the house and fled.

2. Someone has____his books.

3. When the bank was____，the robbers escaped.

4. The cat will____the dog’s meat.

5. Robin Hood used to____rich merchants and priests.

G. 用 refuse 或 deny 的恰当形式填入空白处：

1. He____to go down.

2. Smith____that he had seen her.

3. Do you____that you broke the window？

4. She____to take the money.

5. I asked her to come with us，she____.

H. 用 hear 或 listen 的恰当形式填入空白处：

1. I____carefully but____nothing.

2. He cannot____very well.

3. I was____ing to the music.

4. The deaf cannot____.

5. Let us____to the story.

I. 用 fall 或 fell 的恰当形式填入空白处：

1. Did the child____from the chair？

2. The aeroplane____into the sea yesterday.

3. He____down and broke his leg.

4. The men were busy____old trees.

5. I____him with a single blow.

J. 用 can 或 may 的恰当形式填入空白处：

1. ____I carry the ice cream home？

2. ____a good house be built without a solid foundation？

3. He wishes to know if he____ride the pony？

4. This is a rule which____be applied in every case.

5. Don’t think you____write good English without studying grammar.

K. 将括号中不正确的词划去：

1. Who（discovered，invented）the telephone？

2. The judge was（persuaded，convinced）that the man was guilty.

3. He（took，received）a prize for his diligence.

4. My elder brother（learns，studies）at the university.

5. At what time do you（sleep，go to bed）？

6. She did not（accept，agree）to go.

7. Many ships have been（drowned，sunk）in the Mediterranean Sea.

8. Please（remind，remember）me to give the money back.

9. The judge（revenged，avenged）the wrong done to the child.

10. When will the meeting（take place，take part）？

练习题（59）

将左边的词分别填入空白处：

1. | aware conscious | He was well of the difficulties to be overcome, and yet____of his own inability to overcome them.
2. | needs desires | A miser can easily satisfy his____but can never satisfy his____.
3. | custom habit | A____of industry leads to the____of keeping punctual hours.
4. | famous notorious | The hermit was as____for his good deeds, as the robber was____for his evil ones.
5. | observe remark | I have had many opportunities of____his character, but I never____that particular trait.
6. | large great | China is a____country, containing many____cities．
7. | stop stay | Let us____on the way at this hotel, and____here for the night.
8. | strict severe | He was as____in observing the 'rules as he was____in punishing a breach of them.
9. | divide separate | Society____is into several different classes, Thelowest is____from the highest by a wide interval.
10. | empty vacant | As soon as a seat in parliament becomes____，he hopes to get in and assume the____title of M, P.
11. | example instance | I know an____of a step-mother, who is an____of kindness to her step-children．
12. | give grant | We____his request and____him something morebesides.
13. | gratitude thankfulness | He felt much____for the kindness he had received, and showed it by the____that he expressed.
14. | part portion | The estate was divided into four____，and each of the heirs received his____.
15. | liberty freedom | The prisoners were set at____，they have now perfect____to go where they like.
16. | timid cowardly | Though he was by nature a____man, he repelled that____assault with courage.
17. | forgive pardon | A person may____a fault; but a court of justice cannot____a criminal.
18. | answer reply | He sent a____to my letter; but this contained no____to my question.
19. | advance proceed | He____on his journey, but he had not____far, before he was again stopped.
20. | alter change | To____a dress is to put on another: to____one is to make it different in some respects from what it was.
21. | arms weapons | As he had no____，he, seized the poker and tongs, which he used as____.
22. | attempt try | If you fail when you make your first____，do not dispair, but____again.
23. | generous liberal | He was____with his purse, and had____feelings towards all men.
24. | serious solemn | He made a____pronuse that he would give his most attention to the matter.
25. | fit suitable | He was a very____man for the post, but he accepted it on terms that were not____for a man of his rank.
26. | understand apprenend | I____the general drift of his letter, but could not____that particular point.
27. | below beneath | He is a little____me in social rank, but not by any means____me in character.
28. | bring fetch | Be so good as to____the book lying on the table, I will____the footstool from the next room.
29. | clothe dress | Savages____themselves in skins; moderns____according to the prevaling fashion.
30. | place put | Let this plant be____in a flower-pot and____in the drawing room.

（42）词类的构成（Word-formation）

练习题（60）

A. 将下列名词改为其相当的形容词：

例：victory→victorious

1. ability

2. reason

3. absurdity

4. accident

5. advantage

6. adventure

7. affection

8. progress

9. aristocrat

10. athlete

11. dirt

12. fever

13. quarrel

14. calmness

15. character

16. chastity

17. circle

18. commerce

19. brevity

20. crime

21. contradiction

22. courtesy

23. empire

24. essence

25. favour

26. question

B. 将下列动词改为其相当的名词：

例：abolish→abolition

1. accept

2. accuse

3. add

4. admit

5. adopt

6. apply

7. appreciate

8. annoy

9. ally

10. arrive

11. advance

12. move

13. allow

14. argue

15. choose

16. civilize

17. compare

18. sign

19. tempt

20. reveal

21. assist

22. attend

23. behave

24. believe

25. confer

26. condense

27. consider

28. conquer

29. try

30. reside

C. 写出下列名词相应的动词、形容词及副词：

例：abundance：abound abundant abundantly

1. admiration

2. life

3. appearance

4. attraction

5. memory

6. beauty

7. terror

8. certainty

9. obedience

10. peace

11. correction

12. courage

13. purity

14. deceit

15. difference

16. explosion

17. reality

18. grief

19. haste

20. laughter

（43）语句的结合（Combination of Sentences）

Ⅰ. 结合数单句为一单句

结合的方法：

（1）用分词来形容主语或宾语：

例： | He took his hat from the peg. He left the house. Taking（or Having taken）his hat from the peg he left the house.

（2）用独立的分词：

例： | The sun rose. The fog dispersed. The sun having risen，the fog dipersed.

（3）用介词短语：

例： | The sun went down. The work was not yet completed. The sun went down before the completion of the work. The work was not completed by sunset.

（4）用不定词来代替动词：

例： | He has four sons. They must all be started in life. He has four sons to start in life.

（5）用同格名词或短语：

例： | The faithful dog lay by the cradle. Its name was Gelert. The faithful dog，Gelert by name，lay by the cradle.

练习题（61）

A. 依照（1）的方式将下列各组句子结合为一单句（斜体词指结合后的主动词）：

1. He wrote down all the answers. He still had time to revise them.

2. He held his walking stick under his arm. He walked up and down the street.

3. He arrived in town in the forenoon. He went at once to the best shop.

4. The dogs are placed in different kennels. So they cannot quarrel.

5. The travellers hung up their hats. They sat down to rest.

6. Her father was a successful tradesman. He was able to leave her a great deal of money.

7. He bought a good house. He furnished it well. He brought his family to live in it.

8. I dislike the noise of London streets. I returned to my quiet house in the country.

9. He was much pleased with the cleverness of the answer. He forgave the rudeness.

10. He was inspired with hope. He climbed up the precipice. He reached the top in safety.

B. 依照（2）的方式，将下列各组句子结合为一单句（斜体词指结合后的主动词）：

1. The spring is now well advanced. We shall soon hear cuckoo’s voice again.

2. The war was over. The country was pacified. The volunteers were sent back to their homes.

3. He remained behind. The rest set off at 2 o’clock P. M.

4. The admiral brought all his ships into port. The crews had little recreation on shore.

5. He called for his gun. He took a good aim. The mad dog was shot.

6. He refused to open the door. The unwelcome visitors went away.

7. Every farmer has been provided with a yoke of oxen. The fields will soon be ploughed up for the next harvest.

8. They have reached a place of safety. No further danger need now be expected.

9. The judge entered the court. He took his seat at the bench. The trial proceeded.

10. A brief halt was made for luncheon. The army then resumed its march.

C. 依照（3）的方式，将下列各组句子结合为一单句（斜体词表示结合后的主语及动词，但用其他适当者亦可）：

1. He drives a bullock cart. He carries goods from place to place. By this means he earns his living.

2. He declined to open his door to these visitors. He gave no reason for his refusal.

3. The men made very little profit. Their industry was useless.

4. Their brother disguised himself as a sailor. He knocked at the front door.

5. There was an old Greek fable about king Midas. Every thing touched by him turned into gold.

6. The people crowded the streets to see him. His progress was very much impeded.

7. The soldier appeared on the scene. He had a bayonet in his right hand. The bayonet was held over his shoulder.

8. He was an eloquent speaker. He was also a successful man of business.

9. The traveller returned in safety from the Arctic seas. His friends were much relieved.

10. The parents took a great deal of trouble. They wished to make every child happy as well as useful.

D. 依照（4）的方式，将下列各组句子结合为一单句（斜体词表示结合后的主语及动词，但用其他适当者亦可）：

1. He has now fifteen pupils in his class. He must teach. He must prepare them for the next examination.

2. He had no money left. He could not carry on the business any longer.

3. He drew up his forces in battle army. The enemy were marching towards him. He had to meet them.

4. He stayed at home. He looked after his aged parents. This was his reason for staying there.

5. A tired man enjoys the fresh breezes of the sea. It is very good for his health.

6. He must sign his name. Otherwise the cheque will not be cashed.

7. He should make the best use of the short time left to him. My advice to him was this.

8. The sailors allowed no rats to be killed on the ship. It was their custom.

9. The pigeons flew down. They wish to pick up the grains. They wish to satisfy their hunger.

10. He was ill. For this reason he could not go to school on that day.

E. 依照（5）的方式，将下列各组句子结合为一单句（斜体词指结合后的主语及动词）：

1. Washington is the federal capital of the United States. It is called after General Washington. He led the forces of the American colonies. He founded the great American Republic.

2. Oliver Cromwell was succeeded by his son. His son’s name was Richard.

3. That law has caused us a great deal of trouble. It has produced much discontent. It must be repealed at no distant date.

4. He has many of the qualities of a great commander. He has coolness of judgment in sudden emergencies. He has skill in directing the movements of troops.

5. He fled from his creditors. This was very dishonest act.

6. John Banyan wrote a well known book. It is called the Pilgrim’s Progress. It is an allegory describing the trials and temptations of a Christian on his way to the Land of Promise.

7. Beside him sported on the green his little granddaughter. Her name was Wilhelmine.

8. Cromwell assumed the powers of a king. He had once being a private gentleman. Next he was a popular leader in the Long Parliament. Then he was commander of the Parliamentary forces.

9. Lord Clive was formerly a writer in a merchant’s office at Madras. He founded the British Empire in India.

10. Brutus conspired with Cassius and others to put Julius Caesar to death. Brutus was the enemy of kingly government of every form and kind. Julius was the first man to make himself emperor of Rome. He was the first citizen to acquire an absolute power equal to that of a king.

Ⅱ. 结合单句为并列句

结合的方法：用并列连词（Coordinating Conjunctions）如 and，but，for，therefore；both...and，not only...but also 等。

例： | I worked hard. I gained a prize. I worked hard and（I）gained a prize.

He is not a happy man. He has bad health.

He is not a happy man；for he has bad health.

He is poor. He is contented.

He is poor，but（he is）contented.

练习题（62）

用适当的并列连词结合下列各组句子为并列句：

1. They could not decide the point themselves. They asked a third person to decide it for them.

2. They despised my warning. They shall eat of the fruit of their own way.

3. Her ways are ways of pleasantness. All her paths are peace.

4. He is a rich man. He is not proud of his wealth. He makes no distinction between rich and poor.

5. The feet of a cat are furnished with long sharp claws. A bird or mouse，once caught，cannot escape.

6. An honest man will speak out. He will not be afraid of consequences.

7. In all labour there is profit. The talk of the lips tends only to penury.

8. Life has few enjoyments. We cling to it.

9. They died on the battlefield. They lay on a bed of honour.

10. At this time of the year I do not rise at five o’clock in the morning. I rise at seven or eight.

Ⅲ. 结合单句为复句

结合的方法：用从属连词（Subordinate Conjunctions）who，which，that，when，where，what 等。

练习题（63）

A. 用适当的连词将下列各组句子结合为一复句，须含有名词从句：

注：斜体表示结合后的主动词。

例： | He is going to some place. No one knows it. No one knows where he is going.
| The rose is the sweetest of flowers. This is certain. It is certain that the rose is the sweetest of flowers.

1. He will come at some time or other. No one knows the time.

2. Rain will fall today. This is quite evident.

3. I shall never clearly understand this. So I think.

4. The school will open in ten days’ time. So we heard.

5. The air is never quite at rest. You must know this.

6. He says something. We cannot rely on it.

7. You were taken ill. This was very unfortunate.

8. He was a man of fine character in all points except one. He was rather timid.

9. What do you desire to have？I will grant you anything.

10. It was your duty to make the best use of your time at school. You found out this too late.

B. 用适当的从属连词将各组句子结合为一复句，须含有形容词从句：

例： | I have a goose. The goose lays an egg every day. I have a goose that lays an egg every day.

例： | The messenger had a duty to perform. The duty was difficult. The messenger had a difficult duty to perform. The messenger had a duty that was difficult to perform.

1. We lived in a house. The house has fallen down.

2. This is the story. I heard it ten years ago.

3. Shakespeare was born in a certain house. I have seen it.

4. You are telling me a certain story. Surely it is not true.

5. A small rest house stood at the foot of the hill. We stopped there for the night.

6. He had received a good education. This raised him above many men of his own age and rank.

7. In our ramble through the forest we came upon a thatched cottage. A fine cedar tree was growing by its side. The trees stood forty or fifty feet high.

8. The doctor came with his wife. He’s young. He’s at that table.

9. The students speak formally. They’re in my class.

10. The story is interesting. It’s short. It’s about baseball.

C. 用适当的从属连词将各组句子结合为一复句，须含有副词从句：

例： | He will succeed. He has worked hard. He will succeed，because（since）he has worked hard.
| Men work. They wish to earn a living. Men work，that（so that）they may earn a living.
| He was very sorry. He found out his mistake. He was very sorry，when he found out his mistake.

1. It is now late. Let us go to bed.

2. He walked with care. He was afraid of stumbling.

3. I agree to this. But you must sign your name.

4. He may punish me. Yet I will trust him.

5. He returned home. He had finished the work.

6. He persevered steadily. Success was the result.

7. He is sixty years old. Yet his eyesight is excellent.

8. They deserted their former associate. He had become poor and unfortunate.

9. We left the house at a certain time. It has not ceased raining ever since that time.

10. He may give me leave. He may not give me leave. I shall go back to my parents in either case.

（44）语句的转换（Transformation of Sentences）

（1）变短语为从句：

例： | I am sure of his guilt. I am sure that he is guilty.

练习题（64）

A. 将下列句子的斜体部分改为名词分句：

1. We were surprised at his strength.

2. The President is said to be ill.

3. Can you tell me how to get to the town？

4. We must hope for better times.

5. We know the name of the writer of the letter.

6. Tell us the height of this tower.

7. I do not believe in the truth of this story.

8. The murderer is believed to have been arrested.

9. I do not expect him to return.

10. It is not right for us to idle away our time.

B. 将下列句中的分词短语变为形容词从句：

1. The trees growing there are pines.

2. I heard a dog barking somewhere.

3. Is that your brother getting out of that bus？

4. Where is the money received yesterday？

5. What was the agreement signed last week？

6. There was a hat hanging on the peg.

7. Give me the books lying on the table.

8. We saw some farmers planting rice.

9. The message sent yesterday was received safely.

10. What is the animal moving in that bush？

C. 将下列句中的短语变为副词从句：

例： | In spite of his size he can run very fast. Although he is big he can run very fast.

1. Climbing the hill. I saw a snake.

2. He is very angry because of your disobedience.

3. He got back very late on account of a puncture.

4. He refused to go out for fear of rain.

5. During his absence nobody did any work.

6. He found the house after a long search.

7. I shall go before his return.

8. In case of fire，break the glass and pull the alarm.

9. You cannot do anything well without taking trouble.

10. I have not seen him since his arrival.

（2）比较之互换：

例： | He is as dull as an ass. An ass is not duller than he is.
| The air of hills is cooler than that of lowlands. The air of lowlands is not so cool as that of hills.
| Bombay is the best seaport in India. Bombay is better than any other seaport in India. No other seaport in India is so good as Bombay.

练习题（65）

依上例变换下列句中的比较：

1. The younger brother is cleverer than the elder.

2. Gold is one of the heaviest of metals.

3. I know better than to do such a thing.

4. Bad health is a more terrible enemy than poverty.

5. It is easier to imagine this scene than to describe it.

6. A live ass is stronger than a dead lion.

7. I would as soon die as injure a friend.

8. He is in no respect superior to you.

9. You know his character quite as well as I do.

10. He knows no more than a child how to keep his temper.

（3）否定和肯定的互换：

例： | None but the brave deserves the fair. The brave alone deserve the fair.
| His services cannot be forgotten. His services have been too great to be forgotten.
| No sooner did he see the tiger than he fled. As soon as he saw the tiger he fled.

练习题（66）

将下列句子变为肯定句：

1. You are not taller than he is.

2. This was too great an honour not to excite any of his rivals.

3. No one but a coward would flee from his duty.

4. He left no plan untried.

5. Never again will I revisit the shores of France.

6. Great men are of no one nation，nor of one particular class.

7. As long as the fair continued，not a man lost his temper.

8. Learned man are not always judicious.

9. He cannot but give me thanks that I deserved.

10. Nowhere does France come so near to England as at the Straits of Dover.

（4）词类之变换：

例：

V. 　Lead and tin differ very greatly in weight.

N. 　Between lead and tin there is much difference in weight.

Adj. The weight of lead is very different from that of tin.

Adv. Lead and tin are very differently constituted in point of weight.

练习题（67）

A. 将下列句中的斜体词变为动词：

1. He promised his assistance to the project.

2. I have an engagement today at four o’clock.

3. He talked to us very amusingly.

4. St. Paul was by birth a citizen of Rome.

5. Reliance on such a traitor as that would be foolish.

6. He successfully strove to win the first prize.

7. The plan is apparently a good one.

8. He was presumptuous enough to expect the first place.

9. If you desire admission to my service you must put your signature to this bond.

10. He forcibly made his way through the crowd.

B. 将下列句中的斜体词变为名词:

1. What does he mean by such impertinence？

2. A spider is wonderfully sagacious.

3. I left my house at six o’clock because he desired it.

4. I believe that the accused is entirely innocent.

5. His mind is so active that he succeeded in everything.

6. He was sensible enough to mind his own business.

7. The journey was not very expensive.

8. Whatever he may have intended，he has disappointed us.

9. Her dress is so simple that it adds to her beauty.

10. He is at times inclined to act dishonestly.

C. 将下列句中的斜体词变为形容词：

1. He was absolutely ruined by that unlucky business.

2. Theft in former times was a crime to be punished with death.

3. He is a man of remarkable industry.

4. A man inclined to vice will never prosper.

5. To eat and drink temperately is the way to preserve health.

6. He is an unusually good speaker.

7. He was so given to suspision，that he looked upon every man as his secret enemy.

8. He had not the politeness to stand aside.

9. Every one was pleased with his fearlessness and independence.

10. He presumes to think that his opinion has more weight than mine.

D. 将下列句中的斜体词变为副词：

1. It was not his intention to do you that injury.

2. It is probable that rain will fall tomorrow.

3. I signed this bond with great reluctance.

4. He led a temperate and regular life.

5. The doctor made a very careful and patient study of the invalid’s case.

6. He was very generous in his treatment of the prisoners.

7. He was ordered to leave the room in an instant.

8. There is no meaning in what he says.

9. He is careless in every thing that he does.

（5）变单句为并列句：

例： | Reside making a promise，he kept it.（单） He not only made a promise，but he also kept it.（合）
| He must confess his fault to escape being fined. He must confess his fault，or he will be fined.
| Owing to bad health，he could not work. He was in bad health，and so he could not work.

方法：将短语扩充为对等分句：

练习题（68）

用适当的并列连词将下列单句改为并列句：

1. The agreement having been signed，all were satisfied.

2. The judge believes with me in his innocence.

3. He fled away，to escape being killed.

4. He will be dismissed in the event of his doing such a thing again.

5. He persevered，in spite of all men being against him.

6. He was honoured in virtue of his health.

7. He worked night and day out of ambition to excel.

8. To our great disappointment，we failed to carry out our purpose.

9. To add to his difficulties，he lost his health.

10. He spoke the truth from fear of the disgrace of falsehood.

（6）变单句为复句：

方法：将短语扩充为从句：

例：a）名词从句：

I am certain of giving you satisfaction.

I am certain that I shall give you satisfaction.

b）形容词从句：

He paid off his father’s debts.

He paid off the debts which his father had contracted.

c）副词从句：

On reaching manhood you will have to work for your living.

As soon as you have reached manhood，you will have to work for your living.

练习题（69）

A. 将下列单句扩充为复句，须含有名词从句：

1. I was glad to hear of your having succeeded so well.

2. He is generally believed to have died of poison.

3. No one can tell the time of his coming.

4. He shouted to his neighbours to come to his help.

5. We can place no confidence in any of his words.

6. His death at so young an age is much to be regretted.

7. We must hope for better times.

8. All his statements should be accepted.

9. The greatness of his labour could be seen from the result.

10. He was reported to have lost most of his money.

B. 将下列单句扩充为复句，须含有形容词从句：

1. That was a fault not to be forgiven.

2. Our present house suits us exactly.

3. Their explanation cannot be true.

4. He was not a man to tell a lie.

5. Joseph remained a long time in prison，utterly forgotten.

6. Is this the way to learn your lessons？

7. The benefits of his early training were thrown away.

8. The troubles besetting him on all side did not daunt him.

9. Egypt was the first country to become civilized.

10. After a storm the weather is generally calm.

C. 扩充下列句子为复句，须含有副词从句：

a）用原因从句：

1. In the absence of any other helpers，we must accept his aid.

2. They were much surprised to hear him confess his fault.

3. He was ashamed at being unable to give an answer.

b）用结果从句：

4. The problem was too difficult to be solved.

5. He worked very well，to the astonishment of every one.

6. He fell under suspicion by becoming suddenly rich.

c）用目的从句：

7. He labours day and night with a view to becoming rich.

8. He started by night to escape being seen by any one.

9. He purposes to become rich by sticking steadily to his work.

d）用条件从句：

10. Without leave from the teacher，we should not go out.

11. He would be very thankful to be relieved of all this trouble.

12. Turning to the right，you will find the house.

13. In the absence of the master，the whole house would have been burned to the ground.

e）用比例从句：

14. He is strong for a child of eight.

15. With every man who came in，another went out.

f）用时间从句:

16. He was very sorry on finding out his mistake.

17. With every cough he felt a good deal of pain.

18. In the absence of the cat the mice play.

19. Since the receipt of this news，every one has been happy.

20. Till the arrival of the Saxons，English was not spoken in Britain.

英文语法练习手册习题解答

（1）人称和数

练习题（1）

A. 1. They are here.

2. The gates are locked.

3. We are very tired.

4. Where are they going?

5. We are very sorry for it.

6. My books are lost.

7. The fish（es）are swimming.

8. My feet are sore.

9. My teeth are aching.

10. The children are happy.

B. 1. Sheep were grazing here.

2. Those were cool valleys.

3. The children were asleep.

4. The eggs were cracked.

5. When were we admitted?

6. How old were they?

7. Deer were in the wood.

8. Geese were standing there.

9. There were no proofs.

10. Wolves were seen there.

C. 1. The loaf is baked.

2. The rat is caught.

3. No box is here.

4. Where is the box?

5. The fly is very harmful.

6. I am very tired.

7. The ox is resting.

8. Why is he so careless?

9. I am fond of play.

10. The bird is roosting.

D. 1. Some man was hurt.

2. Was the thief caught?

3. The horse’s tail was cut.

4. This mouse was caught.

5. The goose was not found.

6. The pony was sent away.

7. The loaf was served up.

8. The lady was seated.

9. There was one girl in this class.

10. Here was the house.

E. 1. They have long been gone.

2. Have we seen you before?

3. Have the cats been found?

4. The thieves have been caught.

5. We have done our best.

6. The glasses have been broken.

7. The roofs have been mended.

8. The loaves have been cut.

9. The wolves have been shot.

10. The mice have run away.

F. 1. The goose has been found.

2. My tooth has been aching.

3. His son has left him.

4. I have left school.

5. The ox has come home.

6. I have arrived.

7. The deer has fled.

8. The bird has flown.

9. The sheep has been lost.

10. My foot has been in pain.

G. 1. We do not like him.

2. They do not like me.

3. Do the boys work hard?

4. The boys do not know me.

5. Geese do not fly.

6. Do my friends know me?

7. Do the fires burn well?

8. They do not learn much.

9. Do they keep a dog?

10. The men do not work.

H. 1. I do not go today.

2. Does he keep a horse?

3. They keep a horse，so do I.

4. I do not understand you.

5. He does not go to school.

6. Does he wish to see me?

7. A wolf does not come here.

8. Our cow does not thrive.

9. I do not see you often.

10. I do not want your help.

练习题（2）

1. is

2. are

3. is

4. are

5. were；was

6. is

7. was

8. have

9. has（因 sum and substance 表示一个概念）

10. have

11. have

12. do

13. does

14. does

15. does

16. do

17. do

18. has；have

19. do

20. has

21. is（因系指一物，即穿有线的针）

22. is

23. is

练习题（3）

1. is　　

2. are　　

3. have　　

4. have　　

5. has　　

6. are　　

7. does　　

8. are　　

9. have　　

10. is　　

11. am　　

12. does　　

13. have　　

14. are

练习题（4）

1. was　

2. is　　

3. has　　

4. have　　

5. has　　

6. is　　

7. are　　

8. is　　

9. is　　

10. are

11. are　　

12. was　　

13. is　　

14. is　　

15. have　　

16. is　　

17. is 　　

18. is（was）

练习题（5）

1. is　

2. am　

3. have　

4. has　

5. is 　

6. are　

7. is　

8. have　

9. has　

10. are

练习题（6）

1. are　　

2. does　　

3. is　　

4. are（were）　　

5. are（were）　　

6. has　　

7. are（were）

8. does　　

9. are，have　　

10. is　　

11. were　　

12. was　　

13. are　　

14. have　　

15. is　

16. do　　

17. do　　

18. are　　

19. does　　

20. are　　

21. are（were）　　

22. does

练习题（7）

a.1. You were…weren’t you?

2. Good news has come…

3. Neither reward nor punishment is to be…

4. A carrier with his horse and dog has just…

5. Every man and every horse was…

6. Is either of these horses yours？No，neither of them is…

7. Not a word of these lectures was read out…

8. None of the men selected were found…

9. A large number of cattle are grazing…

10. The audience were not agreed…

11. The carriage and the horse are both…

12. When pain or grief attacks us，…

13. The poultry in your yard are picking up…

14. There’ re four or five persons…

15. A white and a grey rabbit have run…（因指白的和灰的两个）

16. There’ re as many as fifty sheep…

17. The poet and painter that lived here is dead.（因冠词之省略而指一人，即画家兼诗人）

18. Either James or you are sure to win…

19. My box as well as my book has been taken away.

20. The sum of twenty shillings a week was paid to him.

21. A garden full of flowers looks very beautiful.

22. They，and not he，have to pay the fine.

23. Both are clear writers；neither of them makes mistakes.

24. Every man of the boat’s crew except two was taken ill.

25. A large number of men have come…

26. To write well，to speak well，or to act well is difficult.

27. Energy and hopefulness，like faith，remove mountains.

28. Each and all of them were shocked…

29. Nothing but rain and clouds was seen…

30. The sum and substance of the matter was…（因 The sum and substance=The gist［要点］，表示一个概念）

b. 1. has　

2. is　

3. is　

4. are　

5. is　

6. has　

7. are；have　

8. are　

9. is　

10. have　

11. is　

12. are

13. do　

14. is　

15. has　

16. is（was）　

17. are（were）　

18. is　

19. is　

20. are　

21. is　

22. have

23. is　

24. are　

25. am　

26. is　

27. is　

28. is　

29. are　

30. is　

31. is　

32. are（were）　

33. is

34. were　

35. was　

36. are　

37. is　

38. are　

39. are　

40. are；is

（2）疑问句

练习题（8）

A. 1. Does this man weigh more than that one?

2. Do you usually wear a coat?

3. Does a box of matches cost a cent?

4. Do ants lay eggs?

5. Do trees live for thousands of years?

6. Does a coolie earn a lot of money?

7. Do wasps make honey?

8. Does he take the letters to the post office every day?

9. Does the sun shine everywhere each day?

10. Do we like lemonade?

11. Is this seat made of leather?

12. Are these machines driven by steam?

13. Are flowers grown in these fields?

14. Am I often punished?

15. Are there twelve months in a year?

16. Has John left for Chicago?

17. Does this book belong to her?

18. Do I think it is going to rain?

19. Does he drive to work every day?

20. Does their class meet on the tenth floor?

21. Did the prisoner tell the truth?

22. Did she dress herself in her best clothes?

23. Did the sun shine brightly this morning?

24. Did the gardener throw a stone at the dog?

25. Did the soldiers fight well?

26. Did the boy laugh at them and think he was very witty?

27. Did the servant put the lamp on the table?

28. Did the wind blow very hard last night?

29. Did the plate broken to pieces?

30. Did the doctor come to see him yesterday?

B. 1. a. Isn’t William…?

b. Why isn’t William…?

2. a. Won’t Helen be…?

b. Why won’t Helen be…?

3. a. Won’t she be…?

b. Why won’t she be…?

4. a. Did he take…?

b. Why did he not take…?

5. a. Does Mary not like…?

b. Why does Mary not like…?

6. a. Didn’t she attend…?

b. Why didn’t she attend…?

7. a. Don’t they like…?

b. Why don’t they like…?

8. a. Aren’t they going…?

b. Why aren’t they going…?

9. a. Did Mr. Smith not come…?

b. Why did Mr. Smith not come…?

10. a. Will he not be…?

b. Why will he not be…?

11. a. Doesn’t he like…?

b. Why doesn’t he like…?

12. a. Hasn’t John delivered…?

b. Why hasn’t John delivered…?

13. a. Does she not like…?

b. Why does she not like…?

14. a. Did I not study…?

b. Why did I not study…?

15. a. Does Mary never come…?

b. Why does Mary never come…?

16. a. Didn’t I bring…?

b. Why didn’t I bring…?

17. a. Isn’t John making…?

b. Why isn’t John making…?

18. a. Are John and Mary not going…?

b. Why are John and Mary not going…?

19. a. Doesn’t Robert eat…?

b. Why doesn’t Robert eat…?

20. a. Did you not speak…?

b. Why did you not speak…?

21. a. Wasn’t Mary promoted…?

b. Why wasn’t Mary promoted…?

22. a. Are there not…?

b. Why are there not…?

23. a. Is the book not…?

b. Why is the book not…?

24. a. Did they not go…?

b. Why did they not go…?

C. 1. You have found that…

2. He saw the event…

3. He likes the scent…

4. They will remain…

5. In hot countries men chiefly wear…

6. The shepherd drove away…

7. He sheared as many as…

8. She will wear the same…

9. He wrote those…

10. An elephant lives for…

11. An elephant is the largest…

12. This seems to be…

13. He could have done…

14. The shepherd did not say…

15. He should not take…

16. We must really start…

17. He stood all day…

18. The sun rises at six…

19. She awoke and got up…

20. You saw by chance…

（3）疑问短语

练习题（9）

1. didn’t you?　　　

2. doesn’t she? 　

3. don’t you?

4. didn’t you?

5. isn’t she?

6. doesn’t he?　　　

7. does he?　　　　

8. hasn’t he?　　

9. didn’t you?　　

10. did he? 　

11. isn’t she?　　

12. don’t you?

13. are you?　 　

14. does she?　　

15. isn’t it?

16. are they?

17. doesn’t it?

（4）否定句

练习题（10）

A. 1. He has not gone…

2. They will not be…

3. I can not meet…

4. I may not be…

5. We are not going…

6. He will not leave…

7. He is not an engineer…

8. Mr. Smith has not studied…

9. You must not write…

10. Mary is not taking…

11. He will not be…

12. I have not finished…

13. He is not making…

14. We shall not see…

15. John used not to study hard.

16. I dare not ask him.

17. Mary will not be promoted…

18. He has not been…

19. You ought not to go.

20. I have not a good library.

21. He is not a man…

B. 1. I did not feel much…

2. You did not sing better…

3. We did not hear of…

4. It did not rain hard…

5. The sun did not rise at…

6. The fox did not fall into…

7. The bees did not gather much…

8. This tree does not strike its roots…

9. Some trees do not die before…

10. They did not tell the boy…

11. He did not strive to do…

12. He did not give as much as…

13. John did not make many…

14. It does not rain every day…

15. I had not（I did not have）time…

16. I did not understand everything…

17. He does not eat his lunch…

18. She does not want to…

19. He did not begin his…

20. Our classroom has not（does not have）…

21. I am not afraid…

22. He did not stay in…

23. We do not need a fan…

24. We do not use many…

25. John did not come to…

26. Mary does not like to…

27. They did not move to…

28. William does not speak…

C. 1. He saw me…

2. The sun rose…

3. The watchman ran away…

4. We thought John…

5. He spoke about…

6. She thinks that…

7. He felt ill…

8. The lightning stroke the top…

9. The noise in the street broke my sleep.

10. He comes here…

11. They sought for…

12. The dog hunted the deer…

13. The master expects me…

14. This book seems to be…

15. He heard,I think，…

16. The child,walking along the bank,fell into…

17. This student strove to keep…

18. Bees gather much honey…

19. I will give this…

（5）被动语态

练习题（11）

A. 1. We were very much disappointed in the movie.

2. The export division is managed by Mr. Jones.

3. We are taught English by the teacher. English is taught us by the teacher.

4. A dancing class was started by them last week.

5. I was bought this book by him yesterday. This book was bought me by him yesterday.

6. That report has to be finished by Smith tomorrow.

7. By whom has this glass been broken?

8. Fine workers were arrested by the police.

9. America was discovered by Columbus in 1492.

10. He was ordered to take a long rest by the doctor.

11. We were showed the city by a guide. The city was showed us by a guide.

12. If a king may be looked at by a cat,I may be looked at by it too.

13. They were welcomed back by the city on their return from the battlefield.

14. Let me not be disturbed.

15. Will not he be persuaded to work better by a sense of duty?

16. I was called upon to give my reasons by the meeting.

17. Should I be found at home by him,he would not be received by me.

18. I was quite shocked by the language that he used.

19. Who was blamed by them for that unfortunate accident?

20. He was elected president by the people.

B. 1. The enemy captured the town.

2. An unknown person stole the money.

3. His voice and manner hurt me much.

4. A lightning struck him,as he sat under a tree.

5. A bull attacked my brother and me.

6. All the butchers close the shops.

7. The annual rains fertilize the soil of India.

8. An earthquake cracked the walls of the house.

9. Have you shut the door?

10. I am cooking food.

（6）格

练习题（12）

1. I have no doubt at all that it was she who spoke.

2. She and Mrs C. were expected here today.

3. It was she who wrote that letter,not he.

4. He and his father were both taken ill that day.

5. Who do men say that I am?

6. I would not do it,if I were he.

7. I was quite certain that it could not be she.

8. Who made that noise? Not he , sir, but I.

9. Were you there, or was it he that I saw?

10. They that are idle are not wanted here.

11. Her father and I will soon find out where she is.

12. Tom,William and I went out for a ramble.

13. He and I were playing at marbles outside the school door.

14. May Robert and I go out for a walk by ourselves?

15. I have a son, who I intend shall learn Greek.

练习题（13）

A. 1. He asked John and me to go to lunch.

2. I knew it to be him.

3. I knew that it was she who called me.

4. He hurried Tom and me out the back door.

5. The lucky ones who received the prizes are Johnny, Collins and I.

6. He wishes Henry and me to remain this evening.

7. We believe you and him to be entirely above suspicion.

8. The superintendent wishes to see you and me at five o’clock.

9. If I were he , I would ask for a vacation at this time.

10. Why didn’t you tell Ira and me that you were going?

11. It must have been Ella and he who rang up when we were out.

12. When he got out off the train, there were John and I（myself）waiting to greet him.（myself 一类的 self 代词，不能当作 I, he 等单纯代词用）

13. The secretary and I（myself）will prepare a statement for the meeting.

14. it’s 改为 its, 因 it’s 是 it is 的缩写，it 的所有格是 its。

15. For the life of me I can’t think of whom to recommend.

16. John called the secretary and me into his office.

B. 1. they, we 　　

2. them, us 　　

3. I, she；we, they 　　

4. I（me）, she, he；we, they

5. me, him（在形容词 like, near 之后的名词或代词须为宾格）

6. me, him 　　

7. we 　　

8. us 　　

9. I 　　

10. me 　　

11. he

12. me（因 me 是省去了的 he likes 的目的语），I（因 I 是省去了的 like you 的主语）

13. me 　　

14. we, they（are）　　

15. he 　　

16. They 　　

17. me

练习题（14）

A. 1. He is as clever as I am , but not so clever as Tom is.

2. I have not written so much or so clearly as he has.

3. Tom has seen…as often as I have.

4. Tom has seen…as often as he has seen me.

5. They take…as he does in idleness.

6. The dog barks…than it barks at them.（用 does 以代 barks 亦可）

7. The writer understood…than they understood.（用 did 来代 understood 亦可）

8. He is…than I am…，but I am…than he is…

9. None are…as they are…

10. The mother likes…as he does.（does 即等于 likes to be admired）

11. So brave a man as he was was never seen before.

12. That book impressed…than it impressed him.

13. Few men have…than Dickens had.

14. He is…than they are to him.

15.…I made…than he did in two.

B. 1. You had…as I had.

2. A and B are…than we are in everything.

3. My partners have gained…than I have by this plan.

4. Though her brother has studied…than she has , he has not…as she has in daily life.

5. He rides…than she does , but she sings…than he does.

6. That author wrote…than he did.

7. He is…than I am in cash, but…

8. None are…as they are that…

9. I never before saw…as she is.

10. Very few persons spoke…as he did at the meeting.

11. He is more convinced than I am of the truth…

12. No one is more…than he is for what…

（7）人称代词的位置

练习题（15）

A. 1. The boatman and I rowed the boat.

2. You and James must work harder.

3. You and your father have been invited.

4. He and I saw the horse kick.

5. The guests and we were glad of that.

6. The boatman and I were not afraid.

7. The noise alarmed him and us.

8. The music delighted you and me.

B. 1. They and I had a great deal of fun that day.

2. My sister and I are much pleased with that song.

3. I hope you will invite my sister and me again.

4. Who have been invited? William and we.

5. The three boys and we went out to fly the kite.

6. Smith and I will play James and him.

7. This heavy road has tired out my pony and me.

8. It is fine now；my sister and I want to go out.

（8）指示代词

练习题（16）

1. one 　　

2. one 　　

3. that 　　

4. one　　

5. those 　　

6. that 　　

7. that 　　

8. those 　　

9. that 　　

10. that 　　

11. those 　　

12. one 　　

13. it

（9）代词与先行词

练习题（17）

1. one 　　

2. one’s 　　

3. he 　　

4. his 　　

5. his 　　

6. his 　　

7. her 　　

8. their　　

9. his 　　

10. them 　　

11. his 　　

12. him 　　

13. his 　　

14. him 　　

15. your 　　

16. our

（10）关系代词及疑问代词

练习题（18）

A. 1. that（whom）　　

2. that（whom）　　

3. who（that）, that（whom）　　

4. who　　

5. whom 　　

6. whom　　

7. whom　　

8. that（whom）　　

9. that 　　

10. that　　

11. which 　　

12. that（whom）　　

13. who（that）　　

14. as 　　

15. whatever　　

16. that（which）　　

17. as　 　

18. that 　　

19. which 　　

20. who（that），that（who）

B. 1. who 　　

2. who 　　

3. whom 　　

4. whom 　　

5. who 　　

6. whom 　　

7. who

8. whom 　　

9. whom　　

10. who 　　

11. Who 　　

12. Who 　　

13. Whom 　　

14. Whom

15. who 　　

16. whomever　　

17. whom 　　

18. whoever 　　

19. Who 　　

20. whom

21. who 　　

22. Whom 　　

23. Whom 　　

24. Who 　　

25. Who

C. 1. which 　　

2. what 　　

3. which 　　

4. what 　　

5. which 　　

6. which 　　

7. what 　　

8. which 　　

9. which 　　

10. what 　　

11. which 　　

12. which 　　

13. what 　　

14. which

15. which 　　

16. which 　　

17. what 　　

18. which 　　

19. which 　　

20. which 　　

21. which 　　

22. which

D. 1. The man you spoke to is here now.

2. I have bought the book I spoke to you about…

3. He is the man I mean.（为及物动词的目的语的关系代词常可省去）

4. I should like to buy the book I was looking at yesterday.

5. Is this the letter you asked me for yesterday？

6. That is a subject we will have to spend considerable time and money on.

7. That is a question I must speak to you about.

8. Which is the door you knocked at？

9. That is the file I got the letter out of.

10. That is the shelf I took the book down from.

11. Which is the tree they hid the money under ?

12. That is the question they argued over.

13. That is the story we were laughing so hard at.

14. This is the room he inquired about.

15. This is the one he wants.

16. He is the man I saw in the room.

17. Was Mr. Smith the man you talked to ?

18.…an antecedent it refers to.

E. 1. It was a bold step that she had taken.

2.…the business which I have in hand.

3.…the age in which he lives 或 the age which he lives in.

4.…the tax which a man pays to…

5.…the wittiest man that you know?

6.…the only friend that I had.

7.…the first piece which I learned.

8.…the price which he asks.

9.…the man of whom I bought the coat. 或 the man whom I bought the coat of.

10.…the book which we are reading evenings.

11.…Take any seat that you like.

12.…the only opera which I care for. or the only opera for which I care.

13.…all that I can.

练习题（19）

A. 1. herself 　　

2. It 　　

3. it 　　

4. himself 　　

5. It 　　

6. it 　　

7. She

B. 1. that 　　

2. that 　　

3. those 　　

4. That 　　

5. Those

C. 1. some 　　

2. some 　　

3. any 　　

4. any 　　

5. both　　

6. it 　　

7. his

D. 1. who 　　

2. which, who 　　

3. who, that 　　

4. that 　　

5. which 　　

6. that 　　

7. that 　　

8. that 　　

9. that 　　

10. which, what

E. 1. Who 　　

2. whom 　　

3. whose 　　

4. Which 　　

5. Whom 　　

6. Which 　　

7. Who

8. Who 　　

9. Who 　　

10. who

F. 1. The grass which（that）grows…

2. Such a man as came…

3. I return the book which（that） you lent me…

4. I do not like any one who（that）does…

5. The class which（that）you teach…

6. The carpenter who（that）made…

7. I will tell you everything that I know…

8. Such things as they say…

9. The mason who built…

10. The matter which（that）you inquire about…

11. Such news as you brought…

12. Friendship is the virtue which（that）I admire most.

13.…the man who（that）deceived you.

14.…such scent as comes…

15. A boy who is…

16. The man who（that）does…

17. The same book that you read…

18.…the worst thing that you will…

19. This is the thing that he was…

20. Such things as do…

（11）形容词与副词

练习题（20）

A. 1. He writes excellently：…can write as neatly and clearly…

2. He will do it easily…

3. She walks very feebly…

4.…will pay for it dearly.

5. He reads rather indistinctly…

6. He will help you considerably…

7. He came to school very regularly…

8. He treated us all freely and fairly…

9. The battle raged fiercely…

10. That was nobly spoken…

11. They were all marvellously angry…

12. He did it quite accidentally…

13. I will act agreeably…

14. He spoke very intelligently…

15. He treated us handsomely…

16.…the chair intentionally.

B. 1. badly 　　

2. safely 　　

3. quick 　　

4. strongly 　　

5. strongly 　　

6. uneasily

7. uneasy　　

8. freshly 　　

9. sweetly 　　

10. sudden 　　

11. awkwardly 　　

12. awkward

13. suspiciously 　　

14. suspicious 　　

15. sweetly 　　

16. badly 　　

17. sourly 　　

18. careful

C. 1. friendly 　　

2. thoroughly 　　

3. easily 　　

4. fast 　　

5. hard 　　

6. fast

7. temporarily 　　

8. quickly 　　

9. systematic 　　

10. systematically

（12）比较

练习题（21）

A. 1. strongest 　　

2. more beautiful 　　

3. youngest 　　

4. oldest 　　

5. best 　　 　　

6. better 　　

7. most useful 　　

8. largest 　　

9. taller 　　

10. worse

B. 1. smaller than 　　

2. the largest city

3. the best student of all 　

4. John is stronger than his sister

5. two years older than 　

6. the heavier

7. the oldest 　

8. are better than

9. the tallest of（in）　　

10. the highest

C. 1. further 　　

2. latest 　　

3. clean 　　

4. each 　　

5. fewer 　　

6. sorry 　　

7. taller 　　

8. young 　　

9. elder 　　

10. older

（13）冠词

练习题（22）

1. an inkspot；a useful 　　

2. an arrow；a horse 　　

3. an organ 　　

4. a useful 　　

5. an apple；an orange 　　

6. an untidy 　　

7. a history　　

8. an African；a European 　　

9. a hospital 　　

10. a unique 　　

11. a hero 　　

12. a universal 　　

13. an umbrella

练习题（23）

A. 1. The　　

2. a 　　

3. The 　　

4. a 　　

5. a 　　

6. The 　　

7. The 　　

8. A 　　

9. a 　　

10. the

B. 1.—　　

2.—　　

3.—　　

4. The 　　

5.—　　

6.—　　

7. The,—

8. The 　　

9.—, the, the 　　

10.—　　

11. The,—　　

12.—　　

13. the, the

C. 1. The Rhone River…for the river.

2. Most of the Chinese live on the plain of the Yangtse Kiang. Many live on the plain of the Hwan Ho.

3.…the highest mountain in the world.

4.…to reach the Philippine Islands…cross the China Sea.

5. The Mississippi is the longest…

6. The Panama Canal joins the Pacific…

7. The first…the month…

8. The president of the United States…

9. The Himalayas are the greatest…

10. The wolf is an animal of the same family as the dog.

D. 1. A camel travels across the desert.

2. A coolie works very hard.

3. The shark is a dangerous creature.

4. The cow does not eat flesh.

5. The monkey has a long tail.

6. A football is filled with air.

7. The rat is larger than the mouse.

8. A bicycle has two wheels.

9. The kangaroo does not lay an egg.

10. The fire engine carries a ladder.

练习题（24）

1. 1 have just bought a fresh copy of the Old and New Testaments.

2. The five elements, according to the Hindoos, are earth, air, fire, water and ether.

3. A burnt child shunts the fire.

4. The old and new methods of cure failed equally with him.

5. A cool and bracing air suits me better than anything.

6. The black and white horse that he rides fell with him.

7. I have to keep two servant-maids for this house, a cook and a housemaid.

8. The just and merciful general spared the conquered.

9. A live ass is better than a dead lion.

10. Men have a higher degree of reason than brutes.

11. He was much respected both by the civil and the military officers.

12.…are the English, the Germans, and the Dutch.

13. The loyal and the disloyal members…

14. The two parties, the Whig and the Tory,…

15.…a club, a public library and a swimming bath.

16.…of a patient and acute observer.

（14）名词所有格

练习题（25）

1. My nieces’books have been left on the shelf : they are careless.

2. The thieves’tricks were found out through their own carelessness.

3. The horses’hoofs will be hurt if they are not shod.

4. Did you see any ladies’cloaks in this room?

5. Mistresses’orders must be…by their pupils.

6. Many oxen’s hides were brought…

7.…those ships’crew before the ships are lost.

8.…the robber’s cave；he will be…

9. Men’s muscles are stronger than women’s.

10. Librarians’salary is seldom…

11. The witness’s evidence…

12. The lionesses’roar was heard…

13. Heroes’exploits will always…

14. The dwarfs’arms were as short as those of children.

15. The wives’quarters were…

16. The duchesses’jewels have been…

17.…the geese’s cackling.

（15）所有格形容词

练习题（26）

A. 1. yours 　　

2. mine, his 　　

3. My, yours, his 　　

4. His, mine, yours　　

5. his, his

6. his, yours, hers 　　

7. theirs 　　

8. My, yours 　　

9. Her, yours 　　

10. hers, mine

11. yours, mine

B. 1. He is a friend of mine.

2. That shilling of yours is very old.

3. This coat of his is well made.

4. We will lend you those books of ours.

5. That manner of hers surprised me.

6. May I borrow some magazines of yours?

（16）反身代词

练习题（27）

1. He and she hurt…

2.…；I saw him distinctly.

3. Bees provide themselves with…

4.…bought himself a new one.

5.…she brought the chair.

6. They, not he , paid the penalty of his faults.

7. Both she and Mary were…

8. John himself will pay…

9.…injure themselves in that way.

10. War, as he avowed, was…

11. They dressed themselves out…

12.…he saw them go in.

13.…when he was in office.

14.…paid for it himself.

15. He and Smith…

（17）将来时态

练习题（28）

A. 1. shall 　　

2. shall 　　

3. will 　　

4. shall 　　

5. will 　　

6. shall 　　

7. shall 　　

8. shall

9. will 　　

10. shall 　　

11. shall, will　　

12. shall 　　

13. will 　　

14. Will 　　

15. shall

16. shall 　　

17. will 　　

18. Will 　　

19. Shall, shall 　　

20. Shall

B. 1. Will；I will　

2. Shall；I shall　

3. Shall；We shall　

4. Will；We will　

5. Shall；You shall

6. Shall；You Shall 　

7. Will；I will 　

8. Shall；I shall 　

9. Will；I will 　　

10. Shall；We shall 　

11. Will, shall；I will. You shall 　

12. Shall；I shall

13. Shall, will；You shall. I will（not）. 　

14. Shall；You shall（not）　

15. Will；I will

C. 1.…we shall find…

2. It will go…

3.…the Government will do…

4.…our countrymen will not suffer…

5.…what will be…

6.…I shall…

7.…he will get…

8.…unless it will be found…

9.…we shall see…

10.…we shall never be…

练习题（29）

1.…will be crossing…

2.…will be working…

3. Shall you be resting…?

4.…shall be constructing…

5.…shall be shooting.

（18）现在时态

练习题（30）

1. leaves 　　

2. am staying 　　

3. stay 　　

4. rises 　　

5. is holding 　　

6. are travelling

7. inhabit 　　

8. are ringing 　　

9. are written 　　

10. plays　　

11. are having

12. stays, comes, is staying 　　

13. is preparing 　　

14. rises　 　

15. is rising 　　

16. is falling

17. is striking 　　

18. are playing 　　

19. loses　　

20. is losing 　　

21. do you leave, is leaving

22. is coming 　　

23. am going　　

24. are your friends arriving 　　

25. are building

（19）过去时态

练习题（31）

A. 1. was walking, met, asked

2. was raining, left

3. fell, hurt, was riding

4. called, were having

5. broke，was living 　　

6. were sitting, drove

7. was getting, slipped, broke 　　

8. was driving, happened

9. came, was leaving　

10. was talking, saw

B.（study）I studied very hard…

　　　　 I was studying last night…

（take）While John was taking his English lesson…

　　　　 John took his English lesson yesterday.

（sleep）I was sleeping soundly when…

　　　　 I slept soundly last night.

（blow）The wind was blowing hard when…

　　　　 The wind blew hard last night.

（play）Mary was playing the piano when…

　 　　 Mary played the piano for her guests.

（20）将来完成时态

练习题（32）

A. 1. will have died

2. will have seen

3. will have learned

4. will have become

B. 1. By next April he will have read most…

2. He will have completely recovered from his illness by that time.

3. He will have finished his work by eight o’clock.

4. By the end of next year he will have learnt to speak French well.

5. By this time next week we shall have already arrived.

6. He will have paid for his house by that time.

7. The concert will have started at six thirty.

8. In 1960 they will have been married thirty years.

9. He will have lived in this house for six months by that time.

10. The games will have finished before we arrive.

（21）现在完成时态

练习题（33）

1. have visited 　　

2. went 　　

3. have read 　　

4. read 　　

5. has had 　　

6. fell 　　

7. saw 　　

8. have tried 　　

9. went 　　

10. have completed 　　

11. have given 　　

12. has started 　　

13. I have never been to America 　　

14. has gone 　　

15. have been 　

16. have lived 　　

17. lived　　

18. have waited　　

19. have studied　　

20. I have never been

21. joined，studied，but has not studied

（22）过去完成时态

练习题（34）

1. called, had left 　　

2. asked, had done 　　

3. had looked 　　

4. had taken 　　

5. reached, had left 　　

6. reached，had broken，（had）stolen　　

7. opened，had already taken

8. had come 　　

9. arrived, had left　　

10. spent, had stayed

（23）完成进行时态

练习题（35）

1. has been smoking

2. have been working

3. have been bathing

4. have been reading

5. What have you been doing

6. had been visiting

7. Has your business been prospering lately?

8. has been making

9. will have been standing

10. shall have been attending

11. had been travelling

12. had been sailing

练习题（36）

1. tell, flatter 　　

2. saw, have not seen 　　

3. will be doing, call 　　

4. will take 　　

5. was obviously feeling, had drank 　　

6. were speeding 　　

7. was doing 　　

8. have witnessed 　　

9. has captured 　　

10. will have been completed 　　

11. What were you doing 　　

12. left 　　

13. was, has been 　　

14. took 　　

15. shall you go 　　

16. have, has not rained 　　

17. began, ended, had met

18. What was Mary doing 　　

19. had left 　　

20. take

（24）时之一致

练习题（37）

A. 1. She said she could not do this wash.

2. I thought I should finish this report by five o’clock.

3.…predicted that it would rain…

4. She said her name was Smith.

5. She complained that she had…

6. He promised that the error would not occur again.

7. I did not think I could complete…

8. The students thought they were making sufficient progress.

9. He hoped he could get there on time.

10. I didn’t think I should see you again.

11. I was certain that the price would go up soon.

12. He told me that prices were sure to rise.

13. She said she had lived here three years.

14. The jury declared that the prisoner was guilty.

15. They felt sure the battle would be won before nightfall.

16. I wondered what changes the new chairman would introduce.

17. He swore he had never seen the man before.

18. She said she might be late.

19. He said he was taking English lessons from Miss Smith.

20. He said that by next Tuesday he would have worked here two years.

B. 1. will 　　

2. does not 　　

3. has been 　　

4. will 　　

5. is 　　

6. would 　　

7. can　　

8. has 　　

9. are 　　

10. will 　　

11. will 　　

12. have, are

（25）直接叙述和间接叙述

练习题（38）

A. 1. The sailor said that the tide was ebbing.

2. The teacher said that the class would not be punished.

3. The librarian said that the book had been taken out.

4. The newspaper said that a serious fire had occurred.

5. He said that anybody could ride a bicycle.

6. The detective said that nobody might leave that room.

7. The committee reported that Shansi was suffering from a drought.

8. The historian said that the town had been destroyed by an earthquake.

9. James’s father said that he（James）worked in the University.

10. The farmer said that a shower would help the crops.

11. The secretary told the manager that somebody was waiting for him.

12. The dentist told his patient that several of his teeth were decayed.

13. The guide told the explorer that they should have to camp near the river.

14. The lady told the cook that there were four people coming to dinner.

15. The reporter told the editor that he（reporter）had not been able to get an interview.

B. 1. They said to us,“You are on the wrong road. ”

2. I said to him,“You are wrong. ”

3. We said to them,“We have enjoyed ourselves. ”

4. We heard you say,“I don’t understand. ”

5. I said to them,“Your roof will leak. ”

C.2. He asked her what she was doing.

3. He asked her how she was.

4. He asked her when she had tea.

5. He asked her which the best way was.

6. He asked her whether（if）she was going to the pictures.

7. He asked her why she didn’t take more trouble.

8. He asked her whether（if）her sister was still going to school.

9. He asked her whether（if）this work was important.

10. He asked her when the next train left.

11. He asked her whether（if）she had told him the whole story.

12. He asked her whether（if）she had been to Sun Moon Lake.

13. He asked her how far it was from Taichun.

14. He asked her whether（if）she had a pleasant holiday.

15. He asked her whether（if）he might have some milk in his tea.

D.2. They said to us,“Can you hear clearly?”

3. The children said to their mother,“Can we stay up late?”

4. They said to me,“Which is the best hotel?”

5.“Do many people visit the temple?”, we said to the monks.

6. I said to her,“Can I get you a chair?”

7. I said to the stranger,“Do you speak English?”

8.“Where is the ship going?”，they said to the coastguard.

9. We said to the policeman,“May we stand there？”

10.“Where is the nearest telephone？”，asked they.

E.2. He told him not to do that.

3. He told him to write those words in his notebook.

4. He told him to put that pen in his desk.

5. He asked him to tell that boy to put his topee（hat）on.

6. He asked him to give that book to him.

7. He told him to be quick.

8. He told him not to let the snake get away.

9. He told him to take off those cups.

10. He told him to drive more carefully.

11. He asked him to lend him fifty cents.

12. He told him not to be fooled by them.

13. He asked him to come to the office at once.

14. He told him to stop that man.

15. He asked him to buy a ticket for him.

16. He told him not to let that door bang.

17. He told him to send that coolie to him.

18. He told him to stop making that noise．

19. He asked him to throw the ball to Chang.

20. He told him to wait a moment.

（26）条件句

练习题（39）

A. 1. have, had, had had；shall buy, should buy, should have bought

2. studies, studied，had studied; will surely pass, would surely pass, would surely have passed

3. calls, called, had called；shall speak, should speak, should have spoken

4. get, got, had got；shall return, should return, should have returned

5. see, saw, had seen；shall give, should give, should have given

6. find, found, had found；shall, should, should have given

7. turn, turned, had turned；shall be, should be, should have been

8. save, saved, had saved；will be, would be, would have been

9. comes, came, had come；shall see, should see, should have seen

10. know, knew, had known；shall ring, should ring, should have rung

B. 1. rested

2. would have been conquered

3. would have been killed

4. will miss

5. would have shot

6. were not provided

7. would occur

8. should be surprised

9. would have been flooded

10. is polished

11. should die, would（will）be buried

12. had died, would have been buried

13. rose, would be surprised

14. possessed, would fly

15. had not been warned, would have perished

C. 1. I should not go with her

2. he would have succeeded in the examination

3. if it is fine

4. I should not have done that

5. she will surely pass

6. I should have told you

7. if you had asked me

8. I would（should）type the letter for you

9. I should not have gone out

10. we shall go on a picnic

D.（现在）

1. I were there, I should（would）be very glad.

2. I did, I should（would）go swimming everyday.

3. I could, I should（would）buy a typewriter.

4. I had to, I should（would）work hard.

5. he had, he would go with us.

（过去）

1. if there had been one，he would have been saved.

2. if I had known it，I would（should）have rung you up.

3. if he had studied, he would have passed.

4. if I had been, I should（would）have done differently.

5. if I had been able to，I should（would）have spoken to her.

6. if he had studied it, he would have spoken it well.

7. if he had worn it, he would not have taken cold.

8. if he had come，he would have won the prize.

9. if I had been there, I should（would）have seen a good opera.

10. if I had been able to, I should（would）have gone to Venice.

（27）Wish 后面的虚拟式

练习题（40）

A. 1. owned 　　

2. were 　　

3. had gone 　　

4. had 　　

5. had had 　　

6. lived 　　

7. were

8. could 　　

9. could 　　

10. had studied

B. 1. I wish you would come back in an hour.

2. Miss Smith, I wish you would please write this letter right away.

3. I wish you would write your exercises in ink.

4. I wish you wouldn’t write your composition in pencil.

5. I wish you would wait for a moment.

（28）Should 的特别用法

练习题（41）

1. should go

2. should have gone

3. should do

4. should have called

5. should do

6. should have begun

7. should prepare

8. should not work, should take

9. should have answered

10. should have asked

11. should have notified

12. should not smoke

13. should have heard

（29）Ought to

练习题（42）

1. ought to stay

2. ought to have gone

3. ought not to work, ought to take

4. ought not to smoke

5. ought not to, have sent, ought to have sent

6. ought to have asked

7. ought to have notified

8. ought to study

9. ought to visit

10. ought to stay

11. ought not to drink

12. ought to have begun

（30）Should 和 Have to

练习题（43）

1. should have called

2. had to go

3. had to work

4. should study

5. should have taken

6. had to attend

7. have to attend

8. should go

9. should have written

10. had to stay

（31）助动词的特别用法——避免重复

练习题（44）

1. a. He likes her and I do too.

b. He likes her and so do I.

c. He doesn’t like her and I don’t either.　

d. He doesn’t like her and neither（nor）do I.

2. a. He speaks English and his wife does too.

b. He speaks English and so does his wife.

c. He doesn’t speak English and his wife doesn’t either.

d. He doesn’t speak English and neither（nor）does his wife.

3. a. He can go and we can too.

b. He can go and so can we.

c. He can’t go and we can’t either.

d. He can’t go and neither（nor）can we.

4. a. You are wrong and he is too.

b. You are wrong and so is he.

c. You aren’t wrong and he isn’t either.

d. You aren’t wrong and neither（nor）is he.

5. a. Mr. Wang has gone to America and his wife has too.

b. Mr. Wang has gone to America and so has his wife.

c. Mr. Wang hasn’t gone to America and his wife hasn’t either.

d. Mr. Wang hasn’t gone to America and neither（nor）has his wife.

6. a. Mary left right after lunch and John did too.

b. Mary…and so did John.

c. Mary…didn’t leave…and John didn’t either.

d. Mary…and neither（nor）did John.

7. a. She is going and you are too.

b. She is going and so are you.

c. She isn’t going and you aren’t either.

d. She isn’t going and neither（nor）are you.

8. a. I like movies and my sister does too.

b. I like…and so does my sister.

c. I don’t like movies and my sister doesn’t either.

d. I don’t like…and neither（nor）does my sister.

9. a. She is making good progress and her brother is too.

b. She is…and so is her sister.

c. She isn’t making good progress and her sister isn’t either.

d. She isn’t…and neither（nor）is her sister.

10. a. He will be here at ten o’clock and I will too.

b. He will…and so will I.

c. He won’t be here at ten o’clock and I won’t either.

d. He won’t be…and neither（nor）will I.

11. a. My watch is fast and yours is too.

b. My watch is…and so is yours.

c. My watch isn’t fast and yours isn’t either.

d. My watch isn’t…and neither（nor）is yours.

12. a. He wanted to do it and Mr. Jones did too.

b. He…and so did Mr Jones.

c. He didn’t want to do it and Mr. Jones didn’t either.

d. He didn’t…and neither（nor）did Mr. Jones.

13. a. Smith was arrested and his assistant was too.

b. Smith…and so was his assistant.

c. Smith wasn’t arrested and his assistant wasn’t either.

d. Smith wasn’t…and neither（nor）was his assistant.

14. a. He saw the accident and I did too.

b. He…and so did I.

c. He didn’t see the accident and I didn’t either.

d. He didn’t…and neither（nor）did I.

15. a. She likes to read novels and I do too.

b. She…and so do I.

c. She doesn’t like to read novels and I don’t either.

d. She doesn’t…and neither（nor）do I.

练习题（45）

1. can 　　

2. will 　　

3. is 　　

4. did 　　

5. do 　　

6. has 　　

7. didn’t 　　

8. did 　　

9. will　　

10. will 　　

11. will 　　

12. can’t 　　

13. can 　　

14. will 　　

15. do

16. don’t 　　

17. would 　　

18. should

练习题（46）

1. ought 　　

2. does 　　

3. will 　　

4. needn’t 　　

5. won’t　　

6. is 　　

7. are 　　

8. do

9. did 　　

10. did

（32）不定词

练习题（47）

1. to come 　　

2. to swim 　　

3. play 　　

4. to go 　　

5. run 　　

6. fire 　　

7. to pay 　　

8. cry 　　

9. to enter 　　

10. fool around 　　

11. to laugh 　　

12. to work 　　

13. steal

14. to stay 　　

15. waste your time

练习题（48）

1. to rain 　　

2. to be raining 　　

3. to have rained 　　

4. to have stopped 　　

5. to be stopping

6. to be sent 　　

7. to have been sent 　　

8. to be descending 　　

9. to have descended

10. have visited 　　

11. have attended 　　

12. attended 　　

13. to have been kidnapped 　

14. to have escaped 　　

15. to have reached　　

16. to have increased 　　

17. have neglected 　　

18. to be placed 　　

19. to have been murdered　　

20. to have made 　　

21. to be preparing 　　

22. have been punished　　

23. to swim

24. to be finished 　　

25. to have been finished

（33）分词

练习题（49）

A. 1. called 　　

2. Starting 　　

3.（being）defeated 　　

4. Having died 　　

5. lost 　　

6. Arriving 　　

7. walking 　　

8. having opened 　　

9.（being）spent 　　

10. having broken

11.（being）discovered 　　

12. Having finished 　　

13. being held 　　

14. loosing 　　

15. flying

B. 1. humming　　

2. dying 　　

3. fallen 　　

4. barking 　　

5. having struck 　　

6. wearing 　

7. dressed 　　

8. stealing 　　

9. brought 　　

10. growing 　　

11. typed 　　

12. built 　

13. walking 　　

14. killed 　　

15. chatting 　　

16. sent 　　

17. contained　　

18. carrying

19. dying 　　

20. following

（34）动名词

练习题（50）

A. 1. listening 　　

2. paying 　　

3. being defeated 　　

4. joining 　　

5. jumping 　　

6. spraying

7. coming 　　

8. making 　　

9. keeping 　　

10. growing 　　

11. making 　　

12. solving

13. falling 　　

14. building 　　

15. dressing, preparing

B. 1. in seeing 　　

2. of swimming 　　

3. in spelling 　　

4. telephoning 　　

5. of seeing 　　

6. reading 　　

7. from finishing 　　

8. of finding 　　

9. in helping 　　

10. of moving 　　

11. on helping　　

12. in teaching 　　

13. of starting 　　

14. to seeing

（35）不定词乎？动名词乎？

练习题（51）

1. laughing 　　

2. from expressing 　　

3. to smoke 　　

4. to adopt 　　

5. from smoking 　　

6.（to）put 　　

7. in editing 　　

8. in refusing 　　

9. on knowing 　　

10. of attaining 　　

11. to fight 　　

12. to answering 　　

13. to say 　　

14. giving 　　

15. of going

16. meeting 　　

17. to tell 　　

18. to find 　　

19. to cry, to wonder 　　

20. raining

21. trying 　　

22. making 　　

23. crying 　　

24. accounting 　　

25. reading, reading 　　

26. of reading 　　

27. of doing 　　

28. to live 　　

29. to know 　　

30. of getting

（36）介词

练习题（52）

A. 1. by 　　

2. to 　　

3. on 　　

4. in 　　

5. for 　　

6. to 　　

7. of 　　

8. to 　　

9. of　　

10. of 　　

11. of 　　

12. to 　　

13. for 　　

14. of 　　

15. to 　　

16. of 　　

17. from

18. from 　　

19. to 　　

20. to 　　

21. in，of 　　

22. to 　　

23. to，for 　　

24. of 　　　

25. of 　　

26. to 　　

27. into 　　

28. on　　

29. with 　　

30. to，for

B. 1. at half past eight　　

2. in December 　　

3. at sunset 　　

4. to school 　　

5. at sunrise

6. in the morning　　

7. on the fourth of June in the year 1894 　　

8. on Wednesday　　

9. at midnight 　　

10. on June 21st 　　

11. at eight o’clock　　

12. in February and July 　　

13. at night 　　

14. in winter　　

15. in the afternoon 　　

16. search for my lost pen　　

17. suffered from a painful disease

18. at No. 52　　

19. satisfied with

C. 1. at　　

2. for 　　

3. on 　　

4. on 　　

5. of, at 　　

6. with 　　

7. for　　

8. against 　　

9. for 　　

10. in 　　

11. in 　　

12. into 　　

13. with 　　

14. with 　　

15. from　　

16. of

17. with 　　

18. for 　　

19. to 　　

20. on 　　

21. at 　　

22. on 　　

23. for 　　

24. for

25. by 　　

26. on 　　

27. for 　　

28. by 　　

29. for 　　

30. from 　　

31. from 　　

32. by

33. to 　　

34. at 　　

35. to 　　

36. on　　

37. for 　　

38. to 　　

39. by 　　

40. to

41. with 　　

42. from 　　

43. at 　　

44. by 　　

45. than 　　

46. for 　　

47. for

48. for 　　

49. of 　　

50. to 　　

51. for 　　

52. at 　　

53. than 　　

54. for 　　

55. for

56. from 　　

57. with 　　

58. in 　　

59. in　　

60. on 　　

61. from 　　

62. of 　　

63. to

练习题（53）

1. near 或 beside 　　

2. besides 　　

3. by 　　

4. to 　　

5. in 或 during 　　

6. down 　　

7. by 　　

8. by 　　

9. about 或 on 　　

10. after 　　

11. against 　　

12. among 　　

13. between 　　

14. after 　　

15. at 　　

16. against 　　

17. at 　　

18. behind 　　

19. at

20. down 　　

21. of, from 　　

22. off 　　

23. on, on 　　

24. for 　　

25. from 　　

26. into, in

27. within 　　

28. from 　　

29. in, in 　　

30. in, out 　　

31. of 　　

32. out（away）, off

33. on, of 　　

34. for 　　

35. from 　　

36. in, in 　　

37. of, of 　　

38. off, with 　　

39. on, for

40. in, to, of, in, of, for（in）　　

41. in, over, in 　　

42. at, of, of, by（past）　　

43. to（round）, with, by（at）　　

44. in, since, of 　　

45. through, on, to 　　

46. to, for 　

47. towards, up 　　

48. for, at, under　　

49. in, to 　　

50. up, in, of 　　

51. with, for, at, with

52. of, without 　　

53. back, at, over, of 　　

54. round, in（during）, of 　　

55. through, at

56. in, for, since 　　

57. to, to 　　

58. about, in, for 　　

59. in 或 under 　　

60. at, at, up

（37）词的顺序

练习题（54）

1. The chair on which he sat cost ten shillings.

2. He shot the mad dog with a gun after driving…

3. Next morning mounting on a horse，he left the house…

4. He repeated those lines with perfect accuracy after he had…

5. The judge saw that the man was innocent more clearly than…

6. English is difficult not only to speak but also to spell.

7. I am an ascetic neither in theory nor in practice.

8. His daily custom is to tell after dinner anecdotes which amuse or excite the company.

9. Some of lady artists’paintings ,…

10. The general indignantly ordered the deserters…

11.…we keep the tongue more in…

12. He has been here two years ,…it is even more than…

13. I have read the writings of Plato , who was…?

14. A gang of robbers, armed from head to foot , entered the house…

15. A lady brought up in England , the daughter of a civil officer retired from India, seeks employment.

16. A fisherman found his body floating lifeless on the water at a short distance from where the boat was upset.

17.…whence he was destined never to return.

18. Riding over the battlefield , our correspondent saw several soldiers dead or wounded.

19. Paradise Lost , divided into twelve separate parts , is the name of Milton’s great epic poem on the lost of paradise.

20. Before we pay the men , let us see what work they have done.

（38）副词的位置

练习题（55）

A. 1.…is entirely new to me.

2.…flew straight to the landing ground.

3. I went to London to see my friend yesterday.

4. John is coming here tomorrow.

5. You came here quickly on Friday.

6. We went there yesterday.

7. Take your hat off. 或 Take off your hat.

8.…to write down these notes. 或 to write these notes down.

9. Pick it up.

10. Write them down.

11. I never do that.

12. I have always done that.

13. He will always speak badly.

14. She has often been here.

15. They have never been so early before.

16. Food like this is always good enough for me.

17. The children soon felt quite happy.

18. If he likes you perhaps he will ask you to stay longer.

19. What I like most , you like least.

20. I often stay at my office working late.

B. 1. We have lost only one game.

2. He was married only yesterday.

3. Only I am left.

4. These people seem to live only for pleasure.

5. We had only one orange between us.

6. She writes only on one side of the paper.

7. I only drink water. 或 I drink water only.

8. Only John was punished.

9. I have only one dollar left.

10. Please…；I want only to read it.

C. 1. I can speak English very well.

2. I like music very much.

3. A beginner cannot speak English correctly.

4. The teacher explained the problem very well.

5. The hunter shot a lion with his gun.

6. He put the money into his pocket.

7. I sent a letter to my mother.

8. He learnt the poem by heart.

9. I received a nice present from my uncle.

10. He shut the book quickly.

11. I am always on time.

12. It seldom rains in the desert.

13. We went there yesterday.

14. I am not tall enough.

15. He begged the teacher not to punish him.

16. I told him not to get angry many times.

17. He will not have finished his work by tomorrow.

18. The question is often asked by students.

19. John did not come to school yesterday.

20. I almost won the game.

（39）常易混淆的副词

练习题（56）

A. 1. very 　　

2. too 　　

3. too 　　

4. very 　　

5. too 　　

6. very 　　

7. too 　　

8. too

9. too 　　

10. very

B. 1. very 　　

2. much（very）　　

3. much 　　

4. very 　　

5. very 　　

6. much 　　

7. much 　　

8. very 　　

9. much 　　

10. much

C. 1. very much 　　

2. very much 　　

3. too much 　　

4. too much　　

5. too much 　　

6. very much 　　

7. too much 　　

8. very much　　

9. very much 　　

10. very much

（40）常易混淆的形容词

练习题（57）

A. 1. some 　　

2. any 　　

3. any 　　

4. any 　　

5. any 　　

6. some

B. 1. interested 　　

2. interesting 　　

3. interesting 　　

4. interesting 　　

5. interested 　　

6. interesting, interested

C. 1. farther 　　

2. elder 　　

3. older 　　

4. Every 　　

5. less 　　

6. last 　　

7. clear

8. high

D. 1. much 　　

2. Many 　　

3. much 　　

4. much 　　

5. many 　　

6. much

E. 1. a little 　　

2. little 　　

3. a few 　　

4. little, few 　　

5. few 　　

6. little 　　

7. A few

8. a few 　　

9. little 　　

10. few

（41）常易混淆的动词

练习题（58）

A. 1. lie 　　

2. lying 　　

3. laid 　　

4. lain 　　

5. Lay 　　

6. lain　　

7. laid 　　

8. lie

9. lied 　　

10. lay

B. 1. sets 　　

2. sets 　　

3. set 　　

4. sits 　　

5. set 　　

6. sit 　　

7. seat　　

8. seated

9. seated 　　

10. seat

C. 1. risen 　　

2. raise 　　

3. rises 　　

4. risen 　　

5. raise 　　

6. rise 　　

7. rose　　

8. raised 　　

9. rose 　　

10. raise

D. 1. hanged 　　

2. hung 　　

3. hung 　　

4. hanged 　　

5. hung

E. 1. borrow 　　

2. borrow 　　

3. lend 　　

4. lend 　　

5. borrowing

F. 1. robbed 　　

2. stolen 　　

3. robbed 　　

4. steal 　　

5. rob

G. 1. refused 　　

2. denied 　　

3. deny 　　

4. refused 　　

5. refused

H. 1. listened, heard 　　

2. hear 　　

3. listening 　　

4. hear 　　

5. listen

I. 1. fall 　　

2. fell 　　

3. fell 　　

4. felling 　　

5. fell

J. 1. May 　　

2. Can 　　

3. may 　　

4. may 　　

5. can

K. 1. discovered 　　

2. persuaded 　　

3. took 　　

4. learns 　　

5. sleep 　　

6. accept 　

7. drowned 　　

8. remember 　　

9. revenged 　　

10. take part

练习题（59）

1. He was well aware of…，and yet conscious of…

2. A miser can easily satisfy his needs but can…his desires.

3. A custom of industry…the habit of keeping…

4. The hermit was as famous for…as the robber was notorious for…

5.…opportunities of observing his character, but I never remark that particular trait.

6. China is a great country, containing many large cities…

7. Let us stop…and stay here…

8. He was as strict…as he was severe…

9. Society is divided into…The lowest is separated from…

10.…becomes empty…，and assume the vacant title…

11. I know an instance…, who is an example…

12. We grant…and give him…

13. He felt much gratitude…by the thankfulness…

14.…into four parts…, and each…received his portion.

15.…set at liberty , they have now perfect freedom…

16.…a timid man, he repelled that cowardly assault…

17. A person may forgive…；…cannot pardon a criminal.

18. He sent a reply…；…contained no answer to…

19. He proceeded on…，but he had not advanced for,…

20. To change a dress…，to alter one is…

21. As he had no arms，…which he used as weapons.

22.…your first attempt，…but try again.

23. He was liberal…，and had generous feelings…

24. He made a solemn promise…most serious attention…

25. He was a very fit man…，…were not suitable for…

26. I apprehended…，but could not understand…

27. He is a little below me…any means beneath me…

28. Be so good as to bring the book…I will fetch the footstool…

29. Savages clothe…；moderns dress…

30. Let this plant be put…and placed in…

（42）词类的构成

练习题（60）

A. 1. able 　　

2. reasonable 　　

3. absurd 　　

4. accidental 　　

5. advantageous

6. adventurous 　　

7. affectionate 　　

8. progressive 　　

9. aristocratic　　

10. athletic

11. dirty 　　

12. feverish 　　

13. quarrelsome 　　

14. calm 　　

15. characteristic

16. chaste 　　

17. circular 　　

18. commercial 　　

19. brief 　　

20. criminal

21. contradictory 　　

22. courteous 　　

23. emperial 　　

24. essential 　　

25. favorable

26. questionable

B. 1. acceptance 　　

2. accusation 　　

3. addition 　　

4. admittance 　　

5. adoption 　　

6. application 　　

7. appreciation 　　

8. annoyance 　　

9. alliance 　　

10. arrival

11. advancement 　　

12. movement 　　

13. allowance 　　

14. argument 　　

15. choice

16. civilization 　　

17. comparison 　　

18. signature 　　

19. temptation 　　

20. revelation

21. assistance 　　

22. attention 　　

23. behavior（-viour）　　

24. belief 　　

25. conference

26. condensation 　　

27. consideration 　　

28. conquest 　　

29. trial 　　

30. residence

C. 1. admire admirable admirably

2. live lively, life-like, live livelily

3. appear apparent apparently

4. attract attractive attractively

5. memorize memorable memorably

6. beautify beautiful beautifully

7. terrify terrible terribly

8. certify certain certainly

9. obey obedient obediently

10. pacify peaceful peacefully

11. correct correct correctly

12. encourage courageous courageously

13. purify pure purely

14. deceive deceitful deceitfully

15. differ different differently

16. explode explosive explosively

17. realize real really

18. grieve grievous grievously

19. hasten hasty hastily

20. laugh laughable laughably

（43）语句的结合

练习题（61）

A. 1. Writing down all the answers he still had time to revise them.

2. Holding his walking-stick…he walked up and down the street.

3. Arriving in town…he went at once to the best shop.

4. Being placed in different kennels, the dogs cannot quarrel.

5. Having hung up their hats, the travellers sat down to rest.

6. Being a successful tradesman, her father was able to leave her a great deal of money.

7. Having bought a good house and furnished it well, he brought his family to live in it.

8. Disliking the noise of London streets I returned to my quiet house in the country.

9. Being much pleased with…he forgave the rudeness.

10. Being inspired with hope he climbed up the precipice and reached the top in safety.

B. 1. The spring being now well advanced, we shall soon hear the cuckoo’s voice again.

2. The war being over and the country pacified, the volunteers were sent back to their homes.

3. He having remained behind, the rest set off at 2 o’clock p. m.

4. The admiral having brought…，the crews had a little recreation on shore.

5. He having called for his gun and taken a good aim, the mad dog was shot.

6. He having refused to open the door, the unwelcome visitors went away.

7. Every farmer being provided…，the fields will soon be ploughed up for the next harvest.

8. They having reached a place of safety, no further danger need now be expected.

9. The judge having entered the court and taken his seat, the trial proceeded.

10. A brief halt having being made for luncheon, the army then resumed its match.

C. 1. He earns his living by（means of）driving a bullock cart to carry goods from place to place.

2. He declined to open his door to these visitors without giving any reason（for his refusal）.

3. The men made very little profit by their industry.

4. Their brother, in the disguise of a sailor, knocked at the front door.

5. According to an old Greek fable about King Midas, every thing touched by him turned into gold.

6. His progress was very much impeded by the people crowding the street to see him.

7. The soldier appeared on the scene with his right hand holding a bayonet over his shoulder.

8. Besides being an eloquent speaker, he was also a successful man of business.

9. To his friends, great relief, the traveller returned in safety from the Arctic seas.

10. The parents took a great deal of trouble in wishing to make every child happy as well as useful.

D. 1. He has now fifteen pupils in his class to teach and to prepare them for the next examination.

2. He had no money to carry on the business any longer.

3. He drew up his forces in battle array to meet the enemy marching towards him.

4. He stayed at home in order to look after his aged parents.

5. It is very healthy for a tired man to enioy the fresh breezes of the sea.

6. He must sign his name to ensure the cheque to be cashed.

7. My advice to him was to make the best use of the short time left to him.

8. It was the sailors’custom to allow no rats to be killed on the ship.

9. The pigeons flew down to pick up the grains to satisfy their hunger.

10. He was too ill to go to school on that day.

E. 1. Washington, the federal capital of the United States, is called after General Washington, the leader of the forces of the American colonies and the founder of the great American Republic.

2. Oliver Cromwell was succeeded by his son, Richard by name.

3. That law, the cause of much trouble and discontent, must be repealed at not distant time.

4. He has many of a great commander’s qualities, such as coolness of judgment in sudden emergences and skill in directing the movements of troops.

5. He fled from his creditors, a very dishonest act.

6. John Bunyan wrote a well known book, Pilgrim’s Progress by name, an allegory describing the trials and temptations of a Christian on his way to the Land of Promise.

7. Beside him sported on the green his little granddaughter Wilhelmine.

8. Cromwell, first a private gentleman, next a popular leader in the Long Parliament, then commander of the Parliamtary forces, assumed the power of a king.

9. Lord Clive, formerly a writer in a merchant’s office at Madras, founded the British Empire in India.

10. Brutus, the enemy of kingly government of every form and kind, conspired with Cassius and others to kill Julius Caesar, the first man to make himself emperor of Rome and the first citizen to acquire an absolute power equal to that of a king.

练习题（62）

1. They asked a third person to decide the point for them；for they can not decide it themselves.

2. They despised my warning, and therefore they shall eat of the fruit of their own way.

3. Her ways are ways of pleasantness and all her paths are peace.

4. He is a rich man, but he is not proud of his wealth and makes no distinction between rich and poor.

5. The feet of a cat are furnished with long sharp claws, and so a bird or mouse, once caught, cannot escape.

6. An honest man will both speak out and not be afraid of consequences.

7. In all labour there is profits, but the talk of the lips tends only to penury.

8. Life has few enjoyments, yet we cling to it.

9. They died on a battlefield, and consequently they lay on a bed of honour.

10. At this time of the year I do not rise at five o’clock in the morning, but rise at seven or eight.

练习题（63）

A. 1. No one knows when he will come.

2. It is quite evident that rain will fall today.

3. I think that I shall never clearly understand this.

4. We heard that the school would open in ten days’time.

5. You must know that the air is never quite at rest.

6. We cannot rely on what he says.

7. It was very unfortunate that you were taken ill.

8. He was a man of fine character in all points except that he was rather timid.

9. I will grant you whatever you desire to have.

10. You find out too late that it was your duty to make the best of your time at school.

B. 1. The house in which we lived has fallen down.

2. This is the story that I heard ten years ago.

3. I have seen the house where Shakespeare was born.

4. The story which you are telling me is surely not true.

5. We stopped for the night at a small rest house which stood at the foot of the hill.

6. His good education raised him above many men of his own age and rank. 或 The good education which he had received raised him…

7. In our ramble through the forest we came upon a thatched cottage beside which a fine cedar tree of forty or fifty feet high was growing.

8. The young doctor who’s at that table came with his wife.

9. The students who’re in my class speak formally.

10. The short story（which is）about baseball is interesting.

C. 1. Let us go to bed, as it is now late.

2. He walked with care, because he was afraid of stumbling.

3. I agree to this, if you sign your name.

4. Even if he may punish me, yet will I trust him.

5. He returned home, after he had finished the work.

6. He persevered so steadily, that he succeeded.

7. Although he is sixty years old, his eyesight is still excellent.

8. They deserted their former associate, because he had become poor and unfortunate.

9. It has not ceased raining, since we left the house.

10. Whether he gives me leave or not, I shall go back to my parents.

（44）语句的转换

练习题（64）

A. 1. We were surprised that he had strength.

2. It is said that the president is ill.

3. Can you tell me how I shall get to the town?

4. We must hope that better time will come.

5. We know who wrote the letter.

6. Tell us how high this tower is.

7. I do not believe that the story is true.

8. It is believed（They believe）that the murderer has been arrested.

9. I do not expect that he will return.

10. It is not right that we should idle away our time.

B. 1. The trees which grow there are pines.

2. I heard a dog which was barking somewhere.

3. Is that your brother who is getting out of that bus?

4. Where is the money which was received yesterday?

5. What was the agreement which had been signed last week?

6. There was a hat which hung on a peg.

7. Give me the books which lie on the table.

8. We saw some farmers who were planting rice.

9. The message which was sent yesterday was received yesterday.

10. What is the animal that is moving in that bush?

C. 1. When I climbed the hill, I saw a snake.

2. He is very angry because you do not obey.

3.…because a puncture happened.

4.…lest it should rain.

5. While he was absent…

6.…after he had made a long search.

7.…before he returns.

8. If a fire break（s）out,…

9.…if you do not take trouble.

10.…since he arrived.

练习题（65）

1. The elder brother is not so clever as the younger.

2. Gold is heavier than any other metals. 或 No other metals are so heavy as gold.

3. I am not such a fool as to do such a thing.

4. Poverty is not so terrible an enemy as bad health.

5. It is not so easy to describe this scene as to imagine it.

6. A dead lion is not so strong as a live ass.

7. I would sooner（rather）die than injure a friend.

8. You are as good as he in every respect.

9. I do not know his character any better than you do.

10. A child knows as well as he how to keep his（its）temper.

练习题（66）

1. He is as tall as you are.

2. This was so great an honor as to excite some of his rivals.

3. A coward alone would flee from his duty.

4. He tried all plans.

5. For ever will I quit the shores of France. 或 This shall be the last time I visit the shores of France.

6. Great men are of all nations and of all classes.

7. As long as the fair continued every man kept his temper.

8. Learned men are sometimes silly.

9. He has to give me thanks that I deserved.

10. France comes nearest to England at the Strait of Dover.

练习题（67）

A. 1. He promised to assist in the project.

2. I am engaged today at five o’clock.

3. He amused us very much by talking. 或 His talk amused us very much.

4. St. Paul was born in Rome.

5. To rely on such a traitor as that would be foolish.

6. He strove to win the first prize and succeeded. 或 He succeeded in striving to win the first prize.

7. The plan appears to be a good one.

8. He insolently presumed to expect the first place.

9. If you desire to be admitted to my service, you must sign this bond.

10. He forced his way through the crowd.

B. 1. What is the meaning of his such impertinence?

2. The sagacity of a spider is wonderful.

3. I left my house at six o’clock because of（owing to；by）his desire.

4. The entire innocence of the accused is my belief.

5. The activity of his mind caused his success in everything.

6. He had the good sense to remind his business.

7. The journey did not incur much expense.

8. Whatever his intention may have been, he has caused us disappointment.

9. Her simplify in dress adds to her beauty.

10. He is at times inclined to act with dishonesty.

C. 1. He suffered an absolute ruin by that unlucky business.

2. Theft in former times was a crime punishable with death.

3. He is a remarkably industrious man.

4. A man inclined to be vicious will never be prosperous.

5. To be temperate in eating and drinking is the way to preserve health.

6. His proficiency in speaking is unusual.

7. He was so suspicious that he looked upon every man as his secret enemy.

8. He was not so polite as to stand aside.

9. Every one was pleased with him for being fearless and independent.

10. He was presumptuous enough to think that his opinion has more weight than mine.

D. 1. He didn’t do you that injury intentionally.

2. Probably rain will fall tomorrow.

3. I signed this bond very reluctantly.

4. He lived temperately and regularly.

5. The doctor studied the invalid’s case very carefully and patiently.

6. He treated the prisoners very generously.

7. He was ordered to leave the room instantly.

8. He says things meaninglessly. 或 He talks meaninglessly.

9. He does every thing carelessly.

练习题（68）

1. The agreement was signed and all were satisfied.

2. The judge believes in his innocence and so do I.

3. He fled away, or he would be killed.

4. He must not do such a thing again；otherwise he will be dismissed.

5. All men were against him, yet he persevered.

6. He was honoured, for he had health.

7. He has ambition to excel, therefore he worked night and day.

8. We failed to carry out our purpose, and so we were greatly disappointed.

9. He not only had difficulties, but he also lost his health.

10. He spoke the truth；for he feared the disgrace of falsehood.

练习题（69）

A. 1. I was glad to hear that you had succeeded so well.

2. It is generally believed that he has died of poison.

3. No one can tell when he will come.

4. He shouted that his neighbours would come to his help.

5. We can place no confidence in what he says.

6. That he died at so young an age is much to be regretted.

7. We must hope that better times will come.

8. What he stated should be accepted.

9. We could see from the result that his labor was great.

10. It was reported that he had lost most of his money.

B. 1. That was a fault which could not be forgiven.

2. The present house that is ours suits us exactly.

3. The explanation which they have given cannot be true.

4. He was not a man who would tell a lie.

5. Joseph who had remained a long time in prison was utterly forgotten.

6. Is this the way in which you learn your lessons?

7. The benefits which he obtained by his early training were thrown away.

8. The troubles which beseted him on all sides did not daunt him.

9. Egypt was the first country that became civilized.

10. The weather that follows a storm is generally calm.

C. a. 1. Since we have no other helpers we must accept his aid.

2. They were much surprised, because they heard him have confessed his fault.

3. He was much ashamed, as he was unable to give an answer.

b.4. The problem was so difficult that it could not be solved.

5. He worked so well that every one was astonished.

6. He became rich so suddenly that he fell under suspision.

c.7. He labors day and night（so）that he may become rich.

8. He started by night lest he should be seen by any one.

9. He sticks steadily to his work in order that he may become rich.

d.10. Unless we get leave from the teacher, we should not go out.

11. He would be very thankful if he was relieved of all this trouble.

12. If you turn to the right, you will…

13. Had the master been absent, the whole house would have…

e.14. He is strong, considering that he is a child of eight.

15. Another went out as every man came in.

f.16. He was very sorry when he found out his mistake.

17. He felt a good deal of pain as he coughed every time.

18. When the cat is absent, the mice play.

19. Every one has been happy since this news was received.

20. English was not spoken in Britain, till the Saxon arrived.

第二编 作文之部

一 造句例解

（1）名词与冠词的关系

1. 一次不要做两件事（以免一无所成）。

Don’t try to do two things at a time.

〔注〕at a time = at one time

2. 狗是忠实的动物。

A dog is a faithful animal.（= Dogs are faithful animals.）

〔注〕a dog = any dog

3. 这些杯子都是一样大小的。

These cups are all of a size.

〔注〕of a size = of the same size

4. 从前有一个村庄里面住着一个老人。

Once there lived an old man in a village.

〔注〕an old man = a certain old man

a village = a certain village

5. 我每月写一封信给我的父母。

I write to my parents once a month.

〔注〕once a month = once per month

6. 他以为他是一个拿破仑。

He thinks he is a Napoleon.

〔注〕a Napoleon = one like Napoleon

7. 有天一只兔子遇到一只乌龟。那兔子说：“我们赛跑吧。”

One day a hare met a tortoise.“Let us have a race, ”said the hare.

〔注〕第一次说 a hare，再提到时便用 the hare。

8. 门口有人来了，你去看看是谁。

Someone is at the door. Go and see who it is.

〔注〕虽是第一次出现的名词，但对方明显知道所指的是何者时，就可以用定冠词的 the 了。

9. 他在研究十八世纪的英国文学。

He is studying the English literature of the 18th century.

〔注〕因为后面加了 of the 18th century 一个“限定的”修饰短语，所以在 English literature 前就要加用一个定冠词 the 了，普通便不要加，如“He is studying English literature. ”。

10. 地球以三百六十五日围绕太阳一周。

The earth goes round the sun in 365 days.

〔注〕指唯一的东西就要加定冠词，世界上只有一个地球就说 the earth，台南只有一个高等学府，在当地的人就说 the college。

11. 在外国工资是以周计的。

In foreign countries labourers are paid by the week.

〔注〕by the week 按星期计算。又如买布是按码计算，就说 Cloth is sold by the yard.

12. 平常他都起得很早。

Usually he gets up very early in the morning.

〔注〕在一定的短语中，如在 in the morning，in the afternoon，in the evening, in the night 等之中，名词前要加 the 字。又如：但是在他生日那天的早上，他却起得很迟。（But on the morning of his birthday he got up very late.）一句，因系“特定日子”的早上（on the morning of the 10th, on Sunday morning）, 所以前面的介词不用 in，而改用 on，附带说明，希读者注意。

13. 我住在台北市郊，但我的父母就住在乡下。

I live in the suburbs of Taipei, but my parents live in the country.

〔注〕“郊外”及“乡下”这种字眼的前面都要加定冠词。

14. 他抓住我的手，凝视着我的脸孔。

He caught me by the arm and stared me in the face.

〔注〕这正是英文的表现法和中文不同的地方，正像我们说时间要先说日子一样，英文说拍某人的肩，批某人的颊等等，一定要先说人，然后才说及于其身上被拍或被批的那一部分，同时在那一部分的前面要加定冠词 the，如果说“He caught my arm and stared at my face. ”便是中国式的英语了。

15. 他乘克利夫兰总统号横渡太平洋。

He crossed the Pacific by the President Cleveland.

〔注〕川河海洋及船舶等与水有关的固有名词的前面要加定冠词。

16. 爱佛来斯特山是喜马拉雅山脉中的最高峰。

Mt. Everest is the highest peak in the Himalayas.

〔注〕山脉名前要加定冠词，但在单独的山名前便不要加冠词。群岛名及单独的岛名的前面，也是一样：“Luzon is the largest island in the Philippines. ”（吕宋是菲律宾群岛中最大的一岛）。

17. 他生在美国。

He was born in the United States of America.

〔注〕在复数的国名前面，要加定冠词，他如 the Netherlands（荷兰），the U. S. S. R.（苏联）。

18.《伦敦时报》说首相或将辞职，但《曼彻斯特导报》便一字未提。

The London Times says that the premier may resign，but the Manchester Guardian says nothing about it.

〔注〕报章、杂志、书籍等的名字前面，要加定冠词。

19. 他在第二次世界大战的最后一年回国，在上个月死去了。

He came home in the last year of World War Ⅱ，and died last month.

〔注〕说 the last month 是指某时间的最后一个月，不加定冠词单说 last month 是指上个月，即 this month 的前一个月。

20. 大家都说中国人是勤励的民族。

People say that the Chinese are an industrious people.

〔注〕说 people 是指一般世人，说 a people＝a nation 是指一个民族。

21. 他是一个大将兼政治家。

He was a great general and statesman.

〔注〕说同一个人的时候，只要前面用一个冠词就够了，如果是两个人就前后都要用冠词，如“我要一个打字员，另外还要一个速记员。”英文就说“I want a typist and a stenographer. ”。

22. 像他那样好的人，不会做这样卑鄙的事。

So good a man as he cannot do such a mean thing.

〔注〕普通用法是把冠词置于形容词之前，如 a black dog, the big cat 等，但用某些特别的形容词或副词时，就要把冠词置于其后，如 so good a man, such a man, half a mile, double the price, what a picture, no less a person, all the children, both the brothers, so honest a boy, too bad an excuse, how good a girl, quite the thing, just a little, nearly the same, 等等。

23. 我看见远处有一个岛。

I saw an island in the distance.

〔注〕在介词 in 后用定冠词，在介词 at 后用不定冠词，如 at a distance。

24. 面包为养生之本。

Bread is the staff of life.

〔注〕物质名词以用单数“不加冠词”为原则，但特别指定者例外，如“The bread is cut up. ”。此外不用冠词的还有下列各项：（1）在抽象名词前（Necessity is the mother of invention.）（2）当 man，woman 用作代表的意义时（Man likes company.）（3）餐名前（At what time do you have breakfast？）（4）当名词用于呼唤格时（Mother，Father wants you.）（5）在表示资格的 as 或 in the capacity of 后，He traveled as president.（6）表示官阶及职位的名字，与固有名词同用时，或用作补语时（General Yo；King George；He was elected president；Charles Darwin，author of the‘Origin of Species’.）（7）在语法上有同等关系的名词，在成语中并列而用时（side by side；day after day；from flower to flower；pen and ink）（8）名词与介词或动词结合为一成语时（by bicycle；by train；on foot；in front of，to give way；to take place）（9）在 school、church、market、bed、table、prison、hospital 等词表示本来的目的时（I went to school with him；They are at church.）（10）在表示种类时的 kind（sort，manner，class）of 后（What kind of bird is it？）（11）在表示让步或感叹的字句开始名词时（Hero as he was，he shrunk from it；I thought him an honest fellow—fool that I was!）（12）名词前用有 this、that、which、my、each、every、some、any 等代替冠词的字眼时，则可略去冠词。

（2）代词应注意的用法

1. 现在阴云密布，说不定就要下雨。

It is cloudy now，but it may begin to rain at any moment.

〔注〕说“天气”是可用 it 代表的。“今天天气好”，很少有人说 The weather is fine today，而普通只是说 It is fine today.

2. 你的表现在什么时候了？——正三点钟。

What time is it by your watch?——It is three.

〔注〕it 又是“时间”的代词。

3. 从这里到你学校有多远？——走去不过十分钟。

How far is it from here to your school?——It is only ten minutes’walk.

〔注〕it 又可以用来表示“距离”。

4. 撒谎是不对的。

It is wrong to tell a lie.

〔注〕it＝to tell a lie. 所以 it 只是形式上的主语，其实际的主语为 to tell a lie 一个不定词，因此可知 it 又可用做形式主语。

5. 我规定在每天早餐前出去散步一回。

I make it a rule to take a walk before breakfast every morning.

〔注〕it 又可以作为形式上的宾语来用。这个 it 即等于“to take a walk before breakfast every morning. ”。

6. 难怪他要生气。

It is no wonder that he should get angry.

〔注〕it 又可以代表一个从句，作为那个句子的形式上的主语，其实际的主语为 that 以下的从句。

7. 我当作你能来的。

I took it for granted that you could come.

〔注〕这个 it 也是形式上的宾语，其真正的宾语为 that 以下的名词从句。

8. 在1492年发现美洲的是哥伦布。

It was Columbus that discovered America in 1492.

〔注〕It…that…是加强语气的说法，普通是说“Columbus discovered America in 1492. ”。一个句子中的任何一部分都可以用这种方式来加强语气，本句所加强的是主语的 Columbus，如果要加强宾语的 America 便可以说“It was America that Columbus discovered in 1492.”。如果要加强发现的时间，便可以说“It was in 1492 that Columbus discovered America. ”。

9. 人要敬老。

We（You）should respect our（your）elders.

〔注〕漠然地指一般人，可用 we 或 you，正好像用 one 或 they 一样。（见下二例句）

10. 加拿大说什么语言？

What language do they speak in Canada？

11. 用功的人一定成功。

One who studies hard is sure to succeed.

12. 你有自来水笔吗？——嗯，我有。

Have you a fountain-pen？——Yes, I have one.

〔注〕代替“不定冠词 + 名词”（在此句中即为 a fountain-pen）要用 one；但代替“定冠词 + 名词”（即 the fountain-pen）便要用 it。例如 Where is the fountain-pen？——It is on the desk.（自来水笔在哪里？——在桌子上。）

13. 你有笔吗？——有的，我有很好的。

Have you any pens？——Yes, I have some good ones.

〔注〕代替复数名词，就用 ones。在本例中用 ones 代替 pens, 以避免重复来说同一名词。单数当然是用 one 代替，如上例的 one 代替 a fountain-pen。

14. 不要吃得过多。

Don’t overeat yourself.

〔注〕英文中有许多动词，叫作反身动词（reflexive verb），后头跟着有一个 oneself 的，如 enjoy oneself；avail oneself 等，这个 oneself 并没有“自己”的意思，中文可以不译。

15. 他为之狂怒。

He was beside himself with rage.

〔注〕beside oneself＝almost mad. 这是含有 -self pronoun 的 idiom 之一例。其他 oneself 前有 preposition 的，主要有 by oneself 独自（无伴）；for oneself 为己，自立（不依赖人）；of oneself 出于自动，自发，自然。例如 If you don’t know the word，consult the dictionary for yourself.（如果你不认识那个字，自己查字典。）He lived there all by himself.（他独自一人住在那里。）The light went out of itself.（灯自熄了。）

16. 人人尽力使自己的国家成为安乐的居处。

Everybody must do his best to make his country a good place to live in.

〔注〕everybody 中必然有男有女，但英文中没有一个男女共通的单数所有格代词，只好用 his or her, 但这样说未免太啰嗦了，普通人只好不顾语法而用 their 一字，实则用 his 就好了。因为用男性代表，正如用 man 代替人类一样。

17. 我们中国人是一个爱好和平的民族。

We , Chinese, are a peace-loving people.

〔注〕we、Chinese 为同格的主语，如在宾格时就应该用 us，如 They know us, Chinese, a peace-loving people.（他们知道我们中国人是一个爱好和平的民族。）

18. 你的比她的好多了。

Yours is（are）much better than hers.

〔注〕yours 和 hers 这两个所有代词是单复同形的。不可写为 your’s 或 her’s. Cf. It’s mine. = It is mine.

19. 新加坡的气候比日本的要温和得多。

The climate of Singapore is much milder than that of Japan.

〔注〕这个 that（=climate）是绝对不可略去的。如其所代表的名词为复数时则用 those。例如“His children are much older than those of his brother.”。（他的儿女比他兄弟的儿女要大得多。）

20. 你在找什么？——我在找我的自来水笔。

What are you looking for？——I am looking for my fountain-pen.

21. 你知道我在找什么吗？

Do you know what I am looking for？

22. 你以为我在找什么？

What do you think I am looking for？

23. 你为什么要说这样的话？

What made you say such a thing？

〔注〕这等于说 Why did you say such a thing？又如 What do you say to going on a picnic？= How do you like going on a picnic？

What is your home town？= Where is your home town？其他在英语中用 what 开始的很多，如：What is the matter with you？（你怎么了？）I was at a loss what to do.（不知所措。）What has become of the poor fellow？（那个可怜的人怎样了？）

24. 他就是写这首诗的诗人。

He is the poet who wrote this poem.

〔注〕在所有的关系代词中只有 who 一词有变化，其所有格为 whose, 宾格为 whom。例如：He is a poet whose poems are very popular.（他是一个诗作很脍炙人口的诗人。）He is a poet whom we all admire.（他是一个我们大家钦佩的诗人。）

25. 这是一首那个著名诗人所写的诗。

This is the poem which was written by the famous poet.

26. 这是人人皆知的一首诗。

This is the poem which almost everybody knows.

27. 这是一首题为《西风》的诗。

This is the poem whose title is“the West Wind. ”

28. 你看走过来的那人和他的狗。

See the man and his dog that are coming this way.

〔注〕先行词如果是人和物的话，就要用关系代词 that，因 who 只能指人，which 只能指物，唯有 that 才能人和物并指。

29. 有常识的人，谁能做这样的事？

Who that has common sense can do such a thing？

〔注〕先行词为疑问代词的 who 时，下接的关系代词，便不宜再用 who，应改为 that 才妥。

30. 这是我生平所见到的最美的落日。

This is the most beautiful sunset that I have ever seen.

〔注〕在最高级时要用 that 作关系代词。

31. 这是我所有的唯一的英文字典。

This is the only English dictionary that I have.

〔注〕在 the only 之后，也要用 that 作关系代词。此外在 the very 或 all the 之后也是一样，如 These are all the English books that I have.（我所有的英文书全部都在这里。）This is the very thing that I have long wanted to have.（这是我很久就想要的东西。）

32. 那个外国人说的话你懂得吗？

Do you understand what that foreigner says？

〔注〕这个 what 是关系代词，有 that which 之意。因为 what 这个关系代词，本身包括有先行词在内的。这种 what 的用法，还可以举出下列各例：Don’t try to do what is impossible.（不要去试做不可能的事。）Don’t put off till tomorrow what you can do today.（今日能做的事，不要延到明日。）I owe what I am to my uncle.（我之有今日全系我叔之赐。）He is what we call a self-made man.（他是一个我们所谓自学成功的人。）Reading is to the mind what food is to the body.（读书之于心灵，正如食物之于身体。）

33. 想要来的人你都可以招待。

You may invite whoever wants to come.

〔注〕这个 whoever = anyone who, 其中 anyone 是 invite 的 Object, 而 who 便是 wants 的 Subject.

34. 你想要招待的人，都可以招待。

You may invite whomever you want.

〔注〕这个 whomever = anyone whom, 其中 anyone 是 invite 的 Object, 而 whom 便是 want 的 Object。

35. 你可以选取你所喜欢的。

You may take whichever pleases you.

〔注〕which 是主格和宾格同形的，所以这句话又可以说成 You may take whichever you like.

36. 只要是无害的事，你什么都可以做。

You may do whatever is harmless.

〔注〕whatever = anything that. 这个 whatever 是 do 的 Object, 同时又是 is 的 Subject。因为 what 是主格和宾格同形的，在“You may do whatever you like. ”一句中，whatever 是 do 的 Object, 同时又是 like 的 Object。

37. 无论你做什么，你都会成功的。

Whatever you may undertake, you will succeed in it.

〔注〕这个 whatever 是引导一个让步从句的。

38. 不管是谁这样说，我都不信。

Whoever may say so, I shall not believe it.

39. 无论你要哪一个，你都会满意的。

Whichever you may take, you will be satisfied.

40. 要读那些有益的书。

Read such books as can benefit you.

〔注〕这个关系代词的 as 是跟在 such 后面的。这句话又可说成 Read those books which can benefit you.

41. 我跟你有同样的英文读本。

I have the same English reader as you（have）.

〔注〕the same…as…是表同类物，如说同一物的话，就说 the same…that…例：My brother attends the same school that you do.（我弟弟和你进的同一个学校。）

42. 没有一条法则没有例外。

There is no rule but has some exceptions.

〔注〕but has = that has not

43. 这些书你有读过的没有？——是，我有些读过。

Have you read any of these books？——Yes, I have read some.

〔注〕在问句中用 any, 在陈述句中就要用 some。

44. 请你在那里面借一本给我。任何一本都可以。

Please lend me some of them. Any of them will do.

〔注〕some 指其中的一部分，any 则指任何一部分。

45. 如果有人来访，总得有人去开门。

If anyone calls, someone must open the door.

〔注〕在 If-clause 中用 anyone, 在肯定句中用 someone。

46. 我有两个叔叔。一个是牙科医生，一个是银行职员。

I have two uncles. One is a dentist and the other is a bank clerk.

〔注〕在两件事物之中，随便取一件说 one, 其余一件则说 the other。

47. 花瓶中有各色各样的花。有的红，有的白。

There are all sorts of flowers in the vase. Some are red and others are white.

〔注〕others = other flowers

48. 花园中有许多郁金香。有些是红的，其余是黄的。

There are plenty of tulips in the garden. Some are red and the others are yellow.

〔注〕the others = the rest

49. 我不喜欢这个。另外拿一个给我看吧。

I don’t like this one. Show me another.

〔注〕another = a different one

50. 这个不行。拿那个给我。

This won’t do. Show me the other.

51. 青年男女彼此相爱。

The boy and the girl love each other.

〔注〕同为“互相”或“彼此”之意，each other 用于二人之间，one another 用于二人以上，如 You boys should not find fault with one another.（你们孩子们不要彼此找别人的错处。）

52. 他们不是两个人都到了的。

Both of them were not present.

〔注〕这是所谓“部分否定”的说法。如果是说两个人都未到的话，就要说 Neither of them was present.

53. 这些书我并没有完全读过。

I haven’t read all of these books.

〔注〕这也是“部分否定”，如果全未读过，就说 I have read none of these books.

54. 他极其虚弱，所以除水果以外什么都没有吃。

He was so weak that he ate nothing but fruit.

55. 赶脱了快车，除了迟延出发之外别无办法。

As I missed the express, there was nothing for it but to put off my departure.

56. 我没有什么比旅行更要喜欢的了。

There is nothing that I like so much as travelling.

57. 人应守约。

One should keep one’s word.

〔注〕one 如指一般人（men in general）时，后面的所有格就要用 one’s，如系限定的时候，就用 his 和 her, 例如：Every one loves his mother.（人皆爱其母）No one knows what his fate will be.（谁也不知自己的命运将成为什么样子）。

58. 他是一伟大的学者，而人亦以此敬之。

He was a great scholar, and was respected as such.

〔注〕such＝a great scholar. 是用来代替前面说过的那名词的。

（3）形容词应注意的用法

1. 你有几本外国文的书？——我有八本英文书和两三本德文书。

How many foreign books have you？——I have eight English books and two or three German ones.

2. 你父母有多大年纪了？——父亲五十五岁，母亲四十七岁。

How old are your parents？——My father is fifty-five and my mother is forty-seven years old.

3. 那睡着的猫是我的，而那玩着球的猫就是我妹妹的。

The sleeping cat is mine and the one playing with the ball is my sister’s.

〔注〕playing 一个形容词因有 with the ball 的修饰语附在其后，所以不能如 sleeping 一样照平常置于名词之前。因前面说了 cat，为避免重复故后面用 one 代替。

4. 他也许不是一个能干的人，但他确是一个有学问的人。

He may not be an able man, but he is certainly a learned man.

5. 他的学校是一所三层楼的三合土的建筑物。

His school is a three-storied concrete building.

6. 富人未必比穷人幸福。

The rich are not always happier than the poor.

〔注〕the rich＝rich people.

7. 大部分的（许多、多数、有些、少数、没有几个、没有）人这样想。

Most（A great many、Many、Some、A few、Few、No）people think so.

8. 留得有非常多（有很多、有些、有很少、有几无、没有一点）水。

There is a great deal of（plenty of、some、a little、little、no）water left.

9. 我在你之外有少数的朋友。我除你以外几无朋友。

I have a few friends besides you. I have few friends except you.

〔注〕a few 有少数，few 几无。

　　　a little 有少量，little 几无。

10. 我在默书上弄错不少。我在准备背诵中发觉不少的困难。

I made not a few mistake in my dictation. I found not a little difficulty in preparing for the recitation.

11. 奥林匹克运动会每四年举行一次。

The Olympic games take place every four years（every fourth year）.

12. 有些孩子爬树简直像猴子一样，有些孩子泅水简直像青蛙一样。

Some boys climbed up the trees like so many monkeys，and others swam in the pond like so many frogs.

13. 汤姆是他班上最高的孩子。

Tom is the tallest boy in his class. ＝Tom is taller than any other boy in his class. ＝Tom is as tall as any other boy in his class. ＝No other boy in his class is so tall as Tom.

14. 玛丽是两人当中较漂亮的一个。

Mary is the prettier of the two. ＝Mary is prettier than the other.

15. 凯蒂是她们当中最高的。

Kate is the tallest of them all. ＝Kate is taller than the others.

I6. 东西愈远，看去愈小。

The farther a thing is the smaller it looks.

17. 似乎没有再加详细说明的必要。

No further explanation seems necessary.

18. 他太年轻不能帮助他父亲。

He is too young to help his father.

19. 她已经长得够大，可以帮助她母亲了。

She is old enough to help her mother.

20. 他把他所能花费的钱全部拿去买书。

He spends on books all the money that he can spare.

21. 他绝不会做这样的事。

He is the last man to do such a thing.

22. 我第一次在伦敦见到她。

I met her for the first time in London.

23. 终于我们达到旅程的终点了。

At last we came to our journey’s end.

〔注〕这个 last 是形容词的名词用法。其他常作名词用的形客词，我们还可举出不少的例来，下列各句便是其中的一部分。At first I found English very difficult to learn, but I soon found it quite easy.（最初我觉得英文很难学，但不久我就觉得很容易了。）She is now in her forties , but when she got married she was still in her teens.（她现在已经四十岁以上了，但当她结婚时，她还只有十几岁呢。）I have seen it hundreds of times.（我见过无数次。）Thousands of people came to see the sports.（成千的人来看运动会。）They were walking in the park by twos and threes.（他们三五成群地在公园里散步。）Ten to one he will succeed.（十有八九他会成功。）

（4）动词时态的用法

Present Tense（现在时态）

一、现在的事实：

1. 我知道他是高兴的。

I know that he is glad.

2. 我的父母住在乡下。

My parents live in the country.

3. 父亲在看报。

Father is reading a newspaper.

〔注〕现在进行也属于现在时态的一种，表示现在正在做着。

二、现在习惯的行为：

4. 我每天六时起床。

I get up at six every morning.

5. 他常到公园里去散步。

He takes a walk in the park.

6. 他七点钟吃早饭。

He has breakfast at seven.

7. 他七点半去上学。

He leaves for school at half past seven.

8. 他在晚饭后准备功课。

After supper he prepares his lessons.

三、不变的真理：

9. 二加二等于四。

Two and two are four.

10. 地球围绕太阳转动。

The earth moves round the sun.

11. 白日阳光普照。

The sun shines in the daytime.

四、预定的事情：

12. 父亲下星期动身到美国去。

Father leaves for America next week.

13. 母亲明天早上回来。

Mother is coming home tomorrow morning.

五、代替将来时态：

14. 你在此地等我回来。

Wait here till I come back.

15. 等他一到我们就动身。

Let us set out as soon as he arrives.

16. 明天要是天气好，我就高兴啦。

I shall be glad if it is fine tomorrow.

〔注〕如 if 引导的不是副词从句，而是名词从句时，也就可以用将来时态，

例如：I doubt if it will be fine tomorrow.

Past Tense（过去时态）

一、过去某个时候的行为或状态：

17. 昨天我去看他的时候，他正在写信。

When I called on him yesterday, he was writing a letter.

18. 你来的时候我正在洗澡。

When you came , I was having a hot bath.

19. 他在半点钟以前出去散步了。

He went out for a walk half an hour ago.

二、过去习惯的行为或事实：

20. 在那个时候我每个月要看三四回电影。

In those days I went to the movies three or four times a month.

21. 他常到我家里来闲谈。

He would often come to my house to have a chat.

〔注〕表示过去习惯的行为，如加上反复的意味时，可用 would 或 used to 的字样。

22. 我们常一同上学。

We used to go to school together.

23. 年轻时他老爱喝酒。

When young, he was always drinking.

Future Tense（将来时态）

一、单纯将来的陈述句：

24. 我到明年就有十七岁了。

I shall be seventeen next year.

25. 大家说今秋要丰收。

People say that we shall have a big crop of rice this autumn.

26. 过分用功，会生病的。

If you work too hard, you will fall ill.

27. 要更加用功，你才可以考取。

Work harder, and you will pass.

28. 要不更加用功，你就会失败。

Work harder, or you will fail.

29. 吃了这个药，你就会活；不吃，你就会死。

Take this medicine, and you will live；if not, you will die.

30. 如果他听到这个消息，他一定会很难过的。

If he hears the news, he will be very sorry.

31. 现正在下雨，但是不久就会晴的。

It is raining now, but it will soon clear up.

二、单纯将来的疑问句：

32. 如果我马上动身，我可以赶得上吗？

If I start at once，shall I be in time？

33. 如果我马上动身，我要什么时候才可以达到那里？

If I start at once, what time shall I reach there？

34. 你明年几岁？

How old will you be next year？

〔注〕在英国问第二人称的问句，常用 shall, 以期待他回答 I shall…，故上句在英国常作 How old shall you be next year？

35. 你明天这个时候在不在家？

Shall（Will）you be at home about this time tomorrow？

36. 我想要在今天下午三点钟的时候来看你。你有空吗？

I want to see you this afternoon about three. Shall（will）you be free？

三、意志将来的陈述句：

37. 虽然下大雨，我还是要去。

Though it rains cats and dogs, I will go.

33. 如果你在吃晚饭时做好的话，我就带你去看电影。

If you finish it by suppertime, I will take you to the cinema.

〔注〕by 表示时限，意为“为止”。电影英国说 cinema，美国说 movies。

39. 我想试试看，不过我恐怕要失败。

I think I will try , but I am afraid I shall fail.

40. 溺者见到一根草也要去抓住的。

A drowning man will catch at a straw.

41. 狗吠生人。

A dog will bark at a stranger.

42. 你刚才不是说过你要跟我们一道去吗？

You have just said that you will go with us, haven’t you？

43. 她说任何事她都愿为你去做。

She says she will do anything for you.

44. 你要更加用功一点，你就可以得到这个照相机作为奖品。

Work harder, and you shall have this camera as a reward.

〔注〕and you shall have＝and I will give you.

45. 如果你准备好了，我就带你去。

If you are ready, you shall go with me.（＝I will take you with me.）

46. 如果你的弟妹们想去的话，我就带他们去。

If your brothers and sisters want to go, they, too, shall go with me.

四、意志将来的疑问句：

47. 你要这个还是那个？

Which will you take , this or that？

48. 在你回家的路上请代我发这封信。

Will you post this letter for me on your way home？

49. 先生，请你讲解一下这个句子的意义好吗？

Sir, will you kindly explain the meaning of this sentence？

50. 其次我要做什么？

What shall I do next？

51. 要我把你的房间收拾一下吗？

Shall I put your room in order？

52. 我下回什么时候来？

When shall I come next？

53. 我过两天再来好吗？

Shall I come again in a few days？

54. 其次要他做什么？

What shall he do next？

55. 要他为你擦皮鞋吗？

Shall he polish your shoes？

56. 要他什么时候来？

When shall he come？

57. 要他等待你的回信吗？

Shall he wait till he hears from you？

Present Perfect（现在完成时态）

一、现在完成了的行为：

1. 我刚把这工作做完。

I have just finished the task.

2. 我才从车站去迎接了我的表兄回来。

I have been to the station to meet my cousin.

3. 我才从车站去给我的叔叔送行回来。

I have been to the station to see my uncle off.

二、继续到现在为止的行为或状态：

4. 我在此地住上十年了。

I have lived here for ten years.

5. 我自从1942年以来就住在此地。

I have lived here since 1942.

6. 他从月初以来就一直卧病。

He has been ill in bed since the beginning of this month.

7. 她缺席多久了？她从星期一开始就没有来。

How long has she been absent？She has been absent since last Monday.

8. 你认识他多久了？我们从小孩子时代起就认识的。

How long have you known him？I have known him since we were children.

9. 你的英文学了多久了？

How long have you been studying English？

〔注〕have been doing 是包含现在、过去、将来三个时候在内的，在上例中即是说过去学了，现在在学，将来还要继续地学。参看下二例。

10. 我从进初中起就一直在学。

I have been studying it since I entered the junior middle school.

11. 七年来我一直在学。

I have been studying it for the last seven years.

三、现在为止的经验：

12. 你曾经看到过狮子吗？

Have you ever seen a lion？

13. 你到过阿里山吗？

Have you ever climbed Mt. Ali？

14. 是的，我到过。

Yes, I have.

15. 你到过几次呢？

How often have you climbed it？

16. 我到过两次。

I have climbed it twice.

17. 你到过日本吗？

Have you ever been to Japan？

18. 是的，我到过好几次。

Yes, I have been there several times.

〔注〕如果是回答说“我在日本住过三年”，你就不能说 I have been to Japan for three years. 应该说 I stayed（或 was）there for three years. 因为表示单纯的过去不能用完成时态。

19. 你父亲出过洋吗？

Has your father ever been abroad？

20. 是的，他去过一次。

Yes, he has been abroad once.

四、现在空余结果的过去的行为：

21. 我想见见你的父亲。他在家吗？——对不起，他出去了。

I want to see your father. Is he at home？——Sorry, but he has gone out.

22. 你的表几点钟了？——我的表丢了。

What time is it by your watch？——I have lost it.

23. 他出外散步去了。——他什么时候出去的？

He has gone out for a walk.——When did he go out？

24. 有一位王先生来看你了。

A Mr. Wang has come to see you.

五、代替将来完成用：

25. 你用过了，把你的小刀借给我一下好吗？

Will you lend me the knife, when you have done with it？

26. 好的，我一用完马上就借给你。

Yes，I will lend it to you as soon as I have done with it.

27. 你一到目的地，请马上打电报来通知我。

When you have reached your destination, please let me know by wire.

Past Perfect（过去完成时态）

一、在过去某时间完了的动作：

28. 我到车站的时候，火车刚开走了。

When I reached the station, the train had just left.

29. 医生赶来的时候，他已经断气了。

When the doctor came，he had already breathed his last.

二、过去一定的时候为止的继续：

30. 到他几个月以前死去为止，我认识他有三十多年了。

Till he died a few months ago, I had known him for more than thirty years.

31. 他直到上个月死去为止，一直都在台南做事。

Till he died last month, he had been working in Tainan.

32. 昨天我遇见了十年不见的叔父。

Yesterday I met my uncle whom I had not seen for the last ten years.

33. 日前我去看他，才知道他已病了一个多月了。

The other day I called on him and found that he had been ill for more than a month.

三、留下结果在过去某个时候的那以前的行为：

34. 我到达车站的时候，火车已经开走了。

When I reached the station, the train had already left.

35. 我到他家里去的时候，他已经出外散步去了。

When I went to his house, he had gone out for a walk.

四、过去一定的时候为止的经验：

36. 我立刻就认出是他，因为我以前常见到他的。

I knew him at once, for I had often seen him before.

37. 当他们叫我用英语演说的时候，我感到不知所措，因为我以前从来没有这种经验。

When I was asked to make an English speech, I was quite at a loss, for I had never had such experience before.

五、叙述过去的两种动作，颠倒其实际的顺序时：

38. 我给了他那本我前天买的书本。

I gave him the picture-book which I had bought the day before.

39. 卞贾明把他所画的画给他母亲看了。

Benjamin showed his mother the picture which he had painted.

Future Perfect（将来完成时态）

一、在将来一定的时候可完成的：

40. 等你来取那本书的时候，我已经看完了。

By the time you come for the book, I shall have read it through.

41. 到下个月的这个时候，你就会完全康复的。

By this time next month you will have recovered already.

42. 他明天早晨就可以抵达台南的。

He will have arrived at Tainan tomorrow morning.

43. 等你到车站的时候，火车已经开了。

By the time you reach the station, the train will have left already.

二、将来一定的时候为止的继续经验等：

44. 到明年这个时候，我就在此住满十年了。

By this time next year I shall have lived here for just ten years.

45. 到明年三月为止，你就足足学了五年的英文了。

By next March you will have been studying English just five years.

46. 如果我再去一次日月潭，我就去过五次了。

If I go to Sun Moon Lake again, I shall have been there five times.

（5）动词语气的用法

Imperative Mood（祈使语气）

一、命令：

1. 不要闹，听我说。

Be silent and listen to me.

2. 作文要隔一行写。

Write your composition on every other line.

二、禁止：

3. 不许跟你的邻居讲话。

Don’t talk to your neighbor.

4. 绝不可撒谎，要常说真话。

Never tell a lie. Always speak the truth.

三、请求：

5. 请让窗子开着。

Please leave the window open.

6. 请勿吸烟。

Kindly refrain from smoking.

四、条件：

7. 向右转弯，你就可以走到车站的。

Turn to the right, and you will come to the station.

8. 不叫汽车去，恐怕就赶不上快车了。

Take a taxi or you will not be in time for the express.

〔注〕or 意为“要不然的话”。

Subjunctive Mood（虚拟语气）

一、Present Subjunctive（不确实的假定）

9. 明天天气好的话，我们就去野餐。

If it is fine tomorrow, we shall go on a picnic.

10. 要是下雨的话，开会就展期。

If it rains , the meeting will be postponed.

11. 他如果肯试的话，一定成功。

If he tries , he will surely succeed.

12. 你如果不反对的话，我就这样去做。

If you have no objection，I will do so.

二、Future Subjunctive（万一的假定）

13. 万一下雨的话，我就延期出发。

If it should rain , I will put off my departure.

14. 万一我死了的话，我的孩子们将变成一个什么样子呀？

If I should die , what will become of my children？

15. 他有好几天没有来了，我想他今天也不会来的。不过万一他来了的话，我就把这个给他。

He has been absent for some days, so I don’t think he will come today. But if he should come , I’ll give it to him.

三、Past Subjunctive（与现在事实相反的假定）

16. 我要是你的话，我就不做这样的事。

If I were you, I would not do such a thing.

17. 如果我有一百万元的话，我就至少要给你一千元。

If I had one million dollars, I would give you one thousand dollars at least.

18. 我希望我的身体有你那样强壮。

I wish I were as strong as you.

19. 我希望我生双翼，像鸟一样地能飞。

I wish I had wings and could fly like a bird.

四、Past Perfect Subjunctive（与过去事实相反的假定）

20. 那时如果天气好的话，我们上日月潭就去成了。

If it had been fine, we could have gone to Sun Moon Lake.

21. 如果我要早到一天的话，我就赶上考试了。

If I had arrived a day earlier, I should have been in time for the examination.

22. 那时候你要跟我们在一起就好了。

I wish you had been with us then.

23. 我要能够与你同去听了那音乐会就好了。

I wish I had gone to the concert with you.

五、包含有 Past Subjunctive 及 Past Perfect 的句子。

24. 那男孩子说起话来就好像大人一样。

The little boy talks as if he were a man.

25. 她看上去好像是患病多年似的。

She looks as if she had been ill for a long time.

26. 他可谓一长成了的婴孩。

He is, as it were , a grown-up baby.

27. 我们正可谓坐在火山口上。

We are, as it were , sitting on a volcano.

（6）主动语态与被动语态的用法

28. 我每天做这个。

I do it every day.

It is done by me every day.

29. 我昨天做了这个。

I did it yesterday.

It was done by me yesterday.

30. 我明天还要做这个。

I shall do it tomorrow.

It will be done by me tomorrow.

31. 我明天一定要做这个。

I will do it tomorrow.

It shall be done by me tomorrow.

32. 我非立刻做这个不可。

I must do it at once.

It must be done by me at once.

33. 我刚把这个做完。

I have just done it.

It has just been done by me.

34. 在加拿大是说英语的。

They speak English in Canada.

English is spoken 〔by Them 〕in Canada.

35. 人人称赞了他。

People spoke well of him.

He was spoken well of 〔by people 〕.

〔注〕行为者不明或无关紧要时可略去。

36. 他作为战犯而被处绞刑。

He was hanged as a war criminal.

37. 这个校舍建于三十年前。

This school house was built thirty years ago.

38. 星在白天看不见。

The stars are not seen in the daytime.

39. 洪水浸了四千栋房屋，淹死了八百多人。

Four thousand houses were flooded and over eight hundred lives were lost by the flood.

40. 本校的运动会下月十五日在校园举行。

The athletic meeting of our school will be held at the school ground on the fifteenth of next month.

41. 昨天下午我从学校回家的途中遇到骤雨，淋得一身通透。

Yesterday afternoon，on my way back from school，I was caught in a shower and was drenched to the skin.

42. 这个杂志是月刊，销行很广。

This magazine is published monthly and sells very well.

43. 火车出轨，死伤二十余人。

The train was derailed and more than twenty persons were either killed or injured.

〔注〕中国话的死伤及出轨等在英文都要用被动语态。下举各例亦皆如此。

44. 听说他们疲倦得不能前进，我不禁大为失望。

I was disappointed to hear that they were too tired to go on.

45. 有的溺死了，有的烧死了。

Some were drowned，and others were burnt to death.

46. 接到他失败的消息，我大为吃惊。

I was greatly surprised at the news of his failure.

〔注〕此句也可说成 The news of his failure surprised me greatly.

47. 我们对于那结果都很满意。

We were all satisfied with the result.

〔注〕这也可以说成 The result satisfied us all.

（7）助动词的用法

may, can, must

1. 你可以出去散步，不过吃晚饭的时候一定要回来。

You may go out for a walk, but you must come back by suppertime.

2. 随便你做什么都可以，不过你不要这样吵闹。

You may do anything you like, but you must not make such a noise.

3.“我可以用铅笔写吗？”——“嗯，可以，不过你一定要尽力当心地写。”

“May I write with a pencil？”——“Yes, you may , but you must write as carefully as you can.”

4.“我马上就得做吗？”——“不，你用不着马上做，不过你一定要赶快做就是了。”

“Must I do it at once？”——“No, you need not , but you must do it as soon as possible. ”

5. 他也许是一个学者，不过他一定不是一个有德性的人。

He may be a man of learning, but he cannot be a man of character.

6. 他要辞职的消息可能是真的；但是说他要自杀的那种话，就绝不可靠。

The news that he will resign may be true, but the other news that he will kill himself cannot be true.

7.“这故事能是真的吗？”——“啊，当然，这一定是真的。”

“Can the story be true？”——“Oh, yes, it must be true. ”

8. 他也许说了这样的话，不过我不敢肯定地说。

He may have said so, though I cannot say for certain.

9. 他不可能就达到了那里，因为他刚动身不过半个钟头。

He cannot have reached there yet, for he left here only half an hour ago.

10. 他一定已经到了那里，因为他动身得很早。

He must have reached there already, for he left here early enough.

11. 为着糊口，有些人不得不日夜工作。

Some people must work day and night that they may earn their living.

〔注〕that…may…是表目的的。过去时便用 that…might。例如：He worked hard that he might succeed.

12. 在择友上无论怎样慎重也不会过分的。

You cannot be too careful in the choice of your friends.

13. 看了那个滑稽的光景，使我忍不住要笑。

I cannot but laugh at the funny sight. ＝I cannot help laughing at the funny sight.

14. 一时我简直无法外出，但是我想不久我就会可以的。

I have been unable to go out for some time, but I shall soon be able to do so.

〔注〕can 只有过去时的 could, 没有将来时及完成时，故用 be able to 来代替。

15. 因为我自己不能去，只好要我弟弟代替出席。

As I could not go myself, I had to send my brother instead.

〔注〕must 只有现在时，所以要用 have to 来代替过去时、将来时及完成时。但在间接说法中仍可把 must 用于过去，例如：I told him that he must do it himself.（直接说法：I said to him,“You must do it yourself. ”）。

16. 你用不着要亲自去，你只消写一封信给他就行了。

You need not go yourself；you have only to write to him.

17. 无论你从事什么职业，都有知道一种外国语的必要。

Whatever business you may be engaged in, you cannot do without the knowledge of a foreign language.

do

18.“你去参加了运动吗？”——“是的，我参加了。”

“Did you take part in the sports？”——“Yes，I did. ”

〔注〕问句中的 did 是助动词，而答句中的 did 是代动词，即代替 took part in them 的。

19.“你玩得痛快吗？”——“是，从来没有这样痛快的。”

“Did you have a good time？”——“Yes, I never had a better time. ”

〔注〕不做“有”解时的 have，问句不说 Have you？而说 Do you have？

但在美国，即令是作“有”解的 have, 问句中也加用助动词，例如：Do you have any brother？（你有兄弟吗？）Does she have blue eyes？（她有蓝眼睛吗？）

20.“你为什么不去看他？”——“我去了，可是他不在家。”

“Why did n’t you go to see him？”——“I did go, but he was out. ”

〔注〕I did go 为加强 I went 的说法。

21. 夫人不言，言必有中。

He does not speak much, but when he does speak, he speaks to the point.

Ought, Should, Would

22. 当你生病的时候，你应该就医。

When you are ill, you ought to（= should）consult the doctor.

23. 你们年轻人不应该去这样的地方。

You young people ought not to（= should not）go to such a place.

24. 你卧病很久了，你应该马上就医。

As you have been ill in bed for a long time, you ought to（= should）have consulted the doctor sooner.

25. 他在美国住了多年刚回来，应该英语说得很好。

As he has just returned from America after a long stay, he ought to speak English well.

〔注〕he ought to speak 意为当然会说，即 It is no wonder that he should speak 之意。

26. 真是奇怪，他居然说我的坏话，多年来我对他那样好。

It is strange that he should speak ill of me；I have been kind to him all these years.

27. 你想要欺骗他，怪不得他要生气。

It is quite natural that he should get angry；you have tried to deceive him.

28. 这样一个前途有望的人，竟然薄命，十分可惜。

It is a pity that such a promising man as he should have died so young.

29. 他想要他的儿子学医。

He intended that his son should be a physician.

〔注〕这可以视为 He said to himself,“My son shall be a physician. ”的间接说法。

30. 我想跟他一起去徒步旅行，不过恐怕他不会让我去。

I should like to go hiking with him, but I am afraid he will not let me.

31. 我把那钱收起来，以免被人窃去。

I hid the money, lest I should have it stolen.

〔注〕lest…should 的形式，现在已不大用了，而改用 that…may not 的形式。上例即说成 I hid my money that I might not have it stolen.

32. 年轻的时候，他常一坐几个钟头，什么事都不做。

When young, he would often sit for hours doing nothing.

〔注〕这个 would 是表过去的习惯的。

33. 在这样大风雪当中我宁肯坐在家里，而不愿外出。

I would rather stay at home than go out in such a snowstorm.

34. 请你替我把窗子打开一下好吗？

Would you kindly open the window for me？= Would you mind opening the window for me？

〔注〕这是 Please open the window for me. 客气的说法。

35. 我打开窗子好吗？

Would you mind my opening the window？

〔注〕这是 May I open the window？客气的说法。

36. 你太懒了。你应该再用功一点。这样难怪你考不取。

You were too idle. You ought to have worked harder. It is no wonder that you should have failed in the examination.

（8）动状词的用法

不定词（Infinitive）

1. 百闻不如一见。（要看见才相信）

To see is to believe.

2. 对于我们研究大自然的人，最重要的事，就是要学习怎样观察。

The most important thing for us，students of nature，is to learn to observe.

〔注〕to learn 是补语，而 to observe 便是 learn 的 Object。

3. 精读少数几本书比草草读许多书要好得多。

It is much better to read a few books carefully than to read many books carelessly.

〔注〕第一个 to read 是代表句首的假主语的真正的主语，第二个 to read 是 than 之后省略了的 it is good 的 it（假主语）的真正的主语。

4. 我规定在这一年中早上六时起床。

I make it a rule to get up at six all through the year.

〔注〕to get up 为对假宾语 it 的真正的宾语。

5. 我没有什么事做。我很闲。

I have nothing to do. I am quite free.

6. 他不是一个撒谎的人。

He is not a man to tell a lie.

7. 我没有房子住，而又无钱买房子。

I have no house to live in but nor have I the money to buy one with.

〔注〕to live in= in which to live, to buy one with= with which to buy one. 这种不定词都是形容其前之名词的。

8. 我们应当要为工作而生存，不要为生存而工作。

We should live to work，not work to live.

9. 我很高兴地再见到你。

I am very glad to see you again.

10. 你真不当心，把别人的帽子当自己的。

How careless you are to take his cap for your own！

11. 他远从美国回到中国，仅因为听悉其父在前日死去的噩耗。

He came up to China all the way from America only to hear that his father had died the day before.

〔注〕（only）to hear 是表示结果。

12. 听他说英语，你会以为他是一个美国人。

To hear him speak English，you will take him for an American.

〔注〕to hear 表示假定。

13. 父亲不够阔，不能自备汽车。

My father is not rich enough to keep a motorcar.

〔注〕to keep 是副词，enough 的修饰词。

14. 我们太疲倦而不能继续工作了。

We were too tired to go on with the work.

〔注〕to go 是副词，too 的修饰词。

15. 我看见他进房去的。

I saw him enter the room.

〔注〕感觉动词的补语的不定词是要将其 to 略去的，但在被动语态时则不能略，如 He was seen to enter the room.

16. 你曾听过 W 小姐拉小提琴吗？

Have you ever heard Miss W. play the violin？

17. 我觉得有人摸我的肩。

I felt someone touch me on the shoulder.

18. 要他去吧，不管他愿不愿意。

Make him go, whether he likes it or not.

〔注〕使役动词的补语的不定词，也要将其 to 略去，但在被动语态时便不能略，如 He was made to go against his wish.

19. 随他喜欢怎样做就怎样做。

Let him do whatever he likes.（= Let him have his own way.）

20. 让他在这里等我回来。

Have him wait here till I return.

〔注〕have+（a person）+Root，意为使人做什么。

21. 他去年遭妻丧。

He had his wife die last year.

〔注〕have +（a person）+ Root, 又有遭受之意。

22. 你暂时最好守秘密。

You had better keep it secret for some time to come.

〔注〕在 had better, had rather，would rather, cannot but 之后的不定词，要将其 to 略去。

23. 与其撒谎，我宁认错。

I would rather confess that I have done wrong than tell a lie.

24. 听到那个悲惨的消息，我不禁泣然泪下。

At the sad news，I could not but weep.

25. 他好像是一个天才。

He seems to be a genius.（= It seems that he is a genius.）

26. 他好像醉了。

He seemed to be drunk.（= It seemed that he was drunk.）

27. 他好像曾经是一个美少年。

He seems to have been a handsome young man.（= It seems that he was a handsome young man.）

28. 他过去好像曾经久病。

He seemed to have been ill for a long time.（= It seemed that he had been ill for a long time.）

29. 老实说我不信任他。

To tell the truth，I don’t trust him.

30. 说来奇怪，他的颈子愈长愈长了。

Strange to say，his neck grew longer and longer.

31. 出乎意外地指名叫我即席演说，我真不晓得要说点什么。

As I was named to make an after-dinner speech quite unexpectedly，I was at a loss what to say.

32. 我不晓得要到哪里去，也不晓得要问谁。

I don’t know where to go or whom to ask.

33. 要支持哪一边，我迟疑不决。

I could not make up my mind which side to support.

34. 下雨的话，会期顺延。

In case of rain，the meeting is to be postponed to the first fine day.

35. 当她正要纵身跃入水中的时候，有人提了她的手臂。

When she was about to jump into the water，some one caught her by the arm.

36. 春天是开花的时候。

Spring is the time for flowers to bloom.

37. 这问题要我们来解决是太难了。

This problem is too difficult for us to solve.

38. 我太忙不能去。我一定要请人代替我去。

I am too busy to go. I must get some one to go for me.（= I must have someone go for me.）

分词（Participle）

39. 消防队的人冲入火烧的屋子，救出了那小孩。

A fireman rushed into the burning house and saved the child.

40. 我在台北的哥哥，有信来说他生病了。

My brother staying in Taipei sent me a letter saying that he was ill.

41. 一个被烫过的孩子，见火就怕。

A burnt child dreads the fire.

42. 被火烧死的，总数达十人。

Those burnt to death in the fire amounted to ten in all.

43. 公共汽车很挤，我一直都是站着的。

The bus was so crowded that I kept standing all the way.

〔注〕standing 一个分词，在此为主语的补语。

44. 对不起，害你等这么久。

I am sorry that I have kept you waiting so long.

〔注〕waiting 一个分词，在此为宾语的补语。

45. 我的英语说得不好，不过我可以使人听懂我说的话。

I am not a good speaker of English，but I can make myself understood.

〔注〕understood 为宾语的补语。

46. 我把表拿去修理了。

I had my watch mended.

〔注〕have+宾语+动词的过去分词，意为“使人为我做”或“被人做”（见下例）。

47. 我的表被偷了。

I had my watch stolen.

48. 一见警察，那小偷就跑了。

Seeing the policeman，the thief ran away.（= When the thief saw the policeman，he ran away.）

〔注〕从属句中的现在分词，应与主句的主语一致，即这个 seeing，一定要是那 thief 看才行。

49. 做完课外工作，我就去睡了。

Having finished my home work，I went to bed.（= After I had finished my home work，I went to bed.）

50. 太阳落山了，我们便踏上归途。

The sun having set，we started on our way home.

〔注〕如从属句的主语，不与主句的主语一致时，你得另加主语，如本句中的 the sun。

51. 向右转弯，你就可以在你的左边看见那学校的。

Turning to the right，you will see the school on your left.（= If you turn to the right，you will…）

52. 一般说来，我国气候温和。

Generally speaking，we have a mild climate.

〔注〕如 generally speaking, frankly speaking, strictly speaking 等，都是独立的因素，与后面的主句没有语法上的关系。

53. 说到 A 先生，你近来看见他了吗？

Talking of Mr. A，have you seen him lately？

54. 由天色看起来，今天下午要下雨呢。

Judging from the look of the sky，we shall have rain this afternoon.

动名词（Gerund）

55. 在年轻人，过食是最普通的病源。

With young people，overeating is the commonest cause of illness.

56. 我记得以前在什么地方见过他的。

I remember seeing him somewhere before.

57. 依照医生的劝告，他戒了烟酒。

Following his doctor’s advice，he has given up drinking and smoking.

58. 他后悔不该买这样一件无用的东西。

He repents of having bought such a worthless thing.

59. 我做了这样的事，很是羞耻。

I am ashamed of having done such a thing.

〔注〕如说 I am ashamed of your having done such a thing. 便是“你做了这样的事，使我很感羞耻”。

60. 将来如何，未可知也。

There is no knowing what will happen in future.（= It is impossible to know…）

61. 行不通的事情，用不着去试。

It is no use attempting what is impracticable.

〔注〕it 是假主语，其真正的主语为 attempting。

62. 像他这样努力的人，要成功是不待言的。

It goes without saying that such a hard worker as he will succeed.

63. 我一点也不想吃东西。

I don’t feel like eating at all.（= I have no appetite at all.）

64. 我不禁觉得他是相当自私的。

I cannot help thinking that he is rather selfish.（= I cannot but think that he is rather selfish.）

65. 一听那消息，他面色变白了。

On hearing the news, he turned pale.（= When he heard the news, he turned pale. = As soon as he heard the news, he turned pale.）

66. 母亲忙于做饭洗衣。

Mother is busy between cooking and washing.

（9）副词的用法

1. 这是一本讲电视的很有趣的书。

This is a very interesting book on television.

〔注〕现在分词要用 very 来修饰。

2. 我兄弟对这问题，极感兴趣。

My brother is much interested in the subject.

〔注〕过去分词就要用 much 来修饰。

3. 今天我走了三十里路，所以我很疲倦了。

I have walked more than thirty miles today，so I am very tired.

〔注〕在某些过去分词如 tired、pleased、delighted、disappointed、frightened 等之前，仍然要用 very，是因为这些词已失去其过去分词的性质，而成为形容词了。

4. 他上学从不迟到。

He never comes late for shool.

5. 他上学很少迟到。

He seldom comes late for school.

6. 那个外国人说的话我完全不懂。

I can not understand what that foreigner says.

7. 那个外国人说的话我差不多不懂。

I hardly understand what that foreigner says.

8. 他近来时常迟到。

He has come late very often lately.

〔注〕late 和 lately 皆为副词，前者作“迟”解，后者作“近来”解。

9. 已经打过铃了吗？——是，已经打过了。

Has the bell rung yet？——Yes，it has rung already.

10. 已经打过铃了。——已经打过铃了吗？

The bell has rung already.——Has it rung already？

〔注〕在不明白已打铃或未打铃的时候，就问 Has the bell rung yet？自己以为还没有打，忽听见对方说已经打了，而感到惊异的时候，就说 Has the bell rung already？

11. 听他的回答，就知道他是多么地不懂世故。

His answer showed how little he knew the world.

〔注〕a little 有一点儿, little 几无。

12. 你父亲今天好点吗？——谢谢你。他好了一点。

Is your father any better today？——Yes，he is a little better, thank you.

13. 他没有什么惊讶。他有一点儿惊讶。他很是惊讶。

He was little surprised. He was a little surprised. He was not a little surprised.

14. 他得到老师的称赞而更加用功了。

He was praised by his teacher，and he worked the harder.

〔注〕the= by so much，by that amount. 同等地。

15. 他有许多缺点，但我一样地爱他。

He has many faults，but I don’t love him the less.

16. 你曾读过那首诗吗？——是，那是我所读到的一首最美丽的诗。

Have you ever read that poem？——Yes，that is one of the most beautiful poems that I have ever read.

〔注〕这个 ever 作“曾经”解。

17. 我知道那件事。我在两天以前就听说了。

I know of it；I heard the news two days ago.

18. 我知道了那件事。我在那两天以前就听说了。

I knew of it；I had heard the news two days before.

〔注〕ago 是用于从现在起的“以前”，before 是用于从过去某时起的“以前”。

19. 他为什么生你的气？你知道他为什么生你的气吗？你觉得他为什么要生你的气呢？

Why is he angry with you？Do you know why he is angry with you？Why do you think he is angry with you？

〔注〕这三种说法不仅对于 why 为然，即对其他疑问副词 where、when、how 等也是一样。

20. 我只知道他出生的地方，而不知道他出生的时候。

I know（the place）where he was born，but I don’t know（the time）when he was born.

〔注〕句中 the place 及 the time 为关系副词 where（= in which）及 when（= at which）的先行词，但说话时可略去。

21. 无论你怎样用功，你也不能在一两年之内学好一种外国文。

However hard you may work，you cannot master a foreign language in a year or two.

22. 他无论到什么地方，他的狗都跟随着他。

His dog followed him wherever he went.

23. 我每次见到这张照片，我就想起我的先父。

Whenever I see this picture, I am reminded of my dead father.

24. 我爱吃苹果，也爱吃桃子。

I like apples；I like peaches, too.

25. 我不爱吃苹果，也不爱吃桃子。

I don’t like apples；I don’t like peaches either.

〔注〕肯定的“也”用 too；否定的“也”用 either。

26. 父亲下星期日动身到南部去。

Father is leaving for the South next Sunday.

〔注〕说 next Sunday, last Monday 等，不要加介词，但把星期名放在前面时就得加介词，如 on Sunday next, on Monday last 等。

27. 他虽很富有，出门总是坐三等车。

Though he is a rich man，he always travels third class.

〔注〕比较：They walked side by side.（并肩）

They walked arm in arm.（携手）

The stone weighed twenty pounds.（石重二十磅）

The river is just a mile wide at its mouth.（河口宽正一英里）

28. 很亲切地她指点了我们的路。

She kindly showed us the way.

29. 她很亲切地指点了我们的路。

She showed us the way kindly.

30. 幸运地他没有死。

Happily he did not die.

31. 他未死于安乐。

He did not die happily.

32. 我觉得要实行这个计划是不可能的。

I found it impossible to carry out the plan.

33. 我觉得要实行这个是不可能的。

I found it impossible to carry it out.

〔注〕凡 Verb + Adverb 形式的 idiom, 以名词为其 Object 时，其名词置于副词之前或后皆可，唯以代词为其 Object 时，则其代词必须置于副词之前。例如：

I went to the station to see off my uncle.

I went to the station to see my uncle off.

I went to the station to see him off.

（10）介词的用法

表时间的介词

1. 夏天我五点钟就起床，只有礼拜天才起得迟一点。

In summer I get up at five o’clock，but on Sundays I get up a little later.

〔注〕时之一点用 at，长的期间用 in，对小时或钟点用 at，对日用 on，对月、季、年、世纪等用 in。

2. 他从1930年到1945年住在台湾，而他的太太从他死后一直住在这里。

He lived in Taiwan from 1930 to 1945，and his wife has been living here since his death.

〔注〕从……到……，就说 from…to…。since 意为从某日起至今日为止，即从……以来，可单独用，不要另加其他介词。

3. 我到六点钟就回来，所以请你等到那时为止。

I shall come back by six，so please wait till then.

〔注〕by 是表示至迟到某时为止的意思，till 是表示继续到某时为止的意思。

4. 父亲一两天内要到台北去，一星期之内就回来。

Father will leave for Taipei in a day or two，and will come back within a week.

〔注〕辨别 in a week（经过一星期）与 within a week（一星期内）的用法。

5. 有一次我在台南住了一个相当长久的时候，其间我曾心满意足地游览了。

I once stayed in Tainan for pretty a long time，during which I did the sights to my heart’s content.

表地点的介词

6. 年轻时他住在南投的一个小乡村中。

When young，he lived at a small village in Nantu.

〔注〕when young= when he was young

7. 当那男孩子一跳下水去，那女孩子随即就由水里出来了。

As soon as the boy jumped into the water, the girl came out of it.

8. 壁上挂了两张美丽的风景画。

There were two beautiful landscapes on the wall.

〔注〕on= on the surface of

9. 北极熊脚板上长有长毛，所以走起路来不会在冰上滑倒。

A polar bear has long hair on its soles，that it may not slip on the ice.

10. 那少女在她的药指上戴着一个金戒指。

The girl has a gold ring on her ring finger.

11. 书桌上头吊着一盏电灯，桌下放着一个废纸篓。

There is a lamp over the desk，and a wastebasket under it.

〔注〕与表面接触时用 on，悬在上面用 over；如果是桌上的台灯就说 There is a lamp on the desk. 与下面接触用 beneath, 隔离的下面用 under。

12. 这条河在瀑布的上边最深，在桥的下边最浅。

This river is deepest above the waterfall and shallowest below the bridge.

〔注〕上下的关系用 over, under, 前后的关系多用 above, below。

13. 那条船在这河里定期上下。

That ship sails up and down the river regularly.

14. 我们的火车沿海岸走了一阵之后，便走进一个横断山脉的山洞里去。

Our train runs along the coast for some time，then it goes through a tunnel which is cut across the mountain-rage.

〔注〕along 是说沿着，across 是横断，through 是表示贯穿。

15. 两国之间缔结了一个新的协定。

A new treaty has been concluded between these two countries.

〔注〕二者之间用 between, 三者之间用 among, 如 Divide the candies among your brothers and sisters.

16. 男孩们围着池子跑，而女孩们就围着池子坐着。

The boys are running round the pond while the girls are sitting around it.

〔注〕round 用于动作的，around 用于静止的。

17. 在教室里，A 坐在我的前面，B 坐在我的后面。

In the classroom, A sits before me and B sits behind me.

18. 学校前面有一家文具店。

There is a stationer’s in front of the school.

19. 他昨天上台北去了。他昨天向台北出发了。

He went to Taipei yesterday. He left for Taipei yesterday.

20. 从这里到你的住所有多远？

How far is it from here to your lodging-house？

21. 我住在离车站一英里半的地方。我住在离车站不到一英里半的地方。

I live at a mile and a half from the station. I live within a mile and a half of the station.

表原因的介词

22. 我昨天因病缺席。

I was absent from school yesterday because of illness.

23. 今天早上我因迟到而受叱责。

This morning I was scolded for being late.

24. 他父亲因饮酒过度而死。

His father died from drinking too much.

25. 他母亲因伤寒病而死。

His mother died of typhoid fever.

〔注〕关于死的原因，疾病用 of，其他用 from。

26. 他由于疏忽而弄出许多错误来。

He made a lot of mistakes through carelessness.

27. 那事故是由他而惹起的。

The accident was caused by him.

〔注〕through 表间接的手段，by 表直接的手段，故上句又可说成 The accident was caused through his carelessness.

28. 看到那灿烂的落日光景，我们大为高兴。

At the sight of the glorious sunset，we were greatly overjoyed.

29. 听到他突然死去的消息，我们大为吃惊。

We were greatly surprised at the news of his sudden death.

30. 他因救了一个小孩的命而受到表彰。

He was rewarded for saving a child from death.

31. 北投以温泉著名。

Peitu is famous for its hot-springs.

32. 我做那事全出好意，所以请勿见怪。

I did it out of kindness，so please don’t take it amiss.

〔注〕out of 表动机。

表比较的介词

33. 把译文跟原文对一下吧。

Compare the translation with the original.

34. 人生常被比喻为航海。

Life is often compared to a voyage.

〔注〕同类比较用 compare with，不同类比较用 compare to。

35. 我英文比他好，数学却不如他。

I am superior to him in English，but inferior to him in mathematics.

〔注〕这是来自拉丁文的比较格，所以不用 than 而用 to。

表分离的介词

36. 我的村庄离开海岸很远。

My village is situated a long way from the sea-coast.

37. 初发远离标的。

The first shot fell wide of the mark.

38. 他转入那麻烦中很久了。他甫摆脱了那麻烦。

He has long been in the trouble. He has just got out of the trouble.

39. 有几个小孩子在树上。随即有一个从树上跌下来了。

There were several children on the tree. Soon one of them fell off the tree.

40. 我身上带的钱全被抢光了。

I was robbed of all the money I had with me.

表关系的介词

41. 那事与我毫无关系的。

I have nothing to do with the matter.

42. 关于这事你知道一点吗？

Do you know anything about this matter？

43. 你听到了袁博士关于原子能的演讲吗？

Did you hear Dr. Yuan’s lecture on atomic energy？

一般介词的用法（照 ABC 顺序）

44. 他就住在这一带。

He lives somewhere about here.

45. 关于他的事你知道一点吗？

Do you know anything about him？

46. 他有点高贵的样子。

There is something noble about him.

47. 太阳已升上地平线了。

The sun has risen above the horizon.

48. 就在桥头有一瀑布。

There is a waterfall just above the bridge.

49. 她有六十岁以上了。

She is above sixty years of age.

50. 她是不会做这种卑鄙行为的。

She is above such meanness.

51. 依照巴黎电报，总统被暗杀了。

According to a telegram from Paris，the president has been assassinated.

52. 你能游泳横渡这条河吗？

Can you swim across this river？

53. 放学后，我们通常去打棒球。

After school，we usually play baseball.

54. 警察追逐小偷。

The policeman ran after the thief.

55. 他渴求知识。

He thirsts after knowledge.

56. 此儿依其叔父命名为约翰。

The child was named John after his uncle.

57. 他们穿的时式衣装。

They are dressed after a new fashion.

58. 他靠墙而立。

He was leaning against the wall.

59. 她违背父母之意结婚了。

She got married against her parents’wishes.

60. 西山高耸夕阳中。

Shih Shan is seen rising against the evening sky.

61. 至于我个人，并不反对。

As for me（= So far as I am concerned），I have no objection.

62. 他住在台北萤桥。

He lives at Yunchiau in Taipei.

63. 他六时起床，十时就寝。

He gets up at six and goes to bed at ten.

64. 他牺牲他的健康，才把大学读完了。

He（was）graduated from the university at the cost of his health.

65. 我父亲因年迈而辞职。

My father has resigned his post because of his old age.

66. 不要背后说别人的坏话。

Don’t speak ill of others behind their backs.

67. 火车因发生事故而迟到了一点。

Owing to an accident，the train was a little behind time.

68. 他把那钱藏在地毯下面。

He hid the money beneath the carpet.

69. 不要和那人交际因为失你的格。

Don’t associate with him；it is beneath you.

70. 他认为求援有失他的身份。

He thinks it beneath him to ask for help.

71. 一个凶相的老人坐在她旁边。

Beside her sat a fierce-looking old man.

72. 在她以外，还有一个凶相的老人。

Besides her，there was a fierce-looking old man.

73. 台中是差不多在台北与台南的中途。

Taichung is about half way between Taipei and Tainan.

74. 我们私下说一句，他负债累累。

Between ourselves，he is heavily in debt.

75. 在太平洋的那边就是美国。

Beyond the Pacific is the United States of America.

76. 这工作非我的力量所能做到的。

This task is beyond my power to accomplish.

77. 花莲风景之美非笔墨所能形容。

The beautiful scenery of Hualien is beyond description.

78. 不要做这个。你什么都可以做，只不要做这个。

Don’t do this. You may do anything but this.

79. 如果不是你的劝告，我就不会完成我的计划了。

But for your advice，I could not carry out my plan.

80. 我坐火车去的，坐公共汽车回来的。

I went by train and returned by bus.

81. 我写信通知你，不打电话。

I will let you know by letter，not by telephone.

82. 我在路边的一个茶店里休息了。

I took a rest at a tea-house by the roadside.

83. 许寿裳教授被强盗用刀杀死。

Prof. S. S. Shu was killed by a robber with a knife.

84. 日间阳光普照，夜里星月交辉。

The sun shines by day and the moon and the stars shine by night.

〔注〕in the daytime 之反对语为 at night。

85. 他成功由于坚忍。

He succeeded by dint of perseverance.

86. 他经由日本赴美。

He went to America by way of Japan.

87. 我们跟他们说了两个多钟头。

We talked with them for more than two hours.

88. 这条手绢我花十块钱买的。

I bought this handkerchief for ten dollars.

〔注〕这句又可说 I gave ten dollars for this handkerchief.

89. 他看不出有那么大的年龄。

He is young for his age.

90. 我把他当作他的弟弟了。

I took him for his brother.

91. 他是主战论者，而他弟弟就是反战论者。

He was for war and his brother was against it.

92. 他只是为金钱而努力。

He works hard only for the sake of money.

93. 他为研究美国文学而渡美。

He went over to America for the purpose of studying American literature.

94. 他因无钱而放弃那事业了。

He gave up the enterprize for want of money.

95. 美国的主妇从早到晚都很忙。

American housewives are very busy from morning till night.

96. 那乞丐挨门挨户去求乞。

The beggar went begging from door to door.

97. 他的病差不多完全好了。

He has almost recovered from illness.

98. 我们从其余的人中间来选主席。

We chose the chairman from among the rest.

99. 那声音是从门后面来的。

The sound came from behind the door.

100. 他在1876年4月死于英国。

He died in England，in April，1876.

101. 你一定要用墨水写，但是又不可用红墨水。

You must write in ink，but you must not write in red ink.

102. 你曾经用英语演说过吗？

Have you ever made a speech in English？

103. 他过一星期光景会再来的。

He will come again in a week or so.

104. 她用篮子把那些蛋拿回家去了。

She carried home those eggs in a basket.

105. 他们为袁教授举行了一个欢迎会。

A welcome meeting was held in honor of Prof. Yuan.

106. 一个人的成功与其努力成正比例。

A man will succeed in proportion to his efforts.

107. 不顾他那样努力，他仍然失败了。

In spite of his great efforts，he failed.

108. 他没有储蓄，而把他所赚的钱统统用了。

Instead of saving，he spends all he gets.

109. 那山顶终年积雪。

The top of that mountain is always covered with snow.

110. 游览者的大部分为美国的实业家。

Most of the tourists were American business men.

111. 我爱好英语。他自夸其财富。她怕老鼠。

I am fond of English. He is proud of his riches. She is afraid of the rat.

112. 我班上包含男女生五十名。

My class consists of fifty boys and girls. = My class is made up of fifty boys and girls.

113. 他抱怨他的贫穷。

He complains of his poverty.

114. 看到我从妹的这张照片，就使我想起死去的母亲。

This picture of my cousin’s always reminds me of my dead mother.

115. 这些箱子是木做的。

These boxes are made of wood.

〔注〕不变形态的用 made of，要变形态的用 made from，例如 Wine is made from grapes, and beer from barley.

116. 猴从树上摘下一个个的果子来投掷那蟹。

The monkey picked one fruit after another off the tree and threw them at the crab.

117. 船在基隆港外遇难。

The ship was wrecked off the harbor of Keelung.

118. 他当值，他弟弟休息。

He is on duty，but his brother is off duty.

119. 墙上挂着两张地图，一张中国的，一张美国的。

There are two maps on the wall；one is the map of China and the other of America.

120. 在我生日（那天的下午），我招待了几个朋友来吃茶。

On my birthday，（On the afternoon of my birthday，）I invited several friends to tea.

121. 他靠薪水生活——靠一千美元的月薪。

He lives on his salary——on ＄1,000 a month.

122. 他坚持要去看电影。他坚持要我去看电影。

He insists on going to the movies. He insists on my going to the movies.

123. 他故意把窗子打破了。

He broke the window on purpose.

124. 因他急务而到那里去了。

He went there on urgent business.

125. 我因病不能到会。

I could not attend the meeting on account of illness.

126. 他这样一说便走出房间了。

With these words he went out of the room.

127. 他目下失业。

He is now out of work.

128. 我这样做全出于好意，但他不明白我的动机而为之大怒。

I did it out of kindness，but he got angry because he could not see my motive.

129. 几分钟后那船就走得看不见了。

A few minutes later the ship went out of sight.

130. 他父亲好像年过六十了。

His father seems to be over sixty.

131. 小偷逾墙而遁。

The thief jumped over the fence and ran away.

132. 我们一边喝酒一边谈话。

We talked over a cup of wine.

133. 谢谢顺风，我们随即就抵埠了。

Thanks to the favorable wind，we soon reached the port.

134. 猫能跑过那较小的洞吗？

Can the cat run through the smaller hole？

135. 我们经由通译而谈话。

We talked through an interpreter.

136. 我整个夏天都住在阳明山。

I stayed at Yang Ming Shan throughout the summer.

137. 阳明山位于台北之北。

Yang Ming Shan is situated to the north of Taipei.

138. 父亲因事赴台东了。

Father has gone to Taitung on business.

139. 那年极冷，冻死不少的人。

That year the cold was so intense that many people were frozen to death.

140. 他的雄辩使听众都感动得流泪。

He was so eloquent that the audience were all moved to tears.

141. 见子平安回家使我们大为高兴。

To our great joy our son came home safe and sound.

142. 一听到那声音他们一齐冲向门口去。

At the sound，they all rushed towards the door.

143. 到晚边就开始下雨了。

Towards evening it began to rain.

144. 我在定价以下买了那本书。

I bought the book under the fixed price.

145. 她从一个美国女人那学英文。

She is studying English under an American lady.

146. 新校舍目下在建筑中。

Our new school-house is now under construction.

147. 我跟婶母一同去那里的。我住在婶母家里。

I went there with my aunt. I am staying with my aunt.

148. 从那以后他就对我生气了。

He has been angry with me since that time.

149. 那一点我不敢苟同。

I can’t agree with you there.

150. 他的智慧与年俱长。

His wisdom increased with his years.

151. 他到台北去了，旨在谋到一个职业。

He went up to Taipei with a view to finding a job.

152. 他住在离我家不到一英里之远，我可以在半小时内就达到他家的。

As he lives within a mile of my house，I shall be able to reach his house within half an hour.

153. 我尽力地做了一切，但还是失败了。

I did everything within my power but failed.

（11）连词的用法

联结单词与单词

1. 一年的四季为春夏秋冬。

The four seasons of the year are spring，summer，autumn and winter.

2. 这本小说又容易又有趣。

This novel is both easy and interesting.

3. 这本小说不仅容易而且有趣。

This novel is not only easy but also interesting. = This novel is interesting as well as easy.

4. 如果你明天有空请来我这儿玩。

If you are free tomorrow，please come and see me.

5. 不是你，就是我，总得去一个人。

Either you or I have to go.

6. 你和他都不必去。

Neither you nor he has to go.

〔注〕在 neither A nor B 后头的动词与 B 一致。

联结短语与短语

7. 青蛙不仅在水中，而且可以在陆上生活。

Frogs can live not only in the water but also on the land.

= Frogs can live on the land as well as in the water.

８青蛙不仅可在水中游泳，而且可在陆上行走。

Frogs can not only swim in the water but also walk on the land.

9. 他会写信或是打电话回答的。

He will answer either by letter or by telephone.

联结分句与分句

10. 他下决断虽快，但缺乏实行计划的毅力。

He is quick in decision，but he lacks the will power to carry out his plan.

11. 他一定有病，因为他面色很难看。

He must be ill，for he looks pale.

12. 不要专门玩，多用点功吧。

Don’t play so much，but study harder.

13. 再用点功，你就一定可以考取。

Work harder，and you will surely pass the examination. = If you work harder，you will surely pass the examination.

14. 你要再用点功，否则你就会考不取的。

Work harder，or you will fail. = If you don’t work harder, you will fail. = Unless you work harder，you will fail.

引导表时间的从句

15. 小偷一见警察便逃走了。

When（或 As soon as，或 The moment，或 Directly）the thief saw the policeman，he ran away. = No sooner had the thief seen the policeman，than he ran away.

16. 当母亲忙着在做这样做那样的时候，我们就在玩着各种各样的游戏。

While mother was busy doing something or other，we were playing all sorts of games.

〔注〕be busy + gerund 的语法须加注意。

17. 人不等到失去健康是不会懂得健康的真价的。

People seldom realize the value of health till（until）they have lost it.

18. 自从他决心要考大学，他便竭力用功。

He has been working with might and main，since he made up his mind to try the entrance examination of the university.

19. 你一旦决心要做，就得努力完成。

Once you have made up your mind to do something，you should do your best to accomplish it.

20. 他每次到台北来，都要来看我的。

Every time he comes up to Taipei，he has the kindness to call at my house.

引导表原因或理由的从句

21. 因为母亲生病，所以我昨天没有能够来。

I could not come yesterday, because my mother was very ill. = As my mother was very ill，I could not come yesterday.

22. 你既是这样说，我就要去考虑一下。

Since you say so，I will consider.

23. 因为现在你已经年纪够大可以帮助你父亲了，所以你应该抓住一切的机会去这样做。

Now that you are old enough to help your father，you should try to find every opportunity to do so.

24. 你不可因别人衣装不好就轻视他。

You should not despise a man because he is poorly dressed.

〔注〕because = for the reason that

25. 狮子被称为兽中之王，并非因其聪明，而是因为强而有力。

The lion is not called king because he is wise，but because he is strong.

引导表目的的从句

26. 我们皆为糊口工作。

We all work that we may earn a living.

27. 我们加急了，以便及时赶上。

We hurried up that we might be in time.

〔注〕that…may= so that…may= in order that…may, 都是“俾”，“以便”之意。

28. 当心一点走，以免跌倒。

Walk carefully that you may not fall.

29. 我们细声地说话，以免妨害孩子的睡眠。

We talked quietly so that we might not disturb the sleeping child.

引导表结果的从句

30. 我太疲倦而不能前进了。

I was so tired that I could not go on.

〔注〕so…that 与 so that 不同。

31. 他为人极好，所以大家都喜欢他。

He is such a kind man that he is loved by all people.

〔注〕so…that 之间加形容词或副词，such…that 之间就加名词。

引导表条件的从句

32. 如果你对任何事想获得成功，非专心去做不可。

If you want to succeed in anything，you must devote yourself to it.

33. 除非你专心去做你的事，你是没有成功之望的。

Unless you devote yourself to your work，you cannot hope to succeed in it. = If you do not devote yourself to your work…

34. 只要你当心，你就会安全的。

So long as you are on your guard，you are safe.

引导表比较的从句

35. 珠穆朗玛峰是中国第一高山。

Mt. Everest is higher than any other mountain in China. = Mt. Everest is the highest mountain in China. = Mt. Everest is as high as any other mountain in China. = No other mountain in China is so high as Mt. Everest.

36. 正如人体需要食物来养一样，人民需要产业来养。

As（或 Just as）the human body is nourished by its food，so is a nation nourished by its industries.

37. 他比他的兄弟姊妹都聪明。

He is cleverer than his brothers and sisters.

38. 他与其说是正直，不如说是聪明。

He is more clever than honest. = He is not so much honest as clever. = He is rather clever than honest.

引导表程度的从句

39. 尽眼力所及，除水以外什么都看不见。

As far as the eye can reach，nothing is to be seen but water.

40. 尽我所知，英语中并无此词。

So long as I know，there is no such word in English.

41. 我从来没有这样厉害地病过，所以我得去找医生。

I have never been so seriously ill that I have to consult a doctor.

引导表让步的从句

42. 他虽穷，然很正直。

Though he is poor，（yet）he is honest.

43. 虽则他很有钱，他的生活却很俭朴。

Although he has plenty of money，he leads a very simple life.

44. 即令倾盆大雨，我也要去。

Even if it should rain cats and dogs，I will go.

45. 不管他喜不喜欢，他都得去。

He shall go，whether he likes it or not.

〔注〕第三人称用 shall 是表示说话者的意志，即 I will make him go 之意。

（12）时的一致与叙述转换

时的一致

1. 我未曾知道她是你的母亲。

I did not know that she was your mother.

〔注〕前面是说 did not know, 所以后面要接 she was your mother, 而不要说 she is your mother。

2. 我没有想到他会这样早来的。

I did not think that he would come so soon.

〔注〕前面是说 did not think, 所以后面要接 he would come, 而不要说 he will come。

3. 我未曾知道你病了这么久了。

I did not know that you had been ill so long.

〔注〕前面既是 did not know, 所以后面不要用 you have been ill, 而要用 you had been ill。

4. 我未曾知道他在十多年前就死了。

I did not know that he had died more than ten years before.

〔注〕前面既是 did not know, 所以后面不能说 he died more than ten years ago，而要说 he had died more than ten years before , 因为“死去”是在“知道”以前发生的事，不是同时发生的事。

5. 哥伦布曾相信地球是圆的。

Columbus believed that the earth is round.

〔注〕这是一个例外，地球是圆的，是不变的真理，所以前面的动词 believed 虽为过去式，后面仍用现在形的 is。

6. 他说他在每天吃早饭之前要出去散步。

He said that he takes a walk before breakfast every morning.

〔注〕这也是一个例外，所谓习惯的行为是可以用现在时（takes），不必与前面的过去时（said）一致。

7. 今天早上她告诉我说她母亲重伤风躺在床上。

This morning she told me that her mother is ill in bed with a bad cold.

〔注〕她说话在今早，虽已成过去，但她母亲现在（即说这句话的时候）仍卧病在床上，所以可用现在形的动词（is）。

8. 老师告诉我们说林肯死在1865年。

The teacher told us that Lincoln died in 1865.

〔注〕前面既是 told us，照规矩后面应接 Lincoln had died 才对，不过叙述历史上的事实时，单用 died 即可。

9. 母亲对我说，如果她有足够的钱的话，她就要给我买一架钢琴。

Mother told me that if she were rich enough she would buy me a piano.

〔注〕在 told me 之后普通应接 she was，此句因系虚拟语气（Subjunctive Mood），所以说 if she were（假设的过去）。

直接叙述与间接叙述

10. 他对我说，“我病啦”。

He said to me，“I am ill. ”

He told me that he was ill.

11. 你对我说，“我把表掉了”。

You said to me，“I have lost my watch. ”

You told me that you had lost your watch.

12. 她对他说，“我是在桌上找到那个的”。

She said to him，“I found it on the table. ”

She told him that she had found it on the table.

13. 老师告诉我说，“会及格的”。

The teacher said to me，“You will pass. ”

The teacher told me that I should pass.

〔注〕should 为 shall 的过去式。

14. 父亲对我说，“我要带你去”。

Father said to me，“You shall go with me. ”

Father told me that I should go with him.

〔注〕引用句中的 you shall go 是表示说话者的意志的，改为间接说法时则为 I should go，无论单纯未来（例13）或意志未来，改为间接叙述时都是一样。

15. 你对我说，“我要把这个照相簿送你”。

You said to me，“I will give you this album. ”

You told me that you would give me that album.

16. 你对我说，“我又会考不取的”。

You said to me“I shall fail again. ”

You told me that you would fail again.

〔注〕无论意志将来（例15的 I will）或单纯将来（本例的 I shall），改为间接叙述时都是 you would。

17. 他说，“我现正在这儿读书”。

He said，“I am reading here now. ”

He said that he was reading there then.

18. 他说，“这些书是我今天（早晨）买的”。

He said，“I bought these books today（this morning）. ”

He said that he had bought those books that day（that morning）.

19. 她对我说，“我明天付钱给你”。

She said to me，“I will pay you tomorrow. ”

She told me that she would pay me the day after.

20. 她告诉我说她昨天看见我弟弟。

She said to me，“I saw your brother yesterday. ”

She told me that she had seen my brother the day before.

21. 我问她要哪一个。

I said to her，“Which will you take？”

I asked her which she would take.

22. 我问他为什么笑。

I said to him，“Why are you laughing？”

I asked him why he was laughing.

23. 我问他那是怎样做的。

I said to him，“How did you do it？”

I asked him how he had done it.

24. 我问你弟弟病了多久了。

I said to your brother，“How long have you been ill？”

I asked your brother how long he had been ill.

25. 他问我是不是生了他的气。

He said to me，“Are you angry with me？”

He asked me if I was angry with him.

26. 他问我昨天去听音乐会没有？

He said to me，“Did you go to the concert yesterday？”

He asked me if I had gone to the concert the day before.

27. 她问我近来接到他的信没有？

She said to me，“Have you heard anything from him lately？”

She asked me if I had heard anything from him lately.

28. 父亲叫仆人把书房收拾干净。

Father said to the servant，“Put my study in order. ”

Father told the servant to put his study in order.

29. 母亲要玛丽把窗子打开。

Mother said to Mary，“Please open the window. ”

Mother asked Mary to open the window.

30. 医生要他少吃。

The doctor said to him，“Don’t eat too much. ”

The doctor advised him not to eat too much.

31. 我赞成我们去看电影。

I said，“Let us go to the movies. ”

I proposed that we should go to the movies.

32. 他说落日何其美。

He said，“How beautiful the sunset is！”

He cried out that the sunset was very beautiful.

33. 他考取了学校，大为欢呼。

He said，“Hurrah！I have passed the examination！”

He exclaimed with delight that he had passed the examination.

34. 他名落孙山，为之悲叹。

He said，“Alas！I have failed. ”

He said with a sigh that he had failed.

35. 他求上帝饶恕他。

He said，“May God forgive me. ”

He prayed that God might forgive him.

36. 他向我道别。

He said to me，“Goodbye. ”

He said goodbye to me.

37. 他对我说如果明天天气好就开会。

He said to me，“If it is fine tomorrow the meeting will be held. ”

He told me that if it was fine the following day，the meeting would be held.

38. 他对我说如果昨天天气好就开了会。

He said to me，“If it had been fine yesterday，the meeting would have been held. ”

He told me that if it had been fine the previous day the meeting would have been held.

39. 那老人说，他虽不阔，但很幸福。

The old man said，“I am not rich，but I am happy. ”

The old man said that he was not rich，but that he was happy.

40. 我弟弟说他肚子饿了，要我给他一点东西吃。

My brother said to me，“I am hungry. Give me something to eat. ”

My brother told me that he was hungry and asked me to give him something to eat.

二 作文批改

A POET IN THE THEATRE

（1）原作稿

Once a poet enjoyed a play in theatre；behind him sitting a spectator，patted on his shoulder and said，“Please，get your hat off！”

But，the poet did not mind.

Waiting a while，the man sitting behind him said again：“Please，get your hat off，my friend. ”

Still，the poet did not mind.

On the screen the picture was splendid and magnificent；however，to that man his eye-sight was mostly hindered by the hat. He could not，actually，endure any more thus did he say：“Do get your hat off！My eye-sight was entirely hindered. ”

The poet stretching out，therefore，his right hand took off it. Pop! The damned long and disorderly hair stood straight there just like a bundle of straws.

The back spectator felt the change，by no means，to be better after all.

“Sorry！Beg you put on it again！”

（2）讲解

上面登的这篇文章是一个中学生写的。通篇没有什么语法上的错误，在现今的中学校里，能够写得出这样的英文作文来的人，已经算是很不容易了。

这篇文章的毛病，就在用词不当。许多词句都不合英美人的习惯用法，所以即令造句于语法虽无不合，它还是不能达意，作文不论中西，唯一的要点，不外是孔夫子说的“辞达而已矣”。要达意就非用词恰当不可。

现在逐一说明如下：

中文的“观赏”可以译作 enjoy，如“赏花”enjoy the flowers，“赏月”enjoy the moonlight，“赏雪”enjoy the snow 之类；但“观剧”的“观”字就不能用 enjoy 这个字，只可照字面译作 see，有时也可用 do，如 do a cinema（看电影），“观光”（sight seeing）也可以说 do a city，不过这是俗语的表现法。剧场的“观众”在英文中，只能说 audience（听众），至于 spectator 是街上看热闹的人，意思是“旁观者”，例如 He remained an unconcerned spectator of our struggle.（他对于我们的挣扎，抱着漠不关心的旁观态度。）但对于赛马、赛球一类的“观众”，却可以用这个词，例如 a crowd of spectators at football match.（一大群看赛球的人。）spectator 重在“看”，audience 重在“听”。在评剧的发源地，大家都说“听戏”，而不说“看戏”，与英文的 audience 实有一脉相通之处（拉丁文的 audire 即英文的 to hear，所以 audience= assembly of listeners）。play 是指 drama（剧本）或 dramatic performance（演剧），如说去观剧，可说 go to the play，即指我们现在说的“话剧”，以别于“平剧”（Chinese opera）或“电影”。电影在美国说 motion picture（口语说 movies），在英国说 cinema，如说去看电影，可说 go to the movies（美），go to the cinema（英）。但是 show 就无所谓，不仅话剧可用，电影可用，甚至广播剧（radio show）也可用，不论用什么方式，只要是表演或陈列出来给人看的东西都是 show 呢。

get off 意为“下车”、“下马”、“免除”等，“脱帽”的“脱”字，英文应说 remove。

拍某人的肩，英文的表现法要说“在那肩上拍某人”，先要把整个的对象说出来，然后才加说那些细节，即 pat a person on the shoulder（拍别人的肩），strike him on the head（敲他的头），take him by the hand（拿他的手），pull him by the sleeves（牵他的衣袖），kick him on the shin（踢他的脚胫），look him in the face（看他的脸，当面）等等。

mind 作动词用，是留心不要忘记的意思，如说“没有注意他说的话”，译作 did not mind what he said 尚可，但单用一个 mind 是不好的，因为 don’t mind 是对人家问你介意与否时的答词，是说明你不介意人家的话语。take notice（不注意）才是这里适当的字眼。

wait 作不及物动词用，通常后面应加一个 for，不过像 wait for a moment 中的 for, 在口语说时是可以省去的。

eye-sight 是“视力”，不是“视线”（the line of vision）。视力只有好坏（good or bad）或是衰退（failing），不说被阻住（hinder）。

no more 是表 measure（度量）的，要用 no longer 才可表 state（状态）。所以这儿的 not any more 应改为 not any longer。

Pop 是说爆发，此处应该用（Good）Heavens！

damned 是鄙野的字，宜尽量避免。

sorry 即 I am sorry 之略，意为“抱歉”或“惋惜”，用在此处之不当，是很容易看得出来的。

本文主要用得不妥当的词，都已指出来了。读者不难明白，写英文不仅是语法不错就够了的。用词的恰当与否，实极为重要，因为一词之差，意思大变，同时中国语法与英文语法也不大相同，不可就中文直译，一定要用英文的成语表现出来，才是好英文。

现在特就原文的意思，加以修正润色，使成为一篇像样的英文，即 make it readable，希望对于原作者及其他读者，有所助益。

（3）改正稿

A poet once went to see a show in a movie theatre. A man sitting behind him patted him on the shoulder and said,“I say, will you please remove your hat？”

But the poet did not take any notice of him.

Having waited for a while, the man sitting behind repeated the request. Still the poet did not move.

On the screen a very splendid and magnificent picture was being shown, but, to the regret of the man sitting behind, very little could be seen, as his view was mostly obstructed by the poet’s hat.

Being unable to endure any longer, he roared to the poet:“Can’t you remove your hat？”

At this, the poet took off his hat without saying a word. Heavens! What luxuriant and unkempt locks of hair that stood up straight on the poet’s head just like a bundle of straws!

The man behind the poet felt the change by no means better, so he said to the poet:

“If you don’t mind I would prefer that you put on your hat again. ”

MY BEST FRIEND

（1）原作稿

I knew a friend whom I became acquainted with firstly when I attend school. He went along my house and became my best friend. Since then, he and I have been going to school altogether rain or shine.

Not only he himself knows many things, but also he teaches other people who want to learn. He gives a whole book of knowledge to everybody, sometimes he explained very clear and sometimes he says things rather hard to understand.

He is speechless. I seldom hear his voice. Whenever I ask him questions he can not directly answer useful his mouth, but shows me the answers on his body.

All students and all people who learn are to be best friends with him. He is especially intimate with students who study hard in library, that is his office. He helped we learn many things of every side. If we have no him, we will be out of knowledge. You know my best friend’s name？I tell you. His Chinese name is“shu”, English name is“book”.

（2）讲解

说到现在为止还认识的人，应该用完成式的 have known，以代替过去式的 knew。前面既用了 knew, 后面就不要再用 became acquainted with，因为这样就重复了。

attend 应该用过去时。

同去或前去，不应该用 went along，应说 came to。

altogether 和 together, 虽同是副词，但意义不同，前者作“总共”“全然”解，后者才是“共”“同”“互相”的意思。

not only 用在句首是加重的说法，应将谓语移到主语的前面，才合惯用语法。

a whole book of knowledge 嫌生硬，如用 from cover to cover 这个成语，则既含有书的意味（因 cover 是指书的封面），又作“充分”“透彻”解，可以双关。说 I know him from cover to cover，意即我充分地知道他。

things rather hard to understand 是通的，不过最好是把与书有关的成语嵌进去，所以不如改为 read between the lines（言外之意，弦外之音）。

speechless 意为“不能言的”“哑的”，未免说得太显明了，改用 quiet and gentle，要含蓄些。

answer useful his mouth 是不通的，至少也要说 answer with his mouth，但不如说 answer by word of mouth，系现成的字句。又 answer on his body 也是不通的，应以别的方法表出。

all students and all people who learn 意思是说在校的学生以及校外的学人，可说 every student in or out of school，因为 student 是 somebody who studies, 并不限于在校的学生，社会上的好学的人士都可以用此词。

He helped we learn 应说 He helped us to learn 才是。“各方面”应说 in every way，不要说 of every side。

If we have no him 不合英文语法，如说 But for him，既简单而又明了，实为最恰当的一个成语。

out of knowledge 为 in knowledge 之对，二者都不是这里所需要的，“无知”可说 ignorant，但“愚昧”“无学”就可说 benighted。

I tell you 应作 I’ll tell you 或 Let me tell you.

原作小部分是语法不通，大部分是不合惯用语法，所以批改时虽尽量想保存原文，但有时仍不得不将全句重新写过。作文最好充分利用成语，简明恰当，读时容易上口，而不至有中国英文的毛病。

（3）改正稿

I have known him since I first attended school. He came to my home with me and we made friends with each other. I have never been able to go to school without his company since the day we first met.

Not only does he possess profound knowledge but he imparts it to whoever wants it. He likes supplying everybody with useful information from cover to cover. Sometimes he tells things very explicitly；sometimes you have to read his messages between the lines.

He is very quiet and gentle. I have never heard him speak with a raised voice. As a matter of fact, he has never answered a question by word of mouth, but none the less he makes you understand just as well.

Every student in or out of school is on good terms with him. Those who study hard enjoy the closest intimacy with him and remain in his office—the library—all day long. He helps us in every way to improve in knowledge. But for him, we should have been benighted. Do you know what he is called？His name is“book”.

BUYING A NEW PAIR OF SHOES

（1）原作稿

My shoes was ragged. It looked ugly and unsuitable. My mother suggested that I should have a pair of new shoes instead of the old ones. I was very glad to hear that. But suddenly I felt sad because my mother told me that I could not buy them at once. She had no enough money in hand to go shopping. So I must wait till my father got his salary of the next month.

One month seemed to be a long time for me to wait for a pair of new shoes. I just dreamt day after day. What kind of shoes should I buy？Of what style and in what color？I hoped the day would come.

My dream became true after all. One day my father came home and handed to my mother his salary. I jumped up and ran to my mother. She patted my head and told me that I could buy my shoes immediately. I ran to wash my face, change clothes and comb my hair. All things delighted me. I got in the bus with my mother together.

We went from shop to shop and could not buy a pair of suitable shoes. We wanted to buy a pair of shoes which was cheaper and good looking. But what on earth could we buy the shoes？A person who is not rich, cannot buy things which are good and beautiful. we went along the street. At last we found out a shop. There was a pair of shoes in yellow color in the glass. They fitted my feet perfectly, but not the shoes I had dreamed to buy. My mother urged me to buy them. She consoled me that she would buy me a pair of much prettier shoes than this we had bought already. I said not thing. I felt tired when I returned home.

Now this pair of yellow shoes is on my feet. I like the shoes very much because they were bought by using my fathers salary.

（2）讲解

“一双鞋”虽是说 a pair of shoes，但“一只鞋”却要说 a shoe，单说 shoes, 至少是一双，应该用复数。ragged 是说“衣衫褴褛”，不可用来说破鞋。ugly 是指人丑，鞋子的难看，应说 ungainly 或 unpresentable。这一段除第一句外，都没有语法上的错误，只是说出来的句子，不是嫌累赘，就是欠熟练，读起来不那么顺口，所以批改时，就不得不把某些句子颠倒换置，以符英美人造句的习惯。

在 seem 一词后，最普通是接不定词，例如 I seemed to hear a voice in the distance.（我好像听见远处有人声），不过不定词后如再有形容词时，就可把这不定词略去，如 He seems（to be）quite happy.（他好像很快乐。）“期待”应该说 expect，不要 hope。

“梦想实现”普通都说 My dream has come true，不说 become true。说“薪水袋”（pay-envelope）比直说“薪水”salary 来得含混一点。“拍我的头”与其直译为 patted my head，不如说 patted me on the head，比较更合乎英美语法。太琐碎的事如洗脸、梳头、更衣，一一说出来，颇嫌啰嗦，近乎写流水账，故改为 to get ready for going out（收拾好以便出去）。既已出门，又乘上公共汽车了，是应并入下一段才合适。

单说 suitable shoes 意思不完全，应改为“适合我穿的皮鞋”（shoes which suit me）。“比较便宜又好看”译成 cheaper and good looking, 未免太中国式了。“便宜”应该说 reasonable price，即合理的价钱。good-looking 或 bad-looking 都是指人的相貌而言，如 a good-looking person= a handsome person，one with a face that is admired。再说 She is not at all bad-looking. = She is rather pretty.（她一点也不难看，还相当漂亮。）我们到底能够买什么皮鞋呢？写成 But what on earth could we buy the shoes？有点词不达意，现连下一句（即没有钱的人买不到美好的东西）改为 what can you do with a light purse？因为上面已经说过要货色好，又要价钱便宜这是很难的。钱不够，当然买不到好的皮鞋。在玻璃窗中，不可说 in the glass，应说 in the show window。“我什么也没有说”不可说 I said not thing，应说 I said nothing。

“用我父亲的薪水买来”译成 bought by using my father’s salary 完全是中国语法，尤其是 by using one’s salary 用在这里很不习惯，use money 还可以说，use salary 就不大好说了。

（3）改正稿

My shoes were wearing out and looked so unpresentable that I was very happy when my mother suggested that I should buy another pair. But she told me that I had to wait till father got his next month’s pay as she had not ready money to buy them with.

One month seemed such a long time for me to wait. I dreamed of my new shoes every night. What kind of shoes should I buy？Of what style and color？I expected the day would come soon.

My dream came true at last. One day when father came home he handed his pay-envelope to mother. I jumped at the news and ran to my mother, who patted me on the head and consented to buy my shoes at once. I rushed to get ready for going out with mother.

The bus took us to the business quarter in less than half an hour. We went from shop to shop but could not get a pair of shoes which would suit me. We wanted to buy a pair of beautiful shoes at a reasonable price. But what can you do with a light purse？We walked along the street for a long time, and at length came to a shop, in whose show window we saw a pair of brown shoes. They fitted me so well that they seemed made to order. These, however, were not the shoes I had dreamed of. But my mother urged me to buy them, and promised to get me another pair later. So we went home with the pair of brown shoes. I felt very tired after that long walk.

Now I wear this pair of brown shoes everyday. I like them very much because they were bought with the hard-earned money of my father.

MEI-LI

（1）原作稿

It is the first anniversary of Mei-li’s death. She was a charming beautiful girl, she was bright and cheerful, lively and sweet. She was my neighbor. I have known her since my childhood.

We were friends from childhood. I worked, studied and played with her. She became a great friend of mine. Two years ago, in the summer, she left me and went to Taipei to study, so we sadly parted.

On her departure, I found her crying, she said nothing, I couldn’t say something consoling her. At last I bid her farewell reluctantly, and she went. It was sad.

I often wrote to her, and she often wrote to me, too. So long as we remain fast friendship between us, our spirits were close together.

Last winter she wrote me that she was sick, fearing that she would die of pneumonia, I wrote her for consolation, but I didn’t dare tell her what was really in my heart for fearing of losing her love forever. To my horror, death seized her and my heart was broken.

Each time when I return home I think of her. Though she died, she lives in my memory as real as before.

（2）讲解

这是台南一中一位名叫 Chang Hsu-cheng 的同学的作文，现除字面上的修正外，再加以意义上的补充，所以第一段的改正稿，似乎与原作有些出入了。原作第二句，作者似乎想要把世界上所有美好的形容词统统拿来赞美这位小姐，这当然是可以不必的，而且在语法上讲，两句 she was 连在一块儿又无连词，也不大妥当。

第一段的尾上和第二段的开头，连用 since my childhood 及 from childhood，未免重复，现将第二段并入第一段。

原作第三段的字句也略有调动。否定后应该用 any 代替 some, 所以 couldn’t say something 要改为 couldn’t say anything，后面的 participal（consoling）也应改为 infinitive（to console）。最后一句 It was sad. 的主语 it，前无先行的名词，不知它代表的是什么，所以这句至少应改为 It was a sad parting. 或 The parting was a tug.

作“精神”解的 spirit 不宜加复数，spirits 是指“妖精”“精灵”，又指“心境”，如高兴就说 in high spirits。

I wrote her for consolation. 意为写信求她给我安慰，与作者原意不符，应改为 I wrote to console her. 又 I didn’t dare tell 应改为 I didn’t dare to tell，因 dare 在此非助动词，而是一个主动词，所以应接不定词的 to tell，又 for fearing of losing her love 应改为 for I was afraid of losing her love 或 for I feared that I should lose her love. 现稿上用 I had a presentiment of losing her.

Every 有全体的意思，而 each 则只能指单独的，所以 each time 改为 every time，意为次次如此。

（3）改正稿

I cannot help thinking of Mei-li today as it is the first anniversary of her death. I am as thankful to have known Mei-li since her childhood as I am grieved to lose her in her teens. She was a charming girl, bright and vivacious. We were playmates while we were very young, and schoolmates while attending school. As we were close neighbors, we had not parted company for a single day till one summer morning about two years ago, she came to tell me that she was going to attend a school in Taipei. So we parted in sorrow for the first time and forever.

On departure she said nothing, but I found her crying. I was so stupefied that I couldn’t say anything to console her. I had but to bid her farewell reluctantly when her train moved along. The parting was a tug.

Since we were no longer together, we could do nothing but resort to writing to each other very often. So long as we kept in touch with each other through correspondence, we should remain close friends.

It was last winter that she wrote to me saying she had fallen ill. She was afraid that she would die of pneumonia. I tried to console her in every way, but in the depths of my heart I had a presentiment of losing her forever. Unfortunately it turned out to be true；and my heart was broken.

Every time when I pass her house I cannot but think of her. She is alive spiritually, though bodily dead；and it seems as if I can hear her voice and laughter.

MY FACE

（1）原作稿

Every one has a face, though it to be delicate, plain or ugly. And we usually recognize a person just because we are familiar with his face. So face means much importance than any part of our body, especially to girls. A girl with a beautiful face is always prouder than a heiress to a million dollar property.

But my face means nothing to me.

I dislike my eyes, for they are not black enough. And people say that yellow-eyed person is cunning. I have hatred for my nose, though it is not an acquiline one, it has no bride. So people often sneer at my lacking in persistence. As for my mouth, it is ridiculous in shape. My lower lip is thicker than my upper one. And there has never been a loud and tragic voice coming from my mouth. It is why people call me a coward.

I was once blamed by a teacher in the university because of my gazing at him when he had wrongly explained lessons to us. He said that it was very impolite for a student to look at the teacher in that way. Besides, as a teacher of biology, he stated that most murders were yellow-eyed people. His words made my classmates laugh heartily.

It is clear enough that a plain and ugly face is convenient to me. My plain face has told people that I am a mean fellow, so that authorities will put no attention to me. My ugly face has told girls that is my frame there dwells no beautiful soul, so that they will not mistake me as a poet and fall in love with me.

（2）讲解

Every one 表示“人”的时候，应该写成一个词。though 是一个表示转折或矛盾的词，这里说“面孔有美有丑”，与前面的“人人都有一副面孔”并无矛盾，只是一种说明句子，所以不宜用 though 作连词。because 是表示直接真正的原因的，用在此地似乎太重，这里只要一个“由于”的意思就够了，即我们由面孔而认识人，much 不能和 than 相接，要用 more 才行。acquiline 当系 aquiline（= accipitrine= eagle）之误，既没有鼻梁（bridge），当然就不直了。persistence（不是 persistance）是坚忍或持久的意思。因缺乏坚忍为人嘲笑，这句话放在此不知什么意思？ridiculous 用来形容 shape 是不当的，单说 not well-shaped 也就够了。用 tragic 来形容 voice 也不好，而且此句逻辑上也不合，我不懂为什么下唇比上唇厚，就不能发出大声，就使声音变成悲剧的了？说话的声音小，是表示斯文，并不是表示胆怯，而大声瞎嚷也不能表示大胆，只能表示粗暴呢。blame 是非难，不是呵责，以改为 scold 为佳。murder 是杀人，谋杀，至于杀人犯则应说 murderer。

最后一段，嫌啰嗦，也未能把作者的意思完全表达出来。convenient 用在此地不妥，应是不惹人注目，而非给予方便。其貌不扬，也并不一定就是卑贱的人。that is my frame there dwells no beautiful soul 一句，语法欠通，应作 that in such a frame as mine would not be able to dwell any beautiful soul，又 mistake 后应接 for，不宜接 as。行文句子要简单明了，拉得太长，则嫌拖沓了。

（3）改正稿

Everyone has a face which may be handsome or ugly. Generally we know a person by his face. So the face is the most prominent part of a person. A girl with a beautiful face is always prouder than those who possess a large fortune.

But my face means nothing to me.

I dislike my eyes which are not black enough, for people say that yellow-eyed persons are cunning. I hate my nose for it seemingly has no bridge. As for my mouth, I find it not well shaped. My Iower lip is thicker than the upper one. So people often sneer at me for my facial defects.

While studying in the university, I was once scolded by a teacher, because I gazed at him when he has given us a wrong explanation. He said that it was very impolite for a student to look at the teacher in that way. Being a teacher of biology, he asserted that most murderers were yellow-eyed. His words made my classmates laugh heartily.

It is evident, however, that an ugly face will not attract one’s attention. My ugly face, for instance, has deprived me of the chance to win the affection of the fair sex, who fail to see virtue in person with such a face.

THE ROYAL TUTOR

（1）原作稿

Long, long ago, in a kingdom, there was a prince royal who was being educated by a special teacher in the palace. There were many children together with the prince royal in the same class.

One day, the prince royal did something wrong in the class. The teacher did not punish him and did not even breathe a word about it to him. Instead, the teacher gave the punishment to the one of his classmates.

The prince royal looked puzzled and was very sorry for his classmate.

“Why, I did it, teacher, why didn’t you punish me. My classmate had nothing to do with it？”asked the prince royal.

“Because you’re a prince royal, our future king, I dared not punish you, therefore, have your classmate be punished instead of you. If you don’t want to make your classmates be punished, then you must be careful not to do anything wrong. So that your classmates would not be punished instead of you,”answered the teacher sternly.

From what the teacher said we can apparently make out that he reminded the prince royal indirectly that after he became a king he must rule the country in a good way, not be too cruel to the people who are under your rule, otherwise he would make his people as well as the schoolmate had been done.

（2）讲解

既是一个王太子（prince royal），自然是有一个王国（kingdom）存在，所以 in a kingdom 一个短语，就似乎是多余的了。家庭教师可说 tutor, 不必 special teacher。又太子可说 heir-apparent。

一句中连用两个 did not 不好，故后半句改为 nor did。又 the teacher gave the punishment to the one of his classmates 句中的 the one 只能说 one。这句以改为 make an example of someone else 为佳，因 make an example of 有惩一儆百的意思。

单说 very sorry for his classmate，未能表示因其代己受过而对之抱歉那种意思，所以在后面宜加上 who was punished in his stead。

I did it 是普通的说法，在这时候应该用加重的说法，即 It is I who did it. 下一句与其说 why didn’t you punish me？不如说 why did you punish him instead of me？意即“你为什么不处罚我而要处罚他呢？”至于 had nothing to do with it，宜用现在完成时，不要用过去时，因为说他与此事无关系，是到现在还是无关系的。

在教师回答的话中原作未能把立意十分表达出来，所以现略加增补，与原文对照细阅，便知行文的出入。

末段说明词句拟删去，因为读者读了上段，含义已很明白，用不着再加说明，而且文字上也有毛病，例如 under your rule 应作 under his rule，及 otherwise he would make his people as well as the schoolmate had been done 应作 otherwise he would make his people suffer as his classmate had suffered。

（3）改正稿

Long, long ago, there lived a prince royal who was being educated by a tutor in the palace. There were some other children of the royal family studying with the heir-apparent.

One day, the prince royal did something wrong in the class. The teacher did not punish him, nor did he mention it to him. But as a warning to the others he made an example of someone else.

At this the prince royal was puzzled and felt very sorry for the boy who was punished in his stead.

“It is I who did it, dear teacher, ”said the prince royal.“Why did you punish him instead of me？To tell the truth, he has nothing to do with it. ”

“Certainly, ”said his tutor.“But he was made to suffer though he was not the wrong doer. That’s the way in which we behave ourselves in this world. You know, you are the prince royal, our future king. I might, of course, punish you for your misdemeanour, but who will dare to punish you for your wrong-doing when you have become king？As is always the case, the people will suffer for the wrong doings of their ruler. So if you don’t want your classmate or your future subjects to suffer for your wrong doings, you must be very careful not to let yourself go astray from the right path. ”

ON BOOKS

（1）原作稿

Books are to mankind what memory is to the individuals. They contain the history of our race, the discoveries we have made. They not only teach us how to become a doctor, a merchant, a honourable preacher；but also guide us to the path of glory and satisfaction. We can converse freely without hindrance with all the historic figures in the world through books. We can travel the world over happily by the guidance of books. Books are really wonderful.

We know life is short while art is long. We are mortal, therefore we have to go to whence we came at the call of Wyrol. No man has an exception. No matter how wise you are, you cannot experience everything in this human world. We know we have a four thousand years history. If we don’t have books；by what can we know it？

The reason why I buy books is to get knowledge of the universe. Bacon said well that knowledge is power, but I think knowledge is not only power but a soul. Man without soul is no longer a person of mankind. It is only book that comforts our souls and makes our souls to have a connection with our body. According to the Greek philosopher, a man will not be complete untill his soul and body are well united and harmonious.

（2）讲解

第一句引自 Lubbock 的 The Delights of Books 一文中的成句，应该加用引用符号。第二句说的是两件事，应该用连词连接起来。医生的学识从经验得来的比从书本得来的为多，商人更不一定要读多少书，所以改说学者与专家较好。又书本并不一定会使我们知足，饱学之士，贪得无厌的人，还是很多，所以 and satisfaction 的字样，可以删去。既说了 freely, 就不必再说 without hindrance 以免重复。

Art is long and life is short 是由拉丁文的 Ars longa, vita brevis（生也有涯，智也无涯。人寿有限，艺术无穷）一个成语来的，所以我们仍以保留它的原形为佳。Wyrol 不知出自何典，现拟改为普通的 death，或 the god of death。

书籍是给我们读的，买而不读，仅作装饰，非买书的本意，所以与其说 buy，不如说 read。我们求知，主要在我们自身及所居的世界，说 universe 似嫌太渺茫了一点。soul 不能与 power 相配。a person of mankind 也不成话，都非改正不可，所以以下的字句，略有更动，以求达意。又 until 后只有一个 l，而 till 后才是两个 l。

（3）改正稿

“Books are to mankind what memory is to the individual. ”They contain the history of our race and the discoveries we have made. Without them one can hardly be a scholar, an expert, or an honourable preacher. In short, books lead us to the path of glory. Through them we can converse freely with all the world-famous men and women who died long ago, and can see the most beautiful parts of the world without going out of the door. Indeed, books are the most wonderful things created by man.

We know that art is long and life is short. As men are mortal, they will return at the call of death to the place whence they come. No matter how wise you are, you cannot see and know everything in the world. The scope of your eye-sight is rather limited, but if you see with your mind’s eye, there will be a wider prospect. You may know things which happened thousands of miles away or thousands of years ago. If you don’t have books how can you be informed of such things？

The reason why I read books is that I want to have some knowledge of the human race and the world in which we live. Bacon said that knowledge is power, but I think knowledge is not only power, but something to purify our soul. Only a purified soul makes a perfect man. Books make our soul and body unify. According to a Greek philosopher, a man will not be complete until his soul and body are well united.

MY HOME

（1）原作稿

Everybody has one’s own home, but all the homes are not the same. Some are rich，some poor, some small and some big.

Though my home is not a rich one, yet I love my home very much.

My home is situated at a quiet street on Kowloon side. The head of my home is my father, for I have no grandfather or grandmother. But the one that controls the family affair is my mother, for my father has no time to spend on the family affair. He has to devot all his time on his business, in order to make enough money to support the family.

In my home, I have four brothers and three sisters. Two brothers and two sisters are go to school, and my two elder brothers are working people.

They work in order to gain some money to help my father. They are all very happy in living together.

Now, I left my home because I want to continue my study in the university. Next summer vacation I wish I can go back to my home and spend a happy holiday with my family.

（2）讲解

第一段第一句中的 one’s 只能用于 Subject 为 one 的句中，例如 One should take care of one’s health，如果主语的 one 前面加有 every，each 等指示词时，后面就不能再用 one’s，而要改用 his 才对，例如 Every one loves his mother. 何况主语用的是 everybody, 自然后面更不能接 one’s 了。凡指定的，而非泛指的 one，都要接 his；如 One of the boys has lost his cap. 第二句一连用了四个 some，实在太单调，应该用 some…and others…才好。

第三段第一句的 on Kowloon side 不大习惯。“家事”应该说 domestic affairs，不宜说 family affair。又 devote 尾上应有一个 e，而且后面要接 to。

第四段 are go 两个动词不可连用；working people 虽语法不错，然意义不显明，所以应将 people 一词删去。

第六段 wish 后面不能接 can 应接 could，在 hope 后面才是接 can。说 a holiday 只有一天，如礼拜天；如果说一个假期，就得用 holidays 或 vacation。

全文太无内容，词句亦不够表达，语法错误颇多，虽经批改，仍不能成为一篇好的文章。

（3）改正稿

Everybody has his own home, with which no place can be compared. All homes, though different from one another, are sweet. My home is full of delights；I like it very much.

We live in a quiet street in the city of Kowloon. As I have no grandfather and grandmother, my father is the head of the family. But, as he is very busy with his business, he leaves the domestic affairs in my mother’s hands.

My family is rather a big one. I have four brothers and three sisters. Only the two older brothers are working；and the younger ones are still at school. We are grateful to our older brothers who help father keep the pot boiling for the big family and make us feel happy at home!

I left home only because I wanted to continue my study at Taiwan Provincial College of Engineering to which I was admitted. This, as you know, is the best institute of technology. I am glad that I have a chance to study here, but I hope I can spend my summer holidays with my family in Kowloon.

MOUNTAIN CLIMBING

（1）原作稿

It was a day on the end of August, this year. We, about twenty youthes, decided to take a picnic. But, what a pity day it was!A thin rain was droping in the morning, as if to prevent us from going. As you know, the persistent mind of a youth, is not so easily to be striken. Eventually we started off, in spite of rain and wind.

Along a straight narrow lane we went. The wide green rice fields spread over the earth, and continued as long as we passed by. Climbing on a steep mountain, we found nothing, but some cottages far away, which dotted the monotonous nature. Everything is calm. Everything is quiet. Except the sounds of rains, which harmonized with our foot steps were heard. No sooner had we reached our destination than it poured a flood of rain, that made us all scattered like a flock of sheep.

We were all astonished, for there stands a white stucco villa of modern style, which overlooking the road, on the top of the mountain. Then all of us were invited to rest. The radio broadcasted that typhoon was approaching from the East Coast of Taiwan. Not long after, we all sunk to enjoy the sweet dinner which was made by ourselves.

Mountain by mountain, we trod slowly on, with our tired feet, and we bristled our nervous energy again to sing the triumphant song, on our way home. And when the sounds echoed back from the deep valley were stronger than the rains, we could not but burst into a happy laugh. For we not only conquered all the obstructions, but also won the ultimate victory.

（2）讲解

上面这篇英文作文，是本刊读者树林黄介山君最近寄来的。黄君只受过中等教育，就没有升学了，现在专靠阅读《大洋英语月刊》以增进他的英文知识。本刊同人对于这种热心自习的人，最愿竭诚相助，故特将其来稿提前刊出。

第一段说“在一天”应作 on a day, 而“八月尾”可作 at 或 toward 或 about 或 in the end of August，但不能说 on the end。Youth 的复数为 youths，此词可作“青年”解，如 a youth of twenty（二十岁的青年），又可作“青年男女”（集合名词）解，如 the youth of the country（中国青年男女）。从上一个意思，由单数的青年可以加 s 变成复数，如 a bevy of youths and maidens（一群青年男女）。英文只说 have a picnic, 不说 take a picnic。又 pity 是一个名词不能拿来修饰名词的 day。striken 应拼作 stricken。

第二段中间的 as long as（= if only），是错误的，coutinue 一词用在此地也不对，应作 stretch。Except the sounds 一句语法不通，因为没有主语，而动词倒有了两个（harmonized 及 were heard）。在动词 make 的后面应接略去了 to 的不定词或现在分词，而不能接过去或过去分词，所以句中的 scattered 应用 scatter 才对。

第三段发现一所别墅，用不着要 astonish（惊愕）。broadcast 的过去式与现在形一样，不能加 -ed。Not long after 不常用，应用 Before long。又 sunk 是 sink 的过去分词，不能单独作谓语用，此处即改为 sank 意义上也说不通。普通午餐说 lunch 或 tiffin，不说 dinner（正餐，多在晚上吃）。原作中用的 sink to enjoy the dinner，大约是说大家走得饿了，便大吃其“便当”，所以现在改用 do（full）justice to 一个成语，正有饱餐一顿之意。

第四段中说 when the sounds echoed back from the deep valley（这是一个从句），下面就应该接一个有主语和谓语的主句，不能接动词。

全篇文字太拖沓，有欠简洁，以致有些语句语法也不清楚了。标点也太多，如 this year 的前面和 nothing but 的中间那种逗号都是不要的。

（3）改正稿

It was on a day toward the end of August this year. About twenty of us had a picnic. The drizzling rain which was falling in the morning could not prevent us from going, as we young men are not to be discouraged by such trifling obstacles.

Along a straight narrow lane we went. On either side stretched the green paddy-fields dotted here and there with cottages. On our way we could hear nothing except the patter of the rain and the sound of our own footsteps. No sooner had we reached our destination than it poured in torrents that made us all scatter in every direction.

When we had climbed to the top of a high mountain we found there was a white stucco villa of modern style overlooking the road below. The host invited us to his villa where we had a rest and heard the radio broadcasing that a typhoon was approaching from the east coast of Taiwan. Before long we all did full justice to the lunch which we had brought with us.

As we plodded our weary way homeward, we sang songs which echoed through the hills and overwhelmed the patter of the rain. It was already candle-light when we got home.

THE ORIGIN OF LIFE

（1）原作稿

I rise in the east every day, and when I rise then a day is begun. I look in your window with my bright golden eyes, and point to you that you should get up this time. I do not shine for you to lie on your bed and sleep, but I shine for you to get up work and walk about. As I love earth’s people so I let moon to reflect my bright for you at the night. I am a great traveler, I travel all over the sky. I never stop and never tired.

I have a crown of bright beams upon my body, and I sent my rays everywhere. I shine upon trees, house and water, therefor everything looks sparkling and appears beautiful color when I shine upon it. I give you limit energy therefor the fruits and the corn are ripen. I am up very high in the sky, higher than all the trees, higher than the clouds and the moon. If I were to come nearer to you, I should scorch you to death, and I should burn up everything.

（2）讲解

第一句虽无错误，但说 A day is begun 不太好，我们可以说 A day is born 或 A new day has dawned upon the world. 或 The day opened cloudily. 第二句的 point to 在此地不能代表 tell 的意思，因为 point 是“指向”或“用手指物”不能作“指示”解，除非加用 out 才有 show 的意思，如 Please point out my mistakes.（请指示我的错处。）我们不说 earth’s people，应改为 the people on earth。我们不说 at the night，只能说 at night 或 in the night。

第二段中的 house 是应该也用复数的。therefor 应作 therefore。又 ripen 是动词（ripe 是形容词），不宜接在 are 后用。说 limit energy 不对，应改为 limited energy，因为 limit 是动词或名词，而不是形容词。水果单说 fruit 就够了，不要加复数，加了复数是表示各种各样的水果。all the trees 应说 all trees，因为不是指定某一部分的树木，the clouds 也是一样，不要冠词。至于 the sky 或 the moon 就要留下冠词，因为是世界上唯一的，最后一句中的 should，宜改用 would 较妥，因为不是表示单纯将来，而是表示决定呢。

（3）改正稿

I rise in the east；and when I rise, it is day. I look into your window with bright golden eyes early every morning to awake you from your sleep. I do not shine on people lying in bed, but on those going about either for pleasure or on business. I hate inanimation and darkness. I give life to men, animals and plants on earth；and as I do not like seeing them enveloped in darkness, I let moon reflect my light over them at night.

I send forth light as well as heat. I give life as well as energy. Without me grains and fruits never can grow, not to mention ripening. If I were not to shine over the earth, there would be no human beings, no animals, no trees, no grass, and no life at all. So I am the origin of life.

I am a great traveler and never get tired of journeying all over the sky. I shine high up and above all things. I have to keep a long distance from them, because I know I am too hot. If I were to come nearer to them, I would certainly scorch them or burn them to death. I am now at such a distance as to give them enough light and heat from which life springs.

CUTTING DOWN THE DAILY EXPENSES

（1）原作稿

Last night, I saw my wife knited her brows as she counting our dairy expense. So I asked her what did she thinking about.

“Food is dear recently. Our expenditure increased this month, ”she said solicitously.

“What shall we do, ”I said.“We must be more economic. ”

“Yes, I am just thinking about that, ”she said.

“Well, shall we have an economic movement from next month？”

“That is just what I am going to suggest, ”my wife replied agreeably.

“Go and take a sheet of paper, ”I said.“Let us discuss about what shall we spare. ”

She found a piece of paper, and gave it to me.

“Now, you say, ”I took out my pen and asked,“What is the first thing we can save？”

“I think the first thing is your sparerib, ”she took a glance at me and continued:“One catty a day at least needs 10 dollars. You are too fat already. It won’t be better for you to eat more fish. ”

She spoke reasonably, so I could only write it down.

“And what is the second thing？”I asked.

“The second thing is your cigarette, ”my wife said.“40 cigarettes a day causes your mouth smells bad, and your teeth looks dirty. Sometimes it happens to burn black the coverlet or the clothes. ”

I wrote it down also.

She rest a moment and continued,“What will you suggest？”

“I think we need not go to movie for scores of times a month. ”I know my wife is a movie fan, so I said with hesitation.

“You are right, ”she said after a few minutes.“You are not smoke cigarette, of course I am not go to movie. ”

“And, ”I said,“you need not go to the barber’s shop to dress your hair constantly. ”

“Of course, ”she said.“And instead of going to the barber’s shop once a week, you may go there once for a couple of weeks. ”

“It’s enough, ”she said.“Now, please count the sum which we have saved. ”

I added the amount and found that we have saved almost 800 dollars a month. I lited a cigarette and felt rather glad.

“You are smoking!”my wife cried.

“It is the last one, ”I said.“From now on, we can save 800 dollars a month. We will become a millionaire some day. Tonight, we must celebrate our great success. ”

“Where are we going now？”my wife asked blinkly.

“Let me see, we are going to movie at first. ”

She dressed a new skirt and said,“Then we are going to the restaurant and take some sparerib. ”

（2）讲解

在 see 及 hear 等感觉动词后面，应接不带 to 的不定词或现在分词，例如 I saw him come this morning. = When he came this morning，I saw him. 或 I saw him coming this morning. = When he was coming this morning，I saw him.

“每天的”是 daily 不是 dairy（此字作“牛奶棚”或“制酪厂”解）。此种拼法类似的词，应特别注意。

So I asked her what did she thinking about. 这句在语法上有两个大的错误：一是 did she thinking 应改为 did she think 才行，因为 did 是助动词，thinking 是现在分词，都不是主动词。二是问句固然要将主语与谓语颠倒，但成为附从从句的问句，就不要颠倒，仍然保留陈述时的次序。所以此句应作 I asked her what she was thinking about.

“经济学的”是 economic，而“省俭的”便是 economical（= thrift and saving），应辨别这种异同。an economic movement 意为“经济学上的运动”。

Let us discuss about what we spare. 一句所犯的毛病和上述 did she…一样，应将问句的形式改为陈述句的形式。

The second thing is your cigarette 句中末一词应改用复数才对。40 cigarettes a day causes your mouth smells bad，and your teeth looks dirty. 一句，第一点不能用阿拉伯数字来开始一个语句，第二点 cause 后面应接不定词（即 cause one to do），不能接第三人称单数的动词即（cause one does），如用 make 的话，后面就接不要 to 的不定词（即 make one do）。

所谓 coverlet 或 coverlid 是“床上的覆被”，抽烟为什么会熏黑床上的覆被，是不大容易了解的。

看电影普通是说 go to the movies，很少用单数的。

You are not smoke cigarette 句中最大的错处是 are 和 smoke 两个动词连用在一块，我们只能用 are smoking 或 are to smoke，最好是说 smoke（否定说 do not smoke）。抽烟单说 smoke 就够了，如 Do you smoke？Yes，I smoke. 不必说 smoke cigarettes，普通说 have a cigarette 或 enjoy a cigarette。

I am not go to movie 句中 am 与 go 两个动词重复了。后半句也应作 go to the movies，动词 light 的过去和过去分词为 lighted 或 lit，没有 lited 这种写法。

又 dress 作动词用时与 wear 不同，后接宾语时要加介词，如 be dressed in a new skirt。

（3）改正稿

Last night, I saw my wife knitting her brows as she was counting our daily expenses. I asked her what she was thinking about.

“Prices are rising；and we have pushed expenses to the full limits of our monthly income, ”she said, heaving a deep sigh.“We are unable to provide against a rainy day. ”

“What shall we do then？”I said.“We must be more economical next month. ”

“Yes, I am just thinking about cutting down the daily expenses, ”she nodded at me.

“Well, we shall have to reduce our household expenses next month. Go and get me a sheet of paper,”I said.“Let’s see what we can spare. ”

She found a piece of paper, and gave it to me. I took out my pen and asked:“Now, what is the first thing we can dispense with？”

“I think the first thing is the spareribs which you insist on having each day. ”She glanced at me and then continued.“One catty, 10 dollars. What a big bill you will have to pay at the butcher’s each month!”

I agreed and wrote it down.

“And what is the second thing which we can do without？”I went on asking.

“The next thing is the cigarettes, ”my wife said.“Smoking 40 cigarettes a day causes you to have bad breath, besides the seven or eight dollars you have to spend. ”

This I wrote down also.

After a while she said to me,“What do you suggest？”

“I think you need not go to the movies so often, ”I said with hesitation, because I know my wife is a movie fan.

“You are right!”she replied.“If you do not smoke, of course, I shall not go to the movies. ”

“And, ”I continued to say,“you need not go to the barber’s shop to dress your hair once a week. ”

“Of course not, ”she assured me.“I may go there once in two weeks, may I not？Well, that’s enough. Please count up what we have saved. ”

It amounted to almost 800 dollars a month. I lit a cigarette and felt rather happy.

“You are smoking!”my wife cried.

“This is the last one, ”I explained.“From now on, we can save 800 dollars a month. We shall become very rich some day. Tonight, we must celebrate our great success. ”

“Yes, let’s go to the movies, ”my wife suggested.

“No, my dear, ”I interrupted,“we are going to the restaurant and have some sparerib. ”

THE SPURTING FOUNTAIN NEAR THE RAILWAY STATION

（1）原作稿

At the middle of the ground of Tainan Station was a new artificial circular fountain floating the fair blue water, about three feet in depth, in which the color lights of five kinds of electric bulbs had been installed inside the circle about 20 feet in diameter to express their cool lovely beauty. At the center of the fountain, the most large jet was spring up its water into the pure air, and was falling down over its source again and again, as if it was directing the many tinge jets to sing together of the glory which had been established lately by the hand of the Tainan Municipal Government.

Suddenly a massagist’s flute awoke the lonely silence of this dreaming night with its high grace note. No sooner had the note sounded over the loom environ than a train sighed her loud smoky sigh and spited out her slight burden, few passengers.

Near the fountain, under one of the trees, beside the prearrangement-space which had been planned to put a great hero’s bronze statue was a solitary maiden, clad in a long coat, sitting toward the road of leading to a place whence her man was to be coming. He did not come at last, so she had to walk home all alone.

（2）讲解

作文造句，应力求简明，不宜将句子堆砌，而使文字拖沓，语法纠缠不清。

第一段：station 虽是驿站但不一定是火车站，所以火车站，应说明 a railroad（或 railway）station。

喷水不能说它浮在水上（float），英文中“常”用的词是 play，如“今天没有喷水”，就说 The fountain is not playing today. 他们用这个“戏”字，正如我们说“鸳鸯戏水”一样，不过喷水自戏罢了。又如 The fountain played beneath the sun，casting its diamond bright waters to the sky.（喷水向上喷出钻石似的晶莹的水花，而戏于阳光之下。）

the most large 不合语法，应说 the largest。

was 和 spring 二词都是动词，不可连用在一块，只能说 was springing 或 was to spring。

as if 是虚拟语气，后面应接 were，即 as if it were。

jet 是从一个小孔或管子喷出或射出的东西，如 a jet of water, steam, air, gas 等，也可以说 a jet of light（射出一线光）。现在的喷气机便是 jet（air）plane。喷气机虽能发出大声，但普通喷水或喷气是不大有声音的，所以不宜说 to sing。又在 jet 前面，也不宜用 tinge 来形容，tinge 只能作动词或名词用，意为“着色”，如 tinge the sky with a rosy flush。

together 后只能接 with，不能接 of。

which had been established 是指喷水，但现接在 glory 一词之后，就成为形容那种 glory 了。

单说 be established by 就够了，不要说 be established by the hand of。

第二段：普通都是说 break the silence，不说 awake the silence。

grace note 即“装饰音”，是音乐上的一种专用名词，普通作文不宜用。

loom 是动词或名词，意为模糊现出，用在此地，不知何所指。

environ 作名词用，应为复数，如 Taipei and its environs（台北及其近郊）。

spit 的过去为 spit 或 spat 不能写作 spited（这样拼时读［spaitid］），如果要加 -ed，也得拼成 spitted 才对。

prearrangement-space 是杜撰之辞，看去不大顺眼，此处可简单地说 the space left for the bronze statue of a great hero 就行了。

单说 road leading to a certain place 就对了，leading 的前面不要加 of。普通在 road 后面是接 to，如 road to success（达到成功之路），on the road to Taipei（上台北的路上），若要接 of 时，就有四通八达的意思，不是向着某一条路去，例如 Hawaii is at the cross roads of the Pacific.（夏威夷当太平洋的冲要）。

（3）改正稿

In the center of the open space amidst the palm trees near the railway station of Tainan, there is a fountain newly built by the Tainan Municipal Government. The litte pond around the fountain is lighted under water with electric bulbs of different colors, which make the place look like a kaleidoscope.

It was late at night；and everything seemed still to the eye. Suddenly the delightful note of a massagist’s flute was audible, breaking the silence of the night. Before long, it was followed by a screaming siren from an arriving train, which, after drawing up at the station, poured forth some of its burden of passengers.

Near the fountain under one of the palm trees, a solitary young girl was standing. Obviously she was waiting for somebody who failed to come. As the night deepened, she walked home with a heavy heart, leaving behind her the spurting fountain and the sparkling pond.

THE SPRING IN TAIWAN AS COMPARED WITH THAT IN THE MAINLAND

（1）原作稿

It is spring now, but the spring of Taiwan isn’t a good season. The sky is still cloudy. Sometimes it keeps rainning day after day. People would doubt whether they could see the sun again. They also haven’t the happiness of seeing the tree in bloom；because the leave of the tree didn’t fall last year, and there is no any different between winter and spring.

I have lived in Taiwan for six years in spring, I can not help missing my native country. Though I was a little girl while I lived there, I can remenber vividly the little cottage, the stream with willows growing on the shore, and the country path beside the rice field. How wonderful they were, as the cruel winter gave way to the beautiful spring. They were magnificently changed. The stream was released from icy fetter and murmured sweetly again. In thier new green dress, willows danced with the gentle breeze, the field and the path were cover with coloured flowers. Children no longer stayed at the cottage, because it was the season of playing outdoor games as fishing, racing, gathering flowers. Everywhere about the country was beautiful. Everything the countryman did was interesting.

（2）讲解

第一段中说“台湾的春天”，实际是说“在台湾的春天”，所以要说 The spring in Taiwan, 不宜说 of Taiwan。正如近日报上登的“夜巴黎”的香水，名叫 Evening in Paris 一样。still 一词意为“仍然”，即是说“以前如此，现在还是如此”，这儿应改为 always（老是）才对。raining 加接后缀时，不应再加一个 n，因为其前非短元音。doubt 一词可改为 wonder 或 suspect，因为 doubt 所怀疑的是“事情的真假 ”“人的成功与否”“将来的事”等等，例如 I doubt his honesty.（他恐怕不大诚实）；suspect 便是觉得有嫌疑，认为奇怪，怀疑别人犯罪等，例如 I suspect his dishonesty.（他好像是一个不诚实的人）。至于 wonder 就是表示“亟欲知道”或“讶而欲知”或“怪”，如 I shouldn’t wonder if he were to go mad.（他即发狂亦不足怪。）no 后接名词，not 后接形容词，所以我们只说 no books 或 not any books。又在 there is 后要接名词，不可接形容词，所以 different 应改为 difference。

第二段 miss 一个动词的用法弄错了。这词普通虽可作“想念”解，但不能用于“想念故国”，为什么呢？因为 miss 原意为 notice the absence of（someone or something），即“因不在而想念”，例如 I miss my mother when she goes away.（妈离去我想念她），We shall miss you very much. = We shall feel sad at your absence. 不是“故国”离开“我们”，是“我们”离开“故国”，所以这种想念应说 think of，不要用 miss。拼词应注意，如 remenber，thier 等。shore 多指海边，“河岸”只能用 bank。“被盖满”要说 be covered，这儿要用过去分词，才能表出被动的意思来。“多种颜色”单用 coloured 一定不够，应该说 multi-coloured 或 many-coloured 才对。普通美国说 colored people 是说黑人。everywhere 及 today 一类的词，拿来作主语用，有点中国式，如 Everytvhere was beautiful. 及 Today is hot. 宜加用 it 作主语，改说 It was beautiful everywhere. 及 It is hot today. 比较好些。

（3）改正稿

The spring in Taiwan isn’t a good season, because the sky is always cloudy. Sometimes the steadily falling rain makes people wonder whether they will ever see the sun again. As the leaves of trees are green the whole year, there is no marked difference between winter and spring.

I have lived in Taiwan for six years；and in spring, I cannot help thinking of my native country. Though I was a little girl while living there, I can still remember very well the little cottages, the stream with willows growing along its banks, and the paths beside the rice fields. How beautiful the trees and flowers were, as the cruel winter gave way to the spring!The stream was released from the icy fetters and began murmuring sweetly again. The willows in their new garments of green danced with the gentle breeze. The fields and the paths were covered with multi-coloured flowers. Children no longer remained in their cottages, and played outdoors. Sometimes they would go fishing in nearby brooks；sometimes they would race about in the fields. It was beautiful everywhere in the country.

MY FIRST VISIT TO TAIWAN

（1）原作稿

In the year of 1948 I came to Taiwan, the place I first visited. The first different feeling was“it is hot”. The thick clothes we could not wear any longer. We all changed into the summer dress. As I put on my shirt and I could but cry“O！It is summer!”In the fact it was just winter. This delightful weather made me very happy. Immediately I liked Taiwan.

We got down from the ship toward the street I saw in the fruits shops filled with many fruits——oranges, bananas, which I could not often see in the north part of China. Atracted by it’s delicious taste I bought some and I knew it’s price was very low. So I cried to my mother“How nice! We can eat them all day long!”

Taiwan people has some habits that different from our’s, one of these is that they don’t wear shoes, but a kind of wooden slipper. If you pass over streets or lines. You would hear the noisy sound came from every one’s foot.

Some of the beautiful young maiden had on the most fashioned clothes and done their hair the latest style, but you cannot look at their foot because it is not harmonious with their adornments.

The best impression was that the streets were very spick-and-span. The tall palm trees caused me sense that it is a fair island in the southern sea.

（2）讲解

第一段中的 the place I first visited 应说 where I visited for the first time。下面单说一个“不同的感觉”又没有说出和什么不同，意思太含糊了，要说也应该说 It（the hot weather）gives me a different feeling. O 宜改为 Oh，因 O 后常接人（第二人称），且多用于诗中，如 O Caesar，how art thou fallen！O King，take pity on thy subjects，在 Oh 后可加逗号。用 O 时则不能与后面 vocative 分开。普通我们说 in fact，不说 in the fact。

第二段首句只能说 go toward，不要说 get toward。普通说水果店（fruiterer），就叫果蔬商（greengrocer），或说 fruit dealer 或说 fruit shop 都可以，但不能说 fruits shop；说 fruit 已经是多数，若再加 s 而成为 fruits 时，则表不同的种类。atract 应拼作 attract。又 it’s 为 it is 之略，属格应为 its。

第三段 Taiwan people 应说 people in Taiwan。而 habits that different from our’s 一句没有动词，应在 that 后加上一个 are。尾上的 our’s 应作 ours。又 line 只能作“航线”或“铁路”解，不能代替 road 用。

第四段在 some of 之后既接有 countable 的名词，就应用复数，即 some of the maidens。

末段的 impression 应说明是谁的印象。spick-and-span 多用来形容衣装。在 cause 后面应接 to sense（他如 I caused him to do it.），不能将不定词的 to 略去。末句宜用 on the sea，不宜说 in the sea，因为 in 是指在海中，如 a fish in the sea。

（3）改正稿

I came to Taiwan in the winter of 1948. After I had landed, I could no longer wear thick woolen clothes, and had to put on my summer suit, although it was then in December. As it was rather warm, I began to think that summer had set in.

I remember, when I had come ashore and walked along the street, the first thing that attracted my attention was the variety of fruits displayed in the greengrocers’ shops. There were oranges, bananas, pineapples, papayas, and many others I could not even name, because I had never seen them before. I found these fruits so delicious and their prices so low that I could not but cry to my mother,“Oh, how nice it is that we can have them all the year round!”

Many people in Taiwan wear wooden clogs instead of shoes. When you are out on the street, you can often hear the clatter here and there. It seems to be a tiny flaw in a white gem that a beautiful young girl in her fashionable dress and her hair done in a permanent wave wears such wooden clogs which I think really unfit for her.

The city of Taipei struck me, on my first arrival, as a charming outlandish maiden in a spick-and-span new dress which was rather exotic and attractive；and the tall palm trees vibrating with the breeze told me that I had come to a subtropical island.

MR. CLEVER

（1）原作稿

This event happened when I was in middle school. At time, our school had one of the best basketball team in the city and our class had one of the best player in the team. His name was Mr. Clever. He was a poor student and he had remained in the Senior II for two years. According to the school rule he had to pass the final examination that semester or he would be dismissed. But there was a race in the summer vacation in order to win the race it was necessary for him to pass the examination. Every one wanted to help him and the register office arranged the seat and let him sit beside John who was the head student of our class. Yes, our friend copied from John’s paper. When he finished the examination, he was very happy and shook hands with everybody.

The next day, there was a bulletin announced that he was dismissed for cheating and got the zero mark. Why？What was the reason？

Yes, he did copy every word from his neighbor’s paper. But in the last question John wrote,“I do not know this question”and Mr. Clever copied“I do not know this question too. ”

（2）讲解

说“此事”英文就用 it，如“此事在我眼前发生”，即译作 It happened under my eyes. 不要说 this event，且 event 的含义为“大事”，如“去年的大事”，即说 the events of the past year。“国家多事之秋”，即说 the eventful season。单说 in middle school 不一定是在读书，故在 I was 后宜加上 studying 一词。在 one of 后面的名词应该用复数，team 和 player 都非拼成 teams 和 players 不可。连在一起的两个单句，如主语相同时，可略去一个 school rule 改为 school regulations 较好，即使要用 rule 也宜用复数，普通说 rule 多指小范围的，如“打篮球的规则”（the rules of basket-ball），又“我以扶持弱者为定则”（I make it a rule to side with the weaker party），他如 as a rule 都常是指个人的规则。But there was a race 一句应在 vacation 处断句，in order 开始应另成一句，语法上才清楚。race 原为“赛跑”或“竞走”之意，后转为“比赛”，如说 There is a race to be run tomorrow.（明日举行竞走。）“赛马”说 horse race，也是“赛跑”之意。其他的运动比赛，则不宜用此词，现改为 athletic meet（运动会），因为在运动会中可以有篮球比赛（basketball match）。这地方原文意思不显明，所以特为补充了一些字句，对看原作稿及改正稿，自然明白。前面说了 every one，后面也还是以说人为好，故将注册组（register office）改为注册员（registrar）。普通说一班中最优秀的学生，是 the bright ones at the top of a class, 不说 head 而说 top, 所以这儿把原文的 head student 改为 brightest student，随之 of 也得改为 in 了。

第二段中的 bulletin 一词，是告示、公告、各军部机关对战事的公报（the War Department’s bulletins），或报馆所发出的关于战事、饥荒，以及别的重要大事的报告（newspaper bulletins）；另外还有一个意思，就是会报、社报（a regular report of a club or society for its members）。所以现改为 notice（= a paper fixed up in public place giving information）。

最后一句中的 too 是颇有幽默感的，他被开除的主因即在这词上。

（3）改正稿

It happened when I was studying in the senior middle school. Our school had, at that time, one of the best basketball teams in the city and our class had one of its best players. His name was Mr. Clever. He was a poor student and had remained in Senior II for two years. According to the school regulations he had to pass the final examination that semester or he would be dismissed. But there was to be an athletic meet in the summer and we all wanted him to stay in our school in order that we might win the match. If he was to stay, it was necessary for him to pass the examination. So, every one wished to help him；and the registrar made him sit beside John who was the brightest student in our class. Yes, our friend copied from John’s paper. When he had finished the examination, he was very happy and shook hands with everybody.

The next day, there was a notice which announced, to the astonishment of all, that he was dismissed for cheating.

Yes, he did copy every word from his neighbor’s paper. When in answer to the last question John wrote,“I do not know this question”, and Mr. Clever wrote“I do not know this question, too. ”

A GIRL WHOM I KNOW

（1）原作稿

She lives a humble life, but she is the happiest in the world. Calm and mild, thoughtful character and moral qualities. Miss Tai is really a fine person.

Last summer, at a party, I recognized Miss Tai. She is not very pretty, but her simple dress and moderate manner attracted every young girl. And her sweet smile as well as gentle voice made everbody feel warm and happy.

She is a teacher of a primary school. Having dreamed of being a composer, but finally she gave up the idea only because she could not stand to leave those innocent children.

Every time I talk with her, I seem knowing the truth of life. And every time I visit her, I seem going to a quiet，lovely place, full of love and light.

（2）讲解

第一段第二句前面，至少应有 She has a 一类的词语才通顺，照原作省略太多，意思就不明白了。

第二段首句，一语一语，似嫌零碎，且时间的副词短语，普通非加重语气，便不置于句首。recognize 是把某人认识出来，第一次相识，只能说 meet 或 make the acquaintance of，如 Where did you make the acquaintance of this lady？（你在什么地方认识这个妇女的？）I made her acquaintance at Paris.（我在巴黎与之相识。）在一句中前面用了 she is，后面不应改为 attracted 和 made，也应该用现在时，因为这不是某一次的事。

第三段的 Having dreamed of being a composer 一个分词短语，后面应接一个主句，不可接 but，因为 but 是一个连词，只能用来连接两个分句，不能用来连接一个短语和一个从句。作“忍受”解的 stand，原为会话用语（colloquial term），常用于侮辱、艰难、寒暑、费用等，如 I’m not going to stand it much longer.——J. Jerome. 所以应改普通的（usual）字眼 bear。

第四段 seem 一词之后宜接用不定词，什么词后面应接动名词，什么词后应接不定词，是初学英文的人感觉到最头痛的一个问题，因为它没有一定的规则，而辞典及语法书又无详尽的说明，一切只好全凭 usage 去决定。

细细研读改正后的文章，当可知道此中奥妙。

（3）改正稿

Miss Tai is an amiable, thoughtful, good-natured girl. She lives a humble life but she is happy none the less.

It was last summer when I first met her at a party. Though she is not very pretty, she has something in her that attracts the attention of those who come in touch with her. Her simple dress and her good manners make people think that she belongs to the educated class. Her sweet smile and her gentle voice make people feel better in her company.

She is a teacher in a primary school. Once she dreamed of being a composer, but she gave up the attempt at last only because she could not bear to leave the dear, little, innocent creatures——her pupils.

Every time I talk with her, I seem to know a little more about life. Every time I call at her place I seem to have come to a tight little haven which is quiet and comfortable.

THE MAN WHO KNOWS ONLY ONE MEANING OF A WORD

（1）原作稿

One of my friends who had studied English for several years, and had a little success, so he was proud of his knowledge of English.

One day, he went to Kaohsiung with a colleague, Mr. Chen, for their duty. Having finished their dinner, they had nothing to do, and they took a walk on the street.

Seeing an American officer who stood before a stationary’s door, they went up to downtown place. And they saw a clerk of the shop who did not know what to do, then my friend went to the shop as an interpreter.

“Is there anything I can do for you？”my friend asked the officer in English.

“I want to buy a stamp. ”answered the officer.

“Stamp not sells here, you can buy it in the post office. ”my friend said.

And then the officer went away with a smile.

Mr. Chen don’t know English, he heard of my friend to speak with a foreigner, it seemed to him that friend spoke English very well, so he praised him up to the skies.

My friend, he thought, had done such a good thing, prided himself on his speaking English. He told the story to a Mr. Tan when he come back his dormitory.

“You had been broke down the business of that stationary. ”said Mr. Tan.“Why？”he asked.

“The officer wanted to buy a stamp pad, you thought it was the postage stamp. Had you not broke down the business？”Mr. Tan said.

Suddenly he understood that the word“stamp”had another meaning——stamp pad.

（2）讲解

第一句 one of my friends who had studied English…如果不用过去而用现在的话，had 就要改为 have，而不是 has，那意思是“我们所有学了几年英文的朋友之一”。这显然不是原作者的意思，所以只好把 one of 去掉, 把 friends 改成单数。had a little success 与事实不符，宜删。

第二段 duty 的前面不可用 for, 普通是说 on duty，neglect of duty，off duty，及 bound in duty，be discharged from his duties 等，此处原作者的意思，实为 on business，故如此更正。walk on the street, 也不熟，宜改为 walk 或（totter）along（或 about）the streets。我们只可以说 I met him on（或 in）the street. His home is on（或 in）Fifth Street. 又 go on the streets 即 make a living on the streets 为卖淫之意。

第三段 Seeing an American…they went…一句，说法弄颠倒了。在普通的情形，应该说 Going up to downtown，they saw an American. 文具店是 stationer’s（store），单说 stationery 是一个形容词，意为“文具的”；而 stationary 意为“静止的”，二词不可相混。

在引用符中的字句，如接引用符外的字句时，不可用 full stop，宜用 comma，如“Certainly，”he said.

“Stamp not sells here，you can buy it in the post office. ”当然是不通的，“改正稿中”之所以未改正，是要留以表示那位朋友英文的不通。通顺的英语可以说：“They don’t sell stamps here，which you have to go to the post office to buy. ”或是“Stamps are not sold here. You have to go to the post office to buy them. ”

Mr. Chen 是第三人称，后面不可接 don’t，应改 doesn’t，这里既是过去，就应说 did not。说 hear of somebody 意为听见别人说到某人，of 是“关于”的意思。他如 I know him.（我认识他。）I know of him.（我听人说起过他。）凡在 hear，see，watch 等动词后接的不定词，应将 to 略去，如 I saw him come（= when he came，I saw him）. 又可说 I saw him coming（= when he was coming, I saw him）. 在 come back 之后，可直接接副词的 home，如接名词时，就要加一个 to。

说 had been broke 是不通的，如系被动的话，也要说 had been broken，所谓 break down 一个成语，用在此地完全不适当，所以此句只得彻底改过。“Why？”he asked. 应该另外起一行。

（3）改正稿

My friend who had studied English for several years was proud of his knowledge of English. One day, he went to Kaohsiung with Mr. Chen, one of his colleagues, on business. Having finished their dinner, they had nothing to do and took a walk along the streets.

They saw an American officer standing before the door of a stationery store and speaking to a clerk who did not know what to do. Then my friend stepped inside and acted as an interpreter.

“Is there anything I can do for you？”my friend asked the officer in English.

“I want to buy a stamp, ”answered the officer.

“Stamp not sells here, you can buy it in the post office, ”my friend said.

Then the officer went away with a smile.

Mr. Chen did not know English. As he had heard my friend speaking with a foreigner, it seemed to him that my friend could speak English very well.

My friend, quite pleased with what he had done, told the story to a Mr. Tan when he came back to his dormitory.

“That stationery store had lost its business through you!”said Mr. Tan.

“Why？”my friend asked.

“The officer wanted to buy a stamp pad, but you thought it was a postage stamp, ”Mr. Tan said.

So my friend understood that the word“stamp”had another meaning——stamp pad.

THE HEALING POWER FROM ABOVE

（1）原作稿

On the 25th of August, 1953, in a small church near the station, there gathered from far and near about one hundred and fifty persons. It was the time that people had usually taken their lunches and were ready for a nap. The sun shone brightly on the church-yard. Yet no one felt hot or weary. All members were sitting quietly, either in praying or in meditation.

Then came the old clergyman with his nephew and an interpreter. After making a short speech, he began to work. There was a small crowd of sick people standing near the platform. The old man put his hands on the head of the sick one by one and, at the same time offered a prayer for each, while the people sitting below were praying intently.

At times I raised my head to see what had been done I saw a man being sick in the ears. On returning to his seat, he smiled calmly and peacefully, showing that he was greatly satisfied in his inner heart. I also saw a lady who could not raise her left hand. But not a while later she could lift it up well over her head.

Performing miracle is not the most important part of the work of Christian teaching. My reason for writing this is because it is the first time I have been present in such a kind of meeting, and indeed it moved me greatly. As the Chinese proverb says,“Hearing a hundred times is worth less than seeing once”, how cheerful I am to be the eyewitness of that marvelous event!

（2）讲解

开首将 afternoon 说出，后面说 take a nap 的时候，就用不着再加 after lunch 了。单说 the station，在说话时对方就当时的情形可以了解你说的是哪一个车站，行文时就应在 station 一词后加限定的字句才清楚。说 time that people had usually taken their lunches and were ready for a nap，不仅太啰嗦，而且完全是“吃饱了饭准备睡一睡的时候”一句中国话的翻译，所以不如用英文的惯用语法 time for people to take a nap（after lunch）。太阳是普照的，on the church-yard 一句最好略去。no one 后应加限定词。“祈祷”一个名词，应该用 prayer, 如 He could neither eat nor sleep and only prayers，he says，kept him from going out of his mind. 再加动词时可说 say one’s prayers 或 give prayers。

第二段的 the old clergyman 也跟前面 the station 一样的毛病，所以改用不定冠词，以符语法规则。专心的祈祷，不如说热诚地祈祷，intently 改为 in earnest 较佳。

第三段说疾病如果要用 sick 一词时，便宜说 sick of a fever（患热病），sick with malaria（患疟疾），而不可说 being sick in the ears，改成 having trouble with his ears，便是英文惯用的了。not a while later 是“后来不久”一句中国话的直译，应改为 after（或 in）a while。又 lift 已有举起之意，不必再加用 up 一词。

第四段在 reason 一词之后不宜接用 became，因为意思重复了，虽则不考究的洋人也常这样用。说 it moved me 不如说 I was moved 较常用。

最后结论应另成立一段。与其把中国的谚语“百闻不如一见”（Seeing a thing once is better than hearing about it a hundred times.）译成英文，不如利用英文现成的谚语 Seeing is believing，因为二者的意思一样。在说 first time 时可用现在时态，说目击那奇迹就非用过去时态不可，当时在场者既非一人，就应说 one of the eyewitnesses。

（3）改正稿

On the afternoon of August 25th, 1953, in a small church near the station of our town, there gathered from far and near about one hundred and fifty persons. It was the time for people to take a nap. The sun shone brightly；yet no one of the congregation felt hot or weary. All sat there, either in prayer or in meditation.

Then came an old clergyman with his nephew and an interpreter. After making a short speech, he began to work miracles. Near the platform stood some sick persons. The old man put his hands on the head of the sick, one by one, and at the same time prayed for each, while the people who sat in front of him were praying in earnest.

At times I raised my head to see what was being done. I saw a man having trouble with his ears. On returning to his seat, he smiled calmly and peacefully, showig that he felt greatly satisfied. I also saw a lady who could not raise her left hand. But, strange to say, she could after a while lift it well over her head.

Performing miracles, however, is not an important part of Christian teaching. My reason for writing this is that it is the first time I have been present in such a meeting. Indeed, I was greatly moved.

True is the proverb:“Seeing is believing. ”How lucky it was that I happened to be one of the eyewitnesses of that marvelous event!

MY PROFESSION

（1）原作稿

I am an accountant. Why I have become an accountant, the following story will tell you what it is.

During my childhood I was delicate. At the age of two I was suffering from a serious ill with measles, and at the same time I once had stopped breathing for twelve hours. Having taken many kinds of medicines, I have two sorrows for life. First, my eyes become nearsighted；second, my brains are obtuse. And my walking ability was barely perfected until nine years of age, since I was resurrected from death and recovered my health.

As for my education, it was retarded by my physical weakness. My parents provided me with a tutor who was an old man, and only taught me to read and to write Chinese, it was my first education. They did not want me to be a great man. One day, my mother said to me:“I don’t hope you to be a great man, if you would be a treasurer, I should be very pleased. ”In those days she meant the treasurer who calculated the numbers and charged on the book. It was the way of our country and was very simple way. Mother thought that I might equal to this work.

Thanks to my maternal uncle, mother was persuaded to send me to the Hupeh Provincial Commercial School. There were many courses in that school, for instance:Bookkeeping, Accounting, and Economics or something like that. They are modern science which are not so simple as my mother may think.

For all these subjects were going to be hard to me, I worked hard with my all energies and all my times. Fortunately, I had, at last, finished at that school. My family were very much pleased with my success, especially my mother. She made me to be a true accountant.

Now, I have been doing the work of accountant for more than forteen years. Taking a role as clerk, bookkeeper, assistant accountant, and so forth one after another in several companies, I have got much experience and knowledges. This is not meant I am an expert, but I am still feeling my ability for the work far away from it. I think it may be my profession for life.

（2）讲解

本篇犯一般写作的通病，即描写啰唆，有欠简洁。改正稿删除三分之一以上，不仅未丝毫有损原意，反而加强了原意，如将 worked hard 改为 had to burn the midnight oil to study them. 及将 I am still feeling my ability for the work far away from it. 改为 the more we know，the more is to be known. 之类。

第一段的 why I have become an accountant 及 what it is 重复故宜拼为一句。

第二段 at the age of two 是 a point of time，后面不宜接进行时的动词，应将 was suffering 改为 suffered 较佳。又在介词后面要接名词，from 后不能接形容词的 ill。又 and at the same time I once had stopped breathing for twelve hours 一句，事近荒谬宜删。眼成近视，是显明的病态，头脑迟钝，只是自谦的说法，故亦主张从略。与其说 my walking ability was barely perfected，不如用单纯的字句说 I was not able to walk，反而简明有力。since I was resurrected from death 一句，太严重了，以不说为妥。I recovered my health 改为 my health picked up 更要有洋味些。

第三段“至于说到我的教育，那是由于我的体弱而受到妨碍”，不如简单地说“我因体弱未去上学”。说 a tutor who was an old man，也嫌啰唆，就说 an old tutor 简单多了。to read and to write 因系同一类的事，故第二个不定词的 to 可略去。对别人的期待应说 expect，说 want 和 hope 都不当。It was the way of our country 等一句，意义不显明，如系“当时人们认为写算是最容易学的”一种意思的话，则应如改正稿上所说，才能使人了解。

第四段：西人不分伯父、叔父或舅父，统统叫 uncle，正如不分哥哥或弟弟统统叫 brother 一样，无特别必要时不宜说母系的 uncle 或父系的 uncle。母亲一字如前不加 my 时，最好写成 Mother。“会计”等学科名，普通不用大写首字。第五段意思相连，故不必分开，两段宜合并。not so simple as my mother may think 中的 may think 宜改为 thought them to be。又 all these subjects were going to be hard to me 句中的 Tense 用得不当，且与上面一句意思重复（上句说“不容易”，下句说“很难”）。只要说并不如母亲所想象的那样容易，自然就表示出难来了。下面说的“用尽我的精力与时间来用功”，正好采用 to burn the midnight oil 一个成语，言简而意赅。不能说 my all energies，my 应置于 all 之后。I finished at that school 是不通的，只能说 finish the courses at that school。英文只可说 She made me an accountant，不能说 made me to be an accountant。

末段，十四（fourteen）和四十（forty）的拼法不同，应注意。“知识”（knowledge）不能加复数。This is not meant 应改为 I don’t mean to say. 最后一句接在这里意思不大连贯，不如略去。

（3）改正稿

I am an accountant. The following story will tell you why I have become one.

During my childhood I was delicate. At the age of two I suffered from a serious illness——measles. Having taken too many kinds of medicines, I have become nearsighted. Besides, I was not able to walk until nine years of age, when my health picked up.

Because of my physical weakness I did not go to school to study. My parents provided me with an old tutor who taught me to read and write Chinese. It was my first education. My parents did not expect me to be a great man, as one day my mother gave me a hint that if I should become a treasurer, she would be very pleased. By“treasurer, ”she meant one who took charge of the account-books, a job which was thought in those days the simplest for a man to learn.

Following the advice of my uncle, my mother sent me to Hupeh Provincial Commercial School. There were many courses to be completed in that school, for instance, bookkeeping, accounting, economics. All these subjects were not so simple as my mother thought them to be. I had to burn the midnight oil to study them. Fortunately, I passed all the required courses and graduated. My family were very much pleased with my success, especially my mother.

I have been doing the work of an accountant for more than fourteen years, and have gained much experience. But I don’t mean to say that I am an expert；for the more we know, the more is to be known.

SEEING MY BROTHER OFF

（1）原作稿

On a sunday morning of November last year, I turned up at Taipei station, to see off my dearest brother who was to start for Taichung for the acceptance of six-months reserved sergeant training.

The night before the day of his departure, I invited him to see movies instead of giving him present in token of my sorry for his departure. We spent more than four hours with a view to kill the time in theater. On the way home, we talked nothing but exchanged eye-glance each other. Sun was setting, a herd of birds flew over our head. The evening breeze blew to our way. We returned until the evening. As we stepped in we found all members of our family waiting for us a long time. After supper, each one of us did work in his own way as usual. So large a living room remained nobody but my brother, he looked very sad by the appearance, because this is the first time for him to part with his parents and brothers. Walking to and fro a little while, he went to his bedroom. My bedroom is next to his, so I could hear his deep sigh and cry during that night.

The sky was turning grey, the dawn was to come. I waked up and laid on bed. My mind began to wander. As the short hand of my watch pointed to seven, I put on my clothes and coat in order not to be late seeing my brother off.

When we drove at the station, a meeting was holding, which was presided over by Mayor, for them who were to start for Taichung to receive the six-months military training. So many family members to see their children off it was that the station was filled with men and women and children. The station was much more crowded than ever. Most of parents talked closely to their children and gave them the best advice. My parents did the same as others. Only I never talked with my brother and stood there silent but alighted my wandering eye on him.

A few movement later, the bell rang. The train was moving on very slowly. I waved farewell to my brother but bent down my head for daring not to see him off. The train was out of our sight. Most of seer-off left. My parents and I took our leave, too.

（2）讲解

星期名及月名等第一字母都要用大写。station 不一定是车站，电台、警察局、驻军地等都叫 station，所以前面加上 railway 一词较佳。普通亲兄弟说 dear 就行了，说 dearest 反而觉得疏远。

说“在他动身的前夜”已足够明白了，不必要说“在他动身那天的前夜”，所以 the day of 可以删去。movies 前面要加 the，“去看电影”就说 go to the movies。现在把下面的 theater 一词移到此地，当然也可指 movie theater。又 sorry 是形容词，前面不能用 my，应改用 sorrow 的名词。熟语只能说 on one’s way home，不说 on the way。在 exchange 后应接 with（each other），不过只说 exchange 也就足够了。说 glances 即可，无人说 eye-glance。太阳是世界上唯一的东西，所以在其前面一定要加用 the。牛羊等兽类的“群”，可说 herd，但鸟类的“群”，就要用 flock（鸟兽皆可用）或 flight。唯有“一群白鹤”才可说 a herd of cranes。原文中有 We returned until the evening. 是不通的，因为 until 一词的关系，我们只能说 We stayed out until the evening. 或是 We did not return until the evening. 单说 all members of our family 是不对的，因为说话者的兄弟也包含在内，如果要除去他们兄弟就得说 all the other members of our family。把 so large a living room 作为 remained 的主语是不可以的，所以得加 in 字在前，把它做成一个 phrase。说 he looked very sad 就行了，不要再添蛇足加上 by the appearance。既然全是说得过去的事，这里就不要说 this is the first time。下面一个分词句，单说 walking 不够，应说 after walking 或 having walked。

两个单句不宜并列，the dawn 一句前应加以 as 一类的词连接起来，the dawn was to come 是说规定要来，在此用得不当，应改为 the day began to dawn。woke 或 waked 皆可用；laid 是 lay 的过去式，此地要的是 lie 的过去式，即 lay。My mind began to wander. 一句最好删去。钟表上的短针，通常说 hour hand，中国则说“短针”。coat 也是 clothes 的一部分，不宜特别提出来说。

“正在开会”不说 a meeting was holding, 只能说 a meeting was being held。现在的英文不说 them who（乔叟时代的英文就有此用法），而要说 those who。So many family…一句，语法不通，故删去大部分而改为一个简单的句子。讲人要用 crowd 或 congregate 或 gather 等词，不能说 fill。Most of parents 中的 of 是多余的。advice 是普通人的忠告，父母的教训宜用 injunction。

说垂头丧气或屈服才用 bend the neck，普通低头就用 hang one’s head 就好了。看不见了，是 out of sight，不要说 out of our sight。送行者可以说 seer（s）-off，但用得不多，最好不用。

（3）改正稿

On a Sunday morning of November, last year, I turned up at Taipei Railway Station, to see off my dear brother who was to start for Taichung to receive the six-months’ reserve officers’ military training.

The night before his departure, I accompanied him to the theater where we spent more than four hours. On our way home, we did not speak but often exchanged glances. The sun was setting；and a flock of birds flew over our heads. It was already candle-light when we reached home. As we stepped into our house, we found all the other members of our family had been waiting for us a long time. After supper, each one of us did his own work as usual. In so large a living room nobody remained but my brother. He looked very sad because it was the first time for him to part with his parents and brothers. After walking to and fro a little while, he went to his bedroom. As my bedroom is next to his, I could hear his deep sighs during the night.

The sky was turning grey, as the day began to dawn. I woke up early and lay on my bed till the hour hand of my watch pointed to seven, then I got up and put on my clothes.

We drove to the station, where a meeting was being held by the mayor in honor of those who were to start for Taichung to receive the six-months’military training. The station was, therefore, crowded with men, women and children. While my parents were giving my brother their final injunction, I stood there without saying a word.

A few minutes later, the bell rang；and the train began moving very slowly. I waved farewell to my brother but hung my head for I dared not see his face. When the train was out of sight, we all left the station.

THE MOST INTERESTING EXPERIENCE OF MY LIFE

（1）原作稿

Until I was twenty-two years of age, I had never been away from Shanghai, my native city, for more than a week. I had only made a few excursions to nearby cities, such as Hangchow, Changsu, etc. When I decided in the spring of 1938 to join a tin mine in Southern Kiangsi, it meant the first time for me to experience a long journey.

At that time, people travelling from Shanghai to Southern Kiangsi used to go via Hongkong and Canton. I sailed for Hongkong early in May. When I arrived there, I was deeply fascinated by the beautiful sight of this prosperous, semitropical city. The ferryboats between Kowloon and Hongkong, the cable cars going up the hill, and the sunny resorts at the seaside were among the many things that appealed most to my interest. The enchantment of the island reached its summit at night, when glittering lights ascending from the foot to the top of the hilly city presented a miraculous view to people looking from the opposite shore or cruising on the neighboring sea.

I stayed at Hongkong for only two days, and proceeded to Canton by the Kowloon-Canton Railway. Canton, the metropolis of South China that I had often dreamed of, was a magnificent city. Like Shanghai, it has gorgeous departments stores, luxurious hotels and restaurants, and neat, broad streets crowded with people. Nevertheless, what interested me most were the notable differences in custom between people of this city and people living in the Yangtze Delta whom I had known. I also found great affection for the picturesque scenery of suburb areas, which was characteristic of semitropical regions.

I spent about five days in Canton before I continued my journey to Kiangsi, but my experience in that city and in Hongkong had constituted a most interesting part of my memory, perhaps because it was the first time that I made a trip to a place quite remote and different from my native home.

（2）讲解

原作写得相当的好，英文作文能达此地步，颇见功夫。下面第三项改正稿中所改的，几乎没有什么语法上的错误，而只是将语句加以润色，使之更合乎英美的表现法罢了。

现拟就重要的修改略为说明一下：

关于副词 only 的地位，是有研究的余地的。本人交台湾书店出版的“英语法”讲义稿第三十五页上，曾就此 only 一词的地位不同而意义因之而变的用法，举有下列五例：

① Only George saw Mary yesterday.（No one else saw her）

② George only saw Mary yesterday.（He did not speak to her）

③ George saw only Mary yesterday.（He did not see the others）

④ George saw Mary only yesterday.（He saw her quite recently）

⑤ George saw Mary yesterday only.（He did not see her any other day）

原句中的 only 不是形容 made，而是形容 a few 的，故应置于 a few 之前。

“我第一次出远门是在1938年的春天”，照英美语法就要倒过头来说，即是“1938年的春天是我第一次出远门的时候”，所以现改成以春天为主语。语句中既说出时日来，when 的字眼最好跟在那个时日的后面，比较紧凑。动词的 mean 一词，用得恰当，却是很够味的，例如 You don’t realize what unemployment would mean to you.（你不知道失业的痛苦。）What he said was meant only for fun.（他说的只是戏言。）He means ill towards me.（他对我不怀好意。）To copy 1,000 characters means at least an hour’s work.（抄一千字至少也是一小时的工作。）等等。但是 it meant the first time 很少听人说过，普通都是说 it was the first time. 英文要写得好，就在务用“陈言”，要照他们习惯的用法，不要自己来新创。

第二段中 enchant 一词，只有两义：一为魔术，一为迷人。而后义常要说出人来，如 I was enchanted with the music（或 her.）Her voice enchanted him. 故与其放在后面来形容岛，不如移到前面来形容人。单只说灯光（glittering lights）由下而上，使人莫名其妙，此种形容只宜用于读者已明白所指为何的时候才可以，即是前面已将事物交代清楚，读者心目中既经有了一个物象，再听到一般描绘，自然更如亲眼目击，而有身历其境之感了。

第三段关于动词的 tense 略有更易。“广州是一个繁华的城市”，并未成为陈迹，在作者去的时候如此，今日仍如此，所以不应该用过去动词，而宜用现在动词。

又习俗的不同，只有一个“不同”，因为虽有各种不同的习俗，其不同则一也。所以 diffference in custom 宜用单数。第一个 people 既是“指定”为“本城的”（of this city），不是一般的人，就应在词前加“指定”的冠词，即定冠词的 the。第二个 people，就不必重说，应该用 those 来代替才好。suburbs 也是指定的，也应该加定冠词。

第四段中的 experience 既是指在广州及香港两地的，即是两回经验，故应改为复数。同样“记忆”也是复杂而不单纯的，应以复数为佳。上面既说了两个以上的地方，place 就得用复数，说“第一次旅行”，不如说“初旅”来得简明，而无浪费的字眼。在 home 前再加上一个 native 的形容词，犯了关门闭户的毛病，因为 native 是“故乡的”，而 home 又是“家乡”呢。这种用法在修辞学上，叫作 tautology（无谓的重复），写文章，应该避免，无论中英文，皆以简明为尚，堆砌总不是好文章。

（3）改正稿

Until I was twenty-two years of age, I had never been away from Shanghai, my native city, for more than a week. In fact, I had made only a few excursions to nearby cities, such as Hangchow, Changsu, etc. The spring of 1938 when I decided to embark on a mining enterprise in Southern Kiangsi, was the first time I made a long journey.

At that time, people traveling from Shanghai to Southern Kiangsi used to go via Hongkong and Canton. I sailed for Hongkong early in May. When I arrived there, I was fascinated by the beauty of this prosperous, semitropical city. The ferryboats between Kowloon and Hongkong, the cable cars going up the hill, and the sunny resorts at the seaside were among the many things that enchanted me. The island was loveliest at night, when the luminous trams running to and fro like shuttles of fire along the highways presented a miraculous view to people looking from the opposite shore or cruising on the sea.

I stayed at Hongkong for a couple of days, and then proceeded to Canton by the Kowloon-Canton Railway. Canton, the metropolis of South China, is a magnificent city. Like Shanghai, it has gorgeous department stores, pretentious hotels and restaurants, and broad streets crowded with people. What interested me most, however, was the notable difference in custom between the people of this city and those living in the Yangtze Delta, whom I had known. I particularly liked the picturesque scenery of the suburbs, which is characteristic of semitropical regions.

I spent about five days in Canton before I went on my journey to Kiangsi, but my experiences in that city and in Hongkong were the pleasantest of all my memories, because it was the first trip that I had made to places quite remote and different from my native town.

MY WEAKNESS IN WRITING ENGLISH

（1）原作稿

I am not afraid of writing, but I have never written anything voluntarily. Of writing I can often think in the course of my reading, but, whenever I sit down to put something on the white paper, I can do nothing but hold my pen in the open air. It is of no use to sit there long, nor is of any advantage for me to give it up soon. What I often do is to write a letter instead of a serious product of my thought. By so doing I am also often puzzled by the idea that I should not write something without meaning.

It is surely a weakness of my writing. But it may be also my weakness of thinking or something like that. How to explain it I do not know.

As for English-writing I have another drawback, which, if not very serious, at least has given me much pain whenever I hold my pen. That is the“choice of words. ”I have often tried my best to think of the proper word I should use in expressing some kind of idea, but it seems to me that all I have learned are out of my memory and that no proper word is available. The more I think of it the much I am puzzled. This is probably because my memory is too poor to give me what I want in retrospection. Or else it would be my carelessness in reading. I think no other explanation.

（2）讲解

此稿出自某大学英文系同学之手，所以较诸其他原作稿为佳。既无多少语法上的错误要改正，只好在造句上着眼，在逻辑上注意，在意义上补充。

第一段 in the course of my reading 中的 my 是多余的。white paper 是白纸，blank paper 才是“空白的纸”。in the open air 是“在露天底下”，用在此地，全不适当。soon 意为“不久”，多指未来而言，至于用作 at once 解，现在已经作废了，只有在 no sooner than 等几个惯用语句中才保留着那个意思。serious product 很费解，只宜说 proud product 或 meritorious product 或 intellectual product 等等。在 puzzle 后多用 with，如 I was puzzled with the question，很少用 by 的。

第二段原文似乎太简约，仅以不知如何来说明一句了之。现引申原意，加了一点字句进去，使得前后三段文字长短较为均匀。

末段说 another drawback，从逻辑上讲，颇有欠妥之处，因前面并没有说过什么“缺点”呢。“在记忆中”虽可说 in one’s memory 或 within the memory，但“忘记”则不能说 out of one’s memory（只能说 out of mind），如用动词则可说 slip one’s memory 或 Memory is gone and cannot recollect it in the least. 又 the more，the more 前后要一致，都用比较格才是，much 不是比较格，所以语法有误。Or else it would be 的 would 宜改为 may，因为这里要的是“也许”的意思。I think no other explanation 一句，在 I think 后面至少要加 there is 进去才通。

（3）改正稿

I have so far not written anything spontaneously, though writing English composition is not a terrible business for me. In the course of reading something in English, I often feel my finger itching to write myself, but whenever I take up the pen and sit before a piece of blank paper, I am at a loss to word a single sentence. I know it is no use waiting for the first word that would hardly come out of my pen, nor is it of any advantage for me to give it up for good. So, as a purely temporary makeshift, I often change my mind and write a personal letter instead. By so doing I am rather puzzled with the idea that I am writing something without being able to put forth my thought, which is more for a composition than a letter.

Stage fright is always in the way of success. In the same manner, my numbness in starting to write something in English encumbers my road to composition. It is certainly a particular weakness of mine. But I don’t know whether it is a weakness of thinking or a weakness of acting. Stage fright is purely a mental weakness；in other words, one can do it, and it is only because of his fright that he fails to do it. So, it is a weakness of acting. And my numbness in writing may be of a different nature, for it is not only the temporary shyness but also the actual ability that fails me in writing English.

Why am I unable to write？I think I know the hitch. It is the choice of words which gives me much pain while I hold my pen without writing anything. I have often tried my best to think of a proper word I should use in expressing same kind of idea, but it seems to me that all I have learned has evaporated from my memory and nothing is available for the moment when I most want it. The more I think of it, the more I am puzzled. This is probably because my memory is too poor to give me what I want in retrospection. Or else it may be my carelessness in reading. I believe I am not weak mentally.

ONE MOONLIT NIGHT

（1）原作稿

It was the dead of night. I had finished my lessons and walked lonely to the neglected fields. The moon had risen over the hills and was shining brightly on the ground. The earth was under horrible quiet.

As I wondered under the moonlight, the past events gradually came to my mind. Having left far from my native country, today I cannot smelt any delicious of mud of my home. It was just the landscape that having lifted my head to look at the moon, I thus dropped it to think of my native land.

Recollection must be sweet, but as lonesome I am, it only added to more of my distress. Recollect the will which my father gave me on the eve of his death. I could still remember it well“My dear son, we are going to part, as God is unfriendly. I am not cruel enough to leave you, but I can not…”

Thinking of these, I lay on the meadows and heard a crying of birds come from some distant place. I was troubled with affliction.

（2）讲解

上面这篇文章是台南第二中高中部一位同学投来的作文稿，我们为鼓励中学同学英文写作及踊跃投稿起见，特为提前批改，希望对他们确能有所帮助。

第一句的 the dead of night 之前，要加一个 in 或 at 才好，因为“那是深夜”，照语法上讲是不完全的，应说“那是在深夜”才合逻辑。lonely 是一个 adjective，表示孤独的状态（state）的，比说 solitary 更要多含忧郁的感情，在人群中感到孤独，不能说 solitary，只能说 lonely。如 I feel lonely among these people. 说 lonesome 比 lonely 意思更强，这儿把 lonely 改为 alone，是因为在 walked 之后须接一个副词，而 alone= by oneself 作副词用，有独自之意。neglect 作动词用时，意为“疏忽”，“怠慢”，“轻视”，用在田地上似乎不合，故依照原意改为 untilled。所有的介词后面都应该接名词，在 under 后不能接形容词的 quiet（名词为 quietness 及 quietude）。要形容万籁俱寂，故加一句微风不动，a breath of air（或 wind），正是一个适合的短语。

第二段中的 under the moonlight，宜改为 in the moonlight 较常用。要用 under 时后面就不要 the，如“月下的梅花”则为 plum blossoms under moonlight。“远离故乡”不宜用 having left far from my native country，在此只可说 staying far from my native country。在 can 后要接 smell, 不能接过去式的 smelt, 其 Object 也应是一个名词，不可用形容词的 delicious（名 delicacy）。在 It is（或 was）后面应接个 that-Clause，所以在该句 lifted 之前的那个 having 是不能要的，只能加一个 Subject，如 It is only when a friend is going on a longish journey that we turn up at the railway station. 因为 it= that-Clause，其真正的主语是 that-Clause，而不是 it。

第三段中既用了 add to，就不宜再用 more。又在同一句中前面用了 recollect，后面又用 remember，未免重复了。不要说 I am not cruel enough to leave you，应说 I am not so cruel as to leave you，虽则这两种表现法，很多时候是可以换用的。

第四段的 thinking of these，上面只说到一件事故应改为 this。你所躺下的只有一个牧场，也不可以用 meadows。在 heard a crying of birds come from some distant place 句中用了两个动词（heard 及 come）是要不得的，至少要在 come 前面加 which 或 that 字眼才通。在莎士比亚时代的英文，就常略去这种关系代词，现代英文是一定要有的。

（3）改正稿

It was in the dead of night. I had finished my lessons and walked alone to an untilled field. The moon peeped over the hills and was shining brightly on the ground. There was not a breath of air, and everything was quiet.

As I wandered in the moonlight, several past events came to my mind. When I lifted my head to look at the moon, I began to think of my home and my native land.

I did not have sweet recollections. I was in great distress to recall the eve of my father’s death.“My dear son, we are going to part forever, ”he murmured.“I cannot bear to leave you, but it is God’s will…”This I could still remember very well.

While thinking of this, I lay on the meadow and heard the crying of birds in some distant place, which woke me from my sad reverie.

WHEN A LIE IS NECESSARY

（1）原作稿

People have the inclination to enliven up their conversation by lying, as we call it white lie, a harmless one. Though lies are by no means commendable, but they are excusable in certain circumstances. Taking my case, I have a relative those greediness has seduced her to take advantage of her relatives and friends. She tricked us of money from time to time that I am forced to tell a lie to prevent her from meeting my parents. Such a lie, I believe, is harmless, too.

A lie is necessary if one wants to keep a latter secret——at least, if he does not like its being in everybody’s mouth.

People are particularly fond of prying out others’affairs which once found, can never be prevented from spreading about in a snort while, and very often, according to their nature, something new will surely be added in the course of circulation. Therefore, telling a lie to blind the fact is sometimes necessary.

No accusation should be charged upon such a lie which is told to defend oneself against tricks and injuries. Conversely, if one tells me that he never told a lie in his life, I would believe him a great liar, and if he did, he must be a man rather characterized by dullness, for he cannot employ a wit or a prompt sagacity by telling a harmless lie when necessary.

（2）讲解

中国话说“有某种倾向”，在英语中常爱用动词代替我们的名词，即是不大说 have the inclination to，而要说 be inclined to。在 enliven 一词后不要加 up。在 white lie 前面一定要加冠词，否则就要用复数的 lies。一个句子前头用了 though 字，后面便不能再接 but；要用 but，前面就不能用 though。所谓 circumstance 是“情况”，在本句中应该用“场合”case 更为适宜些。“诈取”在英文中应说 trick a person out of something, 这个 out 是不可少的。现将句中的 us 改为 them，以便使之与前面说的 her relatives and friends 一致。在 that 的前面加用 so，才能表示出因果关系来。这一大段，应分为两段。

第二段中的 pry 一词为含有干涉或好奇之意的“探问”“密查”“窃探”，所以后面接的介词以 into 为佳，即 pry into other people’s affairs（探问他人的事）。但如果是说“探出一件秘密来”的话，就可说 pry out a secret。与其说 can never be prevented from spreading about in a short while 一大串，不如利用一个简单的成语 take（或 get）wind（风闻一时，使世人皆知）。to blind 是“蒙蔽”的意思，为什么要说“去蒙蔽事实”而有撒谎的必要，其实不是要“蒙蔽事实”，而只是要“免人乱放谣言”，故将 to blind the fact 删除。

末段第一句中的 which 改成 as 之后，就可与前面的 such 呼应了。to defend 后面接 against 或 from 都可以。I would believe 应改成 we should think，这后面如用 him，就应接 to be a liar，所以现将 him 改为 he is。所谓 if he did 的 did 一词，只能代表 he is a liar，与原意不合，故改为 what he says is true。后面既用了 wit 一字，前面就不必说 dullness，因为意思重复了。所谓 wit，即是“机智”或“急智”之意，自然不必再说 prompt sagacity 了。

总之，文章应力求简洁，含义要深，用词要少，才是上乘。同时要推陈出新，言人所不能言，又要富于风趣，而有余味。

（3）改正稿

People are sometimes inclined to enliven their conversation by lying. It is what we call a white lie, or a harmless lie. Though lies are by no means commendable, they are excusable in certain cases.

I know a woman whose greediness has seduced her to take advantage of her relatives and friends. She tricks them out of their money so often that they are forced to tell a lie later in order to get rid of her. Such a lie, I believe, is a harmless one.

A lie is necessary if one wants to keep a matter secret, or if one does not like its being in everybody’s mouth. Some people are particularly fond of prying into others’secrets which, once known, will soon take wind. Very often, something new will be added in the course of circulation. So, telling a lie is sometimes necessary.

We should not, therefore, accuse one of such a lie as is told to defend one from tricks and injuries. Conversely, if a man says that he has never told a lie in his life, we should think he is a liar. If what he says is true, he must be a man who has not a tincture of wit:for he cannot tell, in case of necessity, a harmless lie.

A GAS METER

（1）原作稿

The legend had it that Lie is the son of Devil, and the first cry he uttered then he came into the world was a lie with a sting to his natural enemy, the Truth. When things come to be detriment to his interest, he spreads rumors and sends out anonymous letters in opprobrious terms against his enemies；when there seems to be a chance to gain power, or win a position, he would dispatch a large pack of minions and claques to sing him praise with a view to create a favorable atmosphere；and when there seems to be an ill omen to lose power, he will bite like dog with rabies those who are unfortunate enough happened to come across his way.

When the printing machine was invented, as was said, it was invented in the interest of the Devil. The improved language and the new invention joined to serve as two strong wings of Lie and enable him to fly high and far in order to scatter dust in the eyes of the multitudes, to distort the Truth, and to trump up false reports；and as there must have two knives in scissors, so there are a Liar and his right-hand man, working collaboration to insinuate, to lure, to bully and to threat. Where liar failed, the man would use his influence:they are working in mutual affirmation and conspiring in evil purposes. Psychologist tells us there is a propensity in many, to lie and in many, to believe. As was said, the vilest writer has his readers, so the greatest liar has his believers. The Devil, as was so believed, had bequeathed the magic wand to his son, the Liar；so whatever the Liar says will be believed by masses；even the wise men will sometimes give in.

The pessimists lament that falsehood flies and truth limps behind；while the implacable moralists attempt to undeceive and disillusion；whereas, I believe in the maxim that it is worth to mend the fold, if there are still some sheep left. Although it is late, but it would help the cause of Truth. If we would only pool our forces together and funnel them on a single purpose of combating that Liar. Lie would certainly be driven from the world and be chained in the bottomless pit for ever.

（2）讲解

这是一位留美多年，得到美国艾奥瓦大学硕士学位的老先生所投来的稿件，他写给编者的信上说：Herewith I humbly submit an article for you，if you have time to run it over；and which is more，I would be too glad and appreciate of your kindness，if you would stoop to prune for me，（and especially to correct the grammars）. 虽文字上有点问题，但还不至于以辞害意，其虚怀若谷的态度，至为明显，编者也就只好接受下来，不揣冒昧地将来稿加以批改，如措辞不够委婉，而有所冒犯之处，尚希原作者只当童言无忌，赐予原谅为幸。

这篇文章的内容，虽同样的是论“撒谎”的，却远不如本刊上期所登的 When A Lie Is Necessary（原稿出自一位师大同学之手）。作者不愧为一位留美学生，知道的英文生词诚然不少，只可惜不大知道它们的用法。文中用的一些比喻，也多半混乱不清，使人难于索解，加之语句拉得太长，有欠简洁，而害辞意。

凡作“主张”“断言”“说”（assert、maintain、say）解的 have，应该用现在时态，不可用过去时态，例如 as Shakespeare has it（有如莎翁所说）；Rumor has it so（谣涿如是云云）。故 The legend had it 应改为 The legend has it 才通。为求使语句简明化，故第一句说完那“传说”即可止住。关于 detriment 一词，普通只有 to the detriment of 或 without detriment to 两种说法，故现采用其一，以免生硬。在从句中既用了现在时态的 seems，在主句中就不可再用过去时态的 would, 故特改为 will, 以求时态的一致。claque 一词出自法文，原意为剧场等地雇用的一群捧场者（a group of people paid to go to a play，opera，etc，and applaud），引申为一群阿谀称赞的附和者（a group of admiring or fawning followers），实为一集合名词，不可加复数，其中的一个人就说 claqueur。关于“赞美某人”应该说 sing the praises of him 或 sing his praises，不可说 sing him praise。其造句的公式为 sing a person’s praises（the praises of a person），但是你可以说 sing me song（给我唱个歌）。with a view to 后应该接 Gerund，不可接 Infinitive。在 he will bite like dog with rabies those who are unfortunate enough happened to come across his way 一句中，最大的错误为 happened 一词没有 Subject，因为前面的 those 是动词 bite 的 Object。又 dog 一个名词，如不用复数，其前就得加冠词。come across 有四个意思：①掠过，为 come across the mind（忽然想到）；②邂逅（meet by chance）；③为俗语的支付，如 come across with $10；④自认，告白（confess），但没有“妨碍”之意，所以不能说 come across his way，只能说 come in his way。

第二段的第一句中，一连用了两个 was invented 未免重复了，故删去了一个，而将前半的从句改为主句。the improved language 不知何所指，因印刷机的发明与文字的改进并无关系，故将其改为 written language。在 as there must have two knives in scissors，so there are a Liar and his right-hand man 一句中，也犯着上述 happened 同样的毛病，must have 一个动词没有 Subject。刀剑及剪刀的“刀身”，英文不说 knife, 要说 blade, 如 a sword with a broad blade 及 the blade of a knife 之类。Psychologist 是一个 singular common noun, 如前面不加冠词，就得改为复数，这和上面说的 dog 同一错法。

第三段中最不可宽恕的错误，就是 although 与 but 的连用，这是中学生都知道的：前面既用了 although 或 though, 后面就不能再用 but, 后面用了 but, 前面就不能用 although 或 though。又 pool 一词作动词用时，意为“为大家的利益而集资”（to contribute a common fund），不能用为“集中（力量）”的意思。funnel 一词，作“专注”、“集中（精力）”解时，后面应接 into，不宜用 on。

最后，我得在此声明一句，本篇原题为 Anonymous Letter, 因与内容不大符合，故冒昧改成现在的题目，这也是要请作者原谅的。至于我为什么改题为 A Gas Meter 呢？因为英文俗语有 to lie like a gas meter, 意为胡言乱语道，专作卑鄙龌龊之谎言，其来源当然是因为瓦斯表最不可靠，故有此语。

（3）改正稿

The legend has it that the devil is the father of lies. When born a lie is armed with a sting to wound his natural enemy, the Truth. If things go against him, he will spread rumors and send out anonymous letters, to the detriment of his enemy. When there seems to be a chance to gain power or to win a position, he will dispatch a large pack of minions to sing his praises, with a view to creating a favorable atmosphere；and when there seems to be a decline in power, he will bite, like a dog having rabies, those who happen to come in his way.

The printing machine, it is said, was invented, in the interest of the Devil. The written language and the new invention serve as two strong wings for a lie which will enable him to fly near and far, to scatter dust in the eyes of the multitude, and to trump up false reports, in order to distort the Truth. As scissors have two blades, a Liar has his right-hand man working in collaboration with him to insinuate, to lure, to bully and to cheat. Where the Liar fails, the man will use his influence. Psychologists tell us that many people have a propensity to lie and many, to believe. As we know, the vilest writer has his readers, so the greatest liar has his believers. Since the Devil has bequeathed his magic wand to his son, whatever the Liar says will always be believed by the masses.

The pessimists lament that falsehood flies and truth limps behind；while the implacable moralists attempt to undeceive and to disillusion. As for me, I believe in the maxim that it is worth while to mend the fold, if there are still some sheep left. Late as it is, it is better than never:for it will certainly help to promote the cause of Truth. If we would only join our forces for the purpose of combating that Liar, we would be able to get rid of the lies and have them chained in the deep dungeon for ever.

DON’T LET YOUR OPPORTUNITY SLIP

（1）原作稿

What is the true meaning of life？Many people especially the youth may always ask the question, but few can give him a satisfactory answer. There are full of annoyances, troubles, and disappointments in the world, if you don’t know the exact meaning of it:it is very dangerous to you. Dr. Sun Yat-sen said“The aim of life is to serve others. ”If you will live a happy life, you ought to catch your chance to do the best that you can for others. No matter you are young or old, man or woman, in your life, there are many good chances wait for you, but you don’t know how to catch them and utilize them properly, and let them pass away. At last you say you have no chance. What a pity it is!

Time is fleeting. You ought to work hard during the day. Don’t wait till dark, because in the night you can do nothing. At the same time, you should catch your golden age in your early life to study, to learn, to work. Whatever you do, you must do it well. You know life is very short, and it passes away when you are hesitating.

（2）讲解

这是台南长荣女中一位高中学生投来的稿子。文字尚清顺，虽仍不免有语法上的错误（如 there are many good chances wait for you 句中的 wait 即须改为 waiting 才通），但大致都还可以。原题 Catch Your Chance，由批改者易为今题。

第二句后半 but few can give him a satisfactory answer 中的 him，当然是指前半句中的 the youth, 不过在此以作复数为佳，故不宜说 him，应说 them，但在此种句中，则根本不要说 him 或 them。这个后半句是中文直译的，意义上尚不完善，因为“很少有人能给一个满意的回答”，读者便会要问：“回答什么呢？”所以现将 but 改为 to which，便有一个交代了。If you don’t know the exact meaning of it 句中的 it，离本文第一句太远，在这句上面可充其 reference 的，有 world, answer, question 诸词，所以文字不紧凑，应说出 life 来，较为明白。it is very dangerous to you 说得太严重，不懂人生真义的人，世界上多得很，并无多大危险。作文不宜太夸张，过甚其词，反而失去意义。

说 if you will live a happy life 并不错，不过不必说得这样郑重，说成普通用的，if you wish to live happily，反而简明通俗得多。“抓住机会”普通是 seize（= catch）an opportunity（= occasion），“趁机会”或“利用机会”就说 take advantage（= avail oneself）of an opportunity；make use of an opportunity；take（= seize）occasion；take the tide as it appears；take time（= opportunity）by the forelock 等，却不大说 catch a chance, 故 you ought to catch your chance to do the best 一句今改为 you ought to avail yourself of every opportunity，以免生硬。失去机会说 let slip 或 miss，所以 let them pass 应改为 let them slip。

单说 wait till dark 不知什么 dark，一定要说 it is dark 才知道是说“天黑”。in the night you can do nothing（不能做事），也说得太过火，现改为 you can accomplish very few things，意为“难于成事”。golden age 是黄金时代，每个人在青春时期，都可称为黄金时代，故不好说“抓住你的黄金时代，只宜说“利用你的黄金时代”。有些多余的话，只好删去，以免累赘。

（3）改正稿

What is the true meaning of life? Many people, especially the youth, always ask this question to which few can give a satisfactory answer. As you know, there are annoyances, troubles, and disappointments in the world. If you don’t know the exact meaning of life, you will find that life is but an empty dream.“The aim of life, ”said Dr. Sun Yat-sen,“is to serve others. ”In other words, if you wish to live happily, you ought to avail yourself of every opportunity of serving others. For men, women, and even children, there are a good many chances to serve others. But it depends upon whether they will make good use of them or not.

Time is fleeting. If you have a chance to work, to study or to learn during the day, don’t wait till it is dark, because in the night you can accomplish very few things. Besides, whatever you do, you must do it well.

MY FAMILY

（1）原作稿

There are four in my family, one of them is I. The other members are my father, mother and elder brother. My father was fifty-nine years old. My mother was fifty-two years old. My elder brother was twenty-nine. I was the youngest in my family. My father serves in education, and my mother teaches pupil in primary school. We were very happy. Because my mother very kind for me, and saved money to buy some candies for me that I like. She always told me that“youth people ought to work hard, don’t waste time”that words I remember in my deep heart. She also very loved me. If I have ill, she consults the doctor at once and told me ought to have lay off a few days. So I was very pleased in every day and my boyhood.

I entered the school when I was about six. I have been studying about nine years. In 1949 I left my home. Now I have been lived in Taiwan for seven more years. Although I lived in free, yet I think of my home day and night, and always anxious my parents. I don’t know whether they living or die. I hope my parents all well and fit. That is my wish. Parents!Recently I’ll back home, and take a good news for you. Let you glad and happy to see your son back your side again.

（2）讲解

这是马祖北竿塘前哨的一位战士所投来的作文稿。我们特提前为他批改发表，以资鼓励。他来信说他很年轻好学，只是没有进修的机会，自己研读遇到有问题时无人请教，颇感痛苦。这是值得同情的。所以我们乐意来帮助他。

第一句语法并不错，现改用 consist of 一个成语，句子便更要熟练一点。第二、三句可删去，因为下面就要分别说到的。说 My father was 59 years old. My mother was 52 years old. 当然不错，不过太呆板，造句的方式又嫌重复，所以把它改为“比我母亲大七岁的父亲有五十九岁了”。说 years of age 和说 years old 是一样的意思。时态都要用现在，因为第一句是用的现在时态。说活着的人都要用现在时态，要等到那人死了，才可改用过去时态。I was the youngest in my family. 难道现在就不是家庭中最小的一个了吗？所以要改为 I am the youngest in the family. 这里把 my 改为 the，即指上述的家庭。“父亲在教育中服务”是不大明白的，只能说在教育界服务，现改为“在一个教育机关服务”，比较具体。“教学生”或“授徒”是中国话，英文只说 teach 就够了，至多说 teach school，不说 teach pupil。在 primary school 前要加冠词。说过去的事，就可以用过去时态，即 I was very happy 云云，是说小时候的事。kind 意为亲切，只宜用于朋友，母子之间应说爱（love），还有应说 kind to me，不说 kind for me。英文的 youth 是一个名词，不能说 youth people，只能说 young people。说 don’t 是对第二人称的命令语气，现主语既是 young people，自然应是第三人称了。that 是单数，其复数为 those，正如 this 的复数为 these 一样。我们不能说 very loved me，只能说 loved me very much。照语法是现在分词前用 very（如 very interesting），过去分词前用 much（说 much interested）。说 have ill 是纯粹中国话的“有病”译出来的，在英文是不通的，因为有字后面必须接一个名词做宾语（Object），而 ill 却是一个形容词。即令改为名词的 illness 也不通，因为英文中没有 have illness（有病）的说法，现改为 I was ill（我病了）就通了。

第二段中说 I have been lived 是不通的，因为我们住在一个地方，不能用被动，只能说 I have lived（到现在为止住了）或 I have been living（过去住到现在，还要继续住下去）。说 seven more years 是“再加七年”，说“七年多”应作 more than seven years。所有的介词后面都要接名词，free 是形容词，所以不能说 in free。现在正住着，不能说 I lived（过去住了），而要说 I am living。又 anxious 是形容词，不能说 I anxious，应说 I am anxious，该词后要接上一个 about，意思才能表达出来。用连词联结的词，前后应为同类的词句，living 是形容词而 die 是动词，所以不能连在一起，应说 live or die。两个人说 both，两人以上用 all。在 let 后面要接动词，不能接形容词。最后之句删除为妥。

（3）改正稿

My family consists of four persons. My father, who is seven years older than my mother, is fifty-nine years of age. My elder brother is twenty-nine；and I am the youngest in the family. My father serves in an educational institution, and my mother teaches in a primary school. I was very happy, because my mother loved me very much. She saved money to buy me candies which I like better than anything else.“Young people, ”she always said to me,“ought to work hard and mustn’t waste their time. ”These words I remember quite well. When I was ill, she would go at once to consult the doctor. So I was very happy during my boyhood.

I went to school when I was about six. In 1949 I left my home for Taiwan, where I have been living for more than seven years. Although I am living in a free country, yet I think of my home day and night. I am very anxious about my parents. I hope, however, they both are well and fit.

ON EYES

（1）原作稿

Human being is bestowed by God a pair of eyes, which though are different in colors and in degrees of brilliance, have the same function—to see.

As the windows are to the house, so are the eyes to the body；and in modern architecture, many windows are preferable；for whenever we open the windows, everything within the visual field comes in and with it the fresh air. By this way, we connect ourselves with the external world and are able to learn something from it. Therefore, the eyes are one of the sources of knowledge by which we educate and adopt ourselves to the circumstances day by day.

Yet whether one who has two eyes is more fortunate than one with one eye is still questionable. If you are acquainted with Helen Keller, the blind authoress, in the Reader’s Digest, you will be inspired into such a thought that one can achieve a great deal without eyes at all.

Moreover, the eyes are too ready for their duty；they cannot be restrained from beholding what they meet at the moment；you can only divert your attention as quickly as possible from one to another, yet are uncertain to catch a better one at the second moment.

Sometimes, you have to see those you dislike, including your enemies, for your eyes cannot foresee them without being noticed. It is very strange to say that the eyes have a secret message sent out for mutual communication. But it seems that the more you hate to see them, the more you will often meet.

Since not all the external world is full of pleasing and delightful things, an one-eyed person may be more fortunate in seeing less ugly things by narrowing his scope of vision, if this does not affect the beauty of his countenance.

（2）讲解

这篇文章字句拖沓，有欠简洁，且有时词不达意，使人看过，猜不透作者的意思，故批改时是以大刀阔斧，常整句地加以割爱的。

第一段的 human being 与 man 不同，man 用作人类解时可以不加冠词，但 human being 如不用做复数（即 human beings），则前面应加不定冠词的 a 才妥。关于 bestow 一词的用法应加注意，第一它后面常跟 upon（或 on），其次是应说“物”is bestowed upon“人”, 不可说“人”is bestowed“物”，例如 I do not deserve all the praise that is bestowed upon me. 或 I hardly deserve such benefit as was bestowed upon me. 之类。color 和 degree 在这种情形下，都要用单数。in color 意为“在颜色上”，in degree 意为“在程度上”。

说开窗一切都进来了，实际是不对的，只能说开窗见到一切，故 everything…comes in，宜改为 everything will come in sight。我们不能说眼睛是知识的来源，只能说是获得知识的工具，因为知识并不能发源于眼睛，人人都有眼睛并不见得人人都有知识，只有那些善用眼睛这个工具去观察事物的人，才能获得知识，故将 source of knowledge 改为 instrument of knowledge，以求合乎逻辑。adopt 是“收纳”“采用”之意，“使适合”应说 adapt，如“他使自身适合于新的环境”He adapted himself to new circumstances。

你可以说 a man with one eye 或是 blind in one eye，但不宜说 one with one eye，因两个 one 念起来不好听，故宜改为 an eye。

meet 不能代替 see 用，故 what they meet at the moment 是不大通用的，虽则你可以说 meet the eye= be visible（看见）；meet a person’s eye（注意到别人望着我；我也去回望他）。下面说的 you can only divert…second moment 一句，因意思不显，故删去，而将下段冒头的 sometimes 一句接上来，其 for 以下所说的理由并不显明，故一并删除。

我们平常说的 The eyes have one language everywhere 意指眉目可以传情，不必通以言语，这句 the…eyes secret message 云云，应移到第二段的末了，意思较为衔接。But 以下一句，意思又变了，故删去。

one 的发音为〔wʌn〕，是辅音，故其前不可用 an。说 his scope of vision，正如说 your state of health 一样不对，因为 your 是形容 health，而不是形容 state 的，同样地 his 是形容 vision，而不是形容 scope 的。这也是属于逻辑上的错误，而不是语法的错误，比方说 He is an undoubted man of genius. 就不通，因为我们要说他的，是他的 undoubted genius，而不是 undoubted man，所以这句话应改为 He is a man of undoubted genius. 才通。同样，我们不可以说 his English knowledge, 应说 his knowledge of English。诸如此类，作文时应多加注意。

（3）改正稿

The eyes bestowed upon man by God have the same function of seeing though they may be different in color and in degree of brilliance.

As the windows are to the house, so are the eyes to the body. Whenever we open our eyes, everything within the visual field will come in sight. With their aid, we can acquaint ourselves with the external world in which an infinite number of wonderful and beautiful things may be revealed. In fact, we may say that the eyes are the instrument of knowledge with which we can educate and adapt ourselves to new circumstances. Besides, through the eyes secret messages may be telegraphed between two persons.

It is doubtful, however, whether a man who has two eyes is more fortunate than one with an eye. If you have read about Helen Keller, the blind authoress, in the Reader’s Digest, you will perhaps think that one can do, without the help of the eyes a good many things as well.

Moreover, the eyes are too ready for their duty; they cannot be restrained from beholding what is before them. Sometimes you cannot avoid seeing those you dislike, including your enemies.

Since not all the things which present themselves before our eyes are pleasing and delightful, a one-eyed person is supposed to be more fortunate in seeing less of the ugly by narrowing the scope of his vision, if his being one-eyed does not affect the beauty of his countenance.

A LETTER TO THE EDITOR

（1）原作稿

Dear Editor,

I don’t think you will surprise at receiving a letter from me.

A few days ago, I received words from Mr. Chou；he told me that you have received an anonymous letter which is in terms derogatory to me. I thank you for your kind information.

You know some people are hard-headed, whereas, I am an iron-head；I never hesitate in confronting a foe. But tell you the truth, I am instinctively afraid of ghost, simply because it comes on you unawares. So in dealing with the cowards, liars, and that sort of persons, I am afraid, just like a kid, of a dog. Napoleon had once said,“The people to fear are not those who disagree with you, but those who disagree with you and are too cowardly to let you know. ”Few men are stronger than Napoleon, so I am not ashamed, if I say I am afraid of the sneakers.

Let us all put on the breastplate of Truth, and the armor of Faith to combating the Liar, the Coward. I am sure you would be too glad to join me in the battle.

Herewith I humbly submit an article, captioned“Anonymous Letter”, for you, if you have time to run it over, and which is more, I would be too glad and appreciate of your kindness, if you would stoop to prune for me,（and especially to correct the grammars）, you know, to say the truth, I am a phony.

I remain always；

Yours,

Wm. S. H. Chang

P. S. If you have anything to be circulated, please give one to me.

（2）讲解

自从本刊第九卷第一期“英文作文批改”栏中刊出那位留美硕士的文稿以后，读者纷纷来函，希望我们把他写给编者的那封信整个都发表出来，以窥全豹，而共欣赏其奇文，我们当然不便拒绝。同时省立××大学的师生们，也都知道了这是×××教授的杰作，因为这篇文章的“原作稿”，早经作者分送给了各教授的缘故。有些好学而正在研究英文的教授，都来向编者索取该期的“大样”，想看钱歌川教授是怎样替他批改的。还有一些工学院土木系那位教授所教的英文班上的同学，也纷纷致函编者，以纯粹研究学问的立场，来讨论那位教授所写的英文，例如有人来问那位教授对各课所出的问题，都称为 Quest, 辞典上此词作“探寻”“探险”解，并无问题（Question）之意，不知究竟如何？我们只好告诉他说辞典是对的，那位教授的用法不敢苟同。又有一位同学，将那位教授英文期中考试的试题抄写一句出来，问我们那英文通不通：Answer the following question with your own English：——When Booker T. Washington reached Hampton，how much money he has left in his pocket？编者对他的答复是，with your own English 不通，因为学生不能各人有各人的英文，普通只能说 with your own words。至于下面那个问句，是一个陈述句，不成其为问句。凡问句是要把主语和谓语颠倒的，改为 how much money had he left, 便成为问句了。关于问句，大概那位教授写的都不合这规则，所以来问类似的句子的人很多，如 Why Mr. Simpson stood？Why they went home？都是犯的同样的错误。最近还有一个姓赵的同学，抄了那教授试题上的一个问句来问意义：Do you think when you come on to the field，you have the right play instead with your feet in soccer game，with your tongue too？这意思我们也看不大懂，因为 instead 后面不接 of，而接 with，我们还是第一次看到呢。听说那位教授对于这班学生的无礼（因为他出的问题被送到校长那里去了），很是生气，他对校长说，他教了三十年的书, 从来没有听见有人说过他的英文不通的，足见这班学生是胡闹，对老师大不敬。闲话不表，言归正传。

第一句中的 surprise 一字，不能用作不及物动词，所以原文说 you will surprise 是错了的。这是个及物动词，我们只能说 It will surprise you…或 You will be surprised.

第二段第一句话，一连用了两个 received，表示作者词不够用，说来说去，就是这几个词。因此为避免重复计，不妨将第一个 received 改为 had。至于那作“传言”“音讯”（message）解的 word，是不能加 s 用复数的，它前面也不要加冠词，如 I have had no word from him yet. I received word of his coming. 无论说话写文章，都要注意“时的一致”（sequence of tenses）。除了一二特殊情形外，在一句中前面既用了过去动词，后面就不能再用现在动词，如 Chou told me that you have received a letter. 句中 told 为 tell 的过去，即表示周告诉我是在过去，他告诉我已发生的事情，当然更在过去，为什么可以用现在的完成时呢？这是中学生都不应犯的错误。下面的 which is 的 is，也犯的同一毛病。

第三段第一句的 you know 与后半的 I am 不相称，I am 应与前半的 some people 对称才是，但行文上看去却是 you 与 I 相比，所以现将 you know 改为 parenthetical expression（插入句）。whereas 是一个 conj. 所以词后不要逗号，意为 when in fact，例如 I hate，whereas you merely dislike, him.（我恨他，而你不过是不喜欢他罢了。）这里不用 whereas，而用 but，就有力多了。iron-head 是矢车菊或白颊凫，见 WNID（《韦氏大辞典》），要做形容词用的 iron-headed 才有 very hard-headed 之意，现改为 a man of blood and iron（硬汉；铁血男儿），便能表出原意来了。But tell you the truth 一句，没有主语，不成其为一个句子，又不是一个短语，不伦不类，所以不通，现改成一个 infinitive phrase，才可成为一个 independant element（独立的因素）。举凡单数的普通名词，不可单独用，要么前面加冠词，要么尾上加 s，作为复数，故 ghost 一词，应改为 ghosts 才对。这也是普通学生不应犯的错误。I am afraid of ghost，simply because it comes on you unawares. 前半句用的 I，后半句又一变而为 you 了，真是所谓“前后判若两人”，说这话的人，其无常情可想。这个 you 宜改为 us 或 me 才通。in dealing with the cowards（用了 the coward 就不宜用复数），与 I am afraid of a dog，其间到底有什么关系呢？作者思路不清，由此可见。Past Perfect Tense 是用于过去以前的，拿破仑说的“说”字，只该用单纯过去，不可用过去完成。

第四段第一句中 to combating the Liar 的 to 不是 Preposition，为什么后面要接上一个 Gerund 呢？这只能接不定词的 combat，普通在 combat 后可直接 Object, 但在此做不及物动词用更好，所以加上一个 with。在 the Liar 与 the Coward 之间不用 and 联结起来时, coward 即变成 liar 的同格词了。“撒谎者即卑怯者”，岂不可笑？too glad to join 是“太高兴而不参加”的意思，作者原意是想说 only too glad to join, 可惜他对这两种表现法分不清楚，所以混为一谈了。

第五段“Anonymous Letter”前面应有冠词，因 letter 是单数普通名词，不加冠词则要用复数。to submit（= offer，present）an article for you, 是不通的，在 submit 后面接的 Preposition 并不是不可以用 for 或 with，不过在此用 for 就错了。我们只能说 submit it for approval 或 submit it to you。又句中说的 and which is more 的 which 无所指，既非指前面的某一名词，又非指前面的一整句，或一个从句，或一个短语，突如其来用上这么一个关系代词，而前面并无有关系的名词，所以犯了一种语法上不可饶恕的错误。在 to appreciate 后面不可以接上一个 of, 应直接地接那 Object 的 your kindness, 因为它不是一个不及物动词，又 to prune for me 一语也不完全，读者一定要问 prune 什么呢？在这个及物动词的后面一定要接一个 Object 才行。在这句的后面括号内的 and，也不知联结何词何句，凡连词总得有可联结的东西，联结词与词，或联结句与句皆可，无词句可联结时，也用上此词就是错误。grammar 一词普通没有人用复数。除非用来指各种不同的语法书时，才可用复数。这里说请改正多数的语法书，岂不好笑！

最后的 I remain 与 always（通常用 ever）是同样的意思，用一个就够了。再启中的 one 字，也是不通的，因为我们只能说 one of them，不能说 one of anything。

总之，这封简短的信，从头到尾，没有一句通的。要不是那位教授的高足宣布于前，他自己又撰文散发于后，谁会相信一位留学美国，荣获硕士头衔，又多年充任英文教授的人，英文会坏到这种程度呢？

（3）改正稿

Dear Editor,

I don’t think you will be surprised at receiving a letter from me.

A few days ago, I had word from Mr. Chou who told me that you had received an anonymous letter which was in terms derogatory to me. I thank you for your kind information.

Some people, you know, are hard-headed, but I am a man of blood and iron and never hesitate in confronting a foe. To tell the truth, I am instinctively afraid of ghosts, simply because they come on us unawares. Just like a kid who is afraid of dogs, I am afraid of such persons as cowards and liars. Napoleon once said,“The people to fear are not those who disagree with you, but those who disagree with you and are too cowardly to let you know. ”As few men are stronger than Napoleon, I am, therefore, not ashamed of myself, if I say I am afraid of the sneakers.

Let us all put on the breastplate of Truth, and the armor of Faith to combat with the Liar and the Coward. I am sure you would like to join me in the battle.

Herewith I humbly submit an article, captioned“An Anonymous Letter”. If you have time, will you run it over？I would be only too pleased, if you would stoop to prune it for me（that is, to correct the mistakes in grammar）.

I remain,

Yours truly,

Wm. S. H. Chang

P. S. If you have anything to be circulated, please give me a copy of it.

NATURE AND KNOWLEDGE

（1）原作稿

It is not a new idea that we consider nature as a great book. Since our old progenitors have no book to read, but they took nature as a great book. They took part in a hunt with their parents or elders. They participate in their elders work, and learned many things from it. Their parents told them skills and knowledge. They learned by doing；they learned from nature. This is what we call today that education is life, and life is also education.

Since the invention of the art of printing, we have progressed in civilization very much. But, on the other band, we were far apart from nature, from society, we got second-hand knowledge from books, from teachers and from magazines. Thus many educators suggested that we must learned by trip. Montaigne, a French educator, said that we（teachers）must bring our children（students）to make a journey. Let them take a view of other people’s life, compare the civilization of foreign countries with ours, and learn the cultural systems of others. The students may be cultivated with broad mind and far sight in nature. Nature is a great book!

（2）讲解

在 regard 后面要用 as，在 consider 后面便不要用。在上半句说 progenitors have，下半句接着又说 they took，前后时态不一致，故将 have 改为 had。同一主语的两个句子，应合成一句，而略去一个主语，如 they took part 及 they participate（此词也应用过去时态），改为 they took part…or participated。在中文可以说“告诉他们一些技能和知识”，但英文则不能说 tell them skill and knowledge（skill 一词一般不用复数），这时候在英文中惯常的说法，是“获得技能和知识”（acquire，attain，have，possess 等）。

在英文中喜欢用名词加动词来表示动作，而不直接用动词，如说话、声明、演说，不说 to remark，to state，to speak，而要说 to make a remark，to make a statement，to make a speech；同样地进步不常说 to progress 而要说 to make progress。说我们从书本得来的知识是间接的，这情形过去、现在、未来都是一样，所以不宜用过去时态，而应该用现在时态，以表示不变的真理。must 是一个助动词，后面只能接略去了 to 的不定词，不能接过去或过去分词，所以 must learned 是不通的。游历可以增广见闻，这个游历只能说 travel，而不能说 trip 或 journey。短程的旅行说 trip, 一日的旅程说 journey, 只有要向远方的外国（distant countries），及长期的行程（of long duration），便称 travel。在 travel 中可以包括 many journeys, 如 Gulliver’s travels（Swift 的小说）及 the Travels of Marco Polo 等常用复数，意为“旅行记”。

（3）改正稿

It is not a new idea that we consider nature a great book. Since our progenitors had no books to read, they learned almost everything from nature. When they took part in a hunt or participated in the work of their elders, they learned many things from the world about them. In fact, their skill and knowledge owed much to nature. This is why we call nature a great book.

Since the invention of the art of printing, we have made great progress in civilization. But we are far apart from nature, because what is acquired from books and teachers is not the first-hand knowledge. Thus many educators believe that we can learn a number of things by travelling. Montaigne, a French educator, said that teachers should encourage their students to travel so that they might see more of the world, get familiar with the way of life in a foreign country, and compare its cultural systems with theirs.

三 英文正误

（1）主语和动词不一致的错误

1. 误：I is a boy.

正：I am a boy.

（我是一个男孩子。）

〔说明〕动词“是”（verb to be）在直说法现在式里，因人称（person）和数（number）的不同，有三种不同的变化：am, are 和 is。动词的身和数须和主语的身和数一致，所以上面的句子要把 is 改成 am。

现在把它们间的关系列表于下：

单数 | I am | you are | he（or she）is
复数 | we are | you are | they are

〔类例〕I am a student.（我是一个学生。）

You are a clever boy.（你是一个聪明的男孩子。）

She is my younger sister.（她是我的妹妹。）

We are good friends.（我们是好朋友。）

You all are here.（你们全体都在此地。）

They are brave soldiers.（他们是勇敢的兵士。）

2. 误：I were a pupil three years ago.

正：I was a pupil three years ago.

（三年前我是一个小学生。）

〔说明〕动词“是”在直说法过去式里因人称和数的不同，有两种变化：was，were。动词的身和数须和主语的身和数一致，所以把 were 改成 was。现在把它们的关系列表于下：

单数 | I was | you were | he was
复数 | we were | you were | they were

〔类例〕I was still young at that time.（我那时还年轻。）

You were only a little child a few years ago.（几年前你不过是一个小孩子。）

He was absent yesterday.（他昨天缺席。）

When we heard the news, we were very happy.（当我们听到这个消息，我们十分快乐。）

You were monitors last term.（上学期你们是级长。）

They were in the first year class last year.（去年他们在一年级。）

3. 误：He have a book.

正：He has a book.

（他有一本书。）

〔说明〕动词“有”（verb to have）在直说法现在式里因人称和数的不同有两种变化：have，has。因为动词的人称和数须和主语的人称和数一致，所以把 have 改成 has。现在把它们的关系列表于下：

单数 | I have | you have | he has
复数 | we have | you have | they have

〔类例〕I have a pencil.（我有一支铅笔。）

You have a pen.（你有一支钢笔。）

He has a piece of paper.（他有一张纸。）

We have a look at the picture.（我们看这张画。）

You have a holiday today.（你们今天放假。）

They have a picnic.（他们举行野餐。）

Each student has a school badge.（每一个学生有一枚校徽。）

The Chinese people have a bright future before them.（中国人民有一个光明的前途。）

4. 误：Our teacher ask us a question.

正：Our teacher asks us a question.

（我们的先生问我们一个问题。）

〔说明〕在直说法句子里主语是单数，动词是现在式时，须加 s 于动词的字尾，所以在这句子里须用 asks。

〔类例〕She comes to school every day.（她每天到学校去。）

He talks fast, but he writes slowly.（他说得快，但是他写得慢。）

It rains at intervals.（雨时落时止。）

The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.（太阳出自东方，落后西方。）

There lies a lazy cat.（那里躺着一只懒猫。）

5. 误：The cause of many failures are poor preparation.

正：The cause of many failures is poor preparation.

（许多失败的原因是没有好好地准备。）

〔说明〕主语的修饰语中的名词的数，和主语的数不发生关系。在上面的句子里主语 cause 是单数，所以应该用 is。

〔类例〕The tables in the classroom are large.（教室里的桌子是大的。）

Little drops of water make the mighty ocean.（小滴的水可成大洋。）

The most valuable of her possessions is this ring.（她的所有物中最宝贵的是这个戒指。）

The telling of lies is sometimes necessary.（说谎有时是不得已的。）

6. 误：There is seven eggs in the nest.

正：There are seven eggs in the nest.

（巢里有七个蛋。）

〔说明〕此地的“there”是引语，并不是主语，动词的数要和倒置的主语一致。在这一句里面 eggs 是主语所以应该用 are。

〔类例〕There is a book on the desk.（书桌上有一本书。）

There was once a good king.（从前有一个好国王。）

There goes the thief.（有贼！）

Here come the children.（小孩子来了。）

Here are our books.（此处是我们的书。）

7. 误：You and he has the same birthday.

正：You and he have the same birthday.

（你和他有同样的生日。）

〔说明〕两个主语由 and 联合起来，通常须用一个复数的动词，所以把 has 改成 have。

〔类例〕A magazine and a newspaper were lying on the table.（桌上放着一本杂志和一份报纸。）

You and I have been friends for a long time.（你和我已友好多时。）

There are a book and a pen on the desk.（书桌上有一本书和一支钢笔。）

8. 误：Bread and butter are my usual breakfast.

正：Bread and butter is my usual breakfast.

（涂奶油的面包是我每日的早餐。）

〔说明〕假使两个主语表示一个观念时，须用一个单数的动词。在这句里 bread and butter 指涂奶油的面包，所以要用 is。

〔类例〕Truth and honesty is the best policy.（真诚和正直是最好的方策。）

Coffee and milk is my favorite drink.（牛奶咖啡是我爱好的饮料。）

His end and aim is success.（他的目标是成功。）

Blood and iron is not a good policy.（铁血政策不是一个好的政策。）

9. 误：Either you or he are wrong.

正：Either you or he is wrong.

（不是你便是他错了。）

〔说明〕二个主语由 or，either…or，neither…nor 连合，则动词应该和最近的主语一致。在这句里最接近动词的主语是 he，所以应该用 is。若改成 Either you are wrong or he is. 则更好。

〔类例〕Either you or I have made a mistake.（不是你便是我弄错了。）

Neither you nor she is a lazy student.（你和她都不是懒学生。）

Neither the teacher nor the students are in the classroom.（先生和学生都没有在教室里。）

He or his servants were to blame.（不是他就是他的仆人们不好。）

10. 误：The mother, as well as her two daughters, are going to market.

正：The mother, as well as her two daughters, is going to market.

（这个母亲和她的两个女儿将到市场去。）

〔说明〕附加语由 with, besides, along with, together with, as well as, in addition to, no less than 等连词引入句中，使句中的主语和动词分离，但它并不影响主语的数，所以在这句里的动词应该是 is。

〔类例〕My life no less than my fortune is at the service of my country.

（我的生命和财产一样供国家驱使。）

The boy with his friends is playing at home.（这孩子和他的朋友正在家里玩耍。）

This fairy story, besides many other interesting stories, is in the book.

（除许多别的有趣的故事外，这篇童话也在这书里面。）

Mary, along with her friends, goes to school.（玛丽和她的朋友们一同到学校去。）

The teacher, in addition to his students, is in the library.（先生和学生都在图书馆。）

11. 误：Somebody have taken away my book.

正：Somebody has taken away my book.

（有人把我的书拿掉了。）

〔说明〕大多数的不定名词、不定代词和不定形容词如 each, every, another, any, either, neither, anyone, each one, every one, some one, no one, anybody, somebody, something 等都是单数的，所以在它们的后面须用单数的动词。此句的主语是 somebody（某人），它是单数的，所以动词也应该用单数的动词 has taken。

〔类例〕Each of the pupils has his own desk.（每个学生都有他自己的书桌。）

Every train was crowded.（每列火车都拥挤。）

One is blind and another is deaf.（一个是瞎的，别一个是聋的。）

Any child knows that.（任何儿童都知道那个。）

Either way is correct.（两种方法随便哪一种都是对的。）

Neither has much to do.（两人均无甚事做。）

Anybody is able to do the work.（任何人都能做这件工作。）

12. 误：Each boy and each girl are here.

正：Each boy and each girl is here.

（每个男孩和每个女孩都到了。）

〔说明〕假使由 and 所连合的两个或两个以上的单数主语的前面有 each 或 every 或 no, 句内的动词应该用单数。所以在这句里的动词应该用 is。

〔类例〕No boy and no girl is allowed to enter.（男孩和女孩都不准入。）

Every man and every woman was asked to take part in the discussion.

（每个男人和每个女人都被邀请参加讨论。）

Each day and each hour brings the news of the war.（每天和每小时都带来战争的消息。）

There is no tree and no flower in the garden.（花园里没有花和树。）

13. 误：All of us is present.

正：All of us are present.

（大家都到了。）

〔说明〕all，some 和 none 用作主语时，若指量则应该用单数的动词，若指数则应该用复数的动词。在这句里的 all 系指我们，我们是可以数的，故 all 是复数，所以动词也应该用复数的 are。我们再举一个例来说明：All of the milk has turned sour.（所有的牛乳已变酸了。）在这句里 milk 是物质名词，它是不可以数的，只可以量计，故 all 是单数，所以它的动词也应该用单数的动词 has turned。

〔类例〕All are agreed.（大家都同意。）

All has been explained.（一切都已说明。）

Some of the soil is poor.（有些土壤是贫瘠的。）

Some of the students speak English very well.（这些学生中有几位英语说得很好。）

None of this concerns me.（这件事与我毫无关系。）

None of my lost books were found.（我所遗失的书一本也没有寻到。）

None are completely happy.（没有人是完全快乐的。）

14. 误：The rest of the boys is at play.

正：The rest of the boys are at play.

（别的孩子在玩耍。）

〔说明〕假使主语是 half, rest, plenty, part 等词时，则动词的数须依照它所指的东西而决定。假使它所指的东西是可数的，并且是多数的，那么它的动词应该用复数，如果它所指的东西虽然是可以数的，可是只是一个或一个的一部分时，那么它的动词应该用单数，假使它所指的东西只可以量计算而不能数的，那么它的动词也应该用单数。在这句子里 the rest 指孩子，孩子是可以数的，并且在一个以上，所以动词应该用复数的 are, 例如 A half of the orange is bad.（一半的橘子是坏的。）在这句里 half 所指的橘子虽然可数，但只是一个橘子的一部分，所以它的动词用单数的 is。又如 The rest of the wine was thrown away.（其余的酒被倒掉了。）在这句子里 the rest 指酒，酒只可以量，却不可以计数的，所以它的动词用单数的 was thrown。

〔类例〕The rest of the students are absent.（其余的学生缺席。）

The rest needs no telling.（其余的不必说了。）

A half of them are gone.（他们中的一半是去了。）

A half of the wood is getting rotten.（这树木的一半已朽了。）

There are plenty of men who would work and not mind the hours.（有许多人工作不顾时间。）

There is plenty of snow.（雪很大。）

A part of the horses have run away.（一部分的马跑掉了。）

Only part of his story is true.（他的故事只有一部分是真的。）

15. 误：The number of students in our class are forty.

正：The number of students in our class is forty.

（我们班里学生的总数是四十。）

〔说明〕The number of 的意思是总数，它作主语时，它的后面的动词应该是单数的。a number of 的意思是若干，它是形容短语，可以用来形容主语，使主语成为复数，所以在这样的主语的后面的动词应该是复数的。在这句里的主语是 The number，所以它的动词应该用单数的 is。

〔类例〕The number of tickets is limited.（票数是有限制的。）

A number of people were present.（若干人出席。）

There are a number of students outside.（若干学生在外面。）

Here are a number of good opportunities.（这里有许多的好机会。）

16. 误：The latest news are favorable.

正：The latest news is favorable.

（最近的消息是好的。）

〔说明〕有许多名词像 news, mathematics, measles 等词虽然是复数的形式，它们的意思却是单数的。当它们被用作主语时须用单数的动词。所以在这句里的动词应该是单数的 is。

〔类例〕Mathematics is my favorable subject.（数学是我喜欢的学科。）

Measles is a common disease among children.（麻疹是小孩患的一种普通的病。）

Physics is worth studying.（物理是值得学习的。）

The gallows was used to hang criminals.（绞台被用来绞死犯罪的人。）

17. 误：His family is all well.

正：His family are all well.

（他的家属都健康。）

〔说明〕当集合名词如 audience, family, class, committee, nation, generation 等词作主语时，若指整个的团体时需要一个单数的动词；若指团体内的各个时则需要一个复数的动词。在这句里的 family 是指家属里的每一员，所以应用复数的 are。

〔类例〕His family is spending the winter in the south.（他一家在南方过冬。）

The family have just sat down to table.（这家人刚刚正在就桌用膳。）

The committee was made up of twenty members.（这个委员会是由二十个委员组成的。）

The committee were divided in opinion.（各委员意见分歧。）

The fifth year class has only ten students.（五年级只有学生十人。）

The whole class are listening attentively.（全班的学生正注意地倾听。）

There was a large audience.（有多数的听众。）

The audience were moved to tears by his eloquence.（听众受他的辞令感动得流泪。）

The whole nation were rising against him.（全国的人民起来反对他。）

The rising generation are fighting for the cause of liberty and justice.

（青年们为自由和正义而战。）

18. 误：The Chinese people loves peace.

正：The Chinese people love peace.

（中国人民爱好和平。）

〔说明〕集合名词中如 people, cattle, police, poultry 等词的外形虽然是单数的，它们的意思却是复数的，当它们被用作主语时，动词应该用复数。在这句里 people 的外形是单数的，可是它指全体的人民所以应该用复数的 love。

〔类例〕The people love their president.（人民爱戴他们的总统。）

These cattle are foreign breed.（这些牛是外国种。）

The police have caught a robber.（警察们捉住一个强盗。）

Poultry are scarce here.（这里家禽稀少。）

19. 误：Many a man have made the same mistake.

正：Many a man has made the same mistake.

（许多人犯同样的错误。）

〔说明〕Many a 是成语，它的意思比 many 强，它的后面须接一个单数的名词，假使这样的名词作主语时，它的后面的动词应该是单数的。所以在这句里，应该用单数的 has made。

〔类例〕Many a student has failed in the examination.（许多学生考试没有及格。）

Many a man has tried to get rich, but without success.（许多人会努力求富，却没有成功。）

Many a house was burnt to ashes.（许多房屋烧成灰烬。）

Many a soldier has fought for his country.（许多兵士曾为国家而战。）

20. 误：The young is taught to respect the old.

正：The young are taught to respect the old.

（年轻人被教导去尊敬老年人。）

〔说明〕The + abjective 可表示一种人们，当它们被作为主语时须用复数的动词。在这句里 the young = the young people（年轻的人们），所以它的动词应该是复数的 are。

〔类例〕The diligent have more time to work.（勤的人有更多的时间工作。）

The rich become richer and the poor poorer.（富者益富，穷者益穷。）

The rich are not always happy.（富的人不常是快乐的。）

The good are said to die young.（好人据说死得早。）

The dumb speak；the dead are raised up；to the poor the gospel is preached.—New Testament（哑子说话；死者被唤醒了。对于穷的人宜讲着福音。——《新约》）

21. 误：Lamb’s“Tales from Shakespeare” are widely read by Chinese students.

正：Lamb’s“Tales from Shakespeare” is widely read by Chinese students.

（兰姆的莎氏乐府本事被中国学生普遍的阅读。）

〔说明〕有一部分的书名、河名、国名具有复数的外形，当它们被用作主语时却需要单数的动词。在这句里的主语“Tales from Shakespeare”虽然是复数，它却是一本书的名字所以动词须用单数的 is read。

〔类例〕“Gulliver’s Travels” is full of satires.（《海客瀛谈》充满着讽刺。）

The United States is a republic.（美国是共和国。）

The Ganges has overflowed its banks.（恒河曾泛滥两岸。）

22. 误：Seventy dollars are the price of this coat.

正：Seventy dollars is the price of this coat.

（这件外衣的价额是七十元。）

〔说明〕当一种价值、重量、距离等用作主语时，虽然它的形式是复数，它的意义却指整体的并非指个别的单位，因此它的后面的动词应该是单数的。在这句里 seventy dollars 是一个价额，所以应用单数的 is。

〔类例〕Three drops of the liquid medicine is a dose.（三滴这种药水是一服药。）

Two hundred pounds is his weight.（他的体重是两百磅。）

Five years seems a long time to the prisoner.（五年对于犯人似乎是一个长的时间。）

Ten dollars a week is poor wages.（一星期十元是低微的工资。）

Three miles is a good walk.（三里路是很适度的散步。）

23. 误：Nothing but two books were found in the drawer.

正：Nothing but two books was found in the drawer.

（在抽屉里除两本书外没找到别的东西。）

〔说明〕but 或 except 所引入的短语并不影响主语的数。在这句里 but two books 是被引入的短语并不影响主语 nothing 的数，所以应用单数的 was。

〔类例〕No one but fools has ever believed it.（除了愚人以外，没有人会相信它。）

No one except members was admitted.（除会员外闲人莫入。）

Nothing but dismal scenes lies before our path.（在我们的路前只有阴惨的景色。）

24. 误：I, and not they, are to go.

正：I, and not they, am to go.

（我决定去，并不是他们。）

〔说明〕在两个主语中一个是肯定的，一个是否定的，句中动词的身和数须和肯定的主语的身和数相一致。在此句里 I 是肯定的主语，they 是否定的主语，所以动词须用 am 和 I 的身和数相一致。

〔类例〕He, and not I, is chosen.（他被选中，并不是我。）

He, and not you, deserves the prizes.（他应得奖，并不是你。）

Money, and not books, was stolen.（钱被偷了，并不是书。）

25. 误：You, who is well, cannot understand my illness.

正：You, who are well, cannot understand my illness.

（健康的你，不能明白我的病的。）

〔说明〕关系代词（relative pronoun）用作从句里的主语时，它的动词的身和数须和它的先行名词（antecedent）相一致。在这句里 who 的先行名词是 you, 在从句里的动词的身和数应该和 you 相一致，所以用第二身的 are。

〔类例〕He who is diligent will surely pass the examination.（勤勉的他，将一定能通过考试。）

We who are your friends desire to help you.（我们是你的朋友，愿意帮助你。）

I will invite only such people as are my friends.（我只要请那是我的朋友的人们。）

（2）动词过多的错误

1. 误：I am learn my lesson.

正：I am learning my lesson.

（我正在学习我的功课。）

〔说明〕在一句句子里不能有两个动词，如进行式是由 verb to be + present participle（现在分词）而成的，完成式是由 verb to have + past participle（过去分词）而成的；被动式是由 verb to be + past participle 而成的。在这句里 am 和 learn 都是动词，所以是错的。若要表示现在正在学习应用现在进行式，须把 learn 改为 learning。

〔类例〕I am writing a letter to my friend.（我正写信给我的朋友。）

He has left school.（他已出了学校。）

Tigers are found in India.（老虎可在印度被见到。）

2. 误：He went down breakfast.

正：He went down to breakfast.

（他到楼下去吃早饭。）

〔说明〕在一句句子里要同时表示两个行动时，也不应该用两个动词，应该用不定词、分词或动名词来表示一个以上的行动。在这句里 went 是一个动作，breakfast 又是一个动作，所以应该用不定词 to breakfast。

〔类例〕I am glad to see you.（我看到你觉得快乐。）

He sat buried in thought.（他坐着深思。）

I hear a bird singing among the trees.（我听到鸟儿在树林里面唱歌。）

He enjoys flying.（他享受飞行。）

（3）动词变化上的错误

1. 误：Last night they spreaded their blankets on the floor.

正：Last night they spread their blankets on the floor.

（昨天晚上他们把毯子铺在地板上。）

〔说明〕动词中如 put, spread, hurt, let, cut 等词的原形过去式，和过去分词都是同一的形态，所以在这句里应该用 spread。

〔类例〕He hurt his own eye this morning.（今天早上他伤了他自己的眼睛。）

He was put to death.（他被处死刑。）

He had his hair cut close.（他已把头发剪短。）

2. 误：He shew me the road to the station.

正：He showed me the road to the station.

（他指示我到火车站的路。）

〔说明〕动词中如 know, blow, grow 等字的变化是 -ow→-ew→-own，但是 show, glow, flow, plow 等词的变化都是有规则的。而且 show 的过去分词有两个形式，showed 和 shown, 因此很容易弄错，所以在这句里应该用 showed。

〔类例〕The water all flowed out little by little.（水渐渐地流光了。）

Their hearts glowed with patriotism.（他们赤心爱国。）

He plowed his field with two horses.（他用两匹马犁他的田。）

3. 误：He was drown in the sea.

正：He was drowned in the sea.

（他在海中淹死。）

〔说明〕 | 原形 | 过去式 | 过去分词
drown 溺 grow 生长 | drowned grew | drowned grown
wound 受伤 wind 绕 | wounded wound | wounded wound
found 建立 find 找着 | founded found | founded found
awaken 唤醒 shake 摇 | awakened shook | awakened shaken

我们看了上面几对动词的变化，便会明白为什么有许多人会把 found，awaken 等词的原形误认为过去分词，所以在这句里应该用 drown 的过去分词 drowned。

〔类例〕The bird is wounded in the wing.（这鸟翼部受伤。）

The college was founded in 1950.（这学院是在1950年创办的。）

In the morning, I was awakened by the alarm clock.（早上我被闹钟闹醒。）

4. 误：He was warmly welcome by his friends.

正：He was warmly welcomed by his friends.

（他受他的朋友热烈的欢迎。）

〔说明〕 | 原形 | 过去式 | 过去分词
lay 放下 delay 延迟 | laid delayed | laid delayed
have 有 behave 处世 | had behaved | had behaved
come 来 welcome 欢迎 | come welcomed | came welcomed

我们看了上面几对动词的变化便会明白为什么有许多人容易把 delay, behave, welcome 弄成不规则的变化，所以在这句里应该用 welcomed。

〔类例〕The train was delayed by an accident.（火车因意外事件而延迟。）

He behaved respectfully towards his superiors.（他对长者很恭敬。）

5. 误：The room is hanged with pictures.

正：The room is hung with pictures.

（室内挂着图画。）

〔说明〕 | 原形 | 过去式 | 过去分词
lie 说谎 lie 躺 lay 放 | lied lay laid | lied lain laid
hang 挂 hang 绞死 | hung hanged | hung hanged
bear 生 bear 负 | bore bore | born or borne（限于被生而且后面不跟 by） borne
cleave 切 cleave 粘附 | cleft or clove cleaved | cleft or cloven cleaved
fall 跌 fell 伐倒 | fell felled | fallen felled
bid 出价 bid 吩咐 | bid bade | bid bidden

在这句里 is hanged 是被绞死的意思，和前后文意不合，所以应该把它改为 is hung, 才是被挂起的意思。

〔类例〕The rascal has lied to me for many times.（这个流氓对我说了好几次谎。）

He lay on the lawn.（他躺在草场上。）

A bridge is laid across the river.（河上横架一桥。）

The clothes were hung up to dry.（衣服挂起来晒干。）

The murderer was hanged.（杀人犯被绞死。）

He was born in this town.（他生在这个市镇里。）

She has borne many children.（她生了许多孩子。）

The task is borne on our shoulders.（这工作担在我们的肩上。）

I cleft an apple in two with a knife.（我用刀把苹果切成两半。）

He cleaved to the cause firmly.（他坚持这主义。）

The house fell into decay.（这房子朽坏了。）

He felled a tree with an axe.（他用一把斧把树砍倒。）

He bid ten thousand dollars for my house.（他愿出价一万元买我的房子。）

I was bidden to wait.（他嘱我等候。）

（4）时态（Tense）的错误

1. 误：We are going to school every day.

正：We go to school every day.

（我们每天到学校去。）

〔说明〕表示现在的习惯须用现在时，不应该用现在进行时，但是进行时和 always，constantly 等副词连用也可以表示惯常的事情，如 He is always talking in class.（他老是在上课时讲话。）

〔类例）He rises early.（他是早起的人。）

He drinks much.（他是善饮酒的人。）

Every morning I go for a walk.（每天早晨我出去散步。）

He is always complaining.（他老是抱怨。）

I am constantly forgetting people’s names.（我总记不住人的名字。）

2. 误：I am believing the story now.

正：I believe the story now.

（我现在才相信这故事。）

〔说明〕一般说来凡表示一种状态而不着重于行动的。动词无进行式，如 understand，believe，resemble，belong 等动词。

〔类例〕I understand the lesson now.（我现在才明白这功课。）

He resembles his father.（他像他的父亲。）

This book belongs to me.（这本书属于我。）

3. 误：The sun rose in the east and set in the west.

正：The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.

（日出于东，而落于西。）

〔说明〕表明真理时须用现在时，不应该用过去时。“日山于东，而落于西”是千古不变的事实，所以在上面的句子里应该把 rose 和 set 改为现在式 rises 和 sets。

〔类例〕The earth is round.（地球是圆的。）

Honesty is the best policy.（诚实是最上策。）

Time and tide wait for no man.（岁月不待人。）

Practice makes perfect.（熟能生巧。）

4. 误：I have written a letter last night.

正：I wrote a letter last night.

（昨天晚上我写了一封信。）

〔说明〕现在完成时表示一个动作开始于过去，一直继续到现在，故现在完成时绝不能和 yesterday，last night，the other day，a few days ago 等表示明确的过去时的副词连用。在上面的句子里已明确的说明昨晚，故动词非用过去时不可。

〔类例〕I saw a good film yesterday.（昨天我看了一张好片子。）

She lived in Nanking ten years ago.（十年前她住在南京。）

I studied hard early this morning.（在今天很早的时候我就用功读书。）

I finished my breakfast just now.（顷刻间，我已用完早饭。）

5. 误：It did not rain since Sunday last.

正：It has not rained since Sunday last.

（自从上星期日起一直就没有下雨。）

〔说明〕since 作介词或连词表示“从过去直至现在”的意思时，句内的动词须用现在完成时。但是若以 it 作主语表示时间的经过时，则句内的动词用 is, 如：It is ten years since he left home.（自从他离家已有十年了。）

〔类例〕 Since ancient times such things have been common.（这种事情古来常有的。）

Taiwan has made a great progress since its retrocession.（台湾自光复以来已有很大的进步。）

Nothing has happened since we parted.（自从我们离别后，还没遇到什么事。）

It is a week since the holidays began.（休假以来已有一星期了。）

6. 误：I shall go home when school will be over.

正：I shall go home when school is over.

（散课后我将回家。）

〔说明〕假使主句内的动词是将来时，则表条件或时间的副词从句内的动词应该用现在时代替将来时，所以在上面的副词从句里应该将 will be 改为 is，但是在名词从句里的动词表示将来的意思时，仍须用将来时，如：I don’t know when he will come.（我不知道他何时会来。）

〔类例〕I shall see you when I come back.（当我回来时我将看你。）

The mice will play, while the cat is away.（猫去则鼠喜。）

I will go if it is fine tomorrow.（假使明天天气好时，我要去。）

7. 误：When I arrived at the station, the train left.

正：When I arrived at the station, the train had left.

（当我抵达车站时，火车已开走了。）

〔说明〕在一句复句内，两个动词表示两个过去动作，可是一个动作在先，一个动作在后，在先的过去动作须用过去完成时表示，在后的过去动作须用过去时表示。在上面的复句里抵达车站的动作在后，火车开走的动作在先，故火车开走的动作应该用过去完成时表示，所以须改为 had left。

〔类例〕I had prepared my lesson before I went to school.（去校以前，我已经准备过我的功课。）

I read the book which I had borrowed.（我读我借来的书。）

8. 误：He said that he does not know.

正：He said that he did not know.

（他说他不知道。）

〔说明〕依据时间的关联（sequence of tenses），主句里的动词若是现在时、现在完成时或将来时，则从句里的动词，可依文义的需要，用任何适当的时态。假使主句中的动词是过去时时，则其从句中的动词须依文义而用过去时或过去完成时。所以应该把这句里的 does 改为 did。

〔类例〕He said that he had done it.（他说他已做过这事。）

I thought I should fail.（我想我会失败的。）

I know that he painted a picture.（我知道他画过一张。）

9. 误：Columbus said that the earth was round.

正：Columbus said that the earth is round.

（哥伦布说地球是圆的。）

〔说明〕叙述一般的真理和日常的习惯时，虽然在主句内用过去时的动词，在其从句中仍须用现在时的动词。在上面的主句中的动词 said 虽然是过去时，却因为它的从句“地球是圆的”是不变的真理，所以其从句的动词仍须用现在时 is。

〔类例〕The teacher told us that the earth moves round the sun.

（先生告诉我们地球是绕太阳旋转的。）

I told him that I take a walk every evening.（我告诉他我每天黄昏散步一次。）

The old man said that honesty is the best policy.（这老人说诚实为最上策。）

（5）及物动词和不及物动词的错误

1. 误：The trees are falling their leaves.

正：The leaves are falling from the trees.

比较：The trees are dropping their leaves.

（树正落叶。）

〔说明〕在不及物动词的后面是不能接宾语的。在上面的句子里 fall 是不及物动词，所以不能接宾语 leaves，而 drop 是及物动词，所以可以接宾语。

〔类例〕Birds sing.（鸟鸣。）

Flowers bloom in the spring.（春天花儿开放。）

2. 误：This book is belonged to me.

正：This book belongs to me.

（这本书属于我。）

〔说明〕belong 是不及物动词，所以它没有被动形式。在上面的句子里应该把 is belonged 改正为 belongs。

〔类例〕A terrible accident happened when I was there.

（当我在那里的时候，这可怕的事变发生了。）

War broke out between the two countries over a boundary dispute.

（为边界的争执，两国间战争爆发了。）

The ship sailed for America a few days ago.（前几天船已开往美国。）

The meeting will take place in the open air.（这会将在露天举行。）

The heavy fighting lasted three hours.（激战延续到三小时。）

3. 误：He replied my letter.

正：He replied to my letter.

比较：He answered my letter.

（他回了我的信。）

〔说明〕有些不及物动词，加上了介词，始有及物的能力。在上面的句子里 reply 作复信解时是不及物动词，不能直接接宾语，加上了 to 才有及物的能力。answer 是及物动词可以接宾语。

〔类例〕Please listen to my story.（请听我讲故事。）

Success depends upon effort.（成功基于努力。）

In business, we must compete with others.（在事业上，我们一定要和别人竞争。）

4. 误：He seats on a chair.

正：He is seated on a chair.

比较：He seats himself on a chair.

比较：He sits on a chair.

〔说明〕seat 是及物动词，它的意义是“使坐”，因此它不能如 sit 用作不及物动词。

〔类例〕I laid myself upon the bed.（我躺在床上。）

He is laid up（= lies up）with a serious illness.（他卧病在床。）

The price of the 4lb loaf is raised a penny.（四磅面包的价钱已增加一便士。）

（6）语态的错误

1. 误：The chairman was elected him.

正：He was elected chairman.

（他被选为主席。）

〔说明〕上面的句子是被动语态，是从自动语态的一句 They elected him chairman. 变过来的。由作为动词而成的句子从自动语态改为被动语态时，应将原有的宾格补充词变为主格补充词，不应将宾格补充词变成主语。

〔类例〕

They considered him a genius.（自动语态）

（他们视他为天才。）

He was considered a genius.（被动语态）

（他被视为天才。）

The people chose him president.

（人民选举他为大总统。）

He was chosen president.

（他被选为大总统。）

2. 误：He cannot be relied.

正：He cannot be relied upon.

（他不能被信任。）

〔说明〕上面的句子是被动语态，是由自动语态的一句 You cannot rely upon him. 变过来的。不及物动词和介词连在一起有及物的意思时，可由自动语态变为被动语态，但是改变时，不应忘掉介词。

〔类例〕

They laughed at me（. 自动语态）

（他们嘲笑我。）

I was laughed at by them（. 被动语态）

（我被他们嘲笑。）

The motor-car ran over a girl.（自动语态）

（汽车撞倒一个女孩）

A girl was run over by the motor-car.（被动语态）

（一个女孩被汽车撞倒。）

3. 误：Carthage was expected to conquer by Romans.

正：It was expected by the Romans that they would conquer Carthage.

比较：The Romans expected to conquer Carthage.

（罗马人希望征服迦太基。）

〔说明〕第一句的意思成为罗马人希望迦太基去征服，和事实不合故错，应改为第二句和第三句。

〔类例〕

We hope that peace will soon be concluded.（自动语态）

It is hoped that peace will soon be concluded.（被动语态）

（希望不久媾和。）

We cannot expect him to remember it.（自动语态）

He cannot be expected to remember it.（被动语态）

（我们不希望他记得这个。）

4. 误：He is known by everybody.

正：He is known to everybody.

（人人认识他。）

比较：He is known by the company he keeps.（看他的同伴，便知道他的为人。）

〔说明〕is known 后面跟介词 to 才有“被”的意思；它的后面跟 by 时，此 by 却有“由于”的意思，所以应将句中的 by 改为 to。

〔类例〕The tree is known by its fruit.（这树因了它的果实而被人认识。）

He is very well known to me.（我很知道他。）

5. 误：This book is belonged to me.

正：This book belongs to me.

（这本书属于我。）

〔说明〕不及物动词不能有被动语态。有许多动词如 happen, occur, belong 和 last 看起来很像及物动词，很容易被错用成被动语态。

〔类例〕The heavy fighting last three hours.（激战延续到三小时。）

A terrible accident happened when I was there.（我在那里时，这可怕的意外事件发生了。）

A flood occurs every year.（洪水每年发生。）

（7）助动词的错误

1. 误：I will be eighteen next week.

正：I shall be eighteen next week.

（到下星期我将满十八岁了。）

〔说明〕shall 和 will 表示纯粹将来时，shall 应该用于第一人称，will 用于第二人称和第三人称，现在把它们的用法列表于下：

| 单数 | 复数
第一人称 | I shall | we shall
第二人称 | you will | you will
第三人称 | he will | they will

假使表示各人称自身的意志时，will 用于各人称，完全没有变化，现在把它的用法列表于下：

| 单数 | 复数
第一人称 | I will | we will
第二人称 | you will | you will
第三人称 | he will | they will

上面的句子的意思表示纯粹的将来并没有含有意志的成分，句中的主语是第一人称，所以应该用 shall。

〔类例〕We shall have rain soon.（表将来）

（天将很快地下雨了。）

I will never go there again.（表意志）

（我决不再到那里去了。）

It will take you two days to get there.（表将来）

（你将花费两天的时间抵达那里。）

He will do it in spite of my advice.（表意志）

（不顾我的劝告他要做这件事情。）

2. 误：I will be glad to meet you at the station.

正：I shall be glad to meet you at the station.

（我将很高兴到车站来迎接你。）

〔说明〕一个句子表达感情时，shall 应该用于第一人称，will 用于第二人称和第三人称；它们都是表示纯粹的将来，因为喜怒哀乐的感情实由于外界的情形而决定，和自己的意志没有关系。上面的一句表快乐的感情，并且主语是第一人称，所以应该用 shall。

〔类例〕I shall feel much obliged，if you will favor me a call.

（如果能够得到你的惠顾，我将十分的感激。）

I shall be much pleased to see you.（我将以见你为乐。）

Your parents will be delighted to hear of your success.

（你的父母将很高兴听到你的成功。）

3. 误：I hope I will succeed this time.

正：I hope I shall succeed this time.

（我希望我这次将能成功。）

〔说明〕一个句子表达希望时与表达感情一样，shall 用于第一人称，will 用于第二人称和第三人称；同样地它们都是表示纯粹的将来，因为希望中的事情是否能够成功是不能由自己的意志左右的。上面一句里的名词从句表示一个希望，并且它的主语是第一人称，所以应该用 shall。

〔类例〕I hope it will be fine tomorrow.（我希望明天天气好。）

I hope we shall pass.（我希望我们会合格。）

I do hope you will soon get well again.（我希望你早日复原。）

4. 误：I promise that my part will be fulfilled.

正：I promise that my part shall be fulfilled.

（我允诺尽我的本分。）

〔说明〕一句句子若要表示说话者的意志——允诺或威逼或禁止等时，will 用于第一人称，shall 用于第二人称和第三人称。现在把它们的用法列表于下：

| 单数 | 复数
第一人称 | I will | we will
第二人称 | you shall | you shall
第三人称 | he shall | they shall

上面一句里的名词从句表示讲话者的允诺和讲话者的意志有关，所以应该用 shall。

〔类例〕They shall not want as long as I live.（表允诺）

（在我活着的时期内，当不使他们有所困乏。）

You shall do so, if you wish to.（表允诺）

（假使你愿意这样做就做吧。）

You shall do so whether you will or not.（表威逼）

（不论你愿意与否，你必须这样做。）

No man shall leave without my permission.（表禁止）

（任何人不得我许可不许离开这房间。）

I will not allow you to set foot in this house again.（表禁止）

（你不许再踏进此屋。）

5. 误：When will we arrive at Taipei？

正：When shall we arrive at Taipei？

比较：When will the train arrive at Taipei？（这火车何时可到台北？）

答句：We shall arrive tomorrow morning.（明天清早到。——同行的人回答。）

　　 You will arrive tomorrow morning.（明天清早到。——车站职员的回答。）

〔说明〕假使一句疑句的主语是第一人称，我们用 shall 表示纯粹的将来或询问对方的意思，除了下面的例子外我们很少用 will 来询问自己的意志。

Will you go？（你愿意去吗？）

Will I go？To be sure, I will.（你问我愿意去吗？我当然愿意去。）

〔类例〕When skall I have your answer？——You shall have it tomorrow.

（你何时回答我？——明天。）

How old shall I be next year？——You will be sixteen next year.

（明年我将几岁？——你明年将十六岁。）

Where shall we go？——Let us（= We will）go to the park.

（我们往何处去？——我们往公园去吧。）

6. 误：Shall you lend me a book？——Yes, I shall.

正：Will you lend me the book？——Yes, I will.

（你愿意借给我这本书吗？——是的，我愿意。）

〔说明〕假使一句疑问句的主语是第二人称，我们用 shall 表示单纯的未来，用 will 询问对方的意志。上面的问句是问对方是否愿意，所以应该用 will。又答句中的 shall 和 will 我们也应该加以注意，“shall you？”的回答必是“I shall.”，“will you？”的回答必是“I will. ”。

〔类例〕When shall you be twenty years of age？——I shall be twenty next year.

（到什么时候你才廿岁？——到明年我才廿岁。）

Will you do this for me？Will I？Of course I will.

（你愿替我做这件事吗？我当然愿意。）

7. 误：When will he come？——Let him come tomorrow.

正：When shall he come？——Let him come tomorrow.

（何时叫他来？——叫他明天来。）

〔说明〕假使一句疑问句的主语是第三人称，我们用 will 表示单纯的将来，它的答句也要用 will。用 shall 询问对方的意志，它的答句常用命令句。上面的问句是问对方的意志，所以应该用 shall。

〔类例〕 Shall he know the truth？——Yes, he shall know it.

（给他知道真相吗？——好的，给他知道吧。）

Will he do it？——I think he will.（他会做这件事吗？我想他会的。）

8. 误：If it would rain，I would rather stay home.

正：If it should rain，I would rather stay home.

（万一下雨时，我宁愿留在家里。）

〔说明〕假使将来时，可以加强语气的不确实性，假使表示纯粹的将来时，不论人称如何皆用 should，假使表示意志时则皆用 would。

上面的一句表示纯粹的将来，所以应该用 should。

〔类例〕If you would grant my request, I should esteem it a great favour.

（假使你肯答应我的请求，我将非常感激。）

He would have to give up his studies，if his eyes should not get better.

（他的眼睛万一不好，他就非抛弃他的研究不可。）

If you should fail, would you try again?（万一你失败，你愿意再试吗？）

9. 误：It is no wonder that he would have succeeded.

正：It is no wonder that he should have succeeded.

（他的成功是不奇怪的。）

〔说明〕凡 It is no wonder that…，It is strange that…，It is surprising that…，It is a pity that…等形式开头的句子表示当然、惊奇、惋惜等意义时，它们的后面应接 should 不应接 would，所以应该把上面句子里的 would 改为 should。

〔类例〕It is strange that you should not have heard it.（你竟没有听到是奇怪的。）

It is proper that you should ask your father.（你当然应该问你的父亲。）

It is right that one should speak well of the absent.（在背后说人好是对的。）

It is natural that he should succeed.（他自然是应该成功的。）

It is necessary that we should start at once.（我们非立刻动身不可。）

It is surprising that he should have said such thing.（他说出这样的事情来真是奇怪。）

It is a pity that he should live at such a distance.（他住得这么远实为憾事。）

10. 误：Men work that they will earn a living.

正：Men work that they may earn a living.

（人们为着谋生工作。）

〔说明〕that, so that 或 in order that 作“为了”解时，它们的后面常接含 may 的目的从句。上面句子里的 that 是有“为了”的意思，所以应该把它的后面引入的目的从句里的 will 改为 may。

〔类例〕He started early that he might not be late.（为着要不迟到，他很早就动身了。）

He worked hard that he might gain a prize.（因为要得到奖品，他努力地工作。）

He took medicine in order that he might recover.（为了要痊愈，他服药。）

He climbs higher so that he may get a better view.（为着要看更好的景色，他爬得更高。）

11. 误：You ought not go to such a place.

正：You ought not to go to such a place.

（你不应该到这样的地方去。）

〔说明〕ought 也是一个助动词，它却和别的助动词不同，它的后面非跟不定词不可，所以上面的句子里的 go 应改为 to go。

〔类例〕You ought to pay what you owe.（你应该还你所负的债。）

You ought to have finished it last week.（你应该在上星期把它完成的。）

He said that I ought to be satisfied.（他说我应该满足。）

12. 误：He dare do that.

正：He dares to do that.

（他敢做那件事。）

〔说明〕在否定的句子和疑问的句子里，dare 和 need 可以用作助动词，但是在肯定的句子里它却不能这样用。上面的句子是肯定的句子，并且它的主语是第三人称单数，所以在 dare 的后面应加 s，它的后面的不定词 to do 也不能省去 to，应该把它添上。

〔类例〕He dare not do that.（他不敢做那件事。）

How dare you do such a thing？（你怎敢做这种事？）

You need to practise over and over again.（必须要重复的实习。）

Need I come？（我必须来吗？）

He need not come at present.（他现在无须来。）

（8）条件句中动词的错误

1. 误：If I have the money, I will lend it to him.

正：If I had the money, I would lend it to him.

（假使我有钱，我就借给他。）

〔说明〕假设法过去时表示和现在的事实相反的假定；上面的句子既表示和现在的事实相反的假定，所以应该用假设法过去时。应该把 have 改为 had, will 改为 would。

〔类例〕If I were you, I would not do this.（假使我是你，我不会做这件事情。）

If I were a bird, I would fly to you.（假使我是鸟，我要飞到你那里。）

If I were rich, I would go abroad.（假使我有钱，我要出国。）

I would fain do it if I could.（如果我能做，我很情愿做。）

2. 误：If the doctor come earlier, the invalid would be saved.

正：If the doctor had come earlier, the invalid would have been saved.

　（假使医生来得早些，病人就得救了。）

〔说明〕假设法过去完成时表示和过去相反的假设；上面的句子既表示和过去相反的假设，所以应该用假设法过去完成时，应该把 came 改成 had come，would be saved 改成 would have been saved。

〔类例〕If the hunters had been there yesterday, they might have shot the tiger.

（假使猎人昨天在那里，他们或许射到那只虎。）

If I had had the money, I would have lent it to you.

（假使我本来有这笔钱，我就已经借给你了。）

I might have done it, if I had been stronger.

（如果我曾强健一些的话，这事我也许已经做了。）

He looks as if nothing had happened.

（他好像不曾发生过什么事情的样子。）

3. 误：If I had known your address, I would write to you.

正：If I had known your address, I would have written to you.

（假使我曾经知道你的通讯处我就已经写信给你了。）

〔说明〕在条件句子内，条件从句和结论从句在普通的情形下时态须一致；如果条件从句是假设法过去时，则结论从句须是假设法将来时或可能法过去时；如果条件从句是假设法过去完成时，则结论从句须是假设法将来完成时；假使条件从句是假设法过去完成时，则结论从句绝不可用假设法将来时或可能法过去时，所以在上面的句子中应将 would write 改为 would have written。但是在假设法将来时中，假使 if 有“万一”和“即使”的意思时，结论从句可以用直说法。例如：

What shall I do if I should fail？（万一失败怎么办呢？）

If you should see John, tell him to come to see me.（万一你看到约翰，叫他来看我。）

I will go, even if it should rain.（即使下雨我也要去。）

〔类例〕I would buy it, if I had the money.（假使我有钱，是要买的。）

If I were a child, I might live a happy life again.

（假使我是一个孩子，我可能再过愉快的生活。）

If you would grant my request, I should esteem it a great favour.

（假使你答应我的请求，我要把这事看作恩惠。）

If I should wear spectacles, I could see more clearly.（假使我戴眼镜，我能看得比较清楚。）

If I had tried , I should have succeeded.（假使我曾试过，我就成功了。）

You might have gone to the play, if you had been older.（假使你年龄大些，就可以去看戏了。）

I could have entered the school, if I had been here.（假使我在这里，我是能进这个学校的。）

（9）不定词的错误

1. 误：The work ought to do.

正：The work ought to be done.

（这个工作应该做好。）

〔说明〕不定词有主动和被动两种形式应依照句子的意思而决定用主动的不定词，或被动的不定词，不应该把它们混用的。在上面的句子里工作是被做的，应该用被动的不定词，所以应将 to do 改为 to be done。to let 和 to blame 虽是主动的形式却有被动的意义，所以下面的两句却是例外：

This house is to let.（这屋出租。）

Nobody is to blame.（没有人该负责。）

〔类例〕No one likes to be cheated.（没有人喜欢被欺骗。）

This book ought to be read with care.（这本书应该小心地读。）

What is to be done？（什么是应当做的？）

2. 误：This water is good to be drunk.

正：This water is good to drink.

（这水是可饮的。）

〔说明〕在 easy，hard，difficult，no，fit 和 good 等形容词的后面通常仅接主动的不定词。在上的句子里 to be drunk 接在 good 的后面，所以应该把它改正为 to drink。

〔类例〕This work is hard to do.（这个工作是难做的。）

This apple is fit to eat.（这个苹果恰好能吃。）

He is difficult to satisfy.（他是难满足的。）

The book is easy to understand.（这本书易懂。）

He has no food to eat.（他没有东西吃。）

3. 误：I taught him to read and to write.

正：I taught him to read and write.

（我教他读书和写字。）

〔说明〕两个不定词连用时，则第二个不定词的 to 可以省去，所以在上面句子里的 to write 的 to 可以省去，但是假使两个不定词用于对比时，则第二个不定词的 to 仍应保留，如：It lies in your power to succeed or to fail.（你有能力使它成功和失败。）

〔类例〕He asked me to go and help him.（他请求我去帮助他。）

I hope to go and see you tomorrow.（我希望明天来看你。）

You are free to go home or to stay here.（回家或留在此地都随你的便。）

It is impossible to love and to be wise.（恋爱而不失智慧是不可能的。）

4. 误：I am glad to help you last night.

正：I am glad to have helped you last night.（= I am glad that I helped you last night.）

（昨晚我帮了你的忙我感到很高兴。）

〔说明〕在一个句子里谓语部分的动词是现在时，而其所随的不定词叙述过去的事情，或不定词所表示的行动较谓语部分动词的行动先发生时，或表示未曾实现的希望或遗忘欲做的事情时应该用不定词的完成时。又 ought 表示过去的意义时，它的后面也应跟不定词的完成时。在上面的句子里的谓语部分动词是现在时，而其所随的不定词叙述过去的事情，所以应该改为不定词的完成时 to have helped。

〔类例〕You ought to have done it earlier.（你早该把这事情做好。）

I am sorry to have forgotten your request.（我很抱歉忘了你的委托。）

He seemed to have been diligent.（= It seemed that he had been diligent.）

（他好像曾用过功。）

I wish to have attended school.（我希望我已入学。）

I intended to have spoken about Tunisia too, but time didn’t permit.

（我本来也想谈到突尼斯，但是时间不允许。）

（注：I intended to speak 和 I intended to have spoken 间的意思不同；前者的意思不过是“我曾欲说话”；后者的意思却有“我本来拟定说话，后来因情形的不许可而没有说”。）

5. 误：You ought do it now.

正：You ought to do it now.

（现在你应该做这件事情。）

〔说明〕在一般的助动词的后面须接动词的原形，可是在 ought, have 和 be 的后面却须接均有 to 的不定词，所以应该把上面句子里的 do 改为 to do。

〔类例〕You ought to obey your parents.（你应该服从你的双亲。）

I have to go now.（我现在必须去。）

The regatta is to be held on Saturday.（竞舟定于星期六举行。）

6. 误：I heard the letter to read.

正：I heard the letter read.

（我听读这信。）

〔说明〕see, behold, hear, feel, watch, observe, perceive, notice 和 know 等词是表示感觉的动词，它们的后面须跟随无 to 的不定词做句中的宾语补足语，所以在上面的句子里应该把 to read 改为 read。

〔类例〕I can see the clouds sail in the sky.（我能够看到云在天空飞行。）

We beheld the fish rise.（我们看见鱼儿浮起。）

I heard the wind roar through the trees.（我听见风在树中怒号。）

I felt the house rock.（我感到房屋震动。）

We watched him go and come.（我们看他来去。）

We observed the barometer fall.（我们看见晴雨计下降。）

I did not perceive anyone come in.（我不觉有人进来。）

I did not notice any one enter.（我未见有人进来。）

I never knew him do such a thing.（我从来不知道他做这种事。）

（注：在 know 的后面所跟的不定词也可以保留 to。）

7. 误：Let me to know the news.

正：Let me know the news.

（让我知道这消息吧！）

〔说明〕当 let, make, bid, have, help 做使役动词时，它们的后面应跟原形不定词。上面句子里的 to know 用在使役动词 let 的后面，所以应该删去 to。

〔类例〕 Let go the rope.（放松这绳。）

He made the children laugh.（他使孩子们发笑。）

He bade me sit down.（他嘱我坐下。）

I have him bring some fresh water.（我要他取点淡水来。）

I can help you do the work.（我能帮助你做这工作。）

（注：在 help 后所跟的不定词，也可以保留 to。）

8. 误：The bird was heard sing.

正：The bird was heard to sing.

（听到鸟唱歌。）

〔说明〕表示感觉动词及使役动词若用于被动语态时，它们后面所跟的不定词不能省去 to，在上面的句子里 was heard 是被动语态，它的后面所以应该跟 to sing。

〔类例〕The earth is felt to quake.（感到地震。）

She was seen to swim across the river.（有人看到她游泳渡河。）

I was bidden to wait.（我被吩咐等待。）

The bear was made to dance.（熊被人教他跳舞。）

9. 误：You had better to be quiet.

正：You had better be quiet.

（你最好静一些。）

〔说明〕在 had better, had rather, cannot but 等短语后须接原形不定词。在上面的句子里，to be 在 had better 的后面，所以应该将 to be 改为 be。

〔类例〕You had better not remain here.（你还是不留在这里好。）

I had rather die than do it.（我宁愿死，也不愿意做这事。）

I cannot but admire his courage.（我不得不赞美他的勇敢。）

10. 误：He did nothing but to laugh.

正：He did nothing but laugh.

（他只是笑。）

〔说明〕在 do nothing but 的后面须接原形不定词。假使 nothing but 之前，非 do 而为其及物动词时，则不定词的符号又不能省去。在上面的句子里 to laugh 接在 did nothing but 的后面，所以应该把 to 省去。

〔类例〕She does nothing but cry all day.（她只整天的哭。）

They desire nothing but to enjoy the present moment.

（他们除了眼前享乐以外，什么都不希望。）

I asked for nothing but to be pardoned.（他只请求被宽恕。）

He wished for nothing but to live comfortably.（他只希望生活得舒服。）

11. 误：He decided to without telling anyone make another attempt.

正：He decided to make another attempt without telling anyone.

（他决定不告诉任何人再作一次尝试。）

〔说明〕不定词和它的符号 to 的中间有时可以插入较短的修饰语，却绝不可插入长的修饰语。在上面的句子里的修饰语 without telling anyone 实在太长，所以不应该插在不定词和它的符号 to 的中间，应该把它移在最后。

〔类例〕 To completely forget this is impossible.（完全忘记这件事是不可能的。）

He, more than anyone else tried to bring about better relations between countries.

（他远甚于任何人，想在国际间构成亲善的关系。）

I knew him to be absolutely honest.（我知道他是绝对的诚实。）

12. 误：To study a foreign language, a good dictionary should be bought.

正：To study a foreign language, we should buy a good dictionary.

（要学一种外国语言，我们应该买一本好的字典。）

〔说明〕在上面的误句里，不定词短语 to study a foreign language，不和句子里比他的部分发生关系，这种不定词短语称为不联结无定词短语（dangling infinitive phrase），造句时应该避免这种用法。因此短语指人，故应以 we 作主语，所以应将误句改正如上面的正句。

〔类例〕 To succeed , you must work hard.（要成功你必须努力工作。）

To open the door, we had to use a key.（要开门，我们一定要用一把钥匙。）

To look at him, you would not think him ill.（看起他来，你不会想他是生病的。）

（10）分词修饰语的错误

1. 误：I received a letter writing in green ink.

正：I received a letter written in green ink.

（我收到一封用绿墨水写的信。）

比较：I saw a boy writing a letter.

（我看见一个孩子写信。）

〔说明〕现在分词用作修饰语时常含有主动的意思，过去分词（限于及物动词）用作修饰语时则常有被动的意思。在上面的句子里，信是被写的，所以应该用表示被动意思的过去分词 written 去形容它。

〔类例〕Is there any magazine devoted to the study of English？（有专门研究英语的杂志吗？）

Men, living in town, do not know rural pleasure.（住在城镇的人不知田园的乐。）

Stolen fruit tastes sweet.（偷来的果子滋味甜。）

2. 误：I saw flowers fallen on water.

正：I saw flowers falling on water.

（我看到花落到水上。）

比较：I saw fallen flowers on water.

（我看到水上的落花。）

〔说明〕不及物动词无被动语态，故它的过去分词，只含主动的意思。可做修饰语的过去分词实在不多，并且须放在所形容的词的前面，所以应将上面句子里的 fallen 改为 falling，或将 fallen 移到 flowers 的前面。

〔类例〕He picked up a withered flowers on the road.（它拾起路上的枯萎的花朵。）

He is a returned student from the United States.（他是美国的留学生。）

The old man is a retired officer.（这老人是一个退职的军人。）

〔例外〕有极少的不及物动词的过去分词也可以放在所形容的词的后边。

In days gone by we were happy at home.（昔日我们享受家庭的乐趣。）

I have met my friend just returned from abroad.（我遇到我的朋友刚从外国回来。）

3. 误：Taking breakfast, they went to school.

正：Having taken breakfast, they went to school.

（他吃完早饭后便上学去。）

〔说明〕在分词修饰短语中，现在分词所表示的动作常和句中谓语部分的动词所表示的动作是同时的。假使在短语中所表示的行动先于谓语部分动词时，则应用完成分词。在上面的句子里，吃饭的行动在入学的行动的前面，所以应该把 Taking 改为 Having taken。

〔类例〕 Having written my composition, I have nothing more to do.

（写完作文后，我没有事情可做了。）

Having served for ten years, the officer retired.（这军官服务了十年后退职了。）

Having finished his task, he went home.（他工作完毕后回家了。）

4. 误：Flying over our heads, we could see some sabrejets.

正：We could see some sabrejets flying over our heads.

（我们能够看到几架军刀式喷气飞机在我们的头上飞行。）

〔说明〕分辨修饰语必须贴近它所修饰的部分，否则容易引起误会。在上面的误句里 flying over our heads 一短语绝不是 we 的修饰语，所以应该把它放在它所修饰的 sabrejets 的后面。

〔类例〕The girl is listening to bird singing in the tree.（女孩倾听着鸟在树上唱歌。）

I saw him standing at the door.（我见他立在门口。）

Standing at the door I saw him.（我站在门口时看见他。）

5. 误：Sailing on and on the new world was discovered.

正：Sailing on and on Columbus discovered the new world.

（当哥伦布继续向前航行时，发现新大陆。）

〔说明〕误句中的 sailing 和句中的任何词都不发生关系，换句话说句中没有词受它的形容，所以这种分词被称为不连接的分词（dangling participle），这是我们应该避免的。所以我们应该把误句改正如上，如是则 sailing on and on 成为 Columbus 的修饰语。

〔类例〕 Eating our dinner, we see the sky clear up.（当我们吃饭的时候，天放晴了。）

Walking in the garden, we saw many beautiful flowers.

（当我们在花园里散步的时候，看到许多美丽的花。）

Living a long way from town, he rarely has visitors.

（因为住在远离都市的地方，来客也稀少了。）

6. 误：Being a fine day, I went out for a walk.

正：It being a fine day, I went out for a walk.

或 As it is a fine day, I went out for a walk.

（因为天气好，我出去散步。）

〔说明〕Being a fine day 是不连接的分词，且无法改造句子的形式使它修饰句中的主语，像这种情形只可以把 being a fine day 改为独立构文 It being a fine day，或改为副词短句 As it is a fine day。

〔类例〕 It being very cold , we made a fire.（因为天气冷，我们生火。）

Night coming on , we started for home.（天晚了，我们动身回家。）

It being Sunday , there was no school.（因为是星期日，所以不上课。）

（11）动名词的错误

1. 误：Do you like me staying here？

正：Do you like my staying here？

（你高兴我留在此地吗？）

〔说明〕名词或代词作动名词的主语时，常用属格的形式，在上面的误句里 staying 是动名词，me 是动名词的主语，所以应该把 me 改为 my。

〔类例〕What is the use of your reading that book？（你读那本书有什么用处呢？）

Would you mind my shutting the window？（你反对我关这窗子吗？）

The reason of Mr. Chang’s leaving is plain.（张先生离开的理由是明显的。）

2. 误：I like my going to school.

正：I like going to school.

（我喜欢上学校。）

〔说明〕在 I cannot approve of his marrying so young.（我不能赞成他如此早年结婚。）这类的句子中，动名词（marrying）的主动者并不就是主要动词（approve）的主语（I），所以动名词的主语必须另外表明。但是当动名词的主动者就是主要动词的主语的时候，动名词的主语便不必另外表明，如：He denied having done it.（他否认他曾经做过这事。）在上面的从句里动名词 going 的主语就是主要动词 like 的 I，所以应该将 my 略去。

〔例外〕You are proud of your being rich, aren’t you？（你是不是对于你的富有而骄傲呢？）

在这句里用 your 是为了加强语气的。

〔类例〕 I am sure of passing the examination.（我相信会通过考试。）

He doesn’t like admitting it.（他不愿意承认那事。）

He regrets having done such a thing.（他懊悔做了这样的事情。）

3. 误：After reading the book, it was returned to the library.

正：After reading the book, I returned it to the library.

（我将这本书读完后，便把它归还到图书馆去。）

〔说明〕假使把动名词和介词合成的短语放在句首时，这个短语须指全句的主语，否则便犯一种错误，叫作不联结的动名词（dangling gerund）。在误句中的 after reading the book 不能指 it, 所以应该把全句改造，将动名词 reading 所指的（I）成为主语。但是当动名词短语表示一个普遍的动作时，便可以用于句中，不和句中别的部分发生关系，如：

In traveling , good drinking water is essential.（旅行时，好的饮水是必须的。）

In doing this work, great care is necessary.（做这件事情，必须极小心。）

〔类例〕 After making a great effort, he at last gained his end.（他努力工作后，最后达到他的目的。）

On hearing the sad news，she began to weep.（听到悲哀的消息后，他开始哭泣。）

On climbing to the top of the hill, I found a beautiful view spreading out before me.

（我爬到山顶后，发现美丽的景色展开在我的眼前。）

4. 误：I could not avoid to do so.

正：I could not avoid doing so.

（我不得不这样做。）

〔说明〕有些动词的后面，只能接动名词，有些动词的后面只能接不定词，有些动词的后面却两样都可以用。在 avoid 的后面，只能接动名词。所以应该把上面误句里的 to do so 改为 doing so。

〔类例〕I enjoy riding.（我喜欢骑马。）

I delayed answering you owing to pressure of work.（我因事忙迟于答复你。）

I suggest asking her advice.（我提议请教她。）

I have finished preparing the lesson.（我已经准备功课完毕。）

I cannot help pitying him.（我不禁怜悯他。）

〔参考〕有些动词的后面只能接不定词，如：

I once hoped to succeed.（我曾一度希望成功。）

I want to see her.（我要见她。）

I long to see him.（我渴望见他。）

有些动词的后面可以接动名词或不定词，如

I like getting up early. I like to get up early. | （我喜欢早起。）

I begin doing it. I begin to do it. | （我开始做事情。）

He continued doing it. He continued to do it. | （他继续做这件事。）

有些动词的后面可以接动名词，也可以接不定词，但是它们所表达的意思完全不同，如：

He stopped thinking（. 他停止思考。）

He stopped to think（. 他停下来思考。）

I forgot to do it（. 我忘记做这件事。）

I forgot doing it（. 我已经做过这件事，但是我忘记曾经做过这件事。）

I remember seeing him a year ago（. 我记得一年前见过他）

You must remember to see him tomorrow（. 你必须记得明天去看他。）

5. 误：I am busy to write a composition.

正：I am busy writing a composition.

（我忙于写一篇作文。）

〔说明〕在形容词 busy, worth 和介词 near 后面须接动名词。在上面的误句里 to write 接在 busy 的后面，所以应该改为 writing。

〔类例〕This book is worth reading.（这本书是值得读的。）

The sun was near setting.（太阳快下山。）

I am busy preparing for the examination.（我忙于预备考试。）

6. 误：I object to be treated in this way.

正：I object to being treated in this way.

（我反对被如此对待。）

〔说明〕有些动词后面跟着的 to 是介词，在它们的后面不应该接不定词，应该接动名词。在上面的句子里 object 后面的 to 是介词，所以应该把 be treated 改为 being treated。

〔类例〕He devoted every evening to reading fiction.（他花费每晚的时间读小说。）

He gives his life to studying English.（他花费他的一生学习英文。）

We look forward to seeing you again.（我们期望再看到你。）

He has taken to playing on the piano all day.（他终日弹钢琴。）

7. 误：I am used to go there.

正：I am used to going there.

（那里我是惯去的。）

比较：I used to go there.

（在过去我惯去那里。）

〔说明〕在有些“verb to be + 分词形容词”后常接介词 to 再接动名词，很容易误接不定词，如 used, unused, opposed 就属于这类分词形容词。在上面的误句里，在“verb to be used”的后面接不定词违反了习惯的用法，所以应该把它改为 to going there。

〔类例〕I am unused to smoking cigarettes.（我不惯于吸香烟。）

I am used to getting up early.（我惯于早起。）

I am opposed to permitting him to go.（我反对准许他去。）

8. 误：I have a strong objection to waste time.

正：I have a strong objection to wasting time.

（我对于浪费光阴极为反对。）

〔说明〕在有些名词的后边常接介词 to 再接动名词，很容易误接不定词，如 objection, view, resistance 就属于这类名词。在上面的误句里 objection 后接不定词违反了习惯的用法，所以应该把 to waste 改为 to wasting。

〔类例〕They offered resistance to being ill-used.（他们反抗虐待。）

He feels an objection to getting up so early.（他不愿起得如此的早。）

The studied English grammar with a view to improving their English.

（他们为求英文的进步而研究英文语法。）

〔附注〕在 objection 和 view 的后面也有接不定词的，但是在语法家看来认为是错误的或不好的英文。

9. 误：He is in the habit to rise early.

正：He is in the habit of rising early.

（他惯于早起。）

〔说明〕有些名词后不能接不定词, 只能接动名词，如 habit, plan, duty, idea 等就属于这类的名词。在上面的误句里 habit 的后面跟不定词，不合习惯，应该改为 of rising。

〔类例〕I will abandon the idea of going.（我将放弃去意。）

I have a plan for overcoming our difficulties.（我有一个计划克服我们的困难。）

We should never neglect the duty of obeying our parents.

（我们永不应该忽略服从父母的义务。）

10. 误：He is fond to hunt.

正：He is fond of hunting.

（他喜欢打猎。）

〔说明〕在有些形容词的后面须先接介词，然后再接动名词，不能接不定词，如 fond, capable，equal 和 useful 等，就属于这类形容词。在上面的误句里，在 fond 的后面接不定词，违反习惯的用法，所以应该把它改为 of hunting。

〔类例〕He is capable of doing it.（他能够做这件事情。）

This is equal to saying that he is not a fool.（这样就等于说他不是智力障碍者。）

The book is useful in helping us to write English correctly.

（这本书有助于我们写正确的英语。）

〔参考〕有些形容词的后面可以接介词再接动名词，也可以接不定词。

He is afraid of dying（. 他怕死。）

He is afraid to die（. 他不敢去死。）

I am delighted at seeing you. I am delighted to see you. | （我看到你很高兴。）

I was surprised at hearing the news. I was surprised to hear the news. | （我听到这个消息觉得惊奇。）

（12）名词的数的错误

1. 误：The branchs of the trees are waving to and fro.

正：The branches of the trees are waving to and fro.

（树枝前后摇晃。）

〔说明〕假使单数名词的词尾是 s 或 x, z, ch, sh，变成复数时，须加 es。

如：ass（驴）—asses

glass（玻璃杯）—glasses

inch（英寸）—inches

brush（刷子）—brushes

bench（长凳）—benches

branch（树枝）——branches

adz（手斧）—adzes

quiz（问答的口试）—quizzes

（quiz 变成复数须先重复 z 再加 es 可说是一个特别的例子。）

在上面句子里的 branch 的语尾是 ch，所以变复数时，必须在它的后面加 es。

〔类例〕Twelve inches make one foot.（十二英寸为一英尺。）

There are many classes in college.（大学中班级很多。）

Foxes are cunning animals.（狐狸是狡猾的动物。）

Her work is to wash up dishes.（洗盆碟是她的工作。）

The students have many quizzes in a term.（在一学期中，学生有许多次问答式的考试。）

〔例外〕ch 发音为［k］时，则仅加 s, 如：

monarch（君主）——monarchs

patriarch（族长）——patriarchs

stomach（胃）——stomachs

In old times there were many monarchs in Europe.（在古时，欧洲有许多君主。）

2. 误：Heros are worshipped by people.

正：Heroes are worshipped by people.

（英雄被人们崇拜。）

〔说明〕假使单数名词的语尾是 o，而 o 的前面是辅音，变成复数时，有一部分必须加 es，有一部分只需加 s，有一部分可以加 es，也可以加 s，现在把这三种名词的变化举例如下:

a. 加 es 的名词：

mango（杧果）—mangoes

hero（英雄）—heroes

motto（座右铭）—mottoes

negro（黑人）—negroes

potato（马铃薯）—potatoes

tomato（番茄）—tomatoes

volcano（火山）—volcanoes

b. 只加 s 的名词：

piano（钢琴）—pianos

solo（独唱）—solos

two（两个的东西）—twos

zero（零）—zeros

可加 es，也可以加 s 的名词：

halo（光轮）—haloes or halos

memento（纪念物）—mementoes or mementos

mosquito（蚊）—mosquitoes or mosquitos

假使 o 的前面是元音，变成复数时，只要加 s，如：

bamboo（竹）—bamboos

cuckoo（杜鹃）—cuckoos

curio（珍物）—curios

portfolio（文书夹）—portfolios

embryo（胚）—embryos

在上面的句子里的 hero 的复数是 heroes，所以应该把 hero 改为 heroes。

〔类例〕In spring, we hear cuckoos singing in the forest.

（在春天里，我们听到杜鹃在树林中唱歌。）

We have a cluster of bamboos in the garden.（我们在花园里有竹一丛。）

There are many active volcanoes in Japan.（日本有许多活火山。）

I like eating tomatoes , potatoes and mangoes.（我爱吃番茄、番薯和杧果。）

3. 误：The maple leafs turn red in autumn.

正：The maple leaves turn red in autumn.

（枫叶在秋天变成红色。）

〔说明〕假使单数名词的语尾是 f 或 fe，变成复数的时候，有一部分这种名词须把 f 或 fe 改为 ves，如

leaf（树叶）—leaves

knife（刀）—knives

half（一半）—halves

thief（贼）—thieves

life（生命）—lives

wife（妻子）—wives

所以上面句子里的 leafs 应改为 leaves。还有一部分这种名词改变复数时只需加 s，如：

chief（领袖）—chiefs

handkerchief（手帕）—handkerchiefs

grief（悲哀）—griefs

hoof（蹄）—hoofs

roof（屋顶）—roofs

gulf（湾）—gulfs

safe（保险箱）—safes

还有些名词语尾是 ff 或 rf，变成复数时统加 s，如:

cuff（袖口）—cuffs

cliff（悬崖）—cliffs

dwarf（矮子）—dwarfs

scarf（围巾）—scarfs

wharf（码头）—wharfs（或 wharves）

〔类例〕Two halves make up the whole.（两个一半合成整个。）

I bought two dozen handkerchiefs.（我买了两打手帕。）

The mountain is abounding in cliffs.（这山多悬崖。）

I saw many beautiful scarfs in a show-window.

（我在商店的陈列窗里看到许多美丽的围巾。）

4. 误：I told the children many storys about fairies.

正：I told the children many stories about fairies.

（我讲了许多神仙故事给孩子们听。）

〔说明〕假使单数名词的语尾是 y 而 y 的前面又是辅音，变成复数时，须把它的 y 改为 i 再加 es。如：

baby（婴孩）—babies

city（城）—cities

fly（苍蝇）—flies

lady（女士）—ladies

story（故事，楼）—stories

所以应将上面句子里的 storys 改为 stories。假使 y 前面是元音，变成复数时，只需加 s。如：

day（日子）—days

key（钥匙）—keys

boy（孩子）—boys

假使语尾是 quy, 变成复数时，须先将 y 改为 i, 然后再加 es。因为 qu 的发音是［kw］，它是二重辅音，所以还须依照前面的规则把 y 变成 i 再加 es，如：

colloquy（对话）—colloquies

soliloquy（独语）—soliloquies

〔类例〕He killed seven flies at a blow.（他一下打死七个苍蝇。）

The keys are tied together.（钥匙系在一起。）

There are many soliloquies in Hamlet.（在《哈姆雷特》一剧中有许多独白。）

5. 误：The farmer plowed his field with a yoke of oxes.

正：The farmer plowed his field with a yoke of oxen.

（农夫以一对牛犁田。）

〔说明〕有些名词从单数变成复数时，并不照普通的规则加 s。如：

child（小孩）—children foot（足）—feet

goose（鹅）—geese louse（虱）—lice

man（人）—men mouse（鼷鼠）—mice

ox（牛）—oxen tooth（齿）—teeth

woman（女人）—women

ox 的复数是 oxen，所以应将上面句子里的 oxes 改为 oxen。

〔类例〕Mothers love their children.（母亲爱她们的孩子。）

Mice have sharp teeth.（小鼠有锐利的牙齿。）

The geese are eating grass.（鹅在食草。）

6. 误：Sheeps are useful animals.

正：Sheep are useful animals.

（羊是有用的动物。）

〔说明〕名词中如 fish, deer, swine, salmon, trout, corps, series, species 等词的单数和复数系同一形式，故它们的复数，不改变形式。fish 一词虽还有 fishes 的复数形，可是它的意思却不同，它是指各种鱼类的。sheep 的复数形也是 sheep, 所以应该把上面误句里的 sheeps 改为 sheep。

〔类例〕We saw many beautiful deer in the zoological garden.（我们在动物园中看到许多美丽的鹿。）

I caught several trout the other day.（前几天我捉到几条鳟鱼。）

A shepherd tends his sheep.（一个牧羊人牧他的羊。）

7. 误：I can see a bacteria with the help of a microscope.

正：I can see a bacterium with the help of a microscope.

（我用一架显微镜能够看见一个细菌。）

〔说明〕普通在书上所见的 bacteria 是 bacterium 的复数。在误句中的 a bacteria 显然是错的，所以应该把它改正为 a bacterium。这种是外来语的变化，现在把日常见到的这种外来语和它们的变化略举如下：

拉丁语

单数 | 复数
alumna（女校友） | alumnae
alumnus（校友） | alumni
apparatus（器械） | apapratus or apparatuses
appendix（附属品） | appendices or appendixes
axis（轴） | axes
bacterium（细菌） | bacteria
curriculum（课程） | curricula or curriculums
datum（论据） | data
erratum（刊误） | errata
focus（焦点） | foci or focuses
formula（公式） | formulae or formulas
index（指数） | indices
index（索引） | indexes
memorandum（备忘录） | memoranda or memorandums
radius（半径） | radii or radiuses
series（连续） | series
species（种） | species

希腊语

单数 | 复数
analysis（分析） | analyses
basis（基础） | bases
crisis（危机） | crises
criterion（标准） | criteria or criterions
hypothesis（假设） | hypotheses
phenomenon（现象） | phenomena
synopsis（要略） | synopses
thesis（论文） | theses

法语

单数 | 复数
beau（纨绔子弟） | beaux or beaus
bureau（局） | bureaux or bureaus
corps（军团） | corps

〔类例〕We searched the indexes in the library for the title of the book.

（我们在图书馆的目录索引里找寻这本书的书名。）

The synopses of the plays were well written.（这些戏剧的说明书写得好。）

The curriculums of that college are well adapted to the needs of society.

（那个学院的课程颇适合社会的需要。）

The solar eclipse is a strange phenomenon.（日食是一个奇怪的现象。）

The alumni will meet this evening.（校友们今晚将相会。）

These appendixes are valuable.（这些附录是有价值的。）

8. 误：I bought two scissors.

正：I bought two pair of scissors.

（我买了两把剪刀。）

〔说明〕名词中如 gloves, glasses, spectacles, shoes, stockings, trousers, compasses, scissors, tongs 等词，指由二部合成的东西，在英语的习惯上都用复数形。假使要表示它们的数目时，须用 a pair of。

所以应该将上面句子里的 two scissors 改为 two pair of scissors。

〔类例〕I want a pair of compasses.（我要一只两脚规。）

I ordered a pair of new shoes.（我定做了一双新鞋）。

He has two pair of glasses.（他有两副眼镜。）

9. 误：He bought two dozens of eggs.

正：He bought two dozen of eggs

（他买了两打鸡蛋。）

〔说明〕假使在 dozen（一打）score（二十）hundred（百）thousand（千）等数词的前面再加别的数字时，则 dozen 等数词虽是复数也不取复数形，所以应该把上面句子里的 two dozens 改为 two dozen。

〔类例〕There were three hundred of warriors on a pass over mountains.

（在山上的荒路上有三百战士。）

He invested three thousand and five hundred of dollars in shares.

（他在股票上投资三千五百美元。）

I walked two score of miles.（我走了四十英里。）

〔参考〕在此等数词前不加数字或加 many, several 等不定数词时，则它们仍须加 s, 如：

Scores of trees were blown down.（数十株树被吹倒。）

There are several dozens of figs in the basket.（篮里有几打无花果。）

Some hundreds of people live here.（几百人住在此地。）

〔比较〕Some hundred of people live here.

（约一百人住在此地。）

10. 误：The farmer has many heads of oxen on his farm.

正：The farmer has many head of oxen on his farm.

（农夫在农场上有许多头牛。）

〔说明〕pair, couple, yoke 等表示成对的单词和 head 表示计算的单位的词，假使有别的数字或不定数字在它们的前面时，通例都不取复数形态，所以应该把上面句子里的 many heads 改为 many head。

〔类例〕 Two yoke of oxen drew the cart.（两对牛拉车。）

The hunter kept three couple of hounds.（猎人养了三对猎犬。）

She has two pair of gloves.（她有两双手套。）

〔参考〕① 假使在此等表示数的单位的词前不加数字时则此等词仍可取复数形，如：

Cattle are counted by heads.（牛以头计。）

Oxen are generally sold in yokes.（牛普通以对出售。）

Stockings are bought in pairs.（袜子成双购入。）

② 数词后面接的 pair 通例都用单数形，如：three pair of shoes，但是现在也有作复数形的如 Three pairs of shoes, many pairs of trousers.

③ couple, head, pair 等词做普通名词时，若在它们的前面加数字则须加 s, 如：

Two heads are better than one.（集思胜于独断。）

Ten couples took the floor.（十对舞伴参加跳舞。）

There were three happy pairs at the party.（那次宴会里有三对快乐的夫妇。）

11. 误：Three peoples live in the room.

劣：Three people live in the room.

佳：Three persons live in the room.

（三个人住在室内。）

〔说明〕如 cattle（牛）clergy（僧侣）people（人）police（警察）等无限集合名词普通无复数形。如说 ten cattle, two clergy, three people, twenty police 是不好的，应该改成 ten head of cattle, two clergymen, three persons, twenty policemen。因此应该把误句里的 three peoples 改为 three persons。

〔类例〕 Two policemen have been sworn in.（两位警士已宣誓就职。）

The farmer keeps forty head of cattle.（农夫养着四十头牛。）

I met three clergymen on the street.（我在街上遇见三个牧师。）

〔参考〕（1）假使 people 作民族解时，它可以加 s 成为复数，如：

There are many peoples in Asia.（亚洲有许多民族。）

（2）以不定数 many, some, several 等词来形容 people 和 cattle 是可以的，如 several people, many cattle, million people, twenty people 也是常见的。虽然还有作者写 three people，究竟是不好的。

12. 误：Bring me a chalk.

正：Bring me a piece of chalk.

（拿给我一支粉笔。）

比较：Bring me some chalk.（给我一些粉笔。）

〔说明〕物质名词如 chalk（粉笔），meat（肉），paper（纸），soap（皂），bread（面包）等词代表物质的全体，故无复数形，如要说到该项物质的一部分，须加单位名词于前面，变成复数时，即将此单位名词改为复数形，所以应将误句里的 a chalk 改为 a piece of chalk。

〔类例〕He bought three pounds of meat.（他买了三磅肉。）

Give me a piece of bread.（给我一片面包。）

Here are two cakes of soap.（此地有两块肥皂。）

〔参考〕（1）water, silk, ash 等物质名词用复数形时，则成普通名词，如：waters（海），silks（绸衣），ashes（骨灰，遗体）。

Many ships go down on the waters.（许多船只沉没在海中。）

She is dressed in silks.（她穿着绸衣。）

His ashes are in Westminster Abbey.（他葬在韦士敏斯德教堂。）

（2）glass, tin, copper 等物质名词也可以做普通名词用，加 s 则成复数，如：

He drank a glass of beer.（他喝了一杯啤酒。）

He filled the glasses with wine.（他将玻璃杯斟满了酒。）

He cannot read without his glasses.（他不戴眼镜不能看书。）

I opened a tin of peaches with a tin-opener.（我用开罐刀打开一罐桃子。）

He bought two tins of coffee.（他买了两罐咖啡。）

I haven’t a copper in my pocket.（我袋内没有一个铜板。）

He gave the beggar a few coppers.（他给乞丐几个铜币。）

13. 误：There were many looker-ons on the scene of the accident.

正：There were many lookers-on on the scene of the accident.

（在出事的地点有许多旁观者。）

〔说明〕复合名词是由数字组合而成，假使要把它变成复数，须将 s 加在主要的词上，如 looker-on 的复数是 lookers-on，所以应将误句里的 looker-ons 改为 lookers-on。下面是常见的复合名词：

单数 | 复数
commander-in-chief（大元帅） | commanders-in-chief
son-in-law（婿） | sons-in-law
passer-by（路人） | passers-by
looker-on（旁观者） | lookers-on
man-of-war（军舰） | men-of-war
runner-up（竞赛中的第二名） | runners-up（第二名、第三名等）
maid-servant（女仆） | maid-servants

〔类例〕She has many maid-servants.（她有许多女仆。）

There are two men-of-war on the sea.（海上有两条军舰。）

A dog barked at the passers-by.（一只狗向路人吠着。）

In the race, Mr. Chang was the first and Mr. Wang was the runner-up.

（在这次竞赛里，张君是第一名，王君是第二名。）

In the race, Mr. Chang was the winner, the runners-up were as follows. Mr. Lee, second place, Mr. King, third place.

（在这次竞赛里，张君是优胜者，其他的名次列举如下：李君第二名，金君第三名。）

〔参考〕① man-servant（男仆）的复数是 men-servants，这是一个特别的例子。

The lord kept many men-servants in his manor-house.

（这位贵族在庄园里拥有许多男仆。）

② 如 go-between（中间人）和 forget-me-not（毋忘草）虽然也是复合名词，它们的变复数的方法却仍和普通的名词一样，加 s 于词尾。

She made a bunch of forget-me-nots.（她做一束毋忘我花。）

The go-betweens played him a mean trick.（中间人向他施了卑鄙的手段。）

③ hogshead（大桶）很像复数却是单数，它的复数是 hogsheads。

They bought two hogsheads of wine.（他们买了两大桶的葡萄酒。）

14. 误：He is an English.

正：He is an Englishman.

（他是一个英国人。）

〔说明〕the English 指全体的英国人，假使要说一个英国人的时候，就应该用 an Englishman。所以应该把误句里的 an English 改为 an Englishman。现较大的国家的人民的单数复数和全体的变化列表于下：

单数 | 复数 | 全体
Chinese（中国人） | Chinese | the Chinese
Englishman（英人） | Englishmen | the English
American（美人） | Americans | the Americans
Frenchman（法人） | Frenchmen | the French
Russian（俄人） | Russians | the Russians
Italian（意大利人） | Italians | the Italians
Japanese（日本人） | Japanese | the Japanese
German（德人） | Germans | the Germans
Indian（印人） | Indians | the Indians
Korean（韩国人） | Koreans | the Koreans
Portugese（葡萄牙人） | Portugese | the Portugese
Spaniard（西班牙人） | Spaniards | the Spanish

Dutchman

Hollander

（荷兰人）

Dutchmen

Hollanders

the Dutch

the Hollanders

Greek（希腊人） | Greeks | the Greeks
Swiss（瑞士人） | Swiss | the Swiss
Dane（丹麦人） | Danes | the Danes
Swede（瑞典人） | Swedes | the Swedes
Norwegian（挪威人） | Norwegians | the Norwegians
Egyptian（埃及人） | Egyptians | the Egyptians
Turk（土耳其人） | Turks | the Turks

15. 误：The passenger has left two baggages in the train.

正：The passenger has left two pieces of baggage in the train.

（旅客在火车上遗忘下两件行李。）

〔说明〕名词中如 furniture（家具），bggage（行李），clothing（衣服），food（食物），merchandise（商品）等词的用法完全和物质名词一样，无复数形，在指一般事物的时候，它们的形态仍为单数，它们的前面也不能用不定冠词。欲加上数的观念时，须用 an article of，two pieces of 等量的形容短语，所以应将误句里的 two baggages 改为 two pieces of baggage。

〔类例〕A wardrobe is a piece of furniture.（衣橱是一件家具。）

She has bought a new article of clothing.（她已买了一件新衣服。）

Man needs various kinds of food.（人需要各种的食物。）

Two articles of merchandise were lost in the store.（在楼房里遗失了两件商品。）

16. 误：He gave me many good advises.

正：He gave me many pieces of good advice.

（他给我许多好的劝告。）

〔说明〕抽象名词如 advice（劝告），information（消息），luck（运气）没有复数形，并且不能把不定冠词加在它们的前面。如要加以数的观念时，须加 a stroke of，two pieces of 等表量的短语于它们的前面，如 a stroke of luck, two pieces of information, many pieces of advice 等，所以应该把上面句子里的 many advices 改为 many pieces of advice。

〔类例〕What a stroke of luck I have！（我有多么好的运气！）

These are two useful pieces of information.（那是两条有用的消息。）

Let me give you a piece of advice.（让我给你一个劝告。）

〔参考〕advice 做消息、通知或报告解时有复数形，如：

We have advices to the effect that the price of copper is declining.

（我们得到铜价下跌的通知。）

From the latest advices from Geneva，I learn that Austria will become an independent nation on May 15.

（从日内瓦最近的通讯，我知道奥国将于五月十五日成为独立的国家。）

17. 误：His parent are both living.

正：His parents are both living.

（他的父母都健在。）

〔说明〕parent（父母中的一个），twin（双生子里的一个），fellow（一双东西中的一个）等名词是指两个中的一个，若要指两个时，必须用它们的复数形，如 parents 才指双亲，twins 才指双生子，fellows 才指一对东西的两个，所以应该把语句中的 parent 改为 parents。

〔类例〕He and his twin looked so much alike that no one could tell them apart.

（他和他的孪生兄弟是如此相像，没有人能够区别他们。）

The twins are as like as two peas.（这对双生子很相像。）

The two shoes are not fellows.（这两只鞋不是一对。）

Where is the fellow of this glove？（还有一只手套在何处？）

Their father had died and their remaining parent brought up them.

（他们的父亲死了，他们的母亲把他们养育大。）

We should obey our parents.（我们应该服从父母。）

18. 误：The children played on the grasses.

正：The children played on the grass.

（孩子们在草地上玩。）

〔说明〕像 grass（草），hair（头发），beard（须），sand（沙）虽然可数，但在习惯上不用复数，所以应该把误句里的 grasses 改为 grass。

〔类例〕He picked up a handful of sand.（他抓了一把沙。）

She has her hair cut in Hepburn’s style.（她把她的头发剪成赫本式。）

He trimmed his beard.（他梳他的胡须。）

〔参考〕（1）假使我们讲到不同种的草时，可以用 grass 的复数形 grasses, 如：

There are various grasses growing in the garden.（园中生长各种的草。）

（2）hair 在指白发及 to split hairs 一个成语中可用复数，如：

He often splits hairs.（他常吹毛求疵。）

（3）sand 作沙丘、沙滩解时可用复数，如：

Some boys are playing on the sands.（几个孩子正在沙滩上游戏。）

（4）whiskers（髯）因生于脸的两颊，故有两处髯，习惯上可用复数。

His whiskers were long.（他的髯长了。）

19. 误：We set out on a five-miles journey.

正：We set out on a five-mile journey.

（我们出发作五英里的旅行。）

〔说明）数字和名词可以组成复合形容词，它们的中间须加用连接号（hyphen），在复合形容词中的名词，常用单数，所以应该把误句中的 five-miles 改为 five-mile。

〔类例〕They concluded a three-year contract.（他们订了一个三年的契约。）

I gave him a five-dollar note.（我给他一张五元的钞票。）

We took a five-minute walk after supper.（晚饭后我们散步五分钟。）

20. 误：We played billiard.

正：We played billiards.

（我们打了弹子。）

〔说明〕有许多名词如 outskirts（郊外），oats（燕麦），billiards（弹子戏），heavens（天空），premises（住宅），headquarters（总部），thanks（多谢），tidings（消息），news（消息），clothes（衣服），circumstances（环境）等名词常用复数形，所以应该将误句里的 billiard 改为 billiards。

〔类例〕He lived on the outskirts of the city.（他住在郊外。）

Having sowed his wild oats in Paris as a young student, James came back very much matured and ready to settle down.

（詹姆士在巴黎求学时，过着放荡的生活，他回来时已极成熟准备安居下来。）

Many thanks for your invitation.（多谢你的邀请。）

The messenger brought tidings from the battlefront.（使者从前线带来消息。）

The news is not true.（这消息是不确实的。）

His clothes are shabby.（他的衣服已破旧。）

It depends on circumstances.（这要看情形而决定。）

The lark sings in the heavens.（云雀在天空中歌唱。）

He sleeps on the premises.（他睡在宅内。）

He was sent to the Garrison Headquarters.（他被送到警备司令部。）

（13）名词的性的错误

1. 误：Mrs. Smith is the host of the International Hotel.

正：Mrs. Smith is the hostess of the International Hotel.

（史密斯太太是国际旅馆的女主人。）

〔说明〕有许多英文名词有性的区别，不能混用，如 host 指男主人，而 hostess 指女主人，所以应该把误句里的 host 改为 hostess。如 host（男主人）加 ess 便成 hostess（女主人），这种变化是有规则的，现在把常见的这种名词的变化列表如下：

雄性 | 雌性 | 雄性 | 雌性
author（作者） | authoress（女作者） | host（男主人） | hostess（女主人）
heir（继承者） | heiress（女继承者） | god（神） | goddess（女神）
patron（赞助者） | patroness（女赞助者） | lion（雄狮） | lioness（雌狮）

〔类例〕Helen Keller is a famous authoress.（凯勒是一位著名的美国女作家。）

George Sand is the patroness of music in her time.（乔治·桑是她那时代的音乐赞助者。）

As Mr. Smith was away, Tom, the eldest son acted as host at the dinner party.

（当史密斯离开时，他的长子汤姆在宴会里当主人。）

She is the only heiress to the property of her father.（她是她的父亲的财产的唯一继承人。）

Ma-Tsu is the Chinese goddess of the sea.（妈祖是中国司海的女神。）

A lioness has no mane.（雌狮子没有鬣毛。）

〔参考〕现代英语己有一种趋势，不过于重视词的性的区别，如 Helen Keller is an American author. 已被认为是无误的句子，即如 She is the only heir to the property of her father. 也被认为是通得过去的句子。

2. 误：He is a witch.

正：He is a wizard.

（他是一个男巫。）

〔说明〕witch 指巫女，wizard 才指男巫，所以应该把误句中的 witch 改为 wizard。像这种改变是没有规则的，现在我们把常见的这种名词的不规则变化列表如下：

雄性 | 雌性
uncle（叔父，舅父） | aunt（叔母，舅母）
nephew（侄，甥） | niece（侄女，甥女）
gentleman（先生） | lady（女士）
sir（先生） | madam（对女人的尊称）
bachelor（独身男子） | spinster（未婚女）
widower（鳏夫） | widow（寡妇）
bridegroom（新郎） | bride（新娘）
wizard（男巫） | witch（女巫）
horse（牡马） | mare（牝马）
ox（牡牛） | cow（牝牛）
cock（雄鸡） | hen（雌鸡）
gander（雄鹅） | goose（雌鹅）
drake（雄鸭） | duck（雌鸭）
stag（牡鹿） | hind（牝鹿）
hero（英雄，男主角） | heroine（女主角）
monk（僧） | nun（尼）

〔类例〕Romeo and Juliet are the hero and heroine of the play.

（罗密欧和朱丽叶是剧中的男主角和女主角。）

There were many widows and widowers after the war.（战后有许多寡妇和鳏夫。）

The cows are milking well now.（牛现产乳甚佳。）

I keep geese and ducks for their laying eggs.（我养鹅鸭为了生蛋。）

3. 误：Miss Mary is his fiance.

正：Miss Mary is his fiancee.

（玛丽小姐是他的未婚妻。）

〔说明〕fiance 是从法文转来的词，是指未婚夫的，fiancee 才指未婚妻，所以应将误句中的 fiance 改为 fiancee。这种外来词因为阳性词和阴性词的差别很小，很容易疏忽过去，现在把常见的而最容易弄错的几个词列表于下：

阳性 | 阴性
blond（金发男人） | blonde（金发女人）
brunet（黑发男人） | brunette（黑发女人）
fiance（未婚夫） | fiancee（未婚妻）

Mr. James is a brunet but his wife is a blonde.

（詹姆士先生是一位黑发男人，但是他的太太是一位金发女子。）

Mrs. Smith is a brunette but her husband is a blond.

（史密斯太太是一位黑发女子，但是她的丈夫是一位金发男子。）

Her fiance is my schoolmate.（她的未婚夫是我的同学。）

（14）代词性的错误

1. 误：Mary has completed his course in the middle school.

正：Mary has completed her course in the middle school.

（玛丽已读毕她的中学全部的课程。）

〔说明〕玛丽是女孩的名字，指她的代词应该是阴性的，所以应该把 his 改为 her.

〔类例〕My mother likes to do her own work, when she is well.

（我的母亲，当她身体好时，欢喜做她自己的工作。）

She with her husband called on us yesterday.（昨天她和她的丈夫一同来看我们。）

Do you think she can do this work herself？（你以为她能自己做这工作吗？）

2. 误：An old country like China can be proud of its history and civilization.

正：An old country like China can be proud of her history and civilization.

（像中国那样的古国才能以历史文化为荣。）

〔说明〕在英文中，国家、大船和飞机等名词常被看作阴性，指这些名词的代词自然也常是阴性，尤其从政治观点指国家时必须用阴性的代词 she，所以应该把误句中的 its 改为 her。

〔类例〕China has taken great strides in her industries.（中国在她的各项工业上已有很大的进步。）

The Empress of Asia was on her maiden voyage.（亚洲皇后号做她的首次航行。）

Sister Ann, soaring away over the city, set on her course for Tokyo.

（安妹号飞机飞临城的上空后，驰向东京。）

〔参考〕关于指国家的代词，若从地理上去观察常用 it 但是仍可以用 she。

Switzerland is famous for its（or her）scenery.（瑞士以景色著名。）

（15）代词数的错误

1. 误：Every student should do their own home task.

正：Every student should do his own home task.

（每个学生应该做他自己的家中作业。）

〔说明〕主语是单数时，指主语的代词也应该是单数，主语是复数时，指主语的代词也应该是复数；换一句话说代词的数一定要和它所指的名词的数一致。在上面的句子里，every student 的意思虽然是“每个学生”或“凡学生”，但是它仍旧是单数，指它的代词自然也应该是单数，所以应该把误句里的 their 改为 his。

〔类例〕I like to receive letters but do not like to write them.

（我喜欢收到信，但是我不喜欢写信。）

Each of them has his own point of view.（每个人有他自己的见解。）

Somebody has left his books there.（某人把书忘掉在那里了。）

2. 误：The committee differ in its opinion.

正：The committee differ in their opinion.

（委员们的意见不一致。）

〔说明〕集合名词表示团体时，指它的代词应该是单数，假使它表示团体中各个的分子时，则指它的代词必须是复数。在上面句子里的 committee 作委员解，所以它的后面应该用复数代词 they 的所有格 their。

〔类例〕The family were eating their supper.（这家人正在用晚饭。）

The committee made its report.（委员会作报告。）

A civilized people must do its own duty.（文明的民族必须尽其自己的责任。）

Educated people must do their own duty.（受过教育的人们必须尽他们自己的责任。）

3. 误：Neither John nor his brother has learned their lessson.

正：Neither John nor his brother has learned his lesson.

（约翰和他的兄弟都不曾读过功课。）

〔说明〕两个或两个以上的单数名词被 or 或 nor 所连接时，则所随的代词应指列于最后的一人或一物，所以它也应该是单数，假使其中有一复数名词，则此复数名词须列于最后，并且在它的后面须用复数代词。在上面的句子里两个主语都是单数，并且被 nor 所连接，所以应该把后面所随的 their 改为 his。

〔类例〕Neither the man nor his son has left his home.（他们父子都没有离开家。）

Mary or John will lend us his book.（玛丽和约翰都愿把书借给我们。）

Neither the captain nor the sailors will desert their ship.（船长和水手都不愿离开船。）

4. 误：The novelist and poet is proud of their works.

正：The novelist and poet is proud of his works.

（这位小说家兼诗人以他的著作自负。）

〔说明〕假使两个名词由 and 所联结，并且只在第一个名词前加冠词，这两个名词只表示一个人或物，则后面所随的指这人或物的代词应该是单数。上面句中的 the novelist and poet 是指一个兼诗人的小说家，故指该人或物的代词应该是单数。

〔类例〕The secretary and treasurer has finished his work.（这位文书兼会计已做完他的工作。）

My old friend and classmate is studying his lessons.（我的学友正在研习他的功课。）

The general and scholar addressed his subordinates on the plan.

（这位儒将向他的部下讲这计划。）

5. 误：Every boy and every girl prepared their lessons.

正：Every boy and every girl prepared his lessons.

（每个男孩和女孩都准备好他的功课。）

〔说明〕假使主语是两个或两个以上的名词由 and 连接而成并且各名词有 each，every 或 no 等词形容，后面所用的指这复合主语的代词应该是单数。上面句子里的复合主语是 every boy and every girl, 指它的代词必须是单数，所以应该把 their 改为 his。

〔类例〕Every gentleman and every lady took his seat.（每位先生每位女士都就座了。）

Each man and each woman should do his part for his home and country.

（每个男人每个女人都应为国家为家庭尽其本分。）

There is no bird and no insect without its mission in life.

（不论昆虫和飞鸟都有它的生存的使命。）

6. 误：The two sisters love one another.

正：The two sisters love each other.

（两位姐妹互相亲爱。）

〔说明〕each other 和 one another 的意思虽然都是互相，但是有许多语法家主张 each other 须用来指二人或二物，而 one another 却用来指三个或三个以上的人或物，所以应该把误句中 one another 改为 each other。

〔类例〕The two brothers quarrel with each other.（两位兄弟互相争吵。）

They gave presents to one another at Christmas.（圣诞节时，他们互相送礼品。）

Fifty students competed with one another for a single scholarship.

（五十个学生互争一项奖学金。）

〔参考〕有许多语法家主张 each other 和 one another 是可以混用的，如英国大语法家福禄（Fowler）在他的《现代英文用法》（Modern English Usage） 中也说这种区别没有历史的根据。在古英文里有 either other 一短语用来指二人或二物，现在已没有人用它了，但是有许多语法家主张严格地加以区别，关于这点读者应该知道的。

7. 误：None of my two sisters is here.

正：Neither of my two sisters is here.

（我的两个姐妹都没有在此地。）

〔说明〕either 或 neither 都被用来指二人或二物，假使要指三个或三个以上的人或物则须用 any 或 none。在上面的句子里，因为要指两个姐妹，所以应该用 neither。

〔类例〕 Neither of the two books is of any use to me.（这两本书对于我一本都没有用。）

Do you know any of these books？（你在这些书中晓得几本吗？）

Either of the two boys may go.（两个孩子都可以去。）

None of my lost books were found.（我所遗失的书一本也没有找到。）

8. 误：I have a new dictionary and several old one.

正：I have a new dictionary and several old ones.

（我有一本新字典和几本旧字典。）

〔说明〕one 可以做代词用，它所指的人或物和前面所提到的人或物不是同一的，却是同类的，它的用法和普通的名词一样指复数的东西时，须加 s，所以应该把误句里的 one 改为 ones。

〔类例〕Birds love their young ones.（鸟喜欢它们的小鸟。）

She kept three black cats and two white ones.（她养了三只黑猫和两只白猫。）

The boy has three balls；a red one and two white ones.

（这个孩子有三个球，一个红的，两个白的。）

9. 误：One of the three books is the Bible, but the other are novel.

正：One of the three books is the Bible，but the others are novels.

（三本书中，一本是圣经，别的两本却是小说。）

〔说明〕one 可以表示人或物中的某一个，the other 可以表示余下来的一个，假使余下来的人或物不止一个时，则须用 the others 来表示它。上面的句子叙述有三本书，其中一本是圣经，其余的两本须用 the others 来指明，所以应该把误句里的 the other 改为 the others。

〔类例〕Have you any other？（你还有别一个吗？）

You should think of others.（你应该顾虑到别人。）

One or other of us will be there.（我们中会有一个人到那里去。）

10. 误：The mountains of Asia are higher than that of America.

正：The mountains of Asia are higher than those of America.

（亚洲的山比美洲的山高。）

〔说明〕that 只能代替单数的名词，若要代替复数的名词必须用 those。在上面句子里的 mountains 是复数的，所以应该用复数的代词 those 来代替它。

〔类例〕The air of mountains is much cooler than that of lowlands.

（山上的空气比低地的空气凉得多。）

The customs of North China are different from those of the South.

（中国北部的风俗和南方的不同。）

I prefer the style of Carlyle to that of Emerson.（我宁爱卡莱尔的文体而不爱爱默生的。）

11. 误：Many a student passed their examinations with success.

正：Many a student passed his examinations with success.

（许多学生考试成绩很好。）

〔说明〕many a 是一个成语，它的后面应该接单数的名词；假使主语受 many a 形容时，它的后面不但应该接单数的动词，而且连指它的代词都应该是单数的，所以应该把误句里的 their 改为 his。

〔类例〕Many a soldier fought for his country.（许多士兵为祖国作战。）

Many a student goes in for his examination.（许多学生应试。）

Many a young man fought his way in the world.（许多青年在世界上奋斗出他们的生路来。）

（16）代词位的错误

1. 误：It is me that have done this work.

正：It is I that have done this work.

（这件事是我做的。）

〔说明〕假使代词放在连系动词 verb to be 的后面指主语，它被叫作谓语主语，它须在主位，所以应该把误句里的 me 改为 I。

〔类例〕It is not I，who am to blame.（我不应受责。）

It was we , to whom be told it.（他把这事告诉我们。）

The man who spoke was he.（讲话的人是他。）

〔参考〕英人在口语中都说 It is me. 虽然不合语法却不能算错的。

2. 误：I have no friend but he.

正：I have no friend but him.

（除他以外，我没有别的朋友。）

〔说明〕介词的宾语都应该是宾位，上面句子里的 but 是介词，它的宾语应该是 him，所以应该把 he 改为 him。

〔类例〕He sat beside her.（他坐在她的旁边。）

All were present but him.（除了他以外，都到了。）

You can depend upon me.（你可以信任我。）

3. 误：He is taller than me.

正：He is taller than I.

（他比我高。）

〔说明〕假使代词接在连词 than 和 as 的后面，它的位完全要看语句的意思而决定，上面的句子是 He is taller than I am. 的省略句子，所以应该把 me 改成 I。但是连词的后面也可以接宾格的代词这是因为把从句中的主语和动词省去的缘故，如

My mother loves my sister better than me. = My mother loves my sister than she loves me.

（母亲爱我的妹妹较甚于爱我。）

He works harder than she.（他比她工作努力。）

He writes better than we.（他比我们写得好。）

He helps you as well as I.（他帮助你像我帮助你一样。）

He helps you as well as me.（他帮助你像他帮助我一样。）

4. 误：We believed the actor to be he.

正：We believed the actor to be him.

（我们相信这个戏子就是他。）

〔说明〕在上面的句子里，actor 是它下面的不定词的主语，凡有主语的不定词的补足语必须是宾格的，所以应该把误句里的 he 改为 him。

〔类例〕In the darkness mother supposed John to be me.（在黑暗中母亲以为约翰是我。）

Do you take me to be him？（你把我当作他吗？）

We imagine the robbers to be them.（我们以为强盗就是他们。）

5. 误：In the darkness John was supposed to be me.

正：In the darkness John was supposed to be I.

（在黑暗中，约翰被人当作我。）

〔说明〕假使一个不定词没有主语，它的补足语应该是主格的。在上面的句子里的不定词 to be 没有主语，它的补足语必须是主格的，所以应该把误句里的 me 改为 I。

〔类例〕Her sister was thought to be she.（她的妹妹被别人当作她。）

It seems to be he.（这似乎是他。）

I should like to be he.（我高兴是他。）

6. 误：The two of us，John and me，went by train.

正：The two of us，John and I，went by train.

（我们中间的两个人，约翰和我坐火车去。）

〔说明〕同位语的格要和它同位的词的格一样，在上面的句子里 The two 是主语，它的同位语 John and I 也应该是主格，所以应该把误句里的 me 改为 I。

Our teacher will punish us，you and me.（我们的先生将处罚你和我。）

像上面的例句中，us 是宾格，所以它的同位语 you and me，也应该是宾格的。

〔类例〕Mr. Chang invited us，you and me，to a conversazione.（张先生邀你和我去参加座谈会。）

We，you and I，should help him.（你和我应该帮助他。）

Mrs. John gave her friends，Mary and me， a tea party.

（约翰太太为她的朋友玛丽和我举行一个茶会。）

（17）代词所有格的错误

1. 误：One hates his enemies and loves his friends.

正：One hates one’s enemies and loves one’s friends.

（任何人恨他的敌人，爱他的友人。）

〔说明〕不定代词 one 不特别指其一个人而是指一般人时，在它的后面所跟的代词所有格须是 one’s，所以应该把误句里的 his 改为 one’s。

〔类例〕One must be careful of one’s health，especially when one is working hard.

（任何人必须留心他的健康，尤其当他努力工作时。）

One should be careful in choosing one’s associates.（一个人在选择朋友时应当留意。）

One should obey one’s parents.（凡人应该服从他的父母。）

〔参考〕在美语中 one 的后面可以任意接 his, 如：

One should obey one’s parents.（英语）

One should obey his parents.（美语）

2. 误：One hates one’s enemies and another forgives them.

正：One hates his enemies and another forgives them.

（一个人恨他的敌人，别一个人原谅他们。）

〔说明〕在上面句子里的 one 是 one of them，它的意思是比较固定的，它的后面须跟代词所有格 his，所以应该把误句里的 one’s 改为 his。

〔类例〕One of the men lost his hat.（人们中有一个人失掉了他的帽子。）

One of my brothers often neglects his duties.（我有一个兄弟常疏忽他的职务。）

One of his sisters devoted her life to music.（他有一个姐妹专攻音乐。）

3. 误：No one should neglect one’s duties.

正：No one should neglect his duties.

（一个人不应该疏忽他的义务。）

〔说明〕在 anyone, everyone, no one, some one 等不定代词之后须跟代词所有格 his，所以应该把误句里 no one 后面所跟的 one’s 改为 his。

〔类例〕Any one knows his own name.（任何人知道他自己的名字。）

Every one should obey his parents.（每个人应该服从他的父母。）

Someone has left his book here.（有人把书遗忘在此地了。）

（18）代词太多的错误

1. 误：Boys and girls who are honest and brave，they are worthy of respect.

正：Boys and girls，who are honest and brave，are worthy of respect.

　（诚实和勇敢的男女孩子是很值得尊敬的。）

〔说明〕在误句里 Boys and girls 是主语，who are honest and brave 是形容主语的形容从句，are 是动词，they 在句子里没有地位，是多余的，所以应该把它删去。

〔类例〕The boy whom you saw is my cousin.（你看到的那个孩子是我的表兄弟。）

Students whom some teachers would call‘naughty’are often very clever.

（被某些先生叫作顽皮的学生常是极聪明的。）

A boy who is always talking can neither learn nor work.

（常讲话的孩子不但不能学习也不能工作。）

（19）代词的错用

1. 误：One does well what he likes to do.

正：One does well what one likes to do.

（一个人对于喜欢做的事情是做得好的。）

〔说明〕不定代词 one 指任何人时它的后面须跟不定代词 one，不应该跟 he，所以应该把误句里的 he 改为 one。

〔类例〕If one fell，one would be hurt badly.（假使一个人跌倒，他会受伤得很厉害。）

One never knows when one may be in need of a faithful friend.

（一个人永不知道什么时候会需要一个忠实的朋友。）

One must be careful of what one wants to say.（一个人应该注意他所要讲的话。）

2. 误：A house built of brick lasts longer than that of wood.

正：A house built of brick lasts longer than one of wood.

（砖建的房屋要比木建的房屋持久。）

〔说明〕如在 The cost of silver is less than that of gold.　一句中，that= the cost，that 是指一定的价格，因此 that 只能代替一个指定的东西。假使要代替一个不完全指定的东西时，须用 one，所以应该把误句里的 that 改成 one。

〔类例〕A coat made of khaki costs less than one made of gabardine.

（卡其布做的上装较加布丁所做的要便宜。）

I prefer a view in the country to one in a city.（我宁爱乡间的景色，不爱城中的景色。）

This is an essay on morals rather than one on education.

（与其说这是一篇论教育的文章不如说这是一篇论道德的文章。）

〔参考〕看上面的类例，我们可以明白代替 a…要用 one，假使代替 the…须用 that，下面便是用 that 的例句：

I prefer the climate of Tainan to that of the Pescadores.

（我宁爱台南的气候，不爱澎湖的气候。）

The study of idiom is as important as that of Grammar.

（学习成语是和学习语法一样重要的。）

（20）关系代词的格的错误

1. 误：The girl who you saw yesterday is my cousin.

正：The girl whom you saw yesterday is my cousin.

（昨天你看到的那个女孩子是我的表妹。）

〔说明〕关系代词的格和它的先行词没有关系，它的格的决定，要看它在从句里的用法而定，在主格时用 who，在宾格时用 whom。在上面句子里的关系代词在从句里是 saw 的宾语，所以应该把误句里的 who 改为 whom。

〔类例〕Persons who are quarrelsome are despised.（好争的人是被轻视的。）

You are the person whom I wish to see.（你是我希望要看的人。）

The boy who brought you the letter is my brother.（带给你信的那个孩子是我的兄弟。）

2. 误：Master Henry is the boy whom，everyone thinks，will win the scholarship.

正：Master Henry is the boy who，everyone thinks，will win the scholarship.

（亨利君是每人以为会得奖学金的孩子。）

〔说明〕关系代词的格不受 I believe，they said，we thought，I imagined 等插入短句的影响，在上面的句子里 everyone thinks 是插入短句，因此它和它的前面的关系代词的格没有关系，在 boy 后所用的关系代词是动词 will win 的主语，所以应该把误句里的 whom 改为 who。

〔类例〕The workmen，who，we believed，were contented went on a strike.

（我们以为满足的工人继续罢工。）

He saw the doctor who，they said，carried out the operation so successfully.

（他看到那位医生，据他们说，他是如此成功地完成手术。）

This is the student who，I imagined，would have been successful.

（这是我以为会成功的学生。）

3. 误：The captain asked whomever dared to join the expedition.

正：The captain asked whoever dared to join the expedition.

（队长问谁敢参加远征队。）

〔说明〕复合关系代词的格要看它在从句里的用法而决定，它的格的决定绝不受在它前面的动词的影响。上面句子里的复合关系代词是动词 dared 的主语，所以应该把误句里的 whomever 改为 whoever。

〔类例〕I will reward whoever can solve this problem.（我将奖赏任何能解答这个问题的人。）

You may invite whomever you like.（你可以邀请任何你喜欢的人）。

（21）关系代词 that，which 和 who 间的错用

1. 误：His father，that is in Hongkong，is coming home next week.

正：His father，who is in Hongkong，is coming home next week.

（他的父亲在香港，将于下星期回家。）

〔说明〕关系代词 that 有限定性，在它的前面不能有逗点，如：In the class，there were many students that passed the examination.（在全班中，有许多学生考试及格。）who 的前面加逗点是表示说明性的或继续性的，如：In the class，there were many students，who passed the examination.（这班里有许多学生，他们考试都及格了。）在上面的句子里，父亲只有一个，不必用限定性的 that，除非他有两个父亲，才能用限定性的 that, 所以应该把误句里的 that 改成 who。

〔类例〕I lived with Mr. Chang，who taught me English.（我和张先生同住，他教我英文。）

I met a student，who handed me this notebook.（我遇到一个学生，他交给我这本笔记簿。）

I wrote to your brother，who replied that you had arrived.

（我写信给你的兄弟，他回信说你已回来了。）

比较:

In this class，the students that were present numbered fifty.

（这班出席的学生共有五十个。）（有些没有出席）

In this class，the students，who were present，numbered fifty.

（这班学生都出席了，共有五十个。）

比较:

His sister that lives in Paris can speak French fluently.

（他那住在巴黎的姐姐能讲流利的法文。）（他最少有两位姐妹）

His sister，who lives in Paris，can speak French fluently.

（他的姐姐住在巴黎能够讲流利的法语。）（他只有一个姐妹）

2. 误：Last night，I received his letter，that I have forgotten to bring here.

正：Last night，I received his letter，which I have forgotten to bring here.

（昨夜收到他的信，我忘记把它带来了。）

〔说明〕关系代词 that 有限定性，在它的前面不能用逗点，如：In my bookcase，there are many books that are hard to read.（在我的书柜内的全部书里，有许多书是难读的。）which 前面加逗点是表示说明性的或继续性的，如：In my bookcase，there are many books which are hard to read.（我的书柜里有许多书，它们都是很难读的。）在上面的句子里，在 letter 的后面有逗点表示后面所跟的从句是说明性的，或继续性的，并非限定性的，因此须用 which，不应用 that，所以应该把误句里的 that 改成 which。

〔类例〕I will lend you this novel，which is both easy and interesting.

（我要把这本小说借给你，因为它既容易又有趣。）

Sun Moon Lake，which lies 760 meters above the sea level，is one of the most noted scenic spots in Formosa.

（日月潭高于海平面760米，是台湾最有名的风景区中的一个。）

比较:

Mr. Wang has two houses that are built of brick.

（王先生有两所砖造的房子。）（他应该还有用别的材料所造的）

Mr. Wang has two houses，which are built of brick.

（王先生有两所房子都是用砖造的。）（他只有两所房子）

比较:

Each made a list of books that had influenced him.

（每个人写下一张对于他有影响的书的书目来。）

I always buy his books，which have influenced me greatly.

（我常常买他的书，这些书对我的影响很大。）

3. 误：He is a man which can be trusted at all times.

正：He is a man who can be trusted at all times.

（他是一个所有时候都可以信任的人。）

〔说明〕关系代词 who 是指人的，which 除了在疑问时指人外，在普通的情形下是指物的，所以应该把误句里的 which 改为 who。

〔类例〕The girl whom you saw is our new secretary.（你看到的那个少女是我们的新秘书。）

The man who telephoned was John.（打电话的人是约翰。）

Henry，whom I met yesterday，is an engineer.（昨天我遇到亨利，他是一个工程师。）

〔参考〕（1）在古英文里，which 不在疑问时也可以指人的，如《圣经》中：

Our Father which art in heaven. Hallowed be thy name.

（我们在天上的父，愿人们都尊你的名为圣。）

（2）who 普通只用于人，却也可以指高贵、勇敢的动物。如：

Bucephala was built near the mausoleum of Bucephalus，who died in the Indian campaign of Alexander.

（印度的巴塞法拉城建筑在离亚历山大的名马巴塞法拉宏大的坟墓不远的地方，它死于亚历山大打印度的一次战争中。）

Then there was the Mocker，who， with one leg destroyed by a shell splinter，struggled home from the Beaumont front in St. Mihiel sector.

（后来有名莫苟〔意嘲者〕的军鸽，他的一条腿已被炮弹的碎片所毁，挣扎从法国圣米业尔战区的布猛特前线飞回家去。）

4. 误：Who of the students asked the teacher？

正：Which of the students asked the teacher？

（哪一个学生问先生？）

〔说明〕虽然关系代词 who 是指人的，which 是指东西的，但是当我们问几个人中哪一个人时，就须用 which of，不用 who of，所以应该把误句里的 who 改为 which。

〔类例〕 Which of them is your father？（他们中哪一位是你的父亲？）

Which are your brothers？（哪几位是你的兄弟？）

Which of these two boys is the cleverer？（这两个孩子中哪一个聪明些？）

Which of the students is the monitor？（哪一个学生是班长？）

Who among the students is the monitor？（学生中谁是班长？）

5. 误：His friend had become a lawyer，whom he wanted to be, too.

正：His friend had become a lawyer，which he wanted to be，too.

（他的朋友已做律师，他也要做律师。）

〔说明〕指人时用 who，指职业时须用 which。在误句里，用 whom 指职业是错的，所以应该把它改为 which。

〔类例〕They elected him president，which he had long wanted to be.

（他们选他为总统，这是他久已想要做的。）

My brother is a merchant，which I should like to be.

（我的兄弟是一个商人，我也想做一个商人。）

6. 误：All that we met in the street were soldiers.

正：All whom we met in the street were soldiers.

（我们在街上所遇到的人都是兵。）

〔说明〕all 指人时，它的后面所接的关系代词须是 who 或 whom，所以应该把误句里的 that 改为 whom。

〔类例〕He spoke to all whom he met.（他向所有遇到的人讲话。）

All who attended the meeting were students.（集会的人都是学生。）

〔比较〕all 指东西时，它的后面用关系代词时, 可用 that。

如：All that I can say is this.（这就是我能说的一切。）

All that glitters is not gold.（光辉灿烂的东西不尽是黄金。）

〔参考〕在下列例句情形，用 that 比用 which 或 when 为普遍。

（1）当先行词附有最高级的形容词或序数的时候：

He is the greatest man that I ever saw.（他是我所见的人中最伟大的人。）

He is the second person that has climbed to the top of the mountain.

（他是第二个攀登山顶的人。）

（2）先行词附有 the only, the same，the very 的时候：

Man is the only creature that can speak.（人是唯一能讲话的动物。）

He is the same person that we met at the station last night.

（他就是我们在火车站遇到的那个人。）

He is the very man that we need.（他就是我们所需要的那个人。）

（3）在其先行词是不定代词 all，any，little，much 等词的时候：

All that live must die.（凡活着的东西必定要死的。）

He is a better president than any that preceded him.

（他是一个好总统，他的前任都不及他。）

There is much that I desire in life.（一生中我所希望的甚多。）

This book contains little that is interesting.（这本书极乏趣味。）

（4）为了加强句中某一部分的语气，采取 It is-that 结构的时候：

It is a long lane that has no turning.（凡事必有变化。）

（5）先行词里含有人和动物的时候：

The train ran over a boy and his dog that were just crossing the track.

（火车碾死了正在穿过路轨的小孩和他的狗。）

7. 误：This is the hotel of that they speak well.

正：This is the hotel of which they speak well.

　　或 This is the hotel that they speak well of.

（这是他们所称赞的旅馆。）

〔说明〕在 which 的前面可以用介词，但是在 that 的前面却不能用介词，所以应该把 that 改为 which，或者把 that 前的 of 移到句末。

〔类例〕I lost the book of which I had told you.（我已遗失我曾经告诉你的那本书。）

It is the time at which the lilies blow.（这是百合花开放的时候。）

It is he that they laughed at.（他是他们所嘲笑的人。）

It is grapes that wine is made from.（制葡萄酒的材料是葡萄。）

（22）省略关系代词的错误

1. 误：I want a novel is both easy and interesting.

正：I want a novel which is both easy and interesting.

（我需要一本浅易而且有趣的小说。）

〔说明〕关系代词在宾格时，可以省略，如：That is the man（whom）I met in the train.（那是我在火车里遇到的人。）

在这句里 whom 可以省去。假使关系代词在主格则不能省略，所以应该把误句里省略的 which 写出。

〔类例〕Mr. Chang is the man who taught me French.（张先生是教我法文的人。）

I want a man who understands English.（我需要一个懂得英语的人。）

上面句子里的关系代词是不应省略的。

This is the book （which） I spoke of.（这是我所讲到的书。）

The man（whom） you see is younger than I.（你所看到的人比我年轻。）

上面句子里的关系代词是可以省掉的。

〔参考〕（1）在古文或诗里，主格的关系代词也被省掉。

如：There is a willow（which）grows aslant a brook.（有一棵椰树斜长在溪上。）

（2）在关系从句里面若有 there is（are），即使是现代文也略去主格关系代词，如：

He is one of the best scholars there are in the world.

（他是现在世界上最好的学者中的一个。）

2. 误：I gave him a novel，he read.

正：I gave him a novel，which he read.

（我给了他一本小说，他把它读了。）

〔说明〕宾格的关系代词，表示限制的意思时，可以省略。

如：This is the man I spoke of.（这就是我所说的人。）

假使宾格的关系代词表示继续性时则不可省略，在上面句子里的 which 是表示继续性的，所以不应该省去。

〔类例〕I received a letter this morning，which I have forgotten to bring here.

（今天早上我收到一封信，我忘记把它带来。）

The maid announced a visitor，whom I had shown in.（女仆通报有客，我吩咐引他进来。）

Here is my excuse，which you may not be able to accept.

（这是我辩白的理由，或许你认为不妥。）

（23）关系代词的地位的错误

1. 误：The girl was taken to the surgery by her friend，who had just broken her leg.

正：The girl who had just broken her leg was taken to the surgery by her friend.

（腿受伤的少女被她的朋友送入医院。）

〔说明〕关系代词应该紧接它的先行词，否则容易误解，像上面的误句里 who had just broken her leg 接在 her friend 的后面，容易被看错，把它当作形容她的朋友的形容短句，所以应该把它放在 The girl 的后面。

〔类例〕（误）The mother put some milk into a bottle with which she fed her baby.

（正）The mother put into a bottle some milk，with which she fed her baby.

（母亲把牛乳装入瓶内喂她的婴孩。）

（误）At last the policeman found the man among the rogues whom he wanted to arrest.

（正）At last the policeman found among the rogues the man whom he wanted to arrest.

（最后警察在无赖群中找到他所要逮捕的人。）

（误）I put all the books on my shelf which my friend lent to me.

（正）I put on my shelf all the books which my friend lent to me.

（我把所有朋友借给我的书放到我的书架上。）

（24）感叹句的错误

1. 误：What beautiful the sunset is！

正：How beautiful the sunset is！

（落日是多么的美丽！）

〔说明〕在感叹句中，感叹形容词 what 不能修饰形容词，须用感叹副词 how 来修饰它，所以应该把误句里的 what 改为 how。

〔类例〕 How interesting the story is！（这故事是多么有趣！）

How brave the knight was！（这武士是多么的勇敢！）

〔参考〕how 也可以形容副词，如：

How cleverly he does it！（他做得多么妙！）

2. 误：How a magnificent view we have！

正：What a magnificent view we have!

（我们看到多壮丽的景色！）

〔说明〕在感叹句中修饰名词不能用感叹副词 how，须用感叹形容词 what 来修饰它，所以应该把误句里的 how 改为 what。

〔类例〕 What fools those fellows are！（那些人多么蠢啊！）

What a beautiful view it is！（这是多么美丽的景色！）

（25）并列连词的错误

1. 误：He begins listening to the lecture and to take notes of it.

正：He begins listening to the lecture and taking notes of it.

　　或 He begins to listen the lecture and（to）take notes of it.

（他开始听讲和记笔记。）

〔说明〕如 and, but, or 等并列连词须连接同等或结构相似的部分即名词和名词或代词，动词和动词，同种类的短语和短语，从句和从句。在误句里 listening 是动名词而 to take 是不定词，它们的种类不同不应被 and 连接在一起，所以应该把 take 改为 taking 或把 listening 改为 to listen。take 前面的 to 是可以省去的。

〔类例〕 Winning and losing are both unpleasant.（胜利和失败都不愉快。）

I decided to get up and（to）have a hot bath.（我决定起身和洗一个热水澡。）

They began waving handkerchiefs and shouting goodbyes.

（他们开始挥手帕和大声地道别。）

We were very glad to see you and（to）learn that you are getting along so well.

（我们很高兴看到你和知道你处境很好。）

His parents were poor but they were honest.（他的双亲虽穷却诚实。）

Is it sweet or sour？（这是甜的还是酸的呢？）

2. 误：He not only wrote novel but a play.

正：He wrote not only a novel but a play.

（他不但写了一篇小说，并且还写了一篇戏剧。）

〔比较〕He not only wrote the play but acted his part well.

（他不但写了这部戏剧并且扮演得很好。）

〔说明〕相关连词如 both…and，either…or, neither…nor, not only…but（also）等也属于并列连词，它们须连接句中并列的部分。在误句中 not only 被放在动词 wrote 的前面而 but 却被放在名词 play 的前面，动词和名词不是同等词类，不应被联结在一起，所以应该把 not only 移在名词 novel 的前面。在供比较的一句中 not only 在动词 wrote 的前面，可是 but 也在动词 acted 的前面，所以是不错的。

〔类例〕It is both good and cheap.（它价廉物美。）

It is neither blue nor green.（它既不蓝也不绿。）

（26）介词误作连词的错误

1. 误：He cannot work like you do.

正：He cannot work as you do.

〔比较〕He cannot work like you.

（他不能像你那样工作。）

〔说明〕like 作像的意思解时是介词，不能用来代替连词 as 或 as if，换句话说介词 like 的后面只能跟一个名词、代词或适当的短语，不能跟一个句子，所以应该把误句里的 like 改作 as。

〔类例〕He came early，as he had been asked to do.（他像被请求那样来得早。）

When you are in Rome，do as the Romans do.（入境问俗。）

He talks as if he knew everything.（他谈话仿佛知道一切东西似的。）

2. 误：You will fail without you work hard.

正：You will fail unless you work hard.

〔比较〕You will fail without working hard.

（除非你努力工作，否则你将失败。）

〔说明〕without 是介词，它的后面只能跟名词、代词或适当的短语，不能跟一个句子，因此它不能代替 unless 作连词，所以应该把误句里的 without 改作 unless。在供比较的一句中，without 的后面跟动名词短语也是可以的。

〔类例〕We shall go unless it rains.（假使不下雨，我们将去。）

Unless you study harder you will never pass your examination.

（除非你较用功，你将永远通不过你的考试。）

Can you speak English without making mistakes？（你能说英语不犯错误吗？）

（27）连词误作介词的错误

1. 误：In fencing he is better than me.

正：In fencing he is better than I.

（他的剑术比我的好。）

〔说明〕than 是连词，在 than 后面的名词或代词，普通是一句省略句的主语，因此在 than 后所跟的词普通必须是主格，所以应该把误句里的 me 改作 I。

〔类例〕You know English better than I.（你懂得英文比我多。）

You will get there earlier than I.（你将比我先到那里。）

〔参考〕（1）In fencing he is superior to me.（在剑术上他比我好。）

superior 是从拉丁语来的比较级，它的后面跟介词 to，在 to 后面所跟的名词或代词必须是宾格。

（2）I love you better than him.（我爱你胜于爱他。）

than 的后面跟宾格的 him 是在特殊的情形下才发生的，这 him 是“I love him. ”的句子经省略后所留下的宾语。

（3）We admire the good manners and kindness of Mary，than whom there is no nicer person.

（我们赞美玛丽的礼貌和和蔼，没有人比她更好了。）

在这句里的 than whom 已成为习惯的用法，有些语法家因此认 than 是介词。

2. 误：Tom is as tall as me.

正：Tom is as tall as I（am）.

（汤姆和我一样高。）

〔说明〕as 是连词，在 as 后面的名词或代词普通是一句省略句的主语，因此在 as 的后面所跟的词普通必须是主格，所以应该把误句里的 me 改作 I。

〔类例〕You are not so tall as he（is）.（你没有他那样高。）

〔参考〕I like her as well as him.（我爱她正像爱他一样。）

在这个句子里，as 的后面所跟的词是宾格，这是因为 him 的前面省略了主语和动词，假使把它们补足，便是下面的句子：

I like her as well as I like him.

（28）关联词的错误

1. 误：Although he is poor，but he is honest.

正：Although he is poor，yet he is honest.

〔比较〕 Although he is poor，he is honest.

　　　 He is poor，but he is honest.

　　　（虽然他穷，他却诚实。）

〔说明〕although（或 though）的后面须用 yet 成为关联词，却不能用 but，所以应该把误句中的 but 改为 yet。在供比较的两句中，它们所用的连词虽然不同，它们所表达的意思却差不多。

〔类例〕 Although it sounds strange，yet it is true for all that.

（虽然听起来是奇怪的，它却是真实的。）

Although it was very cold，yet he did not light a fire.（虽然天气十分冷，他却不生火。）

Though he should slay me，yet I will trust in him.（虽然他杀我，我还是信任他。）

2. 误：He is very tired that he cannot walk any more.

正：He is so tired that he cannot walk any more.

（他疲倦得不能再多走一点路了。）

〔说明〕so…that 才是关联词，并不是 very…that，所以应该把 very 改作 so，表达“如此的程度……以致……”的意思。

〔类例〕He spoke so rapidly that we could not clearly understand him.

（他说得这样快，使我们不能了解他。）

He was so angry that he could not speak.（他怒得不能讲话。）

Here is so big a stone that no man can lift it.

（此地有一块石头，它重得没有人能够举得动它。）

3. 误：There is no such place which you dream of in all this world.

正：There is no such place as you dream of in all this world.

（全世界绝没有像你所梦想的那样的地方。）

〔说明〕such…as 是关联词，表示“像……那样的（东西）”的意思并不是 such…which，所以应该把误句里的 which 改作 as。

〔类例〕 Such aid as I can give is at your service.

（凡我的能力所能够做得到的事情，我都愿为君效劳。）

I don’t care for such hooks as you like.（我不喜欢你所爱的那种书。）

I like to write stories in such simple language as the children can understand.

（我爱用像小孩子都能懂的那种简单的文字所写的故事。）

4. 误：I had no sooner left the house when it began to rain.

正：I had no sooner left the house than it began to rain.

（我刚离开屋子，天就开始下雨了。）

〔说明〕no sooner…than 才是关联词表示“……即刻……”的意思，并不是 no sooner…when，所以应该把误句里的 when 改作 than。

〔类例〕He had no sooner arrived than he fell in.（他一到达就生病。）

The fly had no sooner hit the water than a huge trout snapped at it.

（假蝇钩刚碰到水面鱼便咬住它。）

I had no sooner done it than I regretted it.（我做了那事即感到后悔。）

5. 误：No sooner we had got on shore than it began to rain.

正：No sooner had we got on shore than it began to rain.

（我们刚上岸，天就开始下雨了。）

〔说明〕为了加强语气，no sooner 可以放于句首，不过须颠倒主语和动词的次序，换句话说就是须把主语放于助动词的后面，所以应该把误句里的主语 we 放在助动词 had 的后面。

〔类例〕 No sooner had he seen me than he went out.（他一看到我就出去了。）

No sooner had I knocked than she opened the door.（我刚敲门，她就把门打开了。）

No sooner said than done.（说了就做。）

6. 误：He had scarcely gone out as it began to rain.

正：He had scarcely gone out when（or before）it began to rain.

（我刚出去，天就下雨了。）

〔说明〕scarcely…when（or before）是关联词，表示“……即刻……”的意思，在 scarcely 的后面可以接 when 或 before，却不能接 as，所以应该把误句里的 as 改作 when 或 before。

〔类例〕I had scarcely arrived before he came out to meet me.（我刚到达，他就出来迎接我。）

He had scarcely heard the news when he wept aloud.（他一听到这消息就放声大哭。）

I had scarcely set foot on land when I felt well.（我一踏陆地就感到好了。）

〔参考〕（1）Scarcely had he gone out when it began to rain. 这句的语气要比 He had scarcely gone out when it began to rain.所表达的要强。

（2）He had hardly gone out when it began to rain.

He had no sooner gone out than it began to rain.

As soon as he went out it began to rain.

上面三句所用的关联词虽然不同，他们所表达的意思却是一样的。

7. 误：He can neither read or write.

正：He can neither read nor write。

（他既不能读，也不能写。）

〔说明〕neither…nor 才是关联词表示既不……也不……的意思，并不是 neither…or，所以应该把误句里的 or 改作 nor。

〔类例〕 Neither you nor he was to blame.（你和他都没有错处。）

He has neither a father nor a mother.（他既无父亲，也没有母亲。）

I am n either for nor against the proposal.（我不反对，也不赞成这建议。）

〔参考〕He cannot read or write.（他既不能读，也不能写。）

在句子的前面用 neither 否定时后面须跟 nor，假使句子的前面用别的否定语时，后面可以用 or。

（29）几个极易用错的连词

1. 误：The reason why he failed is because he was careless.

正：The reason why he failed is that he was careless.

（他失败的原因是他不当心。）

〔说明〕在 The reason is 和 The reason why…is 的后面该用 that，不该用 because，以免意义重复，所以应该把误句里的 because 改作 that。

〔类例〕The reason I was not there is that I was out of town.（我不在那里的理由是我出城了。）

My reason for believing in his teachings is simply that he is my teacher.

（我信任他的教训的理由不过是他是我的先生。）

The reason why he is absent is that he is sick.（他缺席的理由是因为他生病。）

〔参考〕His failure is because he was careless.（他的失败是因为他不当心。）

2. 误：I cannot do it，nor you can.

正：I cannot do it，nor can you.

〔比较〕I cannot do it，neither can you.

I cannot do it，and you cannot do it either.

（我不能做这件事情，你也不能做这件事情。）

〔说明〕nor 和 neither 单独用时它们的意思是 and not either（也不），因此它们只可以用在否定句的后面，并且用它们时必须颠倒主语和动词的次序。（主语须放在助动词的后面，假使没有助动词时，须加 do 于主语的前面，verb to be 和 verb to have 却是例外。）在误句里，nor 后面的主语仍在助动词的前面，不合习惯的用法，所以应该把误句里的 nor you can 改作 nor can you。

在供比较的两个句子虽然所用的连词不同，它们所表达的意思却是一样的。

〔类例〕I am not rich，nor do I wish to be.（我不富有，我也不希望富有。）

The first one was not good，neither was the second one.

（第一个是不好的，第二个也是不好的。）

He will not go，neither will I.（他不愿去，我也不愿去。）

3. 误：I shall go abroad until I get a scholarship.

正：I shall not go abroad until I get a scholarship.

（在得到奖学金前，我将不出国。——我要等到得到奖学金后才出国。）

〔比较〕I shall go abroad when I get a scholarship.

（当我得到奖学金时我将出国。）

〔说明〕假使把 until 和 till 译成“等到”，又用写中文“等到”的方法来用 until 和 till，每每会用错，现在把它们的意思和用法详细的说明于下：until 或 till 接在肯定的句子的后面所表达的意思是“一段时间直到某时为止”。例如 I remained in ignorance of it until you told me the news yesterday.（一直到你昨天告诉我这消息，我一直蒙在鼓里。）虽然这句英文还可以译成“等到你昨天告诉我这消息我才明白”。

until 在此地的意思很明显的有些着重在昨天以前的一个时期。又如 Shall you remain at Taipei till December？I shall stay there until my business is concluded.（你将留在台北直到十二月吗？我将逗留在那里，直到我的事情办完。）until 和 till 在这两句的意思更显明的着重在十二月以前的一个时期。until 在否定句子的后面有 before“在……以前的时候”的意思更着重于从某时以前的一个时期。例如 The money shall not be paid，until the receipt has been signed.（or Before the signing of the receipt，the money shall not be paid.）（钱非到收条上签字以后不付。）

假使把 until 和 till 的意思来解说上面的误句，它的意思便成为“我得到奖学金前将出国”。这显然是错误的，所以应该在误句的 will 后加 not。

〔类例〕He worked until he was tired.（他工作到疲劳才止。）

He worked until the job was completed.（他一直工作到工作完成。）

The baby did not stop crying until be was fed.（婴孩到喂食后才停止哭泣。）

I shall not speak to him until he apologizes.（非等到他道歉以后，我将不和他说话。）

He did not arrive until the concert was over.（他在音乐会完了才来。）

4. 误：You may play games before the bell does not ring.

正：You may play games before the bell rings.

（你在没有打铃前可以游戏。）

〔说明〕before 是我国人最容易用错的词，因为我们总说“没有打铃前，你可以游戏”。但是在英文中，这个否定是多余的，所以应该把误句里 before 后的否定句改作肯定句。

〔类例〕He died before I was born.（他在我没有出生前就死了。）

Before I give my answer I will ask you some questions.

（在我没有作答前，我要问你几个问题。）

I will die before I give in.（我宁死不屈。）

（30）对于连词的意义辨认不清楚所发生的错误

1. 误：Yao-Fei was not only a Chinese national hero，but a Chinese general.

正：Yao-Fei was not only a Chinese general ，but a Chinese national hero.

（岳飞不仅是中国的将军，并且他还是中国的民族英雄。）

〔说明〕用 not only…but（also）“不但……而且……”来叙述两件事情时必须把较重要的一件放在 but 的后面。在误句中，两件事中较重要的一件却被放在前面，不合习惯的用法，所以应该把它改正如正句。

〔类例〕Napoleon was not only a strategist, but a great statesman.

（拿破仑不仅是一个军略家，而且还是一个大政治家。）

Faith is not only a real power，but one of the greatest we know.

（信念不但是实在的力量，并且还是我们所知道的最大的力量中的一个。）

He has not only knowledge but also experience.（他不但有智识，而且还有经验。）

He not only heard it ，but saw it himself.（他不但听见过这事，并且亲眼见过。）

2. 误：He is a good student as well as a good monitor.

正：He is a good monitor as well as a good student.

（他不仅是一个好学生，并且还是个好班长。）

〔说明〕假使用 as well as 叙述两件重要性一样的东西时，它的意思几乎和 and 一样。如：Pompey，as well as Caesar，was a great man.（庞培和恺撒同是伟人。）（注：有的语法家主张当 as well as 作 and 解时把 as well as 后面所跟的名词也当作主语，不管 as well as 前面的主语是单数，动词也作复数。如：Pompey as well as Caesar were great men.）as well as 还有一个意思是 and not only“（不仅是）……并且还……”几乎和 not only…but…“不但……而且”的意思差不多，不过语气比较弱些。它们所不同的地方就在用 not only…but（also）…时，须把重要的一件事放在后面；用 as well as 时须把重要的一件事情放在前面。在误句里，却把较重要的一件事放在后面，所以应该把它更正如正句。

〔类例〕The teacher，as well as the students，wishes for a holiday.

（不单是学生，先生也希望放假。）

He has experience as well as knowledge.（他不单有智识并且还有经验。）

Houses should be built so as to admit plenty of light as well as plenty of fresh air.

（房子应该造得不但空气新鲜，并且还要使光线充分透入。）

3. 误：It is morning ，because the birds are singing.

正：It is morning，for the birds are singing.

（这是早晨了，因为鸟在唱歌。）

〔比较〕It is morning，because the sun is rising in the east.

（因为太阳从东方上升了，这是早晨了。）

〔说明〕for 表示推断出理由，because 才表示直接的原因。因为鸟的歌唱绝不是早晨的原因，只不过是推断的理由，所以应该把误句里的 because 改作 for，在供比较的一句里所用的 because 是不错的，因为“太阳从东方上升”确是早晨的原因。

〔类例〕

The light went out，because the oil was out.

（灯熄了，因为油用光了。）——表示原因

The oil must have been out for the light went out.

（油一定没有了，因为灯熄了。）——表示推断的理由

The ground is wet，because it rained last night.

（地湿了，因为昨夜下雨了。）——表示原因

It must have rained last night，for the ground is wet.

（昨夜一定下雨了，因为地上湿了。）——表示推断的理由

The man threw off his coat，because he felt hot.

（那个人因为感到热，脱掉他的衣服。）——表示原因

The man must have felt hot，for he threw of his coat.

（那个人一定感到热，因为他脱掉他的衣服。）——表示推断的原因

（31）连词过多或被放在不必要的地方所发生的错误

1. 误：He is a writer of great experience，and whose suggestions will be found helpful to you.

正：He is a writer of great experience，whose suggestions will be found helpful to you.

（他是一个极有经验的作家，他的意见会对你有帮助。）

〔说明〕关系代词 whose 已有连接的作用，它的前面不必再加 and，因此这个 and 是多余的必须除去它。误句里在 whose 前面的 and 是多余的，所以应该把它除掉。

〔类例〕A student asked me to lend him a novel，the name of which was unknown to me.

（一个学生向我借一本小说，这本书我是不知道的。）

It is strange that he should have been ungrateful to you，who did so much for him.

（你对他恩惠很大，他却对你忘恩负义，那真是不可思议的事情。）

He labours day and night that he may become rich.（他日夜勤劳以求发财。）

2. 误：I said that，“I cannot speak French. ”

正：I said，“I cannot speak French. ”

（我说：“我不能够讲法语。”）

〔比较〕I said that I could not speak French.

　 　（我说我不能够讲法语。）

〔说明〕在直接引句的前面不可用 that。在误句里，在直接引句“I cannot speak French. ”的前面竟用 that，这是错误的，所以应该把它除掉。

〔类例〕The master said to his servant，“Shut the door. ”（主人向仆人说：“关上门。”）

He said，“If I had been you，I would have gone abroad. ”

（他说：“我若是你，我已出洋了。”）

He asked me，“Have you ever been to Hangchow？”（他问我：“您到过杭州吗？”）

3. 误：I asked him that where he lived.

正：I asked him where he lived.

（我问他住在何处。）

〔说明〕在间接疑问句前不必再加 that，因为间接疑问句如 where he lived 的 where 已有连接的作用，假使再加 that，这个 that 是多余的。在误句里 where 的前面竟还用 that，这个 that 是多余的，所以应该把它除掉。

〔类例〕You know who I am.（你知道我是谁。）

We must inquire whether they really come.（我们一定要问他们是否真来。）

I wondered when he would return.（我希望知道什么时候他会回来。）

I ask him if he knew it.（我问他是否知道这事。）

（32）省略连词 that 所发生的错误

1. 误：He will be here on time is not certain.

正：That he will be here on time is not certain.

（他是否将准时到还没有确定。）

〔说明〕连词 that 有时可以省去，如下面句子中的 that 都可以被省去。

I think（that）he is a great man.（我想他是一个伟人。）

It was so cold（that）I could hardly keep still.

（天气是如此的冷，使我几乎不能保持安静不动。）

It is certain（that）he is honest.（他确是诚实的。）

但是 that 被用在做主语的名词短句的开头时，它是不能被省去的。在误句中作主语的短句“He will be here”的前面的 that 被省去，这是错误的，所以应该把它写出来。

〔类例〕 That he is a genius is certain.（他确是一个天才。）

That time is money has never been realized in the East.

（东方人实在不曾明白时间就是金钱。）

That the man made money is no proof of his merit.（这人的赚钱不足以证明他的价值。）

2. 误：The fact he is a national hero is known to all people.

正：The fact that he is a national hero is known to all people.

（他是民族英雄的事实是人们都知道的。）

〔说明〕虽然连词 that 有时可以省略，当它被用在作名词的同位语短句的前面时却不应省去。在上面的误句里 he is a national hero 是 the fact 的同位语短句，在它的前面的 that 被错误的省去，所以应该把它写出来。

〔类例〕My suggestion that he was mad was not accepted by everybody.

（我以为他发疯的意见却没有人同意。）

The fear that he would fail made him nervous.（他的恐惧失败使他神经过敏。）

The rumour that ghosts appeared in the night is totally baseless.

（鬼在晚上出现的谣言是完全没有根据的。）

The idea that he might be mad did not occur to me.（我不曾想到他会发疯。）

3. 误：It is only when you meet a word you don’t know you will begin to feel it necessary to consult

a dictionary.

正：It is only when you meet a word you don’t know that you will begin to feel it necessary to

consult a dictionary.

（只当你遇到不认识的字时，你才会开始感到查字典的需要。）

〔说明〕在句子中的 that 有时可以省去，但是以不害辞意为原则。假使用 It is…that…的语法的句子是短句子，句中的 that 是可以省去的。例如：

It was good（that）he came.（他来了是好的。）

It is true（that）he did it.（这是真的，他做了这件事情。）

上面的句子比较短，省去了 that 并不害辞意，所以上面句子中的 that 可以省去。

It is not to be said in public that war is imminent.（不应公然地说战争将临。）

上面这一句比较长，省去了 that，意思就容易弄不清楚，所以像上面较长的句子中的 that 是不应该被省掉的。在误句里，在 you will begin to feel it necessary to consult a dictionary 的短句的前面的 that 是不应该被省略的，因为句子太长，省去了 that 便容易发主误解，所以应该把 you 前省去的 that 写出。

〔类例〕It was commonly said of him that some devil had possessed his mind.

（一般人说有鬼迷住了他的心。）

It is only when he eats that his swollen tongue troubled him.

（只当他吃东西的时候，他的肿的舌头使他苦恼。）

It is much to be regretted that things should have come to such a pass.

（事情竟到了这样的田地，这是很惋惜的。）

4. 误：What have I done you should strike me？

正：What have I done that you should strike me？

（我做了什么事情了，你敢打我？）

〔说明〕What have I done that you should strike me？是从 It is strange that you should strike me. 演变出来的。在第二句中的 that 是可以省掉的，第一句中的 that 却不能省掉，因为省掉后容易引起误解，所以应该把误句中在 you 前面的 that 写出。

〔类例〕Who are you that you should say so？（你是什么人，敢说这样的话？）

Where has he been that he should look so tired？

（他曾到什么地方去了，他竟显得如此的疲倦？）

Who am I that I should advise a man of your experience？

（我是谁，竟敢劝像你那样有经验的人？）

（33）比较时易犯的错误

1. 误：She is prettyer than her sisters.

正：She is prettier than her sisters.

（她比她的姐妹美丽。）

〔说明〕假如一个形容词的语尾是 y 而 y 的前面是辅音，须先把 y 改为 i，然后再加 er 或 est。如 pretty 的语尾是 y，而 y 的前面是辅音 t，须先把 y 改为 i，再加 er 或 est，所以应该把误句里的 prettyer 改为 prettier。

〔类例〕That was the happiest day of my life.（那是我一生中最快活的日子。）

It is easier said than done.（说它容易做它难。）

He is the laziest fellow in the world.（她是最懒的家伙。）

〔例外〕假使一个形容词的语尾是 y，而 y 的前面是元音，则加 er 时不必先把 y 改为 i，如 gay 字变成比较级时，只要在 y 的后面加 er，便可以了，例如：

Have you ever heard gayer laughter？（你曾听到过更愉快的笑声吗？）

2. 误：A dog is biger than a cat.

正：A dog is bigger than a cat.

（一只狗比一只猫大。）

〔说明〕假使一个音节的形容词的语尾是辅音而辅音的前面又是一个短元音，须重复语尾的字母，再加 er 或 est。如 big 是一个音节的形容词，它的语尾是一个辅音 g, 而 g 的前面是一个短元音 i，须重复 g 再加 er 或 est，所以应该把误句里的 biger 改为 bigger。

〔类例〕He looks thinner than you.（他看起来比你瘦。）

Summer is the hottest season of the year.（夏季是一年中最热的一季。）

3. 误：This picture is beautifuler than that.

正：This picture is more beautiful than that.

（这张画比那张画美。）

〔说明〕将三音节的形容词变成比较级和最高级时不能在它的后面加 er 和 est，须在它的前面用 more 和 most。因为 beautiful 是三音节的形容词，所以应该把误句中的 beautifuler 改为 more beautiful。

〔类别〕He is the most diligent student in his class.（在班中，他是最用功的学生。）

Bread is more important than love.（面包比爱情更重要。）

The book is more interesting than I thought.（这本书比我所想的更有趣。）

Chinese is more difficult to learn than English.（中文比英文难学。）

4. 误：He is more rich than I.

正：He is richer than I.

（他比我富。）

〔说明〕假如把一个单音节的形容词变比较级时，只要在它的语尾后加 er 便可。如 rich 是一个单音的形容词，它的比较级是 richer，所以应该把误句中的 more rich 改为 richer。

〔类别〕Miss Lee is younger than Miss Chang.（李小姐比张小姐年轻。）

Tom is stronger than his brother.（汤姆比他的兄弟强壮。）

He is the tallest boy in the room.（他是这房间里面的最高的孩子。）

〔参考〕（1）当 more 作 rather（毋宁，与其）的意思解时，它可以用在一个或两个音节的形容词的前面，如：

He is more sad than ill.（与其说他生病，不如说他忧郁。）

He is more brave than wise.（与其说他智慧，不如说他勇敢。）

He is more clever than honest.（与其说他诚实，不如说他伶俐。）

（2）为了加强语气 more and more 可以用在一个音节的形容词的前面，如：

She became more and more sad.（她变得越加悲哀了。）

5. 误：He is famouser than his father.

正：He is more famous than his father.

（他比他的父亲更有名。）

〔说明〕假使一个二音节的形容词有 -ful, -able, -ous, -ive, -ing 等语尾，它变比较级或最高级时，不能加 er 或 est 于语尾，须在它的前面用 more 或 most。因为 famous 是一个两音节的形容词，而且它的语尾是 ous，所以应该把误句中的 famouser 改为 more famous。

〔类例〕Iron is more useful than copper.（铁比铜有用。）

Time is more precious than gold.（时间比黄金更可贵。）

She is more lovable than her sister.（她比他的姐妹更和蔼可亲。）

She is the most active student in the class.（她是班中最活跃的学生。）

He made the most biting remarks on that matter.（他对那事件做了最辛辣的批评。）

6. 误：He is more well-known than she.

正：He is better-known than she.

（他比她有名。）

〔说明〕well-known（有名的）是一个副词和过去分词复合的形容词。假使我们要把它变成比较级，只要把它的复合部分副词 well 变成比较级 better 即可。换句话说 well-known 的比较级是 better-known 不是 more well-known，所以应该把误句里的 more well-known 改为 better-known。

〔类例〕He was a better-known poet than his sister.（他是一位比他的妹妹较有名的诗人。）

She is a finer-looking girl than her sister.（她是一位比她的妹妹更美貌的女郎。）

〔比较〕She is a more kind -hearted woman than her mother.

（她是一位比她的母亲更善良的母亲。）

7. 误：This is the farest island from the mainland.

正：This is the farthest island from the mainland.

（这是离大陆最远的岛。）

〔说明〕

一般级 | 比较级 | 最高级
good（好的） well（好的，健康的） | better | best
bad（不好的，坏的） evil（坏的，邪恶的） ill（生病的，邪恶的） | worse | worst
many（指数） much（指量） | more | most
little（指量） little（指大小） | less smaller | least smallest
old（年长的，年久的） | older（指人和物） elder（仅指人） | oldest eldest
late（迟的，近来的） | later（指时间） latter（指次序） | latest last
far（远的） | farther（指距离） further（指程度） | farthest furthest

我们见上表便知道有些形容词的变化是不规则的。因为 far 的变化是不规则的，所以应该把误句中的 farest 改作 farthest。

〔类别〕This is the best novel I have ever read.（这是我读过的最好的小说。）

The patient was worse this morning.（今晨这病人的病更厉害了。）

It is the most beautiful view that I have ever seen in my life.

（这是我一生中见到的最美丽的景色。）

There is not the least wind today.（今天一点风都没有。）

She is his eldest daughter.（她是他的长女。）

This will be your last chance.（这将是你的最后的机会。）

Have you got further information？（你曾得到另外的消息吗？）

8. 误：This book is superior than that.

正：This book is superior to that.

（这本书比那本书好。）

〔说明〕像 superior、inferior、prior、junior 等词是由拉丁词比较级产生出来的，它们的后面接 to，所以应该把误句里的 superior than 改为 superior to。

〔类例〕This method is inferior to that.（这种方法不及那种方法。）

This event is prior to that.（这事件早于那事件。）

She is junior to him.（她比他年轻。）

9. 误：He is the youngest of the twins.

正：He is the younger of the twins.

（他是孪生儿中较年轻的一个。）

〔说明〕两个东西相比时只能用比较级不能用最高级。如 twins 是指两个孪生兄弟，两个兄弟相比是不能用最高级的，所以应该把误句中的 youngest 改为 younger。

〔类例〕Father is the older of my parents.（我的父亲较母亲年长。）

She is the cleverer of the two girls.（她是两个女孩子中较聪明的一个。）

The younger brother is the better of the two.（弟弟比他的哥哥好。）

10. 误：Iron is more useful than any metal.

正：Iron is more useful than any other metal.

（铁比任何金属有用。）

〔说明）甲物和一群别的东西比较时，这一群别的东西不应包括甲物。误句中的 any metal 很明显的包括了相比的 iron，所以应该把误句中的 any metal 改为 any other metal。

〔类例〕China has more population than any other country.（中国的人口比任何国多。）

John is more diligent than any other student in the class.（约翰比班中任何别的学生勤勉。）

Taipei is bigger than any other city in Taiwan.（在台湾，台北比任何别的城大。）

11. 误：Knowledge is more precious than anything.

正：Knowledge is more precious than anything else.

（知识比别的东西贵重。）

〔说明〕正如上面所说的在比较时应避免和其自身相比，所以应该把误句里 anything 改为 anything else。

〔类例〕He is taller than anyone else in the class.（他在班中比任何人高。）

Confucius is more famous than anyone else in China.（孔夫子在中国比任何人有名。）

I love my parents than anybody else in the world.（我在世上最爱我的双亲。）

12. 误：Shakespeare is the greatest of all other English poets.

正：Shakespeare is the greatest of all English poets.

（莎氏是英国最伟大的诗人。）

〔说明〕当我们说某人在一群人中最好时，在这一群人中当然包括某人，不应把某人从这一群人中除去，所以应该把误句中的 other 除掉。

〔类例〕The whale is the largest of all animals.（鲸鱼是最大的动物。）

The lion is the strongest of all animals.（狮子是最强的动物。）

She is the best of all students in the school.（她是校中最好的学生。）

13. 误：I have never seen a more perfect man.

正：I have never seen such a perfect man.

（我从来没有见如此完善的人。）

〔说明〕有些绝对性的形容词如 perfect，round，straight，absolute 等词是没有比较级的，所以应该把误句里的 a more perfect man 改为 such a perfect man。

〔类例〕This is an absolute falsehood.（这完全是谎言。）

It is a straight line.（这是一条直线。）

〔参考〕（1）像 round 等形容词也可以用来比较东西，不过在 more 的后面须先加 nearly 再加 round，如 His hat is more nearly round than mine.（他的帽子比我的圆。）

（2）像 perfect 等形容词在口语中也可以用在最高级，来加重语气或表示喜悦，如：I have just bought the most perfect hat.（我刚买到最完善的帽子。）

14. 误：The population of China is larger than Japan.

正：The population of China is larger than that of Japan.

（中国的人口比日本的多。）

〔说明〕我们比较东西须合逻辑不应像误句里，把人口和国家相比，所以应该把误句里的 than Japan 改为 than that of Japan。

〔类例〕His face was as pale as that of a dead man.（他的脸苍白得和死人的一样。）

The mistakes made by Chinese students of English are different from those made by Japanese students.（中国学英文的学生所犯的错误和日本的学生所犯的不同。）

The tail of a fox is longer than that of a hare.（狐狸的尾巴比兔子的长。）

15. 误：He is more junior to me.

正：He is junior to me.

（他比我年轻。）

〔说明〕像 junior、senior、inferior、posterior 等词是由拉丁词比较级转来的，在它们的前面不必再加 more，所以应该把误句里的 more 删去。

〔类例〕This event is posterior to that.（这事件较那事件迟。）

He is senior to her.（他比她年长。）

It is inferior to the sample.（它比样品较劣。）

16. 误：Compared with silk，cotton is cheaper.

正：Compared with silk，cotton is cheap.

（和丝相比，棉花是便宜的。）

〔说明〕用短语 compared with 开始的句子后面用一般级，不应用比较级，所以应该把误句里的 cheaper 改为 cheap。

〔类例〕Compared with me，you are tall.（和我相比，你是高的。）

Compared with the cat，the dog is faithful.（和猫相比，狗是忠实的。）

17. 误：My younger brother is elder than my younger sister.

正：My younger brother is older than my younger sister。

（我的弟弟比我的妹妹大。）

〔说明〕像 latter，elder，lesser 三个形容词虽然属于比较级，普通却被用作属性形容词。换句话说它们多被用来形容名词，它们的后面不能跟 than，所以应该把误句中的 elder 改为 older。

My father is older than my mother（. 我的父亲比母亲年纪大。）

He is my elder brother（. 他是我的哥哥。）

It is later than eight o’clock（. 现在已过八点。）

I can eat either rice or bread，but I prefer the latter.（我可以吃饭或面包，但是我较喜欢后者。）

Five is less than seven（. 五少于七。）

We should choose the lesser evil（. 我们应该从恶中选择较善者。）

18. 误：Your position is upper than his.

正：Your position is higher than his.

（你的位置比他的高。）

〔说明〕虽然 upper 是比较级的形容词，它的意义是较高的（higher），它却已变成普通的属性形容词，通常被用来形容名词，却不能用来比较，它的后面不能跟 than，所以应该把误句中的 upper 改为 higher。像 upper 同类的形容词有 outer，inner 和 nether 等。

〔类例〕

The tower is higher than the tree（. 这座塔比这棵树高。）

Don’t cut away the upper branches from the tree（. 不要把树上较高的树枝砍掉。）

This room is nearer to the outside than that（. 这间房间比那间房间较靠外边。）

These are his outer rooms（. 这几间是他的靠外边的房间。）

This circle is nearer to the center than that（. 这个圆圈比那个圆圈较接近圆心。）

The inner circle is smaller than the outer（. 内圆小于外圆。）

（34）普通容易误用的形容词

1. 误：I am possible to do it.

正：It is possible for me to do it.

（我能做这工作。）

〔说明〕possible 的意义是指事情可能发生的或可能被做的，没有“感到可能”的意义，所以应该把误句改正如上。

〔类例〕 It is possible to go 500 miles an hour by aeroplane.

（这是可能的，坐飞机一个钟头走五百英里。）

Frost is possible in early spring.（早春降霜是可能的。）

〔参考〕impossible 和 possible 的用法是完全一样的，如：

The accident seemed impossible.（这意外事件似乎是不可能的。）

It is impossible for me to get there by ten o’clock.（要我在十点钟前到达那里是不可能的。）

2. 误：I am difficult to write correct sentences.

正：It is difficult for me to write correct sentences

或 To write correct sentences is difficult to me.

（写正确的句子对于我是件困难的事情。）

〔说明〕difficult 的意义是指一件事情做起来困难，并不是“感到困难的”，所以应该把误句改正如上。

〔类例〕 It is difficult for me to teach.（教书对于我是件困难的事情。）

This task is difficult to do.（这件工作做起来困难。）

〔参考〕1. I find it difficult to write correct sentences.（我觉得写正确句子困难。）

这句子虽然和 It is difficult for me to write correct sentences. 的意思稍有不同，却很可以拿来说明 difficult 的另一种用法。

2. He is difficult to deal with.（他是难以对付的。）

在这句里的主语虽然是人称名词，在句中的 difficult 却没有感到困难的意思。

3. 误：You are easy to do that.

正：It is easy for you to do that.

（做那事对你是容易的。）

〔说明〕easy 的意思是“使人感到容易的”，没有感到容易的意思，所以应该把误句改正如上。

〔类例〕 It is easy for me to write.（写作对于我是容易的。）

It is easy to get to that place.（到那地方是容易的。）

4. 误：He is painful in the teeth.

正：He has painful teeth.

（他的牙疼痛。）

〔说明〕painful 通常的意义是使感觉痛苦的，没有“感觉痛苦”的解释，所以应该把误句改正如上。

〔类例〕The girl has a painful finger.（这个女孩的手指痛。）

He has a painful cut in a finger.（他的手指的伤口疼痛。）

〔参考〕He has a pain in the teeth.（他的牙疼痛。）

5. 误：He is dangerous.

正：He is in danger.

或 He is endangered.

（他遭到危险。）

〔说明〕dangerous 的解释是“引起危险”或“发生危险”，没有遭到危险的意思，所以应该把误句里的 dangerous 改为 in danger 或 endangered。

〔类例〕He is in danger of catching cold.（他有伤风的危险。）

His life is in danger.（他的生命遭受到危险。）

It is dangerous to walk on thin ice in a lake.（在湖中薄冰上行走是危险的。）

（35）几对互相误用的同根的形容词

1. 误：I am interesting in the novel.

正：I am interested in the novel.

（我对这小说发生兴趣。）

〔说明〕interested 和 interesting 是从 interest（兴趣）一词变化出来的两个形容词。前者的意义是感兴趣的，后者的意义是令人感兴趣的，没有感兴趣的意思。要表示感兴趣的意思须用 interested，所以应该把误句里的 interesting 改为 interested。

〔类例〕I am greatly interested in the study of English.（我对于学习英文非常感兴趣。）

I am deeply interested in music.（我对于音乐很感兴趣。）

〔比较〕English is interesting to me.（英语对于我是有兴趣的。）

2. 误：I am delightful to see you.

正：I am delighted to see you.

（我看到你感到高兴。一客气语。）

〔说明〕delighted 和 delightful 是从 delight（使欢喜）一词变化出来的两个形容词。前者的意义是感到快乐的；后者的意义是令人感到快乐的，没有感到快乐的意义。要表示感到快乐的意思须用 delighted，所以应该把误句里的 delightful 改为 delighted。

〔类例〕I am delighted with my coat.（我喜欢我的上装。）

I was delighted at seeing her.（我看到她感到高兴。）

〔比较〕The music is delightful to me.（音乐令我感到快乐。）

3. 误：They are desirable of going abroad.

正：They are desirous of going abroad.

（他们渴望去外国。）

〔说明〕desirous 和 desirable 是从 desire（渴望）一词变化出来的两个形容词，但是它们的意思是不同的。前者的意义是渴望的；后者的意义是值得要的，不能解释为渴望的。要表示渴望的意思须用 desirous, 所以应该把误句里的 desirable 改为 desirous。

〔类例〕I am desirous to succeed.（我渴望成功。）

He is desirous that I should give him some work to do.（他希望我给他些工作做。）

〔比较〕He is a desirable companion.（他是一个值得要的同伴。）

4. 误：I am shameful of doing it.

正：I am ashamed of doing it.

（我做这件事情感到可耻。）

〔说明〕ashamed 和 shameful 是从 shame（羞耻）一词变化出来的两个形容词。前者的意义是感到羞耻的；后者的意义是可耻的；没有感到羞耻的意义。要表示感到羞耻的意思，须用 ashamed，所以应该把误句里的 shameful 改为 ashamed。

〔类例〕He is ashamed to beg.（他耻于求乞。）

I am not ashamed to confess my errors.（我不以承认过失感到羞耻。）

〔比较〕It is a shameful defeat.（这是一个可耻的失败。）（即惨败）

5. 误：He is satisfactory with his house.

正：He is satisfied with his house.

（他对于他的房屋满意。）

〔说明〕satisfied 和 satisfactory 是从 satisfy（使满足）一词变化出来的两个形容词。前者的意义是感到满足的；后者的意义是令人满意的，没有感到满足的意义。要表示感到满足的意思须用 satisfied，所以应该把误句中的 satisfactory 改为 satisfied。

〔类例〕I am satisfied with your explanation.（我对于你的解释满意。）

I am satisfied to remain here.（我满意留在此地。）

〔比较〕Your explanation is not satisfactory to him.（你的解释令他不满意。）

6. 误：I am tiresome with walking.

正：I am tired with walking.

（我倦于步行。）

〔说明〕tired 和 tiresome 是从 tire（使疲倦）一词变化出来的两个形容词。前者的意义是感到疲倦的，后者的意义是令人厌倦的，没有感到疲倦的意义。要表示感到疲倦的意思，须用 tired，所以应该把误句中的 tiresome 改为 tired。

〔类例〕I am tired with running about.（我疲于奔波。）

I am tired of hearing the same story.（我听同一的故事感到厌倦。）

〔比较〕It is a tiresome speech.（这是一篇令人厌倦的演讲。）

7. 误：Our long journey made us wearisome.

正：Our long journey made us weary.

（长途旅行使我们感到疲倦。）

〔说明〕weary 和 wearisome 是从 wear（消耗）一词变化出来的两个形容词，但是它们的意义是不同的。前者的意义是感到疲倦的；后者的意义是令人厌倦的，可以形容人或物，却不能作感到疲倦的解释。要表示感到疲倦的意思，须用 weary，所以应该把误句中的 wearisome 改为 weary。

〔类例〕I am weary with walking.（我因步行而感到疲倦。——我倦于步行。）

He is weary of doing nothing.（他因空闲而感到厌倦。）

〔比较〕It is a wearisome speech.（这是令人厌倦的演说。）

8. 误：Milk is a healthy food.

正：Milik is a healthful food.

（牛乳是一种有益于健康的食物。）

〔说明〕healthful 和 healthy 是从 health（健康）一词变化出来的两个形容词。在正式的英语里，前者的解释是有益于健康的；后者的意义是具有健康的，不能把它解释为有益于健康的。要表示有益于健康的意思须用 healthful，所以应该把误句里的 healthy 改为 healthful。

〔类例〕It is healthful to eat.（吃它是卫生的。）

Tainan has a healthful climate.（台南的气候是有益于健康的。）

〔比较〕She is a healthy girl.（她是一个健康的女孩。）

9. 误：He was negligible of his duties.

正：He was negligent of his duties.

（他疏忽他的职责。）

〔说明〕negligent 和 negligible 是从 neglect（疏忽）一词变化出来的两个形容词。前者的意义是疏忽的；后者的解释是可以疏忽的，没有疏忽的意义。要表示疏忽的意思，须用 negligent，所以应该把误句里的 negligible 改为 negligent。

〔类例〕He is negligent in his business.（他疏忽他的事务）

He is a negligent official.（他是一个疏忽职务的官吏。）

〔比较〕He is a negligible person.（他是一个不重要的人物。）

10. 误：He was always respectable to older people.

正：He was always respectful to older people.

（他始终尊敬年长的人。）

〔说明〕respectful 和 respectable 是从 respect（尊敬）一词变化出来的两个形容词，前者的意义是表示尊敬的；后者的意义是受人尊敬的，不可把它解释为表示尊敬的。要表明表示尊敬的意思，须用 respectful，所以应该把误句里的 respectable 改为 respectful。

〔类例〕He made a respectful bow.（他恭敬地鞠躬。）

You should be respectful to your parents.（你应该尊敬父母。）

〔比较〕He is a most respectable man.（他是一个极受人尊敬的人。）

11. 误：She is contemptible of his advice.

正：She is contemptuous of his advice.

（她蔑视他的劝告）

〔说明〕contemptuous 和 contemptible 是从 contempt（轻视）一词变化出来的两个形容词。前者的意义是表示轻视的；后者的意义是可以轻视的，不能把它解释为表示轻视的。要表明表示轻视的意思，须用 contemptuous，所以应该把误句里的 contemptible 改为 contemptuous。

〔类例〕He received a contemptuous letter.（他收到一封表示轻蔑的信。）

Owing to his contemptuous way of speaking，his friend cannot hear it without offence.

（因了他以轻蔑的样子讲话，他的朋友听了不免发怒。）

〔比较〕His contemptuous attitude towards us is contemptible.（他的轻视我们的态度是可鄙的。）

12. 误：I like his childish manner.

正：I like his childlike manner.

（我喜欢他的天真烂漫的态度。）

〔说明〕childlike 和 childish 是从 child（小孩）一词变化出来的两个形容词，但是它们的意义是不同的。前者的意义是天真烂漫的，它是一个表示赞美的形容词；后者的意义是幼稚的，它是一个表示轻视的形容词。要表示天真烂漫的美质，须用 childlike，所以应该把误句里的 childish 改为 childlike。

〔类例〕I love her childlike face.（我爱他的天真烂漫的脸。）

He has an air of childlike innocence.（他有天真烂漫的模样。）

〔比较〕I dislike his childish talk.（我讨厌他的幼稚的谈话。）

13. 误：He is an industrial farmer.

正：He is an industrious farmer.

（他是一个勤劳的农夫。）

〔说明〕industrious 和 industrial 是从 industry（勤勉，工业）一词变化出来的两个形容词，可是它们的意义却完全不同。前者的意义是勤勉的；后者的意义是工业的，没有勤勉的意义。要表达勤勉的意思须用 industrious，所以应该把误句里的 industrial 改为 industrious。

〔类例〕She is an industrious wife.（她是一位勤劳的太太。）

He is industrious in his business.（他勤于他的事业。）

〔比较〕It is an industrial school.（这是一所工业学校。）

14. 误：Drinking is destructible to health.

正：Drinking is destructive to health.

（饮酒有害于健康。）

〔说明〕destructive 和 destructible 是从 destroy（破坏）一词变化出来的两个形容词，它们的意义却不同。前者的意义是毁灭的或有害的；后者的意义是可破坏的，不能把它解释为致毁灭的或有害的。要表示致毁灭的或有害的意思须用 destructive，所以应该把误句里的 destructible 改为 destructive。

〔类例〕The ship was wrecked in a destructive storm.（这船在致毁灭的风暴中遭了难。）

〔比较〕Everything man made is destructible.（凡人所做的东西都是能够毁坏的。）

15. 误：He is an honorary gentleman.

正：He is an honorable gentleman.

（他是一位受人尊敬的绅士。）

〔说明〕honorable 和 honorary 是从 honour（尊敬；名誉）一词变化出来的两个形容词，它们的意义却不同。前者的意义是受人尊敬的；后者的意义是名誉的（无实权或不担任职务的），不能把它解释为受人尊敬的。要表示受人尊敬的意思须用 honorable，所以应该把误句里的 honorary 改为 honorable。

〔类例〕His conduct is honourable.（他的行为是受人尊敬的。）

〔比较〕Some associations have honorary secretaries as well as regular paid secretaries.

（有些会社不仅有普通的受雇的秘书，还有名誉秘书。）

16. 误：Draw a continual straight line from point A to point B.

正：Draw a continuous straight line from point A to point B.

（从 A 点到 B 点画一条连续的直线。）

〔说明〕continuous 和 continual 是从 continue（继续）一词变化出来的两个形容词，但是它们的意义却有点不同。这两个词虽然都可以翻译为连续的，可是 continuous 所形容的连续是没有一点中断的；continual 所形容的连续却是有中断的。换句话说，在连续的状态中，虽然有许多中断可是大体上看来还是继续的，如 continual showers（连续的阵雨）。形容连续不断的直线，须用 continuous，所以应该把误句里的 continual 改为 continuous。

〔类例〕The continuous flow of the brook formed a ravine.（溪水不断的流经之处成为山谷。）

〔比较〕 Continual interruptions impede continuous work.（不断的阻挠有碍工作的进行。）

A continuous beach is exposed to the continual beating of the waves.

（连续的海滩受海浪不断的打击。）

17. 误：His comparable method of studying is novel.

正：His comparative method of studying is novel.

（他的比较研究法是新的。）

〔说明〕comparative 和 comparable 是从 compare（比较）一词变化出来的两个形容词，可是它们的意义却有点不同。前者的意义是比较的；后者的意义是可比的，没有比较的意义。要表达比较的意思须用 comparative，所以应该把误句里的 comparable 改为 comparative。

〔类例〕He lived in comparative comfort recently.（近来他的生活过得比较舒适。）

Christ died in comparative youth.（做大事业的人死得比较早。）

〔比较〕There is no scenery comparable to that of the West Lake.（没有风景可与西湖相比。）

18. 误：Fairies are imaginative.

正：Fairies are imaginary.

（小仙子是存于想象中的。）

〔说明〕imaginary 和 imaginative 是从 imagine（想象）一词变化出来的两个形容词，它们的意义却完全不同。前者的意义是想象的或存于想象的；后者的意义是富于想象的，没有存于想象的意义。若要表达存于想象的意思，须用 imaginary，所以应该把误句里的 imaginative 改写为 imaginary。

〔类例〕It isn’t real—it’s only imaginary.（这不是真实的。——这只不过是想象的。）

Ghosts are imaginary.（鬼是存在于想象中的。）

〔比较〕She is an imaginative writer.（她是一个富于想象的作家。）

Don Quixote was so imaginative that he fought many imaginary battles.

（唐吉坷是如此的富于想象，使他打了许多次想象的仗。）

〔参考〕imaginable 也是从 imagine 一词变化出来的一个形容词，它的意义和 imaginary 及 imaginative 的不同，它的意义是可以想象的，例如：I have tried all means imaginable.（我已尝试了一切可想象的方法。）

19. 误：The story is hardly credulous.

正：The story is hardly credible.

（这个故事几乎是不可以相信的。）

〔说明〕credible 和 credulous 是两个外形极相似的形容词，它们的语源也相近，它们的意义却不同。前者的意义是可信的；后者的意义是轻信的，没有可信的意义。若要表达可信的意思，须用 credible，所以应该把误句里的 credulous 改为 credible。

〔类例〕It is a credible explanation.（这是一个可信的说明。）

〔比较〕She is as credulous as a child.（她是像一个小孩子那样的轻信。）

〔参考〕creditable 是一个和 credible 同语源的形客词，它的意义是可赞许的，例如：

Her performance is highly creditable.（她的表演极可赞许。）

20. 误：A cultivated person may occasionally enjoy barbarous music.

正：A cultivated person may occasionally enjoy barbaric music.

（一个文明人有时可能享受粗俗的音乐。）

〔说明〕barbarous 和 barbaric 是从 barbarian（野蛮人）一词变化出来的两个形容词，它们的意义却不同。前者的意义是野蛮的和残忍的，不可用它来描写风格和趣味；后者的意义是粗俗的，可以拿来描写风格和趣味。若要表达粗俗的意思，须用 barbaric，不可用 barbarous，所以应该把误句里的 barbarous 改为 barbaric。

〔类例〕The hall was decorated in barbaric splendour.（厅堂被装饰得俗艳。）

〔比较〕These people came from barbarous countries.（这些人来自蛮邦。）

21. 误：He is an effectual speaker.

正：He is an effective speaker.

（他是一个动人的演说者。）

〔说明〕effectual 和 effective 是从 effect（效果）一词变化出来的两个形容词，它们的意义大部分是相同的，却有一些不同的地方。前者的意义是有效的，它只能形容物不能形容人；后者的意义和前者相同，可是它还能形容人。换句话说，当它们形容物时，它们的意义是一样的。但是后者还可以形容人，那时它的意义是动人的和精锐的，如 an effective speaker（一位动人的演说家），effective soldiers（精锐的士兵）。若要表达动人的意思须用 effective 不可用 effectual，所以应该把误句里的 effectual 改为 effective。

〔类例〕They are a company of effective soldiers.（他们是一连精锐的兵。）

〔比较〕 Effectual（or Effective）measures must be taken to meet this situation.

（我们一定要采取有效的手段以应付这局面。）

22. 误：He is an efficacious manager.

正：He is an efficient manager.

（他是一位胜任的经理。）

〔说明〕efficacious 和 efficient 也是从 effect（效果）一词变化出来的两个形容词，它们的意义有一部分相同，有一部分却不同。前者的意义是必然有效的，它的语气比后者要强，可以形容事物，尤其多用于药品和治疗方法，却不能形容人；后者的意义，当形容事物时，也是有效的，它的语气却比 efficacious 较轻，但是它还可以形容人，那时它的意义是胜任的。若要表达胜任的意思须用 efficient，不可用 efficacious，所以应该把误句里的 efficacious 改为 efficient。

〔类例〕He has an efficient private secretary.（他有一位胜任工作的私人秘书。）

〔比较〕The means for doing it are efficacious.（做这事的方法是必然有效的。）

You will find the medicine efficacious.（你会发现这药是灵验的。）

23. 误：I am most regrettable for my mistake.

正：I am most regretful for my mistake.

（我对于我的错误最感到悔恨。）

〔说明〕regretful 和 regrettable 是从 regret（悔恨）一词变化出来的两个形容词，它们的意义却不同。前者的意义是感到悔恨的；后者的意义是可悔恨的，没有感到悔恨的意义。若要表达感到悔恨的意思，须用 regretful，所以应该把误句里的 regrettable 改为 regretful。

〔类例〕She shed regretful tears.（她流下感到悔恨的眼泪。）

〔比较〕It is a regrettable error.（这是一个可悔恨的错误。）

24. 误：There is a sensitive difference in the temperature.

正：There is a sensible difference in the temperature.

（温度的不同是可感知的。）

〔说明〕sensible 和 sensitive 是从 sense（感觉）一词变化出来的两个形容词，它们的意义却不同。前者的意义是可感知的；后者的意义是敏感的，没有可感知的意义。若要表达可感知的意思，须用 sensible，所以应该把误句里的 sensitive 改为 sensible。

〔类例〕There is a sensible increase of velocity.（速度的增加是可感知的。）

〔比较〕My skin is very sensitive.（我的皮肤是非常敏感的。）

25. 误：He is a sensuous person.

正：He is a sensual person.

（他是一个好色的人。）

〔说明〕sensual 和 sensuous 也是从 sense（感觉）一词变化出来的两个形容词，它们的意义却完全不同。前者的意义是耽于肉欲的，好色的，多用于坏的意思；sensuous 的意义是感觉的、美感的，没有好色的意义。若要表达耽于肉欲的或好色的意思，须用 sensual，不可用 sensuous，所以应该把误句里的 sensuous 改为 sensual。

〔类例〕We should not indulge in sensual pleasures.（我们不应该耽于肉欲的快乐。）

〔比较〕All art has a sensuous element，colour，form or sound.

（一切艺术都有一种美感的要素即色、外形或声。）

26. 误：She is pitiable to the poor.

正：She is pitiful to the poor.

（她怜悯穷人。）

〔说明〕pitiful 和 pitiable 是从 pity（怜悯）一词变化出来的两个形容词，它们的意义却不同。前者有感到哀怜的意义；后者的意义是可哀怜的或可轻视的，没有感到哀怜的意义。若要表达感到哀怜的意思，须用 pitiful，不可用 pitiable，所以应该把误句里的 pitiable 改为 pitiful。

〔类例〕My sister is always pitiful to a stray dog.（我的妹妹老是怜悯迷途的狗。）

〔参考〕（1）作可哀怜的或可轻视的意义解时，pitiful 和 pitiable 是相同的，例如：

The starving children were a pitiful sight. The starving children were a pitiable sight. | （挨饿的儿童是一个可怜的景象。）

He has a pitiful ambition. He has a pitiable ambition. | （他有一个可轻视的志向。）

（2）piteous 也是从 pity（怜悯）一词变化出来的形容词，它只有可哀怜的意义，例如：

That is a piteous case.（那是一件可怜的事。）

27. 误：The school is at a considerate distance from my home.

正：The school is at a considerable distance from my home.

（学校离家很远。）

〔说明〕considerable 和 considerate 是从 consider（考虑）一词变化出来的两个形容词，它们的意义却不同。前者的意义是颇多的或颇大的；后者的意义是体谅的。若要表达颇多的或颇大的意义，须用 considerable，所以应该把误句里的 considerate 改为 considerable。

〔类例〕I have given considerable thought to the matter.（我对于此事颇加以思考。）

〔比较〕He is considerate of others.（他体谅别人。）

28. 误：He is conscientious of his own mistakes.

正：He is conscious of his own mistakes.

（他自知其过。）

〔说明〕conscious 和 conscientious 是从 conscience（良心）一词变化出来的两个形容词，它们的意义却不同。前者的意义是自觉的；后者的意义是正直的，没有自觉的意义。若要表达自觉的意思，须用 conscious，所以应该把误句里的 conscientious 改为 conscious。

〔类例〕He was conscious that his strength was failing.（他感到他的力量消失。）

〔比较〕He is a conscientious judge.（他是一个正直的法官。）

29. 误：Our principal is a notorious man.

正：Our principal is a notable man.

（我们的中学校长是一位闻人。）

〔说明〕notable 和 notorious 是两个外形相似的形容词，它们的语源也相近，它们的意义却相反。前者的意义是有好名的，后者的意义却是有坏名的。若要表达有好名的意思，须用 notable，不可用 notorious，所以应该把误句里的 notorious 改为 notable。

〔类例〕 Jane Eyre is a notable book.（《简·爱》是一本名著。）

〔比较〕Monte Carlo is a place notorious for gambling.（蒙的加罗是一个以赌博闻名的地方。）

30. 误：Give my best regards to your reverent father.

正：Give my best regards to your reverend father.

（请向令尊问候。）

〔说明〕reverend 和 reverent 是从 revere（尊敬）一词变化出来的两个形容词，它们的意义却不同。前者的意义是可尊敬的；后者的意义是表示尊敬的或感到敬意的，没有可尊敬的意义。若要表达可尊敬的意思，须用 reverend 不可用 reverent，所以应该把误句里的 reverent 改为 reverend。

〔类例〕She studied painting under the reverend master.（她在受人尊敬的大师下学画。）

〔比较〕He gave reverent attention to the sermon.（他恭敬地听讲道。）

31. 误：Mr. Tu took judicious proceedings against him.

正：Mr. Tu took judicial proceedings against him.

（杜先生提起诉讼控告他。）

〔说明〕judicial 和 judicious 是两个外形相似的形容词，它们的语源也相近，它们的意义却不同。前者的意义是法庭的或法庭判决的；后者的意义是贤明的，没有法庭的意义。若要表达法庭的意思，须用 judicial，不可用 judicious, 所以应该把误句里的 judicious 改为 judicial。

〔类例〕Mrs. Tu got a judicial separation from her husband.（杜太太得到法庭判决夫妇分居。）

〔比较〕A judicious parent encourages his children to make their own decisions.

（一个贤明的父亲或母亲鼓励儿女自作抉择。）

32. 误：She was bedecked with ostensible jewels.

正：She was bedecked with ostentatious jewels.

（她饰以外表美观的宝石。）

〔说明〕ostentatious 和 ostensible 是两个同语源的形容词，它们的意义却是不同的。前者的意义是夸张的或外表美观的，后者的意义是表面的。若要表达夸张的或外表美观的意思，须用 ostentatious，不可用 ostensible，所以应该把误句里的 ostensible 改为 ostentatious。

〔类例〕He has an ostentatious manner.（他有一种夸张的态度。）

〔比较〕The man whose ostensible purpose was patriotism was actually a spy.

（那个表面目的是爱国的人实际上是间谍。）

33. 误：The liar may get some momentous benefit from his falsehood.

正：The liar may get some momentary benefit from his falsehood.

（说谎者可能从他的谎言得到一些片刻的利益。）

〔说明〕momentary 和 momentous 虽然都是从 moment（片刻）一词变化出来的两个形容词，可是他们的意义却不同。前者的意义是刹那的，后者的意义是重要的。要表达刹那的意思，须用 momentary，所以应该把误句里的 momentous 改为 momentary。

〔类例〕His griefs are momentary，and his joys immortal.

（他的悲伤是刹那的，他的愉快是不朽的。）

This error seems to have arisen from a momentary forgetfulness.

（这错误似乎发生于片刻的遗忘。）

〔比较〕He made a momentous decision.（他做了一次重要的决定。）

34. 误：Morning exercise is beneficent to our health.

正：Morning exercise is beneficial to our health.

（早操对于我们的健康是有益的。）

〔说明〕beneficial 和 beneficent 都是从 benefit（利益）一词变化出来的两个形容词，但它们的意思是不同的。前者的意义是有益的，后者的意义却是慈善的。要表示有益的意思，须用 beneficial，所以应该把误句里的 beneficent 改为 beneficial。

〔类例〕Sunshine is beneficial to plants.（阳光对于植物有益。）

I hope your holiday will be beneficial.（我希望你的假期会对你有益。）

〔比较〕The merchant is beneficent to the poor.（这商人对于穷人慈善。）

35. 误：He is a practicable young man.

正：He is a practical young man.

（他是一个注重实行的青年。）

〔说明〕practical 和 practicable 都是从 practise（实行）一词变化出来的两个形容词，但是它们的意义却不同。前者的意义是实际的或实践的，可形容人或物；后者的意义是可实行的，可以形容物，却不能形容人，在上面的句子里要表明一个青年人务实的性情，须用 practical，所以应该把误句里的 practicable 改为 practical。

〔类例〕He is a practical engineer.（他是一位有实地经验的工程师。）

〔比较〕It is a practicable plan.（这是一个可以实行的计划。）

36. 误：He put up at a luxuriant hotel.

正：He put up at a luxurious hotel.

（他住在一家豪华的旅馆。）

〔说明〕luxurious 和 luxuriant 都是从 luxury（奢侈，豪华）一词变化出来的两个形容词，但是它们的意义是不同的。前者的意义是奢侈的或豪华的；后者的意义是茂盛的或华美的，它可以形容树木的茂盛，文体的华美，却没有奢侈的和豪华的意思。要表示豪华的意思，须用 luxurious，所以应该把误句里的 luxuriant 改为 luxurious。

〔类例〕He has a luxurious habit.（他有奢华的习惯。）

He lives in luxurious surroundings.（他生活于奢华的环境中。）

〔比较〕He wrote an essay in a luxuriant style.（他以华美的文体写了一篇散文。）

37. 误：My friend is a tasty artist.

正：My friend is a tasteful artist.

（我的朋友是一位风雅的艺术家。）

〔说明〕tasteful 和 tasty 都是从 taste（味、风味）一词变化出来的两个形容词，但是它们的意义是不同的。前者的意义是风雅的或美味的；后者的意义只有美味的，却没有风雅的意思。要表示风雅的意思，须用 tasteful，不能用 tasty，所以应该把误句里的 tasty 改为 tasteful。

〔类例〕He bought a set of tasteful furniture.（他买了一套雅致的家具。）

〔比较〕He got a tasty meal for a couple of dollars.（他费两块钱吃了一餐美味的饭。）

38. 误：He is very economic of his time.

正：He is very economical of his time.

（他很经济他的时间。）

〔说明〕economical 和 economic 虽然是从 economy（经济）一词变化出来的两个形容词，但是它们的意思是不同的。前者的意义是经济的或节俭的；后者的意义是经济学的或经济上的，没有节俭的意义，要表示节俭的或经济的意思，须用 economical，所以应该把误句里的 economic 改为 economical。

〔类例〕He is economical with his money.（他用钱节俭。）

〔比较〕It is an economic problem.（这是一个经济［学］上的问题。）

39. 误：It is further than I can reach.

正：It is farther than I can reach.

（这地方是远于我所能到的。）

〔说明〕farther 和 further 是从 far（远的）一词变化出来的两个比较级的形容词，它们的意义却是不同的。在正式的英语里，前者表示距离的远近而后者表示抽象的程度。要表示距离的远近，须用 farther，所以应该把误句里的 further 改为 farther。

〔类例〕I cannot reach the farther side of the hill.（我不能到达山的那边。）

Kaohsing is farther from Taipei than Tainan.（高雄离台北较台南离台北为远。）

〔比较〕I will get further information.（我要得到另外的消息。）

40. 误：The later speaker was not so good as the former.

正：The latter speaker was not so good as the former.

（后讲的那位演讲者没有先讲的那位那样好。）

〔说明〕later 和 latter 是从 late（迟的）一词变化出来的两个比较级的形容词，它们的意义却是不同的。前者的意义是较迟的或较后的，后者的意义是后者的。还有一点重要的不同点：later 是表明时间的而 latter 是表明次序的。要表明和前者的（former）对立的后者的，须用 latter，所以应该把误句里的 later 改为 latter。

〔类例〕Mr. Chang and Mr. Lee called on me yesterday，the latter gentleman is an engineer.

（张先生和李先生昨天访我，后者是一位工程师。）

〔比较〕This is a later edition.（这是较近的版本。）

41. 误：What is the last news from your home？

正：What is the latest news from your home？

（家中最近的消息如何？）

〔说明〕latest（最近的）和 last（最后的）都是从 late（迟的）一词变化出来的最高级的形容词，但是 latest 是表示时间的，而 last 是表示次序的。要表达最近的时间观念，须用 latest，所以应该把误句里的 last 改为 latest。

〔类例〕Have you heard the latest news？（你听到最近的消息吗？）

It is his latest work.（这是他的最近的著作。）

〔比较〕The last house in the street is my home.（街上最后的一幢房子是我的家。）

42. 误：We have lesser rain this year.

正：We have less rain this year.

（今年雨较少。）

〔说明〕less 和 lesser 都是 little 的比较级，不过它们的意义却不同。前者可指量的较少；后者的意义相当于 smaller，只能形容体积的较小或者形容较次重要的东西，绝不能形容量的较少。若要表述量的较少，须用 less，所以应该把误句里的 lesser 改为 less。

〔类例〕If you don’t want to get fat，eat less food.（倘不欲胖须少食。）

〔比较〕The greater light rules the day and the lesser light rules the night.

（较大的光管昼，较小的光管夜。）（白天太阳照耀世界夜间月亮照耀世界。）

（36）几对容易互相误用的形容词

1. 误：He has much books in his study.

正：He has many books in his study.

（他在书房里有很多的书。）

〔说明〕many 和 much 虽然都可以翻译为许多的，可是 many 只能形容可以数的东西，much 却只能形容那些不可以数的东西。因为 books 是可以数的，所以应该把误句里的 much 改为 many。

〔类例〕There are many children in the garden.（在园里有许多孩子。）

〔比较〕He has much money.（他的钱很多。）

We do not drink much wine.（我们饮酒不多。）

2. 误：I have few money.

正：I have little money.

（我的钱很少。）

〔说明〕few 和 little 虽然都可以翻译为很少的，可是 few 只能形容可以数的东西，little 却只能形容那些不可以数的东西。因为 money（钱财）是不可以数的，所以应该把误句里的 few 改为 little。

〔类例〕There is little sugar left.（余下的糖很少。）

He has very little knowledge of the subject.（他对于这个问题的知识很少。）

〔比较〕There were few people there.（那里人很少。）

He has few friends.（他的朋友很少。）

3. 误：Though he is a poor student，he has few books.

正：Though he is a poor student，he has a few books.

（他虽然是个穷学生，却有几本书。）

〔说明〕few 有否定的语气，它的意思是“不多”（not many），a few 有肯定的语气，它的意思是“几个”（some）。上面的句子是表示肯定的意思的，所以应该把误句里的 few 改为 a few。

〔类例〕The composition is well written，but it has a few mistakes.

（这篇作文写得很好，可是还有几个错误。——表示肯定的语气。）

He has a few friends.（他有几个朋友。——表示肯定的语气。）

A few people may always be seen on the streets.

（街上总可以看到几个人。——表示肯定的语气。）

If you want money，I can lend you a few dollars.

（如果你要钱的话我可以借给你几块。——表示肯定的语气。）

〔比较〕The composition is well written，as a result，it has few mistakes.

（这篇作文写得很好，结果错误不多。——表示否定的语气。）

He has few friends.（他的朋友不多。——表示否定的语气。）

〔参考〕only a few 却等于 few，表示很少的意思，例如：

There are only a few such men.（这样的人是很少的。）

Only a few people could understand the book.（很少人能懂这本书。）

4. 误：He has little money，so he can buy some sweets.

正：He has a little money，so he can buy some sweets.

（他有点钱所以他能买些糖果。）

〔说明〕little 有否定的语气，它的意思是“不多的”（not much）；a little 有肯定的语气，它的意思是“少许的”（some）或“少量的”（a small quantity of）。上面的句子是表示肯定的语气的，所以应该把误句里的 little 改为 a little。

〔类例〕He is not much better，but there is a little hope.

（他的病虽然不甚好，可是还有点希望。——表示肯定的语气）

He received a little education.（他受过一点教育。——表示肯定的语气）

〔比较〕He grows worse；there is little hope of his recovery.

（他的病况转坏，痊愈的希望不多。——表示否定的语气。）

He received little education.（他所受的教育不多。——表示否定的语气。）

5. 误：Less people study Latin today than fifty years ago.

正：Fewer people study Latin today than fifty years ago.

（今日学拉丁文的人较五十年前为少。）

〔说明〕在正式的英文里 less（较少的）只能用来形容不可以数的东西，因为它是 little 的比较级，所以应该把误句里的 less 改为 fewer。

〔类例〕 Fewer people go to church than to theatres.（去教堂的人较去戏院的人为少。）

〔比较〕He has less money than ever.（他的钱较过去为少。）

6. 误：He made the least mistakes in his composition.

正：He made the fewest mistakes in his composition.

（他的作文犯错最少。）

〔说明〕least（最少的）是 little 的最高级，只能用来形容不可以数的东西。mistake（错误）是可以数的，所以应该把误句里的 least 改为 fewest。

〔类例〕Among my friends，he has the fewest books.（在我的友人之中，他的藏书最少。）

〔比较〕His house is at the least distance.（他的家离此地最近。）

7. 误：Are there some books？

正：Are there any books？

（有书吗？）

〔说明〕some 的意思是几个或一些，它可以形容可数的东西，也可以形容不可以数的东西。它通常不用在疑问句、否定句或条件句内，在这种句子里我们要用 any 来代替它，所以应该把误句里的 some 改为 any。

〔类例〕Have you any money？（你有钱吗？）

There isn’t any water.（没有水。）

If there is any trouble，let me know.（假使你有何困难，让我知道。）

〔比较〕I have some money.（我有些钱。）

There is some water.（有些水。）

There are some books.（有些书。）

〔参考〕在问句里，当我们希望得到肯定的答复时，我们须用 some，如：

Would you lend me some money？

（你愿意借给我一点钱吗？——希望得到一个肯定的答复）

8. 误：Every one of the twin brothers has his duty.

正：Each one of the twin brothers has his duty.

（孪生兄弟中每一个人有他的职任。）

〔说明〕each 可以形容两个中的每个或者形容两个以上中的每个，every 只能形容两个以上中的每个，却不能形容两个中的每个。孪生兄弟是两个人，形容两个人中的每个须用 each，所以应该把误句中的 every 改为 each。

〔类例〕There are trees on each side of the road.（路的两边都有树。）

He carries a lantern in each hand.（他的每只手里拿着一个灯笼。）

I know each member of the family.（我认得这家中的各个人。）

〔比较〕There are enemies on every side.（四方都有敌人。）

9. 误：Each man should respect his parents.

正：Every man should respect his parents.

（凡人都应该尊敬他的父母。）

〔说明〕each 和 every 虽然都可以翻译为“每个”，可是 each 常指一个小团体里的每个，如：Each boy sitting at the table is my brother.（坐在桌旁的每个孩子都是我的兄弟。——指一个小团体里的每个）假使没有形容短语的限制 every 可以指任何一个，如：Every boy should obey his parents.（凡孩子都应服从父母。）在上面句子里所说的每个人是指天下任何一个人，所以应该把误句里的 each 改为 every。

〔类例〕 Every good nan will prosper.（每个好人会发达。）

〔比较〕 Each man may try twice.（每个人可试两次。一小团体中的每个。）

10. 误：My brother is a high man.

正：My brother is a tall man.

（我的兄弟是一个长人。）

〔说明〕high 和 tall 虽然都可以翻译为高的，可是它们的意义有点不同。tall 有瘦长的意思，专形容人或其他细长的东西如柱和尖塔。high 可形容细长的东西以外的一切高的东西如树、山、云等，要表示一个人的长，须用 tall，所以应该把误句里的 high 改为 tall。

〔类例〕There are many tall chimneys in the city.（城内有许多高烟囱。）

A tall spire can be seen for miles around.（一个高的塔尖在周围数里以内可以看到。）

〔比较〕There is a very high mountain beyond the river.（在河的那一边有一座非常高的山。）

11. 误：I am quite good，thank you.

正：I am quite well，thank you.

（我很健康，谢谢您。）

〔说明〕good 的意义很多，可以把它解释为有益的，如：Games are good for health.（游戏对于健康有益。）也可以把它解释为善良的，如：He is a good man.（他是一个好人。）还可以把它解释为强健的或有力的，如：His eyesight is still quite good.（他的目力还很强。）I am good for another ten miles.（我还有力再走十里路。）但是它没有整个身体健康的意义。要表示这种整个身体健康的意思，须用 well，所以应该把误句里的 good 改为 well。

〔类例〕I hope you will soon get well again.（我希望你不久可康复。）

（37）形容词当副词用的错误

1. 误：She speaks English good.

正：She speaks English well.

（她的英语讲得好。）

〔说明〕good（好）只能作形容词用，不能把它当副词用。well 才是表示好的副词。要表示英语讲得好，须用 well，所以应该把误句里的 good 改为 well。

〔类例〕I did not rest well last night.（我昨夜睡得不好。）

You should do it well.（你应该把这事好好地做。）

〔比较〕It is good to have plenty of money.（有充分的钱是好的。）

2. 误：He gets up early everyday.

正：He gets up early every day.

（他每天起早。）

〔说明〕everyday（每日的，普通的）是形容词，不能当副词用。every day 才是表示每天的副词短语，所以应该把误句里的 everyday 改为 every day。

〔类例〕He studies English every day.（他每天学习英语。）

〔比较〕It is an everyday occurrence.（这是一个普通事件。）

3. 误：I put the room orderly.

正：I put the room in order.

（我整理房间。）

〔说明〕形容 orderly（整齐的）的词尾 ly 虽然像副词的，它却不能当副词用。in order 才是表示整齐的副词短语。在误句中把 orderly 当副词用，这显然是错的，所以应该把它改为 in order。

〔类例〕These things should be set in order.（这些东西应该整理好。）

〔比较〕It is an orderly room.（这是一间整齐的房间。）

4. 误：He failed in the examination due to carelessness.

正：He failed in the examination owing to carelessness.

（他因粗心而考试失败。）

〔说明〕due to 可算是一个特殊的形容短语，因为它一定要和名词连用，如 due to carelessness（因粗心），due to accident（由于意外），可是它不能当副词短语用。要用表示由于粗心的副词短语，须用 owing to carelessness，所以应该把误句里的 due to 改为 owing to。

〔类例〕He cannot go to school owing to illness.（他因病不能去学校。）

〔比较〕His failure in the examination is due to carelessness.（他的考试失败是由于粗心。）

〔注〕due to 开始的形容词短语应该用在 verb to be 的后面。

5. 误：It is cold outdoor.

正：It is cold outdoors.

（户外冷。）

〔说明〕outdoor（户外的）和 indoor（户内的）是形容词。在它们的词尾加 s 便成副词 outdoors（户外地）和 indoors（户内地）。在误句里把 outdoor 当副词用，这显然是错误的，所以应该把它改为 outdoors。

〔类例〕Children like to play outdoors.（孩子们爱在户外玩。）

You stay too much indoors.（你在户内的时间太多了。）

〔比较〕I like to lead an outdoor life.（我喜欢过户外生活。）

We had great fun at the indoor games.（我们做户内游戏非常有趣。）

（38）形容词当动词的错误

1. 误：Do you fond of hunting？

正：Are you fond of hunting？

（你喜欢打猎吗？）

〔说明〕fond（喜欢的）是形容词，不能当动词用。在误句里把它当作动词用，这显然是错的，所以应该把误句里的 Do 改为 Are。

〔类例〕She is fond of music.（她喜欢音乐。）

〔比较〕 Do you like hunting？（你喜欢打猎吗？）

2. 误：Do you afraid of dogs？

正：Are you afraid of dogs？

（你怕狗吗？）

〔说明〕afraid（害怕的）是形容词，不能当动词用。在误句里把它当动词用这显然是错的，所以应该把误句里的 Do 改为 Are。

〔类例〕I am afraid to go.（我怕去。）

〔比较〕 Do you fear dogs？（你怕狗吗？）

3. 误：The portrait does not like you.

正：The portrait is not like you.

（这张肖像是不像你的。）

〔证明〕like 作动词用时，它的意义是欢喜；它作形容词用时，它的意义是像。当 like 的意义是像时，它是形容词，不能当动词用，所以应该把误句里的 does 改为 is。

〔类例〕The pond is like a mirror.（这池像一面镜子。）

〔比较〕I do not like the portrait.（我不喜欢这张肖像。）

（39）属性形容词和谓语部分形容词易犯的错误

1. 误：The boy is little.

正：The boy is small.

（这孩子是小的。）

〔说明〕当 little 作小解时，它只能直接形容名词，不能作谓语动词的补语，small 才能作谓语动词的补语，所以应该把误句里的 little 改为 small。

〔类例〕All the rooms are small.（所有的房间是小的。）

These shoes are too small for me.（这双鞋子给我穿太小了。）

〔比较〕She is a little girl.（她是一个小女孩。）

〔参考〕Give me a little water，even if it be very little.（给我一点水，即使是很少的。）

〔注〕在这句里，little 虽然用在谓语部分，但是它的意义不是小的而是少的。

2. 误：Is the fish still live？

正：Is the fish still living？或 Is the fish still alive？

（鱼还活着吗？）

〔说明〕形容词 live（活的）虽然可以直接形容名词，却不能作谓语动词的补语。living 和 alive 具有同样的意义，并且可以作谓语动词的补语，所以应该把误句里的 live 改为 living 或 alive。

〔类例〕The fish we caught is still alive.（我们所捕的鱼还活着。）

I fear he is no longer living.（我恐怕他已死了。）

〔比较〕It is a live fish.（这是一条活鱼。）

3. 误：These pearls are imitation.

正：These pearls are imitative.

（这些珍珠是仿制的。）

〔说明〕imitation（仿制的，假造的）和 mock（模拟的，假的）两个形容词虽然可以直接形容名词，却不能作谓语动词的补语。imitative（仿制的，假造的）和 false（假造的，假的）才可以作谓语动词的补语，所以应该把误句里的 imitation 改为 imitative。

〔类例〕The leather is imitative.（这皮革是仿制的。）

The trial is false.（这审判是假的。）

〔比较〕It is a piece of imitation leather.（这是一块人造皮。）

It is a mock trial.（这是一次假的审判。）

4. 误：He is an ill man.

正：He is a sick man.

（他是一个病人。）

〔说明〕如 ill（有病的）和 well（健康的）形容词只能作谓语动词的补语，却不能直接形容名词。sick（有病的）和 healthy（健康的）与上面两个形容词的意义相同，它们才能直接形容名词，所以应该把误句里的 ill 改为 sick。

〔类例〕I asked after my sick friend.（我问候我的病友。）

She is a healthy girl.（她是一个健康的女孩。）

〔比较〕He is ill.（他有病。）

I am quite well，thank you.（我很好，谢谢你。）

5. 误：He gave me a loath answer.

正：He gave me an unwilling answer. 或 He gave me a reluctant answer.

（他给我一个不愿意的回答。）

〔说明〕如 loath（不愿的），worth（有价值的）等形容词可以作谓语动词的补语，却不能放在名词前形容名词。unwilling（不愿的）和 worthy（有价值的）与上面两个形容词的意义相同，它们才能放在名词前形容名词，所以应该把误句里的 loath 改为 unwilling 或 reluctant, 因为 reluctant（不愿的）也可以直接形容名词。

〔类例〕He gave me an unwilling assistance.（他给我勉强的帮助。）

He made a reluctant answer.（他作了一个勉强的回答。）

He is a worthy student.（他是一个有价值的学生。）

〔比较〕The girl was loath to go.（这女孩不愿去。）

The book is worth reading.（这本书是值得读的。）

〔参考〕（1）The students loath to go may remain here.（不愿意去的学生可以留下在此。）

（2）Nothing worth mentioning occurred.（没有发生值得提的事情。）

〔注〕在第一句里，loath to go 放在名词 students 的后面形容它；在第二句里，worth mentioning 放在名词 nothing 的后面形容它。这种形容短语实在是由形容从句 who are loath to go 和 which was worth mentioning 省略而成的。

（3）The children were nothing loath，for the house was splendid，and the welcome kind enough.（孩子们并无不愿，因为房子是辉煌的，并且对她们的欢迎是十分和蔼的。）

〔注〕在这句里的 nothing loath（并无不愿，完全满足）是成语。

6. 误：An asleep man cannot hear it.

正：A sleeping man cannot hear it.

（一个睡着的人不能听到它。）

〔说明〕如 asleep（睡的），alive（活的）等形容词可以作谓语动词的补语，可以放在名词后形容名词，却不能放在名词前形容名词。sleeping（睡着的）和 live（活的）或 living（活的）和上面两个形容词的意义相同，它们才能放在名词前形容名词，所以应该把误句里的 asleep 改为 sleeping。

〔类例〕Let sleeping dogs lie.（不要干涉而惹事。）

He is the greatest living master of style.（他是当世第一个文章家。）

I have not seen a live phoenix.（我不曾见过一只活的凤凰。）

〔比较〕The fish we caught is still alive.（我们所捉的鱼仍旧活着。）

He is asleep.（他睡着。）

〔参考〕（1）A man asleep cannot hear it.（一个睡着的人不能听到它。）

〔注〕这个放在名词后面的形容 asleep 实在是形容从句 who is asleep 省略而成的。

（2）He is the happiest man alive.（他是世上最快乐的人。）

〔注〕这个放在名词后面的形容词 alive 实在是由 who is alive 省略而成的。

（40）形容词的位置的错误

1. 误：I want a hot cup of tea.

正：I want a cup of hot tea.

（我要一杯热茶。）

〔说明〕在一杯热茶的短语里，热是应该形容茶的，我们不可把它来形容杯子，所以我们要把 a hot cup of tea 改为 a cup of hot tea。

〔类例〕I drank a glass of hot water.（我喝了一杯热水。）

Please pour me out a cup of hot coffee.（请给我倒一杯热咖啡。）

〔比较〕I drank a big cup of beer.（我喝了一大杯啤酒。）

〔参考〕He bought a new pair of shoes.（他买了一双新鞋。）

〔注〕a new pair of shoes 的原意是另一双鞋，后来也表示一双新鞋的意思，这是俗语的用法。

2. 误：I have new something to tell you.

正：I have something new to tell you.

（我有些新奇的事告诉你。）

〔说明〕普通形容词形容名词时，须把形容词放在名词的前面，但是形容 something，anything，nothing，everything 等名词时须把形容词放在这些名词的后面。在误句里 new 被放在 something 的前面，这是错误的，所以应该把 new 放在 something 的后面。

〔类例〕I found something eatable.（我找到了些可吃的东西。）

Is there anything new？（有任何新的东西吗？）

It is nothing serious.（它是不重要的。）

Everything good comes from the United States.（好的东西都来自美国。）

Nothing great is easy.（没有大的事情是容易的。）

3. 误：Clever everybody can do it.

正：Everybody clever can do it.

（每个聪明的人能够做这事。）

〔说明〕形容 nobody，somebody，anybody，everybody 等词时，也须把形容词放在它们的后面，所以应该把误句里的 clever 放到 everybody 的后面。

〔类例〕I met somebody old.（我遇到某个老人。）

Have you found anybody rich？（你找到任何富有的人吗？）

It needs somebody stronger to do work of that sort.（这需要较强的人去做那种工作。）

Everybody present wants to do it.（每个出席的人要做这件事情。）

4. 误：He is the happiest alive man.

正：He is the happiest man alive.

（他是世上最快乐的人。）

〔说明〕普通形容词形容名词时，须把形容词放在名词的前面，但是有些形容词形容名词时，须把它们放在名词的后面。这些特别的形容词就是 alive（活的），afraid（感到恐惧的），else（别的），aware（知道的），ashamed（感到羞耻的），awake（洞悉的），worth（值得的），akin（类似的）等。在误句里 alive 被放在名词 man 的前面，这是错误的，所以应该把它放在 man 的后面。

〔类例〕They are the best men alive.（他们是世上最好的人。）

He is a man afraid of dogs.（他是一个怕狗的人。）

There is no one else in the room.（室中没有别人。）

The boy，aware of his own mistakes，ran away.（那个明白自己的错误的孩子跑开了。）

The boy，ashamed of his bad conduct，confessed the fault.

（那个对自己的坏行为感到羞耻的孩子供认这过失。）

There is no person awake to the danger.（没有人洞悉这危险。）

There is nothing worth doing.（没有值得做的事情。）

Spanish，akin to Latin，is not very hard to learn.

（西班牙文类似拉丁文是不太难学习的。）

5. 误：I like beautiful those butterflies.

正：I like those beautiful butterflies.

（我爱那些美丽的蝴蝶。）

〔说明〕当一个叙述形容词和一个指示形容词同时形容一个名词时，叙述形容词须放在指示形容词的后面。在误句里，叙述形容词放在指示形容词 those 的前面，这是错误的，所以应该把 beautiful 放到 those 的后面。

〔类例〕I dislike that black cat.（我不喜欢那只黑猫。）

I met that beautiful girl yesterday.（昨天我遇到那位美丽的姑娘。）

〔参考〕（1）当一个指示形容词和一个数目形容词同时形容一个名词时，指示形容词须放

在数目形容词的前面，例如：I saw those two boys.（我看到那两个孩子。）

（2）当一个数目形容词和一个叙述形容词同时形容一个名词时，数目形容词须放在叙述形容词的前面，例如：I have two interesting books.（我有两本有趣的书。）

（3）同样的，数量形容词须放在叙述形容词的前面，例如：There is much white sugar.（有许多白糖。）

（4）当一个不定形容词和一个叙述形容词同时形容一个名词时，不定形容词须放在叙述形容词的前面，例如：He has read every interesting book in the school.（他曾读学校里每一本有趣的书。）

（5）疑问形容词须放在叙述形容词的前面，例如：What good fun is it going to be？（这将成为如何有趣的事情？）

（6）关系形容词须放在叙述形容词的前面，例如：He told me what misfortunes he had suffered.（他告诉我他所遭受的不幸。）

6. 误：Our three first lessons are not difficult.

正：Our first three lessons are not difficult.

（我们的前三课书是不难的。）

〔说明〕当一个序数的形容词和一个数目形容词同时形容一个名词时，序数形容词须放在数目形容词的前面。在误句中，three 放在 first 的前面，这是错误的，所以应该把 first 放在 three 的前面。

〔类例〕Her first two names are Mary Grant.（她的前两个名字是玛丽、格兰脱。）

7. 误：She has a green pretty suit.

正：She has a pretty green suit.

（她有一套美丽的绿衣服。）

〔说明〕当一个普通的叙述形容词和一个颜色的形容词同时形容一个名词时，普通的叙述形容词须放在颜色的形容词的前面。在误句里，颜色形容词 green 放在普通形容词 pretty 的前面，这显然是错误的，所以应该改正如上。

〔类例〕I like little red flowers.（我爱小的红花。）

8. 误：He is a Chinese beautiful lady.

正：He is a beautiful Chinese lady.

（她是一位美丽的中国小姐。）

〔说明〕当一个叙述形容词和一个专有形容词同时形容一个名词时，叙述形容词须放在专有形容词的前面。在误句里，专有形容词 Chinese 放在叙述形容词 beautiful 的前面，这是错误的，所以应该改正如上。

〔类例〕He is a famous Italian composer.（他是一位著名的意大利作曲家。）

9. 误：I have heard those radio American programs.

正：I have heard those American radio programs.

（我曾听到那些美国的无线电节目。）

〔说明〕当一个专有形容词和一个用作形容词的名词同时修饰一个名词时，专有形容词须放在用作形容词的名词的前面。在误句里，用作形容词的名词 radio 放在专有形容词 American 的前面，这是错误的。所以应该改正如上。

〔类例〕She is a Chinese girl student.（她是一个中国女学生。）

10. 误：She is a young clever lady.

正：She is a clever young lady.

（她是一位聪明的年轻小姐。）

〔说明〕当一个表性质状态的形容词和一个表年龄的形容词同时形容一个名词时，表性质状态的形容词须放在表年龄的形容词的前面。在误句里，表年龄的形容词 young 却放在表性质状态的形容词 clever 的前面，这是错误的，所以应该改正如上。

〔类例〕My father is a venerable old scholar.（我的父亲是一位受人尊敬的老学者。）

（41）冠词间的错用

1. 误：He was educated at an university.

正：He was educated at a university.

（他在大学受教育。）

〔说明〕普通说 a 用在辅音字母开头的名词前面；an 用在元音字母开头的名词前面，实际上这话是不对的。我们应该说 a 用在辅音开头的名词前面，an 用在元音开头的名词前面。university 开首的字母虽为元音字母，但它的发音却为［ju:］，换一句话说 university 虽是一个元音字母开头的词，却是一个辅音开首的词。在误句里 university 的前面用 an, 这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕A foot is a unit of length.（尺是长度的单位。）

〔比较〕虽然 uncle（叔伯或舅父）也是一个以元音字母 u 开首的词，可是它的发音为［ʌn］，所以它的前面用冠词 an，例如：An uncle of mine has lost his son.（我的一个伯父死去了儿子。）

2. 误：I don’t like such an one.

正：1 don’t like such a one.

（我不喜欢这样的一个。）

〔说明〕虽然 one 是一个元音字母 o 开首的词，可是这个 o 的发音是［wʌn］。换句话说 one 是一个辅音开首的词，它的前面须用冠词 a 不可用 an，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕The robber was a one-eyed man.（这强盗是一个一只眼睛的人。）

〔比较〕I gave her an orange.（我给她一个橘子。）

3. 误：He has a honest face.

正：He has an honest face.

（他有一张诚实的面孔。）

〔说明〕虽然 honest 是一个辅音字母开首的词，可是这个开头的字母 h 并不发音，它的开首的音是元音［on］，因此它的前面须用冠词 an, 不可用 a。在误句里，honest 的前面用 a，这是错误的，所以应该把 a 改为 an。

〔类例〕He stayed there an hour.（他留在那里一个钟头。）

〔比较〕He bought a house in Taipei.（他在台北买了一所房子。）

4. 误：Yesterday I found a dog in the street，and I took a dog home.

正：Yesterday I found a dog in the street，and I took the dog home.

（昨天我在街上碰到一只狗，并且我把这狗带回家。）

〔说明〕当我们第一次提到一个普通的生物或东西时，我们在它的前面用 a 或 an。在第二次提到它时，我们须在它的前面用 the，所以我们应该把误句里的第二个 a dog 改为 the dog。

〔类例〕I have bought a watch and a picture. The watch is for my brother and the picture is for my sister.

（我买了一只表和一张画。表是给我的弟弟的，画是给我的妹妹的。）

5. 误：A sun rises in the east.

正：The sun rises in the east.

（日出东方。）

〔说明〕在 world（世界），earth（地球），sun（太阳），moon（月亮）等独一无二的自然物前须用定冠词 the。在误句里，sun 的前面用 a，这是错误的，所以应该把 a 改为 the。

〔类例〕 The moon is down.（月落。）

He sailed all round the world.（他周航世界。）

We live on the earth.（我们住在地球上。）

〔参考〕（1）on earth（到底，究竟）是一个成语，在 earth 前不必加 the，例如：

What on earth does he mean？（他究竟是什么意思？）

（2）当 moon 和 world 的前面有形容词时，常可用不定冠词，例如：

We live in a busy world.（我们住在匆忙的世界里。）

There was a full moon last evening.（昨晚是满月。）

（42）多用冠词的错误

1. 误：He went to the Tung-Ning Road by pedicab.

正：He went to Tung-Ning Road by pedicab.

（他乘三轮车到东宁路去。）

〔说明〕在人名地名等专有名词前不应用冠词，所以应该将误句中 Tung-Ning Road 前面的 the 除去。

〔类例〕 Confucius is a great Chinese philosopher and educator.

（孔夫子是一位伟大的中国哲学家和教育家。）

Tainan is an old city in Taiwan.（台南是台湾的古城。）

〔参考〕当专有名词变成普通名词时，它的前面须用冠词，例如：

（1）He is the Newton of the age.（他是当代的牛顿。）

在这句中 the Newton 的意思是 a great mathematician like Newton（一位像牛顿的伟大的数学家）。

（2）Hanyang has heen called the Pittsburgh of China.（汉阳被称为中国的匹兹堡。）

在这句中，the Pittsburgh 的意思是 a place noted for ironworks and steelworks（一个以钢铁工厂出名的地方）。

2. 误：A necessity is the mother of invention.

正：Necessity is the mother of invention.

（必要为发明之母。）

〔说明〕在抽象名词前应加冠词。在误句中，抽象名词 necessity 前用冠词，这显然是错误的，所以应该把 necessity 前面的 A 去掉。

〔类例〕 Honesty is the best policy.（诚实为最上之策。）

〔参考〕（1）当抽象名词附有修饰语表示特别的性质或状态时，它的前面须加冠词，例如：

The rich envy the happiness of the poor.（富者羡慕贫者的幸福。）

（2）当抽象名词用作普通名词时，它的前面也须加用冠词，例如：

She is a beauty.（她是一个美人。）

3. 误：The water is changed into steam by heat.

正：Water is changed into steam by heat.

（水受热则变成气体。）

〔说明〕物质名词的前面不应加冠词。在误句中物质名词 water 的前面加冠词 the，这显然是错误的，所以应该把 water 前面的 the 除去。

〔类例〕 Gold is a valuable metal.（黄金是一种贵重的金属。）

〔参考〕（1）当物质名词附有修饰语表示特殊性质时，它的前面须加冠词，例如：

The water of this well is not good to drink.（这井里的水不好喝。）

（2）当物质名词用作普通名词时，它的前面也须用冠词，例如：

He threw a stone at the dog.（他向犬投石子。）

4. 误：A man is the lord of creation.

正：Man is the lord of creation.

（人为万物之灵。）

〔说明〕当 man 指一般人时，它的前面不应加冠词。在误句里的 man 是指一般的人，而它的前面有 A 这显然是错误的，所以应该把 man 前面的 A 除去。

〔类例〕 Man is mortal.（人必有死。）

〔比较〕 A man sometimes hears what he does not like.（一个人有时听到他所不喜欢的话。）

〔参考〕woman 也和 man 一样，指一般女人时，它的前面不用冠词，例如：

Woman is weaker than man.（女人弱于男人。）

5. 误：They were playing a tennis.

正：They were playing tennis.

（他们在打网球。）

〔说明〕说玩（某种游戏）用 play 或 play at，而且在游戏的名称前不用冠词，如打弹子是 to play billiards；打网球是 to play tennis。在 tennis 的前面不用冠词，所以应该把误句里的在 tennis 前面的 a 去掉。

〔类例〕They played billiards.（他们打弹子。）

〔参考〕（1）玩球在英文中可以说 to play with a ball , 在 ball 前用冠词，玩别的东西也是一样，

例如：She is playing with a doll.（她正在玩洋娃娃。）

（2）弹钢琴我们可说 to play on the piano 或 to play the piano，piano 的前面须用定冠词，例如：She was playing on the piano.（她在弹钢琴。）

拉提琴也是一样，如：She was playing the violin.（她在拉小提琴。）

6. 误：The history is a very interesting subject.

正：History is a very interesting subject.

（历史是一门极有兴趣的学科。）

〔说明〕在 history（历史），English（英文），chemistry（化学），mathematics（数学）等学科前不应加冠词。在误句里，学科 history 前加冠词 the，这显然是错误的，所以应该把 the 除去。

〔类例〕 English is taught in all schools.（英文是所有学校都教的。）

Mathematics is a hard subject to learn.（数学是一门难学的学科。）

He studied chemistry.（他研究化学。）

7. 误：The whale is a kind of an animal.

正：The whale is a kind of animal.

（鲸鱼是一种动物。）

〔说明〕a kind of 的后面不应用冠词。在误句里 a kind of 的后面用冠词 an，这显然是错误的，所以应该把它除去。

〔类例〕This is a new kind of machine.（这是一种新式的机器。）

8. 误：The waiter，bring me a cup of coffee，please.

正：Waiter，bring me a cup of coffee，please.

（侍者，请拿一杯咖啡给我。）

〔说明〕用作称呼的主格的普通名词前，不应用冠词。在误句里，waiter 是称呼的主格，它的前面用冠词 the，这显然是错误的，所以应该把 the 除去。

〔类例〕 Waiter，bring my bill，please.（侍者，请拿账单来。）

Mother，where’s my fish pole？（母亲，我的钓鱼竿在哪里？）

9. 误：Europeans eat with a knife and a fork.

正：Europeans eat with knife and fork.

（欧洲人用刀叉吃食。）

〔说明〕两个名词由连词或介词连接起来，表示共同、成双、对照等意思时，应省去冠词，在误句里 knife and fork 表示在一起的两样食具，在它们的前面加冠词 a，这显然是错误的，所以应该把那两个 a 除去。

〔类例〕They worked hard day and night.（他们日夜努力工作。）

He went begging from door to door.（他挨户求乞。）

10. 误：The children go to the school every morning.

正：The children go to school every morning.

（孩子们每天早晨上学去。）

〔说明〕有些短语由介词和名词结合而成，表达抽象的观念。在习惯上，在这种名词的前面不用冠词，如：（go）to school（上学），（go）to bed（就寝），on foot（步行），by water（由水路）等。go to school 是一个短语，表达去求学的抽象观念，在习惯上，school 前不用冠词。在误句里，school 前用了冠词，这显然是错误的，所以应该把 school 前的冠词 the 除去。

〔类例〕It is time to go to bed.（睡觉的时间到了。）

We shall go home on foot.（我们将步行回家。）

He went by water.（他由水路去。）

11. 误：A fool as he is，he will not do such a thing.

正：Fool as he is，he will not do such a thing.

（他虽然是一个智障者，却不会做这种事。）

〔说明〕名词放在从句的前面表示让步时，它的前面不用冠词。在误句里 fool 放在从句的句首表示让步，它的前面用冠词 a，这显然是错误的，所以应该把冠词 a 除去。

〔类例〕 Woman as she is，she may be of help in time of need.

（她虽是女人，但在必要时她可帮忙。）

（43）省略冠词的错误

1. 误：The ship sailed across Pacific.

正：The ship sailed across the Pacific.

（这船横渡太平洋。）

〔说明〕在海洋名的前面须用定冠词，如 the Pacific（太平洋），the Atlantic（大西洋），the Mediterranean Sea（地中海）等，在误句里，在洋名 Pacific 前无定冠词，这显然是错误的，所以应该在它的前面加定冠词 the。

〔类例〕There is a beautiful island in the Atlantic.（在大西洋里有一美丽的岛。）

The battle was fought on the Mediterranean Sea.（这战争在地中海上发生。）

2. 误：The steamer was sailing on British Channel.

正：The steamer was sailing on the British Channel.

（这轮船在英国海峡的海面上行着。）

〔说明〕在海峡名的前面须用定冠词，如 the British Channel（英国海峡），the Magellan Strait（麦哲伦海峡）等。在误句里，在海峡名 British Channel 的前面没有定冠词，这显然是错误的，所以应该在它的前面加定冠词 the。

〔类例〕 The Channel lies between the North Sea and the Atlantic.

（英国海峡位于大西洋与北海之间。）

The Magellan Strait was discovered by Ferdinand Magellan in 1520.

（麦哲伦海峡于西历1520年被麦哲伦所发现。）

3. 误：Yangtze Kiang is the greatest river in China.

正：The Yangtze Kiang is the greatest river in China.

（长江是中国最大的河。）

〔说明〕在河流和运河的名称的前面，须用定冠词，如：the Yangtze Kiang（长江），the Yellow River（黄河），the Panama Canal（巴拿马运河），the Grand Canal（中国的大运河）等。在误句里，在河流名 Yangtze Kiang 的前面没有定冠词，这显然是错误的，所以应该在它的前面加定冠词。

〔类例〕 The Yellow River is the sorrow of China.（黄河为中国的忧患。）

The scenery along the Grand Canal is beautiful.（沿中国大运河的风景是美丽的。）

The Panama Canal is a ship canal across the Isthmus of Panama，connecting the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans.

（巴拿马运河是一条横贯巴拿马地峡的通船的运河，连接大西洋和太平洋。）

4. 误：Persian Gulf is an arm of the Arabian Sea.

正：The Persian Gulf is an arm of the Arabian Sea.

（波斯湾是阿拉伯海的内海。）

〔说明〕在海湾的名称的前面须用定冠词，如 the Persian Gulf（波斯湾），the Spencer’s Gulf（斯宾塞湾）等。在误句里，在海湾名 Persian Gulf 的前面不用冠词，这是错误的，所以应该在它的前面加定冠词。

〔类例〕 The Spencer’s Gulf is a large inlet on the coast of South Australia.

（斯宾塞海湾是南澳洲沿海的一个大海湾。）

〔参考〕（1）bay 是比 gulf 较小的海湾，在这种较小的海湾的名词前不用定冠词，例如：

Hudson Bay is an inland sea in North America.（哈得逊湾是北美的内海。）

若用 bay of name of place 的形式时，它的前面须用定冠词，例如：

The Bay of Biscay is one of the stormiest seas.（比斯开湾是一个最多风暴的海。）

（2）海港名前不用定冠词，例如：

Port Arthur is a naval station at the southern end of the Peninsula of Liaotung.

（旅顺口是辽东半岛南端的军港。）

The ship is at anchor in Foochow Harbour at present.（这船现在停泊在福州港。）

5. 误：West Lake is the most beautiful lake in China.

正：The West Lake is the most beautiful lake in China.

（西湖是中国最美丽的湖。）

〔说明〕在 Oneida Lake（奥奈达湖），Lake Erie（伊利湖）等外国湖名前不应用定冠词，但在英译的我国大陆的湖的前面须用定冠词，如：the West Lake（西湖），the Tungting Lake（洞庭湖），the Poyang Lake（鄱阳湖）等。在误句里 West Lake 的前面不用 the，这显然是错误的，所以应该在它的前面加定冠词。

〔类例〕 The Poyang Lake is smaller than the Tungting Lakes.（鄱阳湖比洞庭湖小。）

〔比较〕 Oneida Lake is a lake near Syracuse.（奥奈达湖是一个近叙拉古的湖。）

〔参考〕（1）the Tungting Lake 也可以写成 Lake Tungting 的形式，在后面的形式里 Lake 前不

应用 the，如：Lake Tungting is fed by the Yantze River.（洞庭湖水来自长江。）

（2）台湾地区的日月潭的英文译名是 Sun Moon Lake, 依照英文的习惯用法，湖名前不用定冠词，例如：Sun Moon Lake is a noted scenic spot in Taiwan.（日月潭是台湾的一个闻名的风景区。）

6. 误：Himalayas contain the highest summits in the world.

正：The Himalayas contain the highest summits in the world.

（喜马拉雅山脉包含世界上最高的山峰。）

〔说明〕在山脉的名称的前面须用定冠词，如：the Himalayas（喜马拉雅山脉），the Alps（阿尔卑斯山脉）等。在误句里，山脉名 Himalayas 的前面不用定冠词，这显然是错误的，所以应该在它的前面加定冠词。

〔类例〕 The Alps are the vastest mountain system in Europe.

（阿尔卑斯山脉是欧洲最广大的山脉。）

〔参考〕（1）在单独的山名前不用定冠词，例如：

Mount Everest is the highest known mountain in the world.

（挨佛勒斯山是世界上所知的最高山。）

（2）阿尔卑斯山有几个单独的山峰名却是例外，在它们的前面仍用定冠词，例如：

The Finsteraarhorn is the highest peak of the Bernese Alps.

（芬斯他拉洪峰是瑞士中南部阿尔卑斯山脉的最高峰。）

7. 误：Malay Peninsula is a peninsula in southeastern Asia.

正：The Malay Peninsula is a peninsula in southeastern Asia.

（马来半岛是在东南亚的一个半岛。）

〔说明〕在半岛的名称的前面须用定冠词，如：the Malay Peninsula（马来半岛），the Iberian Peninsula（伊比利亚半岛）等。在误句里 Malay Peninsula 的前面无定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该在它的前面加定冠词。

〔类例〕 The Iberian Peninsula comprises Spain and Portugal.

（伊比利亚半岛包含西班牙和葡萄牙。）

8. 误：When Columbus first discovered West Indies，he believed he was close upon India.

正：When Columbus first discovered the West Indies， he believed he was close upon India.

（当哥伦布第一次发现西印度群岛时，他以为已近印度。）

〔说明〕在群岛的名称的前面须用定冠词，如 the West Indies（西印度群岛），the Pescadores（澎湖群岛），the Ryukyu Islands（琉球群岛）等。在误句里，West Indies 的前面没有用定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该在它的前面加定冠词。

〔类例〕 The Pescadores are a group of islands off the western coast of Formosa.

（澎湖群岛是台湾西海岸外的一群岛屿。）

The Ryukyu Islands had been Chinese dependent state from the fourteenth century to the nineteenth century.（琉球群岛从十四世纪至十九世纪为中国之属国。）

〔参考〕在单独的岛名前不用定冠词，例如：Formosa is a beautiful island.（台湾是一个美丽的岛。）

9. 误：United States is an industrial nation.

正：The United States is an industrial nation.

（美国是一个工业国家。）

〔说明〕在取复数形式的国家的名称的前面须用定冠词，如：the United States（美国），the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics（苏联），the Netherlands（荷兰）等。在误句里 United States 的前面没有定冠词，这显然是错误的，所以应该在它的前面加定冠词。

〔类例〕 The Union of Soviet Socialist Republics is a communist country.（苏联是一个共产国家。）

The Netherlands is the most densely populated state in Europe.

（荷兰是欧洲人口最密的国家。）

10. 误：Hague is the capital of the Netherlands.

正：The Hague is the capital of the Netherlands.

（海牙是荷兰的首府。）

〔说明〕在有些特别的地名的前面须用定冠词 the，像这种的例子很多，如：荷兰的首府是 The Hague（海牙）；地中海沿岸的风景区是 the Riviera（里维耶拉）；非洲的大沙漠是 the Sahra（撒哈拉）；非洲有一个国家是 the Sudan（苏丹）；南非联邦有一省是 the Transvaal（脱兰斯瓦尔）等等。在误句里 Hague 的前面没有定冠词 The，这是错误的，所以应该在它的前面加定冠词。

〔类例〕 The Sahara is the largest desert of the world.（撒哈拉是世界上最大的沙漠。）

The Riviera is replete with beautiful scenery.（里维耶拉多美景。）

The Sudan is the chief source of the world’s supply of gum arabic.

（苏丹是世界上阿拉伯树胶供应的主要出处。）

The Sudan was proclaimed an independent republic in 1956.

（西历1956年苏丹被宣布为一独立共和国。）

The capital of the Transvaal is Pretoria.（脱兰斯瓦尔的省会是比勒陀利亚。）

〔参考〕The Hague 的 The 即使在句中，也须大写开始，例如：

In 1912，the International Opium Convention was signed at The Hague.

（西历1912年《国际鸦片公约》签订于海牙。）

11. 误：Chinese Government is ruled by the people.

正：The Chinese Government is ruled by the people.

（中国政府是由人民管理的。）

〔说明〕在政府及其各部门的名称的前面须用定冠词，如：the Chinese Government（中国政府），the Foreign Office（外交部）等。在误句里 Chinese Government 的前面没有定冠词，这显然是错误的，所以应该在它的前面加 the。

〔类例〕 The Foreign Office refused to give out any further information on the event.

（关于该事件，外交部拒绝透露更多消息。）

12. 误：He is a member of Young Men’s Christian Association.

正：He is a member of the Young Men’s Christian Association.

（他也是青年会的会员。）

〔说明〕如 the Young Men’s Christian Association（青年会），the Ladies’ Patriotic Society（妇女爱国会）等会社的名称虽然是专有名词，在它们的前面须用定冠词。在误句 Young Men’s Christian Association 的前面没有定冠词，这显然是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕 The Ladies’Patriotic Society was founded long ago.（妇女爱国会很久以前已创立。）

13. 误：Taipei Post Office is not far from the Station.

正：The Taipei Post Office is not far from the Station.

（台北邮政局离车站不远。）

〔说明〕在邮局和银行的专有名称的前面须用定冠词，如 the Taipei Post Office（台北邮局），the Central Bank（中央银行）等。在误句里，Taipei Post Office 的前面没有定冠词，这显然是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕He has a large deposit in the Central Bank.（他在中央银行有一大笔存款。）

14. 误：I bought the book at Popular Book Company.

正：I bought the book at the Popular Book Company.

（我在大众书局购此书。）

〔说明〕在旅馆和商店的专有名称的前面须用定冠词，如 the Mayflower Hotel（美华阁旅馆），the Popular Book Company（大众书局）等。在误句里 Popular Book Company 的前面没有定冠词，这显然是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕 The Mayflower Hotel is fitted up with modern comforts.（美华阁设有新式设备。）

15. 误：He left Catholic Hospital a week after the operation.

正：He left the Catholic Hospital a week after the operation.

（他动手术后一星期离开崇爱医院。）

〔说明〕在医院和戏院的专有名称的前面须用定冠词，如 the Catholic Hospital（崇爱医院），the Great World Theatre（大世界戏院）。在误句里，Catholic Hospital 的前面没有定冠词，这显然是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕 The Great World Theatre is full.（大世界戏院客满。）

16. 误：Have you visited Forbidden City？

正：Have you visited the Forbidden City？

（你曾经游览过紫禁城吗？）

〔说明〕在建筑物的专有名称的前面须用定冠词，如 the Forbidden City（紫禁城），the Great Wall（万里长城），the Altar of Heaven（天坛）等。在误句里，Forbidden City 的前面没有定冠词，这显然是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕 The Great Wall is said to be the only thing man has made that can be seen from the moon.

（据说万里长城是从月球上能够看到的人所做的唯一的东西。）

The Empire State Building is the tallest building in the world.

（皇州大厦是世界最高的建筑。）

The Holland and Lincoln Tunnels and the George Washington Bridge must be great timesavers for people driving in from Jersey.

（人们从求赛驾车经荷兰和林肯隧道再经华盛顿桥而驶入，一定很节省时间。）

Besides the Washington Monument，visitors may also see the Jefferson and Lincoln Memorials in the capital of the United States.

（在美国京城里，游历者除了华盛顿纪念碑之外还可以观光杰弗逊和林肯纪念堂。）

〔比较〕有些英国的建筑物的名称前不加定冠词，例如：

Westminster Abbey is the scene of the coronation of the English kings.

（韦斯敏斯德教堂是英王加冕处。）

Westminster bridge is the broadest in London.（韦斯敏斯德桥是伦敦最阔的桥。）

In St. Paul’s Cathedral，there are the tombs of Wellington and Nelson.

（在保罗大教堂里有威灵吞和纳耳逊之墓。）

〔参考〕（1）伦敦的大吊桥的桥名前须用定冠词，如：

The Tower Bridge opens to permit the passage of vessels.（塔桥开启准船通行。）

（2）在教堂的专有名称前不加定冠词，如：

St. Peter’s is the largest church in Christendom.（圣彼得教堂是基督教界最大的教堂。）

（3）在城的专有名称前不加定冠词，如：

Nanking City is the largest city in China.（南京城是中国最大的城。）

（4）在街道的专有名称前不加定冠词，如：

We live at No. 50，Tung-Ning Road.（我们住在东宁路五○号。）

（5）车站的专有名称前不用定冠词，如：

I went to Tainan Station to see my friend off.（我到台南车站去送朋友。）

（6）公园的专有名称前不用定冠词，如：

Yellowstone National Park is famous for its geysers.

（美国黄石公园以热水喷泉闻名于世。）

17. 误：Queen Elizabeth for London left yesterday.

正：The Queen Elizabeth for London left yesterday.

（到伦敦去的伊丽莎白号昨日启航。）

〔说明〕在船的名称的前面须用定冠词以免引起误会，如：the Queen Elizabeth（伊丽莎白号）the Missouri（密苏里号），the Bismarck（俾斯麦号）等。在误句里 Queen Elizabeth 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕The instrument of unconditional surrender of Japan was signed on board the Missouri in

Tokyo Bay on Sept. 2，1946.

（1946年9月2日，日本在东京湾美国战舰密苏里号上签下无条件投降书。）

The Bismarck，the largest and newest of Germany warships was sunk on May 27，1941 by the British fleet.

（1941年5月27日，德国最大最新的战舰俾斯麦号被英国舰队击沉。）

〔参考〕舰队的名称前也须用定冠词，如：

In June，1944，the American fleet captured the strong island of Saipan.

（在1944年6月，美国舰队攻取日本设防坚强的塞班岛。）

18. 误：He reads Bible every day.

正：He reads the Bible every day.

（他每天读《圣经》。）

〔说明〕在书名的前面须用定冠词，如：the Bible（《圣经》），the Analects of Confucius（《论语》），the Canterbury Tales（《巡礼者的故事》）等。在误句里，书名 Bible 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕He can recite many passages from the Analects of Confucius.（他能背诵许多段《论语》。）

The Canterbury Tales is the great work of the poet Chaucer.

（《巡礼者的故事》是诗人乔叟的巨著。）

〔参考〕以作者名或以故事的主角名为书名时，书名前不必用定冠词，如：

Have you ever read Shakespeare？（您读过莎氏的作品吗？）

Jane Eyre is my favourite book.（《简·爱》是我所最喜爱的书。）

19. 误：Eastern Miscellany was the most famous Chinese magazine before the Second World War.

正：The Eastern Miscellany was the most famous Chinese magazine before the Second World War.

（在第二次世界大战前《东方杂志》是最有名的中国杂志。）

〔说明〕在报章杂志的名称的前面须用定冠词，如：the Eastern Miscellany（《东方杂志》），the Times（《伦敦时报》），the Atlantic Monthly（《大西洋月刊》）等，在误句里，杂志名 Eastern Miscellany 的前面没有用定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕 The Times is a newspaper of very high standing.（《伦敦时报》是极有名的报纸。）

The Atlantic Monthly is a famous American magazine.

（《大西洋月刊》是有名的美国杂志。）

20. 误：Paper was invented in Han dynasty.

正：Paper was invented in the Han dynasty.（或 the Han Dynasty.）

（纸发明于汉朝。）

〔说明〕在朝代的名称的前面，须用定冠词，如：The Han dynasty（汉朝），the Tang dynasty（唐朝），the Ming dynasty（明朝）等。在误句里，Han dynasty 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕Li Po of the Tang dynasty is generally regarded as the greatest Chinese poet.

（唐朝的李白一般被视为最伟大的中国诗人。）

Many Japanese pirates invaded Chinese coasts during the Ming Dynasty.

（明时许多日本海盗侵犯中国海岸。）

21. 误：Former Chinese Empire was the center of civilization in Asia.

正：The former Chinese Empire was the center of civilization in Asia.

（昔时的中华帝国是亚洲的文化中心。）

〔说明〕在帝国的名称的前面，须用定冠词，如：the Chinese Empire（中华帝国），the British Empire（大英帝国），the Japanese Empire（日本帝国）等。在误句里，Chinese Empire 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕The news that Japanese aircraft sank the British battle ships Prince of Wakes and Repulse soon spread all over the British Empire.

（日本飞机击沉英国战舰威克亲王号和击退号的消息顷刻传遍大英帝国。）

The Japanese Empire declined after the Second World War.

（日本帝国衰落于第二次世界大战后。）

22. 误：Dr. Sun Yat-sen is the father of Chinese Republic.

正：Dr. Sun Yat-sen is the father of the Chinese Republic.

（孙中山先生是“中华民国”的国父。）

〔说明〕在共和国的国名的前面须用定冠词，如 the French Republic（法兰西共和国），the Republic of Colombia（哥伦比亚共和国）等，在误句里，Chinese Republic 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕 The French Republic is a large nation in Europe.（法兰西共和国是欧洲的大国。）

The Republic of Colombia is nearly three times the size of France.

（哥伦比亚共和国差不多是法国的面积的三倍。）

23. 误：He will enter Conservative Party.

正：He will enter the Conservative Party.

（他欲参加保守党。）

〔说明〕在政党的名称的前面须用定冠词，如：the Conservative Party（保守党），the Kuomintang（国民党），the Republican Party（共和党）等。在误句里，Conservative Party 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

He is a member of the Kuomintang.（他是国民党员。）

He belongs to the Republican Party.（他属于共和党。）

24. 误：Korean War started in 1950.

正：The Korean War started in 1950.

（朝鲜战争始于1950年。）

〔说明〕在战争的名称的前面须用定冠词，如：the Korean War（朝鲜战争），the Civil War（美国南北战争），the First World War（第一次世界大战）等。在误句里，Korean War 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕 The First World War lasted four Years.（第一次世界大战延续了四年之久。）

The Civil War was fought between the North and the South in the United States.

（美国内战是美国的南北战争。）

25. 误：Conference was held in Cairo on December 1，1943.

正：The Cairo Conference was held in Cairo on December 1，1943.

（开罗会议于1943年12月1日举行于开罗。）

〔说明〕在会议的名称的前面须用定冠词，如 the Cairo Conference（开罗会议），the Potsdam Conference（波茨坦会议），the Yalta Conference（雅尔塔会议）等。在误句里，Cairo Conference 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕 The Potsdam Conference was held at Potsdam in 1945.

（波茨坦会议在1945年举行于波茨坦。）

The Yalta Conference was held at Yalta in February, 1945.

（雅尔塔会议在1945年12月举行于耶尔塔。）

26. 误：He belongs to Mongolian race.

正：He belongs to the Mongolian race.

（他是黄种人。）

〔说明〕在人种的名称的前面须用定冠词，如：the Mongolian race or the yellow race（黄种人），the Ethiopian race or the black race（黑种人）等。在误句里，Mongolian race 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕 The Mongolian race also includes the Eskimos.（黄种人也包括因纽特人。）

He is a member of the Ethiopian race.（他是黑种人。）

27. 误：English language is not difficult to learn.

正：The English language is not difficult to learn.

（英国语言是不难学习的。）

〔说明〕在某种语言和方言的名称的前面须用定冠词，如：the English language（英国语言），the Chinese language（中国语言），the Cantonese dialect（广州话），the Shanghai dialect（上海话）等。在误句里，English language 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕Many English people can understand the Chinese language.（许多英国人能懂中国语言。）

Can You speak the Cantonese dialect？（你能说广州话吗？）

She can speak the Shanghai dialect.（她能说上海话。）

28. 误：He belongs to Catholic Church.

正：He belongs to the Catholic Church.

（他属于天主教。）

〔说明〕在基督教的派别的名称的前面须用定冠词，如：the Catholic Church（天主教），the Presbyterian Church（长老会），the Greek Church（希腊正教）等。在误句里，Catholic Church 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕He is a member of the Presbyterian Church.（他是长老会教友。）

He belongs to the Greek Church.（他属于希腊正教。）

29. 误：In ancient Greece，Olympic Games were held once every four years at Olympia in honor of Zeus.

正：In ancient Greece，the Olympic Games were held once every four years at Olympia in honor of Zeus.

（在古代希腊，在奥林比亚，每四年举行一次奥林比克运动会纪念宇宙神宙斯。）

〔说明〕在运动会的名称的前面须用定冠词，如：the Olympic Games（奥林比克运动会），the first modern Olympiad（第一次现代的世界运动会），the Second Asian Games（第二届亚洲运动会）等。在误句里，Olympic games 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕 The first modern Olympiad was held in Athens in 1896.

（第一次现代的世界运动会于西历1896年举行于雅典。）

The Second Asian Games were held in Manila in 1954.

（第二次亚运会于西历1954年举行于马尼拉。）

The Sixteenth Olympiad was held in Melbourne in 1956.

（第十六次世运会于西历1956年举行于墨尔本。）

30. 误：The plum-blossom is Chinese national flower.

正：The plum-blossom is the Chinese national flower.

（梅花是中国的国花。）

〔说明〕在指明某国的国花的前面须用定冠词，如：the Chinese national flower（中国的国花），the Japanese national flower（日本的国花），the English national flower（英国的国花）等。在误句里，Chinese national flower 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕The rose is the English national flower.（玫瑰花是英国的国花。）

The cherry-blossom is the Japanese national flower.（樱花是日本的国花。）

31. 误：New Year’s festival is usually enthusiastically celebrated throughout China.

正：The New Year’s festival is usually enthusiastically celebrated throughout China.

（在整个中国，人们通常热心地庆祝新年节。）

〔说明〕在节日或纪念日的名称的前面须用定冠词，如：the New Year’s Festival（新年节），the Mid-Autumn Festival（中秋节），the Restoration Day（光复节），the Double Tenth（双十节），the Passover（逾越节）等。在误句里，New Year’s festival 的前面没有定冠词，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕October 24 is the Restoration Day.（十月廿四日是光复节。）

The Passover is a Jewish holyday.（逾越节是犹太人的节日。）

The Chinese observe the Mid-autumn Festival.（中国人庆祝中秋节。）

We celebrated the Double Tenth yesterday.（昨天我们庆祝双十节。）

〔比较〕有许多节日的前面不用定冠词，如：

We celebrated Christmas with a tree and presents.

（我们以一棵圣诞树和礼品庆祝圣诞节。）

New Year’s Day seems to be more appreciated by older people.

（老年人似乎更爱过元旦。）

Thanksgiving Day is celebrated as a national holiday in the United States.

（在美国感恩节像国庆日那样的被庆祝。）

（44）副词被用作补语的错误

1. 误：They appear cheerfully.

正：They appear cheerful.

（他们像是高兴。）

〔说明〕如 appear（像是），be（是），become（变得）等动词是系动词，在它们的后面可以用形容词作补语，却不能用副词代替形容词作补语。在误句里，appear 是系动词，在它的后面用副词 cheerfully，这是错误的，所以应该把它改成形容词 cheerful。

〔类例〕He is diligent.（他是勤勉的。）

She became lazy.（她变得懒惰。）

2. 误：He felt comfortably.

正：He felt comfortable.

（他感到舒服。）

〔说明〕feel（感到）也是系动词，在它的后面不能用副词作补语，所以应该把误句里的副词 comfortably 改为形容词 comfortable。

〔类例〕It proved easy.（它证明是容易的。）

He seemed clever.（他似乎聪明。）

3. 误：The meat smells badly.

正：The meat smells bad.

（这肉有腐臭。）

〔说明〕如 smell（发出气味），taste（有某味）, sound（听起来）等动词当作系动词用时，它们的后面可以用形容词作补语，却不能用副词，在误句里的 smells 是系动词，在它的后面用副词 badly，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕Roses smell sweet.（玫瑰发出香气。）

The milk tastes sour.（这牛乳有酸味。）

The music sounds sweet.（这音乐听来悦耳。）

（45）两个容易误用的副词

1. 误：He left home last year and I did not see him since.

正：He left home last year and I have not seen him since.

（他去年离家，此后我就不曾看见过他。）

〔说明〕since 当作副词用的时候，它的意思是“自彼时至此时”，因此它所形容的动词须用完成时。在误句里 since 的意思是“从去年他离家时起一直到现在”，所以应该把“did not seen”改为完成时 have not seen。

〔类例〕The town was burnt down in 1923 and has since been rebuilt.

（在1923年这城被烧毁，此后城已被重建。）

The tree has since been cut down.（此后树曾被砍倒。）

2. 误：Have you ever seen the gigantic snake？Yes，I have ever seen it.

正：Have you ever seen the gigantic snake？Yes，I have seen it.

（您曾经看到过那大蛇吗？是的，我曾看到过它。）

〔说明〕ever 作“曾经”解释的时候可以用于疑问句和否定句中，却不能用于肯定句中，所以应该把误句里的 yes 后面的 ever 删去。

〔类例〕Have you ever been there？Yes，I have.（您曾经到过那里吗？是的，我曾到过。）

〔参考〕（1）ever 可以用在否定句中，如：

No one has ever reached the place.（没有人到过那地方。）

（2）ever 尚可用在最高级的后面，如：

This is the best novel I have ever read.（这是我读过的最好的一篇小说。）

（46）几对容易互相误用的副词

1. 误：I cannot do it too.

正：I cannot do it either.

（我也不能做这事。）

〔说明〕too 和 either 都可以作副词用，它们的意义也都可以作“也”解释，可是 too 用于肯定句而 either 用于否定句，并且它们不能互相代用。误句是一句否定句，却用了 too，这是错误的，所以应该把 too 改为 either。

〔类例〕If you will not go，I will not go either.（假使您不去，我也不愿去。）

〔比较〕too 用于肯定句，如：

He went there too.（他也到那里去了。）

2. 误：I have not seen him already.

正：I have not seen him yet.

（我尚未看到他。）

〔说明〕副词 already 和 yet 都有“已经”的意思，可是 already 用于肯定句，yet 用于否定句。误句是一句否定句，却用了 already, 这是错误的，所以应该把 already 改为 yet。

〔类例〕He has not yet come.（他尚未来。）

〔比较〕在肯定句中用 already，如：He has already left.（他已离去。）

〔参考〕在问句里也用 yet, 如：Have you seen him yet？（你已看到他吗？）

3. 误：I met her two years before.

正：I met her two years ago.

（我两年前遇见他。）

〔说明〕从现在算起若干时间以前须用 ago，从过去某时算起若干时间以前须用 before。误句里的两年前是从现在算起的，因此用 before 是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕I visited the zoo two days ago.（两天前我游览这动物园。）

〔比较〕以过去某时算起若干时间以前须用 before，如：

I was told that he had left home three years before.（有人告诉我他已离家三年。）

4. 误：Is the boy not your student？Yes，he is not my student. No，he is my student.

正：Is the boy not your student？No，he is not my student. Yes，he is my student.

（这孩子不是您的学生吗？/是的，他不是我的学生。/不，他是我的学生。）

〔说明〕我们中国人回答话时用“是”和“不”的用法和英美人回答话时用 Yes 和 No 的方法是不同的。我们同意对方的问话时用“是”回答，不同意对方的问话时用“不”回答，例如：“他不是您的学生吗？”同意时，我们回答：“是的，他不是我的学生。”不同意时，回答：“不，他是我的学生。”在英语里的问答便不同了，回答的人不必考虑到同意不同意对方的意见。假使回答的话是肯定句，用 Yes；假使回答的话是否定句，用 No。在误句里，回答的话是肯定句却用 No，回答的话是否定句却用 Yes。这两句都是错误的，所以应该把它们改正如上。

〔类例〕Is the answer not right？（这答案是不对吗？）

No，it is not right.（不，它是对的。）

Yes，it is right.（是的，它是不对的。）

Can’t you dance？（您不会跳舞吗？）

No，I can’t.（是的，我不会跳舞。）

Yes，I can.（不，我会跳舞。）

5. 误：He worked very hardly.

正：He worked very hard.

（他十分努力地工作。）

〔说明〕hard 和 hardly 都可以作副词用，可是它们普通的意义却不同，hard 可以作“努力的”解释，hardly 的普通意义却是“几乎不”。误句里所用的 hardly 是错误的，所以应该把它改为 hard。

〔类例〕They tried hard to succeed.（他们努力以达成功。）

〔比较〕I could hardly understand him.（我几乎不能懂他的话。）

〔参考〕当 hardly 和 slowly 或 honestly 用在一起的时候，可作“努力地”或“艰难地”解释，如：

His money is hardly and honestly earned.（他的钱是努力、诚实地赚来的。）

6. 误：He gets up lately every day.

正：He gets up late every day.

（他每日迟起。）

〔说明〕late 和 lately 都可以作副词用，可是它们的意义却不同。late 的意义是“迟的”而 lately 的意义是“近来”。在误句 lately 表达迟的意思，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕The roses bloomed late this year.（今年玫瑰花开得迟。）

〔比较〕She has not been here lately.（她近来未曾在此地。）

7. 误：He lives quite nearly.

正：He lives quite near.

（他住得很近。）

〔说明〕near 和 nearly 都可以作副词用，near 的意义是“近”；nearly 的普通意义是“几乎”，不能作“近”的解释。在误句里，用 nearly 表示“近”的意思，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕Spring is getting near.（春已近。）

〔比较〕He was nearly killed.（他几乎被杀。）

8. 误：The eagle flies highly.

正：The eagle flies high.

（鹰飞得高。）

〔说明〕high 和 highly 都可以作副词用，可是它们的意义却不同。high 的意义是“高”；highly 的普通义是“很”，不可以作“高”的解释。在误句里用 highly 表达“高”的意思，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕The waves ran high.（波浪汹涌。）

〔比较〕I am highly pleased with what he has done.（我对于他所做的非常满意。）

9. 误：I cut the stick shortly.

正：I cut the stick short.

（我把棒砍短。）

〔说明〕short 和 shortly 都可以作副词用，可是它们的意义却不同。short 的意义是“短”；shortly 的普通意义却是“不久”，没有短的意义。在误句里 shortly 用来表达“短”的意思，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕She clipped the thread short.（他把线剪短。）

〔比较〕He will come shortly.（他不久会来。）

10. 误：They sat closely together.

正：They sat close together.

（他们靠近着坐。）

close 和 closely 都可作副词用，并且它们都可以作“接近的”解释，不过 close 所表示的接近是指距离，而 closely 所表示的接近是指差别的程度。在误句里 closely 被用来表示距离的接近，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕He was standing close to the door.（他在近门处站着。）

〔比较〕She closely resembles her mother.（她极像她的母亲。）

11. 误：She is very more beautiful than her mother.

正：She is much more beautiful than her mother.

（她比她的母亲美丽得多。）

〔说明〕much 和 very 都可以作副词用，并且都可以用来修饰形容词或副词，可是 much 可以用来修饰比较级的形容词或副词，very 却不能这样用，在误句里 very 被用来修饰比较级的形容词，这是错误的，所以应把它改为 much。

〔类例〕His composition is much worse than yours.（他的作文比你的坏得多。）

She sings much better than her sister.（她唱歌比她的妹妹好得多。）

〔比较〕very 可以修饰寻常级的形容词，如：She is very clever.（他是非常聪明的。）

12. 误：It is a much interesting book.

正：It is a very interesting book.

（这是一本十分有趣的书。）

〔说明〕形容现在分词须用 very, much 是不能用来形容现在分词的。在误句里，much 用来形容现在分词 interesting，这是错误的，所以应该把它改为 very。

〔类例〕I heard a very surprising news.（我听到一个非常惊人的消息。）

〔比较〕much 可以形容过去分词，如：I was much surprised at the news.（我听到这消息非常吃惊。）

〔参考〕（1）tired，pleased 等过去分词已变成普通形容词，所以我们用 very 形容它们，如：

I am very tired.（我很疲倦。）

I was very pleased.（我极高兴。）

（2）当 tired，pleased 等过去分词恢复动词的性质的时候，仍用 much 形容它们，如：

I was much tired by the task.（工作使我疲倦。）

I was much pleased to hear the news.（我听到这消息非常高兴。）

（3）任何一个过去分词被用为形容词时，须用 very 形容它，如：

His face wore a very surprised expression.（他的脸上带了一种非常惊异的表情。）

13. 误：I very like the book.

正：I much like the book.

（我很爱这书。）

〔说明〕much 可以形容动词，very 却只能修饰形容词和副词，不能形容动词。在误句里，very 形容动词 like，这是错误的，所以应该把它改为 much。

〔类例〕I don’t much like it.（我不大爱它。）

〔比较〕I am very fond of it.（我很爱它。）

14. 误：He is very afraid of the dog.

正：He is much afraid of the dog.

（他极怕狗。）

〔说明〕有些以 a 开头的形容词只可以用于谓语部分，不能放在名词的前面形容名词，如 afraid（怕），alive（活的），alike（像）等。修饰这种形容词须用 much。不可用 very。误句里的 afraid 就是这种限用于述部以 a 开头的形容词，very 却被用来形容它，这是错误的，所以应该把 very 改为 much。

〔类例〕They are much alike.（他们极相像。）

The fish we caught is still much alive.（我们所捕的鱼仍是鲜活的。）

（47）副词当名词用的错误

1. 误：I am going to home.

正：I am going home.

（我回家。）

〔说明〕home 可以作副词用，在它的前面不必用介词。在误句里介词 to 用在副词 home 的前面，这是错误的，所以应该把 to 删除。

〔类例〕He will come home soon.（他将即刻回家。）

〔比较〕He will go to his home soon.（他将即刻回到他的家去。）

2. 误：She will go to abroad.

正：She will go abroad.

（他将出洋。）

〔说明〕abroad（在国外，到外国去）是副词，不能作名词用，因此它的前面不必用介词。在误句里，副词 abroad 的前面用介词 to，这是错误的，所以应该把 to 除掉。

〔类例〕He lives abroad.（他住在国外。）

〔参考〕abroad（外国）也可以作名词用，不过只限用于 from abroad（从国外来）一短语中，如：He returned home from abroad.（他自国外回到家里。）

（48）副词在句中的位置的错误

1. 误：He hard studied at school.

正：He studied hard at school.

（他在学校里用功求学。）

〔说明〕普通副词形容不及物动词时，须放在动词的后面。在误句里，副词 hard 放在不及物动词 studied 的前面，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕I slept soundly last night.（我昨晚睡得好。）

〔参考〕表示时间的副词可以放在句首或句尾，如：

Yesterday we met Miss Smith in the street.（昨天我们在街上遇到施密斯小姐。）

We met her yesterday.（昨天我们遇到他。）

2. 误：They come always on Sunday.

正：They always come on Sunday.

（他们总是星期日来。）

〔说明〕当 always（总是），just（刚），never（永不）等副词修饰句中的动词时，它们须放在动词的前面。在误句里 always 放在 come 的后面，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕They always dine at home.（他们总在家里用膳。）

I just caught the train.（我刚好赶上火车。）

I never saw the dog before.（我从来没有看到过这只狗。）

〔参考〕（1）句中有助动词时，always 等副词须放在助动词和动词的中间，如：

We can never do it.（我们永不能够做此事。）

We can always do it.（我们总能做此事。）

We can just do it.（我们只能做此事。）

（2）加强语气时，always 等副词可以放在助动词的前面，如：

We never can do it.（我们永远不能做此事。）

We always can do it.（我们总能够做此事。）

We just can do it.（我们只能够做此事。）

（3）always 等副词可以放在不加强语气的 verb to be 的后面，如：

He is always late.（他总是迟的。）

He is never late.（他永不迟的。）

He is just the man.（他正是此人。）

（4）加强语气时，always 等副词仍可以用在 verb to be 的前面，如：

He always is late.（他老是迟的。）

He never is late.（他永远不迟的。）

He just is the man.（他正是此人。）

（5）always 等副词须放在 ought 的后面，如:

You ought always to come to see me.（你总该来看我。）

You ought just to tell me.（你正应该告诉我。）

You ought never to tell him.（你永不应该告诉他。）

3. 误：Never I have heard such a thing.

正：Never have I heard such a thing.

（从来我就没有听到过这样的事情。）

〔说明〕为了加强语气，never 可以放在句首，但同时须把助动词放到 never 和主语的中间。在误句里，never 在句首，而 never 和主语的中间没有助动词，这是错误的，所以应该把 have 放在 never 和主语 I 的中间。

〔类例〕 Never have I seen a ghost.（从来我就没有看到过一个鬼。）

Never did I know such a man.（从来我就不认识这样一个人。）

4. 误：He beat loudly the drum.

正：He beat the drum loudly.

（他大声地击鼓。）

〔说明〕副词不应放在动词和宾语的中间。在误句里，副词 loudly 放在动词 beat 和宾语 drum 的中间，这是错误的，所以应该把 loudly 放到句尾。

〔类例〕The people entered the theatre noisily.（人们嘈杂地进入戏院。）

〔参考〕（1）当宾语为名词从句时，副词可以放在动词和名词从句的中间，如：

Can you tell clearly where the treasure is？（你能清楚地说出财宝在何处吗？）

（2）当宾语被从句修饰时，副词可以放在动词和宾语的中间，如：

Can you tell clearly the treasure that was buried deep under the ground by the robbers？（你能清楚地说出强盗埋葬在地下甚深的财宝吗？）

（49）省略介词的错误

1. 误：We usually take luncheon noon.

正：We usually take luncheon at noon.

（我们通常在正午用中饭。）

〔说明〕noon（正午）是名词，不是副词，在它的前面须用介词才组成副词短语。在误句里 noon 的前面没有介词 at，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕He returned home very late at night.（他夜间回家很晚。）

〔参考〕有许多名词的前面放上一个形容词，便组成一个具有副词作用的短语，可以用来表示时间、次数、距离、方法等事项，例如：

He slept all night.（他全夜睡着。）

I met her several times yesterday.（昨天我几次碰到他。）

He walked ten miles.（他步行十英里。）

He did this way.（他用这种方法做。）

2. 误：She is fond singing.

正：She is fond of singing.

（他喜欢唱歌。）

〔说明〕像 fond（爱），afraid（怕），doubtful（疑心的）等形容词的前面用 verb to be, 再在它们的后面用介词 of。这样所组成的短语具有及物动词的作用。但是我们要注意这种短语的末端总有一个介词，这个介词是绝不能少的。在误句里，fond 的后面没有介词 of，这是错误的，所以我们应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕He is afraid of dogs.（他怕狗。）

I am doubtful of success.（我对于成功没有把握。）

〔参考〕busy（忙）也是形容词，但 be busy 的后面却可以不用介词便接宾语，如：

She is busy getting ready for the journey.（他忙于准备旅行。）

3. 误：I was listening the music.

正：I was listening to the music.

（我正在倾听音乐。）

〔说明〕我们中国人很容易把 listen（注意听），arrive（到达）等词当及物动词用。其实它们都是不及物动词。在它们的后面接宾语时非先用介词不可，在误句里 was listening 的后面直接用宾语 the music，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕We arrived at our destination.（我们到达目的地。）

4. 误：This is the house which they live.

正：This is the house in which they live.

（这就是他们所住的房屋。）

〔说明〕关系代词绝不能做不及物动词 live（住）的宾语，它是 live in 的 in 的宾语。在误句里，which 的前面没有 in，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕This is the picture of which I am fond.（这是我所爱的画。）

I found the stream across which they had swum.（我找到他们游泳横渡的溪。）

〔比较〕This is the house where they live.（这是他们所住的房屋。）

5. 误：The boy was run by the train.

正：The boy was run over by the train.

（这孩子被火车所碾过。）

〔说明〕不及物动词是不能变成被动语气的，但是不及物动词和介词所组成的短语即具有及物动词的作用，并且还可以把它变成被动语气。在误句里 run 的后面缺少介词 over，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕He was laughed at by his enemy.（他被他的敌人嘲笑。）

6. 误：This book is great value.

正：This book is of great value.

（这本书极有价值。）

〔说明〕介词 of 加抽象名词便等于形容词，如：of value=valuable，of use=useful，of no use=useless，of importance=important 等。这种短语很多用在 verb to be 的后面当补足语，在误句里，great value 的前面缺少 of，这是错误的，所以应该把它改正如上。

〔类例〕Iron is of great use.（铁是极有用的。）

It is of no use to try.（尝试是没有用的。）

It is of great importance to me.（这对我极重要。）

7. 误：They robbed me my purse.

正：They robbed me of my purse.

（他们抢去我的钱袋。）

〔说明〕用 rob（抢）的时候须注意，绝不可把被夺的东西作为它的宾语，在被夺的东西的前面须用 of。用公式表达出来是“rob + 被盗的人或地方+ of + 被盗的东西”。在误句里，被盗的东西 purse 的前面没有 of，它成为 robbed 的宾语，这是错误的，所以应该改正如上。

〔类例〕Some men robbed the bank of millions of dollars.（几个人从银行里抢走了数百万元。）

〔参考〕deprive（剥夺），bereave（剥夺）等动词的用法是和 rob 一样的。下面是它们的例子：

His failure deprived him of all hope.（他的失败剥夺了他的所有的希望。）

Nothing can bereave me of my memories of the past.（没有东西能剥夺我的过去的回忆。）

（50）多用介词的错误

1. 误：He reached at the United States yesterday.

正：He reached the United States yesterday.

（他昨天到达美国。）

〔说明〕初学英语的中国学生会写出下列句子来：He reached at the school.（他到达学校。）I entered into the room.（我进入房间。）She accompanied with him to the door.（她送他到门口。）这些句子都是错的，因为 reach（到达），enter（进入），accompany（陪）都是及物动词，它们的后面跟着的介词都是多余的。在误句里，reach 的后面跟 at，这是错误的，所以应该把它除掉。

〔类例〕He reached the school.（他到达学校。）

I entered the room.（我进入房间。）

She accompanied him to the door.（她送他到门口。）

〔参考〕reach 和 enter 也可以当不及物动词用，并且它们还可以和介词组成成语，如：

He reached at a flower.（他努力伸手摘取花。）

They entered into a contract.（他们订约。）

2. 误：I am afraid of that he will fail.

正：I am afraid that he will fail.

（我恐怕他会失败。）

〔说明〕to be afraid of 的后面接名词或名词短语时，afraid 的后面的 of 是必要的，但是当它的后面接名词从句时，须把 of 除掉。在误句里，用 that 引入的名词从句的前面尚用 of，这是错误的，所以应该把 of 删除。

〔类例〕He is afraid that she will not come.（他恐怕她不会来。）

I am ignorant that he is so lazy.（我不知道他是这样的懒惰。）

（51）名词前误用介词的错误

1. 误：He was born at the year 1915.

正：He was born in the year 1915.

（他生于西历1915年。）

〔说明〕在 year（年），season（季节），month（月），week（星期）等表示期间的名词前可以用 in，不可以用 at。在误句里，at 用在 the year 的前面，这是错误的，所以应该把它改为 in。

〔类例〕I generally feel unwell in the hot season.（在暑季我通常感到不舒服。）

In spring this garden looks beautiful.（在春季这花园显得美丽。）

He will return in a month.（在一个月里他将回来。）

These flowers bloom in May.（这些花五月开花。）

He will finish reading the novel in a week.（他将在一星期内读完这小说。）

〔比较〕Call me at six o’clock.（六点钟叫我。）

I will leave at five minutes to eight o’clock.（我要在八点缺五分离去。）

〔参考〕（1）当 years 表示年龄的时候它的前面可用 at，如：

He died at ninety years of age. 或 He died at the age of ninety.（他九十岁时去世。）

（2）在 hour（小时），minute（分），second（秒）等表示短时间的名词前也可以用介词 in，如：

He will be back in an hour.（他在一小时内回来。）

I will leave in a minute.（我要即刻离去。）

It will be done in a few seconds.（几秒钟内它将被做好。）

2. 误：He will go abroad in June 5.

正：He will go abroad on June 5.

（他将于六月五日出洋。）

〔说明〕在日子或星期几的前面须用介词 on。在误句里，in 用在 June 5的前面，这是错误的，因为 June 5等于 the 5th of June，所以应该把 in 改为 on。

〔类例〕He will return on the 7th of November.（他将在十一月七日回来。）

They will go on a picnic on Sunday.（他们将于星期日举行野餐。）

〔参考〕（1）weekdays（星期一至星期五）和 weekend（周末——指星期六和星期日）的前

面仍可以用介词 on，虽然它们并不仅指一日，如：

I am busy on weekdays.（我平日忙碌。）

Students dance and play on weekends.（学生们在周末跳舞和游玩。）

（2）在 weekend 的前面还可以用别的介词，如：

He has gone away for the weekend.（他出去度周末。）

During the weekend one guest after another came to see us.（周末许多客人来看我们。）

Will you stay here over the weekend？（你愿意留此渡周末吗？）

3. 误：He left home in the morning of 11th.

正：He left home on the morning of 11th.

（他于十一日晨离家。）

〔说明〕我们普通可以说：in the morning（在早晨），in the afternoon（在下午）和 in the night（在晚上），可是在指定日期的早上、下午和晚上的前面须用 on。在误句里 in 用在指定日期的早上的前面，这是错误的，所以应该把 in 改为 on。

〔类例〕He returned home on the afternoon of his birthday.（他在他的生日的下午回家。）

She died on the night of 12th.（她在十二日的晚上去世。）

4. 误：He called on me on nine o’clock.

正：He called on me at nine o’clock.

（他在九时访我。）

〔说明〕在时间的一定点的前面须用 at，如：at nine o’clock（在九点），at dawn（在黎明），at noon（在中午），at midnight（在夜半）等。在误句里，on 用在时间的一定点九点钟的前面，这是错误的，所以应该将 on 改为 at。

〔类例〕I get up at dawn.（我在黎明起床。）

The gun is fired at noon.（中午放午炮。）

A fire broke out in that street at midnight.（那条街午夜失火。）

〔参考〕在指定的时间的前面也用 at，如：

She sang at the appointed time.（他在指定的时间唱歌。）

He came at the appointed hour.（他按时而来。）

I asked after my friend’s health at the hospital at the hour mentioned.

（我在规定的时间内到医院探望我的朋友的病。）

5. 误：He gave her a beautiful present in Christmas.

正：He gave her a beautiful present at Christmas.

（他在圣诞节送给她一件美丽的礼品。）

〔说明〕在普通的节日的前面须用 at, 如：at Christmas（在圣诞节），at Easter（在复活节），at the Mid-Autumn Festival（在中秋节）等。在误句里，Christmas 的前面用 in, 这是错误的，所以应该把 in 改为 at。

〔类例〕They eat colored eggs at Easter.（他们在复活节吃彩蛋。）

We eat mooncakes at the Mid-Autumn Festival.（我们在中秋节吃月饼。）

〔参考〕还有些节日的前面须用 on，如：

Children make Jack-o-lanterns out of pumpkins on Halloween.

（在万灵节孩子们把南瓜做成南瓜灯。）

We wear new clothes on New Year’s Day.（我们在元旦穿新衣。）

They sing carols on Christmas Eve.（他们在圣诞前夕唱颂歌。）

6. 误：I am traveling on bicycle in an average speed of eight miles an honr.

正：I am traveling on bicycle at an average speed of eight miles an hour.

（我以每小时八英里的平均速度乘脚踏车旅行。）

〔说明〕在速度的前面须用介词 at。在误句里，in 用在速度的前面，这是错误的，所以应该把 in 改为 at。

〔类例〕A pigeon can fly at 50 miles an hour.（鸽子能以一小时五十英里的速度飞行。）

〔参考〕（1）在价目的前面须用介词 at, 如：

I bought the book at the price of $ 50.（我以五十美元的价钱买了这本书。）

（2）年龄的前面可用介词 at，如：

He married at the age of twenty.（他二十岁时结婚。）

（3）在门牌的前面须用 at，如：

He lives at No. 29 Tung-Ning Road.（他住在东宁路29号。）

（4）在温度的前面须用 at，如：

The thermometer stood at 90°in the shade this afternoon.

（今天下午在阴处这寒暑表达华氏90度。）

7. 娱：The girl was dressed with white.

正：The girl was dressed in white.

（这位少女穿白色衣服。）

〔说明〕表示穿着须用介词 in，如 in white（穿白衣），in red（穿红衣），in rags（穿破衣）。在误句里 with 用在 white 的前面表示穿白衣，这是错误的，所以应该把 with 改为 in。

〔类例〕I met a girl in red.（我遇到一位穿红衣的女郎。）

The beggar is in rags.（这乞丐衣服破旧。）

〔参考〕（1）in 可以表示戴帽子的意思，如：

The porter is always in red cap.（这挑夫总是戴小红便帽。）

（2）in 可以表示用墨水或铅笔写的意思，如：

The letter was written in green ink.（这信是用绿墨水写的。）

I am writing in pencil.（我正用铅笔写。）

（3）in 可以表示用什么语言写的或说的意思，如：

She can give a speech in English.（他能用英文演讲。）

I wrote her a letter in English.（我用英文写给他一封信。）

（4）in 可以表示用什么材料做的意思，如：

I have a statue in bronze.（我有一个青铜铸成的雕像。）

（5）in 可以表示在报上登载的意思，如：

I have read the story in that newspaper.（我在那报纸上曾读到这故事。）

8. 误：I wrote a composition with the subject.

正：I wrote a composition on the subject.

（我以那题目写了一篇文章。）

〔说明〕表示用什么题目写文章，或讨论什么题目须用介词 on，不可用 with。在误句里，subject 的前面用 with, 这是错误的，所以应该把它改为 on。

〔类例〕He will give a speech on war and peace.（他将演说战争与和平。）

〔参考〕（1）on 可以表示从事工作的意思，如：

He is on duty.（他在当班。）

He went to Taipei on business.（他有事去台北。）

He went on a long journey.（他作长途旅行。）

（2）在 continent（大陆，洲）和 mainland（大陆）的前面须用介词 on，如：

They travelled on the Continent.（他们在欧洲大陆旅行。）

I always think of my home on the mainland.（我常想念大陆上的家。）

（3）the air 的前面须用 on，表示在广播中的意思，如：

She likes to go on the air.（他喜欢广播。）

（52）动词后误用介词的错误

1. 误：A week consists in seven days.

正：A week consists of seven days.

（一星期由七日所组成。）

〔说明〕consist in 的意义是“在于”，要表示组成的意思须用 consist of。在误句里用 consist in 表示组成的意思，这是错误的，所以应该把 in 改为 of。

〔类例〕Man consists of soul and body.（人由灵魂和肉体所组成。）

〔比较〕Real happiness consists in helping others.（真正的快乐在于助人。）

2. 误：I shall call at my friend tomorrow.

正：I shall call on my friend tomorrow.

（明天我将访我的朋友。）

〔说明〕call at 的意义是访问（朋友的家），要表示访问朋友须用 call on。注意 call at 的后面接地方，call on 的后面接人。在误句里 call at 的后面接 friend。这是错误的，所以应该把 at 改为 on。

〔类例〕I will call on you tomorrow evening.（我要在明晚来拜访你。）

〔比较〕I shall call at his house tomorrow.（我明天将到他的家去拜访。）

3. 误：I agree to you.

正：I agree with you.

（我同意你。）

〔说明〕agree with 和 agree to 的意义都是同意，不过 agree with 的后面普通跟人，agree to 的后面跟事情或计划等。在误句里，you 的前面用 agree to，这是错误的，所以应该把 to 改为 with。

〔类例〕Do you agree with me？（您同意我吗？）

〔比较〕They at once agreed to the plan.（他们即刻同意这计划。）

〔参考〕agree with 作一致解释的时候，在它的后面也可以接物，如：

The story does not agree with the facts.（这故事与事实不符。）

4. 误：This desk is made from wood.

正：This desk is made of wood.

（这书桌是由木头制成。）

〔说明〕be made of 和 be made from 都是表明从某种原料制造成某种东西的意思。假使原料的改变并不大，还可以看得出来所用的原料，便用 be made of；假使原料改变得太大，已看不出所用的原料，便用 be made from。在误句里，用 be made from 来表明桌子是由木制成，这是错误的，因为桌子被制成后，木头并没有遭受多大的改变，很容易看出来桌子是由木头制的，所以应该把 from 改为 of。

〔类例〕The basket is made of wicker.（这篮是由柳条做的。）

We made tables of wood.（我们把木头做成桌子。）

〔比较〕Wine is made from grapes.（葡萄酒是葡萄制成的。）

5. 误：He will arrive at the Unied States at the end of the month.

正：He will arrive in the United States at the end of the month.

（他将于月底到达美国。）

〔说明〕arrive in 和 arrive at 都是到达某处的意思。假使到达一国，arrive 的后面须用 in；假使到达一国的首府，也最好用 in；假使到达较小的地方须用 at。在误句里 arrive at 用在美国的前面这是错误的，所以应该把 at 改为 in。

〔类例〕When will your brother arrive in Japan？（你的兄弟几时到达日本？）

He arrived in London yesterday.（他昨日抵达伦敦。）

〔比较〕He will arrive at Tainan tomorrow.（明日他将到达台南。）

I arrived at my house at nine.（我九点到家。）

（53）形容词后误用介词的错误

1. 误：He is angry with what I said.

正：He is angry at what I said.

（他对于我所说的话发怒。）

〔说明〕be angry with 的后面可以跟人，以人为宾语，而 angry at 的后面可以跟事物，angry with 的后面却不能跟事物为宾语。在误句里，be angry with 以所说的话为宾语，这是错误的，所以应该把 with 改为 at。

〔类例〕She was angry at my words.（她听了我的话而发怒。）

〔比较〕She was angry with her younger brother.（她对她的弟弟发怒。）

2. 误：I am familiar to French.

正：I am familiar with French.

（我通晓法文。）

〔说明〕be familiar to 的意义是什么事对人熟悉，如：The voice is familiar to me.（这语声是我所熟悉的。）to 的后面须以人为宾语。要表示人通晓事物须用 be familiar with，它的后面须以事物为宾语。在误句里，be familiar to 以 French 为宾语，这是错误的，所以应将 to 改为 with。

〔类例〕He is familiar with Shakespeare.（他熟悉莎氏的文章。）

〔比较〕Shakespeare is familiar to him.（莎氏之文是他所熟悉的。）

〔参考〕be familiar with 还有一个意思就是对某人亲密，且以人为宾语，如：

I am familiar with him.（我和他亲密。）

3. 误：He is blind of his own defects.

正：He is blind to his own defects.

（他不知道自己的缺点。）

〔说明〕要表示盲目于或不知道的意思须用 be blind to，不可用 be blind of。在误句里，be blind of 用来表示“不知道”的意思，这是错误的，所以应该把 of 改为 to。

〔类例〕He is blind to his son’s faults.（他不知道他的儿子的错误。）

〔比较〕He is blind of one eye.（他的一只眼是瞎的。）

4. 误：He is good for French.

正：He is good at French.

（他精通法文。）

〔说明〕要表示对于什么精通的意思须用 be good at，不可用 be good for。在误句里 be good for 用来表“精通于”的意思，这是错误的，所以应该把 for 改为 at。

〔类例〕He is good at chess.（他精通棋艺。）

〔比较〕Milk is good for children.（牛乳对于小孩有益。）

〔参考〕He is good for nothing.（他一无所长。）

（54）名词后误用介词的错误

1. 误：He is heir of a large fortune.

正：He is heir to a large fortune.

（他是一大笔遗产的继承人。）

〔说明〕要表明谁是一项财产的继承人须用 be heir to（a fortune），不可用 be heir of（a fortune）。在误句里，heir of 用在 a large fortune 的前面，这是错误的，所以应该把 of 改为 to。

〔类例〕He is the heir to that property.（他是那遗产的继承人。）

〔比较〕He is the heir of his uncle.（他是他的叔父的继承人。）

2. 误：He has a taste of sweet things.

正：He has a taste for sweet things.

（他喜欢吃甜物。）

〔说明〕要表达对什么东西爱好须用 have a taste for，不可用 have a taste of。在误句里 have a taste of 用来表示“爱好”的意思，这是错误的，所以应该把 of 改为 for。

〔类例〕He has a taste for poetry.（他喜欢诗。）

〔比较〕He has had a taste of hard work.（他曾经领略过苦工的滋味。）

3. 误：I have no objection of your plan.

正：I have no objection to your plan.

（我不反对你的计划。）

〔说明〕要表示对某事反对须用 have an objection to，绝不可在 objection 的后面用 of。在误句里，在 objection 的后面用 of，这是错误的，所以应该把 of 改为 to。

〔类例〕He has a great objection to getting up late.（他很讨厌晚起。）

（55）几对容易互相误用的介词

1. 误：The fortune was divided among the twin brothers.

正：The fortune was divided between the twin brothers.

（这财产由双生兄弟平分。）

〔说明〕在两个人或东西的前面用 between，两个以上时才用 among。在误句里，两个兄弟的前面用 among，这是错误的，所以应该把 among 改为 between。

〔类例〕There is a great difference between the two things.

（在这两件东西的中间有极大的不同的地方。）

〔比较〕There is a great difference in character among the three sisters.

（三姐妹间性格上有很大的差异。）

2. 误：He hid himself after a tree.

正：He hid himself behind a tree.

（他躲在树后。）

〔说明〕after 常表示动的位置，behind 常表示静止的位置。在误句里，after 用来表示静止的位置，这是错误的，所以应该把 after 改为 behind。

〔类例〕Do not speak evil of a man behind his back.（勿在别人的背后说别人的坏话。）

〔比较〕The dog ran after a rabbit.（狗追兔。）

3. 误：The earth moves around the sun.

正：The earth moves round the sun.

（地球绕太阳而转。）

〔说明〕around（环绕）和 round（环绕）的意义是相同的，但是 around 表示静止的状态而 round 表示动的状态。在误句里，around 表示动的状态，这是错误的，所以应该把 around 改为 round。

〔类例〕He traveled round the world.（他周游世界。）

〔比较〕We sat around the table.（我们环坐在桌旁。）

4. 误：I will wait for you by six.

正：I will wait for you till six.

（我愿等你到六点钟。）

〔说明〕by（在某时以前）和 till（直到某时）两个介词都表示时间的限制，但是 by 表示事情完毕于某时以前，till 表示事情进行到某时为止。在误句里 by 用来表示等候至六时为止，这是错误的，所以应该把 by 改为 till。

〔类例〕He read the novel till dawn.（他读小说一直到黎明。）

He did not return till dusk.（他直到黄昏才回来。）

〔比较〕The train will arrive at the station by midnight.（火车将于夜半前到站。）

5. 误：He will arrive after a week.

正：He will arrive in a week.

（他将在一星期后到达。）

〔说明〕in 和 after 都可以作“在某一段时间后”的解释，但是 in 以现在为起点，以 in 开头表示时间的短语只可以修饰未来的事情的发生；after 则以过去为起点，以 after 开头的短语只可以形容过去事情的发生。在误句里，after a week 用来修饰将来事情的发生——he will arrive，这是错误的，所以应该把 after 改为 in。

〔类例〕I will call on you in three days.（三天后我将拜访你。）

The blossoms will be out in a few days.（几天后花将开放。）

〔比较〕I finished the task after a month.（一个月后我把指定的工作做完。）

〔参考〕假使 after 的宾语指将来的某时刻，则此短语便可形容将来的事情的发生，如：

I will arrive after one o’clock.（一点后我将到达。）

He will leave after the ceremony.（典礼后他将离去。）

6. 误：After his graduation he has worked in a bank.

正：Since his graduation he has worked in a bank.

（自从毕业后他便在一家银行工作。）

〔说明〕假使 after 的宾语指过去时的一点，则此短语只能形容过去事情的发生。换言之，此短语不能修饰完成式。在误句里，after his graduation 用来修饰完成式，这是错误的，所以应该把 After 改为 Since。

〔类例〕I have not seen him since last year.（自从去年我就没有看到过他。）

〔比较〕 After his graduation he worked in a bank.（毕业后他在一家银行中工作。）

练习题

以下各习题系依据本书所论各项易犯的错误而编成，俾学者读完本书后有练习的机会。习题的次序依照本书所讲九大词类的次序的先后而排列。它们排列的次序是动词、名词、代词（感叹词）、连词、形容词、冠词、副词和介词。

改正下列各句中的错误：

1. There is two books on the desk.

2. The teacher, as well as his students, are in the library.

3. Trial and error are the source of our knowledge.

4. I am glad hear of your success.

5. He was wound in the arm.

6. She was borne in Shanghai.

7. Time and tide waited for no man.

8. Since the Revolution China made great progress.

9. We will go on a picnic if it will be fine tomorrow.

10. A terrible accident was happened last night.

11. Please listen my advice.

12. He was laughed by us.

13. I will be obliged if you will help me.

14. It is strange that you would think so.

15. I will buy the car if I had the money.

16. If I had had the book, I would lend it to you.

17. The essay is difficult to be understood.

18. He did nothing but to cry.

19. Stealing fruit tastes sweet.

20. Fishing in the river, a fish is caught.

21. You must avoid to read in the bus.

22. He spends his evenings to read detective stories.

23. I have no objection to smoke.

24. I caught two trouts in the river.

25. I bought some furnitures for the new house.

26. His parent are both dead.

27. His sister is a blond.

28. Her fiancee is my schoolmate.

29. The secretary and treasurer finished their work yesterday.

30. Many a soldier fought for their country.

31. He works harder than her.

32. Did your father take me to be he？

33. One of his sisters often neglects one’s duties.

34. Every one should obey one’s parents.

35. I prefer a view in the country to that in a city.

36. I told John whom, I knew, would keep my secret.

37. He asked whomever met him.

38. Who of them is your sister？

39. A truck ran over a boy and his dog who were just crossing the street.

40. It is grapes from that wine is made.

41. Heaven helps those help themselves.

42. This morning I received a letter I have forgotten to bring here.

43. There was one man among his friends in the town that he loved dearly.

44. What beautiful the flower is!

45. He not only consented to lend the money but to lend it without interest.

46. You know Spanish better than him.

47. Although it is very cold, but he did not make a fire.

48. I like to write poems in such simple language that the children can read.

49. No sooner he had seen the tiger than he ran away for his life.

50. He has neither a sister or a brother.

51. The reason why you cannot succeed is because you lack perseverance.

52. She came back until night set in.

53. He died before his son was not born.

54. He has not only gold but also silver.

55. The man made money is no proof of his merit.

56. Where have you been you should look so tired？

57. He is the famousest writer in our city.

58. She is the youngest of the twin sisters.

59. He loves money than anything in the world.

60. Her face is more round than that of her sister.

61. I am possible to get there by nine o’clock.

62. I am easy to write correct sentences.

63. He is dangerous of catching cold.

64. He is interesting in music.

65. I am delightful to accept it.

66. He is industrial in his business.

67. Though the composition is well written, it has few mistakes.

68. Less people go to church than to theatres.

69. There are shops on every side of the street.

70. He studies English everyday.

71. All these books should be put orderly.

72. He cannot go to school due to illness.

73. Do you afraid of your teacher？

74. The pond likes a mirror.

75. The girl is little.

76. He is a worth student.

77. I found useful something.

78. I like purple large flowers.

79. He is a honest boy.

80. We live on an earth.

81. He is Newton of the age.

82. They played the billiards.

83. The whale is a kind of an animal.

84. He went to Japan by the water.

85. A woman as she is, she can fight for her country.

86. Grand Canal is the longest canal in China.

87. Pescadores are located near the western coast of Formosa.

88. Altar of Heaven is a beautiful example of Chinese architecture.

89. Have you read Analects of Confucius？

90. Can you speak Cantonese dialect？

91. October 24 is Restoration Day.

92. She seemed cleverly.

93. I cannot sing too.

94. I was told that he had left home five months ago.

95. He tried hardly to succeed.

96. She close resembles her sister.

97. I was very tired by the task.

98. The twins are very alike.

99. Never I have seen a ghost.

100. His failure deprived him all hope.

101. I entered into the room.

102. I am ignorant of that he is so lazy.

103. Students dance and play in weekend.

104. They eat colored eggs in Easter.

105. I have read the news on that newspaper.

106. His brother arrived at Japan yesterday.

107. He is the heir to his uncle.

108. The dog ran hehind a rabbit.

109. He returned home till dusk.

110. After his graduation he has worked in a shipping company.

习题解答

1. There are…

2.…is in the library.

3.…is…

4.…to hear…

5.…was wounded…

6.…was born…

7.…wait…

8.…has made…

9.…it is fine…

10.…accident happened…

11.…listen to…

12.…laughed at…

13.…I shall…

14.…should think…

15.…I would…

16.…would have lent…

17.…to understand.

18.…but cry.

19. Stolen fruit…

20.…I catch a fish.

21.…avoid reading…

22.…reading detective…

23.…to smoking.

24.…two trout…

25.…some furniture…

26. His parents…

27.…a blonde.

28. Her fiance…

29.…finished his work…

30.…for his…

31.…than she.

32.…be him.

33.…her duties.

34.…his parents.

35.…to one…

36.…who, I…

37.…whoever met…

38. Which of…

39.…that were…

40.…grapes that wine is made from.

41.…those who…

42.…a letter, which I…

43. Among his frends in the town, there was one man that he loved dearly.

44. How beautiful…

45. He consented not only to lend…

46.…than he.

47.…cold, yet he…

48.…language as…

49. No sooner had he seen…

50.…nor a brother.

51. is that you…

52. She did not come…

53.…was born.

54.…not only silver but also gold.

55. That the man…

56.…been that you…

57.…the most famous…

58.…the younger…

59.…than anything else…

60.…more nearly round…

61. It is possible for me…

62. It is easy for me to write…

63. He is in danger of…

64. He is interested in…

65.…am delighted…

66.…industrious in…

67.…a few mistakes.

68. Fewer people…

69.…each side…

70.…English every day.

71.…put in order.

72.…owing to illness.

73. Are you…

74.…is like a mirror,

75.…is small.

76.…worthy student.

77.…something useful.

78.…large purple flowers.

79.…an honest boy.

80.…on the earth.

81.…is the Newton…

82.…played billiards.

83.…a kind of animal.

84.…by water.

85. Woman as…

86. The Grand Canal…

87. The Pescadores…

88. The Altar…

89.…the Analects…

90.…the Cantonese…

91.…the Restoration…

92.…seemed clever.

93.…sing either.

94.…months before.

95. He tried hard…

96. She closely…

97.…much tired…

98.…much alike.

99. Never have I seen…

100.…deprived him of all hope.

101. I entered the room.

102.…ignorant that…

103.…on weekend.

104.…at Easter.

105.…in that newspaper.

106.…arrived in…

107.…heir to…

108.…ran after…

109. He did not return…110. Since his graduation…

出版后记

我们相继出版了钱歌川先生的《翻译的基本知识》《翻译的技巧》《英文疑难详解》《英文疑难详解续篇》，读者从这几本书中能够充分看出钱老对基础知识的重视，以及循循善诱的教学风格。这几本书主要集中于英语翻译及部分语法知识点，而这本《英文语法作文大全》，是一本讲解英语最重要的两个基础部分——语法与作文——的综合性教材。

本书出版于1980年，是钱老出版的最后一部重要教材，可谓是一生教学经验的集大成。书中内容分为“语法之部”和“作文之部”两大部分。“语法之部”分为讲解词性的“语法自修”和讲解语法的“语法练习”；“作文之部”分为练习造句的“造句例评”、点评30篇作文练习的“作文批改”、针对55种常见英语表达错误进行纠偏的“英文正误”三部分。全书编排清晰系统，由简单的词句到复杂的作文，再到中英表达习惯的差异，非常符合学生学习英语的规律；书中提供了大量的习题，随学随练，巩固学生对知识点的记忆；精心挑选的作文范例包含了常见的英语写作错误，以批改的形式加深学生的印象。

希望读者能够灵活使用钱老的这几部教材，根据自身情况查缺补漏，提高水平。

服务热线：133-6631-2326　188-1142-1266

服务信箱：reader@hinabook.com

后浪出版公司
2019年1月

翻译的基本知识

钱歌川　著

版权信息

书名：翻译的基本知识

作者：钱歌川

书号：978-7-5502-5092-5

版权：后浪出版咨询（北京）有限责任公司

重版补记

这本小书问世以后，竟意外地引起学术界一些朋友的注意，使我感到颇为兴奋。首先是南洋大学的同僚，年轻的史学家曹仕邦先生的来信。他提出好一些读后感，其中有一条是最有意义的，可供爱好或从事翻译的人参考或研究，所以我转录在此，并附我本人的答复，以待博雅君子的核定。

“原书一二四页至一二五页‘二竖故事的试译’文中，先生将‘余得请于帝焉矣’句中的‘帝’，译作 the late king，后学觉得似宜改用 lord 一字来译较好，原因有二：

（a）春秋时代最高统治者是‘王’，而不是‘帝’。至于秦、齐互称东、西帝，是战国末年的事，即快到秦始皇统一天下的时候才发生的。所以这里说的‘帝’，可能是指‘天神’，‘上帝’而言。

（b）先生已经指出英文是一种含糊的语文，因此我觉得利用它的含糊特性来翻译，似乎更要圆通些。英文的 lord，既可作‘上帝’解，也可作‘大人’解，所以在此为‘天神’固可，为‘先王’亦无不可。”

曹先生提出的这种高见，给了我在翻译时选辞拣字上很好的示范作用，不过我当时执笔翻译那句古文时，也曾为得在 emperor, king, ruler, duke, lord 诸字间加以抉择而有所迟疑，最后采用了 king，是根据下面两条规律来决定的：

（1）卒葬曰帝。（见《大戴礼·诰志》）

（2）措之庙立之主曰帝。（见《礼·曲礼下》）

意即一位国君，在生为公为王，死后便可称之为帝。如果在生是称帝的，死后则称先帝，如诸葛亮在《出师表》上说的“先帝创业未半”之类。

翻译是要字斟句酌的，曹先生虽未尝从事翻译，却有这种翻译的精神，值得佩服。因为他提出异议，我才有机会说出我翻译那一个字时的苦心，为那些不假思索随意照字面翻译的人树立一种楷模，以期减少翻译上的错误。

在同一文中王叔岷先生也曾告我，“公疾病，求医于秦”句中的“疾病”作“疾甚”解，幸亏我译为 suddenly fell ill（一听就病倒了），意思相差不远，虽没有用 serious 一类的字眼，但后面说景公已病得神志不清，其病情的沉重可想而知了。

此外，新加坡文学界的元老连士升先生，也在报端写了一篇《海滨寄简》，专谈读了《翻译的基本知识》一书后的感想，可视为一种书评，现节录一部分如下：

谈到翻译，你可以说是斫轮老手，本质上，你是个作家，在散文作家里你有一定的地位。你精通英文和日文，在分析和了解上，绝对不成问题。此外，你有几十年翻译的经验，乐此不疲，越运用越纯熟。加以多年来，你在各大学里，所担任的多是翻译的课程，熟能生巧，心得自然比较一般畅晓两三种语文的人多得多。因此，当我没有拜读大著以前已经有了信心，读完之后，更觉得名不虚传。

说来实在不容易，任何一技的成功，完全靠累积的功夫，而关键又在于浓厚的兴趣，和有恒不懈的努力。

只因你对于翻译很有兴趣，所以你才能够以数十年如一日的功夫，来研究和传授翻译。翻译家不但是本国文字的作家，而且是外文的爱好者。在没有动笔翻译之前，必须对于原文有深刻的了解，要达到这目的，各种字典、辞典，以及有关问题的参考书，必须齐全。你很幸运，几十年来都在大报馆、大书局、大学校工作，公共图书馆的设备，大可补充个人藏有不足的地方。“工欲善其事，必先利其器。”无论一个作家或翻译家多么努力，假如没有得力的工具，他的工作效率将大为减低，甚至根本没法子进行。

一个人最怕自视太高，唯我独尊，对于别人的成就，根本不放在眼内。你是充分了解孙子的“知己知彼，百战百胜”的战略的人，因此，你时常研读各著名翻译家的作品，看看人家的优点在哪儿，缺点又在哪儿，然后取其精华，删其芜杂，以便树立自己的翻译方法。的确，各人有各人的方法，一种原文，百人译出，尽不相同。有的对原文的了解不够深刻，有的对于有关学问完全外行，有的要做急做章，不免流于疏忽，有的中文太差，译出来的东西，比天书还难读，诸如此类的事情，时常可以见到，在这儿，研究翻译，尽量采用别人的长处，如发觉别人翻译有错误，就应以“哀矜勿喜”的态度，提高警惕，免得重蹈覆辙。

其实，谈理论并不难，最难的是取譬引喻。初出茅庐的人经验不够，他们不是食古不化，便是食洋不化，没法子提出具体的例子来说明。大作得力处，在于实例很多，使人一看就能明白。这种深入浅出的功夫，证明你的确是个行家。

在第九章“首先要了解原文”里，你特地选出五十字，注明同一字而英美的意义不同。举一反三，聪明的读者不难了解同一文字，而含义却是那么歧异。这会提醒他们以后阅读书报，尤其是把笔为文，须加倍小心。

你幼时在故乡打好巩固的中文基础，后来留日，又留英，长期的努力，使你在中、日、英三种语文上，达到优游自得的乐趣。因为你学了日本学术界勤学苦练的功夫，对于外文的进修，多是脚踏实地，所以在翻译和写作上，绝对不成问题。这两三天来，我细心研读揣摩你的“二竖的故事试译”，这才了解你的英文写作的能力实在高明。你把《左传》一段古文，先译成浅近的白话文，再译成琅琅可诵的英文，这一套真实的功夫，不由得不使人肃然起敬。

平心而论，创作困难，翻译也不容易。作家只需精通一种母语，翻译家至少须畅晓两种以上的文字。虽然作家还需搜索枯肠，博访周询，找出许多材料来证实他的理论，而译者却可节省这些麻烦，把人家既成的作品拿来照译，但是在行文上，作家可以自由发挥，而翻译家须受原文的限制，有的可译，有的不可译。有的虽能做到信和达的程度，但因时间和地域的关系，一篇译文，读来全不是味道。

最后，我非常同意你的建议，一切译文必须以逻辑为标准。假如译文不合逻辑，读起来完全不像话。译者必须自己先把原文彻底了解，才可下笔。原意完全明白，译文合乎逻辑，那么“信”和“达”的两大条件已经做到了，至于“雅”“不雅”，见仁见智，各人的看法不同，只好不去管它了。

（文见一九七二年五月二十五日新加坡《南洋商报》）

目 录

重版补记

一 一个古老的问题

二 约定俗成万物名

三 岂有此理必有误

四 严复说的信达雅

五 佛经的翻译方式

六 批评的和实用的

七 直译和意译举例

八 译文第一要通达

九 首先要了解原文

（1）理解字句的含义

（2）字句以外的含义

（3）找出典故的来历

（4）分辨英美的作者

十 中英文中的虚字

十一 不能翻译的字句

十二 两国语义不尽同

十三 在动手翻译之先

十四 选用适当的字句

十五 英译中五种方法

（1）省译法

（2）增译法

（3）倒译法

（4）改译法

（5）简译法

十六 英文长句的译法

（1）在关系代名词处切断

（2）在关系副词处切断

（3）在副词处切断

（4）在动词处切断

（5）在名词处切断

十七 容易译错的文句

（1）英译中

（2）中译英

十八 二竖的故事试译

原 文

语 译

英 译

附录 翻译实例评述

例一

例二

例三

例四

例五

例六

例七

出版后记

返回总目录

一　一个古老的问题

世界上现存有三千多种语言，彼此之间不能理解，要理解就得凭仗翻译。语言的产生和人类的产生同样的古老，两种不同语言的人类，开始发生接触的时候，就发生了翻译的问题。人类由单有语言进化到有文字的程度，其间必然经过极其悠久的岁月，至今世界上三千多种不同的语言中，有文字的仍为极少数，这并不是说有的民族产生得较迟，所以文字也发达得迟，而是因为他们的知识进步得慢，文化水准很低的缘故。大家都知道：文字是代表民族的文化的，一个没有文字的民族，其文化水准的低落可想而知。孔子所谓“言之无文，行之不远”，意思就是说，要把一个人的话语和思想，传到远方或传到后世，就必得有记录的文字。世界上最古的文字有三种：一为苏马利亚人和巴比伦人的楔形文字，二为埃及的图画文字，三为中国文字。所有人类的文字，虽则都是由图画演进而来，然而并非出自一源。于是发展出彼此极其不同的文字来了，如中国的文字为注音文字，西欧的文字为拼音文字。这已经在系统上大有不同，判然二物，即是那些有亲族关系的文字，如日本、高丽、安南，乃至古代的契丹、女真、西夏，都采用了中国文字，或至少是和汉字有不少的关系，但发展的结果，也多变成了另外一种文字，如日本文看上去虽则满纸汉字，然而我们中国人要了解它，也大不易。不要说外国，哪怕是在一国之内，文字也不尽同，我国直到秦朝的李斯，实行“书同文”，才算是把中国的文字统一了。

同一国的文字，如果不统一的话，也是需要翻译的；外国的文字，哪怕是汉字集团，如上述的日本文及高丽文，我们如不经过翻译还是不能了解的。说话固然不能了解，就是写成文字也和我们的大有出入。所以说话需要翻译，文字更要翻译。没有文字而只是口头传述的，不算正式的翻译，只可称为通译（interpret）；要把用文字写成的书籍，译成另外一种文字，这才是正式的翻译（translate）。在新加坡这个多元种族的国家，到处都是不同种族的人，说着各自的母语；就同是华族，也说福建、广东、潮州、海南、三江各地的方言，互相不能达意，就得有人通译。如果是在这个复杂的环境中生长的人，他就会说各种各样的话，会说英语，会说马来话，会说华语，会说闽、粵方言。这样的人英文叫做会说多种话语的人（polyglot）。他只能做通译，不能做翻译。通译是动口的，他不一定要认识字，而翻译是动手的，他必须通晓书本上的文字。所以从事翻译工作，非精通语文的人（linguist）莫办。

通译因无记录可留，自无史实可考，等到有记录时，已经到了翻译的阶段，至少是有一方面的记录，把当时由通译口头传述的话，用文字记下来了。如中国从事翻译的工作，而留下有记录可考的，是三千年前的周代。《礼记》的《王制》上说：

五方之民，言语不通，嗜欲不同。达其志，通其欲，东方曰“寄”，南方曰“象”，西方曰“狄鞮”，北方曰“译”。

等到公元一百五十年的时候，即汉末的桓帝的朝代，所翻译的佛经，流传至今还在。《隋书》的《经籍志》上说：

汉桓帝时，安息国沙门安静，赍经至洛，翻译最为通解。

这似乎是“翻译”一词出现最早的记载，在汉以前只称“译”。《礼记》上说：“北方曰译”，只用一个“译”字。因为汉人大半与北方的外族打交道，所以“译”的这个名称特别发达，后来加上一个形容词便称“翻译”，代表转译四方的语言文字了。

在西洋的欧洲，翻译也有两千年的历史了。有记录可考的，是在公元前二百五十年的时候，罗马的诗人安得罗尼可斯（Livius Andronicus, c.284—204 B.C.）曾把希腊大诗人荷马（Homer, c.10th cent. B.C.）的史诗《英雄流浪记》（Odyssey）译成了拉丁文。可见翻译这一种工作，是在两三千年前的古代，早已有了的，并不是什么新奇的玩意。如果翻译有什么问题的话，也是极其古老的问题。古人所遭遇的困难，我们同样还得遭遇。翻译免不了要发生误译，也并非时下才有的。在民国二十年左右，上海有位文人曾由英译本把俄国作家柴霍甫的短篇小说，全部译成中文，至少有十二巨册。他的中文写得非常流利，英文的阅读能力也不算坏，可是译得多了，总不免有失错（slip）的地方，于是乎他就在中国的文坛上闹了一个大笑话，把英文的银河（The Milky Way）译成“牛奶路”了，有诗为证：

可怜织女星，化为马郎妇。

乌鹊疑不来，迢迢牛奶路。

这首诗可以称为一种史料，中国翻译史上的逸话。大家都知道织女配牛郎，为什么诗中变成了“马郎”呢？这也是那位先生译笔下的杰作。神话中有一种上半身是人，下半身是马的怪物（Der Zentaur），竟被译成“半人半牛怪”，当时曾被人讥为“牛头不对马嘴”的翻译。

在上诗中，提到为牛郎织女七七相会时架桥的“乌鹊”，使我想起另外的一些译作来了。以译介中国文学名著闻名世界的，英国汉学大师介尔斯（Herbert Giles），把曹孟德的诗句：“月明星稀，乌鹊南飞”，英译为：

The stars are few, the moon is bright.

The raven southward wings his flight.

而不久以前台湾的李杏村先生，新译的《前赤壁赋》（见 1968 年 7 月出版的 China Today）上把这两句诗又译成：

When the stars are few

And the moon shines brightly,

Magpies and ravens are winging their way

Southward.

由上两种翻译看来，外国人译的也好，中国人自己译的也好，都把“乌鹊”一个名词翻译错了。介尔斯把它译成“乌鸦”，是另外的一种鸟，而李杏村就把它译成两种鸟了，他不知道“乌”在此是一个形容词，实际是指那种俗呼为“喜鹊”的鸟。

上述几位译者都是很好的，尤其是介尔斯的鼎鼎大名汉学界谁不知道，可是译诗照旧不免有错，古人要译错，今人也要译错。所以我说翻译的困难问题，是自古以来就有了的。

二　约定俗成万物名

十九世纪的英国著名生物学者赫胥黎（Thomas H.Huxley，1825—1895），曾以极其通俗易解的文字，来说明大自然的奥秘。他把世间万物分为两类：一类叫自然物，一类叫人为物。如房屋、家具、舟车、机器之类，就是人为物，因为它们都是经过人的手艺而形成的；而另外还有更多的东西，是完全没有经人之手而出现的，世界上即令没有人类，它们也是存在的，那是些什么呢？那就是日月星辰，白云苍天，山河海洋，动物植物，一切自然产生的东西，所以称为自然物。所谓人为物，严格地说起来，也不真正是人类创造的，如果没有自然物的话，人类便什么也造不出来。例如，一张书桌，算是人为物吧，但是如果没有自然物的树木，给我们做材料，又哪里来的桌子呢？所以，事实上，人为物的产生，不外是我们叫作人类的这个自然物，在别的自然物上有所作为的结果。

老子说：“天地不仁，以万物为刍狗。”意思是说，天地间产生万物，人最为贵，但在大自然方面来看，也是和刍草或狗畜一般，无分轩轾，正如赫胥黎所说的，人类也不过是自然物的一种而已。

自然物既是由造物者一手造成，全世界各地都是一样，美国的月亮也好，中国的月亮也好，都是一般大小的。天下乌鸦一般黑，是人都有五官，是树都有枝叶。不同种族，不同语言的人，对自然物的认识都是相同的。假如英国人指着早晨在东方升起的红日说：the sun，我们不懂英语的人，也懂得他是说的太阳。至于秦朝的赵高指鹿为马，那问题就来了。为什么那有叉角的动物就一定是鹿，那有鬣毛的动物就一定是马呢？仓颉造名时，鹿还可以说是象形，而英文鹿的原意，只是指的普通动物（OE deor = beast, animal）而已。当初把这名称派在别的动物头上，或派在马的头上，那么，赵高指着唤名的，也就不错了。莎士比亚说，名称有什么关系呢？那个我们称为玫瑰花的，叫做任何其他的名字，也是一样的芬芳。这就是说，我们给它的名称虽有不同，而自然物本身的实质不变。荀子在他的《正名》篇上说：

名无固宜，约之以命。约定俗成谓之宜，异于约则谓之不宜。名无固实，约之以命。约定俗成谓之实名。

这是合乎现代语言学的理论的。现代中国首屈一指的语言学家赵元任，在一九五九年出版的《语言问题》上说：

语言跟语言所表达的事物的关系，完全是任意的，完全是约定俗成的关系。这是已然的事实，而没有天然，必然的关系。

他用了荀子的“约定俗成”四字，来说明语言的性质，可见他是同意荀子的说法的。

自然物是人类共通有的，只是各种语言叫它的名称不同而已。我们只要知道那名称所指的是什么，总不会错。“野火烧不尽，春风吹又生”的青草，在世界任何地方都是一样的绿，一样的芳，无论你叫它什么名字都可以，它是决不会变成乔木的。我们在一种语言当中，由于约定俗成的关系，给它取上一个名字；在另外的语言中，又有另外的名字，但不同的名字，并不会发生不同的印象，因为大家心目中早有了那个自然物的形态，只要把两种不同的语言的名称，配合在一块儿，就可明白所指的是什么了。

人为物的情形就完全两样了。例如我们写字的笔墨，便是所谓人为物，凡有文化的民族，莫不有其行文必备的笔墨，可是形态全不一样。英文把中国的“笔”译做 brush，但这个英文字，含义为“刷子”，用以擦洗（scrub），或扫除（sweep），或使干净（clean），或使整洁（tidy）的。中国辞典上对“刷”的解释有四：一为刮去，二为清除，三为理发具，四为印刷。无论是中国解释，或外国解释，brush 一字和中国“笔”的内容与形式，都相差很远。第一 brush 一定是平头的，而中国笔的特色就在它有笔锋，一尖一平，如何可以视同一物呢？有人说中国的笔，与其译作 brush，不如译作 Chinese pen，还不至发生误会，其实，这也并不适合，因为英文的 pen 最初是鹅毛管做的，后来变成钢笔，最近流行的原子笔是在笔尖上附有小球的。无论它怎样进化，总离不开一点：那就是硬的笔头，而中国笔却是软的，所以一软一硬，处于相反的地位，如何可以构成同一物体的观念呢？

再看中国的“墨”，被译成 Chinese ink，如中国的“砚台”，就译成 slab for rubbing up Chinese ink。这比把“笔”译成 Chinese pen，更为不通，因为西洋的 ink 是液体，而中国的“墨”是固体，在实质上大不相同，绝不可能使人发生联想作用，等于译得不伦不类。虽同是约定俗成而取的名字，人为物与自然物有所不同，人为物是没有全人类共通的物象的。你没有见到实物，翻译时总不免有错。有些东西是属于玄奘所谓“三不译”范围之内的，因为译出来，既变成三不像，还不如不译的好。如佛经中的《楞伽经》《楞严经》等，“经”字是译了的，而“楞伽”和“楞严”就不译，即前者可意译，而后者则只能音译。中国的“词”，为中国诗中的变体，不同于“诗”，也不同于“曲”，更不同于“赋”，英文诗中绝无此种形式，勉强拿英文的一种诗体来翻译，必然是牛头不对马嘴，不伦不类，所以只好译音，译成 Tz’u，还不失其本来面目。翻译者处理人为物时，不可不特别谨慎。

三　岂有此理必有误

自然物的名词是很少被人误译的，人为物的名词被人误译的机会也不太多，最容易出纰漏的，就是抽象名词和行动词乃至修饰语之类。所以有时单是语言的知识还不够用，最后非得乞灵于逻辑不可。逻辑是翻译者的最后一张王牌，是他必须具有的基本要素。俗语说的“岂有此理”。正是翻译者随时需要的考验。凡是翻译出来的一字一句，一事一物，都必须要合乎逻辑，合乎情理，否则必然有误。太阳不能从西方出来，父亲不会比儿子年少，小器不能容大物，半数不能表全体，诸如此类，凡是违反人情天理的，都是悖理的，也多半都是译错的。

天覆地载是不移的道理，乾（king）是天，坤（queen）是地；夫是天，妻是地；无论贵为天子，下及庶民，都不能改变这个自然的法则。水一定是向低处流的，火一定是要燃烧的，植物要向阳生长，动物要爱它所生的小崽。天无云不雨，月缺了必圆。如有违反这些定则的，我们就要说：“岂有此理。”译文上遇到不合理的说法，就值得我们怀疑了。

李白的《月下独酌》诗中说：

月既不解饮，影徒随我身。

第一句中说的“不解饮”，是说月亮不懂得喝酒，也就是不会喝酒，可是 More Gems of Chinese Poetry 的译者 Fletcher 却把这句诗英译为：

The moon then drinks without a pause.

月亮怎么能够不停地喝酒呢？即令月中有嫦娥，她也至多只能浅斟低酌，绝不可能不停地饮酒。任何人读到这句译诗，都可断定是一种荒谬的误译。

赛珍珠译的《水浒》，其中确有不少妙（谬）译，现举出一、二实例来，以资研讨。如第三十二回上说：

武行者心中要吃，哪里听他分说，一片声喝道：“放屁！放屁!”

这几句话，那位得到诺贝尔文学奖金而驰名世界的女作家，竟把它译为：

Now Wu the priest longed much in his heart to eat, and so how could he be willing to listen to this explanation? He bellowed forth, “Pass your wind——Pass your wind!”

原文中说的“放屁”，只是“胡说”的意思，而英文竟按字面死译，而且用上命令语气，不看原文，也知道是译错了。因为放屁是自然的现象，不能由人操纵的。一个人自己尚且不能指挥自己放屁，怎可接受别人的命令来放屁呢？这使我想起美国现代名作家萨林杰（J.D. Salinger），在他的名作《麦田捕手》（The Catcher in the Rye）中所描写的放屁的故事。他说宾夕预备学校的一个校友，因经营殡仪馆，以不正当的手段赚了钱，捐献给母校一座侧楼，在校庆纪念那天，他莅临演说。书中描写他演说时的情形是这样的：

他演说中的高潮发生在他讲到正当中的时候。他正在讲给我们听，他是怎样一个漂亮的人物，怎样地吃得开，讲得眉飞色舞，得意扬扬，于是突然一下，坐在我前排那个名叫艾德加·马沙拉（Edgar Marsalla）的家伙，放了一个奇臭无比的屁。在礼堂大庭广众之中大放其屁，确是一件尴尬不堪的事，不过也很有趣。老马那个家伙，可真厉害，一屁放出，几乎把屋顶都轰掉了。没有一个人敢笑，欧森白那家伙装作没有听见的样子，但是就在讲坛上欧森白旁边的塞默校长，大家都知道他确是听到了的。

你说他没有生气吗？他当时虽则一句话也没有说，可是到了第二天晚上，他把我们全部赶进教室强迫用功，后来他跑过来，对我们大训其话。他说昨天在礼堂惹起骚动的学生，没有进宾夕预校读书的资格。我们很想要老马在校长训话的时候，再放那么一个响屁，可惜他那时没有那种雅兴。

可见以马沙拉那样调皮捣蛋的家伙，尚且不能自由意志地放出一个臭屁来，把校长轰走。谁又能接受命令来放屁呢？

同是赛珍珠翻译的《水浒》中，还有这样岂有此理的例子。

阮小七便在船内取将一桶小鱼上来，约有五七斤。（第十回）

Juan the seventh then went to his boat and brought up a bucket of small fish and they were five to seven catties each in weight.

一条五斤到七斤重的鱼，还能称为小鱼吗？一个木桶能装得下那么多五斤到七斤重的鱼吗？这一看就知道原是说的一桶小鱼共重五斤到七斤（a bucket of small fish weighing five to seven catties），而不是说每条重达五斤到七斤呢。

又《水浒》第七回上说：

土炕上却有两个椰瓢，取一个下来倾那瓮酒来吃了一会，剩了一半。

赛珍珠将它译成：

On the brick bed were two cocoanut shells. He took one and dipped up the wine with it and drank half of it.

这句简单的译文，却有两点译得岂有此理的。第一，译者忽视了“瓮”的形式。这就是俗称的坛子，是小口，大肚的瓦器。瓮里装的酒，只能倒出来，倒在椰瓢里来吃，不能把偌大的椰瓢，从瓮的小口里放下到瓮里去舀酒。译文中的“dip up”，就是放下去舀取的意思，如 Dip up a bucketful of water from the well.（从井里满满地舀一桶水上来。）大瓢不能进入小口，这是第一点不合理的地方。其次，原文说的吃了一半，是说把酒吃了一半，不是把瓢吃了一半，译文在一句中用了两个“it”，自然是指同一物呢。吃酒连盛酒的工具也吃掉一半，世间有这样的怪事吗？真太岂有此理了。

由于上面这个一半的译错，使我想起另外一句有关一半的译文。那就是梁实秋译莎士比亚的十四行诗第三十九首的首二行。译文是这样的：

啊，你是我的较佳一半的全部，

我怎能适当的赞美你呢？

读者不看原文，也会感觉到译文有点问题。我们的逻辑中，只有“全部的一半”，没有“一半的全部”，全中有半，半中不能有全，这是一定的道理。大致译者译此诗时，一心只想到俗语中的 better half（指妻，better 为精神上的“较大”，不是“较佳”），而未细看原文：

O, how they worth with manners may I sing,

When thou art all the better part of me?

应译“当你确是我比较大的部分的时候”，all 不是“全部”，它只含有 quite 或 so much 等表程度的意思。如视同 all at once（忽然）或 all of a sudden（突然）中的 all，则根本可以不译。

四　严复说的信达雅

曾任北京大学校长的严复，虽则是学海军的，然擅长中英文字，译介了不少的西哲学说，在中国清末民初的思想学术界，产生了极大的影响。自唐玄奘以来，在中国的翻译界，还没有一个人赶得上严复的。他在汉译的《天演论》的例言上说：

“译事三难：信、达、雅。求其信，已大难矣。”他接下去又详细解释说，翻译时对原文要忠实，对译文要通顺，还要文雅。有时为求译文通顺，不免要颠倒原文字句，甚至在原文之外，还要斟酌补足。这种补足，只是发挥原意，绝非节外生枝。有些原文的含义很是艰深，难得理解，他便要在这些句的前后，酌加“引衬”，以便使得原文的意思可以明显。他不说“解释”，也不说“说明”，而说“引衬”，是很有道理的。“引”是“引申”，“衬”是“帮衬”，即帮助的意思，所以“引衬”，是说多加几个字进去，以助了解。他说“信而不达，虽译犹不译也”。可见单是忠实于原文，而译文不能表达，便失去了译介的作用。令人看不懂的文字，无论内容怎样好，也是无用的。他为求译文通顺，采用了四种办法：（一）颠倒原文字句。（二）有时补足一点。（三）遇到原文长句，采用意译。（四）原文含义深奥的地方，便酌加引衬。单是译文通顺，他还不满意，必须做到文字优美才罢手。这儿说的优美，不但是字面上的美，而且要有声调之美。这便是严复翻译理论的要点。自从清朝末期以至今日，这就成了中国人翻译西籍的准绳。译者一心只希望能做到信达雅的地步，除此以外，再没有别的奢望了。

其实，单只一个信字也就够了，如果我们能从狭义和广义双方来看这信字的解释的话。

在民国二十年代，上海有一部分文人，如赵景深等主张翻译以通顺为第一，即把“达”放在“信”的前面，理由是“辞达而已矣”，看不懂的文字等于废物，一点用途也没有的。

后来朱光潜就说，还是“信”为首要，归根到底，只有信字最难。如果把原文的意思译错，即令译得通顺，又有什么用；即令译得文雅，又有什么用？这是有违背狭义的“信”的，是叛徒的行为，任何人都知道是不对的。

现在我们再来看看广义的“信”，又是怎样的。原文是既达而雅的，我们把它译成不达不雅，这也就不能算是信。原文的意思，一点没有漏掉，全都译出来了，但译文生硬，读起来很费解，如果是懂得原文的人，去读原文比读译文，容易了解多了。你不能照原文一样，译得既达又雅，当然是不信。反过来，如果原文是不达不雅的，如小说中故意描写无教育者的说话，你把它译得既达又雅，如以前林琴南的译文，这也不能说是信，即令意思没有译错，因为把一个流氓译成一位绅士，等于换了一个人，如何能说是忠实的翻译呢？

英国十八世纪有位剧作家 R. B.Sheridan，在一七七五年发表了一出名叫《情敌》（The Rivals）的戏。戏中的女主角 Mrs. Malaprop，谈锋很健，喜欢用一些深奥的字眼，来夸示她的学问。不幸的是她每说必错，反而暴露了她的无知。例如她高谈女子教育时说：

As she grew up, I would have her instructed in Geometry, that she might know something of the contagious countries.

如果照字面译为：“等她大了，我要她学些几何学，使她知道一些传染的国家”，便要使人读了莫名其妙，虽然译得很信，也等于不信了。原来那位好夸耀的太太，想说的是 geography（地理学），却弄错而说成 geometry（几何学），又把 contiguous（邻近的）缠错而说成 contagious（传染的）了。我们只能学韩复渠的办法——他曾把感想说成感冒，闹过笑话——把 geometry 译成“地质学”，把 contagious 译成“怜惜的”，从不信中求信。

所谓信是对原文忠实，恰如其分地把原文的意思，用适当的中文表达出来，即令字面不同，只要含义不错，也就算是信了。

林语堂也反对“字译”，他说“忠实非字字对译之谓”。我们翻译的单位，至少应该是句，而不是字。要能把一段为一个单位，自然更好了。原作者的思想感情和他的语文风格，我们必须把它融会贯通，合成一体，使意义和声调配合无间，译文才能完全表达原文，所以说对原文忠实，不只是对表面的字义忠实，必须对原文的思想、感情、风格、声调、节奏等等，都要忠实才行。

相传欧阳修为韩琦作《相州昼锦堂记》，开头两句原作“仕宦至将相，富贵归故乡”，文稿送出之后，觉得不好，又赶快叫人去将文稿追回，加上两个“而”字，成为“仕宦而至将相，富贵而归故乡”，才认为满意了。但在初学者看来，这个“而”字加与不加，实在没有什么关系，因为意思既没有改变，文法也是一样完整，大文豪欧阳修为什么一定要改呢？这主要是音调上的关系。“仕宦至将相”一连五个字全是仄声，念起来就不好听，在句中加一个平声的“而”字进去，声调就大不相同了。原句气局促，改后能觉舒畅；原句意直率，改后便有了抑扬顿挫，音调上多了一个转折，意思也加深了一重。严格地说，译文如失去原文所有的那种声调之美，也不算是完全忠实。

中西文在语句的组织上，悬殊很大，逐字逐句的翻译，不但不能信，而且也不能达。从文法上来看，英文每多复句，穿插环锁，句中有句，修饰重重。一个长句当中，包含许多短句或称子句，一意未完，又插入另外一意，一种修饰之上，再加另外一种修饰。原文虽繁复屈曲，但它的语句组织，在文法上必然是有线索可寻的。

中文的文法弹性较大，用字颠倒排列，意思不变，一般少用虚字，没有英文的关系代名词之类，所以很少有复句和插句，一义自成一句。行文用字可说是简练直截，运用灵活。可是用简译繁，有时不免张冠李戴，把修饰甲的字句，译成修饰乙的去了。如果照原文的顺序译出，信固信矣，但决不能达，所以结果也等于不信。现举英国神学家 J.H. Newman 著的《大学教育的范围与性质》中的一句话为例。

We sometimes fall in with persons who have seen much of the world, and of the men who, in their day, have played a conspicuous part in it, but who generalize nothing, and have no observation, in the true sense of the word.

我把这句话拿给一班共二十八个学生去翻译，其中有的已在英校学过十四五年的英文，有的已是大学毕业，理解力都是很强的。翻译的结果，以下面一句译文最好：

“有时候我们遇到一些世故很深，而在年轻时曾经显赫一时的人，但说实在的，这些人并没有什么心得与观察。”

我对这句译文的评语，是“达则达矣，信则未也”。因为原文中用了三个 who，是比较复杂的句子，正所谓句中有句，译者粗心一下，就出了纰漏。现在让我来分析给大家听，然后再来翻译就不会有错了。

句中第一个 who 和第三个 who，都是以 persons 为先行词的。至于第二个 who，便是以 men 为先行词，而 of the men，前面应加上 have seen much 三字来解释。我们所遇见的有两种人，一种是熟悉世故的人，另一种是见过大人物的人。上引的译文，却把两种人弄成一种人了，即“世故很深，而曾经显赫一时的人”。

除了文法组织之外，还要把单字和成语的意思，正确地掌握在笔下，才能译出信实的文章来。在上面那句引用文中，值得注意的单字有 generalize（归纳；做出结论）和 observation（观察力）。成语方面则有 fall in with（邂逅；不期而遇），see the world（熟悉世故；深于阅历），in one’s day（在其全盛时代），play a part in（与之有关），in the true sense of the word（那字的真义）。对文法组织和字句的含义，有了如上的了解之后，就可译成下面的文字了。

我们有时邂逅一些熟悉世故的人，和一些曾经见过许多在其全盛时代，叱咤风云，世界安危所系的有名人物的人，但是他们却不能归纳出一点什么来，也毫无真正的观察力。

五　佛经的翻译方式

叶恭绰著《遐庵谈艺录》中，有一篇题为《由旧日译述佛经的情况想到今天的翻译工作》的文章。内容主张我们必须仿效前人译经的方式来从事翻译，才可免除近代译书的粗制滥造的流弊。他虽不同意墨守成规，完全依照“译场”的办法进行，然他对于那种方式确是很赞成的。他的这种见解我们都具有同感，因为谁都知道翻译必须认真彻底，才能搞好，而翻译佛经的方式是最认真，而又最彻底的。现在就让我们来看看，古代“译场”的情形，到底是怎样的。

中国进行有系统的翻译工作，始于东汉明帝永平十年（公元六十七年），直到北宋为止，前后达九百年之久，其间完全采用一种叫做“译场”的方式，即许多人通力合作，在严格的分工制度下从事翻译工作。我们普通人说到翻译，都是指的一个人执笔的翻译，而不是指许多人一块儿来译一部书。清朝末年的“译学馆”，乃至民国以后的“国立编译馆”都未曾作此尝试，虽个人的译作，也都没有什么成绩表现。

据曹仕邦的考证，中国在隋朝以前的译经方式，有点像现今的演讲讨论会，组织比较松懈，结果费时失事，事倍功半。因为隋朝以前是由主译公开在大众前一面翻译一面讲解，在场的任何人都可以跟主译辩论。那时主译的声望愈高，听者愈众，如鸠摩罗什在关中作主译时，便有徒众三千，他们当中有不少是从分裂的中国各地来的，因什公名气大，三藏兼明，所以热心闻法的人，纷纷越境而凑幅长安。这数以千百计的听众，对译经的帮助，并不太大，至多只能收集思广益的效用，使真理愈辩愈明而已。

译场上讲经是对不懂梵文或西域文的华人，来讲解原用梵文或西域文写的佛经，所以主译先诵读原文的经文，然后再随口译为汉语，如果主译不通汉语，就由“传语”负责口译，再由一弟子负责记录，称为“笔受”，即是用笔来接受的意思。笔受的任务是主译随时口译多少，他就记录多少。有些佛经是梵僧来华后凭记忆背诵出来的，而不是他们携来的写在贝多罗叶上的原文，遇此情形，就得再增设一位专门负责记下梵文的笔受。

主译或传语将原文口译成汉语，再由笔受记录下来，只是完成了初步的工作，因为这儿口头译出的经文，还得由主译加以讲解，听众加以辩难，直到在场的人都彻底了解，毫无疑问时，才算定案。

现在新式的教学法，决不限于教师一人讲解，在一节课中常分为讲解、讨论、测验三个部分。现新加坡大学校外进修系的课程，每次也是规定一小时讲解，半小时讨论。佛教讲经，特别注重讨论，历来都要听众向法师质询和辩难，相传佛陀住世时讲《安般守意经》，弟子们无人能提出质问，佛陀只好自己化作两身，由一化身发问，另一化身作答，借着彼此的问答和辩论，引导弟子们进一步的了解经义。从这传说看来，可见讨论辩难是很早就实行有效的传统方式。后来在中国译经时，仍然要采用它，也是当然的。

译场上译经，除了传语和笔受的实际任务外，听众也各自作出笔记，作为讨论的张本。前人记载鸠摩罗什译《维摩经》的经过时，有两句名言说：“因纸墨以记其文外之言，借听众以集其成事之说。”前句指主译的解释经义，因为解经时所说的话，都非佛经本文，故称“文外之言”；后句所言，如听众不做笔记，他又从何借他们“听”到的“成事之说”，而将之集合整理起来呢？

集合听众的笔记，可助译文的写定。在翻译上听众常有一得之愚，足供大师采用，例如鸠摩罗什译《妙法莲华经》时，曾拿竺法护译的《正法华经》作参考，其中卷五《受决品》有一句话，法护译作“天上视世间，世间得见天上，天上世人往来交接”，罗什认为虽能保存原意，而嫌不够典雅。于是僧睿提议改译为“人天交接，两得相见”，什公很高兴地接受了。

当笔受处理译文时，自然要完全掌握主译对经义的解释，所以除他本人所记的以外，还要集合听众的笔记来作参考，以便从许多记录中归纳出真义来。这样译成之后，还须跟原文校勘，才能成为定译。校勘工作最初由通汉文的主译自任。或归传语负责，后来另设专人。译文的用字问题，在检校时可作最后决定。这种校勘工作，极为认真，常要花上好几年的时间，一校再校，慎重可想。

隋唐后译经的方式稍有改变。隋炀帝时设置翻译馆及翻经博士。当时的高僧彦琮，俗姓李氏，尤精于译事。译经一百余卷，合二十三部，晚年著《辩正论》以流传后世，作为翻译佛经的准则。他说佛哲传经，深浅随缘，译事不易；虽精心审度，仍难臻恰当，为求圆满至善，宜有八备。所谓八备，就是参预译场的人所应具备的八种条件。彦琮的翻译八备，原文如下：

诚心爱法，志愿益人，不惮久时，其备一也。

将践觉场，先牢戒足，不染讥恶，其备二也。

筌晓三藏，义贯两乘，不苦暗滞，其备三也。

旁涉坟史，工缀典词，不过鲁拙，其备四也。

襟抱平恕，器重虚融，不好专执，其备五也。

耽于道术，淡于名利，不欲高炫，其备六也。

要识梵言，乃闲正译，不坠彼学，其备七也。

薄阅苍雅，粗谙篆隶，不昧此文，其备八也。

其中第一个必备的条件是：应具备诚心、善心、恒心。自己对工作本身，诚心地爱好，而又立志要帮助不懂原文的人，以献身译经事业的精神，来从事翻译，所以不怕年长月久的工作。

第二个必备的条件是：从事翻译的人，要遵守一切戒规，并有良好的品德修养。

第三个必备的条件是：佛典分经、律、论三大类，合称三藏。两乘指大小乘，包含深玄义理，以慈悲博爱，拯救众生的是大乘，修行者见解狭小，倾于烦琐理论的是小乘。翻译的人应先通晓经论律规，译出经来，才能意义允当，通畅明达。

第四个必备的条件是：坟史指三坟、五典、三史等书。要博览中国的经史，对于用典遣词，才能适切地运用，不至拙于应付。

第五个必备的条件是：要有忠恕之心，虚怀若谷，才能集思广益，不至固执己见。

第六个必备的条件是：重道，淡泊，平实。要崇信道术，才能不求名利，一意弘扬佛法，决不好高立异。

第七个必备的条件是：要精通梵文，明悉译事，才不至有失经义。

第八个必备的条件是：苍雅指古时辞典的三苍、《尔雅》，篆隶指秦汉时代的文字，翻译者须有良好的国学根基，对古辞书与文字学均有相当研究，所译才能文从字顺。

以上八项原来虽是为翻译佛经而说的，但对于从事任何翻译工作的人，都是很实际的指导原则。

隋朝设置翻经馆时，曾“下敕搜举翘楚”，又“置十大德监掌翻译”，可见过去那种演讲讨论会式的译经方式，至此已趋于淘汰，转而向精选助手方面求发展了。唐初，西僧波颇译《宝星陀罗尼经》时，诏选助手十九人，分证义、译语、执笔三种职务，所谓证义是新方式中的一个特色，前所未有，其任务是“证已译之文所诠之义”及“与主译评量梵文”。前者指审查译文，后者指他们跟主译讨论原本义理。

波颇的助手慧颐，为文笔知名之士，玄奘助手负责证义的灵润，未进译场前已是一个精通义理，善于讲经的人了。他能“问难深微”，遇上已译经文“词理有碍，格言正之”，而为“众所详准”。玄奘另一位证义助手道因，也是了不起的人，因玄奘“每有难文”，不易译出的，必找道因“同加参酌”。从前老早就有了的“笔受”，后来更分出“缀文”和“润文”两方面，因为穷一人的精力综理全部译文，未免过劳，于是渐增笔受人数。唐贞观二十一年，玄奘译《瑜伽师地论》时，“承义笔受”的有八人，“受旨缀文”的又有八人，到了显庆元年，玄奘的译场中又增加“润文官”一个职位。这是唐高宗应玄奘的要求，下敕命于志宁、来济、许敬宗、薛元超、李义府、杜正伦六位文臣，给新译的佛经“时为看阅，有不稳便处，即随事润色”。负责缀文的道宣，撰有《续高僧传》《大唐内典录》《广弘明集》等书，他本身又是律宗的祖师。由此可见，译场的人数虽然减少，但参与的人各具专长，使译场成了专家的集会所了。

润文官大都是敕派，但也有自己请求的，如《大宝积经》进行翻译时，中书侍郎崔湜走到翻经院，见在场的人皆一时之选，不禁有“清流尽在此矣”之叹，于是上奏要求加入润色。崔湜自动参加译经，是因为他觉得译场中人不论僧俗，都是饱学之士，场中之集会与学术集会无异，他参加进来，在翻译工作之余，便有机会和他们切磋琢磨，以增进自己的学术修养。由这故事，便可见译场的学术空气是何等的浓厚。

现在我们再来看看译场助手的分工情形。东晋南北朝时是没有“证义”的，那时译场中负实际责任的是“传语”和“笔受”，正所谓“义之得失由乎译人，辞之文质系乎执笔”，即传语负责意义，笔受负责辞藻，故笔受之选以文学修养为首屈一指，懂不懂梵文倒无所谓。

北宋初年建筑的一所译经院，内分三堂：中堂为译经的所在，东序是为润文用的，西序是为证义用的。证义一门又分出许多新职，故有所谓“分职证义”，及“证义正员”等名义。其实，早在玄奘的译场中，证义中已分出的部门，便有“字学”及“证梵语梵文”。“字学”又叫“正字”，专审查译文用字的得失，属于中国音义训诂学的范畴。“证梵语梵文”又简称“证文”，专审查梵文原本的字音字义，是属于印度声明学的范畴。上面提到的崔湜，就曾做润文官兼“正字”，如《开元释敎录》卷九《义净传》上便提到义净的助手中，有“兵部侍郎崔湜，给事卢粲等润文正字”。到这时“正字”已由润文官兼任，有时索性取消了，但专管原文方面的“证梵语梵文”，却另行发展为好几种新职了。

第一种是“证译语”，首见于武则天时菩提流志的译场中，由一位出生和落发都在中国的印度籍僧人慧智担任此职，专审听他们的汉语口译有无错传主译的话。后来唐中宗时华人义净的译场中也设置得有这一职位，仍由外国居士担任。

第二种叫“证梵义”，武则天时义净译场中设置，职责为“明西义得失，贵令华语不失梵义”。

第三种叫“读梵本”，是义净时置，他本人梵文虽好，但要读诵得声调正确，仍以印度人为佳。

第四种叫“证梵本”，也是义净所设置的。这是为考证梵文原文的内容，注意梵文形式的表达，遇上原文有讲不清楚的地方，要能够加以解释，使原文意思能正确地表现出来，不致有误。

从这四种新职来看，翻译工作较玄奘时更有了进展，人们已体会到翻译以理解原文为第一要义，故不特把证义再细分为若干部门，且聘外国人为助，以收事半功倍之效。

到了唐德宗贞元年间，“证义”工作又有了新的进展，如不空译场中有“证义”十一人，另有“校勘”三人，“检校”一人。般若译场中的“检勘”和“详定”，只是名义上的改变而已。北宋译场完全承袭唐代旧规，分工方面再没有什么新的发展了。

（本章取材《现代杂志》三卷二、三期曹仕邦著《关于佛教的译场》一文）

六　批评的和实用的

翻译既系从一种文字易为另外一种文字，从事这种工作的人，自然非通晓有关的两种文字不可。这两种文字，在一般的情形，不外是一为本国文，一为外国文。但两种全属外国文的场合，也并不是没有。例如，我的本国文是中文，在第二次世界大战时，就曾为重庆的一个美国战时机构，将中途拦截的日本电报译成英文，以供当局参考，协助争取最后胜利。但从外国文译成本国文，实为翻译的正宗。大家认为只要外国文好，就可从事翻译，因为本国文是没有问题的。这种看法并不一定正确，翻译的错误来自双方，如我在上文提到的，“乌鹊”一词，英国的汉学大师译错，中国的大学教授也同样译错。这有关对原文的了解问题，以后我们再详加研讨。现在且说从事翻译的人，必须通晓两种文字，不过通法有所不同。他对外国文的知识，必须是批评的（critical），而对本国文的知识，就必须是实用的（practical）。为什么对外国文的知识，要带批评性呢？为什么对本国文的知识，要能实际运用呢？下面我们不妨分别举例来说明一下。

我们暂定外国文为英文，本国文为中文。由英文译成中文的翻译过程，便是我们的主题。

先看怎样实际运用中文的知识，来把英文译成恰到好处的中文句子。

I think the moral of it all is summed up in the remark which an intrepid lady, whose name has of late become a household word, once made to me.

——A.G.Gardiner

句中的 a household word，译成“一个家务的字”，是不合实用的。因为这不但不是一句中国惯用句，而且不像一句中国话。具有相当的中国语文的知识，又能实际运用的人，必然会把这个英文的表现法，译成“一句家喻户晓的话语”。再看：

These statements may seem so commonplace that they may be held to be hardly worth making.

——J.R. Peddie

如果译者不能运用“老生常谈”一句中国成语，就不能很完善而流利地把这句英文翻译出来。

Scientific exploration, the search for knowledge, has given man the practical results of being able to shield himself the calamities of nature and the calamities imposed by other men.

句尾的十一个字，有实用中文能力的译者，便会以“天灾人祸”四个字来翻译，既恰当而又洗练，比原文精彩多了。

La Rochefoucauld said：“In the misfortunes of our best friends, we find something that is not unpleasing.”

上面这句英文，用“幸灾乐祸”一个中国成语来译，才是最为实用而恰当的。

现在再看对英文的原文，要怎样用批评的手法，来决定它的含义，然后才好着手翻译呢。例如：

lt’s not cricket.

这句英文的表现法，句中 cricket 一字我们原来只知道是“蟋蟀”，但蟋蟀在此是讲不通的。我们鉴定它在此决不能作蟋蟀解，因此引起我们的怀疑，不敢断然下笔。我们于是要去查辞典，便查出除蟋蟀一解外，还可作英国最普通的“棍球戏”解。我们晓得棍球是英国的国技，可以代表竞技精神的。所以英文说“这不是棍球”，等于说这不是竞技精神，也就是说，这是不公平的。（It’s not fair.）竞技精神就在 fair play（公正，诚实）上，如果不是公正或诚实的，就变成不正直的了（not honest），甚至有 You’re cheating me.（你欺骗我）的意思。你如果没有批评的能力，也许就译成“这不是蟋蟀”，使人读了莫名其妙。

This is a mere apology for soup.

上面这句英文，如译成“它不过是为羹汤道歉而已”的话，是不合理的，因为“这”不是指人，要人才可以道歉。我们既判断不能如此翻译，便知 apology 一字必另有含义。原来它除道歉而外，还有“代替”的意思。代用品总是勉强充数的，不会像本来的好，为权宜之计而敷衍一下，比方我们搬到新房子里去住，窗帷还没有来得及做好，临时用布遮住一下，就说 We devise apologies for window curtains（设法用他物代替窗帷）。上举羹汤的例，是说有名无实，意为“这个实在不成其为羹汤”。也许是没有正式烧汤，临时用几片白菜叶子煮一碗汤，放点味精充数。现在再看：

Use zip code numbers.

一句英文，句中的 zip 一字，我们只知道是从 zipper 或 zipfastener 一个名词而变化来的动词，意为用拉链拉紧或拉开，如 zip your bag open（closed）。如果根据这个意思来翻译上举的例句，便是“采用拉链的暗号电码”，用批评的眼光来看，实不够明白。这儿需要作进一步的查究。《综合英汉大辞典》上载：zip，[名]弹丸飞过空中或打中他物之音，蚩蚩音。——，[自动]作蚩蚩音，以蚩蚩音而动。《最新实用汉英辞典》则释作：zip，—n.[俗]（1）（弹丸飞过天空时之）飕飕声。（2）能力，活力，力。to have lots of zip and go（精神很好）。—vi.（1）作飕飕声；飕飕飞驶。（2）猛冲，突进。—vt.用拉链拉紧。我们日常用的《韦氏新世界美语辞典》，也和上面举出的大致相同。即 zip, n.[echoic]，1.a short, sharp hissing or whizzing sound, as of a passing bullet.2.“Collog.”，energy; vim. vi.1.to make, or move with, a zip.2.“Collog.”，to act or move with speed or energy. vi.to fasten with a slide fastener.以上中西辞典上的解释，似乎对这句英文的译者都没有多大的帮助。他非在辞典以外，另想办法不可。据说这句话是从美国街头那灰色邮箱上抄来的，当然与邮务有关，现在全世界各文明国家，为求邮送迅速计，都分邮区，如新加坡邮局，在信件上常盖有 Do use Singapore district numbers 字样。美国当不例外，这个 zip code 一定与邮区有关，果然在美国的书上，查出这是从 Zone improvement program（地区改进计划）的起首字母构成的新字，与辞典上的 zip 一字完全无关。它最初写成 ZIP code，后来索性全用小写而写成 zip code 了。这是美国划分邮区的办法，一共用五个数字，前三字为州及城市，后二字才是邮区。他们宣传说 Zip Code Belongs in Every Address.（每一地址都应加上邮区号码）。Use zip code numbers.（请采用邮区号码）。

七　直译和意译举例

Grey are the clouds in the sky and faded are the leaves on the ground,

Bitter is the west wind as the wild geese fly from the north to the south.

How is it that in the morning the white-frosted trees are dyed as red as a wine flushed face?

It must have been caused by the tears of those who are about to depart.

这是熊式一翻译的《西厢记》中的名句。原文是“碧云天，黄叶地，西风紧，塞雁南飞，晓来谁染霜林醉，尽是离人泪”。我现在把它当作实例提出，以便进行讨论“直译和意译”的问题。我认为熊君把“西风”译做 west wind，似乎有点犯了直译的毛病，而使它和前面的形容词 bitter，在英国人观念中发生矛盾。熊君此书在伦敦出版，可说是专翻给英国人看的。他应该注意到英国人心目中的 west wind 是怎么一回事。我不能代表英国人来表示他们的意见，只好请英国的桂冠诗人 John Masefield（1878—1967）出面来说明：

It’s a warm wind, the west wind, full of birds’ cries;

I never hear the west wind but tears are in my eyes,

For it comes from the west lands, the old brown hills,

And April’s in the west wind, and daffodils.

（那是一种温暖的风，西风吹时，万鸟争鸣；

一听西风起，我眼眶中热泪盈盈，

因为它是来自西土，那褐色的故山边，

春天就在西风中到来，还有水仙。）

我们读了桂冠诗人的这首《西风歌》，便不难理解英国的 west wind 简直等于我们的“东风”，也就是温暖的春风一样，所以 Milton 说它“有芳香的翅膀”（And west winds with musky wing）。《西厢记》上说的“西风紧”，正和英国的 east wind 相似，英国人惯常用 keen, biting, piercing 一类的字眼，来形容他们的 east wind，和我们说的“刺骨”差不多。英国小说家 Dickens 在他的名著《块肉余生述》中说：How many winter days have I seen him, standing blue-nosed in the snow and east wind!（在许多的冬日我都看见他，鼻子冻得发紫，站在飞雪和东风之中！）我们对于冰雪和东风是联不起来的，正如英国人对于 bitter 和 west wind 不能发生联想一样。所以我们最好是意译，如果一定要保留原文，照字面直译的话，则须加注。例如译 Dickens 的上引文句时，就得说明英国的 east wind 是从欧洲大陆北部吹来的寒冷的风，和我国的西北风相似。如果是大胆一点的译者，是可以把它意译为“朔风”的，说“站在冰雪和朔风之中”，是不会出纰漏的。至于上说的“西风紧”，如译者不敢意译为 Bitter is the east wind，至少也得在 west wind 下加注，说明这是说的大陆的西风，有如英国的 east wind，好像英诗人 Shelley 到欧洲大陆的翡冷翠时所遇到的西风一样。英国的 west wind 是与春俱来的，而大陆的西风，如 Shelley 说的是呼吸着“秋的生命”（thou breath of Autumn’s being）的。

以上是关于气候与土宜的直译，对另外一个国度的读者有不同的含义。现在我们再来看看普通文字的直译，给读者的印象又是怎样。英国作家 Maugham 在他的自传 The Summing Up 一书中说的 His language will be Greek to them.一句话，如译为“他的语言对他们将是希腊话”，便是直译，中国读者是不能领悟的，甚至不能意会的。因为英文说的 be Greek to one = be beyond one’s understanding 意为“不懂”，在字面上决看不出来有这种意思。所以这句话必须意译为“他所说的这一套，他们是不会懂得的”，才能被读者接受。

再看 Henry James 在 The Real Thing 一篇中说：I had as I often had in those days, for the wish was father to the thought, an immediate vision of sitters 如直译为“我有在那些日子里我常有的一样，因为愿望对于思想是父亲，一个立刻的坐者的幻象”，是没有一个读者能了解的，必须意译为“因为愿望是思想的根源，正如我在当时所常有的情形一样，现在一听说有客人来，心里马上就想到是找我画像的人来了”，才能表达原意。

中译英也是不宜直译的，如唐诗“早晚下三巴”句中的“早晚”二字，Fletcher 译为 early and late，而 Lowell 则译为 from early morning until late in the evening，都因直译而未能表达原意，这个“早晚”是指“有一天”（some day）说的。又如刘长卿的“柴门闻犬吠，风雪夜归人”一联，Fletcher 译为：

The house dog’s sudden barking, which hears the wicket go,

Greets us at night returning through driving gale and snow.

译者照字面直译，故译成狗闻门响而吠，狗欢迎我们在风云中深夜归来。实际是说诗人闻柴门边狗叫，知道是夜里有人从风雪中归来了。

又 Lowell 与 Ayscough 合译的《松花笺》集中译李白“问余何事栖碧山”句作：

He asks why I perch in the green jade hills.

把“栖”字直译为 perch 是不适当的。

司空曙的“晓月过残垒，繁星宿故关”，是指他所送北归的人，在晓月时走过残垒，在繁星下投宿故关，可是 Bynner 却直译为晓月落残垒，繁星照故关了。这是因为译者未能把诗句中的主语找出的缘故。

The moon goes down behind a ruined fort,

Leaving star-clusters above an old gate.

如果译者能完全了解原文，他就可以意译了，如白居易《后宫词》有“红颜未老恩先断，斜倚熏笼坐到明”句，Giles 译成：

Alas, although his love has gone, her beauty lingers yet；

Sadly she sits till early dawn but never can forget.

原为“红颜未老恩先断”现译为“君恩已去红颜在”，先后颠倒过来，意思似乎更为深入，第二句中的“熏笼”虽被略去未译，但补充了“永难忘”的字眼，更是神完意足。又同为白作《琵琶行》中的句子：“暮去朝来颜色改”，Bynner 意译为 And evenings went and evenings came, and her beauty faded.正好像我们说“一天一天的老了”一样，此直译为“暮去朝来”或“朝去暮来”，更容易为西方读者所了解。

Giles 译太白诗“白发三千丈，缘愁似个长”为：

My whitening hair would make a long, long rope,

Yet could not fathom all my depth of woe.

则比原来的意思更进一步了。再看韦应物的“浮云一别后，流水十年间”，Bynner 译为：

Since we left one another, floating apart like clouds,

Ten years have run like water—till at last we join again.

也很自然，因译者能将“浮云”和“流水”融化到译文中去，而避免直译的难懂和不通。

只要真能了解原意，又能用译语表达，是没有直译和意译之分的。

八　译文第一要通达

辜鸿铭以“汉滨读易者”的笔名，著有《张文襄幕府纪闻》一书，其中有这么一则故事：

昔年陈立秋侍郎兰彬，出使美国，有随员徐某，夙不解西文。一日，持西报展览，颇入神。使馆译员见之，讶然曰：“君何时谙识西文乎？”徐曰：“我固不谙。”译员曰：“君既不谙西文，阅此奚为？”徐答曰：“余以为阅西文固不解，阅诸君之翻译文亦不解。同一不解，固不如阅西文之为愈也。”至今传为笑柄。

由上面这个故事看来，可见翻译出来的文字，必须通顺达意，否则就会变成天书，是没有人能看得懂的。遇到徐先生那样不懂英文的人，也宁肯放下天书似的翻译文字，而入神地去看那蟹行的原文了。他的幽默感，给了从事翻译的人们当头一棒，使他们在执笔翻译之前，先得想想：他们是翻给谁看的？当然是翻给他们的国人看的。如果国人看不懂，岂不等于劳力白费？目的既未达到，可说是完全失败了。

十九世纪英国的诗人兼批评家阿诺德（Matthew Arnold），论翻译时说道：“如果可能的话，翻译应该做到使读者完全忘记他读的是一篇翻译文，而发生错觉地以为他读的是一篇原作。”

我们从他这种论调看来，便可相信他是怎样重视译文要通达的了。译文要译得像创作一样流利达意，当然是最高的理想，所以阿诺德也说“如果可能的话”。普通的情形是流利的就不一定达意，而达意的就不一定流利。有一个比喻说得好：“翻译文好比女人——漂亮的不忠实，忠实的不漂亮。”（Translations are like women—when they are faithful they are not beautiful, when they are beautiful they are not faithful.）这也就是说，翻译时流利和忠实是很难两全的。意大利人甚至于说翻译的人是叛徒（Traduttori-traditori = Translators are traitors），也是有道理的，因为译得像原作一样的通顺流利，就多半不大忠实，要忠实地表达原意，一字不苟地翻译时，就要变成天书，没有人能看得懂了。

为什么不可以一字不苟地直译呢？因为两种语文决不会相同的。就以中英两种语文来说吧，中国文字是由象形演变而来的，英文是由字母组合而成的。英文的重点在音，中文的重点在形。这是根本上的差别。中英语文的结构不同，而逻辑的基础也因之而异。西洋人的逻辑，并不一定合乎我们东方人推理的标准。西方语文如英语的动词“be”具有“存在”的意思，因而构成西方逻辑上第一条定律的“同一律”，舍此即不能作逻辑推理。中文没有相当于“be”的动词，白话文的“是”，绝无存在的意思，文言文的“为”，只是可作“成为”解，即英文的“become”，也与存在无关。西方逻辑可称为“同一性逻辑”，而中国逻辑则可称为“相关性逻辑”，因中文只说到是非之间，有无之间，好坏之间，所以张东荪曾经证明辩证法是中国人思想方法中固有的东西。中文说的“世间有马”，英文要说 There are horses in the world.如将中文句照字面直译为 The world has horses.或将英文句直译为“马在世间”，都是不通的。再看“桌上有一本书”，英文要说 There is a book on the table.或 A book is on the table.第二句是回答 What is on the table?说的。这些句中的“be”，以及一般用此动词时，都只能译成中文的“有”，只有一个例外，那就是在指定的人或物时，才能译出这个英文动词的本义来，例如 Where is the book?——The book is on the table.（那本书在哪里？——那本书在桌上。）Where are you?——I am here.（你在哪里？——我在这里。）中文说的“有”，英文多半要用“在”来翻译，如“这学校有五百个学生”，便不能译为 This school has 500 pupils，必须译为 There are 500 pupils in this school.英文说的 I am Chinese.只可译为“我是中国人”。用动词“be”将“存在”的意思表现得最明显的，莫过于 A.G.Gardiner 的这个文句：

We are really, when you come to think of it, a good deal alike——just apparitions that are and then are not, coming out of the night into the lighted carriage, fluttering about the lamp for a while and going out into the night again.（当你想到这一点上，我们真是很相像的——不过是一些出没无常的影像，从暗夜中跑出来，进到光明的车厢里去，围着灯火扑了一会翅膀，又再回到暗夜中去。）

句中的 that are and then are not，便是有时存在，有时又不存在的意思，所以我用一个中国成语“出没无常”来翻译它。

战国时代的公孙龙子曾利用这种有无的逻辑，对抗“存在”的逻辑，而诡辩“白马非马”。他说，如果说有白马就等于有马，那么，说有白马岂不就等于说有黄马，有黑马了吗？由此可知，有马并不等于是有白马，有白马既不可能成为有黄马或有黑马，即是不可能有别的马，也就是没有马了。显然“白马”与“马”有别，所以白马非马。这完全是从有无的观点出发的。西方人只想到有马，虽不一定是有白马，无论马是什么颜色，马的存在总是确实的。中国人则只想到有与无的问题。或是与非的问题，而不专注于客观的存在问题。因为东西方的基本想法不同，所以文学所表现出来的亦随之而异，翻译时怎样可以完全直译，而不求通顺呢？

我相信下面这样的一篇翻译文是任何中国人都看不懂的：

那几分钟在每天的行程中，一个人专注于一点世界的追求，也许不注意地花费在亲切的字眼中，或是细微的慈善中，对他周围的那些人，以及亲切对一个动物就是他们中间的一个，是也许在看见天国时，那唯一的时间他生活过了，对任何目的值得记录。

英文的原文如下：

The few moments in the course of each day which a man absorbed in some worldly pursuit may carelessly expend in kind words or in trifling charities to those around him, and kindness to an animal is one of them, are perhaps, in the sight of Heaven, the only time he has lived to any purpose worthy of recording.

如果要通顺地表达原文的意思，就应译成：

哪怕是一个全神贯注于事业的人，都可能不经心地花几分钟去对他周围的人，说点亲切的话，或布施一些小惠，如仁慈地对待动物便是一例。每一天当中有这样的几分钟，在上帝看来，也许就是他生活上颇有收获的唯一值得记录的时间了。

再看 O.Henry 小说中说的 The broker’s hour is not only crowded, but minutes and seconds are hanging to all the straps and packing both front and rear platforms.如果译成中文的：

经纪人的时间不但是拥挤的，而且分分秒秒都挂在所有的皮带上，包装在前后的月台上。

这是不知所云的，翻译的人必须自己彻底了解原文，才能翻出通顺达意的译文来。上面这句话作者是用了修辞上的隐喻（Metaphor），把经纪人的时间比作拥挤不堪的电车，所以才有 crowd, strap, platform 一类的名词出现。我们晓得在电车上找不到座位，拉着吊带站着的乘客，英文叫作 straphanger，懂得了这一个关键，自然就可以通顺地译出来了：

经纪人的时间不但是忙迫得像电车一样的拥挤，而且每分每秒车上所有的吊带都吊满了站立的乘客，在前后的站台上也挤得水泄不通。

九　首先要了解原文

（1）理解字句的含义

一般讨论翻译问题的人，差不多都认定翻译者对原文是能够了解的，否则他就不会随便动笔翻译。照想固应如是，但事实并不尽然。我们对于一种文字的了解，真是谈何容易！此中情况，不足为外人道，只要是染指过的人，没有不对翻译具有痛苦的经验的。我们读书正如陶渊明所说，是不求甚解的，读懂一个大意就过去了。但到了去翻译的时候，就非得彻底了解不可，一字一句，都不能马虎过去，遇到一个字的意思不能理会时，就翻不下去。诗尤其难译，所以有句笑话说：Poetry suffers in translation——and the reader suffers with it.（诗太难译，译出来多半不成样子，读它的人，也跟着感到难受。）我们现在还是不谈诗的好。现只就散文的翻译来讨论一下吧。

《史记·刺客列传》第二十六：“豫让遁逃山中曰：‘嗟乎！士为知己者死，女为说己者容。今智伯知我，我必为报仇而死，以报智伯，则吾魂魄不愧矣。’”文中说的“女为说己者容”一句，翻译时就大成问题。“容”是美容，即打扮。“说”今作悦，悦己者到底是什么意思呢？是使她喜欢的人呢（he who pleases her），还是喜欢她的人（he who is pleased in her）。翻译者非在这两种意义之间，加以抉择不可。他不能凭个人的判断来取舍，而擅自采用某种意思。他必须有所根据，找出古代名家的说法，作为定论。因此，他查出这是司马迁采自《战国策》的，其本人也在《报任少卿书》上引用过了，但都并没有解释，直到吕向注《文选》时，才注释说：“女为爱己貌者而饰其容”，这样一来，意思就明白了。于是这句话，便可译成 A woman will beautify herself for the man who is pleased in her.悦己者也就是爱她的人，英文可简单地说 for her lover（为爱人）。

再看下面这个笑话：

An Englishman who had just landed in China entered a restaurant to appease the pangs of hunger.Unfortunately he knew no Chinese and the waiter knew no English; so they were both thrown on mother wit. John Chinaman articulated “Bowwow”，to which John Bull moved his head from right to left. Then the waiter said “Quack, quack!” to which the customer moved his head from sky to earth, and the inner man was soon satisfied.

在着手翻译之前，必须彻底了解每一字句的含义。

（1）who had just landed in China 句中的 landed 一个动词，到底是乘船登岸呢，还是飞机着陆？经查出如果是飞机着陆的话，应该用他动词，即如 The airplane landed the passengers in the middle of a big field.（飞机将乘客降落在一大场地的中央）。自动词的 The passengers landed（乘客均已登岸）。The UN troops landed in Egypt.（联合国军队在埃及登岸）。由此可以决定那英国人是乘船在中国上岸。

（2）to appease the pangs of hunger 句中的 pangs，是指一阵突然的痛苦，如牙痛为 the pangs of a toothache，肚子饿得发慌，便是 the pangs of hunger，画饼充饥就说 to appease one’s hunger with depicted cake.

（3）they were both thrown on mother wit，所谓 mother wit 是指天生的机智，人的常识。to throw oneself on 意为听命于，听从。现改用 passive 的形式，如 to be thrown on one’s resources（有赖自己的机智）。

（4）John Chinaman 中国人的诨名。

（5）Bowwow 为犬吠声。

（6）John Bull 英国人的诨名。

（7）Quack, quack!为鸭叫声。

（8）the inner man 内在的人，意指胃袋（滑稽的说法）。

把这些字句完全理解之后，就可以动笔翻译了。

一个刚在中国登岸的英国人，因为肚皮饿得发慌，就走进了一家餐厅去用食物充饥。不凑巧的是他不懂华语，而那堂倌又不懂英语；所以他们只好都靠天生的机智来交谈。那中国佬说“汪汪”，约翰牛连忙摇头。于是那堂倌又说“呷，呷”，客人闻声一直点头，而他的内在的人随即就感到满足了。

在 Henry James 著的 The Real Thing 中有这样的一节：

It was a truth of which I had for some time been conscious that a figure with a good deal of frontage was, as one might say, almost never a public institution. A glance at the lady helped to remind me of this paradoxical law：she also looked too distinguished to be a “personality”.Moreover one would scarcely come across two variations together.

有人这样翻译出来：

这是一个我早就意识到的真理：正如别人所说的，前面有许多空地的建筑物，几乎不可能是一个公共机关。对那女士一瞥，使我想起这样一个似是而非的谬论：她太杰出而不会具有“人格”。加之，一个人也不会同时遇到两种不同的变化的。

这位译者对原文的字句，可说完全没有理解，所以译文简直未能表达原意。现在我们先来研究一下原文吧。

（1）It 是代表下面的 that 子句的形式上的主语。

（2）for some time 不多时。

（3）of which I had been conscious = I had been conscious of which（truth）。

（4）a figure with a good deal of frontage 句中 frontage 原意为“前面”，“建筑物对街或临河的前面的空地”，但在此既系形容一个人物（figure），自然是指此人的仪表了，所以应译作“风度翩翩的人物”，“一表人才”，“仪表漂亮的人”。

（5）public institution 原意为“公共机关”，在此是说人，故应译作“世间知名之士”，或简称“名士”。institution 在口语中有 familiar object（闻名的事物，熟悉的人物）之意，例如 He was one of the institutions of the place.（他是当地的闻人之一）。

（6）this paradoxical law（这个逆说的定则），意指风度翩翩的人，反而不成其为名士的那种现象。

（7）too distinguished to be a “personality”这是对上述逆说的举例。意为“那女人也就是因为太杰出而不能成为名人”。句中的 personality = personage（人物，名人，如 distinguished personage（有名望的人物，名人），noted literary personalities（有名的文人）。

（8）two variations 指对上述法则的例外人物。

据上文说来客有两位，那 lady 即令是一个例外的存在，那 gentleman 却不能也视为同样的情形，所以说，不至于有两个例外同时出现吧。

现在字句都弄明白了，就可以来翻译了。

从不久以前开始，我就留意到了一个事实，那就是一个风度翩翩的人物，我们不妨说，他差不多从来不会是一个社会上的名人。那个女客，一眼看去，就使我想起这种逆说的定则：她看去也是太杰出而不成其为一个名人呢。而且，我们极少会同时遇到两个例外的。

由上面这些例子看来，可见要彻底了解原文的字句，无论原文是用哪一种文字写的，都不是一件容易的事。

（2）字句以外的含义

英国小品文作家 A.G.Gardiner 写的一篇名作《旅伴》中，有这样的一句话：

When the last of my fellow passengers had gone I put down my paper, stretched my arms and my legs, stood up and looked out of the window on the calm summer night through which I was journeying, noting the pale reminiscence of day that still lingered in the northern sky; crossed the carriage and looked out of the other window; lit a cigarette, sat down, and began to read again.（当我最后一个同车的人走了以后，我便把报纸放下，伸了一个懒腰，然后站起身来，望了一回窗外我正在走过的平静的夏夜，看到北方的天际上尚逗留着一抹白日的残晖。随即我又转过身来，向着这边的窗外望了一会，再点燃一支香烟，重新坐下来，又开始来看报。）

白日的残晖，为什么会出现在北方的天际上？难道英国的太阳不是从西方落下去的吗？这确不是从字面上所能了解的含义。我们非借助于风土人情，因时地而有差异的天文地理知识不可。英国位于北方，夏夜过了十时尚有阳光，日暮时北天反照，有时在夜半还可见到北极光。所以上文中说的，坐在当天最后一班火车上，当然是夜半时分，所见到的天上的光辉，确只能在北方才有，西方的落日这时早已消逝得无影无踪，只剩下一片黑暗了。

中国人心目中的“东风”是温暖的，能使草木萌芽，万汇生长，仿佛和春风相似。唐德宗的诗中有“东风变梅柳，万汇生春光”的句子，明朝的蓝茂也说，“东风破早梅，向暖一枝开，冰雪无人见，春从天上来”。可见东风和春天，是有连带关系的。但英国的 east wind，是从欧洲大陆北部吹来的寒冷的风，和我国的西风，乃至北风相似。我们如果没有这种知识，翻译英国人对东风的描写所用的形容词，如 a keen east wind（James Joyce），biting east wind（Samuel Butler），a piercing east wind（Kirkup），都是寒冷刺骨的，一定会感到不合理呢。再看大文豪 Charles Dickens 的句子：

How many winter days have I seen him, standing blue-nosed in the snow and east wind!（在许多的冬日我都看见他，鼻子冻得发紫，站在飞雪和东风之中!）

还有《福尔摩斯侦探案》的作者 Conan Doyle 说的：

It whistled just over my cap like an east wind.（那就在我的帽子上头像东风一样地呼啸而过。）

这都可以看出英国的东风是多么像中国的西风呀。所以我主张应译为西风或朔风，才能达意。反过来，英国的 west wind，却正像我们的东风，如英国桂冠诗人 John Masefield 为怀念他的故乡而作的《西风歌》：

It’s a warm wind, the west wind, full of birds cries;

I never hear the west wind but tears are in my eyes,

For it comes from the west lands, the old brown hills,

And April’s in the west wind, and daffodils.

（那是一种温暖的风，西风吹时，万鸟争鸣；

一听西风起，我眼眶中热泪盈盈，

因为它是来自西土，那褐色的故山边，

春天就在西风中到来，还有水仙。）

诗更是不能从字面上来求解的，如杜甫作的《春望》诗中的一联“感时花溅泪，恨别鸟惊心”，就被外国的汉学家照字面误译了。

W.J.B.Fletcher 的译文作：

In grief for the times, a tear the flower stains.

In woe for such parting, the bird fly from thence.

第一句中的 a tear stains the flower 是以“泪”为主语的，第二句中说的 the birds fly 也是以“鸟”为主语的。至于最近问世的 David Hawkes 的译文，也是半斤八两，无分轩轾：

The flowers shed tears of grief for the troubled times,

And the birds seem startled, as if with the anguish of separation.

他们找不出字句以外的含义，所以译来非错不可。其实这两句诗的原意是：“想起时事，连见了好花也叫人掉泪；和家里的人隔离很久，听到鸟声，也叫人心神不安。”这里说的“见了”和“听到”，当然前面省去了主语的“我”，即诗人自己。花鸟在平时可以娱目赏心，但在离乱伤春的时候，不免见花开而洒泪，闻鸟鸣而惊心了。

一九六八年剑桥考试的中文试题，是英译吴敬梓《儒林外史》第十五回中的一段话，最后一句说：“这便是曾子的养志。”一般应考的人，都把“养志”照字面的意思，翻译为 cultivate one’s ambitions 或 cherish one’s ideals，而没有注意到曾子的养志是另有含义的。作者故意加上“曾子的”一个限定词，就是要读者知道与普通的养志有所分别。普通说的养志，意为“高尚其志”，如《后汉书·王丹传》上说的，“隐居养志”，及《梁竦传》上说的，“闲居可以养志”都是。但曾子说的养志，意指“奉养之道，能承顺父母之意志也”。（《辞海》1491 页）应该译为 carry out the desires of one’s parents 才接近原意。由此更可知道，我们不能照字面翻译，必须找出字面以外的含义来。

有些英文句子，即令你对文字的含义，已经彻底了解，仍然不能决定它的意思的时候也是有的。这是因为英文原是一种含糊的语文（ambiguous language），我们要真正了解其含义，单靠语文知识是不够的，必须加以理智的判断，才能获得结论。这种句子的含义虽然不在字句以外，但需要译者运用理智，加以抉择，如果轻率地就字面的某一种含义译出，可能会完全译错的。例如：

They were entertaining women.

一句英文，如果把 were entertaining 看成一个进行式动词的话，意为“他们在款待女客”；如果把句中的 entertaining women 看成一个有修饰语的名词的话，意为“她们是女招待”。

His object is not to eat.

把上句中的否定字 not 看做是修饰动词 is 时，意为“他的目的不在吃饭”，意即“志不在温饱”；如果把否定字 not 看做是修饰后面的不定词时，意为“他的目的在不吃饭”，意即“绝食”。

The man turned out an impostor.

把 turn out 看作他动词时，意为“他赶走了一个骗子”；如把 turn out 看作自动词时，意为“他毕竟是一个骗子”。

He lives very near.

（a）他就住在附近。

（b）他生活贫苦。

I found him out.

（a）我找出他来了。

（b）我发现他不在家。

再看下面这句话：

Look out! There’s a train coming.

如果不了解 look out 在此作“当心”解的话，而照字面解为“看外面”时，就可能把头伸出火车窗外，而遭遇到危险了。

（3）找出典故的来历

英文中常用的一些典故，我们单就字面来看是不大容易了解的，但英美人却家喻户晓，成为日常语言的一部分，只要用一、二字提到那个典故，就没有不完全会意的。那些典故第一是出自《圣经》，其次就是由莎士比亚的剧本而来的。现在我们来看看下面这个小故事吧。

A college professor was one day nearing the close of a history lecture and was indulging in one of those rhetorical climaxes in which he delighted when the hour struck. The students immediately began to slam down the movable arms of their lecture chairs and to prepare to leave.

The professor, annoyed at the interruption of his flow of eloquence, held up his hand：

“Wait just one minute, gentlemen. I have a few more pearls to cast.”

一位大学教授有天在讲授历史课接近尾声中，正耽溺于他所得意的修辞学上的渐进法时，下课铃响了。学生们随即就开始把他们坐的椅子上活动的扶手，砰然地收下去，预备离开了。

那位教授口若悬河正讲得起劲，突然受到学生的干扰，满怀不悦，于是举起手来说道：

稍等一下，诸位。我还有几粒珍珠要投掷呀。

最后说的“我还有几粒珍珠要投掷”，到底是什么意思呢？是不是要向学生进几句珠玉之言，使他们有所获益呢？不知道这典故的人，是不会了解的。这典故出自《圣经》。《马太福音》第七章第六节：

不要把圣物给狗，也不要把你们的珍珠丢在猪前，恐怕它践踏了珍珠，转过来咬你们。（Give not that which is holy unto the dogs, neither cast ye your pearls before swine, lest they trample them under their feet, and turn again and rend you.）

古语说的 swine 即今的 pig，说猪中外一律，都是指的蠢物。现把人间最贵重的珍珠丢在猪前，愚蠢的猪，不但不知珍爱，反而要去践踏它，岂不可惜。你以贵重的珍珠投猪，它不但不知感激，反而要来咬你，等于以怨报德，是不是值得这样做呢？中国的成语说的“对牛弹琴”，意思就轻得多了，因为牛虽不能欣赏美丽的乐曲，但它并不会对弹琴的人进攻呢。那位教授因恼怒学生的不堪受教，他的珠玉似的教材讲给他们听，就好像丢在猪前一样。

又 V. Grove 著的 The Language Bar 一书中说：

There are others, and they are numberless as the sands, who are mortally afraid to call a spade a spade, because that would be the natural word, and to be natural, in their eyes, would be common, and by this declension they would fall into the pit of vulgarity.

（另外有许多的人，多得像恒河沙数，他们怕死了把铲子叫做铲子，因为那是很自然的字眼，而在他们的心目中，纯出自然而无一点矫揉造作的，便是太平凡了，由于这种堕落，他们便要掉进庸俗的深渊去。）

句中所谓 call a spade a spade（把铲子叫做铲子），到底是什么意思呢？我们要想了解，必须知道这说法的来历。原来这个 spade 不是说铲土的铲子，而是指桥牌中的有铲形花样的牌，即俗称黑桃的。打牌时最怕别人知道自己手中的牌，所以常要说谎，不肯具实告人，把自己手中的黑桃老实说出黑桃来；所以这句话的意思，便成为“直言无隐”了。

知道这个原有的含义之后，用时稍作字面上的改变，也是万变不离其宗，反而增加活用的效果。例如：

Even the most violently patriotic and militaristic are reluctant to call a spade by its own name.

——A. Huxley

（甚至最猛烈的爱国主义者和军国主义者，都不愿意直言无讳。）

He had always been responsive to what they had begun to call “Nature”，genuinely, almost religiously responsive, though he had never lost his habit of calling a sunset a sunset and a view a view, however, deeply they might move him.

——J. Galsworthy

（他素来是对于他们开始叫做“自然”的东西，很容易受到感动，真正地，几乎是宗教性的感动，虽则他一道保留着那种习惯，把落日叫做落日，景色叫做景色，无论那些自然景物对他感动怎样的深。）

所谓 call a spade by its own name 就等于说 call a spade a spade 一样，直说本名，毫无矫饰。至于 call a sunset a sunset and a view a view，只是换上一个自然界的名字，照说出来，并无虚伪的称呼，用法相同，意思也一样。

Words are all of one family.It is their functions that differentiate them. They have two functions, and the combination of these functions is infinite.If there is on earth a house with many mansions, it is the house of words.

——E.M. Forster

上文中说的 a house with many mansions，若译成“一幢有许多大厦的屋子”是决讲不通的，但这个 mansion 的字，字典上的解释只有“大厦”，“邸”的意思，在此全不适用，我们必须采用拉丁文的原意，即 dwelling place（住处）。于是 a house with many mansions（内有许多住处的一幢屋子），就讲得通了，不过如果我们不知道这典故的来历，还是不敢放胆翻译而自由使用的。这典故出自《圣经·约翰福音》第十四章第二节：In my Father’s house are many mansions（在我父的家里，有许多住处）。这有广庇世人之意，但为文人引用时，便成了广大的地方，可以包罗一切。请看：

In Apollo’s house there are many mansions; there is even one（unexpectedly enough）for the Philistine. So complex and various are the elements of literature that no writer can be damned on a mere enumeration of faults.

——L.Strachey

（在太阳神的家里，有的是住处：足够使人感到意外地，居然连俗物都为他准备了一间。文学的因素是那般的复杂多端，所以没有一个作家，只因犯有错误，而可受处罚的。）

这里说的“太阳神的家里”，意为“天地间”或“世界上”。

My desk was of the first magnitude. It had an inconceivable wealth of drawers and pigeon-holes.It was a desk of many mansions. And I labelled them all, and gave them all separate jobs to perform.

——A.G.Gardiner

（我的书桌是最为宏大的。它具有想象不到的丰富的抽屉和格架。这真是一张有广大容量的桌子。我把它们全贴上标签，使之各有所司。）

关于上举 E.M. Forster 的文章，译出如下：

言辞都是一样的。由其作用不同而发生区别。它们有两种作用，把这两种混合起来就无限量了。如果在世界上有一幢包含许多住处的屋子，那就是言辞的屋子。

（4）分辨英美的作者

爱尔兰剧作家 St.John Greer Ervine，在第一次世界大战后渡美，成为百老汇的批评家。当他初到新大陆时，还没有注意到美国话和英国话的不同，所以有一次他到一个美国家庭做客，看到那位主妇非常朴实，一点也不矫揉造作，使客人不受拘束，大有宾至如归之感，所以他就赞美她说：You are very homely.不料这句话使他大为失言，弄得局面尴尬不堪；他原是想要恭维那女主人的，结果变成侮辱了。怎么会这样的呢？原来英国话的 homely，意为“家常的”“朴素的”；而美国话的 homely，则有“不漂亮的”，“丑陋的”的意思。试想一个客人当面对女主人说，“你长得很不漂亮”，将使她怎样受得了？若不是有神经病，谁个男性客人会对女主人说出这样的话来呢？

英国的贵族 Foster 在美国旅行时，正当美国的社交季节。他有一次被招待出席晚会，会上遇见了一位活泼可爱的小姐，他忍不住要献点殷勤，说点称赞的话。于是他用英国很漂亮的话对她说：You are looking very fresh!意为“你看起来真是朝气蓬勃！”可是马屁拍在马腿上，那位小姐一听之下，大为生气，竟至拂袖而去，不再理会这位贵族了。原来 fresh 一字，到了美国之后，受到德国移民所说的德国话 frech（厚颜的，鲁莽的，无理的）的影响（因二字形似）而产生出英文原来所没有的新义。据 Dictionary of Contemporary American Usage 上说，fresh 具有鲁莽无理的意思，完全是美国的俚语，一时用得极为普遍，但现已略为过时，不大有人说了。查其原因不外是此字用得最盛的时候，竟趋于下流而具有狎昵的味道，例如女的说 Don’t get fresh with me or I’ll slap your face.（不要对我这样毛手毛脚，再来我就要打你的耳光）。所以对一个少女用了这样下流的字，而又含有厚颜的意思，她怎样能不生气呢？

法国的名优和美国的女优合演的《煤气灯》（Gaslight）一部片子，是很多中年的人都看过的。其中说到他们两人在巴黎时，约定翌日某个时候在某条街上的 picture show 相会，不料双方准时而去，却没有见到，因为男的去到画展（picture show）相待，女的则往电影院（picture show），所以碰不到头。这也是英国话和美国话在作怪呢。

现在来看下面这一则新闻记事：

Breaking in the door of a room on the second floor of a tenement house at 301 East Twenty Sixth Street last night, police found the bodies of a man and a woman, partly robed, both having died from inhaling gas generated by a gas heater in the room.

The man was identified as K.Markarian, a rug dealer about 28 years old. The woman was unidentified, but a card in her pocketbook carried the inscription Miss Smith, Welfare Island.

这是美国 New York Times 的新闻报道，纯粹美国人写的美国英文，所以 second floor 一语，便可大胆地译为“二楼”，如果是英国报上登的，就应该译作“三楼”才对，因为英国人把楼下叫做 ground floor，而美国人就叫 first floor，由此类推，美国人说的二楼，就是英国人的三楼了。tenement house 意为租金低廉供贫民居住的下级组屋，apartment house 为高级的组屋，英国说 block of flats.第二段中说的 pocketbook 在英国为“小笔记本”，而在美国就是指的“女用钱袋”，“女用手提包”。全文应译为：

在东区二十六街三百零一号组屋二楼，昨夜警察破门而入，发现一男一女的两具尸首，一部分穿有衣服，两人都是吸入了房中暖气炉漏出来的煤气窒息而死。那男人的身份己查明是马卡良，一个二十八岁的地毯商人。女的则身世不明，但在她的手提包里，找出一张卡片，上面印有福利岛史密斯女士的字样。

如果译者没有注意，当作普通英文来翻译，至少 pocket-book 就会误译为“笔记簿”的。

再看下面这段艰深的文字：

The spirit of fair play, which in the public schools, at any rate, is absorbed as the most inviolable of traditions, has stood our race in good stead in the professions, and especially in the administration of dependencies, where the obvious desire of the officials to deal justly and see fair play in disputes between natives and Europeans has partly compensated for a want of sympathetic understanding, which has kept the English strangers in lands of alien culture.

（这种公正的精神，至少在私立公校中是当作最为神圣不可侵犯的传统而加以全神贯注的。这种精神在人们的供职上，尤其是在属地统治上，对于英国民族是很有用的。当统治属地时，英国的官员抱着一种显然的愿望想要公正地处理土人与欧人间的争执，而冀得到公平的解决，使英国人处在海外的异族文化中，因缺乏同情的谅解而格格不入的情形，多少获得了一点补偿。）

现在我并不打算来讨论上文整篇的翻译问题，而只想把文中 public schools 一个名称提出来，以研究英美含义的不同。这是英国人写的文章，我们如果照美国话的意思，译为“公立学校”，就大错特错了。根据 Webster’s New World Dictionary of the American Language 的解释，在美国是指由公家的税收而兴办的中、小学校，通常是不收费的。在英国则指几所私立的中学程度的贵族学校，靠捐献与学费维持，由校董会管理，学生的年龄通常在十三岁至十八岁之间，如 Eton, Rugby, Harrow, Winchester 等皆是。

英国作家 Collin Howard 作的 Post Haste 一个短篇小说中，有这样的一节：

Experiment revealed that the stock of ha’penny stamps was also exhausted. Simpson, in his agitation at this discovery, dropped his letter face downwards on the pavement, when he retrieved it with the addition of a large blot of mud.

（实验的结果显示出半便士邮票的存货也没有了。辛朴生因发现这个而感情激动之余，把他手上的那封信封面朝下地掉到人行道的地上去了，等他拾起来一看，在信封上平添了一大块烂泥。）

这是英国人写的，所以我们把 pavement 译做“人行道”，如果是美国人写的，就得译为“马路”，因为 pavement 在美国是指“车行道”呢。

同一字而英美意义不同的，现选出五十字，注明两国的含义，以供初学者的参考。

| 英 | 美
apartment | 房间 | 公寓
avenue | 林荫道 | 大道
bakery | 面包制造所 | 面包贩卖店
barn | 谷仓，干草房 | 牛棚，马廐
bath | 浴缸 | 浴室
billion | 万亿 | 十亿
biscuit | 饼干 | 馒头形面包
block | 一座大厦 | 一排房屋
bug | 臭虫 | 昆虫
boot | 长靴 | 皮鞋
calico | 白洋布 | 印花布
cane | 手杖 | 藤的总称
casket | 棺材 | 首饰箱
chicken | 鸡雏 | 鸡
conservatory | 私人温室 | 公立音乐学校
Continent | 欧洲大陆 | 美洲大陆
corn | 小麦 | 玉米
couple | 一对 | 两三个
creek | 内江 | 小支流
dresser | 食器柜 | 梳妆台
dry goods | 食粮杂货 | 布料纺织品
faculty | 大学的学院 | 全体教授
fence | 木栅 | 铁栏杆，石垣
fire company | 火灾保险公司 | 消防队
folks | 朋友 | 家族
fresh | 清新的，精神爽快 | 鲁莽无理的
locust | 蝗虫 | 蝉
lumber | 破旧家具 | 木材
lunch | 午餐 | 便餐
merchant | 批发商 | 商人
overall | 女用罩衣 | 男用罩衣
pants | 内裤 | 西装裤
pocketbook | 记事本 | 钱包
pub | 酒店报 | 纸经营者
quiz | 嘲弄 | 测验
rabbit | 家兔 | 野兔
recitation | 背诵 | 课业的复习
redcap | 宪兵 | 搬运夫
shop | 商店 | 工厂
show | 上演的戏 | 展览会
sick | 呕吐 | 生病
sleeper | 枕木 | 卧车
subway | 地道 | 地下铁路
suspenders | 吊袜带 | 吊裤带
the Street | 舰队街（报馆） | 华尔街（银行）
thread | 麻线 | 棉线
through | 接通了电话 | 打完了电话
trillion | 一百万的三乘 | 一百万的二乘
tutor | 导师 | 助教
vest | 内衣 | 背心

十　中英文中的虚字

在上面的文章中我曾提到欧阳修在“仕宦而至将相，富贵而归故乡”句中，增添“而”字的故事。这个“而”字，就是一个虚字，因为有无并不影响文句的意义，当然，中文的虚字，最普通的是“之”“乎”“也”“者”“已”“焉”“哉”。善用虚字，不但可以助长神韵，增加声调之美，而且可以表达感情，使文章生动出色，如果用得不当，小则成为多余的累赘，大则使文句拖泥带水，似通非通。《湘山野录》上载有下列故事：

太祖幸朱雀门，指门额“朱雀之门”问赵韩王普曰：“何以不只书朱雀门，须著之字安用？”普对曰：“语助。”太祖大笑曰：“之乎也者，助得甚事？”

上述的这个“之”字，确是多余的，如果你说“天国之门是窄的”，你就非得用一个“之”字不可。所谓语助，就是虚字的别称。前人有诗云：“之乎也者已焉哉，况且然而以又来，慎矣学生宜领悟，安排妥当真秀才。”清人张文炳把虚字分为六类，有起语虚字，按语虚字，转语虚字，衬语虚字，束语虚字，歇语虚字（见他著的《虚字注释备考》）。可见中国虚字的复杂和难用，否则他也就不会著成专书来说明用法了。

上述“朱雀之门”中的“之”字是多余的，欧阳修的名句“仕宦而至将相，富贵而归故乡，此人情之所荣，而今昔之所同也”中的两个“之”字，又何尝不是多余的呢？去掉句中的“而”字和“之”字，甚至“也”字，说成：“仕宦至将相，富贵归故乡，人情所荣，今昔所同（也）”，还是完全一样地可以把原意表现出来，并没有失掉一点什么，只是在声调上有所不同罢了。最后的“也”字，作语尾助词，略同白话文的“啊”，“呀”，带有暂时收束一句话的作用，又含有作者对读者的轻微的挑战，仿佛说：你想想看吧，你觉得我说的对吗？如果你要继续读下去，你只好承认我说的对了。像这样含义微妙的虚字，谁也很难译成外国文的。欧阳修在他另一篇名文《醉翁亭记》中，一连用了二十一个“也”字，Giles 就一个也没有能够翻译得出来。这实在不能怪他译得不完善，对于虚字最聪明的办法就是放下不译，与其翻译错误，不如不译的好。《醉翁亭记》开头的一句：“环滁皆山也”，译文作 The district of Chu is entirely surrounded by hills，意即滁州被小山环绕着，没有“也”字的踪影。文章的最后说：“醉能同其乐，醒能述以文者，太守也；太守谓谁？庐陵欧阳修也！”这两个“也”字，译文中也不见，如 Drunk, he can rejoice with them; sober, he can discourse with them—such is the Governor. And should you ask who is the Governor, I reply, “Ou-yang Hsiu of Lu-ling.”原文的“太守也”译成“那就是太守”；“庐陵欧阳修也”译成“庐陵欧阳修”，把“也”字直截了当地删去了。

中国的虚字大都没有特殊意义，只当作装饰，或说得更适切一点，用作语助而已，再举一例：

《论语·卫灵公》上有：子曰，“辞达而已矣”。这句话的意思是“辞足以达意便罢了”，辞包括言辞与文辞，言辞是指口头上的言语，文辞是指笔端的文字，二者都是要以能表达意思，使听者或读者，听得懂或看得懂就行。再进一步解释，就是辞用到能达意就行了，不要多加修饰，太富丽反而不好，以辞害意，更是要不得。句中最后的“矣”字，是结束词，表示由一种假定而达到了结论，不问那种假定，上面提到与否，都是一样。

孔子认为做一个君子人，应该实事求是，无论说话作文，只宜做到达意为止，过于浮华的词藻，是虚饰的，俗丽的。所以在《雍也》篇中说：“文胜质则史”，意即文采多于朴实，未免虚浮。又说“文质彬彬，然后君子”，要文采和朴实，即内容与外表，配合适宜，才算是一个君子。

文言的“而已”，等于口语说的“罢了”，也是一种复合虚字。这与“也”“焉”“哉”等字略有不同，因为“而已”是可以翻译的，不过不一定要翻译罢了。要照字面来译，是可以译为 and that’s all 的，不过在孔子这句话中，当然不必要这样译，Legge 的译文是“In language it is simply required that it convey the meaning.”再看 Waley 的译文：“In official speeches all that matters is to get one’s meaning through, ”而新出的 Ware 译文为“It is enough that one’s words express fully one’s thought.”还有人甚至译为“Get your meaning across and then stop.”总之大家都能把“而已”一词，设法表出，但最后的“矣”字，就无法翻译了。

陆机在他作的《文赋》中说，“要辞达而理举，故无取乎冗长”，在美国的方志彤曾经译为“Essentially, words must communicate, and reason must dominate; prolixity and longwindedness are not commendable.”陆机没有用“而已”和“矣”等虚字，也同样地可充分表出辞达的意思，可见虚字除对声调有帮助以外，是没有必要的。有人主张把“辞达而已矣”译为“There is nothing more for me to say in answer than that you should be able to get your meaning across.”即是把“而已矣”三字全都不译的。

中文的虚字可以不译，而中文没有虚字的地方，又非加译英文虚字进去不可。例如汉高祖的《大风歌》第一句“大风起兮云飞扬”，译成英文时，则为 When a strong wind rises, the clouds float in the sky.英文非加上 when 一类的虚字上去，就不能构成这样一个复句出来。中文简练，不必要的字尽量略去，英文则非交代清楚不可，否则，就要发生文法上的错误。

英文的介词，连词，关系词之类，都算是虚字，高克毅在《广播与翻译》一文中说，“使译文听起来太西化，最忌的两种虚字是 when 和 if”。前者译为“当……时候”，后者译为“如果……的话”，都太公式化，应当避免。高先生还举有实例：“当这位意大利共党领袖在他的演讲里开始批评苏联的时候，苏联首席代表波诺马里奧夫就离开了会场。”一句译文，他认为把“当”字去掉，就比较像中国话。如果译为“这位意大利共党代表……开始批评苏联之后……”，或是“这位意大利共党代表一开始批评苏联……”，也与原文无大出入，而意义却更明显而又易懂多了。另一句英文：When there is an agreement at the Paris talks, an Asian peacekeeping force should be formed.可以译成“等到巴黎和谈达成协议，就应当成立一支亚洲和平部队”。

其实 when 一字，决不应呆板地译成“当……时候”，它可译的方式还有很多，甚至不译也成。

不译的如 I won’t go when it rains.（下雨我就不去）。

译为“每当”的如 The stars are brightest when there is no moon.（每当无月，星光特别明亮）。

译为“虽则”的如 He walks when he might ride.（他虽则可以乘车，他却要走路）。

译为“既然”的如 How can I convince him when he will not listen.（既然他不听，要我怎样去说服他）。

译为“只要”的如 You shall have it when you say “please”.（只要你说一声“要”，那就是你的了）。

译为“想到”的如 How can I refuse when refusal means death?（想到拒绝就没有命了，我怎能拒绝呢？）

凡 when = if 时，除译为“只要”外，又可译为“如果”，不过有时候也可略去不译，如 Translations are like women——when they are faithful they are not beautiful, when they are beautiful they are not faithful.（翻译好比女人，如果是忠实的就不漂亮，如果是漂亮的就不忠实）。把句中两个“如果是”去掉，更为简明流利。

英文的 if 也有种种译法，决不可以“如果……的话”，作为翻译的定型。

不译的如 If he goes then I won’t go.（他去，我就不去）。

译为“要是”的如 If I were you, I’d go.（我要是你，我就去）。

译为“即使”的，如 I’ll do it if I die in the attempt!（即使我尝试做这件事会丧命，我还是要做）。

译为“无论何时”的如 If（ = whenever）I feel any doubt, I ask.（无论何时，我有疑必问）。

译为“是否”的如 He asked me if（ = whether）I could help him.（他问我是否能帮他一下）。

译为“……就好了”的如 If I only knew!（我只要知道就好了）。If I haven’t lost my watch!（我要没有把表丢掉就好了）。

十一　不能翻译的字句

中英两种文字，源流判然不同，在文化背景和生活环境方面，有根本的差异，因而常有一些字句，是不能翻译的。这种不能翻译的文字（the untranslatables），一般只是译出一个大意，或近似的字眼（approximations）来敷衍过去，实际是未能把原意真正传出的。

试举一个寻常的字：privacy 为例。字典上译作“隐遁”，“退隐”，“秘密”，“内幕”，“不为人目所见之事”等等，但都未能把 privacy 这个字所具有的主观的感觉表现出来。所谓 privacy 是一个以个人主义为基干的观念，表示个人具有完全自由感的空间那种状态。这即是指个人的自由自在，不受外界任何干扰的生活，所以“He must have disturbed your privacy.”是说他打扰了你，妨碍了你的私生活。与 privacy 相反的字是 public，例如说，“I feel public.”是说感觉到生活完全失去 privacy，置身于众目环视之下，而不自由。这也就是说“I feel exposed.”或“I don’t feel any privacy.”美国作家 Christopher Morley 写的 On Doors （《谈门》）中说：

Doors are the symbol of privacy, of retreat, of the mind’s escape into blissful quietude or sad secret struggle.（门户象征着秘密，隐退，以及向着幸福的安静或悲哀的苦闷之一种心灵的逃避。）

中国话说味美叫“鲜”。比方说，鸡汤是鲜的，白菜豆腐汤就不鲜，但放点味精下去，也可以增加鲜味。这个鲜字就没有办法译成英文。《汉英新辞典》上译作 fresh, pure, clean, bright.而 Mathews’ Chinese-English Dictionary 则译作 new, delicious.在“鲜味”项下则译作 a nice, fresh flavour 又《通用汉英辞典》则把“鲜味”译作 a fresh dainty flavour.其 dainty 一字据 ALD 的解释（of food）delicate and delicious.而同字典对 delicate 则解为（of food, its flavour）pleasing to the taste and not strongly flavoured.（美味的，气味不太重的）。不问形容词的 delicious, dainty，或名词的 flavour，都是“美味的”或“香味的”的意思，至多是表示可口好吃，但并不是“鲜”。因为我们可以说 a delicious cake.（好吃的蛋糕）。The coffee smells delicious.（咖啡味道很香）。dainty bits（美味，珍味）。The cake is flavoured with the taste of the apple.（蛋糕有苹果味道）。ice cream with the flavour of durian（有榴莲味道的冰淇淋）。a story that has a flavour of the sea（具有海洋风味的故事）。这些都是说好吃或有某种香味，但不是鲜。

拆字为汉文特有的玩意，绝不可能翻译，下联实其代表作：

人曾为僧，人弗可以成佛。

女卑是婢，女又何妨称奴。

如照字面译为：

The man who has been a monk cannot become a Buddha.

The girl who is a bond maid may be called a slave.

则汉文的妙处完全丧失，因人曾合为僧字，人弗合为佛字，女卑合为婢字，女又合为奴字，英文都无法译出。中国拆字的名作莫过于《世说新语》上说的“黄绢幼妇外孙齐臼”了。那不是直接的拆字，先要了解代用的名词，然后才能使拆散的字复原，照杨修的解释是：“黄绢色丝也，于字为绝。幼妇少女也，于字为妙。外孙女子也，于字为好。齐臼受辛也，于字为辞。所记‘绝妙好辞也’。”这直译出来，外国人是难于领会的。

回文英文虽有，但极少佳作。其专门名称叫做 Palindrome 意为 a word, verse, or sentence that reads the same when the letters composing it are taken in the reverse order.代表作为 1814 年各国联军攻陷巴黎后拿破仑被放逐于地中海厄尔巴荒岛（Elba）时，所写：

Able was I ere I saw Elba.（我在看到厄尔巴以前曾是强有力的。）

他如：

Was it a cat I saw?（我看到的是猫吗？）

Madam, I’m Adam.（夫人，我名叫亚当。）

英文回文译出来，便失去回文的妙味，同样中文的回文，也是不能翻译的，例如：

客上天然居，居然天上客。

译为 He who goes to Tien Jan Chu is really a heavenly guest.便完全失去回文的巧妙，而索然寡味了。

典故是不能翻译的，如出自《史记》的“项庄舞剑”（别有用意），出自《晋书》的“杯弓蛇影”（以虚幻之事当做真实），直译出来绝无人懂，要译只能意译。

俗语也不能译，如“不管三七二十一”，译成 despite three times seven being twenty one，或“有眼不识泰山”译成 You have eyes but cannot see Tai Shan，也是没有人能懂的。

由于观念的不同也无法翻译，如人家恭维苏东坡“满腹经纶”，而他自认是“一肚子不合时宜”，这两种形容句子，都无法译成英文，因为腹内有文章，或有不合时宜的思想，都是西方人所不能想象的。腹内仅有食物，文思只在脑中，所以一位加大教授译《西厢记》中的“学成满腹文章”作 I have a mind crammed with knowledge of the liberal arts.即是以 mind 代替 belly 了。

由于词藻的关系，直译出来也使读者莫名其妙。如《红楼梦》二十六回上说的“凤尾森森，龙吟细细”，有人不知前句指丛竹，后句指竹上的风声，而直译为龙凤，大闹笑语。

十二　两国语义不尽同

由某一国的语文翻译为另外一国的语文时，人们所遭遇的无法克服的困难，就是找不到一个完全同义的字。人皆有母，而母子的感情，全人类都是一样的，所以“我的母亲”一语，译成英文的 my mother，法文的 ma mere，德文的 meine Mutter，都是很正确而又完善的。但中文的“眼睛”和英文的 eye，就不完全一样，因为二者只有形式相同，而颜色不同。英文的 book 也和中文的“书”不尽相同，它不仅是要从最后一页读起，而且是要从左到右地去读，不像我们的书是由上而下，由右而左的。我们不能从英文中找出一个“兄”或“弟”，“姊”或“妹”的单字来。英文说的 uncle，到底是“伯父”，还是“叔父”，是“舅父”还是“姨父”，无法分明。英文说的 cousin 到底是男的还是女的，都不晓得。中国的“万”字，英文却只能译为 ten thousand“十千”。中国一个“礼”字，要用一大串的英文单字来译，才能表达它所包含的意思，即 ritual（礼仪），courtesy（礼貌），ceremony（礼节），custom（礼俗），morality（品行），manners（举止），style（仪态），respect（尊敬），correctness（端正），modesty（谦让），virtue（美德）等等皆是，没有一个单独的英文字是和它相当的。反过来看，英文的 square 一字，也是没有一个中国字可以完全译出它的意思来的，法文也没有相当的字可用。如说 The box is square.中文应译为“四方形的”，法文应译为 carré.如说 He is square.中文应译为“公正的”，法文应译为 juste 或 vrai.如说 The carpenter’s square.中文应译为“矩”，法文为 équerre.如说 Nelson’s pillar is at Trafalgar Square.中文应译为“方场”，法文为 place.中法文中没有一个单字可以包括这四种意义的。

同为欧洲的语文，彼此之间，也常不能找到完全相等的字来译，例如，在法文中就找不出一个完全和英文的 home 相等的字来，法文只有 house 或 residence 一类意义的字。英文说的 I shall go home，法文只能译为 J’irai chez moi.（法文的 chez 是介词，意为“在家”，也是指的 house）。英文的 This is my home.法文只能译为 Voilà ma maison.也是说的家屋。中文的“家”字，则包含“家屋”和“家庭”两个意思，是可译为 house，也可译为 home 的。

英国人对于吃下午茶特别讲究，普通吃蛋糕一类茶点的是 low tea，吃肉类盘餐的是 high tea，都是在下午五时前后举行。当英国人把这种习惯介绍到法国去时，却不能在法文中找出一个相当的字，于是只好把 five-o’clock tea 直译为 le fiveocloque，略去一个 tea 字，而作为“下午茶”的法国名字。在旅馆餐厅的通告上加有时间的，竟作 On fiveocloque à quatre heures，意为“在四时吃五时茶”，而闹出这样的笑话来。

西班牙文中没有英文的 jungle 一字，于是英国文学家 Rudyard Kipling 的 Jungle Book 一书，就被译成“处女地的书”（El Libro de las Tierras Virgines）。爱斯基摩人的语言中没有“羊”字，于是 lamb of God（上帝的羔羊）竟被译成 seal of God（上帝的海豹），张冠李戴，莫此为甚。

任何一国的语文都有它的地域性，民族性，历史性，乃至生活习惯和文化背景，这些都是很难从另外一种语文中找到同义的字句来表达的。例如，中文说的“推敲”，为仔细研究文字的意思，出典是唐诗人贾岛的诗句。他作有两句诗，第一句是“鸟宿池边树”，第二句是“僧推月下门”，他又想改为“僧敲月下门”，迟疑不决时遇上了韩愈，韩愈指点他说，“敲”字比“推”字好。英文中绝无“推敲”的说法，所以 Mathews’ Chinese-English Dictionary 上，便译为 to consider words when making poetry, from a story of 贾岛 who was puzzled whether to use the words‘push’ a door or‘knock at’ a door.我们如不照他这样解释，而意译的话，便可说 to be puristic（练语），或 to choose diction（选字）。

又如说既婚妇人不贞洁的“红杏出墙”，外国绝对没有同一类型的表现法，用解释的方法来译便是 to participate in extramarital relations，用熟语来译，便可说 married women hop in the hay.

英文有 to bell the cat 一个成语，意为“去做极危险而又困难的事”。这是从《伊索寓言》而来的，与文学遗产有关的说法，中国语文中自然无此表现法。至于那由风俗习惯而来的 to cross one’s fingers 一个成语，用一只手的中指把那手的食指钩住，以表示能消除灾难，意思是为人祝福或祈愿成功，举例说 From here on, we are crossing our fingers.（从今以后，我们只好听天由命了）。又如 He applied for a position with the Foreign Ministry and has his fingers crossed.（他申请了外交部的事，祈愿成功）。中文找不出这类意思的成语。

我现在虽是在谈翻译，但决不赞成字面上的翻译。学习外文决不可以从翻译入手，学习翻译决不可以从字典入手。两种不同的语文，不但单字的含义不尽相同，而且句子的表现方式也常有别。在中国人的头脑中，“雨”是一个实体，即所谓名词，很少把雨作动词用，只有文言中才有，如《淮南子》上说的“昔者苍颉作书，而天雨粟”，但在英文中却常拿雨作动词用。我们说的“天下雨啦”，不可译为 The sky falls rain.一定要照英文惯用句的说法，译成 It rains.或 It is raining.才对。英文在此场合，“雨”必须用作动词，“天”则要用 it 的代词。

又如有人叫你去时，你回答说“来了”，字面是用的过去时，译成英文则必须改为现在进行时的 coming.中国人对初见面的朋友说“久仰”，决不可译为 I adore you for a long time.必须用英文在那场合所用的习惯语句来译，例如 I am pleased to see you.之类。“请教大名”，也不可译为 Please teach me your great name.应译为 May I know（或 ask 或 have）your name?“贵处是哪里？”也不可译为 Where is your honorable place?而应译为 Where do you come from?“我劝你不要去”这样一句中文，最好是译成英文的 If I were you, I would not go.（如果我是你的话，我就不去）。诸如此类，两种国语中不同的表现法，才是最正确的翻译呢。

十三　在动手翻译之先

我们在动手翻译之先，必须具备一些语言文字上的知识。就中文英译来说，白话文除了一些方言俗语，乃至新字译名而外，是不大会有问题的，但文言文，尤其是唐以前的古文，就很不容易能够一目了然，文中用的字须有相当的训诂学、文字学、声韵学、校勘学、语言学及文法学的知识，才能确定其含义。语言文字是随着时代地域而变迁的，时有古今，地隔南北，语文必然地要发生差别而变异了。古今语文不同的地方，重要的有下列几点。第一是音的转变，我们知道语文以音为主，某种声音代表某种意义，音与义合而成词。陈第说：“一郡之内，声有不同，系乎地者也；百年之中，语有递转，系乎时者也。”因为时地的不同，而不免要产生转语，例如《尔雅》上说的“粤、于、爰、曰也”。可见这四字，都是一音之转的所谓声转出来的异语。

又如语义可以变迁：“诸侯之地其削颇入汉者为徙其侯国及封其子孙也所以数偿之”（《汉书·贾谊传》）。

颜师古在“也”字处断句，沈彤指正说：“也当作他。谓诸侯或以罪黜，其地被削，多入于汉者。若因其所存地为国，则国小而其子孙亦不得封，故为之徙其侯国，并封其子孙于他所，如其被削之数偿之。颜注误。”杨树达同意沈彤的说法，但说“也”，“它”二字古音同通假，不改为“他”字。如果我们不懂得“也”字和“它”字同音，就如颜师古一样发生误解，而译文非错不可。

语法也有改易，诗中用韵，倒句极多，如《小雅》所说的“瞻彼中原”，绝不是我们现在说的“中原”，而应为“原中”的倒装说法。他如“不我遐弃”即“不遐弃我”；“野于饮食”即“饮食于野”等皆是。又如：

若崩厥角稽首（《孟子·尽心下》）

也是一个倒句，等于说“厥角稽首若崩”，如果认为是“稽首至地，若角之崩”，不知道角是什么，大成笑话。应劭解释说：“厥者，顿也。角者，额角也。稽首，首至地也。”若崩二字，乃形容厥角稽首之状。焦循解释说：“厥角，是以角蹶地。若崩者，状其厥之多而迅也。”正是白话说的“叩头如捣蒜”。英国汉学家 Legge 不懂得原文的意思，所以英译为：

On this, they bowed their heads to the earth, like the horns of animals falling off.（于是他们俯首至地，像动物的角脱落一样。）

此外因时代不同，字体上也会发生差异，如我们现在通用的“于”和“於”，就有时代的不同，在《诗经》《书经》等古书上用“于”，到《论语》上便改用“於”了。如《论语·为政篇》在同一章中相连的两句内，用了“于”又用了“於”，所以宋翔凤辨证说：“上文引书作于，下文作於是夫子语，显有于於字为区别。”可是东晋古文《书经》的作伪者，没有训诂学上的知识，不明白这种分辨，因而把孔子说的话，也当作《尚书》的逸文，从这里一并采入所谓《君陈篇》中去了。我们的名汉学家当然更加不能辨别，因而有如下的翻译。

子曰书云，孝乎惟孝，友于兄弟；施於有政，是亦为政，奚其为为政。

The Master said, “What does the Shuching say of filial piety?—‘You are filial, you discharge your brotherly duties. These qualities are displayed in government.’This then also constitutes the exercise of government. Why must there be THAT—making one be in the government?”

以上是 Legge 的译文，现在我们再看 Waley 又是怎样译的：

Master said, The Book says：“Be filial, only be filial and friendly towards your brothers, and you will be contributing to government.”There are other sorts of service quite different from what you mean by “service”.

两人同是把“施於有政”，当作《尚书》中的话，而不辨“于”，“於”的古今字，自然分不清楚哪是《尚书》，哪是《论语》的话了。“施於有政”句中的“施”是推行，廷及的意思；“有”字无义，古代构词法，常用于名词前，如“有唐”等；“政”字据杨遇夫说：“政谓卿相大臣，以职言，不以事言。”所以整句话的意思，应为“把这种风气影响到卿相大夫身上去”，也就是“把这种风气带到政治上去”。

单就上面所举出的一两个例子，我们就可以明白在动手翻译之先，要懂得一些什么，而且要深入到什么程度，否则是很难得到正确而优美的译文的。

十四　选用适当的字句

我们到一个陌生的地方，问路是常有的事。例如，“你能告诉我到火车站是怎样走的吗？”这样一句问句，应当是每个小学生都英译得出来的。普通译为“Can you tell me how to get to the railway station?”似乎没有什么不对。但你向英美人这样发问时，他可能不加理睬，即是理睬，他也许只回答一个“yes”便调头而去，不会指点你的路的，因为他自审有此能力，但并无此义务。有此能力，他说”yes”；无此义务，他不必指路。为什么会这样的呢？问题就出在“can”一字上，此字译得不适当，而使问者完全未能达意。英文的“can”是表示能力的，你问他有无此种能力，是对他很失礼的。英文应该用“could”，虽只是“can”的过去形，但含义就大不相同了。美国的学者 Bergen Evans（A Dictionary of Contemporary American Usage 的著者）在 Comfortable Words 一书中说：

Considering that I have interrupted you and bothered you with a question which you are under no obligation to answer, could you find it in your generous heart, drawing the plentitude of your knowledge, to tell me?（想到我来打扰你，用一个你完全没有义务要回答我的问题来麻烦你，你是不是可以引用你丰富的知识，以宽大为怀的心情，来指点我一下呢？）

这意思简单地说时，就是“Could you……？”

朋友新婚，我们说一声“恭喜”，译成英文的“Congratulations!”总该没有错吧。然而有时也是有问题的。对新郎致祝词时固然可以说“Congratulations”，但对新娘就千万不要这样说，因为此字的含义是对努力而获得成功的人说的，如果用来对新娘祝贺，无异于在说，“你多方努力的结果，总算是被你抓住了一个男人，我祝贺你有这种成功！”岂不要使新娘听了很难受吗？所以对新娘说的“恭贺”，英文应译为“I hope you’ll be happy!”或是“I wish you every happiness!”有部名叫《红鞋子》的影片，当中正有恭喜女孩子新婚的对话，可资参考。

Irina：Listen, mes amies.I am fiancee.I get married.（嗨，各位朋友。我是订了婚的，我结婚了。）

Ratov：My dear child. All my love and best wishes for your happiness.（我亲爱的孩子。我诚心祝贺你的幸福。）

Boleslawaky：Irina, my little horror. I wish you the greatest happiness with your new partner.（我的小恐怖，伊莉纳呀。我祝贺你和你的新伴侣共享最大的幸福）。

如果吊丧的话，我们惯常是用哀悼的字样，而且是对死者说的，但西洋人则要对生者慰问，所以不可英译为“commiseration”或“lamentation”，而要译成“sympathy”一字。

同是一个意思，有好几种不同的说法，翻译时非得看说话的对象，用最适合的字句不可。比方路上有人问到某处去怎样走法为好，你回答说，“那最好是坐巴士去。”这句话最普通的翻译，当然是“You had better take a bus.”如果这样对陌生人说，是很失礼的，因为这是一句命令句，只能用于晚辈或下属的。老师可以对学生说，“You had better attend class regularly if you want a good grade.”（你要想有好的成绩，就得经常上课。）医生或护士对病人也会说，“You’d better not take a bath today.”（你今天最好不要洗澡。）为什么这样说是命令语气呢？因为 you had better 为 you have a duty to 或 you have an obligation to 的意思，既系“有义务”，即非这样不可，所以除命令口气外，有时还有胁迫的感觉，如说“You two had better get in the car.”（你们两个坐上车去。）其意实与 you must 或 you should 相近（说 should→had better→must 逐渐加强），所以换句话说，便成“You should do what you are told or else you will suffer rather serious consequences.”（你要照我吩咐的办才好，不然的话，恐将遭受严重的后果。）那么，“最好怎样”，又要如何译法，才不至冒犯别人呢？比较客气的说法有：

I suggest you take a bus.

It might（would）be better to take a bus.

Perhaps you might like to take a bus.

Why not take a bus?

有时也可以利用客观的事实表达，和我们说的“足下之文过人处不少”（苏轼与李方淑书），“故敢坐通书于下执事”（黄庭坚上苏轼书），一则说“足下”，一则说“下执事（你的佣人）”，都是不敢直接冒犯，而用客观的事实来表达，自然就显得客气多了。试比较下面的 A, B 两种译文，A 是唐突而不礼貌的说法，B 是客观而有礼貌的说法。

（1）你最好搭巴士车。

A. You had better take a bus.

B.It’s better to take a bus.或 I think the best way is by bus.

（2）你应在三点半到达。

A. You should arrive at three-thirty.

B. It would be good to arrive at three-thirty.

（3）走二号公路去西贡。

A. Take No.2 Highway to Saigon.

B. It’s best to take No.2 Highway to Saigon.

（4）当心那低梁。

A. Watch that low beam.

B. That beam is low.

（5）那店的东西比较便宜些。

A. You don’t have to pay as much at that shop.

B. It’s less expensive at that shop.

（6）你三点半能来吗？

A. Can you come at three-thirty?

B. Would three-thirty be all right?

（7）你可以接受这个待遇吗？

A. Will you accept this offer?

B. Is this offer acceptable?

（8）你要喝点咖啡或是茶吗？

A. Do you want some coffee or tea?

B. May I serve you some coffee or tea?

（9）你需要帮助吗？

A. Do you need any help?

B. May I help you?

（10）你要把门打开吗？

A. Do you want the door opened?

B. Shall I open the door?

十五　英译中五种方法

（1）省译法

中英两国的文字在语法上常有不同，如英文有 eat one’s words 一个成语，与中国《尚书·汤誓》上说的“食言”相当，但中国话却不像英文一样说“食其言”，可见中文比英文更要简洁。又如表示损人而不利己之意的，出自《伊索寓言》的典故，有 a dog in the manger 一个说法，句中不用动词，而中文则必须说“狗占马槽”，或是“占着茅坑不拉粪”，非有一个动词的“占”字不可，这是英文比中文简洁的地方。

不问原文或是翻译，文字总以简洁为上。文法家 Nesfield 说：“概言之，一句之中简洁所生之力，与繁芜所耗之力，正复相若。无益之字，必然有害。”文学家 A. Bain 说：“用五个字可表达的思想，用十个字来表达，即是浪费。”我们在翻译时，运用语文的习惯，可略则略，否则不但是浪费，而且有害。下列各句中有黑体的字，译成中文时都应略去不译。

A book is useful.（书是有用的。）

The earth is round.（地球是圆的。）

On Sundays we have no school.（礼拜天我们不上学。）

He is keeping his bed.（他正卧病。）

Oh no, he will not do it.（不，他不会那样做的。）

Mr. Bingley was good-looking and gentleman-like.（彬礼先生丰姿秀美，彬彬有礼。）

A wise man will not marry a woman who has attainments but no virtue.（聪明人是不会娶有才无德的女子为妻的。）

If you write to him, the response would be absolute silence and void.（你写信给他，永远是石沉大海。）

Sunday is the day when I am least busy.（礼拜天我最不忙。）

Could you help me in any way?（你能够帮忙我一下吗？）

As it happens，we did not meet there.（我们在那里并没有碰头。）

代名词在英文中用得极多，译成中文时务必略去，译文才能简洁，例示如下。

In sooth, I know not why I am so sad：

It wearies me; you say it wearies you;

But how I caught it, found it, or came by it,

What stuff ’tis made of, where of it is born,

I am to learn;

And such a want-wit sadness makes of me,

That I have much ado to know myself.

—— The Merchant of Venice ，Act Ⅱ，Scene ⅰ.

上文指“忧愁”的 it，三行中凡七用，如全部照译为七个“它”字，便不像中文了，所以梁实秋多把它略去不译：“老实说，我不知道为什么我这样忧愁：使得我也很烦恼；你说使得你厌烦；不过这忧愁我是怎样染上的，怎样寻到的，怎样获得的，是什么东西做成的，从什么地方生出来的，我还得要研究；忧愁把我弄得如此的糊涂，以至于我很难有自知之明了。”

The infrequent sounds that could be heard were strangely distinct, even when they were faint and remote.（不常听到的那种声音，纵是微弱而又辽远，却出奇的清晰。）

He was naturally proud and ambitious, but he was honest and true, and always put the interest of his country men before his own.（他赋性高傲，而且野心勃勃，但却真诚正直，常把国人的利益，看得比自己的还重。）

If we succeed in giving the love to learning, the learning itself is sure to follow.（一到了爱好学问的时候，学问就一定会跟着来的。）

The money you pay to school is called school fee.（缴给学校的钱叫做学费。）

Be a place what it may, one gets to like it, if one lives long in it.（无论是怎样的地方，要是住得长久了，总会渐渐对那地方喜欢起来的。）

The following letter will explain itself and needs no apology.（下面的信一看就明白，用不着什么声明。）

此外中文少用复数，文言虽有“吾侪”，“卿辈”，口语虽有“我们”，“你们”的说法，但对事物则绝少用复数，中国话不可以说“书们”，“笔们”，或“牛们”，“狗们”的，至多只能说“这些书”，“那些狗”，一般情形都是把复数不译，例如：

Winter is the best time to study the growth of trees. Although the leaves are gone and the branches are bare, the trees themselves are beautiful.（冬天是研究树木生长的最好的季节，虽则树叶落了，树枝光了，但树木本身却是美丽的。）

（2）增译法

有些英文字句如照字面翻译，意念是不完全的，必得加上一些字眼来补充说明，有的要补上几个字，有的要增加一整句，例如：

I am looking forward to the holidays.（我在等待假期“的到来”。）

Much of our morality is customary.（我们大部分的道德“观念”都有习惯性。）

What we as laymen and citizens ought to learn is that science and technology are handmaidens.（我们门外汉老百姓应该明白的，就是科学和工艺好像侍女一般“是不能独立的”。）

What if he should fail!（万一他失败了，“要怎么办？”）

Courage in excess becomes foolhardiness, affection weakness, thrift avarice.（勇敢过度，即成蛮勇；感情“过度，即成”溺爱：俭约“过度，即成”贪婪。）

Books are so cheap that every one of us has the best books at his command, as well as the worst.（书籍是非常便宜的，所以我们无论是谁，最好的书也好，最坏的“书”也好，都可以自由地买到手。）

When the eyes say one thing and the tongue another, a practised man relies on the language of the first.（眼睛所看见的是这样，而口里“所说的”又是那样，老于世故的人一定相信前者。）

培根在《谈学问》一文中说：

Histories make men wise; poets witty; mathematics subtle; natural philosophy deep; morality grave; logic and rhetoric able to contend.（历史使人聪明；诗人“使人”遐想；数学“使人”精细；格致“使人”深沉；伦理“使人”庄严；理则和修辞“使人”能够争论。）

（3）倒译法

中国话的副词等常置于句首，而英文则多置于句尾，例如：

He came yesterday.（昨天他来过了。）

He drinks half a bottle of wine with each of his meals.（每餐他都要喝半瓶酒。）

He is not happy, though he is rich.（他虽有钱，但不快乐。）

No doubt，much as worthy friends add to the happiness and value of life, we must in the main depend on ourselves.（益友无疑很可以增进人生的幸福与价值，但大体上我们还是要靠自己。）

Helen Keller 在 Three Days to See 中说：

①How much easier, how much more satisfying it is ②for you who can see to grasp quickly the essential qualities of another person ③by watching the subtleties of expression, the quiver of a muscle, the flutter of a hand!（③借着观察表情的微妙变化，肌肉的颤动，手的挥摆，②你们有眼能看的人要了解别人的特性，①该是多么容易，多么满意呀！）

国父孙中山先生伦敦蒙难获救后，致函报界申谢他们的援助，其中有句云：

Will you kindly express through your column my keen appreciation of the action of the British Government in effecting my release from the Chinese Legation?（本人承蒙贵国政府之援助，得自中国公使馆获释，拟借贵报一角，敬伸感激之情，不知可邀俞允否？）

再看 Jane Austen 的 Pride and Prejudice 中的两句：

“What does Mr. Darcy mean，” said she to Charlotte, “by listening to my conversation with Colonel Forster?”（“戴锡先生听我跟福斯塔上校谈话，”她对查乐蒂说，“这究竟是什么意思？”）

Sir Walter Scott 的 Ivanhoe 中描写比武的场面有句云：

The ladies encouraged the combatants not only by clapping their hands and waving their veils and kerchiefs, but even by exclaiming, “Brave lance! Good sword!”when any successful thrust or blow took place under their observation.（贵妇们看见刺中或打中时，不只是鼓掌，挥动头纱和手巾，甚至高声喊叫：“好枪法！好刀法！”这样地来鼓舞比武的英雄。）

莎剧 Romeo and Juliet ，Act Ⅰ上说：

Draw, if you be man. Gregory, remember thy smashing blow.（是汉子就拔出剑来，葛雷古利，别忘了你的杀手锏。）

Dickens 的 David Copperfield 中云：

The day was just breaking when we were about to start; as I sat thinking of her, came struggling up the coach side, through the mingled day and night Uriah’s head.（天将破晓，我们就要动身了，我坐在车上正想着她，忽然当昼夜混沌未分之际，从马车的旁边钻进尤莉亚的头来。）

（4）改译法

英文喜用 Passive Voice，而中文宜改成 Active Voice 来译：

It is time your boy was sent to school.（现在你该送儿子上学了。）

把 Impersonal 的主语改译为 Personal 的主语，例如：

It is requested that every guest should bring a gift with him.（请每位客人各带一份礼物来参加。）

It is unbearable for me to work in this dreadful heat.（在这种盛暑中工作我受不了。）

否定与 till 连用时，中文应将否定去掉来译，或将 till 句也译成否定，例如：

He will not be here till eight o’clock.（他要八点钟才来。）

People do not know the value of health till they lose it.（人不到失去健康，不知健康的可贵。）

英文句中的主语如系表动作的原因，则有时可以将后面的宾格名词或代名词移调作主语，而将原有的主语改译为“因为……”的语句，例如：

Unfortunately, the want of his family had kept him from school, and he seemed to feel the loss.（不幸得很，他因家庭贫困，不能上学，他似乎痛切地感到这种损失。）

He had given all up for lost, when the appearance of a distant sail raised his hope of rescue.（他全然断了念，以为是没命了；但是因为见到了远方的帆影，他又生出了一种得救的希望。）

The seclusion in which they had kept themselves so long, had cut them off form a knowledge of the relation between the nations.（他们因与世事隔绝日久，以致不能知道国际间的关系。）

Machinery has made the products of manufactories very much cheaper than formerly.（因为机械的缘故，工厂里的产品，比起以前来，价钱便宜多了。）

The little time one can afford for reading ought to settle the question once for all as to what shall be read.（人们因为能够拿来读书的时间太少，所以对于应该读些什么书的问题，不能不有所取决。）

如果英文句中各项内容的排列顺序大异于中文时，便须大事调动，重新加以组织，译成中文后方可通顺明白，例如 Emily Bronte 的 Wuthering Heights 一书中有这样的一句：

One end, indeed, reflected splendidly both light and heat from ranks of immense pewter dishes, interspersed, with silver jugs and tankards, towering row after row, on a vast oak dresser, to the very roof.（在一个尽头处，有一个大橡木柜台，上面放着很大的一排排的盘子，中间羼放着银制的杯罐，一排比一排高，高到屋顶，诚然是把光线和热气都反映得很灿烂。）

（5）简译法

语言之趋于简洁，原为自然的演变。英文较法、德、俄文为简洁，而中文的简洁，又远胜英文。中国文字无字形变化之累，无定形文法之弊，其简洁自不待言。

Thomas Hardy 的 Jude the Obscure 上有句云：It isn’t rum for a woman to want her old husband back, for respectability, though for a man to want his old wife back—well, perhaps it is funny, rather!（“一个”女人为了体面[的关系]，而要[她的从]前[的那个丈]夫回来，这并不“是”奇怪“的事”，虽然“一个”男人要“他从”前“的那个”妻“子”回来，也许是很有趣的事。）

Scientific exploration, the search for knowledge, has given man the practical results of being able to shield himself from the calamities of nature and the calamities imposed by other men.（科学的探测，知识的追求，使人获得了避免天灾人祸的实力。）

To use the knowledge which science is supposed to discover and apply it to things which are useful is technology.（利用科学知识制造有用之物，即所谓工艺学。）

La Rochefoucauld said：“In the misfortunes of our best friends, we find something that is not unpleasing.”（幸灾乐祸。）

简译法是一种意译，取其精华，去其渣滓，无须保留字面的意思。又如 Hilaire Belloc 讲贫穷时的标题：

Poverty：The Attainment of It：the Retention of It when Attained ，可简译为《贫穷：致贫与安贫》。

十六　英文长句的译法

我们从 Everyman Library 或 The World’s Classics 中取出以年代为顺序的英国代表散文选来读的时候，便可发觉英文造句的变迁，以前流行写很长的句子，现在却倾向于简化了。我们的生活，一天天的繁忙起来，没有前人那样悠闲自在；从前从欧洲到亚洲，要走上十几年才走得到，现在只消一两天工夫就行了。一切都缩短了，英文的造句也不在例外，以前一个句子长达三百字以上，常常一页书只有一句，并不算什么稀奇。至于一百多字长的句子，更是俯拾皆是。例如约摸在二百年前出版的 Lawrence Sterne 著 The Life and Opinions of Tristram Shandy 一书，我们就可以在其中读到一百四十五字长的如下的文句：

I wish either my father or my mother, or indeed both of them, as they were in duty both equally bound to it, had minded what they were about when they begot me; had they duly considered how much depended upon what they were then doing;—that not only the production of a rational being was concerned in it, but that possibly the happy formation and temperature of his body, perhaps his genius and the very cast of his mind;—and, for aught they knew to the contrary, even the fortunes of his whole house might take their turn from the humours and dispositions which were then uppermost;—had they duly weighed and considered all this, and proceeded accordingly, I am verily persuaded I should have made a quite different figure in the world, from that in which the reader is likely to see me.

（我希望我的父亲或是我的母亲，不，我的双亲，因为他们两人同样地对此都有义务，当他们生我的时候，会注意到他们所做的事；如果他们适当地想过，他们当时所做的事，是有何等大的影响；那不单是产生一个有理性的人，而且身体适合的形成和要素的配合，也许他的天赋及其心灵的典型都产生出来；而由于那时他们最强烈的性情和意向，恐怕要甚至改变他们全家的命运；如果他们适当地仔细考虑过这一切，因而照着进行的话，我确信我早成为与读者诸君此后可能见到的我，完全两样的一个人物了吧。）

以上是依照原文也译成一个长长的中文句子，如能表出原意已属万幸，决谈不上通顺流利。

据 R. Flesch 的研究，伊丽莎白时代的文句，长度平均是四十五字，维多利亚时代平均是二十九字，到现代便只有十几二十字了。文章要使人容易了解，最要紧的条件，就是句子要短，每句不到十九个字的句子，是最容易了解的，二十八字以上的句子就相当费解了。

现代的文人不愿咬文嚼字，故意矫揉造作，只求平易通达，所以都是用的短句，例如美国的大作家海明威（Ernest Hemingway）所写的短篇 Cat in the Rain 起头的一节：

There were only two Americans stopping at the hotel. They did not know any of the people they passed on the stairs on their way to and from their room. Their room was on the second floor facing the sea. It also faced the public garden and the war monument. There were big palms and green benches in the public garden. In the good weather there was always an artist with his easel. Artists liked the way the palms grew and the bright colours of the hotels facing the gardens and the sea. Italians came from a long way off to look up at the war monument. It was made of bronze and glistened in the rain. It was raining. The rain dripped from the palm trees. Water stood in pools on the gravel paths.

（那旅馆里只住着两个美国人。他们从房间里出来，或是从外面回到房间里去的途中，在楼梯上所碰到的人，一个也不认识。他们的房间，是在面对着海的二楼。那又朝向公园和战争纪念碑。在公园中有大的棕榈树和绿色的凳子。当天气晴和的时候，总是有一个画家带着画架到公园里去。画家们喜欢棕榈树生长的样子，喜欢那些面向公园和海的旅馆的鲜明的色彩。意大利人从远处来此看那战争纪念碑。那是铜制的，在雨中闪耀发光。那时正下着雨。雨从棕榈树上落下来。在那石子铺的小路上，有着一滩滩的水。）

海明威的文章平均每句只有十一个字，正是所谓 tough style（吃力的文体）。除了必要的以外，决不加修饰语句，俾可给读者一个正确而简明的印象。在上面这十二个句子当中，有九句是单句，只有两句是复句，一句是合句。就是那复句也都把其中的关系代名词省略掉了（即 any of the people [that] they passed 及 liked the way [in which] the palms grew）。

反之，我们看 Sterne 的那个长句中，竟用了九个之多的连词，都是把从属子句连在主句上的，这样的主从关系，便叫作 hypotaxis（从属）；与此相反的便叫作 parataxis（并列），如罗马皇帝的名句 I came, I saw, I conquered.（我来了，我看见了，我征服了。）

文章之难于了解，不仅是在其太长，而且是在从属与并列的关系太复杂。原来古代的英语只有并列，后来因人的思想愈趋复杂，便发展到微妙的从属关系了。例如古人说 I know that：he is honest.（句中 that 为指示代名词）。今人说 I know that he is honest.（句中的 that 便成为连词了）。古人说 Had I the time? I would go.（前句原是问句）。今人说 Had I the time（ = If I had the time），I would go（前句成为假定句了）。由此可见从并列进展到从属的过程和迹象了。

中英文法不同，表现方法亦异。一般而论，中文简洁而英文繁复。中文一字一义，至多一辞一义，而英文则常用冗长的修饰句来表达一个意思，所以英文每多长句。严几道在《天演论》例言中说：“西文句中名物字多随举随释……少者二三字，多者数十百言。”他所指的就是说英文中的形容词子句或分词片语等，那些修饰语每置于其所形容的名词之后，用 which, who, that 等关系代名词引导，少则二三字，多则几十字或上百字，使得英文句子愈拉愈长。严氏又下断语说：“假今仿此为译，则恐必不可通。”所以我们翻译这些像一列火车似的英文长句，必须把它切断来译，才可使之成为通顺的中文。切断的方法很多，现就其重要者，例解如下：

（1）在关系代名词处切断

Time is of no account with great thoughts, which are as fresh today as when they first passed through their authors’ minds ages ago.（时间和伟大的思想是没有什么重大关系的。那些思想直到今日，仍然和往昔在其创始者的头脑中最初出现时一样，是依旧很新鲜的。）

（2）在关系副词处切断

The pale old man was calmly sitting in the inconvenient little back room which the household was taught to call his study, when the smiling face of the housemaid appeared at the door, holding a slip of paper in her hand.（那位面容苍白的老人正平静地坐在那间不方便的内室中，而那间内室是他要家人称为他的书斋的。这时候，手中拿着一张纸条的女仆的笑脸，便在门前出现了。）

（3）在副词处切断

In the life of a healthy youth there must be opportunities for physical daring and endurance, especially in such an age as ours when there is nothing compulsory to call out the reserves of physical power in the lives of young men.（在一个健康青年的生命里，必须有机会来让他养成身体上的勇气与耐力。在我们所处的这个时代中，没有任何强制的事物，可以在年轻人的生命中唤起内蕴的精力的，所以这种机会尤属必要。）

（4）在动词处切断

The president, in giving to his most powerful and most distinguished rival the greatest place which a president ever has it in his power to bestow, gave an excellent proof of the nobleness of his own spirit.（那位总统把自己权力所能给予的最大职位，给予了他的最有势力，而又最为卓越的敌手。这便是他的高尚精神的最好的证据。）

（5）在名词处切断

It was pleasant to review the past without anger or bitterness, although God knows he had cause enough for bitterness; the Theatre going to the dogs as it was and all these inexperienced muttering young actors playing leading parts in the West End.（在既不生气，也不难受的情况下，来回顾过去是愉快的，虽则他心中自有足够使他感到难受的地方，不过不为他人所知罢了。例如看到戏剧界堕落到现在这个样子，而一些毫无经验的，连台词都念不清楚的年轻小伙子；却在伦敦西区的大舞台上当起主角来。）

翻译并无一定的方法，同样一句话，十个人也许可以翻译十种不同的译文来，正所谓把戏人人会变，各有巧妙不同。以上所举五种不同的译法，想来绝不止此，我只不过是窥豹一斑而已。还有这五种方法，也并不限于在一句中只能用一种，译者是可以同时并用的。一句英文的长句是应该尽量把它译成许多短句的，绝不限于只能切断为两句。

当然，现在某些有名气的翻译者，也并不一定要将英文的长句切断来译，只要译出来的中文念得顺口，意思明白，也就行了。

十七　容易译错的文句

（1）英译中

英国诗人 Pope 说：To err is human.（人总是要犯错的）。孔子称赞他最得意的门生颜回“不贰过”，可见犯错是圣贤也不能免的。翻译要保险不错，是谁也办不到的事。法国诗人 Baudelaire 翻译的美国诗人 Poe 的短篇小说，世评认为比原作更好，至少也是文学界一部模范的名译本，但我们仍然在译文中发现错误，例如在 The Gold-Bug （《金甲虫》）中 Negro Jupiter 的主人变得“as white as a goose”（ = ghost）一句上，Baudedaire 译成“pâle comme une oie”（ = as pale as a goose）了。不过话说回来，译者能够那样深入地理解原文的，实不多见，我以前翻译 Poe 的时候，许多地方就是参考了 Baudelaire 的法译，才决定如何下笔的。再说另一部更伟大的《钦定本英译圣经》（The Authorized Version of the Bible），早成为英国国民生活的中心，精神的粮食，不但这样，而且在英文方面是一个永不枯竭的源泉，在英美文学上也是灵感的来源，它本身就是一部文学名著。这样神圣的译品，也不免有一些译错的地方，如 to strain at a gnat（Matt . 23：24）①，即是一例，好在将错就错，早已成为英文的经典了。错误虽为名译者所不免，但那应属于艰深奥妙的字句，而一般人的误译，则常由于语文知识的浅薄而来，如非对字义认识不足，便是对文法没有搞通。我现且就错误的种类，分别将容易译错的英文字句，举例说明如下：

1. 由误解字义而生的错误

这是在各种误译中最单纯的一种，一个字常有好几种意义，甚至还有隐藏的意义非字典所载有的，译者如对原文了解不够，总不免译错，而未能传出原意的。

（1）This picture somehow looks crude.

（误译）此画无论如何看来粗俗。

（应译）此画终嫌粗俗。

（2）I made up my mind to write a life of my poor father.

（误译）我决心要替我可怜的父亲作传。

（应译）我决心要替我死去的父亲作传。

（3）I am no wiser than before.

（误译）我不比以前更聪明。

（应译）我仍旧一无所知。

（4）Fancy all these inexperienced muttering young actors play leading parts in the West End.

（误译）试想那些毫无经验的，喃喃自语的年轻的演员们，居然在伦敦西区大舞台上当起主角来。

（应译）试想那些毫无经验的，连台词都念不清楚的，年轻的演员们，居然在伦敦西区大舞台上当起主角来。

（5）We are here today and gone tomorrow.

（误译）我们今天在这里，明天就到别处去了。

（应译）人生朝露（今日生存，明日死去）。

（6）My uncle remembered me on my birthday.

（误译）我叔父记得我的生日。

（应译）我叔父送了我一个生日礼物。

（7）We found a stone lancet and some fine bone needles in the cave.

（误译）我们在那洞穴中找到了一个刺胳针一般的石器，和一些优秀的骨制的针。

（应译）我们在那洞穴中找到了一个刺胳针一般的石器，和一些骨制的细针。

（8）She is a homely woman.

（误译）她是一个家庭妇女。

（应译）她是一个朴素的女人。

（9）He was a soldier of fortune.

（误译）他是一个幸运的军人。

（应译）他是一个冒险的军人。

（10）Never had there been such devotion to a cause.

（误译）从来没有这样热忱来追究一个原因的。

（应译）从来没有人对一个主义有这样忠实的。

（11）Our adviser is a colored man of African descent.

（误译）我们的顾问是一个从非洲下来的好色之徒。

（应译）我们的顾问是一个非洲血统的黑人。

（12）This is a mere apology for soup.

（误译）这只是为羹汤道歉而已。

（应译）这个实在不成其为羹汤。

2.由疏忽而引起的错误

这方面的错误，多由未注意英文的惯用法，以致夹缠着另外的说法，而将文义弄错。

（13）He was used to being made fun of.

（误译）他常被人愚弄。

（应译）他已惯于被人愚弄。

这是将上句误认为 He used to be made fun of.一句而翻译的结果。注意二者的分别： used to do 往常，向来； be used to doing 惯于，习于。

（14） By 1960，he was well on the way to doing these things.

（误译）到一九六零年为止，他对于这些事早已着着进行了。

（应译）在一九六零年以前，他对于这些事早已着着进行了。

“到一九六零年为止”的英文为 till 1960.应分辨 by 1960 和 till 1960 二者的含义。till 表示继续的终点，by 意为“在……以前”，表示完成的时期。比较：I shall be here by five.（我将在五点以前来此）。I shall be here till five.（我将待在此地到五点为止）。表示完成的 by，除现在时态外，还可以用过去时态或未来时态等，上例 by 1960，不像 till 1960 的停止在那年了，而是现在仍在进行的。

（15）They robbed his safe.

（误译）他们偷走了他的保险箱。

（应译）他们盗取了他保险箱内的东西。

我们说 The bandits robbed a bank.（土匪抢劫银行），是抢去银行里的钱，绝不可能把银行搬走。又如 Robin Hood and his men robbed the Norman nobles.（罗宾汉及其党徒抢劫了诺尔曼贵族），是说抢了他们的财物，绝不是绑架他们本人去做人质。

（16）Ashurst was seeing Megan.

（误译）亚雪斯那时正看着梅干的面影。

（应译）亚雪斯那时正在回忆着梅干的面影。

英文的 see 是一个“不完结动词”（non-conclusive verb），所以在“看”或“看见”的意义上，是不能有进行式的。可以用进行式来说的，只限于下面四种含义，即：（1）会面，（2）送行，（3）观光，（4）幻想。上例便是“幻想”的意思。

（17）He stopped to think over his way of life.

（误译）他对于自己的生活方式已经停止不再想了。

（应译）他停下来想到自己的生活方式。

比较：He stopped smoking. （他戒烟了）。He stopped to smoke. （他停下工作，来吸一支烟）。

（18）It（ = Holland gin）has a musty acrid flavour, and the taste for it must be acquired.

（误译）这种荷兰金酒具有陈年苦味，你非品尝一下不可。

（应译）这种荷兰金酒具有陈年苦味，没有喝惯是不会领略到它的优点的。

英文的动词 acquire，除“获得”一义外，还有“后天习得”的意思，如 an acquired taste （后天养成的趣味）。又如 to acquire a taste for brandy（慢慢领略白兰地的酒味）。还有 an acquired taste（从学习中得来的嗜好），例如 Many Chinese don’t like cheese when they first eat it; it is an acquired taste .（许多中国人初吃干酪很不喜欢；那是要吃惯了才爱吃的）。

（19）His success is out of the question.

（误译）他成功是无问题的。

（应译）他绝不可能成功。

英文的 out of question 和 out of the question ，虽相差只有一个小小的冠词 the，但意思是完全不同的。 out of question ＝beyond question 意为“无疑”或“不待言”，所以 His success is out of question .是说“他一定成功”。至于 His success is out of the question. 便是说“他一定失败”。因为 out of the question = not to be thought of; quite impossible，意为“决不可能”或“无讨论的价值”。

3.文句分析上所发生的错误

（20）We still call the copper-colored natives of the New World Indians.

（误译）我们现在仍然把这铜色的土著，叫做新大陆的印第安人。

（应译）我们现在仍然把新大陆的这铜色的土著，叫做印第安人。

（21）He knew all about geology. But for what the Germans call Erdekunde, his knowledge was not sufficient.

（误译）他对于地质学什么都懂，如果没有德国人所称的“地学”，他的知识是不够的。

（应译）他对于地质学什么都懂，但对于德国人所称的“地学”，他的知识是不够的。

普通说的 but for = if it were not for 或 if it had not been for，意为“如非”，例如 But for your help, I should have failed.（如非你的帮助，我早已失败了）。但在上文中，不应做成语看，应将 but 与 for 分为二字来讲。又德文的 Erdekunde 只能英译为 earth science，没有适当的“-ology”的字可译。

（22）They were not merely a bundle of casual letters but were biographical ones.

（误译）那些不但是一些随便写的信件，而且是一些有传记色彩的信件。

（应译）那并不是一束无所谓的信件，而是一束有传记价值的信件。

这句只是 not…but（不是…而是）的单纯构造，不应将其解释为 not merely…but = not only…but also（不但…而且）。

4.照字面解释的错误

这种错误在翻译中所占的比率相当的高，不少于由误解字义而生的错误。

（23）He lost a cool thousand dollars.

（误译）他损失了一千元，还很冷静。

（应译）他整整的损失了一千元。

这个 cool 意为“不虚报的”，“实实在在的”，“整整的”，如 We walked a cool twenty miles.（我们整整地走了二十里路）。He left a cool million to his son.（他足足留下了一百万的家财给他的儿子）。

（24）We cannot exaggerate its importance.

（误译）我们并没有夸张来说它的重要。

（应译）其重要性无论怎样夸大其词也不为过。

You cannot appraise this book too high.（此书无论给以怎样高的评价也不为过），也是同样意思的表现法。

（25）This is some war!

（误译）这是某样的一种战争。

（应译）这是一场大战！

代替 great 而用 some 的，是修辞学上所谓 meiosis（曲言法）。他例如 That was some storm!（好大的风暴）。It was some party!（盛会）。He is some scholar.（他是个大学者）。I call that some poem.（我觉得那是一首好诗）。

（26）I should know this tune.

（误译）我应当记得此曲。

（应译）此曲确曾听过。

（27）I can’t help thinking that he is still alive.

（误译）我不能帮助思想他还活着。

（应译）我不能不认为他还活着。

这个 help 不作“帮助”解，而作“避免”解，通常与 can 或 cannot 连用，他例如 I don’t do more than I can help .（我能不做的便不去做）。I can’t help it if he doesn’t come.（他若不来，我也没有法子）。

（28） When I saw it （ = the mesa） again ，I told myself, I would have done my duty by it.

（误译）当我再看到这块岩石台地时，我私自说，我就要由它来代尽我的义务。

（应译）我再度来到这块岩石台地时，我心下誓言要对它来尽我的义务。（by = to）

（29） If you failed in your experiment, why ，try for the second time。

（误译）如果你的实验失败了，为什么不再来一次呢？

（应译）实验不成功的话，何妨再来一次。

在“If…，why…,”的造句中，why 有“那么”的意思不可译成“为什么”，也根本不必译出。这个 why 是感叹词，有时还可译为“当然”，或“哼”或“啊”，如，“Who wrote Hamlet ?”“ Why ，Shakespeare.”（“《哈姆雷特》是谁作的？”“当然是莎士比亚。”）

（30）All this time I was living with a young married couple who interested me very much, for they were unlike any people I had ever known.

（误译）这个时期我一直和一对使我很感兴趣的年轻夫妇同住在一块儿，因为他们是我从来没有遇见过的有趣的人。

（应译）这个时期我一直和一对年轻夫妇同住在一块儿，这对夫妇使我很感兴趣，因为他们是我从来没有遇见过的有趣的人。

在关系代名词前即令没有逗号（comma），也不一定是限定用法，上例当作限定用法译出，所以不对，因为 who = and they.

（31）So, like a fool, I was just going to speak when he did .

（误译）于是，当他说话的时候，我傻里傻气地也打算要说点什么。

（应译）于是，不说也罢了，偏偏我傻里傻气地想说点什么的时候，他却先开口说话了。

这种 when-clause，一般都喜欢译在前面，其实，很多情形是应该译在后面的，他例如 I’d just got to work in my room when Mother came in .（我正打算在我房间里开始用功的时候，母亲走进来了）。以上二例主句中都有 just 一字，但一般多不说 just，用法也是一样的。

（32）I will tread this unbolted villain into mortar, and daub the walls of a jakes with him.

（误译）我就把这没筛过的恶奴踏成泥灰，拿他修补厕所的墙。

（应译）我要把这肮脏的恶奴踏成泥灰，拿他去涂抹厕所的墙壁。

上面这句英文出自莎士比亚著的《李尔王》第二幕第二场第七十二行（King Lear： Ⅱ，ⅱ，72），而译文是梁实秋的手笔。梁氏把原句中的 unbolted 一字照字面的意思译为“没筛过的”（not sifted），拿来形容人实在费解。凡没有筛过的谷类，一定是粗糙不洁的，引申而为污浊肮脏的。这句话朱生豪则译成“我要把这下流的东西踏成一堆替人家刷墙的泥浆”。他把 unbolted 译为“下流”，对人来说虽比较适合，但未免离原文太远了。他把“厕所”（jakes）译成“人家”，则太离谱，无疑是误译。

（33）The Doctor scattered the things to the four winds, till there wasn’t an atom of natural history left in the whole classroom.

（误译）直到教室中一点博物学的影子也没有了为止，校长把所有的生物，驱散到四方八面去了。

（应译）校长把所有的动物驱散到四方八面去了，所以教室中终于一点博物学的影子也没有了。

英文的 till 一字并不是非译成“到……为止”不可的，尤其是在否定后应特别注意来翻译，如 He will not come till eight o’clock.（他要八点钟才来），不可译成“到八点为止，他不会来”。

5.关于成语比喻等修辞上的错误

（34） Catch me doing it!

（误译）我正在做着那个的时候，你抓住我吧。

（应译）谁要做那样的事！（反语的用法）

（35）It is a long lane that has no turning.

（误译）这是一条不转弯的长长的小道。

（应译）世上没有一条不转弯的路。

这是一句谚语，不能照字面来译的。世上既然没有不转弯的道路，坏的运道也不会永远坏下去的，所以这句实有“否极泰来”的意思。同样的表现法尚有 It is an ill wind that blows nobody good.意思并不是“歪风没有一个人吹得舒服的”，而是“哪怕是歪风也有人吹得舒服”，即所谓“人疾医生喜”，任何坏的事情总有人得利的。

（36）They sent him to Coventry.

（误译）他们把他送到卡文特里去了。

（应译）他们拒绝和他来往。

这句英文成语，意为“绝交”或“驱逐出社交扬”（ostracize），他例如 His friends sent him to Coventry after he was court marshalled.（在他受了军法审判之后，他的朋友就不跟他来往了）。这句老话的来源不明，Coventry 为英格兰中部的，一个以技术和工艺著称的小城市。

（37）Half of us disagreed with him, myself among the rest.

（误译）我们一半都不同意他，我也是赞成其他的人的一个。

（应译）我们一半都不同意他，我也是不同意者当中的一个。

这句不合逻辑的话是从古以来就有名的。英文还有 among others 的说法，是从拉丁文 inter alia 来的。

（38）He may die, for all I care.

（误译）我无论怎样照顾他，他恐怕还是会死。

（应译）那家伙死了也无人关心。

（39）I could not recollect his name to save my life.

（误译）为救我的命，我也不能想起他的名字。

（应译）无论怎样我也想不出他的名字来。

此语又可译为“要我的命我也不能…”，是一种加强语气的说明。

（40） I dare say he is honest.

（误译）我敢说他是诚实可靠的。

（应译）我想他是诚实可靠的。

（41）He must needs go at once.

（误译）他必须立刻前往。

（应译）他坚持立刻要去。

英文的 must needs = insist on…－ing，意为“主张一定要怎样做”。参考：needs must = cannot help…－ing，意为“不得不”。

（42）I am quite at fault.

（误译）我完全错了。

（应译）我十分迷惑。

这个 at fault = at a loss 或 puzzled，意为“不知所措”，“困惑”。

（43）He is a man of family.

（误译）他是一个有家庭的人。

（应译）他是一个世家子弟。

英文有许多表现法是相当含蓄的。of family = nobly born.

（44） By trimming the sails, he tided over the crisis.

（误译）由于调整船帆，他渡过了危机。

（应译）临机应变，渡过危机。

（45）Living, as he does, in the country, he does not know the bustle of city life.

（误译）他因住在乡村，如他所做的一样，不知都市生活的扰攘。

（应译）无论如何他是住在乡村里的人，不会知道都市生活的忙乱扰攘。

句首的 Living = As he lives.接下来的 as he does 一个插入句是为加强语气而重复的说法（tautology）。

以上大多数的例句，是从 Galsworthy, Maugham, Cather, A.Huxley, Phillpotts, Hilton, Woolf, Commager 等人的作品中引用的。

（2）中译英

任何翻译都有原文和译文的两面，而难易有所不同，不同的关键，就在译文的文字，是外语还是母语，现在姑就华英互译来说，如果原文是英文，华人将它译成华文，就比较容易，因为华文是母语，只要把原文的英文意思看懂了，译出来的华文是鲜有不通的。反过来说，如果原文是华文，译者即令对原文的含义完全了解，执笔来把它移译为英文时，写出来的是外国语文，总多少不太流利，甚至行文不免错误。所以一般的情形是用母语译较易，用外语译较难。

翻译不比自由写作，因原文已把意思限定，不能由译者爱怎么写就怎么写，处处都得追随原文，亦步亦趋，原作者所说的一字一句，翻译者都非彻底了解不可，如有一知半解的情形，译文必将有错，至少未能达意。《世说新语》上有一则故事，说杨修跟随曹操走过曹娥碑下，看见碑背上题有八个字，杨修一见就懂，曹操却前进了三十里路才明白那是什么意思，所以他对杨修说：“我才不及卿，乃觉三十里。”有人不了解这个“觉”字，以为作“领悟”解，所以译成“As my talent is less than you, I comprehend it after we have gone thirty miles”.其实原文的意思是“我的才干不如你，相差有三十里”。这个“觉”字应作“差”字解，所以我曾把它译成“I am far behind you in talent. There is, I find, a difference of thirty li between us.”在翻译上译错一个字，就完全不是那回事了，正所谓“差之毫厘，失之千里”呢。

我们把中文译成英文的时候，必须对英文有充分的表达能力，具有正确的英文知识（knowledge of English），懂得英文的惯用法及文法。此外，还要有好的辞典，随时查阅，因为大部分翻译的错误，虽然是由英文知识不够而来的，但少数误译则发生于疏忽，临时未及查阅辞典所致。例如说 She was so angry at her husband that she took it out on her children.句中一个难字也没有，执笔翻译时决不会去查辞典的，随便就译成“她因对丈夫生气，所以拿它给孩子们去了”。如果查查辞典便马上查出 take it out on，有“詈骂或伤害泄愤”的意思，而上面这句英文就会正确地译成“她因对丈夫生气，就拿孩子来作出气筒”。

1.依照华文直译而生的错误

（1）我想要认识格林先生。

（误译）I want to recognize Mr.Green.

（应译）I should like to know Mr.Green.

中文说的“认识”在上句中只能用英文的 know 来译，如照字面直译为 recognize 就错了，因为英文的 recognize = know again，例如 He has changed so much that I can hardly recognize him.（他变得太厉害，我几乎不认识他了。）原本认识的人才可以用 recognize，第一次相识只能说 know。

（2）他父亲破产使他不能出洋去留学了。

（误译）The bankruptcy of his father has made him impossible to go abroad.

（应译）The bankruptcy of his father has made it impossible for him to go abroad.

英文的 possible 或 impossible 一类的形容词，是要用“it”来作主语，不可以用“人”作主语的。

（3）如蒙早日赐复，不胜感激。

（误译）I shall appreciate very much if you will reply at your earliest convenience.

（应译）I shall appreciate it very much if you will reply at your earliest convenience.

作“感激”解的 appreciate 是他动词，必须接有宾语，他例如，I greatly appreciate your kindness.（我非常感激你的好意。）

（4）他跟一个百万富翁的女儿结婚了。

（误译）He married with the daughter of a millionaire.

（应译）He married the daughter of a millionaire.

英文 marry 一字普通是用作他动词的，共有三个意思。

（1）结婚，包括娶和嫁，例如 He is going to marry Miss Wong.（他将娶王小姐为妻）。She married an Englishman.（她嫁给一个英国人）。May cousins marry each other?（表兄妹可以结婚吗？）（2）遣嫁，娶媳，例如 He married his daughter to a rich man.（他把女儿嫁给一个富翁）。He married his son to an architect’s daughter.（他替儿子讨了一个建筑师的女儿做老婆）。（3）主婚，例如 The priest is going to marry them.（牧师将为他们主婚）。如用 passive voice 是表示已结了婚的那种状态，如 Tom and Alice have been married four years.（托孟和阿丽斯已结婚四年了）。They got married soon after that.（那以后他们随即就结婚了）。

（5）他是一个初级中学的教员。

（误译）He is a teacher of a junior high school.

（应译）He is a teacher at （或 in）a junior high school.

（6）我将用电报把结果通知你。

（误译）I will inform you the result by telegram.

（应译）I will inform you of the result by telegram.

（7）我昨天跟你讲的那本书要我拿给你看吗？

（误译）Shall I show you the book which I told you yesterday？

（应译）Shall I show you the book I told you of yesterday?

（8）健康比财富可贵。

（误译）Health is precious than wealth.

（应译）Health is more precious than wealth.

（9）他年轻时的勤勉，使他获得今日的地位。

（误译）His diligence in his younger days made him what he is today.

（应译）His diligence in his younger days has made him what he is today.

（10）我哥哥是一个跳舞迷。

（误译）My brother is a dance mania.

（应译）My brother has a mania for dancing.

表示对某事的着迷或狂热，英文说 mania，但这个名词不能作主格补语用，只能作动词 have 的宾语用。他例如 He has a perfect mania for rare books.（他有收集珍本书的狂癖）。

（11）新加坡有好多人口？

（误译）How many population has Singapore?

（应译）What is the population of Singapore?

“人口”的英文 population 是不加“s”而造成复数的，所以不能用 many，但有时可以加不定冠词，如 Singapore has a very large population for its area.（新加坡以面积来说人口是很多的）。这个 population 当然也可作单数用，如 Population sinks.（人口降低）。普通用作集合名词，不需加“s”作成复数，除非是下列情形：the educated populations of China and Japan（中日两国的知识阶级）。

（12）那语言中心有很多优良的设备。

（误译）The language centre has many fine equipments.

（应译）The language centre has much fine equipment .

作“设备”解的 equipment，也和 information 等字一样，是不可以加“s”作成复数的。

（13）假期从明天开始。

（误译）The vacation begins from tomorrow.

（应译）The vacation begins tomorrow .

句中的 tomorrow 是一个副词，前面不可加用介词。

（14）那地方像江南三月的温暖。

（误译）The place is as warm as March of Kiangnan.

（应译）The place is as warm as Kiangnan in March.

不是同类的名词不能比较。

（15）他后悔不该那样说的。

（误译）He repents to have said so.

（应译）He repents of having said so.

（16）一到新加坡，我的朋友就在机场等着接我。

（误译）On arriving at Singapore, my friend was waiting for me at the airport.

（应译）On arriving at Singapore, I found my friend waiting for me at the airport.

（17）他是我父亲的朋友。

（误译）He is a friend of my father.

（应译）He is a friend of my father’s .

（18）他没有告诉我说他什么时候回来。

（误译）He has not told me when he will be back.

（应译）He did not tell me when he would be back.

（19）这学校有三千个学生。

（误译）The school has three thousand students.

（应译） There are three thousand students in the school.

（20）我想向你借个电话好吗？

（误译）May I borrow your telephone?

（应译）May I use your telephone?

2.缺乏英文文法知识而来的错误

（21）王先生给了我们学生很多的课外作业。

（误译）Mr.Wong gave our students many homeworks.

（应译）Mr.Wong gave us students much homework .

（22）如果你想增进你英文写作的能力，你必须尽量地多读。

（误译）If you want to improve your ability of writing English, you have to read books as many as you can.

（应译）If you want to improve your ability to write English, you have to read as many books as you can.

（23）我们在阿尔卑斯山中的一个茅舍里住了将近十天。

（误译）For about ten days we spent at a mountain hut in the Alps.

（应译）For nearly ten days we spent at a mountain hut in the Alps.

英文的 spend 是他动词，不可以说 we spent about ten days.依照文法规则，他动词要直接接宾语，只有自动词接宾语时才需要加介词。

（24）去秋我去游了在杭州的西湖。

（误译）Last autumn I visited West Lake where is in Hangchow.

（应译）Last autumn I visited West Lake in Hangchow.

说到所在地我们都喜欢用 where 一个关系副词，其实英文对表地方的名词也是用 which 来代表的，所以例句中的 where 应改为 which，当然最好是把 which is 全部略去。

（25）我们在礼拜天爱睡早觉的习惯很难改掉。

（误译）The habit that we get up late on Sunday mornings is difficult to shake off.

（应译）The habit of getting up late on Sunday mornings is difficult to shake off.

（26）看到哈姆雷特和赖尔蒂斯比剑的一幕使我非常感动。

（误译）I was very much impressed by the scene in “Hamlet” that Hamlet fights a duel with Laertes.

（应译）I was very much impressed by the scene in “Hamlet” in which Hamlet fights a duel with Laertes.

（27）他的英文知识非常丰富。

（误译）His English knowledge is very rich.

（应译）His knowledge of English is very rich.

（28）坐在花园中的篱笆上，一个黄蜂刺了我一下。

（误译）Sitting on a fence in my garden, a wasp stung me.

（应译） Sitting on a fence in my garden, I was stung by a wasp.

英文的分词片语，必须和后面的主语一致，sitting 是 I am sitting，所以主句中的主语必须是 I。

（29）他是这样说，但我想的不同。

（误译）He says so, but I think different.

（应译）He says so, but I think differently .

（30）我或许明天要出门去。

（误译）I shall likely leave home tomorrow.

（应译）I shall probably leave home tomorrow.

但可说 I shall very likely leave home tomorrow.原有误译句中的 likely 是形容词，如作副词用则常伴有 very 或 most 的字样。

3.违背惯用语法而来的错误

（31）我希望我的父母长寿。

（误译）I hope my parents to live long.

（应译）I hope my parents will live long.

英文动词有一定的惯用法（correct usage），有的后面可接不定词，如 I want you to attend the meeting.（我要你去开会），有的后面要接动名词，如 How can we avoid making mistakes?（我们要怎样才可避免犯错？）还有的后面一定要接一个子句（clause），如本例所示，但 hope 也可接不定词，如 I hope to see you soon again.（希望不久再见）。

（32）那教授毕生献身于英文学的研究。

（误译）The professor devoted his whole life to study English literature.

（应译）The professor devoted his whole life to the study of English literature.

据惯用法 devote to 后必须接名词。

（33）我们期待着明天见到你。

（误译）We are looking forward to see you tomorrow.

（应译）We are looking forward to seeing you tomorrow.

（34）我要一星期后才能够去。

（误译）I shall be able to go after a week.

（应译）I shall be able to go in a week.

在惯用法中 after 指过去，in 指未来。

（35）大家都反对那计划，连我本人也在内。

（误译）Everybody, not except myself, was against the plan.

（应译）Everybody, not excepting myself, was against the plan.

英文的 except 一字，如用于否定时，或用在 always 或 without 之后，要改为 excepting，例如 They often went to the theatre, always excepting Cinderella.（她们常去看戏，总是不带辛德雷拉去）。

（36）除了前去之外，没有别的办法。

（误译）There is no other way open but to go.

（应译）There is no other way open than to go.或 There is no way open but to go.

（37）他因盲肠炎开刀了。

（误译）He has been operated for appendicitis.

（应译）He has been operated upon for appendicitis.

（38）你的行为不容有何借口。

（误译）Your action admits no excuse.

（应译）Your action admits of no excuse.

英文的动词常是既为自动又为他动，不过意思不同罢了，如 admit 一个动词，用作自动时作“容许”解，所以接宾语时要加“of”；用作他动时作“承认”解，如 admit a mistake（承认错误）。

（39）那工作被认为满意。

（误译）The work is regarded satisfactory.

（应译）The work is regarded as satisfactory.

（40）你既不对也不错。

（误译）You are not right nor wrong.

（应译）You are not right nor are you wrong.

（41）深情厚谊，存没俱感。

（误译）Your kindness will fully be appreciated both by the quick as well as by the dead.

（应译）Your kindness will fully be appreciated both by the quick and by the dead.

（42）你和你兄弟一样强壮，可能比他更为强壮。

（误译）You are as strong, if not stronger, than your brother.

（应译）You are as strong as your brother, if not stronger than he is.

（43）我怀疑这事是否真确。

（误译）I doubt that it is true.

（应译）I doubt whether it is true.

在否定及问句后则用 that，如 I do not doubt that it is true.（我相信这是真的）。Who doubts that it is true?（此事真确无人怀疑）。

4.滥用英文成语而来的错误

（44）尽管是一个大学生，我兄弟连一封英文信都写不好。

（误译）In spite of a college student, my brother cannot write an English letter properly.

（应译） Though （he is）a college student, my brother cannot write an English letter properly.

成语 in spite of 虽则有“虽然”的意思，但在此不可以用，因为 in spite of = not to be prevented by，即不为困难或障碍等所阻，例如 They went out in spite of the rain.（不顾下雨他们还是出去了）。We succeeded in spite of all difficulties.（我们虽遭遇种种困难，仍然获得成功）。

（45）看电视，打网球，每个礼拜天就是这样度过了。

（误译）What with watching television and what with playing tennis, I spend every Sunday.

（应译）I spend every Sunday watching television or playing tennis.

据 Hornby 的解释，这个 what with……what with 的成语，是用于 between various causes 的，最后一字尤其注意，所以中文可译为“半因……半因……”，如 what with overwork and（what with）undernourishment, he fell ill.（半因工作过度，半因营养不足，他病倒了）。

①钦定《圣经·马太福音》第二十三章第二十四节说，Ye blind guides, which strain at a gnat, and swallow a camel.英国新译的 The New English Bible ，则改译为 Blind guides! You strain off a midge, yet gulp down a camel!可知希伯来原文的意思是“滤掉”（strain off）；而不是“无谓纷扰”（strain at），可是钦定《圣经》早已成为英文的经典，错也错成了典故，所以 strain at a gnat and swallow a camel，即成为 make much fuss about little peccadillos, but commit offenses of real magnitude 或 overestimate little things, while neglecting the greater（斤斤于小事而反忽视大事；拘泥细节而甘冒大不韪；见秋毫之末而不见车薪）的意思了。英文的 strain at 有二义：（1）use great effort in trying to move（an object）；push or pull hard at（用力拉；努力于），（2）have unusually great difficulty accepting; make a fuss about（无谓纷扰）。中文《圣经》倒是译对了：“你们这瞎眼领路的，蠓虫你们就滤出来，骆驼你们倒吞下去。”　

十八　二竖的故事试译

凡从事翻译的人，遇到原文艰深晦涩的时候，总不免要先花一些工夫，来细为诠释，加以钻研，然后才可以动笔翻译的。原文是英文的话，就得先看看它的文法结构，再研究它的习语成句，如系古文就得把古字的现代意义找出来。原文如果是中国的古文，最好先将它用白话译出，然后再译成英文。

现在采作材料来翻译的，是中国秦汉以前的一篇古文，所以不得不先下一番语译的工夫，以解决文字上的障碍，因此除原文外，有两篇译文。现就请看下面的原文和翻译。

原　文

晋侯梦大魔，被发及地，搏膺而踊曰：杀余孙不义，余得请于帝焉矣。坏大门及寝门而入。公惧，入于室，又坏户。公觉，召桑田巫，巫言如梦。公曰，何如？曰：不食新矣。公疾病，求医于秦。秦伯使医缓为之。未至，公梦疾为二竖子。曰：彼良医也，惧伤我，焉逃之。其一曰：居肓之上，膏之下，若我何？医至，曰：疾不可为也。在肓之上，膏之下，攻之不可，达之不及，药不至焉，不可为也。公曰：良医也，厚为之礼而归之。

（《左传》）

语　译

晋景公做了一个梦，梦见一个身躯高大，长发披地的魔鬼，一面跳跃，一面捶胸的大叫道：“你这没良心的家伙，杀了我的孙儿，我要捉你去见先王。”于是将大门和卧室的门摧毀，直走进来。景公大惊，逃到内室里去，可是那魔鬼接着又打破了内室的门。景公惊醒过来，便把桑田地方的巫师召来询问。巫师说：“我的占卜也和你的梦一模一样呢。”景公问：“那要怎么办？”巫师说：“你吃不到今秋收割的新米了。”景公一听就病倒了，便去请秦国的医生来诊病。秦伯叫缓医生去。医生还没有到，景公已病得神志不清，朦朦胧胧的看见疾病变成了两个小小的人儿，一个说：“那人是个好医生呀，我真怕他会把我杀掉，有什么办法逃跑吗？”另一个回答说：“跑到横膈膜的上面，心脏的下面去，他拿我有什么办法！”缓医生到来，看了景公的病，便说：“这个病没得治了。病已侵入到横膈膜的上面，心脏的下面去了，既不能用外敷药来疗，又不能用针灸法来治，也不能用内服药来医，没得救了呀！”景公说：“真是一个好医生！”于是给了他许多礼物，叫人护送他回去。

英　译

Duke Ching of Chin dreamed of a huge evil spirit with long hair hanging to the ground, who, jumping and beating his breast, scolded：“You are so wicked as to have killed my grandson, and I want to take you to the presence of the late king.” On saying so, he broke the front door of the building as well as the door of the bedroom and came straight in. The duke was very much frightened and fled to an inner chamber, the door of which was also destroyed by the spirit.

Startled from sleep, the duke summoned the wizard of Sang Tien to appear in court and divine. The wizard reported that the result of his divining was the same as the duke’s dream. The duke then asked him what to do, and the answer was：“I am afraid, sire, you cannot live to eat the fresh rice to be cropped this autumn.”

The duke then suddenly fell ill, and sent for a physician from the State of Ch’in to cure his illness. The Earl of Ch’in dispatched Doctor Huan to attend the duke. Before the doctor’s arrival, the duke was once in a trance, seeing dimly that his illness had turned into two tiny boys. One said, “That man is a good doctor. I’m afraid he will kill me. Is there any way for me to escape?” The other replied：“You’d better enter the vital region between the heart and the diaphragm like me. What can he do then?”

When Doctor Huan came, he said to the duke：“There is no remedy for your illness, sir, because it has entered the vital region between the heart and the diaphragm. It is impossible to cure with fomentations, nor can acupuncture reach it, and even the internal medicine is not effective. There is no remedy for it really.”

The duke said, “What a good doctor he is!” He gave orders that the doctor be sent back with a handsome present.

附录　翻译实例评述

例一

一九七一年二月十三日新加坡国立大学副校长杜进才博士，针对最近一些新大教授在报章上批评新大办理不善的事，特召开一个新闻记者招待会，用英语发表谈话，加以解释，其中有一段原文是这样的：

As early as 1968，Professor Puccetti indicated to me that he would not want to stay too long in Singapore as he was in his mid-forties and that his purpose of remaining in this university was because he could find the time to do his own research, something which he would not be able to do in a university in the U.S.，because of the rat race and the large amount of teaching one has to handle.

第二天新加坡《南洋商报》刊出杜博士谈话的全文，上面一段英文的翻译是这样的：

关于布西迪教授的事情，他在一九六八年曾告诉我，他将不会在新加坡居留太久，而他在新大逗留的目的，是因为他可有时间，以从事他本人的研究，而这些条件他在美国大学是无法得到的，因为老鼠的品种及教学上的繁重负担。

【评述】一开头的 as early as，就未译出，接着下面的 as he was in his mid-forties 一句，也完全漏译。前者说那是老早的事，后者说那教授不想久留的理由，二者似乎都不应不译。英文说的 one’s forties，是指年龄在四十一岁到五十岁的十年间。还可细分为 early forties，是四十二、三岁，mid-forties 是四十五、六岁，late forties 是四十八、九岁。

在句尾上说的 the rat race，被译成“老鼠的品种”，是非常荒谬的。这样一来，使得这个译文变成一派胡言，毫无意义。美国大学的教授并不人人都是生物学家，可说和老鼠的品种毫不相干。race 一字也只能译成“族类”，例如 the race of fishes（鱼类），the winged race（鸟类），而不可译成“品种”（kind, sort, grade）。那么，所谓 the rat race 到底是什么意思呢？ Webster’s New World Dictionary of the American Language 解释为[Slang]a frantic scurry or mad scramble.（狂乱的疾走或是疯狂的争夺），这个意思似乎和杜博士说的不大适合。我们不妨再看一九六八年新出的美国字典 Random House Dictionary of the English Language 上的说明：Any exhausting, unremitting activity or regular routine.（任何消耗精力而无间断的活动或例行公事），这意思就对了，正是指的美国那种徒劳无功的竞争。如果我们再进一步查阅一下 Harold Wentworth 和 Stuart Berg Flexner 合编的 Dictionary of American Slang ，更可查出这句俚语的来源了：

（1）Any job, occupation, office, business, or way of life in which action and activity seem more important than specific results or goals. From the traditional image of laboratory rodents being placed on a treadmill to test their energy; hence fig.，a race on a treadmill.

（任何工作，职业，任务，事情或生活方式的行为与活动，似乎比其明确的结果或目标更为重要。由于传统的概念在实验室中把老鼠放在踏车上以测验其精力，而引申为无止境的踏车竞赛。）

（2）Any occupation, place, social group, or way of life in which success is based on competition and comparison of one’s financial and material success with that of others, ignoring personal achievement and satisfaction.

（任何职业，地位，社团或生活方式的成功，是以财力上和物力上的优势，与别人竞争或比较为基础的，不顾个人的成就和满足。）

（3）Any crowded locale, scene, business, or social function of great confusion. Orig. a euphemism implying that sanity or productive work is impossible in such a locale, scene, business, or social function. 1951：“Usually they rather have become weary of frivolous dates, the rat race of ordinary social gatherings.”Edna Wilder, AP, N. Y.，Dec. 14.

（任何杂沓的场所，出事的地点，发生的事件，或混乱的社交集会。原来是一种委婉的说法，指在这种场所，地点，事件或集会中，不可能有健全而生产的工作。一九五一年十二月十四日纽约美联社王尔德报道：“他们通常对于轻浮的约会，和那些普通社交集会的消耗精力而无间断的活动，感到厌倦起来了。”）

（4）Specif.，a dance or dancing party. Student and teenage use.

（跳舞或舞会。学生和十几岁的青年用语。）

（5）A full dress review. W.W. Army use.

（盛装检阅。第二次世界大战时的军用语。）

【改译】早在一九六八年，布西迪教授就对我说过，他不想在新加坡待得太久，因为他已经是四十五六岁的人了。他又说他留下在本校的目的，是为了他可以找到时间做他自己的研究，那是他在美国大学里所不能做到的，在那儿一个人必须应付那种徒劳无功的竞争和大量的教书工作。

例二

有一次釜山大火，《台湾报》上列出火烧的情形如下：

每小时速率三十里的强度，使火头自一个房屋延烧至另一个建筑物，夹杂的雨水发出火星，大部分市区好像在放烟花。

后来看到同一消息的英文报道，原来如此：

A 30-mile an hour wind flamed the fire from one building to the other and rained sparks like a fireworks display over much of the city threatening to ignore rooftops.

【评述】失火最怕刮风，因风能使火势蔓延，译文中却把一个重要的“风”字漏掉不译，不说“强风”，而说“强度”，是令人莫名其妙的。“夹杂的雨水发出火星”，变成水中喷火，更是笑话。原文中的 rain 是动词，其主语为 wind，句子的骨干为 A wind flamed and rained.这个动词 rain 为及物动词，有宾语的 sparks，中文也有这样的用法，如《淮南子·本经》：“昔者苍颉作书而天雨粟，鬼夜哭。”threatening to ignore rooftops = threatening the rooftops that ignore it.（威胁着不理睬它的屋脊）。这句话比较难解，所以被译者略去了。

【改译】时速三十里的强风，使大火从这间屋子蔓延到那间屋子，像放烟火一般地把火星散落到大部分的市区，威胁着那些袖手旁观的屋脊。

例三

曾慰译的《漫天烽火一将才》，是从美国《时代周刊》（Time）的 A Soldier of France 一文译出的。

（原文）Then last fall, Navarre picked swashbuckling Colonel de Castries over several generals for Dienbienphu, the most important field command in Indo-China.

（曾译）于是在去年秋天，纳伐尔将军把他的职位提高到超过了在奠边府几位将官的职务，是越战中最重要的指挥官。

【评述】句中的主要人物竟不译出，而含糊地用一个“他”字带过去，是译者最大的过失。他又把 picked swashbuckling 译为“提高职位”也是瞎猜的。《综合英汉大辞典》载有 swashbuckler 一字，为“空作威福者”或“虚夸者”的意思。swashbuckling = （n.）the activities, deeds, or adventures of a swashbuckler，（名词）虚夸者的活动，行为或冒险。（adj.）characteristic of a swashbuckler，（形容词）虚夸者的本性或特征。在上文中此字是作形容词用的，意为“虚张声势的”，“好大喜功的”。Indo-China 指法属印度支那，和现在的越南不同。法国在奠边府一役被越人击破之后，便只得放弃亚洲的这个殖民地回老家去了。这位守奠边府的军人，为他本国这块殖民地送了终，我们的译者还称赞他是一位将才，如非讽刺，便太好笑了。

【改译】于是，去年秋天，纳伐尔撇开了几位将军，而选中好大喜功的卡斯屈瑞上校来戍守奠边府，那是印度支那最重要的战地指挥任务。

（原文）Kin to ten dukes, a marshal of France and one of Lafayette’s officers, De Castries joined the French army as a private（1921），got his commission at cavalry officers’ school, …

（曾译）寇屈瑞斯上校是一位法国元帅与辣斐德将军手下的军官，也是一个公爵的近亲，一九二一年，他参加法国军队当兵，其后又加入骑兵军官学校攻读，…

【评述】辣斐德是法国的名将兼政治家，曾参加 1776 年建国的美国独立战争，又在 1789 年及 1830 年指导法国革命，他生于 1757 年，死于 1834 年。卡斯屈瑞上校戍守奠边府，在 1954 年五月失陷。时间上相差百多年，他怎么会是辣斐德手下的军官呢？分明是 ten dukes 而被译成“一个公爵”，复数变成了单数。got his commission at cavalry officers’ school 译成“加入骑兵军官学校攻读”，也够荒唐了。commission 一字，从来没有读书的意思，在此是指“任命”，“委任”，“委任状”，全句意为在骑兵学校时，他才接到派命，出任军职。凡是有派令的才是军官，否则只是士兵而已，如 non-commissioned 意为无委任状的，未受任命的。non-commissioned officer（略为 N.C.O.），意为军士。

【改译】卡斯屈瑞系与十个公爵，一个法国元帅和一个辣斐德将军的部将，都有亲属关系，他加入法军时是一个上等兵（一九二一年），后来在骑兵军官学校受命出任军官，…

（原文）The inn caught fire. De Castries just ordered more champagne.“We’ll finish our meal, ”he told the innkeeper.“Send for the fire chief.”To the chief he snapped：“Turn your hoses on this house. But if I’m not able to finish my lunch, I’ll have you shot.”

（曾译）这个酒店忽然着弹燃烧起来，这时寇屈瑞斯正在要一杯香槟酒的当口，他从容地说：“我们吃完了再说。”他告诉酒店侍者说：“把这杯酒交给救火队长。”俟后又对救火队长尖声叫喊说：“把这些救火皮带管口朝向外面，等到我不能吃完这顿饭时，你们再进来灭火好了。”

【评述】第一句中的 just ordered more champagne 意为“要了更多的香槟酒”，被误译为“正在要一杯香槟酒的当口”，把过去译成现在了，而且 more 也不是“一杯”。innkeeper 不是侍者（男侍者为 waiter，女侍者为 waitress），而是酒店老板。send for the fire chief，是“差人去把救火队长叫来”，如何可译成“把这杯酒交给救火队长”呢？译者连惯见的成语 send for 是什么意思都不明白，居然大胆译书，翻译工作的不被人重视，由此可见。我们说 send for a doctor，不是“为医生送去”，而是“去请医生来”，send for 是“差人去请某人来”的意思。Turn your hoses on this house，不是什么“把这些救火皮带管口朝向外面”，而是“对这屋子浇水”。I’ll have you shot，译为“你们再进来灭火好了”，简直是没有常识的译语。屋子中弹起火，只能在外面灌救，怎样可以“进来灭火”呢？这句译文与原文风马牛不相及，全是瞎猜的。

【改译】那酒店着火了。卡斯屈瑞刚叫了更多的香槟酒。“让我们吃完饭再说吧，”他对酒店老板说，“差人去把救火队长叫来。”他用尖快的声音对那队长说：“把你的水龙头对准这屋子浇。假如我不能在此吃完这顿饭，我就要把你枪毙。”

（原文）An impetuous man, with tawny eyes, a constant wine flush on his cheeks and a towering reputation as a ladies’ man……

（曾译）他是一个脾气非常暴燥，具有黄褐色眼睛，脸颊上时常因饮酒而转成红色，又是一个享有盛誉。

【评边】“他是一个脾气非常暴燥”及“又是一个享有盛誉”两句译文的后面，都非加上“的人”二字不可，否则是不通的。impetuous 是从名词 impetus 变来的形容词，名词意为“冲力”，“推动力”，形容词意为“冲动的”（rash），“猛烈的”或“激烈的”（violent），不应译为“脾气暴燥的”，（附带说明一下，“燥”应作“躁”，火旁的燥当干字讲，足旁的躁才是性子很急，坐立不定的意思，成语有性情暴躁，心浮气躁。）最后的 as a ladies’ man 未译，致使译文意念不全。

【改译】他是一个勇猛的人，生着一对黄褐色的眼睛，两颊常呈酒晕，而且又是一个很有名的善于对妇女献殷勤的男子。

（原文）When he runs up to lead a charge, “Allons, ” De Castries has been heard to shout back, “What the hell are you waiting for? Do you expect the enemy to send you violets? Give the bastards the gun.”

（曾译）在他领导作战时，老是对那些怕死的士兵说：“你们还等什么？等敌人们来侮辱你么？”接着他便命令左右：“把枪给这些家伙们。”

【评述】Allons 是一个法国字，意为“来，让我们冲”。这是卡斯屈瑞向后面的军队回喊的话。所谓“老是对那些怕死的士兵说”，是译者瞎栽的。violet 是紫罗兰花，大约译者看成 violent（凶暴的）或是 violate（冒渎，侵害）了，故译成“侮辱”。最后一句“把枪给这些家伙们”，简直正合了意大利人说的 Traduttori-traditori，翻译的人就是叛徒，司令官叫“杀敌”，现译成把枪给敌人，自己缴械，不是叛徒又是什么？bastard 原意为“私生子”，“杂种”，在此指敌人。

【改译】当他领队冲锋的时候，卡斯屈瑞便喊回来：“来吧，冲啊！你们还等什么？难道你们想敌人会送花来吗？杀死那些杂种呀。”

（原文）Immaculately clad, garlanded with some 20 campaign decorations, scented with shaving lotion, wearing a bright red cap and shadowed by a Moroccan orderly carrying riding crop and carbine, …

（曾译）干净的衣服，佩上了近二十只勋章，头戴一顶刷亮的红色军帽，手中常执摩洛哥人骑马带的马鞭与卡宾枪。

【评述】句中 scented with shaving lotion 被筛掉了。and shadowed by a Moroccan orderly carrying riding crop and carbine 一句原文，译者既不懂 shadowed by 的意思，又把 orderly（传令兵）一个名词看成副词了。所以译为卡斯屈瑞本人手中拿着马鞭与卡宾枪。做动词用的 shadow，有“附随”，“尾行”的意思，此处指卡斯屈瑞身边跟着一个摩洛哥人的马弁。

【改译】穿着整洁的军服，佩着二十次战役的勋标，带着润须香水的香味，头戴一顶鲜红色的军帽，并随身跟有一个拿着马鞭和卡宾枪的摩洛哥随从。

（原文）“He will get himself killed, ”added another, “or he’ll come back a general.”

（曾译）又有人说：“当他凯旋归来的时候，可能已是一位将军了。”

【评述】He will get himself killed，又被筛掉了。“可能已是”也找不出来源，or 一字也没有译出。

【改译】另外一个补充说：“他要么就马革裹尸，不然，他就会变成一个将军回来。”

例四

美国 Collier’s 杂志刊出的 Please Take Care of Me 一文，有罗裕及盛泉二人的节译，题名同译为《新生》。

（原文）She had ordered a pousse-café and was holding it up to the light to look at it.

（罗译）她叫了一杯“浓咖啡”，举在灯光里照着它。

（盛译）她向柜台上要了一杯咖啡饮料，举杯在手，迎着灯光呆视。

【评述】两人都译错了的就是 pousse-café 一字。这是法文，意为 coffee-pusher，并不是咖啡，而是在大餐时饮过咖啡后所进的一小杯 liqueur（一种含有强烈酒精及香味的甜酒）。

【改译】她叫了一杯力曲酒，举起在灯光下去看。

（原文）I snapped my lighter but it was out of fluid and she handed me a little gold thingumabob I couldn’t even get hold of. She laughed and took it back and lighted her cigarette and mine. “You have to use both hands, ” she said.

（罗译）我按着我的打火机，但它没有油，她给我一个金的小玩意，我甚至不能抓住它。她笑着拿回去，点了她和我的烟。

（盛译）我捺着打火机，点燃了她和我的香烟。

【评述】thingumabob 或 thingumajig 或 thingummy 或 thingamy，是在 thing 后加上一些无意义的尾缀而形成的，在口语中意为 what-d’ye-call-it（那叫什么的东西），或有时指人的 what’s-his-name（那个叫什么的人）。“某先生”除了译成 Mr.So-and-so 之外，还可译成 Mr.Thingummy.指物时如说 His gramophone has a little thingamy that changes the records automatically.（他的留声机当中有一个叫什么的小玩意能自动地换唱片）。这个罗译不错，但他却把 get hold of 译错了，这个成语在平常确是应该当“抓住”解的，不过在现在这句话中，却不能一成不变的来译，因为这时打火机分明在手，自不能再说“不能抓住它”，应译为“我甚至无法打开它”，因这个成语除“抓住”的基本含义外，还可引申为“操纵”，“掌握其用法”之类的意思。最后一句说的“你得用双手呀”，不应略去，因与前面的 I couldn’t even get hold of 有关。罗译除这两点外，别的都译得不错。盛译则张冠李戴，分明是她点火却译成我点火，其余漏译太多，不在话下。

【改译】我捺开了我的打火机，但没有油了，所以打不燃，她递给我一个金的小玩意，我却没办法打开来。她笑着拿回去了，打出了火，点燃了她自己的香烟，又为我点燃了，她说：“你得用双手才打得开呀。”

（原文）It leaves so many people with half-selves. If you’ve got a half-self, you’re not much good to anyone.

（罗译）它使那么许多人只剩下一半的自我。假使你只剩下一半，你对任何人都无用。

【评述】盛译常整句不译，故未引出加以比较。罗虽译了这句，但译文是很难懂的，什么叫做“一半的自我”，非请教罗先生不可。也许译者本人也不明白。他不知这儿说的 half-selves，是指 better half（妻）与 worse half（夫）的 half，即只剩一半的夫妻，self 当然是指人。

【改译】它（指战争）使许多人变成了孤寡，假使你变成了孤寡，你对任何人都没有多大用处。

（原文）“But it’s impossible to stop and do nothing, ”she said.“I can’t even play the piano any more because the music is so full of associations. I can’t go to the places we went together. I get suffocated and can’t breathe. I can’t stand being with people because what they say sounds like so much nonsense. I can’t get interested in doing anything constructive because it all seems so ridiculously futile.”

（罗译）“可是那不可能停下来，什么也不干。”她说：“我甚至不能再弹琴。随便什么都使我想到他。我对一切都失了兴趣，他们看来是那么可笑的无聊……”

（盛译）“说来容易做时难。我何尝不想停顿一下，把那愁闷的心胸驱逐干净，然后再重新享受以前的一切欢乐。但是过去的一切，莫不令人触景伤情。”她感慨地说。

【评述】罗译用“随便什么都使她想到他”一句，来代替许多句子，未免太图方便了。盛译则是完全的自由创作，不是照原文翻译的，这只能算是窃取别人的意思自己来写文章，不能视为翻译。

【改译】“但是要停顿下来，什么事都不做，是不可能的，”她说，“我甚至连钢琴都不能再弹了，因为那音乐使我发生种种联想。我们曾经到过的地方，我都不能再去。我去了要使我为之哽咽。我不能和人们站在一起，因为他们说的话，听来多么没有意思。我没有兴趣去做任何有建设性的事情，因为这一切都好像徒劳无益，荒谬可笑。”

（原文）“They found out that other people needed them, needed their help, ” I said.“Most important of all, they learned that a person possesses only what he gives away, and that they were luckier than some women who’d never been loved at all.”

（罗译）“他们发现其他的人需要她们，需要她们的帮助，”我说，“更重要的是她们发现一个人，只能拥有他给予过的东西，她们已比从来没有爱情的女人要幸福。”

（盛译）“她们知道徒然留恋过去是没有用处的，她们要面对现实，重新鼓起生活的勇气。她们知道世界上伤心的人很多，他们应该为帮助别人而再生存下去。譬如说，有许多孤儿没有人照顾，有许多寡妇找不到谋生的工作等等，如果你对这些工作发生兴趣，我想你一定不会再消沉下去了。”

【评述】most important 应译为“最重要的”，不是比较级，不可译为“更”。who had never been loved 是“从未被人爱过”，不是“从来没有爱情”。盛译完全是自己在乱写，与原文无关，无可评述。

（原文）I had trouble getting Elaine out of my mind even while I discussed an assignment for a magazine article on India and Pakistan.

（罗译）甚至我讨论印度和巴基斯坦的访问事务时，我都难以将爱琳撇开脑际。

【评述】罗译将 an assignment（派定的工作）丢掉不译，意思便不同了。“访问”不知从何而来？盛君则将整句删去，免得译错，被人批评。

【改译】即使我在谈论某杂志请我写的关于印度和巴基斯坦的文章时，我也难以把爱琳从心头撇开。

（原文）I wrote a short note to Elaine then and asked how she was getting along. Her answer was breezy, impersonal and exactly as I knew it would be. She was showing down and the transition was painful, but she was getting there.

（罗译）我写了一个短简给爱琳，接到一封冷淡的回信，她说她安定了下来，改变是痛苦的，但是她已经得到。

【评述】and asked how she was getting along 及 exactly I knew 两句都被筛去没有译出。breezy 是“活泼的”，“欢乐的”，“轻松的”，也未译出。impersonal 基本意思为“无人格的”，“无特殊人称的”，在此应为“一般性的”，“空泛的”。she was getting there 译为“她已经得到”，有点含糊。俚语 to get there 有“成功”，“了解”的意思。

【改译】我于是写了一个短简给爱琳，问她近況如何。她的回信轻松空泛，果不出我所料。她已经弛缓下来，这种转变是很痛苦的，不过，她已经成功了。

（原文）I let it drop. But when autumn came and the leaves were beginning to turn yellow I thought of how she’d look in the orange and red and gold of the New England woods, And pretty soon I thought of it so much I was on the train for Vermont.

（罗译）我放下了这件事。可是当秋天到来时，我想到她在新英格兰金黄火红树林里将是如何的一种状态。不久我已踏上去维蒙的火车。

【评述】the leaves were beginning to turn yellow 未译。I thought of it so much（that）也未译，所以最后一句译文脱了节，变得与前文毫不相干了。

【改译】我放下了这件事。但当秋天到来，树叶开始变黄的时候，我想到她在新英格兰的橙红和金黄色的树林里，不知是个什么样子。随即不久，我对这件事想得太多了，所以我就只好踏上开往维蒙的火车。

例五

一九五五年三月号的《读者文摘》上刊有一篇鬼故事 The Girl Named Lavender （《紫姑》），作者为 Carl Carmer，有一位署名觐业的人，把它译做《紫堇花》，在报纸副刊上发表出来，译笔歪曲得不成样子，现举出几个例子，以供大家研讨。

（原文）A few years ago the postmaster in a village that lies beside its lonely waters talked often about a lithe tawny girl with hyacinth eyes and wheatyellow hair.

（觐译）草原上村落里的邮局局长在河畔休息时，闲谈中常提到一位明眸大眼，黄发褐肤女郎的故事。

【评述】句中 that lies beside its lonely waters 是形容 village 的，如果是在河畔休息的话，也应该是村落，而不是局长。从前的翻译家讲究信达雅，现在的翻译家就采用猜筛栽，读到觐业的翻译，证明确是如此。就在上面这简单的一句译文中，他也能运用到这三种法宝。他说邮政局长在河畔休息，完全是猜出来的。A few years ago 没有译，lonely waters 没有译，lithe 没有译，hyacinth 没有译，这些都被译者筛掉了。“草原上”及“明眸大眼”是译者瞎栽进去的。a village that lies beside its lonely waters 应译“在那孤寂的流水旁边的村庄”。waters 用复数指流动的水，溪流，江河，海洋，波浪等皆是。Still waters run deep.是一个成语，意为静水流深，引申为大智若愚，深思的人不大说话。lithe 柔软的，易弯的。hyacinth 洋水仙，花为碧蓝颜色。wheatyellow 麦黄色的。

【改译】早几年，在那流水孤村中的邮政局长，常常谈起一个金发碧眼，肤色黄褐的，轻快活泼的姑娘。

（原文）The postmaster was a sophisticated gentleman, traveled and urbane, member of a distinguished family in these parts.

（觐译）这位局长先生是个富有幽默感的人物，家庭在村庄里也算是世家。

【评述】sophisticated, traveled, urbane 三个字中没有一个字带有一点幽默感的，凭空加上这么一个意义不是瞎栽是什么？译者猜不出来就筛去，再瞎栽些东西进去补足。sophisticated 意为世故的，好矫饰的。traveled 作形容词用，是说游历很广的。urbane（此字不可和 urban 相混，那是都市的），文雅的，和蔼的 in these parts（在那一带）怎样可以拿来专指这个小村庄呢？

【改译】那位邮政局长出生于附近的一个世家，游历颇广，世故很深，为人和蔼而爱矫饰。

（原文）The postmaster would sometimes see him and the girl picking blackberries on a hillside or, on a Saturday night, walking the road to a country dance.

（觐译）就是这位局长教师也在野外遇见她和他的学生们在采摘野花，或者在森林中携手狂舞着。

【评述】原文只说一个学生（him），为什么要译成“学生们”呢？blackberries 是一种浆果，不是野花。hillside 是山边，不是野外。a Saturday night 是很重要的，不宜略而不译。分明是“在路上走着去参加一个乡村的舞会”，竟被译成“在森林中携手狂舞着”，意义完全不同，笔下擅自造作。原文说的 walking the road（走路）的 walk，在此为他动词，类似用法有 He linked his arm in mine, and walked me slowly along the platform.（Max Beerbohm）（他挽着我的手，拉着我沿月台走去）。跳舞会英文不必说 dancing party，单说 dance 就行了。

【改译】那位邮政局长有时就会看见他（一个逃走的男孩子）同那姑娘在山边摘着黑莓，或是在一个礼拜六的晚上，在路上走着，同去参加一个乡村的跳舞会。

（原文）There was a gasp when the preacher pulled from the second barrel a lavender evening dress covered with sequins that glinted like amethysts; it was cut low off the shoulders.

（觐译）出乎意外地竟有一件紫堇花女衣满缀着意大利古代金币闪烁地发着紫色闪光。

【评述】sequin 一字，据《综合英汉大辞典》解释为：威尼斯之古金币（约值美金 225 元），所以觐业要译为“意大利古代金币”，但他不想想一件捐给贫民的衣服，上面怎样会缀满着每个值美金二百余元的古金币的呢？谁有这样大方捐出这样阔气的衣服？何况无论怎样的阔人，也不见得要把金币缀满一身的。我们凭常识也不会相信世间有这种事，荒谬大胆的译者竟至形诸笔墨，其无常识可想。amethysts（紫水晶）倒反而不译了。gasp 是屏息，不是出乎意外。lavender 香草名，因花为淡紫色，故用以形容颜色。

【改译】牧师从第二箱中取出一件袒胸露臂的紫色夜会服来，上面镶着一些小金属片，像宝石般闪闪发光，大家一看，全场为之哑然。

（原文）The boys stopped and asked if they could give her a lift. She eagerly seated herself between them and asked if they were going to the square dance at Sterling Furnace.

（觐译）少年学生们停车查询她是否欲附搭他们的车赴会，探知目的地相似后，她热情地上车，坐在两位少年中间座。

【评述】她只是问他们是不是到 Sterling Furnace 去跳舞，并未“探知目的地相似”，因为目的地并不相同。give her a lift 是让她搭车（免费），并不一定赴会。square dance 以两人为一组，四人相对合舞的一种跳舞。这些译者都猜不透只为筛掉。

【改译】那两位大学生把车子停下来，问她是不是愿意搭乘他们的车子前去，她很热心地登上车来，坐在他们两个人的中间，又问他们是不是到纯净炉去跳方形舞。

（原文）After directing the driver through dusty woodland roads she finally bade him to stop before a shack so dilapidated that it would have seemed deserted had it not been for a ragged lace curtain over the small window in the door.

（觐译）最后车驶至公路旁树林深处，看到一幢孤立茅屋，破烂得只有一个小窗，车在茅屋旁停下。

【评述】译文说“茅屋破烂得只有一个小窗”，一见便知是错误的，因为古语说得好，皮之不存，毛将焉附，一幢屋子只剩下一个窗子，那窗子是不是悬在空中呢？had it not been for = if it had not been for，意为如果不是的话。

【改译】她指示车夫在泥土的山林路上走了好一阵子之后，终于达到了她的目的地，她要车夫在一所茅屋的前面停下来了。那屋子破落不堪，如果不是门上那小窗后面挂着破烂的空纱窗帘的话，你会以为是没有人住的呢。

例六

美国现代作家海明威（Ernest Hemingway，1898—1961）在一九五二年出版的《老人与海》（The Old Man and The Sea）获得诺贝尔文学奖金，是现代的一部名著。中文有两个译本，一为辛原译，一为范思平译，后者较为忠实，但仍不免有可推敲的地方，如

（原文）On this circle the old man could see the fish’s eye and the two grey sucking fish that swam around him.

（辛译）绕这一圈的时候，老人可以看见鱼的眼睛和它游着的一双灰乳鱼。

（范译）这次兜圈子，老人可以看见那鱼的眼睛，还有两条吸在大鱼身上的灰色的鱼，它们有时绕着它游着。

【评述】辛原将 sucking fish 译成“乳鱼”是错误的，鲨鱼虽属胎生，但它是否经过哺乳阶段却很成问题，即使它有这一个阶段，它也不会跟着雄鲨鱼的，因为作者称这条大鱼用 he 而不用 she，并且下面跟着的一句是 sometimes they attached themselves to him，更显明地告诉读者 sucking fish 是指“吸鱼”，不是鲨鱼的小鱼。范译“两条吸在大鱼身上的灰色的鱼”，也不大妥当，因为他把 sucking fish 译成“正在吸着的鱼”，所以把它的形容句译成“它们有时绕着它游着”，不得不多加“有时”两字。其实 sucking fish，不一定要译成进行式，现在分词是可以当形容词用的，例如 singing birds，不一定要译成“正在唱歌的鸟”，而可译成“鸣禽”，同样地 sucking fish 也是可以译为“吸鱼”的。

【改译】那鱼兜这一圈的时候，老人能够看到鱼的眼睛，和两条灰色的吸鱼绕着它游。

（原文）He took all his pain and what was left of his strength and his long gone pride and he put it against the fish’s agony and the fish came over on to his side and swam gently on his side……

（辛译）他忍着痛将身上能够挤出的最后一丝力气，连同业已丧失的自尊，一股脑儿向鱼迸发。鱼拉过来了慢慢向船游来……

（范译）他收拾起他所有的痛楚和残余的精力，和他久已丧失了的自傲，他用这一切来和那鱼的苦痛对抗。那鱼到他旁边来了，侧着身子温柔地在他旁边游着……

【评述】上面这句主要的部分直译是“他拿他所有的痛楚，残余的力量，和久已丧失的自傲这一切来和鱼的痛苦较量一下，看谁支持得久，谁熬得过谁”。辛译只注意到老人方面的力量，而忽视了那鱼对抗的力量。范译较为忠实，但“和鱼的苦痛对抗”，太直译了，苦痛二字太抽象，不切实。句尾叙述鱼身倾斜以后，再侧着身体在游泳。came over 叙述鱼身倾斜。on to his side = to a position on his side 叙述那鱼倾斜的程度达到侧面向着水底。swam on his side 是侧泳。这儿两个 his 都是指鱼的，不可把它看作是指老人。

【改译】他要唤起久已丧失的自傲，忍住所有的痛楚，去克服那鱼临死的挣扎。鱼身倾斜了，它侧着身体缓缓地游着。

例七

《自由谈》五卷四期上登了一篇牧田夫译的《孤叶未凋零》，是从 O. Henry 的短篇名作 The Last Leaf （《最后一叶》）翻译出来的。现拣几节来研讨一下。

（原文）In a little district west of Washington Square the streets have run crazy and broken themselves into small strips called “places”.

（牧译）在华盛顿西面有一个小小街区，街道都糊里糊涂地缠在一起，自相交叉，形成狭长条子，那便是所谓“区域”。

【评述】那个小地区（不是译者说的小小街区），不是在华盛顿之西，而是在华盛顿方场之西。这句中的 Square 一字关系重大，岂可筛掉。如果不说方场，单说华盛顿，是很有问题的，因为美国的国都叫华盛顿，英文说 Washington D.C.,而美国西北部有一州也叫华盛顿，英文说 Washington State，二者都可略称华盛顿。译文中说的“自相交叉”四字，是从文章后面另外一句中拿来的。至于 called 一字，译者把它当作另一类似语的 so-called 来译出，当然也就错了。socalled 译“所谓”而 called 则只能译成“叫做”或“称为”。place 是指夹在通衢之间的短街，不宜译作“区域”，而应译作“街坊”，即里巷，英文的 district 才可译作“区域”。

 【改译】在华盛顿公园之西的那一带地方，街路纷乱破裂，自成一些称为“街坊”的小区划。

（原文）An artist once discovered a valuable possibility in this street.

（牧译）在这条街道上，一个艺术家有发现价值的可能。

【评述】“可能”的英文是 potentiality，至于 possibility 应译作“可能性”。这句译文很费解，到底是发现什么价值呢？

【改译】有一位画家曾经在这街上发现了一件难能可贵的事。

（原文）Suppose a collector with a bill for paints, paper and canvas should, in traversing this route, suddenly meet himself coming back, without a cent having been paid on account!

（牧译）譬如说，一个带着一本支票簿去购买颜料，纸张和帆布的人，漫步经过这条街，会突然地发现连一个钱也没有花，他自己又转回来了。

【评述】这一句译得完全把对象弄错了。译者把出卖颜料等画具的商人，看成购买那些东西的画家去了。那商人是来收账的，并不是来买颜料的。collector 是收账的人。bill 是账单（支票应作 check），canvas 是画布，paid on account 是付账，不是花钱。

【改译】比方一个带着别人买了颜料，图画纸，画布的账单来收账的人，他要是走过这条路的话，就会突然发现他自己又走回到原来的地方了，而一文钱的账都还没有收到手！

（原文）So, to quaint old Greenwich Village the art people soon came prowling, hunting for north windows and eighteenth century gables and Dutch attics and low rents.

（牧译）这样的，一群艺术家立刻到这座奇怪而古旧的格林威治村庄来了，他们巡查着，搜索着向北的窗户，十八世纪的屋翼，荷兰式的小楼，和廉价的房租。

【评述】“立刻”的英文应是 at once，原文中只说 soon，应译为“快”或“不久”。prowling 不是“巡查着”，而是“私下探索地走着”。gable 不是什么“屋翼”，屋子的翼英文叫 wing，是从主屋向两边伸出的部分。gable 是人字形屋顶的建筑，（尖顶屋两端的）人字形的墙，英文的解释为 the pointed part of a wall between the two sloping sides of a roof.又 attics 是“顶楼房”，不应含糊地译作“小楼”。因为荷兰式的建筑，往往在那高屋顶底下，有一间广大的顶楼房间。还有“这座村庄”的座字，也用得不恰当。座是计算高大物体数目用的词儿，如一座山，两座大楼。

【改译】所以对于这个奇妙古老的格林尼支村，那些画家们争求着朝北的窗牖，十八世纪的尖屋顶，荷兰式的顶楼房，和便宜的租金，而很快地就聚居拢来了。

（原文）Then they imported some pewter mugs and a chafing dish or two from Sixth Avenue, and became a “colony”.

（牧译）然后他们从六条通输入了白蜡酒杯，和一两只摩光的碟子，于是这样便变成了一块“殖民地”。

【评述】imported 在此只宜说是“运来”，不好硬译作“输入”，因为同在一个城里，不必大张旗鼓地输出输入呢。pewter mugs 是白镴的茶杯，锡和铅的合金叫白镴（应为金旁，不是石旁），用这种合金做的茶杯，不会打破。mug 为直筒的大漱口碗似的容器，不宜盛酒，只合饮茶。“六条通”是日本话，不应滥用于美国的街名。“摩光的碟子”是一个什么玩意，译者自己恐怕也不明白。美国《韦氏新世界辞典》上有 chafing dish = a pan with a heating apparatus beneath it, to cook food at the table or to keep food hot.意即轻便火锅。

【改译】随即他们从第六街运来了一些白镴的咖啡杯，和一二轻便火锅，便把这地方造成了一个画家的“殖民地”了。

（原文）Mr. Pneumonia was not what you would call a chivalric old gentleman. A mite of a little woman with blood thinned by California zephyrs was hardly fair game for the red-fisted, short-breathed old duffer.

（牧译）肺炎先生不是个所谓谦逊的老绅士。一个被加利福尼亚西风吹得瘦削了的少女，绝不是这个怀着红红拳头的老家伙的对手。

【评述】call 不是“所谓”，见前节评述。chivalric 分明是“义侠的”，不可译做“谦逊的”。a mite of a little woman 极言其细小瘦弱，不应略去，“少女”不一定是 little 的，尤其不一定是 a mite（微小物）。句中 blood 一字未经译出，所以成为“被西风吹得瘦弱了的少女”，实则 blood 在此为 life 或 the essence of life 的意思，thinned 不是修饰 woman 的，而是修饰 blood 的，说她生命脆弱，受不起肺炎病的打击。zephyr 为希腊神话中花神的爱人，由它的气息开花结果，可见是一种温和的风。英国诗人歌诵春天时多提及它。不可译成“西风”，因为英文的 west wind 是温暖的，不像中国西风的寒冷。red-fisted 译成“怀着红红拳头”，中文不通，应译“满手血腥的”，即手上染有血迹的杀人凶手。short-breathed 是描写个性上很重要的形容词，译者不了解它，故只好筛去。它的意思是“呼吸促迫的”，以肺炎病的症状拿来形容肺炎本身。duffer 暴徒。

【改译】肺炎先生并不是你所说的那种义侠的老绅士。生长在加州那和风中的，一个纤腰弱质的小妇人，实非那满手血腥，吸呼促迫的暴徒的敌手。

出版后记

钱歌川先生以两类著作闻名于世。

一类是散文，量多质优。据陈子善统计，他在大陆和海外总共出版了散文集二十多本，其数量超过了林语堂和梁实秋，仅次于周作人。另一类是英语教学资料，都是基于他数十年的英语教学经验凝炼而成，有些长期被大学采用作为教材。与一般的英语教学资料相比，钱氏的英语教材富有浓厚的文学底蕴。作者在书中的举例，多出自欧美文豪作品与中国古典文学作品，这让读者在阅读的过程中，提高了字句锤炼及语言感受能力。

这本《翻译的基本知识》典型地体现了钱氏作品的特点，在不长的篇幅中，读者既能了解翻译的历史与理论知识，又能有足够的例句学习翻译的具体技巧，是不可多得的翻译基础入门书。

在此要特别感谢张兆龙先生，是他不辞辛劳帮助我们联系远在美国纽约的钱歌川的女儿钱宁娜女士，我们才得到了钱先生著作的出版版权，使得这些优秀的著作得以在大陆出版。《翻译的技巧》《英文疑难详解》《英文疑难详解续篇》也会陆续与读者见面，敬请期待。

服务热线：133-6631-2326　139-1140-1220

服务信箱：reader@hinabook.com

2013 年 4 月

翻译的技巧

钱歌川　著

版权信息

书名：翻译的技巧

作者：钱歌川

书号：978-7-5502-5435-0

版权：后浪出版咨询（北京）有限责任公司

序

这本小著前后写了十年之久，在我七十生辰的当月，总算全部脱稿，可以付诸剞劂了。

我开始在大学里教翻译课，是在台湾大学，后来因移砚他校，停了一个相当长久的时期，直到一九六四年应聘南来星洲，先在义安学院，继在新加坡大学，今在南洋大学，每年都教翻译，而且成了我的专科。在海外和在国内，教翻译是不同的。因为国内的大学，是把这门课开设在外文系里，而且是高年级才有的，可是在星洲，翻译是中文系的课程，各年级都有，这当然是为配合当地需要的缘故。国内把这门课开设在外文系，教的人比较不大吃力，星洲因为是中文系的课程，教时就比较要困难些。大家都知道在我国或星洲，谈到翻译，大抵是指中英对译。中文是我们的母语，无论如何，总比英文要好得多，所以学生到了外文系三、四年级时，英文也学到了相当的程度。可以自由表达了，这时来学翻译，无论是中译英或英译中，都能写出通顺的文字来，问题只在对内容的含义，可能有译得不恰当的地方。在星洲的情形可不同了，因为读中文系的同学，英文好的不多，教翻译的人，先得讲解英文，事倍功半。

本书除第三编的一小部分外，其余都是在星洲写成的。九年来不断地加以增补修订，始有今日的面貌。当然我不敢自诩内容已臻完善，不过我已尽了最大的努力，使之切合学生的需要，可以作为翻译教本。第一编教学生用各种各样的英文句型来翻译，使之熟悉英文的写法，以补救英文较差的缺憾。如每周三小时，两小时讲解，一小时练习，本编是足够一年之用的，第一编所注重的是中译英，而第二编则把重点移到英译中的上面，分门别类的介绍英文的惯用句，各种特殊的表现法，除加上适当的汉译外，并详为解说，每种句法皆附有习题，以供练习之用。学生学完一种表现法后，即进行习题翻译，如此一再实验，定能有所心得。第二编的内容也超过可供每周三小时用一年的教材。以上两个年度的教程，仍不外是奠定基础的准备工作，要到第三年才正式进入实际翻译的阶段。

第三编的主体为长篇的中译英和英译中，这便是我们通常所遇到的翻译材料。除此以外，另备一些可供讲解的教材，以助学习。在第三编的头上，有英文类似句的研究，又有容易译错的文句及其正确译法，这些都是极有用的资料，不易搜集到的。在长篇翻译的教材中，中文方面有浅近的白话，和艰深的文言。在翻译文言文的时候，必须有一番准备工夫，译者得先把文言译成白话，然后才好译成英文，否则难免差误。在英译中方面，则未采用古文，完全选的近代人的作品，内容也不限于文艺方面，而包含哲学，政治，语文，人生问题，原子弹的恐怖，甚至局外人对越战的看法等各方面，以便译者可接触到英文表现的各种面貌。书末附录现在生存的英美名家代表作的节译，更可看出现代英文的趋势，并得以此为踏脚石，进而直接阅读现代文学名著。

过去出版的有关翻译的书，无论中外，大都是讲理论的，偶有谈实际的也只是举出几个例子而已。像本书这样有系统，有方法，来研究翻译的书，似乎还不多见，也可说是破天荒之举，如能对初学者有所裨益，该编者多年的辛劳就得到酬报，而感到满足了。书中错误，在所不免，仍希读者，不吝指正。

一九七二年春　歌川识于南洋大学

目录

序

第一编 汉译英与英文句型

壹 由要素来分的造句

（1）汉文易写英文难通

（2）动词的种类和变化

（3）动词与五种句型

（4）第一句型的自动构造

（5）第二句型的不完全自动构造

（6）第三句型的他动构造

（7）第四句型的授与构造

（8）第五句型的不完全他动构造

贰 由构造来分的造句

（1）用单句来翻译

（2）用合句来翻译

（3）用复句来翻译

叁 由内容来分的造句

（1）用平叙句来翻译

（2）用疑问句来翻译

（3）用命令句来翻译

（4）用感叹句来翻译

第二编 英文惯用法及其翻译

Ⅰ. It 的造句

（1）it…不定词

（2）it…for…不定词

（3）it…动名词

（4）it…子句

（5）it is…子句

（6）it…名词

Ⅱ. 名词的造句

（7）“all + 抽象名词”或“抽象名词 + itself” = very + 形容词

（8）“the + 单数名词”的特殊用法

（9）无生物的主语

（10）something（much）of，nothing（little）of

（11）属格的主格作用和宾格作用

（12）名词（A） + of + a + 名词（B）

（13）名词 + of + 属格 + 名词

（14）of + 抽象名词 = 形容词，of 从略 + 普通名词

（15）one’s own + 名词，of one’s own + 动名词

（16）have + the + 抽象名词 + 不定词

（17）that（those） + 先行词 + 关系代名词

（18）one thing…another

Ⅲ. As 的造句

（19）“as…as”的三种用法

（20）as…as any，as…as ever

（21）as…as…can be

（22）as…，so…

（23）It is in（or with）…as in（or with）

（24）as much，as many，like so many

（25）as good as，as well as

（26）句首的“as it is”，句尾的“as it is”

（27）过去分词 + as it is，现在分词 + as it does

（28）名词等 + as + 主语 + 动词等

Ⅳ. 动词的造句

（29）may well + 动词，and well + 主语 + may

（30）may as well…as，might as well…as

（31）so that…may，lest…should

（32）cannot help + 动名词，cannot but + 原形不定词

（33）have + 宾语（物） + 过去分词

（34）have + 宾语（人） + 原形不定词

（35）have + 宾语 + 副词（地点，方向等）

（36）have + 宾语 + 现在分词

（37）find oneself

（38）find…in

（39）“do”的两种用法

（40）“depend on”的两种用法

（41）know…from

（42）had better + 原形不定词，would rather + 原形不定词

（43）make…of

（44）make one’s way

（45）rob…of

（46）seize…by the…

（47）see if…，see that…

（48）take…for granted

（49）used to + 原形不定词，be used to + 动名词

（50）be + 自动词的过去分词

（51）否定 + fail + 不定词

（52）动词 + 原形不定词

（53）leave + much（nothing） + to be desired

（54）be + 不定词

（55）have + 不定词 + 宾语，have + 宾语 + 不定词

（56）prevent + 宾语 + from + 动名词

（57）persuade + 宾语 + into + 动名词，dissuade + 宾语 + from + 动名词

V. 不定词的造句

（58）表目的、原因、结果等的不定词

（59）so as + 不定词，so…as + 不定词

（60）too… + 不定词，not too… + 不定词，too…not + 不定词

（61）only too… + 不定词，too ready + 不定词

（62）不定词的感叹用法

（63）not to speak of，not to say

Ⅵ. 动名词的造句

（64）There is no + 动名词

（65）for + the + 动名词

（66）above + 动名词

（67）worth + 动名词

（68）far from + 动名词

（69）busy + 动名词

（70）on + 动名词，in + 动名词

Ⅶ. 否定词的造句

（71）no more…than

（72）no less…than

（73）not so much…as，not so much as

（74）Nothing is more…than，Nothing is so…as

（75）cannot…too

（76）否定 + without

（77）否定 + but

（78）否定 + until（till）

（79）not so…but，not such a…but

（80）“not A but B”，“B，（and）not A”

（81）否定 + because

（82）not because…but because

（83）not that…but that

（84）否定 + every（all，both，always，quite）

Ⅷ. what，who 的造句

（85）what he is，what he has

（86）what + 名词，what little + 名词

（87）what with…and what with，what by…and what by

（88）what is + 比较级

（89）A is to B what X is to Y

（90）who + 肯定，who + 否定

（91）疑问词 + should…but

（92）Who knows but（that）

Ⅸ. 条件及让步的造句

（93）省略 if 的句法

（94）If it were not for（ = Were it not for） + 名词，If it had not been for（ = Had it not been for） + 名词，But for + 名词，But that + 名词子句

（95）命令句 + and，命令句 + or

（96）名词 + and

（97）动词 + 疑问词

（98）no matter + 间接疑问句，疑问词-ever + may

（99）动词 + as + 主语 + 助动词

（100）if any

（101）be it ever（或 never）so，let it be ever（或 never）so

（102）once

（103）were to

（104）含有条件意味的字眼

Ⅹ. 形容词副词的造句

（105）“the + 形容词”的两种用法

（106）最上级形容词含有 even 之意

（107）the + 比较级…the + 比较级

（108）the + 比较级 + 理由

（109）the last… + 不定词，the last… + 形容词子句

（110）so + 形容词（副词） + that，so + 动词 + that

（111）so that

（112）so much so that

（113）such…as，such…that

（114）比较级 + than，more + 原级 + than

（115）more…than + can

（116）more than + 动词

（117）less…than

（118）much more，much less

（119）would sooner（rather）…than，would as soon…as

（120）no sooner…than，hardly…when

（121）anything but，nothing but，all but

（122）short of，be short of，nothing short of

（123）ever so

（124）good and 的副词用法

（125）to one’s + 感情名词，to the + 感情名词 + of

（126）so far，so far as，so far as…is concerned

Ⅺ. 连词的造句

（127）and that

（128）at once…and

（129）in that

（130）It is true…but

Ⅻ. 其他的造句

（131）one，as such

（132）one thing…another

（133）in + 人物

（134）before 的四种译法

第三编 疑难句法及文章译例

壹 英文类似句辨异

贰 常易译错的文句

Ⅰ中译英

Ⅱ英译中

叁 翻译实例

Ⅰ中译英

（1）郑燮致弟书

（2）中国的山水画

（3）为学

（4）光与色

（5）教学相长

（6）翻译文欠通顺

（7）学无所用

（8）画蛇添足

（9）嗟来食

（10）老与少

（11）雕刻奇技

（12）狐疑

（13）怕伞的姑娘

（14）偷窃狂

（15）狐假虎威

（16）习惯说

（17）黔之驴

（18）少年孔融的机智

（19）绝妙好辞

（20）韩信忍受袴下辱

Ⅱ英译中

（1）Too Clever Not to See

（2）The Busy Broker

（3）Speculation on Important Subjects

（4）A Feeling of Eternity

（5）The Spirit of Fair-Play

（6）On D. H. Lawrence

（7）On Books

（8）Arguments against Smoking

（9）The Definition of a Gentleman

（10）The Law of the Jungle

（11）Some well-informed People

（12）The English Humour

（13）The Trouble with Translation

（14）Too Distinguished to be a Personality

（15）Schadenfreude

（16）Aloneness is Worse than Failure

（17）Being One’s True Self

（18）Happiness Consists in Love

（19）The Cosy Fire of Affection

（20）Irrational Man

附录 当代英美名作摘译

（1）William Plomer：On Not Answering the Telephone

（2）Louis Kronenberger：A Note on Privacy

（3）Lawrence George Durrel：Justine

（4）Lawrcnce George Durrel：Mountolive

（5）P. H. Newby：A Parcel for Alexandria

（6）Muriel Spark：The Girls of Slender Means

（7）J. D. Salinger：The Long Debut of Lots Taggett

（8）J. D. Salinger：The Catcher in the Rye

（9）Iris Murdoch：The Bell

（10）Iris Murdoch：The Flight from the Enchanter

（11）Truman Capote：Breakfast at Tiffany's

（12）Truman Capote：Breakfast at Tiffany's

（13）James Baldwin：Notes of a Native Son

（14）William Styron：Lie Down in Darkness

（15）William Styron：The Confessions of Nat Turner

（16）Stan Barstow：Gamblers Never Win350

习题解答

出版后记

返回总目录

第一编
汉译英与英文句型

壹　由要素来分的造句

（1）汉文易写英文难通

汉译英必须采用英文的句法，来表达汉文的意念，不可照汉文直译，如照汉文的句法直译，则译出来的不像英文。为避免写成中国式的英文，首先就要把英文的一些基本句型学会，而且要记在心上，当我们动手翻译时，便能运用自如，随便采用哪种句型，都合乎英文的惯用句法了。

我们既能说中国话，又能读中国文，在翻译上对于汉文方面是不会有很多困难的，问题只有英文这一方面，因此我们在汉译英的时候，还是要从英文着手，要把写作英文的基本句型，来作为翻译的工具。

现在我们先来学会以要素为主的五种英文的句型，作为学习翻译的第一步。因为任何英文句子，总不外是这五种句型当中的一种，现代英文是没有第六种句型的。这五种句型是由动词的不同而分别出来的，所以我们在研究五种句型之前，要先把英文动词的种类搞清楚一下。

五种句型是以要素（element）来分的，那么在英文句子中有些什么要素呢？那一共有四个要素，即主语（Subject），述语（Predicate），宾语（Object），补语（Complement）。任何一个句子，必须有主语和述语。另外一些句子，除主语述语外，还有宾语或补语，或宾语补语同时都有。决定一个句子是不是要有宾语补语的，就在动词，而且动词是两个基本要素当中的一个。所谓述语，原是叙述一件事物的动作或状态的，结局就是动词。这是任何一个句子非有不可的基本因素。学英文把动词的用法学会了，英文就学通了十分之八九了。

（2）动词的种类和变化

一个英文动词本身虽只有现在形、过去形、过去分词形和现在分词形四种形式，例如“看见”这个动词，则有 see，saw，seen，seeing 四个不同的变化，但这四种形式运用起来，也可变出十六种不同的时态，即

1．He sees（现在）

2．He saw（过去）

3．He has seen（现在完成）

4．He had seen（过去完成）

5．He is seeing（现在进行）

6．He was seeing（过去进行）

7．He will see（现在推量）

8．He would see（过去推量）

9．He has been seeing（现在完成进行）

10．He had been seeing（过去完成进行）

11．He will have seen（现在完成推量）

12．He would have seen（过去完成推量）

13．He will be seeing（现在进行推量）

14．He would be seeing（过去进行推量）

15．He will have been seeing（现在完成进行推量）

16．He would have been seeing（过去完成进行推量）

这便是英文动词的变化和用法。奇数是现在，偶数是过去。所谓“完成”是英文特有的动词时态，它本身又有现在、过去、未来之分，现在完成所代表的时态，是从过去到现在，过去完成是指过去的过去，未来完成是说未来的过去。所谓“进行”是真正的现在，即正在进行中的动作，英文的现在时态，只是一种经常的现象而已。所谓“推量”即指未来的事现在加以预测，并不怎样确实的。

所谓现在、过去、未来三种基本的时态，每种又包含得有单纯的，以前的，以后的三个时期，现举例说明如下：

Ⅰ. PRESENT

1. Simple present：

I take three meals a day.

2. Before-present：

I have finished my meal.

3. After-present：

I am about to start my meal.

Ⅱ. PAST

1. Simple past：

Last Wednesday at two o’clock my plane left.

2. Before-past：

Last Wednesday at two o’clock I had just returned from London.

3. After-past：

Last Wednesday at two o’clock I was about to give my speech.

Ⅲ. FUTURE

1. Simple future：

Next Wednesday at two o’clock I will land at New York.

2. Before-future：

Next Wednesday by two o’clock I will have landed at New York.

3. After-future：

Next Wednesday at two o’clock I will be about to land at New York。

再就性质来说，英文动词又可大别为两类：自动词（Intransitive Verb）和他动词（Transitive Verb）。自动词是说明主语的动作或状态的，它自身已能完成一个意念，不必要补足什么要素，而成为一个完整的动作。例如唐诗人贾岛的名句：

鸟宿池边树，僧敲月下门。

译成英文时，便是

Birds dwell in a tree by the pond.

A monk knocks at the door under the moon.

又如，

皓月当空。

The moon shines brightly.

凉风起天末。

A cool breeze sprang up in the sky.

日出于东而落于西。

The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.

到了春天美丽的花朵开遍原野。

In spring beautiful flowers bloom in the open country.

我今天觉得好多了。

I feel much better today.

我对他那贵重的援助非常感谢。

I am deeply indebted to him for his valuable assistance.

在以上例句中有主语 Birds 及其述语 dwell

在以上例句中有主语 monk 及其述语 knocks

在以上例句中有主语 moon 及其述语 shines

在以上例句中有主语 breeze 及其述语 sprang

在以上例句中有主语 sun 及其述语 rises

在以上例句中有主语 sun 及其述语 sets

在以上例句中有主语 flowers 及其述语 bloom

在以上例句中有主语 I 及其述语 feel

在以上例句中有主语 I 及其述语 am

前七例是说明主语的动作的，后二例是说明主语的状态的。

他动词就不同了，若单说 have，make 等字时，意念是不完全的，必得再加上宾语，才能表出一个完全的意念，例如：

我在新加坡有许多熟人。

I have many acquaintances in Singapore.

我早已跟他结识了。

I made his acquaintance long ago.

我害了重伤风。

I have taken a bad cold.

我带着照相机到槟城去玩了一星期。

I made a week’s trip to Penang with my camera.

有的他动词都要有宾语，否则不成句，因为他动词没有宾语就不能表示出一个完全的意念来，上举四例：

主语 | 述语 | 宾语
I | have | acquaintances
I | made | acquaintance
I | have | takencold
I | made | trip

这两种动词又可以再细分为四种，即：完全自动词（Complete Intransitive Verb）与不完全自动词（Incomplete Intransitive Verb）；完全他动词（Complete Transitive Verb）与不完全他动词（Incomplete Transitive Verb）。现在分别举例说明如下：

完全自动词本身已能表示一个完全的意念，无须再加补语，例如

昨夜下了大雨。

It rained heavily last night.

一轮明月在东方升起。

A beautiful moon has risen in the eastern sky.

在晴天众鸟欢鸣。

In fine weather birds sing merrily.

以上各例句中除主语和述语外，便没有其他的要素了，那就是说，没有宾语或补语，有的只是无关重要的形容词，副词，或形容词片语，副词片语之类罢了。如第一句中的 heavily 是副词，last night 是副词片语。第二句中的 a 和 beautiful 是形容词，in the eastern sky 是副词片语。第三句中的 in fine weather 是副词片语，merrily 是副词。这些都是修饰语，不是文句不可缺少的要素。所以这种完全自动词的句子，在语言学上称为 favourite sentence（最普通的句子），因为它只需要“动作者 + 动作”就行了。

不完全自动词本身不能表出一个完全的意念，必须补上另外的字才能成句。你单说 He is，即“他是”，听者必然要问“他是什么”？又如你说 He becomes，即“他变得”，听者必然要问“他变得怎样了”？我们如果在这两种说法的后面，加上 rich 一字，意念便完全了。即变成 He is rich. “他是有钱人”。He becomes rich. “他变得有钱了”。这个 rich 的字，在文法上就叫做补语。又因为这是补足主语的意味的，所以称为主格补语（Subjective Complement）。加上补语的不完全自动词，便能表示出一个完全的意念来了。

他是一位教师。

He is a teacher.

他好像很诚实的样子。

He seems quite honest.

他直到最后都是很忠实的。

He remained faithful to the last.

天气变得很热了。

It has become much warmer.

她渐入老境。

She is growing（or getting）old.

那谣言证实了。

The rumour proved true.

霜叶红于二月花。

The frosted maple leaves have turned red，much redder than the flowers in spring.

在上面的例句中，有三个要素，举出如下：

主语 | 述语 | 补语
He | is | teacher
He | seems | honest
He | remained | faithful
It | has become | warmer
She | is growing | old
rumour | proved | true
leaves | have turned | red

完全他动词是不要补语的，但它非有宾语不可。有时采用一个宾语，有时采用两个宾语。先看采用一个宾语的造句。这是任何他动词都可以用的，只要有宾语，就可造出一个句子来，别的字多也无用。

树大招风。

Tall trees catch much wind.

我们每天学英语。

We study English every day.

我昨天在理发店遇见他。

I met him at the barber’s yesterday.

他的法国话比英语说得好。

He speaks French better than English.

在上面的例句中，有三个要素，举出如下：

主语 | 述语 | 宾语
trees | catch | wind
We | study | English
I | met | him
He | speaks | French；English

采用两个宾语的完全他动词，又叫做授与动词（Dative Verb）。这是由“授物与人”（give something to a person）或“授人以物”（give a person something）的基本观念而产生的。这个“人”与“物”，都是句子当中的宾语，所以就变成一个句子有两个宾语了。通常“物”是直接宾语（Direct Object），“人”是间接宾语（Indirect Object），因为真正给的是物，接受那物的才是人。

把货物交给我，我就会付你钱。

Give me the goods，and I will give you the money.

她问那孩子叫什么名字。

She asked the boy his name.

医生不许他的病人喝酒。

The doctor forbade his patient wine.

我羡慕你的健康。

I envy you your good health.

请你帮我一个忙好吗？。

Will you do me a favour？

付一块钱给车夫。

Pay the driver one dollar.

他们对我们并无恶意。

They meant us no harm.

通常是把间接宾语放在直接宾语之前，如果为加强语气等原因而把直接宾语放到前面去的话，就要在间接宾语前加介词 to，for，of 等而做成一个片语，例如：

我寄了一封信给她。

I sent her a letter. = I sent a letter to her.

我为她买了一袭新衣。

I bought her a new dress. = I bought a new dress for her.

我想求你一件事。

I wish to ask you a favour. = I wish to ask a favour of you.

这样一来，采用两个宾语的授与动词，就变成采用一个宾语的普通动词了。句中的 to her，for her，of you，都是介词的片语，等于一个形容词的作用。不过有人还是把它视为两个宾语的句子。

单有宾语还不能表示一个完全的意念，必得再加以补语的，便是不完全他动词。这种动词含有使动的作用，是有所作为的，所以又称为作为动词（Factitive Verb）。例如：

他使父母快乐。

He made his parents happy.

总统任命他为将官。

The president made him a general.

结果是父母感到快乐（His parents were 〔or became〕happy.），那人成为将军（He was〔or became〕a general.），这都不外是那动词有所作为的结果。第一句中的 happy 是形容词补语（Adjective Complement），第二句中的 general 是名词补语（Noun Complement），二者都是补足句中的宾语的，所以就叫作宾格补语（Objective Complement），跟上面说过的主格补语不同。

英文的动词，自动或他动，完全或不完全，都不是固定不移的，任何一个动词，常有变化发生，一定要看它用在什么句子中，才能确定它的性质乃至它的意义。例如：

（a）鸵鸟不能飞。

The ostrich cannot fly.（这个 fly 是自动词）。

（b）我会放风筝。

I can fly a kite.（这个 fly 是他动词）。

同是一个自动词，也有完全及不完全两种用法，例如：

（a）车轮徐转。

The wheels are turning slowly.（这个 turn 是完全自动词）。

（b）树叶转黄。

The leaves are turning yellow.（这个 turn 是不完全自动词）。

同是一个他动词，也有完全及不完全两种用法，如

（a）我们用葡萄造酒。

We make wine from grapes.（这个 make 是完全他动词）。

（b）把你的故事说得有趣一点。

Make your story interesting.（这个 make 是不完全他动词）。

又如

（a）I think it is right.（完全他动词）。

（b）I think it right.（不完全他动词）。

英文的自动词照规矩是不能接上一个宾语的，不过有时用一个介词为媒介，也可以接用宾语，如

人人都笑我。

Everybody laughed at me.

思君令人老。

To think of you makes me old.

（3）动词与五种句型

所有的英文句子，归纳起来，不过五种句型构造，即是

1. 第一句型的自动构造（Intransitive Construction）。

这需要用四种要素中的两种基本要素：

Subject + Predicate

例句：车轮转动。

Wheels turn.

2. 第二句型的不完全自动构造（Neuter Construction）。

这需要用四种要素中的三种要素：

Subject + Predicate + Complement

例句：牛奶变酸了。

Milk turns sour.

3. 第三句型的他动构造（Transitive Construction）。

这也需要用四种要素中的三种要素：

Subject + Predicate + Object

例句：人们转动车轮。

Men turn wheels.

4. 第四句型的授与构造（Dative Construction）。

这虽则只用到三种要素，但宾语这个要素，得分为间接与直接两个：

Subject + Predicate + Indirect Object + Direct Object

例句：母牛给我们牛奶。

Cows give us milk.

5. 第五句型的不完全他动构造（Factitive Construction）。

这是要动用四种要素的：

Subject + Predicate + Object + Complement

例句：打雷使牛奶变酸。

Thunder turns milk sour.

而这五种句型，如下表所示，又都是由动词出发的，可见动词对英文造句是何等的重要呀。

动词 | 自动词 | 完全自动词 | （第一句型）
不完全自动词 + 补语 | （第二句型）
他动词 | 完全他动词 | + 一个宾语 | （第三句型）
+ 两个宾语 | （第四句型）
不完全他动词 + 宾语 + 补语 | （第五句型）

（4）第一句型的自动构造

主语 + 述语

从英文的造句法（Syntax）上来看，每个句子都必须具备主语和述语两个部分。表示思想主题的是主语，述说动作、状态、性质等的是述语。

这两个部分是任何英文句子不可或缺的，如果在句中不见了这两个部分，或其中的一个部分，那只是在字面上临时把它省略了，并不是原来就不存在的。例如：

“走开！” Go away！——这个命令句译成英文时是把主语的 you 省略了，原应作 You go away！的。又如

一个多么漂亮的姑娘！

What a pretty girl！

这个惊叹句译成英文时，是把主语的 she 和述语的 is 省略了。原应作 What a pretty girl she is！的。

我很快就会再写信给你的。

Write you soon again.

这个平叙句译成英文时，是省略了主语的 I 和助动词的 will 的，原应作 I will write you soon again. 的。根据以上的例子，就可知道没有主语述语的句子，只是临时省略，原来的句子是非有不可的。主语述语对文句既有这般重要，我们决不可加以忽视，在阅读时找出文句，尤其是长的文句的主语述语，对我们了解文义，是有极大的帮助的。

对于第一句型的句子①，普通都是把它分做两个部分，例如 These pretty little birds sing very merrily. 一句，普通把 These pretty little birds 四字看作主部的 Subject，把 sing very merrily 三字看作述部的 Predicate. 主部的中心一定是一个名词，或名词同等语，所以那个名词才是主部的本体，英文叫作 Subject-word（主语本字）。在上例中的 Subject-word 是 birds，这便是我们读书时第一个要找出来的字。同样地述部的中心，一定是一个动词，所以这个动词才是述部的本体，英文叫作 Predicate-verb（述语动词）。在上例中的 Predicate-verb 是 sing。我们读书时第二个要找出来的字就是它。把一句长文的主语和述语找出来，无异提纲挈领，抓住要点，对文句的主动者及其动作，已经有所了解，整个句子的含义，便可掌握到十之七八了，因为其余的大都是修饰语，在文法上是无关重要的。

在第一句型的构造中，常见的有下列三种形式：

1. S. + Vi：

Birds sing.

2. S. + Vi. + Adverb（Adverb Phrase）：

Birds sing merrily（in the tree）.

3. S. + Vi. + Adverb Infinitive：

John has gone to buy books.

现在我们再举出一些第一句型的例子，来看它是怎样发展的。

在量上有所得，在质上必有所失。

If anything gains in quantity，it must lose in quality.

勿做得不偿失的事。

Do not pay too dear for your whistle.

在教室里上课时不要讲话。

You must not talk in class.

你来此有何贵干？

What have you come here for？

昨夜发生火灾。

A fire broke out last night.

当我到车站时正下大雨。

It rained heavily when I arrived at the station.

他的弟弟考取了南洋大学。

His brother succeeded in the examination of Nanyang University.

他为着转地疗养昨天到金马仑去了。

He went to the Camelon highland yesterday for a change.

我想考取所以拼命用功。

I studied with might and main not to fail in the examination.

因为战争的缘故物价天天上涨。

The prices go up every day owing to the war.

这些果树明年就要开始结果子了。

These trees will begin to bear next year.

对人客气是不会吃亏的。

It pays to be polite.

我明天午后三时到四时之间来看你。

I will come to see you between three and four tomorrow afternoon.

只有人类会说话。

Man alone can speak.

我通常是早上七时起床。

I generally gets up at seven in the morning.

王君不久即将出洋研读数学。

Mr. Wang will shortly go abroad to study mathematics.

习题 1

试将下列各句译成英文，句中须用完全自动词。

1. 健全的思想寓于健全的人格。

2. 我们不是为食而生，乃是为生而食。

3. 合则留，不合则去。

4. 说话不要支吾其词。

5. 在中国学年为八月一日起到七月三十一日止。

6. 我兄弟前天由此放洋，下月半前后可抵伦敦。

7. 他可能很快回来，不过我不能说一定。

8. 猫在黑暗中也能看见。

9. 这把小刀好切得很。

10. 那工作做了不合算。

11. 这些鸡已经开始生蛋了。

12. 我的朋友是站在我一边的。

13. 太阳好像是围绕着地球在走。

14. 因为太暗我看不清楚。

15. 走了约摸一个钟头，我们到达了目的地。

16. 勤则不匮。（《左传》）

17. 卧不安席，食不甘味，心摇摇如悬旌。（《国策》）

18. 下乔入幽。（《孟子》）

19. 东风解冻。

20. 臣无祖母，无以至今日；祖母无臣，无以终余年；祖孙二人，相依为命。（李密）

（5）第二句型的不完全自动构造

主语 + 述语 + 补语

第二句型的造句和第一句型不同的地方，就是句中多了一个补语的因素。这是与不完全自动词有连带关系的。凡是遇到不完全自动词的时候，就有加上补语的必要。补语主要是由形容词或名词构成的，但用别的词类也未尝不可，关键是在动词，如果那动词是不完全的自动词，则在其后接上的任何字都是补语。

不完全自动词的代表动词是“be”，说 I am，you are，he is 等，意念都是不完全的，必须加上一个表示身份或状态或性质的字眼上去，才能成为完整的句子。这个表示身份或状态或性质的字眼，便叫作补语。华文也是一样，单说“他是”是不能成为一个句子的，必须加上表示身份的名词，或是表示状态或性质的形容词才行。例如说“他是一个什么人”，后面就要接上名词的补语，若说“他是什么状态或性质”，便不能接名词，而要接形容词的补语了。到底要接名词或是要接形容词，在下笔之先必须想想才不会弄错，因为“他是一个学生”（He is a student.）是说明他的身份的，用上一个名词，当然简单明了，没有问题。至于“他在生病”，是说他的状态的，可就不能用名词了。如果用名词而译成 He is illness. 就是错的，必须改说为 He is ill. 才通，因为 illness 是名词，ill 才是形容词。表示状态或性质必须用形容词作补语，表示身份才用名词。用名词作补语的，我们可以说“他是学生”，同样也可以说“学生就是他”。但用形容词作补语时，我们却不能说“他是病”，当然“病也不是他”，用公式表出时，He = student. He≠illness. 中国语在形容词的尾上用一个“的”字，等于形容词的尾缀，这是很重要的。“他是勤快的”，或简单地说“他勤快”，英文译成 He is diligent. 中英文都是通顺的。如果说“他是勤快”，中文句子就不完善了，因为“勤快”是一个抽象名词，不是一个形容词，如果“他是勤快”，那么，岂不“勤快就是他”了。需知他并不等于勤快，一方是人，一方是一种性质，二者是不能相等的。英文也是一样，我们不能说 He is dligence. 因为 he 并不是 diligence，所以不可以用名词，中英文都要用形容词，中文用“勤快的”，英文要用 diligent 才对。

现在我们再举一例，来作进一步的说明。

（a）他是诚实的。（He is honest.）

（b）他是一个诚实的人。（He is an honest man.）

（a）句的补语是形容词（honest），（b）句的补语是名词（man）。（a）句是答复“他是怎样”的，所以说，他是诚实的；（b）句是答复“他是什么”的，所以说，他是人。因此，（a）句必须用形容词，如果说成 He is honesty. 就错了，因为他并不是诚实那回事。（b）句中的 honest 一字，只是用来修饰 man 的，不是主要的因素。（a）句中的 honest，便是补语，为四种要素之一。附带要注意的一点，man 是一个普通名词，依照文法的规定，普通名词如非用复数，就必须加冠词，所以，如果说成 He is man. 或 He is honest man. 就错了。一定要说 He is a man. 或 He is an honest man. 才行。如果补语的名词变成复数的话，这个冠词就用不着了，如：

（a）他是聪明的。（He is clever.）

（b）他是一个聪明的孩子。（He is a clever boy.）

（a）他们是聪明的。（They are clever.）

（b）他们是一些聪明的孩子。（They are clever boys.）

以上用作形容词或名词的补语，是与句中的主语有关的，所以又称主格补语。

上面已经说过，补语并不限于名词和形容词，其他的词类，都可以用作补语，只要那动词是不完全的。任何一个不完全的动词，都需要加上补语，不管那补语是一个怎样形式的字眼，其他词类用在补语的地位上即变成补语了。不过名词和形容词，仍是补语的两大因素，其他只能算是同等语。Noun-Element = Noun and Noun Equivalent. Adjective-Element = Adjective and Adjective Equivalent.

兹将可构成主格补语的字眼分类举出如下：

1. 名　词：He is a teacher.（他是教师。）

2. 代名词：It’s me.（是我。）

3. 形容词：We are ready.（我们准备好了。）

4. 副　词：He is out.（他出去了。）

5. 不定词：He seems to be honest.（他好像是诚实的。）

6. 分　词：I got hurt.（我受伤了。）

It is interesting.（这很有趣。）

7. 动名词：Seeing is believing.（看见才相信。）

8. 片　语：He is at home in history。（他精通历史。）

It is of no use to try further.（不用再干下去了。）

9. 子　句：The pen is where it was.（笔在原来的地方。）

上面说过 He is diligence. 一句是不通的，应说 He is diligent. 才可以，因为非用形容词不可，但英文的形容词，常可用“of + 名词”所构成的形容词片语来代替，如 useful 可用 of use 来代替，useless 可用 of no use 来代替，故上举第八项中的第二例，也可以说成 It is useless to try further. 所以上面说的 He is diligence. 那个不通的句子，只消加上一个“of”，而说成 He is of diligence. 也就通了。这个“of + 名词 ” = 形容词，也是常用的一种补语，再举数例如下：

这本杂志是很有用的。

This magazine is of great use.（ = very useful）

这些书对我毫无价值。

These books are of no value to me.（ = valueless）

有些没有形容词的名词，当然更要用 of-phrase 了，如

这些东西都是同样的价钱。

These articles are（of）the same price.

这两个茶杯是同样大小的。

These two cups are（of）the same size.

兹再将需要有主格补语的不完全自动词分别举例说明如下。需要主格补语的代表动词是“be”，此字原作“存在”解，用作动词时本身几乎没有什么意思，而只担承把主语和补语联系起来的任务罢了，从他这种任务来看，用方法上的专门术语说，叫做 Copula = linking verb（联系词）。在“be”以外的动词，也多少有带着 Copula 的任务的，所以这样的动词，也都要有补语才行。例如 lie ，意为“用某种状态躺着”，引申为“在某种状态中”；seem 意为“好像在某种状态中”；remain 意为“维持某种状态不变”。此外还有由变化而成为某种状态之意的自动词 become，grow 等，也可以作为需要补语的动词来用。

（一）用属于 be 一类的动词来翻译：

这朵玫瑰花很香。

This rose smells sweet.

这纸很粗糙。

This paper feels rough.

他那时看去好像耽于回想似的。

He looked reflective for a few moments.

他的声音听来好像很愤恨的样子。

His voice sounded resentful.

他好像不是寻常的乞丐。

He seemed no ordinary mendicant.

也像一切羞怯的人一样，他有时显得傲慢。

Like all shy men he sometimes appeared arrogant.

他直到四十岁都还没有结婚。

He remained unmarried till forty years old.

他醒来躺着很久才起床。

He lay awake a long time before getting up.

我很敬重他。

He stands high in my estimation.

他生为圣徒，死为烈士。

He lived a saint，and died a martyr.

（二）用属于 become 一类的动词来翻译：

那两个人一天天变得更亲密了。

The two were becoming more intimate every day.

我的预言成为事实了。

My prediction has come true.

那棵树长得越来越高了。

The tree grew taller and taller.

我希望他很快康复。

I hope he will get better（or recovered）soon.

他在不久的将来就会成为一个优秀的工人的。

He will make a capital workman one of these days.

于是他突然变得严肃了。

Then he suddenly fell grave.

我的头发变白了。

My hair has turned grey.

那狗发狂了。

The dog has run mad.

这个新发明会成为对全人类有用的吧。

This new invention will prove useful to all humanity.

一听那话她脸色登时变得苍白，直白到嘴唇了。

On hearing that，her face went white to the lips.

（三）为着要显示 seem 等字中所潜在的 Copula 的意味，不妨加上 to be 的字样进去。

鸟鸣山更幽。

It seems to be more lonesome in the mountains when birds are singing.

他显得很年轻。

He appears to be young.

那终会成功的。

It will prove to be successful.

那谣言变成事实了。

The rumour has turned out to be true.

如果你继续这样懒惰下去，你总有一天要后悔的。

If you continue to be idle，you will be sorry for it some day.

这类的自动词是可以反映出说话者的心情的，如 He seems to be ill. 一句话，是表示说话的人不愿直接肯定地说出 He is ill，而只是用 seems to be（好像是）作为推测之辞。

在第二句型的构造中，有下列十二种形式：

1. S. + be-V. + Noun：

Jack is a schoolboy.

2. S. + be-V. + Pronoun：

The umbrella is mine.

3. S. + be-V. + Adjective：

He is kind.

Your story is interesting.

4. S. + be-V. + to-Infinitive：

I am to start tomorrow.

5. S. + be-V. + -ed + to-Infinitive：

I am pleased to meet you.

6. S. + Vi. + Noun：

He became a merchant.

7. S. + Vi. + Adjective：

He got angry.

He looks happy.

8. S. + Vi. + -ing：

The boy came running.

He stood waiting for me.

9. S. + Vi. + -ed：

He looked pleased.

He went home disappointed.

10. S. + Vi. + Prep. + -ing：

The prices go on rising.

11. S. + Vi. + Adjective + to-Infinitive：

He felt very happy to see me elected.

It remains much to be done.

12. S. + Vi. + Adjective + that（if，whether，where，when，why，etc.）Clause：

I feel certain that he is coming with me.

Are you sure if（whether）John is going with us？

He looked blank when he was informed of his dismissal.

习题 2

试将下列各句译成英文，句中须采用不完全自动词。

1. 我们选择朋友时非十分谨慎不可。

2. 美国人好活动而富于独立精神。

3. 那大学的入学试题很难，我不知能否考取。

4. 她觉得有点窘，不知如何是好。

5. 良药苦口利于病。

6. 他立志坚定不移。

7. 他始终都用心在听讲。

8. 这个办法并不一定永远有效。

9. 真价常不能被人认识。

10. 世事尚待证明。

11. 他依然怏怏不乐，一声不响。

12. 她坐着沉思了好几分钟。

13. 他似乎知道那个事实。

14. 那以后他们就满足了。

15. 中国人的态度是对西方行为的一种反感。

16. 在世界上相距最远的东西两端的地方，经过多少世纪，实际上完全不知道彼此的存在。

17. 他的游记是一种非常有趣味的记录。

18. 很少旅行家的记录有马可·波罗写的那样生动，那样有内容的。

19. 似乎有稍加说明的必要。

20. 不做时代落伍的学生，对当前的出版物是不能忽视的。

（6）第三句型的他动构造

主语 + 述语 + 宾语

这是用完全他动词加上一个宾语而构成的句子。在这个句型中新出现的一个因素，就是宾语。构成宾语的，都是名词或名词同等语，例如：

1. Do you know Mr. Chang？（Noun）

2. I like him very much.（Pronoun）

3. I like to read.（Non Infinitive）

4. I like reading.（Gerund）

5. I know how to swim.（Noun Phrase）

6. I know that he is an honest man.（Noun Clause）

主语和宾语一定是非名词莫办的，因此我们可以说，任何字句一登上主语或宾语的宝座，它就变成名词了。

宾语并不一定是在动词后面的，有时也会跑到动词的前面去，如 What did Jack build？This is the ship that Jack built. 并不一定每次都如 Jack built a ship. 一样在动词后面。

他动词的宾语从意义上看，有三种不同的字汇。即：

一、为表示结果的宾语，如我们分明是在纸上写字，结果却写成了一封信，因而我们就说写信（write a letter）。再如我们挖土，结果挖成了一个洞，我们就说挖洞（dig a hole）。

二、为表示一般意义的宾语，有 things，matters 等，例如 If she is really bad，it simplifies things very much.（Galsworthy：Fraternity）（她要是真的坏，那事情倒简单多了。）

三、为模拟宾语（sham object）“it”。这是英文的一种惯用法，它本身根本没有什么意思，也不是专指一件什么事物，如 He lords it over his inferiors.（他对部下如君临一般高傲不堪。）If you are found out，you will catch it.（如果你被他们看到，你就要挨骂的。）

有些句子我们中文是要用自动词的，而英文则惯用他动词来说，因为我们很少用事物来作他动词的主语的，英文为说话求简起见，常爱以事物为主动者，这类造句很多和我们说法不同，宜加注意，例如：

你来此何事？

What has brought you here？ = What have you come here for？

从这条路去，就可以到火车站。

This road will take you to the station. = If you follow this road，you will get to the station.

什么事使他这样生气？

What made him so angry？ = Why did he get so angry？

你肯帮助我的话，我就一定会成功的。

Your assistance will make my success certain. = If you assist me，my success will be certain.

看到这个使我想起以前的好日子。

This reminds me of the good old days. = When I see this，I think of the good old days.

我们靠希望而生存。

Hope keeps us alive. = We live on by hope.

衣食足而后知礼仪。

Wealth enables men to be courteous. = If men have wealth，they are able to be courteous.

因为天气坏，我们未能动身。

Bad weather prevented us from starting. = We could not start because of the bad weather.

他动词后面所接用的宾语，中英两种语文的表现法也有不同的地方。现分五项将英文特异之处说明如下：

（一）具有“夺取”意义的动词

凡被夺取的目标，在中文的说法应该是“物”，而在英文则要说“人”。在被夺取的物品之前加一个“of”的介词，造成一个片语接在“人”的后面。

强盗抢了他的钱。

A highwayman robbed him of his money.

同样的用法还有下列种种情形。

他把海上的强盗一扫而光。

He cleared the sea of those robbers.

忧烦的习惯夺去了我们的和平和安乐。

The habit of worrying robs us of peace and comfort.

我学了很多，足以诊好我从前的好幻想的毛病。

I have learned enough to cure me of my old fancies.（Stevenson）

我将永远无法完全放弃这种感觉。

I shall never be able entirely to divest myself of this feeling.

国王剥夺了他一切的荣誉。

The king stripped him of all his honours.

他忘不了过去那种痛苦的回忆。

He could not rid himself of the painful memories.

你来了省得我去麻烦写一封长信。

Your coming relieves me of the bother of writing a long letter.

他只求自己获得享乐，不管是从谁夺取得来。

He does not care whom he deprives of enjoyment，so that he can obtain it.

（二）具有“供给”意义的动词

在英文的表现法中，不能直接把所供给的事物作为宾语，必须以介词 with 为媒介，才能说出那事物来。同时只有受到供给的人才能成为宾语。如“供给某人金钱”为 supply him with money，“车上载草”为 load a cart with straw，“在玻璃杯中倒满清水”为 fill the glass with water. “给人食物”为 provide a person with food，“供给我许多消息”为 furnish me with a lot of information，“把那本书呈献给他”为 present him with the book，“赐予接见”为 favour me with an interview，“把秘密告诉她”为 trust her with a secret 等等。

（三）具有“作成”意义的动词。那时句中的“of”所引出的名词，便是作成什么的材料，如“愚弄他”，英文说 make a fool of him，便是把他当作材料，作成一个愚人。又如“专攻英文”为 make a special study of English. 意即把英文当作材料来作出一种专门的研究。

（四）不把直接接受动作的人身上某一部分作为宾语，而要把那个人当作对象来说，是大处着眼的意思。

他轻拍我的背。

He patted me on the back.

他抓住我的衣领。

He seized me by the collar.

他命在旦夕。

Death stared him in the face.

他紧紧握着我的手，不让我走。

He held me by the hand firmly and would not let me go.

我抓住了他的胳膊。

I caught him by the arm.

他拖着我的衣袖。

He pulled me by the sleeve.

她打他一记耳光。

She strikes him across the face.

在受到动作的人体上某一部分的前面，一般只用冠词 the，不用人称所有格的形容词，如 my，his 等，但有时也可以用，不过用法稍古，如“她吻了他的面颊”说 She kissed him on his cheek. “他敢于用最温柔的态度执了她的手”说 He presumed in the gentlest manner to take her by her hand.（Lamb，Tales from Shakespeare）说 I caught him by the hand，英文的味道特别浓厚，若照中文的说法，改为 I caught his hand，也未尝不通，不过两者之间是有 nuance 的不同的。

（五）有许多动词我们中文都是作自动词用的，而英文却是他动词，后面要接宾语，例如：

不幸降临到他身上。

A misfortune befell him.

这种式样的衣服对你很适合。

This style of dress becomes you well.

二者大小相似。

They resemble each other in size.

半小时内我们就到槟城了。

We can reach Penang in half an hour.

据说那屋子有鬼。

They say ghosts haunt that house.

不要走进这房门去。

Don’t enter this room.

英文的自动词在下列四种情形中，便可当作他动词用，后面直接接上宾语：

1. 接用同系宾语（Cognate Object），如“他过了幸福的一生”（He lived a happy life.）2. 具有使动的意味（Causative Sense），如“农人种稻”（The farmer grows rice.）3. 接用介司（Preposition），如“你在看什么？”（What are you looking at？）4. 伴有补足字（Complement），如“我们时常谈一通夜”（We often talked the night away.）

1. 同系宾语

我做了一个奇怪的梦。

I dreamed a strange dream.

他一睡不醒。

He slept the sleep that knows no waking.

我打了一场好仗。

I have fought a good fight.（Bible）

他吐了一口气，才来念了祈祷文。

He sighed a sigh and prayed a prayer.（Scott）

不但自动词如此，他动词有时也可接用同系宾语，例如 tell a tale，sing a song，see a sight 等等。

在同系宾语上附有修饰形容词时，通例可换成态度副词（Adverb of Manner），如 live a long life = live long；live a happy life = live happily；die a natural death = die naturally；die a violent death = die by violence 等等。

有的宾语与动词不同语源，但意义相通，也可视为同类，如 run a race；run a course；run one’s career；fight a battle；blow a gale；strike a blow；ring a peal；wreak one’s vengeance 等等。

漠然无所指的宾语“it”，也可看做一种同系宾语，如

我决心奋斗到底。

I am determined to fight it out.（ = fight to the end）

安哲罗勋爵很有爵爷的神气。

Lord Angelo dukes it（ = plays the part of duke）well.（Shakespeare）

我已惯于栉风沐雨。

I am used to roughing it.

白人对土人如君临一般。

The whites lord it over the natives.

我们是生来为君王效犬马之劳的。

We are born to slave it for our lord.（Thackeray）

他到各地巡回演出。

He is starring it in the provinces.

我们不得不冒雨而行。

We had to walk it in the rain.

你能游泳过去吗？

Can’t you swim it？

在某些熟语中可将同系宾语略去，如 look thanks 为 look a look of thanks 之略。

他眼中现出言语无法表达的感谢。

He looked the thanks he could not express.

她以短剑相刺的目光望看我，而走出房间去了。

She left the room，looking daggers at me.

我问他是否满意，他点头表示首肯。

I asked if he was satisfied，and he nodded assent.

那人的字写得好吗？

Does the man write a good hand？

用最上级形容词时，多半也要把同系宾语略去。

那妇人在那个时候看去最美。

The lady was looking her best（look）.

她唱出她最好听的歌声来取悦他。

She sang her sweetest（song）to please him.

其他如 do one’s best（or utmost） = do all one can do（尽全力）；see the last of anything = see it no more（再也不见了）；hear the last of anything = hear of it no more（再无消息）；breathe one’s last = expire（呼出最后一口气，即死去）。

2. 含使动意

她把蜡烛竖在地板上。

She stood the candle on the floor.（Dickens）

我慢慢地带马走上小山。

I slowly walked my horse up the hill.

他们把船开到滩上去了。

They ran the ship aground.

他们使马泅水渡河。

They swam their horses across the river.

那船上挂出降旗。

The ship was flying the flag of truce.

下次满潮时船就可以浮起来了。

The next tide will float the ship.

巡洋舰把那运输船击沉了。

The cruiser sank the transport.

他们过分地酷使了那些马。

They work the horses too hard.

我躺下来好让两条疲惫的腿子休息一下。

I laid myself down to rest my wearied limbs.

3. 接用分词

怎样得到那个结果的呀？

How was the result brought about？

她在年轻的时候，追她的人很多。

She was much run after in her youth.

顽皮的孩子人人皱眉。

Everybody frowns at a naughty child.

越有越是想要。

Possession makes one wish for more.

愚人才不认错。

Fools persist in their error.

我不知道真有这样的人。

I do not know of any such man.

我不会把这问题一直讲下去的。

I shall not dwell on the subject at any length.

你最好有空的时候把那事情仔细想一下。

You had better think over the matter at your leisure.

我的母亲反对这门亲事。

My mother objects to the match.

娱乐不能妨害正事。

Pleasure must not interfere with duty.

4. 加补足字

做人不可醉生梦死。

One must not sleep or dream one’s life away.

睡眠能恢复疲劳。

You can sleep off your fatigue.

别的客人都走光了他还不走。

He sits out the other guests.

他能说服别人听从他的意见。

He can talk people over to his own views.

你自己去查字典吧。

Look up the word for yourself in the dictionary.

他们大叫把演讲者轰下台来。

They shouted down the orator.

他使我厌烦死了。

He bored me to death.

他向我说出种种道理，使我非答应不可。

He has reasoned me into compliance.

我说得他把原来的决定推翻了。

I have talked him out of his resolution.

在第三句型的构造中也有下列十一种形式：

1. S. + Vt. + Noun：

I keep a diary every day.

2. S. + Vt. + Pronoun：

They know us very well.

3. S. + Vt. + -ing：

I like playing tennis.

I do not advise your seeing him at this time.

4. S. + Vt. + Prep. + -ing：

Mrs Smith objected to our riding across the lawn.

The girl insists on going to the movies.

He persists in doing something in his own way.

5. S. + Vt. + to-Infinitive：

I like to play tennis with them.

6. S. + Vt. + what（whom，which） + to-Infinitive：

I don’t know what to do.

I don’t know what book to read.

We must know whom to choose.

I don’t know whom to go to.

Do you know which to choose？

Do you know which way to take？

7. S. + Vt. + how（when，where） + to-Infinitive：

You must learn how to swim.

We must decide when to start.

She will show where to sit.

8. S. + Vt. + that Clause：

I hear that he is in Singapore now.

9. S. + Vt. + what（who，whom，which）Clause：

I know what his name is.

I know what I must do.

Do you know what answer he made？

Do you know who he is？

Do you know whom we chose？

I cannot see which（which way）is better.

We don’t know which（which way）he took.

10. S. + Vt. + how（when，where，why）Clause：

I wonder how old that man is.

I know when（where）you were born.

No one knows why he did such a thing.

11. S. + Vt. + if（whether）Clause：

I wonder if it will rain tomorrow.

I don’t know whether the news is true or not.

习题 3

试将下列各句译成英文，句中须采用完全他动词。

1. 昨天的迎新会你出席了没有？

2. 苏君顺利地进了牛津大学。

3. 王君文官考试优等及第。

4. 我们要奋斗的话，就要奋斗到底。

5. 在印尼他们剥夺了华侨一切的财产。

6. 他把我所要的一切都给我了。

7. 他抓住我的手，不让我走。

8. 她假装对我朋友说话，实际是说给我听的。

9. 勤能补拙。

10. 我一定想要你来。

11. 他不用功，在学校里又混过了一年。

12. 我旅行时总是坐的三等。

13. 他讲演完毕时，听众大声喝采。

14. 他在夜里十一时十分钟断气。

15. 你能像那老人一样游过长江吗？

16. 我给了那可怜的孩子一点钱去买东西吃。

17. 她写了一封长信给我，谈到她的将来。

18. 我们讨论那个问题直到夜深。

19. 他承认她是对的。

20. 她提议我们应从头来过一次。

（7）第四句型的授与构造

主语 + 述语 + 间接宾语 + 直接宾语

这是在一句当中用两个宾语的造句法。普通的他动词只要有一个宾语就行了，但这种他动词却需要两个宾语，即除了直接的宾语外，还需要有一个间接的宾语。那个间接宾语，在拉丁文中称为与格（Dative Case），Dative 意为英文的 giving. 因此对于要有间接宾语的这一类的动词，就称为授与动词（Dative Verb）。英文与拉丁文不同，间接宾语与直接宾语并没有各自不同的形态，所以间接宾语并无所谓授与格的名称，不过形态虽同，在意味上却是有这种授与格的存在的，因此在英文中也仍然保留着 Dative 这个名称。

间接宾语通常是人，而直接宾语则通常是说的事物，如 That will save me a lot of trouble.（那将省我不少的麻烦。）但偶然也有间接宾语不是说人的，如 He allowed his imagination full play.（他任意胡思乱想。）

通常是把间接宾语放在直接宾语的前面的，但有时为着加强语气，或使意义更为明白起见，也可以把间接宾语移到直接宾语的后面去，不过在那时候，就得在间接宾语前加上“to”，“for”，“of”等介词，而把它做成介词片语，使之完全失去宾语的性质了，例如：

He gave me a book. = He gave a book to me.

He will buy me a knife. = He will buy a knife for me.

I wish to ask you a favour. = I wish to ask a favour of you.

He played our master a dirty trick. = He played a dirty trick on our master.

但两个宾语如果都是简短的代名词时，间接宾语即令移到直接宾语的后面去，也不要加用介词，如：

Her mother did not give it her.（她母亲并未把那个给她。）

We rather shrank back when she proffered it us.（Caskell，Cranford）（当她提出那个来的时候，我们都退缩了。）

间接宾语移到了直接宾语的后面仍不加介词，是因为省略掉了，而且只有在简短的代名词如 it，me，her，him 等时才可省略，不省当然是可以的，如说 Please give it to her.（美国说法）。省略后便成为 Please give it her.（英国说法）。凡遇到间接与直接二者全是短字，也可以说成 Please give her it. 但如直接宾语不是代名词而是名词时，要前后调动就非加介词不可，那时我们必须说：

Please give the book to her.

若照平常的次序说 Please give her the book. 当然是可以的。应该注意的是，我们不可以说 Please give the book her. 因为直接宾语不是代名词，故“to”不能略去。间接宾语为名词，而不是代名词时，也不能把“to”略去，如

I gave it to the beggar.

不能说 I gave the beggar it. 但可以说 I gave the beggar a coin. 或是 I gave a coin to the beggar.

如果间接与直接两种宾语的音价（phonetic value）相等，或直接的更轻，那么，还是要维持原来的次序的，如

I grudge him you.（Shaw）（我不肯把你交给他。）

Do not send me those.（Onions）（不要把那些东西送给我。）

Bring me him down like a ripe apple.（Stevenson）（把他当作一个熟透了的苹果一般，小心地带到我这儿来。）

Tell him this.（Onions）（把这件事告诉他。）

间接宾语多半是人，而且是受惠者：（a）他是获得什么东西，看到什么东西，或听到什么东西的人（the person to whom something is given，shown or told）；或是（b）别人为他做了什么的人（the person for whom something is done）。这便是间接宾语为数最多的两大类。间接宾语如果不是受惠者，如

He asked me a few questions.（他问了我几个问题。）

I can forgive him anything and everything.（一切我都可以赦免他。）

等句中的间接宾语，是不能得到任何利益的。这时节我们就不妨把两个宾语都看作直接宾语。

授与动词可以细分为四类，即授与（give）东西，告知（tell）事情，贡献（render）服务，及施行（perform）恩惠（有关得失的）。前三类中的间接宾语都可以加“to”改成介词片语，即 to-phrase，for-phrase（有的文法家将此视为一个间接宾语）等，如：

Give me the book. = Give the book to me.

Tell us a story. = Tell a story to us.

Do me a favour. = Do a favour to me.

唯有最后一类不能用“to”，要用表示目的的介词“for”来把间接宾语改写为介词片语，如

Get me a glass of water. = Get a glass of water for me.

这种用法的动词在现代英语中为数极少，如果在古代的话，则几乎任何动词上都可以加一个恩惠的授与格（Dative of Favour），如 Open me the door. 今则说 Open the door for me. 他如 Shakespeare 说的：Heat me these irons hot.（趁热为我打铁）等等都是的。

只有授与动词如 give，bring，teach，show，ask，send，make，lend，owe，tell，sell，cost，read，write，offer，pass，pay，promise，choose，find，leave，get，play，reach，sing 等，才能接用两个宾语，其他的他动词则只能接用一个宾语。今就同义的动词举例比较如下：

（a）We gave him a watch.（ = gave a watch to him）

（b）We presented him with a watch.（presented a watch to him）

（a）A litle was given him.

（b）A litle was conferred on him.

（a）He teaches us English.

（b）He instructs us in English.

（a）He asked me a question.

（b）He put a question to me.

1. 有授与意味的授与动词——兹就其惯用句法例示如下：

我在一个月前通知他解职。

I have given him a month’s warning（notice）.

我当面责备他是撒谎。

I gave him the lie in his throat.

公平地说，敌人是勇敢的。

To give the devil his due，the enemy are quite brave.

接到来函使我大为高兴。

Your letter has afforded me much pleasure.

他每月给他儿子五百元。

He allows his son five hundred dollars a month.

我在他头上给以重重的一击。

I struck him a hard blow on the head.

我将尽量给你帮助。

I’ll lend you all the assistance in my power.

他传言说要来。

He has sent us word that he is coming.

如果有什么信件寄来请转给我。

Please forward me any letter that may come.

他答应给我职务。

He has promised me an appointment.

我去烹点茶来给你喝。

I will make you some tea.（ = I will make some tea for you.）

她自制了一袭新衣。

She made herself a new dress.（ = She made a new dress for herself.）

她为他做一个好妻子。

She made him a good wife.（Cf. 她会成为一个好妻子的。译成 She will make a good wife. 句中的 make = become. 此句为第二句型，即“主语 + 述语 + 补语”。）

2. 有告知意味的授与动词：

王先生教我们的英文。

Mr. Wang teaches us English.

请你告诉我去车站的路好吗？

Will you please show me the way to the station？

孩子们要我讲故事给他们听。

The children want me to tell them a story.

你唱支歌给我听吧，在我离去之前。

Sing me a song before I leave.

让我把他刚来的信念给你听。

Let me read you his letter just received.

3. 有贡献意味的授与动词：运动是对你有益的。

Exercise will do you good.

喝少量的酒是无害的。

A little wine will do you no harm.

公平地说一句，他并不是坏人。

To do him justice，he is not a bad man.

请你帮我一个忙好吗？

Will you do me a favour？

在我贫困时，他给了我不少的帮助。

He has rendered me great help in time of need.

4. 有得失意味的授与动词：

我去替你买张戏票来。

I will get you a ticket.

你有了这张票即可入场。

This ticket will gain you admission.

我要尽量使你获得好的条件。

I will try to procure you the best terms I can.

那本书使他出了名。

The book won him a reputation.

他太迟钝了，以致失掉了那个机会。

His slowness lost him the chance.

5. 还有一种变则的授与动词，是只有间接宾语而无直接宾语的，与文法原则相反，故称变则。

这件衣服你穿了很合适。

The dress becomes you very well.

年轻人宜彬彬有礼。

Modesty becomes a young man.

我已有准备来应付可能到来的最坏的情形。

I am prepared for the worst that can befall me.

这幢房子花了我三万元。

This house cost me thirty thousand dollars.

你多久才把英文学好的？

How loog did it take you to master English？

这件衣我穿了五年。

This coat has lasted me five years.

我的英文知识给了我很大的用场。

My knowledge of English stood me in good stead.

在第四句型的构造中有下列三种形式：

1. S. + Vt. + Noun（Pronoun） + Noun：

I gave John（him）the book.

I bought John（him）the book.

I asked John（him）the question.

2. S. + Vt. + Noun（pronoun） + how（when，where，what，which） + to-Infinitive：

I taught John（him）how to drive a car.

Did he tell you when to start？

Please show me where to find them.

He told me what to do next.

He showed me which（which way）to choose.

3. S. + Vt. + Noun（pronoun） + that（what，which，who，how，when，where，why，if，whether）Clause：

He told me that he did not know it.

He asked me what was the right way to do it.

Will you tell me which（which book）you have read？

He does not tell me who is going with us.

He does not tell us whom he is going to bring.

He asked me how（where，when，why）I was going to do it.

Will you ask him if（whether）he is coming with us？

习题 4

试将下列各句译成英文，句中须采用授与动词。

1. 只有人类有天赋的说话才能。

2. 他让了座位给她。

3. 他父亲留给他一大笔遗产。

4. 我把那钱付给他了。

5. 我来把信念给你听。

6. 你给我唱一支中国歌好吗？

7. 我很羡慕你运气好。

8. 我很恭维了他。

9. 敬祝成功愉快。

10. 我很抱歉给你许多麻烦。

11. 他们甚至连极微薄的报酬都不给我。

12. 我希望你不至拒绝我的请求。

13. 旅客只许带三十磅的行李。

14. 中国古话说，女子无才便是德。

15. 他们对自己的国家没有一点责任感。

16. 她要不是为着对她孩子的爱她就愿意死去。

17. 我并不羡慕阔人的财富，那使他们非常忧烦。

18. 公平地说一句，他一直是一个好丈夫，也是一个好父亲。

19. 那个恶棍长久逃避追捕终于落网。

20. 微物请赐哂纳为幸。

（8）第五句型的不完全他动构造

主语 + 述语 + 宾语 + 补语

这是英文造句中四种要素具备的句型。句中的他动词是不完全的，所以有了宾语，还是不能使意念完全，必得再加上一个补语才行。例如：

他使父母快乐。

He made his parents happy.

句中的 he 是主语，made 是述语，his parents 是宾语，happy 是补语。因为这个述语是不完全他动词，所以单有宾语不够，还得加上补语。这种动词英文又称 Factitive Verb（作为动词）。这个 factitive 意为 making 因为它是有所作为的。照普通的话说，它能使人做什么，使人变得怎样，比方说“人们选举他为市长”，就是使他做市长。“儿子使父母快乐”，就是使父母变得快乐。“我们叫他傻瓜”，就是使他成为傻瓜。诸如此类，都是表示作为、使成、变得等的意思。

We named him John.（ = He was named John.）

They call him Jack.（ = He is usually called Jack.）

They appointed him governor.（ = He was appointed governor.）

They elected Washington president.（ = Washington was elected president.）

They crowned William king.（ = William was crowned king.）

由于上面的这些例子，可见在“作为动词”后的宾语，都含有被动的意思，这就是“作为”的结果。使动是可以包括在被动中的，如云 He made his parents happy. = His parents were made happy. 意即他的父母被使快乐，被儿子使他们快乐。

我们还记得在第二句型的不完全自动构造中，也是需要采用补语的，即是说不完全自动词与不完全他动词，都需要有补语以完全文句的意念，不过前者为主格补语，后者为宾格补语，比较如下：

不完全自动与主格补语

She became（was made）his wife.

She became（was made）happy.

不完全他动与宾格补语

He made her his wife.

He made her happy.

宾格补语也和主格补语一样，可分 Noun-Element（名词及其同等语）和 Adjective-Element（形容词及其同等语）两大类。还可细分如下九项：

1. They appointed Nelson admiral.（Noun）

2. I believed it him.（Pronoun）②

3. He painted the house green.（Adjective）

4. What time do you expect her back？（Adverb）

5. I have always found him to be a true friend.（Infinitive）

6. I kept him waiting.（Present Participle）

7. We call such a way of life “eating the bread of idleness”.（Gerund）

8. I found everything in good condition.（Phrase）

9. We have made him what he is.（Clause）

他动词中可作“作为动词”用的有 make，elect，think，have，keep，find，leave，create，show，appoint，name，suppose，call，prove，believe，imagine 等字，而某些形容词或名词前后加“en”时，也可作成具有作为意味的动词，如

To enable = to make able

To enfeeble = to make feeble

To weaken = to make weak

To strengthen = to make strong

To lengthen = to make longer

To shorten = to make shorter

To widen = to make wider

To harden = to make hard

To soften = to make soft

To broaden = to make broad or broader

上举的“作为动词”中有些字如 find，think，show，prove 等，实际原来是不定词构造（Infinitive Construction）的省略形，即：

We supposed him 〔to be〕 dead.

We found him 〔to be〕 alive.

You must show yourself 〔to be〕 a gentleman.

He has proved himself 〔to be〕 worthy of confidence.

在这种句型中有时因声调的关系，常要在宾语地位上用“it”来代替不定词，而将不定词移到别处去，因为 to be 作补语用固可，作宾语用就有些拗口，应加用一个代名词的“it”进去，才合乎惯用语法，如

我觉得这样做是我的义务。

一句，如译为 I think to do so my duty. 则不顺口，应改为

I think it my duty to do so.

才妥。又加

我认为那个要实行很难。

一句，如译为 I found to put it in practice very difficult 则不顺口，应译为

I found it very difficult to put it in practice.

才合乎英语的惯用法（usage）。

同是一个他动词可用作完全他动，也可用作不完全他动，如

（a）I found the book easily.

（b）I found the book easy.

在（a）句中的 found 为完全他动词，easily 为修饰动词的副词，全句意为“很容易地找到了那本书”。在（b）句中的 found 为不完全他动词，在宾语外，还得加一个补语，意念才能完全。第二句意为“这本书我读了觉得很容易”，即容易读懂的意思。easy 是修饰 book 的，原是说 I found the book was easy，略去了 was 便成此型，而那主格补语便成为宾格补语了。比较：

（a）I believed the untrue report.（完全他动词）

（b）I believed the report untrue.（不完全他动词）

（a）I make a point of siding with the weaker party.（完全）

（b）I make it a rule to side with the weaker party.（不完全）

（a）I made a workbox out of it.（完全）

（b）I made it into a workbox.（不完全）

英文还可以说成这样的妙语：She made him a good husband because she made him a good wife.（因为她成为他的好妻子，所以也把他做成了好丈夫）。前面一个 made 是作为动词，后面一个 made 是授与动词。

1. 认识动词，即有心灵感觉（mental perception）的动词，其宾格补语主要是表示性质的，如 think，consider，call，believe，imagine，find，prove 等。在那宾格与补语之间，有时可以加上“to be”的字眼，例如：

我素来认为他是诚实的。

I have always thought him honest.

军队觉得在酷热下进军几不可能。

The troops found it almost impossible to march in the great heat.

那孩子走出学校进入社会时，并不以为统治是荒诞的，权威是可笑的。

When he leaves school and enters the world，the boy is not disposed to consider rule absurd and authority ridiculous.

他确实不是邪恶的，不过人们易于想像他的性格是柔弱的。

Vicious he could assuredly not be，but one easily imagined him weak in character.

从那种娱乐的形式看来，好像可以判明他的诚实。

Such a form of pastime seems to prove him sincere.

2. 感觉动词，即有身体感觉（physical perception）的动词，有 see，hear，feel，want，wish，like，hold，keep，leave，have，wear 等。

现今我觉得我的生活有说不出的空虚。

Now I feel my life unspeakably empty.

他们都指望我死，想得我的钱。

They all want me dead，and are hankering for my money.（Thackeray，Vanity Fair）

她回答说她完全满足于现况，不再想望别的什么。

She replied that she was quite contented and wished nothing different.

她披头散发。

She wore her hair loose.

那消息使得我漠然地感到不安。

The news left me vaguely uneasy.

她请医生替她检查了眼睛。

She had her eyes examined by the doctor.

3. 有些作为动词，在宾格补语之前，有加上一个“as”的必要。这个“as”是专为那动词而添附的，并无特殊意义。

她认为从那个根源可以产生任何好的事情出来，并非寻常的现象。

She regarded it as extraordinary that anything good could come from that source.（Gissing，Life’s Morning）

他们认为已经绝望，就把他放弃了。

They gave him up as hopeless.

我认为他是一个很诚实的人。

I esteem him as a very honest man.

有人解释说，这个是有伤达克夫人的人格的。

Some persons understood this as an imputation on Mrs Ducker.

从许多随笔家及杂文家中，选出这些人作为最能代表维多利亚朝的特征的。

These were selected，from among many essayists and miscellaneous writers，as most typical of the Victorian Age.

在谈论她的时候，巴氏夫妇说她羞怯那是不错的。

The Boxendales were not wrong in discussing her as shy.（Gissing，Life’s Morning）

4. 有些宾格补语是表示由那动作的结果而产生的状态。这类动词多半有使动意味（make，render，set，drive 等），或表示一般的动作（strike，beat，shoot，fold 等）。

我要解除他的一切困难。

I will set all his troubles right.

我在那种地方看到她，真使我惊讶得哑口无言。

I was struck dumb with astonishment at the sight of her in such a place.

休士那个家伙是可以做出很卑鄙的行为的。

That fellow Hughs could make himself quite nasty.（Galsworthy，Fraternity）

他决心对公众开放他那美丽的花园。

He decided to throw open his own beautiful gardens to the people.

你那感恩戴德之心，使你不可能对你的恩人做出这种事来。

Your gratitude should have rendered you incapable of such conduct towards your benefactor.

5. 反身自动词如要宾格补语时，也像作为动词时一样，那补语是表示动作的结果所产生的状态的。

他说话把声音都说哑了。

He talked himself hoarse.

大多数的人在那种情形中是欲罢不能的——他们都喝得烂醉如泥。

Most people in that state can’t stop—they drank themselves dead drunk.（Galsworthy，Motley）

他们谈得睡着了。

They talked themselves asleep.

我们必须摆脱这种古老的伤感的想法。

We have got to shake ourselves free of the old sentimental notions.

“啊，我只是要求一点——请你清醒过来听我说话。”

“Why，this is what I want—and just shake yourself sober and listen，will you？”（Eliot，Silas Marner）

6. 在采取宾格补语的他动词中，如 see，原是指“看到的状态”，现在却变成指“看到的时候”，而在状态上加有时间的意味了。

我还会再见到他活着的人吗？

Shall I see him again alive？

我记得他年轻的时候。

I remember him young.（Lawrence，White Peacock）

她看到他的时候，他是年轻、骄傲、而又强壮的，现在他已年老，疲惫不堪，样子可怕，而已经死了。

She saw him young，and proud，and strong，and now he was old，and worn，and horrible，and dead.（Bennett，Old Wives’ Tale）

在第五句型的构造中有下列九种形式。

1. S. + Vt. + Noun（Pronoun） + Noun（Pronoun）：

I thought him an honest man.

I thought your brother you.

2. S. + Vt. + Noun（Pronoun） + Adjective：

Her words made the man（him）angry.

3. S. + Vt. + Noun（Pronoun） + -ing：

I saw John（him）entering the room.

4. S. + Vt. + Noun（Pronoun） + -ed：

This word made his master（him）very pleased.

5. S. + Vt. + Noun（Pronoun） + to-Infinitive：

I want John（him）to come here at once.

6. S. + Vt. + Noun（Pronoun） + zero-Infinitive：

No one can make John（him）do the work.

Will you please let me go in his place？

I did not see anyone（him）enter the room.

7. S. + Vt. + Noun（Pronoun） + as + Adjective（Noun）：

They represented him as reliable.

We will consider Hamlet as an example of a Shakespearian tragedy.

8. S. + Vt. + Noun（Pronoun） + Prep. + Noun：

He put his affairs in order.

I found him in good health.

We consider this of the essence of the English character.

I thought it of no use.

He has set a new scheme on foot.

I mistook him for my brother.

Please make yourself at home.

9. S. + Vt. + Noun（Pronoun） + Clause：

He has made the company what it is today.

Call it what you will.

这五种句型只是一些不同的表达方式而已，所以我们可以用来表达同样的一个意思，如

战争使我们的生意萧条。

（1st pattern）Our business has suffered not a little through the war.

（2nd pattern）The effect upon our business of the war has been striking.

（3rd pattern）The war has affected our buisiness to a remarkable extent.

（4th pattern）The war has done our business much harm.

（5th pattern）The war has rendered our business dull.

习题 5

1. 美国人民决不会选举一个黑人做总统的。

2. 他们选举王君为议员。

3. 户外运动使我们心身强健。

4. 世人都以为他正直，实则他是一个骗子。

5. 我吃过晚饭照例出去散步一回。

6. 在别人没有注意的时候，他走出那房间去了。

7. 我换了一张新牌照，又有三年好用。

8. 我们发现他躺在马路边上。

9. 他们正在我园里偷水果，我把他们抓住了。

10. 我们的身体和衣服都要保持清洁，以免生病。

11. 那叫作所答非所问。

11. 我认为他说的不适切。

13. 我感觉到那问题很难解决。

14. 我认为把那件事情守秘密是贤明的。

15. 荀爽以御李（膺）为荣。

16. 我把他看做我的恩人。

17. 他把国家的情形说得十分令人慨叹。

18. 他们把她描写成天仙一般的美女。

19. 他的英文极好。

20. 我国向来尊重学问。

①当然不限于第一句型，任何句型，任何复杂的文句，都可分成两个部分，例如 The boy who just came in，the one in the blue suit，I studied English in Canada for two years when he was a child.

②I believed it（to be）him. 的 to be him 为 believed 的 Objective Complement，而 him 又是 be 的 Complement，用的 Objective Case. 其 Passive Voice 的 It was believed to be he. 中的 to be he，是 was believed 的 Subjective Complement，而 he 又是 be 的 Complement，用的 Nominative Case. 他例如：We suspected the intruders to be them. The intruders were suspected to be they. 在 to be 的后面是主格和宾格都可以接用的。

贰　由构造来分的造句

（1）用单句来翻译

所谓单句，英文叫作 Simple Sentence，是在一个句子中，只包含得有一个主语和一个述语的，例如

Birds sing.（鸟鸣。）

What have you been doing？（你在做什么？）

What beautiful hair that little girl has!（那小女孩有多么美丽的头发呀!）

单句并不一定是很短的，有时因为修饰语加多了，也可以把句子拉得很长，现举几个例子如下：

Nearly all the boys in this class go somewhere for the summer.（几乎班上所有的学生都要到什么地方去过暑假。）

They saw a burning house，standing a little distance from the road，with some stately fir-trees in the foreground.（他们见到离开大路不远的地方，有一幢房子起火了。在那房子前面长得有一排森森的枞树。）

Caught in a shower on his way to his house in Lloyd Road，a tall English gentleman，a teacher of English in one of the most flourshing private schools in Singapore，began running，with some books under his arm，in order to catch a bus going at full speed about twenty yards ahead of him.（一个身材高大的英国人，是新加坡顶发达的一间私立学校的英文教员，在回返劳益路他的住宅去的途中，遇到了骤雨，他手臂下夹着几本书，开始向前跑，想去搭乘在他二十码光景前面以全速力在开行的那辆巴士车。）

我们由中文翻译英文的时候，应运用英文各种惯用的句法，采取各种不同的方式，即以单句而论，也是有许多方式可以用来把句子扩大的：（一）用补语的，（二）用宾语的，（三）用形容词或副词的，（四）用动词片语的，（五）用独立片语的，（六）用副词片语的，（七）用介词片语的，（八）用名词片语的，（九）用代名词片语的，（十）用分词片语的。所以在主语和述语以外，还可以增加许许多多的字句，因为上述十种方式，并不限于一句只许用一种，我们同时可以用上好几种，如上举最后的一个例句，caught in a shower 是分词片语，a tall English 是形容词，a teacher of English 是同格名词，running 是宾语，with some books under his arm 是副词片语，in order to catch a bus 是介词片语，going at full speed 是形容词片语等等，所以原来只有主语 gentleman 和述语 began 两个字，现却拉长到五十五个字了。

（一）用补语的

不完全的动词必须有补语，才能使句子表达出一个完全的意念来。自动词用主格补语，他动词用宾格补语。

（a）主格补语

他看去很年轻。

He looks young.

华盛顿小时是一个好孩子。

Washington was a good boy.

中国是要养儿防老的。

In China a son should be the staff of his parents’ old age.

（b）宾格补语

人民选举他做总统。

People elected him president.

他使国家富强了。

He made his country wealthy and powerful.

（二）用宾语的

英文的他动词是要加上宾语才能成句的。用宾语的句子可分下列六种译法：

（a）用一个宾语

除你以外我没有朋友。

I have no friend but you.

天生丽质。

Nature has molded her form and features with masterly touch.

（b）用两个宾语

那老人讲一些有趣的故事给我们听。

That old man tells us amusing stories.

一磅烟丝只够他吸两个礼拜。

A pound of tobacco only lasts him a fortnight.

（c）用表结果的宾语（Object of Result）

她点燃了一把火。

She lights a fire.

他在木板上钻了一个洞。

He bores a hole in the plank.

我在那上面画了一朵花。

I painted a flower on it.

（d）用同系宾语（Cognate Object）

他发出了一声短促的苦笑。

He laughed a little short ugly laugh.

他过着一种凄凉寂寞的生活。

He is living a sad and lonely life.

（e）用反身宾语（Reflexive Object）

他在晚会上感到很快乐。

He enjoyed himself at the party.

你应利用图书馆的书。

You should avail yourself of the books in the library.

（f）用保留宾语（Retained Object）

凡有间接和直接两个宾语的文句，如由主动改为被动时，通常有两种说法，即每次只能用一个宾语，间接的或直接的，作为主语，其未用作主语的，就称为保留宾语，如

我给了那孩子一支自来水笔。

I gave the boy a fountain pen.

如将上句改为被动时态，则有下列两种形式：

The boy was given a fountain pen by me.

A fountain pen was given the boy by me.

（三）用形容词或副词的

（A）用形容词的，又可分为（a）叙述的用法，（b）限定的用法，（c）名词的用法，（d）副词的用法，（e）同格的用法五种译法。

（a）叙述的用法（Predicative Use）

这朵玫瑰花是红的。

This rose is red.

他对那结果感到满意。

He was content with the result.（Cf. contented）

这不值得那样麻烦。

It is not worth the trouble.（Cf. worthy）

专限于叙述用法的形容词有：ill（Cf. sick），well（Cf. healthy），glad，sorry，exempt 等，其他还有以“a-”开头的字，如 alone，asleep，awake，afraid，alike，ashamed，akin 等，例如：He was fast asleep.（熟睡）也多半只有叙述用法。

（b）限定的用法（Attributive Use）

这是一朵红玫瑰花。

This is a red rose.

知足常乐。

A contented person is happy with his status quo.

他找到一个敢于和他相抗的敌人。

He found a worthy enemy.

儿童教育必须由所能聘到的最好的教师来施行。

The education of children must be conducted by the best D instructors.

没有一件伟大的事不是由热忱来做成的。

Nothing great was ever achieved without enthusiasm.（Emerson）

（c）名词的用法（Noun Use）

他有审美的眼光。

He has an eye for the beautiful.

阔人也有他们的苦恼。

The rich have their troubles too.

级长阻止强者欺侮弱者。

The monitors hinder the strong from bullying the weak.

她是一个俗气的富婆。

She’s one of the vulgar rich.（Gissing）

他对周围老少的人群投以一瞥。

He cast a look at the crowd of old and young about him.（对称时可略去冠词）

（d）副词的用法（Adverbial Use）

他们平安到达了。

They arrived safe.（ = They were safe when they arrived. 句中的 safe 为补语）

红颜薄命。

He died young.（ = He was young when he died. 句中的 young 为补语）

我很想对你做得诚实一点。

I want to act honest with you.

看得轻松一点吧。

Take it easy.

我大为吓到了。

I’m awful frightened.

那会很合我的式。

That will suit me fine.

（e）同格的用法（Appositive Use）

一个饥饿疲惫的猎户睡在床上。

A hunter，hungry and exhausted，slept on the bed.

他又忧伤又疲倦，慢慢地走回家去了。

Sad and weary，he slowly walked home.

他老是神经过敏，这时尤其如此。

Always sensitive，he was especially so at this moment.（Gissing）

她的面貌虽不难看却很平凡。

Her features，though not plain，were insignificant.（Austen）

仍然是绿的叶子被风吹得从灌木篱笆上飘落下来。

The leaves，still green，were tossed off the hedgerow trees by the wind.

（B）用副词的，又可分为（a）修饰动词、形容词或其他副词，（b）修饰名词或代名词，（c）修饰副词片语，（d）修饰全句，（e）作形容词用，（f）作名词用，（g）作补语用七种译法。

（a）修饰动词、形容词或其他副词：

她听了那笑话开心地大笑。

She laughed heartily at the joke.

我现在已准备好了。

I am ready now.

她英语说得非常好。

She speaks English remarkably well.

（b）修饰名词或代名词：

这事小孩子也能做。

Even a child can do it.

圣人也不免有过。

Even Homer sometimes nods.

只有你能猜。

Only you can guess.

已有大批人聚集在那里了。

Quite a crowd had already gathered there.

唯有约翰知道这事。

John alone knows about it.

你还要什么？

What else do you want？

我也有烦心的事。

I，too，have troubles.

（c）修饰副词片语：

我们及时到达。

We arrived just in time.

我在战争结束后随即来到新加坡。

I came to Singapore soon after the war.

正十时关大门。

The gate is shut exactly at 10 o’clock.

他差不多快渡过河去了。

He is almost across the river.

他旅行了世界一周。

He has traveled entirely around the world.

（d）修饰全句：

简单地说，事实就是这样。

Briefly the facts are these.

很幸运地我去时他正在家。

Fortunately I found him at home.

确实你是错了。

Certainly you are in the wrong.

他愚笨地把那鹅杀了。

He foolishly killed the goose.

那真是一个好计划。

That is an excellent plan indeed.

（e）作形容词用：

这是下行车吗？

Is this a down train？

在那边那位绅士是他的父亲。

That gentleman there is his father.

我在归途中遇到了他。

I met him on my way back.

从这件事产生的不愉快情形，和吃了大肉的早餐，可能就是他对一般世界失去希望的原因吧。

The unpleasant circumstances resulting from this together with heavy meat breakfasts，may probably have contributed to his desponding views of the world generally.（Eliot）

他一切都完了。

All is over with him.

我们一定要想办法赶走这些苍蝇。

We must do something to keep the flies off.

他把袜子穿反了。

He put on his socks wrong side out.

（f）作名词用：

从这儿去有多远？

How far is it from here？

今天是我生日。

Today is my birthday.

那个描写了人生的浮沉。

It described the ups and downs of life.

（g）作补语用：

火熄灭了。

The fire is out.

战争结束了。

The war is over.

蔷薇开了。

The roses are out.（ = open）

幕已揭开。

The curtain was up.

（四）用动词片语的

英文动词除单字（如 come 等）及群字（如 will come 或 will have come 等）外，还有动词片语（verb phrase），那是动词和其他词类，尤其是名词，结合而成的一种片语，常另具特殊意义，所以我们特别列成一项，来供翻译时采用。

你不应该拿你小弟弟们来开玩笑。

You should not make fun of your little brothers.

明天市公会堂要举行音乐会。

A concert is to take place at the town hall tomorrow.

我们没有钱就生活不了。

We cannot get along without money.

他赶不上班。

He couldn’t keep up with the class.

我期待着你的回信。

I look forward to receiving your reply.

你必得把所作的决定重新加以考虑。

You must think better of your resolution.

我规定在晚饭前出外散步一回。

I make a point of taking a walk before supper.

我不作弄天真老实的人。

I don’t play a trick on innocent people.

他的脚有什么毛病。

He has something the matter with his foot.

我和那件事没有关系。

I have nothing to do with the matter.

（五）用独立片语的

独立片语有三种，有用独立不定词构成的，有用独立分词构成的，有用独立介词构成的。兹分别采用翻译如下：

（a）独立不定词。这是用来修饰全句的。从文法上讲，它和主句毫无联系。

老实说，我并不喜欢他。

To tell the truth，I do not like him.

他可谓一部活辞典。

He is，so to speak，a walking dictionary.

使事情更糟的，天又下起雨来了。

To make the matter worse，it began to rain.

此外还有 to speak candidly，to be frank with you，to be sue，to return to the subject，to be brief，to make a long story short，strange to say，needless to say 等等。

（b）独立分词。这个与主语无任何文法上的关系，其形式有下列三种：

1. 分词前带有意味上的主语的

太阳落山，孩子们回家去了。

The sun having set，the children went home.

有他在此，便无危险。

He being here，there is no danger.

工作做完，他们就回家了。

The work done，they left for home.

春天来了，我们到公园去散步。

Spring coming on，we go to gardens to take a walk.

他是我的长辈，我应当尊敬他。

He being my elder，I should respect him.

2. 无人称的独立分词

严格地说，他并不算一个爱国者。

Strictly speaking，he is not a patriot.

以他的年龄而论，他是够聪明的了。

Considering his age，he is very clever.

从各方面来考虑，他的命运是幸福的。

Taking all things into consideration，his lot is a happy one.

其他如 judging from，talking of，等皆是。3. 由 with 引导的独立分词

那小妇人慢慢前进，眼睛恶意地盯在那张粉红色的纸上。

The little woman advanced slowly with her eyes fixed malevolently on the pink paper.（Wells）

这个小村庄是位于平坦雄伟的牧场和麦田的中央，前有一列白杨树在风中摇曳。

This little village was set midst flat breadths of pasture and corn-lands，with long lines of poplars on the foreground bending in the wind.

（c）由表感情上之结果（resulting emotion）的“to”所引导的独立片语。

使我喜慰的，我发觉他还活着。

To my joy，I found him alive.

使我吃惊的，他居然把一切都说出来了。

To my surprise，he confessed everything.

使我失望的，他竟不同意我的计划。

To my disappointment，he did not consent to my plan.

使我满意的，是他终于解决了那个问题。

To my satisfaction，he has solved the problem at last.

使他悲伤的，他知道他父亲去世了。

To his sorrow，he learned that his father was dead.

（六）用副词片语的

当心地写。

Write it with care.

天黑了，我们才回家。

We came home after dark.

他现在住在本村。

He lives in this village at present.

亲切地对待他。

Treat him with kindness.（ = kindly）

我出外散步去了。

I went out for a walk.

他们匆匆回家了。

They went home in a hurry.

我们努力用功以求考取。

We work hard to pass the examination.

这本书太难懂。

This book is too difficult to understand.

（七）用介词片语的

介词片语有两种形式皆可用来翻译。一种是介词片语（preposition phrase），另一种是介词的片语（prepositional phrase）。所谓介词片语是一个名词或形容词前后都有介词而构成的片语，如 by means of，on account of，at the mercy of，for the purpose of，in return for，in respect to，in love with 等等，而所谓介词的片语，则为介词加名词。其中的名词实为那个介词的宾语，如 of diligence，in my hand，with pleasure 等等，其功用可修饰名词，有时也可修饰动词。

（a）介词片语

他因生病，所以没有来。

He did not come on account of illness.

他们远赴台湾。

They went as far as Formosa.

贾克由于不屈不挠的精神而获得成功。

Jack succeeded by dint of perseverance.

思想由言语表达。

Thoughts are expressed by means of words.

旅人以驴代马。

The traveller is using an ass as a substitute for a horse.

他和她结婚是看上了她的财产。

He married her with an eye to her fortune.

我喜欢小黑（狗名），是因为它的头脑好。

I love Blackie for the sake of his sense.

他想要建房子，所以买了一块地皮。

He has bought a piece of land with a view to building a house.

（b）介词的片语

一个品行优良的人受人尊敬。

A man of good character is to be respected.

凡 of + abstract noun = adjective，of use = useful，of diligence = diligent，of freedom = free，of security = secure，of importance = important，of wisdom = wise，of kindness = kind，of beauty = beautiful 等等。

苹果放在篮子里。

The apples are in the basket.

国王死后政府改变了很多。

After the king’s death，many changed were made in the government.

玛丽对他那样不客气使我感到羞辱。

I am mortified by Mary’s treating him so unkindly.

那个大建筑工程已经开始五年了。

The great structure has been under construction about five years.

他的语言教授法是最新式的。

He is very up to date in his methods of language teaching.

我们吃点鹿肉换个口味。

Let us have venison for a change.

一个健康的人一般都是乐天的。

A healthy man，as a general rule，is optimistic.

（八）用名词片语的

凡作名词用的片语，便是名词片语，例如：

他是一个诚实的人。

He is an honest man.

狮为万兽之王。

The lion is the king of beasts.

我喜欢打网球。

I like to play tennis.

我不晓得要怎样办。

I did not know what to do.

教育部批准了他出国深造。

The Ministry of Education has ratified his going abroad for higher studies.

母亲很高兴，他这样快回家。

Mother rejoiced at his coming home so soon.

（九）用代名词片语的

夫妻应当互助。

Husband and wife should help each other.

人们喜欢互殴。

People like to fight one another.

（十）用分词片语的

（a）用现在分词的

在路上走着，我遇见了一个老朋友。

Walking along the street，I met an old friend.

因为疲倦了，他躺下睡一会儿。

Being tired，he lay down to sleep.

用趾尖行走，我蹑足走到了他的背后。

Walking on tiptoe，I approached him behind.

说完这个他递了一封信给我。

Saying this，he handed a letter to me.

向右转弯，你就可看到你要找的屋子。

Turning to the right，you will find the house you are looking for.

他说英语，时常说错。

He often makes mistakes when speaking English.

情侣的时间是很长的，虽则感觉很短。

For lovers’ hours are long，though seeming short.

（b）用过去分词的

划船划得疲倦了，我一定要休息一下。

Fatigued with rowing，I must have a rest.

极其细心建筑出来的这些庙宇，是不容许加以冒渎的。

Built with infinite care，the temples are not allowed to desecrate.

习题 6

试用英文单句译出下列各句：

1. 太阳落山了，我们回家去。

2. 忙中有错。

3. 我两年前才认识他的。

4. 请代我谢谢他的礼物。

5. 言归正传，他们当天便结婚了。

6. 以貌取人，失之子羽。

7. 贪爱钱财是万恶之源。

8. 他来看我目的在借钱。

9. 同盟国家互相猜忌。

10. 名誉与金钱无关。

11. 他赚了一大笔钱，他母亲高兴极了。

12. 写完了那封信，我就出去散步了。

13. 他易于满足。

14. 早起三朝当一天。

15. 病从口入。

16. 一寸黄金买不到一寸光阴。

17. 知人知面不知心。

18. 破帽之下多好人。

19. 智慧就在认识机会。

20. 人谁无过。

（2）用合句来翻译

所谓合句，英文叫作 Compound Sentence，是由两个或两个以上的独立子句（Independent Clause）所构成的。采用这种句型来翻译的时候，实比采用单句还要来得简单，但要注意一点，子句与子句间要用对等连词（Coordinate Conjunction）来结合成为合句才是。对等连词约可分为下列四种：

（一）累积连词（Cumulative Conjunction）：有 and，both……and，not only……but also，no less than，as well as，furthermore，besides，moreover 等。

（二）选择连词（Alternative Conjunction）：有 or，either……or，nor，neither……nor，otherwise，or else 等。

（三）反意连词（Adversative Conjunction）：有 but，yet，while，nevertheless，still，however，whereas，only，notwithstanding 等。

（四）推论连词（Illative Conjunction）：有 for，therefore，so，thus，hence，wherefore，consequently，accordingly 等。

在以上的对等连词中，有的并不是真正的连词，而是接续副词（Conjunctive Adverb），又称关系副词（Relative Adverb），拿来用作对等连词的，例如：

那里没有一个人，所以我也就走了。

There was no one there，so I went away.

我们在那里呆了一个钟头就回家了。

We stayed there an hour；then we went home.

你一旦露出任何恐惧的迹象，他就会攻击你。

Once you show any sign of fear，he will attack you.

她是留学美国的，所以她英语说得好。

She is an American returned student，therefore she speaks good English.

这书一脱稿，我马上和出版家订好了出版合约。

Immediately this was done，I completed an arrangement with my publishers.

我很想去，不过我却不愿冒着雨去。

I want to go very much；still I do not care to go through the rain.

他是一个聪明人，而仍不免常犯错误。

He is a wise man，nevertheless（或 none the less 或 and yet）he often makes mistakes.

我很愿意做，只是我太忙了。

I would do it with pleasure，only（ = except that）I am too busy.

我正要说话，铃子就响了。

I was just going to speak，when the bell rang.

此外还有原是不对等的连词，如 as，until，while，when 等，有时也可拿来作对等连词用，例如：

他是一个美国人，我听他说话就知道。

He is an American，as I know from his accent.

在此他又犯了一般以貌取人的通病，那过后就可以证明的。

Here he fell into the common error of judging by appearances，as will be proved hereafter.

那个婴孩变得越来越虚弱，终于不久就死了。

The little baby grew more and more sickly，until presently it died.

一条轮船正用全速力在走，突然一下驶入浅水而触礁了。

A steamer was going along at full speed，when it suddenly got into shallow water and ran aground.

他正想要用脚后跟践碎那株小草，而一个新的念头使他停下来了。

He was about to crush the plant with his heel，when a new thought made him stop.

某种习惯一直在形成而牢固起来，终至变得牢不可破。

All the while a certain habit is forming and hardening，until at last we find ourselves helpless.

有的人富，有的人穷。

Some men are rich，while（ = whereas）others are poor.

当我在纽约的时候，我见过他好几次。

I saw him several times while I was in New York.

我弟弟发了财，而我还依旧穷困。

I have remained poor，while my brother has made a fortune.

那帽子的颜色我虽则很喜欢，但形式我不爱。

While（ = Though）I like the colour of the hat，I do not like its shape.

上面最后两例是由其前一例的基本用法逐渐引申出来的。

现将真正的对等连词的用法，例示如下：

小红低唱我吹箫。

I played on the flute，and Hsiao Hung sang to it.

他开始说话，全体肃静。

He began to speak，and all was still.

过几分钟他就睡熟了。

A few minutes more，and he lay sound asleep.

赶快，那么你就可以赶上火车。

Make haste，and you will catch the train.

他在恐怖中从家中逃走了，从那以后我再没有见到他。

He fled from the house in terror，and I have never seen him since.

你一定要把文书归档，否则你就不会受到信赖。

You must have your papers on file，or no credit will be given.

穿上你的外套，否则你会着凉的。

Put on your overcoat，or you will catch cold.

要么进来，要么出去。

Either come in or go out.

你必须说实话，或者什么也不说。

You must either tell the truth or say nothing.

强使污物留下的话，不是引起皮肤病，就是伤害血液。

Either the skin will become diseased，or the blood will be injured by being forced to retain its impurities.

赶快，否则你就要迟了。

Hurry up or else you’ll be late.

我没有钱，我也不想有钱。

I am not rich，nor do I wish to be.

既非他错，也非我错。

Neither he is mistaken nor I am.

约翰和我都没有到会。

Neither John nor I attended the meeting.

他是一个能干的人，但这问题对他也嫌太难了。

He is an able man，but the problem was too hard for him.

他的身体虚弱，但他仍要工作。

He is not in good health，but he still wants to work.

你现在必得离去，但下回你可以再来。

You must go now，but you may come again.

他不可能懒惰，因为他有很大的进步。

He cannot be idle，for he makes remarkable progress.

油完了，因为灯已熄灭。

The oil must be out，for the lamp has gone out.

林肯不但是黑人的朋友，也是弱者和无告者的朋友。

Lincoln was not only a friend of the negroes，but a friend of the weak and the helpless.

他不但给了我钱，还给了我一个装钱的皮包。

He gave me not only the money，but also a purse to put it in.

事业的成功，不但要有精力，还得有耐性。

Not only energy，but patience is necessary to success in life.

你须听话，否则你将受罚。

Do what you are told；otherwise you will be punished.

抓住那个机会，不然你将后悔。

Seize the chance，otherwise you will regret it.

有人喜欢吃肥肉，而另有人就讨厌它。

Some people like fat meat，whereas others hate it.

他很聪明而他的妹妹就有点愚笨。

He is clever whereas his sister is foolish.

总督看了请愿书，但他仍然拒绝赦免那孩子。

The governor read the petition；nevertheless he refused to pardon the boy.

他有学问又有经验。

He has experience as well as knowledge.

合句有时不用连词而用标点也是可以的，尤其在古文中常有见到，例如：

Cowards die many times before their death；The valiant never taste of death but once.（Shakespeare，Jul.Caes. II，ii，32f.）（对照意味）

John Told had drunk a large quantity of liquor，he was both merry and tipsy.（Powys）（因果关系）

Shakespeare was born in 1564；he died in 1616.（罗列一起）

A writer wants something more than money for his work：he wants permanence.（继续谈论）

而《圣经》上的合句则连词和标点都用得很多：

And the rain descended，and the floods came，and the winds blew，and beat upon that house；and it fell；and great was the fall of it.（Matt. vii. 27）

合句有时既可借用复句的不对等连词，则合句与复句岂不变得一样的而没有分别了，须知二者的分别并不全在连词，还有其他重要的因素。凡用有限制用法的关系词（Relative）的文句就是复句，用有非限制用法即继续用法的关系词（通例在其前有 Comma）的文句便是合句，如：

He is the man whom I met in the train.（复）

I met Mr. A，who（ = and he）told me the news.（合）

This is the place where I was born.（复）

Then my parents went to America，where（ = and there）I was born.（合）

Then I went to Rome，where（ = and there）I stopped for a week.（合）

This book，which（ = though it）appeared about a month ago，has already gone through several editions.（复）

When at home，he shuts himself up in his study.（复）

在合句中连词的位置多半是放在两个子句之间，如：

He is young，and yet he is prudent.

I was ill，so I did not go.

I knew it was him the minute I saw him.

但是复句的连词就多半是放在附属子句之前，如：

Let us go to bed，as it is late.

Though he is poor，he is honest.

Brave as she was（ = Though she was brave），she trembled.

Brave as she was（ = Because she was brave），she attacked.

习题 7

试用英文合句译出下列各句：

1. 日暮途远。

2. 不自由毋宁死。

3. 聪明人为求知而读书，愚人则为文凭。

4. 天将下雨，因为晴雨表渐见降低。

5. 几家欢乐几家愁。

6. 他自己家里有很多事要做，而他却来帮我的忙。

7. 他硬不肯听，要我怎样去说服他。

8. 他分明知道打扰我们，他还要说个不停。

9. 他借我五千元，只还来两千。

10. 当我对你说话的时候，请你不要作声。

11. 他有钱无处用，而我无钱可用。

12. 他是唯一的候选人，因此他当选了。

13. 他是很孚众望的候选人，结果他是会当选的。

14. 我憎恨他，而你只是不喜欢他而已。

15. 人生不满百，常怀千岁忧。

16. 我必须把他的一份给他，因我已答应两人平分。

17. 我到达车站的时候，火车已经开走了。

18. 他口中高谈和平，而实际却带给我们战争。

19. 我接受了他善意的劝告，所以我现在并不觉得新生活徒劳无功。

20. 这种工作也许别人可以，我是不能做的。

（3）用复句来翻译

所谓复句，英文叫作 Complex Sentence，是由两个或两个以上的独立子句所构成的。构成合句的子句一定是对立的，而构成复句的子句，其中只有一个是主要子句（Principal Clause），其余的都是附属子句（Dependent Clause）。在复句中所用的连词，不是对等连词，而是不对等连词（Subordinate Conjunction）。这种不对等连词，多半是放在附属子句前面的。

依照外形分类，不对等连词可分为下列四种：

（一）单纯连词（Simple Conjunction）：as，if，than，that，though，lest，when，since，while，etc.

（二）复合连词（Compound Conjunction）：although，because，unless，whereas，etc.

（三）关联连词（Correlative Conjunction）：as……as，as……so，so……as，so……that，whether……or，etc.

（四）片语连词（Phrase Conjunction）：as soon as，as（or so）long as，as if，as though，in case，in order that，in that，for fear（that），the moment，etc.

英文连词常用其他词类来充任，如：

1. 名词：Next time I see you，I will lend you the book.（下次我看见你的时候，我就把那本书借给你。）

I’ll tell him the moment he gets in.（他一来我就告诉他。）

2. 代名词：Whichever you choose，I’ll give it to you.（随便你选择哪一个，我都可以给你。）

3. 动词：Suppose I were going away，should you be sorry？（我如离去，你会觉得难过吗？）

4. 副词：Now（that）you are here，you’d better stay.（既来之，则安之。）

5. 介词：You will not have better health without you take better care of yourself.（你要是不更加讲究卫生，你就不会有更好的健康。）

For all（that）you say，I still like him.（不管你怎样说，我还是喜欢他。）

用介词 without 作连词，是古文或方言的用法，现代英文，多用 unless.

依照内容分类，不对等连词可分为下列三种：

（一）用于形容词子句的：who，whose，whom，that，which，when，where，why，etc.

（二）用于副词子句的：

1. 时间：before，after，as，since，till，until，when，while，as soon as，as（or so）long as，no sooner……than，scarcely（or hardly）……when，etc.

2. 地点：where，whence，whither，wherever，etc.

3. 方式：as，as if，as though，etc.

4. 比较：as，when，the，than，etc.

5. 原因：as，because，since，etc.

6. 目的：that，so that，in order that，lest，for fear，etc.

7. 结果：that，so that，so（or such）……that，so……but that，etc.

8. 条件：if，unless，provided（that），in case（that），on condition（that），in the event（that），supposing（that），suppose（that），etc.

9. 让步：although，though，as，if，even if，notwithstanding（that），whether，etc.

（三）用于名词子句的 that，whether，if，who，which，how，when，where，why，etc.

（一）用于形容词子句的译例

敬人者人恒敬之。

He who respects others is constantly respected.

昨天我们在戏院里遇见的那人是我的老师。

The man whom we met in the theatre yesterday is my teacher.

作品获奖的女孩是全班中年纪最小的。

The girl whose work got the prize is the youngest in the class.

我现在写的这封信是一封英文信。

The letter that I am writing is an English letter.

这就是我所选定的书。

This is the book which I chose.

礼拜天是我最清闲的时候。

Sunday is the day when I am least busy.

我不知道你到底要到哪里去。

I don’t know the exact place where you want to go.

那就是我喜欢读中文的理由。

That is the reason why I like to study Chinese.

他在英国时，专门从事古堡的研究。

While he was staying in England，he made a study of old castles.

三尺童子无不识之。

There is no child but knows him（ = who does not know him）.

人孰无过。

No man but errs（ = who does not err）.

彼纵下愚，犹能知此。

He is not such a fool but that he knows it.

彼虽下愚，尚不至认敌为友。

He is not such a fool but what（ = but that）he can tell a friend from a foe.

（二）用于副词子句的译例

1. 时间：

你买东西，非钱不可。

When you buy things，you must have money.

你不肯听我怎能对你说明呢？

How can I explain it to you when you won’t listen？

有生命就有希望。

While there is life，there is hope.

当我生病的时候，他代替了我的位置。

He took my place while I was ill.

在我写这个的时候，你可以做点别的事情。

While I am writing this，you can be doing something else.

他还没有到我就离开了。

I left before he arrived.

我离开了以后他才到来。

He arrived after I left.

我没等待好久他就来了。

I had not waited long before he arrived.

等雨停了再说。

Let’s wait until（or till）the rain stops.

我到新加坡差不多五年了。

It is almost five years since I came to Singapore.

我正要走的时候他回家来了。

He returned home as I was leaving.

一息尚存，奋斗到底。

So long as I live，I must fight it out.

你现在已经很大了，应该学点礼貌。

Now（that）（ = As）you are a big boy，you must behave better.

我一做完就发现错了。

Immediately（或 Directly 或 The moment）（ = As soon as）I had done it，I knew I had made a mistake.

他一见到那个，就动身回家去了。

He started back home as soon as he saw it.

He had no sooner seen it than he started back home.

He had scarcely seen it when he started back home.

He had hardly seen it before he started back home.

2. 地点：

精神一到，何事不成。（有志竟成。）

Where there is a will，there is a way.

谁也不去的地方，他也不喜欢去。

He does not like to go where nobody is going.（Lynd）

谁也不晓得她是从何处来的。

No one knows whence she came.

他随遇而安。

He will be happy wherever he lives.

无论何处有口角，总有他在场。

Wherever there is a quarrel，there he is sure to be.

3. 方式：

入乡问俗。

When in Rome，do as the Romans do.

他说英语好像他父亲一样。

He speaks English as his father does.

我就是这样去（不换衣服）。

I’ll go just as I am.

他的行动好像很怕的样子。

He acted just as if（or as though）he were afraid.

他对待我好像对待下属一样。

He treats me as if I were his subordinate.

种瓜得瓜，种豆得豆。（因果报应，丝毫不爽）。

As yon sow，so you shall reap.（Proverb）

有其父必有其子。

As is the father，so is the son.

珊瑚非树，犹鲸非鱼。

Just as a coral grove is not a tree，so a whale is not a fish.

4. 比较：

那太太和她丈夫一样高。

The wife is as tall as the husband（is）.

太太没有丈夫高。

The wife is not so tall as the husband（is）.

她比她丈夫高。

She is taller than her husband（is）.

他像他妹妹一样亲切。

He is as kind as his sister（is）.

他又诚实又亲切。

He is as kind as（he is）honest.

他妹妹诚实，而他就亲切。

He is as kind as his sister is honest.

他像死人一样。

He is as good as dead.

她与其说是漂亮，不如说是可爱。

She is more attractive than pretty.

与其说他不好交际，不如说他羞怯。

He is more shy than unsocial.（ = He is shy rather than unsocial.）

与其说他是活着，不如说他是死了。

He was more dead than alive.

我们登得越高，气候越冷。

The higher up we go，the colder it becomes.

多多益善。

The more，the better.

越近骨头的肉，味道越美。

The nearer the bone，the sweeter the meat.

欲速则不达。

More haste，worse speed.

他半闭着眼睛，好像在回想什么。

He half-closed his eyes as though trying to recall something.

他说英语好像说自己的母语一样地熟练。

He can speak English with the same ease as if it were his mother tongue.

我现在确信眼下这个样子最好。

I am now quite certain that things are for the best as they are.

她聪明的程度远不及他的邪恶。

She was not nearly so clever as he was wicked.

你说你只有几本书，但你这儿的书就比我的要多上五倍。

You said you had a few books；but there must be five times as many here as I have.（Gissing）

我们必须接受事物的现状。

We must take things as we find them in the world.

他有一点过分爱好杯中物，正如水手们常有的现象。

As is often the case with sailors，he was a little too fond of liquors.

有急流一般的大的澎湃的声音。

There was a loud roaring as of rushing waters.

5. 原因：

因为我们没有钱，所以用不着去想度假的事。

Since we have no money，it is no good thinking about a holiday.

既然你要去，我就陪你去吧。

Since（或 As）you are going，I will accompany you.

因为他诚实，所以大家都喜欢他。

He is beloved of all because he is honest.（原因）

Cf. He must be honest，for he is beloved of all.（理由）

合句用 for，复句用 because，但 for 不用于会话体（conversational style），例如：“They ate their food uncooked，for the use of fire was unknown.”一句，到会话中则变成“Why did they eat their food uncooked？”“Because the use of fire was unknown.”不可用 for.

因为下雨，我就没有出门。

I did not go out because it rained.

在否定后接用的 because 如作 though 解，翻译时绝无问题，如 You should not despise a man because he is poor. 译为“虽则他穷，你也不要轻蔑他。”或译为“不要因别人穷就轻蔑他。”都是一样，错不了的。但如遇到不作 though 解的否定后接的 because，就得特别当心了。因为它可能有两种解释，例如：I didn’t go because I was afraid. = （1）I didn’t go，and the reason was fear.（我怕所以我没有去。） = （2）I went，but the reason was not fear.（我不是因为怕才去的。）一义说“去了”，另一义说“没有去”，竟发生完全相反的含义了。

因为他成绩好，所以薪水高。

He was well paid，as he had done the work well.

你疲倦了，最好去休息吧。

As you are tired，you had better rest.

6. 目的：

他们因为怕赶不上火车，急急忙忙地走了。

They hurried that（或 so that，in order that）they might not（说话时美国常用 wouldn’t）miss the train.

要想动手搞另外的，你就得先把这个做完。

Finish this that（或 so that，in order that）you can start another.

当心以免从树上掉下来。

Be careful lest（或 for fear 〔that〕）you should fall from the tree.（lest 用于写作，说话时则用 for fear）。

为着要去早晨的新鲜空气中把那问题仔细考虑一番，所以我出外散步了。

I went out for a walk，so that I might think the matter over in the fresh morning air.

为节省时间，队长亲自装上了马鞍。

The captain，in order that there might be no time lost，saddled his horse himself.

我们通常只是为求得别人的称赞而称赞别人。

We usually praise others only that we may be praised.

7. 结果：

我太疲倦，随即上床去睡了。

I was so tired that I went to bed at once.

那使他大为震惊，登时脸都白了。

It gave him such a shock that his face turned white.

他是那样的一个撒谎者，所以没有人喜欢他。

He is such a liar that no one likes him.

那是一个非常愚笨的计划，谁也不赞成。

It was a plan so stupid that no one approved of it.

我们经过长时间一直走得很快，所以十分疲倦了。

We walked very fast for a long time，so that we got quite tired.

他去得很早，所以占了一个好位子。

He went early so he got a good seat.

他说得那般清楚，我们每个字都听得见。

He spoke so clearly that we could hear every word.

你站近些使我可以看清楚你的面孔。

Draw nearer so that I can see your face.

她说的话那般有趣，使我既不知道也未注意时间的流逝。

She interested me so much that I neither knew nor heeled how time passed.（Caskell，Cranford）

我微不足道，无可效劳。

I am such a tiny thing that I am little use to you.

没有一个人老得不能学的。

No man is so old but that he may learn.（However old a man may be，he may learn.）

无论怎样的难事久练自易。

Nothing is so hard but that it becomes easy by practice.

不雨则已，雨必滂沱。（重重不幸，祸每两临。）

It never rains but it pours.（ = It never rains without pouring.）

裁判虽属公平，仍然有人不服。

Justice is never done but some people will be found to complain.

一定有事要发生的。

It can not be but that something will happen.（ = Something must happen.）

人谁能免于过失。

It is impossible but that a man will make some mistakes.

8. 条件：

你如果明天有空，请来我家坐坐。

If（you are）free tomorrow，please come to see me.

只要你一年内还我，我是可以把那笔钱借给你的。

I don’t mind lending you the money provided（that）you pay it back within a year.

你要不是一个完全的笨蛋，你就不会那样对待你叔叔的。

Unless you are a perfect fool you will behave properly to your uncle.

只要有二十个人肯捐一百元，我也就照捐不误。

I will subscribe a hundred provided twenty others will do the same.

即令发生最坏的情形，至少她也就有一个安全的地方可作退步的。

At least there will be a retreat secured for her in case the worst should ensue.（Thackeray，Vanity Fair）

非我喝酒，他不罢休。

Nothing will content him but I must drink.

若非贫穷，我是决意要出洋去的。

I would go abroad but that（ = but for the fact that）I am poor.（but for my poverty.）

无论如何必须达到我的目的。（不达目的，事必棘手。）

It shall go hard but（ = unless）I will accomplish my purpose.

9. 让步：

虽则天气很冷，他并没有升火。

（Al）though it was cold，he did not light the fire.

不问他成败如何，我们都要尽力帮忙。

Whether he succeed（s）or fail（s），we should have to do our best.

即令他穷，他看去很快乐。

If he is poor，he looks happy.（if = even if）

哪怕我有钱，我也要工作。

Even if I were rich，I would work.

姑认这是真的，又将怎样？

Granting（或 Granted）that this is true，what follows？

天虽则黑了，我们还是找到了回家的路。

Dark as it was（ = Though it was so dark），we found our way back.（注意 as 前如用名词，也要将冠词略去，如 Poor piper as I am. = Though I am a poor piper.）

他虽然吓坏了，但并没有倒下。

Startled though he was，he did not lose his balance.

糖虽是一种主要的食料，我们却不能以之为生。

Important as sugar is as an article of food，we cannot live upon it.

哪怕牺牲性命，他也要干到底的。

He will go through with it if it costs him his life.

即令你向他提出，他也不会接受的。

Even if you offer it to him，he won’t accept it.

他虽有时感受风寒，然其身体极为强健。

He is extremely strong—not but that（ = though）he will catch a cold at times.

（三）用于名词子句的译例

他曾到此是确实的。

That he was here is true.

Cf. It is true that he was here.（副词子句）

我想他在城里。

I think（that）he is in town.

他说他要来的。

He said（that）he would come.

你不能来使我感到遗憾。

I am sorry（that）you can’t come.

不晓得他在不在家。

I wonder if（或 whether）he is at home（or not）.

我相信他说的不错，而到现在为止谁也没有讲过这岛上的状况。

I believe（that）he was really right，and that nobody had told the situation of the island.（Stevenson）

我不知道我能不能进大学。

I don’t know whether I shall be able to go to college or not.

问他是不是到动身的时候了。

Ask him if it is time to start.

我不清楚是他要打梅先生呢，还是梅先生要打他。

I am not clear whether he was going to strike Mr. Mell，or Mr. Mell was going to strike him.（Dickens，David Copperfield）

他问我是不是有什么要他做的事情。

He asked me if I had any business he could arrange for me.

他一再地问我在那里我是不是有什么事情要办。

He repeated the inquiry if I had any business there.

他做出这样的愚行来真是遗憾。

It is to be regretted that he should have committed this foolish act.

他完全相信他父亲会替他还债的。

He had a perfect belief that his father would pay his debt for him.

谁是下届美国总统尚未决定。

Who will be the president of the U. S. A. next time is undecided.

我问你在这三者之中最喜欢哪一个。

I ask you which of the three you like best.

我要用你所喜欢的名字来叫你。

I will name you what you like.

我不知道他怎样完成那工作的。

I know nothing as to how he has finished his work.

他要何时回家，连他太太都不知道。

When he will come home is not known to his wife.

我要把这个送给任何需要它的人。

I will give this to whoever wants it.

听说他要来，我们都高兴。

The news，that he will come，gives us much pleasure.

我确信他必成功。

I do not doubt（but）that he will succeed.（这个来自法兰西语的否定后的 but 是无意义的，下同。）

我不否认他是勤快的。

I do not deny（but）that he is diligent.

他的年轻并不妨碍他教书。

His youth hinders not but that he may teach.（ = His youth does not hinder him from teaching.）

没有什么事可以妨碍我完成目的的。

Nothing shall hinder but that I will accomplish my purpose.（ = Nothing shall hinder me from accomplishing my purpose.）

或者如此，亦未可知。

Who knows but it may be so？

习题 8

试用英文复句译出下列各句：

1. 我们都晓得时间就是金钱。

2. 我不知道这是真的还是假的。

3. 这就是昨天对我狂吠的那条狗。

4. 我亟想知道他这个时候在不在家。

5. 自从他去年离开这里以来我还没有见到过他。

6. 他说话的神气就好像什么都懂得似的。

7. 你越用功，进步越快。

8. 你既然这样讲，我就得相信呀。

9. 我们读书是为了求知。

10. 我打开窗子邀明月进来。

11. 他太狡猾所以没有人和他做朋友。

12. 豹死留皮，人死留名。

13. 如果合算的话，我就接受那个工作。

14. 没有人比不要听的人更聋的了。

15. 如果你是上等人，你就要像个上等人的样子。

16. 听来也许觉得奇怪，我太有钱反买不起它。

17. 我并不羡慕他富有，那使他非常烦恼。

18. 忧愁使他变成这个样子。

19. 在我们愉快地玩着的时候，时间过得很快。

20. 没有互敬是不能有友谊的。

叁　由内容来分的造句

（1）用平叙句来翻译

平叙句（Declarative 或 Assertive Sentence）是叙述事实的文句，我们日常讲话，大部分都是用的这种句子。如我在本书前面讲过的，英文的句型共有五种，其用字的排列次序为：

1. “主语 + 自动词”，如 Birds sing.（鸟鸣。）

2. “主语 + 自动词 + 补语”，如 The rose smells sweet.（玫瑰花香。）

3. “主语 + 他动词 + 宾语”，如 He has plenty of sense.（他富有见识。）

4. “主语 + 他动词 + 间接宾语 + 直接宾语”，如 He teaches us English.（他教我们英文。）

5. “主语 + 他动词 + 宾语 + 补语”，如 You must keep it a secret.（你必须保守秘密。）

英文句中用字的排列次序常有变化，并不一定照这五种句型的规矩来说。兹就惯用法找出一些变化的形式，来作为平叙句的译法；至于普通五种句型所表现的平叙句法，因为前面已经详细讲过了，所以这儿不拟再说。

（一）There + 动词 + 主语

凡说到事物或人的有无时，在主语所含文字较长的情形下，为引起听者对主语的注意起见，在应说主语的地位上，用 there 一字充数，而将真正的主语移到后面去说，如

桌子上有一本书。

There is a book on the desk.

后来他确知悔悟了。

There came a time when he did repent.

人们看到了一个奇异的光景。

There was seen a strange sight.

从前有一位大王名叫亚菲来德。

Once there lived a great king whose name was Alfred.

一切寂静无声。

There fell a deep silence.

（二）把条件句中的连词省略，而将助动词放在主语的前面去，本动词的 be 及 have，也有这种助动词同样的用法。例如：

如果你找到了，请告诉我。

Should you find them，kindly let me know.

她要有一个小孩的话，她就快乐了。

Had she a child，she would be happy.

他要是还在世，他会怎样说呀！

Were he alive，what would he say？

我要是见到了他，我会责备他的。

Did I see him，I would blame him for it.

（三）副词（片语） + 动词 + 主语

为着引起读者的注意或好奇心起见，又为着保持字数较多的主语和动词的密切结合起见，常把动词放到主语的前面去。在这种情况下，也有采用 there 的时候。

一个女郎和一条狗来到街头了。

Down the street came a girl and a dog.

名单上还可加入下列的名字。

To the list may be added the following names.

在房间的当中，枝形吊灯下面，站着老家长乔戎。

In the centre of the room，under the chandelier，stood the head of the family，old Jolyon.

在他后面走进来一个身材高大的女人，体态丰腴，容仪端正，头发还是棕色的——那就是瓦丽斯夫人。

Behind him had come in a tall woman，of full figure and fine presence，With hair still brown—Lady Valleys herself.

（四）为着加强副词（片语），补语、宾语或本动词起见，常将这种字放在一句的头上。

1. 惊叹词变来的副词及介词，与同形的副词及 here，there。

副词 + | 动词 + 名词 代名词 + 动词

（a）枪声砰的一响，那鸟就掉下来了。

Bang went the gun，and the bird fell.

砰的一下又是一声枪声。

Bang came another shot.

皮鞭重重地抽去。

Crack goes the whip！

（b）天花板掉下来了。

Down came the ceiling.

他走下去了。

Down he went.

老鼠都跳进去了。

In plunged the rats.

我们像一阵风似的走了。

Off we went like the wind.

笛声一再高扬。

On and on went the puper.

行行复行行。

On and on they went.

那对夫妇一下就冲出去了。

Out rushed the man and his wife.

他们冲出去了。

Out they rushed.

马车驰过去了。

Over went the carriage.

他拿着盘子走过去了。

Over he went with the dish.

蜻蜓轰然上升。

Up went this roaring dragonfly.

他们上去了。

Up they went.

（c）托孟来了。

Here comes Tom.

他来了。

Here he comes.

这是你的上衣。

Here is your coat.

这就是的。

Here it is.

那是你的手套。

There are your gloves.

那就是的。

There they are.

注意：here，there 如做“在这里”，“在那里”解时，仍可放在句首，但字的排列要照普通的顺序，如 Here the game keeper found the dead body.（猎场看守人在这里找到了那尸体。）There Scott wrote all his works.（史各特就在那里写出了他全部的著作。）

2. 上述 1. 项以外的副词及副词片语。

副词（片语） + 助动词 + 主语 + 本动词

我们对于这个决定深为后悔。

Bitterly did we repent our decision.

那情景我记得很清楚。

Well do I remember the scene.

我曾指出时间是过得很快的，但是徒然。

In vain did I point out how time was getting on.

我们再也见不到他的面了。

Never shall we see his face again.

我做梦也未曾想到这样的事。

Never had I even dreamed of such a thing.

对于这个使命我决不再向前移动一步。

Not another step will I budge on this errand.

直到那个时侯我才实感到形势的危险。

Not till then did I realize the danger of the situation.

他不但从来没有踏进大门来过，甚至连在窗口也没有露过面。

Not only did he never cross the threshold，but he never so much as showed his face at a window.

为着闲人去游荡，世界上再没有比伦敦更好的地方了。

Nowhere in the world is there such a place for an idle man as London.

我们没有想到会再也见不到他的。

Little did we think that we should never see him again.

他一进房来就破口大骂。

Scarcely had he entered the room when he broke out in insults.

那对他们最没有兴趣的了。

Least of all is it to their interest.

我看见过他好多次。

Many a time have I seen him.

这种光景我以前只见到过一次。

Only once before have I seen such a sight.

他只有一次对我说过话。

Only on one occasion did he speak to me.

迟迟地他才明白那火灾是发生在他自己家里。

Only slowly did he understand that the fire was in his own house.

3. 补语：

补语 + 主语 + 动词

（a）罗杰始终是一个坏脾气的家伙。

Cantankerous chap Roger always was.

他们非常感谢我要援助他们。

Very grateful they were for my offer of help.

幸而我们知道她的名字。

Lucky it is that we know her name.

（b）我的懊悔是痛苦而无益的。

Bitter but unavailing were my regrets.

我采取正当措施极为有效。

So effective it is that I have taken the right measures.

4. 宾语：

宾语 + 主语 + 动词

宾语 + 助动词 + 主语 + 本动词

（a）我们虽然能够知道过去，但对未来却只能推测。

The past one can know，but the future one can only feel.

我们高兴地记得许多事情，也高兴地忘却许多事情。

Many things we gladly remember，others we gladly forget.

金银我都没有，我所有的只有这些，现在都给你好了。

Silver and gold have I none，but such as I have give I thee.

（b）他没有给她说一句好话。

Not a word did he say in her favour.

不到最后一张纸印好，他们谁也不会有一分钟休息的。

Not a moment’s rest will any of the men enjoy until the last paper is printed.

只有两个人死去了，没有继续受苦。

Only two had merciful death released from their sufferings.

5. 本动词：

你抱怨也得去。

Growl you will and go you must.

他说我们必须赶上她。

He says overtake her we must.

因为我们必须找到那个解毒剂，不然就得发现民主政治是欺诈的。

For find that antidote we must，or discover democracy to be fraudulent.

“如果你马上打电报去，他是可以阻止的。”而他就是这样被阻止了。

“If you telegraph at once，he can be stopped.” And stopped he was.

（五）为着和上文联系，某些字眼要放在句首。

这种威胁他简直无法实行。

This threat he was quite unable to carry out.

这到底是什么我说不出来。

What it is I cannot tell.

这个议论的全程有赖于此。

On this depends the whole course of the argument.

我相信那些话是有预言意味的。在那些话中间有着劳工阶级成功地进行斗争的秘密。

I believe those words are prophetic. In them is the secret of a successful prosecution of the struggle of the working class.

随后就吹起逆风来了。

Then came unfavourable winds.

其次就是付款的问题。

Next comes the question of pay.

这便是此人的生平与性格。

Such are the life and character of this man！

医生在他的（创办医院的）计划书上这样说。

So the physician said in his prospectus.

他加速了他的步伐，我也如此。

He quickened his pace，and so did I.

你们错了，我们也错了。

You were wrong，so were we.

“你现在一定要去睡觉呀。”“正是。你也是呀。”

“You must go to bed now.”“So I must. So must you.”

树倒下来了，一定会死的。

As the tree falls，so must it die.

种瓜得瓜，种豆得豆。

As a man soweth，so shall he reap.

自作自受。

As you make your bed，so you must lie on it.

那件事他什么也不知道。他的妻子也和他一样。

He knew nothing about it. No more did his wife.

试想想田野的百合是怎样生长的；它们既不劳动，也不纺织。

Consider the lilies of the field，how they grow；they toil not，neither do they spin.（Matt.6：28）

我也不必告诉你，我做这些事是凭什么职权。

Neither do I tell you by what authority I do these things.

那一切都是真的，我们不可忘记。

All that is true，nor must we forget.

我不知道，我也猜不出来。

I know not，nor can I guess.

我不告你虚伪，更不告你欺诈。

I do not accuse you of falsehood，still less（do I accuse you）of dishonesty.

习题 9

1. 笨人无药可医。

2. 她每星期写一封信回家。

3. 他把钱都花在买书上面了。

4. 阔人也和穷人一样烦恼。

5. 这个礼拜下了不少的雨。

6. 现在是到了要思索的时候。

7. 她的缝纫机原来就是放在这里的。

8. 在他后面接着来了长蛇似的兵马。

9. 一按机关地雷立刻爆炸。

10. 在蒙茅斯要塞陆军通讯队所养的鸽子是最有代表性的。

11. 人们最喜欢的就是名利。

12. 杯中只有一点水。

13. 罕有比这更为忙乱的。

14. 他要看到了我，立刻就会认识的。

15. 他甫发言，听众就阻碍他。

16. 关于此事我们意见不同的地方就在此。

17. 他们得看护病伤的人。

18. 他不会成功的，虽则他从未这样努力试过。

19. 知足的人是幸福的。

20. 那演说家如是说。

（2）用疑问句来翻译

疑问句（Interrogative Sentence）是发出疑问的文句，正好像肯定形（Affirmative Form）的句子大都可以变成否定形（Negative Form）的句子一样，一般的叙述句也是大都可以变成疑问句的。例如“他礼拜天上教堂。”译成：

He goes to church on Sunday. 是肯定平叙句，而

He does not go to church on Sunday. 是否定平叙句。

Does he go to church on Sunday？才是疑问句。

感叹句有时也勉强可改成否定，不过只能改为相反的意思，例如“这朵花多么美呀！” How beautiful this flower is！改为否定时便成为“这朵花多么丑呀！” How ugly this flower is！改为疑问句则成为 Is this flower beautiful？意为“这朵花美吗？”和感叹句的含义（对此花之美大为惊叹）大不相同了。

英文的疑问句，从用字的排列上看，有三种基本的构成形式。

1. 最普通的字序（word-order）为：

Predicate-Verb + Subject

（a）在下列动词的场合，不用 Do-Form：Be（was；were），have（Past Tense 时偶然也可用 Do-Form），shall（should），will（would），can（could），may（might），must，ought to，need（v. aux.），dare（v. aux.），used to.

你好吗？

Are you well？

他来了吗？

Has he come？

我们赶得上火车吗？

Shall we be in time for the train？

你明天要来吗？

Will you come tomorrow？

你能读中文吗？

Can you read Chinese？

我可以回家去了吗？

May I go home？

你一定这样快就要走吗？

Must you go so soon？

我应该做这事吗？

Ought I to do this？

他非急不可吗？

Need he hurry？

你敢从那高墙上跳下来吗？

Dare you jump from the top of that high wall？

他曾经住在这里吗？

Used he to live here？

（b）在其他的动词的场合，就要用 Do-Form：

你喜欢他吗？

Do you like him？

你昨天看见他吗？

Did you see him yesterday？

2. 主语为疑问词或含有疑问词时的字序为：

Subject + Predicate-Verb

什么风把你吹来的？

What brought you here？

《哈姆雷特》是谁作的？

Who wrote Hamlet？

昨天有谁来了？

Who came yesterday？

什么人（哪一个）这样说的？

What（Which）man said so？

要做什么？

What is to be done？

如果在 1. 型上再加疑问词时，则仍依照 1 型的字序，不必改变。

他说什么？

What did he say？（句中 what 为 say 的宾语）

你有多少孩子？

How many children have you？

他是哪里来的？

Where has he come from？（句中的 where 为 from 的宾语，from where 为 Predicate-Verb 的 Modifier.）

你讲的是谁？

Whom are you talking of？

你何时从英国回来的？

When did you return from England？（句中的 when 为 Predicate-Verb 的 Modifier.）

3. 全照平叙句的字序，只消在句尾加上一个 Interrogation Mark（疑问号），以表示疑问的意思就行了。说的时候，句尾稍加扬起。

你还没有去吗？

You are not going yet？

上面这三种疑问句的造型，还可以补充说明一下。属于 1 型的疑问句，都是可以回答 Yes 或 No 的，在说话时，这类问话都要在句尾用升调（Rising Intonation）。至于 2 型的疑问句，就不能回答 Yes 或 No，因为它所问的不是是非的问题，而是“是什么”，“为什么”，“怎么样”，“哪一个”，“何时”，“何地”，“何人”等的问题。这类问话都是要在句尾用降调（Falling Intonation）的。至于 3 型已如上述，在说话时句尾要用升调，而文字的排列次序，完全和平叙句一模一样，只在句尾多了一个问号而已。这一类型的疑问句，也可再细分为下列两类：

（a）对于说话的人原是用不着要问的，不过为慎重起见，再来问一下，例如：

我想，你有钱吧？

You have some money，I suppose？（Stevenson）

这个我可以看吧？

I may read this？（Dickens）

情形与此类似，而将疑问句的省略式附于平叙句之后，也是口语中经常见的。英文把它叫做 Tag-question，通常那附加的疑问句是不要译出的。

你不喜欢读小说吧？

You don’t like to read novels，do you？

他去了美国吧？

He has gone to America，hasn’t he？

你每个礼拜五都有英文课吧？

You have English lessons every Friday，don’t you？

他们早餐吃茶点的吧？

They have tea for breakfast，don’t they？

天气很好呀。

It’s a fine day，isn’t it？（J. K. Jerome）

（b）凡表惊讶或怪异的时候，也可以用这种形式。

你不想去？

You don’t wish to go？

我的父亲死了？

My father is dead？

上面这种形式的句子，普通常用不定词的造句来表达，例如：

他欺骗我？

He to deceive me？（ = To think that he should deceive me！）

一个英国人叛国？

An Englishman betray his country？

路易士跟布兰芝结婚？

Lewis marry Blanche？（Shakespeare）

怎可放弃真理的大义？

How relinquish the cause of truth？（Goldsmith）

这三种疑问句的基本构成形式，Harold E. Palmer 把 1 型叫作 General Question（一般疑问），2 型叫作 Special Question（特殊疑问）；而 Otto Jespersen 又把 1 型叫作 Nexus Question（叙述关系的疑问）。2 型叫作 X-question（含有未知数的疑问）。至于 3 型就被 Onions 及 Curme 称为 Deliberative Question（深思熟虑的疑问）。

除此三种而外，还有一种所谓 Rhetorical Question（修辞的疑问），是指那些表面上是疑问句，实则什么都不要问，而只是作为一种反语来表示自己的相反的意见，好使对方接受而已。这种表现法实较平叙句更为有力，更要充满感情，例如：

有什么用？

What is the use？（ = It is no use.）

谁不晓得？

Who does not know？（ = Everyone knows.）

有人写过这样没有意义的东西吗？

Was ever such nonsense written？（ = Never was such nonsense written.）

在这种修辞的疑问中，肯定的疑问句相等于否定的平叙句，例如：

黑人能够改变他的肤色，豹子能够改变它的斑纹吗？

Can the Ethiopian change his skin，or the leopard his spots？如用平叙句说时，当然就变成 cannot 了。

否定疑问句相当于肯定平叙句，例如：

这不好笑吗？

Isn’t it funny？（ = It is very funny.）

有时连句尾的问号都可以省去：

Yet，are we not like spoilt children who have so many new toys to play with that we have ceased to wonder at anything.（可是，我们真好像是不断地给与许多新玩具的惯坏了的孩子似的，对任何东西都不感到新奇了。）

有时加上一个否定字的 not，也和没有此字的句子一样，结果变成同样的意思，例如：

他发现这个时极为惊异。

What was hit astonishment on finding it？ = How great was his astonishment on finding it！（感叹句）

What was not his astonishment on finding it？（修辞的疑问） = No astonishment could be greater than his was on finding it.

兹就四种疑问句分别举例译出如下：

（一）一般疑问句

今夜月亮圆了没有？

Is the moon full tonight？

公众不是最好的批评家吗？

Is the public not the best judge？

你知道猫有九条命吗？

Do you know the cat has nine lives？

英国人喜欢户外运动吗？

Are the English fond of outdoor sports？

他坚持要一意孤行吗？

Will he have his own way？

她的眼睛是蓝色的还是棕色的？

Has she blue eyes or brown eyes？

你从前认得他吗？

Used you to know him？

他应该马上动身吗？

Ought he to start at once？

衣服穿得太脏是对人的一种无礼。

Isn’t untidy dress a form of discourtesy？

他这样愚笨真令人吃惊？

Isn’t it surprising that he should be so foolish？

你的意思是拒绝吗？

Am I to understand that you refused？

（二）特殊疑问句

谁会想到这样呀？

Who would have thought so？

一部车子里能够坐多少人？

How many passengers can ride in one carriage？

你手里是什么？

What have you in your hand？

从这里到车站哪条路最近？

Which is the shortest way from here to the railway station？

那本书你在哪里找到的？

Where did you find the book？

她为什么要这样说？

Why did she say so？

她何时起生病的？

Since when has she been ill？

你对于中国电影觉得怎样？

How do you like Chinese movies？

假期何时开始？

When will the holidays begin？

（三）熟虑疑问句

他还没有来吗？

He is not coming yet？

那房间里什么也没有？

Nothing was found in the room？

我并不感兴趣。

We were not amused，were we？（Queen Elizabeth）

那真奇怪呀。

That’s queer，isn’t it？

我要尊敬你吗？

I honour thee？

他不会说英语？

He doesn’t speak English？

你不吃蛋糕？

You don’t eat cakes？

再不要了吗？

No more？

他把约会忘记了？

He to forget the appointment？

他是一个君子？

He a gentleman？（ = He is not a gentleman.）

你不去开会吗？

You are not going to the meeting？

（四）修辞疑问句

这有什么麻烦？

What is the trouble？（ = It is no trouble.）

谁不喜欢名利？

Who does not care for fame and wealth？（ = Everybody likes fame and wealth.）

你能忘记那可怕的光景吗？

Can you forget that terrible scene？（ = You cannot forget that terrible scene.）

本性难移。

Can man change his nature？

世界上有这样的事吗？

Has ever such a thing happened in the world？

我不应该留我兄弟在此。

Am I my brother’s keeper？（ = It is not my duty to keep my brother.）

我不在乎。

What do I care？（ = I don’t care.）

我有足够的钱吗？

Have I money enough？（ = I haven’t enough money.）

习题 10

1. 这有什么关系？

2. 你那支手杖是哪里买的？

3. 难道你不以儿子为荣吗？

4. 他是干什么的？

5. 这本书你花了多少钱？

6. 你打算雇用哪一位？

7. 有什么你要的东西我可以替你找来吗？

8. 有谁不犯过失？

9. 有很会游泳的女子吗？

10. 发生了什么事情吗？

11. 你喝点啤酒好吗？

12. 你有些英文书吗？

13. 给我一点葡萄酒好吗？

14. 你说莎丽要跟谁结婚？

15. 你知道空中楼阁是怎样一回事？

16. 明天我要去讲些什么呢？

17. 附近有公共汽车吗？

18. 你想她什么时候可以回来？

19. 他在英国住上十年之久还不懂英文？

20. 如果我坐三点半的车去，可以赶上吗？

（3）用命令句来翻译

命令句（Imperative Sentence）是表示命令、请求、忠告、愿望、禁止等的文句，普通是对第二人称说的，所以常把对方的主语 you 省去。中国话也一样不说“你”，单说动词就行，例如：

进来！

Come in.

不要闹。

Be quiet.

把门关上！

Shut the door！

快说！

Speak！

过来！

Come here！

快走，玛丽，快走！

Run，Mary，run！

有时为着要和别人区别，特别有指明对方的必要时，也可以把主语说出来，例如：

你同我到车站去。

You go with me to the station.

兹就命令句的各种形式，逐条例解如下：

1. 最普通的形式是略去第二人称的主语。

把握时机。

Make hay while the sun shines.（Proverb）

回去照我吩咐你的去做好了。

Go home and do what you are told.

请把面包递给我。

Pass me the bread，please.

要诚实呀！要诚实呀！要诚实呀！

Be true！ Be true！Be true！（Hawthorne）

把书拿出来看。

Show the book.（C. Bront）

2. 否定的命令句常要加用助动词的 do，有时也可保留主语。普通是表示禁止的意思。

不要这样大声说话。

Don’t talk so loud！

孩子们，不要懒惰。

Don’t be idle，my boys.

你不要去把这个秘密告诉他呀。

Don’t（you）go and tell him the secret！

你不要就开始。

Don’t you begin it.

决不要撒谎。

Never tell a lie.

你不要管我。

Never do you bother yourself about me.（Eliot）

不要怕。

Fear nothing.

不要动。

Don’t you stir！

不要为他着急。

Don’t you worry about him.

不要为我难过。

Don’t you go feeling sorry for me.

不要为一吻所欺骗而自寻苦恼。

Suffer not yourselves to be deceived by a kiss.（Patrick Henry）

在古文中或诗中虽有否定词仍然可以不加 do，如美国诗人 Longfellow 的诗句：

Tell me not，in mournful numbers,

Life is but an empty dream！

（毋作悲哀语，谓人生若梦。）

3. 肯定的命令句常加上一个助动词的 do 字，以加强语气，表示恳请。

务请你到这里来。

Do come here！

请不要吵闹。

Do be quiet！

务请你去。

Do go，please.

求你赏一文钱吧。

Do give me just one penny!

求你坐一会儿吧。

Sit down for a moment，pray，do！

4. 命令句法在古时是不略去第二人称的主语的，不过那时常把主语放在动词后面，例如 Go and do thou likewise.（你去照样做吧。）Enter ye in at the strait gate.（你们要进窄门。）So speak ye，and do so.（你们就该照这律法说话行事。）以上这些引用的句子都是《圣经》上的，由于这种用法遗留下来，现代英文中便有 mind you，look you，mark you，speak you 等等惯用语句：

你要当心，他还没有付款。

Mind you，he hasn’t paid the money yet.

赞美主。

Praise you the Lord！

5. 在现代英文中为加强语气或代表对照起见，也还是可以保留第二人称的主语的。特别提出对方来说，以便唤起对方的注意。

我不晓得要怎样说，诺拉，你去吧。

I don’t know what to say，Nora，you go!

“你在此看守她，”医生对他的助手说，“我要八点钟才能回来。”

“You watch her，” the doctor said to his assistant，“I shan’t be back before eight.”

你注意我说的话。

You mark my words！

你不要惹那条狗。

You let that dog alone！

你坐下来吃你的早餐好了。

You sit down and get your breakfast!

你听我的劝告，不要去。

You follow my advice and don’t you go！（Emphasis）

你要当心呀，你听到了吗？

You be careful，you hear？（Emphasis）

这个我搞不好，你来试试看。

I cannot manage this；you try.（Contrast）

约翰，你先坐下吧，有人会再去拿些椅子来的。

You take that seat，John，and someone（ = one of you present）fetch a few more chairs.（Contrast）

啊，请你们那个进去告诉她一声吧。

Oh，please，someone（ = someone of you）go in and tell her.

6. 对于第一人称和第三人称的命令句，就要加用 let 一字，而把主语变成宾语。

让我看看。

Let me see！

让我们走吧。

Let us go！

让他进来。

Let him come in!

让他们向前走。

Let them walk on.

我们在这里停留一个礼拜吧。

Let us stay here a week.

如果是恳求的话，还可以在 let us 前加 do 或 don’t 的字样，如：

啊，请让我们吧。

Oh，do let’s！

不要让我们那样做呀。

Don’t let us do that！

Compare：

Let’s 〔lets〕 go.（我们去吧。）

Let us 〔lets〕 go.（ = Set us free）（让我们走吧。）

Let us 〔lets〕 know（ = Tell us）the time of your arrival。（告诉我们你到达的时间。）

Let’s let him go.（ = Let’s allow him to go.）（让我们允许他去吧。）

Let it be distinctly understood（ = Understand 〔it〕 distinctly）that I will stand no nonsense.（要明白我是不会容忍胡闹的。）

Let me see！What is the name of that man？（让我想想看他姓什么。）

Let me not hear of it any more.（我不要再听到这个了。）

Let’s not do what is wrong.（让我们不要做错事。）

Let’s go for a walk，shall we？（我们去散散步吧。）以下则形式（Form）上为间接命令，而意味（Sense）上却是直接命令：Let the pupils beware of bad company.（Boys，beware of bad company.）（学生不要交坏朋友。）

Let any one of you，who can answer this question，hold up his hand.（你们任何人，谁能回答这问题的举手。）

Now let’s every one go to bed that we may rise early.（Walton）（大家早早去睡，我们明天好早早起身。）

7. 命令句中的假设语气的用法：

在 Older English 中命令句的主语如系第一人称或第三人称的时候，就用假设语气现在（Subjunctive Present）来表示。今日在诗中极少数惯用语句中，还有这种用法的遗留。

他们说我做错了。让它去吧。

They say I have done wrong. Be it（Let it be）so.

让我们向前进吧。

Move we（ = Let us move）on.（Scott）

不要爬得太高，以免跌得太重。

Climb we not（ = Let us not climb）too high，/Lest we should fall too low.（Coleridge）

我们的路在那边；让我们蜿蜒爬上高处。

Thither our path lies；wind we（ = let us wind）up the heights.（Robert Browning）

这种形式在现代口语中也有遗留下来的痕迹可寻。那些带有命令形（Imperative Form）的假设语气现在（Subjunctive Present），可用作让步的意思。

不管天气如何，我都要去。

I will go，be the weather what it may（ = whatever the weather may be）.

不管花多少钱，我都要买。

Cost what it may（ = Whatever it may cost），I will buy it.

不管你怎样说，他都不听。

Say what you will（ = Whatever you may say），he does not mind us.

无论他们怎样努力去干，也决不会成功的。

Try as they may（ = However had they may try），they will never succeed.

无论它们怎样挣扎，钓钩已钩牢在它们鳃上了。

Do what they might（ = Whatever they might do），the hook was in their gills.（George Meredith）

可以说强盗已被击溃了。

Suffice it to say that the robbers were defeated.（Farley）

金窝银窝，不如自己的狗窝。

Be it ever so humble，there is no place like home.

不管是什么事情，始终都要说实话。

Be the matter what it may，always speak the truth.

8. 命令句法的时态在性质上原是现在，不过偶然也有用完成式的，那当然是为着加强语气而用的。

算了吧。

Be gone！

够了，不要再这样胡说了。

Have done with such nonsense！

9. 命令句的特殊用法。

（a）为表示条件有时也可以用命令语气：

只要你看管小钱，大钱就会看管自己的。

Take care of the pence，and the pounds will take care of themselves.（ = If you take care of the pence，the pounds will take care of themselves.）

只要你敢走近我一步，我就要打碎你的嘴。

Take a step near me，and I’ll smash your mouth.

你说呀！不说我就开枪啦。

Speak！or I fire.（ = If you do not speak，I 〔will〕 fire.）

（b）表示假设等。

假如你有了一笔钱，例如一千镑吧，你会用来做点什么？

Suppose（ = If）you had a sum of money—say（ = for instance）a thousand pounds—what would you do with it？

下星期休假一天何如？

Suppose we take a holiday next week.

他连日常必需品都没有，遑说什么奢侈品。

He lacks the bare necessaries of life，let alone（ = not to mention）luxuries.

（c）命令句又可用作副词同等语（Adverb-Equivalent）。

毕竟，他那样的人是不会再度遇见的吧。

Take him for all in all（ = After all），we shall not look upon his like again.（A. Huxley）

确实，马克爵士和那事毫无关系。

Rest assured（ = Assuredly）Sir Mark had nothing to do with the matter.

习题 11

1. 我们不要做不诚实的事。

2. 我不想再听到这件事了。

3. 你要勤快点才好呀。

4. 不要懒惰呀。

5. 不要急急离去呀。

6. 拿把椅子来让你叔叔坐。

7. 那只猫你让它去吧。

8. 胡兰芝，现在你读。

9. 务请赏光。

10. 你不要挂意。

11. 不要忘记你的功课。

12. 不要过分依赖别人的帮助。

13. 你告诉他这是紧急的事。

14. 不要胡说八道。

15. 请大家安静下来。

16. 不要担心。

17. 你戒了酒，健康就会好些。

18. 永不要说别人的坏话。

19. 不要像许多人一样，只为娱乐而读书。

20. 请等一会，我马上就来。

（4）用感叹句来翻译

感叹句（Exclamatory Sentence）是表示惊愕、苦痛、欢喜等感情或加强说出某种事实、希望、命令、疑问等的文句。在这种句子的尾上，常要加上一个惊叹号（Exclamation Mark），以代替句点（Period）；在句首则常有 How 或 What 的字眼。How 常用于形容词的前面，而 What 则用于名词的前面，例如：

How lucky you are！（你多么幸运呀！）

What a lucky girl you are！（你是一个多么幸运的女子呀！）

但不用 how 或 what 也是可以构成感叹句的。那是形式不完备的感叹句。

一般的文法家多是将平叙句、疑问句、命令句、感叹句并列，把感叹句作为由内容来分的四种句型之一，但也有人，如荷兰的英文学者 Hendrik Poutsma（1857—1937），在他著的 A Grammar of Late Modern English 一书中，便把感叹句看做平叙句的一种。

因为人类是感情的动物，常要表现出各种各样的感情来。《礼记·礼运》上说：“何谓人情？喜怒哀惧爱恶欲七者，弗学而能。”因而被认为在语言中，这种感叹句是起源最古的文句。它是感情激发时的叫声，因而保存着朴素的形式。它常将主语和动词全部略去，有时甚至只有一个字。兹分别举例说明如下：

普通在句首用 what 或 how 的，可分三类，即

1. 将 how 用作 Exclamatory Adverb 的：

今夜的月光何等明亮！

How bright the moon shines tonight！

这花多么的美呀!

How beautiful this flower is！

我们快乐的日子多么短促呀!

How short our happy days appear！

那狗跑得好快！

How fast the dog runs!

你多么亲切！

How kind of you！

雷打得多么响！

How it thunders！

他的决心唱得多么高调！

How high a pitch his resolution soars！

2. 将 what 用作 Exclamatory Adjective 的：

那女子具有多么美丽的头发！

What beautiful hair that girl has！

他的房子好大！

What a big house he has！

人是多么渺小呀！

What paltry creatures we are！

这年头充满着幻想的色彩!

What visionary tints the year puts on！（Lowell）

啊，我的国人呀，那儿的秋天多好呀!

Oh，what a fall was there，my countrymen！（Shakespeare）

3. 将 what 用作 Exclamatory Pronoun 的：

他们不晓得是怎样想像的呀！

What might they not have imagined!

他发现那个时不胜诧异。

What was his surprise when he found it!

上面说，Poutsma 认为感叹句是一种平叙句，其实我觉得感叹句和疑问句更为接近，在形式上，在意义上，都有很深的关系。主语与动词的排列次序，感叹句确是和平叙句一样的，但除开这一点，感叹句就更像疑问句了。试比较如下：

疑问句：How old is he？（他几岁？）

感叹句：How old he is！（他好老！）

疑问句：What man？（什么人？）

感叹句：What a man！（何等了不起的人！）

疑问句：What book is it？（这是什么书？）

感叹句：What a good book it is！（多么一本好书！）

疑问句：What act was it？（那是什么行为？）

感叹句：What an act it was！（那算什么行为!）

疑问句：What dreadful act has he committed？（他做了什么可怕的事？）

感叹句：What a dreadful act he has committed！（他做了一件多么可怕的事！）

由上面的例句我们可以看得出来，感叹句用了 what 一字，又在其后接有单数普通名词时，便要加上一个不定冠词，这是在疑问句中所不需要的。

感叹句并不老是照平叙句一样，先说主语后说动词的，有时也可以照疑问句的次序，先说动词，再说主语。这是为要对主语加重的说法，尤其是移到句尾的字眼，说来特别响亮。

我做了一件多么愚笨的事呀！

What a poor fool was I！

我们真希望上天没有赋予我们说话的能力！

How would we wish that Heaven had left us still！

在石头上流动的水波，多么的光耀！

How bright are its waters，playing over the stones！（避免把修饰语的 playing，说成动词的 are playing 的关系而倒装。）

他的话多么动听呀！

How persuasive are his words!（Sheridan）

我在儿童时代老是在这些树下玩耍的。

How often have I played under these trees as a boy!（Irving）

啊，那是多么奇怪的光景！

Oh，what a sight was that！（H. R. Haggard）

人是（上帝）多么巧妙的作品呀!

What a piece of work is man！（Shakespeare）

人是多么奇怪的东西!

What a strange thing is man!（H. S. Merriman）

裘蒂斯，裘蒂斯，你多么可爱呀!

Judith，Judith，how lovely are you！（Curme）

从这小山开始路就宽了，这地方多么使人愉快呀！

How pleasant is this hill where the road widens.（Curme）

也有让疑问句一点不改来作感叹句用的。那称为 Exclamatory Question，例如：

她多么可爱呀！

Isn’t she a sweet girl！

谁会想到这样的事!

Who would have thought of such a thing!

啊，那真好玩！

Oh，wouldn’t it be fun！（Dickens）

多少次她没有坐在那里了！

How many times had she not sat there！（Galsworthy）

还有就照平叙句一模一样来说，只在句尾附加一个惊叹号，以表示确说的形式，也可以当作感叹句用：

这座桥绝对是危险的！

The bridge is absolutely unsafe！

那绝对不可以做！

It simply cannot be done！

在感叹句中有时可以将补语置于句首：

你们英国人是多么的冷血呀！

Cold-blooded people you Britishers are！

你圆满地达成了使命！

Well hast thou fulfilled thy mission！

此外感叹句还有种种破格的形式：

1. 省略句。

看呀！

Look！

蚀呀！

An eclipse！

啊，坏蛋！

O，the wretch！

幸运儿！

Fortunate man！

何等愚笨！

What folly！

何其无礼！

What impertinence!

好大的鼻子！

What a nose!

多么可惜！

What a pity（it is）！或 What a shame!

他真笨！

How foolish（it is）of him！

真是厚颜！

What impudence!

想得真妙!

What an idea!

这是多么的客气呀！

Wonderful civility this！（C. Bront）

多么不像从前他们白家的爷们呀!

How unlike their Belgic sirs of old.（Goldsmith）

如果我有这种愿望，我就要快乐十倍了！

This wish I have（ = If I have this wish），then ten times happy me！（Shakespeare）

一个多么了不起的女人——啊，一个多么了不起的女人!

What a woman—oh，what a woman！（Doyle）

2. 抗议句

什么？说我爱！说我求婚！说我找老婆！

What？I love！I sue！I seek a wife！

说我对肯医生讲了什么不礼貌的话？天不会允许的！

I say anything disrespectful of Dr. Kenn？Heaven forbid！（George Eliot）

他的祖父怎么会是一个商人！他是一位绅士呀!

Why，his grandfather was a tradesman！He a gentleman！（Defoe）

她要算是美人的话，她的母亲也就可以算是才子了!

She a beauty！I should as soon call her mother a wit.（Austen）

说他傲慢吗！啊，他决不会的！

He arrogant！No，never！

3. 将补语放在句首。

你居然笑，真是可怕呀！

How horrid of you to smile！

对于一个情夫，这样是颇有鼓励的呀！

Pretty encouragement this for a lover!

4. 将宾语放在句首。

但那正是这些女孩子们要说的话呀！

But the things these girls would say！

当他说这话时，他自己也觉得是伪君子的行为！

The hypocrite that he felt himself as he said this!

5. 加用 to think，fancy，O that 等字在句首。

他会在这次危机中拆我的烂污真不堪设想！

To think that he should fail me in this crisis！

啊，这样壮丽的王宫里，居然会有欺诈的行为！

O，that deceit should dwell

In such a gorgeous palace！（Shakespeare）

他居然相信呀！

Fancy his believing it！

竟至要等待整个下午！

Fancy having to wait all afternoon!

试想他对那件事竟一无所知！

To think of his not knowing anything about it？

从未听到这样的事！

If ever I heard the like！（ = I never heard the like.）

祈愿句（Optative Sentence）通常是看作感叹句的一种的：

共和国万岁！

Long live the Republic！ 或 May the Republic live long!

愿你的国降临。愿你的旨意行在地上，如同行在天上。

Thy kingdom come，thy will be done.（Matt.6：10）

有你这样的好心肠，上帝是会保佑你的。

God bless and reward you for all your kindness！（Stowe）

愿上帝原恕我!

God forgive me！（Miss Mulock）

啊，女王，但愿如此！

So be it，O Queen！（H. R. Haggard）

愿我的房子是山边的茅屋！

Mine be a cot beside the hill！（Rogers）

愿上帝帮助我！

So help me God！

愿我再也不会见到他的面孔！

May I never see his face again！

愿今夜没有噩梦来打扰我的睡眠！

May no evil dream disturb my rest！（Evening Hymn）

愿他安息！

May he rest in peace！（Irving）

我要是在那里就好了！

Would that I were there！或 Oh were I but there！

雷白卡，你要能多留一下就好了！

Oh that you could stay longer，dear Rebecca！（Thackeray）

但愿我行事坚定，得以遵守你的律例!

O that my ways were directed to keep thy statute.（Psalm）

愿我能够把这一切铸成一顶皇冠！

Would I could coin it all into a crown!（Lord Lytton）

我要是没有遇到它就好了！

Wish to God that I had never seen it！（Doyle）

啊，愿我能够再见到他一次！

Oh，that I could have seen him once again！（Watts-Dunton）

但愿我有这种精神，而不是我孩子的。

I would that it had been my soul and not my boy’s.（H. R. Haggard）

啊，要是这样就好了！

Oh had it been so！

那时我要在巴黎就好了!

Oh to have been in Paris then！

愿他安乐地长生不老！

May he live long in peace！

但愿是由那纯洁的火焰点燃的火把!

O for a kindling touch from that pure flame.（Wordsworth）

愿你有一个光明的前途!

Bright be the future that lieth before thee！（Scott）

愿那秋天是阴暗的！

Black be its fall.（Stevenson）

愿你的树林是绿的，花是美的！

Green be your woods，and fair your flowers!（Byron）

祈愿句的反面便成为咒骂了，如

我碰了鬼！

Devil take me！（Lamb）

该死的文法！

Grammar be hanged！

愿上帝使你瞎眼。

May God strike you blind.

习题 12

1. 雪多么洁白呀！

2. 这落日真是光辉灿烂呀！

3. 这花多美呀！

4. 你好迟呀！

5. 这机器的声音真大呀！

6. 我们玩得多么有趣。

7. 他真是傻瓜。

8. 人的头脑真是太巧妙了。

9. 一个多么卑鄙的流痞！

10. 愿他有好的运道！

11. 每年真不知有多少人到耶路撒冷朝圣。

12. 我要能够去那音乐会就好了！

13. 他的鼾声多大！

14. 他口若悬河！

15. 在这里遇到你，我真高兴！

16. 愿她婚后幸福！

17. 朋友们再会！

18. 好呀，她来了！

19. 哎呀，我完了！

20. 愿天下有情人都成眷属！

第二编
英文惯用法及其翻译

Ⅰ. It 的造句

（1）it…不定词

（a）It is wrong to tell a lie.

撒谎是不对的。

（b）He does not think it wrong to tell a lie.

他不认为撒谎是不对的。

【解说】

这种形式上的主语或宾语，是中文表现法中所没有的。这些句子的真正的主语或宾语移到后面去了，而不在原来的地位上，于是那里就产生一个空缺，只得用“it”填补上去，所以这个“it”，英文就叫做填补词（expletive）。

如果把（a）例真正的主语恢复它原来的地位时，便成为：

To tell a lie is wrong.

这正是中国话的表现法，但英文除极少数的文句外（如 To teach is to learn. To eat is to live.）一般都不喜欢用不定词作主语，而要改用形式上的“it”来作主语，把它说成：

It is wrong to tell a lie.

英文用不定词作主语虽不流行，但至少文句是通的。用不定词作宾语，则有背英文的惯用法，成为不通的了。如说成，He does not think to tell a lie wrong. 或说成，He does not think wrong to tell a lie. 都要不得，必须加用形式上的宾语“it”进去，而把它说成：

He does not think it wrong to tell a lie.

才合乎英文惯用的语法。因为惯用法不允许拿不定词作宾语，所以凡遇到不定词要用作宾语时，就采用形式上的“it”来代替它。

不定词虽不能用作宾语，但可用作补语，如 We found him to be alive.（我们发觉他还活着。）这种作补语用的不定词，有时可以略去，单说 We found him alive. 意思也是一样，而且更加简明有力。

形式上的宾语，在某些常说的文句中，可以省略不用，尤其是后接不定词的时候为然，如：Your father thought 〔it〕 fit to leave me guardian.（你父亲认为请我做监护人最为适合。）

If God sees 〔it〕 fit that I should marry，he would provide me with a worthy husband.（如果上帝认为我应该结婚，他就会供给我一个如意郎君的。）

And are you sure of all this，are you sure 〔of it〕 that nothing ill has befallen my boy？（Goldsmith）（这一切都是真的吗，你确实知道我儿子没有遭遇任何不顺利的事吗？）

I am sorry 〔for it〕 that you are going away.（你要走我很难过。）

Men differ from brutes in 〔it〕 that they can think and speak.（人之所以异于禽兽，就在能思想能说话。）

He forgot everything but 〔it〕 that he was near her.（Galsworthy）（他跟她在一块儿就把一切都忘了。）

【类例】

It is easy to learn English，but it is difficult to attain perfection in it.（英文易学难精。）

It is much easier to read French than read Greek.（学法文比学希腊文容易多了。）

It may be advisable to wait till they come back.（最好是等他们转来。）

She had said what it was necessary to say.（要说的她都说了。）

It needs no great sagacity to see that the writer is a novice at his task.（很容易看得出来那作家是一位生手，刚从事写作的。）

I found it very difficult to put it in practice.（我觉得实行很难。）

He took it upon himself to pay off the debt.（他自愿负责还清债务。）

I know it to be the established custom of your sex to reject a man on the first application.（Jane Austen）（我知道拒绝男子的第一次求婚是你们女性的固定的习惯。）

Fortunately I have it in my power to introduce you to very superior society.（幸而我还有能力可以介绍你给非常上流的社会。）

If you take it into your head to go on refusing every offer of marriage in this way，you will never get a husband at all.（如果你执意要继续这样来拒绝所有的求婚，你就永远得不到一个丈夫了。）

Make it the first object to be able to fix and hold your attention upon your studies.（把专心致志于学业，持久不懈，作为第一目标。）

The fog made it difficult to calculate the distance.（雾迷了眼，看不出距离来。）

【习题 1】

1. It was glorious to acquire a place by justice，yet more glorious to prefer justice before a place.

2. I have my own views about learning a language. I think it waste of time to acquire a greater knowledge than suffices me to read fluently and talk enough for the ordinary affairs of life.（Maugham）

3. How far cards might have helped him here it is difficult to say.（Hugh Walpole）

（2）it…for…不定词

（a）It is difficult for him to do so.

要他这样做是有困难的。

（b）I think it dfficult for him to do so.

我想要他这样做是有困难的。

【解说】

这是属于“it…不定词”同一形式的，“it”仍然是代表不定词的形式上的主语或宾语。翻译时必须把句中的不定词看作主动词，因为介词“for”的宾语是不定词的意味上的主语（sense subject），即宾语的“him”应译成主语才是。如果我们把填补词的“it”去掉，恢复原来应有的形式时，便成 To do so is difficult for him. 这个“for him”，也可译成中文的“在他”，全句译为“要这样做，在他是有困难的”。但不如把“him”当作主语来译更加利落。

这个“for”有时可以换为“of”，如 It was brave indeed，of you to attempt it.（你真大胆敢于去尝试一下。）何时要用“for”，何时要用“of”，依前面的那个形容词而定。如果那个形容词是指的一种行为的性质（the nature of an action），就要用“for”；如果那形容词是指的行为的性质，同时又指行为的人（the doer of an action），就要用“of”了。换句话说，单说行为的用“for”，说行为及行为者的用“of”，前者以“necessary”为例，后者以“kind”为例，造成句子，便是：

（a）It is necessary for you to do so.

（b）It is kind of you to do so.

句中说的“kind of you”，可译为“你的行为是亲切的”，也就是说“行为者的你是亲切的”。句中说的“necessary for you”，可译为“你的行为是必要的”，却不能说什么“行为者的你”，即是：

（a）“必要的”（necessary）是指“行为”，不是指“行为者”。

（b）“亲切的”（kind）既是指“行为”，又是指“行为者”。

（b）句的意思是“他这样做是亲切的”，同时也是“这样做的人是亲切的”，但（a）句则只能说“这样做是必要的”，却不能说“这样做的人是必要的”，因为这样一来，变成必要的是“人”，而不是“事”了。我们只能改说成 You are kind to do so. 不能改说成 You are necessary to do so. 其理甚明。再举一例，以资比较：

（a）It was impossible for him to go alone.

（b）It was foolish of him to go alone.

（a）句中的“impossible”，也和“necessary”一样，是指“事”而不是指“人”，所以要用非人称的“it”做主语，但（b）句中的“foolish”则和“kind”一样，既可指“事”，又可指“人”，说 It is foolish 既可以，说 You are foolish 也可以，不过我们却不能说 It is foolish to do so. 也不能说 It is foolish for you to do so. 一定要说 It is foolish of you to do so.

【类例】

It is no time for me to hide anything.（Doyle）（什么东西都来不及藏起来。）

It is time for us to start.（ = that we should start）（现在是我们动身的时候了。）

It is an evil thing for a man to have suspicion.（Caxton）（人要怀疑是一件坏事。）

It is not common for him to receive letters.（Doyle）（他接信是不平常的。）

It is enough for me to say that some of its circumstances passed before my own eyes.（Dickens）（关于我亲眼看见许多这样的情形的事，我已经说得够了。）

It is easier for a camel to go through a needle’s eye than for a rich man to enter into the kingdom of God.（Luke，xviii，25）（骆驼穿过针的眼，比财主进上帝的国，还容易呢。）

How was it possible for so great a commerce to flourish？（Gissing）（这样大的贸易怎么可以兴隆呢。）

【习题 2】

1. It is so very difficult for a sick man not to be a scoundrel.（Dr Johnson）

2. It is not supposed to be easy for women to rise to the height of taking the large free view of anything—anything which calls for action.

3. It is foolish of him to set himself to perform an impossibility.

4. It is not good for a man to be alone.

5. It was wrong of you to borrow his bicycle without asking his permission.

6. I think it wise of him not to accept their offer.

（3）it…动名词

（a）It is no use talking about it.

空谈无益。

（b）I think it rather dangerous your venturing out to sea.

我想你冒险出海是相当危险的。

【解说】

“It is no use + Gerund” = “It is of no use + Infinitive”，可译作“无益”或“无用”。这个形式上的主语是和代表不定词一样，是代表后面的动名词的。二者所不同的，就是后接不定词的前面要用形容词，后接动名词的前面才用名词。因为依照惯用语法，只能说 It is useless（ = of no use）to protest. 不能说 It is no use to protest. 所以我们如果要把例句中的“talking”改为“to talk”时，前面说的“no use”那个名词，就得改为“of no use”的形容词才行。It is no use doing. = It is no good doing. Cf. There is no doing. = It is impossible to do. 例如

There is no knowing what may happen.（未来的事是不可能知道的。）

【类例】

It is no use crying over spilt milk.（覆水难收。）

It was very odd and amusing seeing her friends on the stage.（见到她的朋友登台表演，她觉得奇怪有趣。）

It’s not worth while your going.（你不值得去。）

It is very funny his going without saying goodbye to anyone.（他一声不响地走了，真是奇怪。）

It is no good talking of his domestic matters.（不要谈论他的家事。）

It is useless your trying to evade the question.（你用不着环顾左右而言他。）

It was no use men being angry with them for damaging the links.（他们把高尔夫球场弄坏，人们也不必生气。）

It is useless your saying anything.（你说也没有用。）

It is no use hoping for or expecting anything now.（现在用不着希望或期待什么。）

It is no use your trying to deceive me.（你别想欺骗我。）

It is no use my arguing with you.（我用不着和你争论。）

Don’t you find it very unpleasant walking in the rain？（你不觉得在雨中行走不舒服吗？）

Do you think it odd my having gone to church？（你觉得我去做了礼拜奇怪吧。）

【习题 3】

1. It is no good talking about the greatness of our country，unless we do something to make it great.

2. It is worth while asking how far their education contributed to their success.

3. You must find it rather dull living here all by yourself.

（4）it…子句

（a）It is true that he went there.

他去了那里是真的。

（b）I think it true that he went there.

我想他去了那里是真的。

【解说】

这是“it…不定词”的一种变形，形式上的主语或宾语所代表的，在此句型中便是后面的子句（that-Clause）。这两种句型差不多都是可以随时变换的，单句变成复句，复句也可以变成单句，例如：

I have some purchases that I must make.（to make）（我要买些东西。）

There was not an instant that we could afford to lose.（to lose）（一刻都不能耽误。）

There are many difficulties that will have to be overcome.（to overcome 或 to be overcome）（有许多困难尚待克服。）

Egypt was the first country that became civilized（to become civilized）.（埃及是最早的文明古国。）

I want a hat that will go（to go）with this dress.（我想要一顶配合这衣服的帽子。）

There is no reason that she should give me（for her to give me）such a dirty look.（她没有理由要对我做出那样的怪相。）

It is dangerous that you have（to have）a smattering of superficial knowledge on a subject.（对于任何问题一知半解的知识都是危险的。）

表“目的”的 in order that…may，也可改为 in order to do，比较下列二句：

（a）The teacher explained that passage again and again in order that every student might understand it.

（b）The teacher explained that passage again and again in order to make every student understand it.

可知这种句型在英文中是用得极多的，在口头说的短句中，常将“that”略去，把两个子句连着来说，如 I think（that）you had better go. = It is advisable for you to go. 在主句的“it + 动词”之后，子句之前，可接用形容词、名词、副词，或什么都不接，而直接接上子句也行。

【类例】

It is clear that you did not want to do the work.（很明显地你不想做那工作。）

It is a blessing that we do not know what is going to happen.（我们不知道未来的事是幸福的。）

It is your own concern whether you believe me or not.（信不信是你自己的事。）

It matters little who does it so long as it is done。（只要事情做了，谁做都行。）

It is amazing what progress the child is making under the new teacher.（在新老师教导之下那孩子的进步神速。）

I think it probable that he may give his assent.（我想他大概会同意的。）

We regarded it as preferable that he should continue in his position with us.（我认为他能继续在我们这里帮忙更好。）

It is a thousand pities that it should have come to this.（那会变成这个样子真是可惜。）

It is probable that he’ll come again.（他大概会再来的。）

It often happens that the biter is bit.（请看剃头者，人亦剃其头。）

It seems that there is going to be a change.（好像会有变动。）

How is it that you are late？（你怎么会迟到的？）

It is under such circumstances that one recognizes one’s true friends.（患难见交情。）

It occurred to me（that）there was no time to lose.（Stevenson）（我感到事已迫切。）

It was to save them from destruction（that）I parted with your dear person.（Fielding）（为救助他们免于灭亡，我才离开了你。）

He made it clear that the plan was impossible.（他明白地说了那计划行不通。）

Depend upon it（that）there is some mistake.（那一定有错。）

You must see to it that no harm comes to her.（你必须注意不要伤害她。）

I took it for granted that he would not come.（我认为他不会来。）

May I take it that you will sign the document？（我相信你会在文件上签字的吧。）

And publish it that she is dead indeed.（Shakespeare）（公开宣布她已死亡。）

No one wished it to be known that he failed to see the wonderful clothes.（谁也不希望别人知道他没有看见皇帝的新衣。）

Rumour has it that there will be war.（谣言说快要打仗了。）

【习题 4】

1. It is true the Chinese attitude is to a large degree a reaction to the behaviour of the West，so that the latter must be taken into account，and will frequently be criticized.

2. It is hoped that men will be honest，but from a higher motive than because honesty is the best policy.

3. It is a rule never to be forgotten，that whatever strikes strongly，should be described while the first impression remains fresh upon the mind.（Dr Johnson）

4. I have heard it remarked by a statesman of high reputation that most great men have died of overeating themselves.

（5）it is…子句

It is diligence that makes up for deficiency.

勤能补拙。

【解说】

这和上项所说的“it…子句”完全不同，因为这个“it”不是代表后面的子句的。这是一种加重语气的说法。句中关系代名词的先行词，须与后接附属子句中的动词在数、性、人称上保持一致。这种关系代名词是属于限制性的（restrictive），自应以用“that”为宜，不过常被换上“who”，“which”来说，也是可以的，而且甚至有将关系代名词略去的。

上举例句的原句，不是 That makes up for deficiency is diligence. 而是 Diligence makes up for deficiency. 其加重说法便是套上“It is…that…”的形式。说 It is I that am wrong. 比说 I am wrong. 要加强得多。再看两种比较的说法：

You are guilty.（普通说法）

It is you that are guilty.（强调说法）

Edison invented the gramophone.（普通）

It was Edison who invented the gramophone.（强调）

Stupid pupils do not ask questions.（普通）

It is not stupid pupils who ask questions.（强调）

We should be grateful to men like Edison.（普通）

It is to men like Edison that we should be grateful.（强调）

如果主动词后面接的是一个不定词，就无须要有子句来加强语气，例如：

SIMPLE：The tough little man’s object in life is to avoid work.

EMPHATIC：It is the tough little man’s object in life to avoid work.

为回答 Who is the tough little man？一问，也有两种不同的方式，一为普通的说法，一为加强的说法。

SIMPLE：The tough little man is a person whose object in life is to avoid work.

EMPHATIC：The tough little man is a person whose object in life it is to avoid work.

句中“it”不代表后面子句的例子，还有 It was not that he had plenty of money.（那并不是因为他有很多的钱。）这个“it”，意为“the reason”或“what I mean.”详见后面的“否定的造句”。

【类例】

What is it that you have to sell？（Dickens）（你要出卖的是什么？）

It is not only bachelors on whom the young ladies confer their affections.（Thackeray）（年轻女子要和他谈情说爱的，不只是单身汉而已。）

It is not who rules us that is important，but how he rules us.（重要的不是谁统治我们，而是他怎样统治法。）

It is only shallow people who judge by appearances.（Oscar wilde）（只有浅薄的人才会以貌取人。）

It is a kind of miracle brought us here.（Bacon）（我们来到这里，简直是一种奇迹。）

It is I have been stupid.（Wells）（愚笨的是我。）

I wonder who it was defined man as a rational animal.（Wilde）（人是一种理性的动物，这不知是谁下的定义。）

It is proud he must be to get you.（Yeats）（ = Proud he must be to get you.）（得到了你，他一定是很自负的。）

It was your brother who talked the most.（说话最多的就是你的兄弟。）

It is the first step which is troublesome.（只有初步麻烦一点。）

It is not helps but obstacles that make a man.（使人成功的，不是助力，而是阻力。）

It is only education which will conquer prejudice.（克服偏见唯有教育。）

It was thanks to him that I got well.（要谢谢他把我的病治好了。）

It was with some difficulty that he found the way to his own house.（他费了不少的劲才找到路回家。）

It was not till evening that we got the news.（我们到晚上才得到消息。）

It is a wise father that knows his own child.（Merchant of Venice，II，ii）（任何聪明的父亲都不见得完全知道他自己的儿子的。）①

【习题 5】

1. It is an ill wind that blows nobody good.

2. Yet it is not he who sings loudest and jokes most that has the lightest heart.（Irving）

3. It is the want of money and need of it that gives most of us activitacy.

4. Reading furnishes the mind only with materials of knowledge；it is thinking that makes what we read ours.

5. Most large companies have trained specialists，called personnel managers，whose job it is to interview and pass judgment on prospective employees.

6. He is an interpreter，one whose duty it is to act as a bridge or channel between the minds of his readers.

（6）it…名词

It is strange this Norse view of Nature.

挪威人对大自然的这种看法是很奇怪的。

【解说】

这个“it”是代表后面的名词的，在名词的前面，经常伴有“this”，“that”，“the”的字样。上例去掉形式上的“it”，恢复原来的说法，便是 This Norse view of Nature is strange. 不过一般人说时，都喜欢采用 It is strange…的形式。我们不可误会这是“it…子句”型，省略了“that”的，试看下面的类例，便无法把“that”加进去。

【类例】

It was very funny the way in which the penguins used to waddle.（企鹅走路的那样子真是滑稽。）

His coat it was all of the greenwood hue.（他的上衣完全是绿林的颜色。）

【习题 6】

1. It is strange the number of mistakes he always makes.

2. It’s so dreadful，her father and mother dead almost at the same time.（Gissing）

3. He wondered if it was true what Mabel had said.

①此种句法一不当心即将译错。梁实秋译：“聪明的父亲才能认识他自己的儿子呢。”朱生豪译：“只有聪明的父亲才会知道他自己的儿子。”

Ⅱ. 名词的造句

（7）“all + 抽象名词”或“抽象名词 + itself” = very + 形容词

（a）He was all gentleness to her.

他对她非常的温存。

（b）To his superiors，he is humility itself.

对于长辈他极为谦逊。

【解说】

“all + 抽象名词” = “抽象名词 + itself” = very + 形容词。这原是表示某种性质到了极点的一种说法，有“非常”，“只管”，“一味”，“尽”之意，有时甚至可以译为“…的化身”，“…的具体化”。普通名词的复数形用在“all”之后，也是属于这一类型的句子，如 She is all smiles.（她一味笑。）He is all eyes.（他盯着看。）

【类例】

I am all attention.（我全神贯注地在倾听着。）

I am all anxiety.（我真担心。）

“It’s simplicity itself”，he remarked，chuckling at my surprise——“so absurdly simple that an explanation is superfluous.”（Doyle）（“那简直是再简单也没有了”，他望着我惊异的表情，咯咯地笑着说，“简直简单到用不着再加说明。”）

【习题 7】

1. “I am all astonishment，” said Nelson，“when I reflect on what we have achieved.”

2. Washington was discretion itself in the use of speech，never taking advantage of an opponent，or seeking a short-lived triumph in a debate.（Smiles）

3. While she was waiting for the tinkling of the bell，all nerves，suddenly he stood before her.（Maugham）

（8）“the + 单数名词”的特殊用法

（a）The horse is a noble animal.

马是高尚的动物。

（b）The pen is mightier than the sword.

文笔比刀剑更要强而有力。（文胜于武）

【解说】

定冠词的“the”与单数普通名词结合时，有下列五种用法：（1）特定之物（particularizing），（2）集合复数（collective），（3）代表性的单数（representative），如（a）例，（4）代替抽象名词（abstractive），即指那个名词所有的抽象的观念，如（b）例，（5）定性的用法（qualitative），代替“such”或“so”的字样，用于普通名词或是抽象名词都可以。现在就根据这五种用法举例如下：

【类例】

Shut the door please.（请把门关上。）（1）

The cabinet has resigned.（内阁辞职了。）（1）

I am going to the station.（我上车站去。）（附近的）（1）

They are the teachers of our school.（他们是本校的教员。）（全体）（2）

The stars are out.（星星出来了。）（常见的）（2）

The cherry trees are in blossom.（樱花开了。）（附近所有的樱花）（2）

The gentleman glories in his honourable poverty.（君子安贫。）（乐于清贫，“the”表其类全体的性质或作用。）（3）

The whale is not a fish，but a mammal.（鲸不是鱼，而是哺乳动物。）（3）

Bitters are good for the stomach.（苦味有益于胃。）（3）

The face is the index of the mind.（面情为心情的表征。）（3）

The child is father of the man.（儿童为成人的胚胎。）（儿童的性情虽长大了也不变。江山易改，本性难移。）（3）

We should give up the sword for the pen.（化干戈为玉帛。）（4）

The heart sees farther than the head.（情有胜于智的先见。）（4）

We must keep the wolf from the door.（ = keep hunger away）（我们必须防止饥饿。）（4）

When a man is reduced to want，the beggar（element）comes out.（人穷志短。）（人穷则乞丐的性质俱现。）（4）

When I hear this song，I feel the patriot rise within me.（我听了这支歌便发生爱国的心情。）（闻歌而有故国之思。）（4）

He is not the boy to（ = such a boy as will）tell a lie.（他不是说谎的孩子。）（5）

He had the goodness（ = was so good as）to grant my request.（他亲切地允许了我的请求。）（5）

【习题 8】

1. The bamboo is one of the most wonderful as well as beautiful productions of the tropics.

2. He allowed the father to be overruled by the judge，and declared his own son to be guilty.

（9）无生物的主语

Business took me to the town.

我因事进城去了。

【解说】

中国话对于每个句子，差不多都是用人作主语，很少用无生物的。英文本也可以用人作主语，但用无生物作主语，却使得英文的气味更加浓厚。上例当然也可以说，I went to the town on business. 不过不及用无生物主语来得漂亮。有时为避免把人转入，用无生物主语则更为含蓄，如不说 We request，而说 It is requested，便觉得是间接的要求了。例如 It is requested that every guest should bring a gift with him for exchange.（每位客人请携带一件礼物以便交换。）Contributions are requested for the refugees.（为难民呼吁捐款救济。）与无生物主物同用的动词，主要有 make，enable，remind，prevent，show，bring，keep 等字。

【类例】

This medicine will make you feel better.（ = If you take this medicine，you will feel better.）（你吃了这药就会好些。）

His wealth enables him to do anything.（ = He can do anything because he is rich.）（他有钱什么都可以做。）

The sight of the orphan always reminds me of her parents.（ = Whenever I see the orphan，I remember her parents.）（一见到那孤儿，我就想到她的父母。）

Bad weather prevented us from starting.（ = We could not start because of bad weather.）（天气太坏，我们无法动身。）

Careful comparison of them will show you the difference.（ = If you compare them carefully，you will see the difference.）（你只消仔细比较一下，就可以发现不同。）

A few steps across the lawn brought me to a large，splendid hotel.（走过草地几步，我就到了一个华丽的大旅馆。）

A bit of knowledge kept me from making a big mistake when an important question was to be decided.（我因稍具知识，所以在决定重要问题的时候，还没有犯大的过错。）

【习题 9】

1. His work made it impossible for him to get home oftener than every other weekend.

2. Machinery had made the products of manufactories very much cheaper than formerly.

3. My hunger and the shadows together tell me that the sun has done much travel since I fell asleep.

（10）something（much）of，nothing（little）of

（a）Mr. Li is something of a philosopher.

李君略有哲学家的风味。

（b）Mr. Wu is nothing of a musician.

吴君全无音乐家的风味。

（c）Mr. Lu is very much of a poet.

卢君大有诗人气派。

（d）Mr. Liu is little of a scholar.

刘君几无学者风度。

【解说】

这是表示“程度”的形容词片语，有时可以当作副词来译。“something of” = to some extent（某程度），在问句或条件句中，则说“anything of”，中文可译为“略有”，“多少”。至于“nothing of”，则可译为“全无”，“毫无”。“to be something of + 名词” = “to have something of + 名词 + in + 代名词”，所以 He is something of a philosopher. = He has something of a philosopher in him. 又 He is nothing in ability of an orator. = He has nothing of an orator in his ability.（他毫无演说家的才能。）

英文的“much”一字作名词用时，意为“多量”，“多额”，“许多”（a good deal），“重要的人或物”，“了不起的东西”等。如 How much are eggs？（鸡蛋多少钱？）Much of the time was wasted.（时间大半浪费了。）“much of”可译为“大有”，通常与否定连用，如 He is not much of a scholar.（他算不得一个学者。）意为“不是很好的或重要的学者”。与这“much of”相反的说法，为“little of”，可译为“几无”。至于“much of”的变形则为“a great deal of”，而“little of”的变形则为“a bit of”。这个“much of”又还可以用比较级的形式，如 Oscar Wilde 在 DeProfundis（《狱中记》）中说，I am far more of an individualist than I ever was.（我现在比以前更是一个个人主义者了。）又如 Conan Doyle 在 The Sign of Four 中说，The truth is that I was never much of a credit to the family，and I doubt if they would be so very glad to see me. They were all steady，chapel-going folk，small farmers，well known and respected over the country-side while I was always a bit of a rover.（实际那个家族对我是没有什么信誉的，是不会高兴见到我的。他们都是信仰上帝，稳健的小农，在乡下颇有名气，受人尊敬，而我却老是有点流浪儿的味道。）

这一类的名词用法，最好当作副词来译，就容易了，例如 He has seen something of life. 与其译为“他看过了一些人生”，不如译为“他略具阅历”或“他稍阅世”。He is something of a scholar. 也同样地可译为“他略具学识”或“他稍有学问”。

英文的“something of”与“something like”，又有程度的不同。“something like” = something approximating in character or amount，指数量或性质略同的事物，又可作 somewhat（似乎，略微）解。This is something like a pudding.（此物略似布丁）。It shaped something like a cigar.（其形略似雪茄）。

从前北京大学有两位教授（陈源和刘复），感情闹得不好。就是为着“something”一字。当陈通伯在伦敦把刘半农介绍给一位英国学人时，因知刘不大愿意透漏他北大教授的身份，故含糊地说了一句：Mr. Liu is something of a professor or a lecturer. 刘听了大不受用，后来同到北京，刘在《语丝》上为文讥讽陈，故意把“北京大学教授陈源先生，即署名西滢的便是”一句中国话，加注译成英文说：“A Teacher of the Peking National University. Something like a Professor or a Lecturer.”比陈说的“something of”更降了一级，变成“something like”了。可见“something”不是一个好字眼，不可随便乱用，因此字略等于中国话的“一点儿”，如 to know something of everything，意为什么都知道一点儿，其实什么都不懂。

【类例】

They say that he had no university education，but he seems to be something of a scholar.（据说他并未受过大学教育，但他看去好像学者的样子。）

He has not much education，but he seems to be very much of a gentleman.（他虽未受过太多的教育，但很有君子风度。）

That’s too much of a good thing.（那事好过了头，反而糟了。）

I like warm weather，but with the mercury standing at 95° in the shade，it is a little too much of a good thing.（我喜欢热天，但室内达到九十五度，则未免有点过佳，反而觉得不妙。）

He is very much of a gentleman.（他是一个非常体面的绅士。）

He is more of a scholar than a teacher.（与其说他是教师，不如说他是学者。）

If he is anything of a gentleman，he will keep his promise，I should think.（他如果有一点君子的风度，我想他就会守约的。）

There was only a wooden latch to his door，because he had been too much of a skinflint to pay for one of the new iron locks to be fixed on.（Walter de la Mare）（他家门上只有一个木闩，因为他太吝啬而不肯花钱买一把新的铁锁装上。）

His features were agreeable；his body，though slight of build，had something of athletic outline.（他的面貌令人有愉快之感，他的身体虽很瘦小，但有点运动家的轮廓。）

Although not a strong boy，there was nothing of the coward about him.（他虽不是一个强壮的少年，但却没有一点胆怯的迹象。）

You may have something of a Roosevelt，something of a Newton in yourself；you may have something very much greater than either of these men manifested waiting your help to give it expression.（你也许具有罗斯福的才能，牛顿的智慧，你也许具有比他们两人所显示的更为伟大的本领，在等待着你把它表现出来。）

【习题 10】

1. When Waddington left her Kitty thought over what he had so carelessly said. It hadn’t been very pleasant to hear and she had had to make something of an effort not to show how much it touched her.（W. S. Maugham）

2. It was the first word of kindness the child had ever heard in her life；and the sweet tone and manner struck strangely on the wild，rude heart，and a sparkle of something like a tear shone in the keen，round，glittering eye.（H. B. Stowe）

3. There was nothing of the student about him，but very much of the miner.

4. As you know，Gurdon，I never was much of a ladies’ man.（F. M. White）

（11）属格的主格作用和宾格作用

（a）No one came to my mother’s rescue.

谁也不来救助我的母亲。

（b）The love of money is the root of all evil.

爱财是一切罪恶的根源。

【解说】

英文属格的用法，都有主格作用和宾格作用的分别，要看文气才能决定是哪一种。由他动词变来的名词，差不多都有这两种用法。

美总统 Lincoln 的名言，“the government of the people，by the people and for the people”，便是一个好的例子。句中的“of the people”一语，到底是主格作用呢，还是宾格作用，颇引起意义上的争执，因为它可以解释为（1）“人民治理的”（主格作用），也可以解释为（2）“治理人民的”（宾格作用），到底是何者只好去问林肯本人了。普通把他这句名言译为“人民的，由于人民的，为着人民的政治”，把“of”一字含糊地译成一个“的”字，不分宾主，实在是一种过关的办法，但意义是不够明显的。另外一种简单的译法是“民治、民有、民享”，这就明白表示出主格作用来了。Austen O’Malley 写有这样的一句 parody（模仿他人的作品而改作的讽刺诗文）：The American government is a rule of the people，by the people，for the boss.（美国的政治是人民为着政党的领袖而统治人民的。）这好像是把“of”看作宾格作用了。

上举的（a）（b）两句，都是用为宾格作用的，现再举例比较如下。其中主格作用是通常的意思，宾格作用为偶然的用法。

The conquests of Caesar（主格作用）

Caesar’s conquest of Britain（宾格作用）

The writings of Plato（主）

The writing of a book（宾）

The commands of the general（主）

The command of an army（宾）

John’s fear（约翰所怀的恐怖）

The fear of John（恐怕约翰的心情）

Your dismissal of him（主）

Your dismissal by him（宾）

【类例】

Nature is not over-merciful in her treatment of delinquents.（主）

Are you satisfied with your treatment？（宾）

She has never recovered her loss.（主）

I have never recovered her loss.（宾）

Thanks to their father’s rescue，they could return home safe.（幸获父亲援救，他们才能安然回家。）（主）

They hurried to their father’s rescue.（他们赶快去救父亲。）（宾）

The love of Browning for Italy.（白朗宁对意大利的爱。）（主）

A mother’s love of children.（母爱。）（宾）

The love of God.（上帝的爱。）（主）

God’s love of man.（上帝爱世人。）（宾）

His memory is very bad.（他的记忆力很坏。）（主）

A monument is dedicated to his memory.（为纪念他而立的碑。）（宾）

She doesn’t want his praise.（她不要他赞美。）（主）

She has come to sing his praise.（她来赞美他。）（宾）

【习题 11】

1. His death was hastened by the shock of her loss.

2. A mother’s love for her own child differs essentially from all other affections.

3. Succeeding ages will reverence his memory.

4. There were no legal reason to justify his expulsion.

5. The mere saving of pennies regardlss of the sacrifices we make to save them is not scientific and practical thrift.

6. His greatness was in his perseverance in the pursuit of his project.

7. The loss of these aesthetic tastes is a loss of happiness.

（12）名词（A） + of + a + 名词（B）

（a）It was a great mountain of a wave.

那是一个像山一样高的大浪。

（b）That fool of a Tom did it.

这是托姆那个笨蛋做的。

【解说】

这叫作同格的属格（Appositive Possessive），在“of”前后的名词，指同一人或同一物。其中的“名词 + of”，构成一个形容词片语，以修饰后来的名词。在这个同格的“of”后出现的名词前面，必须加不定冠词，哪怕是固有名词，这个不定冠词都不能省。

最普通的有“a devil of a man”，“a rascal of a fellow”，“to catch a death of a cold”等 idiomatic expressions，可解释为“a devil of”等就像“a kind of ”，“a sort of” 一样的表现法，从文法上看，“devil”，“kind”等是主体（principal），而“of”以下为附属（adjunct），即所谓修饰语（modifier），但从意义上看，则恰相反，“kind of”，“devil of”的“of”，可视为前一字的后缀（suffix），不妨将“a devil of a man”改写为“a devilish man”，将“a rascal of a fellow”改写为“a rascally fellow”，将“a death of a cold”改写为“a deadly cold”。他如“a brute of a man” = “a brutal man”，“an awful fool of a woman” = “an awfully foolish woman”。英国名作家 Thackeray 在 Vanity Fair 中有所谓“her old sharper of a father”（她那骗子的老父）的说法。

【类例】

That old cripple of a Henn.（Sean O’Faolain）（那个年老的残废者亨。）

She was much better educated than that fool of a Beatrice.（A. Huxley）（她比那愚笨的比特里斯受过更好的教育。）

This huge lunatic warren of a London.（J. B. Priestley）（这个巨大狂人收容所一般的伦敦。）

Those pigs of girls eat so much.（那些猪一般的女子吃那么多。）

He was a fine figure of a young man.（他是一个翩翩佳公子。）

I’ve got the devil of a toothache.（我牙痛不堪。）

It would make the deuce of a scandal.（Galsworthy）（这会弄得声名狼藉的。）

Mr. A lives a hell of a long way off.（他住得远哉遥遥。）

She was an angel of a wife.（天仙一般的妻子。）

She gave a party in her baby-house of a dwelling.（她在她那婴儿屋子一般的小住宅中开了一个晚会。）

He was a big clumsy giant of a man with a broad face and small suspicious eyes.（Christie）（他是一个具有大脸孔和多疑的小眼睛的，笨拙如巨人般的男子。）

At Jutland，although I was in the devil of a funk all the time，I was sort of pleased with myself too.（Walpole）（在遮特兰，虽则我始终都很恐惧，但我却多少还能自得。）

The child is a treasure of a son.（那是一个宝贝儿子。）

He lives in a palace of a house.（他住在一座宫殿似的大屋子里。）

Your fool of a husband said so.（你那愚笨的丈夫说的。）

She is an old blackguard of a woman.（她是一个老毒妇。）

【习题 12】

1. He was a brute of a man for all that you may say in his praise.（Nesfield）

2. Down with the Bourbons，and that great pig of a Louis XVIII！（Hugo）

3. They gave Sally this little blue butt-twitcher of a dress to wear.（J. D. Salinger）

（13）名词 + of + 属格 + 名词

It was beyond expectation for a man of your taste.

遇到一位像你这样有风趣的人，真是出乎意外。

【解说】

在“名词 + of + 属格 + 名词”的形式中，其属格的含义为：“像……那样的”。

【类例】

He is a man of your experience.（他是一个像你那样经验丰富的人。）

I am not a man of his means.（我不是他那样的资产家。）

You are a lady of her wisdom.（你是一个像她那样贤慧的淑女。）

【习题 13】

1. The watch was by no means low-priced，and was too expensive for a person of my limited means；still it was cheap at the price asked，for as to its action it defied all comparison.

2. Methought he strove to shine more than ordinarily in his talkative way，that he might insult my silence，and distinguish himself before a woman of Arietta’s taste and understanding.（Spectator）

（14）of + 抽象名词 = 形容词，of 从略 + 普通名词

（a）It was of great importance.

这是非常重要的。

（b）The earth is the shape of a pear.

地球是梨子形的。

【解说】

在（a）例中“of + 抽象名词”的形式，是和形容词同义的。如“of importance” = important. “of use” = useful. “of no use” = useless. 这都是可以译为“…的”的，如“a man of courage” = a courageous man（勇敢的人；勇士）。“a lady of virtue” = a virtuous lady（贤德的女人，淑女）。他如“a child of fortune”（幸运儿）。“a man of business”（实业家）。用普通名词也是一样，如“a man of family”（名门之子）。“a man of few words”（寡言的人）。“a man of his word”（言行一致的人）。

在（b）例中的“the shape”，虽字面上看不见“of”一字，但意味上实等于说“of the shape”一样。凡形状、年龄、大小、色度、价格等有关的字，多有这种用法。如“同一大小”说“of a size”，如果加上形容词时，就常要把“of”略去，说成“the same size”，如像“age”，“price”，“size”等字，是没有形容词的，因此，“of age”，“of size”，“of price”，就弥补了这个缺憾，而代行形容词的任务了。

【类例】

Bernard Shaw was an Englishman of letters.（萧伯纳是英国的文人。）

Su Tung-po was a man of parts.（苏东坡是多才多艺的人。）

He is a man of means.（他是资产家。）

Chu Ko-lian was a man of resources.（诸葛亮足智多谋。）

They are all of an age.（他们同年。）

They are all the same age.（他们都是同年的。）

These glasses are of a size.（这些玻璃杯大小一样。）

These glasses are the same size.（这些玻璃杯都是同样大小的。）

Her dress is the colour of grass.（她的衣服是草绿色。）

This shirt is exactly the right size.（这件衬衫大小正好。）

The island is about one-third the size of Singapore.（那岛的大小略等于新加坡三分之一。）

【习题 14】

1. The heroic bravery displayed by this officer，in the midst of a hail of bombs from the enemy，was of the highest order.

2. The towers were exactly the same height.（Kruisinga）

3. He must have been almost the same age as was my father when I first met him.

4. Unsuccessful candidates are five times the number of successful ones.

（15）one’s own + 名词，of one’s own + 动名词

（a）He shines his own shoes.

他自己擦皮鞋。

（b）It is a tree of his own planting.

这是他手栽的树。

【解说】

英文说的“one’s own”，除“自己的”一个意思外，还有“为自己”一个意思，即英文“by oneself”的意思，如（a）例 He shines his own shoes. = His shoes are shined by himself. 原来“own”是加强的说法，单说 That is his house.（那是他的家）已经够了，但要加强时便说 That is his own house. 单说 He has a house.（他有一幢房子）也够明白了，但要加强时就说 He has a house of his own.（他自己有一幢房子）。要注意的是：不能说 He has his own house. 因为现代英文不可以把属格代名词和指示代名词连用，即是：不能说“this my（own）house”，而要说“this house of mine”，或“this house of my own”，因此惯用法就要说 He has a house of his own. 尤其是在动词“have”之后。（b）例的“of one’s own doing”，意为“自己做的”（done by oneself），往往可省略“own”一字，如“a tree of his own planting”也可以说成“a tree of his planting.”

【类例】

She has no children of her own.（她自己没有生孩子。）

The moon has no light of its own.（月亮本身无光）

It is a poem of his own composing.（ = It is a poem composed by himself.）（这是他自己做的诗。）

This profession is of my own choosing.（这是我自己选择的专业。）

He lived a colorful life and，in the end，a disastrous one，which is no less moving because much of the disaster was of his own making.（Arthur Mizener）（他过的一种多彩多姿的生活，而最后却是多灾多难的生活，那同样令人感动，因为灾难大半是他自己招致的。）

【习题 15】

1. He dressed his own food.

2. Usually that which a man calls fate is a web of his own weaving，from threads of his own spinning.（Doyle）

3. She married him of her own choice against her parents’ will.

（16）have + the + 抽象名词 + 不定词

I had the fortune to succeed.

我很幸运获得成功。

【解说】

这个 have = possess，原指肉体上或精神上的特征，作为一种天禀而具有的，比方说，He has a good memory.（他的记性好）。又如 Irishmen have red hair.（爱尔兰人天生是红头发）。进而由普通名词发展为抽象名词，后面接上一个不定词，而成为一种惯用的语法了。例如

She had the cheek（ = impudence）to say such a thing.（她厚颜地说出这样的话。）这就等于说：She was so impudent as to say such a thing.

How can you have the heart（ = hard-heartedness）to drown such darling little kittens？（你何忍把这些如此可爱的小猫去淹死？）这就等于说：How can you be so hard-hearted as to drown such darling little kittens？

Will you have the goodness（ = kindness）to do it for me？（ = Will you be so kind as to do it for me？）（请你帮忙替我做一下好吗？）

所以例题的句子也可以说成 I was so fortunate as to succeed. 或 I was fortunate enough to succeed. 而含义完全一样。此外，在抽象名词后的不定词，有时也可变成“of + 动名词”，如 May I have the pleasure of dancing with you？（我可不可以和你跳一回舞？）

【类例】

I had the luck to find him at home.（我幸运地遇见他正在家里。）

He had the misfortune to break his leg.（他不幸折断了腿。）

Those who have the interest of their country at heart are praiseworthy.（忧国之士值得颂扬。）

He had the courage to express his opinion.（他毫无忌惮地申述了他的意见。）

I had the folly to spend all I earned.（我竟愚笨得丧尽所获。）

That wretch has had the audacity to touch my children’s doll.（V. Hugo）（那个小坏蛋竟有狗胆来动我孩子们的玩具。）

He had the kindness to show me round the place.（他亲切地带我参观了一圈。）

He had the imprudence to marry beneath him.（他不谨慎地竟至娶家世寒微的女子为室。）

【习题 16】

1. The boy waved the fan to and fro and drove away the buzzing flies whenever they had the impertinence to come near the baby’s face.

2. He had the foresight to carry fire insurance.

（17）that（those） + 先行词 + 关系代名词

He lost that picture which he had got with much trouble.

他把那费了很大的劲才得来的画丢了。

【解说】

这是所谓“强烈的限制”（strong restriction）用法，即是为加强限制的意思，在“who”，“which”的先行词（Antecedent）前加用“that”，“those”的字眼。这种表现法和说“such…as”差不多。句中的“that”，不能译为“那个”。

【类例】

The root is that part of the vegetable which least impresses the eye.（根是植物最不引人注目的部分。）

That virtue which requires to be ever guarded is scarcely worth the sentinel.（ = Such virtue as requires…）（需要常常保护的美德是不值得看守的。）

Those rich men are great who do not think themselves great because they are rich.（并不以为他们有钱就是伟大的阔人们，才算伟大。）

Those persons who do most good are least conscious of it.（“Those…who or which” = “only those” or “all those”）（为善最多的人很少感觉到他是在为善。）

A dog will become attached to those members of the family who are kind to it.（家里的人谁对狗好，狗就喜欢跟谁。）

【习题 17】

1. Milton had that universality which belongs to the highest order of genius.

2. Education alone can conduct us to that enjoyment which is best in quality and infinite in quantity.

（18）one thing…another

It is one thing to know and another to teach.

自己知道是一件事，要教别人又是另外一件事。

【解说】

这个例句又可简约地说 To know is one thing；to teach is another.（ = Knowing and teaching are different.）意即自知和教人是两回事，有的人知道但不能教，虽有一肚子学问却不会教书。“another” = an + other. “one…another”不可与“one…the other”以及“the one…the other”混乱。在二者之中任取其一（one），剩下的便是另外的一个了（the other）。例如 They have two daughters；one is a singer，the other an actress.（他们有两个女儿，一为歌手，一为女伶。）“the one…the other” = the former…the latter.（前者…后者），例如 Mary has a white and a red rose；the one is lovelier than the other.（玛丽有一株白玫瑰和一株红玫瑰；白玫瑰比红玫瑰好看。）

【类例】

It is one thing to own a library；it is another to use it wisely.（藏书是一件事，能否善于利用又是另外一件事。）

To have money is one thing，to spend it wisely is quite another.（有钱是一件事，贤明地用钱又是另外一件事。）

It is one thing to know a language，and it is another to know about it.（懂得一种语文是一件事，具有关于那种语文的知识又是另外一件事。）

【习题 18】

1. There is no more dangerous experiment than that of undertaking to be one thing before a man’s face and another behind his back.

2. Others hold that the essence of art is one thing and the form another.

Ⅲ. As 的造句

（19）“as…as”的三种用法

（a）He is as kind as his sister（is）.

他像他妹妹一样和蔼。

（b）He is as kind as（he is）honest.

他又诚实又和蔼。

（c）He is as kind as his sister is honest.

他妹妹诚实而他就和蔼。

【解说】

英文“as + 形容词 + as”的形式，是表示程度相同的某种性质的，如（a）例，表示两个不同的人相同的性质，（b）例表示同一人的不同的性质，（c）例表示两个人的不同的性质。句中第一个“as”为指示副词，第二个“as”为连词，因此在第一个“as”后面，只能接用一个形容词或副词，而在第二个“as”后面，便要接上一个子句。如系否定时则第一个“as”改为“not so”，例如 He is not so kind as you are.

这个“as…as”是平等比较，高一级的比较则用“-er…than”，至于对同一人所有的不同性质的比较，则用“more + positive”的形式，如 She is more attractive than pretty.（与其说她漂亮，不如说她可爱。）She is more shy than unsocial.（ = She is shy rather than unsocial.）（与其说她不爱交际，不如说她害羞。）The man was more dead than alive.（那人只剩得奄奄一息了。）

【类例】

He is as clever as his sister.（他和他姊姊一样聪明。）

She is not so pretty as her sister.（她没有她妹妹好看。）

No country suffered so much as England.（Macaulay）（没有一个国家受过英格兰那样多的痛苦。）

He is as cunning as you are clever.（他的狡猾好似你的聪明。）

【习题 19】

1. He is as old as his cousin.（Greene）

2. He was as covetous as cruel.（Wotton）

3. Dobbin looked as pale and grave as his comrade was flushed and jovial.（Thackeray）

（20）as…as any，as…as ever

（a）He is as great a statesman as any.

（b）He is as great a statesman as ever lived.

他是一位稀有的大政治家。

【解说】

英文的“as…as”原为同等比较的意思，加上“any”或“ever”的时候，就变成“不让”，“不弱”，甚至“古今无双的”的意思了。在“as…as any”后面，又可以接上名词，如 He works as hard as anybody.（他勤勉不逊于任何人。）如果在“any”后接物而不接人，则有“as…as anything can be”（ = as…as possible）一个表现法，意为“愈…愈佳”，如 I will make it as clean as anything can be.（我要尽量把它弄清洁。）这个“as…as ever”，另外又有“as…as before”（照旧）的意思，如 He works as hard as ever.（其勤勉不减于以前。）He is as busy as ever.（他照旧忙。）She is as pretty as ever.（她还是一样的漂亮。）这个“ever” = always.（素常。）

【类例】

His behaviour is as good as ever.（他的行为和过去一样的好。）

His trust in his friend was as firm as ever.（他对其朋友的信任照常坚定。）

He is as diligent a man as ever lived.（其为人勤勉不让古今的人。）

They continued to fish up plate，bullion，and dollar，as plentifully as ever.（他们继续地捞起一些碟子、金块和银元，和以前一样地多。）

The dog was as courageous an animal as ever scoured the woods.（狗的勇敢不逊于到现在为止在森林中跑动的任何动物。）

Then as for active exercise，she could ride on horseback as well as any man in his kingdom.（Hawthorne）（至于说到实际的运动，她的骑术不弱于国内任何男子。）

【习题 20】

1. His novels have as good a chance of surviving as any that have been written in the last hundred years.（Maugham）

2. It’s not only real，but it’s as fine a string of pearls for its size as I’ve ever seen.（Maugham）

（21）as…as…can be

It is as plain as plain can be.

那是再明白也没有了。

【解说】

上例单说是 It is plain. 也就够了，现在为要加强“plain”的意思，所以把同一个形容词再说一遍，最后再加上“can be”的字样，表示“明白到不能再明白的程度”。这种表现法有时可将第一个“as”省掉，或将“can be”略去。这个“can be”，有时也可说成“may be”的。

【类例】

You are as wrong as wrong can be.（你大错特错。）

A lot of these boys were green as green can be.（Bob Considine）（这些男孩子许多都是精力充沛无以复加的。）

Gabby yanked him quick as quick.（John Tunis）（加比急急地把他用力猛拉。）

I am as thirsty as thirsty may be.（我口渴得不得了。）

She is as happy as happy can be.（她快乐已极。）

The place is as still as still.（那地方静寂得无以复加。）

【习题 21】

1. “Thou’rt wrong，my friend，” said good King Hal；“as wrong as wrong can be.”（Mackay）

2. The old folks made me welcome；they were as kind as kind could be.（Woolson）

3. Since I have been in prison he has always been coming to see me，and at times he would talk to me，and was as good to me as could be.（Plato’s Death of Socrates）

（22）as…，so…

As rust eats iron，so care eats the heart.

忧能伤人，亦犹锈之蚀铁。

【解说】

这个“so”的意思是“in the same proportion”，“in like manner”，“in the same way”（亦复如此）。为着加强语气，又可在“as”前加用“just”一字。有时在主句中，可将动词置于主语之前。

【类例】

As you treat me，so I will treat you.（你怎样待我，我也怎样待你。）

As the lion is king of beasts，so is the eagle king of birds.（鹰为鸟中之王，正好像狮为兽中之王一样。）

As fire tries gold，so does adversity try courage.（正如火可以试金一样，逆境也可以试人的勇气。）

As the human body is nourished by the food，so is a nation nourished by its industries.（正像身体要靠食物营养一样，国家要靠工业营养。）

【习题 22】

1. Just as no two words are truly synonyms，so no two different expressions，or ways of expression，can mean exactly the same thing.（G. H. Vallins）

2. Just as the chemist draws his deductions from the results of laboratory experiments，so must students of language draw their deductions from an observation of the facts of language.（R. C. Pooley）

（23）It is in（or with）…as in（or with）

It is in life as in a journey.

人生好比旅行一样。

【解说】

这个表现法是由“as…so”（正像）变化而来的，意为“is like”，可译作“犹如”，“正好像”。例句可说成 Life is like a journey. 句首的“it”，并不指什么，只是一般漠然的用法。

【类例】

It is in studying as in eating；he who does it gets the benefits，and not he who sees it done.（读书和吃饭一样，得到利益的是实际在吃的人，而不是在旁观看的人。）

It is with women as with flowers.（妇美如花。）

It is with a machine as with a child that must always be taken care of.（机器也和小孩一样，需要时常加以照顾。）

It is in mind as in body which must be nourished by good food.（精神和身体都必须有好的食物来营养。）

It is with one as with the other.（ = One is like the other.）（彼此相似。）

【习题 23】

1. It is in man as in soils，where sometimes there is a vein of gold which the owner knows not of.

2. It is with words as with sunbeams；the more they are condensed，the deeper they burn.（Southey）

（24）as much，as many，like so many

（a）I thought as much.

我亦作如是想。

（b）Those five days seemed to me as many years.

那个五天对我好像五年一样。

（c）They work like so many ants.

那些人就像那么多的蚂蚁一样在做工。

【解说】

这个“as much” = as much as that，具有三种意思：①“the same degree or quantity of”，表同样程度的，同样分量的，例如 He has gold as much as silver.（他有与白银同样多的黄金。）②“as well”；“equally”，表同等或同样的，例如 He was greatly respected，and his brother as much despised.（他很受人尊敬，而他的兄弟则很受人鄙视。）③“the same thing”；“just so”，表同一事；意为“亦然”，例如 I was not at all vexed at my failure，for I had expected as much.（我对失败一点也不烦恼，因为我早知道会失败的。）

至于“as many” = the same number of，是表同数的，意为“其数相同”，例如 He made six mistakes in as many paragraphs.（他在六节中犯了六个错误。）这个“as many”如用在“like”后面“as”就要改变为“so”，说成“like so many”，意也是“好像同样数目的”，又可译成“宛如…似的”，例如 We worked like so many bees.（我们宛如那样多的蜜蜂似的工作了。）

【类例】

I was not in the least surprised，for I had expected as much.（我一点也没有吃惊，因为我早已料到会有那样的事。）

I found ten misprints in as many pages.（我在十页中就发现十个错误。）

You have made two blunders in as many minutes.（你在两分钟之中就犯了两次大错。）

It was a truly awful sight，watching the numberless little wooden houses catching fire one after another，and flaming up like so many match-boxes.（那真是一个可怕的光景，望着无数的小木屋，一个又一个地着火燃烧，就像烧着那样多的火柴盒子一样。）

【习题 24】

1. “Nay，I told you as much before，” said Blount.（Scott）

2. The wall was about fifteen feet high，and as many feet thick.

3. All our streets are lined with trees，and like so many stars among the leaves and branches，the street lamps shed their light.

4. I assembled a number of my play-fellows，and we worked diligently like so many emmets.（Franklin）

（25）as good as，as well as

（a）It is as good as done.

这就和做好了一样。

（b）It is broad as well as long.

那既长且宽。

【解说】

英文的“as good as”有两个意思：①“amounting to”；“not falling short of”，意为“等于”，“同样”，“几如”，“不欠缺”，例如 He was as good as his word.（他不爽约。实践其言。）（句中“word”换为“promise”也是一样。）②“virtually”；“essentially”；“in every essential respect”，意为“实际上”，“其实”，“实在”，“在各要点上”，例如 He is as good as dead already.（宛如死人。行尸走肉。名存实亡。他简直和死人一样。）

至于“as well as” 则有四个意思：①“no less than”；“equally with”，意为“等于”，“不下于”，“亦”，“一样好”，例如 I have understanding as well as you.（我的理解力和你一样好。）②“both…and”；“one equally with the other”，意为“与”，“及”，“二者皆”，例如 Work in moderation is healthy as well as agreeable to the human constitution.（适度的劳动对身体给与快感，又有益卫生。）③与“not only…but also”有连带关系，如云 He has experience as well as knowledge. = He has not only knowledge，but also experience.（他有学识又有经验。学识自不待言，连经验也很丰富。）注意改写时要把顺序颠倒，如（b）例 It is broad as well as long. = It is not only long，but also broad.④“as well as”还可以代替“better than”用，例如 As well（ = better）be hanged for a sheep as（ = than）for a lamb.（与其盗小羊而受绞刑，毋宁盗大羊合算。窃钩不如窃国。）

【类例】

The sailors did noble duty that day，in the dogged faith that they would “give as good as they got，anyhow.”（那些水手们当日尽了高尚的职责，在那顽强的信仰中，一言以蔽之，他们是要以其所受施诸其人的。）

I will let you have a geography that is not new. It is as good as a new one.（我要给你一本旧的地理书。因为那和新的一样。）

She said that he was as good as engaged to a girl out there，and that he had never dreamt of her.（W. D. Howells）（她说那男人在外洋有一个女子等于订了婚一样，而他却从来没有梦想过她。）

The merchant as good as promised the orphan boy，that he would adopt him.（那商人等于是答应了那孤儿要收他为养子。）

This is the case with manufacturing as well as with agricultural interests.（这是对工业有利，对农业也一样好的实例。）

In polity，as well ecclesiastical as civil，there are always evils which no art of man can cure.（Hooker）（在政治形态上，也和在教会组织及国家行政上一样，总有许多坏处是人力无法治好的。）

【习题 25】

1. Out of the eight men who had fallen in the action，only three still breathed；and of these two were as good as dead.

2. Men should be gentle as well as brave and women brave as well as gentle.

3. I returned to the den to cook myself a meal，of which I stood in great need，as well as to care for my horse，whom I had somewhat neglected in the morning.（R. L. Stevenson）

4. Doris’ musical background stemmed from her father，William，who was an organist，as well as a violin，piano，and voice teacher.（R. G. Hubler）

（26）句首的“as it is”，句尾的“as it is”

（a）If I were rich，I should do so. As it is，I do nothing.

如果我有钱的话，我就要这样做。但实在太穷，我什么都不能做。

（b）The painter does not copy nature as it is.

画家描绘大自然，并不是完全写实的。

【解说】

英文说的“as it is”（过去时态为“as it was”）这个表现法，有两种场合，因用的位置不同，而影响到意义的差别。

（a）用于句首，接在假设语气之后。例如 If I were a college graduate，I would go abroad. As it is，I cannot go.（如果我是大学毕业生的话，我就要出洋去。但事实上，我可不能去。）这个“as it is” = as it stands；to state the matter as it really stands；as a matter of fact；in reality，意为“在事实上”，“就实际的情形而论”，简略成为“实际上”，“事实上”。接在假想之后，作为报告实情时的导言。用过去动词时，意义不变。如 As it is，we cannot help her. 过去时则为 As it was，we could not help her. 如系说人，则要随人称的不同而改变动词，如 Paint me as I am.（照我现在的样子来画。）在许多场合可用其他同样意义的片语来取代，如 As matters stand，I do not like to make the plan public.（在目下的状态中，我不想把那计划公开。）As the case stands，I don’t care to make public the reason for my visit.（在目下的状态中，我还不想公开我访问的理由。）As things now are，we cannot put the plan into practice.（以目下的状态，我们还不能把那计划付诸实行。）As things go，it is impossible to make a forecast of the development of the peace talk.（以目下的情形而论，和谈的发展如何是未能预测的。）

（b）用于句尾，接在名词或代名词之后。例如 I take the world as it is.（世界就是这个样子，我并不指望它会变好。）Leave it as it is.（就让它是那样，不要动好了。）You has better take things as they are.（你最好接受事物的现状。）这个“as it is”（复数为“as they are”），意为“照现状”，“it”指前面的名词，所以那名词如为复数时，就要改为“they”，动词也跟着要改为“are”。

【类例】

If he were not ill，he would go to see the play. As it is，he has to stay at home.（如果他不生病的话，他是要去看戏的。实际上，他只好呆在家里了。）

If I had been rich，I would have bought it. As it was，I missed the chance of getting it.（我有钱早就买了，但实际上我却失去了获得那个的机会。）

We hoped things would go better，but as it is they are getting worse.（我们原指望事态好转，可是实际上却更糟了。）

Please leave the apple-box as it is.（请把苹果箱照原样放着。）

He finds fault with society as it is without having anything better to suggest in its place.（他并没有提出什么替代的良策，只是一味对现实社会加以非难。）

He took the bundle just as it was to the police-station.（他把那包裹原封不动地送到警察局去了。）

I often wish I could read. As it is，I have nothing to do but to think.（我常希望我能阅读。像我现在这样一字不识，我除了思索之外，什么也不能做。）

【习题 26】

1. There is no alleviation for the sufferings of mankind except veracity of thought and action and the resolute facing of the world as it is.

2. I should have followed him through the open window if I had been stronger. As it was，I rang the bell and roused the house.（Doyle）

（27）过去分词 + as it is，现在分词 + as it does

（a）Hidden as it was by the trees，the tomb was difficult to find.

深藏在树木中，那坟墓很难找到。

（b）Standing as it does on a high hill，the church commands a fine view.

像这样建立在高山上，教堂的眺望很好。

【解说】

这是上项用法的变形。这个“as it is”（过去用“was”）是强调前面的过去分词的，“it”是指主句中的主语，在上例中则指“the tomb”，如果不要加强来说，则取消“as it was”，说成 Hidden by the trees，the tomb was difficult to find. 意思还是一样。

在过去分词之后所接的“as it is”，到了现在分词之后，就要把动词“be”改为“do”；这个“as it does”也好，前述的“as it is”也好，都是为加重语气而设的插入句，去掉它也是无妨的，如（b）例改说成 Standing on a high hill，the church commands a fine view. 意思还是一样的。这个在现在分词后接用的“as it does”（或“as he does”；“as she did”等），可译为“因为是这样”，“实际…故”等等。

【类例】

Written as it is in good English，this book is recommendable to all.（实际是用美好的英文写的，所以这本书可以向大众推介。）

Burdened as he was，he could not walk fast.（因为负荷太重，所以他不能走快。）

Living as we do in a remote village，we rarely have visitors.（因为是住在这样远离城市的村庄上，我们是很少有客人的。）

Bathing as he did several times a day，he could not get his hair to stay down.（因为是这样一天去游泳好几次，他的头发是不会平伏的。）

【习题 27】

1. Published as it was at such a time，his work attracted much attention.

2. This movement，arising as it does among the poor themselves，is likely to have more force than if it was from the upper classes.（Dixon）

3. Coming as it did at a period of exceptional dullness it attracted perhaps rather more attention than it deserved.（Doyle）

（28）名词等 + as + 主语 + 动词等

（a）Child as she was，she was more than a match for him.

她虽是一个小孩，却甚过做他的对手。

（b）Strange as it may sound，it is true.

听来虽觉奇怪，却是千真万确的。

（c）Try as you may，you will never succeed.

你尽可以试试看，不过你决难成功。

【解说】

在“名词（形容词） + as + 主语 + 动词”的形式中的“as”，如例（a）及（b），多为“though”或“although”的意思，是一种表示让步的句子，上例可改写为 Though she was a child（注意这时要加上冠词）及 Although it may sound strange. 至于“动词 + as + 主语 + 助动词”的形式，也是让步的说法。Try as you may = Although you may try. 见（c）例。试比较下举二例：

（1）Clever as he was，he found not a little difficuty in solving the problem which was anything but difficult.（他虽很聪明，也很难来解决那个决非困难的问题。）

（2）Clever as he was，he found little difficulty in solving the problem which was none too easy.（他因为很聪明，所以一点不困难，就把那个决非容易的问题解决了。）

（1）Clever as he was = Although he was clever.

（2）Clever as he was = As he was clever.

（1）意为“虽则”，（2）意为“因为”。这个“as”何时作“虽则”解，何时作“因为”解，就要看后面的文句才能决定。这原是由“（as）clever as he is”强调的省略而来，“像他那样聪明”，变成“他虽则聪明”。在美国现仍有人用“As clever as”的形式。又（a）例中的名词，因移到句首去，便得将冠词略去，如恢复普通说法时，则非有冠词不可，如 Warrior as he was = Though he was a warrior（他虽为武士）。Woman as I am = Though I am a woman（我虽属女流）。至于（c）例，因前为动词，句法全变，应译为“尽管”。

【类例】

Young as he is，it is but natural that he should commit such a mistake.（他因为年轻，要犯这种错误也是当然的事。）

Woman as she is，she was brave.（她虽是女流，那时却够勇敢了。）

Poor piper as I am，I won’t do anything below contempt.（我虽滥竽，但不做可鄙的事。）

Young as he is，he is able.（他虽年轻，但很能干。）

Teacher as he is，he explains it very clearly.（因为他是教师，所以解释得很清楚。）

The Greeks，eminent as they were in almost every department of human activity，did surprisingly little for the creation of science.（希腊人在人类一切活动的领域虽然都很优越，但对于科学的创造上，却毫无贡献。）

【习题 28】

1. Young as he was，and poor as he was，no King’s or Lord’s son could come up to him in learning.

2. Struggle as we may，we can never be completely satisfied.

3. Dull as a student may be，and difficult as a subject may seem to be at first sight，he will find the study become easier or at least less difficult，if he can persevere and does not neglect it.

Ⅳ. 动词的造句

（29）may well + 动词，and well + 主语 + may

（a）He may well be proud of his success.

他获得那样的成功是很可以骄傲的。

（b）He is proud of his success，and well he may.

他对于自己的成功感到骄傲，也是应该的。

【解说】

在（a）例中的“may well” = have good reason（其中的“well” = with good reason = reasonably），意为“那样也是有理由的”，“无怪”。在（b）例中的“well + 主语 + may” = and with reason，附在主句之后，意为“那也是应该的”。这个“well”是修饰整个句子的副词，以表示说话者的意见的。有时不说“may”，单用一个“well”，也能表达“with good reason”的意思，如 We cannot very well refuse him.（我们没有好的理由来拒绝他。）内容如果是指的过去的话，“may”则可改为过去时态的“might”，不过有时候，用过去时态的“might”，并不一定是指过去，而是一种客气的说法，用来表现在的，如 She might well ask that.（她这样问一声，也不为无理吧。）还有“may well”的“well”，又可作“probably”（大概）解，如 It may well be true.（那大概是真的。）

【类例】

She may well be proud of her son.（她对她自己的儿子感到骄傲，是有理由的。）

You may well say so.（你很有理由这样说。）

Well he might be proud and glad.（他要感到骄傲而又高兴也是应该的。）

You may well refuse him.（你拒绝他是对的。）

He was proud of his feat，and well he might.（他自夸他的功绩是有理由的。）

【习题 29】

1. As regards its climate，Japan does not differ materially from Britain，and in this，the country may well be called “the Britain of the Pacific”.

2. The good lady was in an acstasy of delight. And well might she be proud of her boy.（Hawthorne）

3. During this period I met persons who by their rank，fame or position might very well have thought themselves destined to become historical figures.（Maugham）

（30）may as well…as，might as well…as

（a）You may as well call a cat a little tiger as call a tiger a big cat.

你如把虎叫做大猫，同样也无妨把猫叫做小虎。

（b）You might as well throw your money away as spend it in gambling.

你要把钱花在赌博上，就不如丢掉的好。

【解说】

英文说的“may as well…as”和“might as well…as”，都是用于现在的，并无现在时和过去时的分别，其所不同的是前者指“可能的事”，而后者指“不可能的事”。这种句中的“well”，也和上项（29）“may well”中的“well”意思相同，都是作“合理的”，“理所当然的”（reasonably；with good reason）解，所以“may as well…as” = have as good reason to…as，不过这个表现法中的意义的重点，在“as…as”之间的比较，有时可解释为“与其…做，宁肯…做为佳”，如 One may as well not know a thing at all as know it imperfectly.（与其一知半解，不如完全不知的好。）在第二个“as”以下的句子，是常被省略的，如 I may as well go at once.（我还是马上去的好。）后面省去了 as not（与其不去）的字样。第一人称的 I may as well 与第二人称的 you had better 相当，但较 had better 为弱，所以意为“为宜”，“还是那样做的好”。如（a）例是“合理的”的意思。

现在再看（b）例。句中 throw your money away（A），是谁也不干的愚行，spend it in gambling（B），也是不弱于（A）的愚行，为要强调（B）的愚笨，故在（A）句中不用“may”而用“might”，是假定的说法，表示不可能的事。这种“as…as”的造句，原意为比较，即（B）和（A）一样，可译成“不啻”，“犹之”，“可与相等”，但由力加否定的关系，有时可采用选择的译法：“与其那样不如这样的好”。在第二个“as”后的字句，常被省略，因为由前面的文字可以想像出来。

【类例】

You may as well（ = had better）begin at once（as not）.（你宜早日着手。）因马上着手与不马上着手的理由同样充分，所以还是马上着手的好。

You might as well throw your money into the sea as lend it to him.（你借钱给他，不啻把钱丢在海里。）

I might as well act it as say it.（我那样说就等于那样做。）

I think we may as well set out on our travels.（我想我们最好就出发去旅行。）

You might as well erect a house without bricks and mortar as try to get on in life without education.（不受教育而想立身处世，就像没有砖和灰泥来建造房子一样。）

You may just as well tell me the truth.（你把事实告诉我是为你好。）

One may as well be hanged for a sheep as a lamb.（与其窃钩而诛，毋宁窃国。）

You might as well advice me to give up my fortune as my argument.（你要我放弃议论，还不如要我放弃财产。）二者皆不可能。

【习题 30】

1. Friendship is a vase，which，if it is cracked by accident，may as well be broken at once.

2. You might as well expect the sun to rise in the west as expect me to change my opinion.

3. When this lady saw that the magazine was not going to rise，she became a little disgusted with the editor and decided that she might as well get what there was to get while there was still something available.（Hemingway）

（31）so that…may，lest…should

（a）I run fast so that I may catch the train.

我快跑为的是要赶上火车。

（b）I run fast lest I should miss the train.

我快跑以免赶不上火车。

【解说】

这两种表现法，都是表示“目的”的，“lest…should”的说法较古，现今多用“for fear that”来取代了。“that…may” 也略带古风，“in order that…may”，则是郑重的表现法。这个表“目的”的“may”，有时也可换用“can”，“shall”等字。（a）例可译作“俾可”，“以求达到”，而（b）例则为“以免”，“以求不至”，又可翻译为“因恐”，“免得”。这个“so that”在会话体中及美国话中，常只用一个“so”字，而不用“that”，在“so that”的前面有时用逗号（Comma），有时不用，逗号的有无，完全不影响文义。“lest…should”除上述“for fear”外，还可代以“in case”，后面仍接“should”不变。在最近的美国话中，则将“should”略去不说，后接原形动词，如 Take care lest you fall.（当心不要跌倒。）这个“lest…should”的口语表现法为“so as not to”。

【类例】

We whispered lest he should hear.（怕他听见故细声说。）

Man does not live that he may eat，but eats that he may live.（人非为吃而生，乃为生而吃。）

He spends that he may succeed，and succeeds that he may spend.（他消耗以求成功，成功以便消耗。）

They placed a guard at the door，lest the prisoner should find means of escape.（他们派了一个卫兵来看守房门，以免犯人想办法逃走。）

He tried to shout so that he might be heard all along the street.（他试着大声叫喊，指望沿街有人听到。）

Kindly sign it and return to me，so I can put through a voucher for the $1，000 we agreed on.（请签字后寄回给我，俾可将我们双方议定的一千元顺利完成保证手续。）

I wrote out an itinerary so they could follow us.（Hemingway）（我定出了一个旅程表，以便他们可以追随我们而来。）

【习题 31】

1. Science consists in grouping facts so that general laws or conclusions may be drawn from them.（Darwin）

2. When the schoolboys find a nest，they are very careful not to disturb it lest the mother bird should be frightened and desert it.

（32）cannot help + 动名词，cannot but + 原形不定词

（a）I cannot help admiring his courage.

（b）I cannot but admire his courage.

我对于他的勇气不胜佩服。

【解说】

在（a）例中的“help”意为“避免”，可用“avoid”，“resist”，“forbear”等取代。同义的说法还有“cannot keep（或 refrain，abstain）from-ing”，如 We cannot keep from admiring the scenery.（我们不禁大为赞赏那种风景。）至于（b）例的“cannot but”，是稍具古风的表现法，其中的“but” = except，意为“除了那样做以外，什么也不能做”，最后成为“不得不”了。比较下面三种说法：

Formal：I cannot but feel sorry for him.

Informal：I can’t help feeling sorry for him.

Vulgar：I can’t help but feel sorry for him.

把最后一例说成卑语的，只是英国的说法，在美国却视为正常的英文，在 Webster’s New World Dictionary of the American Language 上就举有“cannot help but” = cannot fail to；be compelled or obliged to 的解释。

【类例】

I cannot help thinking he’s wrong.（我不禁认为他错了。）

I cannot but feel thankful that it formed such a material part of my education.（我不禁深为感谢，那竟形成了我教育上重要的一部分。）

I cannot help forming some opinion of a man’s character from his dress.（我不得不多少要从一个人穿的衣服来判断他的性格。）

We cannot but believe in the youth who is always trying to improve himself.（常要努力改进自己的青年，我不得不信赖。）

I could not but laugh on seeing such a funny sight.（看到这样滑稽的光景，我不禁笑出来了。）

The little child was so beautiful，kind，and good，that no one who saw her could help loving her.（那个小孩非常美丽，又亲切，又善良，所以没有人见到她不爱她的。）

I cannot help wondering about the child.（关于那个孩子的事，我不禁感到奇怪。）

【习题 32】

1. She could not help sympathizing with every little helpless thing；her heart was always touched by a bird or beast that had been hurt.

2. When I consider the greatness that he afterward achieved I cannot but smile as I remember the fashion in which he was discussed at my uncle’s table.（Maugham）

（33）have + 宾语（物） + 过去分词

（a）I had my watch mended.

我找人把我的表修理好了。

（b）I had my watch broken.

我把我的表弄破了。

（c）We have our enemy almost surrounded.

我们差不多把敌人包围起来了。

【解说】

例（a）表主语的意志，例（b）则与主语的意志完全无关，例（a）为使动，例（b）则为被动。例（a）的主语有意去请人修表，而例（b）的主语实无意把表弄破。例（c）为保持那种被动（在例句中为“被包围”）的状态。（a）句中的“have”，有时可换用“get”，以限制其意义。普通受 Passive Form 的动作者为主语，例如 My watch was stolen.（我的表被窃。）一语，其中受动作者为“watch”，今若欲说“我被窃去一只表”，便是：I had my watch stolen. 此时的主语，间接受到动作，故此种体裁，称为“间接受动态”（Indirect Passive Form）。如果说 He was handed a short note. 听来很不自然，故改说 He had a short note handed to him.（有人交给了他一封短信。）凡 Passive（被动）皆无意志，若加上意志便成为 Causative（使动）之意，例如 I will have（ = cause）a new house（to be）built.（我欲使新屋建成。我欲建筑一幢新居。）在用作使动时“have”要读重音，用作被动时则不要，如 He had his salary raised.（他使薪水提高了。）I had my hat blown off.（我的帽子被风吹落了。）

【类例】

I had my foot severely trodden upon in the bus.（我在公共汽车里被人重重地践踏了脚。）

He had his left hand cut off.（他被人砍去了左手。）

She has her head turned.（ = she has gone mad.）（她发狂了。）

We shall have our rights trampled under foot.（我们的权利将为人所蹂躏。）

I will have a new suit made.（我想制一套新装。）

I will have my photograph taken.（我要去照相。）

No family is too poor to have the table covered with a clean cloth.（没有一个家庭会穷困到连放在餐桌上的干净桌布都没有的程度。）

He had his right leg pierced by a shot.（他的右腿为子弹所贯穿。）

Old ladies in the States will have new novels read to them.（美国的老太太喜欢叫人把新出的小说读给她们听。）

He has his leg pulled.（ = He is befooled.）（他受了人家的愚弄。）

Falling from his bicycle，he had his arm sprained.（他从脚踏车上跌下来把胳膊跌断了。）

So I went first to have my wounds dressed.（所以我先去把伤包扎好。）

You must have this fact impressed upon your mind.（你必须把这事实铭记在心上。）

He had a ticket given him.（有人给了他一张票。）

I had my right leg hurt in the accident.（在车祸中我伤了右腿。）

After paying his bill and buying his railway ticket，he had only fifty cents left.（付清了账又买了火车票，他只剩下五角钱了。）

Did he have his hair cut yesterday？（他昨天去理过发了吗？）

I have my revolver loaded.（我把手枪装上子弹了。）

We’d clear away all these cases and have the whole of that wall filled by a heroic fresco of Hector and Andromache.（Huxley）（我们要把这些箱子全部都清理出来，好让墙壁充满描写赫安英雄事迹的壁画。）

Sadie had her hand clapped to her cheek as though she had toothache.（Mansfield）（沙娣好像牙痛似的，把一只手敲着她的面颊。）

This error was particularly magnified by the fact that by the time of Yalta we already had Japan beaten.（Reader’s Digest）（到雅尔塔协定时，我们算是已经把日本打败了，由这事实看来，那错误尤为显著。）

【习题 33】

1. He who wished to read the hearts of this husband and wife who stood at right angles，to have their wounds healed by Law，would have needed to have watched the hundred thousand hours of their wedded life.（Galsworthy）

2. Some are born great，some achieve greatness，and some have greatness thrust upon them.

3. We need to have our liberties taken away from us in order to discover that they are worth dying for.（Gardiner）

4. I had my plans arranged by which I should have the opportunity of making the man who had wronged me understand that his old sin had found him out.

（34）have + 宾语（人） + 原形不定词

（a）I have him mend my watch.

我请他修理我的表。

（b）He had his mother die.（ = His mother died.）

他遭母丧。

【解说】

这个“have + 宾语（人） + 原形不定词”（无“to”的不定词，在此作宾格补语用）的形式，有两种解释：凡在主语无意志之下而发生的事，是用的被动的作用，若加上主语的意志进去，就是用的使动的作用了。何时为被动，何时为使动，要看前后文才能决定，但有时从助动词上也可以看得出来，例如

（a）I will have many people come.（将使许多人来）是有意志的。

（b）I shall have many people come.（将有许多人来）是无意志的。

在（a）句中“will”后的“have”，已成为“make”之意了。这种说法美国人用的颇多。英国人表“请人为某事”之意时，则用“get”，但后面须接用有“to”的不定词，即限于使动时，等于“get + 宾语 + 有 to 的不定词”，如 I get him to mend my watch.（我找他替我修理手表。）I will get some one to translate the letter.（我要找人把这封信译出来。）英国人表“使人为某事”之意时，则用“make”，如 I will make my servant clean your shoes.（我将叫仆人替你擦皮鞋。）在美国“get”和“make”都不用，而一律用的“have”. 如 We had a fire break out last night.（昨夜附近有火警。）I had him write the letter.（我使他写那封信。）

至于上举例句的第二例，也是有有意志与无意志之分的，如 His mother died.（他母亲死了。）是无意志的，如加上有意志的成份进去，当做一个人自己的经验来说时，就成为 He had his mother die.（他遭母丧。）

在“have”后接“人”和接“物”的不同，使宾格补语的形式随之而异，即接“人”时用原形不定词，接“物”时用过去分词，比较如下：

Please have the porter carry this trunk.

Please have the trunk carried by the porter.

【类例】

I don’t like to have you go.（我不想你走。）

He likes to have people come.（喜有客来。）

I will have someone come and keep me company.（希望有人来为我作伴。）

I wouldn’t have you do that.（我不想你那样做。）

I should like to have her meet you.（我希望她能见到你。）

I had them clean the house before your arrival.（使人洒扫以待。）

My wife would have me buy that television set.（我太太只想要我买那架电视机。）

I don’t like to have somebody else tell me I ought to do this thing and that.（我不喜欢老是要别人来指挥我做这样做那样。）

If you will have me stay，I shall stay.（必欲留我，我就留下。）

What would you have me do？（有何吩咐？）

The students are afraid of having him become principal.（学生生怕他当校长。）

These little animals seem glad to have people visit them.（这些小动物喜欢有人去看它们。）

【习题 34】

1. It is his nature to do to others what he would have others do to him.

2. As we lived near the road，we often had the traveller visit us to taste our gooseberry wine.（Goldsmith）

3. I would rather have lost them twice over than have had this happen.（Hardy）

4. I had a cultivated Englishman ask me if it were true Negroes could not walk on the same sidewalks as white Americans.（The New York Times）

（35）have + 宾语 + 副词（地点，方向等）

（a）Let’s have him here.

要他到这里来吧。

（b）He had a tooth out.

他拔了一个牙齿。

【解说】

这种句法中的“have”，也是使动的意思，原则上和前面两项无异，不过翻译时须看前后文的关系，采用适当的字眼，不一定要把使动译出来，如（a）例，便可不必译为“使他来这里”，第二句的（b）例，也不必译为“要牙医为他拔牙”。如例句所示，在“have”后，是既可接“人”，又可接“物”的。

【类例】

We’ll have the big table here.（把大桌子放在这里吧。）

Let me have Mr. Wong over.（去请王先生来吧。）

I had him there.（在那一点上我把他击败了。）指议论时说的。

He was had up for exceeding the speed limit.（他因开车超速而被起诉。）

【习题 36】

1. We shall be having the decorators in next month.

2. He won’t stand for it. He’ll have you out on Tuesday，so that you may as well make up your mind to it.（Maugham）

（36）have + 宾语 + 现在分词

（a）I can’t have him doing that.

我不能让他那样做。

（b）I have a car waiting for me.

我有汽车在等待着。

【解说】

这个“have + 宾语 + 现在分词”的表现法，有两种含义，如（a）例为“许可”，（b）例为“使动”。动词“have”的原义为“具有”，即具有某种情形，如 I have a lot of visitors coming.（我有许多客人要来。）

有时不用现在分词，而改用形容词，也是类似的用法，例如 I can’t have you idle.（我不能让你这样懒惰。）

【类例】

I won’t have you going out.（你不要老是跑出去。）

I had it coming.（ = I deserve it.）（这是当然的报应。）

I won’t have you smoking at your age.（我不想要你这样小就抽烟。）

We told him we had relatives coming.（Hedley Gore）（我们告诉了他说我们有些亲戚要来。）

【习题 36】

1. I see that woman downstairs has a couple of sailors sitting there. I wonder how she’s gotten acquainted with them.（Maugham）

2. It is generous of me to have you doing nothing.

3. I will not have you talking indecently before the children!（Sinclair Lewis）

（37）find oneself

After half an hour I found myself in front of the house.

半小时之后，我就觉得我已经站在那房子的前面了。

【解说】

英文说的“find oneself”有三个意思：①起居，动定，例如 How do you find yourself this morning？（ = How are you this morning？）（你今早觉得身体好吗？）②自给自足，例如 He works for one hundred dollars a month and finds himself.（他每月有工资一百元足以自给。）③自觉，自知，发现自己的能力，例如 After trying various jobs he found himself and became a successful reporter.（换了几个职务之后，他发现了自己的能力，成为一个成功的记者。）最后一解为“感觉到自己在某种特定的场所，地位，或状态中”，引申而为“注意一看则身在”或简单地说成“觉得”。这种说法，实含有“意想不到”，“偶然”，“竟至”的意思在内。例如 I find myself in a church.（我发觉走进了一个教堂。）I found myself in his company.（注意一看，他陪伴着我。）

【类例】

She returned to England to find herself famous.（她回到英国发觉自己竟成名了。）

She found herself a mother at fifteen.（她十五岁就做了母亲。）

Moving homeward by a new way，I presently found myself on the side of a little valley，in which lay a farm and an orchard.（Gissing）（从一条新路向着家园走去，我随即就来到了一个小谷的旁边，那里有农场和果木园。）

Otherwise he “found” himself in childish fashion out of the six or seven weekly shillings.（F. Marzials）（不然的话，他就要用小孩子的方式从每周六、七先令中自谋生活。）

In many places the churches are trying to get hold of the neglected strangers and help them to “find themselves” in their unfamiliar surroundings.（James Bryce）（在许多地方教会努力要收容那些无人过问的外来人，帮助他们在不熟悉的环境中发现自己的能力。）

When he awoke，he found himself in jail.（他一醒来，睁开眼睛一看，自己竟在牢狱里了。）

He found himself at last.（他终于发现了自己的天分。）

【习题 37】

1. I awoke one morning and found myself famous.（Lord Byron）

2. The hours moved on，and he found himself staring at his small candle，which struggled more and more faintly with the morning light.

3. In about forty-five seconds I found myself again in the waiting room with the compassionate secretary，who made me sign more documents.（Conrad）

（38）find…in

I found a true friend in him.

我发现他是一个真实的朋友。

【解说】

在这个动词“find”的后面，除接介词“in”外，还可以接“that”引导的子句或不定词的造句。意为（由经验而）发现，觉悟，知道，（试过之后而）认明，认定，验出。例如 I find that the work pays.（我始知此事合算。）We found that the report was false.（ = We found it to be false.）（问明而后知为虚报。）I awoke to find it a dream.（醒来始知为梦）在“in”前面的动词，并不限于“find”，他如“see”，“have”，“behold”，“lose”等都可以用。

【类例】

I found a friend in a supposed enemy.（我在原来以为是敌人的当中得到了一个朋友。）

Columbus found a warm supporter in Queen Isabella.（哥伦布获得伊莎贝拉女王的热心赞助。）

I found an enthusiastic coadjutor in the person of a young fellow named Wong Ming.（我获得一个名叫王明的热心的青年助手。）

Dostoievski finds brothers in thieves and murderers.（陀思妥耶夫斯基把小偷和杀人犯视为兄弟。）

We found victory in defeat.（我们认定失败就是胜利。）

We lost a great scholar in Dr. Hu Shih.（胡适的死使我们失去了一个伟大的学者。）

【习题 38】

1. Many on becoming rich have found in wealth not an escape from evil，but a new and worse form of it.

2. It was easy to see in Gladstone the perfect model of the upright—the man whose life had been devoted to the application of high principles to affairs of State.

（39）“do”的两种用法

（a）You know more than I do.

你比我知道的多。

（b）I do want to know the truth.

我真想要知道真相。

【解说】

除疑问句和否定句以外所用的“do”，有两种用法：一为代替已说过的动词以避免重复，这叫做代动词（pro-verb），如（a）例中的便是以“do”代替“know”的。在英文中除助动词及“be”动词外，其余所有的动词，都可以用“do”来代替。第二种用法是加强动词意味的，这是助动词，如（b）例所示，是加强动词“want”的，普通单说 I want to know the truth. 意思也是一样。加强语气时可译作“真”，“真正”，“实在”等。

【类例】

Do you drink？Yes，I do.（你喝酒吗？我喝。）

Don’t you drink？Nor（或 Neither）do I.（你不喝酒吗？我也不喝。）

You stammer sometimes；so do I.（你有时口吃，我也是一样。）

You dislike dogs as I do cats.（好像我不喜欢猫一样，你不喜欢狗。）

No father could have loved his children better than he did us.（没有别个父亲有我们的父亲这样爱他的孩子的。）

I do believe you.（我确实相信你说的话。）

I do wish you had seen him.（我真希望你见到了他。）

I did see him.（我确曾见到了他。）

He does work hard，but he often fails.（他确是很用功，但老是考不上。）

I did go，but failed to see him.（我确是去了，但没有见到他。）

Do stay here.（务请留此。）

Do be patient!（务请忍耐。）

Don’t be anxious！（勿忧。）

Rarely did she laugh.（她难得笑。）这是倒装法，仍为加强语气的。

He is generally very reserved，but if he does talk，he always speaks to the purpose.（夫人不言，言必有中。）

The area could support a far larger population than it does at present.（那地方可以维持比现在大得多的人口。）

He had bought the home furnished sometime previously from a Lord somebody who needed cash，as so many do these days.（今天有非常多的人也是这样，因为需要现金就把房子卖掉，不久以前他从一个叫什么的勋爵那里买了这幢有家具的房子。）

Magnesium lives well with other metals—and，as in any good marriage，each partner functions better with the other than either does alone.（镁跟其他的金属结合得很好，所以好像很相合的婚姻一样，各金属单独的时候不如与其他结合时更能发生作用。）

【习题 39】

1. I have somewhere seen it observed that we should make the same use of a book that the bee does of a flower；she steals sweets from it，but does not injure it.

2. Suppose you think of an important idea. Unless you can write it down，your idea will probably die when you do. Even if you do write it down，it perishes as soon as the mice eat the paper，which they often do and do quickly.

（40）“depend on”的两种用法

（a）He depends on his pen for his living.

他靠文笔为生。

（b）Success depends on perseverance.

成功恃乎毅力。

【解说】

英文的“depend on”或“depend upon”，由主语不同而发生意义上的差异。如（a）例以“人”为主语时，便有“依靠”，“信赖”的意思，如（b）例以“物”为主语时，则意为“以…为据”，“凭…而定”，“由…为转移”，“恃乎”。关于“depend”一字，另外还有两个惯用句，即① depend upon it. = You may be certain；I assure you.（你可以相信；请你确信；我可担保。）例如：

The school boy is very idle and heedless now；but depent upon it，he will some day regret his idleness.（那学童现在很懒惰又不用心，不过我可以担保将来总有一天他会后悔的。）② That depends（on circumstances）.（视情形而定；视情形如何，难以逆料。）

【类例】

He is not to be depended upon.（他不可靠。）

Chinese varsity men mostly depend on their parents for support，but American college boys are independent of them.（中国大学生依赖父母；美国大学生自己工读。）

We depend on the newspaper for daily news.（我们靠报纸得知每日新闻。）

I shall have to depend on you to do it.（我只得仰仗足下来做。）

He no longer depends on his father.（他早已不靠父亲了。）

I cannot depend on your promise unless you give me the necessary security.（除非你提出必要的保证，否则，我是不能信赖你的诺言的。）

His departure depends on the weather.（他何时动身要凭天气而定。）

The effect depends on the cause.（结果由于原因。有因始有果。）

Everything depends on the amount of money given.（凡事皆凭金钱的多少而定。凡事以财力大小而定。）

The sale depends on the quality.（销路决定于品质。以货色的优劣而决定销路的大小。）

Victory does not always depend on numbers.（精兵不在多。）

【习题 40】

1. A man must so train his habit as to rely upon his own powers and depend upon his own courage in moment of pressing necessity.

2. Few realize how much the happiness of life and the formation of character depend on a wise selection of books we read.

3. I am deeply convinced that our peace of mind and the joy we get out of living depend not on where we are，or what we have，or who we are，but solely upon our mental attitude. Outward conditions have very little to do with it.（D. Carnegie）

（41）know…from

He does not know an adjective from an adverb.

他连形容词和副词都分不清楚。

【解说】

这个“know…from”是为表示辨别而用的，有时也可以说“tell…from”，它的意思是“能加辨别”，“能够分辨”，如 to know right from wrong 为“辨是非”，to know a friend from an enemy 是“分敌友”等等。

【类例】

I do not know the one from the other.（我未能辨别二者之差异。）

I cannot tell the one from the other.（不能区别彼此。）

Is it possible to tell a good book from a bad one？（要判别一本书的好坏是可能的吗？）

They do not know B from a bull’s foot-B from a broomstick-B from a battledoor（or battledore）-chalk from cheese.（他们一无所知。）

How do you know an Englishman from an American？—By the way he speaks English.（英国人和美国人的区别，听他们说英语就可知道。）

I can tell an Italian from a Frenchman.（我能辨别意大利人和法国人。）

I can tell a crocodile from an alligator（the difference between them）.（我能分别普通的鳄鱼和美洲产的鳄鱼。）

【习题 41】

1. It is hard to know flatterers from friends，for as a wolf resembles a dog，so a flatterer，a friend.

2. Much as sheep look alike，there is a difference between them，and John knows one from another.（Much as…alike = Though sheep look much alike）

（42）had better + 原形不定词，would rather + 原形不定词

（a）You had better go at once.

你最好马上去。

（b）I would rather go at once.

我宁肯马上去。

【解说】

照字面看来，“had”，“would”虽则是过去形，但在此等惯用句中，决无过去的意思，而只是一种假设语气的说法罢了。（a）例含有劝告的意思，可译为“最好是”，（b）例含有选择的意思，可译为“宁肯”，二者不可混同。这个“had better”的说法，有时可说成“had best”，那就更接近中文的说法了，不过不大通用，例如 I’d best go and settle the score.（Thackeray）（我最好去把债务弄清楚）。I had best start for home.（我最好就动身回家去）。这个“had better”有时还可以用过去形，如 You had better do it. 的过去形便是 You had better have done it.（你最好那样做了就好了）。

有人把“had better”及“would rather”两种说法混为一谈，而形成“would better”及“had rather”的说法，这是不妥的，最好避免不用。例如 I had rather be a doorkeeper in the house of lord than dwell in the tents of wickedness.（我与其住在罪孽的天幕中，宁肯做神殿的司阍）。

我们须注意“had better”是用于劝解或间接命令的，所以有时可能含有“have a duty to”或“have an obligation to”的意思，自然是带有一种命令的口气，说 You had better go away. 含义为 You should do what you are told or else you will suffer rather serious consequences.（你应该照吩咐去做，不然的话，就要遭受严重的后果）。因此对长辈是不宜用“had better” 的，对不大熟悉的人须存几分客气也不宜用，与其说 You’d better take a bus. 不如说 I suggest you take a bus. 与其说 You had better wear a blue necktie with that suit. 不如说 It might be better to wear a blue necktie with that suit. 或 It would be better for you to wear…

【类例】

When he proposed to fly across the Atlantic，I said，“You had better not try！”（Kirkpatrick）（当他打算要飞越大西洋时，我劝说：“你最好不要去尝试。”）

We had better not remain here any longer.（我们最好不要在此久留。）

I would rather die than live in dishonour. = I would sooner die than live in dishonour. = I would（just）as soon die as live in dishonour.（与其屈辱而生，宁愿光荣而死。）

I would rather be a poor man in a garret with plenty of books than a king who did not love reading.（我与其做一个不爱读书的国王，宁肯做一个住在屋顶楼上而拥有许多书的穷人。）

He said he would rather have lost both his legs than have seen dishonour brought upon the English nation.（他说与其见到英国民族蒙受耻辱，宁肯自己失去双腿。）

You had better not work after yon have tired yourself.（疲劳之后最好不要用功。）

You had better go back—the risk is great.（Thomas Hardy）（你最好回去，危险太大。）

I really don’t think I’d better.（J. D. Salinger）（我想我最好不要去。）

You had better make hotel reservations before you leave here.（你离开此地以前，最好先把旅馆的房间订好。）

【习题 42】

1. If you can neither receive nor bestow benefit，you had better leave that company at once.

2. I do not flatter you，young people，when I say I would rather talk to you than to the grown-up people.

（43）make…of

I will make a scientist of my son.

我要使儿子成为一个科学家。

【解说】

英文“make…of”的形式，原意为“以之为材料而做成”，“使之成为”。这个“of”有“from”之意，不改变原料本质的用“of”，如 The desk is made of wood.（桌子是木头做的），桌子做成之后还看得出木头的本质。改变原料本质的用“from”，如 Paper is made from rags.（纸是破布做的），做成了纸之后，就看不见破布的影子了。同样的情形，葡萄可以造酒，但酒中看不见葡萄，我们说 We make grapes into wine. 或者说 Wine is made from grapes. 又如 Aspirin is made from coaltar.

英文用介词“from”，“of”，“out of”表示原料，用“into”表示制成品。造句的方式为 to make material into object 或 to make object from（或 of 或 out of）material. 这个“out of”中的“out”一字，常可略去不用，尤其是紧接在“made”一字后时为然，如 Many things are made（out）of paper. 成语有 to make a mountain of a molehill（小题大做；言过其实）；to make ducks and drakes of one’s money（挥霍无度；浪费金钱）；to make fun of a person（开玩笑，戏弄）。

【类例】

She often makes a hero of her husband.（她常把她丈夫当作英雄，推崇备至。）

Don’t make a fool of him.（不要愚弄他。）

He made an ass（a fool，a beast）of himself.（他做着愚相。）

I don’t want to make a cat’s paw of him.（我不想拿他当傀儡。）

She has made a conquest of a man.（她使他成为她在爱情上的被征服者。）

A well-to-do farmer in China cannot make up his mind to make a farmer of his son，unless he deems his son incapable of undertaking any other profession.（一个中国富裕的农夫不能够决心让他的儿子成为农夫，除非他认为他儿子不能够干其他的职业。）

Nothing more makes a coward of a man than to be in the wrong.（没有别的事情比做错事更能使人胆怯的。）

A sea life may be the very thing required to make a strong man of him.（海上生活也许是使他成为一个强壮的人所必要的事。）

【习题 43】

1. The artist can within certain limits make what he likes of his life. In other callings，in medicine for instance or the law. you are free to choose whether you will adopt them or not，but having chosen，you are free no longer.（Maugham）

2. Men who have done great things，made stepping stones of their failure.

（44）make one’s way

He’ll have no difficulty in making his way in the world.

他要出人头地是没有什么困难的。

【解说】

英文的“make one’s way”有两个意思：①进行（proceed），例如 make one’s way on foot（步行前进），make one’s way home（回家）。It rapidly made its way into universal favour.（那个很快地就获得了世人的爱好。）②在事业上的进展（make progress in one’s career），如 He has yet his way to make in the world.（他还没有成就。）《综合英汉大辞典》上解释较详：to make one’s way（through difficulties—homeward—in life—in one’s profession）（排除困难而）进，（向家）行，（生涯）昌盛，（职业）成就。由此看来，我们可以知道，一个人在社会上的成功，并不是轻易得来的，而是由于“努力上进”，“力争上游”才获致的。上面说的 through difficulties 是历尽艰苦才得到的，正所谓“吃得苦中苦，方为人上人”。

由这个成语而产生出许多类似的表现法，用其他种种动词和“way”（进路）组合起来，差不多都有这种排除万难而得以前进的意思，如 The chick breaks its way out into the world.（鸡雏啄破蛋壳出来进入世间。）cleave one’ s way through many difficulties to prosperity（排除万难，打开出路，以臻繁荣。）conquer one’s way to the higher happiness（克服挡在路上的苦难，而达到更大的幸福。）corkscrew one’s way through a crowd（在群众的夹缝中走。）又如 cut one’s way 意为排除障碍始得前进，即所谓筚路蓝缕，例如 Great men are those who cut their way to success through difficulties.（伟人都是历尽艰苦才达到成功的。）他如 feel one’s way up the stairs（摸上楼梯。）fight one’s way out of the seething swaying mob（从沸腾浮动着的群众中打出一条出路来。）fight one’s way in life（in the world）.（人生奋斗。）A young man must find his own way in the world without props and safeguards.（年轻人必须在没有支持和保护之下自己来打天下。）I had some difficulty in finding my way back.（我很费了劲才找到路回家。）He forced his way from a humble origin to an exalted position.（他从微贱中奋斗而达到高位。）又可说 forge one’s own way to success（打开成功之路。）labor one’s way with great difficulty（艰苦奋斗。）With no further formal education，he had worked his way to a major position.（他没有受过更多的正式教育，也搞到一个重要的位置了。）He worked his way through college as a waiter.（他半工半读，一面当侍者，一面读完大学。）

【类例】

The young man will make his way，for he is industrious and economical.（那青年既勤快又节俭是会成功的。）

He（Disraeli）is determined to make his way.（Edinburgh Review）（他是决心要成功的。）

Snails are making their way as an article of food.（蜗牛渐渐变成食品了。）

The word is a provincialism，but has made its way into standard speech.（这字原为方言，次第变成标准语了。）

The carp always makes its way up a waterfall.（鲤鱼跳龙门。）

Be active！That’s the way to make you way 〔up〕 in the world.（放活跃些！那就是你出人头地的办法。）

【习题 44】

1. So long as you are not a useful，faithful，and truthful man，you can scarcely hope to make your way in the world.

2. He has made his way to presidency step by step.

3. There is scarcely a great truth but has had to fight its way to public recognition in the face of opposition.

（45）rob…of

He robbed me of my watch.

他抢夺了我的表。

【解说】

“他动词 + 宾语（人） + of + 宾语（物）”的形式，是英文的特殊语法，和中文大不相同的。英文凡具有“夺取”意义的动词，就要用这种表现法。被夺取的目标分明是“物”，英文偏要说“人”，而在被夺取的“物”之前，加上一个“of”的介词，把它造成一个片语，接在“人”的后面。这个“of”的意思是表“分离”的。

英文在 rob，deprive，deliver，divest，break，relieve，clear，inform，bereave，cure，strip，rid 等有夺取，除去，减轻，通知等意的动词上，都可以采用这一种表现法。动词 steal（窃）虽与 rob（盗）相类，但用法完全不同，和它同用的介词不是“of”而是“from”，即“steal…from”，如 A thief stole some cigarettes from that shop.（有贼从那店里偷去一些香烟。）如果是具有“供给”之意的动词，就要用“with”来代替“of”，如说 supply him with money（供给他钱），fill the glass with water（倒水入杯），furnish one with information（给他消息），favour one with an interview（赐予接见），trust one with a secret（告以秘密）等。

【类例】

He does not care whom he deprives of enjoyment，so that he can obtain it.（他只求自己获得享受，不管是从谁夺取得来。）

I don’t want to rob him of his inalienable rights.（我不想夺取他做人固有的权利。）注：Life，liberty，and the pursuit of happiness have been called the inalienable rights of man.（生命，自由与追求幸福，被称为人类不可剥夺的权利。）

He cleared the sea of those robbers.（他肃清了海盗。）

I have learned enough to cure me of my old fancies.（Stevenson）（我学到足以诊好我从前好幻想的毛病。）

I shall never be able entirely to divest myself of this feeling.（我将永远无法完全放弃这些感觉的。）

He could not rid himself of the painful memories.（他忘不了过去那种痛苦的回忆。）

Your coming relieves me of the bother of writing a long letter.（你来了省得我去麻烦写一封长信。）

He was determined to break himself of the bad habit of lying in bed late of a morning.（他决心革除睡早觉的恶习。）

Thieves stripped the house of everything valuable.（贼偷去了家中一切贵重的东西。）

Death bereft（or bereaved）him of his son.（他有失明之痛。）

Four years of war drained the country of men and resources.（四年的战争使国家耗尽壮丁和资源。）

【习题 45】

1. He informed me of the news so that I got prepared in time.

2. A foolish notion that it is more dignified to be seen in a carriage than on horseback，had deprived all French noblemen of the use of the saddle.

3. It was fortunate for me that I suddenly achieved popularity as a dramatist and so was relieved of the necessity of writing a novel once a year to earn my living.（Maugham）

（46）seize…by the…

He seized me by the arm.

他抓了我的胳膊。

【解说】

这是纯粹的英文表现法，和中文不同，其形式为“他动词 + 宾语 + 介词 + the + 名词”。中国话一定用属格，而英文则先把整个的对象说出来，然后再说到那对象身体的局部。这是大处着眼，小处着手的办法。身体的局部接受动作时，不用代名词的属格“one’s”，而采用“介词 + the + 名词”的形式。这一类的动词有 seize，catch，take，strike，drag，pat，hit，hold，pull，stare，look 等，而介词则有 by，on，in，over，across，with 等。“他抓了我的胳膊”这句话，依照中文的说法，译成 He seized my arm. 也不为错，不过英语的气味不浓，和说 He seized me by the arm. 二者间的 nuance（细微差异），是很难言传，而只可意会的。但是如“不要让别人牵着你的鼻子走”一句话，则必须译成 Don’t let them lead you by the nose. 若说 Don’t let them lead your nose. 就不成话了。

【类例】

He kissed his horse on the forehead.（他在额上吻了他的马一下。）

He struck me on the head.（他打了我的头。）

I caught him by the right hand.（我握住他的右手。）

He pulled me by the sleeve.（他拉住我的衣袖。）

I gave him a blow on the head.（当头一棒。）

He looked me in the face.（他凝视着我。）

He wounded me in the arm.（他扭我的胳膊。）

He slapped me on the shoulder.（他拍我的肩。）

Poverty stared him in the face.（赤贫迫在眼前。）

He presumed in the gentlest manner to take her by her hand.（C. Lamb）（他敢于用最温柔的态度执了她的手。）注：古文可以说 by her hand. 但现代英文则必须说 by the hand.

【习题 46】

1. Never hold anybody by the hand in order to be heard out.

2. If that woman crosses my threshold，I shall strike her across the face.

3. The doctor angrily seized him by the collar，and asked him what he meant by such bad behaviour.

（47）see if…，see that…

（a）He came out to see if it had begun to rain.

他出来看是不是已经下雨了。

（b）He came out to see that the boy did not get hurt.

他出来注意防止小孩受伤。

【解说】

（a）例的“see if”中的“if”，是作“whether”解的，意为“是不是”。在“see”后不一定要接“if”，还可接用其他各种各样的疑问词。至于（b）例的“see that”中的“see”，则有“take care”之意。这个“see that”，实为“see to it that”的省略说法。“see to it” = look well to it；attend；consider；take care（加意及之，留神，注意，当心）。这种句中的“that”有时也可省掉不说。基本句型为“see that something is done”（当心照料，监督）转为“负责担任；保证”之意。

【类例】

See if he can do it.（看看他是不是能做这个。）

Go and see if there is anything to eat.（去看看有什么吃的东西没有。）

Go and see what is the matter.（去看看发生了什么事。）

Let’s see how the land lies.（让我们先来窥探一下形势。）

See how the wind blows.（观看形势；默察大势；观望。）

I will see that they do it.（我当负责要他们做。）

I will see that he pays you.（或 see that you are paid 或 see you paid）（我必令他还钱给你；我保证他一定还你。）

See to it that this does not occur again.（保证不再发生同样的事。）

See to it that you do not offend him.（当心不要冒犯他。）

I will see to it that everything is ready for your departure.（我会注意准备好一切让你起程。）

See to it that the boys learn the lesson well.（请留意使学生熟习功课。）

See to it that the work is done before dark.（你注意天黑前要做好。）

I will see 〔that〕 you avenged.（必定使你可以报仇。）

I will see 〔that〕 you hanged first.（那里有人肯做这样的事？）

【习题 47】

1. Many men do not allow their principles to take root，but pull them up every now and then，as children do flowers they have planted，to see if they are growing.

2. If a captain loves his ship truly，he must not neglect to attend to the smallest defect in her. He must report it and see that it is made good.

3. “I’ve been here when there’s been cholera and I haven’t turned a hair. The great thing is not to eat anything uncooked，no raw fruit or salads，or anything like that，and see that your drinking water is boiled.”（Maugham）

（48）take…for granted

（a）We took it for granted that you knew the whole matter.

我们认为那件事情你当然是完全知道的。

（b）She began to take her husband for granted until he threatened to leave her.

她开始有点瞧不起她丈夫的样子，直到她丈夫声称要离家出走，她才改变态度。

【解说】

英文成语“take…for granted”的形式，等于“assume as true”，可译作“认为当然”，“假定是实”，即并无明确的证据，也信以为真的意思。普通的用例为“take it for granted”，其中的“it”为形式上的宾语，代表后面的“that-Clause”；如果不用“it”而用名词时，则“that-Clause”可以不要。这个“granted”，分明是一个分词，在此权充介词“for”的宾语，如果把它看做前面省去了“being”一字也就好解释了。在“take”后面的宾语，一向都只限于“it”或事物的名词，但新近美国《韦氏大辞典》上，却增加了一个新的用法，即在“take”后面接用人的宾语，如（b）例所示，便是那辞典上举出的例句。对这个新义的解释，该辞典作“to pay inadequate attention to or value too lightly（as a possession，right or privilege）”，意即对地位、权利或特权，不加重视，或不十分注意，自然是带有瞧不起的神气。

【类例】

I take it for granted that you will be interested in it，too.（我认为你当然对此也会感兴趣的。）

I just took it for granted that we will close on May Day.（我认为劳动节商店当然是关门的。）

I took it for granted that he would come.（我以为他一定会来的。）

He takes nothing for granted.（他对任何事物都不视为当然。）

I took his qualifications for granted.（我姑认为他的资历是真实可靠的。）

They themselves take their love for granted，and do not care what strangers may think about it.（他们本人认为他们的相爱是理所当然的，别人怎样想法，他们毫不介意。）

I took for granted the innumerable little jobs she did for me.（Siegfried Sassoon）（我把她为我做的那些无数的小事视为当然。）

Physical and intellectual miracles we take for granted.（M. B. Johnstone）（我们把心身的奇迹认为是当然的。）

Cf. From your manner I am to take it as true.（Hardy）（从你的态度看来，我得把那个看做真的了。）

【习题 48】

1. Of the rural life of England he knew nothing；and he took it for granted that everybody who lived in the country was either stupid or miserable.

2. I take the goodness of the good for granted and I am amused when I discover their defects or their vices；I am touched when I see the goodness of the wicked and I am willing enough to shrug a tolerant shoulder at their wickedness.（Maugham）

3. I went there as a kid and grew up with the place. They took me for granted.（Elizabeth Wilson）

（49）used to + 原形不定词，be used to + 动名词

（a）He used to do such a thing.

他以前常做这样的事。

（b）He is used to doing such a thing.

他惯于做这样的事。

【解说】

在（a）例中说的“used to do”，表示过去的习惯，即“以前常那样做”，这表示现在已不那样做了。在（b）例中的“be used to doing” = be accustomed to doing，是表示现在的惯常行为，其中的“be”，有时可说成“get”，比方我们新到一个地方，对于当地的情形陌生，人们就会说：You will soon get used to it.（过些时间你就会习惯的。）又“他惯于登山。”就说 He is used to mountain-climbing. 这个“be used to”和前面的“used to”，含义大不相同，试比较下面两句：

（a）I am used to sitting up late at night.

（b）I used to sit up late at night.

（a）句意为“我惯于迟睡。”（b）句意为“我以前总是睡得很迟的。”

英文还有一个“would”字，也和“used to”一样，是表过去习惯的，但二者在用法上略有不同。表示不规则的习惯时用“would”，表示有规则的习惯则用“used to”。用“would”时多伴有“always”，“often”，“frequently”，“sometimes”，“for hours”等副词。比较下面四个句子，不难有所分辨。

（a）He climbs a mountain every Sunday.

（每个礼拜天他都要去爬山。）

（b）He will often climb a mountain of a Sunday.

（他常要在礼拜天去爬山。）

（c）He used to climb a mountain on a Sunday.

（他以前常要在礼拜天去爬山。）

（d）He would often climb a mountain when young.

（他年轻时常去爬山。）

这种“would”具有一种“回想的心情”，而“used to”只是表示“过去与现在的对比”而已。再看下例：

He would often sit for hours，book in hand.（他从前常要手里拿一本书，一坐就是好几个钟头。）

Sometimes the boys would play a trick on their teacher.（有时孩子们常要对老师开个玩笑。）

这都是回想着过去而说的，表示以前常要那样做，指过去的反复的动作或习惯。至于“used to”，就是拿现在和过去比较，例如：

He used to play tennis before his marriage.

（他在结婚以前常打网球。）现在不打了。

一般是客观地说过去的事用“used to”，带有意志时则用“would”。用“would”比“used to”略带文气。第三人称用“will”也可表习惯的行为，如 He will often get up at midnight to jot down something in his notebook.（他常半夜起来在笔记本上记下一些事情）。如用“would”则对所有的人称都可以。有时“would”和“used to”是可以混同的，如

When I was a boy，I would（或 used to）get up early.

（我小时候，总是起身很早的。）

英文的“used to”常和表现状态的动词同用，如：

There used to be a church here.

（以前这里有一个教堂。）

When I was a boy，I used to like chocolate.（but I don’t like it any more）.（在小孩子的时候，我爱吃巧克力糖。）意即现在不再爱吃了。这个用法是不可以换用“would”的，因为说 When I was a boy，I would like chocolate 是不通的。I would like chocolate，意为“我想吃巧克力糖”。如果不想强调现在与过去的对照，就用单纯的过去动词也同样可以达意，如 There was a church here. He played tennis before his marriage. 至于现在的情形如何，就不在话下了。

【类例】

People used to think that the sun went round the earth.（从前的人以为太阳是围绕着地球转动的。）现在的人就不这样想了。

He usedn’t to answer.（他总是不回答。）

I used to go fishing on Sundays when I lived in Taipei.（我住在台北时礼拜天常去钓鱼。）

I am used to the military life now.（我现在已惯于军队生活了。）

I’m sure it’s because she is not used to the new typewriter yet.（那一定是因为她未用惯这架新的打字机。）

I got 〔became〕 used gradually to the vegetarian diet.（我逐渐习惯于素食了。）

The country inn was as pleasant as it used to be in the old times.（那间乡下客栈还是和从前一样舒服。）

That is how automobiles used to be made.（那就是汽车以前的制造法。）

The book used to belong to you？（Gissing）（这本书是你的吗？）

I used to remonstrate with Laura like a fussy old uncle but she’d only laugh.（Nigel Sligh）（我以前常要像一个讨厌的叔叔似的，老是给罗娜劝告，而她只是笑笑而已。）

There are some kinds of butterflies that used to be quite common，and now they are quite rare；I expect in a few years there will be none left at all.（Sweet）（某些种类的蝴蝶，以前很普通，现在却稀少了；我想再过几年就恐怕完全没有了。）现在、过去、未来的比较。

Sometimes he used to tell us of his expeditions through the woods and fields round his home，and how he explored the solitary brooks and ponds；and then he would describe the curious animals and birds he saw.（Sweet）（以前他时时对我说关于他在他家周围的森林和原野中探险的事，以及他怎样找到一些寂静的溪流和池塘的情形，然后他老要描述他所见到的珍禽异兽。）

“I often used to have a bit of fun with her，in the hold（ = old）times！” Mr. Bailey spoke as if he had already had a leg and three-quarters in the grave，and this had happened twenty or thirty years ago.（Dickens）（“在很久很久以前，我常要跟她开开玩笑”，倍雷先生说，俨然他已经有一只脚和四分之三进入坟墓了似的，而这已经是二三十年前的事了。）

【习题 49】

1. “I care nothing for the world，” he declared，“for the future，for what people will say，for any kind of established position，or even for literary fame，which in my early days I used to stay awake so many nights dreaming about.”（Lynd）

2. Of course he suggested seeing her home，which she wouldn’t hear of at first—she said there was really no need，she was used to the journey alone and her parents’ house was only a few minutes’ walk from the station.（Hilton）

3. The air of our island was so genial and balmy that we could have slept quite well without any shelter；but we were so little used to sleeping in the open air，that we did not quite relish the idea of lying down without any covering over us.（R. M. Ballantyne）

（50）be + 自动词的过去分词

Spring is come.

春满人间。

【解说】

在动词“be”之后接用自动词的过去分词，不可看做被动语态，而应视为一种完成式才对，因为那是指某自动词的动作在完成后的状态。我们现在所说的完成式（现在）只有“have done”一个形式，但在 OE（古英文）的时代是“have + 宾语 + 过去分词”，例如现在说 I have caught the fish. 古代说 I have the fish caught. 和现代表示使动或被动的形式一样（如被动说的 We have our enemy almost surrounded. 及 Did he have his hair cut yesterday？及使动说的 I had my watch mended. 等）但用于“have + 宾语 + 过去分词”这个形式的动词主要是他动词，而自动词，尤其是表运动、变化、终止等的自动词，如“come”，“go”，“arrive”，“fall”，“arise”，“become”，“grow”，“change”，“die”，等字，就采用“be + 过去分词”的形式，和用“have”的形式，在意义上毫无分别。但这种自动词的“be + 过去分词”的形式，经由 Middle English（中世英语）到 Modern English（现代英语）而渐渐失势，为“have” 的形式所侵蚀，所以我们今日说到 Perfect Tense（完成时态）就只知“have done”一个形式了。

但古代自动词的用法并没有绝迹，现在表示运动和变化的少数自动词如“come”，“go”，“arrive”，“depart”，“fall”，“rise”，“set”，“grow”等，仍保留“be + 过去分词”的形式，在用法上与“have”的形式分庭抗礼，以“have”表完成的动作（action），“be”表完成的状态（state），例如：

He has gone.（他已经走了。）重点指动作的完成。

He is gone.（他已不在此了。）重点指动作的结果（现状）。

自动词的过去分词用于动词“be”后时，是表示那个自动词的动作完成了的状态，所以 He is gone. = He is no longer here. 说他已不在此，正是那“去”的动作完成后的状态。Spring is come. 其“来”的动作完成后的状态正是莺飞草长，杂花生树的春满人间的情形。The leaves are fallen. 是落叶满地的一片秋天的景象。The weeds are grown. 是杂草丛生的废园的样子。这些用在“be”后自动词的过去分词，最好把它当作形容词看待，以免发生被动的错误观念，而事实上许多过去分词的自动词辞典上也标明是形容词，如“agreed”便是其中的一个字，例：We were agreed on that point.（我们在那一点上意见一致。）I am agreed to accept the offer.（我同意接受那个提议。）如果用在名词前面，更是不含被动意味的形容词了，在此情形如系他动词则有被动意味。比较：a faded flower（已经谢了的花），是自动词过去分词变来的形容词，不含被动意味，只表“已经”之意。a broken promise（被破坏了的诺言），是他动词过去分词变来的形容词，故含有被动意味在内。

【类例】

We are prepared for the worst.（准备最坏的情形来临。）

He was married.（他结婚了。）

The train was stopped.（火车停了。）

The day for payment is come.（发薪的日子来了。）

All hope is gone.（一切的希望都完了。）

I was determined to go.（我决心去。）

The sun is risen.（ = The sun has risen and is now in the sky.）（太阳出来了。）太阳已经升起，现在在天上看见太阳。

The sun is set.（太阳落山了。）

My money is gone.（我的钱花完了。）

She found that her strength was gone.（她发觉她的气力都没有了。）

He is dressed elegantly.（他衣着华丽。）

Here’s Mr. Land come all the way from Yorkshire.（这是从约克县远道而来的蓝先生。）在“come”前省略了“who is”二字。

Arrived at the spot，the party lost no time in getting to work.（一到现场，那一行人马上开始工作。）句首略去“being”一字。

【习题 50】

1. All the guests are arrived and we’ll have dinner served right now.

2. We are gathered here this morning to discuss without any prejudice the question of the day.

3. I’m almost finished with my work，but there are a few odds and ends left to be done.

（51）否定 + fail + 不定词

He cannot fail to rise early.

他一定要很早起身。

【解说】

英文的“cannot fail to do”和“cannot but do”同义，可译作“一定”，“必须”，“不得不”等。这个表现法的基本字“fail”，是由自动的“fail in an attempt”（失败，未成）变成他动的“fail do to something”（疏失，忘置，不济，不能，难能），其反对字的“succeed”则只能作自动，不能作他动，即只能说“succeed in doing”，不能说“succeed to do”。以“fail”为句中主动词后接不定词时，意即“cannot do”。至于在“fail to do”之意上再加否定时，即成“not fail to do” = be sure to do（certainly）。【类 例】I shall not fail to（ = certainly）do so.（我必照办。）

He never fails to（ = is sure to）accomplish his purpose.（必达目的。）

Never fail to（ = be sure to）come to me.（务必相助。）

Don’t fail to let me know.（务请相告。）

You will never fail to be moved by the beauty of the sight.（你一定会被那美丽的景象所感动的。）

I cannot fail to save enough money to buy a new watch.（我一定要储蓄足够的钱，好买一只新表。）

【习题 51】

1. Nobody can fail to see that they have reached a crisis in their national development.

2. If we love our fellow creatures，as we ought to do，we cannot fail to be courteous to them.

（52）动词 + 原形不定词

Go bring me my hat.

去把我的帽子拿来。

【解说】

依照英文的习惯，两个动词不能连用，必得用“and”连接起来，或是把第二个动词改为不定词，即是说“go and bring”或“go to bring”两种形式。但我们现在采用的例句，既不用“and”也不用不定词，把两个动词连用在一起，似乎是不合惯用语法，其实这只是“go to bring”的省略，把后接的不定词的“to”略去，使它成为原形不定词（bare infinitive 或称 zero infinitive）。在表运动的动词如“come”，“go”之类时，常要将其后的不定词的“to”略去。现在的人以为这是美国人的用法，其实在中世英文时代老早就有了，不过到 1890 年以后，英国就不用了，仅在方言中还存在罢了。Jespersen 说，“This is pretty frequent in recent American books.”（这在美国书中是很常见的。）会话中固不待言，文学作品中亦频频出现。其实这也不是美国人复古，而是十九世纪爱尔兰的大批移民到来以后，受到爱尔兰语影响的结果。在现代爱尔兰的语文中，还不失为一种惯用的语法，如 Go call them here again.（W. B. Yeats）I’ll go tell Jack Smith’s…（Lady Gregory）现在美国话中这种用法极多，甚至把“go get”（获得，弄到手）的动词，转为名词的“go-getter”（活动家），如 The thing to do then，as a live bunch of go-getters，is to capitalize Culture.（S. Lewis）（作为一个活泼的活动家随后要做的事，就是把“文化”也资本化起来。

【类例】

Let’s go talk to the other fellows.（John Steinbeck）（我们到别的人们的地方去谈谈吧。）

Won’t you go take a look at him？（id）（你不去看他一眼吗？）

I’d better go fetch him before all the fish die of age.（Puss’n Pooch）（我最好去找他来，怕这些鱼因年老而死光。）

I’d better go telephone Dilly first.（电影 Love Letters）（我最好先去打个电话给狄莉。）

She’s better come get you，anyway.（H. Hamilton）（总而言之，她最好来带你去。）

Better come join us.（S. Lewis）（你跟我们一起去吧。）

Run get the ball for me，Jamie.（B. Tarkington）（詹米，你跑去替我把球拾来吧。）

I like say something if you got a minute.（id）（如果你得空，我想和你说几句话。）

He offered to help carry her basket.（他说要替她提篮子。）

I have heard say he is a miser.（我听说他是一个守财奴。）

Don’t leave go until I tell you.（我不说你就不要放手。）

I hear say that there will be an election soon.（Zandvoort）（我听说不久要举行选举。）

I hear tell there’s a new arrival six days old.（我听说有一个出生六日的婴孩。）

Let it go hang！（让它去吧。）

【习题 52】

1. Go look up the tree and see if there is any ripe fruit on it.（Haggard）

2. If you like not my writing，go read something else.（Burton）

（53）leave + much（nothing） + to be desired

The book leaves much to be desired.

这本书写得极不完善。

【解说】

英文说的“leave much to be desired” = be very imperfect，意为“极不完善”，“缺点很多”。而“leave nothing to be desired” = be perfect，意为“完善”，“毫无遗憾”，“没有缺点”。

【类例】

Your behaviour leaves much to be desired.（你的行为尚须改进。）

It leaves nothing to be desired.（那毫无缺憾。）

The telephone service at Singapore leaves nothing to be desired.（新加坡的电话服务无复遗憾。）

The system of water supply in the city leaves much to be desired.（本市的自来水供应制度极不完善。）

The system of internal communication in England almost leaves nothing to be desired.（英国的国内交通制度完善得很。）

This steamer leaves nothing to be desired so far as comfort and luxury are concerned.（在舒服和豪华方面这轮船可谓尽善尽美了。）

【习题 53】

1. When this disagreeable difference has been removed，the friendly relations between the two Republics，cordial even when one was yet an Empire，will leave nothing to be desired.（Wu Ting Fang）

2. If you will balance it on your finger you will find that it is perfect weight，and as to the finish it leaves nothing to be desired.（Fred M. White）

（54）be + 不定词

He is to arrive at seven in the morning.

他预定早晨七时抵埠。

【解说】

这个“be + 不定词”是不定词的叙述用法，好像形容词一样。英文的这种表现法，有许多不同的含义，如上例便是表“预定”的，除此基本含义之外，它还可以表“可能”，表“义务”，表“假设”，表“目的”，表“结果”，表“运命”等。但注意不要与名词用法相混，如 To see is to believe.（百闻不如一见。）这句中的动词后虽然也是接的不定词（to believe），但它是名词补语，和我们现在讨论的叙述用法的形容词补语完全不同。

【类例】

We are to meet him at the airport.（我们要到飞机场去接他。）（预定）

The meeting is to be held on Sunday.（定了礼拜天开会。）（预定）

We are to go to town this afternoon.（我们打算今天下午进城去。）（预定）

In the sky not a cloud was to be seen.（青天无片云。）（可能）

Every misfortune is to be subdued by patience.（一切不幸都可能由忍耐克服。）（可能）

Her feelings as she read the letter were scarcely to be defined.（她看信时的心情不可名状。）（可能）

You are to stay here till I come back.（你得待在此地等我回来。）（命令）

You are always to knock before you enter my room.（在进入我的房间前你要敲门。）（命令）

It was understood that everybody was to pay his own expenses.（听说各人付各人的钱。）（义务）

Let me know everything that I am to know without delay.（我需要知道的事赶快都告诉我吧。）（义务）

She asked him what she was to do.（她问他看她要做点什么。）（义务）

If he were to come，say that I am absent.（他来了，只说我不在家。）（假设）

Certain skills must be learned if one is to use English effectively.（如果想要有效地使用英语，某些技巧是必须学会的。）（假设）

If it is to be done at all，do it well.（如果一定要做的话，就好好地做吧。）（假设）

This house is to be let or sold.（这房子要出租或出售。）（目的）

Not an instant is to be lost.（一秒钟也不要浪费。）（目的）

And the augurs were as clever as are politicians，who also must practise divination，if ever they are to do anything worth the name.（D. H. Lawrence）（现代的政治家也和古代的占兆家一样，不得不实行占兆，如果他们想要做点名副其实的事情的话，所以古代的占兆家也和现代的政治家一样聪明。）（目的）

He was to blame for not locking the door.（没有锁门是他的过错。）（结果）

Am I to understand that you have engaged yourself to this young gentleman？（Shaw）（你是说你已经和这个青年男士订了婚吗？）（结果）

The Prince of Wales has been touring the worldwide dominions of which，some day，he is to be the crown head.（H. G. Wells）（将来命定要做英国领土之王的皇太子，去周游了遍及全世界的领土回来了。）（运命）

The worst is still to come.（还有最坏的要来。）（运命）

【习题 54】

1. If you are to understand this strange，rather sad story，you must have an impression at least of the background—the smashed dreary city of Vienna divided up in zones among the four Powers.（G. Greene）

2. The President of the University is to give a speech at the convivial meeting.

3. “I am all astonishment. How long has she been such a favourite？—and pray，when am I to wish you joy？”（Jane Austen）

（55）have + 不定词 + 宾语，have + 宾语 + 不定词

（a）I have to spend much money.

我非花许多钱不可。

（b）I have much money to spend.

我有许多钱可花。

【解说】

英文的“have to do”和“have…to do”两种形式，在意味上不一定有区别，大都是同义的，如 I have to write a composition. 和 I have a composition to write. 两句都是作“我非做一篇作文不可。”解，意即 I must write a composition. 但 COD（《简明牛津字典》）的编者特别举出意义不同的例句来证明二者是可能有不同解释的：

（a）I had to do my work.

（b）I had my work to do.

（a）句中的“had to”注明为“be obliged”（不得不，必须）之意。（b）句中的“had to”注明为“be burdened with”（使负担）之意。

美国的 Fries 在他著的 American English Grammar 一书中（169 页），也举例加以分别：

Speeches may be broadly divided into two kinds. There is the speech a man makes which he has something to say，and the speech he endeavours to make when he has to say something.（演说可大别为两类。一类是一个人有话想说的时候而去发表的演说，另一类是他并没有打算说话，而临时被迫演说，只好努力去找些话来说以应付过去。）

他这说法是不错的，我还可以举出日常的用例：

（a）I have something to tell you.（我有话跟你说。）

（b）I have to tell you something.（我必须告诉你一件事。）

可知“have + 宾语”的作“有”解，“have + 不定词”的作“必须”解，但一般的用法二者的分别并不太明显（not always very well marked）。

【类例】

I have three miles to walk.（有三里路要走。）意为非走不可，无车代步。不能说 I have to walk three miles. 因为并非有走三里路的必要，而是因为路程长达三里的意思。

Whom have I to complain of but myself？（Milton）（我除了自己以外，还能向谁抱怨呢？）

I have only to blame myself. = I have only myself to blame.（我只怪自己。）

As a matter of fact，he’s having to sell his house.（事实上，他现在非把房子卖掉不可。）

He has several letters to write.（他有几封信要写。）

He has nothing to eat.（他没有东西吃。）

I have a knife to sharpen my pencil with.（我有削铅笔的小刀。）

The weather has to be good；otherwise，we’ll postpone it.（一定要好天气，否则，我们就延期。）

Do I have to go to bed now，mother？（妈，我就要去睡吗？）

Wake them all up，if you have to，but find that paper！（没有办法的时候，只好把他们全部叫醒，那文件无论如何要找出来！）

My doctor says I haven’t to（ = mustn’t）eat meat，but I don’t have to（ = needn’t）take his advice if I don’t want to.（医生说我不可以吃肉，不过如果我不想听他的话，我就不一定要服从他。）don’t have to 或说 haven’t got to 也是一样。

He has to get through work before eight.（八点钟以前他必须把工作做完。）

Everything had to have his approval.（一切都得由他批准。）

You don’t have to decide this matter at once.（你不用马上决定。）

【习题 55】

1. Some authors write because they have to tell a story rather than they have a story to tell.（Anthony Trollope）

2. I played away a month on account of illness，so I had to work hard to make up for lost time.

3. She has never expressed an opinion，and the inference was that she had no opinion to express.

4. We have some miles to drive，even from the small station.

（56）prevent + 宾语 + from + 动名词

Illness prevented him from going there.

他因为生病未能去那里。

【解说】

英文说的“prevent a person from doing something”，意即“hinder him so that he cannot do it”，可译作“阻止去做”或“使不能做”，是指妨碍一个人去做什么事说的。这个“from”是表示“分离”的。动词“prevent”有时改用“hinder”，“deter”，“keep”，“stop”等字也是一样，如用“restrain”则为“抑制”，若用“prohibit”则为“禁止”，用法相同，都是后接“from”加动名词或名词的，不过如用与“prohibit”同义的“forbid”时，用法就不同了。在动词“forbid”后不能接介词“from”，而要接不定词，才符合英文的惯用法。如“他父亲禁止他抽烟”一句话，译成英文时，用“prohibit”则说 His father prohibited him from smoking. 用“forbid”则说 His father forbade him to smoke. 这两个动词意义虽同，用法上也略有分别：“forbid”指直接或私人下的命令，或定下办法来禁止，并希望他人遵循，而“prohibit”则指当局制定正式规章，如政府的立法禁止之类，并有强迫执行之意，如 Smoking is prohibited in theatres.（戏院中奉令禁止吸烟。）Swimming in the reservoir is prohibited.（禁止在贮水池中游泳。）

【类例】

This is only to prevent him from going abroad.（这只有妨碍他出洋的。）

He could not keep from the use of tobacco.（他未能停止吸烟。）

What prevented you from coming last night？（昨夜你为何没有来？）

Urgent business prevented me from calling on you.（因有要事，以致未能奉访。）

Bad weather prevented us from starting. = We could not start because of bad weather.（因为天气不好，所以没有能够动身。）

We must prevent the trouble（from）spreading.（我们必须阻止纷争扩大。）

Please refrain from smoking.（请免吸烟。）

Failure in the examination should not deter you from trying again.（这次考试落第，不应妨碍你再试的勇气。）

Tired as I was—exhausted，in fact—I was prevented from sleeping by the pain in my knee.（Jack London）（我虽则疲劳，实际上是筋疲力竭了，我因膝痛未能入眠。）

If he would only keep from bad company，he might yet do well.（只要他不要再交结坏朋友，他还是可以变好的。）

Her lips were set together almost as if she was pinching them tight to prevent words or sounds（from）coming out.（Gaskell）（她的嘴唇为着不让语言或声音出来，几乎好像夹紧了一样完全闭着。）

A man can never be hindered from thinking whatever he chooses so long as he conceals what he thinks.（一个人只要他不把心里所想的事说出来，他高兴怎样想就怎样想，是谁也不能阻止他的。）

【习题 56】

1. Society does not in any age prevent a man from being what he can be（ = become）.

2. If you apply the principles of efficiency to your work，nothing can stop you from achieving your ambitions.

（57）persuade + 宾语 + into + 动名词，dissuade + 宾语 + from + 动名词

（a）I persuaded him into doing so.

我劝说他才这样做的。

（b）I dissuaded him from doing so.

我劝阻他才不这样做的。

【解说】

某种他动词的后面接“into doing”时，便产生肯定的意思；接“from doing”时，便产生否定的意思。前者的“into”表他动词的“结果”，后者的“from”表“制止”，“抑制”。后面不用动名词而改用名词也可以，如 I dissuaded her from her folly.（我劝她少做蠢事。）他动词“persuade”是劝人去做一件事，而“dissuade”则是劝人不要去做一件事，所以劝告成功，便是去做了（into doing），或是不做了（from doing）。普通在“persuade”后又常接用不定词以代替动名词，如不说 I have persuaded him into doing it. 而改说 I have persuaded him to do it. 也是一样。但反对字的“dissuade”后便一定要接动名词，不可以接不定词，即是我们只能说 I should dissuade you from going. 不可以说 I should dissuade you to go. 不过这个“from”有时也可换用“out of”或“against”，如 I tried my best to reason him out of his fears，but it was all in vain.（我尽力劝他不要怕，但毫无效果。）They dissuade people against going to China.（他们劝人不要到中国去。）

【类例】

The father dissuaded his son from leaving school.（父亲劝他的儿子不要中途辍学。）

He was persuaded into doing it against his own wish.（他被劝服去做他违心的事。）

They dissuaded her from going on the stage.（他们劝她不要去演戏。）

The priests of the old religions used to persuade the people to do all hurt to the Christians.（古宗教的僧人们老是劝说人们对基督徒加以种种危害。）

I could not persuade her to（ = into）my way of thinking.（我不能说服他依从我的想法。）

I have convinced her that she needs a holiday，but cannot persuade her to take one.（我已使她相信她需要度假，但不能说服她真去。）

I knew I should study，but he persuaded me to go to the movies.（我知道应该读书，但他劝诱我去看电影。）

【习题 57】

1. I honour the man who can neither be bribed nor frightened into doing wrong.

2. Literature serves a human animal struggling to persuade the universal Sphinx to propose a more intelligible riddle.（Santayana）

V. 不定词的造句

（58）表目的、原因、结果等的不定词

（a）I went to see him off.

我去送了他的行。

（b）I am glad to see you.

见到你我真高兴。

（c）He worked only to fail.

他努力终归失败。

【解说】

在“动词的造句”中，我们已经涉及一些不定词的用法，但那是以动词为主，不定词只是附属而已。现另辟专栏来研讨不定词的一些特别用法。就不定词而论，最复杂而又最难辨别的，就是它的副词用法。那可以用来表“目的”，“原因”，“结果”，“理由”，“条件”，“让步”等等，一不当心，就会译错。上举（a）例所示，凡用于不表感情的动词之后的不定词，便是表示“目的”的。（b）例中用于表示感情的形容词或自动词之后的不定词，则是表示“原因”的。（c）例中用于无意志动词之后的不定词，便是表示“结果”的，在“only”或“never”后的不定词，多属此类。现将各种副词用法，分别举例说明如下：

【类例】

We eat to live，（but do）not live to eat.（我们为生而食，不是为食而生。）（目的）

The boy rushed his home work through and went out to play.（那男孩急急忙忙把作业做好，出外玩去了。）（目的）

They are selling red feathers to raise money for crippled children.（他们在卖红羽毛为残废儿童筹募基金。）（目的）

She wept to see him in this condition.（看到他这个样子她不禁哭了。）（原因）

They were delighted to learn of the arrival of our baby.（他们听说我们生了孩子大为高兴。）（原因）

She was hurt to find that no one admired her performance.（她发觉谁也不赏识她的演奏颇为伤心。）（原因）

He awoke to find（ = and found）himself famous.（他一觉醒来发现自己出名了。）（结果）

Few live to be a hundred.（活到百岁的人无几。）（结果）

I little thought then that I left it（ = the house），never to return.（Dickens）（在当时简直没有想到我离开那个家就再不会回去了。）（结果）

She will grow up to be a fine woman.（她会长成一个漂亮女人的。）（结果）

It is discouraging to tell the truth only to find that we are not believed.（我们说的真话，结果却无人相信，未免使人气馁。）（结果）

One day Mr. Nelson disappeared from town，never to be seen again.（有一天芮先生在城里不见了，以后再没有人看到他。）（结果）

He must be a fool to say so.（说这样的话，他真傻呀。）（理由）

He must have studied hard to have succeeded so splendidly.（他如此高中，一定是很用过功来的。）（理由）

What a fool I was to have expected him to help me！（指望他会帮我的忙，我多么傻。）（理由）

They must be crazy to let him drive their car. He hasn’t got a driver’s licence.（他没有开车的执照，他们竟糊涂地让他去驾驶他们的车子。）（理由）

To hear you sing，people might take you for a girl.（听你唱歌，人们会以为你是女子。）（条件）

I should be glad for Mary to go.（Curme）（玛丽要能去的话，我真高兴。）（条件）

To look at her you’d never guess she was a university lecturer.（看她的样子你决想不到她原是大学的讲师。）（条件）

You would have done better to have made up with them.（你要跟他们和解了的话，就更好了。）（条件）

To do his best，he could not finish it in a week.（即令尽他的力量去做，一个礼拜也做不好。）（让步）

【习题 58】

1. They were shocked to see the state of the bell-rope.

2. I come to bury Caesar，not to praise him.（Shakespeare）

3. He did not live to enjoy the fruits of what he had done.

4. We rushed through it only to find ourselves back again in prison.

5. If modern individuals and modern nations pursue again these crazy competitions，without regard for the dignity of human life，we shall live to see ten millions perish for every million who perished in the war.

6. Many a young person has felt that life was not worth living after a broken love-affair，only to discover a few years later that happiness was waiting，after all.

（59）so as + 不定词，so…as + 不定词

（a）We started early so as to get there before noon.

我们为要在正午以前赶到那里，所以很早就动身了。

（b）We started so early as to get there before noon.

我们因为很早动身，所以在正午以前就到达那里了。

【解说】

在（a）例中将“so as（not）to do”连用，与用子句的“so that + may”一样，是表示“目的”的，意为“为着（不）要”。如 We started early so as to get there in time. = We started early，so that we might get there in time.（我们早早动身，俾可及时赶到那里。）至于在（b）例中把“so…as to”分开来用，便产生出“结果”之意，表示因果关系，有时也可表“程度”，等于用子句的“so…that”，可译作“因为…所以”，如 We started so early as to get there in time. = We started so early that we got there in time.（我们早早动身，以致及时到达了那里。）表“程度”的如 He was so angry as to be unable to speak. = He was so angry that he could not speak.（他大为生气，连话都说不出来了。）

【类例】

Come early so as to get a good seat.（ = Come early，so that you may get a good seat. = Come early in order to get a good seat.）（早点来可以占到好位子。）

She walked softly so as not to make any noise.（ = She walked softly that she might not make any noise. = She walked softly in order not to make any noise.）（她轻移莲步，不使出声。）

Houses should be built so as to admit plenty of light as well as of fresh air.（建筑家屋应使空气流通，阳光直射。）

Books are now so cheap as to be within the reach of almost every one.（书籍现在非常的便宜，几乎任何人都能购读。）

Something fresh and green was springing forth so as to be ready for the summer.（为准备好以便迎接夏季，新绿正在迸发。）

He listened attentively so as not to miss a single word.（他不想漏掉一个字，所以很用心地听了。）

He went so far as to say that she was a liar.（他甚至说她是撒谎。）

In those days ships were sometimes so delayed by contrary wind as to run short of fresh water and provisions.（当时船因遇到逆风而迟误，以致发生淡水和食粮不足的现象。）

Without，the storm drove so fast as to create a snow-mist in the kitchen.（Hardy）（外面暴风雪吹得很急，以致在厨房中造成沉沉的雪雾。）

【习题 59】

1. Before we start to investigate that，let us try to realize what we do know，so as to make the most of it，and to separate the essential from the accidental.（Doyle）

2. Vegetables are not produced so abundantly as to suffiee for the wants of the whole country.

（60）too… + 不定词，not too… + 不定词，too…not + 不定词

（a）She is too angry to speak.

她愤怒得说不出话来。

（b）He is not too old to do it.

他不是老人，那个他是可以做的。

（c）He is too angry not to say it.

他在盛怒之下，不免要说出这样的话来。

【解说】

这三个句子中的不定词，都是表示“限定”的。在（a）句中的“too…to do”，是以不定词来修饰前面的“too”字，因而这个不定词就含有否定的意思在内，可译作“太…而不能”，用英文解释则为 She is so angry that she cannot speak.（她如此愤怒以致不能说出话来。）但是这个表现法如果在前面加上一个“not”的字样，如（b）例所示，便是把（a）句加以否定，意即“并不太…所以能做”，但这个否定的“not”，如果不是加在“too”之前，而是加在不定词的“to do”之前，如（c）例所示，那就是把原有的否定打消了，原为“不能说”变为“不是不能说”也就是“可能说”了。这个“not”是修饰不定词的，以英文解释时便是 He is so angry that he cannot but say it.（他是那般愤怒而忍不住要说出那样的话来。）

【类例】

The news is too good to be true.（消息太好，恐不可靠。）

The flower is too beautiful to last.（花太美难经久。）

I was too excited to speak.（我兴奋得说不出话来了。）

English is not too difficult to learn.（英文并不太难学。）

The expression is well known to many students of French，but it is far too good not to be requoted here.（这句话是学法文的学生都知道的，不过实在说得太好，这儿不免要再度引用一下。）

This coffee is too hot（for me）to drink.（咖啡太烫我不能喝。）

His income is too small to support his family.（收入微薄无法养家。）

The light was too dim to be used for close work.（灯光太弱不能做细工。）

The change which these years have brought about is too remarkable to be passed over without being noticed，too weighty in its lesson not to be laid to heart.（近年来所发生的变化是极为显著而不容有所忽视，在得到的教训上极为沉痛而不容吾人不深为铭记。）

Elliott was too clever not to see that many of the persons who accepted his invitations did so only to get a free meal and that of these some were stupid and some worthless.（W. S. Maugham）（艾略特是聪明的人必然看得出来，大多数接受他的邀请的人，只是为着要来吃一顿不花钱的饭，他知道他们当中有些是愚笨的，另外有些却是不足轻重的。）

He is too much of a man of the world not to know better.（像他那样精通世故的人，当无做此事的道理。）

【习题 60】

1. It is flattering to believe that their thoughts are too profound to be expressed so clearly that all who run may read，and very naturally it does not occur to such writers that the fault is with their own minds which have not the faculty of precise reflection.（Maugham）

2. If we were not too proud to explain ourselves or to ask explanations of others，most of the misunderstandings of life would disappear.（A. G. Gardiner）

3. I had read too many novels and had learned too much at school not to know a good deal about love，but I thought it was a matter hat only concerned young people I could not conceive that a man with a beard，who had sons as old as I，could have any feelings of that sort.（Maugham）

（61）only too… + 不定词，too ready + 不定词

（a）I am only too glad to do so.

我非常高兴去做。

（b）She is too ready to speak.

她真是爱说话。

【解说】

凡在“not”，“only”，“all”，“but”等字后面的“too”，其句中的不定词是没有否定意义的。“only too”意为“very”或“exceedingly”。这是从字面上来看的说法，如果从构造上来看，不定词如系修饰“too”后面的字，而非修饰“too”时，也不含否定的意思。这种句中的不定词是修饰“too”后面的“ready”一类的字的，也可以说“too”是修饰“ready to speak”的，所以（b）例 She is too ready to speak. = She is too talkative. 这类句子在“too”后常用的字除“ready”以外，还有“apt”，“eager”，“easy”，“inclined”，“willing”等字。

【类例】

You know but too well to hold your tongue.（你深知少说的好。）

They are all too satisfied to take the opinions of others without the pain of thought for themselves.（他们都太满意于接受别人的意见，自己懒得去想。）

I shall be only too pleased to do my best in that line of work.（我很高兴尽力于那方面的工作。）

I am only too delighted to accept it.（我很高兴接受那个事情。）

He is too ready to promise.（他轻诺。）

He is too ready to suspect.（他易疑。）

She is too ready to talk.（她多言。）

We are too apt to overlook our own faults.（我们很容易忽视自己的过错。）

People are too apt to do so.（人们常要这样做。）

They are too apt to keep their inferiors at a distance.（他们常要对部下抱敬远态度。）

Beginners are too apt to make mistakes.（初学者容易弄错。）

The political freedom we have today will never be too easy to preserve.（我们今日所有的政治上的自由，是决不容易维持长久的。）

【习题 61】

1. I soon perceived that she possessed in combination the qualities which in all other persons whom I had known I had been only too happy to find singly.（J. S. Mill）

2. Philosophers have been too ready to suppose that question of fact can be settled by verbal considerations.

（62）不定词的感叹用法

To think that he has become a minister！

想不到他居然当了部长。

【解说】

不定词单独用时往往有感叹的意思，最普通的形式为“To think that…！”和“To go…！”在这种不定词的前面，可看做是省略了 I am astonished to think that…或 What a foolish thing it is to go…或 It surprises me…等字样。上举的例句前面，即可加上 How astonishing it is 的字样来解释。如译为“真是出乎意外”或“真想不到”时，便可传出原意。这种省略句中所用的不定词（Infinitives in Ellipitical Constructions），都是表示感叹的，其主语为说话的人。例如诗人 Robert Browning 的名句：O to be in England now that April’s there！（ = Oh how happy I should be，were I in England now that April is there.）（今正值英伦四月，我要在那里就好呀！）有时可将不定词的“to”略去，如 She talk to him！（她跟他说话！〔那是不可能的。〕）

【类例】

To think that in just a few days we’ll be parting！（想不到只有几天我们就要分别了。）

I to marry before my brother，and leave him with none to take care of him！（Blackmore）（要我比哥哥先结婚，而让他失去照顾，那怎使得！）

A gentleman to come to that.（一个上等人竟下流到这样的程度。）

To treat in such a manner the friend of his father！（竟这样对待他父亲的朋友。）

To think that he should fail me in this crisis！（在这危机中想不到他竟一点也不帮我。）

To think that neither of his children should come to help！（试想他的孩子竟然一个也不来帮忙。）

O to have lived（ = O how I wish I had lived）in the brave days of old！（啊！但愿我曾生活在从前那样美好的日子里。）

【习题 62】

1. To come to sneaking things like that！It’s upset me frightfully.（Galsworthy）

2. Foolish fellow！To suppose that he could be pardoned.

3. To think that you，of all persons，should say so！

（63）not to speak of，not to say

（a）He knows Latin，not to speak of English.

他懂得拉丁文，英文自不待言。

（b）He knows Latin，not to say English.

姑且不说英文，拉丁文他也懂得。

【解说】

这是不定词的独立用法，两个说法形似而义不同，不可混淆。“not to speak of” = without even speaking of；to say nothing of；not to mention；as well as；in addition. 意即“自不待言”，“更不必说”，“犹其余事”，“何况”等。至于“not to say” = one might almost say；if not. 意为“姑且不说”，“即不说”，“姑置不论”，“甚至”，“虽未到那种程度”，“若非”等。

【类例】

He cannot afford the ordinary comforts of life，not to speak of luxuries.（他连日常生活的舒服都负担不起，哪里还谈得上奢侈。）

Japan is noted for Mt. Fuji，not to speak of its cherry blossoms.（日本樱花出名自不待言，富士山也有名于世。）

The scholar is well versed in Greek and Latin，not to speak of English which is his mother tongue.（那学者精通希腊、拉丁语，他的母语英文更无论了。）

The painter is a little singular，not to say grotesque.（那画家虽不能说是古怪，也可算奇特的了。）

He is very good-natured，not to say foolish.（他老实得几乎有点愚笨。）

He is extremely frugal，not to say stingy.（不说他吝啬也罢，至少他是极其节俭的。）

He is dishonest，to say nothing of his other faults.（他不正直，其余的坏处更不必说了。）

She is a good housekeeper，not to speak of being a good cook.（她不但是一个做菜的能手，而且也很会治家。）

He raised quite large and salable crops of hay and oats，to say nothing of his own vegetables and fruit.（T. Dreiser）（他自己用的蔬菜水果固不待言，他还培植了许多可销售的大量干草和燕麦。）

His speech was very eloquent last night，to say nothing of its having been significant.（昨晚他的演说意味深长自不待言，而且极为动听。）

He is a graduate student，but he cannot speak English，not to mention（ = to say nothing of）French.（他是研究所的学生，但法文固不必讲了，连英文都不会说。）

We’re too busy to take a long vacation this year，not to mention the fact that we can’t afford it.（出外度一个长的假期费用太大自不待言，而时间上也无此余裕。）

【习题 63】

1. If there be plenty of traffic，the railway is able to make transportation very economical，not to speak of its regularity，ease，and rapidity.

2. As a matter of fact，all great discoverers worthy of the name have at one time or another been regarded as dreamers，not to say mad.

Ⅵ. 动名词的造句

（64）There is no + 动名词

There is no knowing what may happen.

未来的事无法知道。

【解说】

这句惯用语法，意为“不可能”，或“未可逆料”。There is no doing. = It is impossible to do. = We cannot do. 在动名词后，常接以疑问词开头的子句。Charlotte Bront 说的 There was no possibility of taking a walk that day.（那天是不可能出去散步的。）也属于这一类的句法。另外有一种句式：“There is no use（或 good） + 动名词”，就和“There is no + 动名词”大不相同，如 Oscar Wilde 说的 There’s no use staying on.（用不着再呆下去。）这可能是“It is no use + 动名词”的变形，如 There is no good telling any more about it. 改为 It is no good telling any more about it. 似乎更好，因为谚语原是 It is no use crying over spilt milk.（覆水难收。）又有人说正规的表现法在动名词前应该有一个介词，如 Charles Dickens 说的 There is no use in talking.（用不着说。）至于 There is no use our coming here. 一句，也可以在“our coming”前加上一个介词的“in”字。

【类例】

There is no denying this.（这个无可否认。）

There is no accounting for tastes.（嗜好各有不同，是无法说明的。）

There is no telling what will happen.（Curme）（未来的事未可逆料。）

There is no getting along with him.（id.）（跟他是无法相处的。）

There is no saying how long the war is going to last.（战争还要继续多久是未知数。）

There’s no telling when he will arrive.（不晓得他何时到达。）

There is no knowing when we shall meet again.（后会无期。）

There is no going out in this snow-storm.（在这样的大风雪中，是不可能外出的。）Cf. It is impossible（for us）to go out in this snow-storm.

【习题 64】

1. There was no saying how he might behave upon these occasions.

2. There is no knowing when one’s house may come tumbling down about one’s ears.

3. He had always been excitable，but now he was beside himself；there was no reasoning with him.

（65）for + the + 动名词

You can have it for the asking.

那个你只消索取即可得到。

【解说】

这个“for + the + 动名词”的形式，意为“for the mere act of doing”，或是“if one only + 现在动词”，可译作“只消”，“只要”。句中的“for”有时可换用“with”，如 Things which perish with the using. 只要索取即可得到，当然是免费的，所以“for the asking” = for nothing（免费；不取分文）。

【类例】

It is yours for the asking.（你要就送你。）

It may be had for the asking.（免费奉送。）

You may have it for the asking.（你要就拿去。）

The choicest gold is to be had for the digging.（最上等的黄金只要挖掘就可以得到。）

A lass that may be had for the asking.（Scott）（一个女孩只要你要就是你的。）

Remarkable facts were to be had for the picking up.（T. H. Huxley）（很显著的事实俯拾皆是。）

【习题 65】

1. If an individual was not satisfied with his calling or his salary，he could obtain a farm for the asking and begin a new industrial life.（F. W. Blackmar）

2. Who would be satisfied with the success which may be had for the wishing？

（66）above + 动名词

He is not above asking questions.

他不耻下问。

【解说】

一个人为自尊心或道义感而不屑于去做某种事情，英文就说“be above doing”，可译为“不屑为”，“决不肯做”，“耻于去做”。这个“above”意为“超过……的范围”，有时后面接名词也是一样，如 He is above reproach.（他是无可责难的。）

【类例】

He is above telling a lie.（他不是一个肯说谎话的人。）

Poor as he was，he was above selling his country at any price.（他虽穷苦，无论给他多少钱，他也不肯出卖祖国。）

【习题 66】

1. Any one who would profit by experience will never be above asking help.

2. National spirit should be so high as to make a strong power to be above bullying a weak one.

（67）worth + 动名词

Whatever is worth doing at all is worth doing well.

任何值得做的事，就值得做好。

【解说】

在“worth”这个形容词后，惯用法要接一个宾语，而这个宾语又通常是动名词构成的。如 This book is worth reading.（此书值得一读。）句中的“reading”是 Active 的形式而含义却是 Passive。本来动名词是没有被动语态的，常以主动语态来表示被动的意思，如说 The garden wants weeding.（花园需要清除杂草。）实为“being weeded”之意，即被人清除杂草。本例说的“worth reading”，亦复含有“worth being read”之意，但习惯上不这样说，而把这个被动的形式，让给另外一个同义的形容词“worthy”去专用。故“此书值得一读”可译成下列两种形式：

This book is worth reading.

This book is worthy of being read.

这个“worth + 动名词”又可变为“worth-while + 动名词”或“worth one’s while + 动名词”，不过意义上微有不同罢了。说“worth doing”意为“值得去做”，说“worth（one’s）while doing”意为“值得花时间去做”，例如 It is not worth-while your doing.（这不值得你费神去做。）The museum is worth seeing.（这博物馆值得看。）又 worth-while 在叙述用法时应分为二字，如 All this fussing is hardly worth while.（这一切的大惊小怪是值不得的。）普通常用的形式是“worth doing”或“worthwhile to do”，虽则说“worthwhile doing”也不为错。

It is worthwhile to read this book.

It is worthwhile reading this book.

以上二句从文句的构造上看，“to read this book”和“reading this book”，同样是句中真正的主语，“it”不过是形式上的主语而已。但是如果我们说 It is worth discussing the question further. 就是错误的，因为句中的“it”是形式上的主语，真正的主语应为“discussing the question further”而“worth”的宾语落空了。这变成 Discussing the question further is worth. 所以不通。应改为 The question is worth discussing further. 或 It is worth while to discuss the question further 后一种改正法：“to discuss the question further”与“it”为同格，而“worth”则有“while”一字作为它的宾语。

又我们只能说 Is today’s film worth seeing？不能说 Is today’s film worth to see？因为“worth”后必须接动名词或名词，如 It is not worth a penny.（一文不值。）只有在“worthy”后才可以接不定词，如 He is worthy to lead.（他能做领袖。）

现代英语说的“worth doing”，在稍古的用法中则说“worth the doing”，例如 The conversation are worth the remembering or recording.（Thackeray）Everything that made a hard life worth the living.（Kipling）Any success you may achieve is not worth the having unless you fight for it. 最后一例中的“worth the having”实为“worth the act of having”加强的说法。

【类例】

Venice has many places worth visiting.（威尼斯有许多值得去游玩的地方。）

It is worth your while to go and see them.（你值得花些时间去游览。）

A book which is worth reading at all is likely to be read more than once.（一本果真值得我们去读的书，就值得多读几遍。）

This is worth saying. = To say this is worth while. = It is worth while to say this.（这话值得说。）

He ought to spend his time on some worthwhlie reading.（他应该花时间去读些值得读的书籍。）

This book is worthwhile reading.（这书值得花时间去读。）

It isn’t worthwhile going there now.（现在要去那里却是浪费时间。）

【习题 67】

1. Nothing worth having can be had without labour.

2. It is far better to do well a bit of work which is well worth doing than to have a large fortune.

（68）far from + 动名词

The noise，far from abating，continued to increase.

那声音不但丝毫未停止，反而增大了。

【解说】

英文说的“far from”，意为“not at all”，加重时说“so far from”。这成语中的“far”，原是表示距离的，转而成为比喻的用法，具有“远未”，“绝非”之意。有时在“from”后接上一个形容词，也可视为省去了动名词“being”的说法，例如 He is far from happy. 即“from being happy”之略。此外“from”后接名词或代名词，也是常有的事，如 It is far from the truth.（远非真实。）a house far from the town.（远离城市的屋子。）还有成语的“far from it”（决无其事；一点也不），也就是英文“not in the least”的意思。例如：

“Mr. Dickson，you say，is not，strictly speaking，handsome！”“Handsome！Oh no；far from it.—certainly plain”.（Jane Austen）（“你说狄克逊先生，严格地讲并不漂亮！”“漂亮！啊，不，一点也不——他确是长得很平凡的呀。”）最后说的是“其貌不扬”的婉说法。

【类例】

Far from reading the letter，he did not open it.（哪里谈得上看信，他拆都没有拆开。）

It was far from being good.（一点也不好。）

I am far from blaming him. = I do not blame him at all.（我一点也不怪他。）

His explanation is far from（being）satisfactory.（他的说明决不能令人满意。）

He was a good worker at school and far from stupid.（他在学校时很用功，决不愚笨。）

The room was far from comfortable.（这房间一点也不舒服。）

It’s far from well.（ = not at all well；a long way from being well.）（这个一点也不好。）

He is far from well.（他一点也不健康。）

His style is far from perfect.（一点都不完善。）

I am far from content.（决非满意。）

【习题 68】

1. So far from repenting of his error，he glories in it.

2. Indeed，so far from poverty being a misfortune，it may，by vigorous self-help，be converted even into a blessing.

（69）busy + 动名词

He is busy preparing for the examination.

他忙于准备考试。

【解说】

这个“busy + 动名词”的形式，应视为“busy in doing”的省略，在《牛津大辞典》上也说“busy in doing”的 modern use 便是“busy doing”，所以 He is busy writing letters. 可以说是 He is busy in writing letters. 的现代英语的形式。在形容词“busy”之后只能接动名词，不可以接不定词，即不可以说 He is busy to prepare for the examination. 但可以说 He is too busy to prepare for the examination.

【类例】

He is busy writing a report.（他忙于写报告。）

The German was busy in washing his hands.（Bulwer）（那德国人忙着洗手。）

Nanny has been busy ironing this evening.（G. Eliot）（南妮今晚一直在忙着烫衣。）

Farmers are busy working in the fields.（农人在田里忙于工作。）

I found him busy packing his trunk.（我看见他正忙于收拾行李。）

Ruth was busy at her desk correcting test papers.（Caldwell）（鲁仕正在桌上忙着批改试卷。）

【习题 69】

1. He was then so tremendously busy handling piles of desk work.

2. Mr. A is busy（in）canvassing for the Conservative candidate.

（70）on + 动名词，in + 动名词

（a）On reaching Hongkong，I went to see him.

一到香港我就去看他了。

（b）In walking downtown，I met him.

在闹市走着时我遇到了他。

【解说】

在这用法中的介词“on”有“as soon as”或“when”的意思，而“in”则有“when”或“while”的意思。这种句子如果把动名词前的介词略去，使之由动名词构造（Gerundive Construction）变成分词构造（Participial Construction），即说成 Reaching Hongkong，I went to see him. 及 Walking downtown，I met him. 意思也还是一样，并无任何不同。如果一定要加以区别的话，动名词构造对于时间的观念表现较强而已。现在的倾向，动名词构造比较要占优势些。

【类例】

On seeing me（ = When he saw me）he escaped.（他一见到我就逃走了。）

On entering（ = When we entered）his room，we at once perceived that he was a man of taste.（一走进他的房间，我们立刻就看出他是一个趣味丰富的人。）

On arriving（ = On his arrival）in Singapore，he received a visit from a college professor.（一到新加坡他就接受了一位大学教授的访问。）

In talking（ = When we talk）about imagination we invariably talk of the poet.（谈到想像时我们一定就会谈及诗人的。）

There’s no point in doing that.（那样做毫无意义。）

Am I right in thinking that a nuclear war will never happen？（核子战争永不会发生，我这样想对吗？）

He found an outlet for his anger in kicking the dog.（他拿狗来出气。）

They decided on building a theatre.（他们决定建造一座戏院。）

He is intent on pleasing people.（他只想讨好别人。）

He is engaged in collecting stamps.（他从事集邮。）

In making a dictionary he displays a special skill.（编字典他有特殊技能。）

Come，there’s no use in crying like that.（Carroll）（喂，那样的大哭大叫也没有用呀。）

I have spent my life in finding that out.（Galsworthy）（我为要找出那个来，花了一生的工夫。）

He was so long in answering a salutation.（Galsworthy）（他没有马上回礼。）

He was drowned in crossing the water.（他渡河时淹死了。）

In crossing（ = While I was crossing）the Lozere I had come among new natural features.（Stevenson）（渡过泸哲尔河时，我来到新的自然美景之中了。）

【习题 70】

1. We should not be too hasty in condemning all compromise as bad morals.

2. On reaching home we found she had given us up after searching a little while.（Hardy）

Ⅶ. 否定词的造句

（71）no more…than

You can no more swim than I can fly.

你不能游泳跟我不能飞行一样。

【解说】

这种表现法是为加强“than”前的否定而用的。在“than”以后的文句，表面上看去虽有肯定的形式，然其含义仍属否定。此点在翻译时应特别注意，以免译错。句中的“no more”可换用“not any more”，普通是没有什么不同的，意为“not…just as…not”。又“no more than”不可和“not more than”混同，因后者意为“至多”（at most）。

这个作“同样”解的“no more…than”的基本用法是表示普通的比较，如 He has no more money than you have.（他的钱和你一样多。）不过另外还有三种特殊用法，是颇难翻译的。

（1）为著名的 whale pattern：

A whale is no more a fish than a horse is.（ = A whale is not a fish any more than a horse.）（鲸之非鱼犹马之非鱼也。）马之非鱼显而易见，鲸之非鱼亦同于马。用以将后半句与前半句一同打消，以后者的不可能，来打消前者的可能性。

（2）成语中的“no”不是修饰“more”，而是修饰后面的名词的，其“than”也不是连词，而是介词。

“Than whom”，said Dupin，“no more sagacious agent could，I suppose，be desired，or even imagined.”（E. A. Poe）（别指望有比此人更聪明的侦探，连想都不要想。）

句中的“no”就是修饰“agent”的，改写过一下，便成为 no agent more sagacious than whom 了。在“than”后只有单字无子句，故非连词而为介词。

（3）为“no more than” = only（不过，仅，只），如：

He has no more than $10 = He has only ten dollars.（他只有十块钱。）

He is no more than a puppet.（他只不过是一个傀儡。）

No more than three days = only three days.（只有三天。）

上举的用法（1），可译为“与…同样不是…”，“跟…一样不是…”（ = as little as），如 He is no more a god than we are.（他和我们一样都不是神。）比较：

（a）I am no more mad than（ = as little mad as）you are.

（我和你一样并没有发狂。）

（b）I am not more mad than（ = not so mad as）you are.

（我发狂没有发得你那样厉害。）

【类例】

There is no more dependence to be placed on his words than there is on the wind.（ = Just as we cannot depend on the wind，so we cannot depend on his words.）（其言之不可信赖，也像风之不足信赖一样。）

It is not easy to give away money any more than it is to make money.（用钱不容易，正如赚钱不容易一样。）

He could no more bear the noise of a child than he could fly.（他决受不了小孩的吵闹。）

There is no more dangerous experiment than that of trying to appear what one is not.（在人前装模作样，是比什么还要危险的尝试了。）

The jest about her（a wife）being able to say no more about his（a husband）occupation than “he is something in the City” is not entirely an absurdity.（P. Carr：The English Are Like That）（关于丈夫的职业，妻子只好说“他是金融界的一位大亨”，那样的笑话，也不能完全说是荒谬。）

A home without love is no more a home than a body without a soul is a man.（正像没有灵魂的身体不成其为人一样，没有爱情的家庭也不成其为家庭。）

A man has no more right to say an uncivil thing than to act one.（一个人无权说无理的事，就像无权做无理的事一样。）

The gospel of making a fortune is no more true than what I tell you.（你们所说的致富之道跟我讲的一样是靠不住的。）

He cannot effect the impossible any more than we can.（他不能做不可能的事也跟我一样。）“effect”意为“实现”。

He was no more than skin and bone，was partly paralysed，and wore spectacles of such unusual power，that his eyes appeared through the glasses greatly magnified and distorted in shape.（R. L. Stevenson）（他只剩下皮包骨了，半身不遂，因为戴着非常深度的眼镜，所以在那镜子后面的眼睛，看去扩大得多，而且变了样子。）

【习题 71】

1. But Judith did not want or intend to forget John. She could no more have considered marrying another man than she could have accepted some strange new God thrust suddenly upon her.（K. Winsor）

2. Doris gave no sign of good looks，her nose was too long and her figure was lumpy；so that Mrs Garstin could hope no more for her than that she should marry a young man who was well off and in a suitable profession.（W. S. Maugham）

3. John was eight years older than she and for many years he paid her scanty attention，though he took it for granted that eventually they would marry；the betrothal papers had been signed while he was yet a child and Judith no more than a baby.（K. Winsor）

（72）no less…than

A whale is no less a mammal than a horse is.

鲸是哺乳动物，和马是哺乳动物一样。

【解说】

这是和前项正相反的一个表现法。在“no more…than”的场合，连词“than”前后都是否定，而在“no less…than”的场合，则连词“than”前后都是肯定。用减少的否定词以加强肯定的意思。可译作“不逊于”，“不弱于”。在普通的比较级，“no less than” = as many（much）as；just，例如 He owns no less than（ = as many as）ten houses.（他拥有的房子达十幢之多。）There were no less than fifty killed and wounded.（死伤达五十人。）但特别用法的“no less…than” = quite as…as，例如 She is no less beautiful than her sister.（她美不逊于她的姊姊。）意即其美正复相等。

比较：

（a）The number of the students is not less than（ = at least）1，000.（学生人数至少有一千人。）

（b）The number of the students is no less than（ = as many as）1，000.（学生人数多达一千人。）

（a）He has not less（ = perhaps more）than $100 in his pocket.（他口袋里至少有一百元，也许不止此数。）

（b）He has no less than $100 in his pocket.（他口袋里竟有一百元，可算相当多了。）连用的“no less than” = as many as，as much as，exactly，据 ALD 上说是“expressing surprise at the amount，例如 He won no less than $5，000 in the lottery. 或 He won $5，000，no less，in lottery.（他中了五千元之多。）

比较：

（a）He gave me no less than（ = as much as）$100.

（b）He gave me no more than（ = only）$100. 分开的“no less…than” = quite as…as；the very，具有两个意思：（1）不逊于，如 She is no less（quite as）beautiful than（as）her sister.（貌美不逊其姊。）（2）不外是，如 He is no less a person than the king.（他正是国王其人。）就等于说 He is the very king.

【类例】

He was no less a person than the President.（ = He was a person no other than the President.）（他正是总统其人。）

The writer is no less a personage than a prince.（那作家的名望正如一个王子。）“no less…than” = of as high a station or rank as，exactly，the very. 意为“身家相若”，“权位相等”，“恰好”，“正是”。

Our soldiers fought with no less daring than skill.（ = Their daring equalled their skill.）（我们的军人战斗既勇敢而又熟练。）

Sunlight is no less necessary than fresh air to a healthy condition of body.（日光和新鲜空气同样对身体的健康情形是有必要的。）

He is no less guilty than you.（他和你同样有罪。）

As regards our foreign policy，it is no less our interest than our duty to maintain the most friendly relations with other countries.（关于我国的对外政策，维持和别国的友好关系，是我们的义务，同样地也是我们的利益。）

We hope to invite no less a person than an assistant professor.（我们希望聘请一位助教授阶级的人。）

In Japan he is famous already，a personality no less in the public eye than the Crown Prince or the slugging first baseman of the Tokyo Giants.（在日本他早出了名，在一般人的眼中，他简直像皇太子或是东京巨人队棒球的第一垒击球手一样的名人。）

【习题 72】

1. Want of care will not less ruin the good man than the man of lax morals.

2. The technique of writing is no less difficult than that of the other arts and yet，because he can read and write a letter，there is a notion that anyone can write well enough to write a book.（Maugham）

（73）not so much…as，not so much as

（a）His success is not so much by talent as by energy.

他的成功与其说是由于才能毋宁说是由于精力。

（b）He did not so much as turn his face.

他连头也没有回一下。

【解说】

英文说的“not so much…as” = rather than，其中的“as”有时可以换用“but rather”，可译为“与其说是…毋宁说是”。而“not so much as” = without（或 not）even，可译为“甚至…都没有”，其中的“not”有时可以换用“without”。

【类例】

The oceans do not so much divide the world as unite it.（与其说陆以洋分，毋宁说陆以洋合。）

He is not so much a scholar as a writer.（与其说他是学者，不如说他是作家。）

The farmer looks wealthy，but he has not so much wealth as people at large think.（那农夫看上去很有钱的样子，但没有一般世人所想象的那样有钱。）

Success in life does not depend so much on one’s school record as on one’s honesty and diligence.（事业的成功并不靠在学校时的成绩，而要靠为人的诚实和勤勉。）

She is a society woman，but strange to say，she cannot so much as（ = even）write her own name.（她是一个社交妇女，但说也奇怪，她甚至连自己的名字都不会写。）

He went away without so much as saying good-bye.（他甚至不辞而去。）

He did not so much as punish one of the murderers，nor did he show the least tenderness to the survivors.（Macaulay）（对于那些杀人犯他甚至一点也没有处罚他们，而对于那些生存者他也没有表示一点亲切。）

Law，in its true notion，is not so much the limitation as the direction of a free and intelligent man to his proper interest.（法律真正的意义，是要把一个自由而有理性的人，导向正当的利益上去，而不是对此加以限制的。）

The window was so narrow that one could not so much as get one’s head through.（那窗子小得连头都伸不出去。）

There is nothing in the world that I like so much as music.（世界上再没有别的东西比音乐更要使我爱好的了。）

The great use of a school education is not so much to teach you things as to teach you the art of learning.（学校教育最大的效用，不在教你一些知识，而在教你学习的方法。）

【习题 73】

1. It is not men’s faults that ruin them so much as the manner in which they conduct themselves after the faults have been committed.

2. The policeman walked through the crowd without so much as turning his face to either side.

3. It is not so much the hours that tell as the way we use them.（Sir J. Lubbock）

（74）Nothing is more…than，Nothing is so…as

（a）Nothing is more precious than time.

没有什么比光阴更可贵的东西了。

（b）Nothing is so precious as time.

像光阴那样可贵的东西再没有了。

【解说】

英文形容词的比较，虽有寻常级（positive degree），比较级（comparative degree），最高级（superlative degree）三种不同的形式，但无论是平等的比较或高一级的比较，都可以用来表出最高级比较的意思，例如 He is as sympathetic a man as ever breathed. = He is more sympathetic than any other man that ever breathed. = He is the most sympathetic man that ever breathed. 第一句为 positive，第二句为 comparative，第三句为 superlative，而全都表出同样的意思来，都可以用“最”字来翻译。“Nothing is more…than”和“Nothing is so…as”两种表现法，都具有最高级比较的意思。句中“nothing”一字，可换用其他的否定字如“no”，“nobody”，“nowhere”，“little”，“few”，“handly”，“scarcely”等等，“as…as”的否定形通常是“not so…as”.

【类例】

No one is so foolish as to believe that anything happens by chance.（谁也不会愚笨到相信世间有什么偶然发生的事。）

To my mind nothing is more horrible than a hydrogen bomb in the world.（我觉得世间没有什么比氢弹更可怕的了）。

No complaint is more common than that of a scarcity of money.（最普通的抱怨就是说钱不够用。）

Nothing sounds more ridiculous（than this）.（没有比这说得更荒谬的了。）

Nothing can be more attractive to the eye.（没有比这更好看的东西了。）

Nothing is more valuable than health.（没有比健康更可宝贵的东西。）

No other animal is so large as a whale.（没有比鲸更大的动物。）

【习题 74】

1. Scarcely any part of the world affords so great a variety in so small an area as our own island.

2. Nothing is so uncivil as the habit of smoking in the streetcar.

3. Nothing is more important for the student who loves literature than to become intimately acquainted with great critics.

（75）cannot…too

We cannot thank him too much.

我们无论怎样感谢他也不为过。

【解说】

英文说的“cannot…too”，意为“it is impossible to overdo…”，或“no matter how much more you do，you will never overdo it”，或“the more，the better”（无论怎样也不为过）。其中的“can”表可能性，“too”有“over-”之意，可换用“enough”或“sufficient”等字样。不用“not”而用其他的否定字，如“hardly”，“scarcely”等也是可以的。下列六句意思完全一样：

You cannot be too careful.

You cannot be over careful.

You cannot be careful enough.

You cannot be sufficiently careful.

You cannot take enough care.

You cannot take sufficient care.

下面的句子也相仿佛：

I cannot see enough of him.

We cannot recommend this book too strongly.

We cannot exaggerate his attainments.

This point cannot be over-emphasized.

【类例】

You cannot be too careful in crossing the street.（过街越当心越好。）

You cannot begin the practice too early.（练习开始得越早越好。）

Good manners cannot be too much valued.（礼貌是值得尽量尊重的。）

This introduces a fact of an importance that cannot be overstressed.（这介绍我们一个事实，其重要性无论怎样强调都不为过。）

That which is good cannot be done too soon.（好事做得越快越好。）

The importance of scientific study cannot be overvalued.（研究科学的重要，估价决不会太高。）

It is impossible to speak in terms of too high praise of his merits.（他的功绩无论怎样赞扬也不为过。）

I cannot be too grateful for his kindness.（对于他的帮忙，无论怎样感谢也不为过。）

【习题 75】

1. A man who has received a kindness cannot be too grateful for it.

2. The importance of reading aloud，and of rewriting again and again can hardly be overestimated.

3. A book may be compared to your neighbor；if it be good，it cannot last too long；if bad，you cannot get rid of it too early.

（76）否定 + without

You cannot speak without moving your lips.

你不动嘴唇便不能说话。

【解说】

通常的情形是两个否定构成肯定，但翻译时最好还是保留否定的语气，实比肯定更要强而有力。这种双重否定的用法，变化颇多，分别举例以见一斑。大抵皆可译为“每…必”，“无…不”。

【类例】

One cannot succeed without perseverance.（人无毅力不能成事。）

You cannot make omelettes without breaking eggs.（不事耕耘，焉得收获。不打破蛋就不能做煎蛋卷。）

He cannot speak English without making mistakes.（He cannot but make mistakes when he speaks English.）（他说英语每说必错。）

One cannot look at Emerson’s picture without feeling that he was not only wise but good.（看到艾默生画像的人，没有不感觉到他的贤明与善良的。）

They never meet without quarrelling.（ = They never fail to quarrel when they meet.）（他们每次见面必要吵架。）

It never rains without pouring.（ = It never rains but it pours.）（祸不单行。不雨则已，雨必滂沱。）

No one can read it without crying.（无人读此而不下泪。）

No pleasure without pain.（有乐必有苦。）

No gains without pains.（无不劳而获者。）

No roses without thorns.（凡物必有缺憾。）

No one should ever go to London without seeing some of his wonderful creations.（没有一个人到伦敦不去看看他那令人惊奇的几幅油画的。）

Not a day passed without their meeting.（他们无日不相见。）

In India，not a year passes without a number of people falling victims to the ferocity of the tiger.（印度每年必有多人死于虎患。）

【习题 76】

1. Just as we cannot understand Chinese literature without any knowledge of the works of Confucius，so all students of English should know something about the English Bible.

2. We cannot pick up even an ordinary book，a magazine or a newspaper without finding in it references to the Bible and quotations from its pages.

（77）否定 + but

There is no rule but has exceptions.

条条规则都有例外。

【解说】

在否定字或准否定字的后面，所有的“but”，都是具有“which not”，“who not”，“that not”等否定意义的关系代名词或连词，因而构成前后的双重否定，可译成“没有…不是”。上例又可说成 The exception proves the rule.

【类例】

There is no one but hopes to be rich.（没有人不想发财。）

There is no one but knows that.（无人不知。）

There is scarcely a man but has his weak side.（人皆有缺点。）

There is nothing in the world but teaches us some good lesson.（世界上的一切都能给我们好的教训。）

No leader worthy of the name ever existed but was an optimist.（值得做首领的人都是乐观主义者。）

It was impossible but he should see it.（他一定看到那个的。）

No man is so old but he may learn.（没有老到不能学习的人。）

I never think of summer but I think（ = without thinking）of my school days.（想到夏天就想到我的学生时代。）

It never rains but it pours.（祸不单行。破屋又遭连夜雨。）

She would have fallen but that I caught her（ = if I had not caught her）.（如果不是我抓住她，她早已掉下去了。）

Justice was never done but that（ = without the result that）someone complained.（即使是公平裁判也还是有人要抱怨的。）

Scarcely a week passes but she writes to her old parents.（差不多每星期她都要写信给她的父母。）

【习题 77】

1. There has not been a statesman of eminence but was a man of industry.

2. There was scarcely a family but had at least one relative among the wounded.

3. No two people can be half an hour together but one shall gain an evident superiority over the other.

4. Never a week passes the whole year round but that，in some part of the world，wheat is being reaped for the British market.

（78）否定 + until（till）

The value of health is not esteemed until it is lost.

人要到失去了健康，才知道健康的可贵。

【解说】

在否定字如“no”，“not”，“never”，“little”，“few”，“seldom”等的后面所接用的“until”或“till”，与其照字面译为“直到…为止，…不”，不如译为“要…才…”，把否定译成肯定，才合乎中文的语法。

【类例】

Nobody knows what he can do till be has tried.（任何人都要试一试，才知道他能做什么。）

He will not come till eight o’clock.（他要八点钟才来。）

He didn’t arrive until the meal was over.（他到饭后才来。）

Man in general does not appreciate what he has until he loses it.（一般人要等到失去他的所有才知珍惜。）

I am afraid I cannot finish the work till Friday.（我恐怕要到星期五才能做完。）

He didn’t go abroad till he graduated from college.（他到大学毕业后才出洋深造。）

It was not till yesterday that I got the news.（直到昨天我才听到那个消息。）

Do not start till I give the word.（等我下命令才出发。）

【习题 78】

1. Some take no thought of money until they come to an end of it，and many do the same with their time.

2. True friendship is like health，the value of it is seldom known until it is lost.

3. The central fact of biology，evolution，was not established until modern science had been in existence for over two hundred years.

（79）not so…but，not such a…but

（a）He is not so sick but he can come to school.

他并没有病到不能上学。

（b）He is not such a fool but he knows it.

他并不是连那个都不知道的傻子。

【解说】

这和（77）项的“否定 + but”相似，不过那个“but”多半是关系代名词，而本项中的“but”，就是含有“that…not”意味的连词。把句中这个“but”改写为“that…not”，和前面的“so”或“such”连起来，即成为“so…that”或“such…that”的形式，更可以看出是表程度的了。又“but”有时可说成“but that”或“but what”，意思还是一样，有“without the fact that”（除去那事实外）之意。这个“but”是不对等连词，作用和“that”相似。“否定 + so + but”的形式，和“however + may”相同，如 There is nothing so hard but it becomes easy by practice. = However hard anything may be，it becomes easy by practice. 意为“无论怎样…也不是不能”。

【类例】

There is not such a fool but that he can see it.（没有愚笨到连这个都不懂的人。）

No man is so foolish but he may give another good counsel sometimes.（无论怎样愚笨的人有时都能给别人好的忠告。）

His income is not so small but he can support his family.（他的收入无论怎样少也能维持他一家的生活。）

The current was not so strong but he could swim against it.（激流并未强到他不能逆泳的程度。）

The streets were not so crowded but our car could go through.（街上并不是拥挤得不能通车。）

It was not such a cold night but we could go out.（那天夜里并不是寒冷得不能外出。）

No man is so old but（that）he may learn.（没有人老到不能学习的。）

【习题 79】

1. There is nothing so strong but it is in danger from what is weak.

2. The material destruction of the war not so great but that it could by this time have been repaired，had a good peace been made without delay.

（80）“not A but B”，“B，（and）not A”

（a）He excels not in English，but in mathematics.

他擅长的不是英文，而是数学。

（b）He excels in mathematics，and not in English.

他长于数学，而非英文。

【解说】

这是将否定和肯定并举的句法，先说否定须接用“but”，先说肯定则接用“and”，不过有时也可以将“and”略去不说。

【类例】

He has in mind not a particular class of readers but men and women in general.（他心中所指望的，不是一个特殊阶级的读者，而是一般的男女。）

He has in mind men and women in general，not a particular class of readers.（他心中所指望的，是一般的男女，而不是一个特殊阶级的读者。）

He is not my son，but my nephew.（他不是我的儿子，而是我的侄儿。）

He is my nephew，（and）not my son.（他是我的侄儿，不是我的儿子。）

The most important thing in the Olympic Games is not to win but to take part.（奥林匹克运动会最要紧的不是优胜而是参加。）

It is not work，but overwork，that is hurtful；and it is not hard work that is injurious so much as unwilling work.（有害的不是工作而是过度工作；辛劳的工作并没有不愿意的工作那样有害于健康。）

【习题 80】

1. The end of law is not to abolish or restrain，but to preserve and enlarge freedom.

2. lt is the monotony of their minds，not of their surroundings，that is chiefly responsible for their weariness.

（81）否定 + because

Don’t give up because it is difficult.

不要因为困难就放弃呀。

【解说】

连词“because”在肯定句中是对主句（main clause）全体说的，如 I was fatigued because I had sat up all night.（我因通宵未眠而感疲惫。）至于在否定句中，则不是指主句全体，而是指句中的一个字，如例句中的“difficult”一字。但“because”与否定同用时，常会发生两种不同的含义，例如：

（a）I didn’t go because I was afraid.

= （1）I didn’t go，and the reason was fear.

（我怕所以我没有去。）

= （2）I went，but the reason was not fear.

（我不是因为怕才去的。）而是因为别的原因。

（b）I did not marry her because I loved her.

（1）我不是因为爱她才和她结婚的。

（2）我因为爱她才不和她结婚。

如果连词“because”是用作“though”解时，就比较好译，因为译成“因为”或是译成“虽则”，都不算错。

【类例】

You should not despise a man because he is poor.（不要因为别人穷就轻蔑他。）或译（虽则他穷你也不应该轻蔑他。）

We should not look down upon the man because he is out of employment.（我们不要因为那人失业就瞧不起他。）

Don’t be vain because you are good-looking.（不要因为你长得漂亮就虚荣起来。虽则你长得漂亮也不要虚荣。）

He cannot go to school because he is sick.（他因生病不能上学。）

I did not go out because it rained.（我因为下雨没有出门。）

I will not do that because it would be of no avail.（因为没有用我不要做它。）

The seed does not complain because there are stones and turf in its way.（种子并不因为有石头和草皮挡住它的路而抱不平。）

【习题 81】

1. He has no reason to think less of himself because he is not dressed in a rich and fashionable manner.

2. Because a lad does not happen to be strong，it does not necessarily follow that a sea-life would not suit him.

（82）not because…but because

A mountain is not famous because it is high，but because it has some spirit dwelling in it.

山不在高，有仙则名。

【解说】

英文的“not because…but because”可译为“不是因为…而是因为”。这个“because”可用为连词，后接用子句，也可用为副词，后接用片语，如上举例句中的“because”是连词，下例中的“because”便是副词：The ship was delayed not because of the war，but because of a snow-storm.（船的延误非因战争乃因风雪。）

【类例】

I recommend her not because she is beautiful，but because she has a talent for music.（我推荐她并不是因为她美，而是因为她有音乐天才。）

A mountain is not valuable because it is high，but because it has trees.（山并不因高而有价值，而是因为有树木才贵重的。）

Some women do not buy their new dresses because they like them，but because they do not like to be behind the fashion.（有些女人买新衣并不是因为她们喜欢，而是因为她们不愿落在时髦的后面。）

Religions succeed not because they are true，but because they provide what people want.（宗教的成功并不是因为它们是真理，而是因为它们供给人们所需要的东西。）

【习题 82】

1. He is good，not because of any virtue，but because he is too much of a coward to be bad.

2. The difference in your bonus is not because of your efficiency but because of your long absence.

（83）not that…but that

Not that I loved Caesar less，but that I loved Rome more.

我并非因爱凯撒浅，而是因爱罗马深。

【解说】

这个“not that…but that”中的“that” = because，全句可补“it is”来解释，意即 It is not because I loved Caesar less，but because I loved Rome more. 这个“it”实具有“the reason”（其理由为）或“what I mean”（我想说的是）的意思。又“but”后的“that”有时可以省去。这种没有主句（principal clause）的表现法，原是用“not”一字来代表主句的一种省略说法，可解释为 I do not mean that I loved Caesar less，but that I loved Rome more.

【类例】

Not that I dislike the work，but that I have no time to do it for the time being.（不是因为我不喜欢那工作，而是因为我眼下没时间去做。）

It is not that I am unwilling but that I have no time.（不是因我不愿，而是因没时间。）

No，thank you. I don’t want any more，not that I don’t like them，but I am just full and cannot eat anything more.（谢谢你，我不要了。我不能再吃了，并不是因为我不喜欢吃，而是因为我吃得太饱，什么也吃不下了。）

Not that I don’t want to help you，but that it’s beyond my power to do so.（并非我不帮忙，实力有未逮。）

Not that I like a dog but that I dislike a cat.（并不是因为我喜欢狗，只是因为我不喜欢猫。）

【习题 83】

1. Our boast is not that we have more ideas，but that our ideas are better sounder.

2. We want to get into good society not that we may have it，but that we may be seen in it，and our notion of its goodness depends primarily on its conspicuousness.

3. If I accidentally had my attention drawn to the fact that some other boy knew less than myself，I concluded，not that I knew much，but that he，for some reason or other，knew little.

（84）否定 + every（all，both，always，quite）

（a）I do not know every one of them.

我不全认识他们。

（b）All that glitters is not gold.

发光的东西未必都是黄金。

（c）The rich are not always happy.

富人未必常是幸福的。

【解说】

不定代名词（the indefinite pronoun）的“every”，“all”，“both”，以及副词的“always”，“quite”，与否定结合时，不是全部否定（total negation），而是部分否定（partial negation），意即不是“全不是”，而是“不全是”。注意“not all”与“not at all”（全部否定）的不同。例如 Both（of them）are not my brothers. = One is not my brother，but the other is. 意即“他们两个当中，只有一个是我的兄弟”。如果要说两个都不是的话，英文应说 Neither（of them）is my brother.

试比较下面三句的含义：

I know both of them.（他们两人我全认识。）

I do not know both of them.（他们两人我只认识其中一个。）

I do not know either of them.（他们两人我全不认识。）

换上“all”一字，也是同样的情形：

I know all of them.（他们我全认识。）

I do not know all of them.（他们我不全认识。）

I do not know any of them.（他们我全不认识。）

由以上的例子看来，我们知道“both”是部分否定，而“either”，“neither”才是全部否定；“all”，“every”是部分否定，而“no”，“any”，“none”等字才是全部否定。

All that glitters is not gold.（发光的东西未必都是黄金。）

None（Nothing）that glitters is gold.（发光的东西都不是黄金。）

Every man cannot be a poet.（不是人人可作诗人。）

No man can be a poet.（无人可作诗人。）

【类例】

You can’t fool all the people all the time.（你未必能够老是愚弄所有的人。）

He is not always so sad.（他并不是经常这样悲伤的。）

Somehow the old house is not quite what it should be.（Charles Lamb）（不晓得怎样的，那老屋并不十分合乎理想。）

He did not read every book in his library.（他并没有把他图书室所有的书全部读完。）

Every man is not polite，and all are not born gentleman.（不见得人人都懂礼貌，而所有的人未见得都是生来的君子。）

We did not see all the pictures，for it needs many visits to do so properly.（我们并没有看完所有的画，要规规矩矩全部看完必须去参观好多次才可以。）

Every man cannot be rich，but every man can be a gentleman.（不见得人人都能致富，但人人都能成为君子。）

Opportunities come to all，but all are not ready for them when they come.（机会是均等的，人人都有，但不见得人人都能准备好去接受它，当机会到来的时候。）

The biographies of scientists are not always good literature，but they have immense educational value.（科学家的传记并不见得是好的文学作品，但它们都有很大的教育价值。）

【习题 84】

1. All great truths are obvious truths. But not all obvious truths are great truths.（A. Huxley）

2. As play was forbidden on Sunday，this seemed to me a not quite intolerable way of passing the time away.（Lynd）

Ⅷ. what，who 的造句

（85）what he is，what he has

We honour him for what he is，not for what he has.

我们尊敬的是他的人品而不是他的财富。

【解说】

这个“what”是关系代名词，“what” = that which，意为“所”，“者”，“…的事物”。“what he is” = his character，是说“他现在的状态”，即“他现在的人品（personal character）”，或“他所具有的学识品德”。如用过去动词说“what he was”则为“他当时的状态”，也就是“他当时的人品”。“he is”可换为“you are”或“I am”等，用法也是一样。至于“what he has” = his property，则意为“他所有的”，也就是“他的财产”。

【类例】

It is not a question how much a man knows，but what use he can make of what he knows；not a question of what he has acquired，and how he has been trained，but of what he is，and what he can do.（问题不在一个人知道多少，而在他能否运用他的知识；问题不在他所学为何，受过怎样的教育，而在他的人品以及他的能力。）

He has made what I am.（我之有今日是他所赐予的。）

Coal and iron have made England what she is.（英国之有今日是由于煤与铁的赐予。）

A man’s dignity depends not on what he has but on what he is.（一个人的高贵，不在于他的财富，而在于他的人品。）

What a man is contributes much more to his happiness than what he has.（一个人的品德比他的财富更能够使他幸福。）

【习题 85】

1. He is rich or poor according to what he is，not according to what he has. He is rich who values a good name above gold.

2. Half the unhappiness in the world is caused by losing the blessing which would result from the enjoyment of what we have in envying others and longing for what they have.

（86）what + 名词，what little + 名词

（a）He gave me what money he had about him.

他把他身上所有的钱都给我了。

（b）I gave him what little money I had.

我竭尽绵薄将我仅有的钱都给他了。

【解说】

这个“what + 名词”的形式有“all the…that”或“that…which”的意思，可译作“所有的都”或“所”，是将“what”用作关系代名词的。“what money” = all the money that. 在这种“what”后常带有“little”，“few”一类的形容词，含有“虽少但全都”或“所仅有的”之意。“little”用于数不清的名词上，“few”用于数得清的名词上。

【类例】

I will use what influence I have with the minister in your behalf.（我当竭尽绵力为君向部长推荐。）

I will lend you what books I can spare.（我所不用的书虽为数不多可悉数借给你。）

He does not read many books，but what books he reads，he reads very carefully.（他读书不多，然所读少数的书皆读得很仔细。）

I have come to render what service is in my power.（我特来为你效一点能力所及的微劳。）

He saves what little he earns.（他储蓄仅有的一点收入。）

She saved what little money she could out of her slim salary to help her brother go to school.（她从她微薄的薪水中留出钱来送她弟弟上学。）

She waited with what patience she could command.（她竭力忍耐在等待。）

The leaves were trembling with what little breeze there was.（微风吹动木叶。）

【习题 86】

1. What crops survived the long drought perished in the subsequent inundation.（Brinkley）

2. I shall tell you how in such a situation I acquired what little ability I may be supposed to have in that way.（Franklin）

3. One of the saddest sights is that of a young man who has sacrificed what little health and constitution he had for a college course.

（87）what with…and what with，what by…and what by

（a）What with illness and what with losses，he is almost ruined.

半因生病，半因亏损，他几乎整个毁了。

（b）What by bribes and what by extortions，he made money.

或由受贿，或由勒索，他发了财。

【解说】

这是“what”的副词用法，可译作“多少”，“半”，“或”（somewhat；partly）。当“what”与“with”结合时，表“原因”，与“by”结合时表“手段”或“方法”。普通是在一句中重复地用，但也有把第二次要用的略去不说。

【类例】

What with teaching and what with writing，my time is wholly taken up.（或因授课，或因写作，以致全无暇晷。）

What with his studies and what with his sports，the school-boy has no time left for idle thoughts.（半以功课，半以运动，使学生无暇胡思乱想。）

What by policy and what by force，the English made themselves masters of all India in 1876.（英人在 1876 年用策略或用兵力征服了整个印度。）

What with drink and（what with）fright he did not know much about the facts.（半由酒醉，半由恐怖，他对于那真相知道得很少。）

What with the wind and（what with）the rain，our walk was spoiled.（风风雨雨使得我们的散步全遭破坏。）

What with overwork and under-nourishment he fell ill.（由于过劳，加上营养不足，他终于病倒了。）

Young people cannot be expected to read，what with automobiles，sports and television.（有了汽车、运动和电视，我们还能指望青年人读什么书。）

【习题 87】

1. In less than a minute the storm was upon us—in less than two the sky was entirely overcast and what with this and the driving spray，it became suddenly so dark that we could not see each other in the fishing boat.

2. What by threats and what by entreaties，he finally accomplished his purpose.

3. What with tending the sick and wounded and making sandbags，sometimes turning out as many as four dozens of them in a day，her time was fully occupied.

（88）what is + 比较级

It’s a good book，and what is more，it’s quite a cheap one.

这是一本好书，而且，价钱又很便宜。

【解说】

用在句首的“what”多半有名词的作用，但用在插入句中，则变成带有副词的作用了。如插入句中用为独立语句的“what is more” = moreover；besides，作“而且”或“更有进者”解。比较级偶也可换用最上级。

【类例】

We were overtaken by the night on the way，and what was（still）worse，it began to rain.（我们还在路上天就黑了，还有更糟糕的，天又下起雨来了。）

He is a good scholar，and what is better，a good teacher.（他是一个优秀的学者，而且，还是一个优秀的教师。）

She is good-looking，rich，and，what is the best of all，clever.（她美而富，而最了不得的是，她又聪明。）

The rules must be few，and，what is more important，comprehensive.（规则宜简，更重要的在能包括。）

And，what makes the matter worse，he has taken to drinking.（而更糟的是他又喝起酒来了。）

What’s more，he was not a very pleasant person.（加之，他又不是一个愉快的人。）

【习题 88】

1. Hard work，moreover，tends not only to give us rest for the body，but what is even more important，peace to the mind.

2. Thus the young man of promise broke not only all the promises he had made to himself and others，but，what was worse than all，the heart of his aged father also.

（89）A is to B what X is to Y

The man who cannot be trusted is to society what a bit of rotten timber is to a house.

不能信赖的人对于社会，正如朽木对于家屋一样。

【解说】

在这种造句中的“what”是一个关系代名词，从文法上来看，这个 what-Clause 是“A is”的补语，即 A is what（ = that which）X is to Y to B. 或用括孤把“to B”括开，则更明白，即 A is（to B）what X is to Y. 又“what”放在第一个名词子句的头上也是可以的。又不用动词“be”而改用别的动词如“stand”也未尝不可。介词“to”有时也可换用别的介词如“for”等。句中的 what-Clause 既放在句首，则可再用一个“that”在后来子句的头上，例见后面的〔类例〕中。

【类例】

What the blueprint is to the builder the outline is to the writer.（作家对于写作的轮廓，就像建筑师对于蓝图一样。）

What the leaves are to the forest，/That to the world are children.（Longfellow）（木叶对于森林，正像小孩对于世界一样。）

Air is to us what water is to fish.（空气对于我们犹水之于鱼。）

【习题 89】

1. What Newton was to mechanics and Darwin to biology，Freud was to psychology.

2. He crooked his knee and foot so as to caress the quadruped in a nerve under the angle of the jaw，the stimulation of which…is for a dog what a good cigar is for a man.（G. K. Chesterton）

（90）who + 肯定，who + 否定

（a）Who can rely on such a man as to tell a lie？

谁能信任这样一个撒谎的人？（谁也不能信任）

（b）Who cannot rely on such an honest man？

谁不能信任这样一个正直的人？（谁都能信任）

【解说】

这种句子虽有问句的形式，但并不是要问什么，只是加强语气而已。这原是反语的表现法，在文法上就称为修辞的疑问句。因为不是普通的问话，所以不要作答。（a）例“who + 肯定”就等于加强语气来表示“nobody + 肯定”的意思。（b）例“who + 否定”即“everybody + 肯定”的加强说法。在“who”之外还可换用其他的疑问词如“what”，“when”，“where”，“how”等等。

【类例】

Who knows（ = Nobody knows）what will happen tomorrow？（谁晓得明天会发生什么事？）

Where will I not go with you？（和你在一起天涯海角我都要去。）

Who does not love his country？（谁不爱自己的国家？）

Why should you be surprised？（ = You should not be surprised at all.）（你用不着惊奇。）

Who shall decide when doctors disagree？（Pope）（学者意见不一致时无人能决定。）

Don’t stand as if you were afraid；who is the wiser？（不要怕，谁也不知道的。）

Who does not hope to be good？（人谁不想做好？）

Why can’t we kiss and be friends？（Maugham）（我们为什么不能相吻为友呢？）

【习题 90】

1. Who wishes to employ anyone who has not enough self-respect？

2. What would I not give to have such a cow？

3. Where are the snows of yesteryear？

（91）疑问词 + should…but

Who should fail but that man？

除那人外还有谁会失败呢？

【解说】

英文的“疑问词 + should…but”的形式，表示过去的意外的事，是一种反语的说法，意为“none…but”，可译作“岂料”，如上例可意译为“想不到失败了的竟是他”。凡“who”，“why”，“how”等疑问词接上“should”时，都可以表示“意外”，“不可解”，“惊讶”等。

【类例】

Who should write it but himself？（除他本人以外还有谁会写呢？）

Who should come in but the very man？（进来的正是那人。）

The door opens，and—who should enter but the very man we were talking of？（门开处谁想到走进来的正是我们方才谈论的人。）

Who（m）should I meet but my old friend Tom？（我遇到的原是老朋友托孟。）

Of course he married，and who should be his wife but Barbara？（Dickens）（当然他结婚了，他的妻子是谁呢，就是巴白拉呀。）

Fancy this：last night at about six，who should walk in but Elwin？（Dickens）（试想想：昨夜六时走进来的是谁，竟是艾尔温。）

【习题 91】

1. Passing through one of the principal streets，whom should I meet but our cousin to whom you first recommended me？（Goldsmith）

2. This morning he rose very early，and what should he do but take it into his head to wash down the stairs.（Fagazzaro）

（92）Who knows but（that）

Who knows but（that）he may go？

他多半会去的。（或者他会去也未可知。）

【解说】

这表现法照字面解时为“除了他可能去的这件事以外，还有谁知道别的事”，是反语的问句，即除此以外别的谁也不知道。反面的说法则为 I do not know but that he may go. 是说谁也不知道那以外的事，意即“除了他可能去以外别的我都不知道”。结果正反两句，意思完全相同，皆可译为“多半”。那“that”可省去，有时也可换用“what”。普通反面的说法用的颇多，“but”在否定后实无任何意义，因为那是从法语转变来的。

【类例】

Who knows but it may be so？（或者如此，亦未可知。）

I do not doubt（but）that he will succeed.（我确信他必成功。）

I do not deny but that he is diligent.（我不否认他的勤勉。）

He is extremely strong—not but that he will catch a cold at times.（他虽有时感受风寒，然其身体固甚强健。）

He is not such a fool but that he knows it.（他纵下愚犹能知此。）

He is not such a fool but what（ = but that）he can tell a friend from a foe.（彼虽下愚，当不至认敌为友。）

【习题 92】

1. Who knows but we may make an agreeable acquaintance with this interesting family？（Hook）

2. Not but what he did his best.（Nesfield）

Ⅸ. 条件及让步的造句

（93）省略 if 的句法

（a）Were he alive，what would he say？

他要是还在世的话，他会怎样说呀。

（b）Had I been there，I should have said so.

如果我在那里的话，我就会这样说的。

【解说】

凡有“were”，“had”，“should”，“would”，“could”等〔助〕动词出现在主语前面，而又不是疑问句的时候，便一定是略去了“if”或“though”那种连词，而构成条件或让步的假设语气的造句了。上例“were he”即“If he were”之略；“Had I been”即“If I had been”之略。有时连加重语气的“do”，也可当作普通助动词而同样省略“if”来用。这类句子都可译为“如果…的话”或“即令…”。

【类例】

Were I rich，I would give you some money. = If I were rich，I would give you some money.（如果我富有的话，我就要给你一些钱的。）

Had you followed her advice，you would have succeeded. = If you had followed her advice，……（如果你听了她的劝告，你就早已成功了。）

Did I see him，I would blame him for it. = If I did see him，……（如果我当时看到了他，我就早已为那件事责备过他了。）

Should he read this book forever，he would not grow wise. = Though he should read this book forever，……（即令他一直不停在读此书，他也不会变得明智的。）

Had I known it，I should have told it to you.（我要知道的话，我早告诉你了。）

They might live quite comfortably were it not for a quarrel with their nextdoor neighbour.（他们如果没有和邻居吵架的话，就会过得很舒服的。）

Had he planted the tree near the road，strangers would have stolen the fruit.（他当时要是把那树种在路边，路人早就盗取果实了。）

Should this vote go（ = If this vote should go）against the ministry，it could not carry on the government.（万一这次选举内阁失败的话，现政府就不能继续执政了。）

Many a murderer would have remained innocent had he not possessed（ = if he had not possessed）a knife or a gun.（如果当时没有刀枪在手，许多杀人犯都不至犯下大罪了。）

Could he have foreseen（ = Even if he could have foreseen）that he was to lose everything，his iron soul must not have been shaken.（如果他预知他会失去一切，他的铁一般的意志就决不会动摇了。）

Had he made an obvious mistake（ = Though he had made an obvious mistake），he still refused to admit it.（他虽犯了明显的错误，还是不肯认错。）

以上各例都是假设语气过去及假设语气过去完成，所以动词的时态前后都是一致的，但假设语气现在及假设语气未来，前（条件句）后（归结句）句中动词的时态，就可以不一致了，例如 If this be true（条件句），I am sorry for it.（归结句）。前面的条件句为假设语气现在，后面的归结句为直陈语气现在，前后动词的时态是不一致的。又例如 If it should be true，I shall be very happy. 前面的条件句为假设语气未来，后面的归结句为直陈语气未来，动词时态也不一致。再看下面的类例：

Should the weather be wet（ = If the weather should be wet），the meeting will not be held.（如天下雨会议停开。）

Should it rain tomorrow（ = If it should rain tomorrow），I shall stay at home.（如果明天下雨，我就呆在家里不出去。）

Should a table stand in the way and unexpectedly cause pain，the child，once recovered from the feeling of surprise，may beat it in anger.（如果有一张桌子妨碍了他，意外地引起痛苦的话，那孩子一旦从惊奇的感觉中恢复过来，他也许就要愤怒地去打击那张桌子的。）

【习题 93】

1. Had his abilities been equal to his disposition，he would have made a very good king.

2. Many of the successful men，had they been able to choose for themselves，would have selected some quite different profession from that in which they have made their fortunes.

（94）If it were not for（ = Were it not for） + 名词，If it had not been for（ = Had it not been for） + 名词，But for + 名词，But that + 名词子句

（a）If it were not for his help，I should fail.

（b）If it had not been for his help，I should have failed.

（c）But for his help，I should fail（have failed）.

（d）But that he helps，I should fail.

如果不是他帮忙的话，我就失败了。

【解说】

这些都是表条件的句子，四句具有同样的意思，但造句法各有不同。（a）句是假设过去，（b）句是假设过去完成，（c）句是上举二者的省略说法，可用作假设过去，也可用作假设过去完成，（d）句后面接名词子句，采用现在时态的动词，但它所表达的意思，却是假设过去。如果条件句是表假设过去完成时，后面主句中的动词当然也可改为过去时态了。（c）句的“but for”有“except because of”的意思。

【类例】

I would go by steamer but that I am a poor sailor.（假设过去）（我要不是因为晕船，我就坐船去了。）“but that I am” = if I were not.

We should have arrived earlier but that we met with an accident.（ = if we had not met with an accident.）（假设过去完成）（我们如果不是途中遭遇事故，我们就早早到达了。）

But for（ = Had it not been for）you，I should have been ruined.（如果不是你帮忙，我早已毁了。）

But for（ = If it were not for）human selfishness，all might prosper.（如果不是人类的自私，一切就繁荣了。）

All would go well if it were not for losses and want of work.（如果不是损失和失业的话，一切就好了。）

But for his personal example of courage，the battle would have been lost.（如果不是他个人以身作则，勇猛向前的话，恐怕早战败了。）

I should have married her，but that it pleased her father to refuse me.（如果不是她父亲反对这门亲事的话，我早就和她结婚了。）

But that I saw it，I could not have believed it.（我要不是亲眼看见的话，我是不相信的。）

I should think it summer still，but that I see the lanes yellow-purfled with flowers of autumn.（Gissing）（如果不是我看见小路上饰满了秋天的黄花，我还以为仍是夏天呢。）

But for the thick trees，the bitter wind would blow the house to pieces.（如果不是那丛密的树木挡住，强风就会把屋子吹成碎片的。）

But for an unexpected emergency，I could have paid him a visit.（如果不是意外发生的紧急事件，我早已去拜访过他了。）

If it were not for the immense income derived from advertising newspapers could not be sold so cheaply.（如果不是在广告上有莫大的收入，报纸就不能卖得这样便宜的。）

I do not know what I should do for relaxation，were it not for the innumerable detective stories.（如果没有那无数的侦探小说，我真不晓得要怎样消遣。）

What a delightful parent my father would have been，had it not been for his strictness.（如果不是那样的严厉，我父亲就是一个非常令人愉快的人了。）

【习题 94】

1. Birds are good friends to man. If it were not for them the world would be overrun with insects.

2. Freedom might have come later in India and in a different form if it had not been for Gandhi.

3. People who have pleasant homes get indoor enjoyments that they would never think of but for the rain.

4. But that he came to my rescue then，I should certainly have died.

（95）命令句 + and，命令句 + or

（a）Work hard，and you will succeed.

努力工作，那么，你将成功。

（b）Work hard，or you will fail.

努力工作，否则，你将失败。

【解说】

英文的“命令句 + and”等于“if”；“命令句 + or”等于“if not”。这合句的前后句为顺意时，就用“and”作连词，如前后句为逆意时，就用“or”作连词。（a）句既有“if”之意，用中文解说，便是“如果那样就会（成功）”，（b）句既有“if not”之意，中文可说“如果不是那样，就会（失败）”。所以（a）句改为复句时便是 If you work hard，you will succeed. 而（b）句改为复句时，便是 If you do not work hard，you will fail. 又（a）句中的“and”，有时可以略去。这种（a）型的造句，后句中的动词如果用了过去时态的话，前句的命令就变成条件了，用例见下。

【类例】

Give him an inch，and（ = if you give……）he’ll take an ell.（得寸进尺。）

Let a man be once a beggar，and he will be a beggar for life.（讨过饭的人永远想讨饭。）

Talk of the devil，and he’ll appear.（说到曹操，曹操便到。）

Scratch a Russian，and yon will find a Tartar.（文明人剥去一层皮，就变成野蛮人了。）

Sit back and rest，and you will feel much better.（坐着休息一下就好了。）

Keep away from those high tension wires，or you’ll be electrocuted.（不要靠近那高压线，否则你会触电的。）

Write it down，or you’ll forget it.（写下来以免忘记。）

Give him time，and he was generally equal to the demands of suburban customers.（如果给他以时间，他大概就可以答应郊区顾客的要求了。）

Hurry or interrupt him，and he showed himself anything but the man for a crisis.（Gissing）（时间太仓促或者对他说话加以阻挠的话，他就会显示出他不是一个能应付危机的人。）

Try and calm yourself，and your mind will be easy again.（镇静一点，你的心就可安定下来。）

Ask a European critic to name the two leading American poets，and in most cases he will reply，“Poe and Whitman”.（要一个欧洲的批评家提名两个美国一流诗人的话，他多半会回答，爱伦·坡与惠特曼。）

【习题 95】

1. Let a man learn as early as possible honestly to confess his ignorance，and he will be a gainer by it in the long run.

2. Take away from Shakespeare all his bits of natural description，all his casual allusions to the life and aspects of the country，and what a loss were there！

3. Don’t go too close to him，or you will be found fault with.

（96）名词 + and

A few minutes，and they went away.

再过几分钟，他们就走了。

【解说】

这种“名词 + and” = 副词子句。因为它可改为由“if”，“when”，“after”等开头的副词子句，如上例的 A few minutes and = When a few minutes had passed. 上项讲过的“命令句 + and”，是和这个相类似的造句，因为把命令句中的动词略去，只留下名词时，就成为现在讲的这种句法了。

【类例】

One more effort，and we shall succeed.（ = If we make one more effort，we shall succeed.）（再努力一下，我们就会成功的。）

One foot nearer，and you are a deadman.（再靠近一步，你就没有命了。）

Another month and I’ll be ordering you off！（再过一个月，我就会把你赶走的。）

A few minutes more，and he lay sound asleep.（再几分钟他就睡熟了。）

Another half hour，and all the doors would be locked.（再过半个钟头，所有的门都要上锁了。）

A word，and he would lose his temper.（你再说一句他就会生气了。）

A little farther，and（ = When they had gone a little farther）they turned off to the left in the direction of an olive orchard.（Wallace）（他们再走得远一点，就要朝着橄榄园的方向左转去了。）

【习题 96】

1. A turn of the path and we were in a fairy land，whose existence no one a hundred yards off would have suspected.

2. The bullet lodged in my left shoulder—a little lower，and I should have been in Paradise long ago.

（97）动词 + 疑问词

Say what you will，I don’t like it.

不管你怎么说，那个我总是不喜欢的。

【解说】

这种“动词 + 疑问词” = 让步句。这是在假设语气中用作副词子句的句法。“动词 + 疑问词 + will”，常有“即令”那种让步的意思。上举例句就等于说 Whatever you may say 一样。句中的疑问词除“what”外，还可换用“when”，“where”等，而“will”也可换用“may”。

【类例】

Look where I will，I see nothing like him.（Bront）（ = Wherever I may look…）（无论我到哪里去找，都找不到他那样的人。）

Do what he could，the king could neither soothe nor quell the nation as he wished. He was at his wit’s end.（那国王无论怎样也不能如愿地把全国的老百姓加以抚慰或是镇压下来。他简直黔驴技穷了。）

Go where I will，I find a house full of peace and cordiality.（Cowper）（ = Wherever I may go…）（无论走到哪里，我都会看到一个充满和平与温情的家庭。）

Come what will（或 may），I am prepared for it.（无论变得怎样我都准备好了。）

Let others say what they will，I always speak the truth.（让别人高兴怎么说就怎么说，我是总要说真话的。）

Later writers，say what you will of their genius，have rarely equalled the elaborate beauty of the ancients.（Thoreau）（后世的作家不管你对他们的天才怎样说，是很少有能够与古代作家那种精巧的美匹敌的。）

A man thinking or working is always alone，let him be where he will.（Ibid）（一个思想或工作的人无论到哪里都是孤独的。）

Come what might，they were alone in the world with no one to help them.（Dickens）（无论发生什么，他们在这世上是孤独的，谁也不来扶助。）

Here，wake at what hour I may，early or late，I lie amid gracious stillness.（Gissing）（在这里，我无论在何时醒来，或迟或早，都是躺在可感谢的静寂之中的。）

【习题 97】

1. Die in what manner I may，I will die like the son of a brave man.

2. The youth who expects to get on in the world must make up his mind that，come what may，he will succeed.

3. Say what you may about it，it is your father that made you what you are.

（98）no matter + 间接疑问句，疑问词-ever + may

（a）No matter how hard it may be，do your best.

（b）However hard it may be，do your best.

不管那是怎样的难，你还是尽你的全力吧。

【解说】

（a）（b）两例虽则表现法不同，但都是表让步的，意思相同的句子。据专家解释（a）句是句首省略了“it is”二字，全句应作 It is no matter how hard it may be. 这两种句法中的“may”可以略去不说，也可以换用别的助动词。又在“no matter”之后，接用由“whether”引导的子句也是可以的。这个“how”也可以换用“what”，“who”，“which”，“when”，“where”等疑问词。至于（b）例中的“however”，也可换用“whatever”，“whoever”，“whichever”，“whenever”，“wherever”等字，不过在“-ever”后的“may”，在现今口头英语中多采用直陈语气，例如不说 Whoever it may be，而改说 Whoever it is；不说 Whichever you may choose，而说 Whichever you choose 等等。因为这种让步句的比较古一点的说法，和上项相似，是用动词开头的，不过只限于用“be”一个动词。在这种句法中，又可用“ever so”来代替疑问词。

【类例】

Whoever（ = No matter who）may come，he will be welcome.（无论谁来都欢迎。）

It’s a very fine house，whomever（ = no matter whom）it belongs to.（这是一幢漂亮的房子，不管它是谁的。）口语说 whoever.

Whatever（ = No matter what）you（may）do，do it well.（不管你做什么，都要好好的做。）

Whichever you（may）choose，you will be pleased.（随便你选哪一个，你都会满意的。）

I will go，whatever the weather may be（ = be the weather what it may）.（不管天气如何，我都会去的。）

Forgive her all her sins，be they ever so many.（ = however many they may be）.（完全赦免她的罪过吧，不管那有多少。）

Be it ever so humble（ = However humble it may be），there’s no place like home.（无论怎样卑陋，还是自己的家舒服。）

Whatever be our fate，let us not add guilt to our misfortunes.（Goldsmith）（ = whatever our fate may be）（不管我们的运命怎样，我们不要在我们的不幸上面再加罪过了。）

The idle，useless man，no matter to what extent his life may be prolonged，merely vegetates.（那懒惰无用的人，不管他寿命多长，也不过是饱食终日，虚度一生。）

There is but one safe way for every young person starting in life，whatever the business may be.（不问是干哪一行的，对于每个开始出来谋生的青年人，只有一条安全的路好走。）

【习题 98】

1. He taught all his young gentlemen to box like featherweights，no matter whether they weighed one hundred and five or two hundred and five pounds.（Hemingway）

2. However experienced you are，however competent，you never entirely conquer the difficulties of technique，and by the time you have learnt to write，it is very likely that you have nothing more to write about.（Maugham）

（99）动词 + as + 主语 + 助动词

Try as you may，you will not succeed.

无论你怎样去试，你也不会成功的。

【解说】

这是以假设语气现在动词开始的让步句，与（97）项的表现法一样，也可以不用“as”而用疑问词的“how”，又与上项“no matter + 间接疑问句”的意思相同，故依照上项表现法改写为 No matter how you（may）try 时，意义仍然不变。从属于句中的助动词，常用“may”，“might”，“will”，“would”这种表现法格调很高，是表示感情的。

【类例】

I couldn’t read it，try as I would.（Maugham）（我无论怎样试，也读不懂。）

I followed him，but，search as we would，we could find no trace of…（Christie）（我追踪了他，但是，无论怎样搜寻，我们也找不到他的踪迹。）

【习题 99】

1. Choose as I pleased，the roads always ended by turning away from it.（ = my destination）（Stevenson）

2. Try as she would，she could never remember a word of what he had said.（A. Huxley）

（100）if any

（a）He despises honour，if any one does.

世上果真有人轻视名誉的话，他便是一个。

（b）He has little，if any，money.

他即令有钱，也是极少的。

【解说】

英文说的“if any”，“if ever”，意为“果真有或即令有的话”（if there is 〔are〕 any at all），是为加强语气而用的。如（a）例，意为“如果世界上果真有那种人的话”，如（b）例则可译为“即令有，也”，它通常是伴有“little”，“few”，“seldom”等准否定字的。与此形式相近的还有“if anything”的说法，那意思是“if at all”或“if there is any difference”，可译为“倘有异同”，“如果稍有区别的话”。还有“if a day”的说法，意为“at least”.

【类例】

Correct errors，if any.（ = if there are any）（改错。如果有什么错误的话就改正。）

There are very few trees，if any.（即令有树也是极少的。）

There is little，if any，hope.（希望甚微。）

It occurs seldom，if ever（ = seldom or never）.（即有其事，亦必不多。）

He is little，if at all，better than a beggar.（ = little or no better than a beggar.）（殆与乞丐无异。）

There are few，if any，such men.（if there are any such men）（ = few or no such men）（即有其人，亦必不多。）

If anything，he is a little better today.（如果说有什么不同，他比昨天略为好了一点。）

He is，if anything，a shade better today.（他今天略为好了一点。）

The carriages of the German State railways are，if anything，better than those of the large French companies.（德国国营铁路的火车，倘有异同，比法国大公司的火车要好一点。）

If anything，a Judas is worse than a Nero.（如果要加以区别的话，犹大比尼禄更坏。）

True greatness has little，if anything，to do with rank or power.（真正的伟大是几与地位或权力无关的。）

【习题 100】

1. Though the French are little，if at all，inferior to the English either in boating or sailing，their taste for these pursuits are extremely limited.

2. If there is anything in the world that a young man should be more grateful for than another，it is the poverty which necessitates starting life under very great disadvantage.

（101）be it ever（或 never）so，let it be ever（或 never）so

Be it ever so humble，there’s no place like home.

无论怎样简陋，还是自己的家好。

【解说】

这个“be it”中的“be”，是古代假设语气的遗留，现在的英语便说“let it be”。至于“ever so”（其古形为“never so”，并无否定之意），就是“very”的意思。这两种说法都是表让步的。在“let”后也可接其他的字句。

【类例】

Let it be ever so humble，home is home.（无论怎样简陋，总是自己的家。）

A man thinking or working is always alone，let him be where he will. Solitude is not measured by the miles of space that intervene between a man and his fellows. The really diligent student in one of the crowded hives of Cambridge College is as solitary as a dervish in the desert.（Thoreau）（一个人在思想和工作时总是孤独的，无论他在什么地方都是一样。孤独是不能用介乎一个人和他朋友之间的空间的里数来测量的。在哈佛大学的丛集如蜂窝的地方，勤读的学生，也和沙漠中托钵僧一样的孤独。）

Let it ever be so weak，there is nobody but loves his country.（无论国家怎样的弱，没有人不爱他的国家的。）

【习题 101】

1. There is no living plant or animal，be it ever so common，that will not repay study，and provide，if intelligently observed，quite an interesting story.

2. Let his occupation be what it may，he must devote himself if he is to succeed.

（102）once

Once you hesitate you are lost.

你要踌躇一下，你就完了。

【解说】

这个“once”是接续副词（Conjunctive Adverb），有“侯门一入深如海，从此萧郎是路人”中的“一”的意思即“一度”（when once），有时又可解释为“as soon as”（随即）或“whenever”（无论何时）之意。

【类例】

〔When〕 once 〔it is〕 gone，you will never get it back.（一度失去了，再也找不回来。）

Once you begin，you must continue.（一经开始，你就得继续下去。）

Once started，it was hard to stop.（一度开动了，就不容易停下来。）

Once（ = If once）within call，we are safe.（一度进入叫喊能听到的范围内，我们就安全了。）

Once you consent you are trapped.（一度你同意了，就上了圈套。）

It is to be explained perhaps by the fear that once foreign affairs become predominant，home affairs take a back place.（要加以说明的也许是担心国外的事情一度占优势令人注意的话，国内的事情就要退居后位了。）

【习题 102】

1. But their aloofness might have quite the same opposite result of that which they desire；for once（ = when once）the crisis had arrived，home affairs would indeed be swamped.

2. Once you are married，there is nothing left for you，not even suicide，but to be good.（Stevenson）

（103）were to

If the sun were to rise in the west，I would not do so.

即令太阳从西边出来，我也不做这样的事。

【解说】

在条件句中用的“were to”，表示与未来的事实相反的假设，含有“万一”之意，稍古一点的说法是用“should”，意思一样，不过“were to”比“should”不确实的意思更为强烈，所以现代英语的普通口语，都用“were to”来取代“should”了。又在口语中如主语是单数时，连“were to”有时也更改成直接语气的“was to”了，例如 If this collection was to be sold，it would fetch a lot of money.（D. Sayers）（这些收藏如果出卖的话，就可以得到一大笔钱。）If he was to come in at this moment，I should fall down on my knees in thankfulness.（L. P. Hartley）（他要是在此时走进来，我就会跪下来感谢的。）If I was to be shot for it，I couldn’t.（就要杀我，我也不能。）

【类例】

If he were to come，say that I am absent.（他若来了，只说我不在家。）

If I were to go abroad，I would go to Europe.（如果我有可能出洋的话，我就要到欧洲去。）

If he should（ = were to）hear of your marriage，he would be surprised.（他要是听到了你结婚的消息，他一定会惊异的。）

Even if you were to try，you wouldn’t be able to do it.（Hornby）（即令你去试试，你也做不到的。）

If you were to start early tomorrow morning，you would（或 could，might，ought to，should）be at your destination by evening.（如果你明天早上早早动身的话，你就会在晚上到达目的地。）

If he were to call，tell him to wait.（如果他来访时，要他等一下。）

He wouldn’t do it unless you were to order him to.（除非你命令他做，否则他是不会做的。）

It would be appropriate if they were to blow a siren.（他们只要吹一下号角就对了。）

Supposing I were to die as I sit at this table，what would the difference be？（K. Mansfield）（即令我现在坐在这桌子上就是这样死了，也不会有什么不同呀。）

If anything were to happen to him the family would be left poorly off.（如果他发生了什么事情，那一家人的衣食就成问题了。）

If you were to throw him to the lions，that would no doubt be persecution.（Shaw）（若是你把他投向狮子，那无疑就是迫害呀。）

Would it spoil it if I were to ask his name？（我要是问问他的名字不会坏事吧。）

【习题 103】

1. If the sun were to be extinguished，the whole earth would be fast bound in a frost so terrible that every animal would die.

2. If we were to think that Mrs Gerard were right，my dear Judge，then we should quit you judging men and I analysing them，and we should follow her.

（104）含有条件意味的字眼

（a）A close observer would have noticed it.

如果是一个细心的观察者，就早注意到了。

（b）With his aid you would succeed in it.

有他帮忙，你就可以成功。

（c）You would do well to write more distinctly.

你要是再写得清楚一点就好了。

【解说】

英文表示假设的方法很多，并不一定要用明显的条件句，如（a）例中用的一个形容词“close”，即含有“if the observer had been close”之意。（b）例中的介词“with”，也含有“if you had his aid”之意。（c）例中的不定词“to write”，也含有“if you should write”之意。此外其他的字，也都可以用为假设的。

【类例】

Anybody who should do that（ = if anybody should do that，he）would be laughed at.（任何人如果那样做，就要被人笑的。）（关系代名词）

I am otherwise engaged，or（ = if I were not otherwise engaged）I would go myself.（我要不是因为有别的事，我就亲自去了。）（连词）

I would have let you know by letter，but there was no time.（ = if there had been time）（我要有时间的话，我早就用信通知你了。）（连词）

He said he would have done，only you treated him so off-hand.（ = if you had not treated him so off-hand）（他说他本打算要做的，只是因为你待他太不客气了。）（副词）

Turning（ = If you turn）to the right，you will find the house.（你向右转去，就看见那房子了。）（现在分词）

The book cannot be interesting，judged（ = if it is judged）by its contents.（从内容上看来，这本书不会有趣的。）（过去分词）

Your refusal to come（ = If you should refuse to come，you）might give offence.（你要不到会得罪人的。）（名词）

A Chinese（If he were a Chinese，he）would not do this.（这种事中国人是不会做的。）（名词）

【习题 104】

1. He would have paid more attention to a pretty girl.

2. Without history we should be at a loss to understand our presence on the earth either as a nation or as individuals.

3. He would be wrong in refusing to go.

4. To hear him talk，one would take him for a fool.

5. The same thing，happening in wartime，would amount to disaster.

6. Born in better times，he would have done credit to the profession of letters.

Ⅹ. 形容词副词的造句

（105）“the + 形容词”的两种用法

（a）The righteous are bold as a lion.

正义之士，其勇如狮。

（b）The beautiful lives forever.

美是不朽的。

【解说】

英文的“the + 形容词”，可以等于复数普通名词，也可以等于抽象名词，即是单数的名词。二者全看形容词的性质而定，在字面上是看不出来的。如（a）例所示，“the righteous”为“righteous people”之意。说“the righteous”是复数，单数要说“a righteous man”。最常见的这种用法有“the rich” = rich people. “the poor” = poor people. 如（b）例所示，则完全不同了。“the beautiful” = beauty. 是一个抽象名词，这是近乎文言的语法。英诗人 Keats 的名句 A thing of beauty is a joy forever.（美的东西是永远的喜悦），和上举例句意思相近。他例如“the sublime” = sublimity. 这两种用法也可适用于“the + 现在分词”及“the + 过去分词”，不过不一定是等于复数普通名词罢了。

现在且把这个“the + 形容词（分词）”的用法分成四类来翻译：（1）“…的人们”，如 The sick are here cared for.（病人们在这里受到看护。）The wounded and the dying were rushed to hospital.（受伤的人们和垂死的人们被急送到医院去了。）（2）“…的一个人”，如 The deceased was a great friend of mine.（死者是我的好朋友。）The accused was soon acquitted.（被告随即就宣告无罪了。）（3）“…的一切”，如 In the old society many readers loved the sensational.（在旧社会里许多读者爱好骇人听闻的一切事情。）He has no eye for the beautiful.（他没有审美的眼光。）（4）“…的一件事”，如 The unexpected always happens.（意料不到的事常会发生。天有不测风云。）The inevitable was not long in coming.（那不可避免的事不久就发生了。）

在“the”与形容词之间还可以再加形容词，用法不变，如“the leisured rich”（有闲的阔人们），“the hungry poor”（饥饿的穷人们），“the aged poor”（年老的穷人们），“the bereaved poor”（孤苦无依的穷人们）等等。

【类例】

The beautiful is higher than the true.（美高于真。）

Confucius did not talk of the supernatural.（子不语怪力乱神。）

The oppressed and the exploited looked forward to their liberation.（被压迫的人们和被剥削的人们盼望得到解放。）

The rich are apt to look down on the poor.（阔人常要轻视穷人。）

The power of fortune is acknowledged by the unhappy；for the happy impute all their success to their merits.（运命的力量为不幸者所承认；因为幸福的人把他们一切的成功都归于他们自己的实力。）

The living may have less to say to us than the dead.（现在活着的人也许没有死去的人那样多的话要对我们说的吧。）

Local government was generally regarded as a hobby of the well-to-do and the retired.（地方政治一般认为是富裕的人和退休的人所有的癖好。）

The deceased was 102 years of age.（死者有一百零二岁。）

The accused held back the names of his partners.（被告不肯说出同谋者的名字来。）

The sublime is in a grain of dust.（一粒尘土之中也有崇高的东西。）

In their education the useful has of late been encroaching on the ornamental.（近来在他们的教育上，有用的东西侵入到装饰的东西当中去了。）

By nature she had a taste for the gorgeously beautiful.（她生性爱好华美。）

We are apt to accept the obvious too easily.（我们容易接受明显的东西。）

Adventure allows the unexpected to happen to us.（冒险引起意外。）

In an attempt to explain the unknown，primitive man fashioned various kinds of superstitions.（为着想要说明未知的东西，原始人作出各种各样的迷信来。）

The poet had an ardent yearning for the supernatural.（诗人憧憬超自然的东西。）

【习题 105】

1. It is generally the idle who complain they cannot find time to do that which they fancy they wish.

2. There is but a step from the sublime to the ridiculous.（Napoleon）

（106）最上级形容词含有 even 之意

The shortest cut would take us five hours to get there.

即令走捷径也要五小时才能到达。

【解说】

英文这种“the + 最上级”的形式，不宜只照字面翻译为“最”，因为其中包含得有“even”的意味。应译为“即令”，“哪怕是”等才对。

【类例】

The best brewer sometimes makes bad beer.（即令是最好的酿造家，有时也不免要造出坏啤酒来。）

The lion’s roar will strike terror to the bravest heart.（听到狮吼，哪怕是非常勇敢的人也不免要惊恐。）

There is no smallest doubt about it.（毫无疑惑。）

This does not concern me in the least.（毫无关系。）

It fulfilled every faintest hope.（哪怕是极微的希望都试过了。）

【习题 106】

1. By the law of nature the stream will run down，and the strongest man cannot stop it.

2. The industrial arts are necessary arts. The most degraded savage must practise them and the most civilized genius cannot dispense with them.

（107）the + 比较级…the + 比较级

The richer a man is，the greedier he gets.

人越有钱越是贪婪。

【解说】

这是一种复句（Complex Sentence），前为附句，后为主句，故第一个（附句中的）“the” = in whatever degree；to what extent，为关系副词，而第二个（主句中的）“the” = in that degree；to the extent，则为指示副词。在主句中有时可用“do”以加重语气，如 The farther we proceed，the more difficulties do we meet.（我们越前进，遭遇的困难愈多。）这个“do we meet”是强调，不是倒装。这种复句，常用省略的说法，如 The sooner，the better.（越快越好。）是略去了主语和动词的。The nearer the bone，the sweeter the meat.（越靠近骨头的肉其味越美。）是略去动词的。More haste，worse speed.（欲速则不达。）是略去副词的。有时又可把主句放在附句的前面去，如 I sing the worse，the more I practise.（ = The more I practise，the worse I sing.）（越练习越唱得坏。）

【类例】

The sooner he comes，the happier I shall be.（他越早来，我越高兴。）

The more he gets，the more he wants.（越有越贪。）

The more he flatters，the less I like him.（他越逢迎我越不喜欢他。）

The stone gets the harder，the longer it is exposed to the weather.（越是在空气中暴露得久，石头变得越硬。）

The higher a mountain is，the more people like to climb it；the more dangerous the mountain is，the more they wish to conquer it.（山越高，人越爱爬山；山越危险，人越想克服它。）

My experience has led me，the longer I live，to set the less value upon mere cleverness.（因为经验增长的关系，年龄越大，我对单是聪明越觉得没有什么价值。）

The more things a man is interested in，the more opportunities of happiness he has，since if he loses one thing he can fall back upon another.（人对越多的事物发生兴趣，便越多获得幸福的机会，因为他失去对一件事物的兴趣，又可从另外一件事物上获得兴趣。）

The more complex his material，the greater must be his art.（作家的材料越是复杂，他的技术越要伟大。）

The nearer the train approached the scene，the drearier became the aspect.（火车越接近现场，那光景越加可怕。）

【习题 107】

1. Lying on the grass，he looked straight up into the sky. It was very blue，and the longer he looked，the higher it seemed to look.

2. A great part of our lives is occupied in reverie，and the more imaginative we are，the more varied and vivid this will be.（Maugham）

（108）the + 比较级 + 理由

I like him all the better for his faults.

因为他有缺点，我更加喜欢他。

【解说】

这个表现法是只用一个“the + 比较级”，后面就接上表理由的“for”，“because”，“on account of”，“owing to”等，具有“更加”的意思。常出现的为“all（或 much）the + 比较级”的形式，这个“all”或“much”是为加强语气而用的，可以不必译出。句中的“the” = to that degree.

成语说的“none the less”（依然。但仍不失为。）如 He has faults，none the less he is the best student of the class.（他有缺点，但仍不失为这班上最好的学生。）实有“虽然如此”（nevertheless）之意，也和本项为同一用法。

有时可将说理由的字句省略，而在别的地方表示出那个理由来，如 I said nothing，which made him all the more angry.（我一言不发，使他更为生气。）We are apt to undervalue the purchase we can not reach，to conceal our poverty the better.（我们常有将自己买不起的东西过低估价的倾向，借以隐藏我们的贫穷。）

【类例】

We do not like him the less because he has faults.—We like him none the less for his faults.—He has faults，but we do not like him the less.—We do not like him the less on that account.（我们并不因他有缺点，而较少喜欢他。）

If he doesn’t understand English，it is all the better for you.（如果他不懂英语，那对你更好呀。）

The danger makes the sports only the pleasanter.（那运动因有危险而更加有趣。）

He is the worse for drink.（他喝醉了。）

We should not think the worse of a man because he is ill-dressed.（我们不应因人衣服褴褛而藐视其人。）

I think none the worse of him because he accepted their offer.（他接受了他们的建议，我并不因此就对他不尊敬了。）

The coat is much the worse for wear.（那上衣穿得很破了。）

He won’t come.—So much the better.（他不来更好。）

I am the more inclined to help him，because he is poor.（因为他穷，我更加想要帮助他。）

It is none the less true because it sounds strange.（听来很怪，却是真的。）

It is all the more dangerous for not being generally recognized as snch.（一般不认为危险的，反而更加危险。）

You may be as neat as you please and I shall love you the better for it；but this is not neatness，but frippery.（Goldsmith）（你们照自己的意思弄整洁就好了，那样我会更加爱你们的，但照现在这样，并不是整洁，而只是矫饰〔俗丽〕而已。）

【习题 108】

1. Indulged in to excess，reading becomes a vice—a vice all the more dangerous for not being generally recognized.

2. I think one of the most useful discoveries I ever made was how easy it is to say “I don’t know”. I never noticed that it made anyone think the worse of me.（Maugham）

（109）the last… + 不定词，the last… + 形容词子句

（a）He is the last man to accept a bribe.

他决不是受贿赂的人。

（b）He is the last man I wanted to see.

他是我最不愿见的一个人。

【解说】

句中的“last”为“the least likely”的意思，是否定地加以推论的想法。译为“最不大可能的”，“最不适的”。由原意的“最后去做”，变成“决不去做”。

【类例】

He is the last man to do such a thing.（他决不做这样的事。）

You should be the last man to wish it.（你决无希冀此事之理。）

I should be the last man to speak lightly of the profession of a clergyman.（我决不轻视牧师的职务。）

The very last thing of which man can make his boast is his knowledge.（人类对自己的知识是决难夸口的。）

That is the last thing one would expect.（那是一种最不可能预期到的东西。）

The author should be the last man to talk about his work.（作者最不宜讨论他的作品。）

Money is the last thing he wants，and you won’t succeed by offering it.（他决不要钱，你想用钱去买动他是决不会成功的。）

You are the last person I was going to see. Why did you come to see me？（你是我决不想要会见的人。你为什么要来见我？）

Romantic is the last thing I am.（我决不是浪漫的人。）

Certainly the last thing an Englishman should despise is poetry.（一个英国人决不会轻视诗歌的。）

【习题 109】

1. He was the last man in the world to suffer his authority to be set at naught.

2. A pretext was the last thing that Hastings was likely to want.（Macaulay）

（110）so + 形容词（副词） + that，so + 动词 + that

（a）This coffee is so hot that I cannot drink it.

这咖啡太烫，我不能喝。

（b）He ran so fast that nobody could catch him up.

他跑得那样快，谁也赶不上他。

（c）It so happened that he was not at home.

他碰巧不在家。

【解说】

在“so”后接形容词或副词的，是表示因果关系，“so”以下表原因，“that”以下表结果。在“so”后接副词的，多是用来表程度的。在“so”后如接动词，就是表方法、状态、程度或目的的。This coffee is so hot that I cannot drink it. = This coffee is too hot（for me）to drink. 在“so + 形容词（副词）”后不接“that”引导的子句，而接不定词也是可以的，不过要用关系副词连起来，如 He was so angry that he could not speak. 一句可改为 He was so angry as to be unable to speak.

【类例】

The world is probably so made that men are unable to live without loving others.（大概这个世界上的人是非爱他人就不能生活的。）

It is so easy that a boy can learn it.（那非常容易，小孩子都能学会。）

Man is so created that he lives with woman.（男人是被造来和女人共同生活的。）

He so handled that matter that he won（ = as to win）over his opponents.（他为着赢得反对者的支持，而把事情那样处理了。）

He spoke so rapidly that we could not clearly understand him.（他说话太快，所以我们没有能够完全听懂。）

Those ponds and streams are so small that they cannot be shown in your maps.（那些池塘和小溪，因为太小，所以地图上没有。）

They were so close（that）I heard every word.（他们很靠近我，所以他们说的每个字我都听到。）美国口语略去“that”一字。

His income is so small that he can not support his family.（他收入太少，不能养家。）

These shoes are so small that I cannot put them on.（这双鞋太小，我不能穿。）

It was so cold that we lost the use of our hands.（太冷，我们手都不能动了。）

He had lived so long in the east that he had got out of English ways.（他在东方住得太久，所以英国的生活习惯都忘记了。）

The orange was so sour（that）I couldn’t eat it.（橙太酸我不能吃。）

I was so astonished that I could not utter even a word.（我吃惊得说不出话来了。）

The current was so strong that he could not swim against it.（水流太急，他不能逆泳。）

He spoke English so fluently that everyone was astonished.（他英语说得那样流利，大家都吓倒了。）

The streets were so crowded that our car had to go very slowly.（街上太拥挤，汽车只好慢慢的走。）

Explanations were of no use because he was so prejudiced that he would not listen to reason.（说明对他无用，因为他不肯听从道理。）

【习题 110】

1. I do not think anyone writes so well that he cannot learn much from Fowler’s Dictionary.（Maugham）

2. Many foods are never so cheap that the poorest people can afford to eat them.

3. May we so live that our children’s children may look upon us as having set them an example.（“may + 主语 + 原形不定词”是祈愿句法。）

（111）so that

So that it is done，I don’t care who does it.

只要做好就行，我不管是谁做的。

【解说】

这个“so that” = if only，so long as，provided that，是表条件的，有时可将“that”省略。这是略带古风的说法，但在美国语中用的很多，可译为“只要”，因系条件句，所以第三人称单数的现在动词上可以不加〔s〕，例如 He can stay long so that he catch the train.（只要他能赶上火车，仅可多呆一会。）不过这种表条件的用法，属于古文体，现在我们不宜采用。

除古文体表条件外，现代英文又常用“so that”来表目的和结果。表目的的“so that” = in order that，后常接“may”及“should”，“would”，“could”等字，口语则用“can”，有时也可用单纯过去代替“might do”。如表目的时说 Switch the light on so that we can see what it is.（打开电灯，好来看过究竟。）表结果时则说 Nothing more was heard of him，so that people thought he was dead.（再也没有听到他的讯息，因此人们以为他死了。）用单纯过去时态的如 He went early so that he got a good seat.（他早早去所以占到了一个好位子。）比较：

He spoke clearly，so that everyone could hear.（结果）

He spoke clearly so that everyone might hear.（目的）

【类例】

I’ll write to him today so that he may know when to expect us.（我今天要写信给他，为着要使他知道我们何时到达。）

They are climbing higher so that they may get a better view.（他们爬得更高，以便看得更远。）

School was closed early in order that the children might go home ahead of the storm.（学校早早下课，以便学生在暴风雨前回家。）

We put up a fence so that the neighbors should not overlook us.（我们搭一个围墙，以免邻居看见我们。）

He slammed the door so that his mother would know he was home.（他把门砰的一声关上，好让他母亲知道他回来了。）

Speak up so that the students sitting in the back of the room can hear you.（把声音放大一点，以便坐在后面的学生可以听到。）

They are hurrying so that they won’t miss the train.（他们匆忙赶去，以免脱车。）

All precautions have been taken，so that we expect to succeed.（一切准备妥善，因此我们期待成功。）

You may keep the book，so that you bring it back in good condition.（只要你不弄坏还来，你可以把这本书借去阅读。）

To find her（ = Megan）again he knew he had only…to take train himself and go back to the farm，so that she found（ = might found）him there when she returned.（Galsworthy，The Apple Tree）（为要找到美冈他知道他只有自己搭火车回农场去，她若回家了，就会到农场来看他的。）

Put the butter in the icebox，so that it may（will）not get soft.（把牛油放在冰箱中就不会软化。）

Come early so that you may get a good seat.（早来可以占到好位子。）

So that it be done，it matters not how.（只要能做成，不管用什么方法。）

So that it is true，what matters who said it？（只要确实，管它是谁说的。）

I got up early so that I might be in time for the first train.（我为着要赶上头班车，故特早起。）Cf. I got up so early that I was in time for the first train.（因我早起，故赶上了头班车。）前句表有意志的目的，后句表无意志的结果。

【习题 111】

1. I warned him so that he might avoid the danger.

2. Society is not very particular what a man does，so that it prove him to be a man.

3. To him it was indifferent who was found guilty so that he could recover his money.

（112）so much so that

He is very ignorant so much so that he cannot read his own name.

他非常无知，甚至连自己的名字都不认识。

【解说】

在“so much so that”中，第一个“so”是承接“that”以下的，与前面说过的表因果关系的“so that”的用法一样；第二个“so”是为避免重复起见，用来代表前面那个叙述形容词的，在上例中即代表“ignorant”一字。至于“much”便是为免除两个“so”连在一块儿而插入其间，作为缓冲的字眼，所以结局在本句中就等于说“so ignorant that”一样。全句可解释为 He is very ignorant to that extent or degree so that he cannot read his own name. 如果后面不接“that”所引导出来的子句，而改用不定词时，则为 He cannot so much as（ = even）read his own name. 或整个说出来 He is very ignorant so much as to read his own name.

【类例】

The invalid was very tired when he returned from the ride；so much so that he could not sit up.（病人坐车回家时非常疲倦，疲倦得甚至不能坐起来。）

Ships were built，and kept thoroughly efficient，so much so that the country remained safe for very many years.（兵舰造起来了，发挥充分的效率，那样，使国家永保太平无事。）

The first born was greatly privileged—so much so that the equal inheritance by two or more offspring was totally denied.（长子被给与很大的特权，至于由两个或更多的儿子来平等地继承遗产的事是完全被否认了。）

He is poor—so much so that he can hardly get enough to live.（他很穷，穷得几乎无以为生。）

All parts of the British Isles are noted for their dampness，and Ireland so much so that the people of Ireland have this saying，“In England，it rains all day；in Scotland，it rains all night；but in Ireland，it rains both day and night.”（不列颠群岛各地以潮湿著名，爱尔兰亦复如此，所以爱尔兰人有这样的说法，“在英格兰整天下雨，在苏格兰整夜下雨，但在爱尔兰，日日夜夜都下雨”。）

【习题 112】

1. It is very fierce and savage—so much so that the natives dread it more than they do the lion.

2. But is not the fear of death natural to man？So much so，Sir，that the whole of life is but keeping away the thoughts of it.（Dr. Johnson）

（113）such…as，such…that

（a）It is such an easy book as he can read.

这是他能读的一本容易的书。

（b）It is written in such easy English that he can read it.

这是用浅易英文写的书，所以他也能读。（结果）

这是用他也能读懂的那样浅易的英文写的。（程度）

【解说】

英文的“such…as”是表程度的，而“such…that”则可表结果，也可表程度。（a）例中的“as”是关系代名词，也是“read”的宾语，所以不要说成“read it”。（b）例中的“such…that”与“so…that”同义，所不同的是“such + （形容词） + 名词 + that”而“so + 形容词（副词） + that”，这个“that”是连词，所以在“read”后必须有一个宾语“it”。

【类例】

It was such a cold night that we all kept indoors.（那天夜里冷极了，我们都没有出门。）

The children were having such a good time that their mother hated to call them it.（孩子们玩得非常开心；母亲不忍叫他们回家。）

Let us discuss such things as（ = those things which）we can talk of freely.（让我们讨论一些我们可以自由谈论的事吧。）

This book is written in such easy English as beginners can understand.（这本书是用初学者也能读懂的浅易英文写的。）

This book is written in such easy English that beginners can understand it.（这本书是用浅易英文写的，所以初学者也能读懂。）

I don’t know whether he is really such a great scholar as people say.（我不晓得他是否真如世人所说的是一个大学者。）

The silkworm is an animal of such acute and delicate sensation that too much care cannot be taken to keep its habitation clean，and to refresh it from time to time with pure air.（蚕是一种感觉敏锐而纤细的生物，要注意尽量地保持它居处的清洁，时时使它获得新鲜空气。）

It was the discovery of this extraordinary fact by generations of people long dead that made the greatness of such works as those of Shakespeare，of Dante，or of Goethe.（L. Hearn）（使莎翁、但丁或歌德的作品变得那样伟大的，是由于老早就死了的多少代的人们，发现了这个异常的事实的原故。）注意：上半句为“the discovery of this fact by people”的加重语气的说法。“made the greatness of”意为“使之变成伟大”。

For the man sound in body and serene of mind there is no such thing as bad weather；every sky has its beauty，and storms which whip the blood do but make it pulse more vigorously.（G. Gissing）（对于一个身体健全，精神平静的人，是没有坏天气的；无论什么天气都有它的美丽，激励血液的暴风雨，只会使脉膊跳动得更加活泼。）“do but make” = only make.

He was no more than skin and bone，was partly paralysed，and wore spectacles of such unusual power，that his eyes appeared through the glasses greatly magnified and distorted in shape.（R. L. Stevenson）（他只剩下皮包骨，半身不遂，戴着非常深度的眼镜，使他的眼睛经过镜子看去，大为扩大，且变得奇形怪状。）

【习题 113】

1. My father，I do not know why unless he was drawn by some such restlessness for the unknown as has consumed his son，went to Paris and became solicitor to the British Embassy.（Maugham）

2. Books did not much attract him；when he opened one he was sure to come upon something or other which took such possession of his thoughts，or so affected his imagination，that he went off into dreaminess，and for that day he read no more.（G. Gissing）

（114）比较级 + than，more + 原级 + than

（a）He is bolder than his brother.

他比他的兄弟要大胆些。

（b）He is more bold than strong.

与其说他刚强，不如说他大胆。

【解说】

（a）例的“bolder than”是形容词的普通比较级，对同一性质来比较其不同的程度或大小，至于（b）例，则是将不同性质加以比较，其中的“more”有“rather”（毋宁）的意思。普通比较级的形式虽为“-er than”，但有时只用“-er”也就够了，试看下面四句：

（1）This cord is stronger than that one.

（2）This cord is a stronger one.

（3）This cord is the stronger one of the two.

（4）This cord is the stronger（of the two）.

注意不用“than”时冠词的用法。当“more”用作“rather”之意时，就是比较同一人或同一物的两种不同的性质，在“than”后可接形容词，副词，名词，片语或子句等。

【类例】

It is more than probable that he will fail.（十之八九，他会失败。）

He has more than 10，000 dollars—more than enough.（他有万元以上，绰有余裕。）

He is more shy than unsocial.（他是害羞，不是不爱社交。）

His mother is more kind than intelligent.（他母亲不是聪慧，而是和蔼。不是智者，而是仁人。）

He is more witty than wise.（与其说他聪明，不如说他机智。）

He is more dead than alive.（与其说他活着，不如说他死了。）

He is more knave than fool.（与其说他蠢，不如说他坏。）

Li Yu was more of a poet than a king.（李煜与其说是一位国君，不如说是一位词人。）

She was dressed more than simply.（他穿得岂只是朴素，简直近乎破烂。）

I prayed to heaven in my heart that my boy，my more than son，might live.（Haggard）（我私自心里祷告，求上苍让我的儿子，我那心肝儿子，活下去吧。）

Oh，great Sciolto！Oh，my more than father.（啊，伟大的西奥图！啊，我那单说是父亲还嫌不足的亲爱的人。）

Friend of my bosom，thou more than a brother，／Why wert not thou born in my father’s dwelling？（Charles Lamb）（我的知交，你胜过亲兄弟，你为何不生在我父亲的家里？）

During the last fifty years the short story has developed in scope and variety more rapidly than during the preceding five centuries.（J. Hadfield）（在过去五十年中，短篇小说的视野和变化，比以前五百年都要更迅速地发达了。）

Public opinion is always more tyrannical towards those who obviously fear it than towards those who feel indifferent to it. A dog will bark more loudly and bite more readily when people are afraid of him than when they treat him with contempt，and the human herd has something of this same characteristic.（B. Russell）（舆论常是对于显明地怕它的人比毫不介意它的人更要残暴。狗对于怕它的人要大吠并随时准备来咬，对于轻蔑它的人，它就没有这样，人类也多少具有这同样的特质。）

【习题 114】

1. Smike，more dead than alive，was brought in and locked up in a cellar.（Dickens）

2. He did not taken the fever，after all；he was more frightened than hurt.

3. I have noticed that when someone asks for you on the telephone and，finding you out，leaves a message begging you to call him up the moment you come in，and it’s important，the matter is more often important to him than to you.

（115）more…than + can

He earns more money than he can spend.

他赚的钱，他用不完。

【解说】

这个表现法是不能照字面来翻译的。在“more than”以后的文句，英文虽是肯定，但中文必须翻为否定。这和其他接子句或接单字、片语的有所不同。注意在后接的子句中常用“can”的助动词，当然也有不用“can”而用别的动词的。在“more…than…can”时，意为“达到不可能的程度”；在“more than…can”时，意为“简直不可能”。

【类例】

He has more books than he can read.（ = He cannot read all his books.）（他藏书多到他不可能读完的程度。）

That is more than I can tell.（ = I cannot tell that.）（那我简直不懂。）

How he manages to live is more than I can tell.（ = above my comprehension）（他怎样生活的，我简直猜不透。）

It is more than flesh and blood can bear.（这非血肉之躯所能忍受。）

His insolence is more than I can stand.（他的无礼我受不了。）

The beauty of the place is more than I can describe.（那地方景色之美，非笔墨所能形容。）

I don’t do more than I can help.（能够不做的我便不做。）

【习题 115】

1. So many mothers and fathers died that there were more Orphans than the asylum could possibly take care of.

2. We all complain of the shortness of time，and yet we have more than we know what to do with.

（116）more than + 动词

This more than satisfied me.

这使我十二分的满意。

【解说】

这是在文法上破格的造句法，把“more than”放在动词之前，是表示就用更强意的动词也无妨，用英文说时则为“to do more than to”，可译为“深为”，“岂特”，“十二分的”等。

【类例】

He more than hesitated to promise that.（他对于答应那件事，岂特是踌躇而已〔简直是拒绝了〕。）

More is meant than meets the ear.（Milton）（有言外之意。）

Rose’s cheeks were more than touched by the sun.（Gissing）（露丝的面颊深受太阳的伤害。）

He has more than repaid my kindness.（他岂只是报答了我的帮助而已。）

She was more than pleased with her daughter’s performance.（她对女儿的演奏十二分的高兴。）

I prefer autumn to spring. What we lose in flowers we more than gain in fruits.（比春天我更要喜欢秋天。我们失去春花而以秋果补偿绰绰有余。）

【习题 116】

1. He more than smiled，he laughed outright.（Rowe）

2. He is more than pleased with the result.

（117）less…than

During the week he saw less of her than usual.

在那一星期内，他比平常要少见到她。

【解说】

英文的“less…than”是低一级的比较，意为“较少”，“较差”，“不及”，“不如”。“A is less…than B”略等于“A is not so…as B”的说法。这个“less”作形容词用时较为易译，作副词用时，则较难译。下面是“less”与“more”用法的比较：

Proof-reading is not interesting，still less so when it is one’s own work.

Proof-reading is uninteresting，still more so when it is one’s own work.

【类例】

He was less hurt than frightened.（他受的伤不如吓的厉害。）

I regard him less as my teacher than as my friend.（我把他看做朋友，甚过我把他看做老师。）

You’re more of a scholar than he is，but you’ve got less common sense.（作为一个学者你在他以上，就常识而论则你不如他。）

She eats less than a bird.（她吃得太少。）

He’ll be back in less than no time.（他将马上回来。）

His lecture left me less than satisfactory.（他的演讲怎也不能使我满意。）

This razor runs less of a chance of getting cut.（这把剃刀差不多不可能割破脸。）

Father understood less of money matter than a child.（父亲对钱的事比小孩还要不懂。）

If you smoke cigars or a pipe，you’re still risking cancer. But a good deal less than you are if you stick to cigarettes.（你抽雪茄或烟斗，还是有得癌症的危险，不过比抽纸烟的危险性少得多了。）

He observed with interest the errors of her face and figure，the thin underlip，too heavily penciled eyebrows，and her legs less than slim although not actually skinny.（他颇感兴趣地望着她面孔和身体上的一些缺点，那太薄的下嘴唇，画得太浓的眉毛，和她那瘦弱的双腿，虽然没有达到皮包骨的程度。）

【习题 117】

1. A man less thick-witted than the skipper might have been forgiven if he were bewildered by Neilson’s words.（Maugham）

2. Learning is，in too many cases，but a foil to common sense，a substitute for true knowledge. Books are less often made use of as “spectacles” to look at nature with，than as blinds to keep out its strong light and shifting scenery from weak eyes and indolent dispositions.（W. Hazlitt）

（118）much more，much less

（a）He likes a child，much more a baby.

他喜欢小孩，更加喜欢婴孩。

（b）He does not like a child，much less a baby.

他不喜欢小孩，更加不喜欢婴孩。

【解说】

例句中（a）（b）两种表现法，都有“更加”的意思，不过用法不同罢了。（a）是用于肯定句之后，表程度的增加，（b）是用于否定句之后，表程度的减少。（a）表更多，（b）表更少。“much”改为“still”还是一样。（a）可译为“更加”，“当更”。（b）可译为“遑论”，“何况”。所谓否定后接“much less”，肯定后接“much more”的说法，也不过是最基本的用法罢了。在文人笔下，即令是肯定句，如含有否定意时，也可接“much less”；至于在否定的陈述之后，用“much more”的也不是没有。这个“much less”普通有“not to speak of”之意，故上面把它译作“遑论”。在“it is impossible”后不接“much less”，而要接“much more”，即有“much more impossible”之意。

【类例】

It would be impossible for any American much more an American who was stupid and provincial to gain their confidence.（Whitford）（任何美国人，尤其是愚笨而粗俗的美国人，更不可能获得信任。）

It is scarcely imaginable how great a force is required to stretch，still more break，this ligament.（Curme）（要把这条轫带拉长，尤其是要把它拉断，需要多大的力量，简直不可想象。）

I like music，much more dancing.（我喜欢音乐，更加喜欢跳舞。）

I don’t like music，much less dancing.（我不喜欢音乐，更不喜欢跳舞。）

I do not even suggest that he is negligent，much less that he is dishonest.（我甚至没有暗示说他怠忽，更没有说他欺诈。）

If you must work so hard，how much more must I？（你尚且如此刻苦，我一定要更加努力才行。）

No other country accepted the proposal，much less acted upon it.（没有别的国家接受那个提案，更没有哪个国家采取行动的。）

Every one has a right to enjoy his liberty，still more his life.（人人都有享受自由的权利，生命更加如此。）

Not all verse is poetry；not all prose about the past is history，nor is all literary work literature. The discrimination is habitually applied to other subjects，and clearly it is the quality which is decisive，not the quantity，scope or subject-matter，still less the popularity，of the work.（并非所有的韵文都是诗，并非所有关于过去的散文都是史，并非所有的著作都是文学。这种辨别常可应用到别的科目上，很明显的，有决定性的，是那作品的质，而不是量，也不是它的范围或题材，更不是它的声望。）

【习题 118】

1. One would not wish to visit the white mountains in winier，still less would he be willing to live there in that season.

2. If worship even of a star had some meaning in it，how much more might that of a Hero.（Carlyle）

（119）would sooner（rather）…than，would as soon…as

（a）I would sooner（rather）die than disgrace myself.

（b）I would as soon die as disgrace myself.

我宁死不受辱。

【解说】

这表现法中的“would”是表愿望的，与“wish 〔to〕”相同。句中的“soon”也不作“早”，“快”解，而是“愿意地”，“高兴地”（readily，willingly）的意思，（a）例中的“sooner”为比较级，结局与“rather”同义。英文的“rather”原来是“rathe（ = early，soon）”的比较级，不过现在只剩下“rather”一字，但仍保持它比较级的作用。（b）例中的“would as soon die as”，是用的平等比较，一般的情形谁也不希望死，所以这句话的意思是希望与那同样的程度，结局也是“would sooner…than”的意思。“would sooner（rather）”可译为“宁愿”，“than”以下便要译成否定。“rather than” = might as well…as.

【类例】

He would sooner die than consent to such a plan.（他宁死也不肯同意这个计划。）

The brave soldier would as soon die as yield to such an enemy.（那个英勇的军人宁死也不肯屈服于这样的敌人。）

What strikes me most is that here are three thousand young men，every one of whom would rather lose a game than play it unfairly.（最使我感动的是这里的三千个青年，人人都宁肯比赛失败，而不愿作弊取胜。）

I would sooner die at once than live in this agony.（与其生存在这种苦痛中我宁肯早死的好。）

I would rather you came tomorrow than today.（我宁愿你明天来。）

I would rather be deaf than blind 〔if I were to be either of them〕.（我宁愿聋不愿瞎。）

He would rather resign than take part in such dishonest business deals.（他宁肯辞职而不愿参加这种不正当的勾当。）

I would just as soon stay at home 〔as go〕.（我宁愿呆在家里。）

I would rather you remained here.（Dickens）（我宁愿你留下不走。）

I would rather never allude to the past for it is very painful to me.（C. Doyle）（我不愿再提到过去，因那使人痛苦。）

【习题 119】

1. I asked if she would like a taxi. “No，I’d sooner walk，it’s such a lovely day，” she answered.（Maugham）

2. I’d as soon put that little canary into the park on a winter’s day，as recommend you to bestow your heart on him！（Bront）

（120）no sooner…than，hardly…when

（a）He had no sooner seen me than he ran off.

（b）He had hardly seen me when he ran off.

他一看到我就跑掉了。

【解说】

这两种表现法都是“随即”的意思，表示两种动作跟着发生，几乎是同时的现象。我们要注意的是不可把两个意义相同的表现法混乱，英美未受教育的人每每说成“no sooner…when”，其实只需看“sooner”是比较级，当然是要接上“than”才通。这个“hardly”有时说成“scarcely”也是一样，后接的“when”稍古的说法为“before”，意思不变。如用稍古的说法，将“no sooner”或“hardly（scarcely）”置于句首时，就要把主语和动词颠倒过来，如 No sooner had he seen me 及 Hardly had he seen me. 这种说法在意义上没有什么不同，只是语气上有些加强而已。与此同义的还有“as soon as + 主语 + 动词”，“the moment（或 the instant） + 主语 + 动词”，及“directly（或 immediately） + 主语 + 动词”。例如 As soon as（或 the moment 等）he saw me，he ran off. 还有在动名词项下说过的“on + 动名词”也有“as soon as”的意味，如 On arriving home he wired me.（他一到家就打电报给我了。）

【类例】

No sooner had I started than it began to rain. = Scarcely（Hardly）had I started when（before）it began to rain.（我一动身天就下雨了。）

Let me know directly（immediately）he comes.（他一来就请通知我。）

He ran away the moment（the instant）I came in.（我一进来他就逃了。）

I had scarcely started before a man came up to me and asked me if he was right in thinking my name was so-and-so.（Maugham）（我甫出门就有一个人走过来问我是不是姓什么的。）

Directly he had gone，she burst into great sobs.（他一走她就啜泣起来。）

The instant that we heard the sound，Holmes sprang from the bed，struck a match，and lashed furiously with his cane at the bell-pull.（Doyle）（我们一听到有声音，福尔摩斯就立刻从床上跳将起来，擦燃一根火柴，用手杖去猛击那钟绳。）

I had no sooner opened the cage than out flew the little bird.（我一开笼小鸟就飞出去了。）

No sooner had I glanced at this letter than I concluded it to be the one of which I was in search.（我一见那信便知道正是我找寻的一封。）

No sooner had I come into contact with him than I determined to get to know him well.（我一接近他，马上我就决心要和他做好朋友。）

【习题 120】

1. No sooner had the thief perceived that than he sprang to his feet and took to flight.

2. Hardly had he started when the sky became overcast and down came the rain again.

3. The moment the door was opened，the dog flew to the chest.

4. As soon as a man begins to love his work then he will begin to make progress.

（121）anything but，nothing but，all but

（a）He is anything but a scholar.

他决非一个学者。

（b）He is nothing but a scholar.

他不过是一个学者。

（c）The boy all but fell into the well.

那孩子几乎掉到井里去了。

【解说】

英文的“anything but” = never. “nothing but” = only. “all but” = almost，nearly 在这三种表现法中的“but”，都有“except”（除开）之意。“anything but”意即“除此之外别的都是”，是表强调的否定的。“否定字 + anything but” = “nothing but”，意即“除此之外别的都不是”。至于“all but”是指“everything short of”，所以结局是和“almost”，“nearly”同义了。

【类例】

He is anything but a scientist.（他决非科学家。）

I’m nothing but a student.（我不过是一个书生而已。）

A trouble of the eye all but drove me mad with fear of blindness.（Gissing）（我的眼痛使我生怕要瞎几乎为之发狂。）

Famous as the actress may be，her manners are anything but gracious.（那女伶虽很有名然举止欠佳。）

Strange to say，man is nothing but a bundle of habits.（说来奇怪，人不过是一堆习惯而已。）

If nothing but plain common sense were admitted，we should have had little or no great poetry.（R. Lynd）（如果是普通常识以外什么都不认可的话，那么，我们就不会有伟大的诗篇了。）

The house was all but completed when he was drafted and sent to the East.（那房子几乎快落成了，而他便受到征召，送往东方去了。）

It is anything but pure.（不纯。）

His English is anything but correct.（他的英文错误百出。）

His English is all but correct.（他的英文几乎是正确的。）

His English is nothing but correct.（他的英文只是不错而已。）

He is anything but a fool.（他决不是傻子。）

He is all but a fool.（他几乎可说是傻子。）

【习题 121】

1. He wandered up and down among the crowd in anything but a calm frame of mind.

2. Science is，I believe，nothing but trained and organized common sense.

3. Physical labour carried beyond a certain point is atrocious torture，and it has very frequently been carried so far as to make life all but unbearable.（Russell）

（122）short of，be short of，nothing short of

（a）Short of theft，I will do anything I can for you.

除了偷窃之外，我什么都愿为你效劳。

（b）We are short of hands at present.

我们眼下人手不够。

（c）His conduct was nothing short of madness.

他的行为简直是发了狂。

【解说】

英文的“short of” = except，是副词的用法。在这前面常用的动词有“come”，“fall”，“run”等，有“不足”，“欠缺”的意思，其“of”作“from”解。至于“be short of”及“nothing（或 little）short of”中的“short of”则为形容词，在“be short of”时意为“不足”或“离开”，在“nothing short of”时意为“完全”，用法仍有如副词一般。

【类例】

The result fell short of my expectation.（那结果出乎我所预料。）

The result was nothing short of my expectation.（那结果正如我所预料。）

Short of some tremendous accident or untoward event it could not be anything else.（除了是一件重大事件或不幸事件外，这不可能是别的事情。）

They were short of money.（他们缺少钱。）

They were still five miles short of their destination.（他们距目的地还差五英里。）

It was little（或 nothing）short of miraculous（或 a miracle）.（这几乎是奇迹。）

The arrow fell short of the mark.（矢未中的。）

We have run short of tea.（我们的茶叶不够了。）

He committed every crime short of murder.（他只差没有杀人，什么罪都犯了。）

We have reason to believe that our education falls short of what we should wish it to be.（我们有充分的理由相信，我国的教育还未达到我们所理想的境地。）

【习题 122】

1. In this instance fame has fallen short of the truth.

2. Sleep was out of the question；for even if they dared to stay，they knew that to lie down on the ground was little short of certain death.

3. To impose a new civilization on an ancient culture is naturally a gigantic undertaking；and Japan can only be admired for attempting it，and having so well succeeded in accomplishing it. Could the achievement have been realized without losing some of the virtues of either civilization，it would be nothing short of a miracle.

（123）ever so

（a）There are ever so many schools in Taiwan.

台湾的学校非常的多。

（b）Be a man ever so rich，he ought not to be idle.

人无论怎样有钱，也不可以懒惰。

【解说】

在（a）例中的“ever so” = very；exceedingly，可译作“非常”，在（b）例中的“ever so”，便有让步的意思，等于说“however”，有“in or to whatever conceivable degree or extent”的意思。可译作“无论怎样的”。这个“ever so”的古写法是“never so”，从字面看去好像意思相反，其实完全同义，例如英文名歌中有一句脍炙人口的句子，便是用的古文说法：Home is home，be it never so humble.（ = however humble it may be）。（无论怎样卑陋，家总是自己的好。）我们由下面三个句子可以看出文字演变的迹象来：（1）He looked never before so healthy 〔as then〕，—（2）He looked never so healthy.—（3）He looked ever so healthy.

【类例】

He is ever so strong.（他非常强壮。）

The patient is ever so much better.（病人好得多了。）

Betide what may，we will not despair，were the world never so unfriendly.（Carlyle）（无论发生什么事情，我们也不会绝望，即令世界变得非常冷酷无情。）

I like it ever so much.（我非常喜欢它。）

Thank you ever so much for you kindness.（真谢谢你的帮忙。）

No one will be vexed or uneasy，linger I ever so late.（无论我呆到好晚，也没有人讨厌的。）

She’s got ever so many books.（他有非常多的书。）

Let him be ever so bad，he has some good points.（Curme）（他虽很坏，却也有他的好处。）

He was ever so tired.（ = He was as tired as he could possibly be.）（他非常疲倦。）

There is no place like home，be it never so homely.（即令很鄙陋，还是自己的家好。）

Such a mean fellow，though never so rich，should not be admitted into society.（这样卑鄙的人，虽则有钱，也不应允许他进入社交界。）

【习题 123】

1. There be heard ever so many more voices，and it was noiser than ever.

2. If my life’s journey is to be along an easy road to success，I shall have no objection；if it is to be along a hard one，let it be ever so rough，I will make it smooth and gain my object nevertheless.

3. He is in error，though never so wise.

（124）good and 的副词用法

The apples are good and ripe.

这些苹果完全成熟了。

【解说】

普通用“and”来连结两个形容词时，是表示两个形容词的对等作用，但第一个形容词如果是“good”，“nice”，“fine”等字的话，当它和“and”结合起来时，便构成“well”或是“nicely”意味的副词同等语了。在美国口语中，这种表现法用得很多，是作为强意语（intensifier）用的，例如“good and sweet”，“good and cold”，“good and plenty”等皆是，意为“very”或“thoroughly”，翻译时应特别注意，不可把“good and ripe”译成“又好又熟”，它的原意实为“well ripe”（熟透）罢了。这个表现法普通都可改为副词，如“nice and cool” = nicely cool（凉爽），“snug and warm” = snugly warm（暖适）。在 COD 上将“nice and”解释为“satisfactorily”。他例还有“fine and”，“lovely and”，“bright and”，“rare and”，“big and”等等。“lovely and warm” = dilightedly warm（温暖）是女性用语。

【类例】

I am good and tired.（我很疲倦。）

It’s good and cold out.（外面很冷。）

When it was good and dark I slid out from shore before moonrise.（Mark Twain）（天完全黑了，我就在月亮出来以前从河岸上溜出去了。）

The boy was bad. Yes！He was good and bad.（那孩子坏呀。是的！他真是很坏。）

The house stands nice and high.（那房子位置很高。）

The room was nice and cool.（房间凉爽。）

He’s good and dead，he is.（Stevenson）（那家伙死僵了。）

You’re fine and strong，aren’t you？（G. Eliot）（你孔武有力。）

You’ll make yourself fine and beholden to Aaron.（G. Eliot）（你对爱伦要很感激才是。）

The place is nice and healthy.（那地方对健康很好。）

The dish is nice and warm.（菜热的好吃。）

I was rare and hungry.（Stevenson）（我很饥饿。）

She would make thee rare and happy，Seth.（G. Eliot）（塞司，她会使你幸福的。）

【习题 124】

1. The car is going nice and fast.

2. I wish your eyes would always flash like that，for it looks so nice and manly.（Doyle）

（125）to one’s + 感情名词，to the + 感情名词 + of

（a）To my joy，he was quite free from danger.

使我高兴的是他已脱险了。

（b）He has recovered，much to the delight of his friends.

他病好了，使得他的朋友们大为欢喜。

【解说】

这是表结果的副词片语，句中的“to”就是表结果的介词。这两种形式和表感情的抽象名词结合时，意为“令人（喜、怒、哀、乐）的”。

【类例】

I found to my horror that the man was mad.（我发觉那人已发了疯大吃一惊。）

To my shame I must confess that I wronged you.（实在可羞耻，然我必得自认错怪了你。）

I found to my joy（ = was rejoiced to find）that he was alive.（令人可喜的是他还活着。）

To our surprise（或 astonishment）he has succeeded.（他的成功使我们感到惊异。）

To my disappointment，I found that he had left this country.（听说他已出国使我怅惘。）

So the matter has ended to the unspeakable relief of everybody.（事情如此了结，大家都非常安心了。）

She revenged herself to her heart’s content.（她尽情报复了。）

The little animal，to the astonishment of the spectators，expired without showing any signs of pain.（使观众大吃一惊的是那个小动物竟一点痛苦的样子也没有就气绝了。）

To her horror she saw clouds of smoke issuing from her master’s nose！（使她大为恐怖的是她看到一阵阵的烟从她主人的鼻孔中冒出来！）

【习题 125】

1. And to his great surprise and sorrow，he saw that his dear old mother was seriously ill in bed，looking very pale and almost without consciousness.

2. One of the commonest faults of writing is the use of long and many-syllabed words when short，simple words would do as well. The greatest writers often do this，to their shame.

（126）so far，so far as，so far as…is concerned

（a）So far so good.（ = Up to this point everything is satisfactory.）

到目前为止一切良好。

（b）He isn’t dead so far as I know.

据我所知他并未死。

（c）So far as his eyes were concerned，he was already an old man.

单就视力来说，他已经是一个老人了。

【解说】

英文的“so far” = so far forth = thus far，意为“到目前为止”。“so far as”与“as far as”同，照字面译时为“像……那样远”，如 We did not go so far as the bridge.（我们没有走到桥那样远去），引申为“就……而论”，如 So far as I know，he has not much money.（就我所知，他没有很多的钱。）至于“so far as…is concerned”，意为“就关于……来说”，“别的不说，单就……来说”。“so far as I am concerned” = as for me.（就我个人来说）。“as far as”由“距离”而变成“范围”，“as far as”是一个介词片语（Preposition Phrase），而“so far as”一般用作连词片语（Conjunction Phrase），表程度或界限的“in so far as”，则常用作连词，如作介词用是不合文法的（ungrammatical）（MEU）。“so far as”虽与“as far as”通用，但“so far”却与“as for”不同，“as for”与“as to”一样，是再提到已说过的事时用的，意为“关于”，如 As for me，I think I’d rather stay at home.（至于我呢，则宁留在家里。）As for news，I have little to say.（关于报导，无可奉告。）

【类例】

So far you have been successful.（到目前为止，你是成功了。）

In as far as it is an inspiration，it is a gift from Heaven.（A. A. Milne）（只要是灵感，就是天赐。）

If I understand your brother，he only means so far as your having some thoughts of marrying.（J. Austen）（就我所理解的来说，你的兄弟不过是说，只有你想着结婚的事。）

So far you are right.（到此为止你是对的。）

Now that we have come so far，we may as well go all the way.（已经走了这么远，我们不难走完全程的。）

But so far there is no certainty as to the main starting grounds of the locusts.（Henry Jackson）（但是到现在为止，我们还不知道蝗虫主要的出发点在哪里。）

No casualties were reported thus far.（至今为止还未接到死伤的报告。）

Very wisely，he did as she ordered，for as far as he knew the revolver might be loaded.（H. Horn）（很聪明地他照她吩咐的做了，因为就他所知，那手枪也许是上了子弹的。）

Man is a rational animal—so at least I have been told. Throughout a long life，I have looked diligently for evidence in favour of this statement，but so far I have not had the good fortune to come across it.（人是理性的动物——至少我听说的是如此。在很长的时间里，我一直勤勉地在搜寻支持此说的证据，但至今为止我没有那般好运找到它。）

So far as the style is concerned（ = as regards the style），it leaves very little to be desired.（仅就文章来说，几乎无可指摘。）

The sun appears to take his daily course over the earth，while it is really the earth which moves. The sun，at least，so far as we are concerned，is standing still.（太阳好像是每天围绕地球在走，而实际走动的却是地球。至少就我们地球上的人来说，太阳是屹立不动的。）

【习题 126】

1. The man who enjoys watching football is so far superior to the man who does not.

2. As far back as history goes men have always had some knowledge of the facts of nature；and those nations，like the Egyptians and Chinese，which long ago had become highly civilized，had learnt a great deal，and must probably have known some things of which we are still ignorant.

3. So far as people who have no ear for music are concerned，it would be a waste of time and money for them to try to learn music.

4. The literature of the past is only of value in so far as it has significance today，just as history is only of use if it can throw a light upon the contemporary scene.

Ⅺ. 连词的造句

（127）and that

Return to your work，and that at once.

回去工作，而且要马上去。

【解说】

这个“and that”应译为“而且”，是加强语气的省略说法，如 You must tell him at once. 一句普通的话，加强语气说时，便是 You must tell him，and tell him at once. 再简略地说，便成为 You must tell him，and that at once. 了。可知这个“that”是代表“tell him”的。一般都是将这个指示代名词的“that”，用来代表上文的全部或一部分，如例题的句子便是以“that”代表“return to your work.”整个句子的。OED 上说，“Used emphatically，instead of repeating previous words or phrase. Preceded by and（rarely but），and referring，to something in the previous cluse”. 一般都是用“and that”的形式，不过如指前面的复数名词时，也可说成“and those”，例如 I have only three rings，and those not of the best.（and those = and those three rings）。又如 With very short intervals of sleep，and those entirely filled with dream.（Fielding）

【类例】

The snow began to come down and that in earnest.（开始下雪了，而且下得很大。）

He makes mistakes，and that very often.（他弄错，而且常常弄错。）

He will come，and that soon.（他要来，而且马上要来。）

I studied Greek and Latin，when I was young，and that at Oxford.（我年轻时学过希腊语拉丁文，而且是在牛津大学学的。）

All men seek after happiness，and that without any exception.（所有的人都要追求幸福，且无例外。）

Every moment may be put to some use，and that with much more pleasure than if unemployed.（时时刻刻都是可加利用来做点什么事的，而且比不做事更为快乐。）

He speaks English，and that very well.（他会说英语，而且说得很好。）

The ostrich swallowed a stone，and that a considerably big one.（鸵鸟吞下了一块石头，而且是一块相当大的石头。）

【习题 127】

1. They alone have the right to change it，and that only in a particular way.（James Bryce）

2. I have tried in vain to account for the fact that with their absurd habits of eating and indolence，the German students can study so many hours and that to extreme old age.

（128）at once…and

The novel is at once pleasing and instructive.

那部小说既有趣又有益。

【解说】

普通说“at once”的意思是“立刻”（immediately），如 She told him to leave the room at once.（她要他立刻离开那房间。）但这个“at once”也可作“同时”（at the same time）解，尤其是后面跟得有“and”时为然，例如 Do not all speak at once.（不要大家同时说话。）英文的“at once A and B”与“both A and B”同义，都是所谓相关连词（Correlative Conjunction）。

【类例】

I was at once（ = both）comforted and terrified by this thought.（这样一想既安心而又恐惧。）

His father was at once strict and kindly.（他父亲又严厉又仁慈。）

The expression was at once grand and sweet.（Hawthorne）（那表情既威风而又温和。）

He was at once detested and despised.（他既可恨又可鄙。）

The story he told us was at once interesting and instructive.（他讲给我们听的故事，既有趣，又有益。）

【习题 128】

1. Very few will doubt that it is science which has at once quickened the demand for general education in modern times and the education itself effective.

2. Accustomed to play the host in the highest circles，he charmed and dominated all whom he approached；there was something at once winning and authoritative in his address（ = personal bearing）；and his extraordinary coolness gave him yet another distinction in this half maniacal society.（R. L. Stevenson）

（129）in that

Men differ from brutes in that they can think and speak.

人之所以异于兽类，就在能说话又能想事。

【解说】

这是一种近乎文言的表现法，意思由“在那样的一点上”，而变成“因为”（since；because）了。有时也可以说“in this”，二者都是很庄重的文体，在正式的论述中常见的用法。

【类例】

The budget is unrealistic in that it disregards increased costs.（这预算不符实际，因为忽视了增加的费用。）

Vinyl is similar to cellophane in that it is transparent.（乙烯基在透明的一点上，与玻璃纸相似。）

He didn’t think the better of her in that she had a lot of imagination.（因为她的想像力丰富，他对她的评价不高。）

There is not a war in the world，no，nor an injustice，but you women are answerable for it，not in that you have provoked，but in that you have not hindered.（世界上任何一次战争，不，任何一次不讲道义的行为，都应由你们女人来负责，并不是因为那是你们鼓励起来的，而是因为你们没有去加以阻止。）

【习题 129】

1. Some things they do in that they are men…some things in that they are men misled and blinded with error.（Hooker）

2. The scheme differs from the common method of accounting for the origin of our affections in this，that it supposes what is personal or selfish in our affections to be the growth of time and habit.（Hazlitt）

（130）It is true…but

It is true I went there，but I saw none.

我诚然去过那里，但我没有见到一个人。

【解说】

这种“It is true…but”的形式，意为“诚然是…不过”。“It is true”有时可换用“I admit”，“It is admitted”，“no doubt”，“indeed”，“to be sure”等字样，“but”也可换用“yet”，“still”等字，“it is”也可以略去，意思都是一样。

【类例】

It is true he is young，but he is prudent for his age.（诚然他是年轻，但以他的年龄，他是谨慎明智的。）

It is true he is old，but he is still strong.（老则老矣，然其体力犹健。）

A good method，to be sure—but hard to practice.（诚属妙策，然不易实行。）

For me，indeed，there is no labour at any time，but nevertheless does Sunday bring me repose.（对我来说，诚然是任何时候都没有劳动，不过到了礼拜天才真正获得心神的安静。）

Life is indeed a tragedy at times and a comedy very often，but as a rule it is what we choose to make it.（诚然人生有时是悲剧，而常常是喜剧，不过一般说来，还是看我们自己要它是什么就是什么。）

It is true that he did his best，but on this occasion he was careless.（诚然他是尽了全力，但在这个场合，他却不免疏忽了。）

His music was not classical indeed，but was good of its kind.（他的音乐诚非古典，但是在那一类中还算是好的。）

It is hot，no doubt，but then the heat is dry.（确是很热，但没有湿气。）

【习题 130】

1. It is true that road travel in the old days was difficult，tedious，and uncomforable，but it was comparatively safe.

2. Those who are born in the purple have indeed many advantages，but they pay dearly for them.

Ⅻ. 其他的造句

（131）one，as such

If you want a watch，I will give you one.

如果你想要一只表，我就给你一只。

（b）He is a student，and must be treated as such.

他是一个学生，我们一定要以学生待他。

【解说】

为避免反复使用同一个名词，我们常要采用代名词，如果是同名同物时用“it”，如果是同名异物时则用“one”，如：

（1）If you want the watch，you can have it.

（2）If you want a watch，you can have one.

第一句是代表同名同物，故用“it”；第二句是代表同名异物，故用“one”，我们也可以说，“it”是指特定的东西，而“one”则是指不定的东西。作为反复代名词用的“such”，只有“as such”一个用法。换句话说，反复代名词普通是用“one”，如在“as”后就换用“such”，即不说“as one”，而说“as such”。英文的“as such”含义有二，其一为“照其资格”（in that capacity），另一为“其本身”（in itself 或 in themselves）。

【类例】

I have lost my umbrella；I think I must buy one.（我把雨伞丢了，我想要另买一把。）

When the telephone was invented and was ready to use，hardly anybody cared to install one.（当电话发明了，且可供实用时，却很少的人要装置它。）the telephone 指一般的电话，故不用“it”而用“one”。

He is a child，and must be treated as such.（他是一个小孩，必须把他作小孩看待。）

He is the master，and as such must be obeyed.（他是主人，因此必须服从他。）

He was a foreigner and was treated as such.（他是一个外国人，所以被当作外国人看待。）

It was as a physician that he presented himself，and as such was cordially received.（Hawthorne）（他以医师的身份在这里出现，而大家便热诚地把他当作医师来接待他。）

History as such is too often neglected.（历史本身常被忽视。）

Wealth，as such，doesn’t matter much.（单是有钱算不得什么。）

In country places strangers are welcome as such.（在乡下外来的人就因为这个理由而大受欢迎。）

【习题 131】

1. He had not been bred a soldier，and had no inclination to bocome one.

2. New-year resolutions are good enough as such，but unless they are got into heart and life，as well as down in neat lines on papers，they will amount to little.

3. Witty men are apt to imagine they are agreeable as such.（Steele）

（132）one thing…another

It is one thing to speak and another to act.

说是一件事，做又是另外一件事。

【解说】

在“one thing…another（thing）”的表现法中，“one”和“another”是对立的，正好像“some…other”是对立的一样，不可把这两个同义的表现法混淆起来。“one thing”有时可以略去，有时又可将“thing”字换用别的名词。这可翻译为“…是一事…又是一事”，表示二者判然不同，不可混为一谈。

【类例】

Theory is one thing and practice（is）another，so they don’t necessarily go together.（理论和实际判然不同，不一定能达到一致。）

For one reason or another（或 For some reason or other）he resigned his post.（不晓得什么理由他辞职了。）

To know is one thing，and to teach is another.（自己懂得是一件事情，要教人又是另外一件事情。）

That’s quite another thing.（那是另外一件事。）

One man’s meat is another man’s poison.（施于甲为肉，施于乙为毒。利于甲者未必利于乙。）

【习题 132】

1. It is one thing to own a library；it is quite another to use it wisely.

2. There is no more dangerous experiment than that of undertaking to be one thing before a man’s face and another behind his back.

（133）in + 人物

They have an enemy in him.

他才是他们的敌人。

【解说】

这个“in” = in the person of（在那人身上），表一个人身上所有的性质、资格、能力等，原是由于形状（与形状有关的用“in”，如“in a circle”，“in print”，“in couples”，“in a heap”，“in human shape”，“in ruins”等）所转来，而有“即…是也”，“就是”的译法。这种“in”多出现在“have”，“find”，“see”，“behold”，“lose”等动词的后面。

【类例】

We found a true friend in（the person of）him.（他才是我们真正的朋友。）

I have a good companion in（the shape of）a dog.（我有良朋，即犬是也。）

We have lost a good teacher in Mr. Wong.（王先生之死，使我们痛失良师。）

They see a great man in every Chinese.（他们见到中国人都认为是伟大的。）

He had something of the hero in him.（或 in his nature）（他有英雄气概。）

The love of beauty is inherent in poets.（爱美乃诗人之天性。）

I didn’t suspect she had it in her.（我想她没有那种气质。）

I will defend him as far as in me lies.（我要尽力为他辩护。）

China lost a great artist in（the death of）Chi Pai-shih.（齐白石之死，使中国失去了一个伟大的艺术家。）

【习题 133】

1. If ever thou wanted a friend，thou shalt have one in Richard Steele.（Thackeray）

2. You behold in me one who has slain the monster.

3. I recognized an old friend in the star actor.

（134）before 的四种译法

（a）Before he came here，he was in America.

他来此以前是在美国。（以前）

（b）You must not count your chickens before they are hatched.

小鸡尚未孵出不可作数。（尚未）

（c）It was long before he came.

他过了许久以后才来。（以后）

（d）It was not long before he came.

他不久就来了。（“before”不要译出）

【解说】

这个连词的“before”，不可只照字面译为“以前”，因为由句子的不同，还有其他各种译法，甚至译成相反的意思，或根本不去理它。我们翻译成中文时，必须注意中文的语法，不可死抱着英文原文的意思不放，如“before they are hatched”一句话，常被人译成“未孵出前”，又是“未”，又是“前”，不免重复，不如译成“未孵出时”或“在孵出前”。

【类例】

He went away before I could reply.（或 before I had time to reply）.（我未及作答他已离去。）

She became a mother before she had attained her fifteenth year.（她不到十五岁已做了母亲了。）

It was midnight before he returned.（他在夜半以后才回来。）

I had not waited long before he came.（稍候即至。）

I had not gone a mile before I felt tired.（没有走到一英里路，我已经疲倦了。）

They had not been married a month before they quarrelled.（结婚未足月，夫妻已反目。）

My father died before I was born.（父亲在我出生以前就去世了。）

He arrived there before it began to rain.（他到达那里的时候，天还没有下雨。）

【习题 134】

1. He had gone some distance before he missed the book.

2. They had not proceeded far before they perceived a bear making toward them with great rage.

第三编
疑难句法及文章译例

壹　英文类似句辨异

英文中常常有些句子，看去很是相似，其实总有一点不同，而那一点不同，就使得意义大为悬殊。这些句子最易使初学者难于觉察，而把意义弄错。读书误解，译书谬误，大都是由于这些地方有欠仔细所致，所以不要以为是小处，其实大有细心研究的必要。所谓差之毫厘，失之千里，正是像这样的。有时只因为在句子中多加了一个小小的冠词，而使得意义大变；有时两个成语，除有的多了一个不定冠词外，别无差异，而意义也就大不相同。有时因一个形容词或副词的地位不同，也会使句子产生不同的意义。诸如此类，不胜枚举，兹就见闻所及，采集一百二十例，除附译文外，又多加以注释，俾使研习翻译的学生，有所了解，而获助益。

1.（a）A number of members are absent.

（b）The number of members is alarming.

（a）多数的会员没有到会。

（b）会员人数多得可惊。

注　英文的 number 一字，有两个主要的含义：一为“数目”或“总数”，如（b）例，故为单数。一为“许多”或“多数”，如（a）例，故为复数。他例如 The number of fools is infinite.（愚人的数目是无穷尽的。）He owns a number of houses in this street.（他在这街上有许多屋子。）

2.（a）They are the students of our school.

（b）They are students of our school.

（a）他们是本校的全体学生。

（b）他们是本校的一部分学生。

注　有定冠词的复数名词代表全体，无定冠词的复数名词，代表一部分。他例如 The Americans are an active people.（美国人是活跃的民族。）Americans think that they can win the war in Vietnam.（美国人以为他们可在越南战胜。）

3.（a）His success is out of question.

（b）His success is out of the question.

（a）他必成功。

（b）他必失败。

注　out of question = beyond question. 无疑；不待言。out of the question = not to be thought of；quite impossible. 决不可能；无讨论的价值。

4.（a）The enemy is in possession of the fortress.

（b）The fortress is in the possession of the enemy.

（a）那炮台一时为敌人所占领。

（b）那炮台的主权为敌人所有。

注　in possession of = having in one’s possession. 保持在某人手中，但主权并非某人所有。in the possession of = held by；possessed of. 为某人所有，即主权属于某人。前者为一时占有，后者为主权所有。前者以人为主语，后者以物为主语。

5.（a）She was with a child.

（b）She was with child.

（a）她带了一个孩子。

（b）她身怀六甲。

注　be with child = be pregnant. 怀孕。

6.（a）She kept the house.

（b）She kept house.

（a）她守在家里。

（b）她管理家务。

注　keep house = manage the affairs of a household. 还可以再加形容词，如 keep a good house = provide good food and plenty of comfort. 治家有条。所以管家婆就叫 housekeeper。

7.（a）A lawyer would make a better statesman than a soldier.

（b）A lawyer would make a better statesman than soldier.

（a）律师比军人更易成为好政治家。

（b）律师改做政治家比改做军人更易成功。

注　（a）句的 than a soldier = than a soldier would make a statesman. 两人相比，应重复 that 后的冠词。（b）句的 than soldier = than he would make a soldier. 两职相比，便在 than 后不要重复冠词。

8.（a）He is rather a foolish fellow.

（b）He is a rather foolish fellow.

（a）说他是一个愚笨的人更为恰当。

（b）他是一个有点愚笨的人。

注　（a）句中的 rather 是修饰 a foolish fellow 的，（b）句中的 rather 只是修饰 foolish 一字的。他例如 We have come rather a long way.（way = distance）（我们是从相当的远距离来的。）We have come a rather long way.（way = route）（我们来自颇远的路程。）

9.（a）Miss Taylor was in charge of the children.

（b）The children were in the charge of Miss Taylor.

（a）戴小姐负责管理孩子。

（b）孩子由戴小姐照顾。

注　如果把受照顾者作主语时，就应在 charge 前加一个定冠词。他例如 The patient is in the charge of the nurse. 或 The nurse is in charge of the patient.

10.（a）The new harbour is in course of construction.

（b）Fossils were found in the course of the work.

（a）新码头正在兴建中。

（b）在工事中发现了化石。

注　in course of = in process of. 正在。in the course of = during or before the end of. 在…中；在…时间之内。

11.（a）The maid of honour had grey hair.

（b）The maid of honour had grey hairs.

（a）白头宫女。

（b）二毛宫女。

注　（a）句中的 hair 是一个集合名词，代表整体，即全部的头发，如说 She has golden hair.（满头金发。）这是一个不可数的（uncountable）名词，不能加〔s〕使它变成复数的。但（b）句中的 hairs，便是一个可数的（countable）普通名词，指一部分而言，如说 grey hairs，意为头发花白，两色相间，故中文称为“二毛”，通例指老年，如《左传》上说的“不擒二毛”，《圣经》上说的 bring down a person’s grey hairs in sorrow to the grave.（使老年忧愁促其早死。）

12.（a）He is a child of ten.

（b）He is a father of ten.

（a）他是一个十岁大的孩子。

（b）他是一个有十个孩子的父亲。

注　（b）句的表现法，可以看出语言的经济。

13.（a）She served me with a kind of coffee.

（b）She served me with coffee of a kind.

（a）她请我喝一种咖啡。

（b）她给我一杯说是咖啡而非咖啡的东西。

注　（b）句是表现出一种轻蔑的说法。意为徒有其名，实则太无味了。参考 a kind of gentleman 虽不能说很标准，总算是一种绅士。a gentleman of a kind 也称为绅士，实在是冒充的，强调 non-typical position of the individual，非典型的，算不了什么绅士。

14.（a）You have offended the girl as deeply as I.

（b）You have offended the girl as deeply as me.

（a）你触犯了那女子之深和我一样。

（b）你触犯了那女子和触犯了我一样的深。

注　（b）句中的 me 为 offended 的宾语，而非 as 的宾语。as me = as you have offended me.

15.（a）You love me better than he.

（b）You love me better than him.

（a）你爱我比他爱我更甚。

（b）你爱我比爱他更甚。

注　（a）than he = than he loves me.

（b）than him = than you love him.

16.（a）This is no place for me to go to.

（b）There is no place for me to go to.

（a）那不是我去的地方。

（b）我没有地方好去。

注　there is 为“有”，there is no 为“没有”。

17.（a）Under the Mongol Dynasty Chinese men of letters stood at the foot of the social ladder.

（b）He lay the money and treasures at the feet of the beautiful lady.

（a）在元朝统治之下，中国的文人社会地位最低。

（b）他把财宝献给那个美妇。

注　（a）at the foot of 在底层，在基部，如 the foot of a mountain 山脚。at the foot of the page 在页底。My house stands at the foot of a hill. 我家位于山麓。Notes are given at the foot of every page. 每页下端有注。（b）at the feet of 在脚跟前，在足下，如 They fell down at the feet of their enemy. 他们降服了。屈伏在敌人的足下。

18.（a）This is my portrait.

（b）This is a portrait of me.

（c）This is a portrait of mine.

（a）这是我画的肖像画。

（b）这是我的肖像。

（c）这是我所藏的肖像画。

注　除（b）意为 representing me（画的是我的像）以外，其余二句都不十分肯定，如（c）除 my property（所藏）一义外，还有 painted by me（所绘）的意思。（a）更是几乎三个意思都有，既有所绘意，也有所藏意，还有画的我的肖像的意思。

19.（a）They are an industrious people.

（b）They are industrious people.

（a）他们是一种勤励的国民。

（b）他们是一些勤励的人们。

注　a people = a nation 国民。people = men 人们。

20.（a）You will find some cigars of mine in the drawer.

（b）You will find some of my cigars in the drawer.

（a）在那抽屉里你可以找到我的雪茄烟。

（b）在那抽屉里你可以找到我有些雪茄烟在那里。

注　（a）表示全部，（b）表示一部分。又如说 three of my sisters 意为我许多姊妹中的三个；说 three sisters of mine 则表示三个以外再没有姊妹了。

21.（a）No one appeared from anywhere.

（b）They appeared from nowhere.

（a）任何地方都不见人影。

（b）他们不知是从哪里来的。

注　（a）句中的 anywhere 和（b）句中的 nowhere 都是名词。（b）句中的 nowhere = no place（无论哪里都不是的地方。）The rumor came from nowhere.（那谣言不晓得是从哪里来的。）如说“他逃到不知哪里去了”英文就说 He has escaped nobody knows where.（ = He has escaped God knows where.）

22.（a）We met nobody.

（b）We didn’t meet anybody.

（a）阒无一人。

（b）我们一个人也没有看见。

注　（a）句带点文言的味道，（b）句才是口语的说法。

23.（a）He is not a fool.

（b）He is no fool.

（a）他不是傻子。

（b）他不但不傻，而且聪明。

注　一般的情形是 No sound was to be heard = Not a sound was to be heard. He has no money. = He has not any money. 但这个 no 又可以表示与它后接的字相反的意思，如上举例句说的 He is no fool. = He is aclever man. 及 He showed no great skill. = He showed very little skill. 上举的（a）句为普通的否定句，意即 He is not foolish.（他并不傻。）（b）句意为 He is nobody’s fool. 昔日国王豢养的小丑或弄臣叫做 fool，是供人愚弄的，现在说他不受任何人的愚弄，可见他不傻，而且是很聪明的。

24.（a）He has no more than ten books.

（b）He has not more than ten books.

（a）他只有十本书。

（b）他至多不过十本书。

注　no more than = only. 仅只。

not more than = at most. 至多；或不足。

25.（a）It is not always good to live alone.

（b）It is not good always to live alone.

（a）离群索居不一定好。

（b）老是离群索居是不好的。

注　（a）是部分否定。（b）是全部否定。

26.（a）He is not a little afraid of it.

（b）He is not a bit afraid of it.

（a）他非常怕。

（b）他一点也不怕。

注　not a little = much. not a bit = not at all. 二者皆系副词片语。

27.（a）He has not a little experience.

（b）He has not the least experience.

（a）他很有经验。

（b）他毫无经验。

注　not a little = much. not the least = no. 二者皆系形容词片语。

28.（a）He is not quite so diligent as she.

（b）He is not nearly so diligent as she.

（a）他没有她那样勤学。

（b）他决无她那样勤学。

注　not quite = a little less…than 稍稍不及（不足），稍劣。not nearly = far from 大为不及（不足），大劣。

29.（a）I ask you nothing.

（b）I ask nothing of you.

（c）I ask you for nothing.

（a）我没有什么要问你的。

（b）我没有什么要求你的。

（c）我没有什么要请求你的。

注　（b）有时也可以说成（a），因为这个 of 是 out of 的意思。（c）ask for 意为 demand（要求，请求），如 ask for a loan of money.（请求告贷。）

30.（a）We hadn’t anything to eat.

（b）We didn’t have anything to eat.

（a）我们家里一点吃的东西也没有了。

（b）我们什么也没有吃。

注　（a）句意为 We had no food in our possession.（b）句意为 We did not partake of any food.

31.（a）Write and tell me whether I am to come.

（b）Write and tell me if I am to come.

（a）请写信通知我看我有去的必要没有。

（b）如果我没有去的必要你就不必回信了。

注　表示“要不要”或“是不是”等意时，英文常用 whether 一字，有时在口语中则用 if 代 whether，二者原是没有什么分别的。不过把两句话比较研究时，也多少可以发现有些歧异，据 Palmer 的说法，用 if 时，等于说 Send me a letter if I am to come，but if I am not to come，don’t trouble to send me a letter.

32.（a）This is the same knife as I have lost.

（b）This is the same knife that I have lost.

（a）这把小刀和我失掉的一把完全一样。

（b）这就是我失掉的那把小刀。

注　the same…as 同类物。the same…that 同一物。

33.（a）Ask him when he comes back.

（b）Ask him when he will come back.

（a）他回来的时候你就问他。

（b）你问他要什么时候回来。

注　（a）句中的 when he comes back 是副词子句，故要用现在时态代未来时态；（b）句中的 when he will come back 是名词子句，故仍保留未来时态。

34.（a）I have to spend much money.

（b）I have much money to spend.

（a）我非花许多钱不可。

（b）我有许多钱可花。

注　（a）句中的 have to = be obliged to，不得不，必须。（b）句中 have much money = am rich enough. 他例如：

（a）I have to tell you something.（我必须告诉你一件事。）（b）I have something to tell you.（我有话要跟你说。）可见 have to 分开和连续，意思是可能发生歧异的。

35.（a）Whoever says so is a liar.

（b）Whoever may say so，he is a liar.

（a）说那种话的人，不问是谁，都是撒谎。

（b）谁说那种话，也就是撒谎。

注　在（a）中的 whoever = the person that. 在（b）中的 whoever = though any person.

36.（a）They say Joe is mad，and so he is.

（b）She is mad，and so is he.

（a）人们说乔发狂了，他真是那样的。

（b）她发狂了，他也是一样。

注　“so + 主语 + 动词”中的 so，意为 yes（正是）。“so + 动词 + 主语”中的 so，意为 also（也是）。

37.（a）I am sorry to disturb you.

（b）I should be sorry to disturb you.

（a）打扰你真对不起。

（b）如果会打扰你的话，那就真对不起啦。

注　（a）句意为事实上是在打扰。（b）句意为还不晓得是不是会打扰，如果是的话。类例如：

（a）I think it is not true.（我想这不会是真的。）（b）I should think it is not true.（我看这恐怕不会是真的。）

38.（a）She wrote she was coming.

（b）She wrote（for）me to come.

（a）她写信说要来。

（b）她写信要我去。

注　（b）句中的 for，说话时可省略。英文说的 write for 是写信去要什么，如 I will write for a copy.（我就写信去买一部。）句中的 to come，是宾格补语，即是说要我到她那里去。“去”的意思而用“来”表示的，是主观的说法。

39.（a）It makes him fear.

（b）It makes him feared.

（a）那使他怕起来。

（b）那使他受吓不小。

注　（a）句指自己怕；（b）句指别人使他怕。

40.（a）I left the window open.

（b）I kept the window open.

（a）我让窗子开着。

（b）我故意不开窗。

注　（a）意为让它去，不在乎。（b）意指故意的动作。

41.（a）I had money enough to buy it.

（b）I had money enough to have bought it.

（a）我曾有足够买那东西的钱。

（b）如果我要买那东西的话，我是有足够的钱的。

注　（b）句中实含有 I had money enough，but I did not buy it. 的意思，用 to have bought，是表示与过去的事实相反的情形，在本句中即是说“未买”。有的文法家把它看作假设语气。

42.（a）Did you say what he wanted？

（b）What did you say he wanted？

（a）你曾说他要什么是不是？

（b）你曾问他要的是什么？

注　（a）句的答案是 Yes，I did. 或 No，I didn’t.（b）句的答案是 I said he wanted some paper. 之类，（b）句中的 did you say 是插入句。

43.（a）Did you do any work last evening？

（b）Did yuu do some work last evening？

（a）昨天晚上你做了点什么事吗？

（b）你要做的事昨天晚上又做了一点吗？

注　（a）句的说法是对别人做的事或没有做，完全不知道的时候发问的，而（b）句则是知道对方有事要做（每晚），问他进行的情形如何时而说的。

44.（a）He is as good as dead.

（b）His brain is as good as ever.

（a）他简直像死了一样。

（b）他的头脑还是和从前一样的好。

注　（a）句中的 as good as 是一个成语，意为“几乎等于”，“简直一样”，（b）句中的 good 作“好”的本意解释，照字面译即可。

45.（a）Which train are you going by？

（b）What train are you going by？

（a）你坐哪一班车去？

（b）你坐几点钟的车去？

注　（a）句中的 which 是指“哪一个？”，即在许多当中指定一个。（b）句中的 what，作疑问形容词用，意为“什么？”问什么火车，即指几点钟开的火车。

46.（a）He is afraid to die.

（b）He is afraid that he will die.

（c）He is afraid of death.

（d）He is afraid of dying.

（e）He is afraid of being killed.

（a）他怕死。

（b）他惧怕他会死。

（c）他怕死亡。

（d）他担心会死。

（e）他担心被杀。

注　在 be afraid 后，可自成段落，不必接任何字，也可以接 that 引导出来的子句，或不定词或 of 片语。这比说 fear，更为口语化。（a）句的 He is afraid to die. = He dare not die. 因为恐怖那种结果而不敢尝试。又如说 He is afraid to swim，是说他怕而不敢下水去游泳。如说 He is afraid of drowning. 就是他生怕淹死。前者是未下水，后者是已下水。（d）句的 He is afraid of dying. = He is afraid lest he should die. 意为他担心他会死。这个 lest，用于 fear 或 be afraid 后意为 that. 至于在 afraid of 之后，可接动名词或名词，而（e）句的 afraid of being killed，还是一样，只是加了一个被动进去而已。（c）句的 He is afraid of death. = He is afraid to die. 在 afraid 后接子句时（如 lest…should，that…might 等），不问是假设语气或直陈语气，都是指不希望有的事，所谓 unpleasant probability，担心有那样的事发生。他例如 I am afraid lest I should（ = that I might）hurt his feelings.（生怕使他不高兴。）I am afraid（that）we are not in time.（我恐怕我们迟到了。）I am afraid（that）it will rain.（ = lest it should rain）.（怕会下雨。）普通“afraid + 子句”，表遗憾或抱歉的意思，如 I am afraid（that）I cannot lend you $1，000.（对不起，我恐怕不能够借给你一千元。）

47.（a）He is certain of returning.

（b）He is certain to return.

（a）他自信一定要回来的。

（b）他一定会回来的。

注　（a）句是表示其主语的“他”，对他自己将要回来的事毫无疑惑；（b）句是说别人对他将要回来的那回事没有疑惑。同样地 He is sure of success.（他自认一定成功。）He is sure to succeed.（我想他一定成功。）

48.（a）It has been raining continually for two days.

（b）It has been raining continuously for two days.

（a）断续地下了两天的雨。

（b）不停地下了两天的雨。

注　（a）continual = frequently or closely repeated 表断断续续，即是间歇的。（b）continuous = without interruption 表继续不断的。

49.（a）Have you finished your homework yet？

（b）Have you finished your homework already？

（a）你的课外作业做好了吗？（还是没有？）

（b）你的课外作业就已经做好了？（真快！）

注　（a）句是普通情形“问对方是否已经做好”。（b）句则知道对方已经做好，而不免觉得惊奇对方何以如此的快，already 一字要念得重一点。

52.（a）Happily he did not die.

（b）He did not die happily.

（a）他幸免于死。

（b）他未死于安乐。

注　（a）句中的副词 happily，是修饰整句的，而（b）句中的副词 happily 则是修饰动词 die 的。

51.（a）Any doctor will say something to please his patients.

（b）Some doctor will say anything to please his patients.

（a）任何医生都会对他的病人说点安慰的话的。

（b）有的医生会对他的病人说点安慰的话的。

52.（a）He is the only son of a poor man.

（b）He is only a son of a poor man.

（a）他是一个穷人的独子。

（b）他不过是一个穷人的儿子。

注　在（a）句中，only 作形容词用，比较简单。在（b）句中，only 作副词用时就复杂多了。作副词用的 only，最好是尽可能接近它所修饰的字，否则意义就变了。随着一个句子的语词的多少，而使 only 一语变动其地位，因而产生同数含义不同的句子出来，如由 only，the English，love，sports 四语构成的句子，则产生下列四种不同的句子：（1）Only the English love sports.（只有英国人爱好运动。）意指没有别的人。（2）The English only love sports.（英国人只是爱好运动而已。）而并不实际去运动。（3）The English love sports only.（英国人只爱好运动。）别的都不爱好。（4）The English love their only sports.（英国人爱好他们唯一的运动。）并没有别的运动。

53.（a）By trimming the sails，he tided over the crisis.

（b）Trimming the sails，he tided over the crisis.

（a）临机应变，度过危机。

（b）见风转舵，他得以渡过难关。

注　（a）句是普通的表现法，（b）句则为生动（vivid）的表现，因句中加上了一个 by 字，就显得语调太硬了。trim the sails = set sails to suit the wind，引申为 change one’s opinion，views，etc. to suit circumstances.

54.（a）It was the second year of the Republic.

（b）It was in the second year of the Republic.

（a）时在共和二年。

（b）那是共和二年发生的事。

注　（a）句中的 it 是代表“时”的，（b）句中的 it 是代表“事”的。

55.（a）He agreed to the plan.

（b）He agreed with the plan.

（a）他赞成那计划。

（b）他认为那计划很好。

注　（a）句的 agree to = give consent to，而（b）句的 agree with = regard…with approval.

56.（a）He was familiar to me.

（b）He was familiar with me.

（a）他是我很熟悉的人。

（b）他跟我太亲密了。

注　（a）句中的 familiar to = well known to；accustomed to. 如 His face is familiar to me.（很是面善。）（b）句中的 familiar with 如对事物说时，意为“精通”（well versed in），如对人来说，则含有轻蔑之意，表示超越身份，交情等不当的亲密。他例如 He made himself much too familiar with my wife.（他对我的太太过分亲密太冒失了。）I am familiar with the countryside.（对这乡间我很熟悉。）

57.（a）I have a friendship for him.

（b）I have a friendship with him.

（a）我跟他有交情。

（b）我和他交游。

注　（a）句的 have friendship for somebody，意为对某人具有好感，例如 His friendship for Byron began in the same year.（他和拜伦的交谊也是同一年开始的。）（b）句的 have friendship with somebody，意为“与之交游”，即和某人交际，彼此有往来，但不一定有交情。

58.（a）At the beginning of the term，our teacher addressed us in an eloquent speech.

（b）In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth.

（a）在学期开始的时候，我们的老师洋洋洒洒地向我们说了许多话。

（b）起初上帝创造了天和地。

注　（a）句的 at the beginning = at the start，意为“在开始的时候”，（b）句的 in the beginning = at first，意为“起初”。同类的句子还有 at the end = at last，意为“最后”，如 At the end of the term we shall have examinations（在学期结束时，我们有考试。）in the end = after all；finally，意为“毕竟”，“终于”，如 In the end he found out all the secret.（他终于发觉了所有的秘密。）还有 at the middle = between beginning and end，意为“在半途”，如 The novelist was born at the middle of the 19th century.（那小说家生于十九世纪中叶。）I entered the school at the middle of April.（我是四月半入校的。）in the middle = in the centre or heart 意为“在中央”，如 The boy stretched himself at full length in the middle of the room.（那男孩伸长手脚睡在房间的中央。）In the middle of the night，there was a fire near my house.（在夜半我家附近起了火。）

59.（a）I am busy at the moment.

（b）Let’s set aside for the moment the question of expense.

（c）Try to be calm and sensitive in the moment of danger.

（d）He is one of the men of the moment.

（e）She burst out crying on the moment.

（f）The clock is timed to the moment.

（a）我眼下很忙。

（b）我们暂时不妨把费用问题搁在一边。

（c）危险当头，必须镇定灵敏。

（d）他是当今风云人物之一。

（e）她当场就哭出来了。

（f）那时钟报时绝对准确。

注　at the moment = just now. for the moment = temporarily. in the moment = in case. of the moment = important at the present time. on the moment = all at once；on the spot. to the moment = with absolute punctuality.

60.（a）I have to be at business by nine.

（b）I have been pressed by business.

（c）He has a good head for business.

（d）He is in business with his father.

（e）Are you in London for pleasure or on business？

（f）In my daily walk to business I frequently meet a certain gentleman.

（a）我九点钟就要到店里去营业。

（b）我一直非常繁忙。

（c）他有经商之才。

（d）他们开一爿父子商店。

（e）你来伦敦是为游玩还是因公？

（f）我每天走去店里的时候，常遇到一位绅士。

注　at business 到店里去营业，出差，在执行任务。by business 由于事务，例如 I was prevented by business.（为事所阻。）for business 为着事务，为经商。in business. 从商，从事实业，如 a man in business（实业家）。This firm is now more than 60 years in business.（那店已经开办六十年了。）on business 因商务，因公，有事。No admittance except on business.（非公免进。）to business 办公，上班。At what time do you go to business every morning？（每天早晨你何时去上班？）

61.（a）The animal likes to live by itself.

（b）The bird builds its nest for itself.

（c）The door opened of itself.

（d）It is a small thing in itself.

（e）He was beside himself in joy.

（f）He had the room all to himself.

（a）那动物爱独居。

（b）那鸟自力营巢。

（c）那门自开。

（d）这本来是小事。

（e）他得意忘形。

（f）那房间归他专用。

注　by oneself = alone，意为“独自”，“离群索居”，但往往用作“自力”，“自然地”的意思。for oneself = independently，意为“独立”，“自力”，“不依赖他人”，但往往有 for its own sake（为自己）的意思。of oneself = spontaneously（出于自动，自然而然），但往往用作“独自”，“不假外力”的意思。in oneself = absolutely 意为“原来”，“本来”。beside oneself = wildly excited；mad；out of one’s sense，意为“神经错乱”，“忘形”，“疯狂”。to oneself = for one’s use solely. 意为“专用”，“限于自己一人”。

62.（a）He went to Taipei for pleasure.

（b）He went to Taipei with pleasure.

（c）He went to Taipei at pleasure.

（a）他往台北游玩去了。

（b）他高兴地到台北去了。

（c）他随心所欲地到台北去了。

注　for pleasure，意为“寻乐”，“行乐”。with pleasure，意为“乐意地”，“愿意地”。at pleasure，意为“随意地”，“恣意地”。他例如 He likes traved for pleasure. I will do it with pleasure. Will you come with us？Yes，with pleasure. You may come or go at pleasure.

63.（a）He spoke nothing on purpose.

（b）He spoke nothing to the purpose.

（c）He spoke nothing to no purpose.

（a）他什么也没有故意说。

（b）他说的一点也不得要领。

（c）他所言无不生效。

注　on purpose 故意。to the purpose 中肯。to no purpose 无效，毫无结果。例如 People sometimes work to no purpose. 人们有时辛苦工作而无收获。

64.（a）He presented a pistol to me.

（b）He presented a pistol at me.

（a）他送了我一支手枪。

（b）他以手枪向我。

注　（a）为好意的馈赠，（b）为敌意的威胁，at 在此表目标。

65.（a）The boat was under the bridge.

（b）The boat was below the bridge.

（a）船在桥拱下面。

（b）船在桥的下流。

66.（a）I shall be here till three o’clock.

（b）I shall be here by three o’clock.

（a）一直到三点钟，我都在这里。

（b）至迟三点钟，我会到这里来。

注　till = as late as，up to，至，直到。by = not later than，as soon as，before，迄，到…为止。by 可以不到指定的时候，till 则一定要到指定的时候。二字都是表示时间的限度，即“为止”，（a）句说的是人已经在此，（b）句说的是人还未来。

67.（a）With this he went away.

（b）On this he said so，

（c）At this he got angry.

（a）他一面这样说，一面就走了。

（b）他随即这样说了。

（c）他一见到这个就生气了。

注　with this = as saying 这样说着。on this = hereupon 于此，随即，随后。at this = at seeing（或 hearing）this 见到这个，听到这话。

68.（a）I am quite at fault.

（b）You are much in fault.

（c）He is faithful to a fault.

（a）我十分迷惑。

（b）你咎有应得。

（c）他非常忠实。

注　at fault = at a loss，in a puzzled or ignorant state，不知听措，昏乱，迷惑。in fault = guilty，to blame. 有过失，应尸其咎。to a fault = excessively，too（much）. 太，过于，非常。

69.（a）In a word，he is only a student.

（b）He calmed them at a word.

（a）一言以蔽之，他不过一介书生而已。

（b）他一句话，就把他们镇定下来了。

70.（a）He sticks to nothing.

（b）He sticks at nothing.

（a）他对任何事都无恒心。

（b）他无所踌躇。

注　stick to，意为“坚持”。stick at，意为“犹豫”。

71.（a）He has as much as she.

（b）He has half as much as she.

（c）He has as much again as she.

（d）He has half as much again as she.

（a）他有她一样多（的钱）。

（b）他只有她一半那样多（的钱）。

（c）他有她两倍那样多（的钱）。

（d）他有她一倍半那样多（的钱）。

72.（a）He will love his books as long as he lives.

（b）He will love his books so long as they are instructive.

（a）在他有生之日，他总是爱书的。

（b）只要那些书对人有益，他总是爱的。

注　as long as = while，当…之间，so long as = if only，provided that，on condition that 只要。但二者也常混用。

73.（a）I run away for my life.

（b）I cannot run for the life of me.

（c）I never ran so fast in my life.

（a）我拼命地逃跑。

（b）要我的命我也跑不动。

（c）我一生中从来没有跑过这样快的。

注　for one’s life，意为“拼命”，“无论如何”。for the life of one，意为“怎也不能”，“要命也不能”。in one’s life，意为“一生当中”，多用于否定句中。

74.（a）His English is anything but correct.

（b）His English is nothing but correct.

（c）His English is all but correct.

（a）他的英文错误百出。

（b）他的英文只是不错而已。

（c）他的英文差不多没有错误。

注　anything but = far from，not at all，决非，并不。nothing but = only，只，不过。all but = almost，差不多。

75.（a）The portrait is drawn from 〔the〕 life.

（b）The portrait is drawn to the life.

（c）The portrait is drawn as large as life.

（a）这张肖像是写生的。

（b）这张肖像栩栩如生。

（c）这张肖像和真人一样大。

注　draw from life，意为“写生”，只表画的过程，而不问画的结果。至于 draw to the life，即意为“逼真”，“和活的一样”，只提画的结果，不管画的过程。其中 from 指由来，to 指结果。as large as life，是说画的大小，和真人一般大。

76.（a）They inquired about the matter.

（b）They inquired into the matter.

（c）They inquired after me.

（d）They inquired for me.

（a）他们曾询及此事。

（b）他们曾查究此事。

（c）他们曾来问我的安。

（d）他们来问我在不在。

注　inquire about = ask to tell about 询及，问到。inquire into = investigate 调查。inquire after = ask about a person’s health or welfare 请安，问候。inquire for = try to learn where a person is. 探问某人的行踪。

77.（a）He was at home in English.

（b）He was at home wherever he was.

（a）他精通英文。

（b）他随遇而安。

注　英文的 at home 一个片语，有很多意思。其基本含义为“在家里”，因为人在自己家里很是随便而感舒适，所以又有“无拘束”，“安祥”，“舒适”之意。第三有接见客人的意思，at home 为“会客”，not at home 为“不会客”，“不接见客人”，如云 He is not at home to anyone except relatives.（他除亲人外不见客。）在 at home 后接上介词 in 时，则有“精通”之意，如 He is quite at home in modern history.（他精通现代史。）

78.（a）I have no opinion as to the result.

（b）As for me，I have no opinion at all.

（a）关于那结果我没有意见。

（b）至于我个人，是毫无意见的。

注　as to 及 as for，都有“关于”的意思，不过 as for，则有“别人（物）怎样我不知道，至于我（这个）…”之意。

79.（a）They are all of age.

（b）They are all of an age.

（a）他们都已成年。

（b）他们都是同年的。

注　of an age 中的 an，有 the same 的意思。

80.（a）Speak to him as soon as you can.

（b）Speak to him as fast as you can.

（a）你马上就去对他说的。

（b）你对他说话越快越好。

注　（a）句意为“立刻”，指时间的迟早。（b）句意为“尽快地”，指动作的速度。

81.（a）He is a man of family.

（b）He is a family man.

（a）他是世家子弟。

（b）他是有家室的人。

注　（a）句中的 of family = nobly born，出身名门。（b）句中的 family man = man with family，即 domestic person，有妻室儿女的人，或爱好呆在家里的人。说 family marriage，意为生有儿女的婚姻。类似的表现法有 a man of the world（劳苦的人），a worldly man（俗物）。a teacher of English（英文教师），an English teacher（英国教师，不一定是教英文的）。

82.（a）We must get it at any price.

（b）We must get it at any cost.

（a）无论要多少钱，我们都得买来。

（b）无论任何代价，我们都得把它弄到手。

注　price 是专指关于金钱的，cost 则与劳瘁，努力，健康，甚至生命，都有关系。

83.（a）He has an eye for pictures.

（b）He has an eye to pictures.

（c）He has kept an eye on this picture long before he bought it.

（a）他有识别画的眼力。

（b）他只注意那些画。

（c）他购此画之前，久已注意及之。

注　（a）have an eye for = be able to see well or quickly，有鉴别力。（b）have an eye to = have as one’s object，着眼，作为注视之的。（c）keep an eye on = have one’s eye on，keep watch on（lit.＆ fig.），watch carefully，目不离的注意，留心照拂。

84.（a）He is too glad to do so.

（b）He is only too glad to do so.

（a）他高兴得不能去这样做。

（b）他极高兴去这样做。

注　（a）too…to do，意为“太…而不能”，他例如 She is too young to understand such things. = She is so young that she cannot understand such things.（她太年轻不懂得那样的事。）The news is too good to be true.（消息太好恐不足信。）（b）only too…to do，意为“正是所愿”，“甚为”，无否定意。他例如 I am only too willing to serve you.（极愿效劳。）I am only too pleased to help you.（我极高兴来帮助你。）

85.（a）He knows German，to say nothing of English.

（b）He knows German，not to say English.

（a）他懂得德文，英文自不待言。

（b）即不说英文，德文他也懂得。

注　to say nothing of，自不待言，更不必说。not to say，姑且不说，即使不说。他例如 He is dishonest，to say nothing of his other faults.（他不正直，其余的坏处更不必说。）He is very good-natured，not to say foolish.（他老实得几乎有点愚笨。）

86.（a）Won’t you go to the concert this evening？

（b）Won’t you come to the concert this evening？

（a）今天晚上的音乐会你去不去听？

（b）今天晚上的音乐会你也去听听好吗？

注　在逻辑上应当说“去”的时候，常改说为“来”，是客气的表现，因为是拿对方做主体，以他的立场来说话。我去你家，你来我家云云，是以“我”为主体的说法，如说，“明天我来看你”代替“去看你”，就是以“你”为主体的。上举的（a）例是漠不相干的问法，而（b）例用上 come 一字，则含有“我也将去听”的意思在内，因为不是去到对方的家，所以用不着客气，而只是表“我当然是要去的”含义，因此在译文中用了一个“也”字，来表示此种内涵。

87.（a）I hate to lie.

（b）I hate lying.

（a）我不能撒谎。

（b）我素来不喜欢撒谎。

注　（a）句是说临时的，指现在，指在这场合。（b）句则含有“素来”，“一向”的意思，语气较强。在 hate 一个动词后面，接用不定词或动名词皆可，含义微有不同。

88.（a）I remembered mailing the letter.

（b）I remembered to mail the letter.

（a）我记得发有那信的。

（b）我记起要发信。

注　（a）句在 remember 后接动名词，是说过去的事，有 remember having done 的含义，（b）句在 remember 后接不定词是说未来的事，有 not to forget to do 的含义。相反的字 forget 用法也是一样。

89.（a）She stopped talking.

（b）She stopped to talk.

（a）她停止说话了。

（b）她停下来说话。

注　（a）句中的 talking 为动名词，是动词 stop 的宾语。（b）句中的 stop 为自动词，to talk 为不定词的副词用法。

90.（a）I saw him only once.

（b）I have seen him only once.

（a）我只见过他一次。

（b）我生平只见过他一次。

注　（a）句的意思是指“他在这里的时候”，而（b）句则可在句尾加入 in the whole of my life 来解释，即“在我一生之中，先后只有一次”。

91.（a）I have not looked at the paper this morning.

（b）I did not look at the paper this morning.

（a）我今天还没有看报。

（b）今天的报都没有工夫看。

注　（a）句是上午说的。（b）句是下午或晚上说的。

92.（a）Have you ever seen such a picture？

（b）Did you ever see such a picture？

（a）你看到过这样的画没有？

（b）你恐怕没有见过这样的画吧？

注　（a）句是平常 colourless 的问句，而（b）句则含有“我想你是没有的”的意味在内。要加上 ever 一字时才有此意。

93.（a）You must not play here.

（b）You will not play here.

（a）你们不可以在这里玩。

（b）你们不要在这里玩。

注　（b）句的说法虽同是禁止之辞，但比（a）句来说委婉而又优雅。

94.（a）I soon informed them of the affair.

（b）I had soon informed them of the affair.

（a）我马上把那事情通知他们了。

（b）我随即就把那事情尽快通知他们了。

注　（b）句是生动的（vivid）表现法。

95.（a）This book is worth reading.

（b）This book should be worth reading.

（a）这本书值得一读。

（b）这本书确是值得一读。

注　（b）句是加强语气的说法。

96.（a）Let’s go.

（b）Let us go.

（a）我们去吧。

（b）你让我们走吧。

注　（a）句的意思为 shall we go？（b）句的意思为 Set us free. 如果是一个人则说 me 以代 us. 如 Let me go！ = Take your hands off me. 或 Don’t hold or keep me.

97.（a）He doesn’t need to be told.

（b）He needn’t be told.

（a）（他已经知道）用不着告诉他。

（b）（他知道怎样去做的）用不着告诉他。

注　（a）强调现状。（b）强调今后的行为。

98.（a）If you want anything，let me know.

（b）If you want for anything，let me know.

（a）假使你要什么，告诉我好了。

（b）假使你需要什么而得不到的话，告诉我好了。

注　（a）句中的 want 为他动词，意为“想要”或“需要”。（b）句中的 want 为自动词，所以后接用介词 for，意为“欠缺”或“不足”。英国话说的 I want you to come. 美国话则说 I want for you to come.

99.（a）The surgeon consulted the orthopedist in reaching his decision.

（b）The surgeon consulted with the orthopedist in reaching his decision.

（a）那外科医生请教过整形医生之后才作决定。

（b）那外科医生与整形医生商量之后才作决定。

注　（a）句中的 consult 是他动词，意为 seek advice or an opinion from a qualified source（请教，咨询）。（b）句中的 consult 为自动词，所以后接 with，意为 confer with（商量）。

100.（a）I know him.

（b）I know of him.

（a）我认识他。

（b）我知道他。

注　（a）句意为 I have made his acquaintance，认识，彼此有接触，有往来，也可称为朋友。（b）句意为 I know about him. 或 I know him by reputation. 或 I have been told about him，but probably have not met him personally. 只知其名，如在报上每天见到的大人物，也知其身份，地位，或品德学问，但多半从来没有见过其人。句中的 of，作“关于”解。

101.（a）He had trouble on my account.

（b）He took trouble on my account.

（a）他为得我而惹了麻烦。

（b）他为得我而不辞劳苦。

注　have trouble 含有讨厌之意。take trouble 有不惮烦之意。

102.（a）He must needs go at once.

（b）He needs must go at once.

（a）他坚持立刻要去。

（b）他必须立刻就去。

注　needs 在此是副词，由于放在 must 的前后不同，而意义有别。must needs = insist on doing，意即主张一定要怎样，而 needs must = cannot help doing，意即不得不。

103.（a）He was proved to be a swindler.

（b）He proved to be a swindler.

（a）业已证明他是一个骗子。

（b）后来判明他是一个骗子。

注　（a）句中的 prove 是他动词，他例如 His guilt was clearly proved.（他的罪已明白地证明了。）（b）句中的 prove 是自动词，有 turn out（后来判明）之意。他例如 Our reference books proved（to be）insuficient.（我们的参考书显得不够。）

104.（a）I can but read the book.

（b）I cannot but read the book.

（c）I do nothing but read the book.

（a）我只好读那本书。

（b）我不得不读那本书。

（c）我一味读那本书。

注　can but = can only 唯有。cannot but = am compelled to，为加强 must 的说法，意即“不得不”。至于 do nothing but，意为别的什么都不做，就只是…。

105.（a）I hope he will do it.

（b）I wish he would do it.

（a）我希望他会做。

（b）他要肯做就好了。

注　（a）句的 I hope，表可能实现的希望。（b）句的 I wish，表不可能实现的希望。所以在 hope 后接直陈语气（Indicative）. 而在 wish 后就要接假设语气（Subjunctive）。

106.（a）He writes well.

（b）He writes a good hand.

（a）他的文章做得好。

（b）他的字写得好。

107.（a）He has no one help him.

（b）He has no one to help.

（c）He has no one to help him.

（a）他不要人帮他的忙。

（b）他没有人要帮忙。

（c）他没有人帮他的忙。

注　（a）句“have + 人 + 原形不定词”，有“令”，“使”之意。他例如：

Please have the boy bring the books to my house.（b）句中 help 的宾语为 no one.（c）句中 help 的宾语为 him.

108.（a）He made me a teacher.

（b）He made a teacher of me.

（a）他派我去做了一个教师。

（b）他把我培养成了一个教师。

注　（a）是任命我为教师。（b）是使我受必要的师范教育而成为教师。

109.（a）You had better make it at once.

（b）You had it made better at once.

（a）你最好马上去做。

（b）你马上把它改好。

注　（a）句中的 you had better，是一种假设语气的说法，含有劝告的意思，可译为“最好是”。（b）句中的 had it made better，为“have + 宾语 + 过去分词”的句法，在此为使动。它又可作被动用，其主语可分有意志与无意志两种，例如 I had my watch mended. 是有意志的，而 I had my watch stolen. 便是无意志的了。

110.（a）I sent a maid to the doctor.

（b）I sent a maid to the doctor’s.

（c）I sent a maid for the doctor.

（a）我已派女仆到医生那里去了。

（b）我已派女仆到医生家里去了。

（c）我已派女仆去请医生来了。

注　在中国话（a）（b）两句很容易相混，不过内容还是有分别的，即（a）是有事直接去找医生商量，到他家里也行，到他诊所也行，只要能找到他本人即可。而（b）的意思，就专限于到医生家里或送礼或取物，不一定要找到医生本人。（a）句注重在人，（b）句注重在地。至于（c）句，则意为请医生来。说 send for 是英文的惯用句，send for him = tell him to come（请他来）。send for the book = order it as purchase（定购）。

111.（a）He may be a good man.

（b）He may possibly be a good man.

（a）他也许是一个好人。

（b）他是一个好人也未可知。

注　（a）充满可能性（possibility），好人的成分多。（b）缺乏可能性，外表虽则像是好人，骨子里怎样却不知道。possibly = perhaps.（或许，可能）。

112.（a）He cannot be a good man.

（b）He cannot possibly be a good man.

（a）他不会是好人。

（b）他决不会是好人。

注　在 cannot 上加一个 possibly，意为绝对不会，绝对不能。如 How can I possibly do it？（我如何能做这事？）

113.（a）I will allow him to do so.

（b）I will permit him to do so.

（a）我将让他去那样做。

（b）我将允许他去那样做。

注　allow 表默认。permit 表许可。

114.（a）You may well say so.

（b）You may as well say so.

（a）你说的有理。

（b）你也可以这样说。

注　两个 well 都是副词，而具有 with reason，justice or fairness 之意，至于 as well 则意为 with equal reason，advantage，etc.

115.（a）He used to go out at night.

（b）He was used to going out at night.

（a）他以前常在晚上出去。

（b）他曾习惯于晚上出去。

116.（a）He kept smoking all the while.

（b）He still kept on smoking.

（a）他在那个时间中始终在抽着烟。

（b）他至今还是抽烟如故（尚未戒除）。

注　“keep + 动名词”表继续不断的动作，“keep on + 现在分词”，表保持某种状态不变。

117.（a）I must have this coat ironed.

（b）I must have ironed this coat.

（a）我必得把这件上衣拿去烫一下。

（b）我一定是烫过了这件上衣。

注　（a）句为“have + 宾语 + 过去分词”的形式，是表未来要做的。（b）句为“must have + 过去分词”的形式，是表过去推量的。

118.（a）I saw him enter the room.

（b）I saw him entering the room.

（a）我看见他走进那房间里去了。

（b）我看见他正走进那房间里去了。

注　（a）句意为 He entered the room and I saw it.（b）句意为 He was entering the room when I saw him.（a）句是叙述那件事实的，而（b）句则是说明那种动作的。

119.（a）He guessed my age.

（b）He guessed at my age.

（a）他猜出了我的年龄。

（b）他试猜着我的年龄。

注　同一动词常有他动自动两种用法，用于他动的意思比较确实的，用于自动的意思就表示不可靠了。如 catch a ball（接球）是表示确实可以抓到它的，这是用的他动词，但 catch at a ball（抢球）是表示大家争夺去抓那球，不一定抓得到手，这是用的自动词。guess 用作他动词时，意为“猜想”，“猜出”，例如 You guesssd right.（你猜对了。）I should guess his age at 50. 或 I should guess him to be 50.（我猜想他有五十岁了。）作自动词用时，含有“猜猜看”的意思，如 Can’t you even guess at her age？（你猜猜她的年龄看。）I cannot even guess at her age.（我对她的年龄甚至连猜都猜不出来。）

120.（a）He proceeded to the question.

（b）He proceeded with the question.

（a）他已开始研究那问题了。

（b）他继续去研究那问题了。

注　（a）句中的 proceed = begin，go forward（to do），开始进行。（b）句中的 proceed = continue，go on（with，in），（停止后）继续进行。

习题

试就（a），（b）不同的含义译成中文：

1.（a）I met a young man in the street.

（b）I met a young person in the street.

2.（a）He came to the town in the evening.

（b）He came to town in the evening.

3.（a）You can tell me your opinion while we eat.

（b）You can tell me your opinion while we are eating.

4.（a）They will be coming.

（b）They are coming.

5.（a）It seems he is rather slow-witted.

（b）It would seem he is rather slow-witted.

6.（a）They live in Singapore.

（b）They are living in Singapore.

7.（a）He pushed the door.

（b）He pushed at the door.

8.（a）He went out on a fine day.

（b）One fine day he went out.

9.（a）She sat up for her husband all night.

（b）She sat up with her husband all night.

10.（a）We are sure that man is mortal.

（b）We are sure that man is dead.

11.（a）The cause of John’s anxiety was his failure to pass the examination.

（b）A cause of John’s anxiety was his failure to pass the examination.

12.（a）The prime minister appeared on television.

（b）The prime minister’s address was broadcast by television.

13.（a）This is a credible story.

（b）This is a creditable achievement.

14.（a）He is not a teacher.

（b）He is no teacher.

15.（a）What do you want from me？

（b）What do you want with me？

16.（a）He has no less than ten books.

（b）He has not less than ten books.

17.（a）I have been wired to from home.

（b）I have been wired for from home.

18.（a）This is a flash of humour which surpasses Lin Yutang.

（b）This is a flash of humour which Lin Yutang surpasses.

19.（a）He is sure of success.

（b）He is sure to succeed.

20.（a）Few of us know the truth.

（b）A few of us know the truth.

（c）Not a few of us know the truth.

21.（a）On the contrary he said nothing.

（b）He said nothing to the contrary.

22.（a）It is a pity you did not go.

（b）It is a mercy you did not go.

23.（a）I wonder that it is so.

（b）I wonder how it is so.

24.（a）It may be done.

（b）It might be done.

25.（a）I wish I were as rich as he.

（b）I wish to be as rich as he.

26.（a）Let us repair our house.

（b）Let us repair to our house.

27.（a）He wrote a letter to me.

（b）He wrote a letter for me.

28.（a）He threw a bone to the dog.

（b）He threw a bone at the dog.

29.（a）The lamp is on the table.

（b）The lamp is over the table.

30.（a）He is possessed of great wealth.

（b）He is possessed with dangerous ideas.

31.（a）I doubt if he is guilty.

（b）I suspect that he is guilty.

32.（a）He always interferes in my business.

（b）He always interferes with my business.

33.（a）He passed by a scholar.

（b）He passed for a scholar.

34.（a）Air consists of oxygen and nitrogen.

（b）Hapiness consists in contentment.

（c）His action consists with his words.

35.（a）What is he about to speak？

（b）What is he to speak about？

36.（a）I saw a great many men there.

（b）I saw many a great man there.

37.（a）I never heard her sing.

（b）I never heard her song.

38.（a）We hired the boat by the hour.

（b）We hired the boat for an hour.

39.（a）Whose brothers take you to the park？

（b）Whose brothers do you take to the park？

40.（a）Many of the jewels were stolen.

（b）Most of the jewels were stolen.

41.（a）He was looked upon as a genius.

（b）He was looked up to as a genius.

42.（a）I must look to the matter.

（b）I must look into the matter.

43.（a）I don’t care to go abroad.

（b）I don’t mind going abroad.

44.（a）I shall have some people come tomorrow.

（b）I will have some people come tomorrow.

45.（a）The island is five miles around.

（b）The island is five miles across.

46.（a）I have studied English for five years.

（b）I have been studying English for five years.

47.（a）He has been to New York.

（b）He has gone to New York.

48.（a）They are at play in the garden.

（b）They said so only in play.

49.（a）He did it in haste.

（b）He did it in a hurry.

50.（a）I have nothing to write.

（b）I have nothing to write with.

（c）I have nothing to write on.

51.（a）There is nothing to see.

（b）There is nothing to be seen.

52.（a）Such men are hard to find.

（b）Such men are hard to be found.

53.（a）I am anxious about the result.

（b）I am anxious to know the result.

54.（a）I did not notice him.

（b）I took no notice of him.

55.（a）She met a friend in the street.

（b）She met with an accident in the street.

56.（a）Is there any difficulty in this？

（b）Is there some difficulty in this？

57.（a）I admire her as much as he.

（b）I admire her as much as him.

58.（a）I will pay at the end of the month.

（b）I will pay at the end of a month.

59.（a）I came to the meeting in time.

（b）I came to the meeting on time.

60.（a）I think it is not true.

（b）I should think it is not true.

贰　常易译错的文句

Ⅰ中译英

1. 中国的京戏你觉得怎样？

How do you think of Chinese opera？（误）

What do you think of Chinese opera？（正）

How do you feel about Chinese opera？（正）

How do you like Chinese opera？（正）

注　How do you like it？ = Do you like it much or little or dislike it？

2. 第二次世界大战是一九四五年八月十五日结束的。

The World War Ⅱ came to an end on August 15，1945.（误）

World War Ⅱ came to an end on August 15th，1945.（正）

The Second World War ended on August 15th，1945.（正）

3. 昨天晚上我们整晚在看电视。

We spent last evening watching the television.（误）

We spent last evening watching television.（正）

注　television 是一个不可数的名词，不能加冠词，也不能变成复数，但加有 set 一字时则非加冠词不可，如 She won’t leave the television set even though her husband is waiting for his supper.

4. 旅行社告诉了我们许多关于夏威夷的情形。

The travel agency sent us many informations about the Hawaiian Islands.（误）

The travel agency sent us much information about the Hawaiian Islands.（正）

注　information 也是一个不可数的名词，不能说成复数。

5. 假期从明天开始。

The vacation begins from tomorrow.（误）

The vacation begins tomorrow.（正）

注　中文的“从”字在这场合是不要译出的，其他场合也不要译成 from，例如“新学期从四月开始”。The new term begins in April. “新学期从四月五日开始。” The new term begins on the 5th of April. “茶会从六点开始。” The tea party begins at six o’clock. “教育从一个人出生开始。” Education begins with a man’s birth. 例句中的 tomorrow，是一个副词，副词前是不可以用介词的。April，the 5th，six o’clock，birth 都是名词。

6. 这只表的价钱很贵。

The price of the watch is dear.（误）

The watch is dear.（正）

The price of the watch is high.（正）

注　以物品为主语时用 dear 或 cheap，以定价为主语时就说 high 或 low.

7. 我和他是好朋友。

I am a great friend with him.（误）

I am great friends with him.（正）

8. 旅行我总是坐三等。

I travel always by the third class.（误）

I always travel third class.（正）

I always take a third-class car.（正）

注　说坐几等时不要用介词，说坐船，坐车，坐飞机等才要，如 by boat，by train，by plane 之类。几等的等级前，不要用定冠词，但如不用 travel 而改用 take 时，则要在等级前加一个不定冠词，等级后加一个名词，如上译例。

9. 我不想去。——他也是。

I don’t wish to go.—So does he.（误）

I don’t wish to go.—Nor does he.（误）

I don’t wish to go.—Neither does he.（正）

注　nor 在古文中虽可作副词用但现为连词，neither 古为连词，现为副词。

10. 我不喜欢喝酒。——我兄弟也是一样。

I dislike to drink.—Neither does my brother.（误）

I dislike to drink.—So does my brother.（正）

注　dislike 一字虽有否定之意，但表面上并没有否定的字样，在使用时仍可看做是肯定的，故译文应将 neither 改为 so 才对。如说 I don’t like to drink，虽意义相同，但字面上有否定（don’t），所以后面可以接用 neither 一字。

11. 谁在敲门？

Who is knocking the door？（误）

Who is knocking？（正）

Who is at the door？（正）

Who is knocking at the door？（正）

12. 你什么时候到过伦敦的？

When have you been to London？（误）

When did you go to London？（正）

When were you in London？（正）

13. 他没有告诉我说他什么时候回来。

He has not told me when he will be back.（误）

He didn’t tell me when he would be back.（正）

14. 那一点你是错了。

You have mistaken in that point.（误）

You are mistaken on that point.（正）

15. 倘战争爆发我们会变得怎样呀？

What shall we become if war breaks out？（误）

What shall become of us if war breaks out？（正）

注　自动词的 become of = happen to，意为“降临”，“遭遇”，说时则为“怎样”。中国话是以“我们”为主语，但英文句中的主语则为 what。

16. 老张也没有来。

Old Chang has not come also（or too）.（误）

Old Chang has not come either.（正）

注　作“也”字解的 also 或是 too，只能与肯定连用，如果换上否定的句子，就得改用 either。

17. 昨天晚上我们玩得很愉快。

We played very pleasantly last night.（误）

We enjoyed ourselves very much last night.（正）

We had a good time last night.（正）

注　玩牌，打球，演戏之类就用 play，中国话这儿说的玩是指度过一个愉快的时候，最好译成 enjoy oneself 或 have a good time。

18. 如果他来，我愿尽力为他服务。

If he comes，I’m glad to do anything I can for him.（误）

If he comes，I’ll be glad to do anything I can for him.（正）

注　在副词子句中是用现在时态代替未来时态的。

19. 王君是一九六五年南洋大学毕业的。

Mr. Wong graduated Nanyang University in 1965.（误）

Mr. Wong graduated at Nanyang Univetsity in 1965.（正）

Mr. Wong was graduated from Nanyang University in 1965.（正）

注　英国人说 graduate at，美国人说 be graduated from，不过近来美国偶有略去 from 而说成 graduate college 的。

20. 他在那里专攻中文，荣誉毕业。

There he specialized Chinese literature and graduated with honour.（误）

There he specialized in Chinese literature and graduated with honours.（正）

There he took Chinese literature and graduated with honours.（正）

There he majored in Chinese literature and was graduated with honours.（正）

注　“专攻”美国话说 major in，英国话单说 take 一字就行了。荣誉毕业即获得优等成绩，注意 honours 要用复数。

21. 上个礼拜我们班上讨论了关于男女同校的问题。

Last week our class discussed about coeducation.（误）

Last week our class discussed coeducation.（正）

22. 我惯于迟睡。

I am used to sit up late at night.（误）

I am used to sitting up late at night.（正）

注　be used to = be accustomed to，“惯于”，后接名词或动名词，不可接不定词。如前无动词，单说 used to 时，则后接不定词，是指过去的习惯行为。参考：I used to sit up late at night. 意为“我以前常很迟睡觉”；现在睡得早了。

23. 你喜欢看看我搜集的邮票吗？

Do you like to see my stamp collection？（误）

Would you like to see my stamp collection？（正）

24. 他正忙着在写信。

He is busy to write a letter.（误）

He is busy writing a letter.（正）

25. 他们坐在小船上渡过河去了。

They crossed the river on a boat.（误）

They crossed the river in a boat.（正）

26. 她生于一九五零年。

She was born in the year of 1950.（误）

She was born in the year 1950.（正）

She was born in 1950.（正）

27. 我在一九三九年夏天离开伦敦。

I left London in the summer 1939.（误）

I left London in the summer of 1939.（正）

28. 我想要一架电视机，但我没有钱买它。

I want a TV set，but I can’t afford to buy it.（误）

I want a TV set，but I can’t afford to buy one.（正）

注　it 是代表前面用有定冠词（the）的名词，如前面的名词是冠有不定冠词（a）时，则须用 one 为代名词。

29. 他的情形跟我不同。

His case is quite different from me.（误）

His case is quite different from mine.（正）

30. 那地方像江南三月的温暖。

The place is as warm as March of Kiangnan.（误）

The place is as warm as Kiangnan in March.（正）

注　place 不能与 March 比较，应以同类的名词“江南”来比。

31. 我跟叔父学英文。

I studied English from my uncle.（误）

I studied English under my uncle.（正）

I learned English from my uncle.（正）

I was taught English by my uncle.（正）

32. 他的职业是教师。

His profession is a teacher.（误）

He is a teacher by profession.（正）

33. 我的国籍是中国。

My nationality is China.（误）

My nationality is Chinese.（正）

34. 我的教授主张我去申请奖学金。

My professor suggested me to apply for a scholarship.（误）

My professor suggested that I apply for a scholarship.（正）

35. 请即回信。

Please reply this letter early.（误）

Please answer this letter early.（正）

Please reply to this letter promptly.（正）

36. 那妇人跑到警察局去求救。

The woman ran to the police for getting help.（误）

The woman ran to the police to get help.（正）

The woman ran to the police for help.（正）

37. 许多人在海上丧生。

Many people lost their life at sea.（误）

Many people lost their lives at sea.（正）

38. 听写我完全不错。

I didn’t have mistakes in the dictation.（误）

I didn’t have any mistakes in dictation.（正）

39. 他从来不撒谎。

He always says the truth.（误）

He always speaks the truth.（正）

He always tells the truth.（正）

40. 他前妻生了两个孩子。

He has two children of his former wife.（误）

He has two children by his former wife.（正）

注　by 有 born to him by 之意。

41. 我的见解和你相反。

My views are opposite from yours.（误）

My views are opposite to yours.（正）

注　在 different 后才可接 from。

42. 他的意见和你的正相反。

His opinion is the very opposite to yours.（误）

His opinion is the very opposite of yours.（正）

43. 大多数的子女都想要自立，不愿依赖他们的父母。

Most children want to be independent on their parents.（误）

Most children want to be independent of their parents.（正）

注　dependent 后接 on，而 independent 后接 of.

44. 我把窗子打开一下你不在乎吗？

Do you mind if I opened the window？（误）

Would you mind if I opened the window？（正）

Do you mind if I open the window？（正）

45. 请你到这儿来一下好吗？

Do you mind to come here for a moment？（误）

Do you mind coming here for a moment？（正）

Do you care to come here for a moment？（正）

46. 我开一下窗子你不在乎吗？

Will you mind my opening the window？（误）

Would you mind my opening the window？（正）

47. 他对中学教师讲授英语教授法？

He lectured teaching method of English to high school teachers.（误）

He lectured to high school teachers on methods of teaching English.（正）

48. 不久又有新的麻烦发生？

It didn’t take long before new troubles arose.（误）

It wasn’t long before new troubles arose.（正）

It didn’t take long for new troubles to arise.（正）

49. 旅行社宣布不再接受旅客前往开罗的订票。

A travel agency announced not to accept any more bookings for tourist travel to Cairo.（误）

A travel agency announced that it would not accept any more bookings for tourist travel to Cairo.（正）

50. 我很高兴接受你的邀请。

It gives me much pleasure in accepting your invitation.（误）

It gives me much pleasure to accept your invitation.（正）

I have much pleasure in accepting your invitation.（正）

I take great pleasure in accepting your invitation.（正）

注　take great pleasure = greatly enjoy. 如说 have the pleasure 则后不接 in 而接 of，如 I have the pleasure of accepting your invitation. 也是通的，不过此种语法多用于下类句中：May I have the pleasure of taking a glass of wine with you？I once had the pleasure of being introduced to you. I am sorry I cannot have the pleasure of accompanying you today. I hope you will give me the pleasure of dining with me at 8 o’clock tomorrow evening at my place. There are many famous men whom I have not yet had the pleasure of meeting so far.

51. 这问题值得再讨论一下。

It is worth discussing the question further.（误）

It is worth while to discuss the question further.（正）

The question is worth discussing further.（正）

注　句中的 it 为形式上的主语，真正的主语是 discussing the question further. 因此 worth 变成没有宾语了，故第一句译文是不通的。第二句中的 it 仍为形式上的主语，真正的主语为 to discuss the question further，而 worth 另有 while 一个名词成为它的宾语，所以就成为一个完善的句子了。注意 worth 这个形容词，后面必须接用宾语。

52. 他给了我一张五百元的支票。

He gave me a cheque of $500.（误）

He gave me a cheque for $500.（正）

53. 他呼吸有大蒜味道。

He breathes with garlic smell.（误）

His breath smells of garlic.（正）

注　他例如：

“这咖啡有点大蒜味道”，不可译为 This coffee has a garlic taste. 应译为 This coffee tastes of garlic.

54. 我最好来讲一个故事给你听。

I can do no better than to tell you a story.（误）

I can do no better than tell you a story.（正）

注　在 than 后的字的形式应和 than 前的一致，句中前面是 can do，后面只能说（can）tell，不能说（can）to tell. 他例如 It is better to win than to lose. I’d rather stay at home than go for a walk.

55. 错误显然是在你那一边。

The fault clearly lies at your side.（误）

The fault clearly lies with your side.（正）

注　在自动词 lie 后可接用各种各样的介词，惟含义各有不同，如 Sheets of paper lie about the room.（纸张散满一屋。）The village lie across the river.（村庄在河的对岸。）Accusation of theft lay against him.（控他以盗窃罪。）The path lies along a stream.（小路沿溪。）The hot springs lie among pretty scenery.（温泉在风光明媚之中。）The blame lies at his door.（错在他。）A happy future lies before you.（幸福就在你的前途。）What mystery lay behind the disappearance of the girl？（少女失踪的后面潜在着什么神秘？）The truth lies between extremes.（真理存于两个极端之间。）He has the manuscript lying by him for the next number.（下一期的原稿在他那里。）The charm of travel lies in its new experiences.（旅行的妙味在于新奇的经验。）The ship is lying off the mouth of the river.（船停在河口以外。）The book lies on the floor.（书在地上。）A white mist lay over London.（伦敦为白雾所笼罩。）The person lies under the suspicion of corruption.（那人有受贿的嫌疑。）The choice lies with you.（任你选择。）在 lie 字后接介词 with 时，意为“是……的义务”，“是……的责任”，他例如 It lies with you to decide.（决定的责任在你。你有义务来作决定。取决于你。）It lies with you to accept or reject the proposal.（接受或拒绝那个建议就全看你了。）The fault does not lie with the government officials.（责任不在政府官员。）

56. 那房间是用电力照明的。

The room is lighted with electricity.（误）

The room is lighted by 〔means of〕 electricity.（正）

The room is lighted with electric lamps.（正）

注　用于无形的手段时要用 by，所以与抽象名词连用，但用于有形的手段时则须用 with，所以与普通名词连用。electricity 为抽象名词，electric lamps 为普通名词。

57. 他觉得那杂碎是他从来没有尝过的美味，哪怕是在中国也没有。

He thought the Chop Suey was more delicious than anything he had ever tasted before，not even in China.（误）

He thought the Chop Suey was more delicious than anything he had ever tasted before，even in China.（正）

He thought the Chop Suey was such a delicacy he had never before tasted anywhere，not even in China.（正）

58. 美国成为现今世界上最富有的国家。

The United States become the richest country in the world.（误）

The United States has become the richest country in the world.（正）

注　The United States 要接单数动词。说“现在已经成为”应该用现在完成动词。

59. 我刚才把它写完了。

I have written it just now.（误）

I have just written it.（正）

I wrote it just now.（正）

60. 他虽然生病但是仍去上学了。

Though he was ill，but he went to school.（误）

He was ill，but he went to school.（正）

Though he was ill，〔yet〕 he went to school.（正）

61. 我在下星期一去那里。

I will go there Sunday next.（误）

I will go there next Sunday.（正）

I will go there on Sunday next.（正）

注　凡 last，next 等字用于星期、年、月之前时，可将介词略去，用在那些字后面，就必须加上介词。

62. 你怎样认识他的呀？

How you come to know him？（误）

How come you to know him？（正）

注　惯用法在 come to do 的问句中，要将 do，did 等发问的虚字略去，这是古来的传统。但在现今的口语中可说 How did you come to know him？美口语还可以说 How come you didn’t say anything？（你为何一言不发？）

63. 我从来没有听见讲过有这样的事。

Never I have heard of such a thing.（误）

Never have I heard of such a thing.（正）

64. 他称赞他妹妹的勤快。

He praised his sister’s diligence.（误）

He praised his sister for her diligence.（正）

65. 有五百元一月就够生活了。

Five hundred dollars a month is enough to live.（误）

Five hundred dollars a month is enough to live on.（正）

注　live 是自动词，故要加介词的 on.

66. 我从小孩子的时候起就认识他。

I have known him since a child.（误）

I have known him from a child.（正）

I have known him since his childhood.（正）

注　从过去某一时期到现在为止，英文要用现在完成时态，介词就用 since，但有时不说“迄”（till）也可以说“起”（from）的，即用“from + 普通名词”代替“since + 抽象名词”。但在 from 后也同样可接抽象名词，所以不说 He has been blind since childhood，而说 He has been blind from childhood. 也是一样。

67. 我们登得越高，天气越冷。

We ascended the higher，it became the colder.（误）

The higher we ascended，the colder it became.（正）

68. 他既不会说华语，也不会说英语。

He neither speaks Chinese nor English.（误）

He speaks neither Chinese nor English.（正）

69. 消防队员死了不止一人。

More than one firemen were killed.（误）

More than one fireman was killed.（正）

70. 她打击了他的头，使他不省人事达一小时之久。

When she struck his head，he remained unconscious for an hour.（误）

After she struck him on the head，he remained unconscious for an hour.（正）

He remained unconscious for an hour after she struck him on the head.（正）

71. 我正在听她唱歌。

I am hearing her sweet song.（误）

I am listening to her sweet song.（正）

72. 那便是我所收到的最后的消息。

That is the last news I’ve received.（误）

That is the latest news I’ve received.（正）

73. 双方的意见并没有什么不同。

There is no difference between both views.（误）

There is no difference between their views.（正）

There is no difference in their views.（正）

74. 他有自己的一幢房子。

He has his own house.（误）

He has a house of his own.（正）

注　英文的属格代名词（Possessive Pronouns）有两种形式，普通的形式为 my 等，后必须接名词如 my book，绝对的形式为 mine（ = my book）等，是为避免重复地来说那名词而采用的，例如 Your house is larger than mine（ = my house）。在属格代名词的前面如再加指示代名词时，即在 my book 前再加 this，that，a，some，any，no 等字样时，普通的形式便得改为绝对的形式，以避免指示代名词与属格代名词连在一起。三百年前的英文是可以连用的，即是可以说 this my book，而现代英文则必须改为 this book of mine 才行。反身属格（Reflexive Possessive）的 my own，your own，his own 等，也要采用绝对的形式，因为现代英文已不说 He has that his own house. 或 She has some her own reasons. 而必须改成 He has that house of his own. 或 She has some reasons of her own.

75. 他是我父亲的朋友。

He is a friend of my father.（误）

He is a friend of my father’s.（正）

注　名词前面的属格，可代定冠词用，如 my brother’s wife = the wife of my brother. 又 my brother’s friends = （all）the friends of my brother. 如果不是指某一个特定的人或几个人时，则须用不定冠词（a），那是不能用属格来代替的，即是用了属格，还得有不定冠词，但我们又不能说 my brother’s a friend. 或 a my brother’s friend，所以只好说 a friend of my brother’s. 这种表现法所含有的意味是 a friend（that is）my brother’s 或 one of my brother’s friends. 这便是英文的两重属格的由来。

76. 我和王君久别重逢至为高兴。

I am very glad to meet Mr. Wang again after a long parting.（误）

I am very glad to meet Mr. Wang again after a long separation.（正）

注　part 指离别的动作，如说离别的期间则用 separate.

77. 我在桥头和他分手。

I parted with him on the bridge.（误）

I parted from him on the bridge.（正）

注　与人分离说 part from，与物分离说 part with，例如 He hates to part with his money.（他极舍不得用钱。）

78. 这学校有三千个学生。

The school has three thousand students.（误）

There are three thousand students in the school.（正）

注　英文的动词 have 有三义：（1）物质上的所有，如 I have a lot of friends.（我有许多朋友。）（2）心身上的具有，如 I have a poor memory.（我的记性很坏。）（3）构成上的含有，如 A week has seven days. = There are seven days in a week.（一星期有七天。）例句中的 have 与（3）相似，但仍是似是而非，因学校是一个地点，不是机构，学校与学生的关系，不是不可分离的，不像星期少了一天就不成。还有“there + be”原意为“存在”，存在于某处，因而变成“有”的意思。

79. 你方便的话，请在六点钟来。

Please come at six if you are convenient.（误）

Please come at six if it is convenient to you.（正）

80. 你有必要这样去做。

It is necessary of you to do so.（误）

It is necessary for you to do so.（正）

注　一个形容词可以用来指“行为”，又可以用来指“行为者”，如 kind，good，foolish，nice，careful，careless 之类皆是。这种形容词可以接用 of 来造句，如 It is kind of you.（行为） = You are kind.（行为者）。另外有些形容词，只能用来指“行为”，不能用来指“行为者”，如 necessary，impossible，inconvenient，unbearable 之类皆是。这种形容词是不可以接用 of 来造句的，它只能接用 for，例如 It is necessary for you to go. 而不能说 You are necessary to go.

81. 她父亲决不赞成她嫁给这样一个穷人。

Her father will never approve her marrying such a poor man.（误）

Her father will never approve of her marrying such a poor man.（正）

82. 由于整夜未睡，我们疲倦得要死。

We were tired to death through having sat up all night.（误）

We were tired to death from having sat up all night.（正）

注　动名词前的 through 是表理由的，要 from 才能表原因。

83. 那囚犯的处死引起了很多的物议。

The prisoner’s execution has caused a lot of public censure.（误）

The execution of the prisoner has caused a lot of public censure.（正）

注　英文的属格有两种用法：一为主格作用（Subjective Possessive）。一为宾格作用（Objective Possessive）。例如 She has come to sing his praise.（她来赞美他。）是宾格作用。She doesn’t want his praise.（她不要他赞美。）是主格作用。说 his praise（他的赞美）用作主格作用是不会有误解的，但说 his praise（赞美他）用作宾格作用，即属格变成了宾格，就令人费解了。这两种作用在文字上是没有分别的，读者要从意义上才能加以辨明。如上例句中所说的 the prisoner’s execution，意为处死囚犯，当然是宾格作用，因为被人处死，是被动，决不可能变成囚犯自己处死的，所以不能说成 the prisoner’s execution，只能改用 of 的造句而说成 the execution of the prisoner，因为用 of 的造句多是表宾格作用的，例如 the choice of him = the act of choosing him.（选择他）。如说 his choice = the preson or thing he has chosen（他所选定的人或物），就是主格作用了。

84. 战争结束以后他就出洋去了。

After the war being over，he went abroad.（误）

The war being over，he went abroad.（正）

注　在 Absolute Participle 的前面不要再加连词或介词。改正后的句子是属于 Written English 方面的，如改为 spoken English，则为 After the war was over，he went abroad.

85. 虽则他病过好几年，现在却完全好了。

Though having been ill for years，he is now quite well.（误）

After having been ill for years，he is now quite well.（正）

Having been ill for years，he is now quite well.（正）

注　though 是连词，只能用于连结两个子句（clause）。句中 having been ill for years，不是一个子句，至多前面只能用介词 after，或根本什么都不要。

86. 一到新加坡，我的朋友就在机场等我。

On arriving at Singapore，my friend was waiting for me at the airport.（误）

On arriving at Singapore，I found my friend waiting for me at the airport.（正）

注　凡是带有介词的动名词，或是单独的分词，必须有一个意味上的主语，来配合这个动作。到达新加坡的是“我”，而主句中的主语却是“我的朋友”，动作不能配合，所以是错误的。介词 before 与 after 的情形和 on 一样，故下面的两句也是错的：After finishing his work，I paid him.（他把工作做完，我就付钱给他。）Before reading the text，the vocabulary should be learned.（在阅读课文之前应先学习生字。）

87. 他满足于默默无闻的生活。

He is content of living in obscurity.（误）

He is content with living in obscurity.（正）

He is content to live in obscurity.（正）

88. 他禁止孩子们吸烟。

He has prohibited the boys to smoke.（误）

He has prohibited the boys from smoking.（正）

注　古代英文原是可以接不定词的（如 God prohibited Adam to eat of the fruit of a certain tree.）但现代英文必须接“from + 动名词”。另一个同义字的 forbid，则可接不定词，如 I have forbidden the boys to smoke.

89. 我确信可以获得任命。

I am confident in getting an appointment.（误）

I am confident of getting an appointment.（正）

注　confide 和 confidence 后皆接 in，如 He confided in your honesty.（他信任你的诚实。）She has great confidence in her success.（她自信她会成功。）但形容词的 confident 后却要接 of，他例如 We are confident of victory.（我们确信会胜利。）

90. 他后悔不该那样说的。

He repents to have said so.（误）

He repents of having said so.（正）

He repents his words.（正）

91. 他坚持拒绝我的要求。

He persisted to refuse my request.（误）

He persisted in refusing my request.（正）

92. 总而言之，日本人在思想上有岛国根性。

The Japanese people are insular in their thinking to sum up.（误）

To sum up，the Japanese people are insular in their thinking.（正）

注　独立片语，如 to sum up，to tell the truth，strictly speaking，taking everything into consideration，judging from…等等，都是应该放在句首的。

93. 日本的气候比英国温和。

The climate of Japan is milder than England.（误）

The climate of Japan is milder than that of England.（正）

注　比较一定要同性质的才可以，例句中以气候比英国，故误。改正为 that 代表 climate，如前面名词为复数则用 those 代表。

94. 无知与疏忽是这错误的原因。

Ignorance and negligence have caused this mistake.（误）

Ignorance and negligence has caused this mistake.（正）

注　两个以上的主语用 and 连起来表示一个单纯的目的或观念时，动词要用单数才对。他例如 Truth and honesty is always the best policy. Slow and steady wins the race. Bread and butter is his abomination.

95. 林博士代表新加坡大学出席会议。

Dr. Lim，on behalf of the University of Singapore，attended the conference.（误）

Dr. Lim attended the conference on behalf of the University of Singapore.（正）

注　主语与述语务必放在一起，不要隔开。

96. 麦饼比米饼便宜。

A cake made of wheat costs less than that made of rice.（误）

A cake made of wheat costs less than one made of rice.（正）

注　that 是从 the 变来的，属于定冠词的范围之内，所以它只能代表有定冠词的单数名词，如 The cost of oil is less than that of gas.（油价比煤气便宜。）但凡是有不定冠词的单数名词，就不能用 that 代表，只能用 one 代表，如上举的两个例句：one = a cake 而 that = the cost. 对于有定冠词的单数名词，也并不一定非用 that 代表不可，如 The step you have taken is that of much risk.（你所采取的步骤，是一个很危险的步骤。）一句中的 that 就错了，应改为 one 才对，因为在动词 is 后应接 a step，所以只能用 one 代表。

97. 他不但是一位作家，而且是一位画家。

He not only is a writer，but also a painter.（误）

He is not only a writer，but also a painter.（正）

98. 我住在离城一英里远的地方。

I live at a mile distant from the town.（误）

I live at a mile’s distance from the town.（正）

I live a mile distant from the town.（正）

注　at 是介词，应置于名词前，不可置于形容词前，要用 at 则后必须接名词的 distance，不可接形容词的 distant，又 mile 既是名词，自应改为属格。

99. 黄君在台大读博士学位。

Mr. Huang studies the doctor’s degree at Taiwan University.（误）

Mr. Huang works for the doctor’s degree at Taiwan University.（正）

Mr. Huang is a doctoral student at Taiwan University.（正）

100. 这些问题太难，我只能解答两个出来。

The questions were so difficult that I could solve only two.（误）

The questions were so difficult that I could answer only two.（正）

注　solve a problem 和 answer a question 为一定的说法。

101. 彼德是一个十岁的男孩。

Peter was a boy of ten years old.（误）

Peter was a boy of ten years of age.（正）

Peter was a boy of ten.（正）

Peter was a boy ten years old.（正）

Peter was a ten-year old boy.（正）

102. 学生们在星期六晚上要去参加一个舞会。

The students are going to a dance party on Saturday night.（误）

The students are going to a dance on Saturday night.（正）

注　舞会应该说 dancing party，不要说 dance party，但一般只说 dance 也就够了。开舞会就说 give a dance，去参加舞会就说 go to a dance. 那旅馆每晚举行舞会：At the hotel dances are held nightly. 我第一次遇见她是在一个舞会上：She and I first met at a dance. 他们请我参加舞会：They asked me to a dance. 规模较大的舞会，英文又可说 ball，是从拉丁文来的。

103. 我很愿意帮你做任何事。

I am willing to assist you to do anything.（误）

I am willing to assist you in doing anything.（正）

I am willing to help you to do anything.（正）

104. 辩论已近尾声。

The debate was drawing to an end.（误）

The debate was drawing to a close.（正）

The debate was coming to an end.（正）

105. 他以儿子为荣。

He is proud in his son.（误）

He is proud of his son.（正）

He has a pride in his son.（正）

He prides himself on his son.（正）

注　在形容词 proud 后要接 of，在名词 pride 后则接 in，在反身动词后则接 on.

106. 这章需要重新写过。

This chapter needs being rewritten.（误）

This chapter needs rewriting.（正）

This chapter needs to be rewritten.（正）

注　动词 need 后面接的动名词，意思虽是被动，但字面上一定要用自动。如不接动名词，也可改接不定词，不过形式便恰相反了，这时的不定词，一定要把被动表示出来，不可用自动的 to rewrite，要用被动的 to be rewritten. 他例如 This house needs repairing. = This house needs to be repaired.（这屋子要修理。）谚语有 The best horse needs breaking，and the aptest child needs teaching.（即使是最好的马也需要受驯，即使是最聪明的孩子也需要受教。）如系人做主语则后可接自动的不定词，例如 Each of us needs to master such a foolish fear.（我们每个人都需要克服那种愚蠢的恐怖。）

107. 这机器要修理。

The machine wants to repair.（误）

The machine wants to be repaired.（正）

The machine wants repairing.（正）

注　动词 want 也和动词 need 一样，后接动名词时要用自动，后接不定词时才可以用被动，用自动便错了。如果以人做主语，也就可以用自动的不定词了，同时也可接被动的不定词，例如 He wants to buy a watch.（他要买表。）He wants to be notified beforehand.（他要人事先通知他。）

108. 我现在到医院去看我兄弟的病。

I’m going to hospital to see my brother.（误）

I’m going to the hospital to see my brother.（正）

注　到医院去求医是医院的本分，不加冠词，如 go to hospital（入院）。He is still in hospital.（他还在医院里。）He was taken to hospital.（他被送进医院去了。）反之，则须加冠词，如 My uncle lives near the hospital.（我叔叔住在医院附近。）Is it far from here to the hospital？（从这里去医院远不远？）

109. 那年我去了西贡，而第二年我又去了河内。

I went to Saigon that year，but next year，to Honoi.（误）

I went to Saigon that year，but the next year，to Honoi.（正）

注　我们现在说明年，就用 next year，如果是说过去的或未来的第二年，就得加冠词说成 the next year. 如 The school year begins on the 1st of April and ends on the 31st of March of the next year. He started from here early the next morning. He arrived at New York on the 3rd of the next month.

110. 苹果坏了四分之三。

Three-fourths of the apples was ruined.（误）

Three-fourths of the apples were ruined.（正）

注　英文以分数为主语时，由其后接的名词来决定动词的单复数，例句中 apples 为复数，故动词应改为复数的 were。但 Three-fourths of the crop was ruined.（四分之三的收成都毁了。）

111. 猫把家里的老鼠一扫而光。

The cat cleared off rats from the house.（误）

The cat cleared the house of rats.（正）

The cat swept rats out of the house.（正）

注　用动词 clear 时，其形式为“clear + 地点 + of + 物”，如用 sweep 时，则为“sweep + 物 + out of + 地点”。

112. 昨夜他喝得大醉了。

He was much drunken last night.（误）

He was much drunk last night.（正）

注　drunken 是一个限定形容词，只能用在名词前，如 a drunken man（醉人），不能作叙述形容词用。

113. 笨人无药可医。

There is no medicine to cure a fool.（误）

There is no medicine for curing a fool.（正）

114. 昨晚我接到了他的电话。

I received a telephone from him last night.（误）

I had（or received）a phone call from him last night.（正）

He called me up last night.（正）

115. 我觉得这样做是我的本分。

I think to do so is my duty.（误）

I think it my duty to do so.（正）

注　英文惯用法是不用不定词作宾语的，故以 it 代替。

116. 峨眉山是中国的最高的山。

Mt. Omei is the highest mountain of China.（误）

Mt. Omei is the highest mountain in China.（正）

Mt. Omei is China’s highest mountain.（正）

117. 我打网球一年来大有进步。

My tennis has much progressed in a year.（误）

My tennis has improved very much in a year.（正）

I have made much progress in tennis this past year.（正）

118. 日本好像以极大的速度富裕起来。

Japan seems to be getting rich at the tremendously speedy rate.（误）

Japan seems to be getting rich at a tremendously speedy rate.（正）

119. 去年我读了好些海明威的小说。

Last year I read many Hemingway’s novels.（误）

Last year I read many of Hemingway’s novels.（正）

Last year I read many Hemingway novels.（正）

120. 名画落入了那人之手。

The famous painting came into possession of the man.（误）

The famous painting came into the possession of the man.（正）

The man came into possession of the famous painting.（正）

注　“物入人手”为 come into the possesion of，“人使物入手”即为 come into possession of，因主语的不同，影响名词前冠词的有无。

习题

试改正下列错误的译文：

1. 到公园里去要怎样走？

How shall I go to the park？

2. 那讲演是在礼拜五从两点钟开始。

The lecture is from two o’clock on Friday.

3. 中国的风景很美。

The sceneries of China are very fine.

4. 他们没有房子住。

They have no houses to live.

5. 比起福克纳他更喜欢海明威。

He likes better Hemingway than Faulkner.

6. 这只表要修理。

This watch wants to mend.

7. 全家的人在九点钟上教堂去做礼拜。

The family go to the church at 9 o’clock.

8. 那年我身体很好，但在那前一年我生了病。

I was quite well that year，but ill the last year.

9. 那条沉没的船不可能捞起来。

It is impossible to raise the sunk ship.

10. 你早上来吧，不要晚上来。

Come in the morning instead of the evening.

11. 他的女儿嫁给一个阔人。

His daughter married to a rich man.

12. 这样一个好天气，你为什么要呆在家里。

Why are you at home on such a fine weather？

13. 赶快，再迟就赶不上了。

Make haste，and you will be behind time.

14. 日暮途穷。

The day is falling and the road is coming to an end.

15. 我从一星期前开始就生病了。

I have been ill since a week ago.

16. 你小时候读过的那些有趣味的故事你还记得吗？

When you were a boy do you remember all the interesting stories you read？

17. 从汽车的遮风玻璃望过去，我们远远地就看见了那宝塔。

Looking out of our windshield，the pagoda would be seen by us in the distance.

18. 兔子的耳朵比猫的长。

The ears of a hare are longer than that of a cat.

19. 你去过美国吗？

Have you gone to America？

20. 他来过此地一两次。

He has come here once or twice.

21. 我昨天看见他。

I have seen him yesterday.

22. 我觉得那菜很好，吃得很满意。

I found the food very good，and enjoyed to eat it.

23. 我想很快就回家去。

I think to go home very soon.

I think going home very soon.

24. 一个普通信都不会写的人，对这样重要的职务是不能胜任的。

A man who is unable to write a letter is incapable to hold an office of such importance.

25. 他好像很不喜欢说实话。

He seems to have an aversion to speak the truth.

26. 中国人是刻苦耐劳的民族。

The Chinese are hard-working and industrious people.

27. 我可以跟你借个电话吗？

May I borrow your telephone？

28. 他被选为议员了。

He was elected councilman.

29. 王先生昨天回返新加坡了。

Mr. Wong returned back to Singapore yesterday.

30. 这报告必须在下月六日提出。

This report must be presented by 6th next month.

31. 请你记得要我交还。

Please remember me to give it back.

32. 我在纽约定购了十本书。

I ordered ten books in New York.

33. 我确信我的英语可以使人听懂。

I’m sure I can make myself understand in English.

34. 我确信我可以使你了解我的意味。

I’m sure I can make you understood what I mean.

35. 汽车朝着公园的方向驶去了。

The motor car ran to the direction of the park.

36. 我对他的正直不能信赖。

I have no reliance in his honesty.

37. 他把大笔的钱交我代为保管。

He entrusted a large sum of money in me.

38. 小孩子总是这样那样顽皮的。

Children are always in some mischief or another.

39. 我对他的悲伤深表同情。

I sympathize him deeply on his sorrow.

40. 他向我道歉他所犯的过失。

He apologized me on his mistake.

41. 有人这样说，但我忘记是谁了。

Somebody said so，but I forget whom.

42. 他除了发财以外无他愿望。

He has no other desire but to make a fortune.

43. 她的服装不大入时。

Her dress does not conform to the fashion.

44. 如你所知道的，人生常比做航海。

As you know，life is often compared with a voyage.

45. 她入不敷出。

Her expenditures do not correspond with her income.

46. 我去吊慰了他父亲之死。

I condoled him about his father’s death.

47. 学生到了多少？

How many students did come？

48. 这些就是他们说是傻瓜的人。

These are the people whom they say are fools.

49. 台湾比新加坡要大得多。

Taiwan is very larger than Singapore.

50. 我坐船回家要五天。

I take five days to return home by steamer.

51. 他是从后门进来的。

He entered from the back door.

52. 那个老人遭失明之痛。

The old man had his son died.

53. 这架缝衣机是中国制造的。

This sewing-machine is Chinese make.

54. 我从来没有见过这样高的人。

I never saw so a tall man before.

55. 他懂得知难而退。

He has good sense of quitting when he found the thing too difficult to do.

56. 马可·波罗以一二五四年生于威尼斯一个商人的家里。

Marco Polo was born in 1254 at a merchant’s house in Venice.

57. 他从桌子上把花瓶拿去了。

He has taken the vase from the table.

58.《中国简史》的序文就是一部中国简史。

The preface of “A Short History of China” is a short history of China.

59. 我国的早期教育发展很快。

The early education of our country grows very rapidly.

60. 由于各学院中的教授皆一时之选，致使那间大学名扬遐迩。

It is due to the outstanding professors in the various faculties that the university has won a worldwide fame.

Ⅱ英译中

1. I am then never less alone than when alone.（W. Hazlitt）

我出外旅行时决不比孤独时更少孤独。（误）

我出外旅行时和一人在家时同样的寂寞。（正）

2. Nobody will be the wiser.

谁也不会更为聪明。（误）

谁也不懂得。（正）

注　英文形容词 wise 有三个基本意思：（1）聪明的，如 You were wise not to go.（你不去是聪明的）。（2）饱学的，如 He is wise in the law.（他精通法律）。（3）知道的，如 We are none the wiser for his explanations.（听完他的解释，我们还是不明白）。上例便是第三义，等于说 Nobody will know it. 通常用比较级，意为“至今不知道的事，现在知道了”，所谓 none the wiser = no wiser than before = as wise as before，照旧。

3. The OED is the final court of appeal in all matters concerning English words.

《牛津辞典》是有关英文一切问题的最后的申诉法院。（误）

《牛津辞典》是有关英文一切问题的最高权威。（正）

4. Don’t you see the writing on the wall？

你不看见墙上的字吗？（误）

难道你看不到灾难的迫切吗？（正）

注　典出《旧约·但以理书》（Daniel 5∶5-25）。

5. Truth lies at the bottom of the decanter.

真相从玻璃酒瓶底下看出来。（误）

酒后出真言。（正）

6. Don’t tell him home truths.

不要告诉他家里的真相。（误）

不要对他讲逆耳的事实。（正）

7. This will go a long way in overcoming the difficulty.

在克服困难上要走很远的路。（误）

这在突破难关时是很有帮助的。（正）

注　go a long way = will be helpful. 又 go a little way with a person，意为对那人一点效果也没有，对他影响很少。

8. He has a yellow streak in him.

他身上有一条黄的纹路。（误）

他有胆小的气质。（正）

9. One or two of the jewels would never be missed.

一两粒宝石是决不会不见的。（误）

失去一两粒宝石是决不会知道的。（正）

注　作他动词用的 miss 有四义：（1）不中，不见，如 He hammered away，but half the time he missed the nail.（他不断地用钉锤在钉，但一半都未钉中钉子。）（2）略去，如 When we sing this hymn，miss out the second and fourth verses.（唱这首赞美歌时，略去第二第四两节不唱。）（3）逃避，避免，如 I missed the 7∶30 train and so missed the accident.（我赶脱了七点半的车，所以未遇到那场车祸。）第一个 miss，是上述第一义。（4）觉察（什么）不在，因（某人）不在而想念。我们上面用来作例句的，正是这个意思。他例如 We shall miss you badly when you are away.（你走了我们一定会非常想念你的。）When did you miss your purse？（你何时才发觉你的钱包被扒去了？）Where did you miss your umbrella？（你到什么地方才想起你的伞来？）

10. I know he meant business.

我知道他的用意在生意。（误）

我知道他不是开玩笑的。（正）

注　口语用法的 mean business = be serious；be earnest. 做生意的人是要认真的，讲求信用的，因此引申出上面这种意思来了。

11. This failure was the making of him.

这次失败是他造成的。（误）

这次失败实为他成功的基础。（正）

注　动词 make 原是“造成”的意思，又可作“发展或发达的过程。成功的原因或手段”解，例句中所用的便是这个意思。making 还可以加复数，而构成“要素”，“素质”之意，例如 He has in him the makings of a poet.（他有诗人的素质。）

12. He has never recovered her loss.

他永未能补偿她的损失。（误）

他永含失恃之悲。（正）

注　这是英文中最容易弄错意思的一种表现法。英文属格分主格作用和宾格作用两种。例句说的是宾格作用，所谓 her loss = the loss of his mother，而不是 his mother’s loss，不是他母亲的损失，而是他失去母亲。如果说成 She has never recovered her loss. 就是主格作用，因为 she 和 her 是同一人，her loss 就是她的损失。从他动词变来的名词，就能有这两种作用。

13. I could do with more leisure time.

有更多的闲暇我就能做了。（误）

要再多有一些闲暇就好了呀。（正）

注　can do = be satisfied with；be content with，满足，忍受。在 do 之前用 can 的过去 could 时，便有“要能得到就好了”，“想要”的意思，不过常出于戏言。That man could do with a shave.（那人要把胡子剃光就好了。）

14. She is now in a delicate condition.

她现在是在一种微妙的状态中。（误）

她现在是在怀孕中。（正）

注　分辨 a delicate condition 和 a delicate situation，后者意为“困难的局势”。

15. The lecturer carried his audience with him.

讲演者把他的听众带走了。（误）

讲演者博得全场喝彩。（正）

注　他动词 carry 除普通作“搬运”，“携带”解外，还有“吸引（听众或观众）”的意思，如 His acting carried the house.（他的演技博得满场喝彩。）又有“获胜”（在攻城略地，选举，提案等时）的意思，如 Our troops carried the enemy’s fort.（我军攻下了敌人的炮台。）He carried the election.（他当选了。）The proposal was carried with acclamation.（提案在大家鼓掌喝彩中通过了。）

16. General Smith and my father are on first name basis.

史将军和我父亲都是在第一名的基础上。（误）

史将军和我父亲是称呼名字的知交。（正）

注　on…basis 或 on the basis of；意为“在…原则上”，“在…基础上”。on an equal basis（在平等的原则上）。I am on a fifty-fifty basis with him.（我和他平分。）

17. The grey mare is the better horse.

灰色的牝马是较好的马。（误）

牝鸡司晨。（正）

注　这是一句谚语，意为丈夫受到妻子的支配。John Galsworthy 在他的名著 The Man of Property 中说：“D’you think he knows his own mind？He seems to me a poor thing. I should say the grey mare was the better horse！”（你以为他有决心吗？我觉得他太可怜了。简直是牝鸡司晨呀！）

18. How much did you have to pay down on the car？

在那部车子上你一共花了多少钱？（误）

那部车子你第一次付出多少现钱？（正）

注　down = in cash，在买东西时付出的现金，如 You pay five thousand dollars down and the remainder in installments.（你付五千元现钱，其余分期付款。）

19. Rich and poor were sitting cheek by jowl in the audience.

在听众中贫富分开坐着。（误）

穷人和阔人并肩坐在那里听讲。（正）

注　cheek by jowl 是一个成语，意为“极为接近”，“密接”，因为 cheek 是脸颊，而 jowl 是下颚，二者原是紧接在一起的。胖人因有下颚的垂肉（jowl），而变成双下巴（double-chinned）。

20. Keep your chin up.

抬起头来。（误）

不要失去勇气。（正）

21. The wind blows south.

风向南边吹去。（误）

风从南边吹来。（正）

注　凡表示方位的字，如东南西北，用作副词时，其意为“朝那方向去”，如 The river flows south.（河水向南流去。）唯有说到风的时候，就恰好相反，而指“从那方向来”。如赤壁之战那时正刮着东风，则说 At that time the wind blew east.

22. There was no living in the island.

那岛上无生物。（误）

那岛不能居住。（正）

注　“There is no + 动名词” = “We cannot + 原形不定词” = “It is impossible + to-Infinitive”.

23. A drowning man catches at a straw.

一个落水的人抓住一根草。（误）

一个将溺死的人哪怕是一根草也要去抓。（正）

注　catch a straw 为实际抓住，catch at a straw 为还未抓到手，不过努力想去抓罢了。这个成语说的 catch at a straw 是指 an action of despair，表示绝望时的心情。

24. It was not that he had plenty of money.

他并不是有很多的钱。（误）

那并不是因为他有很多的钱。（正）

注　这个 it 并不代表 that 以下的子句，而只是一个普通的代名词。在这种句式中常可将 it is 略去不说。这个 that = because，句首补上 it is，使成为一个完整的句子而已。说得更完全时，便是 It is not that…but it is…that…。代名词的 it 意为 the reason 或 what I mean.

25. The cavalry were well mounted.

骑兵都已上马待发了。（误）

骑兵都是骑的好马。（正）

注　mount 在此不作“骑”解，而是指“供给马匹”，又 well 非“善于”骑马，而是指“好”马而言。他例如 The woman was well dressed. 不是说那妇人善于穿衣，而是说她的服装都漂亮。

26. He wanted to go to sea.

他要到海边去。（误）

他要去当水手。（正）

注　want 作他动词用时，除“要”一个主要意思外，又还有“缺少”的意思，如 He wants judgment.（他缺少判断力。）作自动词用时则一定作“缺少”或“贫困”解，如 The house wants in height.（这房子不够高。）We mustn’t let him want in his old age.（我们一定不要使他在老年贫困。）wanting 无论作形容词或介词用，都一定是作“缺少”解的，如 Many pages of this book are wanting.（这本书缺了很多页。）Wanting mutual trust，friendship is impossible.（无互信即无友谊。）

27. She is careless of her dress.

她不注意她的衣服。（误）

她不爱惜她的衣服。（正）

注　careless of，意为“不重视”，若谓“不修边幅”则应说 careless about.

28. None is so deaf as those that won’t hear.

没有比听不见的人更聋的了。（误）

没有比不要听的人更聋的了。（正）

注　won’t = will not，表示不要，不想要，含有意志在内，不是不能。

29. You must make good any loss.

你必须转祸为福。（误）

有任何损失你必须赔偿。（正）

注　make good，有“赔偿”之意，如 Let me make good your loss.（让我赔偿你的损失。）又有“实践”之意，如 You must make good a promise.（你必须实践诺言。）

30. Those apples are good and ripe.

那些苹果是优良且成熟的。（误）

那些苹果是很成熟了的。（正）

注　good and，当作一个副词用，意为“非常”（very），“完全”（thoroughly）。同类型的表现法还有 nice and（ = nicely），rare and（ = rarely）等，如 The car was going nice and fast. = The car was going satisfactorily fast.（车子跑得够快了。）

31. The smoke betrayed where the dwelling lay.

烟将家屋毁坏了。（误）

炊烟起处有人家。（正）

注　动词 betray 有四义：（1）出卖。如 They betrayed their country.（他们出卖了自己的国家。）He was betrayed by his friend.（他为朋友所出卖。）（2）不忠，辜负。如 She betrayed her promise.（她不守诺言。）He will not betray our trust.（他不负我们所托。）（3）泄露。如 He betrayed his friend’s secret.（泄友之秘密。）（4）无意中暴露，显示。如 His behaviour betrayed his intention.（他的行为显出企图。）His mistakes betrayed his lack of education.（错误显出他缺乏教育。）上面的例句正是这第四义，深山中的茅屋，为树木所遮蔽，外人看不出来，但有炊烟升起时，就显示出那里有人家了。

32. Curses come home to roost.

诅咒回到老巢。（误）

害人终害己。（正）

注　roost 原意为巢，引申为安歇处，说 go to roost，即为上床睡觉。例句说诅咒回到原来出发的地方，即是反而害了自己。

33. He is brave like anything.

他像任何东西一样的勇敢。（误）

其勇无比。（正）

注　like anything，意为拿任何东西来譬喻都不相称，引申而成“非常”，“不劣于任何东西”之意。

34. It is said that his days are numbered.

据说他的日子都计算好了。（误）

据说他的死期已近。（正）

注　number 用作被动时，有“为数可数”之意，即“有限”，“无多”，“迫切”的意思。传说人寿有定，当生命将尽时，可以说 His hour has come. 或 His course is run.

35. It is time he began to work.

这时他已经开始工作了。（误）

现在是他应该开始工作的时候了。（正）

注　“It is time + 主语 + 过去动词”，就和“It is time for + 宾语 + 不定词”一样的意思。句中的过去动词是一种假设语气的用法，他例如 It is time I was going.（我早应该告辞了。）

36. He was lost in admiration.

他被人赞扬不置。（误）

他不胜羡慕之至。（正）

注　这句也可译为“他不胜赞赏”。be lost in，原意是隐匿在什么东西中间而看不见了，如山峰被云遮住，就说 The summit is lost in the clouds. 说某人走失在人群中看不见了，就是 He was lost（sight of）in the crowd. 所谓 be lost in，即从 be lost sight of in 而来，所以 He was lost in admiration. 原意是说在 admiration 中看不见自身，也就是进入忘我的境界，因羡慕或赞赏过甚，而忘其自身的存在了。中国话说的“发愤忘食”，“得意忘形”中的忘字，正是这种情形。

37. He was strong in his time.

他在一生中都很强健。（误）

他在年轻时身体强壮。（正）

注　in one’s time（或 days），意为 when he was young（或 at his best）。相反的说法则为 in one’s age.（在老年）。

38. He may be drowned for all I care.

不顾我怎样当心，他或许仍然会溺死的。（误）

他也许会溺死，但我毫不介意。（正）

注　for all I care = I don’t care if. 英文说的 for all 或 with all，实有不顾（notwithstanding）之意，如 For all his wealth，he is unhappy.（他虽有那么多的钱还是不快乐。）

39. There is no love lost between them.

他们之间并未失掉爱情。（误）

我们非常不和。（正）

注　这是委婉的说法，意为他们之间根本无爱情可言，换言之，There is hatred between them.（他们之间只有憎恨。）

40. He had words with her.

他和她谈过话了。（误）

他和她发生口角了。（正）

注　have words with 或 exchange words with，为互相争论或口角之意。本例也可说成 They had words together. 英文的 words，常有吵嘴的意思，如 proceed from words to blows（由争论而至殴打。）

41. He was laid up for a few days.

他被安插好几天了。（误）

他病倒两三天了。（正）

注　因病或伤睡在床上，英文说 lay up，如 be laid up with illness（卧病）；be laid up with a broken leg（因折腿不能起床）。

42. He took my advice in good part.

他接受了我的忠告最好的部分。（误）

他嘉纳了我的忠言。（正）

注　take something in good part，意为“善意地接受”或“顺受”。相反的说法有 in bad（或 ill）part，则为“不悦”或“逆受”。A 教授请假一日后通知学生翌晨照常上课，在黑板上写道“Prof. A will meet his class tomorrow morning.”有顽皮学生恶作剧，把 class 一字的第一个字母“c”擦去，变成了 lass（意为少女或情妇），教授见到不以为忤（The professor took the practical joke in good part.）进而再擦去“l”那个字母，如是学生变成蠢材了。

43. It is a wise man that never makes mistakes.

聪明人从来不做错事。（误）

智者千虑必有一失。（正）

注　此句照字面解释，似应照误句的译法，不过这是一句古来的谚语，凡“it is…that（who）”的构造，都含有“无论怎样……都不免”的意思。参考下列各句：It is an ill wind that blows nobody good.（害于此者利于彼。人病医生喜。人死和尚乐。）It is an ill bird that fouls its own nest.（自诽其家者未之有也。家丑不可外扬。）It is a good workman that never blunders.（无论怎样好的工人有时都不免做错。）It is a long lane that has no turning.（否极泰来。）It is a wise mother who knows her own child.（为母者不知其子之恶。）It is a good divine who follows his own instructions.（能说者不能行。）

44. We parted the best friends.

我们和最好的朋友离别了。（误）

我们在分别时是极好的朋友。（正）

注　part 是一个自动词，the best friends 为补语。

45. Twenty failed，myself among the rest.

有二十人落第，但我自己不在内。（误）

落第者二十名，我自己也是其中之一。（正）

注　the rest，原意为“其余”，如 as for the rest（至于其他之点）。但 among the rest，则系一个成语，意为 among the number（就在那个数目之中）。

46. I am in his debt.

我是他的债主。（误）

我借了他的钱。（正）

注　be in one’s debt，意为“有负于人”，“欠他的债”，进而有“蒙恩”的意思。

47. He is dead，as I live.

他死了，我还活着。（误）

他的的确确是死了。（正）

注　as I live 在此意为 indeed（的确），是加重前面主句的。英文还有其他类似的说法，如 as I am here，as the sun shines，as you stand here，as my nose is on my face 等等。

48. She will make you a good wife.

她将使你做一个好妻子。（误）

她将成为你的好妻子。（正）

注　这个 make 是完全他动词，采用了两个宾语，前面的 you 为间接宾语，后面的 good wife 为直接宾语。“母亲要替我买一只表”一语，如不译为 Mother will buy a watch for me. 时，也可译为 Mother will buy me a watch. 所以上举例句就是 She well make a good wife for you 的另一种说法。利用 make 这个他动词，我们还可以造出这样的妙句：She made him a good husband because she made him a good wife.（因为她成为他的好妻子，所以也把他做成了一个好丈夫。）第一个 made 为不完全他动词；第二个 made 为完全他动词。

49. His picture does credit to a professional.

他的画可增加专家的信用。（误）

他的画较之专家所作亦无逊色。（正）

注　does credit to = be worthy of，意为“有成为的价值”，“为之增光”，如 She does credit to the educational system pursued here.（Thackeray）（她为这里所追求的教育制度增光不少。）

50. I am staying with a friend.

我和一个朋友同住。（误）

我现在住在一个朋友家里。（正）

注　stay with = stay at -’s house. 用 with 时后接“人物”，用 in 时后接“地方”，用 at 时后接“房屋”。

51. They made an example of the boy.

他们以此童为模范。（误）

他们惩罚此童以儆其余。（正）

注　make an example of one = punish one as an example to others. = make an example of the first offender as a warning to others.（惩初犯者以儆效尤）。注意：如说 set an example，就是“示范”了，如 He set an example to his inferiors.（他为晚辈示范。）You should set an example for the future.（你应以身作则，垂法于后。）

52. We found them at table.

我发现他们在打牌。（误）

我看见他们在用餐。（正）

注　green table 是指赌博，普通单说 table 一字，多半是说用餐，如 lay the table 摆刀叉准备用餐。keep a good table 餐食丰美。keep an open table 广纳食客。

53. I will make myself obeyed.

我要使自己服从。（误）

我自己说的话必将恪守。（正）

注　参考：I made myself understood in English.（我使别人能听懂我用英语说的话。）例句中的 obeyed 的用法，与上例中的 understood 相同。如说 I made you understand me.（我使你了解我。）则与说 I will make others obey me.（我要使别人服从我。）用法相同，understand 和 obey 二字，都是略去了 to 的不定词。

54. But for hope，life would be short.

但是因为希望，人生是短促的。（误）

如果没有希望，人生苦短。（正）

注　but for = if it were not for 或 if it had not been for（如果没有），可作为过去或过去完成的省略。这个 but 有否定之意，后面如不接 for，而接 that 也是一样，如 Life could be short，but that hope prolongs it.（人生是短促的，若非希望去延长它的话。）

55. He is ignorant to a proverb.

他不懂得这句谚语。（误）

他的无知是有名的。（正）

注　这句话又可说成 His ignorance is a proverb. 或 He is a proverb for ignorance. 所谓 proverb，是指尽人皆知的事，故 to a proverb，意即尽人皆知，达到尽人皆知的程度。参考：He is ignorant to a wonder.（他的无知令人吃惊。）改用形容词也是一样，如 His generosity is proverbial = He is proverbial for his generosity.（他的大量是人所共知的。）

56. The man was generous to a fault.

那人宽恕过失。（误）

他过于宽大。（正）

注　to a fault = to excess；excessively，过度地，极端地。他例如，He is kind to a fault.（他极端亲切。）用上 faut 一字，原意为即令有缺点也满不在乎。

57. I have no opinion of that sort of man.

我不赞成那种人的意见。（误）

我对于那种人毫无好感。（正）

注　句中的 opinion 一字，不是“意见”，而是“评价”的意思，又可作“信用”解，如 I have no opinion of him.（我不相信其人。）他例如 I have a very high opinion of him.（我尊敬他。）

58. He will finish it in no time.

他将永远不能完成此事。（误）

他马上就会把这个做完。（正）

注　in no time = in a moment. 立刻。

59. I have a long letter in hand.

我手中拿着一封长信。（误）

我正在写着一封长信。（正）

注　如果是手中拿着的话，应说 I have a long letter in my hand，单说 have in hand 意为 be engaged in（正进行中，担任着，制驭着）。他例如 He has a novel in hand.（他正在写一部长篇小说。）参考：at hand（近，在近边，在手边），by hand（用手），on hand（现存着，即来），to hand（到手，收到）。

60. He thought all his own that she had.

他以为他自己所有的一切都是她的。（误）

他以为她所有的一切都是他自己的。（正）

注　all 是 that she had 的 antecedant（先行词）。

61. He is equal to any task whatever.

他对任何事情都是同等看待的。（误）

他对任何工作都可胜任愉快。（正）

注　be equal to the work = be able to do the work，胜任愉快，应付裕如。他例如 He was equal to the occasion.（他能应付那种局势。他能临机应变。）She is very weak and not equal to a long journey.（她身体很弱，不堪长途跋涉。）She does not feel equal to receiving so many visitors.（她觉得力有未逮，不能接待这么多的客人。）

62. He has to answer to me for the letter.

他必须回答我那封信。（误）

关于那封信他必须对我负责。（正）

注　answer for，有“负责”的意思，如 answer for a crime（对一种罪行负责。）answer for his safety.（负责他的安全。）You will have to answer for your wrongdoings one day.（将来有一天，你会自食其恶果的。）I can’t answer for his honesty.（我不能保证他的诚实。）

63. They did not answer to your explanation.

他们对你的解释没有回答。（误）

那些和你的解释不相符合。（正）

注　“回答”只能用 answer 一字，不能加 to。英文说的 answer to = correspond，即“符合”之意。主语的 they，指事不指人。

64. The officer was broken for neglect of duty.

那军官破坏守则，忽视义务。（误）

那军官因玩忽职守而受降级处分。（正）

注　break = reduce in rank，是美国用法，说 break an officer，便是将他革职（dismiss），把他的官阶降级到士兵的地位。

65. They were killed to a man.

他们被杀得只剩下一个人了。（误）

他们被杀得片甲不留。（正）

注　（all）to a man = all without exception，（一个人都不留，全部），实连最后一人也包括在内，并无例外。他例如 Though we expected some absences，the staff were there to a man.（我们以为有人缺席，实则都到齐了。）

66. The village is on the side of the mountain.

那村庄在山旁。（误）

那村庄在山腰。（正）

注　山有阴阳两面（two sides），说在一面上，自然是在半山上，若说在旁边，则是指在山下的意思，英文为 by the side of.

67. He was at once a soldier and a writer.

他立刻成为一个军人和作家了。（误）

他是一个军人，同时又是一个作家。（正）

注　英文成语 at once，原有两个意思，即“立刻”和“同时”，例句中后面跟了一个 and，说明是两件事，自然应作同时解。

68. She can play on the piano after a fashion.

她能随时俗的所尚弹奏钢琴。（误）

她能稍许弹弹钢琴。（正）

注　after a fashion = not satisfactorily but somehow or other，乃委婉的贬词，意为“稍许”，“略为”。他例如 She has a rough manner，but she is kind after a fashion.（她态度粗鲁，但人还和善。）如把不定冠词改变为定冠词，就变成“追逐时髦”的意思了：after the fashion = in accordance with the prevailing style of dress，etc. 例如 This kind of hat is after the fashion。（这种帽子正在流行。）

69. He was worn out with company.

他已倦于交游了。（误）

来客太多使他疲于应接。（正）

注　company 在此作“客人”或“友伴”解，例如 He is fond of company.（他好客。）Will you favour me with your company at dinner？（敬备菲酌，恭候台光。）

70. Take this as an earnest of what is to come.

把这个当作未来热心从事的表示。（误）

拿这个去作为定金，以后再行付清。（正）

注　earnest 作形容词用时意为“热心”或“认真”，但作名词用时，则意为“定金”、“保证”、“抵押”、“预兆”。

71. It is the man behind the gun that tells.

说话的是在大炮后面的人。（误）

胜败在人而不在武器。（正）

注　动词 tell = produce marked effect（见效，奏功）。例如 Money is bound to tell.（钱到效生。）Every shot tells.（百发百中。）Years begin to tell upon him.（年老使他开始显得虚弱起来。）

72. He never calls a spade a spade.

他从来不把锄头叫做锄头。（误）

他从来不说直话。（正）

注　call a spade a spade = speak quite plainly（直言无隐。）原是打桥牌的用法，因为玩牌时手上有什么牌常不直说，分明手上是一张 spade，却故意说成 club，或 heart，或 diamond，以乱视听。

73. The proper study of mankind is man.（A. Pope）

人类能正当学习的只有男人。（误）

要正当地研究人类，就应以人为对象。（正）

注　句尾的 man，无冠词，仍然是指 mankind.

74. The Child is father of the Man.（W. Wordsworth）

孩子是男人的父亲。（误）

成人是由幼儿长大的。（正）

注　意指从幼儿的心中产生出大人的思想感情来，俗语说的三岁儿童百岁魂，可知一粒小的种子可以长成一株参天乔木，现在倒过来说，成为 paradox（似非而是的雋语，如越帮越忙，越忙越慢之类），倒是很有趣的。句中 Child 和 Man 都用大写，不但表示强调，而且含有抽象的意味。

75. Every time he snickers，he sprays his audience，like a Chinese laundryman.（Erle Stanley Gardner）

每次他用目光扫射他的听众时，他都不免暗笑，像一个中国洗衣匠烫衣服的样子。（误）

每次他笑时唾沫横飞到他的对谈者的身上，就好像中国人的洗衣工在烫衣时用口喷水一样。（正）

76. That picture flatters her.

那是逢迎她而画的。（误）

那画像美过她本人。（正）

77. He flatters himself that he speaks English as well as an Englishman.

他夸奖自己的英语说得和英国人一样好。（误）

他妄自以为他说英语跟英国人一样好。（正）

注　flatter oneself that = feel satisfaction with oneself，妄自以为，自鸣得意，私自窃喜。

78. It does not belong to me to dictate to my colleagues.

要同僚给我笔录的事是不属于我的。（误）

我无权对同僚下命令。（正）

注　自动词的 belong 有四种用法：（1）关系上的所属，如 He belongs to the Republican Party.（他是共和党。）（2）主权上的所属，如 This book belongs to me.（这本书是我的。）（3）配合上的所属，如 That cover belongs to this jar.（那盖是这个瓶子的。）（4）地位上的所属，如 This is a place where（ = to which）he doesn’t belong.（这是不合他身份的地方。）上例便是第四种用法。此字英国用法后常接介词 to，美国用法则可接 among，in，on，under，with 各样不同的介词。至于动词 dictate，也有二义：（1）口述令人笔录，如 I dictate letters to my clerk.（我令书记笔录信件。）（2）指示，命令，指定，如 The country that won the war dictated the terms of peace to the country that lost.（战胜国向战败国指令讲和的条件。）I cannot give order，nor will I be dictated to.（既不能令，又不受命。）It belongs to me to dictate to them.（我有权命令他们。）It is not for you to dictate to me.（你不可以向我下命令。）I will not be dictated to.（我不受命。）

79. Better not be at all than not be noble.（Tennyson）

与其不能高尚，不如完全不要。（误）

与其忍辱偷生，不如光荣而死。（正）

宁为玉碎，不为瓦全。（正）

注　句前省略了 It would be 三字，有时也可看作省略了 You had 二字，他例如 Better be a nettle in the side of your friend than his echo.（Emerson）（与其做朋友的应声虫，不如做他腰间的荨麻，即不能万事逢迎。）

80. Homekeeping youth have ever homely wits.

守在家里的青年总有家常的机智。（误）

足不出国门的年轻人，常是心智平庸的。（正）

老是呆在国内的年轻人，总是头脑呆板的。（正）

81. I will see you hanged first.

我要看你先吊死。（误）

那里有人肯做这样的事。（正）

注　see 字后面略去了 that 的连词。这个 see 即 see to it 之略，也就是 take care 的意思。他例如 I will see you avenged.（必定使你可以报仇。）

82. She’s the sort of woman who likes to be very much in evidence.

她是那种喜欢求证的女人。（误）

她是属于爱出风头的女人。（正）

注　in evidence = conspicuous 显然可见。例如 Smith is nowhere in evidence.（史密斯不见了。）

83. He doesn’t know any better.

他不知道任何更好的。（误）

他居然有这样笨。（正）

注　know better = be wiser.

84. He is one of the institutions of the place.

他是当地机构之一。（误）

他是当地知名人物之一。（正）

注　institution 俗语有名人之意。他例如 John W. Gardner 说的，Self-congratulation should be taken in small doses. It is habitforming，and most human institutions are far gone in addiction.（自歌自颂只可偶一为之，多必成瘾，而大多数的达官贵人都已成为瘾君子了。）

85. I’ll eat my hat if I do.

如果我做的话，我就要吃掉我的帽子。（误）

我决不做。（正）

86. It is the watch I am anxious to have mended.

这就是我系念着是否已修理好了的表。（误）

这就是我渴望去把它修理好的表。（正）

注　不可把 have mended 当作完成动词来看，须知 watch 才是 have 的宾语，全句用单句说时，则成 I am anxious to have the watch mended.

87. I can make nothing of what he says.

我认为他说的话一文不值。（误）

他说的话我一点也不懂得。（正）

注　make…of，普通是作 consider as（认为）解的，不过加上一个 can，意思就大不相同了。can make…of = understand（了解）。

88. I did what I thought was wise.

我做了我想做的事是聪明的。（误）

我做了我以为是贤明的事。（正）

注　句中有句，I thought 是插进去的另一个句子，was 的主语是 what. 主句是 I did what was wise. 不可把 what I thought 当作 was 的主语。

89. He talked himself hoarse.

他用粗嗄的声音说说。（误）

他说得声音都嘶哑了。（正）

注　hoarse 是补语，不是表手段，而是表结果的。全文意为 He talked till he was hoarse. 类例如 She cried herself blind.（眼睛都哭瞎了。）

90. I went an enemy，and returned a friend.

我去掉一个敌人，迎回一个朋友。（误）

我去时是敌，归时为友。（正）

注　enemy 和 friend 都是补语，与 I 一致。

91. He wants for something to read.

他想要有点什么阅读的东西。（误）

他没有东西阅读正感难过。（正）

注　单说 want，意为“要”，“需要”，“想得到”，是他动词，want for 意为“缺乏”，“短少”，是自动词。说 I do not want for a dictionary. 不是“不想要字典”，而是“不短少字典”。

92. She made light of her illness.

她减轻了自己的病。（误）

她轻视自己的病。（正）

注　make light of，轻视，瞧不起。

93. He looked thanks at her.

他看见她有感谢的样子。（误）

他以感谢的目光看着她。（正）

注　thanks 为 looked 的同系宾语，表现感激的是他，不是她。

94. There is nothing like home.

没有像家一样的东西。（误）

任何地方都没有家里好。（正）

注　There is nothing like，没有比这更好的，胜过这个的再没有了。

95. You have your own way to make.

你完全要照自己的意思去做。（误）

你非独力开拓你的前途不可。（正）

注　have one’s own way，意为“随心所欲”，“为所欲为”，但 make one’s own way，则大不相同，意为“努力上进”，“独力奋斗”。

96. She is well-informed for a woman of the old school.

以一个古老学校出身的妇人来说，她是见闻广博的。（误）

以一个旧式的女人来说，她是见闻广博的。（正）

注　well-informed，见闻广博的，消息灵通的。old school，老派，旧式。

97. He will do for a teacher.

他努力想做个教师。（误）

他适宜于做个教师。（正）

注　do = suit，适合。

98. I am no man’s man.

我不是谁何的人。（误）

我不是任何人的下走。（正）

注　等二个 man = servant.

99. He takes after his father more than his mother.

你从父亲遗传比从母亲更多。（误）

他比他的母亲更像他的父亲。（正）

注　take after，相貌相似。

100. I have next to nothing to say about my childhood.

其次关于我孩童时代的事我无话可说。（误）

关于我的孩童时代我几乎没有什么可说的。（正）

注　next to = almost，故 next to nothing，意为“几乎什么都没有”；next to impossible，“几乎不可能”。

101. I shall leave here for good next year.

明年我将好好地离开这里。（误）

明年我离开这里不再回来。（正）

注　for good 或 for good and all，意为“永久地”。

102. He was caught red-handed.

他被红手抓住了。（误）

他在现行中被捕。（正）

103. Every man cannot be a poet.

每个人都不能成为诗人。（误）

人非尽可为诗人。（正）

注　every 与否定连用时，也和 all，both 等一样，是部分否定而非全部否定。比较：部分否定说 Every couple is not a pair.（配合得宜的夫妇少有。）全部否定说 No couple is a pair.（配合得宜的夫妇没有。）又 All is not gold that glitters.（一切闪耀的东西，未必都是黄金。）

104. Don’t cough more than you can help.

不要多咳除非你能忍住的时候。（误）

不要多咳除非你忍不住的时候。（正）

注　这句极普通的英语，严格地说，是完全不合理的。合理的说法应该是 Don’t cough more than you cannot help，因为固定的成语为 cannot help（不禁，不得不），例如 I cannot help laughing.（我不禁发笑。）

105. You are not playing the game.

你不是在竞技。（误）

你不公平。（正）

注　英国人讲究竞技精神（sportsmanship），在比赛时一定要 A fair field and no favour，may the best man win. 即所谓 fair play（公平）。这种精神运用到一般国民的日常生活上，凡事有不公平或不正直的地方，就说那不是竞技的办法。因此竞技一词就成为公平正直的代名词了。

106. The actress has her head turned.

那女优回过她的头来。（误）

那女优得意忘形。（正）

注　have one’s head turned，因不当的赞扬或意外的成功，使人改变常态，自以为了不起。

107. I’m a Dutchman if it is true.

真的我就是一个荷兰人。（误）

绝无其事。（正）

注　在英荷战争时，“荷兰人”这个名词，就成为一切虚伪的事情或可恨的事物的同义字了。说 I would rather be a Dutchman，是表示极强硬的拒绝。I’m a Dutchman if I do.（我决不做。）至今英文中的 Dutch 或 Dutchman，总是含有不好的意思，如 Dutch courage（虚勇，酒后之勇），Dutch defence（假防御），Dutch feast（主人先客而醉的宴会），Dutch treat（各自出钱的宴会），Dutch widow（妓女），Dutch wife（竹夫人），Dutch auction（拍卖者自动落价，直到有人愿出钱购买的拍卖）。

108. There are friends and friends.

那儿有许多朋友。（误）

朋友有种种不同，有益友，有损友。（正）

注　这表现法似乎是出自 Bacon 说的 There are dinners and dinners. 一语，现应用到其他一切事情上，如 There are shopkeepers and shopkeepers.（商人有好有坏。）

109. I wish peace could be saved at the eleventh hour.

我希望在第十一点钟和平可以得救。（误）

我希望在最后五分钟可以挽回和平。（正）

注　at the eleventh hour = at the last possible moment，意为在最后一个可能的时机中。

110. I am now a little under the weather.

我现在有点像在露天之下。（误）

我现在有点不舒服。（正）

注　under the weather = unwell or depressed，意为受天气影响而患病。

111. Somebody will have to break the ice.

有人一定会把冰敲破的。（误）

总有人得先开口说话。（正）

注　break the ice = make a beginning，or break through reserve or stiffiness. 打破僵局，打破冷场。When you have broken the ice（ = When you know him better after the first formalities）with him，you will like him.（你跟他混熟一点，不受拘束自由言行时，你就会喜欢他的。）

112. The boy cried because his schoolfellows called him names.

因为同学叫了他的名字，那孩子哭了。（误）

那孩子哭了，因为他的同学骂了他。（正）

注　call names 即 call bad names such as “Fool” and “Dunce”，骂人。他例如 He called me all kinds of names.（他对我任意辱骂。）

113. If he has a hobby let him ride it.

如果他有一匹小马，让他去骑吧。（误）

如果他有什么得意的话题，让他发挥好了。（正）

注　hobby 在古文中或方言中，意为 pony（小马），故木马或竹马就说 hobbyhorse。成语有 side（或 mount）a hobby，意为叨叨不绝地谈论自己癖好的问题，使人听得厌倦。hobby 现为本职以外的癖好的事物或职业，如集邮、种花、养鸟之类。

114. Why should I quarrel with my bread and butter？

我为什么要和牛油面包发生口角呢？（误）

我为什么要和自己的生计作对呢？（正）

注　bread and butter，指我们所依靠的糊口之资，例如与衣食父母的老板吵架，结果不免打破饭碗。

115. He used to lay down the law in a teahouse.

他从前常在茶馆里无法无天的乱闹。（误）

他从前常在茶馆里大发议论武断一切。（正）

注　lay down the law = speak in tones of authority，在辩论时，说话独断，装做是权威一般地说话。此外还有斥责，下命令等义。

116. Most people have a daily fight to keep the wolf from the door.

许多人每天都在奋斗，以免引狼入室。（误）

许多人每天都在与饥饿奋斗。（正）

注　wolf 为贫苦与饥饿的象征。

117. There is no come and go with him.

与他毫无往来。（误）

他非常固执，怎也劝不动他。（正）

注　come and go，为复合名词，意为“往来”，尤指交通。又可作“星移物换”解，在本例中用在 no 字之后，则为“无可变动”之意。

118. He has come off second best.

他以第二名获得成功。（误）

他失败了。（正）

注　普通说 come off，为“成功”之意，second best 为“第二个最好的”，但在本例中实为一种婉说法，意指在竞争中失败了。

119. He has got out of the bed on the wrong side today.

他今天是从床后面爬起来的。（误）

他今天很不高兴。（正）

注　这句又可说成 rise out of the wrong side of the bed. 一开头就错误，自然一天都不高兴。至于 wrong 一字，常指不正当的事，如说 He was born on the wrong side of the blanket.（私生子）。She laughs on the wrong side of the mouth.（哭）。

120. Go it while you are young.

去吧，当你正年轻的时候。（误）

青春不再，趁早努力。（正）

注　go 在此为他动词。go it = act with vigour and daring advocate or speak strongly，live freely，故又可说 go it blind，（fast，strong，bald-headed，etc.）例如 I don’t like to go it blind.（毫不了解的事我不愿做。）come 也有同样的用法，例如 He comes it strong.（过于夸大，恭维过度，行之过激等。）You can’t come it = You cannot succeed.（你不会成功的。）

习题

试改正下列错误的译文：

1. My shoes are the worse for wear.

我的皮鞋更加不好穿了。

2. Everybody bridled at his remarks.

人人都尽量控制自己说的话语。

3. Fight shy of the theoretical method of approach to the learning of English.

从理论上来讲，学英文的方法，就是要战胜害羞。

4. It is not women and Frenchmen only that would rather have their tongues bitten than bitted.

不只是妇女和法国人愿意用舌剑唇枪应付敌人。

5. He changed his condition only a week ago.

他的健康状态在一星期前改变了。

6. He got married accepting a leap-year proposal.

他在闰年接受提议而结婚了。

7. All my advice falls flat on him.

我的忠言使他平地跌倒。

8. You can always tell the somebodies from the nobodies at a cocktail party. The somebodies come late.

你可以报告鸡尾酒会有无人到或有人迟到。

9. The persons elected will sit till 31 Dec.，1973.

选出的人要坐到一九七三年底为止。

10. He is free with his money.

他有钱很自由。

11. An airplane was ordered from France.

从法国来定了一架飞机。

12. She has been a widow only six months.

她只做了六个月的寡妇。

13. Your loss is nothing to mine.

你的损失与我无关。

14. He started on New Year’s Eve.

他在新年的晚上出发了。

15. He left his watch with me.

他丢下我和他的表走了。

16. He pretended not to be ill.

他没有假装生病。

17. “I think not，” said he.

他说：“我不以为然。”

18. It is two years come Christmas.

耶诞日来过两年了。

19. Men of millions are possessed with the idea.

几百万人都具有这种思想。

20. He is behind time.

他已落伍。

21. He went up stairs.

他上二楼去了。

22. One fine morning he found himself a ruined man.

在一个晴天的早晨他发现自己衰颓了。

23. His English leaves nothing to be desired.

他的英文毫无希望。

24. Take care that all is right.

当心一切就好了。

25. He measured his length on the floor as soon as he entered the room.

他一进房就在地板上测量了他的长度。

26. We searched him to no purpose.

我们寻找他毫无目的。

27. I met a woman with child when I came home.

我回家时遇见一个带着孩子的妇人。

28. He succeeded to a large property.

他事业成功获得一笔大的财产。

29. He caught me by the hand.

他用手抓住了我。

30. What shall I go in？

我要加入什么？

31. He says what he does not mean.

他说话毫无意思。

32. No alcohol this evening.

今天晚上没有酒精了。

33. What does c-a-m-e-l spell？

骆驼怎样拼的？

34. He is tired of the work.

他工作得疲劳了。

35. Life is often compared to a voyage.

生命好与航行比较。

36. Better to reign in hell than serve in heaven.（Milton）

最好统治地狱，不要服事天堂。

37. Iowa’s Governor Harold Hughes had withdrawn his favorite son candidacy 12 days ago and shortly afterwards announced his support for Senator Eugene J. McCarthy of Minnesota.

爱荷华州州长休士已经把他宠爱的儿子的候补资格撤销，随后不久就宣布支持明尼苏达州的参议员麦卡席。

38. If the election were held today，we would not have a prayer.

如果今天举行选举的话，我们就不去做祷告。

39. I would rather have his room than his company.

我宁肯要他的房间，不要他的公司。

40. That women are bad drivers is open to question.

说女人不会驾车是公开的问题。

41. The lost child was soon identified.

那失去的孩子很快就认为系同一的了。

42. He begged to be remembered to you.

他求你记得他。

43. I have seen nothing of him of late.

我近来没有看见他的什么东西。

44. He shared the little he had with the poor.

他把和穷人共有的少许东西全分配完了。

45. What you cannot afford to buy，do without.

不能买到的东西，就不必去买了。

46. What is done cannot be undone.

自己做了的事不能说未做。

47. She believed he said so honestly.

她相信他说得像真的一样。

48. They have been broken into a dozen pieces.

它们打碎成十二片了。

49. They that know nothing fear nothing.

可怕的事物他们全不知道。

50. The picture was painted after Wu Chang-shih.

这画是吴昌硕以后画的。

51. He knows what it is to have a boy idle.

他知道有一个懒惰的孩子是怎么一回事。

52. It is no proof that one cannot do a thing because one does not like it.

因为不喜欢就不能做，这是不能证明的。

53. I bought these books new.

我新近买了这些书。

54. He borrowed a horse of a friend.

他借了朋友的马。

55. He covered ten miles an hour.

他一点钟包括了十英里。

56. He helped himself to the wine.

他帮忙自己饮酒。

57. I believe in rough，manly sports.

我信仰激烈的男性的运动。

58. He did not see the movie out.

他没有看那电影演出。

59. Eighty poor fellows perished.

有八十个穷人死亡。

60. He said nothing to that effect.

他说的话一点效果也没有。

叁　翻译实例

Ⅰ中译英

（1）郑燮致弟书

【原文】

吾意欲筑一土墙院子，门内多栽竹、树、草花，用碎砖铺曲迳（1）一条，以达二门（2）。其内茅屋二间，一间坐客，一间作房，贮图书史籍，笔墨砚瓦（3），酒董（4）茶具其中，为良朋好友，后生小子论文赋诗之所。其后住家，主屋三间，厨房二间，奴子屋（5）一间，共八间，俱用草苫（6），如此足矣。或曰，此等宅居甚适，只是怕盗贼，不知盗贼亦穷民耳。开门延入，商量分惠，有什么便拿什么去。若一无所有，便王献之之青毡（7），亦可携取质（8）百钱救急也。吾弟当留心此地，为狂兄（9）娱老之资（10），不知可能遂愿否？

【译文】

I am thinking of building a house enclosed with earthen walls，in which plenty of bamboos，trees and various flowers should be planted. There should be a curved path paved with broken bricks leading to the porch. There are two spacious rooms behind the porch，one used as drawing-room and the other as study. Books and paintings，records and documents，writing-brushes and inksticks as well as inkstones，wine utensils and tea-sets are to be put in these two rooms. My intimate friends and young people may come here to discuss literature and make poems. Behind these there is the residence consisting of three bedrooms for the family，two rooms as kitchen，and one as servant quarters，so the total number of rooms in this house is eight，under the same thatched roof. That will be quite enough for me. Some one says that such a house is comfortable to live in，but the trouble is that thieves might easily break in，too. But he doesn’t realize that thieves are but poor people. If they should come，I would open the door and invite them to step in，so as to talk over the distribution of my belongings. They may take whatever I have. In case there is nothing at all worth taking，I would give them the hereditary blue blanket as what Wang Shien-tze had possessed，with which they may pawn for a hundred cashes to meet their urgent need. You must know，my dear brother，that this place will serve as the last resort to spend my peaceful latter years，but I wonder if I could be able to fulfill it or not.

【注释】

（1）碎砖铺曲迳（同径）：crazy pavement.（2）二门：门廊，porch.（3）砚瓦：中国的书画家喜欢用汉瓦或汉砖作砚。inkstone.（4）酒董：酒器。wine utensils。（5）奴子屋：仆人住的地方。servant quarters.（6）草苫：thatched.（7）王献之之青毡：晋人王子敬被盗时，只说“那铺青毡是我家祖传的东西，请你特别给我留下，其余你要的东西，随便你拿去好了”。the hereditary blue blanket as Wang Shien-tze had possessed.（8）质：典当。pawn.（9）狂兄：板桥自称的谦词。Ⅰ.（10）娱老之资：娱老意为养老。资在此为凭借之物。last resort for my old age.

（2）中国的山水画

【原文】

要说明山水画（1）的布置，先得说明山水画的构图（2）原理。原来山水画的构图，不是对景写实，而是用鸟瞰（3）的方法，将真景缩小（4），然后加以描写的。眼睛（5）中所能看到的，只有一重（6）山或一重水，这样简单的景物，是不容易构成山水画面的。作画的人，得走入山水的深处，遍观所有的风景（7），回到家里，把所经历的地方，像画地图似的缩写出来，还得把自己放的很大（8），把风景缩的很小，好像看假山（9）似的，才能构成“咫尺千里” （10）的画面。

【译文】

In order to explain the disposition of a landscape painting，we have to make clear at first the principle of its composition. Originally the composition of landscapes is not to paint a real picture as we see it，but to depict by means of a bird’s eye view，namely，to diminish the subject matter in a nutshell. What we can see with our naked eyes is generally only a single layer of mountains or rivers. This of course is not enough for us to compose a scene of the landscape. The one who paints ought to go into the heart of mountains and rivers，inspecting all the scenery before he puts down from memory on returning home the whole scope of his travelled regions as a miniature as he draws a map. In doing so，he has to enlarge himself as big as possible and contract the scenery as small as a rock-work to look upon，then he can for the first time compose a picture of thousand miles represented on a few-foot piece of paper or the like.

【注释】

（1）山水画：landscape painting.（2）构图：composition.（3）鸟瞰：a bird’s eye view.（4）缩小：diminish.（5）眼睛：指肉眼。our naked eyes.（6）重：layer.（7）遍观所有的风景：inspect all the scenery. 注意 scenery 指一个地方或某一带的风景，不可写成复数如山景则说 mountain scenery，海岸风光则说 coast scenery，风景如画则说 picturesque scenery. 又如 The scenery of West Lake is impressive. 西湖的山水留给游人深刻的印象。（8）放大：enlarge.（9）假山：rock-work.（10）咫尺千里：a picture of thousand miles represented on a small piece of paper.

（3）为学

【原文】

天下事有难易乎（1）？为之，则难者亦易矣；不为，则易者亦难矣。人之为学（2），有难易乎？学之，则难者亦易矣；不学，则易者亦难矣。

蜀（3）之鄙（4）有二僧：其一贫，其一富。贫者语于富者曰：“吾欲之（5）南海（6），何如？”

富者曰：“子（7）何恃（8）而往？”

曰：“吾一瓶一钵（9）足矣。”

富者曰：“吾数年来欲买舟（10）而下，犹未能也。子何恃而往！”

越明年（11），贫者自南海还，以告富者，富者有惭色（12）。

西蜀之去南海，不知几千里也（13）。僧富者不能至（14），而贫者至焉。人之立志（15），顾（16）不如蜀鄙之僧哉！（彭端淑）

【译文】

There is nothing difficult for us to do in the world. If we do it，the difficult thing will be easy；if we don’t，the easy thing will be difficult. There is nothing dificult for us to learn. If we learn it，the difficult thing will be easy；if we don’t，the easy thing will be difficult.

There lived two monks in the western frontier of Szechuan，one poor and the other rich. One day the poor monk said to the rich one.

“I want to go to Nanhai，what do you think？”

“On what do you depend for going there？” asked the rich monk.

“A bottle and a basin will suffice me，” answered the other.

“Well，I have been meaning to go there by boat for many years，but failed. How could you go without any support！”

After one year the poor monk returned from Nanhai，and told his story to the rich one，who was ashamed to hear it.

It is so many thousand miles from the western frontier of Szechuan to Nanhai. The rich monk failed to go，but the poor one went. Couldn’t we make up our minds to do something as the poor monk of the western frontier of Szechuan did？

【注释】

（1）因为一国有一国的特殊语法，翻译是决不能完全照字面直译的，例如本文第一句：“天下事有难易乎？”用白话说，便是世界上的事有没有难和易的分别，如照此英译为 Is there a difference between difficulty and easiness in things of the world？则不合英美语法的表现方法，所以应该意译，看英美人对于这样的意思是怎样表达的，我们就怎样来译，不必拘泥于原文字句。注意 nothing difficult，不能说成 difficult nothing，因为在 thing 字上已有一个形容词，就不能再加别的字。他例如 something Chinese（一点中国的东西）也是同样的用法。普通的情形，当然可以说 not a difficult thing（不是一件难事）。（2）为学：to learn.（3）蜀：古地名，即今四川省。（4）鄙：指边鄙地方，可译 the frontier districts，或简说 frontier.（5）之：去。（6）南海：不可译作 the South Seas（南半球的海洋；南太平洋），因为此处系指普陀山，南海观世音菩萨说法处，故音译为 Nanhai.（7）子：你。（8）恃：依赖，可译作 depend on.（9）钵：和尚盛饭的用具叫钵。用饭钵来化缘的和尚称托钵僧。（10）买舟：即买船票的意思，在此是指坐船。（11）越明年：意即经过了一年，故译为 after one year.（12）惭色：意为惭愧之色，译为 to be ashamed 即可，色字不宜译出。（13）不知几千里也：意即有好几千里，故译为 many thousand miles. 文学作品对于距离不必太准确，否则应以 li（里）代 mile（英里）。（14）至：在此与其译成 reach，不如译为 go，更为适合说话的语气。（15）立志：下决心做事。to make up one’s mind.（16）顾：反而。此处只好译成 Couldn’t 的反问语气。

（4）光与色

【原文】

目（1）睹物而知形（2），然形非色（3）不见；色非光不见。故色必资乎（4）光；画资乎日，夜资乎月星与火。光盛则色显，光微则色隐。色依（5）光以现其形：色浓则明，色淡则藏；色立乎（6）异，则相得益彰（7），色傍乎同，则若存若亡。（郑光复：《镜镜痴》）

【译文】

We know the shape of a thing when we see it，but its shape will not be seen if it has no color. The color of a thing will not be seen if there is no light. So the color for us to see has to depend on light，just as the day on the sun；or the night on the moon and stars，and fire. When the light is strong，the color becomes apparent；and when the light is dim，the color becomes obscure. A thing shows its shape by its color：it is conspicuous when its color is deep；it is invisible when its color is light. There will be a striking contrast if the colors of the things are quite different while their existence will not be felt if their colors are almost the same.

【注释】

（1）目：指我们的眼睛，英文要说“人”看，不要说“眼睛”看，故不可译成 the eye 或 our eyes.（2）形：外形，我们见到一件东西的样子。shape；form.（3）色：由一种特殊波长的光线所产生的效果。或是由于分解了的光线在我们眼睛上所产生的感觉。由此可知光与色的关系。（4）资乎：depend on；help.（5）依：by means of；by.（6）立乎：存在。be.（7）相得益彰：得到陪衬，愈为明显。help each other to become more conspicuous.

（5）教学相长

【原文】

虽（1）有嘉肴（2），弗食（3），不知其旨也（4）；虽有至道（5），弗学，不知其善也。是故学，然后知不足（6）；教，然后知困（7）。知不足；然后能自反（8）也，知困；然后能自强（9）也。故曰，教学相长（10）也。（《礼记》）

【译文】

Even when there is good food，you will not know its deliciousness，if you don’t taste it；even when there is a good doctrine，you will not know its virtue，if you don’t learn it. Therefore，to learn makes us realize our deficiency，and to teach makes us know the difficulties. Having realized our deficiency，we may then come to reflect；having known the difficulties，we may be able to strengthen ourselves to overcome them. So，we say，to teach is to learn.

【注释】

（1）虽：即使。even. 不是虽然，故不可译成 though.（2）嘉肴：table delicacy；viands. 简易地说 good food.（注意 food 不可用复数）。（3）弗食：弗，作“不”字解。食，作“品尝”解。这句翻译时，应加假设语气及主语上去。在这种副词子句中，要用现在动词以代未来动词。（4）不知其旨也：you will not know its deliciousness. 不可译成 delicacy 或 delicacies，因为此字意为“佳肴”，而不是“美味”。（5）至道：good doctrine.（6）不足：deficiency.（7）困：difficulty.（8）自反：即反省。reflect.（9）自强：strengthen oneself.（10）相长：benefit each other.

（6）翻译文欠通顺

【原文】

辜鸿铭著《张文襄幕府纪闻》有题为《不解》一则云：

昔年陈立秋侍郎（1）兰彬，出使（2）美国，有随员（3）徐某（4），夙不解西文（5）。一日，持西报展览（6）颇入神（7）。使馆译员（8）见之，讶然（9）曰：“君何时谙识（10）西文乎？”徐曰：“我固（11）不谙。”译员曰：“君既不谙西文，阅此奚为（12）？”徐答曰：“余以为阅西文固不解，阅诸君之翻译文亦不解。同一不解（13），固不如阅西文之为愈也。”至今传为笑柄（14）。

【译文】

An Anecdote from Ku Hung-ming’s “Hearsay Accounts at the Secretariate of Chang Tzu-tung.”

Many years ago a Mr. Hsu was in the suite of Chen Lan-ping，who had been a vice minister at home and was then sent on a mission to the USA. Though quite ignorant of English，Mr. Hsu was seen one day holding in his hand an English newspaper，and reading it with absorbing interest. The interpreters of the Legation who had witnessed the scene asked him in surprise：

“When did you learn English？”

“I have not yet learned it，” the other replied.

With great astonishment，the interpreters went on：“Since you don’t know English，why on earth should you read the paper？”

“I cannot understand English，” Mr. Hsu answered quietly，“nor can I understand your translation. So I think it’s better to read the original than to read the translation of yours，because both are Greek to me.”

This has been told as a laughng-stock since then.

【注释】

（1）侍郎：官名。vice minister.（2）出使：be sent on a mission to.（3）随员：be in the suite of.（4）徐某：a Mr. Hsu.（5）夙不解西文：素来不懂得英文。quite ignorant of English. “夙”可译作 from the first 或 originally，但不必译出。（6）展览：打开来看，但不是真的阅读，英文可说 pretend to read（佯装阅读），但仍以不如此明说为宜。（7）颇入神：对某事心醉神迷。with ecstasy；be in（go into）ecstasies over。（8）译员：interpreter；translator.（9）讶然：表示疑怪的样子。in surprise；in wonder.（10）谙识：懂得。understand.（11）固：surely；certainly；of course.（12）奚为：为什么。why.（13）同一不解：both are Greek to me.（14）笑柄：laughing-stock.

（7）学无所用

【原文】

鲁人身（1）善织屦（2），妻善织缟（3），而欲徙（4）于越。或（5）谓之曰：“子必穷矣。”鲁人曰：“何也？”曰：“屦为履之（6）也，而越人跣行（7）；缟为冠之（8）也，而越人被发（9）。以子之所长（10），游于不用之国，欲使无穷，其可得乎？”

【译文】

A native of Lu was good at making hempen sandals and his wife at weaving silk taffeta；and they intended to move to the State of Yueh. Someone told them that they would become poor if they should do so. The native of Lu asked him，“Why do you think so？” The other said：“You know sandals are made for the feet，but the people of Yueh are barefooted. The silk taffeta is for the head，but the people of Yueh are bareheaded. Now you go to a country where your special skill is not wanted. How can it be that you will not become poor？”

【注释】

（1）身：本身，本人。oneself.（2）屦：（音句）麻履。hempen sandals. Cf. 屣：草履。straw sandals. 履：皮屦。leather shoes，即俗称革履。（3）缟：白色生绢。缟冠，a white silk cap.（4）徙：迁居。move.（5）或：有人。somebody.（6）履之：something for the feet to wear.（7）跣行：barefooted.（8）冠之：something for the head to wear.（9）被发：bareheaded.（10）子之所长：what you are skilled in；what you specialize in.

（8）画蛇添足

【原文】

楚有祠（1）者，赐其舍人（2）卮酒（3）。舍人相谓曰：“数人饮之（4）不足，一人饮之有余。请画地为蛇，先成者（5）饮酒。”一人蛇先成，引酒且饮之（6），乃（7）左手持卮，右手画蛇，曰：“吾能为之足（8）！”未成！一人之蛇成，夺其卮，曰：“蛇固（9）无足，子（10）安能（11）为之足？”遂饮其酒。为蛇足者，终亡（12）其酒。（《战国策》）

【译文】

A native of Chu after worshiping his ancestors gave his retainers a pot of wine. One of the retainers said，“It’s insufficient for all of us，but too much for one of us. I suggest，therefore，that we draw snakes on the ground，and the one who first finishes drawing the snake will win the pot of wine.” When one retainer had completed his drawing，he took the pot to drink. As he held it in his left hand，he continued to draw the snake with his right hand，saying：“I can add feet to it.” While he was adding feet to his snake，another man who had then drawn his snake snatched the pot from his hand，protesting：“No snake has feet. How can you add feet to it？” Then he drank the wine. The man who added feet to the snake lost his prize at last.

【注释】

（1）祠：春祭叫作祠。祠者即祭祖的人。（2）舍人：古时贵族家里的门客，侍从，家臣。（3）卮酒：即一卮酒。卮（goblet）为古时有足无柄的酒杯。（4）之：指卮酒。（5）先成者：先画好一条蛇的人。（6）引酒且饮之：拿起酒来打算要喝。引作取解。且作将解。（7）乃：竟然；居然。（8）为之足：给它添上脚。（9）固：本来，实在。（10）子：你。（11）安能：怎么能够。（12）亡：失去。

（9）嗟来食

【原文】

齐大饥，黔敖为食于路（1），以待饿者而食之（2）。有饿者蒙袂（3）辑屦（4），贸贸然（5）来，黔敖左（6）奉食，右（7）执饮（8）曰：“嗟！来食（9）。”扬其目而视之曰：“予惟不食嗟来之食，以至于斯也。”从而谢焉（10），终不食而死（11）。曾子闻之曰：“微与（12），其嗟也可去，其谢也可食。”（《檀弓》）

【译文】

There was a severe famine in Chi. Chien Ao had food ready at the roadside for the starvelings to eat. A famished man appeared staggeringly，covered his face with the sleeve because of shame，and his shoes in hand as he was too weak to wear them. He was halted by Chien Ao，who held food in his left hand and drink in the right，saying：“Holla，come，you.” The man raised his eyes and looked at him. “I have become thus only because I don’t want to eat anything given in such a manner，” he said. So Chien Ao made an immediate apology to him for not being so polite at first，but still the man refused to take any food and died with hunger at last. On hearing this，Tseng Tzu said，“It’s a pity for him to do so. He might have gone away when offered food as alms，but he should have eaten when apologized.”

【注释】

（1）为食于路：在路边上准备饮食。（2）食之：食为动词，之指饿者。（3）蒙袂：以衣袖蒙着面孔。（4）辑屦：用手提着鞋子。（5）贸贸然：好像瞎子一样。贸贸或写成眊眊。（6）左：左手。（7）右：右手。（8）执饮：拿着饮料。（9）嗟来食：嗟，即嗟乎，或咨嗟，指叹息的声音。嗟来食，意为喊他来吃，因哀悯贱视而施与食物，丝毫没有尊敬的意思，故使有自尊心的人，宁饿死也不吃这种嗟来食。（10）从而谢焉：因此便向他道歉。（11）不食而死：即饿死。die with hunger. 在 die 字后可接三个不同的介词，应加分别：

1. die with hunger（fatigue，thirst，sword）；2. die from a disease（a wound，an accident，repletion，broken heart）；3. die of cancer（poison，an illness，old age，undernourishment，overwork，too much whisky）。（12）微与：不必啦。微作无或非字解。

（10）老与少

【原文】

老年为少年之过来人，少年为老年之候补者，老与少，只不过时间上之差别而已。然中国习惯，对老少之间，往往划有无形界限。在客观上，有时重老而轻少，有时重少而轻老。在主观上，老者自恃其老，少年自矜其少。几千年来，遂形成老者自以为持重（1）练达（2）而菲薄（3）少年为少不更事（4）；而少年自以为新锐精进（5），而凌轹（6）老者为老朽昏庸（7）。此真所谓偏颇（8）两失之见也！

曩梁任公在其《少年中国》一文中，对老年人与少年人曾有一适当对比。其言曰：“老年人如夕照，少年人如朝阳；老年人如瘠（9）牛，少年人如乳虎；老年人如僧，少年人如侠；老年人如字典，少年人如戏文（10）；老年人如鸦片烟，少年人如白兰地酒；老年人如别行星之陨石（11），少年人如大海洋之珊瑚岛；老年人如埃及沙漠之金字塔，少年人如西伯利亚之铁路；老年人如秋后之柳，少年人如春间之草；老年人如死海之潴为泽（12），少年人如长江之初发源……”

观此，则知老年与少年，各有所长，各有其用，如能祛除（13）成见，同为国家效力，则裨益民族，定非浅鲜。（血轮：《绮情楼杂记》之一）

【译文】

The aged are the antecedents of the young，and the young are the candidates of the aged. The difference between age and youth is only a matter of time. But，according to the Chinese custom，there is always an invisible line of demarcation between them. Objectively speaking，sometimes the aged are held in esteem and the young are made light of；sometimes it is just the other way round. Subjectively speaking，the aged are self-conceited because of their good old age，while the young think no small beer of their own youth. For thousands of years it has been assumed that the aged，thinking themselves experienced and more skilful，look down upon the young for their greenness in worldly affairs，while the young，thinking themselves fresh in life and more energetic，call the aged old fogies. Either of these views，of course，is far from being impartial.

Liang Chi-chao in an article entitled “Young China” made a proper contrast between the aged and the young. He said：“The old man is like the setting sun；the young man，the morning sun. The old man is like a lean ox；the young man，a cub tiger. The old man is like a monk；the young man，a knight. The old man is like a dictionary；the young man，the text of a play. The old man is like opium；the young man，brandy. The old man is like a shooting star；the young man，a coral island. The old man is like the pyramid of Egypt；the young man，the Siberian railroad. The old man is like the willow after autumn；the young man，the grass in spring. The old man is like the dead sea that turns into a lake；the young man，the source of the Yangtze River……”

From this，we know that the aged and the young both have their own merits and uses. If they will cast away their prejudices and work together for the country，their services to the people shall be immense.（Hsueh Lun：Old Age and Young）

【注释】

（1）持重：举止庄重的意思，成语有“老成持重”的说法。（2）练达：精熟通达。（3）菲薄：瞧不起；轻视。（4）少不更事：年少的人历事不多。更事当经历讲。（5）新锐精进：精明强干，活力充沛。（6）凌轹：原意为车轮辗过，引申为用权势压迫人的意思。成语有“仗势凌轹”一语。在此借用为欺侮轻蔑。（7）老朽昏庸：指因年老而糊涂无能。（8）偏颇：不正不平，侧重一方面。（9）瘠：瘦。（10）戏文：戏剧的台词。（11）陨石：即流星。（12）潴为泽：成语潴为大泽，即积储许多水而成湖海。（13）祛除：除去。祛音驱，作除去解，如祛惑，祛弊等。

（11）雕刻奇技

【原文】

今日善雕刻者甚多，但重在神似，不在细巧。昔苏州有杜士元者，擅雕刻，号称鬼工，能将橄榄核或桃核雕刻成舟，作苏东坡游赤壁故事。舟虽小，而桅千两橹艄篷及舵篙帆樯毕具，两面窗槅，俱能移动开阖。舟中三人，东坡为长髯布袍，佛印则着禅衣对坐，几上纵横列骨牌三十二张，若将搜抹者然。旁有手持洞萧启窗外望者，则相从之客也。船头有童子持扇烹茶，旁置一小盘，陈茶杯三盏。舟师三人，两坐一卧，细逾毛发。

每一舟成，人争相购。然士元好饮，终年游宕，不轻易出手，惟贫困时，始能镂刻，否则虽千金不能致也。

清高宗南巡，于行宫见其作品，大加赞赏，因三召至启祥宫，赐金帛甚厚。顾士元处禁垣中，终日闷闷，欲出不可，因诈痴，始得放归。

按桃核不过两指头大耳，而能雕出如许人物，诚非气静神完者莫办，谁谓古人艺术，不逮今人！（血轮：《绮情楼杂记》之一）

【译文】

Today there are many good engravers. But they lay emphasis on the very moral of what they engrave，and not on the fineness of it. Once，there lived in Soochow a man whose name was Tu Shih-yuan. He was so skilful at engraving that people called him supernatural craftsman. He could engrave on an olive or a peach stone the story of Su Tungpo making an excursion to the Red Cliff. Though the boat is very small，it has its mast and rigging，sculls，poles，and what not. The windows on either side of it are movable. Inside the cabin，there are three people. Su Tungpo with a long beard and in flowing robes，sits opposite to Fu Ying，the accomplished monk，who wears a Buddhist gown. Thirty-two pieces of dominos lying scattered on the desk show that a game is being played. By their side a man，flute in hand，opens the window to look out. He is their guest who joins them in the excursion. On her bow a boy with a fan in his hand is making tea near the stove，and by his side is a tray with three cups. Besides there are three boatmen，two sitting and one reclining—all life-like.

Every time he had finished a boat，people contended for buying it. When Tu Shih-yuan was indulging himself in wine，and idling away his time，you would find it no easy matter to have him cut such a boat. He would do the engraving only when he was hard up. If he was not short of money，he would refuse to do it for the wealth of a prince.

Kao Chung，the emperor of the Ching Dynasty，saw Tu Shih-yuan’s skilled handiwork at travelling-lodges when he was touring south，and was very pleased with it. Then Shih-yuan was summoned to the palace，and the Emperor bestowed on him pots of money and silk. While living in the Forbidden City，Tu Shih-yuan was sad and depressed；for he was not allowed to wander beyond its walls. So he feigned to be mad until he was set free.

As you know a peach stone is no bigger than two of our fingers combined，but Tu Shih-yuan was able to engrave so many persons and things on it. It is indeed a piece of excellent workmanship. Who says the art of the ancients is inferior to that of the moderns？（Hsueh Lun：The Ingenious Art of Engraving）

（12）狐疑

【原文】

我有一个漂亮的表姐，跟一个工程师结了婚，感情和好，生活美满。婚后三年，她突然变态：凭空指责她丈夫有外遇，日夜悲泣不已。任凭她的丈夫怎样解释，都无济于事。他只好寸步不离她，她的疑心犹不减，责备他每日死守家屋，意在追恋女佣。他换了一个女佣，她又说是他的新恋人。换上别个女佣，无论老妇童女，她无不怀疑。终于他的丈夫决心一个女佣都不用，她却乐得自己烧饭洗衣。

不久以后，她的疑心更多了。她认为妹妹、嫂嫂、姑姑，都是丈夫的恋人。于是，大家相信她发了狂，这才将她送进神经病院，施行电疗、打针，用尽百法，毫无效果。

在完全绝望的时候，我介绍一位心理学家去看她，单独与她密谈两小时后，他有了骇人的发现。

“夫人”，心理学家诚恳地说：“我愿为你摘去内心的痛苦，但请坦白见告，你曾经有什么不可告人的遭遇吗？”

这一问，好像一股电流触及她的内心痛处，她惊跳一下，低头啜泣。

“愿向上苍指誓，为夫人严守秘密”，专家继续说：“夫人，为了你的终身幸福，愿坦白见告。”

她终于说出了：半年前，她曾为一个青年而坠入情网，事后，荣誉心迫她回头改正，然而，她始终不敢正视自己既往的可耻事实，却在心里另觅一种自慰：那便是她的丈夫在外必定也有与她相似的不贞行为。久而久之，造成她反常的疑惧心理。

心理学家明白了她的病根所在，便轻易为她拔除掉了。使她逐渐领悟，她的不贞行为，乃属于她的偶然性错失，而非人人必然性的现象，更不能转移于丈夫身上。

过分多疑的心理，因素很是复杂，绝非单纯神经过敏可以解释。多疑往往由于自己的“内疚”反射于他人，在心理学上称之为“投射作用”，我用最简单的一句中国俗语，可以说明“心理投射作用”的深奥原理。这句俗语是：“有此心，反疑心”。（林枕客：《狂人百相》之一）

【译文】

After three happy years of conjugal life there came a sudden change in my pretty cousin’s sensual nature. She suspected her husband，an engineer，to be unfaithful and reproved him for his disloyalty without any reason. Her husband tried in every way to explain but in vain. She was in so great a distress that she wept all the time. He had to stay at home with her in the hope that he might get rid of her doubt about him. But，to his amazement，this only led to her new suspicion. She thought that he remained at home all day because he was in love with the maid. He dismissed the maid and hired a new one whom his wife would call his new love. In short，she regarded any maid，irrespective of age，as the object her husband was in pursuit of. At last，her husband decided not to keep a servant in his house，leaving all the domestic work to his wife，which she undertook without a complaint.

Not many days had elapsed before she entertained more doubts about him. She suspected even her female relations，such as her sisters-in-law，being also in love with her husband. This made people think that she had gone out of her mind. She was then sent to a hospital where she was put under various medical treatments；but all of them had no effect upon her.

Such being her case，I recommended her to a psychologist. After two hours’ tête-à-tête with her，the psychologist made a startling discovery.

“My dear madam，” began the expert in a most sincere manner，” I should be able to remove all the worries from mind if you would tell me everything frankly. Have you anything to be kept secret？”

Thus asked，she started as if she were electric-stricken and began to weep.

“If you will let me into the secret，I promise to keep it from the knowledge of others，” he continued. “For your own good，and for the happiness of your life，do tell me，madam！”

She sobbed bitterly and then gave the following account：It was about half a year ago when she met a young man with whom she fell in love. But before long，her sense of honor made her repent of her folly，and she came back to her husband again. What a shame it was to recall her past conduct，so she consoled herself by thinking that her husband must have done the same thing as she did. By and by this developed into an abnormal apprehension.

When the psychologist had found out the root of her disease，it was easy for him to uproot it. He told her that her disloyalty was due to her casual wrongdoing，not to the inevitable conduct of everybody. Nor could it be transferred to her husband.

That which gives one the feeling of distrust is rather complicated. It cannot be explained merely by nervousness. To have a suspicion against others usually comes of one’s own sick conscience. Psychologically speaking，it is called the project action，that is the process of acting upon others. A Chinese proverb that presents fully the gist of this psychological action runs，“Suspicious are those who take an interest in the matter themselves.”（Lin Chen-ko：Smoke Without Fire）

（13）怕伞的姑娘

【原文】

女孩子如有特癖，出嫁后非常痛苦。在家时，父母会容忍她的特癖，但婚后丈夫未必能谅解她，这里有一个悲剧为例证：

有个女人，名陈竹竹。她跟一个二十岁的青年吴铭结婚。过了一个秋天，生活都很愉快。入冬雨季却带来了悲剧：她上班去，穿雨衣走，吴铭要她再带把伞，她不肯，说她从来不用伞。他实在太爱她，便拿把美丽雨伞交给她，她一触到伞柄，状极惊恐，急推地上。吴铭大为骇异，便问：

“竹竹！你怎么啦……”

“我害怕……”竹竹说。

“雨伞有什么可怕呢？”吴铭问。

竹竹默然不答。青年人意气刚强，他的太太越怕伞，他越要给她伞，企图改变她的怪癖。竹竹在他的情感威严的压力下，不得不拿，可是，她每提起伞，都要惊哭一阵，昏厥过去为止。

这件事屡屡发生后，竹竹终于向法院请求离婚，理由是：不堪丈夫虐待，饱受强迫提伞的苦刑。当法官在庭上听吴铭申诉竹竹下雨不肯带伞的事，觉得很希奇。便问竹竹，她说生平怕伞，其夫偏用伞来恐吓她，不胜惊扰之苦，非离异不可。法官不信，令刑事取伞给她，果见她吓得脸色发青，掩面大哭。

法官认为她有神经病，吴铭加以否认说，她除怕雨伞之外，其他完全正常。这一对好夫妇终于双方同意地离婚了。离婚后，陈竹竹的生活正常，当然心情枯寂悲愁，幸而，嗣后，她遇见了救星，一个精神学家替她揭去内心之谜。

原来陈竹竹幼年失母，她的继母冷酷无情，竹竹在七岁时，每天上学，没有鞋穿，没有书包用，也没有一把伞，下大雨，就不上学。有一天适逢学校大考，偏偏天下大雨，她不能去，情急了，偷了继母的雨伞走。一撑开伞，她吓坏了，伞里爬出一条青蛇，立即昏迷过去。从此以后，有个恐怖的观念占据看她；至今长大，她仍怕伞，但已忘其所以然了。

心理学家用“联想法”使她回想起当年旧事，再以“提示法”剔除她内心所潜伏的顽固意识。最后，当她听见心理学家亲切的声音：“你也可以有一把伞，像任何人一样。”她何等惊喜！在医师协助下，她伸出发抖的手，握住伞，撑开来，她觉得那是多么新奇、安全，有趣的伞呀！她忽感到一阵害羞袭来，急把伞儿遮住脸。（林枕客：《狂人百相》之一）

【译文】

A girl with idiosyncrasies often suffers greatly after getting married. While at home，She would not be unbearable，for all her personal peculiarities，to her parents. But it is not probable that her spouse would understand her. Here is a tragic case to illustrate the truth：

There was a girl whose name was Chen Chu-chu. She was married to Wu Ming，a young man twenty years old. Their married life was full of happiness during the first autumn. But the rainy season of winter brought them unexpected misfortunes. One day when she was setting out for her office，she put on her raincoat. Her husband asked her to take an umbrella along；but she refused，saying she had never used an umbrella. As he loved her very much，he handed her a beautiful umbrella. As soon as she touched its handle，she dazed with horror，threw it on the ground.

“What’s up，my dear？” asked her husband，greatly perplexed.

“I’m afraid of……” said the wife.

“There’s nothing to be afraid of in an umbrella，is there？” said Wu Ming.

Chu-chu remained silent. As young men are very obstinate，Wu Ming insisted upon his wife’s taking with her umbrella，in order to do away with her peculiarity. Because of his affection for her and in deference to his wishes，Chu-chu had to take it. But every time she took the umbrella，she was horrified，burst into tears and fainted.

This happened so often that Chu-chu at last had to appeal to the court for a divorce. Her reason was that she could not stand the ill-treatment of her husband. He tortured her by forcing her to take an umbrella. On hearing the statement of the husband the judge felt it was rather odd. In answer to the judge’s inquiry，Chu-chu said that as her husband terrified her with an umbrella and made her suffer a great deal，she had to divorce him. The judge did not believe it and ordered an umbrella to be brought to her，which indeed made her turn pale and weep bitterly.

The judge thought she was neurotic，but her husband denied it，saying that she was normal with everything except with the umbrella. Consequently the well-matched couple agreed to put an end to their marriage. After the separation Chen Chu-chu lived a normal life，though she felt very lonesome and miserable. Before long，to her relief，there came an alienist，who solved the riddle of her fear of umbrellas.

It was said that Chen Chu-chu lost her mother when she was only a few years old，and was brought up by her step-mother who was very severe to her. At seven，she went to school every day without shoes or bag. As no umbrella was given her，she was obliged to stay at home if it rained heavily. One day，it was raining cats and dogs. But she had to go to school for her final examinations. Under mental stress，she stole her step-mother’s umbrella，and was ready to go. But alas！When she opened the umbrella，there crawled out a green snake which terrified her and made her faint on the spot. Since then，a certain terror had dominated her thoughts. She was now a grown-up woman，but she still feared the umbrella，though she could not tell why she was afraid of it.

The psychologist used the method of association to make her recollect the bygones，and then，by means of “suggestion”，got rid of the obstinacy hidden in her mind. At length，she heard the psychologist say in a kind voice：“Like everyone else，you too may have an umbrella.” How glad she was to hear this！With the help of the doctor，she held out her trembling hand and took the umbrella. Opening it，she felt it was so novel，interesting，and there was nothing treacherous in it. With shyness she hid her face behind the umbrella.（Lin Chen-ko：The Girl Who Feared an Umbrella）

（14）偷窃狂

【原文】

“十疯九偷”，精神学家承认这句话。十个疯子有九个患“偷窃狂”。“偷窃狂”是精神病中最通常的病征，可怜他，起初都被人认为“道德堕落者”，根本不把他当病人看待。直至其疯到不可救药，才认做疯子。“偷窃狂”和通常偷窃很易分别，窃贼偷东西是有目的的，偷窃狂则无目的不问其需要与否，常感觉有某些东西非偷不可，仿佛把“偷”当作一种享受。读者不难遇见一些人，经济颇有办法，对于有些他们家中决不缺乏的东西，也爱顺手窃取，或揩油带回家去。不论其需要与否，一拿到手满高兴。这实在是极可怜的心理病态。“偷窃狂”虽然多是精神病的病征，但也有是童年时期在不良家庭生活中所养成的习惯。

我在师范学校一年级读书时，发现一件怪事：大半同学的圆规、三角板、看地图用的放大镜都遗失了。我连续买过四次，也弄得没有一件器具用。校长据报后，请老师抽查学生箱箧，所注意的对象多是贫苦学生。查了一个月，不但毫无下落，而且这种窃案继续发生。我看见情形很严重，决心自己来捉贼。

那个星期天，我再买了一套新的，放在床前书桌上，躺在床上装做午睡。妙极了！我从眼睛眯缝里，果然发现一个人影迫近桌前。我得意极了，我就要抓到贼了。

我高喊一声“嘿！”跳下床来，定睛一看，那一刹那间，我失望极了。而贼不是别人，居然是本级最富有人家的子弟吴津同学。他的学问品德都好，又乐于助人，决不至偷窃这些小东西的。然而，事实表现得太残酷了。他听见我“嘿”的一声，立即扑通一声跪下哀求着：

“老林！我错得很，饶恕我吧！”

我仍半信半疑，老吴会做贼？巧妙地笑着说：

“哈哈！老吴！够了吧，别再开我的玩笑，借去用吧！”

我放了他，可是没有救他。有一天，他终于被捕了，搜出百多套同样的用具。这件事，在别的学校，开除了事，幸好师范学校有教育心理学的老师，反对开除“问题学生”，请求校长准予留校察看，以供研究，并加以感化。因此组织了“研究小组”研究吴津为什么会偷窃。

这问题终于在家庭访问时获得解答：吴津家富，兄弟姊妹共有七人，他居最小，最受父母溺爱，亦最缺乏教养，年幼时他喜爱哥哥姐姐们手上的东西就要，要不到就哭，母亲就对他说：“等三姐不在时，我去偷来给你！”或是说：“等四哥出去了，我就拿来给你。”果然，兄姐们一走开，母亲便去拿给他，而且教他玩的时候，别让哥哥姐姐看见。他一拿到手，老是藏起来不玩。他从小便得到了这样的经验，要什么，只要在人家不在时去拿好了。这种拿的办法，在家庭里无所谓，在学校中或社会上，就成为“偷”了。他长大以后，也不自知其为偷，但那已经成为顽固的怪癖了。（林枕客：《狂人百相》之一）

【译文】

It is believed to be true by psychopathists that nine out of ten insane people have an inclination to steal. In fact，kleptomania is the commonest symptom of insanity. Poor souls！They are supposed to have morally degenerated and will never be treated as kleptomaniacs until their insanity is beyond cure. In that case，they are regarded as lunatics. The distinction between kleptomania and theft can easily be made. A theft is committed with an aim，while kleptomania without any object at all. A person suffering from kleptomania steals all sorts of things whether he needs them or not；he considers larceny a kind of enjoyment. You are apt to find some people who are rather well off，indulge in stealing from others things which they are never in want of. They would be very pleased with the thing they have stolen even if it is quite useless to them. This irresistible tendency to steal we may easily ascribe to the mental disease just mentioned. Although kleptomania is a symptom of mental weakness，the habit may be formed during one’s childhood in a depraved family.

Something strange had come about while I was a first year student of the normal school. It occurred that my compasses，set-squares，magnifying glasses for reading maps were always missing. Though I had bought four sets of them，yet I could not find them when I wanted to use them. After being told of what had happened，the principal asked our teacher to search for them among the belongings of the students，especially the poor ones，in the school. The search continued for a month，but resulted in nothing. As the same thing happened again and again，I set to work to seek the mystery of the case myself.

I bought another new set of the above-mentioned instruments on a Sunday，and put it out on the desk just in front of my bed. Then I pretended to be asleep. Fancy！with half an eye，I saw a form moving stealthily towards my bed. I was so excited that I cried out “Hi！”，and jumping up from my bed，ready to catch the thief on the spot，I found，to my disappointment，that he was no other than Wu Tsing，a classmate of mine，who was from one of the richest families，and who was very generous in helping others. It seemed improbable that he，who conducted himself well at school，would steal such trifles. But on hearing my voice，he dropped down on his knees in a panic，imploring：

“Forgive me，Old Lin，for Heaven’s sake. I know it’s very wicked of me to do so.”

I was confounded and could not believe my eyes. It was beyond my comprehension that Wu Tsing should commit a larceny. In a moment I gathered my senses and answered：

“Ha，ha！Old Wu，that’s enough. Don’t make fun of me any more. You are welcome to use them.”

I let him go，but I did not succour him. Some days later，he was caught at last. More than hundred sets of similar instruments were found in his suitcase. If it happened in other schools，he would be dismissed at once，but ours was a normal school，and the teacher of educational psychology objected to dismissing the student in question. He asked the principal to keep Wu Tsing in school for some time for investigation. A committee was formed to find out the reason why Wu Tsing should steal and how he could be “cured”.

The answer to this problem was finally derived from a visit they paid to his family. As he was the youngest of seven children of a well-to-do family，his parents doted on him so much that they spoiled him. Whenever he saw anything interesting which his brother or sister had，he would cry for it if it was not given him. Having a weakness for the youngest，his mother would pacify him with these words：“Don’t cry，my boy，I’ll steal it for you when your sister is not in，” or “You can have it afterwards when your brother is out.” Every time when his brother or sister was away from home，his mother would fetch him the thing he liked to have without fail. Moreover，he was told then not to play with it in his or her presence. Having had gained the experience that anything he wanted could be obtained during the absence of its owner，he did not realize that taking things away from others secretly was a crime. Of course，it would not be regarded as a theft by his brothers and sisters at home，but it was not so in the school or society. He came to know it was theft when he grew up，but the habit had been formed and could never be shaken off.

（15）狐假虎威

【原文】

虎求百兽（1）而食之，得狐。狐曰：“子无敢食我也！天帝使我长百兽（2），今子食我，是逆（3）天帝命也。子以我为不信（4），吾为子先行（5），子随我后，观百兽之见我而敢不走乎？”虎以为然（6），故遂与之行，兽见之皆走，虎不知兽畏己而走也，以为畏狐也。（《战国策》）

【译文】

A tiger went about in search of other weaker animals for food. Once in his hunting，he happened to find a fox. “You won’t dare to eat me，” said the fox，“as I am head of all animals appointed by God. It is against the will of God，if you eat me now. In case you don’t believe what I say，let us go together. You just follow me as I go ahead to see if there is any animal that does not run away when I pass.” The tiger agreed and went with the other. Certainly he saw all the animals run away on seeing the fox. He thought they were afraid of the fox without knowing it was he himself that they feared.

【注释】

（1）百兽：各种动物，all kinds of beasts.（2）长百兽：为百兽之长。（3）逆：违反。（4）子以我为不信：你如果不相信我的话。又可译为 if you don’t believe me. 英文说 believe me 是说“相信我说的话”，如说 believe in me，则意为“信任我这个人”。（5）吾为子先行：让我走在你的前面。（6）虎以为然：老虎同意狐的建议。

（16）习惯说

【原文】

蓉（1）少时，读书养晦堂（2）之西偏一室。俛（3）而读，仰而思；思而弗（4）得，辄起，绕室一旋（5）。室有洼（6）径尺（7），浸淫（8）日广，每履之（9），足苦踬（10）焉；既久而遂安之。一日，父来室中，顾而笑曰：“一室之不治（11），何以天下国家为？”命童子取土平之。后蓉复履其地，蹴然（12）以惊，如土忽隆起者；俯视地，坦然（13）则既平矣。已而复然（14），又久而后安之。噫！习（15）之中人（16）甚矣哉！足利平地，不与洼适也；及其久而洼者若平；至使久而即乎其故（17），则反窒焉（18）而不宁（19）。故君子之学贵慎始。（刘蓉）

【译文】

When I was young I studied in a western chamber of the Obscurity House. Sometimes I bent down to read；sometimes I looked up to think. When I could not，after much thinking，figure out the meaning of what I was reading，I rose to my feet and walked about the room. In the earthen floor of the room there was a hollow about one foot wide；and that grew larger day by day. Every time I walked over it，I stumbled；but by degrees，I got used to it. One day Father came into my study and saw the hollow. “How can you serve your country well，” he said，smiling，“when you cannot keep such a little room tidy？” So he ordered a boy to fill it up with earth. Later when I walked over the spot again，I was surprised to find the earth there seemed swelling. I looked down，and found the hollow had already been filled up and the place was now as flat as a pancake. It was some time before I could get used to it again. Ah！how a habit works on man！You find it fit for your feet to walk on the level ground but not on places with holes. When you have，however，become accustomed to the sunken places in the floor，you will feel as if they were level. You will，on the contrary，stumble and feel uncomfortable when you walk on the spot newly leveled-up. Therefore the Superior Man is very cautious when he starts learning a thing.

【注释】

（1）蓉是作者刘蓉的自称。（2）养晦堂为作者家中的斋名。（3）俛同俯。（4）弗当不字讲。（5）旋，转。（6）洼：低陷的地方。（7）径尺：直径有一尺的光景，it measures one foot in diameter.（8）浸淫：逐渐 gradually.（9）履之：走过那里，walk over it.（10）踬：遇阻碍而颠跌，trip，stumble.（11）治：弄好，keep it tidy，make it in perfect trim.（12）蹴然：不安的样子，unsteady.（13）坦然：平坦的样子，as flat as a pancake.（14）复然：仍是这样。（15）习，即习惯，a habit.（16）中人：对人的影响，works on a person.（17）至使久而即乎其故：假使过了很久再恢复原状，if it is restored to its former condition after an elapse of time.（18）窒焉：受到阻碍，be obstructed.（19）不宁：不舒适，uncomfortable.

（17）黔之驴

【原文】

黔（1）无驴，有好事者（2），船载以入；至则无可用，放之山下。虎见之，尨（3）然大物也，以为神；蔽（4）林间窥之。稍出，近之，慭慭然（5）莫相知（6）。他日驴一鸣（7），虎大骇远遁，以为且噬（8）己也，甚恐。然往来（9）视之，觉无异能（10）者。益习其声（11）又进出前后，终不敢搏（12）。稍近益狎（13），荡倚冲冒（14）；驴不胜怒，蹄之（15）。虎因喜，计之曰（16）：技止此耳（17）。因跳踉大（18），断其喉，尽其肉，乃去。噫（19）：形之尨者，类有德（20），声之宏者，类有能（21）。向不出其技，虎虽猛，疑畏卒不敢取（22）；今若是焉。悲夫（23）！（柳宗元）

【译文】

There was no ass in Kweichow，and somebody brought in one by boat. But when it arrived，he found he could make no use of it，so he left it at the foot of a mountain. Seeing it，a tiger thought such a tremendous thing must be none other than a god. At first he peeped at it from behind the woods，and then moved timidly towards it；but still he dared not get in touch with it. One day the ass brayed，and the tiger was so frightened that he ran far away from it fearing it was going to eat him up. Later on he came back to look at it from all quarters，and found it possessing no particular ability. Though he，being more accustomed to its braying，was no longer afraid to come near it，yet he dared not attack it. He ventured to tease it more and more with a view to testing its abilities. Being greatly irritated，the ass gave him a kick. At this time the tiger was very glad as he found it was at its wit’s end and had no other ability than this. Therefore he pounced upon it，first breaking its neck and then eating up all its flesh，and went away. Alas！those with a huge form appear to be powerful，and those with a loud voice appear to be capable. No matter how fierce the tiger was，he would not be bold enough to grapple the ass，so long as it did not show off its ability. What a pity that it should have done thus!

【注释】

（1）黔即今贵州省。（2）好事者：喜欢兴造事端之人，如孟子说的“好事者为之也”。英译为 busy body，但在此译为 somebody 较好。（3）尨，通庞，巨大的意思，huge，tremendous.（4）蔽，藏匿的意思，hide. 译文中以 behind 表达出来。（5）慭慭然，谨敬的样子，timidly，cautiously 慭音佞。（6）莫相知：不敢亲近，dared not get in touch with.（7）驴鸣，bray.（8）噬，吃掉的意思，eat up.（9）往来：应译 to and fro，译文中意译为 from all quarters（从各个角度）。（10）异能：特殊本领。（11）益习其声：更加习惯了驴的叫声 being more accustomed to its braying.（12）搏：攻击，attack.（13）狎：玩弄轻慢，to be intimate with.（14）荡倚冲冒：荡是动荡，倚为身体贴近，冲是冲过去，冒是追上前去。全句意为接近驴子而触怒它，来试试它的本领。（15）蹄之：用蹄去踢虎。（16）计之曰：估计着说，said in estimation.（17）技止此耳：只有这样一个本领，this is all it can do. 文中以 at its wit’s end 表示。（18）跳踉大：跳踉是脚乱动的样子。同噉或啖，dancing and eating to his heart’s content.（19）噫：叹息声，alas.（20）形之尨者，类有德：形体尨大，看去像是有德的。“德”字在此的用法，与《礼记·大学》上说的“富润屋，德润身，心广体胖”中用的“德”字意义相同，即显见于外者，实于内，那驴子外表看来，身体既那样尨大，则它的实力一定雄厚。“德”可译为 powerful.（21）声之宏者类有能：声音宏亮，好像有技能的样子。“能”可译为 capable.（22）疑畏卒不敢取：怀疑畏怯，终不敢去捕食，not be bold enough to grapple the ass.（23）悲夫：多么可悲，how sad.

（18）少年孔融的机智

【原文】

孔文举（1）年十岁，随父到洛。时李元礼（2）有盛名，为司隶校尉（3）。诣门者皆俊才清称（4），及中表亲戚乃通（5）。文举至门，谓吏曰：“我是李府君（6）亲。”既通，前坐，元礼问曰：“君与仆有何亲？”对曰：“昔先君（7）仲尼（8），与君先人伯阳（9），有师资之尊（10），是仆（11）与君奕世（12）为通好也。”元礼及宾客莫不奇之。太中大夫（13）陈韪后至，人以其语（14）语之（15）。韪曰：“小时了了（16），大未必佳。”文举曰：“想君小时，必当了了。”韪大踧踖（17）。（《世说新语》）

【译文】

When Kung Yung went to Loyang，the then capital，with his father，he was only ten years old. At that time，Li Ying，the supreme official inspector，was a man of great reputation in the country. Nobody except his relatives and those who possessed distinct attainments and high commendation would be admitted to his presence.

“I’m a relative of your master.” said the boy to the gate officer，who at once led him in. Sitting before the host，Kung Yung was questioned by Li Ying. “What relationship is there between you and me？”“In old times，my forefather Confucius had a teacher-pupil relationship with your ancestor Lao-tze，” the boy guest replied，“and，therefore，our two families have been closely related for many generations.” Li Ying and all his other guests present were greatly surprised at the answer.

Chen Wei，the counsellor，came later and was told what Kung Yung had said. “Being bright in early childhood does not necessarily mean that he will be clever when grown up，” he observed. In response to this，Kung Yung said，“I guess you must have been very bright in your childhood，” which made Chen Wei feel very much embarrassed.

【注释】

（1）孔文举：孔融字文举，孔子后裔。（2）李元礼：李膺字元礼，有高名，被他接见的人即可身价百倍，称为登龙门。（3）司隶校尉：官名，掌纠察百官以下及近郡犯法者，东汉时并领有一州，权威极重。（4）俊才清称：超群的才学，清高的称誉。（5）通：通报，传达。（6）府君：郡守的称呼。（7）先君：今人称自已死去的父亲为先君，但古人对祖先亦称先君。（8）仲尼：孔子名丘字仲尼。（9）伯阳：老子姓李名耳字伯阳。今又有人考证老子姓老。（10）师资之尊：孔子适周，尝问礼于老子，故尊为师。（11）仆：孔融自称。（12）奕世：累世，累代。（13）太中大夫：官名，掌谏议，备咨询。（14）其语：孔融说的话。（15）语之：讲给他听。（16）了了：聪慧，晓解事理。（17）踧踖：不安的样子，音促籍。

（19）绝妙好辞

【原文】

魏武帝（1）尝过曹娥碑（2）下，杨修（3）从。碑背上见题作黄绢幼妇外孙韲臼八字，魏武语修曰：“解不（4）？”答曰：“解。”魏武曰：“卿未可言，待我思之。”行三十里，魏武曰：“吾已得。”令修别记所知。修曰：“黄绢色丝也，于字为绝。幼妇少女也，于字为妙。外孙女子也，于字为好。韲臼受辛也，于字为辤。所记绝妙好辞也。”魏武亦记之与修同。乃叹曰：“我才不及卿（5），乃觉（6）三十里。”（《世说新语》）

【译文】

Emperor Wu Ti of Wei（in the Three Kingdoms）once went for an outing with Yant Hsiu，one of his officials. While riding by the foot of the stone tablet of Tsao，they saw on its back an inscription consisting of eight characters：“Yellow lustring，young woman，external grandson，crushing mortar.”

“Do you know，” Wu Ti asked Yang Hsiu，“what they mean？”

“Yes，Sire，” the other replied.

“Don’t tell me now，” Wu Ti said. “I’ll think it over myself.”

When they had gone for thirty li，Wu Ti exclaimed，“I’ve got it！” He told Yang Hsiu to write his explanation on a piece of paper，which read：“Yellow lustring” is coloured silk，which makes up the character “chüeh” meaning “extremely”. “Young woman” is a little girl，which makes up the character “miao” meaning “admirable”. “External grandson” is the son of a daughter，which makes up the character “hao” meaning “fine”. “Crushing mortar” is the vessel in which pungent things are pounded，which makes up the character “tzu” meaning “expression”. The whole inscription means “an extremely admirable fine expression”.

On discovering what Yang Hsiu had written was just the same as his，Wu Ti heaved a deep sigh，saying：“I am far behind you in talent. There is，I find，a difference of thirty li between us”.

【注释】

（1）魏武帝：曹丕篡汉后追谥其父曹操为武帝。（2）曹娥碑：东汉时上虞女子曹娥，因父溺死，亦投江而死。经五日，抱父尸出。度尚使弟子邯郸淳为作诔辞，立石。蔡邕夜摸其文读之，题黄绢幼妇外孙韲臼八字，即绝妙好辞四字的隐语。（3）杨修：东汉人，字德祖，聪慧过人，为曹操主簿。后为曹操所杀。（4）解不？：懂得吗？（5）卿：秦汉以来君呼臣曰卿。后世夫妻间称卿。原来只有丈夫称妻子为卿，故世说《惑溺篇》中载：王安丰妇常称安丰为卿，安丰便对她说：“妇人卿婿，于礼为不敬，后勿复尔。”他的妻子反驳他说：“亲卿爱卿，是以卿卿，我不卿卿，谁当卿卿？”上述的“卿婿”及后面的“卿卿”的第一个卿字，都是作动词用的。（6）觉：相差的意思。

（20）韩信忍受袴下辱

【原文】

信（1）钓于城下（2），诸母（3）漂（4），有一母见信饥，饭信（5），竟漂数十日（6）。信喜，谓漂母曰：“吾必有以重报母（7）。”母怒曰：“大丈夫不能自食（8），吾哀王孙（9）而进食，岂望报乎？”

淮阴屠中少年（10），有侮信者，曰：“若（11）虽长大，好带刀剑，中情怯（12）耳。”众辱之曰（13）：“信，能死，刺我（14）；不能死，出我袴下（15）。”于是信孰视之（16），俛（17）出袴下，蒲伏（18）。一市人皆笑信，以为怯。（司马迁：《淮阴侯列传》）

【译文】

Once Han Hsin was fishing on the outskirts of the city，where many a woman was bleaching silk. One of the women seeing him hunger-stricken offered him food out of her own lunch box，and continued to do so for scores of days till she had done all her bleaching. Han Hsin，quite gratified，said to the old woman：“I will pay you back much more for your kindness some day.” Exasperated at this，she retorted，“Being a man，you cannot feed yourself. It is just out of pity that I share with you what I have，and not that I wish to have something in return！”

A youth among the butchers at Huai Yin once spat at Han Hsin，saying：“Though you grow so big and like to wear a sword，you are at heart a coward！” In presence of a large group of spectators，he went on with scorn：“Look here，Hsin，if you are not afraid of death，stab me；otherwise，go through under my legs.” Thereupon，Han Hsin after staring at the youth for a while，crawled under his legs，face downwards on the ground. The whole town laughed at Hsin，thinking him a coward.

【注释】

（1）信：韩信，汉兴三杰之一，灭项羽，使刘邦成帝业，封淮阴侯，后为刘邦所杀，夷三族。（2）钓于城下：在淮阴城下淮河边上钓鱼。（3）诸母：好些老大娘。（4）漂：洗丝绵。（5）饭信：把她自己的饭分给韩信吃。（6）竟漂数十日：一连几十天都分饭给韩信吃，直到漂完为止。（7）吾必有以重报母：我将来一定要厚厚地报答您老人家。（8）不能自食：不能够自己找到饭吃。（9）王孙：好像说公子一样，古代对青年人的敬称。（10）屠中少年：市上卖肉的少年们。（11）若：你。（12）中情怯：内心怯懦，即胆子小。整句意为“你虽然个子长得很高，又喜欢佩刀挂剑，其实是一个胆小鬼。”（13）众辱之曰：当众侮辱他说。（14）能死：你要不怕死的话。（15）出我袴下：从我的裤裆底下钻过去。（16）孰视之：仔细地打量他一番。“孰”即古写的熟字。（17）俛：同俯。（18）蒲伏：同匍匐，意为在地上爬行。

习题

试将下列中文译成英文：

（1）“各人自扫门前雪，休管他人瓦上霜”，是使世界达到和平幸福的最佳途径。一家如此，则一家和乐。一国如此，则一国安定。全世界如此，则天下太平。

（2）学问是自己的事，不能依靠别人的。环境好，图书设备充足，有良师益友指导启发，当然有很大的帮助，但是这些条件具备，也不一定能保证一个人在学问上就有成就。世间也有不少在学问上有成就的人，并不具备这些条件。最重要的因素，还是个人自己的努力。求学是一件艰苦的事，许多人不能忍受那必经的艰苦，所以不能得到成功。

（3）“我想认识伦敦，应该先到哪里去？巴力门，还是唐宁街？”我向寓所的女主人打听。那位老太太摇摇头说：“这种地方你去干什么？你得先上海德公园。在那公园里，你才能了解我们英国怎么会有巴力门和唐宁街的。”她的意思是说，造成英国政治的，是英国人民的精神，并不是有了议会和内阁，英国才得到民主的政治，而是人民有了民主的精神，才有英国的议会和内阁。海德公园正是民主精神表演的地方。

（4）善即是美。我们感到物事像理想一般的实现，我们就觉得是美。所谓理想一般的实现，就是说，那物事能把它的天性完全发挥出来。所以，如花在天性全露时最美一样，人在充分发挥他的天性时，也就达到美的极致了。

（5）道德非言语所能施教。凡未亲受仁爱待遇者毕生将不知仁爱为何物。故以仁爱待人，始能教人以仁爱。语云：“以言教者讼，以身教者从。”

（6）文学的工具是语言文字。我们第一须认识语言文字，其次须有运用语言文字的技巧。这事看来似很容易，因为一般人日常都在运用语言文字；但是实在极难，因为文学要用平常的语言文字产生不平常的效果。文学家对于语言文字的了解，必须比一般人都较精确，然后可以运用自如。他必须懂得字的形声义，字的组织以及音义与组织对于读者所生的影响。这要包涵语文学，逻辑学，文法，美学和心理各种知识。……一个人想做出第一流文学作品，别的条件不用说，单说语文研究一项，他必须有深厚的修养，他必须达到有话都可说出而且说得好的程度。

（7）庄子与惠子游于濠梁之上，庄子曰：“儵鱼出游从容，是鱼之乐也。”惠子曰：“子非鱼，安知鱼之乐？”庄子曰：“子非我，安知我不知鱼之乐？”惠子曰：“我非子，固不知子矣。子固非鱼也，子之不知鱼之乐全矣。”

（8）大家都知道下午四五点钟，在英国是喝茶的时间。首相也好，时装模特女郎也好，警察也好，甚至强盗也好，都是一定要喝下午茶的。

一杯茶，加上一点烤面包或饼干，再和朋友闲谈几句。这种光景在英国下午四五点钟的时候，是到处可以见到的，不问是在英王居处的白金汉宫，或是在寻常老百姓的家里，都是一样。对于在机关上做打字员一类工作的女性们，忙了一天而得到半小时的休息，去喝一杯茶，实在是一种最受欢迎的调剂了。甚至在前线的士兵们，如果情势允许的话，也要抽空去喝一杯茶。这原是英国牢不可破的传统。

（9）人人都知道圣华伦泰节是景慕情人的一个爱情的节日。其起源可追溯到远古的罗马时代。当时的青年人以抽签的方式，取得住在附近女孩子的名字，而凭以决定他们的情人。在中世纪时，就把圣华伦泰节定在二月十四日，随后欧美的人们，又找出许多新花样来庆祝那一天。

一个青年男子不妨去吻他当日所遇到的第一个女人。这在东方人看来，也许是要觉得奇怪的。

到了十九世纪，人们开始寄赠美丽的辞句和专为当日设计的卡片，并进行交换礼物。

今天人们不但对情人寄赠卡片，而且对父母师长，也照样寄，成为很通行的习俗了。

（10）在伊庸河附近我父母的产业，对我毫无吸引力。我常走下到河边去，偶然望望浮在河上的黄色的水藻，时而又拾起扁平的石块去打水漂，看它像燕子一般迅速地在水上掠过。

我父母的家屋是长形而灰色的。牧场一直伸展到像乳酪似的伊庸河边为止，燕子在空中飞翔着，河岸上的白杨树，长得枝叶互相连起来了。有一棵白杨树，我特别喜欢，常要躺在那树下。我发觉我自己在草中微笑着，我想要不笑，可是不成。

Ⅱ英译中

（1）Too Clever Not to See

【原文】

Elliott was too clever not to see（1） that many of the persons who accepted his invitations did so（2） only to get（3） a free meal and that（4） of these some（5） were stupid and some worthless（6）.（W. S. Maugham：The Razor’s Edge）

【译文】

艾略特是一个聪明的人，必然看得出来，大多数接受他邀请的人，只是为着要来吃一顿不花钱的饭。他知道他们当中有些是愚笨的，另外有些却是不足轻重的。

【注释】

（1）too clever not to see = clever that he cannot but see，以他的聪明岂有不知此事之理。他例如：He is too angry not to say that. 他那般愤怒而忍不住要说出那样的话来。（2）did so 即 accepted his invitations.（3）to get = in order to get.（4）that 接前面 to see 说的。句子的构造是：to see that…and that…（5）of these some = some of these.（6）some worthless = some of these were worthless.

（2）The Busy Broker

【原文】

The broker’s hour is not only crowded（1），but minutes and seconds are hanging to all the straps（2） and packing（3） both front and rear platforms（4）.（O. Henry）

【译文】

经纪人的时间不但是忙迫得像街车一样的拥挤，而且每分每秒车上所有的吊带都吊满了站立的乘客，在前后的站台上，也挤得水泄不通。

【注释】

（1）crowded：对个人的时间，只能说 fully occupied，意为很忙碌，完全被事情占有了，不能说 crowded，这是拥挤的意思。只有乘车等才可说拥挤，可知这是一种比喻的说法。作者把经纪人忙碌的时间，比做拥挤不堪的街车（street car，即英国人说的 tram car，或现通行的 bus），所以才有拥挤及以下的种种说法。（2）straps：每部车子都有规定，可容坐客多少，站客多少，站立的乘客，车上悬有许多吊带，以便站着的人抓住，不至因车开动而跌倒，这种乘客就叫作 strap-hanger（挂在吊带上的人）。（3）packing：装载，塞满，挤紧，拥挤，例如 A hundred men were packed into a small room.（一百个人挤在一间小房子内。）（4）platforms：车子前后不设座位的空地，以便乘客上下的出入处所。这段文章的表现方法，是用的修辞学的一种，实为作家所不可少的技巧。比喻分明喻（simile）和隐喻（metaphor）两种，如《圣经》上说的（a）In the morning they are like grass which groweth up.（Psal. xc.5）（早晨他们如生长的草。）（b）All flesh is grass.（Isa. xl.6）（凡有血气的，尽都如草。）（a）句为明喻，而（b）句则为隐喻。上文没有说明像电车一样，所以是属于隐喻一类。

（3）Speculation on Important Subjects

【原文】

There（1） are few（2） circumstances among those（3） which make up the present condition of human knowledge，more significant（4） of the backward state（5） in which speculation（6） on the most important subjects（7） still lingers，than the little（8） progress which has been made in the decision of the controversy（9） respecting（10） the criterion（11） of right and wrong.（John Stuart Mill）

【译文】

就构成人的知识现状各种情形来说，没有什么比解决是非准绳的争论之罕有进展，更要表示吾人对最重要的问题的思索，是依然停滞在落后的状态中。

【注释】

（1）There 以下 52 字构成的一个句子，在动手翻译之前，必须提纲挈领，找出全文的骨干，才能把文法结构了然于心，译时便可把握正确的意义。全句的纲领如下：There are few circumstances…more significant of the state…than the progress.（2）few：几无。（3）those：即指 circumstances.（4）significant：意指，表示。例如 Smiles are usually significant of pleasure.（微笑通常是表示愉快。）原句可用动词 signify 来代此形容词的 significant，而改写为 few circumstances…which signify the backward state…more than the progress.（5）backward state：落后的情形；进步慢或发达迟的情形。（6）speculation：思索（thought），默想（meditation）。例如 He began to speculate on the origin of the universe.（他开始思索宇宙的起源。）She often speculates as to what sort of man she will marry.（关于她将来要嫁怎样的人她时常在想。）（7）subjects：问题，课题。（8）little：与前面的 few 同样是作几无解，little 指量，few 指数。（9）controversy：争论（discussion）。（10）respecting：关于。（11）criterion：准绳（a standard of judgment），例如 Money is only one criterion of success.（金钱只是成功的一种标志。）

（4）A Feeling of Eternity

【原文】

No young man believes he shall（1） ever die. There is a feeling of Eternity in youth，which makes us amends for every thing. To be young is to be one of the Immortal Gods（2）. One half of time indeed is flown（3）—the other half remains in store for us with all its countless treasures；for there is no line drawn，and we see no limit to our hopes and wishes. We make the coming age our own（4）. “The vast，the unbounded prospect lies before us.” We look round in a new world，full of life，and motion（5），and ceaseless progress；and feel in ourselves all the vigour and spirit to keep pace with（6） it，and do not foresee from any present symptoms how we shall be left behind（7） in the natural course of things（8），decline into old age，and drop into the grave.

【译文】

没有一个年轻人相信他是要死的。在青春时有一种永恒的感觉，使人获得了一切的补偿。年轻人快乐似神仙。虽则半生一晃就过去了，还有下半生带着无限的宝藏，仍然给他储备着，因为前程远大，希望无穷。这个新的时代是属于年轻人的。一个广大无边的前景展开在他前面。他环顾周遭这个新的世界，充满着生命、活跃和不断的进步，他自身也感到元气旺盛，精神焕发，要来和它并驾齐驱。没有任何征候会使他预感到有朝一日，自己行将落伍，沦入老境，而终于要掉进墓穴中去的。

【注释】

（1）he shall：第三人称不用 will 而用 shall，是表预言的，例如 East is East and West is West，and never the twain shall meet.（R. Kipling）（东是东，西是西，两者永远碰不到头。）（2）the Immortal Gods：神仙。单说 the Immortals 也是一样的意思。（3）flown：为 fly（飞）的过去分词。（4）our own：年轻人的。在本文中开端虽用的第三人称的 young man，但随即用 us 取代，通篇说的 we 或 us 都是指的年轻人。（5）motion：活跃。（6）keep pace with：与之并驾齐驱。（7）be left behind：落伍。（8）in the natural course of things：在万物的自然趋势中。

（5）The Spirit of Fair-Play

【原文】

This spirit of fair-play，which in the public schools（1），at any rate，is absorbed（2） as the most inviolable（3） of traditions，has stood our race in good stead（4） in the professions，and especially in the administration of dependencies，where the obvious desire of the officials to deal justly and see fair-play in disputes between natives and Europeans has partly compensated for a want（5） of sympathetic understanding，which（6） has kept the English strangers in（7） lands of alien culture.（William Ralph Inge）

【译文】

这种公正的精神，至少在私立公校中是当作最为神圣不可侵犯的传统而加以全神贯注的。这种精神在人们的供职上，尤其是在属地统治上，对于英国民族是很有用的。当统治属地时，英国的官员抱着一种显然的愿望，想要公正地处理土人与欧人间的争执，而冀得到公平的解决，使英国人处在海外的异族文化中，因缺乏同情的谅解而格格不入的情形，多少获得了一点补偿。

【注释】

（1）public schools：英国为私立公校，为教育上层阶级子女的寄宿学校，如伊顿（Eton）等校。但在美国则为公立学校。（2）is absorbed：全神贯注，专心，神往。（3）inviolable：不可侵犯的，神圣的。（4）stand（或 serve）one in stead：于人有用，有好用处。（5）want：缺乏。（6）which：为 want 的关系代名词。（7）keep the English strangers in：使英国人在……始终陌生，不能融洽。

（6）On D. H. Lawrence

【原文】

One of the great charms of Lawrence as a companion was that he could never be bored and so could never be boring. He was able to absorb himself completely in which he was doing at the moment；and he regarded no task as too humble for him to undertake，nor so trivial that it was not worth his while to do it well. He could cook，he could sew，he could darn a stocking and milk a cow，he was an efficient woodcutter and a good hand at embroidery，fires always burned when he had laid them and a floor，after Lawrence had scrubbed it，was thoroughly clean. Moreover，he possessed what is，for a highly strung and highly intelligent man，an even more remarkable accomplishment：he knew how to do nothing. He could just sit and be perfectly content. And his contentment，while one remained in his company，was infectious.（Aldous Huxley）

【译文】

跟罗伦斯做朋友所感到的他的一种很可爱的地方，就是他从不讨人厌，因之，他也从不讨厌人。他在做着一件事的时候，总是专心致志的，没有什么事他会觉得太卑屈而不屑于去做的，也没有一件小事他认为不值得他好好去做的。他能烹调，他能缝纫他能编织袜子，还能挤榨牛奶。他是一个能干的樵夫，又是一个刺绣的好手。他生的火总是燃烧得很旺的。他洗擦过的地板，干净得一尘不染。此外，以他那样一个高度紧张和高度理智的人，更具有一种杰出的才能：那就是他知道无所为而为，他可以单只坐着什么事也不做而能心满意足。他这种满足，我们跟他一块儿坐着的话，也可以传染到的。

（7）On Books

【原文】

Some books，like some persons，convey to us all that they will ever（1） have to give at a single sitting（2）. Others hold our attention profitably through two or three encounters……and the books to frequent，the books to be shipwrecked with（3），the great books into which rich and substantial lives have been distilled（4） and packed—the Dialogues of Plato，Montaigne’s Essays，Boswell’s Johnson，the Essays and Journals of Emerson—these are to be lived with and returned to（5） and made the companions of hours and days and moods as various as those in which they were written.（Stuart P. Sherman）

【译文】

有些书也和有些人一样，大概都是把它们打算要传达给我们的东西一下子就完全倾吐出来。有些书则使我们要专心而获益地读上两三遍才能释手。……还有些是要再三反复去读的书，有些是在遭遇船只失事时也仍然要带着走的书，有些是从丰富而充实的人生中摘出而填入行间字里的伟大的书——柏拉图的语录，蒙田的随笔，鲍斯威尔的约翰生传，艾默逊的散文和日记——这些书是可以与之共同生活的，可以百读不厌的，也可以在不同的时日与心情中作为伴侣的，那种不同的时日与心情，也正和那些作品在写作时的情形一样。

【注释】

（1）ever：在以 that 引导的关系子句中，前有最上级形容词或 all 或 the only 等字样时，则有 on any supposition，by any chance，at all（究竟，到底，的确）之意。（2）at a sitting：一口气（做完一件事，如读完一本书，写完一篇文章之类）。（3）be shipwrecked with：在船失事沉没时也要带着逃命的。（4）distill：精炼，摘出，精选。（5）returned to：重读。

（8）Arguments against Smoking

【原文】

It is always inspiring to see a brave man fighting for a lost（1） cause，and I never cease to admire the Jacobitish（2） zeal with which year after year Mr. John Ervine（3） carries on a guerrilla warfare（4） against the ever-increasing power of tobacco. I admire it all the more because（5） I have fired a few shots in the war against tobacco myself，and have invariably retired defeated（6），with sign of defeat（7），a cigarette in my mouth. I can go on fighting for a week or a month，but there always comes a time when I strike my colours（8）—and a match.（Robert Lynd）

【译文】

看到勇敢的人为着一种毫无成功希望的运动而奋斗的情形，是始终令人鼓舞的。年复一年地以斯图亚特王室拥护者的热诚，来对抗不断增长的烟草的势力，进行游击战的厄尔文，我一直都是衷心佩服的。我本人在对抗烟草的战争中，也曾开过几枪，而每次都败下阵来，口里衔着一支香烟，便是败北的标志，因此我对于他的热诚更加佩服。我能继续战斗一星期，或一个月，但最后总有一个时候要到来，那就是我挂降旗——刮火柴。

【注释】

（1）lost：不作“失去的”解，应为“失败的”，“输了的”之意，如 a lost battle（败仗），故在上文中意为“一种完全没有成功希望的运动”。（2）Jacobitish：为 Jacobite 的形容词。Jacobite 为 1688 年被迫逊位的英王 James Ⅱ的拥护者，即支持 House of Stuart（斯图亚特王室）者。（3）St. John Ervine 为英国爱尔兰出生的剧作家兼小说家。在第一次世界大战后渡美，成为百老汇的批评家。（4）guerrilla warfare：游击战。（5）all the more because：因此更加。（6）retired defeated：败下阵来。（7）the sign of defeat：与下面说的 a cigarette in my mouth 同格。（8）strike one’s colours：投降。作者利用 strike a match 一语中的同一动词（strike）而作出此俏皮话语。

（9）The Definition of a Gentleman

【原文】

It is almost a definition of a gentleman to say he is one who never inflicts pain. This description is both refined and，as far as it goes，accurate. He is mainly occupied in merely removing the obstacles which hinder the free and unembarrassed action of those about him；and he concurs with their movements rather than takes the initiative himself. His benefits may be considered as parallel to what are called comforts or conveniences in arrangements of a personal nature—like an easy chair or a good fire，which do their part in dispelling cold and fatigue，though Nature provides both means of rest and animal heat without them.

【译文】

这差不多可以算是绅士的定义了：说一个人从来不使别人受苦。这个界说，就其本身而论，是既精到而又正确的。他主要是只忙着为他周围的人来消除那些阻止他们自由自在的行动上的障碍，他总是迎合别人的趋向，而自己是不肯发端的。他给人的恩惠，可认为就是那种为某一个人而安排的舒服与方便——好像一把安乐椅子或一盆炉火一样，在驱除寒冷和疲劳上尽其职责，虽则大自然也就准备好休息和体温两种办法，不要它们也行的。

（10）The Law of the Jungle

【原文】

People in our culture（1） who like to think of themselves as tough-minded（2） and realistic，including influential political leaders and businessmen as well as go-getters（3） and hustlers（4） of smaller caliber（5），tend to take it for granted（6） that human nature is “selfish” and that life is a struggle in which only the fittest may survive. According to the philosophy（7），the basic law by which man must live（8），in spite of（9） his surface veneer（10） of civilization，is the law of the jungle（11）. The “fittest” are those who can bring to the struggle superior force，superior cunning，and superior ruthlessness（12）.

The wide currency（13） of this philosophy of the “survival of the fittest” enables people who act ruthlessly and selfishly，whether in personal rivalries，business competition，or international relations，to allay（14） their consciences by telling themselves that they are only obeying a “law of nature”. But a disinterested（15） observer is entitled to（16） ask whether the ruthlessness of the tiger，the cunning of the ape，and obedience to the “law of the jungle” are actually evidences of human fitness to survive.（S. I，Hayakawa）

【译文】

在现代文化中，喜欢把自己看作是意志坚强而现实的人们，包括那些有势力的政治领袖和商界翘楚，以及才干较差的野心家和活动家在内，都想要把人性的自私，与人生是一场只有适者才能生存的奋斗，视为当然。由于这种人生观，人类为要生存而必须倚重的基本原则，就是弱肉强食，纵令他具有文明的外表。所谓适者就是那些能够以过人的力量，过人的狡猾和过人的残忍来奋斗的人。

由于这种“适者生存”的人生观广泛地流行着的缘故，不问是个人方面的敌对，事业上的竞争，或是国际间的关系，都要残忍而自私地来加以处理的人们，只消对自己说这样做只是服从大自然的法则而已，便可获得良心上的安慰。但是一个公正无私的观察者，有资格来问：老虎的残忍，猿猴的狡猾，以及服从弱肉强食的法则，是不是人类适者生存的实际证据呢？

【注释】

（1）culture：文化（state of intellectual development among a people）。但常与 civilization（文明）混用。文明为人类社会开发的状态（与野蛮对称），而文化则为人类社会由野蛮进化为文明，其努力所得的成绩，表现于各方面的为科学、艺术、宗教、道德、法律、风俗、习惯等，其综合体则谓之文化。（2）tough-minded：意志坚强的。（3）go-getter：充满活力而有进取心的人（aggresive person who is full of vitality）。（4）hustler：非常活跃而机敏的人（very active，prompt，quick-moving person）.（5）caliber：才干，能力。（6）take it for granted：句中的 it 为下面 that 子句的代词。这成语的意思为“把它视为当然”。（7）philosophy：人生观。（8）live by：赖以为生。例如 He lives by teaching.（他以教书为生。）（9）in spite of：不顾。（10）veneer：虚饰，外表上的装饰。（11）the law of the jungle：弱肉强食。（12）ruthlessness：残忍。（13）currency：流通，流布。例如：

The rumor gained currency.（谣言流布。）（14）enables people to allay：使人能够解忧。（15）disinterested：公正无私的。（16）is entitled to：有资格去做。

（11）Some well-informed People

【原文】

We sometimes fall in with（1） persons who have seen much of the world（2），and of the man（3） who，in their day（4），have played a conspicuous part in it（5），but who generalize（6） nothing，and have no observation（7），in the true sense of the word（8）. They abound in（9） information in detail（10），curious and entertaining，about men and things；and，having lived（11） under the influence of no very clear or settled principles（12），religious or political，they speak of every one and everything，only as so many（13） phenomena，which are complete in themselves，and lead to nothing，not discussing any truth，or instructing the hearer，but simply talking（14）. No one would say that these persons，well informed as they are，had attained to any great culture or intellect or to philosophy.（Cardinal Newman）

【译文】

我们有时邂逅一些熟悉世故的人，和一些曾经见过许多在其全盛时代，叱咤风云，世界安危所系的有名人物的人，但是他们却不能归纳出一点什么来，也毫无真正的观察力。我所遇见的那些人，对于人物和掌故，富有离奇有趣而又极为详尽的见闻。他们因为在宗教上和政治上，都无很明确的信念，而浑浑噩噩地度日，所以他们谈到一切的人物和一切的事情时，只是当作行云流水，映入他们眼帘的一些现象，把它说完即了，并未留有什么后果，也未讨论到任何真理，对听他说的人自然无所启发，只不过是一种闲谈而已。这样的人虽富有见闻，谁也不会认为他们在任何伟大的文化，知识，或哲理上有什么造诣的。

【注释】

（1）fall in with：邂逅，偶然遇到。（2）see（or know）the world：阅历深的，世故深的（acquire or have experience）。see much of，看得多，世面见得多。（3）of the men：接前面的 have seen much 来解。（4）in one’s day：在其全盛时代（in one’s time of prosperity）。（5）played a part in it（i. e. the world）：与……有关。例如 Mencius’s mother played a great part in his life and in his ultimate success.（孟母对孟子的一生和他的成就有很大的关系。）（6）generalize：归纳，做出结论（infer）。observation：观察力。（8）in the true sense of the word.（那字的）真义。（9）abound in：丰富。（10）in detail：详细地。修饰前面的 information（见闻知识）的，与后面的 curious 和 entertaining 同为 information 的修饰语。（11）having lived： = as they have lived.（12）under the influence of no very clear or settled principles： = not influenced by very clear or settled principles. Cf. He uttered no word. = He didn’t utter a word.（13）so many：同数的。例如 He looks upon his children as so many encumbrances.（他把他的孩子们看做许多累赘。）（14）not discussing any truth，…but simply talking. 注意句中 not…but 在文法上的相连关系。

（12）The English Humour

【原文】

Humour has been well（1） defined as “thinking in fun（2） while feeling（3） in earnest（4）”. The English do not approach（5） life intellectually；they do not demand that it shall conform to（6） some rigid mental plan；they are not convinced（7） that the universe can be penetrated（8） by thought；they are willing to go to work，either in politics or art，without a theory to sustain them（9）；and when they are more practical than other races，it is not（10）—as those races frequently conclude—because they are coldly clear-sighted and unimaginative，but because they do not busy themselves（11） asking reason（12）to find a key when instinct has already shown them that the door is wide open.（J. B. Priestley）

【译文】

幽默被人很巧妙地诠释说：“一面认真地感觉一面滑稽地思考。”英国人是不肯聪明地去接触人生的。他们并不要求人生应与某种艰苦卓绝的，出自智力的计划一致。他们并不相信这个宇宙是可以用思想去突破的。即令没有支持他们自己的一种理论。他们也愿望去着手于政治上的或艺术上的工作。当他们比别的民族更要实际的时候（例如别的民族惯爱轻易下结论，所以不实际），那并不是因为他们只有冷静的明察力，却缺乏想像力，而是因为当直觉已经明示给他们看那门是打开着的时候，他们仍不肯忙着去讲理性找出一把钥匙来。

【注释】

（1）well：巧妙地（skillfully）。（2）in fun：开玩笑的。（3）while feeling： = while one feels.（4）in earnest：认真的。（5）approach：接近（come or go near or nearer to）。（6）it shall conform to：句中的 it = life，而 shall 是表主句中主语（they）的意志。例如 I am determined she shall have no cause to complain.（Sheridan）（我决心不要让她有何抱怨。）conform to：使顺应，使一致，使相似。（7）they are not convinced：句中的 are convinced 在意义上几乎和 believe 相同。我们如将 are convinced 与一个他动词等量齐观的话，那么，其后的 that 子句，就可看做动词的宾语了。（8）penetrate：洞察，了解（fathom，comprehend）。I could not penetrate the mystery.（我无法了解这种神秘。）（9）sustain them：支持他们自己。（10）it is not：句中的 it 是指其前面的 they are more practical than other races.（11）busy oneself（in）doing：使自己忙于去做。（12）reason：在此不是“理由”，而是“理知”，“理性”（intellectual faculty）。

（13）The Trouble with Translation

【原文】

No one these days would，I suppose，maintain（1） that it is a bad thing to have so many translations of great books cheaply available（2）. But like most blessings，plentiful translations can be curses in disguise（3）.

My feeling is that students，and readers generally（4），should as soon forgo the airplane and television as neglect the translations of Oriental and European literature（5） which are becoming so abundantly and cheaply available. But I also think that they should be constantly aware（and that publishers，editors，and teachers should constantly remind them）that what they are reading is someone’s English version of a work（6） which，in its original language，had unique and untranslatable qualities（7）. Further，they should remember that the more the original work depended for its effect upon those qualities which make literature a fine art（8），the less is a translation able to provide equivalent effects（9） Baudelaire’s （10）translations of Poe may be “better” poems than those Poe（11） wrote；but those who read them have read Baudelaire’s version of Poe；not Poe.（John A. Kouwenhover）

【译文】

我想现今没有一个人要坚持说，许多伟大的书的译本，数量繁多，售价低廉，是一件坏事。但是丰富的译本，也和大多数的幸福一样，到头来会变成不幸的。

我的感想是学生们和一般的读书人，都趋之若鹜，谁也不肯放弃数量如此繁多，价钱如此便宜的东洋文学和欧陆文学的译本，正如他们不肯放弃现代文明之赐的飞机与电视一样。但是我又觉得他们应经常留意（出版家，编辑者，及教师们也应经常提醒他们），他们听读着的译本，只是什么人英译出来的一部作品，在它原来的语文中，实具有不能翻译的独自的特质。此外还有一点，他们应该记住：要使原作成为文学上优美的艺术而产生效果，就得依靠那些特质，依靠的程度越深，译本所能给与的同等的效果越少。波德莱尔所译的爱伦·坡的诗，也许比爱伦·坡自己所写的更好；但读那些诗的人只是读了波德莱尔所译的爱伦·坡；而不是真正的爱伦·坡。

【注释】

（1）maintain：主张，坚持。（2）cheaply available：廉价买到。（3）curses in disguise：化妆的祸根。前面说的 blessings 为 curse 的 antonym（反义字）。（4）readers generally：一般的读书人。（5）should as soon forgo the airplane…literature：如果把东洋文学和欧洲大陆文学的翻译本弃置不顾，就好像放弃飞机不坐，电视不看似的。（6）someone’s English version of a work：什么人英译出来的一部作品。（7）which，in its original language，had unique and untranslatable qualities：在它原来的语文中，具有不能翻译的独自的特质。（8）the more the original work…a fine art：越是原作由于使文学成为一种优美的艺术，要靠那些特质才能产生效果。这句话的结构略异寻常，一般是说 depend upon A for B（由 A 而获得 B），现因 A 的修饰语句太长，故变更顺序而说成 depend for B upon A 了。（9）a translation able to provide equivalent effects：能产生同等效果的翻译。（10）Charles Baudelaire：法国诗人，代表作有《恶之花》诗集，以译介 Poe 的作品驰名于世，公认译得比原作更好。（11）Edgar Allen Poe：美国诗人兼短篇小说家。

（14）Too Distinguished to be a Personality

【原文】

When the porter’s wife（she used to answer the house-bell）announced “A gentleman—with a lady，sir，” I had as I often had in those days，for the wish was father to the thought（1），an immediate vision of sitters（2）. Sitters my visitors in this case proved to be；but not in the sense I should have preferred（3）. However，there was nothing at first to indicate that they might not have come（4） for a portrait……It（5） was a truth of which I had for some time been conscious that a figure with a good deal of frontage（6） was，as one might say，almost never a public institution（7）. A glance at the lady helped to remind me of this paradoxical law（8）：She also looked too distinguished to be a “personality” （9）. Moreover one would scarcely come across two variations（10） together.（Henry James）

【译文】

当守门人的妻子（她一向是在应门的）来通报说：“先生，有一位绅士带了一位女客来了。”因为愿望是思想的根源，正如我在当时所常有的情形一样，现在一听说有客人来，心里马上就想到是找我画像的人来了。这次来找我的人，果真是为画像而来的，不过却不是我所指望的对象。虽然如此，起初并没有一点什么迹象显示他们可能不是为画像而来的。……从不久以前起，我就留意到了一个事实，那就是一个风度翩翩的人物，我们不妨说，他差不多从来不会是一个社会上的名人。那个女客，一眼看去，就使我想起这种逆说的定则：她看去也是太杰出而不成其为一个名人呢。而且我们极少会同时遇到两个例外的。

【注释】

（1）for the wish was father to the thought：此为根据谚语 The wish is father to the thought. 说的。意为愿望是思想的根源。心有所欲，便有所思。在本文的场合，是正在期待要画像的人来，所以一听说有客，心里就想到是那样的人来了。（2）sitters：被画像的人要坐着不动，故云。这字前说的 vision，不是指眼前所见到的，而是指当时心中所想像的。（3）not in the sense I should have preferred：句中的 not in the sense，意为“不是那种意味的”，后半限定语中的 should，不可解释为“应该”，而是表示一种可能发生而实际并未发生的情形。如 I should have gone if you had asked me.（如果你要我去，我就去了。）（4）might not have come：句中 might 的用法，是表示“推测”的，这句意思是“恐怕不是为……而来”。此句因前有 nothing 一字，致构成双重否定，若加以抵消的话，则意为“一开头就知道他们是为着求画像而来的呀”。（5）It：这个代名词是代表 that a figure 等一个子句的。（6）a figure with a good deal of frontage：风度翩翩的人物。一表人才。仪表漂亮的人。（7）public institution：原意为“公共机关”，在此为“世间知名之士”，“名士”。institution 一字在口语中有 familiar object（有名的事物；熟悉的人物）的意思，例如 He was one of the institutions of the place.（他是当地闻人之一。）（8）this paradoxical law：这个逆说的定则，意指风度翩翩的人反而不成其为名士的那种现象。（9）too distinguished to be a “personality”：太杰出而不能成为名士。personality = personage 人物，名人。distinguished personage 有名望的人物，名人。（10）two variations. 指对上述法则的例外的人物。来客有两人，那女客即令是例外的存在，那绅士不可能也是，不至两个例外同时出现。

（15）Schadenfreude

【原文】

If we contrast the resources of the United States and the resources of the Viet Cong（1），whatever we may think of the political morality of the activities of the Viet Cong，it does not seem to the outsider that the Viet Cong are inferior to the Americans in courage，resolution（2），or belief in their cause（3）. For this reason，the news that the Americans had dropped napalm（4） on their own troops was received with very mixed feelings（5） in Europe. There were，of course，professional and permanent anti-Americans（6） who had all the joys of Schadenfreude（7） at the news. For them，there is no folly and no crime of which the Americans are not intrinsically capable，and there is no folly and no crime which the enemies of the Americans are not justified in committing（8）. But many people who do not share these views（9） in the least（10） could not help reflecting that a fate（11） had befallen unfortunate young American soldiers that has frequently befallen even（12） more unfortunate Vietnamese children.（Sir Denis Brogan）

【译文】

如果把美国的资源和越共的资源比较一下，无论我们对越共的所作所为在政治上的道德怎样想法，由局外人来看是不会认为越共在勇敢，决心，和忠于大义的信念上，有逊于美军的。由于这个原因，在欧洲听到美军把烧夷弹误投到他们自己的军队上的消息时，不免感到悲喜交集。当然，有些职业的，坚决永恒的反美主义者，听到这消息便要幸灾乐祸，感到高兴。他们认为美军在本质上是任何愚行，任何罪恶，都可以干得出来的，所以美军的敌人要干些愚行和罪恶，也是应该的。但即令许多决不同意这种见解的人，听到这消息时，也不得不有下面这样的想法：不幸的年轻美国兵曾经遭遇的悲惨的死，在更加不幸的越南儿童身上，到现在为止所遭遇到的同样的惨死，也不知有多少次了。

【注释】

（1）Viet Cong：越共。（2）resolution：决心（firmness of purpose）。（3）belief in their cause：对于（民族解放的）大义的信念。普通说 one’s cause 为人们所拼命支持的主义、主张、信仰、运动等。（4）napalm：燃烧弹。火焰喷射器等所用的胶状汽油。（5）mixed feelings：复杂的感情。（6）professional and permanent anti-Americans：职业的持久的反美主义者。（7）Schadenfreude（G.）：幸灾乐祸（enjoyment obtained from the mishaps of others）。这是说对别人的不幸感到痛快。这是一个德文的字，英文无相当的字可以用的，故借用。（Schade = damage + freude = joy.）（8）there is no folly and no crime which the enemies of the Americans are not justified in committing：句中两重否定变成肯定，故可改写为肯定句 The enemies of the Americans are justified in committing any folly and crime. 即所谓“以牙还牙”的理论。（9）share these views：同意。（10）not…in the least： = not…at all 注意这个 in the least 与 at least 不同，不可混淆。（11）a fate：悲惨的运命，即死。（12）even： = still

（16）Aloneness is Worse than Failure

【原文】

What is feared as failure in American society is，above all，aloneness. And aloneness is terrifying because it means that there is no one，no group，no approved cause to submit to. Even success often becomes impossible to bear when it is not socially approved or even known. This is perhaps why successful criminals often feel the need to confess，that is，to submit to the community’s（1） judgment，represented in the person to whom the confession is made. They will confess even under circumstances where this will probably，if not certainly，endanger their previous success：proof，I think，that aloneness is more intolerable than mere failure. For mere failure，provided（2） it is found in company（3），can rather easily be borne；many ideologies have the function of making it possible for people to digest（4） the worst miseries and even death. Under the sway（5） of the ideology，they do not feel the impact（6） of their failure；they are in the grip of an authority，even if it lets them down（7）. On the other hand（8），one who is alone lacks this solace which can make even failure comfortable.（David Riesman）

【译文】

在美国社会中作为失败而为人们所恐怖的，莫过于孤独了。而孤独之所以可怕，就因为那意味着没有一个可服从的人，没有一个可服从的团体，也没有一个可服从的公认的大义。即令获得成功，若不为社会所认可，或甚至不为世人所知道时，就是成功也常要变得使人不能忍受的。这也许就是成功的罪犯，时常觉得有必要去自首的原因，那就是，去服从那个听取自首的人所代表的公众的裁判。即令在如果不是一定的话，至少是可能危害他们前此的成功那种情形之下，他们仍然要去自首的。变成孤独比单纯的失败，更要难于忍受，我想这就足以证明了。因为单纯的失败，即令是与人共同遭受的，毋宁是能够容易忍受的。许多意识形态的作用，可使人能够忍受极大的不幸，甚至是死亡。人们在意识形态掩护之下，便不会感到自己失败的冲击。意识形态以一种权威的力量，掌握住他们，虽则在紧要关头也不免要把他们抛弃。在另一方面，孤独的人便缺乏那种甚至可以使失败也感到舒服的安慰。

【注释】

（1）the community：公众（the public）。（2）provided：如果（if），即令（even if）。（3）in company：与人共同地。（4）digest：忍受（bear with patience；endure）。（5）sway：控制。（6）impact：冲击。（7）let them down：把他们抛弃（fail them at need）。（8）on the other hand：在另一方面。

（17）Being One’s True Self

【原文】

In literature，as in life，one of the fundamentals is to find，and be，one’s true self. One’s true self may indeed（1） be unpleasant；but a false self，sooner or later，becomes disgusting—just as a nice plain woman（2），painted to the eyebrows，can become horrid（3）. In writing，in the long run（4），pretense does not work. As the police put it（5），anything you say may be used as evidence against you. If handwriting reveals character，writing reveals it still more. You cannot fool your judges all the time（6）.

Most style is not honest enough. Easy to say，but hard to practice. A writer may take to（7） long words，as young men to beards—to（8） impress. But long words like long beards，are often the badge of charlatans（9）. Or a writer may cultivate the obscure（10），to seem profound. But even carefully muddied puddles（11） are soon fathomed. Or he may cultivate eccentricity，to seem original. But really original people do not have to think（12） about being original—they can no more help it than（13） they can help（14） breathing.（Frank Laurence Lucas）

【译文】

在文学中，也和在人生中一样，基本原理之一就是发现自我，乃至成为真正的自我。真正的自我诚然是令人不愉快的，但一个虚伪的自己迟早是会变得令人讨厌的——正好像一个丑陋的女人，涂脂抹粉，一直涂到眉毛以上去，也会变得可怕的一样。在写作中假装毕竟也是行不通的。正如警察所说的，你说的任何一句话，都可能要成为对你不利的证据。如果笔迹显示性格，写作显示的更多。你不能始终愚弄所有的评判人呀。

大多数的文体是不够诚实的。说时容易做时难。一个作家也许好用长字，正如年轻人好蓄胡须一样，目的无非是想使人留下深刻的印象。但是长字，有如长须，常成为骗子的标志。凡是一个作家想要显得高深，可能采用晦涩难解的文字。但是无论怎样细心弄得浑浊的水，也很快就可测出其深度的。或是有人想要显得独创，可能写出奇奇怪怪的文章。但是真正有独创力的人们无用乎去想怎样来独创，他们就像不得不呼吸一样，也不得不发挥出那种独创力来。

【注释】

（1）indeed：与后面的 but 呼应。（2）a nice plain woman：不说 ugly woman，而说 plain woman 或 homely woman，比较含蓄，是一种委婉的说法（Euphemism），其实这个 plain = ugly. 在男人方面说 plain man，意义就不同了，那是指率直的人，而所谓 plain people 便是指一般的人。形容词对男女意义有别，须加注意。他例如 an honest man 诚实的人；an honest woman 贞洁的女人（a chaste woman），成语有 make an honest woman of her，先奸后娶，使成正式妻子。nice 用在形容词前为副词，意为“十分地”，“怎样也是”，如 It was nice cold weather.（天气很冷。）（3）painted to the eyebrows，can become horrid：涂到眉毛以上，意即浓妆艳抹。句中的 can 非指“能力”，而指“可能性”。（4）in the long run：终久，毕竟。（5）put it：这个 put 有“表明”和“述说”的意思，如 To put it briefly.（简单地说。）Let me put it in another way.（换一个方式来说吧。）（6）all the time：一直，始终。（7）take to：喜欢，耽于。（8）to：即 in order to.（9）badge of charlatans：骗子的标志。charlatan 原为法文，有“走江湖者”，“骗子”，“冒充内行者”的意思。（10）the obscure：形容词前加定冠词即指名词，如 the beautiful = beauty；the poor = poor people.（11）muddied puddles：泥水潦。（12）do not have to think：意为 need not think.（13）no more…than：与……同样不。（14）help：避免（avoid）。

（18）Happiness Consists in Love

【原文】

Who can say（1） in what remoteness of time，in what difference of earthly shape，love first come to us as a stranger in the jungle？We，in our human family（2），know him（3） through dependence（4） in childhood，through possession（5） in youth，through sorrow and loss in their season（6）. In childhood we are happy to receive；it is the first opening of love. In youth we take and give，dedicate and possess—rapture and anguish are mingled，until parenthood brings a dedication（7） that，to be happy，must ask for no return（8）. All these are new horizons of content（9），which the lust of holding，the enemy of love（10），slowly contaminates. Loss，sorrow and separation come，sickness and death；possession，that tormented us，is nothing in our hands；it vanishes. Love’s elusive（11） enchantment，his ubiquitous（12） presence，again become apparent；and in age we may reach a haven（13） that asking for nothing knows how to enjoy. （14）（Freya Stark）

【译文】

爱这东西，不管是在多么远古的时代，不管是采取怎样现世的形态出现，总好像在森林中遇到的陌生人一样，是一个谁也不能了解的哑谜。属于人类的我们，在孩童时代，由于依赖爱自己的人而认识爱；在青年时代，由于占有所爱的人而认识爱，于是时候一到，由于失去了所爱的人感到悲伤而认识爱。在孩童时代我们很高兴来接受；这是爱的最早的端倪。在青年时代我们有取有予，有献身有占有——悲喜交集，直到做了父母时，对儿女那种献身的爱，心甘情愿，不望报答。这一切都是令人满足的爱的新境界，可惜不免要为与爱为敌的所有欲，慢慢地加以污损。失去了爱的痛苦，离别的悲哀，随即到来，还有疾病和死亡。以前那种使我们受苦的占有，已不在我们掌握之中，而早烟消云散了。爱的难于捉摸的魅力，它那不即不离的灵性，再度变得明显起来，及来到老年，我们就可能达到一个由于不求报答，故能体味到那种平静无波的爱的佳境。

【注释】

（1）say：（尤其是在否定和疑问句中）推测；评定；提出意见。（2）We，in our human family：等于说 We human beings. 人类。（3）know him：等于前面说的 love first comes to us 一样，将 he 作为 love 的代名词。这个 know，不是指状态，而是指“相知”。（4）dependence：依赖（父母）。（5）possession：占有（爱人）。（6）through sorrow and loss in their season：在人生的各个时期由于失去爱而感到悲伤。in their season 表示包括所有的时期，their 指 sorrow 与 loss 的，故译为“时候一到”。（7）until parenthood brings a dedication：直到做了父母，就献身地去爱儿女，天下父母心，莫不皆然。（8）must ask for no return：决不望报。（9）new horizons of content：令人满足的爱的新境界。（10）the lust of holding，the enemy of love：所有欲，也就是爱的大敌。（11）elusive：不可捉摸的，以为捉到了的东西又跑掉了，意指倏忽无常。（12）ubiquitous：原意为无所不在的，现译为不即不离的。以上两句并非同格的说法，由动词的复数便知。（13）haven：平静安乐的境界。（14）that asking for nothing knows how to enioy：由于我们不求报答故能体味到那种……

（19）The Cosy Fire of Affection

【原文】

You’ve been in love，of course！（1）If not you’ve got it to come. Love is like the measles；we all have to go through it. Also like the measles，we take it only once. One never need be afraid of catching it a second time. The man who has had it can go into the most dangerous places（2），and play the most fool-hardy tricks（3） with perfect safety. He can，to see the last of a friend（4），venture into the very jaws of the marriage ceremony itself（5）. He can keep his head through the whirl of a ravishing waltz（6），and rest afterwards in a dark conservatory（7），catching nothing more lasting than a cold.（8）

No，we never sicken with love twice. Cupid（9） spends no second arrow on the same heart. Love’s handmaids（10） are our life-long friends. Respect，and Admiration，and Affection，our doors may always be left open for，but their great celestial master（11），in his royal progress，pays but one visit（12），and departs. Meteor-like，it blazes for a moment（13），and lights with its glory the whole world beneath. Happy those who（14），hastening down again e’er it dies out（15），can kindle their earthly altars at its flame. Love is too pure a light to burn（16） long among the noisome gases that we breathe，but before it is choked out（17） we may use it as a torch to ignite the cosy fire（18） of affection.（Jerome K. Jerome）

【译文】

当然，你们都有过恋爱的经验！如果还没有的话，也就必然会要来的。恋爱好像麻疹一样，是每个人都要经历的。也好像麻疹一样，我们一生中只能罹上一次。谁也不用担心会再度罹上它的。凡是已经有过那种经历的人，可以深入最危险的地带，玩弄最鲁莽的勾当，逢场作戏，保证安全。他可以向独身生活告别，而大胆地走进结婚典礼的虎口。他可以满不在乎地从结婚晚会的狂欢圆舞的漩涡中安顿下来，然后进入幽暗的温室里去，从此相安无事，即令有平地波澜，也不过是像纠缠的伤风一样的小小毛病而已。

所以我们是不会再度罹上恋爱病的。爱神不会在同一颗心上射出第二支箭。爱的侍女们成为我们毕生的伴侣。尊敬，赞美，钟情，我们的心扉经常为她们开着，可是她们那伟大的天上的主子，在他的行幸中，只降临一次就离去了。像流星一般，它只燃烧一会儿，用它的荣光，照明下界整个的世界。趁着那光还未消失，再急忙地下降，能用它的火焰把他们地上的祭坛点燃的人们就有福了。爱是一种太纯洁的光，不能在我们呼吸的具有恶臭的气体中燃烧得太久，但是在它窒息之前，我们也许可用它作为火把，以点燃舒适的炉火，钟情的所在。

【注释】

（1）You’ve been in love，of course！：作者认为男女之间总不免有相恋的事，但只有初恋才是真诚的，所以他把它比做每个人都要经历一次麻疹。确认了这种严肃的事实之后，他便达到了一个结论：正是王戎说的“情之所钟正在吾辈”。钟情才是最要紧的，维系男女的关系，家庭的存在，乃至快乐的婚后生活，或是避免离婚的悲剧，一切都有赖于此。（2）the most dangerous places：指男女间最容易出问题的情形。（3）play the most fool-hardy tricks：所谓 play a trick，意为开玩笑或诈骗，trick 是诡计或欺诈手段。fool-hardy 为有勇无谋的，鲁莽的。故全句译成玩弄鲁莽的勾当。（4）see the last of a friend：这里说的 a friend，是把 single-blessedness（独身生活）人格化了。所谓和那朋友见最后一面，就是和他告别的意思。（5）can venture into the very jaws of the marriage ceremony itself：句中动词的 venture，形容词的 very，乃至反身代名词的 itself，都是为加强语气而用的，全部总括在助动词的 can 之下。复数形的 jaws 有“峡谷”的意思，在此乃比喻的用法。（6）can keep his head through the whirl of a ravishing waltz：句中 keep his head 有 keep calm（沉着，满不在乎）之意。the whirl of a ravishing waltz，指结婚晚会的狂欢热舞的场面。（7）conservatory：温室，暖房（不可译作音乐学校），在此指家庭。因为人们说结婚是爱情的坟墓，现由结婚典礼来表示爱情的结束，晚会的狂欢敲响了葬送爱情的丧钟（funeral bell），而当事人在那个热闹的场面过后，能够安静下来（rest）的地方，便是可避风雨侵凌而由人工做出来的温室（家庭）了。（8）catching nothing more lasting than a cold：注意这儿说的 catching，与前面第五句说的 One never need be afraid of catching it a second time. 中的 catching 遥相呼应，而有对照的作用。全句意为延续的东西除伤风外就不会得到别的什么了。说结婚生活中即使有点平地波澜也不会大过伤风那样的小毛病。注意在 conservatory 前用了 dark 一个形容词，既系幽暗，自然难免伤风，而且这个 cold 还有对 love 已经冷却了的含义。（9）Cupid：罗马神话中的爱神，用箭射在男女的心上，他们就相爱起来。（10）Love’s handmaids：指下面说的 Respect，Admiration，Affection.（11）their great celestial master：指 Love.（12）pays but one visit：只降临一次，与上段说的 Also like the measles，we take it only once. 遥相呼应。（13）it blazes for a moment：句中的 it 指 Love. 上句因有 master 的字样，故临时改用 his 为代名词。（14）Happy those who 即 Happy are those who 的省略说法。这使人不免要联想到新约圣经的 St. Matthew V 中的“The Sermon on the Mount”如 Blessed are the poor in spirit：for theirs is the kingdom of heaven 等句法。（15）hastening down again e’er it dies out：句中的 again 不是指 hastening down 的反复，而是指往返运动中返的意思，但不必译出，这原是说 Love 离开人间回到天上去，有时再来到人间。e’er 应写作 ere = before，这当然是作者的笔误（erroneous use）。全句意为趁着人们热恋的纯情还没有完全消失，再匆匆忙忙地从天上降下，用它的火焰点燃他们地上的祭坛上的火，能做到这点的人们便有福了。（16）too pure…to burn：太纯洁而不能燃烧。（17）it is choked out：窒息死去（指 love）。（18）the cosy fire：指家庭中的 hearth（火炉）而言。hearth 在英国因一年到头生火故为家庭的象征。最后说的 of affection 意指家庭有赖爱情的支持，故 the cosy fire 即为钟情的所在。

（20）Irrational Man

【原文】

An observer from another planet might well be struck by（1）the disparity（2） between the enormous power which our age has concentrated in its external life and the inner poverty which our art seeks to expose to view. This is，after all，the age that has discovered and harnessed（3） atomic energy，and that will，in a few years（perhaps in a few months），have atomic-powered planes which can fly through outer space and not need to return to mother earth for weeks. What cannot man do（4）？But if an observer from Mars were to turn his attention from these external appurtenances（5） of power to the shape of man as revealed in our novels，plays，painting，and sculpture，he would find there a creature full of holes and gaps，faceless，riddled with doubts and negations（6）.

This violent contrast between power and impoverishment（7） is frightening，for it represents a dangerous lagging of man behind his own works（8）；and in this lag lies the terror（9） of the atomic bomb which hangs over us like impending night. Here surely the ordinary man begins to catch a fleeting glimpse of that Nothingness（10） which both artist and philosopher have begun in our time to take seriously.（William Barrett）

【译文】

现代的人在其外面的生活上集中巨大的力量，而现代艺术却企图把那内面的贫穷暴露出来让人们看，一个从别的星球来的观察者，看到这种悬殊的不同，要大吃一惊也是当然的。毕竟，现代是发现了原子能又加以利用的时代，在几年内，甚至几个月内，就会有原子动力的飞机，能够飞往外太空，好几个礼拜都无需回返地球。人类还有什么做不到的事呢？但是如果一个从火星来的观察者，把他的目光从这些人力发挥尽致的外表的工具，转移到现代小说，戏剧，绘画，雕刻，所显示的人的形状，他就会发觉那是为疑问和否定，弄得满目疮痍，面目全非的一个生物。

这种外表的威力和内在的脆弱，二者对照的激烈令人可怕，因为它表示人类落在他自己造出的强大工具的后面，已达到危险的程度。像迫近的黑夜一般悬在我们头上的原子弹的恐怖，就因为这种落后而将来临。那是一定的，原子战争的结果，一切归于毁灭。艺术家和哲学家早已在我们这个时代开始时，就认真地在考虑这“无”的世界，而一般的人也触目惊心，开始注意到这个问题了。

【注释】

（1）might well be struck by：要为……而感到大为吃惊也是应该的。（2）disparity：不同，悬殊。（3）harnessed：利用。（4）What cannot man do？：人类还有什么不能做的？意即人类什么都能做（修辞疑问），是以否定加强肯定的。（5）appurtenances：Random House Dictionary 上解释说，something subordinate to another，more important thing，更加重要的附属物，在此指原子弹及太空船一类的人力所造成的外表的工具。（6）a creature full of holes and gaps，faceless，riddled with doubts and negations：由于怀疑和否定使之伤痕累累，面目全非的生物。所谓 faceless 不是没有面孔，而是面目不分明（unidentifiable），不能分辨是谁。这儿所描写的生物（人类）是指现代精神分裂的人，怀疑的人，虚无的人等形象化的东西。（7）power and impoverishment：外表的威力和内在的脆弱。（8）it represents a dangerous lagging of man behind his own works：这表示人类落在他自己的制作品的后面，达到危险的程度。lagging behind 的反意语为 catching up with.（9）in this lag lies the terror：恐怖就在这落后之中。这是一种倒装句法，意为因为这种落后而发生那种恐怖。（10）catch a fleeting glimpse of that Nothingness：一切皆空原是东方的思想，在西洋到了本世纪才有人提倡存在主义，于是也有了虚无思想，代表的有法国的卡缪著的《西奇斐的神话》（Albert Camus：Le Mythe de Sisyphe，1942），德国卡甫卡著的《奇妙之身》（Franz Kafka：Die Verwandlung，1916）等。Nothingness 指一切毁灭，是原子弹炸后的状态。catch a fleeting glimpse of，一瞬瞥见。指普通人也要骤然想到一切归于毁灭后的虚无状态。

习题

试将下列英文译成中文：

（1）You are a very strange creature by way of a friend！—always wanting me to play and sing before anybody and everybody！If my vanity had taken a musical turn，you would have been invaluable；but as it is，I would really rather not sit down before those who must be in the habit of hearing the very best performers.

（2）Twenty years had passed since then. He kept up a busy correspondence with various great ladies and his letters were amusing and chatty. He never lost his love for titled persons and paid no attention to the announcement in the Times of their comings and goings. He perused the column which records births，deaths，and marriages，and he was always ready with his letter of congratulation or condolence.（Maugham）

（3）The best of the communications an author has to make is to his own generation，and he is wise to let the generation that succeeds his choose its own exponents. They will do it whether he lets them or not. His language will be Greek to them.（Maugham）

（4）Often enough—and often justifiably—your ordinary lover of Nature has been accused of sentimentality. He prattles，so his condemners say，of the sweet twitter of birds and of the flowers that bloom in the spring. He disregards the seamy side of things and sees the world in greeting-card terms.（Joseph Wood Krutch）

（5）If to feel a false emotion based upon a deliberately incomplete view of the facts is to be guilty of sentimentalism，then the view that Nature is consistently violent and cruel is as sentimental as its opposite. She is no more characteristically red in tooth and claw than she is characteristically a kind mother.（Joseph Wood Krutch）

（6）Probably in nothing have man’s inventive powers been so active as in his endeavour to triumph over the terrors of darkness. Light is among the first needs man has supplied for himself in his struggle against it. Yet darkness has its gracious gifts. As it descends upon the world nature prepares itself for rest and sleep，and in the silence men recover strength of mind and body for the duties and burdens of the new day.

（7）Maybe the gradual actualization of this solidarity was the result of scientific and hence technological progress which caused distances to shrink and required ever expanding markets. But it is a preconceived and entirely unwarranted idea to believe this technological unification to have been a primary cause.

（8）A stout old lady was walking with her basket down the middle of a street in Petrograd to the great confusion of the traffic and with no small peril to herself. It was pointed out to her that the pavement was the place for foot-passengers，but she replied：“I’m going to walk where I like. We’ve got liberty now.” It did not occur to the dear old lady that if liberty entitled the foot-passenger to walk down the middle of the road it also entitled the cab-driver to drive on the pavement，and that the end of such liberty would be universal chaos.

（9）Foolishly arrogant as I was，I used to judge the worth of a person by his intellectual power and attainment. I could see no good where there was no logic，no charm where there was no learning. Now I think that one has to distinguish between two forms of intelligence，that of the brain，and that of the heart，and I have come to regard the second as by far the more important.

（10）The educated man is presumed to know what is wrong in the world，and what should be done to rectify it. If his education has amounted to anything，it should have increased his ability to think clearly and scientifically，and thus to know how to get at the cause and effect of political，social，economic，industrial evils. No man has right to consider education as merely a personal benefit enabling him to be more prosperous and happy in the world. He must look upon it as imposing upon him a responsibility to increase the welfare of others. Too many regard it as their own possession，and do not realize that it is something to be shared with others，and to be used for good of society at large.

附录
当代英美名作摘译

小引

一般读书人都是陶渊明的信徒，读书不求甚解，明白了一点大意就满足了。因此一动手来翻译，立刻就露出马脚来，连大名鼎鼎的胡适博士亦在所不免。他所译的短篇小说和原文常有出入。日本人读书比较认真，所以他们的译文是不会有太离谱的。这并不太难，只要我们放弃不求甚解的习惯，仔细精读原文，自不难彻底理解。如果能把原文逐字逐句理解无遗，再运用中文的表现能力，自然就能很忠实而流利地翻译出来了。

（1）

Suppose you ignore the telephone when it rings，and suppose that，for once，somebody has an important message for you. I can assure you that if a message is really important it will reach you sooner or later. Think of the proverb：“Ill news travels apace.” I must say good news seems to travel just as fast. And think of the saying：“The truth will out.” It will. But suppose you answer the telephone when it rings. If，when you take off the receiver，you say “Hullo！” just think how absurd that is. Why，you might be saying “Hullo！” to a total stranger. a thing you would certainly think twice about before doing in public，if you were English.

But perhaps，when you take off the receiver，you give your number or your name. But you don’t even know whom you are giving it to！Perhaps you have been indiscreet enough to have your name and number printed in the telephone directory，a book with a large circulation，a successful book so often reprinted as to make any author envious，a book more in evidence than Shakespeare or the Bible，and found in all sorts of private and public places. By your self-advertisement you have enabled any stranger，bore，intruder，or criminal to engage you in conversation at a moment’s notice in what ought to be the privacy of your own home.

【解说】

本文选自英国现代作家 William Plomer（1903—）写的 On Not Answering the Telephone 一篇随笔中的一节。文笔中讽刺与幽默并用，再加上日常说的谚语，写来极为生动有趣。作者生于非洲，虽曾回国入 Rugby 私立公校，因水土不合又回返他的出生地去了。他在非洲从商，又从事农业，后与诗人 Roy Campbell 合办一个文学杂志。第二次世界大战中从军，在海军部服务。作品涉及长篇小说，短篇小说，诗歌，传记各方面，以短篇小说最为有名。

【注释】

（1）ignore 不理睬。（2）important message for you，有重要的消息告诉你。（3）sooner or later 迟早。（4）think of 想到，忆及。例如 I can’t think of his name at the moment，我一时想不起他的名字。（5）“Ill news travels apace”恶事传千里。travels 一字，又常用 runs 或 flies 等字。apace 有 fast 的意思，如 The hours and days speed apace 时日飞逝。（6）The truth will out. 真相终将水落石出。will 表示习性。out 为 come out 的简略说法，单此一副词即可作自动词用。同样的俗语有 Murder will out，谋杀案隐藏不住，终将泄露出来。（7）receiver 电话的听筒。（8）total stranger 完全不认识的陌生人。（9）a thing 用作和上文同格的名词，这一件事即指对一个陌生人照呼。（10）think twice about 再思（而后行）的意思的陈句。（11）doing in public 公开的去做，在人前做。（12）if you were English 如果你是英国国民的话。the English 指英国全体的国民，单独的个体则说 an Englishman，复数为 three Englishmen，但普通说国籍时常把冠词略去，如 I am Chinese.（我是中国的国民）。比较：I am a Chinese.（我是中国人）。They are Italian.（他们都是意大利的国民）。比较：They are Italians.（他们是意大利人）。if you were English 的 English 是如上 Italian 同样的用法。（13）indiscreet 轻率的。（14）telephone directory 电话簿。（14）a book with a large circulation 一本销数很广大的书。（15）make any author envious 使任何作家妒羡。（16）in evidence 是一个有 conspicuous（显著的）之意的成语，例如 She likes to be much in evidence 她很爱出风头。Smith was nowhere in evidence. 史密斯显然不见了。（17）self-advertisement 自作广告，自我宣传。指把自己的姓名住址登在电话簿上。一种讽刺的说法。（18）bore 令人讨厌的人。（19）intruder 闯入者。（20）criminal 罪犯。（21）engage you in conversation 来和你交谈。（22）at a moment’s notice = immediately 在此场合的 notice 可作“预告”解。（23）in the privacy of your own home. 在你自己家里的私生活中。in privacy 秘密地，隐秘地。例如 He likes to live in privacy. 他喜欢与人无所接触的生活。他喜欢离群索居。I tell you this in strict privacy. 此事绝对秘密。in the privacy of one’s thoughts 在心灵深处。

【译例】

假定电话铃响你置之不理，又假定刚好这次那人有重要的消息要告诉你。我可以向你保证，如果那消息是真正重要的话，它迟早总会传达给你听的。想到那句谚语：“恶事传千里”，我一定要说好的消息好像也同样地传达得很快的呀。再想想那句常言：“真相总会水落石出的”，确是如此。但是假定你听到电话铃响，你就去接。当你拿起听筒，如果你说“哈罗！”的话，试想这是多么荒谬呀。哼，你也许正在对一个完全不相识的陌生人在说着“哈罗！”如果你是英国国民的话，这确实是一件在人前你要三思而后行的事。

但是当你拿起电话听筒的时候，也许你会把你的号码或是姓名告诉对方的。你甚至还不知道你在告诉的人是谁呢！也许你太轻率把你的姓名号码，随便就印在电话簿上去了，那是一本销数极多的书，任何作家都要羡慕的一本再三重版的成功的书，一本比莎士比亚或是《圣经》更要引人注目的书，在各种各样的公私场所都可见到的。由于你的自我宣传，你使得任何陌生人，令人讨厌的家伙，闯入者，或是罪犯之流，都能够侵入你在自己家里的私生活，随时来和你交谈。

（2）

What is perhaps strangest today is the keen widespread interest displayed toward people who are，on the one hand，not real celebrities and，on the other，not personally known to one. Most gossip that doesn’t concern one’s friends and acquaintances has，classically，a certain snob appeal—has to do with people of great wealth or fame or beauty. But much that one reads today in the gossip columns has to do，it might almost be said，with people whose reputations are being made at the same time they’re being unmade—people who only exist，as it were，in terms of the gossip. The who’s-dating-whom，the rumors of divorce，the shifts of affection，the speculations as marriage，the pregnancies and births，are for the most part—in New York，at any rate—about people only marginally in the limelight and often actually on the side lines. That Sonny Tink，the underwear heir，is dating a starlet，or even a showgirl；that a TV scriptwriter is horning in on the happy home of a candy-bar maker；that it’s a boy at the Gumbridges（his pajama company sponsors a minor radio program）；that a dog-biscuit tycoon has taken to investing in Broadway shows—this is the run of such stuff；and in a city of 8，000，000 people—a city that teems with real celebrities—this would seem to me of a piece with the trailer items in an old-fashioned small-town society column.

【解说】

本文采自美国作家 Louis Kronenberger（1904—）的一篇文章 A Note on Privacy 中的一节。描写私生活日益遭受侵害，物议纷纭，人言可畏。行文故意规避平易的表现，而采用奇特的语法，点缀一些有趣的警句和新鲜的比喻，口语俗语自由使用，有时未免艰深难解，总之，不失为奔放不羁的文体。作者为德国系统犹太人的后裔，在出生地 Ohio 的 Cincinnati 大学毕业后，1924 年前往纽约，先在 Boni ＆ Liveright 公司编辑部工作，后又改任 Knopf 出版公司编辑。发表了许多小说和评论，现为纽约《泰晤士报》写剧评，相当活跃。

【注释】

（1）the keen widespread interest 热烈的普遍的兴趣。（2）displayed toward people who are 对那些人们展示的。（3）on the one hand…on the other（hand）在一方面……在另一方面。（4）celebrities 名人，闻人。（5）personally known to 亲身认识。（6）gossip 街谈巷议；在人背后说人长短或是非闲谈。（7）that doesn’t concern one’s friends and acquaintances 无关他的朋友或相识的。（8）classically 原义为“正统地”，在此用着“传统地”（traditionally）相近的意味。（9）snob appeal 意为 appeal to snobbery，以名词修饰名词，简洁有力，为现代英语中常见的用法。has a certain snob appeal 引起某种装模作样的兴趣。据 Random House Dictionary of the English Language 的解释说 snob = a person who pretends to have social importance，intellectual superiority，etc. 意为一个假装社会上重要的人物，或智力超人表示他什么事都知道的样子。snob 在此指 snobbish character 或 conduct. 即上述俗物的性格或行为。（10）has to do with 与……有关。（11）people of great wealth or fame or beauty 极为富有，极为有名，极为美貌的人。（12）much that one reads today in the gossip columns 今日我们在闲话栏中所读到的大部分的社会新闻。（13）reputations are being made at the same time they’re being unmade. 由于声名狼藉而使声誉鹊起。意为以丑行而出名的。这种表现法很是有趣。（14）as it were 可谓。（15）in terms of 由于（by means of）；从什么的观点（from the standpoint of）.（16）The who’s-dating-whom 谁在跟谁闹恋爱。这种随意加短划而把若干单字构成一语，也是新的表现法。（17）the shifts of affection 移情别恋。（18）speculations 臆测。（19）pregnancies 怀孕。（20）only marginally in the limelight 仅是略为靠近灰光灯所照射的部分。意指稍为世人所知的。（21）on the side lines 在界线外的地方。借用运动术语，以作比喻的表现。The spectators watched the game from the side lines. 观众站在线外看比赛。（22）Sonny Tink 捏造的名字，非实际的公司名。（23）underwear heir 内衣公司老板的继承人。是一种极为紧缩的表现法。（24）is dating a starlet 和一个小明星约会。（25）showgirl 在歌舞场献技的女郎。（26）a TV scriptwriter 电视脚本作者。（27）is horning in on the happy home 正在破坏一个幸福的家庭。horn in = intrude 闯入。为美国俗语。（28）candy-bar maker 糖果制造商。（29）it’s a boy at the Gumbridges 在简家生了一个男孩。（30）his pajama company 简家经营的睡衣公司。（31）sponsor a minor radio program 赞助一个小型的广播节目。（32）a dog-biscuit tycoon 饲犬用的饼干业巨子。（33）take to 喜欢；耽于。（34）Broadway shows 百老汇上演的戏。（35）the run = the average kind 普通的种类。Cf. the common run of men（普通人）。（36）teem with 充满着。（37）of a piece with = of the same kind 与……同一类。（38）the trailer items 附加的记事。trailer 原意为电影样片。

【译例】

目下最奇怪的事，也许就是对于既非名人，又非熟识的人们所展示的一般热烈的兴趣。和自己的朋友或相识无关的大部分的闲谈，在传统上有一种诉诸俗物气质的魅力，而老是和富豪，名士或美人有关的。但是我们今日在闲话栏中所读到的多数的社会新闻，差不多可以说，都是有关以丑行而出名的人物的，以及有关那些可谓只存在于闲谈的世界中的人物的。谁又在跟谁闹恋爱，离婚的谣诼，移情别恋，关于结婚，怀孕及出生的臆测，大部分——至少是在纽约——都是关于一些不大出名的，而实际常是一些角落里的人的。说那个爽利丁克内衣公司的小开，正在爱上了一个小明星，甚至是一个歌女哪；又说一个写电视脚本的人，正在勾引着一个糖果制造商的妻子，而进行破坏他们的幸福家庭哪；又说赞助一个小型广播节目的，开睡衣公司的简家生了一个男孩哪；又说饲狗饼干业的大亨正有意投资于百老汇的戏剧哪，诸如此类，都是一般闲谈的材料：而在一个有八百万人口的，像纽约这样的大城市，其中充满着真正的名士，我觉得这些张家长李家短的玩意，就和旧式小镇上社交栏中所出现的附加的记事，没有什么两样呢。

（3）

Scobie is a sort of protozoic profile in fog and rain，for he carries with him a sort of English weather，and he is never happier than when he can sit over a microscopic wood-fire in winter and talk. One by one his memories leak through the faulty machinery of his mind until he no longer knows them for his own. Behind him I see the long grey rollers of the Atlantic at work，curling up over his memories，smothering them in spray，blinding him. When he speaks of the past it is in a series of short dim telegrams—as if already communications were poor，the weather inimical to transmission. In Dawson City the ten who went up the river were frozen to death. Winter came down like a hammer，beating them senseless：whisky，gold，murder—it was like a new crusade northward into the timberlands. At this time his brother fell over the falls in Uganda；in his dream he saw the tiny figure，like a fly，fall and at once get smoothed out by the yellow claw of water. No，that was later when he was already staring along the sights of a carbine into the very brainbox of a Boer. He tries to remember exactly when it must have been，dropping his polished head into his hands；but the grey rollers intervene，the long effortless tides patrol the barrier between himself and his memory.

【解说】

本文作者 Lawrence George Durrel（1912—）是英国的诗人兼小说家，出生于印度，回国受教育。曾任海外各地的通讯员，甚至还做过夜总会的琴师。他有文学天赋，才气蓬勃，他的文章被誉为绣帷缀锦（tapestry）具有丰富的字汇和华丽的色彩。他以 20 世纪 30 年代的埃及亚历山大为背景，写成 The Alexandria Quartet 四部作，其第一部 Justine，成于 1957 年，第二部 Balthuzar 及第三部 Mountolive，均成于 1958 年，第四部 Clea 则成于 1960 年。各部的观点和写作手法都有不同，具有立体的及其他多方面的效果。作者长于人物描写，即令是同一个人物，在各书中出现时，都是从不同的角度看去，而加以描写的。所以新的面影摧毁了旧的轮廓，但并未使之完全消失，仍在读者的心目中，留下一个残像，重重相叠，新像再印在旧像之上，就好像一张感光的底片，一次又一次把人相照上去，结果没有一个具有个性的特定的人物存在，只剩下一堆具有莫名其妙的侧面的人影，或是说得正确一点，像人一样的面影，浮现在读者的眼前。本文采自他的四部作的第一部 Justine 中的一段。我们且来欣赏一下作者的人物描写吧。Scobie 原服务海军中，经过长年的海上生活之后，现加入埃及警察部队，已经是一个快七十岁的老人了。这种喜剧的描写，隐喻叠出，有如用散文写出的一首诗。

【注释】

（1）protozoic profile 原生动物的轮廓。Protozoa 原生动物，即单细胞的动物类，通常要用显微镜才可以看见的。（2）in fog and rain 在雾里和雨中。这表示更加模糊。（3）English weather 英国的天气，是以多雨多雾著称的。（4）microscopic woodfire 微微的炉火。microscopic = very small；tiny 极小的，微小的。wood-fire 英国家庭的火炉，讲究烧柴火，如云 Put some more wood on the fire.（在火炉上加点柴去。）（5）talk 接上面说的 can sit，即 can talk 之略。（6）his memories leak 他的记忆泄露出来。（7）through the faulty machinery of his mind 经由他心灵的破机器。意即从他那有毛病的头脑中。因人类的头脑构造复杂，故用机器的总称 machinery 一字，而不说单独一部机器的 machine.（8）Behind him I see the long grey rollers of the Atlantic at work 在他的背后我看见波澜起伏。roller 原意为滚动的东西，在此指“巨浪”，如 Huge rollers broke on the beach.（巨浪冲上沙滩。）这是说 Scobie 的过去，令人联想到惊涛骇浪的海洋。现在人已经老了，过去的记忆，好像全埋没到海洋中去了似的。但并没有丧失。用波澜起伏的隐喻，至为生动。（9）curling up over his memories 蜷伏在他的记亿上。（10）smothering them in spray 用浪花把他的记忆全般掩蔽着。（11）blinding him 使他为之目盲。（12）a series of short dim telegrams 一连串短的意思不清楚的电报。（13）as if already communications were poor，the weather inimical to transmission 俨然是由于原来的通信联络已经不好，再加上气象条件不利，而传送大有困难似的。描写他说话如打电报，故云。inimical 不利的。（14）从 In Dawson City 直到 into the very brain-box of a Boer 为止全用的过去动词，似乎是指 Scobie 断续的记忆，电报似的话语。（15）Dawson City 加拿大西北部森林地带的城市。the Yukon 河及 Klondike 河在此汇合。在 1890 年以后数年间在此曾发生淘金热。（16）like a new crusade 像一个新的十字军，指 whisky，gold，murder 连在一起而形成的。（17）timberlands 森林地带。（18）Uganda 乌干达，原为东非英国的保护国，位于刚果及肯雅之间。（19）get smoothed out 消失不见。（20）the yellow claw of water 黄色的水的魔爪，指人为水所吞没。（21）along the sights of a carbine 沿着一支卡宾枪的照准。意即瞄准射击。（22）into the very brain box of a Boer. 正射进一个波尔人的脑袋中去。Boer 波尔人为荷兰血统的南非人。the Boer War 发生于 1899—1902 年。（23）polished head，光滑的头；油头。（24）the grey rollers intervene 波涛起伏遮断（他的记忆）。（25）the long effortless tides patrol the barrier 那长大的不需费力的浪潮巡逻守住界线（不让他的记忆突破）。

【译例】

史可庇带有一种在雾里和雨中的原生动物的轮廓，因为他携带得有英国的天气，只要他在冬天能够坐在一个微微的炉火旁边，天南地北来闲聊的话，他就再快乐也没有了。一件一件的往事，从他那有毛病的头脑中泄漏出来，直到最后连他自己都不知道那些记忆的东西，是不是他自己的。在他的背后我看见大西洋上的灰色巨浪，汹涌起伏，蜷伏在他的记忆上，又用浪花把他的记忆掩蔽，使他再也看不见了。当他说到过去的时候，是用一连串短的意思不清的电报来说的——宛然是因为原来的通信联络已经不好，再加上气象条件不利，而使得传送大有困难似的。在道生市，那时有十个人走到河的上流去，全都冻死了。冬天像一把铁锤似的降下，把他们打得失去知觉了。威士忌酒，黄金，杀人——这些结合在一起，形成了一支向着北方森林地带而去的新十字军。正在这时，他的弟弟在乌干达坠下到瀑布里去了；他在梦中看见那像苍蝇一般的小小的人影落下去，而马上就被黄色的水的魔爪吞没得不见了。不对：那还在以后，那是他已经把一支卡宾枪正瞄准好，要射中一个波尔人的脑袋那个当儿呀。他很想正确地记忆出那到底是在什么时候，于是把他那油滑的头伏下在他的两手之中，可是那灰色的大波又出现了，那毫不费力的巨大的浪潮，守住了界限，不让他回复记忆。

（4）

He entered the penumbra of the storm slowly，marvelling at the light，at the horizon drawn back like a bow. Odd gleams of sunshine scattered rubies upon the battleships in the basin（squatting under their guns like horned toads）. It was the ancient city again；he felt its pervading melancholy under the rain as he crossed it on his way to the Summer Residence. The brilliant unfamiliar lighting of the thunderstorm re-created it，giving it a spectral，story-book air—broken pavements made of tinfoil，snail-shells，cracked horn，mica；earth-brick buildings turned to the colour of ox-blood；the lovers wandering in Mohammed Ali Square，disoriented by the unfamiliar rain，disconsolate as untuned instruments；the clicking of violet trams along the sea-front among the tatting of palm-fronds. The desuetude of an ancient city whose streets were plastered with the wet blown dust of the surrounding desert. He felt it all anew，letting it extend panoramically in his consciousness—the moan of a liner edging out towards the sunset bar，or the trains which flowed like a torrent of diamonds towards the interior，their wheels chattering among the shingle ravines and the powder of temples long since abandoned and silted up……

【解说】

本文采自 Durrell 作的四部作的第三部 Mountolive 中的一段。上一篇我们所精读的是 Durrell 的人物描写，现在我们再来看看他的景物描写。Mountolive 是英国驻埃大使，为着要去会晤他以前当秘书时代所爱的女子。遂从开罗出发。横渡沙漠，到亚历山大去。本文便是描写这旅途的情形。那是冬日的薄暮。作者对描写风景的特点，就是大用色彩的字眼和比喻，且都能诉诸感觉，鲜明如绘。不但是现实的外表，就连那些难于捉摸的内在的理性，都被作者描绘出来，使读者感觉得到，有如亲身的经历似的。所以在作者笔下所描绘出来的风景，对现实的轮廓很薄，而色彩浓厚，给人的印象极深。在本文中，那轮廓已经很薄了的风景，重重叠叠，印在读者的心上，使得海洋，城市，乃至沙漠混合起来，构成一幅镶嵌细工的图样，令人为之目迷。作者笔下的景物描写，与传统小说上的判然不同，反映出他特有的诗一般的美丽的文笔来，他的名文家的声誉是当之无愧的。

【注释】

（1）penumbra（绘画）浓淡相交之处。原为天文上指日蚀，月蚀时部分入影的区域，即半阴影部分。复数为 penumbrae.（2）marvelling at 对于什么感到惊异。（3）drawn back like a bow 像被拉紧的弓一样。（4）Odd gleams of sunshine 夕阳的残照。（5）scattered rubies upon the battleships 把如红宝石一般的点点金光洒在战舰上。（6）basin 为陆地所包围的小海湾。（7）squatting under their guns like horned toads 像有角的蟾蜍一般蹲踞在突出的大炮之下。（8）its pervading melancholy 那城中弥漫的忧郁感。（9）Summer Residence 消夏的邸宅。驻在埃及的外交官入夏便从开罗迁居亚历山大。（10）The brilliant unfamiliar lighting of the thunderstorm re-created it，giving it a spectral，story-book air 那雷雨的不习见的闪电的光亮，把那城市重新造过，给了它一种非现实的童话一般的面貌。spectral 妖怪的；幽灵的。（11）tinfoil 锡箔。（12）snail-shells 贝壳。螺旋形的贝壳，蜗牛壳作螺旋形。（13）cracked horn 破碎的角。（14）mica 云母。（15）ox-blood 带黑的深红色。（16）Mohammed Ali Square 穆罕默德·阿里方场。以十九世纪初叶埃及太守名为纪念的地名。（17）disoriented = disorientated 对方向弄不清楚；迷失方向。（18）disconsolate as untuned instruments 像不合音调的乐器一样令人不快。形容爱侣的情绪不好。disconsolate 哀伤的，使人难过的。（19）clicking 金属物相碰的声音。（20）the tatting of palm-fronds 像梭织花边似的棕榈树叶。（21）desuetude 废止状态。作废，为 consuetude（惯例）之对。例如 Many words once commonly used have fallen into desuetude.（许多以往通用的字今已废而不用了）。（22）were plastered with the wet blown dust of the surrounding desert 涂满了周围沙漠中吹来的湿的尘土。（23）从 The brilliant unfamiliar lighting 起直到 the surrounding desert 为止都是描写 Mountolive 如梦如幻地所感到的亚历山大的情景。所以下面总结一句说 He felt it all anew. 更进一步地，让这个城市这种周围的景象，还栩栩如生之际，接着说 letting it extend（让它扩大下去）。（24）panoramically 全景在目地。（25）in his consciousness 在他的意识中。（26）the moan of a liner 一条定期船的呻吟。（27）edging out towards the sunset bar 向着落日的港口徐徐移动出去。（28）the trains which flowed like a torrent of diamonds towards the interior 像钻石的奔流一样向着内陆流去的火车。（29）ravines 由激流而构成的峡谷。（30）the powder of temples long since abandoned 早就被人遗弃了的庙宇的废墟。powder 腐朽而化成了灰。（31）silted up 为淤泥充塞。

【译例】

蒙搭里夫慢慢地走进了那风暴的明暗相交的处所，惊奇地望着那拉紧像一把弓似的明亮的地平线。夕阳的残照有如红宝石的点点金光，洒向停泊在小海湾中的兵舰上（那些兵舰像有角的蟾蜍一般蹲踞在突出的大炮之下）。重又来到了这个古城。当他横过此城走向大使馆的消夏别墅去时，在大雨淋漓之下，他感觉到这城中弥漫着忧郁的感觉。大雷雨中那不习见的电光，使这城市面目一新，给了它一种非现实的童话一般的容貌。用锡箔、贝壳、碎角、云母铺成的破烂的铺道。土砖的房子变成了带黑的深红色。情侣们在穆罕默德·阿里方场散步，由于不习见的雨而使他们迷失方向，有如弹着走了调的乐器听来很不舒服一样，他们的情绪非常不好。沿着海岸线，在梭织花边似的棕榈叶的树荫下走着的紫色电车的轧轧声。这个古城好像要被废弃的样子，它的街道上涂满了从四周围沙漠中吹来的湿的尘土。这一切的情景他又重新充分地感到了，让那全景在目地在他心中扩展开去。——一条定期轮船向着落日的港口徐徐移动出去的声音，或是像钻石的奔流一般向着内陆流去的火车，它们的车轮在满布鹅卵石的峡谷上，和很久已绝人烟，早为淤泥充塞的庙宇的废墟上辘辘地奔驰着。

（5）

Spearing wore his hair long even in Egypt. He had the kind of complexion the sun fired to a demonic redness and，in contrast，the hair looked whiter and silkier than it does today. Everybody knew him，by sight if not by name. He never wore a hat. You can imagine how he stood out in a crowd of Egyptians because of this flouncing mop of hair. He was a marked man. Perhaps he felt that the extravagance of his appearance had to be matched in some way by an extravagance of conduct. In England，where he is naturally less conspicuous，Spearing has never made a lot of trouble.

Both of us were teaching at the University but I saw more of him than the rest of my colleagues did because we put up at the same pension. Accordingly，When I heard him shouting abuse in Cairo Post Office one hot afternoon I went over to see what the trouble was this time.

We were in the Parcels Department，a long dark cavern equipped with an unusually wide counter，a number of scaler and a chute. Only one official seemed to be on duty that afternoon，a hard-faced little man with creased cheeks who closed his eyes when he spoke.

“If you don’t put Alexandria，” he said in English，“I won’t take it.”

Spearing was so angry that his hands visibly trembled when they gripped the edge of the counter. “Everybody knows where Sidi Gaber is，you coot！You know where Sidi Gaber is！I know where it is！He—”

【解说】

作者为英国小说家 P. H. Newby（1918—），本文采自他的短篇小说 A Parcel for Alexandria 开端的一段，描写一个英国人在开罗邮局寄小包，因地址不全而被拒收的情形。文体如行云流水，明白通达，且多用单句，浅显易读。作者在大学毕业后从军，参加第二次世界大战，在埃及军中受命兼任大学讲师，任教至战后 1946 年止。1946 年以后服务于 B. B. C. 常以近东及其他外国为背景来写小说，作风颇近似 E. M. Forster，自 1945 年 A Journey to the Interior 问世以来，差不多每年都有一部作品发表。

【注释】

（1）complexion 面色。（2）the sun fired to a demonic redness 被太阳晒得变成魔鬼似的红色。这当然是修饰面色的。（3）in contrast 对照起来。（4）silkier 更为柔软发亮。（5）by sight if not by name. 即不知道他的姓名，也能认识他的面貌。这种表现法简洁有力。（6）stood out in a crowd 鹤立鸡群。（7）this flouncing mop of hair 他这一头蓬松的头发。flounce 原意为女裙的荷叶边，在此无非形容多皱的头发。mop 拖把似的头发。（8）a marked man 引人注目的人。marked 显著的，明显的。（9）extravagance 过度；放纵。extravagance of appearance 他样子的放肆。extravagance of conduct 行为的放肆。（10）had to be matched by 相等，配合。（11）in some way 有些方面。（12）less conspicuous 不大引人注目。比较少人注意。（13）has never made a lot of trouble 从未惹起很多麻烦。（14）the University 用大写指当地唯一的大学。（15）put up at 住宿。（16）pension = boarding house 公寓，宿舍。原为法文，如 live en pension 住在宿舍里。（17）shouting abuse 大声辱骂。（18）the Parcels Department，邮局包裹部。（19）cavern 地下的大洞穴。在此指邮局下层包裹部黑暗得像地洞似的。（20）equipped with an unusually wide counter 装备得有一个异常宽大的柜台。（21）scales 天平（用复数）。（22）chute 使邮包自上滑下的装置，滑槽。（23）official 在此指邮局职员。（24）on duty 当值，值班。（25）hard-faced = hard-favoured 面貌严厉的；面色难看的。（26）little man 小个子；身材矮小的人。（27）creased cheeks 多皱的面颊。（28）I won’t take it. 我不接受（这个邮包）。（29）when they gripped the edge of the counter 当他的两手紧抓着柜台边上的时候。（30）Sidi Gaber 为 Alexandria 的郊外地区。（31）Coot（俗语）愚人；笨东西。（32）He——实际是说的 I，如华语说的“人家”或“别人”，有时也是指自己，例如：

“人家（或别人）一番好意，你却这样不领情”。

【译例】

史匹林的头发，哪怕是在埃及，都算是蓄得很长的。他的面孔被太阳晒得像魔鬼似的血红，与之成对照的，是他的头发却比现今更白，更为柔亮。人人都认得他，即令不晓得他的名字，也认识他的面貌。他从来不带帽子。你不难想像他那一头蓬松的头发，站在一群埃及人当中，简直是鹤立鸡群，非常突出。他成为一个引人注目的人了。也许他觉得他的放肆的样子，应该配上一些放肆的行为才对。在英国，那儿是本乡本土，他自然不会引人注目，史匹林也从未惹起过什么麻烦。

我们两人都是在大学教书，不过我比其余的同事和他见面的机会更多，因为我和他住在同一个宿舍的缘故。于是，在一个酷热的下午，当我听到他在开罗邮局大声辱骂的时候，我赶忙走过去看这次是发生了什么麻烦。

我们都在邮局的包裹部门，那是一间长形的黑暗洞穴似的屋子，设有一个非常宽大的柜台，里面有天平和滑槽。那天下午好像只有一个职员在值班似的，那是一个面色可怕，面颊多皱的小个子，他说话时总是把眼睛闭上。

“如果你不写上亚历山大的字样，”他用英语说，“我不接受。”

史匹林气得两手发抖，他的两手正紧握着那柜台的边缘。“人人都晓得西提加柏在什么地方，你这笨猪！你也知道西提加柏在什么地方！我也知道它在什么地方！人家——”

（6）

The gong was about to sound quite soon. Anne kicked her cigarette-stub into a dark corner. Greggie called over her shoulder，“Anne，here comes your boy-friend.”“On time，for once，” said Anne，with the same pretence of scorn that she had adopted when referring to her brother Geoffrey：“Geoffrey would be the last person I would consult.” She moved，with her casual hips，towards the door. A squarebuilt high-coloured young man in the uniform of an English captain came smiling in. Anne stood regarding him as if he was the last person in the world she would consult. “Good evening，” he said to Greggie as a well-brought-up man would naturally in the doorway. He made a vague nasal noise of recognition to Anne，which if properly pronounced would have been “Hallo”. She said nothing at all by way of greeting. They were nearly engaged to be married. “Like to come in and see the drawing room wallpaper？” Anne said then. “No，let’s get cracking.” Anne went to get her coat off the banister where she had slung it. He was saying to Greggie，“Lovely evening，isn’t it？” Anne returned with her coat slung over her shoulder. “Bye，Greggie，” she said. “Goodbye，” said the soldier. Anne took his arm. “Have a nice time，” Greggie said. The dinner-gone sounded and there was a scuffle of feet departing from the notice-board and a scamper of feet from the floors above.

【解说】

本文采自英国女作家 Muriel Spark（1918—）所写的 The Girls of Slender Means 一篇小说，那是 1963 年的作品。作者生于 Edinburgh，旅居 Southern Rhodesia 达六年之久，于第二次世界大战中返国。此后近十年间专从事于诗作，似有“枉抛心力作诗人”的打算。直到 1951 年观察报悬赏征求小说，她应征写了一个短篇 The Seraph and the Zambest 寄去，居然获得首奖，而使她写小说的文名鹊起，这一来她也就放下诗作而转向于小说了。她以写诗的技巧和辞华来写小说，自然写来特别绚烂夺目。她的文章中常有对照的表现，如幻想与现实，讽刺与感伤，愤怒与欢笑等等，皆能有机地结合起来。在她的散文中洋溢着诗的影像和旋律，构成了她特殊的作风。

【注释】

（1）gong（通知用餐时用的）碟形的铃，或称呼钟。此字又可作“铜锣”解。（2）kicked her cigarette-stub into a dark corner 把她的烟屁股丢向暗的角落上。kick 意为 send forcibly or angrilly（ALD）用力掷去。（3）over her shoulder 回过头来。（4）on time 准时。（5）for once = as an exception 难得一次。（6）with a same pretence of scorn 带着同样假装的轻蔑（她内心对她的哥哥是很佩服的，但在人前却假装着瞧他不起的样子）。（7）Geoffrey would be the last person I would consult. 我绝对不会去和哥哥商量的。（8）She moved，with her casual hips，towards the door. 她移动了，无意识地扭着她的屁股，向门口走去了。这描写何等的具有诗的洗练，影像虽不显明，却能使人获得深的印象。这种 erotic（色情的）的描写正是作者的一种手法。（9）square-built 坚实的；粗壮的。（10）high-coloured 有朝气的，生龙活虎的。（11）in the uniform of an English captain 穿着英国陆军上尉的制服。（12）a well-brought-up man 一个有教义的人。（13）in the doorway 进门时。（14）made a vague nasal noise of recognition 发出含糊的鼻音来招呼一下。（15）properly pronounced 正规地发出音来。（16）by way of greeting 作为应酬的话。（17）nearly engaged 差不多算是订了婚。（18）the drawing room wallpaper 客厅里的糊壁纸。（19）let’s get cracking = let’s start. 俗语 get cracking = get busy（with work waiting to be done）.（ALD）马上就动身吧。（20）banister 栏干。（21）where she had slung it 她把上衣丢在那里。他动词 sling 意为抛掷。（22）Bye 为 bye-bye 的省略说法，原为儿语，现大人也说，表示亲密。（23）Have a nice time 希望你们玩的好。（24）The dinner-gong sounded and there was a scuffle of feet departing from the notice-board and a scamper of feet from the floors above. 晚餐的铃声一响，就听见离开公告栏乱糟糟的脚步声，和楼上地板上急走的足音。从 sound 到 scuffle 最后及于 scamper 都是用齿音〔s〕作头韵。scuffle 混乱，乱做一团。scamper 疾走，急驰。

【译例】

吃饭的铃子很快就要响了。安把她吸剩的香烟头，使劲地扔在那暗角上去。格雷琪回过头来叫道：“安，你的男朋友来了。”“这次总算是准时来的，”安说，带着假装的轻蔑，正好像她提到她哥哥时所表示的一样：“我是决不会去找乔勿莱商量的。”她移动了，照常无意识地扭着屁股，向门口走去。一个穿着英国陆军上尉的制服，身体结实，活力充沛的青年，含笑走进来了。安站在那儿把他看做是这世界上她决不会去找他商量的人似的。“您晚上好。”他对格雷琪说，凡是一个有教养的人，一进门来，见到年长的人自然要这样说的。他发出含糊的鼻音来对安招呼了一下，如果要用正规的发言来说时，那便是“哈罗”了。作为应酬的话，她什么也没有说，他们快要订婚了。“你高兴进来看看客厅里的糊壁纸么？”安于是这样说。“不必啦，我们还是马上就走吧。”安走去栏干边取她的上衣，她早些时候把它掷在那上面的。那军人对格雷琪说：“真是一个可爱的夜晚呀。”安转来了，把她的上衣挂在肩上。“格雷琪，回头见。”她说。“再会。”那军人说，安挽着他的手走了。“希望你们玩得痛快。”格雷琪说。吃饭的铃子终于响了，只听见离开公告牌一阵混乱的脚步声，和从上面楼板上发出的疾走的足音。

（7）

Lois Taggett was graduated from Miss Hascomb’s School，standing twenty-sixth in a class of fifty-eight，and the following autumn her parents thought it was time for her to come out，charge out，into what they called Society. So they gave her a five-figure，la-de-da Hotel Pierre affair，and save for a few horrible colds and Fred-hasn’t-been-well-lately’s，most of the preferred trade attended. Lois wore a white dress，an orchid corsage，and a rather lovely，awkward smile. The elderly gentlemen guests said，“she’s a Taggett，all right”；the elderly ladies said，“She’s a very sweet child”；the young ladies said，“Hey. Look at Lois. Not bad. What’d she do to her hair？”；and the young gentlemen said，“Where’s the liquor？”

That winter Lois did her best to swish around Manhattan with the most photogenic of the young men who drank scotch-and-sodas in the God-and-Walter Winchell section of the Stork Club. She didn’t do badly. She had a good figure，dressed expensively and in good taste，and was considered Intelligent. That was the first season when Intelligent was the thing to be.

【解说】

这是美国现代作家 J. D. Salinger（1919—）的短篇小说 The Long Debut of Lois Taggett 的头上的一节。描写一个年轻姑娘初次进入社交界的情形。Salinger 在 1951 年发表长篇小说 The Catcher in the Rye 一举成名，在美国文坛获得崇高的地位，无论内容形式，都是最新颖的。研究这位作家的书，都出了好几本，如 Gwynn ＆ Blotner 著的 The Fiction of J. D. Salinger（University of Pittsburgh Press，1958）；H. A. Grunwald 著的 Salinger：A Critical and Personal Portrait（Harper ＆ Brothers，1962）；Warren French 著的 J. D. Salinger（Twayne Publishers，1963）. 此外还有 Laser ＆ Fruman 编的 Studies in J. D. Salinger：Reviews，Essays and Critiques of the Catcher in the Rye and Other Fiction（Odyssey）及 James E. Miller 的 J. D. Salinger（Minnesota University Press），足见他的文学地位，我们要知道什么是美国最新的文体，最好阅读 Salinger 的作品。上面所选用的短文，便可看出作者的风格，不但文字洗练，而字句也十分新颖，读来真可一新耳目。

【注释】

（1）standing twenty-six in a class of fifty-eight 一班五十八名中她名列第二十六。（2）come out = make a debut 开始进入社交界。（3）charge out 和 come out 同义，换一个说法重复一下，以加强语气。（4）Society 社交界。（5）gave her an affair 为她举办一个晚会。affair 在此作 party 解。（6）five-figure 五位数目的，不一定指万数，而是指大量的金钱。（7）la-de-da 或拼为 la-di-da，作形容词用时有 foppish（纨绔子的，适合于纨绔子的。空虚的，愚笨的，矫饰的），在此有 stylish（合乎时尚的，时髦的，漂亮的）的意思。（8）Hotel Pierre 是纽约 Manhattan 地区一流的旅馆。（9）save for = except for 除开。（10）a few horrible colds and Fred-hasn’t-been-well-lately’s 少数几个人因重伤风，以及胡来德近来健康欠佳。表示拒绝来参加晚会的理由，这种表现法颇为新奇有趣。（11）preferred trade 优先选定的客人。trade 原为 customers 的意思，作集合名词用。他例如 preferred stock（优先股），作者大概是想到这个而滑稽地使用的。（12）orchid corsage 胡姬花束。妇女胸前或肩上的饰物。（13）Not bad 很好，非常的好，这是一种 understate 的说法。（14）What’d = What did.（15）Where’s = Where is.（16）did her best 尽力。（17）swish 瑟瑟声，表在冬天寒风中走动的神气。（18）photogenic 宜于艺术摄影的。the most photogenic of the young men 最会照艺术相的年轻人。（19）scotch-and-sodas 威士忌苏打 soda water 在美国叫 sodas.（20）God-and-Walter Winchell section 有名的新闻记者 Walter Winchell 等人常占用的席位。其中 God-and-无特殊意义，只是强调的说法。（21）Stork Club 鹳雀俱乐部。此为纽约 Manhattan 有名的夜总会。（22）figure 身材。（23）in good taste 有高尚的趣味。（24）Intelligent 有头脑的、有才智的、聪明的。（25）the thing to do 重要的事。

【译例】

萝薏·塔格特从赫斯康女士的学校毕业时，全班五十八人中她得到第二十六名。就在她毕业的第二年秋天，她的父母认为已经是她进入那个他们称为社交界的时候了。所以他们为她在匹尔亚大饭店举行了一个盛大的合乎时尚的晚会。除了几个说是因患了重伤风和近来健康欠佳的人以外，优先选定的客人们大部分都到了。萝薏穿了一袭白色的衣服，胸前挂着一束胡姬花，面上浮着一片相当可爱而又笨拙的微笑。年长的先生们说：“她不愧是塔格特家的姑娘。”年长的太太们说：“她真是一位人见人爱的孩子呀。”年轻的妇女们说：“吓，看萝薏。好漂亮呀。她的头发不晓得是怎样做的。”而年轻的男士们就说：“酒在哪儿？”

那年冬天萝薏努力和那些在鹳雀俱乐部的瓦特温彻的座席上，喝威士忌苏打的青年人中最善于拍摄艺术照的人，一块儿在曼哈顿一带那瑟瑟的寒风中走来走去。她表现得很不错。她的身材既长得好，又穿上高价和趣味优雅的服装，被认为是有头脑的。在最初的时期，第一就是要有头脑。

（8）

It was too late to call up for a cab or anything，so I walked the whole way to the station. It wasn’t too far，but it was cold as hell，and the snow made it hard for walking，and my Gladstones kept banging hell out of my legs. I sort of enjoyed the air and all，though. The only trouble was，the cold made my nose hurt，and right under my upper lip，where old Stradlater’d laid one on me. He’d smacked my lip right on my teeth，and it was pretty sore. My ears were nice and warm，though. That hat I bought had earlaps in it，and I put them on—I didn’t give a damn how I looked. Nobody was around anyway. Everybody was in the sack.

Usually I like riding on trains，especially at night，with the lights on and the windows so black，and one of those guys coming up the aisle selling coffee and sandwiches and magazines. I usually buy a ham sandwich and about four magazines. If I’m on a train at night，I can usually even read one of those dumb stories in a magazine without puking. You know. One of those stories with a lot of phoney，lean-jawed guys named David in it，and a lot of phoney girls named Linda or Marcia that are always lighting all the goddam Davids’pipes for them.

【解说】

如果要研读以俚俗语写的现代文学，最好还是读 J. D. Salinger 的长篇小说 The Catcher in the Rye. 这不但是他的代表作，也是现代俚俗语文学的代表。这部小说既无故事，也无结构，却能彻底地表现出作者的生活态度和真挚感情。全书描写一个阿飞学生在离校后回家前的三日间在外流浪的过程，全用极其正直的内心的独白表出，足见作者对个性的描写何等深入。这确是现代英文一种独特的文体，值得一读。

【注释】

（1）too late to call up for a cab 太迟不能打电话去叫车。too…to do 意为“太……不能做”。cab = taxicab = taxi 出租汽车。（2）or anything 为 or something 的否定形，因前有 too……to 的否定。意为“还是什么”，在此意为既不能去叫出租汽车，也不能去叫别的什么。此为口语中特有的表现法。（3）It wasn’t too far. 并不太远。not too = not very 也是口语的说法。（4）cold as hell 冷得要死；非常的冷。（＜as……as hell）这种 swearwords（咒骂语），是俚俗的（slangy）文体的特色。（5）the snow made it hard 中的 it 指 the way 而言。（6）Gladstones 英国十九世纪的政治家 William Ewart Gladstone（1809—1898），为自由党的党魁，曾四次任首相。由此而发生出两种东西，一为两人坐的四轮游览马车，一为由当中开口分为上下的旅行皮箱，二者都是用他的名字，叫作 Gladstone，这里是指后者。即又可称为 Gladstone bag 的。（7）banging hell out of my legs 重击在我的两条腿上。hell 一字为俚语表现法，在此除加强语气外别无他意。（8）I sort of enjoyed = I rather enjoyed. 我相当的喜欢。“sort of＋动词”的形式，也是美国口语的表现法。（9）and all 及其他。等等。（ = and everything）也是口语特别的说法。（10）though 意为“可是”、“虽然”，在口语中放在句尾是作副词用的。（11）old Stradlater’d = old Stradlater had. 这个 old 不作“老”解，而是指熟悉的朋友，一种亲密的称呼，如我们同学间叫的老张，老李一样。（12）laid one on me 给我一拳。one = a blow.（13）He’d = He had.（14）smacked 掴；重击。（15）pretty sore 很痛。这个 pretty 为 understatement（说得较轻）。（16）nice and = quite satisfactorily，口语的表现法。（17）ear-laps = ear-flaps 耳罩。（18）in it 帽子上。（19）not give a damn 后可看作略去了一个 to 宇，是 swearwords 的一种。意为“我一点也不在乎”，“管它个屁”。（20）around 附近。（21）anyway = anyhow 意为“左右”，“在任何情形下”（at any rate，in any case），“总之”。（22）sack = bed 作床解为美国俗语，hit the sack 就寝。（23）one of those guys 接前面的 with 说。美国语的 guy = fellow 并没有什么坏的意思，在此指小贩。（24）aisle 原为教堂中座位间的通道，美国用来指教室，戏院，火车上的通道（gangway）。（25）dumb stories = damn stories 低级的，或粗制滥造的小说。因避免用誓语的 damn 故以音近的字 dumb 来代替。（26）puking = vomiting 作呕的。（27）You know 是一句没有意思的口头禅。在对方多不知道时说的。（28）phoney = phony 美国俗语，意为 fraudulent（诈欺的，骗取的）。（29）lean-jawed guys 瘦尖下巴的人。（30）goddam = cursed，damned 一种咒语，并无特别的意思，只是为加强语气而说的。

【译例】

那时已经太晚不能打电话去叫出租汽车什么的了，所以我便一直走路走到火车站去。那并不太远，不过却冷得要命，飞雪使步行增加困难，我手上所提的旅行皮箱老是在我腿上碰来碰去。可是我对于那空气等等倒是相当喜欢的。唯一的困难就是我的鼻子冷得发痛，还有正在我上嘴唇下面的部分也痛，因为老史重重的在那里打了我一下。他掴了我牙齿外面的嘴唇，那里痛的很。我的耳朵却很温暖，因为我买的那顶帽子是有耳罩的，我把那两个耳罩戴上了，——至于我变成一个什么怪相我一点也不管。好在附近也没有一个人。所有的人都睡到床上去了。

通常我是喜欢坐火车的，尤其是在夜里，电灯照着，窗外一片漆黑，还有那小贩来到通路上卖着咖啡，三明治，还有杂志。我总是要买一个火腿三明治，和差不多四种杂志。如果我是在夜间坐车，我通常都能读完一篇这种杂志上的低级故事而不作呕的。你知道的，这样的故事，有一篇其中出现不少名叫大卫的尖下巴的骗子，还有一些名叫苓达或玛琪的女骗子，她们老是要去替那些混帐东西的大卫们点燃他们的烟斗。

（9）

Then Dora noticed that there was a Red Admiral butterfly walking on the dusty floor underneath the seat opposite. Every other thought left her head. Anxiously she watched the butterfly. It fluttered a little，and began to move towards the window，dangerously close to the passengers’ feet. Dora held her breath. She ought to do something. But what？She flushed with indecision and embarrassment. She could not lean forward in front of all those people and pick the butterfly up in her hand. They would think her silly. It was out of the question. The sunburnt man，evidently struck with the concentration of Dora’s gaze，bent down and fumbled with his boot laces. Both seemed securely tied. He shifted his feet，narrowly missing the butterfly which was now walking into the open on the carriage floor.

“Excuse me，” said Dora. She knelt down and gently scooped the creature into the palm of her hand，and covered it over with her other hand. she could feel it fluttering inside. Everyone stared. Dora blushed violently. Toby and his friend were looking at her in a friendly surprised way. Whatever should she do now？If she put the butterfly out of the window it would be sucked into the whirlwind of the train and killed. Yet she could not just go on holding it，it would look too idiotic. She bowed her head，pretending to examine her captive.

【解说】

这是从英国现代女作家 Iris Murdoch（1919—）的小说 The Bell 中选出的头上的一段。作者生于爱尔兰的 Dublin，牛津大学毕业。1948 年以后在牛津教哲学。1956 年和同事 John O. Bayley 结婚。她和 John Wain 及 Kingsley Amis 诸人，代表第二次世界大战后英国的新文学。作者有象征主义的作家之称。她作品的标题多是象征的，以暗示作品的象征性。当然，称她的作品为象征主义，决不是由于使用直接的象征，而实另有其内容上的真正的魅力在，以及深入她文体中诗人的素质，一言以蔽之，是风格上的象征性。她自己说：“我们要用既非形而上学的，也非全体的，更非宗教的感觉，来描写现实的超绝性（transcendence of reality），实有必要。”以哲学的主题使之在小说中结晶，这便是这位闺秀作家对她写作的主张了。Tradition and Dream 一书的著者 Walter Allen 论英国现代小说到 Murdoch 时，说她的文体是“把诗完全融化在散文中了”。

【注释】

（1）Red Admiral butterfly 红花蝴蝶。admiral 为各种彩色蝴蝶的俗称。（2）dusty floor 火车上肮脏的地板。（3）Every other thought left her. 把别的事全都忘了。所有的别种想法都从她的头脑中离开了。意即一心一意地想着那红花蝴蝶的事。（4）dangerously close to the passengers’feet 很危险地接近火车上来往旅客的脚，意即几乎要被人踏死。（5）held her breath 屏息；吓得不敢出气。（6）She ought to do something. 她应该有所作为。（7）But what？但要做点什么呢？（8）flushed with 因……而脸发红。（9）indecision and embarrassment 犹豫不决和局促不安。（10）lean forward 弯下身去；倾身向前。（11）in front of 在……的眼前。（12）They would think her silly. 别人会以为她太孩子气了。（13）out of the question = impossible 不可能。（14）The sunburnt man 面孔被太阳晒黑了的人。（15）evidently struck with 显然是由……而想起。（16）fumbled with his boot laces 去摸索他的皮鞋带子。（17）securely tied 系得很紧。（18）shifted 移动了。（19）narrowly missing the butterfly 几乎踏到了那蝴蝶。miss 相差。逃过。（20）walking into the open 走到空敞的地方来。（21）gently scooped the creature into the palm of her hand 温柔地把那蝴蝶引到她的手板心里来了。scoop 汲取；舀取。（22）could feel it fluttering inside 可以感觉得到蝴蝶在她手中拍翅。（23）in a friendly surprised way 以友善的惊异态度。（24）whatever should she do now？她现在到底要怎样办才好呢？（25）be sucked into the whirlwind of the train and killed 被火车开动时的旋风吸转进去而被压死。（26）it would look too idiotic 那看来太傻气了。（27）pretending to examine her captive 假装着来细看她手中的蝴蝶。captive 俘虏；捕获物。

【译例】

正在那时，朵娜注意到了，一双红花蝴蝶，在对面座位底下积满灰尘的地板上走动着。她一意地想着那只蝴蝶，把别的事情全都忘了。她很担心地守望着它。它稍稍拍了一下翅膀，开始向着对面的窗口移动，很危险地靠近来往旅客们的脚下了。朵娜紧张得屏息望着。她真该想个办法去救救它才好。但要她想什么办法呢？她为了自己的犹豫不决和局促不安，而感到脸红了。她不能够在所有的乘客面前，弯下身去，拾起那只蝴蝶，放到她手上来的呀。她要那样做的话，别人就会认为她太孩子气了。这绝对办不到。那个面孔被太阳晒黑了的人，显然是由朵娜的集中凝视而想起，遂弯下腰去摸摸他的皮鞋带子。两脚好像都系得紧紧的。他移动了他的脚，险些儿把那只蝴蝶给踏死了，因为它正走向车厢地板上的空敞的地方来。

“对不起。”朵娜说。她随即跪了下去，轻轻地把那只蝴蝶舀入她的手板心来，然后又用另外一只手把它盖上了。她可以感觉得到蝴蝶在里面鼓翼。人人都在望着她。朵娜羞得满脸绯红。托比和他的朋友，用一种友好的惊奇态度，也在望着她。现在她到底要怎样办呢？如果她把它丢出车窗外面去，它便要被火车的旋风转入而压死的。可是她却不能老是用两手来捧着它呀。那看来未免太傻气了。她低下头去，假装着来细看她的捕获物似的。

（10）

Annette felt always that she was travelling at a speed which was not her own. Going to or from her parents on one of her innumerable journeys，her train would stop sometimes between stations，revealing suddenly the silence of the mountains. Then Annette would look at the grass beside the railway and see its green detail as it swayed in the breeze. In the silence the grass would seem very close to her；and she would stun herself with the thought that the grass was really there，a few feet away，and that it was possible for her to step out，and to lie down in it，and let the train go on without her. Or else，travelling towards evening，as the lights were coming on in the houses，she would see the cyclist at the level-crossing，his face preoccupied and remote，and think that when the train had passed and the gates opened he would go on his way and by the time he reached his house she would be passing another frontier. But she never got off the train to lie down in the grass，nor did she ever leave it，high up in the mountains，at the small station that was not mentioned in the time-table，where the train unexpectedly halted and where the little hotel，whose name she could read so plainly，waited with its doors open. She could not break the spell and cross the barrier into what seemed to her at such moments to be her own world. She stayed on the train until it reached the terminus，and the chauffeur came to take her luggage to the car and Nicholas came bounding into the carriage，filling her with both sadness and relief at the ending of the journey. But the world of the chambermaid and the cyclist and the little strange hotel continued to exist，haunting and puzzling her with a dream of something slow and quiet from which she was forever shut away.

【解说】

这还是选的 Murdoch 的作品 The Flight from the Enchanter 中的一段，也和前一篇一样地是描写火车旅行的。不过是回想过去火车旅行的体验，富于哲学意味，且具象征的风格。

【注释】

（1）always 通常放在 felt 的前面，在本句中放在后面是修饰往后的子句的。又 always 和进行式动词连用时，表示动作的反复。（2）at a speed 用一种速度。at a speed of 40 miles an hour 用每小时四十英里的速度。（3）which was not her own 不是她自己的；非她自己控制的。（4）Going to or from her parents 到父母家里去或从父母家里出来。（5）on one of her innumerable journeys 在她数不清的旅途上，每次。（6）her train would stop sometimes between stations 她坐的火车有时总不免要在车站与车站的中间停下来。这个 would 是回想的，表过去的习惯。下同。（7）the silence of the mountains 有深山中那般寂静。（8）would look at the grass beside the railway 总要去看看铁路旁边的青草。（9）its green detail 绿的草尖（细小的部分）。（10）swayed 摇摆。（11）very close to = very near to 很靠近。（12）stun herself 使她自己昏晕；使目瞪口呆，如 We were stunned by the sudden news. 我们听到这突如其来的消息而为之目瞪口呆。stun = make senseless by a blow；confuse the mind of.（13）in it = in the grass.（14）let the train go on without her 她没有上车去，让火车开走。（15）towards evening 天将暮的时候。（16）the lights were coming on in the houses 万家灯火。（17）cyclist 坐脚踏车的人。（18）level-crossing 平面交叉，在此指铁路上的平交道。美国说 grade crossing.（19）preoccupied and remote 心不在焉的状态。（20）the gates 平交道因火车经过而关闭的栏栅。（21）he would go on his way 句中的 would 为普通的假定语气。下面的 she would be passing 的 would 用法同。（22）by the time 到那时。（23）another frontier 另外一个国境（因 Annette 现正在欧洲大陆旅行）。（24）got off 下（车）或下（马）。（25）nor did she ever leave it = and she never left it.（26）not mentioned in the time-table 火车时间表上没有载名的（小车站）。（27）halted 停下来。（28）whose name she could read so plainly 那小旅馆的名字很明显地她可以辨认得出来。（29）waited with its doors open 打开门在等待着她。（30）break the spell 破除符咒；突破魔力。spell 是作者喜欢用的字眼，尤其是在这部小说中，可说是表现主题的 key-word 呢。（31）cross the barrier 越过障碍。（32）at such moments 在这种时候。（33）to be her own world 完全属于自己的世界。（34）terminus 终站。在美国说 terminal.（35）the chauffeur 汽车夫。指私人雇用的司机。（36）luggage 行李。在美国说 baggage.（37）Nicholas 是 Annette 的哥哥。（38）came bounding into the carriage 跳进车厢里来。（39）filling her with 使她充满着……的感触。（40）both sadness and relief 既忧愁又安慰。（41）the chambermaid 在本节前所回想的人物。指儿时的女佣人。（42）haunting 时常浮现于脑海中。（43）puzzling her with 用……使她迷惑。（44）dream of something slow and quiet 悠然静止的梦。（45）from which she was forever shut away 她永远被关在梦的外面。

【译例】

安呐特觉得她老是以非自己控制的速率在旅行着。从父母跟前出来，或回到父母跟前去，在数不清的旅程上，每次她坐的火车，有时总不免要在车站与车站的中途停下来，突然显示出有深山中一般的寂静。那时，安呐特总要去看看铁路旁边的青草，看那些绿的草尖在微风中摇摆的样子。在这种寂静中，那青草会变得好像很靠近她似的；她会使自己昏眩地以为那青草果真在那儿，离开她不过两三英尺远罢了。她又以为她是可以走出去的，走去躺下在青草中，让火车没有她坐在上面自个儿开走。要不然的话，当万家灯火近黄昏的时候坐在火车上，她就会看到在平交道上那骑脚踏车的人，面孔上显得心不在焉的样子，她想到当火车一经过，平交道的栅门打开时，那人就会继续上路，等到他回到家里的时候，她乘的火车恐怕又在经过欧洲的另外一个国境了。但是她实际并没有下车去躺下在青草中，哪怕是当火车走向高高的山路，在火车时间表上都没有名字的小站上意外地停下来，那儿的小旅馆，它的名字都看得清清楚楚，正敞开大门在等待着她，而她也从来没有离开过火车一步。她不能破除符咒，越过障碍进入在那种时候好像是她自己的世界里去。她只能留在火车上，直到它开到终站为止。于是汽车夫来替她把行李搬上汽车去，而她的哥哥尼可拉一下就跳进车厢里来了。到了旅程的终点，她满怀忧愁而又安慰，心绪颇为不宁。但是包含那个儿时的女仆，那个骑脚踏车的人，以及那个奇怪的小旅舍等等的世界，老是历历在目，不能忘怀，时常浮现于脑海中，变成一个悠然静止的梦境，使她永远被关在它的外面，深感迷惑。

（11）

I am always drawn back to places where I have lived，the houses and their neighbourhoods. For instance，there is a brownstone in the East Seventies where，during the early years of the war，I had my first New York apartment. It was one room crowded with attic furniture，a sofa and fat chairs upholstered in that itchy，particular red velvet that one associates with hot days on a train. The walls were stucco，and a colour rather like tobacco-spit. Everywhere，in the bathroom too，there were prints of Roman ruins freckled brown with age. The single window looked out on a fire escape. Even so，my spirits heightened whenever I felt in my pocket the key to this apartment；with all its gloom，it still was a place of my own，the first，and my books were there，and jars of pencils to sharpen，everything I needed，so I felt，to become the writer I wanted to be.

It never occurred to me in those days to write about Holly Golightly，and probably it would not now except for a conversation I had with Joe Bell that set the whole memory of her in motion again.

Holly Golightly had been a tenant in the old brownstone；she’d occupied the apartment below mine. As for Joe Bell，he ran a bar around the corner on Lexington Avenue；he still does. Both Holly and I used to go there six，seven times a day，not for a drink，not always，but to make telephone calls：during the war a private telephone was hard to come by. Moreover，Joe Bell was good about taking messages，which in Holly’s case was no small favour，for she had a tremendous many.

【解说】

美国现代小说家 Truman Capote（1924—）生于 New Orleans，因父母离婚的关系，少年时代在孤独中度过。受了中学程度的教育，十九岁时写的一个短篇，获得了欧·亨利文学奖金。二十三岁时发表 Other Voices，Other Rooms（1948），一举成名，而登上了美国的文坛。现在不过四十多岁的人，已成为美国文学界的大作家了。他所描写的感伤性和幻想界的异常的心理，正是第二次世界大战后这一代的特征。作品多以南部农村为背景，人物则为这时代的少年少女。本文采自他在 1958 年发表的短篇集 Breakfast at Tiffany’s，主要是写 Manhattan 的妓女。

【注释】

（l）drawn back 怀想；回想。（2）places where I have lived 我曾住过的地方。（3）the houses and their neighbourhoods 那些房屋和邻近的地区。上说住过的地方是一般的说法，现在具体地说出房屋来，下面还要更明确地说纽约的公寓。（4）a brownstone 一幢用红褐色沙岩造的房子。brownstone 为用于建筑的红褐色沙岩。（5）the East Seventies 东七十街一带地区。纽约以第五街为中心，分东西地区。（6）the war 指第二次世界大战。（7）my first New York apartment 我第一次住的纽约的公寓。（8）attic furniture 简单的家具。attic = simple. 据 Random House Dictionary 说 Attic（adj. often lower case）意为 displaying simple elegance. 这里只概说家具，下面便具体地细说 sofa，chair 的件名。（9）fat chair 臃肿、宽大的椅子。（10）upholster 为椅子装上椅套。（11）itchy 令人发痒的。（12）associate with 联想到。（13）stucco（粉饰墙壁的）灰泥。a stucco house 粉刷灰泥或水泥的房子。The walls were stucco 墙上涂的灰泥。（14）tobacco-spit 烟草的汁。（15）Everywhere in the bathroom too 先说“所有的地方”是概括的，随即又细别说“浴室”，成为作者一贯的作风。（16）prints of Roman ruins 罗马废墟的版画。（17）freckled brown with age 因年深月久而生出褐色的斑点来了。（18）looked out on 开向。（19）fire escape 太平梯；避火梯。为发生火警时便于逃出屋子去的设备。（20）my spirits heightened 精神焕发。（21）gloom 阴郁；幽暗。（22）jars of pencils 插在铅笔筒中的铅笔。（23）It never occurred to me…to write about 我决没有想到要来写些关于……的事。（24）and probably it would not now 大概现在也不会想到要写的。（25）except for a conversation with 如果不是和……谈话。（26）that set the whole memory of her in motion again 那谈话使得我对她的记忆又重新活动起来。（27）tenant 房客。（28）ran a bar 经营一个酒吧。（29）Lexington Avenue 纽约第三街和 Park 街之间的一条大路。（30）still does 现在还经营着。（31）not for a drink 不是去喝酒。（32）not always（for a drink）并不一定（是去喝酒）。（33）make telephone calls 去打电话。（34）a private telephone was hard to come by 私人电话难于获得。come by 获得。例如 He seemed to have come by a large fund of knowledge. 他所获得的知识似乎很丰富。（35）taking messages 听取消息。（36）no small favour 大可感谢。（37）for she had a tremendous many 因为她的电话多得可怕。

【译例】

我老是要回想到我曾住过的地方，那些屋子和邻近一带。例如，在东七十街地区内的一幢用红褐色沙岩造的房子，在战争的初期，我第一次在纽约租下那公寓来住。那是一间房，里面塞满了简单的家具，一张沙发和一些臃肿的椅子，椅套是用令人发痒的特别红的天鹅绒做的，使人联想到暑天坐火车的味道。墙壁上是涂的灰泥，那颜色就像烟草的汁。屋子内到处，连浴室都不例外，挂着罗马废墟的版画，因年深月久都生出褐色的斑点来了。唯一的窗口是向一个太平梯子开着的。甚至如此，每次当我把手插进口袋去摸出我这公寓的开门钥匙时，我都感到非常高兴。哪怕是幽暗阴森，这总是我自己的家，第一，我的书都在这里，还有一筒子待削的铅笔，所以我觉得如我所指望的做一个作家，我所需要的一切，这儿都有了。

在那些日子里，我从来没有想到要写点关于哈利·歌莱特里的事，大概我现在也不会想到要写的，如果不是和乔·白尔一席话，使我重又勾起了对她的记忆的话。

哈利·歌莱特里也是那幢红褐色沙岩建造的公寓中的房客。她就住在我底下一层楼。至于谈到乔·白尔，他是在雷新顿大道的转角上开一家酒吧的，那店子现在还在。哈利和我两个人一天要到他那儿去上六七次，不是去喝酒，并不一定是去喝酒，而是去打电话。在战时私人是很难获得电话的呀。加之，乔·白尔很好，他不惮烦地替我们接电话，在哈利的场合十分可感，因为她的电话多得可怕呢。

（12）

That Monday in October 1943. A beautiful day with the buoyancy of a bird. To start，we had Manhattans at Joe Bell’s. Later，we wandered towards Fifth Avenue，where there was a parade. We ate lunch at the cafeteria in the park. Afterwards，avoiding the zoo（Holly said she couldn’t bear to see anything in a cage），we giggled，ran，sang along the paths towards the old wooden boathouse，now gone. Leaves floated on the lake；on the shore，a parkman was fanning a bonfire of them……

Passing a Woolworth’s，she gripped my arm：“Let’s steal something，” she said，pulling me into the store，where at once there seemed a pressure of eyes，as though we were already under suspicion. “Come on. Don’t be chicken.” She scouted a counter piled with paper pumpkins and Hallowe’en masks. The saleslady was occupied with a group of nuns who were trying on masks. Holly picked up a mask and slipped it over her face；she chose another and put it on mine；then she took my hand and we walked away. It was as simple as that. Outside，we ran a few blocks，I think to make it more dramatic；but also because，as I’d discovered，successful theft exhilarates. I wondered if she’d often stolen. “I used to，” she said，“I mean I had to. If I wanted anything. But I still do it every now and then，sort of to keep my hand in.”

【解说】

这篇还是从美国现代作家 Capote 的 Breakfast at Tiffany’s 中选的。前面的文章是描写小说中的主人公，在纽约住公寓的情形。尾上点出小说中的女主人公，但没有对她加以描写。本文专写这位想当作家的主人公，和女主人公同游的一幕，并绘出下流社会女子的行为，被迫非盗窃不可，而且为要养成熟练的手法，对此勾当表示不敢荒废。

【注释】

（1）with the buoyancy of a bird 具有小鸟的快乐（似的美丽的一日）。（2）To start 开始。（3）Manhattans 曼哈顿鸡尾酒（为威士忌和艾酒混合而成的）。（4）Fifth Avenue 纽约闹市中向南北伸展的大路。（5）parade 整队游行。（6）cafeteria 自助餐馆。（7）park 指纽约最大的 Central Park.（8）the zoo 中央公园中的小动物园。（9）couldn’t bear to see 看了受不了；不忍看。（10）giggled 傻笑，格格地笑。（11）boathouse 船库；艇屋（原为贮藏小舟之屋，现多具有供人小憩的设备）。（12）now gone 现在早已不存在了。（13）bonfire of them 焚烧落叶。（14）Woolworth’s 英美各地都开有的廉价商店。（15）pulling me into the store 把我拉到伍尔渥斯店里去。（16）pressure of eyes 人眼的压力，意即受人监视。（17）under suspicion 遭受嫌疑。（18）Don’t be chicken 不要怕。chicken = （Slang）cowardly.（19）scout 侦察。（20）paper pumpkins 纸做的南瓜。为万圣节前夕的装饰用。（21）Hallowe’en masks 万圣节（All Saints’Day）前夕（十月三十一日）假装用的面具。（22）saleslady 女店员。（23）who were trying on masks 她们正在把面具试戴着看。（24）It was as simple as that. 就是那样简单的。（25）outside，we ran a few blocks. 从店子走出街上来，我们一气地跑了几条街。block 四围有街围住的一连房屋。（26）to make it more dramatic 使之更有戏剧性。（27）because successful theft exhilarates 因为盗窃成功，特别使人兴奋。exhilarates 使高兴；使快活；使兴奋。在此用的现在时态，表示一般的真相。（28）wonder if 急想知道是不是。（29）used to 表过去的习惯。（30）had to 表过去的必要。（31）now and then 时常。（32）sort of 稍稍地；有几分（ = somewhat）.（33）to keep my hand in 在干着；保持熟练。如 He plays his violin every day to keep his hand in. 他每天拉小提琴以保持熟练。

【译例】

一九四三年十月的那个礼拜一，是小鸟飞舞，风光明媚的一天。一开头我们就在乔·白尔的酒吧里，喝了曼哈顿鸡尾酒。随后，我们在第五街一带闲荡着，那儿正有人在列队游行。我们走到中央公园里的自助餐厅去吃了一顿午餐。后来，为避免动物园（哈利说她不能忍受看到任何东西被关在笼子里），我们格格地笑，又跑又唱，沿着小路，走向那现已不存在的古老的木造船库去。落叶漂满一湖；在湖畔有一个园丁正在焚烧落叶……

走过一家伍尔渥斯的百货商店，她紧抓住我的手臂：“我们去偷点什么吧。”她说着，就把我拉进那商店去了。一走进去我马上就感觉到众目睽睽好像都在监视着我们，俨然我们已经受到嫌疑了。“来呀。不要这样胆怯。”她侦察了一个堆满了纸做的南瓜和万圣节前夕用的假面具的柜台。那女店员正在忙于招待一群在试戴着假面具的尼姑顾主。哈利选了一个面具自己戴在面上；她又另外选了一个给我戴上；于是她牵了我的手，我们便走出那商店来了。那就是这样简单的呀。出了店门一走上街，我们一气跑了几条街，我认为这样可以使之更带戏剧性呢。可是，如我后来所发现的，也是为着盗窃的成功而特别高兴吧。我问她是不是常偷东西。她回答说：“我以前是常偷的，是迫不得已，非偷不可呀。当我想要点什么的时候。但是，现在我还是时常要这样来一下，为保持熟练起见。”

（13）

It must be remembered that the oppressed and the oppressor are bound together within the same society；they accept the same criteria，they share the same beliefs，they both alike depend on the same reality. Within this cage it is romantic，more meaningless，to speak of a “new” society as the desire of the oppressed，for that shivering dependence on the props of reality which he shares with the Herrenvolk makes a truly “new” society impossible to conceive. What is meant by a new society is one in which inequalities will disappear，in which vengeance will be exacted；either there will be no oppressed at all，or the oppressed and the oppressor will change places. But，finally，as it seems to me，what the rejected desire is，is an elevation of status，acceptance within the present community. Thus，the African，exile，pagan，hurried off the auction block and into the fields，fell on his knees before that God in Whom he must now believe；who had made him，but not in his image. This tableau，this impossibility，is the heritage of the Negro in America：Wash me，cried the slave to his Maker，and I shall be whiter，whiter than snow！For black is the color of evil；only the robes of the saved are white……

【解说】

作者 James Baldwin（1924—）是美国现代黑人作家。本文采自他的散文集 Notes of a Native Son. 他的代表作为 Go Tell It on the Mountain 一部长篇小说。他生于纽约，曾往欧洲旅行，在法国住了一个时期，现住纽约有名的 Greenwich Village. 他写作的主题，无论是在小说或戏剧或评论或散文中都是一贯的为黑人请命。简单地说，就是“美国的黑人有何身份？”或“做美国的黑人有何意义？”他一直在探索美国黑人的真相，美国黑人的 specialness（特色）。他说美国的民主是只存在于白人社会的。这个社会和过去奴隶制社会并没有两样。要到真正的出现新的社会，奴隶才能翻身。现在美国黑人的祖先，为人奴役，不但失去自由，也忘记了故国的话语，失去了本来的姓名，肉体受到蹂躏，终至于丧失了自己，这便是美国黑人的历史。但有些自甘堕落的美国黑人，早丧失了他的人格，只希望他的皮肤能变白，头发能变直，这种人终将成为“看不见的人”，既不能加入白人的队伍，又自动脱离了黑人的行列，早已无处可以存在了。

【注释】

（1）the oppressed and the oppressor 受别人压迫的人和压迫别人的人。（2）criteria 判断的准绳。字尾的〔a〕表复数，单数为〔on〕（criterion），此为希腊字的变化，他例如 phenomenon，phenomena（现象）。（3）cage 牢笼，指现实的社会。（4）romantic 空想的。（5）more meaningless 没有比这更无意义的了。（6）that shivering dependence 战战兢兢来依附的。（7）the props of reality 叫做现实的那个支柱。（8）Herrenvolk（德文）支配民族（纳粹主义的德国民族自夸之辞）。Herren 为 Herr（ = lord，master）的复数形。volk = people.（9）inequalities 不平等。（10）vengeance 复仇；报仇。如向某人报仇则说 take vengeance upon a person.（11）exact 动词，意为坚持地要求；必要。（12）change places 调换地位。（13）the rejected desire 不被接受的要求；被拒绝的请求。（14）elevation of status，acceptance within the present community 身份地位的提高，被白人社会所接受。指现代美国黑人的公民权运动而言。（15）exile 被放逐的人；流亡者。（16）pagan 异教徒。非基督徒。（17）auction block 奴隶拍卖台。（18）fields 自由的原野。（19）that God 指基督教的上帝。（20）in Whom he must now believe 现在他必须信奉的，说黑人在他的故国非洲时，原是信的土族宗教，自从被卖为美国人的奴隶以后就被迫改信基督教。（21）who had made him but not in His image 上帝造人，但没有照着神的形像来造他。旧约全书《创世记》第一章第二十七节上说：“上帝就照着自己的形像造人，乃是照着他的形像造男造女。”（22）this tableau 这种光景。参考惊叹词的 Tableau！试想那种光景！（23）this impossibility 这种不可能的事。人世间办不到的事。（24）heritage 祖先遗留下来的事物。（25）his Maker 他的造物主，即上帝。（26）black is the color of evil. 黑是罪恶的颜色。（27）the robes of the saved 被救者的外衣。

【译例】

我们必须记住受压迫者和压迫者是在同一个社会中被束缚在一起的。他们接受同样的准绳；共有同样的信仰；他们彼此相像地都依赖同样的现实。在这种现实的樊笼中，作为受压迫者的要求，来说什么“新的”社会，简直是幻想，再没有什么比这更无意义的了。因为受压迫者和支配民族双方都要战战兢兢地依附在他们共有的现实支柱上，这就使人不可能去想像一个真正的“新的”社会了。新的社会的含义是其中不平等的现象完全消失，报仇的意义必须实现；要么是受压迫者已不存在，要么是受压迫者和压迫者调换地位。但是结局，我觉得那不能接受的要求，就是黑人身份地位的提高，被白人社会所接纳的那回事。这样一来，从奴隶拍卖台急急逃向自由的原野去的非洲人，流亡者，异教徒，就要跪下在他现在不得不信奉的上帝的前面去了。上帝造人，但没有照着他的形像来造他。试想这种光景，这种决办不到的事，正是在美国的黑人的祖先所遗留下来的奴性：洗净我吧，那奴隶对他的造物主叫出来，那样我就可以更白，比雪还要白呀！因为黑是罪恶的颜色；只有那些得救者的外衣才是白的……

（14）

I was naked，clean if sweating，just as I had come. Something seemed to hurry me through space. I heard that thunder again，on the remotest horizon，guns perhaps，something；above Java or palms on the Laccadives，in the profoundest sunlit sea. Something hurried me through memory，too，but I can’t pause to remember，for a guilt past memory or dreaming，much darker，impels me on. I pray but my prayer climbs up like a broken wisp of smoke：oh my Lord，I am dying，is all I know，and oh my father，oh my darling，longingly，lonesomely，I fly into your arms！Peyton you must be proper nice girls don’t. Peyton. Me？Myself all shattered，this lovely shell？Perhaps I shall rise at another time，though I lie down in darkness and have my light in ashes. I turn in the room，see them coming across the tiles，dimly prancing，fluffing up their wings. I think：my poor flightless birds，have you suffered without soaring on this earth？Come then and fly. And they move on past me through the darkening sands，awkward and gentle，rustling their feathers：come then and fly. And so it happens treading past to touch my boiling skin—one whisper of feathers is all—and so I see them go—oh my Christ！—one by one ascending my flightless birds through the suffocating night，toward paradise. I am dying. Bunny，dying.

【解说】

本文作者 William Styron（1925—）为美国小说家，以巧于遣词用字著称，生于美国 Virginia 州的 Newport News，出身 Duke 大学，又在 New York’s New School 学习文艺写作，受教于 H. Hyan 教授。1951 年发表 Lie Down in Darkness 一部小说，立刻引起文坛的注意。随又在 1953 年发表 The Long March，1960 年发表 Set This House on Fire，1967 年发表 The Confessions of Nat Turner，作品不多，但已足够表现作者的文才了。他的文笔，有时幽静，有时热情，有时素朴，颇多变化。总说起来，他不是一个惜墨如金的作家，他有丰富的想像力，笔下驱遣云烟，词汇多如潮涌。他把文字所有的象征的及比喻的机能，发挥到最高度，且能将字与字，句与句，人物与人物，形成微妙的对比，以浮雕出人心上的种种皱纹。他使用的词句虽很明朗，但决无地域的及时代的限制；他放眼乾坤，以整个的人生为对象，写出世间的混乱，不安，绝望，爱憎，伪善，复仇，背信，不平，犯罪，同情，怜悯种种现象。他的作风在表现上学 T. Wolfe，在主题上学 W. Faulkner，在手法上学 J. Joyce. 有人说艺术家是使得语言的绚烂幻影背后闪耀的真实，浮现出来的魔术师。本文作者就够得上称为这样的“语言的魔术师”了。他也算是当代一流的 storyteller，他的成功的作品，匠心独运，有如织锦，可算是高度的艺术品。本文采自 Lie Down in Darkness 第七部。他这部处女作《躺下在黑暗中》，在出版的第二年便获得美国艺术院的奖金。故事描述美国南部一个富人家的罪恶与堕落，以及衰败的悲剧。那个不能爱他妻子的丈夫米尔顿，不被丈夫所爱的孤独而严格的妻子海伦，生来残废但受母亲溺爱的白痴。长女莫蒂，恋父情结（Electra complex）的次女蓓顿，及其他米尔顿的情妇朵利，清教的神父凯亚里，和黑人的一家，这许多人物之间的爱与恨，同情与背信，报仇与死亡等等，都以次女蓓顿为中心而展开来。这部奇异的故事，展开的实际时间，不过五六小时的当中所发生的事情，作者用登场人物的回想方式，各人各样的意识流，把这一富人家三十多年的过去，全都表现出来了。

现在选用的这一段是最后的部分，即蓓顿从家庭中逃出来，大学也退学了，经过了许多的爱人之后，终于和一个犹太裔的无名画家哈利结了婚，得到了一个爱的家庭，可是她因 Electra Complex 的关系，仍然搞不好，她只要被爱，却不知什么是爱。丈夫无能为力，只好和她分居。蓓顿再三再四去恳求他回家，最后的希望落空之后，她已经酒精中毒，精神分裂，在神经失常之中，她从纽约的一座摩天楼的顶上跳下自杀了。现在采用的这一段，便是她自杀前的心理状态，实在描写得很巧妙，值得我们玩味。

【注释】

（1）clean if sweating 即令满身的汗，也是很干净的。（2）had come = had come into the world = had been born. 出世。（3）guns perhaps，也许不是雷声，而是炮声。（4）Java 爪哇。（5）the Laccadives 拉卡代夫群岛。此为阿拉伯海中的群岛名，位于印度西南海岸。（6）the profoundest sunlit sea 阳光灿烂的海域。（7）I can’t pause to remember 我不能停下来从容回想。（8）a guilt 犯罪的意识。指蓓顿过去生活中种种行为而产生的心理状态，例如因对姊姊未细心照顾以致发生事故而使她送命，及对丈夫背信等等。（9）past memory or dreaming 越过记忆或梦想。（10）much darker 修饰前面 a guilt 的。（11）impels me on 将我向前推进。（12）a wisp of smoke 一缕烟。（13）oh my Lord 啊，主啊。呀，我的天呀。（14）oh my father，oh my darling. 啊，我的父亲，啊，我的爱人。因为蓓顿在家时曾无意识地对她父亲怀着异性的思慕。其说出自弗洛依德的精神分析学。儿子对母亲，便称 Oedipus complex.（15）Peyton you must be proper nice girls don’t. Peyton. “蓓顿，你一定要学得高尚些，上等女孩子不是这样的，蓓顿。”蓓顿的母亲看见她的次女行为有欠检点，常是这样告诫她。蓓顿在酒精中毒以后，累累地和丈夫以外的男子乱来，现在心中不免发生犯罪的意识。（16）Me？Myself all shattered，this lovely shell？是我吗？是完全被打得粉碎的这个我，这个可爱的贝壳？前后两句是同格的比喻。想到天真的儿童时代在海滨拾贝壳，童心与贝壳形成双重的影像，再拿来和现在的残花败柳，破碎之身对比。（17）Perhaps I shall rise at another time，though I lie down in darkness and have my light in ashes. 虽则我现在躺下在黑暗中，而到骨灰中去求我的光明，也许将来有一天我会苏醒过来的。作者在书前的题词（epigraph）中曾用了这样的词句。Sir Thomas Browne（1605—1682）曾著有《壶葬论》（Urne-buriall），对生死问题有所阐述，立论警策，作者即从该书引用了上述的文句，又拿来用作小说的题名。《壶葬论》中说到生死轮回的思想，darkness 和 light 即象征死生。（18）them 指小鸟。（19）coming across the tiles 从瓦上过来。（20）prancing 跳跃着。（21）fluffing up their wings 使翼翅松散。（22）my poor flightless birds 我可怜的不能飞的小鸟啊。蓓顿自喻的话，表示她不能自由地飞翔，加上烂饮与滥交的关系，而有犯罪之感，以及憧憬自由而不可得的焦躁之感，那种精神错乱的不安状态，用小鸟拍翅膀来形容，颇为巧妙传神。（23）darkening sands 逐渐变得黑暗了的沙滩。（24）treading past 走过。（25）my boiling skin 我那沸腾炽热的皮肤。（26）one whisper of feathers 羽毛一度作沙沙声。（27）suffocating night 闷热的夜晚。（28）Bunny 原来是对兔子或松鼠的爱称，在此为蓓顿叫她父亲时的爱称。

【译例】

我全身赤裸，虽淌着汗，但很清洁，就像我刚生下来的时候一样。好像有什么东西，把我向太空推去。我再度听到遥远的地平线上的雷声，也许是炮声，或是别的什么声音。那是在阳光灿烂的海域中的爪哇上空呢，还是在拉卡代夫群岛的棕榈树的上空，不得而知。又有什么东西驱赶着我向记忆中去，但是我不能从容地来回想，因为超过记忆或梦想，一种更黑暗的犯罪意识驱使着我向前迈进。我祷告，但我的祷词，像一缕破碎的轻烟向天上升去：“啊，主呵，我要死了”，这便是我所知道的一切。还有“啊，我的父亲；啊，我的爱人”，满怀渴望，孑然一身，我要飞去投入你的怀抱！“蓓顿，你一定要检点些，好女孩子都不是这样的。蓓顿。”是我吗？是损毁不堪的这个我，这个可爱的贝壳？虽则我躺下在黑暗中，要到骨灰中去求取我的光明，也许有朝一日我会苏醒过来的。我在房间里回头一看，便看见一些小鸟松开着翅膀，糊里糊涂地在跳跃着，跳过花砖来了。我想：我可怜的不能飞的小鸟啊，你们不能高飞入云，在这地上很受了苦吧？那么，来起飞呀。于是小鸟们经过我的身边，羽毛沙沙作响，笨拙而又温柔地向前移动：来起飞呀。就是这样，小鸟们偶尔想要接触到我的滚烫的皮肤，而贴近我走将过来——羽毛一度发出小声，如是而已——随即我看见它们飞走——啊，我的救主！——一只一只地我那些不能飞的小鸟，突破窒息的夜晚，向天国飞升而去。我要死了，朋宜，就要死了。

（15）

I seemed to be walking alone at the edge of a swamp at nightfall，the light around me glimmering，crepuscular，touched with the greenish hue presaging the onslaught of a summer storm. The air was windless，still，but high in the heavens beyond the swamp thunder grumbled and heaved，and heat lightning at somber intervals blossomed against the sky. Filled with panic，I seemed to be searching for my Bible，which strangely，unaccountably I had left there，somewhere in the depths and murk of the swamp；in fear and despair I pressed my search into the oncoming night，pushing now deeper and deeper into the gloomy marshland，haunted by the ominous，stormy light and by a far-off pandemonium of thunder. Try desperately as I might，I could not find my Bible. Suddenly another sound came to my ears，this time the frightened outcry of voices. They were the voices of boys，hoarse and half grown and seized with terror，and now instantly I saw them：half a dozen black boys trapped neck-deep in a bog of quicksand，crying aloud for rescue as their arms waved frantically in the dim light and as they sank deeper and deeper into the mire. I seemed to stand helpless at the edge of the bog，unable to move or to speak，and while I stood there a voice echoed out of the sky，itself partaking of that remote sound of thunder.

【解说】

本文采自美国作家 William Styron 在 1967 年发表的 The Confessions of Nat Turner 一书的 Judging Day 第一部。《挪特·颓累的忏悔》获得 1968 年度的普立策奖（Pulitzer Prize）。故事说到 1831 年 8 月某日，在维吉尼亚州的东南部地方，突然发生了美国黑奴历史上唯一的，持续很久，颇有效果的黑人暴动。为首的挪特·颓累，是这反叛的计划人兼指导者。他是为黑人所尊敬的传教师，通文墨的黑奴，受到神的指示，要把当地的白人全都杀死，可说是一个对宗教着了魔的人。于是他便带着好几十个黑人暴动起来，用斧头和枪把那地方的农场主人及其家族等近六十人完全残杀了。几天之后暴动被镇压下来，挪特被捕。作者以挪特在狱中向律师的自白为题材，再加上丰富的想像力，而创造出一篇优美的小说来了。

现在这个断片是指挪特被带入法庭，在开庭的几分钟之间，叙述他所经历的白日梦的一段。沼泽地的暮色，和黑人们的悲惨，以及挪特的心境等等，作者以巧妙而朴素的文笔，象征地描绘出来，实不愧为“语言的魔术师”。

【注释】

（l）swamp 沼泽。浸有水的低湿地带，与后面出现的 marsh 同义，至于最后说的 bog 也是沼池，但无水。（2）glimmering 发微光的，例如 lights glimmering in the distance 远处微弱的灯光。（3）crepuscular 晨光熹微的，黄昏的。crepuscular birds or insects 在晨暮之际活动的鸟或昆虫。a crepuscular period 初期，蒙昧未开的时期。（4）touched with = being touched with 染得有（那种色彩）。（5）the greenish hue 略带青色。（6）presage 预示，前兆。Some people think that a circle around the moon presages a storm. 有些人以为月晕预示有暴风雨。（7）onslaught 猛攻。（8）heavens = sky. 散文中通例用复数，如 the starry heavens.（星空），大约是因为古代的天文学认为天有七重，上帝和天使们住在最上一重。（9）grumbled and heaved 隆隆作响，有起有伏。（10）at somber intervals 此为作者所特有的修辞法。我们应把 at intervals（ = now and then 时时）和 somber（阴沉的，幽暗的）分开来看。（11）blossomed 形容闪电有如开花。（12）Filled with panic = Being filled with panic 凡是过去分词开头的句子，都可以加上 being 来解释。（13）I seemed to be……of the swamp. 描写挪特在暴动失败后一时找不到神的焦躁状态，这也是象征的表现法。（14）depths and murk 在黑暗的深处。（15）press = hasten，urge on 加速，赶快。（16）oncoming 即将来临的。（17）haunted by 萦绕于怀；为……所困扰。A wrongdoer is constantly haunted by the fear of discovery. 作恶者心中经常害怕被人发觉。I am haunted by regrets. 我悔恨无已。（18）pandemonium = perfect confusion 骚乱，喧嚣。大混乱的场所。原出 Milton 著 Paradise Lost，指群鬼的宫殿。（19）Try desperately as I might. 普通“形容词＋as” = though（虽则），但此句为“动词＋as”，用法完全不同，应译作“尽管”，上句可译为“尽管我拼命去找，（我也找不到我的《圣经》）”。（20）outcry of voice 人声的叫喊。（21）half grown 还没有变成大人的声音，还带得有儿童的声音。（22）seized with terror 为恐怖所侵袭，大为恐怖。（23）trapped neck-deep in a bog of quicksand 陷于沼地的流沙中，深入齐颈。（24）mire 泥淖，泥泞。（25）itself partaking of 和那声音相伴。itself 是接前面的 a voice 说的。

【译例】

我好像是在暮色中独自一人在沼泽岸边走着似的。那包围着我的薄暮的微光，染得有带青的颜色，预示着一个夏天的暴风雨就要袭来。微风不动，静寂寂的，但在沼泽那边高高的天上，却雷声隆隆，由小而大，而闪电时时在阴沉的天上开出花来。我充满着恐怖，好像是在寻找我的《圣经》似的，很奇怪而无法说明地，我把《圣经》放在沼泽的黑暗深渊中的什么地方忘记了。在恐惧和绝望中，我加快在即将来临的夜色中寻找，受着那恶兆的暴风雨的电光，和辽远的吵闹的雷声所困扰，我现在向着阴郁的沼泽地越来越深入地推进了。尽管我拼命地寻找，但怎也找不到我的《圣经》。突然间另外一个声音来到我的耳中，这次却是人们恐慌的叫喊声。那原是一群男孩子的声音，嘶嗄而未成年的声音，为恐怖所袭时的声音。现在一瞬间，我看明白他们了：那原是五六个黑孩子陷在沼地的流沙中，深及颈部，当初他们越来越深地沉下到那泥淖中去时，他们在幽暗的夜色中，疯狂地舞动手臂，高声呼喊救命。我好像是站在那沼地的岸边一点办法也没有的样子，既不能移动，也不能说话，而当我站在那里的时候，突然从天上传来一个声音，听去却和远处的雷声混在一起了。

（16）

Scurridge reached for the morning newspaper and turned to the sports page. “I fancy a bit o’bacon an’egg，” he said，and sat down beside the fire and placed his pointed elbows in the centres of the two threadbare patches on the arms of his chair.

His wife threw a surly glance at the upraised newspaper. “There is no eggs，” she said，and Scurridge’s pale，watery blue eyes fixed on her for the first time as he lowered the paper.

“What y’mean‘there is no eggs’？”

“I mean what I say；I didn’t get any.” She added with sullen defiance. “I couldn’t afford’em this week. They’re five-an’-six a dozen. Something’s got to go—I can’t buy all I should as it is.”

Scurridge smacked his lips peevishly. “God！Oh！God. Are we at it again？It’s one bloody thing after the other. I don’t know what you do with your brass.”

“I spend it on keeping you，” she sald. “God knows I get precious little out of it. Always a good table，you must have. Never anything short. Anybody’ud think you’d never heard of the cost of living. I’ve told you time an’again’at it isn’t enough，but it makes no difference.”

【解说】

本文作者是英国劳动阶级出身的作家 Stan Barstow（1928—）. 这是他的作品 Gamblers Never Win 当中的一节。描写一个沉溺于赌博中的矿坑夫，在早餐时和老婆口角的情景。用活生生的现代英语表出，平易可读。下层阶级的口吻，连他们说话的声音，都被刻画出来。

【注释】

（1）reach for 伸手去取。（2）turn 翻动，转向，如 The car turned to the left.（汽车向左转去了）。在自动词 turn 后接介词 to 时，可作“查阅”解，如 turn to a dictionary for guidance（参考类书）。又可作“开始工作”解，如 He turned to stamp-collecting again.（他又开始集邮了）。此外还可以作“求助于”解，如 I have no one but you to turn to.（我可以求助的人只有你呀）。如果把 to 作副词用时，则可说 It’s time to turn to.（是开始工作的时候了）。（3）fancy = would like to have（想吃）。这个动词的 fancy，原有 take a fancy to（爱好）的意思，如对病人等说 Don’t you fancy anything？（你想吃点什么吗？）（4）of，and 等字说得很轻的时候，便成为 o’和 an’了，即是不把 f 和 d 的音说出来。（5）bacon and eggs 英国人一般做早餐吃的。（6）the fire 炉火（无论贫富英国家庭终年都生火）。（7）his pointed elbows 他的尖肘（形容工人的消瘦）。（8）the two threadbare patches 椅子扶手因用久破烂而加上的补丁（形容主人的穷相）。（9）a surly glance 不高兴的一瞥。（10）the upraised newspaper 双手拿起在看的报纸。（丈夫的面孔被报纸遮住了，她只好对那报纸投以不高兴的一瞥。）（11）There is no eggs. 没有鸡蛋了。（在口语中不管主语是单数或复数，一概说 there is.）（12）pale，watery blue eyes 无神的浅蓝色的眼睛。pale = feeble 缺乏健康的气色。watery 不是修饰 eyes 的（watery eyes 泪汪汪的眼睛），而是修饰 blue 的。watery blue 浅蓝色。（13）for the first time 第一次（说那赌徒的丈夫那天起身以后还是第一次来凝视他的老婆）。（14）What y’mean = What do you mean？你是什么意思？（15）I mean what I say. 就是我说的意思。不是和你开玩笑的，我是认真说的。mean 意谓，如 What do you mean by saying that？你那样说是什么意思？（16）get 买。（17）with sullen defiance 带着愠怒的反抗。（18）They’re five-an’-six a dozen. 鸡蛋卖到五先令六便士一打。five-and-six = five shillings and six pence 口语都不说出先令和便士的字眼来。（19）Something’s got to go. = something has to go. 有些事情一定得废止才好。句中的 go 有 be abolished（废止）之意，例如 Drink must go.（酒必须废止）。口语常以 have got to 代 have to 用。（20）as it is 照现在这个样子。（21）smack one’s lips 咂唇作响。（22）peevishly 气恼地。（23）Are we at it again？难道我们又要斗嘴了吗？at it 进行某事和进行口角等。（24）bloody 他妈的。在英国卑语中用的颇多，只是表示强烈的感情无特殊意义。如强调否定时说的 not a bloody one（连一个都没有）。（25）brass 口语中指 money 说的。（26）God knows I get precious little out of it. 天晓得我为自己用的极少。句中 I 用斜体是加重语气说的。God knows 后接有子句时，表发誓的意思，即“皇天在上，我绝对没有为自己花掉多少钱”。如后面不接 that，而接 why，where，when，what 等时，God knows 意为 Nobody knows. 又口语中将 precious 作副词用，precious little = very little 极少。他例如 It is precious cold.（冷极了。）（27）a good table 餐食丰盛。（28）Never anything short. 从未缺少一点什么。（不用主语和动词，简明有力。）（29）’ud = would.（30）you’d = you had.（31）the cost of living 生活费。（32）time and again 再三再四。（33）’at = that.（34）it makes no difference 没有什么不同，毫无效果。

【译例】

史卡力支伸手去拿了早报，翻开运动栏来看。“我想吃点腊肉鸡蛋。”他说着在火炉旁边坐下来，把他的两只尖肘搁在他坐椅扶手上那两块破补丁的中央。

他的老婆对那举起的报纸投以不高兴的一瞥。“没有鸡蛋了。”她说，而史卡力支放下报纸，把他那无神的浅蓝眼睛第一次瞪着他老婆望了。

“你说没有鸡蛋了是什么意思？”

“就是我说的意思，我一个蛋也没有买呀。”她带着愠怒的反抗补充着说了。“这个礼拜我买不起鸡蛋。一打涨到五个六了。有些事情一定得停止才好。——照现在这个样子，我想要买的东西都不能买呀。”

史卡力支气恼地咂唇作响。“天啦！啊！天。难道我们又要斗嘴了吗？一个问题刚解决，第二个又来了。我不晓得你的钱，是怎样用的。”

“我用来维持你的生活呀！”她说。“天老爷明白，我为自己用的极少。你一定要吃得好，不能短缺一点什么。人家以为你从来不知道生活费要多少呀。我再三告诉过你说这点子钱是不够的，但你老是把它当作耳边风。”

习题解答

第一编 汉译英与英文句型

壹 由要素来分的造句

习题 1

1. A sound thought dwells in a sound personality.

2. We do not live in order to eat，but we eat in order to live.

3. Stay if the work fits well，or you go away.

4. Don’t falter when you speak.

5. The school year in China begins on the 1st of August and ends on the 31st of July.

6. My brother started from here the day before yesterday，and will arrive at London towards（or about）the middle of next month.

7. He may return very soon，but I cannot say for certain.

8. The cat can see in the dark.

9. The knife cuts well.

10. The work does not pay.

11. These hens have begun to lay.

12. My friend has stood by me.

13. The sun appears to move round the earth.

14. I could not see distinctly owing to the darkness.

15. Having walked about an hour，we arrived at the place.

16. When industry comes in at the window，poverty goes out of the window.

17. I do not sleep soundly，eat heartily，and my heart leaps all the time.

18. He descends from the lofty tree and goes into the dark valley.

19. The snow melts away in spring.

20. I could not have lived till today without my grandmother，and she would not survive in her later days without me. Both my grandmother and I rely on each other so as to exist in this world.

习题 2

1. We must be very careful in picking our company. One must be very careful in the choice of one’s friends.

2. The Americans are fond of activity and rich in the spirit of independence. The American people are a nation that likes an active life and is full of the spirit of independence.

3. The examination questions of that university are very difficult，and it is doubtful whether I shall succeed in the entrance examination. As the examination questions of that university are very difficult，I doubt if（it is uncertain that）I shall pass the entrance examination（or not）.

4. She felt a little awkward and was quite at a loss to know what to do.

5. Good medicine tastes bitter（to the mouth），but is good for a disease.

6. He stands firm in his purpose.

7. He has kept attentive through the lecture.

8. The rule does not always hold good.

9. True worth often goes unrecognized.

10. It remains to be proved.

11. He continued sullen，without speaking a word.

12. She sat thoughtful for a few minutes.

13. He appears to be aware of the fact.

14. After that they rested content.

15. The Chinese attitude is a reaction to the behaviour of the West.

16. The regions lying at the furthest extremes of the world remained entirely or virtually unknown to each other for centuries.

17. The account of his journey is an extraordinarily interesting document.

18. Few of the accounts of other travelers are as lively and informative as Marco Polo’s.

19. A few words of explanation appear necessary.

20. No student who keeps abreast of the times can afford to ignore the publications of the day.

习题 3

1. Did you attend the welcome meeting yesterday？

2. Mr. Su has successfully entered Oxford University.

3. Mr. Wang has passed the Civil Service Examination with honours.

4. If we must fight，we must fight it out.

5. They have stripped the Chinese of all their wealth in Indonesia.

6. He has provided me with everything I need.

7. He seized me by the hand and would not let me go.

8. She affected to talk to my friend，but she was really speaking at me.

9. Diligence makes up the deficiency in ability.

10. I insist that you shall come.

11. He did not work hard，and played away another year at school.

12. When I make a journey，I always take third class.

13. The audience shouted applause at the end of his speech.

14. He breathed his last at 11：

10 p. m.

15. Can you swim it across the Yangtze River as that old man did？

16. I gave the poor little boy some money to buy food with.

17. She wrote me a long letter about her future.

18. We discussed the problem far into the night.

19. He admitted to her that she was right.

20. She suggested to us that we should do the whole thing over again.

习题 4

1. Heaven has given man only the gift of speech.

2. He offered her his seat.

3. His father left him a large fortune.

4. I paid him the money.

5. I will read you the letter.

6. Will you sing me a Chinese song？

7. I envy you your good fortune.

8. I paid him a high compliment.

9. I wish you joy of your success.

10. I am sorry to give you so much trouble.

11. They grudged me even my pittance.

12. I hope you will not refuse me the favour.

13. Passengers are allowed 30 lbs of luggage.

14. An old Chinese proverb says that too much learning does not become a woman.

15. They have no sense of the duty which they owe their country.

16. She would be glad to die，but for the love she bears her child.

17. I do not envy the rich their wealth which causes them so much anxiety.

18. To do him justice，he has always been a good husband and a good father.

19. The rascal has at last been caught，after long giving the police the slip.

20. I beg you will do me the honour of accepting the trifling present.

习题 5

1. The people of the U. S. A. would never elect a colored man president.

2. They elected Mr. Wang a councilman.

3. Outdoor exercise makes us strong in mind and body.

4. People think him honest，but he is really an impostor.

5. I make it a rule to take an hour’s walk after supper.

6. He left the room unobserved.

7. I had my license renewed for another three years.

8. We found him lying on the pavement.

9. I caught them stealing fruit from my garden.

10. We should keep our bodies and clothes clean not to be attacked by illness.

11. I call that answer impertinent.

12. I consider what he said irrelevant.

13. I found it difficult to solve that problem.

14. I deemed it prudent to keep the thing a secret.

15. Hsün Shuan esteemed it an honour to be the driver of Li Ying.

16. I look upon him as my benefactor.

17. He represents the state of the country as deplorable.

18. They describe her as a fairylike beautiful woman.

19. His knowledge of English leaves nothing to be desired.

20. Learning has always been held in high esteem in our country.

贰 由构造来分的造句

习题 6

1. The sun having set，we went home.

2. In haste，there is error.

3. I got acquainted with him two years ago.

4. Return him my best thanks for the present.

5. To return to the subject，they got married the very day.

6. Judging from appearance you will lose the man of Tsu Yu.

7. The love of money is the root of all evil.

8. He came to see me for the purpose of borrowing some money from me.

9. The allied countries are suspicious of one another.

10. Fame has nothing to do with money.

11. To the joy of his mother，he won a lot of money.

12. Having written a letter，I went out for a walk.

13. He is content with very little.

14. To get up early for three mornings is equal to one day of time.

15. Diseases enter by the mouth.

16. An inch of gold will not buy an inch of time.

17. We know men’s faces，not their minds.

18. There is many a good man to be found under a shabby hat.

19. Intelligence consists in recognizing opportunity.

20. Among men who is faultless？

习题 7

1. It is getting dark and we are still a long way off our destination.

2. Give me liberty or give me death.

3. An intelligent man studies for knowledge，but a foolish man just for a diploma.

4. It is going to rain，for the barometer is falling.

5. Some families are making merry while others are suffering from poverty.

6. He comes to help me when he has plenty to do at home.

7. How can I convince him when he will not listen？

8. He kept on talking when he knew it annoyed us.

9. He paid me only two thousand dollars when he owed me five thousand.

10. Please be quiet while I am talking to you.

11. He has nothing to spend his money on，while I have no money to spend.

12. He was the only candidate；therefore，he was elected.

13. He is a most popular candidate；consequently，he will be elected.

14. I hate，whereas you merely dislike，him.

15. A man does not live a hundred years，yet he worries enough for a thousand.

16. I must give him his share，for I have promised to go halves.

17. The train started before I had got to the station.

18. He talked about peace but he brought us war.

19. I accepted his well-meant advice，and now I do not feel futile in my new life.

20. Such work may do with others，but it won’t do with me.

习题 8

1. We all know that time is money.

2. I do not know whether it is true or not.

3. This is the dog that barked at me wildly yesterday.

4. I wonder if he is at home at this time of day.

5. I have not seen him since he left here last year.

6. He speaks as if he understood everything.

7. The harder you work，the sooner you will improve.

8. Since you say so，I must believe it.

9. We study in order that we may gain knowledge.

10. I open the window that I may let the moon come in.

11. He is so cunning that nobody wants to make friends with him.

12. When the leopard dies，he leaves his skin；a man，his reputation.

13. I will undertake the work，if it pays.

14. None are so deaf as those who will not listen.

15. If you are a gentleman，you must show yourself as such.

16. Strange as it may sound，I am too rich to afford it.

17. I do not envy him his wealth，which causes him so much anxiety.

18. Grief has made him what he is.

19. Time passes quickly when we are engaged in the pursuit of pleasure.

20. There can be no friendship where mutual respect is wanting.

叁 由内容来分的造句

习题 9

1. There is no art that can make a fool wise.

2. She writes home once a week.

3. He spent all his money on books（ = in buying books）.

4. The rich have their troubles as well as the poor.

5. There has been a lot of rain this week.

6. Now was the time for thought.

7. Here stood her sewing machine.

8. Behind him came a long stream of horse and foot.

9. Immediately the button is pressed，the mine explodes.

10. Typical is the regiment at the pigeon loft of the Army Signal Corps at Fort Monmouth.

11. Fame and wealth people like best.

12. Nothing but a little water was in the cup.

13. Seldom has there been more fuss.

14. Should he meet me，he would know me at once.

15. Hardly had he began to speak when the audience interrupted him.

16. Here we differ about this matter.

17. They had to take care of their sick and wounded.

18. He will not succeed，try he（ = though he try）never so hard.

19. Happy is the man who is contented with his lot.

20. Thus spoke the orator.

习题 10

1. What does it matter？

2. Where did you buy that stick of yours？

3. Aren’t you proud of your son？

4. What is he？（ = What is his occupation？）

5. What（ = How much）did this book cost you？

6. Which man are you going to employ？

7. Is there anything you want which I can get for you？

8. Who is there but commits（ = that does not commit）errors？（ = Who is infallible？）

9. Can any ladies swim well？

10. Has anything happened？

11. Will you have some beer？（ = Please have some beer.）

12. Have you not some English books？（ = You have some English books，haven’t you？）

13. Can I have some wine？（ = Please give me some wine.）

14. Who do you say Sally is going to be married to？（Thomas Hardy）

15. Do you know what sort of thing a castle in the air is？

16. What sort of speech shall I make tomorrow？

17. Is there a bus close by？

18. What time do you expect her back？

19. He cannot understand English while living in England for ten years？

20. Shall I get there in time if I take the 3∶30 p. m. train？

习题 11

1. Let us not do what is dishonest.

2. Let me not hear of it any more.

3. Be diligent！

4. Don’t be idle！

5. Don’t go away so soon.

6. Bring a chair for your uncle to sit on.

7. You let that cat alone!

8. Now，Franz，you read.

9. Do come！

10. Take it easy.

11. Do not neglect your lessons.

12. Do not rely much on the help of others.

13. Tell him it’s urgent.

14. Don’t talk nonsense.

15. Please come to order.

16. Don’t worry.

17. Give up drinking，and your health will improve.

18. Never speak ill of others.

19. Do not read for mere pleasure as many people do.

20. Wait a moment please. I’ll come at once.

习题 12

1. How spotless the snow is!

2. What a glorious sunset this is!

3. What a pretty flower this is!

4. How late you are！

5. What a noise the engine makes！

6. What a time we have had！

7. What an ass he is!

8. What a strange thing is our brain!

9. What an impudent rascal（he is）！

10. May he have good luck！

11. What a vast number of pilgrims go to Jerusalem every year！

12. If I could only go to the concert！

13. How he snores！

14. How eloquent（he is）！

15. How happy I am to meet you here！

16. May she be happy after getting married！

17. Good-bye，my friends！

18. Hurrah！she’s come.

19. Alas！I am ruined！

20. May those who love each other get married!

第二 编英文惯用法及其翻译

习题 1

1. 由正义而获得一个名位是光荣的，不过宁取正义而牺牲名位，则更加光荣。

2. 关于学习语言，我有我自己的想法。我认为只要学到足够我们自由阅读，自由谈论日常生活的情形就行了，研求再多的语言知识，简直是时间的浪费。

3. 纸牌在此可能很帮了他一点忙是很难说的。

习题 2

1. 要一个病人不成为凶恶的人是非常困难的。

2. 大家认为要妇女的见解高到可以对任何要求行动的事，采取广大自由的观点，是很不容易的。

3. 他真是愚笨，让自己去做那不可能的事。

4. 一个男子老是单身是不好的。

5. 不得他的允许就骑走他的脚踏车，原是你不对。

6. 不接受他们的提议，他是聪明的。

习题 3

1. 空谈我们的伟大是没有用的，除非我们致力使它伟大。

2. 他们的成功得力于教育的地方到底有多大是值得查究的。

3. 你独自一人住在这里，一定很无聊吧。

习题 4

1. 确实的，中国人的态度大半是对西方行为的一种反感，所以西方必须自我检讨，而经常接受批评。

2. 希望人是正直的，但这不是因为正直是最好的政策，而是由于更高的动机。

3. 凡是印象深刻的东西，就应该趁那最初的印象记忆犹新的时候，加以描写，这是必须记住的一条法则。

4. 我曾听到一个有名望的政治家说过，大部分的伟人都是因为吃得太多而送命的。

习题 5

1. 人病医生喜。

2. 引吭高歌，最爱诙谐笑谑的人，并不是心情最轻松的。

3. 使我们大部分的人活跃的，是因为没有钱和需要钱。

4. 读书只能供给心灵以知识的材料，思想才能把我们所读的变成自己的东西。

5. 多数大公司都训练得有叫做人事经理的专家，他们的任务就是接见可能聘雇的人员，决定取舍。

6. 他是一个翻译者，其任务就是做一架桥梁或一条通路，以沟通作者和读者的心灵。

习题 6

1. 很奇怪他总是犯同样数目的错误。

2. 她的父母几乎是同时死去；那是很可怕的。

3. 他亟想知道麦伯尔说的是真是假。

习题 7

1. 纳尔逊说：“当我想到我们所成就的事，不禁惊叹不止。”

2. 华盛顿对于措辞非常谨慎，在辩论中他从来不欺骗他的对手，或是争取暂时的胜利。

3. 当她非常神经过敏地在等待着铃子响的时候，他突然一下站到她的眼前来了。

习题 8

1. 竹是最美丽又最奇特的热带产物之一。

2. 他让做法官的正义压倒做父亲的慈爱，宣布了自己的儿子有罪。

习题 9

1. 他因工作关系，只能隔周在周末回家一次。

2. 因为机械的关系，工厂的出品比以前便宜多了。

3. 感到肚子的饥饿，和看到日影的倾斜，使我知道我睡着了以后，太阳走过很远的路程了。

习题 10

1. 当瓦丁顿离去之后，琪娣把他刚才信口随便说的话细细想了一下。那是听来很不舒服的，她费了多少的气力才忍住没有把她内心的伤痛表现出来。

2. 这是那孩子生平第一次听到的亲切的话语；那温柔的音调和态度，奇怪地感动了那狂暴而粗野的心，一滴眼泪似的东西像一点火花在那锐利圆圆的发亮的眼睛中照耀了。

3. 他没有一点学生的样子，但很有矿工的神气。（全不像学生，倒像是矿工。）

4. 戈登，你知道的，我真算不得是一个会侍候女性的人。

习题 11

1. 他因受失母的惨痛而促短了他的天年。

2. 母爱与其他的爱情在本质上是大有分别的。

3. 后代的人会追慕他。

4. 没有法律上的任何理由可以将他除名的。

5. 毫不顾到在储蓄上付出多大牺牲的那种小钱的储蓄是不科学的，也是不实际的节俭之道。

6. 他的伟大就在他致力实行他的计划时那种毅力上可以看得出来。

7. 失去这些审美的趣味，就等于失去幸福。

习题 12

1. 无论你怎样称赞他，他仍不免是一个残暴的人。

2. 打倒布尔朋皇族，和那个大肥猪路易十八！

3. 他们给莎莉一条扭动屁股的蓝色短裙来穿。

习题 13

1. 这只表的价钱决不便宜，对我这种一个没有钱的人来说，确是太贵了；不过照它的定价看来，也算是便宜的，因为在效能上它是无比的。

2. 据我看来，他努力想要比平常更甚地来炫耀他的口才，无非是打算侮慢我的沉默，和在亚丽达那样具有风趣而又聪悟的女人前面显露头角而已。

习题 14

1. 在敌人的炸弹密如雨下的当中，这位军官所表现的英勇是最高级的。

2. 那些塔的高度完全是一样的。

3. 当我第一次见到他时，他一定是差不多跟我父亲同样的年纪。

4. 落选者约五倍于当选的人。

习题 15

1. 他自己做饭。

2. 通常一个人所说的命运，原是一张他用自己纺的纱而自己织成的网。

3. 她违背父母的意思，嫁给自己选择的男人。

习题 16

1. 那孩子来回地扇着，以驱逐那些嗡嗡飞舞，随时无礼地飞近婴孩的面孔的苍蝇。

2. 他有投保火险的先见。

习题 17

1. 米尔顿有属于最高天才的普遍性。

2. 在质上最优，在量上无限，能够引导我们走向快乐的惟有教育。

习题 18

1. 在一个人的面前是一套，在他的背后又是一套，这种作法再危险也没有了。

2. 别的人认为艺术的本质与其形式是两回事。

习题 19

1. 他和他的表兄弟同年。

2. 他既残酷又贪婪。

3. 达宾看去面色苍白，态度庄严，而他的同志就是面孔发红，心情愉快。

习题 20

1. 他的小说比一百年来文人所写的小说，更有传诸后世的可能性。

2. 那不但是真的，而且在大小那一点说起来，是我至今所见到的一串最好的珍珠。

习题 21

1. “我的朋友，你错了，”哈尔王说：“错得不能再错了。”

2. 父老们欢迎我，亲切得无以复加。

3. 自从我进入监狱以来，他常来看我，有时他和我谈话，亲切得不得了。

习题 22

1. 正如没有两个字是完全同义的一样，也没有两种表现法能够正确地表示同一件事。

2. 正如化学家从实验的结果获得论断一样，学习语文的人也必须从观察语文的实况而获得论断。

习题 23

1. 人的情形和土地一样，有什么潜在的能力自己也不知道，正像地主有时并不知道他那土地上蕴藏着有黄金的矿苗。

2. 言语犹如阳光，越凝缩越强烈。

习题 24

1. “不对，我早已和你这样说过了。”布隆特说。

2. 那墙约有十五英尺高，十五英尺厚。

3. 我们所有的街道上，两旁都种有树木，当街灯照耀时，就好像那么多的星星，从枝叶间发出光来。

4. 我召集了许多玩耍的伴侣，就像一群那样多的蚂蚁一样勤快地工作了。

习题 25

1. 八个在战斗中倒下的人，只有三个还未断气，而其中两个却像死了一样。

2. 男人应该是既勇敢而又温柔，女人则要既温柔而又勇敢。

3. 我因为肚子饿了非进食不可的缘故，便回到洞穴中去做饭，同时也得去照顾一下我的马，整个上午都没有去理会它了。

4. 美国的名歌手朵莉戴的音乐背景，是渊源于她那教风琴、钢琴和声乐的父亲维廉的。

习题 26

1. 人类的痛苦是不会减轻的，除非我们具有正确的思想行为，并以坚定的决心去面对现实的世界。

2. 假如我更为结实的话，我就早已跟随他从窗口跳出去了。实际上，我只是按铃把全家的人叫醒来。

习题 27

1. 难得的是在这样一个时期出版，他的书引起了很大的注意。

2. 因为这运动是发生于穷人本身之间的，很可能比来自上流社会的更有力量。

3. 因为这事发生在特殊沉闷的时候，所以它比应有的更吸引了人们的注意。

习题 28

1. 他虽则年轻，他虽则贫穷，但没有一个国王或爵爷的儿子，在学问上及得他的。

2. 尽管我们奋斗，我们是决不能完全满足的。

3. 即令学生很笨，功课起初看去很难，如果他能坚忍不拔，努力做去的话，他就会感到那研究越来越容易，至少也不会那样难了。

习题 29

1. 关于气候，日本在本质上与英国无异，所以在这一点上，说日本是太平洋上的英国，确是很有理由的。

2. 这个善良的妇人喜不自胜。她要以自己的儿子为荣也是应当的。

3. 在这期间中我遇见了一些人，凭他们的身份、名誉或地位，是很可以自命要注定成为历史上的有名人物的。

习题 30

1. 友情好像花瓶一样，只要偶然发生裂痕，就很可能马上破碎的。

2. 你想要我改变意见，就和想要太阳从西边升起一样。

3. 当这妇人看见杂志没有增加销路，她对那编辑就有点讨厌起来了，而决心要趁着还有什么可加利用的时候，把凡是可以入手的东西最好全部捞过来。

习题 31

1. 科学的目的就在把一些事实汇集拢来，以便从而引出一般的法则与结论来。

2. 学生们一见到鸟巢，就要极为小心地不去惊动它，生怕母鸟受惊而弃之他去。

习题 32

1. 她对于每个弱小无助的东西都不禁对之发生同情；遇到受伤的小鸟或小兽，她总要为之痛心。

2. 想到他日后成就的伟业，我便记忆到在我叔叔家的食桌上，大家谈论他的那种样子，我不禁为之莞尔不已。

习题 33

1. 任何人想要理解这一对要靠法律来医治他们的创伤的，不和夫妇的心情，就非得密切注视过他们结婚生活的数十万个小时不可。

2. 有些人是生来就伟大的，有些人则独力完成伟大的事业，而另外还有些人就是被人把伟大加诸其身的。

3. 为要发觉自由是值得渴望的东西，我们首先有被剥夺自由的必要。

4. 我计划了各种策略，以便获得机会，使那曾经冤枉过我的人，了解他因从前所犯的罪过而受到了惩罚。

习题 34

1. 他的天性是想要别人怎样对他，他就怎样对待别人。

2. 因为我们住在路边，所以常有旅人为试饮我们的醋栗酒而过访。

3. 与其有这样的事发生，我宁愿加倍地遗失金币。

4. 一个很有教养的英国人问我，美国黑人是否不能和美国白人同在一条人行道上走路。

习题 35

1. 下个月我们就请室内装饰师来家装饰。

2. 那个他受不了吧。他打算在星期二要把你赶出去，所以你还是作个准备的好。

习题 36

1. 我看见楼下的那个女人居然搞了两个水手坐在那里。我不晓得她是怎样认识他们的。

2. 什么都不要你做，我很大方吧。

3. 我不想听到你在孩子们前面说些下流话。

习题 37

1. 有天早晨我一醒来，就发觉我已成名了。

2. 时间一刻一刻地流去了，而他注意一看，自己正凝视着那支小蜡烛。烛光与晨光争辉中越来越微弱了。

3. 不到一分钟我发觉我跟那有同情心的秘书又进入了那间等待室，他要我签定了更多的文件。

习题 38

1. 许多的人发了财的时候，始知财富并不能从罪恶逃避，反而是一种新的更坏的形式的罪恶。

2. 格兰斯顿才是一个高洁的人，也就是终生献身于运用崇高的主义于国事的人。他是这样一个完美的典型，是很容易知道的。

习题 39

1. 我在什么地方看见有人说过，我们要像蜜蜂利用鲜花一样来利用书本，它盗取花的甜蜜，而并不伤害花朵。

2. 假如你想到一个什么重要的观念，如果你不能把它记录下来，你的观念就会要随着你的死亡而消逝。即令你把它记录下来了，也不免有虫伤鼠患之灾，常常很快就被它啮光了。

习题 40

1. 一个人必须养成一种习惯，在穷困的时候，依靠自己的能力，信赖自己的勇气。

2. 没有几个人知道人生的幸福和性格的形成，大半是靠我们所读的精选的书籍。

3. 我深为相信我们心灵的和平及有生的快乐，并不是看我们的地位，我们的财产，或是我们的身份而定，而是完全以我们的精神的态度为转移的。外界的条件和它差不多没有关系。

习题 41

1. 逢迎者和真朋友是很难辨别明白的，因为好像狼和狗的相似一样，逢迎者和真朋友也是很相似的。

2. 绵羊看去都是一样的，不过它们之间仍然是有差别的，约翰就能够辨别得出来。

习题 42

1. 如果你交的朋友对你无益，你也不能对他有所帮助，你就得马上离开他。

2. 青年朋友，我不是当面奉承，我实在宁肯对你们聊天，而不愿对成年人讲话。

习题 43

1. 在某种范围之内艺术家是可以随心所欲地把他的生活做成一个什么样子的。在别的职业上，如医生的或律师的，你要不要去就那种职业，是可以自由选择的，不过，一度选定了，你便再没有自由了。

2. 成就大事业的人，是要把他们的失败作为阶梯的。（意即以失败为基础而达到成功的地步。）

习题 44

1. 你要不是一个有用的人，忠实而诚笃的话，你就不能希望在这世间获得成功。

2. 他努力奋斗一步一步地做到总统的高位。

3. 在面临反对声中而获得社会承认，无需要奋斗的那种伟大的真理是很少有的。

习题 45

1. 他通知我那个消息，所以我能及时准备。（so that 表结果）

2. 一种愚笨的想法，认为坐马车比骑马要威严些，使得法国的贵族都停止去骑马了。

3. 我很幸运作为一个剧作家突然一下声望鹊起，这样一来我就用不着要每年写一个长篇小说来维持我的生活了。

习题 46

1. 不要抓住别人，要他听完你想说的话。

2. 如果那个女人走进我的屋子，我就要打她的耳光。

3. 那医生愤怒地抓住那少年的领子，问他为什么要这样顽皮。

习题 47

1. 世间有许多人不肯让他们的主张在别人心中生根，而要像孩子们的揠苗助长一样，时常把他们种的花拔出来看是不是长大了。

2. 如果一个船长真个爱他的船的话，他就会对于船上极小的毛病都不忽视。他一定要报告这种毛病出来，并留意使它修理完好。

3. 当霍乱流行的时候，我仍然呆在这里，满不在乎。最要紧的就是不要吃没有煮熟的东西，不要吃生的水果和蔬菜，或是这类的任何东西，还有要注意的事，就是饮水必须煮沸。

习题 48

1. 他对于英国的乡村生活一无所知；他竟认为所有生活在乡下的人，当然都是愚笨和悲惨的。

2. 我认为善人的善良是当然的，当我发现善人的缺点和败德时，我感到很有趣；当我看到恶人的善良时，我就为之感动，而很愿意对于他们的邪恶一耸我这宽大的肩膀。

3. 我是在小孩子的时候到那里去的，一直在那里长大。所以那里的人并不怎样重视我的存在。

习题 49

1. 他说：“我对这世界什么都不在乎，既不在乎将来的事，也不在乎人们的批评，更不在乎任何种类的确立的地位，或者甚至是文学家的声名，那是我早年许多的夜里睡不着觉所梦想的。”

2. 当然他曾提议要送她回家，起初她是不肯接纳的——她说那确是没有需要，因为从车站回到她父母家里去，不过几分钟的路程，她独自一人已经走惯了。

3. 我们岛上的空气曾是那般纯洁芳香，我们用不着要什么遮盖也能露宿得很舒服的，但是我们不惯在露天底下睡觉，所以我们并未能十分欣赏头上毫无遮盖而躺下睡觉的那种想法。

习题 50

1. 客人都到齐了，马上可以开饭了。

2. 今天早上我们大家聚集一堂来毫无偏见地讨论时下的问题。

3. 我的工作大体上都做完了，只剩下一些零星的事。

习题 51

1. 谁都必然会看得出来，他们现在正遭遇到国家发展上的危机。

2. 如果我们照应当做的一样爱我们同类的话，我们就一定要殷勤有礼地对待他们。

习题 52

1. 你去看看那棵树，看是不是树上有果子成熟了。

2. 如果你不喜欢我写的东西，你不妨去读别人的。

习题 53

1. 把这种讨厌的歧见去掉之后，这两个共和国之间的友好关系，便将变得毫无遗憾了，甚至当其中一个还是帝国时代就很友善的。

2. 如果你把它放在手上衡量一下，你就会感觉到这是够重量的，至于说到它的完美，那更是无懈可击。

习题 54

1. 如果你想要了解这个奇怪，而有几分悲惨的故事的话，你至少对那背景得有一个印象——由四大强国来瓜分为四的维也纳，那个被破坏的可怕的都市。

2. 预定大学校长将在恳亲会上致辞。

3. “我真个吓倒了。她被你看中有多久了？请你告诉我，什么时候我可以庆贺你们的订婚呢？”

习题 55

1. 有些作家提笔写作，是因为他们不得不说出一个故事，而不是因为他们已有一个故事要说。

2. 我因生病游荡了一个月，所以我必得加倍努力，以补足失去的时间。

3. 她从来不表示意见，据推测是她无意见可表示。

4. 即使从这个小车站去，也非驱车跑上好几英里路不可。

习题 56

1. 社会在任何时代都不会阻止一个人的成就的。

2. 如果你把能率的原理应用到你的事业上，没有任何事物能阻止你去实现你的抱负。

习题 57

1. 威胁利诱都不能使之作恶的人我是尊敬的。

2. 文学帮助在挣扎中的人们，来说服那叫做宇宙的怪物，要它提出一个较为易解的哑谜。

习题 58

1. 他们看到钟索的情形大吃一惊。

2. 我是来埋葬凯撒的，不是来赞美他的。

3. 他并没有看到他事业的成果就死去了。

4. 我们匆匆走过那里，结果却是又回到原来的监狱里了。

5. 如果现代的个人或现代的国民，不顾人类的尊严，再度追求这些疯狂的竞赛，那么我们活着时还可以看到对战争中每死一百万人，就有一千万人会要因此而死亡。

6. 许多年轻人在一度失恋之后，就感觉到人生是不值得活下去了，结果他们发现不到几年之后，毕竟幸福是在等待着。

习题 59

1. 在我们开始调查那个之前，让我们努力来理解我们所知道的事，以便充分加以利用，而分别主要的部分与附属的部分。

2. 蔬菜生产不足，难以应付全国的需求。

习题 60

1. 相信他们自己的思想太过深奥，而不能明白易解地表现出来，这说法未免美过其实。这些作家不会想到原只怪他们自己的心灵未具正确的思想能力，这也是很自然的。

2. 只要我们不太傲慢而不肯自己说明或请求别人解释，人生大部分的误会就都会消除了。

3. 我读过非常多的小说，在学校里也学了不少的东西，所以对于恋爱的事懂得相当的多，但我想这只是年轻人的玩意。我以为儿子有我这样大的一个有胡子的人，是不会有那种情感的。

习题 61

1. 我很快就注意到了，在她以外我所认识的人们的性质，她一人兼而有之，我很高兴那些性质在她一个人身上都能发现出来。

2. 哲学家太爱作此假定，认为事实的问题是可以用言辞上的考虑来解决的。

习题 62

1. 那样地来偷窃东西，真使我吓倒了。

2. 愚笨的家伙，居然以为他是可以被赦的。

3. 别人犹可，你也这样说真是太出意外了。

习题 63

1. 如果运输频繁，铁路就能使运费更为经济，至于其火车的有规律，舒适和迅速，犹其余事。

2. 事实上，所有值得称为大发现家的人，都曾一度被人看作梦想者，不被当作狂人看待已经很好了。

习题 64

1. 在这种场合不晓得他要怎样办。

2. 一个人的家屋在何时会从他的头上倾倒下来，是未可逆料的。

3. 他过去老是很容易兴奋的，可是现在他简直神经错乱了；没有法子再去说服他。

习题 65

1. 如果有人不满足他的职业或他的薪水的话，他只消去申请，就可以得到一块农场，用来开始一种生产的新生活。

2. 谁会满足于只要想望就可以得到的成功呢？

习题 66

1. 想要由经验而获得利益的人，是决不认为求助是可耻的。

2. 国魂应该高升到使强国以欺凌弱小为耻。

习题 67

1. 凡是具有价值的东西都不是可以不劳而获的。

2. 去做好一件很值得做的小事，就比发一笔大财好多了。

习题 68

1. 他不但不后悔他的过错，反而感到得意。

2. 诚然，贫穷决非不幸，由于孜孜不息的自助，贫穷也许可能变成一种幸福的。

习题 69

1. 他那时为处理桌上堆积如山的工作非常忙碌。

2. 他忙于保守党候补的竞选。

习题 70

1. 我们不应太快来责难说一切的妥协都是败坏的道德。

2. 到家一看，我们发觉她只找了我们一会儿就放弃不再找，而独自回家了。

习题 71

1. 但裘蒂并不要，也不想忘记约翰。想到要跟另外一个人结婚，就和接受一个突然向她推挤过来的异教的新神一样是决不可能的。

2. 陶乐斯不能说美，她的鼻子太高，身体矮胖；所以贾斯丁夫人除了指望她嫁给一个富裕而有适当职业的青年以外，更无奢望了。

3. 约翰比她要大八岁，多年来他很少把她放在心上，虽则他认为当然他们毕竟是要结婚的；订婚的证书当他还是一个小孩子，裘蒂还在襁褓的时候就签定了。

习题 72

1. 因为缺乏细心使得放荡的人为之身败名裂，好人亦复如此。

2. 写作的技巧和其他艺术的技巧是同样困难的，不过因为谁都能读懂或写出一封信，使人想到任何人也能够好好地写出一本书来。

习题 73

1. 毁灭人的与其说是他们所犯的过错，毋宁说是他们在犯过后的行为举止，即持身之道。

2. 那警察左右双方都没有顾盼地从群众中走过去了。

3. 发生影响的与其说是时间，不如说是我们使用时间的方法。

习题 74

1. 像我们的小岛一样如此小的范围而能有这样多的变化，是世界上任何地方所没有的。

2. 在电车里吸烟的习惯是最无礼貌的了。

3. 对于爱好文学的学生，最重要的是和批评家多多接近。

习题 75

1. 得到别人恩惠的人是无论怎样感谢也不为过的。

2. 高声朗诵与再三易稿的重要性，是无论怎样评价也不为过的。

3. 一本书可以比做邻居；如果是好的，结识越久越好；如果是坏的，分手越早越好。

习题 76

1. 正好像我们没有经典的知识就不能了解中国文学一样，所有学习英文的人，都应该懂得一点《圣经》。

2. 我们哪怕是拿起一本普通的书，一份杂志，或一张报纸，都会发现有提到《圣经》的地方，或引用它的字句的。

习题 77

1. 有名的政治家没有一个不是勤励的人。

2. 没有一个人家不是至少有一个亲人受伤的。

3. 两个人只要有半个钟头在一起的话，就一定有其中一个要显明地凌驾另外一个的。

4. 在一年当中没有任何一周，在世界上某个地方，不是为英国市场而在收割小麦的。

习题 78

1. 有少数的人要等到钱用完了才考虑到钱的事，而大多数的人，对于时间也是这样。

2. 真正的友谊就像健康一样，其价值要到失去之后才知道的。

3. 生物学上主要事实的进化论，直到近代科学产生二百多年以后才建立起来。

习题 79

1. 任何强大的东西，都不免有受到弱小侵害的危险。

2. 战争在物质上的破坏，无论怎样的大，到现在也可以修复了，只要无延误地恢复了和平。

习题 80

1. 法律的目的不是要废止或抑制自由，而是要保护和扩大自由。

2. 他们感到无聊的主要原因，是精神的单调，而不是环境的单调。

习题 81

1. 他没有理由要瞧不起自己，虽则他的服装不够富丽时髦。

2. 一个青年偶因身体有欠强壮，并不一定就是说他不适于过海上生活。

习题 82

1. 他的好处不是因为有任何美德，而是因为他太懦弱不敢作恶。

2. 你的奖金不及别人的多，不是因为你做事欠缺效率，而是因为你缺勤太久。

习题 83

1. 我们所夸耀的，不是因为我们有更多的想法，而是因为我们的想法比较更为健全。

2. 我们之所以想要进入上流社会，并不是因为我们想要占有它，只是因为想要让人看见我们置身其间而已，我们对于上流的想法，原来也只在它的发放异彩一点上。

3. 如果我偶然注意到一个别的孩子比我知道得少，我就会推断那并不是因为我知道的多，而是因为某种理由他不知道罢了。

习题 84

1. 伟大的真理都是明白的真理。但不见得所有明白的真理都是伟大的真理。

2. 礼拜天禁止游玩，我觉得这不失为一个勉强可以忍受的消磨时间的方法。

习题 85

1. 人的贫富不在他的财产而在他的品德。重视名誉过于黄金的人就是富人。

2. 这个世界上一半的不幸是由于羡慕别人，想要获得别人的财富，而失去由享受自己现有财富的乐趣所产生的幸福而引起的。

习题 86

1. 在长期干旱中未死去的作物，却在接踵而来的洪水中淹没了。

2. 我要讲给你们听，我在那种环境中怎样获得了大家认为我在那方面所有的一点点能力。

3. 最可悲痛的光景之一，就是为着大学课程而牺牲了仅有的健康和身体的一个青年的光景。

习题 87

1. 不到一分钟风暴就向我们袭来了——不到两分钟天完全黑了，因为这个以及迎面而来的水沫飞溅，突然变得黑暗不堪，我们同在一个渔船上都彼此看不见人了。

2. 一方面用威胁，一方面用恳求，他终于达到了他的目的。

3. 既要看护伤病的人，又要缝制沙包，有时一天缝好四打之多，她的时间便完全占去了。

习题 88

1. 还有，勤勉有着不但是可使身体休息，而且更重要的，是有可使心灵平安的倾向。

2. 这样那个前途有望的青年，不但是违背了对他自己和对别人一切的诺言，而且最糟糕的是又伤透了他老父的心。

习题 89

1. 弗洛依德对于心理学的关系，正像牛顿对于力学，达尔文对于生物学的关系一样。

2. 他为着安抚那狗下巴下面的神经，弯曲了他的一只膝头。这种鼓励对于那狗，就像一支好的雪茄对于男人一样。

习题 90

1. 谁愿雇用一个没有自尊心的人？

2. 能够得到这样一头牛，我什么都愿给。

3. 去年的雪而今安在？

习题 91

1. 走过一条大路时，不意遇到了你最初给我介绍了的我们那位表兄。

2. 今天他一大早起身，预备做点什么呢？突然想到要去洗楼梯。

习题 92

1. 我们也说不定会要和这个有趣的家庭愉快地结交的。

2. 他大概已尽了全力。

习题 93

1. 如果他的能力可与他的脾气相埒，他就成为一个很好的国王了。

2. 许多成功的人如果当初他们能自由选择职业的话，他们也许会选择和现在使之赢得极好的地位的这种职业完全不同的另外一种职业。

习题 94

1. 鸟是人类的好朋友。如果没有鸟，这个世界就会被昆虫所占领了。

2. 如果没有甘地的话，印度的自由就要来得更迟，而且形式也要两样了。

3. 有愉快家庭的人们，如果不是天雨的话，他们决不会想到他们所有的室内的乐趣。

4. 如果不是他来救援，我一定早已死去了。

习题 95

1. 一个人尽可能及早地坦白承认他的无知，他便要终将由此获益不浅。

2. 把莎翁所有的自然描写部分，以及偶然触及的田园的生活和外观，完全去掉的话，将是一个何等大的损失。

3. 不要太接近他，否则他就会找你的岔子的。

习题 96

1. 从那路上一转弯进去，我们便到了一个仙境，只消离开那里一百码的地方，就没有一个人会想到有那样一个仙境存在的。

2. 子弹射入我的左肩——只要再下去一点，我就早已进了天国。

习题 97

1. 不管怎样死法，我都要死得像勇士之子一样。

2. 想要立身处世的青年，不管遭遇什么困难，都要抱定决心，非达到成功不止。

3. 不管你怎么说，你之有今日，完全是你父亲之赐。

习题 98

1. 不管那些青年人是体重一百零五磅，还是二百零五磅，他都把他们看作轻乙级（指体重在一百二十六磅与一百一十八磅之间的拳击家）的人而教他们拳术。

2. 不管你怎样富有经验，怎样能干，你也决不能完全克服写作技巧上的困难，等到你学会了写作时，很可能你已经没有东西可写了。

习题 99

1. 无论选择哪条路，都走不到我的目的地。

2. 无论她怎样去想，她绝对想不起来他所说的一个字。

习题 100

1. 虽则在划船和帆行上，法国人并不弱于英国人，但他们对这些运动的趣味就很有限了。

2. 如果世上果真有什么使青年人比别的更要感激的事物，那就是在非常恶劣的环境下，来开始谋生时所必要的贫穷。

习题 101

1. 无论是怎样普通的动植物，都有研究的价值，如果理智地观察的话，也会提供一个很有兴趣的故事。

2. 不问是什么职业，如果要想成功的话，就必须以献身的精神去干。

习题 102

1. 他们要是冷淡的话，就会招致跟他们所想望的完全相反的结果也未可知，因为等到危险来临的时候，国内的事情就真个要完全被压倒了。

2. 一度你结了婚，你除了规规矩矩以外，你什么自由也没有了，甚至连自杀都不允许的。

习题 103

1. 如果太阳消灭了的话，全世界就要很快地为坚冰所封，可怕得令一切死尽灭绝。

2. 如果我们觉得吉拉德夫人的想法是对的，那么，我亲爱的法官，我们就得停止你对他们的裁判，我也得停止我对他们的分析，而去追随吉拉德夫人才对。

习题 104

1. 如果是一个漂亮姑娘的话，他就会更加注意了。

2. 若是没有历史的话，作为国民或是作为个人，我们就无法了解我们在这世界上的存在了。

3. 他若拒绝前往就不对了。

4. 听他说话，我们就会把他当作一个傻子。

5. 同样的事情如果是发生在战时，就会要造成很大的灾难。

6. 如果他是生在太平盛世，他就早在文学界建立声望了。

习题 105

1. 一般都是懒惰的人抱怨他们没有时间去做想做的事。

2. 从庄严到滑稽只有一步之差。

习题 106

1. 依照大自然的法则，溪流是要朝下面流去的，任何强而有力的人，也不可能加以阻止。

2. 工艺是必须有的技术，无论怎样未开化的野蛮民族，也不得不学习手艺，无论怎样文明的天才人物也不能放弃它。

习题 107

1. 躺在草上，他一直遥望天空。天色青青，他望得越久，天就显得越高。

2. 我们一生的大部分都为空想所占据，我们越富想象力，这种空想也越加多彩多姿，越为生动。

习题 108

1. 过度的耽溺，读书也要变成一种恶习的——因为不被一般人所确认，所以是一种更危险的恶习。

2. 我想我至今所发现的最有用的一件事，就是多么容易说一声“我不知道”。我从来没有注意过这居然使得别人因此而瞧不起我。

习题 109

1. 他决不是一个看到自己的权力被人蔑视而一声不响的人。

2. 哈斯丁好像是决不需要有何借口的。

习题 110

1. 我觉得任何人不从华勒的辞典多多学习，是不能写出很好的文章来的。

2. 许多食物因价钱不太便宜，穷人无法买来吃。

3. 愿我们的生活能够垂范后昆。

习题 111

1. 为着使他避免危险，我警告过他了。

2. 只要社会认为你是大丈夫的话，不管你怎样做，它也就不会对你怎样吹求了。

3. 他只要能把钱索回，犯罪者是谁，他都漠不关心。

习题 112

1. 那是非常凶猛而狂暴的——使土人们畏之过于狮子。

2. 但是人的怕死是当然的。在人的一生中，随时都不可避免地要想到死那回事，也是当然的。

习题 113

1. 我父亲去了巴黎，成为英国驻法大使馆中的律师，我真不明白他为什么要去，除非是为着追求未知的事物那也使他的儿子的我，将心身消耗殆尽的那种不安的情绪所吸引。

2. 书籍并没有怎样地使他着魔。每当他打开一本书时，他一定会遇到什么东西，要控制他的思想，刺激他的想象，使他沉迷于幻想之中的，于是那天他就不再阅读了。

习题 114

1. 史买克在与其说是活着不如说是死了的状态中，被抬进去，锁在地窖中了。

2. 毕竟他并没有传染到那种热病；他只是吓坏了，并未怎样受到伤害。（意为受惊较受伤更甚，等于说 He was frightened rather than hurt.）

3. 我注意到每当有人打电话找你，听说你不在家时，他就要留下口信，说你一回家，就要你立刻打电话给他，因为有要紧的事情，其实事情常是对他要紧，而不是对你要紧。

习题 115

1. 许许多多的父母死去，留下来的孤儿，多得使孤儿院都照顾不了。

2. 我们大家都抱怨时间的短少，可是却又有许多时间我们不晓得要怎样处理才好。

习题 116

1. 他岂特是微笑，简直是大笑了。

2. 他对于那结果满意之至。

习题 117

1. 一个没有那船长一般钝感的人，即令听到尼尔逊的话而感到迷惑，也许是会被宽恕的。

2. 学问在太多的场合只是普通常识的陪衬物，真知灼见的代用品。书籍被当作观看大自然的眼镜时，常加以利用的时候较少，反而被当作从视力微弱及气质懒惰的人们，遮断大自然那种强烈的光线和不断变化的光景的目障，加以利用的时候较多。

习题 118

1. 谁也不想在冬天去游白峰，更没有人愿意在那种季节中去住在那里。

2. 如果崇拜一颗星也有什么意义的话，那么，崇拜英雄的意义就大得多了。

习题 119

1. 我问她要不要叫一部计程车。她回答说：“不要，我宁肯走路，天气太好了。”

2. 与其劝你把爱给与那个男人，我宁肯在冬天把那小金丝雀放到公园里去。

习题 120

1. 小偷一看到那个，马上跳起来逃走了。

2. 他刚动身天就变得阴暗了，随即又下起雨来了。

3. 门开处狗就冲向箱子那地方去了。

4. 一个人一旦开始爱他的工作，便是他进步的开端。

习题 121

1. 他心情一点也不沉着地在人群中来去地走着。

2. 我相信科学不过是有训练和有组织的常识罢了。

3. 超过一定程度的体力劳动，是痛苦得可怕的，而体力劳动经常是使人生几乎不能忍受地在过度地进行着。

习题 122

1. 在这个场合名声不如实际。（名不副实）

2. 睡眠是不可能的。因为即令他们斗胆留宿，他们也知道睡在地上，差不多一定会死的。

3. 把一种新的文明加在一种旧的文化之上，自然是一种艰巨的事业，而日本从事于此是可佩服的。要实现这个成就而不损失任何一种文明的优点，那简直是奇迹。

习题 123

1. 他在那里听到很多的人声，比平常更为吵闹。

2. 如果我所经历的世路是一条达到成功的坦途，我也就无异议；如果是一条艰难的路，无论怎样险阻，我都要使它化为平易而达到我的目的。

3. 他无论怎样聪明，都不免有错。（智者千虑必有一失。）

习题 124

1. 那汽车跑得很快。

2. 我希望你的眼睛永远是那样炯炯有光，因为那有男子气概。

习题 125

1. 使他大惊和悲伤的，是他看见他那亲爱的老母病重在床，面色苍白，几乎没有知觉了。

2. 写作的通病之一，是短简的字一样行的时候，偏要用长的多音节的字。即使是最伟大的作家，也常犯这毛病，使之蒙羞。

习题 126

1. 看踢足球而感到高兴的人，单这一点就比不看的人高出一筹。

2. 自有历史以来，人们常常对大自然的现象具有一些知识；像埃及人和中国人很久以前就有高度的文化，学得了很多的东西，西方人至今还不知道的他们大概早知道了。

3. 就那些对音乐没有欣赏能力的人们来说，要他们学习音乐，简直是浪费时间与金钱。

4. 正如历史要能在现代的舞台上投以一线光明才有用处一样，过去的文学也只有当它对今日有意义的时候才有价值。

习题 127

1. 只有他们有权改变这个，而且只能用一种特殊的方法。

2. 德国学者虽具有饮食和怠惰的恶习，却能长时间从事研究工作，而且直到高龄不衰，我尽力想要找出一个理由来，可是徒劳无功。

习题 128

1. 几乎没有人要怀疑科学使现代对一般教育的要求加速了，同时使得教育本身更有效果。

2. 在高贵的社交界中做惯了当主人的角色，他接触到的所有的人都为他所吸引而受其支配；他待人接物的态度，既有魅力，而又威严；而他那种异常的冷静，在这个半疯狂的社会中，给了他另外一种特征。

习题 129

1. 他们做的有些事情，是因为他们是人，有些事情是因为他们是被误导的人，由错误而不辨是非的人。

2. 这个方案和说明我们感情的起源的普通方法有所不同，因为它把我们感情中的个人的乃至自私的东西，看做时间与习惯的产物，在这一点上是有不同的。

习题 130

1. 诚然古代陆路旅行是困难的，既无聊而又不舒服，不过却比较安全。

2. 生在贵族之家的人们，诚然有许多利益，不过为那些利益所付出的代价也很高。

习题 131

1. 他没有被培养成为军人，也没有想做军人的倾向。

2. 新年立下的决心，就决心而论当然是很好的，单是明白写在纸上，如果不是铭刻在心，付诸实行的话也是没有用的。

3. 机智的人易于想象作为一个机智的人是令人愉快的。

习题 132

1. 藏书万卷是一回事，能够贤明地加以利用又是另外一回事。

2. 在人前是一套，在他背后又是一套，这种作法再危险也没有了。

习题 133

1. 如果你想要有一个朋友，礼查·史狄尔就正好做你的朋友。

2. 杀死那怪物的人就是我呀。

3. 我认出那个剧界明星，原来是我的一个老朋友。

习题 134

1. 他走了很远才想起那本书来。

2. 他们没有走到好远，就看到了一条大熊愤怒地朝向他们而来。（make toward 朝向）

第三编 疑难句法及文章译例

壹 英文类似句辨异

1.（a）我在街上遇到一个年轻的男人。

（b）我在街上遇到一个年轻的女人。

注　（b）句中说的 a young person，普通的意思多指年轻的女性而言，如 There’s a young person to see you.（有一个年轻的女人要会你。）

2.（a）他来到这城里了。

（b）他回到这城里了。

注　（a）句中的“他”对这城是一个陌生人，而（b）句中的“他”，原是这城里的人，或是对这城非常熟悉的人。

3.（a）等我们吃饭的时候，我才来听取你的意见吧。

（b）现在我们一面吃饭，我一面就来听取你的意见吧。

注　（a）句是在开始吃饭以前说的。

4.（a）他们要来。

（b）他们就要来了。

注　（b）是表示时间的迫切。

5.（a）他似乎颇为迟钝。

（b）他也许像是有一点儿迟钝的样子。

注　（b）句说得婉曲多了。

6.（a）他们一直住在星洲。

（b）他们眼下住在星洲。

注　（a）表示经常的居住，（b）则有暂时的感觉，或根本是暂时性的，如我们从外地到星洲观光，住在旅馆中，则说 I am living in the hotel. 又 live 一个动词有“居住”和“生活”二义，如云 Are your parents living？（你父母都健在吗？）便是“生活”的意思，这句话一定要用现在分词，不可说成 Do your parents live？

7.（a）他推开了门。

（b）他试图把门推开。

注　英文动词有他动与自动之分，同一动词由他动变成自动时，意义常有改变，多是变得空虚而不实在了。如他动词说 A cat catches mice.（猫抓老鼠。）自动词说 A drowning man will catch at a straw.（将溺的人哪怕是一根草也要去抓住求救。）

8.（a）在一个晴天他出门了。

（b）有一天他出门了。

注　（b）句中的 fine 是一个虚字，没有什么意思的。说 one fine day 或 one fine morning 等句，多半用作一种意外事件或毋妄之灾时的前奏，可能由法文 un beau jour 及 un beau matin（ = in opinement 即英文说的 unexpectedly 意外地）直接译成英文的。

9.（a）她彻夜不睡坐待她丈夫回家。

（b）她彻夜不睡来看护她的丈夫。

注　（a）句的 sit up for，意为“不睡来等待”，（b）句的 sit up with，意为“不睡来看护”。

10.（a）我们确知人是要死的。

（b）我们确知那人是死了。

注　（a）句中的 that 是连词，man 是指人类，而（b）句中的 that 是形容词。

11.（a）约翰不安的原因是考试落第。

（b）约翰的不安考试落第也是原因之一。

注　（a）意为 His failure was the specific case.（b）意为 His failure was one of the causes—there are others. His poor health might be another.

12.（a）首相在电视上出现。

（b）首相的演词由电视加以广播。

注　参考：The symphony was broadcast on（or over）the radio.（交响乐由无线电广播。）注意：在 television 前不要冠词。

13.（a）这是一个可信的故事。

（b）这是一回可称赞的成就。

注　credible = believable. creditable = praiseworthy.

14.（a）他不是一个教师。

（b）他不是一个好教师。

注　not a 比 no 的意义要重些，（a）句意为“他不是以教书为业的，也许是商人，也许是公务员，总之是做别的事情的人。”（b）句意为“纵然他现在以授徒为业，可是他学问不好，教授无方，或是品行欠佳，不配做人师表。”类例如 He is not a businessman.（ = a statement of fact：the man’s profession is not business）. He is no businessman.（ = an ironical statement. The man may or may not be a businessman. Whether he is or not，he certainly is unskillful in business matters）。同样 He is not a gentleman.（ = He is a workman 他是工人或是下等人）。He is no gentleman.（ = He has bad manners. 他的举止粗鄙不像上等人）。He is not a lawyer.（ = that is，not his profession. 他的职业不是律师）。He is no lawyer.（ = not an efficient lawyer. 他不是能干的律师）。

15.（a）你想向我要求什么？

（b）你想和我接洽什么？

注　（a）want something from somebody，欲从某人得到某物。（b）want something with somebody，欲向某人接洽某事。

16.（a）他的书至多只有十本。

（b）他的书不少于十本。

注　no less than = as many as（至多，刚够）。not less than = as many more（不少或多过）。同样的还有 no better than = as bad as，例如 He is no better than a beggar.（他和乞丐一样），not better than = perhaps worse than，例如 He is not better than a beggar.（他不比乞丐好，也许比之更坏）。

17.（a）家里有电报来给我了。

（b）家里有电报来要我回去。

注　如果换成 active voice，则（a）便成 wire to me（打电报给我），而（b）便成 wire for me（电促我归）。for = to get.

18.（a）这是远胜过林语堂的一种幽默。

（b）这是及不上林语堂的一种幽默。

19.（a）他自信一定成功。

（b）我想他一定成功。

20.（a）我们中间没有几个人知道那真相的。

（b）我们中间只有几个人知道那真相的。

（c）我们中间知道那真相的人不少。

注　few 意为“差不多没有”，无的成分多于有的成分。a few 意为“只有二三人”，有的成分多于无的成分。not a few 意为“不少”，即有很多。以上均系表数的，如表量则用 little，a little，not a little. 义与上同。

21.（a）反之，他什么也没有说。

（b）反对的话他一句也没有说。

注　on the contrary 意为“反之”，副词片语。to the contrary 意为“与之相反的”，形容词片语。

22.（a）可惜你没有去。

（b）幸亏你没有去。

注　It is a pity = I regret. 遗憾。It is a mercy = I rejoice. 幸喜。

23.（a）事竟如此使我觉得惊愕。

（b）我亟欲知道事情何以会这样。

注　wonder that = be amazed at，觉得惊愕，感到骇异。wonder＋疑问词 = be curious about；be anxious to learn，亟想知道。

24.（a）那也许可以做。

（b）那不一定不能做。

注　（a）含有 It is possible，（b）含有 It is not impossible 的意味。might 是假想。

25.（a）我希望我有他那样富有。

（b）我希望成为他那样的富人。

注　（a）在 wish 后接假设语气，这是对现在的事实相反的假设，无法办到的事。（b）表示未来的愿望，并不一定是做不到的事。

26.（a）让我们修理家园。

（b）让我们回家去吧。

注　repair 作他动词用时，意为“修理”，作自动词用时，意为“往（某处）”，“赴” = go.

27.（a）他写了一封信给我。

（b）他替我写了一封信。

注　for = in place of，代为。

28.（a）他投骨于犬。

（b）他投犬以骨。

注　（a）是好意，以骨头给狗吃。（b）是敌意，以骨头来打狗。

29.（a）灯放在桌子上面。

（b）灯悬在桌子上空。

30.（a）他拥有大宗财产。

（b）他抱有危险思想。

注　is possessed of = has，拥有。is possessed with = is controlled by. 受迷住，为其所乘。

31.（a）我想他不会有罪。

（b）我觉得他好像有罪。

注　doubt if，意为“难信”，“好像没有”。suspect that，意为“可疑”，“好像有”。suspect = imagine to be.

32.（a）他老是来干涉我的事。

（b）他老是来妨碍我的事。

注　interfere in，干涉。interfere with，妨害。

33.（a）他以学者之名混过去了。

（b）人皆视彼为学者。

注　pass by = be currently known by a name of，以……之名混过。pass for = be accepted as；be thought of，被认为，被视为。他例如 His name is Wang but he passes by the name of Li.（人皆知其姓李，其实他是姓王。）Many a coward passed for a hero.（懦夫而充作勇士者比比皆是。）

34.（a）空气由氧和氮组成。

（b）幸福存于满足之中。

（c）他的言行一致。

注　consist of = be composed of 由……而组成。consist in = lie in = is in，在，存于……之中。consist with = be in accordance with，与……一致。

35.（a）他打算说什么？

（b）他预定要说的是什么？

注　be about to = be going to，为较文言的说法。be to，表示预定。

36.（a）我看见那里有很多的人。

（b）我看见那里有很多大人物。

注　a great many 后接复数名词。many a great 后接单数名词。

37.（a）我没有听见她歌唱过。

（b）她作的歌我没有听见人唱过。

注　（a）句中的 her 为宾语，sing 为原形不定词所构成的宾格补语。（b）句中的 her 为所有格，song 为名词，her 的宾语。

38.（a）我们租的船以时间计算。

（b）我们只租了一小时的船。

39.（a）谁的兄弟带你去游公园的？

（b）你带谁的兄弟去游公园的？

注　（a）句的主语为 brothers，（b）句的主语为 you.

40.（a）那些宝石有许多被盗。

（b）那些宝石的大部分被盗。

41.（a）他被视为天才。

（b）他被崇为天才。

注　look upon as = regard as，视为。look up to as = respect as，作为……而崇仰。

42.（a）我必得注意那件事。

（b）我必得调查那件事。

注　look to = attend to，注意，照顾。look into = investigate，调查。

43.（a）我并不想出洋。

（b）我不反对出洋。

注　“not care＋to-Infinitive” = not like＋to-Infinitive，不想做。“not mind＋Gerund” = have no objection to＋Gerund，不反对。

44.（a）明天会有一些客人来。

（b）明天我要请一些客人来。

注　（a）是无意志的，（b）是有意志的。

45.（a）那岛周围五英里。

（b）那岛直径五英里。

注　around = in circumference，周围。across = in diameter，直径。

46.（a）我学过五年的英文。

（b）我从五年前起开始学英文。

注　（a）意为到现在为止我一共学了五年。（b）意为从五年前开始学起，至今未停，一直在学。

47.（a）他到过纽约。

（b）他去了纽约。

注　（a）have been = have gone somewhere and come back 或 have come and gone away again，例如 I have been to（ = visited）Paris three times.（我到过巴黎三次。）（b） = he is now in New York or on the way there. 他已去了或正在去的途中。

48.（a）他们在花园里玩耍。

（b）他们说这话只是戏言。

注　at play，游戏，嬉戏。in play，玩笑，戏谑。

49.（a）他至急地做了那个。

（b）他慌忙地做了那个。

注　in haste，迅速，赶忙，急遽。in a hurry，匆匆，仓促，慌忙。英文的 in a hurry 另外还有两种惯用的说法（collq.）：

（1） = easily（容易地），例如：

You won’t find a better specimen than that in a hurry.（你一下子不容易找到更好的标本。）

（2） = willingly（愿意地），例如：

I shan’t ask him to dinner again in a hurry.（我不会愿意再请他吃饭的。）

50.（a）我没有什么可写的。

（b）我没有笔写。

（c）我没有纸写。

注　（a）write 为他动词，nothing 为其宾语。（b）（c）write 为自动词，nothing 仍为宾语。

51.（a）没有什么可看的。

（b）看不见什么。

注　（a）意为 nothing worth seeing.（b）意为 nothing visible.

52.（a）这样的人很难得寻获。

（b）这样的人差不多不能够找到。

53.（a）我悬念其结果。

（b）我亟欲知其结果。

注　anxious about “悬念”，“忧虑”。anxious＋Infinitive，意为“切望”，“渴望”。

54.（a）我未尝注意到他。

（b）我并未把他放在眼下。

注　（a）是无意的，（b）是有意的。

55.（a）她在街上遇见了一个朋友。

（b）她在街上遇见一桩事故。

注　meet with = come across；experience，是一个自动词，所以附有介词，普通对遇见事物而言，即遭遇，如云 meet with fortune.（success，failure，obstruction，kindness，rebuff，etc.）。但对人则通常是用他动词，所以不要附加介词，即可直接接宾语，除非意外地遇见什么人时才用自动词，如 Such a man is rarely to be met with.（这样的人真是少见。）

56.（a）此中有无困难呢？

（b）此中有点困难吧？

注　（a）是在完全不知有无困难时问的。（b）是在认为有点困难时问的。

57.（a）我和他一样很钦佩她。

（b）我很钦佩她，也很钦佩他。

58.（a）我想在这个月底付款。

（b）我想经过一个月再付款。

59.（a）我到达时还未开会。（正要开会）

（b）我到达时正开会。（刚刚开会）

注　in time，意为“及时”，时间比规定的略早，on time，意为“准时”，再迟则来不及了。如火车准时开行，则说 The train leaves exactly on time. 还有 in time 除 not late；early enough 的含义外，又有 sooner or later；after the passing of an indefinite period of time，例如 You will learn how to do it in time.（你慢慢就会知道做的。）

60.（a）我想这不会是真的。

（b）我看这恐怕不会是真的。

贰 常易译错的文句

Ⅰ. 中译英

1. What way shall I take to get to the park？

注　How shall I go 是问怎样去法，如坐计程汽车去，坐公共汽车去，或坐三轮车去之类。问路应说 What way 才得。

2. The lecture begins at two o’clock on Friday.

The lecture starts at two o’clock on Friday.

3. The scenery of China is very fine.

注　scenery 是集合名词，不可用复数。

4. They have no houses to live in.

5. He likes Hemingway better than Faulkner.

6. This watch wants repairing.

7. The family goes to church at 9 o’clock.

注　把全家的人看做一个整体，即一家人，应该接用单数动词。“去做礼拜”，英文应说 go to church，如果加了冠词说成 go to the church，便不是去做礼拜，而只是去参观礼拜堂的建筑。同样“上学读书”是 go to school，如说 go to the school，便是指校舍而言，与读书无关。

8. I was quite well that year，but ill the year before.

9. It is impossible to raise the sunken ship.

注　sunk 只能作叙述用法，要 sunken 才可作限定用法。

10. Come in the morning instead of in the evening.

11. His daughter married a rich man.

His daughter was married to a rich man.

注　中国语的“嫁”或“娶”，英文都是 marry。此外“主婚”也是 marry，例如 She is married to a foreigner.（她嫁给一个外国人。）He married a wife last year.（他在去年娶了妻。）He has been married two years.（他结婚两年了。）He wished to marry his daughter to a peer.（他希望把女儿嫁一个贵族。）The clergyman married Mary Jones to John Smith.（牧师主持玛利和约翰的婚礼。）

12. Why are you at home on such a fine day？

Why are you at home in such fine weather？

13. Make haste，or you will be behind time.

注　命令句接顺意的说法用 and，接逆意的说法用 or.

14. The night is falling and the road is coming to an end.

注　我们说的“日”英文应译作“夜”。中文的“日暮”除译作 The night is falling 外，又可译成 the night is closing in，或 night is coming 〔on〕，或 it is getting dark。中文的“途穷”，除如上照字面译出的以外，又可译为 no road ahead，或意译为 straitened，in poor circumstances 等。

15. I have been ill for a week.

I have been ill since last Monday.

注　ago 只能用于有过去动词的句中，它不能与现在完成时态同用。

16. Do you remember all the interesting stories you read when you were a boy？

注　副词子句应置于它所修饰的动词附近。这句中的副词子句 when you were a boy，是修饰动词 read 的，所以应紧接在 read 之后。

17. Looking out of our windshield，we could see the pagoda in the distance.

18. The ears of a hare are longer than those of a cat.

19. Have you been to America？

注　have gone 不能用于第一人称和第二人称，只能用于第三人称，意为“去了”。

20. He has been here once or twice.

21. I saw him yesterday.

注　现在完成时态不能与表过去的字连用。

22. I found the food very good，and enjoyed eating it.

23. I think of going home very soon.

I think I will go home very soon.

24. A man who is unable to write a letter，is incapable of holding an office of such importance.

25. He seems to have an aversion to speaking the truth.

26. The Chinese are a hard-working and industrious people.

27. May I use your telephone？

28. He was elected a councilman.

注　总统，市长，主席等独一无二的职位，不用冠词，其他如议员等，同样的职位有许多名存在，故必须加不定冠词，以示其中之一。

29. Mr. Wong returned to Singapore.

Mr. Wong went back to Singapore.

30. This report must be presented by the 6th of next month.

31. Please remind me to give it back.

Please remind me to return it.

32. I ordered ten books from New York.

33. I’m sure I can make myself understood in English.

34. I’m sure I can make you understand what I mean.

35. The motor car ran in the direction of the park.

The motor car ran towards the park.

36. I place no reliance upon his honesty.

I have no confidence in his honesty.

37. He entrusted a large sum of money to me.

He entrusted me with a large sum of money.

注　“entrust＋物＋to＋人”或“entrust＋人＋with＋物”。

38. Children are always in some mischief or other.

Children are always in one mischief or another.

39. I sympathize deeply with him in his sorrow.

注　“sympathize＋with＋人＋in＋事”。

40. He apologized to me for his mistake.

注　“apologize＋to＋人＋for＋事”。

41. Somebody said so，but I forgot who it was.

42. He has no other desire than to make a fortune.

He has no desire but to make a fortune.

43. Her dress does not conform with the fashion.

注　conform to（custom），从（俗），依照（习惯），是有意志的，至于 conform with（custom），（与习惯）相合，是无意志的。例如 Conform to the custom of the land，入国从俗。Your conduct does not conform with the custom. 你的行为不合习惯。

44. As you know，life is often compared to a voyage.

注　同种类的东西相比用 compare with，不同种类的东西相比，则要用 compare to，例句中 life 与 voyage 完全不同种类，故用 compare to 方合，再看下例 Famous as she is，she cannot be compared with him as a writer of tragedies.（她虽有名，但作为一个悲剧作者是不能和他相比的。）

45. Her expenditures do not correspond to her income.

注　correspond to（something），相当，相称，相配。correspond with（each other），一致，符合。例如 The punishment should correspond to the offence.（刑罚应与犯罪相当。）This house exactly corresponds with my needs.（这房子正符合我的需要。）又 correspond with，可作通信解，如 We have corresponded with each other for several years.（我们通信有好几年了。）

46. I condoled with him on his father’s death.

注　“condole＋with＋人＋on＋事”。

47. How many students came？

注　问句中有了疑问词时，就不要再加 do 了。

48. These are the people who，they say，are fools.

These are the people whom they call fools.

49. Taiwan is much larger than Singapore.

注　very 只能用于形容词的原级，如系比较级则要用 much，far，by far the 等字样。

50. It takes me five days to return home by steamer.

51. He entered at the back door.

He came in at the back door.

注　“出去”也要说 go out at the door.

52. The old man had his son die.

注　“have＋物＋过去分词”，如 have the box removed. 又“have＋人＋原形不定词”，如 have the servant remove the box.

53. This sewing machine is of Chinese make.

注　说何国制造而用 make 时，必须带有 of 的字样，如 of Chinese（English，American，Japanese）make，但如用 made 时则说 Chinese made 或 made in China，不要再加 of，如说 manufacture 也是要有 of 的，如 of Chinese manufacture（中国制造）。

54. I never saw so tall a man before.

I never saw such a tall man before.

注　用 so 或 such 时冠词的位置不同，应加注意。

55. He has the good sense to quit when he found the thing too difficult to do.

注　用 ability 也是一样，如 He has the ability to speak English clearly.

56. Marco Polo was born in 1254 into a Venetian merchant family.

注　说生于什么人家，即俗称投生于某家，故英文要用 into，不用 at。他例如 No man is born into this world whose work is not born with him.（James Russel Lowell）。如果是指由什么人即父母而生，则要用 of，例如 He was born of Chinese parents（of humble parentage，of poor fisherfolk in Holland 等）。但家庭在这种意义之下即可用 of，例如 He was born of a wealthy（noble，good）family. 又 But in every child born of man lurks some of greatness—waiting for the food.（H. G. Wells）（但是每个孩子都潜伏着有将来伟大的种子只等待加以培养。）生于什么人家，有时又可译成 to 字，例如 She was born to the purple；diamonds suited her.（她生于贵族之家，所以钻石是适合她的。）这个 to 是指的对象，如 Two children were born to them.（他们生有两个孩子。）Mark Twain was born to Samuel Langhorne Clemens，in Florida，Mo. November 30，1835.（马克·吐温以 1835 年 11 月 30 日，于密苏里州佛罗里达市，作为桑米·郎洪·克来门斯的儿子而出生的。）

57. He has taken the vase off the table.

58. The preface to “A Short History of China” is a short history of China.

59. The early education in our country grows very rapidly.

60. It is due to the outstanding professors on the various faculties that the University has won a worldwide fame.

Ⅱ. 英译中

1. 我的皮鞋穿破了。

注　这句话的意思是“因为穿得太久的结果，破烂不堪”。（My shoes are badly worn as the result of long wear.）他例如 He was plainly the worse for drink.（显明地他是喝醉了酒。）I am none the worse for a single failure.（一度失败我并不灰心。）

2. 大家听了他说的话都感愤怒。

注　原意为马缰的 bridle 一字，虽引申可作“控制”解，如 Try to bridle your temper.（设法控制你的脾气。）但用作自动词时，就作“昂首”（表示愤怒、傲慢或轻视）解，如 bridle up，bridle with anger，bridle at somebody’s remarks 等。例如 She bridles at the least slight.（她略为受到一点藐视就要昂首发怒。）

3. 学英文要尽力避免讲理论而不务实际。

注　形容词的 shy 普通作“羞怯的”解，如 I am shy of doing it.（我怕作此事。）又可作“畏缩的”解，如 The boatmen were shy of the rapids.（船夫畏惧险滩。）但此字因在动词 fight 后，就有“避开”，“敬远”（avoid，keep aloof from）之意。

4. 宁肯割断舌不愿塞住口的不止是妇女与法国人而已。

注　作“咬”字解的 bite，过去式为 bit，过去分词为 bitten，但作“装马口铁”，“抑制”，“约束”解的 bit. 过去和过去分词都是 bitted。这个 bit = mouth piece（metal bar），原是名词，由“马嚼口”引申为“拘束物”，“控制物”之意。再用作动词时，便意为“约束”，“控制”，例如 Tell him to put a bridle on his tongue.（告诉他说话要谨慎。）又可说 Curb your tongue.（少说话。）因为 bridle（马勒；缰辔）实包括全套马头上的配备：马嚼铁（metal bit），皮带（straps）及缰（reins），在马嚼铁外有马衔（curb），在皮带靠近两眼处又有遮眼革（blinkers），这一切总称为 bridle. 参看上面第二例。

5. 他刚在一星期前结了婚。

注　句中的 change 改为 alter 也是一样，condition 普通指健康状态，此处指生活状态。

6. 他接受女方提出的求婚而结婚了。

注　闰年不比常年，闰年提出的求婚，当然也是不平常的，普通总是男方向女方提出求婚，现反过来由女方提出，故云。

7. 他把我的忠告当作耳边风。

注　fall flat 这个成语有二义：（1）直挺地跌倒（be prostrate），如 The wounded man staggered，and fell flat on the floor.（伤者蹒跚了几步，使直挺地倒在地上。）（2）终于完全失败，毫无反应，一点效力也没有，如 His best jokes fell flat.（他最好的笑话也未能使人发笑。）现将此成语译成中国成语的耳边风（preaching to the wind）似乎是再恰当也没有了。

8. 在鸡尾酒会上你常可看出大人物和无名小卒来。那些迟到的人就是大人物。

注　作名词用的 somebody 是与 nobody 对称的，前者为大人物，后者为微不足道的人。He thinks himself to be somebody.（他自以为了不得。）In a small village you are somebody，but you become nobody when you come to a big city.（你在小村庄很了不起，到大城市就变得微不足道了。）

9. 当选的职员任期至一九七三年年底为止。

注　sit = occupy a seat，就某种职位，成为议员、委员或职员。注意后面接的介词，sit in Parliament（做议员），sit on a committee（当委员），sit for a constituency（在议会中成为某选区的代表）。

10. 他用钱豪爽。

注　这个 with 不作“持有”解，而作“关于”解。free with，意为“大方的”，“不吝啬的”（lavish）。例如 He is very free with his advice. = He gives plenty of advice.（他给与很多的忠告。）如说 make free with = use anotner person’s things as if they were one’s own，当作自己的一样随便使用别人的东西。例如 They entered the house and made free with whatever they could lay their hands on.（他们一进屋内，随意取用所有的东西。）

11. 向法国去定了一架飞机。

注　普通作“从”解的 from，与 order 连用时，就有“向”的意，不是“从法国来定”，而是“向法国去定”。

12. 她的丈夫死了至今不过半年。

注　这句英文意为 It is only six months since she became a widow. 若译成“只做了六个月的寡妇”，则不免有很快再嫁之嫌。

13. 你的损失和我的比较起来真算不了什么。

注　nothing to mine 中的 to，有比较的意思。

14. 他在除夕出发了。

注　eve 和 evening 二字虽是同根生，然其含义则大不相同。eve 为节日等的前夜或前日，如 Christmas Eve（耶诞的前夜），on the eve of victory（胜利的前夜），故 New Year’s Eve 为除夕，而非元旦（New Year’s Day）的夜晚。

15. 他将表托我保管。

注　“leave＋宾语＋介词＋人”，意为“将某物（事）托付某人”。I’ll leave the matter to him.（这事我交给他去处理。）I left a message with your servant.（我留言要你的佣人转告你。）

16. 他假装没有生病。

注　not 是否定 to be 一个不定词的。He did not pretend to be ill，才是“没有假装生病”。

17. 他说：“我以为不然。”

注　这个 not 不是修饰 think 的，而是后面接着的否定句所留下的代表，意为 I think it is not so. 如果照误译句的意思，英文是说 I do not think so. 比较：I am afraid not.（我恐怕不是那样。）I am not afraid.（我不怕。）

18. 到今年耶诞时就是两年了。

注　come Christmas 的说法，据《牛津简明辞典》的解释是 including the time from now to Christmas（包括从现在到耶诞日的时间）。come Christmas = if Christmas comes（如果到了耶诞日的话），是假设的用法（suppositional use）。命令句是有这种假设用法的，如 Give me good fortune（ = if good fortune is given me），I will strike him dead.（Tennyson）（时运来时，我就要将他打死。）莎剧 Romeo and Juliet 中有句：Come Lammas-eve at night shall she be fourteen.（到收获节的前夕，她就有十四岁了。）

19. 百万富翁都具有这种思想。

注　men of millions 不可与 millions of men 混同。

20. 他迟到了。

注　behind time = late，迟到。behind the times，时代落伍。

21. 他上楼去了。

注　普通说“上楼”，多半是指“到二楼去”，英文说，He went upstairs. 句中的 upstairs 为副词，是修饰动词 went 的。若分开写成二字的 up stairs，则不论二楼也好，四楼也好，无论哪一层楼，只要是走上楼去就是了。

22. 一朝醒来，自己已经成为一个破产的人了。

注　one fine morning 中的 fine 一字，实无意义，可以不译，其用法与 one of these fine days（不久总有一天）相同。find oneself，不知不觉间，而自己已变成了。他例如 She found herself a mother at fifteen.（她刚十五岁不知不觉之中已做了母亲。）

23. 他的英文毫无遗憾。

注　nothing to be desired，不能指望更好。至于婉言某人对于某事不好，还应多多努力，也可用此表现法：In her English there is still much to be desired.（她的英文实尚未能副我们的期望。）

24. 注意使一切平善。

注　take care that = see（to it）that，当心，注意。他例如 Take care that the quality is satisfactory.（注意要使品质满意。）Take care that you don’t get knocked down when you cross the road.（小心过街以免撞倒。）

25. 他一进房就跌倒在地板上。

26. 我们搜查过了他的身上，但毫无所得。

注　寻找一个人的踪迹，是 search for a person，单说 search a person，意为搜查一个人的身上看有无违禁品之类。to no purpose = with no result. 无结果。

27. 我回家时遇见一个孕妇。

注　with child 怀着孩子，with a child 携着孩子。

28. 他承继了一笔大的财产。

注　succeed in，成功。succeed to，承继，如 Who will succeed to his office when he resigned？（他辞职后谁来继任？）

29. 他抓住了我的手。

注　他例如 He pulled me by the sleeve.（他拉住我的衣袖。）He struck me on the head.（他打了我的头。）

30. 我穿什么出去呢？

注　这个 in 意为 dressed in（穿衣）。他例如 I have nothing to go in.（我没有衣服穿着出去。）普通说 She is in red.（她穿的红衣。）

31. 他说话无心。

注　mean 除“意义”外，还有“意谓”，have in mind（心有成竹）的意思。I mean what I say. 说话作数，决非口是心非。What do you mean by saying that？（你说那话是什么意思？）

32. 今晚不要喝酒。

注　alcohol 原意为酒精引申为酒，如 His doctor told him not to touch alcohol.（医生要他不要喝酒。）由 no 开头的句子有禁止意。

33. c-a-m-e-l 拼成一个什么字？

注　spell 除作“拼”解外，还有“拼成一字”（make up a word）的意思。如照误句的意思应说 How do you spell camel？

34. 他对那工作已厌倦了。

注　“疲劳”为 tired with，“厌倦”为 tired of = sick of.

35. 人生常常譬作航海。

注　compare to（for dissimilar things），是“譬喻”的意思，compare with（for similar things）是“比较”。Some people have compared books to friends.（有人以书喻友。）Artificial light cannot compare with day light for general use.（在一般的用途上，人造光是不能与日光比较的。）

36. 宁为鸡先，勿为牛后。

注　在 than 后省去了不定词的 to.

37. 爱荷华州州长休士，已经把他自己被州内一致推举出来提名竞选总统的候补资格撤销，而随后不久就宣布他支持明尼苏达州的参议员麦卡席竞选。

注　favorite son = a candidate favored by the political leaders of his own State，city，etc. for nomination to a high office，especially the presidency. 由其州内的政治领袖们所推举出来的总统候选人。

38. 如果今天举行选举的话，我们就用不着要感谢上帝了。

注　既然失败，自然不必感谢上帝了。have a prayer = offer a prayer of thankfulness 或 a prayer of thanks to God.

39. 我宁愿他不在此。

注　句中 room 作“余地”解，company 作“伴侣”解。his room 指“他的余地”或“他的空间”，即空了他，也就是说他不在。例句全文意为“与其跟他同席，宁愿他不在场的好”，简译成“我宁愿他不在此”。

40. 说女人不会驾车实有疑问的余地。

注　在 open 后无 to 者，如 an open question（尚未解决的问题），但有 to 时，如 open to = not protected 易受……的，招致……的。His conduct is open to grave objections.（他的行为易受严重的反对。）The evidence is open to doubt.（证据有可疑的余地。）

41. 那迷失的孩子很快就认明身份了。

42. 他致意你。

注　remember A to B，意为 A 向 B 致意。

43. 我近来简直没有看见他。

注　nothing of 为副词用法，意为“一点也没有”。

44. 他把他所有的少许东西，也分配给穷人了。

注　with the poor 是接 shared 说的，不是接 had 的。

45. 无钱购买的东西，只好不要。

注　what you cannot afford to buy 是 do without 宾语。

46. 做了的事不能取消。

注　这句话用主动语态说便是 we cannot undo what we do.

47. 她相信他诚实地这样说了。

注　so 是修饰 said 的，不是修饰 honestly.

48. 它们打成碎片了。

注　a dozen 不一定是说十二，在此只是表示多数。

49. 新生之犊不畏虎。

注　意为什么都不懂的人什么都不怕。

50. 这画是模仿吴昌硕画的。

51. 他知道让孩子游荡下去是很不好的。

注　have a boy idle（让孩子游荡）和 have an idle boy（有懒惰的孩子）大不相同，前者的 idle 为 have 的补语。

52. 不喜欢做并不是不能做的证明。

注　it 的真正的主语，不是 that 以下的文句，而是 because 以下的文句。

53. 那些是我买的新书。

注　new 是补语。

54. 他从朋友处借了马来。

注　of = from，用法与 buy of 或 receive of 中的 of 相同。

55. 他一点钟走了十英里。

注　cover 与距离连用时，意为“通过”，“走过”，如：These cars cover 200 miles a day.（这些车一天能走二百英里。）

56. 他随意自斟自酌。

注　help oneself to，自己取用。

57. 我认为激烈的男性的运动是好的。

注　believe in，一般都作“相信”解，但在此意为“相信有效”，“相信是好的”，“信以为真”。

58. 他没有看完那部影片。

注　see……out，看到最后为止。

59. 不幸有八十人死亡。

注　poor = unfortunate，可怜，不幸。

60. 他没有说一点含有那种意思的话。

注　to that effect 中的 effect = meaning. 他例如 He wrote to that effect.（他写的大意如此。）The letter is to the effect that……（那信的大意为……）

叁 翻译实例

Ⅰ. 中译英

（1）（a）One of the best ways to make the world peaceful and happy is for every individual to keep within his own province，refraining from encroaching upon others’. If a family follows this way，that family will be free from worry；if a nation follows this way，that nation will be at peace；and if the entire world follows this way，it will find itself in perfect peace.

（b）In order to secure（or bring about）a happy and peaceful world，we must first of all，limit our activity within our own spheres，strictly refraining from trespassing upon others’. Suppose that this rule is observed in all families，countries of the world，surely there will be no trouble in them all.

（c）“Just sweep away the snow in front of your own house，and never mind the frost on other people’s roof，” as the Chinese proverb says，may be the best way to bring about a happy and peaceful world. So long as we limit our activity within our own spheres，strictly refraining from trespassing upon others’，we can surely win peace in the family，in the country as well as in the world.

（2）Learning is one’s own business，which cannot rely upon others. It will certainly be of great help，if there are good environment，sufficient books and equipment，as well as instructions and enlightenments from scholarly mentors and benefitial friends. But even if you have got all these favorable conditions，you cannot be sure to succeed in learning，for not a few people who have successful in learning are not armed with all these things. The most impottant factor consists in one’s own effort. To learn is rather a painstaking and persevering business. Many a man is a failure because he cannot bear such indispensable hardships.

（3）“As I want to know more of London，will you please tell me where shall I go first，Parliament or Downing Street？” I once asked the advice of my landlady. The old woman shook her head and replied，“Why should you go to those places？You had better go to Hyde Park first. You will understand from there how our England has got Parliament and Downing Street.” Of course，she meant to say it is the spirit of the English people that has made the English politics，in other words，it is not because of Parliament and the Cabinet that England has got its democratic politics，but because of the people with their democratic spirit that there comes to be the English Parliament as well as the English Cabinet. Hyde Park is the very place where democratic spirit is fully demonstrated.

（4）Virtuousness is synonymous with beauty. We feel the beauty of a thing when it has come to realization ideally. By ideal realization we mean that a thing has displayed fully its true nature. Therefore，as a flower is at its best when it has revealed its natural character，a man may be said to have reached the zenith of his beauty when he has made the fullest use of human nature.

（5）Morals cannot be inculcated by means of spoken or written words. Those who have never been treated kindly must end their days without realizing what kindness is. To treat others with kindness，therefore，is to teach them what this virtue is. As the saying goes：Those who teach in word will be criticized，and those who teach in deed will have their followers.

（6）The implement of literature is the language. First we have to know the language，and then we must be armed with the craft of using it. The thing looks easy，as all of us are using the language every day，but it is really difficult，because literature is something that is expressed by ordinary language to produce an extraordinary effect. A man of letters must apprehend the language more precisely and thoroughly than the ordinary people，so that he can use it at his will. He must understand the form，the sound，and the meaning of a word，as well as the effects of the arrangements of words in connexion with the sound and meaning to be felt by the reader. This will involve such knowledge as philology，logic，grammar，aesthetics，and psychology……If a man is to create some literature of the first class，he must，besides other conditions，have profound knowledge of the language，so as to be able to express any idea and express it effectively.

（7）Chuang-tzu went out for pleasure with his friend Hui-tzu on the bridge over River Hao.

“How happily those little silver fish are swimming in the water！I wish I were a fish，too，” said Chuang-tzu.

At this Hui-tzn said，“You aren’t a fish，are you？How can you know whether the fish are happy or not？”

“You aren’t me，” retorted the other，“how do you know that I do not know the happiness of the fish？”

“Quite so，” Hui-tzu said，taking advantage of what the other had said. “It is true that I don’t know your happiness because I am not you，and for the same reason，you don’t know the happiness of the fish，because you are not a fish. Isn’t it clear enough？”

（8）As everyone knows，four or five o’clock is tea time in England. The Prime Minister，fashion models，policemen—very likely even robbers too—must have their afternoon tea.

A cup of tea，with toast or biscuit，with a bit of conversation. This is the scene to be witnessed everywhere in England at four or in the average home. For women office workers，the “tea break” is a welcome relief from the day’s busy work. Even soldiers at the battlefront will take time out for tea，if circumstances permit. It is a firm British tradition.

（9）（a）Everybody knows of St. Valentine’s Day，a “love day” to admire sweethearts. Its origin is rather old and goes back to the Roman times. Young men chose their sweethearts by picking from a lottery box the names of girls who lived nearby. In the Middle Ages St. Valentine’s Day came to be held on February 14th，and people in Europe and America developed a variety of new ways to celebrate the day.

Although it may seem odd to oriental people，a young man would kiss the first girl whom he met on that day.

In the 19th century people began sending beautiful verses and cards particular to that day，and exchanging gifts.

Today it is a popular custom from people to send cards not only to their sweethearts but to their parents and teachers as well.

（b）St. Valentine’s Day is known as a “love day” honoring sweethearts. Its origin goes back to the Roman times. In those days young men picked their own sweethearts by drawing from a lottery box the names of young girls living in the same towns and villages. During the Middle Ages，the date of the St. Valentine’s festival is supposed to have been fixed on February 14th，and people in Europe and America found new ways to celebrate the day. Strange as it may seem to some orientals，young men would kiss the first lady whom they happened to meet on that day. In the 19th century young people started sending beautifully decorated verses and cards specially designed for this day，and also began exchanging gifts. Today not only to particular persons like sweethearts，but also to parents and teachers as well，people often send cards on this day.

（10）（a）My parents’property on the River Yonne offered few distractions. I would go down to the river bank，occasionally look for a moment at the weeds floating yellow on the surface，then choose little flattened stones to send skimming over the water like darting swallows.

The house where we lived was long and grey. A field stretched down from it to the River Yonne full of foam，which was girdled by flights of swallows in the sky and poplars on the field. One in particular I loved to lie under. I was surprised to see myself smile in the grass. I did not stop myself from smiling，nor could I.（in British English）

（b）My parents’place on the Yonne River offered little to do. I used to go down to the bank of the stream，now and then look for a while at the formations of yellow algae on the surface and then skip flat stones across the water，which moved as swiftly as swallows.

Our house was long and gray. A meadow ran down to the foamflecked Yonne River，with swallows soaring overhead and poplar trees on the ground bordering each side. There was one poplar，in particular，in whose shade I liked to lie. I saw myself smile. I did try to prevent it，could not even if I had tried.（in American English）

注　本文是从现代法国女作家沙冈的小说《微笑》（Un Certain Sourire）中取出来的，用英国话和美国话分别加以译出。英语译文由英国人罗爵斯执笔，美语译文由美国人加查林女士执笔。

Ⅱ. 英译中

（1）当作一个朋友你是一个非常奇怪的人！常常要我在任何人的面前来弹唱！如果我的虚荣心转向音乐方面的话，那你对我倒是很有价值的鼓励；可惜像我现在这样，我真是不愿坐在那些必然是便于听最好的演奏的人们面前来献丑。

注　1. by way of：“作为”，“当作”。例如 He said something by way of an apology.（他说了一点道歉的话。）2. take a musical turn：这个 turn 的意思是“转机”，“改变”，“变化”的意思。例如 The sick person has taken a turn for the better.（病人情形有了好转。）

（2）从那以来已经有二十年了。他一直在忙着和一些贵妇们通信，而他写的信都是很有趣而健谈的。对于那些有爵位的人，他从来没有失去爱好的心情，在《泰晤士报》上所刊登的人物往来的报导，他都要很注意地来看的。他对于通知诞生，死亡，结婚的一栏，也看得很仔细，随时都准备好，要去信道贺或是悼唁。

（3）一个作家必须尽力来给它传达思想的，原只限于他自己的一代，而他要让后继的一代去选择他们自己的代言人，实为明智的办法。不管他要不要这样做，他们终归是会这样做的。他所说的这一套，他们是不会懂得的。

注　1. exponent：代言人，代表者（ = representative）。例如 This form of discontent found its exponent in Mr. A.（对于这种不满，A 氏以代表人物的姿态出现。）

（4）世间一般认作爱好自然的人，屡屡地常被指责为多情善感，而这种指责常是颇为中肯的。照那些指责者的说法，他只是一味花香鸟语，说个不停而已。他忽视了事物的黑暗面，拿庆贺佳节时的祝颂语句的词意来看这个世界。

（5）基于对事实的一种故意使之不完全的想法，而具有错误的感情，也被谴责为伤感的话，那么，说大自然经常是狂暴而残酷的那种想法，也和反对论调同样是感情用事。大自然的特质，既不是慈爱的母性，也不是血染的爪牙。

注　1. be guilty of：犯（commit）。例如 You have been guilty of a serious blunder.（你犯过一个大错。）又有“有……缺点”的意思，例如 be guilty of breach of good manners.（违反礼节。）be guilty of bad taste（低级趣味。）I was guilty of great impoliteness.（我大为失礼。）2. red in tooth and claw. 爪牙染血。（见 Tennyson 的名作：In Memoriam，LV.）

（6）人类的创造力，在征服黑暗的努力上，大概是比在其他任何方面，都要来得活跃。在人类与黑暗奋斗的当中，灯光是人类自力供给的最初的必需品之一。虽然，黑暗也有它的好处，当夜幕下降，大自然便准备着来休息和睡眠，而在那种夜的寂静之中，人类便得为第二天的职责及任务，而恢复心身的力量。

注　1. in nothing have……powers been so active as in his. = powers have been so active in nothing as in his.

2. triumph over：征服，胜过。3. is among： = is one of. 例如 Light is among the first needs. = Light is one of the first things that were needed.（光明是首要的必需品之一。）4. in his struggle against it： = when he was struggling against darkness.

5. burden：重荷，费力的任务。6. nature prepares itself for：便进入……的状态。

（7）这种团结的逐渐实现，也许是由于科学进步所促成的工艺进步的结果。那种进步使得各大城市间的距离缩短，市场不断扩大。但是若把这种工艺上的统一当作主要的原因，就不免带有成见，而完全是一种不当的想法。

注　1. unwarranted：不当的。动词 warrant，有“证明……为正当”的意思。2. preconceive：预想，例如 a preconceived idea（或 notion）（成见，偏见，先入为主的意见）。3. solidarity：团结。Cf. solidity：团体性，充实，坚固，坚实，体积。

（8）一个肥胖的老妇人，手上提着一个篮子，在彼得堡的马路当中走着。一时使得交通大为混乱，她自己也冒上很大的危险。有人向她指明，走路的人应该在人行道上走，她却回答说：“现在革过命了，我们获得了自由。我喜欢在哪里走，就可以在哪里走呀。”那个老妇人却有所不知，如果允许走路的人走到马路当中去，那么也要让开车的人把车子开到人行道上来，这样自由的结果，会要造成普遍的混乱是无疑的。

注　1. Petrograd：为 1914 到 1924 年苏联的首都，后改名为 Leningrad. 2. no small： = great.

3. occur to：心中想到。4. entitle：使有资格，使有权。例如 This ticket entitles you to a free lunch.（凭此券可免费午餐一次。）You are not entitled to sit here.（你没有资格坐在此地。）

（9）因为愚笨地妄自尊大，我尝拿一个人的智力和学识来判断他的真价：认为不合逻辑的就不好，没有学问的就不美。现在我以为我们必须把两种不同的智力分别一下才是。知识的智力和感情的智力，而我觉得后者比前者重要得多。

注　logic：与前面说的 intellectual power 相呼应。2. learning 与前面说的 attainment 相呼应。3. the brain：理智。4. the heart：感情。

（10）受过教育的人，是被认为知道什么是人间不正的行为，及应该怎样去加以纠正的。如果他的教育达到某种程度的话，那便能促进他明确的思考能力——找出事物的因果关系，进而明悉政治上，社会上，经济上，和工业上的病根。谁也无权认定教育只是为个人的利益的，使他能够更加飞黄腾达。他必须把教育视为加诸其身的一种责任，用来造福人群才对。但大多数的人都把教育认为是他们所私有，而不了解那是应与他人分享的，应该用来增进社会一般福利的。

注　1. amount to anything：达到某种程度。2. clearly and scientifically：明确地。3. be more prosperous and happy in the world：更加飞黄腾达。4. at large：一般的。例如 Did the people at large approve of the war？（一般的人都赞成打仗吗？）

出版后记

在钱歌川先生编写的大量英语教学资料中，《翻译的技巧》是最富盛名的。

能让那么多的读者从中获益，端赖于这本书是在他数十年从事翻译教学工作的基础上，花费十年的工夫，反复修订校改，于七十岁高龄才付梓出版，可谓浓缩了钱先生英语知识的精华，供读者学习汲取。

钱先生长期身处教学第一线，最明白不过所谓技巧，无非是尊重学习的规律，由点滴积累的量变促成质变的飞升，这是他在《翻译的基本知识》一书中反复强调的。是以这本书的编排，并非是零碎技巧的补丁集合，也没有什么一招鲜的秘诀，而是从英语语法的梳理开始，经由对 11 项 134 条语法知识点的讲解，再上升到段落篇章的翻译。这样的科学的系统化的编排方式，使得无论是想提升自己的英语翻译水平还是希望夯实自己的英语知识的读者，都可以依照本书，循序渐进地学习下去。是以，钱先生在序言中所言，“像本书这样有系统，有方法，来研究翻译的书，似乎还不多见，也可说是破天荒之举”，绝非自夸之词。

钱先生不仅熟习英语，中文的功底也是相当了得。书中中文段落，有些选自中国的古书和明清小品，翻译文言文的过程，最能体现钱先生在《翻译的基本知识》中强调的“首先要了解原文”，读者在对文言原文字句意思的推敲琢磨中，自觉地锻炼严复强调的信达雅的原则。

本书的附录选取了 16 篇当时欧美文学名著中的段落进行摘译。我们从钱先生对名家名作的解说中可以看到，钱先生非常熟悉欧美文坛的动态，其阅读量之大，评论之中允深刻才情横溢，提醒了我们学习英语一定要建立在大量的阅读和思考之上，非一朝一夕之功可成。

本书简体版曾于 1981 年由商务印书馆精装出版，市面上早已难以买到。鉴于当今中国与世界接轨的步伐越来越快，英语学习的热潮前所未有的高涨，我们认为这样一本扎实丰厚的英语教本可以让读者少走很多弯路，进行有效的学习，重新出版是非常必要的，希望这本书的再版能够为读者答疑解惑。

在此感谢帮助我们联系版权的张兆龙先生，他的热心帮助促成了钱歌川先生的作品在大陆的出版。我们接下来还要出版《英语疑难详解》、《英语疑难详解续编》，敬请期待。

服务热线：133-6631-2326　139-1140-1220

服务信箱：teacher@hinabook. com

后浪出版咨询（北京）有限责任公司
2011 年 7 月

英文疑难详解

钱歌川　著

版权信息

书名：英文疑难详解

作者：钱歌川

书号：978-7-5596-1271-7

版权：后浪出版咨询（北京）有限责任公司

目录

Ⅰ 名 词

1. 无生物主语

2. 代替time的各种不同的名词

3. raise one’s hand用复数人称时，名词也改复数

4. 不可以说“I am a good friend with him.”

5. 美国大学教师的名称

6. madam和madame在用法上的分别

7. 用名词表动作

8. 双重属格的用法

9. 属格的主格作用和宾格作用

10. 属格代名词的绝对型，反身属格的用法

11. 抽象名词用作普通名词

12. friendship一字的单复数

Ⅱ 代名词

13. 不可以说“I think to do so my duty.”，须用代名词it来代替不定词，而说成“I think it my duty to do so.”

14. 用that代单数名词，those代复数名词

15. 代普通名词的it和one的用法

16. that代有定冠词的名词，one代有不定冠词的名词

17. one、a one、the one、ones的分别

18. 指同一人不可随意改变人称

19. it的误用

20. 关系代名词的误用

21. 代名词应有所代表

22. this的误用

23. they的误用

24. whose duty it is to do中it的用法

25. 作关系代名词用的as

26. 代名词的格

27. 代名词的I和he（或you）的排列次序

28. do so和do it等的用法

Ⅲ 形容词、副词

29. 形容词最上级不加冠词的用法

30. most、a most、the most

31. 副词最上级前加冠词的用法

32. 比较级形容词前加冠词

33. the more . . . the more中the为副词

34. enough修饰形、副、动时，置于其后

35. 无冠词的普通名词加enough的用法

36. young enough和old enough

37. 不可以说“I am glad enough to see you.”

38. 部分否定

39. 两种形容词

40. when的七种用法

41. India paper和Indian paper

42. never的位置

43. 副词not应置于分词knowing之前

44. 有-ly的副词和没有-ly的副词

45. 数字的修饰语

46. 形容词地位的先后

47. pretty的比较级

48. 作愚笨解的fat

49. 副词的位置

50. especially和specially

51. long与for a long time的分别

52. everyday和every day

53. sometime和sometimes

Ⅳ 冠 词

54. 选举的总统名词前不用冠词，议员前须加冠词

55. 说某人是议员，则有加冠词和不加的两种用法

56. people和a people

57. 复数名词前加用不定冠词

58. 物质名词前加用冠词变成普通名词

59. catch cold和catch a cold

60. We had heavy rain和We had a heavy rain

61. go to school和go to the school

62. Americans和The Americans

63. in a family way和in the family way

64. in spring和in the spring

65. 不定冠词的用法

66. 定冠词的用法

Ⅴ 动 词

67. She will make him a good wife

68. She will make a good wife

69. 借电话的说法

70. 接电话的说法

71. 不可以说“The school has many students.”

72. speak、say、tell等字的意义及用法

73. “Care killed the cat.”中的过去动词

74. “one of +名词”后面附句中的动词的数，要以那名词为准

75. 动词后接表示动作的字可分三种

76. 自动词的被动语态

77. My uncle remembered me on my birthday

78. 不可以说“I am having money.”

79. 时态的一致和不一致

80. 假设语气的用法

81. 假设语气的时态和实际时间的比较

82. 完全他动词和不完全他动词

83. dative verb的用法

84. factitive verb的用法

85. be going to的用法

86. It is a dream come true

Ⅵ 助动词

87. “Have you？”和“Do you have？”

88. It is . . . that . . . should中should的含义

89. can not、cannot、can’t

90. must的主要用法

91. must和have to的分别

92. must用于过去时态

93. would和used to的分别

94. “Used you to do？”和“Did you use to do？”

95. shall和will的用法

96. 用will、would表示现在推量

97. ought to的用法

98. need的用法

99. dare的用法

Ⅶ 准动词

100. megafeps

101. I am afraid的三种不同的接法

102. 无to的不定词

103. 不可以说after the war being over

104. “be +不定词”的用法

105. 名词后接用的不定词

106. so as to do和so . . . as to do

107. too . . . to do

108. 不定词的否定

109. not too . . . to do和too . . . not to do

110. but +不定词

111. say +不定词

112. 美国话中的现在分词的用法

113. want和need后接动名词或不定词

Ⅷ 连 词

114. because、for、since、as

115. because与否定

116. though和although

117. though的误用

118. after用作连词或介词

119. doubt后的连词用whether或是that

120. and和数目字

121. 中文连词“而”字的译法

Ⅸ 介 词

122. “假期从明天开始”不可译作“The vacation begins from tomorrow.”

123. from、since、for三个说时间的介词

124. 介词的宾语

125. except和excepting的分别

126. government of the people是主格作用还是宾格作用

127. dependent on和independent of

128. 被动语态后接用的介词

129. “Money cannot buy happiness.”的被动语态

130. 作“用作”解的as与for

131. 表示附带状况的with

132. what with和what by

133. There is something vulgar about him

134. listen to、listen for、listen in的分别

135. as against、as by、as concerning、as from、as of

136. know of him和 know him

137. believe in a person和believe a person

138. 介词的省略

139. at、in、of、on、to等省略的用例

140. “以上”“以下”“以前”“以后”“起”“讫”等的译法

141. at the beginning和in the beginning

Ⅹ 文句及表现法

142. 名词放在主句，代名词放在附句

143. I am sorry、Thank you、Pardon三个口头语

144. charade

145. It is . . . that-Clause后的假设语气和直陈语气

146. It is + that-Clause和 It is + Infinitive

147. You don’t say和Don’t tell me

148. “I am So-and-so.”和“My name is So-and-so.”

149. There + be的表现法

150. 作understatement用的rather

151. Mrs. + 丈夫姓名

152. 用不定词或动名词取代子句

153. be supposed to的译法

154. “Do you know who he is？”和“ Who do you think he is？”

155. Who do you think is the best player？

156. I don’t think的句型

157. had better、would better，had rather、would rather

158. 美国语中the way的用法

159. 同一意义的26种表现法

160. 海明威说的“They were as old as erosions in a fishless desert.”句中erosion一字的译法

161. tag question的表现法

162. do with的三种意义及understatement

163. 主语和动词在数上的不一致

164. DRINKA PINTA MILKA

Ⅺ 单字研究及辨异

165. awake、awaken、wake、waken

166. simulate和dissimulate

167. habit和custom

168. “This is mere apology for soup.”句中的 apology

169. business、calling、employment、occupation、profession、trade等作“职业”解的字

170. in the dark和 in the darkness

171. a horse、the horse、horses、the horses

172. turtle和tortoise

173. difference和 discrepancy

174. rise、 arise、raise、rouse、arouse

175. worth和 worthy

176. 关于“水”流的声音和动态的字

177. content和contents

178. 名词单复数的意义不同

179. 表“群”的字

180. 关于“雨水”的字

181. offer的译法

Ⅻ 中英不同的表现法

182. “我有三姊妹”英文说“I have two sisters.”

183. 不可以说“It is faithful for you to do so.”，但又可以说 “It is necessary for you to do so.”

184. “It is necessary for you to do so.”和“It is very kind of you to do so.”

185. 可以说“How kind of you！”，但不能说“How beautiful of her！”

186. 不可以说you are convenient！

187. “亡羊补牢”的英译

188. “逆来顺受”的英译

189. “乔迁之喜”的英译

ⅫⅠ 成语的意义和用法

190. shock absorber

191. Diamond cut diamond

192. a Chinaman’s chance

193. jam tomorrow

194. take a person for granted

195. all Greek to me

196. at large

197. Scotch on the rocks

198. as follows

199. give the cold shoulder to

200. a number of和the number of

出版后记

Ⅰ 名 词

1. 无生物主语

“His work made it impossible for him to get home oftener than every other weekend.”这句英文，意义易于了解，但难于翻译。今译作“他的工作使他不能比隔周一次的周末更时常地回家”。感到不像中文，不知应该怎样翻译才好？

【解答】上面这句英文，确是很难译成中文，原因是其中有些表现法是英文特有的，和中国语法不同，我们翻译时生怕背离原意，力求忠于原文，故产生上举的译文。这毛病在于过分的直译，作为一个中文句子来看，就感到不自然了。

这句英文的表现法和中文最不相同的地方，就在用“无生物主语”的上面。我们说中文时，惯常都要用人或生物做主语，而英文则爱用无生物做主语。例如说：

If you take this medicine，you will feel better.

（你吃了这药就会好些。）

这是接近中文的说法，英文惯常的表现法却是：

This medicine will make you feel better.

意思还是一样，不宜直译为：“这药会使你觉得好些。”遇到这种英文句子的时候，最好是把那无生物的主语当作副词来译，再把人作为主语，这个原则是可以奉行的。所以问题中的句子，原用his work作主语，译时最好改用“他”作主语，全句我想这样翻译：

他因工作关系，只能隔周在周末回家一次。

和上例类似的表现法，我们还可以举出一些例句：

His wealth enables him to do anything.（他有钱什么都可以做。）〔He can do anything because he is rich.〕

The sight of the orphan always reminds me of her parents.（一见到那孤儿，我就想到她的父母。）〔Whenever I see the orphan，I remember her parents.〕

Bad weather prevented us from starting.（天气太坏，我们无法动身。）〔We could not start because of bad weather.〕

Careful comparison of them will show you the difference.（你只消仔细比较一下，就可发现不同。）〔If you compare them carefully，you will see the difference.〕

再看下面两个例句：

A few steps across the lawn brought me to a large，splendid hotel.（走过草地几步，我就到了一个华丽的大旅馆。）

A bit of knowledge kept me from making a big mistake when an important question was to be decided.（我因稍具知识，所以在决定重要问题的时候，还没有犯大的错误。）

在以上这种句子中与无生物主语同用的动词，以make为首，另外还有enable、remind、prevent、show、bring、keep等等。英文的这种表现法，虽有时比较难译，但它最具有英文的味道，我们学写英文或学说英语时，也要多多注意这种和中文不同的地方，才能造出更合标准的语句。

2. 代替time的各种不同的名词

“我和王君久别重逢。”译成英文为：“I met Mr. Wang again after a long parting.”。不知译得正确否？

【解答】英文的part是讲离别的动作，动名词parting的意思还是如此，如“她在临别时哭了”（She cried at parting）、“临别赠言”（parting words）、“临别的一吻”（a parting kiss）。如果是说离别的期间，就应该说separation，例如：

They were very pleased to meet after such a long separation.（久别重逢，他们非常高兴。）

因此，问题中的译文也应改为：

I met Mr. Wang after a long separation.

在after a long后面的名词，可随时改用他字。如：

I received a letter from him after a long silence.（许久未通讯，最近才接到他来函。）

I went out for a walk after a long interval.（好久没有出外散步，这回才去了。）

He returned to his native village after a long absence.（他出门很久才回故乡。）

这种说法都是for a long time的变化，如after a long separation就等于说whom I had not seen for a long time，而after a long absence就等于说where he had not been for a long time。诸如此类，斟酌情形，是可以采用各种不同的名词来代替time的。

3. raise one’s hand用复数人称时，名词也改复数

“举手”英文说raise one’s hand，是举起一只手来；如遇到强盗，表示不抵抗时，即说hold up one’s hands，是举起双手。通常表示赞成，大家举手时，也说raise their hand行吗？因为若说raise their hands，岂不是每人举起双手来了吗？到底应该用单数还是复数？

【解答】这确是英文的一种不完善的地方，也只怪得人类的双手常不同时动作的缘故，如果是眼睛就没有这个问题，因为两个人仰视时说raise their eyes，一个人时还是raise his eyes。一个人举手时说raise his hand，自然很清楚，表示只举一只手，但多数人时，则说：

They all raised their hands.

意思仍然是各人只举一只手，习惯上都知道是举单手不是举双手，虽则可能含有双手之意。不过真正要分别的话，我们还是可以说their both hands来表示举双手的。原则上多数人就要用复数名词，参考下面各种例句：

I make up my mind.（下决心。）

They make up their minds.

You must not speak ill of a man to his face.（不要当面说人坏话。）

You must not speak ill of others to their faces.

Do not speak ill of a man behind his back.（不要背后说人坏话。）

Do not speak ill of others behind their backs.

但是请看下面二例：

（a）The three men were nodding their heads.

（b）The three men were nodding their head.

据G. H. Vallins在Perfect Your English（P. 107）中说，上面的（a）例，意为三个人每个人都有一个以上的头，而（b）例的意思则为三个人共一个头，所以用复数或单数都一样的有毛病，但除此二者之外，没有其他更好的说法，只得从二者择其一，勉强用了（b）型。所以我说有时是英文本身不完善的地方，无法说得满意的。

但有些名词如way是不要加复数的，例如：

They continued their way on foot.（他们继续徒步前进了。）

He worked his way through university as a day laborer.（他做着日薪工人赚钱读完大学。）

The red cows on the farther hill ate their way slowly toward the north. ——John Steinbeck（在远处山上的那些赤牛慢慢地吃着草向北走去。）

4. 不可以说“I am a good friend with him.”

“我和他是好朋友。”译作：“I am a good friend with him.”。为什么不对？应该怎样译，才合英文的惯用语法？

【解答】应说“I am good friends with him.”。主语分明是单数，下接的补语却要改成复数，原是英文的一种特殊的表现法，在其他的语言，如法文、德文或意大利文里面都没有的。这是两个不同的表现法混淆起来，所变成的一个四不像的杂种。在现代英文中，这种构成的习语，习见不鲜，在主张纯正英文（Pure English）的学者看来，这简直是把英文糟蹋了，所以他们对于这个的专门术语，叫作“污染”（contamination）。不幸的是，这种污染的英文，居然被惯用法（usage）所认可，而成为现代英文的一部分了。

原来是两句很通顺的英文，一句说“I am friendly with him.（我和他友善。）”，一句说“He and I are friends.（我和他是朋友。）”。这两句混合起来便成为“I am friends with him.”了。这个混血儿的产生为时是很早的，因为Shakespeare在他著的《亨利四世》上卷第三幕第三场二百零二行中，便有这样的说法：

“I am good friends with my father，”says Prince Hal，“and may do any thing.”（我和我父亲已经回复旧好，现在我什么事情都可以做了。）（虞尔昌译）

英文表示“与人亲密”或“与人重修旧好”的意思，就用to be（或make或keep）friends with这个习语。但也有用单数的时候，不过不是说友善，如：

He is our friend.（他是我党。）

I am a friend to（或of）liberty.（我爱自由。）

He is no friend to（或of）peace and order.（他不维护治安。）

He is a friend to commerce.（他赞助商务。）

5. 美国大学教师的名称

在美国大学里有associate professor和assistant professor，都是我们说的副教授，二者不知有何分别？又，instructor和lecturer都是讲师，其分别何在？

【解答】美国大学中除系主任（department head）外，还有教授、副教授、讲师等等教员。不像英国的制度只有系主任是教授，其余都是讲师。中国的情形与美国相近，不过美国制度更为复杂而已。在美国大学中正教授（professor，即full professor）与副教授（assistant professor）之间还有一个阶级，那就是准教授（associate professor），中国大学里没有这一级，所以大家就弄错，以为他也是副教授。

至于instructor是指专任的讲师，lecturer是指兼任的讲师。

另外还有reader，在英国大学里也是讲师，但在美国大学里只是教授的助手，帮教授改考试卷子等（correct examinations，themes，etc. for a professor）的人，即我们通称为助教（assistant）的。

又，在美国某些大学中，不称associate professor，而称为adjunct professor，也是一样的准教授。

此外还有年老退休的教授，仍保留他的头衔和地位的，称为a professor emeritus（名誉教授）。额外的教授就叫作a professor extraordinary。我们称为讲座的，即指英文的a professor’s chair。

6. madam和madame在用法上的分别

英文中对妇女的称呼，有madam和madame二字，不知在用法上有何不同？请分别详为说明。

【解答】两字同为my lady变化来的，madam为英文，madame为法文，读英文时重音在第一音节，法文则重音在第二音节。

（1）madam的用法：

①单独用，后不加姓名，与对男性称呼的Sir用法相同。

②在函札中对不相识的妇女之称，已婚未婚皆可。

③对女长官的称呼，后面也不加姓名，但也常常缩成M’am。

④店员对女顾客的称呼，后面也不加姓名。

⑤开会时对作主席的女人的称呼：Madam Chairman。

⑥为表示某种特殊职位，如女相士之流，偶然也有用来代替Mrs. So-and-so，说Madam So-and-so的。

⑦在文学作品上，为描写说话无诚意，故意嘲弄或讽刺，或表示过分的客气时，也偶然用到此字，如“Madam，I humbly take my leave.”。

⑧美国话用以称呼一家的主妇，如“May I speak to the madam of the house？”。

⑨指妓院的鸨母，如“She is a madam.”。

⑩在新加坡，对已婚妇女仍用她未婚时姓名的，如说Madam Ng Siew Hong，而不称她为Mrs. Low Boh Tan。

（2）madame的用法：

①用在法国人名之前，或是有外国式发音的人名之前，如伦敦蜡人馆名为Madame Tussaud’s，因为它是法国女人Marie Tussaud所创办的。

②单独地用（后不加姓名），如上述第一项一样，不过前面不加Dear字样。

③对女长官的称呼，如果她是一个外国人的话。

④在文艺作品上用此字较为神气，如歌剧《蝴蝶夫人》为Madame Butterfly。

⑤用于上述第六项。

7. 用名词表动作

“你不能再迟疑了。”译成英文“You cannot hesitate any more.”并不为错，但有人说不如译作“No more hesitating for you.”。分明是一个动作，为什么要译成名词呢？

【解答】在表现上英文和中文最不相同的地方是英文喜欢用“无生物作主语”及“以名词表动作”。翻译时应特别注意这种不同的地方，才能译出洋味浓厚的英文来。

拿名词表示动作或状态的，主要是抽象名词，例如：

He had given up school without the knowledge of his parents.（他的父母不知道他已辍学。）〔His parents did not know that he had given up school.〕

We were greatly disappointed at her absence.（她没有去，使我们大为失望。）〔We were greatly disappointed to find that she was absent.〕

He is content in spite of his great poverty.（他虽则很穷，却是满足的。）〔Though he is very poor，he is content.〕

We informed him of their refusal to help.（我们已告诉了他说他们拒绝援助。）〔We informed him that they（had）refused to help.〕

英文采用名词也许是因为实字份量较重的缘故，凡喜怒哀惧爱恶欲七情，无一不用名词来表现。就是日常的动作，分明有动词的，他们不用动词，偏要用名词，如“演说”，不说speak，而说make a speech；“散步”不说walk，而说take a walk；“款待”不说entertain，而说give an entertainment；“抽烟”不说smoke，而说have a smoke；“访问”不说visit，而说pay a visit。诸如此类，不胜枚举。

现分下列四项来考察：

（1）感叹词多用名词：

表惊奇的叹声常用“My eye！”；

惊讶则用“My goodness！”；

失败则用“Oh，my aching back！”；

后悔则用“Shucks！”；

感谢上苍时说“Bless my stars！”；

愿获天佑时说“Bless my soul！”。

（2）日常应酬的话多用名词：

早上见面说“Good Morning.”；

临别说“Good Luck！”；

祝贺喜庆时说“Congratulations！”；

悼丧用“Sympathy.”。

（3）通常说话时，也会略去动词，只用名词：

In spite of the love of the parents for their child and their fears for her safe-ty，they both knew that their beautiful daughter was an incredibly stupid，dull little girl.（尽管父母疼爱他们的孩子，担心她的安全，他们都知道他们那个美丽的女儿是一个极其愚笨的小女孩。）

One baby after another. Six children half frozen huddled in one bed. No fire in the stove.（小孩接连生出。六个孩子挤在一张床上，冻得半死。火炉里没有火。）

（4）表示感情常用名词：

Shame on you！（可耻！好羞耻！）

Botheration！（讨厌！）

Humbug！（骗人！你瞎说！）

No questions！（不要多问！）

The very sight of you makes me sick.（一见到你我就要作呕。）

The crowd makes me self conscious.（看见那么多的人，就使我不自在。）

In a rage he tore the letter into pieces.（大怒之下，他把那信扯得粉碎。）

Stop talking.（不要再说了。）

In my joy at the news，I forgot all about the matter.（我听到那消息很是高兴，所以把那事情完全忘记了。）

Have pity on a poor old man.（哀怜贫苦的老人。）

Great fears are entertained for his safety.（他的安全，非常令人忧虑。）

All my love and best wishes for your happiness.（我诚心祝祷你的幸福。）

I have an intense hatred for such persons.（我极恨恶这样的人。）

I have a great desire to see you.（我很想见你。）

8. 双重属格的用法

“他是我父亲的一个朋友”一句话，译成英文的“He is a friend of my father.”，被改正为“He is a friend of my father’s.”。句中已经用了属格（即所有格——编注）介词的of，后面再加〔’s〕，岂不是重复了吗？原译的一句，在文法上有什么不对的地方？

【解答】英文的这种双重属格的用法，确是很特别的，在我们中国话里面找不出同样的表现法来。所以我们翻译时，要特别注意这种表现上的差异，才能译成惯用通顺的文句。英文这一个特殊的表现法，据Jespersen说：“这有时含有全体中的一部分的意思，但不是永远这样。”（It sometimes，but not always，has a partitive sense.）这里所谓全体中的一部分，即是说“He is a friend of my father’s friends.”。这样解释起来，自然就无所谓两重属格了，在father’s后接上了宾语的friends，这个属格自有其存在的必要，而不是重复或多余的了。不过这种情形只是偶然有之（sometimes），不是经常有的（always）。比方说，“我妹妹的那只表”（that watch of my sister’s），分明知道她只有那么一只表，怎么可以解释为that watch of my sister’s watches（许多表当中的一只）？在这个场合便产生了另外一种合理的解释：that watch which is my sister’s（watch）（那只表是我妹妹的〔表〕）。这个说明句子只是加以限定之意而已。

英文的这种双重属格的用法，经过上述两种说明之后，对它之所以要重复使用属格的理由，当已明白，不足为怪了。如果我们不把它当作省略的表现法看待，而一定要追溯其成因时，就得溯到钦定《圣经》及莎翁的时代，过渡到现代一个时期中英文所发生的变化了。

我们把“这顶帽子”和“我的帽子”合成一句时，说“我的这顶帽子”。在四百年前英文也可以把this hat和my hat合成一句说this my hat，但就在莎翁那时起，这个句子就开始朝现代英文的方式在改变，所以莎剧中，除this my hat一个形式外，还有this hat of mine一个新的形式，也同时被采用了。this my hat是古代的说法，现在早已不通用了，现代英文只能说this hat of mine，这个mine即等于说my hat；如果古代说的this my father’s hat，现在便成为this hat of my father’s了。

现代英文之所以要改用这种表现法，无非是为了要避免指示代名词（this）与属格代名词（my）两个代名词碰在一块儿（juxtaposition），故意用of把它们隔开来，因而产生了这种双重属格（double genitive）的表现法。

这种表现法用途很广，例如：

I make it a rule of mine.（我规定这样做。）

This is no fault of Frank’s.（这绝非胡兰克的错。）

Where did you buy this wrist-watch of yours？（你这个手表是在哪里买的？）

Have you read any books of his？（你读过他写的什么书吗？）

This uneasy heart of ours. ——Wordsworth（我们的这种不安的心情。）

That poor old mother of his.（他那个可怜的老母。）

That flattering tongue of yours.

——As you Like It，IV. i. 188

（你的那个谄媚的舌头。）

If I had such a tyre，this face of mine

Were full as lovely as is this of hers.

——The Two Gentlemen of Verona，IV. iv. 190

（如果我有这样的头饰，我的脸会和她的一样妩媚。）

有时又可用来表示叹赏（great admiration）或轻蔑（contempt），如：

I love that picture of yours.（我真爱你这张像。）

That idiot of a maid of yours has only packed one stocking for my two legs.（你那个笨死了的女仆只为我收拾了一只袜子给两只脚来穿。）

美国人对于英文语法上这些规定是不大考究的，例如Hemingway在所著The Sun Also Rises中便有：

“Well”，the count shrugged his shoulders. “About his future you can’t ever tell. Anyhow，his father was a great friend of my father.”

这里就没有说father’s，虽则意为“他父亲是我父亲的好朋友”。在英国也有a friend of my father的说法，不过含义不同罢了。Sweet在他的New English Grammar 2010节中对此有所说明：“. . . ‘he is a friend of my brother’would imply‘he is friendly towards my brother’.”。而Jespersen在他的Modern English Grammar Ⅲ，1. 95上也说：“ . . . a friend of Tom’s means one whom Tom looks upon as a friend，and a friend of Tom one who looks upon Tom as his friend.”。和Sweet同一旨趣，前者以Tom的立场来说，后者以其友人的立场来说。又如P. A. Erades在他的English Studies中举有下面一个对话，最能说明这种意思：

——“Who told you that？”

——“A friend of your father’s.”

——“If he says such things，he is not a friend of my father，whoever he may be.”

意为：“他说出这样的话来未免对我父亲太不友善了，他不配做我父亲的朋友！”两种用法对照得非常明显，其不同的含义也就明白地表现出来了。

9. 属格的主格作用和宾格作用

“那囚犯的处死引起了很大的非议”一句，译成英文的“The prisoner’s execution has caused a lot of public censure.”。据说译错了，但不知错在什么地方？请详加说明。

【解答】这句英文应改正为“The execution of the prisoner has caused a lot of public censure.”才对。英文的惯用法对于属格（Possessive）是很复杂的，比方照规则是有生物用〔’s〕，无生物用of，但例外很多，而且界说不明，植物也算是无生物，时间和距离，乃至度量衡又可作有生物看待。最无定准的是属格本身既可作主格解释，又可作宾格解释，不看前后文是没有法子作决定的，例如his praise到底是“他赞美别人”还是“别人赞美他”，是不能说一定的，二者都可以解释，试看下举的二例：

（a）She has come to sing his praise.（她来赞美他。）

（b）She doesn’t want his praise.（她不要他赞美。）

（a）句中的his是宾格作用的属格（Objective Possessive），所以his praise意为“赞美他”，而（b）句中的his 是主格作用的属格（Subjective Possessive），所以his praise 意为“他赞美”。现在再举几个例子对照如下：

（a）They hurried to their father’s rescue.（他们赶快去救父亲。）（Obj. Poss.）

（b）Thanks to their father’s rescue，they could return home safe.（幸获父亲援救，他们才能安然回家。）（Subj. Poss.）

（a）A monument is dedicated to his memory.（为纪念他而建立的石碑。）（Obj. Poss.）

（b）His memory is very bad.（他的记忆力很坏。）（Subj. Poss.）

用of的情形也是一样，如：

a mother’s love of children（母爱）（Obj. Poss.）

the love of Browning for Italy（英诗人白朗宁对意大利的爱）（Subj. Poss.）

这种属格一共有三种形态，即用“名词+〔’s〕”的，如father’s rescue；用代名词的，如his rescue；及用of的，如the rescue of their father。可是这三种形态，并不完全相等，有时含义及用法都大有不同。大致说来，用代名词的多为主格作用，如：

his choice = the person or thing he has chosen

his want = the want which he feels

in my sight = where I can see

用of的多为宾格作用，如：

the choice of him = the act of choosing him

the want of him = the want which others feel of him

at the sight of me = seeing me

用名词与用代名词之间，有时也有很大的区别，尤其是用于宾格作用的时候，是不可以用名词的，只能用代名词或of两种办法。现在我们明白了，为什么问题中的句子，不能说the prisoner’s execution，而一定要改为the execution of the prisoner的原因了吧。不用of，而用代名词，说成his execution原是可以的，不过“他”是谁呢？要使读者或听者懂得“他”是谁，就非把prisoner一字说出不可，所以在这种情形之下，his execution的表现法是用不着的。

现在再举两例来说明一下：

（a）He has never recovered her loss.（Obj. Poss.）

（b）She has never recovered her loss.（Subj. Poss.）

（a）The prisoner desired to see his wife before his execution.（Obj. Poss.）

（b）His execution of the task was admirable.（Subj. Poss.）

在上面两个主格作用的句子（b）当中，属格的用法是简单明了的，用不着多加说明。唯有宾格作用的用法值得注意。例如（a）句中的her loss及his execution是可以改为the loss of his mother（失恃）及the execution of the prisoner（将囚犯处死），但不能说his mother’s loss及the prisoner’s execution。

属格如果是用于宾格作用的话，惯用法是要用代名词，而不用名词的。对人如此，对物亦然。上例说，“失去他的母亲”而用his mother’s loss，是宾格作用，所以不行；如果是主格作用，意为“他母亲的损失”，自然是可以说的了。我们不能说the article’s use，但可以说its use；我们不能说a room’s length，但可以说its length。例如：

If you deny my statement，I can produce witnesses to prove its truth.（如果你要否认我的陈述，我可以提出证据来证明它的真实。）

这种宾格作用常要发生误解，最好尽量少用，因为意义暧昧不明。至于主格作用与宾格作用，也是很难分辨的，例如美总统林肯的名言，“government of the people，by the people and for the people . . . ”，句中的by the people，显然是主格作用，而for the people，显然是宾格作用，但of the peo-ple就是二者皆可的。

10. 属格代名词的绝对型，反身属格的用法

“她有点私房钱”一句话，为什么不可以译成“She has some her own property.”，而必须要译作“She has some property of her own.”才对？

【解答】英文的属格代名词原有两种形态，一是说出名词的，一是不说出名词的，前者为普通型，后者称绝对型（Absolute Form）。如“Your house is larger than mine（= my house）.”，用了绝对型的mine，就可避免重复说house一个名词了。当那名词前面用有a、any、some、no、this、that等字样时，这个绝对型常要用在of之后，而构成英文的双重属格（Double Possessive），例如：

A friend of mine is desirous of seeing your house.（我的一个朋友想要看看你的屋子。）

That is no business of yours.（那不关你的事。）

That was a shocking mistake of yours.（那是你的一个大错。）

Where did you buy that watch of yours？（你那只表是哪里买的？）

May I look at this photograph-album of yours？（你的这本照相簿我可以看看吗？）

如果不用代名词而改用名词的时候，就要在名词上附加撇号（Apos-trophe）“s”，才能同样地表示出属格来，例如：

Any friend of my brother’s is welcome.（任何一位我兄弟的朋友我都欢迎他来。）

It was no fault of the doctor’s. ——Irving（那不是医生的过错。）

Which house of your neighbour’s was burnt down？（你附近的哪一幢房子烧掉了？）

That really beautiful speech of your husband’s.（你丈夫说的话真够漂亮。）

反身属格（Reflexive Possessive）的my own、your own、his own等，也是采用这种形式，当那名词前面附有a、any、some、no、this、that一类的字眼时，尤其是与动词have同用的时候，例如：

He has no house of his own.（他没有自己的房子。）

She has no children of her own.（她没有亲生的儿女。）

Has she any money of her own？（她自己有钱吗？）

That boy has a will of his own.（那孩子有自己的意志。）

I have some reasons of my own for wishing to do so.（我想要这样做是有我自己的理由的。）

Among the languages which we describe as foreign，French holds a position of its own.（在我们形容为外国文的各种语文当中，法文有它独特的地位。）

在双重属格时，我们一定要说a friend of my brother’s，因为我们不能说my brother’s a friend或a my brother’s friend。在反身属格时，我们不能说“He has a（或no）his own house.”，一定要说“He has a（或no）house of his own.”；也不能说“She has not any her own property.”，而一定要说“She has not any property of her own.”；也不能说“I have some my own reasons.”，而一定要说“I have some reasons of my own.”。这都是为着要避免指示代名词与属格代名词连在一起的关系。

如果名词前没有a、any、no、this等字，而又不用have（= be the owner of）动词的话，则my own是可以置于名词前面的，如云：

This is not my own house.（这不是我自己的房子。）

又，如果have不作be the owner of解时，也还是可以不采用“of + 反身代名词”的形式，如：

Each country has（= keeps）its own customs.（各国各有其不同的风俗。）风俗不是一种物质，不能有“所有权”的。

11. 抽象名词用作普通名词

英文的抽象名词（Abstract Noun），依照文法规则，是不可以加用冠词或变成复数的，为什么又常有人说“Many thanks.（多谢。）”“May I ask a favour of you？（我可以请你帮我一个忙吗？）”？

【解答】凡是抽象名词原则上是不可以加用a、an，或改成复数的，但事实上却常见到有这种情形。如果一个抽象名词加上冠词或变成复数时，它就失去了抽象名词的资格，而变成一个普通名词（Common Noun）了。凡抽象名词被用来表示一种、部分、结果、所有者及实例等时，就失去抽象名词原有的特性，而变成了一个普通名词，因为在字前加用冠词，或在字尾改成复数，都是普通名词才有的用法呢。例如：

Mary is a great help to her mother.（玛丽是她母亲的一大助手。）

It is a thousand pities（= a great pity）.（非常遗憾。）

The grammar lying upon the desk is mine.（桌上的文法书是我的。）

I have a friendship for him.（我跟他有友谊。）

现在试将抽象名词与普通名词比较如下：

I am learning composition.（我在学习写作。）（抽名）

I am writing a composition.（我在写作文。）（普名）

Exercise makes us strong.（运动可以强身。）（抽名）

Swimming is a good exercise.（游泳是好的运动。）（普名）

Life is pleasure.（人生是快乐的。）（抽名）

Work is a pleasure to him.（工作对他是一种乐趣。）（普名）

Kindness is a virtue.（亲切是美德。）（抽名）

He has done me a great kindness（act of kindness）. I have received many kindnesses from him.（他对我非常好。）（普名）

Life is short.（人生苦短。）（抽名）

He lives a happy life.（他生活幸福。）（普名）

Many lives were lost in that railway accident.（在那次火车事故当中死了很多人。）（普名）

有时在名词前另加表示数目的字眼，也同样有使那抽象名词变成普通名词的作用，例如：

What a piece of impudence！（何等卑鄙！）

twenty cases of death（二十个死者）

a word（或piece）of advice（一句忠言）

a stroke of work（为某工作做的一番努力）

What a stroke of luck！（多么幸运呀！）

12. friendship一字的单复数

I should like to cultivate cordial friendships with them.（我希望和他们做朋友。）句中friendships一字，有人说复数形不对，应该改为单数。请说明此字单复数用法上的差异。

【解答】关于friendship一字，可分作抽象名词及普通名词两方面来解释。作为基本用法的抽象名词是不可数的（uncountable），意为“友情”“友谊”“友爱”（the feeling or relationship that exists between friends），例如：

my friendship for her（我和她的交情）

It ought，in common friendship，to be done.（这是朋友应尽的义务。）

由抽象名词变成普通名词时，就可数了（countable），意为上述友谊的实例，或维持的时期（instance or period of this feeling），例如：

a friendship of long standing（多年的交情）

Never to forget old friendships.（毋忘旧友。）

现就两种名词的用法分别举例说明如下：

（1）抽象名词的用例：

Women who offer friendship to a man usually find that he responds with an offer of love.（女人对男人表示友情时，男人通常都要以爱情来回报她。）

It was then that he commenced his romantic friendship with her.（就是从那时开始，他对她发生了罗曼蒂克的友谊。）

I earnestly desire your friendship.（渴望垂爱。）

He needed friendship.（嘤鸣求友。）

I need not say that I shall always hold in grateful remembrance your proven friendship in this hour of need.（你在我穷困的时候，仍然照旧地对我表示深厚的交情，使我永远感戴不忘。）

（2）普通名词的用例：

A close friendship was established between the two.（二人之间建立了密切的友谊。）

Explosive epistles blast friendships.（过激的书信破坏友情。）

They broke off a friendship of twenty years’standing.（二十年的交情毁于一旦。）

I have a friendship with him.（我和他有交游。）

We’ll keep old friendships in repair.（继续维持多年的友谊。）

He was endeared to me by a warm friendship of 40 years.（他是我极要好的四十年的老朋友。）

至于friendship的单数形与复数形在用法上的区别，除上述单数的“友谊”和复数的“友善”外，还有下面这样一点分别：复数形常指“许多朋友彼此之间的交谊”，例如大学同学可以培养出许多的友善关系，就说college friendships；至于两个人之间的友谊，如说the friendship between Henry and James，就不可以改成friendships。问题中的句子是说一个人对其余一些人之间的友谊，所以也不宜用复数。

Ⅱ 代名词

13. 不可以说“I think to do so my duty.”，须用代名词it来代替不定词，而说成“I think it my duty to do so.”

“我觉得这样做是我的义务。”译成英文为“I think to do so my duty.”。为什么不通呢？

【解答】英文的不定词近乎是一个万能的词儿，它可以作名词、形容词、副词用。所谓名词，如“To teach is to learn.（教学相长。）”，主语是一定要用名词的。还有宾语也非名词不可，所以“I like to teach.（我喜欢教书。）”，to teach是动词like的宾语，自然也成为名词了。但用作主语或宾语，总是不太好的，惯用法要尽量避免，例如“To waste time is wrong.（浪费时间是不对的。）”，在文法上原不错，不过英文惯用法爱把这句说成：

It is wrong to waste time.

这表示不喜欢用不定词作主语，要凭空找出一个代名词的it来，放在主语的地位上，而把原有的不定词移到后面去。在宾语的场合，就比这更为严格，简直认为说“He does not think to waste time wrong.”是错误的，原因是念起来太拗口了，他们一定要说：

He does not think it wrong to waste time.

句中的it就是代表不定词的，因为作宾语用的不定词是最受反对的。问题中所提出的例句，译得不通就是这个道理，应改译为：

I think it my duty to do so.

在“作为动词”中的think、find、show、prove等字，后面接的宾语，如果是不定词时，务必加一个it进去，说来就合乎惯用法了。再举一例如下：“我认为那个要实行很难。”不可译作“I found to put it in practice very difficult.”。应该用一个it来放在不定词的地位上，然后把那原来的不定词移到句子的后面去，即：

I found it very difficult to put it in practice.

有时候为加强语气也用得着这个代名词的it，例如说“A teacher’s duty is to teach.”，或“To teach is a teacher’s duty.（一个教师的义务就是教书。）”并不为错，但为着加强语气而改成了：

It is a teacher’s duty to teach.

如果追问“What is a teacher？（教师是干什么的？）”，那回答说：“A teacher is a person whose duty is to teach.（教师是一个有教书义务的人。）”。但如果要把上面含有加重语气的it的句子作为根据来回答时，便是：

A teacher is a person whose duty it is to teach.

通常这种含有关系代名词的复句，大都是用加重的说法，如：

He appeared to be a tough little man whose one object in life it was to avoid work.（他看来是一个粗暴矮小的人，他生在世上唯一的目的，就是避免做事情。）

Most large companies have trained specialists，called personnel managers，whose job it is to interview and pass judgment on prospective employees.（大多的大公司都训练有称为人事经理的专家，他们的工作就是接见和决定可能雇用的人员。）

14. 用that代单数名词，those代复数名词

“你车子的机器比我的好。”这句话译成英文时为“The engine of your car is better than mine.”。据说这是错误的，但不知错在什么地方，请详加说明。

【解答】译出的英文句子的确是错误的，因为比较不伦不类。句子的mine = my car，是代表整个的汽车，不能拿来代表汽车上的机器，所以应说“The engine of your car is better than that of mine.”才对。这样拿代表我车engine的that，与你车engine相比，自然就门当户对了。

如果所比的东西是一个复数名词的话，就要把that也改为复数，例如：

The houses of the rich are generally larger than those of the poor.（阔人的房子都比穷人的大。）

Modern schools are far better than those of a century ago.（现代的学校比一个世纪前的好得多了。）

Elizabeth’s expeditions by sea were in general more successful than those which she attempted by land.（伊丽莎白的海上远征，一般地看来，比陆上的远征更为成功。）

兹再举出几个单数that的例，以供参考：

The climate is like that of France.（气候和法国相像。）

His manner was that of a gentleman.（他的态度有君子风。）

The weight of an ox is much more than that of a horse.（牛重于马。）

The cost of oil is less than that of gas.（油的价钱少于煤气的价钱。）

15. 代普通名词的it和one的用法

“我的伞失掉了，我想我一定要再买一把来。”译成英文为：“I have lost my umbrella. I think I must buy it again.”。译文中的it据说是错了，应改为one才对，不知这两个代名词的用法有何不同？

【解答】英文的it和one，都是用来代表普通名词的，所以译文中用了it，不能说是文法上绝对的错误。既不能从文法上来说明，只好由常识来解答。

现在我们看看译文中的it所代表的是什么，谁也知道是伞，即it = my umbrella；这样一来，无异是要把已经失掉了的那把伞重新再买回来，这怎么可能呢？所以凭常识判断，用it是错误的，如果改为one（= an umbrella）的话就对了，因为那是另外的一把新伞，人人得而买到的。

同为普通名词的代名词one和it的区别，看去很简单，用时也不免常要弄错，所以我们还是要找出一个定则来，以便遵循：

（1）one是指不定的东西，it是指特定的东西：

（a）“Do you have a car？” ——“Yes，I have one. I have a good one.”（“你有车吗？”——“我有一辆。我有一辆好车。”）

（b）My father bought a car and gave it to me.（我父亲买了一辆车，又把它给我了。）

在（a）句中的one及（b）句中的it，同是指a car，所不同的，只是（a）中的one = a car，（b）中的it = the car，前者不定，后者特定。前者只说是有一辆车，未指定哪一辆，后者则指定是父亲买来的那一辆。在car前加的这个不定冠词和定冠词的关系很大，不可不注意，现再举一例来加重我们的印象：

（a）“Do you want a pen？”——“Yes，I want one.”（“你要一支笔吗？”——“好，我要一支。”）

（b）“Do you want the pen？”——“Yes，I want it.”（“你要那支笔吗？”——“好，我要那支笔。”）

回答加有不定冠词的名词时用one，回答加有定冠词的名词时则用it，二者用法分明，稍稍注意即不会错。由此可知定冠词的the，是特定的，和the为同根生的this、that，自然也有同样的作用，所以在one前加上the、this、that等字时，也就变成特定的了。例如：

“Is this car yours？”——“No，it is my brother’s. Mine is the one（= the car）over there.”（“这辆车是你的吗？”——“不是，这是我弟弟的。我的在那边。”）

This car is finer than that one（= that car）.（这辆车比那辆车要好些。）

（2）one只能代替普通名词用，不可以用来代替物质名词或抽象名词，即是不可数的（uncountable）名词，都不可以用one来代替它，请研究下面的例句：

This tea is better than that.（这种茶比那种茶好。）tea是物质名词，不可以说that one。

I asked him for some ink，and he gave me some.（我问他要点墨水，他给了我一些。）ink是物质名词，不可以说he gave me one。

I judge his public conduct by his private.（我从他私下的行为来判断他公开的行为。）conduct是抽象名词，不可以说private one。

16. that代有定冠词的名词，one代有不定冠词的名词

我们可以说：“The study of idiom is as important as that of grammar.”。为何不能说“This is a point of idiom rather than that of grammar.”呢？

【解答】that代表有定冠词的名词，one代表有不定冠词的名词。问题中的第二句是有不定冠词的名词（a point），所以应该用one代表，全句应改正：

This is a point of idiom rather than one of grammar.

当然这个句子里的one略去亦无妨。但要用必须用one，不可用that，因为that是the变的，属于定冠词范围之内。第一句中的that，正是代表the study的，而第二句中的one，则是代表a point的。再看这样的例句：

The cost of oil is less than that of gas.（油的价钱少于煤气的价钱。）句中that = the cost。

但如果说：“A cake made of wheat costs less than that made of rice.”时，则that等于a cake，所以要不得，应把that改为one才对。（one = a cake）

I prefer a flat in Taipei to that in Singapore. 句中that不能代表a flat，应改为one。

有些句子字面上没有冠词，实际是有冠词隐藏在内，例如：

Modern schools（= The schools of modern times）are far better than those of a century ago.（现代的学校比一个世纪前的好得多了。）

又，前面有the，后面并不一定非接that不可，如“The step you have taken is that of much risk.”的说法，就是错误的，应将that改为one才对。因为that = the step，而one = a step，这个句子只能说：

The step you have taken is a step of much risk.（你所采取的步骤是〔一个〕很危险的〔步骤〕。）

现用one代替a step，以求简化。

The subject is too vast a one to be treated in an essay of this length.（这个题目太大了，这样短短的文章中包含不下。）

This book is such a one as is needed by every student of English.（这是每一个研究英语的人都需要的一本书。）

Your cat is black；my young one is white.（你的猫是黑的；我的小猫是白的。）

没有形容词时就不要加冠词，如：

He has many books；I want to borrow one.（他有许多书，我要向他借一本来看。）

This book is one that is needed by every student of English.（这是一本每个研究英语的人所需要的书。）

但有时可以加上定冠词，而意思便不同了。

17. one、a one、the one、ones的分别

“你有一支笔吗？”——“是的，我有一支笔。”译成英文为“‘Have you a pen？’——‘Yes，I have a one.’”。据说a one是错误的，应改为one才对，但“We are going to leave our house and remove to a new one.（我们将离此屋，迁入新屋。）”，句中不是在one前加了不定冠词吗？请将one、a one、the one、ones等的用法说明一下。

【解答】在没有任何形容词的时候，one前通常不加冠词〔注〕或所有格，但除了the以外，因the等于说the only差不多，否则就是两相比较之时，如the one、the other的说法，现在且看带有形容词的a one的用例：

Get me some better pens，this is a bad one.（给我几支比较好的笔，这支笔太坏了。）

This book is the one that is needed by every student of English.（这便是那每一个研究英语的人所需要的〔唯一的〕书。）

再看复数的代名词ones的用法，也总是带有形容词的，不能单独使用：

I like peaches，but I must have some ripe ones.（我喜欢吃桃子，但一定要是熟了的。）

I have a new pen and several old ones.（我有一支新笔和好几支旧笔。）

These green ones are too small；I want those black ones.（这些绿的太小，我要那些黑的。）

有时把修饰ones的形容词放在它的后面也可以，如：

The students who do best in examinations are not always the ones（= those）with the best brains.（考试成绩优秀的学生并不一定是最聪明的。）

〔注〕口语的用法a one意为热狂者，如“He is a one for baseball.”。俗语的用法a one意为怪物，如“You are a one！”。

18. 指同一人不可随意改变人称

The“Instructions to Freshmen”pamphlet gives a person much good advice，but you can’t hope to correct all of your bad habits in one term. 这句英文是什么意思？文字上有什么毛病？

【解答】这句话的意思是：《新生指导手册》确能给新生许多极好的忠告，不过谁也不能指望，在一个学期当中，把以前所有的坏习惯，全部改正过来。

意思明白了之后，我们现在再来研究一下文字。上半句中的a person显然地是指one of the freshmen，即任何一个新生，是第三人称单数，但到了下半句时，忽然变换人称，改称you及your了。这是不妥的，在同一句话中，既说的是同一人，就应该用同一人称到底，不可中途改变，所以在上举例句中，如将you、your改为he、his的话，就和前面说的a person有了呼应，读来便知是指的同一人了。

说话的时候，每每喜欢用you来指people，又常爱前后改变人称，听话的人当然明白指的是谁，所以也不必多事吹求，但下笔写成文字时，就必须注意这些小地方，以减少行文的毛病。

常有人主张“Write as you talk.”。如果真的照你说的写出来的时候，据Rudolf Flesch在他的Readable Writing一书第八十四页上说，口头英语和笔下英语在文法、惯用法和习语的遣词造句上都大有不同。口头英语有两个主要的特色：造句的松懈和用字的重复（loose sentence structure and a great deal of repetition），可见下笔写作时是不能不稍加考究的。

19. it的误用

Long ago I decided to become an air stewardess because it gives one a chance to see the world.（很久以前我就决心要做一个空中小姐，因为使人有机会看世界。）这句英文不知有无毛病？

【解答】这句英文是有polish（润色）的余地的。毛病出在代名词的it上，前面没有可代的名词，自然它就落空了。改正的办法是把句中it gives二字去掉，在one字后加上may have二字就行了。这个one虽也是代名词，但指的是任何一个人，等于说we、you、they全是代表people一样，前面不必要有一个名词。再看下面的例句：

Television sets will probably never completely take the place of motion pictures，but it will undoubtedly develop into a very popular form of enter-tainment.（电视机多半永远不会完全取代电影，但它无疑地是会发展成为一种非常普遍的娱乐方式的。）句中的it应改为they才可代表前面的sets一个复数名词。

The problem is simply stated：Should our country allow citizens to make treasonous statements，even though they are not actually guilty of it？（把那问题简单地说：我国应否让公民发表卖国的言论，即令他们实际并未犯卖国罪。）句中的it不能代表前面的statements，应改为treason才妥。

In one of the pamphlets I used it gives a chart showing the increase in the costs of government.（在我用的一本手册中，有一张图表说明政府费用的增加。）句中的it是突如其来的，应删去才对，同时句首的in也不要。

20. 关系代名词的误用

The game was scarcely under way before mud had worked into my shoulder pads which caused a raw feeling. 这句英文不知应如何译法？文字上有无毛病？

【解答】这句英文可译作：“竞赛刚一开始，烂泥就弄到我两肩的垫子中去，引起一种湿冷的感觉。”句中的关系代名词which一字用得不妥，因为它指的是前面的pads，而实际引起湿冷之感的是mud，所以应将which改为and，使caused与前面的worked并立就很妥善了。

我们不妨再来检讨一下另外的句子：

In the United States enough time，energy，and money were spent to build atomic bombs that could have been used to erect new cities.（美国为着造原子弹所用去的时间、精力和金钱，足够建立好几个新的城市了。）

句中关系代名词that是指前面的atomic bombs，实际应指time、energy、money才对，所以全句宜修正为：

In the United States enough time，energy and money that could have been used to erect new cities，were spent to build atomic bombs.

请再看：

Many of our most intelligent youth are not given a chance for an education which does not improve the quality of our voting citizenry.（许多聪明的青年都没有接受教育的机会，由于他们的无知，而不能提高选民的素质。）

句中which是指“教育”恰与原意相反，应将which改为their illiteracy就达意了。

21. 代名词应有所代表

“排队等上一个多钟头，结果他们说经理今天不能接见，要我们明天再去，真是使人气馁。”译作“It is surely discouraging for us to stand in line for more than one hour and then have them tell us that we can’t see the manager until tomorrow.”。不知对不对？

【解答】译文大致不差，只有them一字用得不太恰当，在口头说话时，用字较为随便，写成文字必须交代清楚，这个代名词them，是代表那机关的办事人员，但在本句中前面并没有the staff或office-workers一类的复数名词，所以它无可代表，突如其来，有欠确实，应设法改正。最好不用have them tell us的表现法，单说一个be told，不但意思也能表达，而且与前面的不定词一致，即for us to stand and（to）be told，在一句话当中，不中途改变章法，文章自然流利了。全句成为：

It is surely discouraging for us to stand in line for more than one hour and then be told that we can’t see the manager until tomorrow.

现在再举出几个同样用有reference不明的字的句子如下：

We no longer cut our own Christmas trees. Now Dad stops at some place where they sell them.（我们现在不再自己去砍圣诞树了，爸爸从出卖圣诞树的店家买回来。）

这句话最后的them一字，固然可代表Christmas trees，但用they代表店家，就有些交代不明了。所以应把sell them 二字改为are sold，让they代表前面说的Christmas trees，就完美通顺了。

Mother thought that every well-brought-up girl should have mastered horsemanship，but unfortunately it was discovered that I was allergic to them.（母亲认为教养好的女孩子都应当精于骑术，可是不幸发觉我是对马有敏感症的。）

句中最后them一字要改为horses才交代清楚，因为前面只有horsemanship，没有horses，所以them所代表的名词落空了。

22. this的误用

“狩鹿可以使人成为更好的游猎者，这个使得一般的猎户获益良多。”译为：“Deer hunting makes a man a better sportsman. This is taught the average hunter in many ways.”。似有欠妥，请为改正。

【解答】译文中This一字，所指模糊不明，因为它所指的原是Deer hunting，而现在用作指前面整个的句子了，全句似可这样修正：

Deer hunting makes a man a better sportsman，by which the average hunter is taught in many ways.

下面几个例句中this的用法都有问题，可供译作上的研究。

I hate to see two houses being built on one lot，because this would seem like living in a cracker box.（我讨厌看到两幢屋子建在一块划分的土地上，因为这样好像使人有住在饼干盒中的感觉。）句中的this改为living there就很好了。

At an early age the youth will develop his personality traits，and the kind of home life he has will greatly influence this.（青年人的个性很早就会发展出来，而他的家庭生活对他个性的发展是很有影响的。）句中最后一字this是无可代表的，应改为the development。

The harpoon has to be fired with deadly accuracy；this is why an experienced harpooner receives twenty thousand dollars a year.（射鲸的鱼叉要射得极其准确才行，所以一个有经验的射手可以收入两万块钱一年。）句中的this is why三字改为therefore一字就没有问题了。

23. they的误用

“在仓库里我们找到了一张合用的桌子，虽则要两个礼拜他们才能送来。”译成：“At the warehouse we found a suitable table，although it would be two weeks before they could deliver it to us.”。不知译得对么？

【解答】译文中的they所代表的为何人，句中没有明白说出，即是交代不清，对英文本身颇有问题，改正的办法是将它削去，全句可改译为：

At the warehouse we found a suitable table，although it could not be delivered to us until after two weeks.

再看下面一句：

In earlier days，learning was acquired through memorizing，copying，and repeating；they merely continued what other people had learned.（在古代，学问是由记忆、抄写和重述而得到的，它们只能把别人所学的继续保留下来罢了。）

句中的they是想要用来代表上述的记忆、抄写和重述，但意思不分明，如果把they改为people，再把后面的other people改为others，就更明白而无瑕疵了。

24. whose duty it is to do中it的用法

There is a second man，whose duty it is to open the box. 句中的it指什么，从文法上看它是什么作用？如果不用这个it，句子不也很通吗？

【解答】在这个句子中，确实是it的有无同样通顺，不过有it时，更为普通而已。现就问题中的例句来研究一下：

There is a second man，whose duty it is to open the box.（另外还有一人，他的任务就是开箱。）

在这句whose以下，我们可以改写为and his duty it is to open the box = and it is his duty to open the box。但在意义上和说and his duty is to open the box并无不同，只是语气加重了一些而已。我们不妨从文法的分析来探求这个it的来龙去脉，就知道我那加重语气的说法是不错的。

A teacher’s duty is to teach.

（加重时说）It is a teacher’s duty to teach.

A teacher is a person whose duty is to teach.

（加重时说）A teacher is a person whose duty it is to teach.

美国杂志上有这样一个句子：

Most large companies have trained specialists，personnel managers，whose job it is to interview and pass judgment on prospective employees.（大多的大公司都训练有称为人事经理的专家，他们的工作就是接见和决定可能雇用的人员。）

这是加重的说法，我们也可依照上面的方式，把它回复到普通的表现法来：

The personnel manager is a trained specialist，whose job it is to interview and pass judgment on prospective employees. 去掉句中的it，便是不加重的说法。

It is the personnel manager’s job to interview and pass judgment on prospective employees. 改为普通说法，取消加重，即成为“The personnel manager’s job is to interview and pass judgment on prospective employees.”。

现在我们明白了，这个it除了加强语气外是没有什么特殊意义的，虽然大多数的人都喜欢用，但不用的人也不在少数，兹各举数例如下：

（1）加重语气的：

One whose dream it is to excel in trade. ——Max Beerbohm（梦想靠做生意出人头地的人。）

The man whose destiny it has been to preside for a quarter of a century.

——Lady Cinthia Asquith（一个命定在四分之一世纪中执牛耳的人。）

He appeared to be a tough little man whose one object in life it was to avoid work.（他看来是一个粗暴矮小的人，他生在世上唯一的目的，就是避免做事情。）

It was one of those committees whose job it is to decide whether or not a student is to receive a grant of money to help continue a course of study.（那是许多委员会当中的一个，其任务就在审定学生为升学用的奖学金。）

（2）不加重语气的：

A body of men，whose duty is to protect person of the Sovereign. ——Wyld（一队人，其任务为保护君王人身的安全。）

The only important thing for men whose business is to fill a theatre. ——London Mercury（对于那些以充实戏院座位为职责的人们唯一重要的事。）

I soon found myself almost as lazy as my host，whose sole occupation was to lie in the garden and smoke cigarettes. ——Janko Larvin（随即我发觉我自己也几乎像我的旅舍老板一样懒惰，他的唯一的事业就是躺在庭院中抽香烟。）

25. 作关系代名词用的as

If，as is sometimes found among the first threads or streamlets，there happens to be one that has some spring for its source，we very soon become aware of the fact that such springs are also produced by rain. 在一篇文章中看到上面的句子，请说明句中as的用法。

【解答】英文的as一字，具有四种不同的词性，用法颇为复杂。它可以作副词，如：

I can do it as well.（我也同样可以做。）

又如：

He did it in two hours，but it took me as many days.（他两小时就做好了，而我却要花上两天工夫。）

又可用作介词，如：

It can be used as a knife.（这可以当作小刀用。）

Some animals，as the fox and the squirrel，have bushy tails.（有些动物例如狐与松鼠，有浓密的尾巴。）

又可用作连词，如：

It is not so easy as you think.（这没有你想的那么容易。）

Just as he was speaking，there was a loud explosion.（正当他在说话的时候，发生了大爆炸。）

As you are sorry，I’ll forgive you.（因为你已道歉，所以我原谅你。）

Young as he was，he was able.（他虽则年轻，却很能干。）

Socrates’conversations as reported by Plato were full of a shrewd humor.（柏拉图所传述的苏格拉底的谈话是充满着辛辣的幽默的。）

最后一例中的as，是用来限制它紧前那个名词的概念的，reported前可加they were来讲。又，“He arranged matters so as to suit everybody.（他把事情安排得人人都合适。）”一句，在as后没有接子句，而是接的不定词，看去不像是连词一样，其实这种说法等于说“He arranged matters so well that they suit everybody.”，所以as还是连词，例如“Be so good as to come.”=“Be so good that you come.”。

最后还可用作关系代名词，它的先行词，如果是such或the same后的名词时，就很容易说明，例如：

Such men as（= Those men who）heard him praised him.（听过他演说的人都称赞他。）

Such animals as（= Those animals which are）the fox and the squirrel have bushy tails.（狐与松鼠那样的动物有浓密的尾巴。）

This is the same watch as I have lost.（这只表和我丢了的表是一样的。）

Bees like the same odors as we do.（蜜蜂对于香味与我们有同好。）

但它的先行词，不一定是一个名词，有时是前面整个的句子，以as来引导出一个不限制的关系词子句，这时就比较难于分析了。问题中的句子正是这种情形。兹另举数例如下：

As might be expected，a knowledge of psychology is essential for good advertisement.（如我们所预期的一样，好的广告，绝对需要有心理学的知识。）

She was a woman of intelligence，as is shown by the letters she wrote.（她是一位有高度智力的女人，从她所写的信件中便可以看得出来。）

He was a foreigner，as I knew from his accent.（他是外国人，听他说话的腔调就知道。）

You are wrong as was to be expected.（果然不出所料，你是错了。）

这种先行词为整个句子的as，可以用which或which fact来解释，而用法与比较时的than略相似，试看下面用than的例句，可供参考：

There are more things in heaven and earth than are dreamt of in your philosophy.（天地间的事情比在你的知识中所梦想到的，多了不知多少倍。）

Our employees are working longer hours than is efficient.（我们的雇员工作得比有效能的时间更要长久。）

26. 代名词的格

“我想那是他”一句中文译成英文时，可译作（a）“I thought that it was he.”，或（b）“I thought it to be him.”。为何一则用he，一则用him呢？

【解答】英文造句有四大要素，即Subject（主语），Predicate（述语〔即一般所谓“谓语”——编注〕），Object（宾语），Complement（补语）。在文句中凡作为补语用的代名词，它的格（Case）必须和它有关的名词或代名词的格一致。就问题中所提出的两个句子来看，（a）句中之所以要用he，是为着要和was的主语it一致，使之成为主格补语（Subjective Complement）的缘故。至于在（b）句中的him，也是和it的格一致，不过这个却是thought 的宾语，所以him就不得不用宾格补语（Objective Complement）了。简单地说，主格补语是主格（Subjective Case），而宾格补语就是宾格（Objective Case）。

了解了这个原则之后，即令文句的构成上有些变化，但万变不离其宗，细心想一下就不会弄错了。现在我们不妨来做些填空的测验。

（1）It was thought to be ___.

在空白处到底要填he还是him呢？在to be后应填的代名词的格，须与it一致，而句中的it是was thought的主语，所以应填主格补语的he才对。

（2）I believe the pickpocket to be ___.

这句要填he还是him呢？在to be后应填的代名词的格，须与pickpoc-ket一致，而pickpocket是believe的宾语，所以应填宾语的him。

（3）The criminal turned out to be ___.

意为“犯人已判明是他”。在to be后应填的代名词的格，须与主语的criminal一致，所以要填主格的he。

（4）Somebody had given the money to the poor girl. I didn’t consider it to be ___，though it was generally thought to be ___. But finally it proved to be really ___.

在上举例句中有三个代名词要填，第一个应与it一致，而it是consider的宾语，所以须填宾格的him。第二个也要与it一致，而it是was thought的主语，所以须填主格的he。第三个还是要与it一致，而it是proved的主语，所以须填主格的he。

现在再举三句比较难的例子，读者不妨先自己试填一下，然后再看我的说明。

（1）___ do you suppose me to be？

（2）___ am I supposed to be？

（3）It appears to have been ___.

解答：（1）Whom，（2）Who，（3）he。理由思索自明。

27. 代名词的I和he（或you）的排列次序

“昨夜我和妹妹去看电影。”译作“I and my sister went to the movies last night.”。被改正为“My sister and I went to the movies last night.”。为什么不能依照长幼之序来说呢？请说明错误的理由。

【解答】语文的表现法多由习惯（usage）来决定，很少有充分的理由的。T. J. Fitikides在他编的Common Mistakes in English八十七页上说：

English idiom requires that when a person is speaking of himself and others，he must mention the other person or persons first and leave himself last. But in confessing a fault，the speaker mentions himself first.（英文的习惯用法，要求把自己说在别人的后面，除非是承认什么错处的时候，才先说自己。）

外国人没有受过中国的教化，不懂得什么叫作长幼之序，对父母兄弟无孝悌之可言，习惯上在说话时虽对自己的妻室儿女，也要把她说在前面。不过近年来这种虚怀若谷的态度，也起了变化，根据许多英美文人的作品看来，“第一人称+第三人称”的说法也就时有所闻了。下面就是一些实例：

“Play snooker together every Wednesday，me and George.”——H. E. Bates：Thelma（我和乔治每个礼拜三都在一块玩斯诺克。）句中me是I的口头语，play之前当然是省去了一个主语的We，这个说话的Thelma在和乔治还不太亲密的时候，却是说George and me的。

To this little circle，I，my wife，and my little two daughters made，I venture to think，a not unwelcome addition. ——E. M. Forster：The Story of a Panic（我冒昧地揣度，我们夫妇和两个小女儿加入这个小集团，并不是不受欢迎的。）

I and Turner are taking Elsie and Ethel Rand canoeing. ——E. O’Neill：Ah，Wilderness！（我和退纳带了艾丽西及艾塞尔·朗德去划独木舟。）

I and Red Risk went in swimming there and I saved his life. ——Ibid（我和雷特·利斯克到那里去游泳，而他几乎淹死，是我救了他的。）

We were always thanking him for that. ——I and the others. ——F. S. Fi-tzgerald：The Great Gatsby（我们总是为此感激他的——我和其余的人。）

When she was a very tiny little kid，I and Allie used to take her to the park with us，especially on Sundays. ——J. D. Salinger：The Catcher in the Rye（当她还是一个小孩子的时候，我和阿里老是带她同我们一道去公园里玩，尤其是在礼拜天。）

甚至“第一人称+第二人称”的例也是有的，如：

Remember the time I and you drove into Volognes. ——J. D. Salinger：Nine Stories（你当然还记得我跟你一同驱车进入佛伦的情形吧。）

此外我们熟悉的Ladies and gentlemen那句固定的口头话，居然也有颠倒的说法，而且是出自名家之笔：

I have made it sufficiently profitable to enable its proprietors to live like the gentlemen and ladies they were now become. ——W. S. Maugham：Christmas Holiday（我曾使之充分有利可图以促使它的经营者如现在的情形一样过着像绅士淑女一般的生活。）

Perhaps these gentlemen and ladies will allow me to offer them a glass too. ——Ibid（也许这些先生太太们也会让我敬他们一杯酒的。）

28. do so和do it等的用法

有人说，“你可以这样做”应译成“You can do it.”，不宜译作“You can do so.”。不知do so和do it有何区别，请就用法及含义加以说明。

【解答】副词的so有时具有代名词的作用，它可以当作宾语而用在动词say、tell、think、hope、expect、suppose、imagine、believe、fear、hear等的后面，例如：

I think so.（我也这样想。）

I hope so.（我希望是这样。）

I told you so.（我早就这样告诉你了。）

You don’t say so？（不会有这样的事。）

在动词do的后面也同样地可以接用so做宾语的，不过这是近乎文言的用法，即写作时用的英语（written English），在口语（spoken English）中这个副词用作代名词的so似乎已被it取而代之了。如说“He promised to do so.”就近乎文言，口语便说成“He promised to do it.”了。英文的it本来是that、this的代名词，所以有时不用it，而用that或this也是很普通的。

兹就（1）A. Miller作的After the Fall，（2）T. Williams作的Period of Ad-justment，和（3）T. Williams作的Sweet Bird of Youth三个剧本来检查一下do so和do it等使用的频度，得到如下的结果：

| do so | do it | do that | do this | 计
（1） | 0 | 11 | 15 | 0 | 26
（2） | 2 | 9 | 8 | 1 | 20
（3） | 0 | 6 | 6 | 0 | 12
计 | 2 | 26 | 29 | 1 | 58

照表上看来，do so在口语中差不多不用了，用it或用that的最多，用do this的反而比用do so的时候更少，do this的出现只有一次，do so倒有二次，现将整个的句子抄在下面：

How does Dorothea feel about you all doing this？——T. Williams：Period of Adjustment（你们大家这样做，杜洛西觉得怎样呀？）

I was never tempted to do so. ——Ibid（从来没有什么使我想要这样做的。）

I’ve come back crawling！——not even embarrassed to do so. ——Ibid（我爬回来了！甚至没有被妨碍这样做。）

但是有的作家在说话时还没有完全摆脱文语的羁绊，虽写在对话的口语中仍然用的do so，例如Freemen Wills Crofts在他著的Crime at Guilford一书中，对话时都喜欢采用do so的形式：

Only sir，that you should have told us about it. Have you any objection to doing so now？（只是你早应该告诉我们的。你现在还反对这样做吗？）

We shall have to do so. Now，sir，about your own key. Where，or rather now，do you keep it？（我们必得这样做。现在，先生，关于你自己的钥匙。你现在放在哪里呀？）

. . . and if you do so，what you may be used in evidence.（而你如果这样做的话，你就显然地可能被人利用。）

但在同一书中采用do that或do it的也不是完全没有，如下例所示：

“This morning I again had to open the safe.”“Better do that too”，he said.（“今天早上我又得开一次保险箱。”“也最好这样做。”他说。）

Ⅲ 形容词、副词

29. 形容词最上级不加冠词的用法

最上级（即最高级——编注）的形容词前面，照规定是应该加the的，但“These roses smell sweetest of all.”句中的sweetest，分明是最上级形容词，为何又不加the呢？

【解答】照文法规则，形容词最上级是必须加the的，但那最上级的形容词，如用作动词的补语而成为述语的一部分时，便可将the略去，问题中的sweetest便是这样的缘故，而略去the的。最上级的形容词即令用作补语，如果它后面接有名词时，那个the也不能省略，例如：

（a）It is best to do so.（最好是这样做。）

（b）This is the best book I’ve ever read.（这是我读过的最好的书。）

因为best后接有名词的book，所以the决不可少。再看下举二例：

（a）The lake is deepest at this point.（此湖在这里最深。）

（b）The lake is the deepest in the world.（此湖为世界上最深的湖。）

在（b）例中的the deepest = the deepest lake，所以还是因为接有名词的关系，the不能省。如果后面没有名词，只有形容词时，便可将the略去，如：

New York Harbor is loveliest at night perhaps.（纽约海港也许是在晚上最可爱。）

再研究上面说湖的两个例句，我们得到这样的原则：

（1）最上级带有名词的，必须有定冠词，the deepest即可把它当作一个名词看待，这是用来与其他同类物比较的。

（2）没有定冠词的deepest是形容词，用来与其本身比较。比方说上面（a）例的本身比较，即为在同一湖中这里跟那里比，看何处的水最深。再以纽约海港为例，是说在同一地方，将早晨、正午、黄昏、夜晚等等时候来比较，看什么时候最可爱。

现在我想再举几个例句来检讨一下：

The stars are brightest when there is no moon.（没有月亮的时候，星星最为明亮。）

这是说，有月星不明，有云星也不明，有雨星也不明，同在夜间，由各种不同的夜来比较，看何时星光最亮。又，名演员Gisele Mackenzie说：

Like most show people，I feel happiest when my life is maddest.（也像大多数演员一样，当我的生活最狂热的时候，我感觉到最快乐。）

句中的happiest与maddest都是形容词，都是自身比较，它不是和人比看谁最快乐，而是自身看在什么时候最快乐。他的生活最狂热的时候，也是与其他时候的生活比较而言的。这两个字当然都是形容词，不可能作名词用的。

You never like to dance. I think I’ve been happiest when I was dancing. Sometimes I wish that I’d tied a tape measure to my ankle when I danced all my life. Then I could tell you how many miles I’ve traveled when I was happiest.（你总不喜欢跳舞。我想我在跳舞的时候是最快乐的。有时我希望在脚上系一把量长度的卷尺，当我一生跳舞的时候。那么，我就可以告诉你，我在最快乐的时候，走了多少英里的路程。）

30. most、a most、the most

“It is most important for anyone to choose good friend.”一句中，most为最上级，为何它前面不加the呢？

【解答】这个most的用法，叫作绝对最上级（Absolute Superlative），常可用它来表示一个很高的程度（a very high degree），而不是最高的程度（the highest degree），略等于very、“very +原级”，不是说那特定范围内的“最”，而是说一般情形中非常高级的。它在副词中也用得很多。“It is most important.（非常重要。）”，既等于very、very important，自然前面不要再加the了。英文的最上级，通常指相对最上级（Relative Superlative），例如：

He was the bravest of all.（他是在所有的人当中最勇敢的。）

如用绝对最上级来说便成为：

He is a most brave man.（他是一个非常勇敢的人。）句中a most brave man = a very brave man。

现在我们发现有三种不同的说法了：most、the most、a most。用例句来作一比较：

（a）The scenery here is the most picturesque in this neighborhood.（这儿的风景是附近一带最美的。）

（b）The view from the mountain top was most picturesque.（从山顶望去风景极美。）

（c）It was a most picturesque scenery.（那是一片非常美的风景。）

此外most一字作“大多数的”“大抵的”解时，也不加the，例如：

Most students of this school are dayscholars. Some come to school by train or by bus，and others by bicycle，but most of them on foot.

当我们用相对最上级时，如果要把语气再加强或稍减弱的话，又要怎样来说呢？比方中国话的“他算是我们班上最优秀的学生”，没有肯定说他确是，而只说他算是，英文就可以译作：“He is about the brightest boy in our class.”。若果想要再说得漂亮一点，等于舞弄文字的话，就不妨用practically一字。这字比about好，在字面上看去是似褒实贬的一个实用的字，因它除“实际上”一解之外，还有“差不多”（almost）的意思，例如：

He is practically dead. = He is as good as dead.（他简直像死了一样。）

There is practically nothing left.（差不多没有剩下什么。）

She is practically the most beautiful girl in our town.（她大概是我们城里最美的姑娘了。）

反之，我们如果要在最上级时再加强语气的话，就可用much或by far的字眼，如：

He is much the brightest boy in our class.（他确是我们班上最最优秀的学生。）

英文表示最上级有happiest、the happiest、most happy、most happily种种说法，用时必须仔细加以分别。

31. 副词最上级前加冠词的用法

英文副词正常的比较等级，为soon、sooner、soonest，及wisely、more wisely、most wisely两种形式，但在书上又发现最上级的副词前面，居然也附加定冠词the，请说明这种用法。

【解答】副词的最上级通常诚然是不加冠词的，不过确是常见有人加用，照美国文法家Curme说，这种用法在口语中极为普遍，笔下也时常见到，副词最上级前加the，是作为宾格意味的副词而用的。例如：

Of all my books I like this the best. ——Dickens（在我写的所有的书当中，我最喜欢这本。）

It is impossible to say whose eyes would be the widest opened. ——Henry Arthur Jones（要说出谁的眼睛睁得最大是不可能的。）

Frits works the hardest of all.（在所有的人中胡理之最用功。）

John played badly，Tom played worse，and Harry played the worst.（约翰玩得坏，托孟更坏，哈利最坏。）

这种用法，现在甚至扩大到了比较级，不限于最上级了，例如：

He runs the faster.（他跑得更快。）

Ruth could not tell which she liked the better.（鲁斯说不出来她更喜欢哪一个。）

32. 比较级形容词前加冠词

通常在比较级形容词的前面，是不要加定冠词的，但在“He is the taller of the two.”一句中，为何又加了the呢？

【解答】英文形容词的比较级，是把两种性质拿来比较的，比方说“甲比乙高”时，英文原有两种译法，一种是把甲、乙二人都说出来，如“A is taller than B.”。另一种是只说出其中一人来，如“A is the taller of the two.”。凡在比较级之后有of the two（有时略去）的，则必须加the（注意要加的是定冠词的the，而不是不定冠词的a）。例如：

He is the taller of the two.（他是二人中比较高的一个。）

This pupil is the cleverer of the two.（这学生是两人中比较聪明的一个。）

This boy is the more agreeable of the two.（这孩子是二人中比较和气的一个。）

Of gold and silver，the former is the more precious.（在金银之中，以金为贵。）

He belonged to the upper class.（他属于上流阶级。）

The music was popular among the younger generation.（那种音乐年轻人很喜欢。）

下面的例句可供比较研究：

Which is more nourishing，rice or oatmeal？（米麦哪种更有营养？）

Rice is the more nourishing（of the two）.（米是二者中营养比较高的。）

Rice is more nourishing than oatmeal.（米比麦更有营养。）

有时在比较级的前面也可加不定冠词，不过那必须在形容词后跟有名词才行，如：

Iron is a more useful metal than gold.（铁是比黄金更为有用的金属。）

Iron is the more useful of the two.（铁是二者中更为有用的。）

33. the more . . . the more中the为副词

英文的定冠词the，用在“So much the better.（那样更好。）”等句中时，据说就变成副词了。关于这个副词，它到底有些什么用法，请详加解说。

【解答】这个the是表示程度的副词（“the”as Adverb of Degree），通常都是用在比较级的形容词或副词的前面，而具有“那种程度”（in that degree）之意。在它的前面或后面常有表示原因或目的的字样，可译为“因此更加”。这种与比较级同用的副词the，可分单用和复用两种情形。上面说的是单式，通常要用for或because来说出理由的，例如：

I feel the better for my walk.（散了一回步我觉得舒服多了。）

I will help you the more willingly because I know your father.（我因为认识你父亲，更加愿意帮助你。）

You should not think the worse of a man because he is poorly dressed.（你不要看别人衣服穿得坏就瞧不起他。）

She raised herself in bed，the better to watch the dog.（为着更看得清楚那条狗，她在床上坐起来了。）

He is taking more care of himself，and looks the better.（他现在很注意摄生，所以看去好多了。）

If you start now，you will be back the sooner.（如果你现在动身，你就可以更早回来。）

He shouted to call her，and she ran away all the faster.（他大声叫她，她因而跑得更快。）

在上面最后四个例句中虽未用for或because，但在前半句中已经把那原因说出来了。

I love him none the less for his faults.（我并不因为他有缺点就少爱他。）

I love him all the more for his faults.（我因为他有缺点而更爱他。）

I am never the wiser for your explanation.（我听了你的说明还是一点不懂。）

He found himself much the better after he had taken it.（吃了那个之后他觉得好多了。）

The danger makes the sport only the pleasanter. ——Thackeray：Vanity Fair（因为有危险而使得狩猎更加愉快。）

第二种用法是复式，为“the +比较级，the +比较级”。这两个相对的句子，构成英文的复句（Complex sentence），但前后两个the的性质是不同的。前面的the为关系副词，后面的the为指示副词，因而后句成为主句，前句是附句，关系副词具有in what degree或by how much之意，而指示副词则具有in that degree或by so much之意，实为带着指示代名词意味的一种副词。前后两句可译成“越是……越是”。

The more a man has，the more he wants.（人越有钱，越想要钱。）

The more he flatters，the less I like him.（他越逢迎我，我越不喜欢他。）

Come，my lads，it’s no use thinking of it；the sooner done，the better.（哦，孩子们，想也没有用，越是早点做完越好。）

The higher up we go，the colder it becomes.（越高越冷。）

有时可以将动词略去，如：

The nearer the bone，the sweeter the meat.（越近骨头的肉，味道越美。）

有时还可以把主语和动词全部省略了去，如：

The sooner，the better.（越快越好。）

The more，the merrier.（多多益善。）

有时甚至连头上的两个副词也略去了，如：

More haste，worse speed.（欲速则不达。）

一般的情形都是把附句放在前面，主句放在后面，但偶然也有调动次序的时候，那时就得由常识去判断，看哪个是条件句，哪个是主句：

The stone gets the harder，the longer it is exposed to the weather.（暴露在空气中越久，石头变得越硬。）

以上单式和复式两种说法，其实单式只是由复式分化出来的一个形态而已。单式是复式略去了附句，只留下主句的用法，通常是带有表示原因或理由的字句的，细阅上面单式的说明及附句便知。

34. enough修饰形、副、动时，置于其后

“你觉得够暖吗？”一句，译成英文“Are you enough warm？”，为什么是错误的？而“我们没有足够的时间”，译作“We haven’t enough time.”又对了；enough一字在一句中的位置，到底有没有一定，请详细说明。

【解答】英文不可以说“Are you enough warm？”，必须改成“Are you warm enough？”才通。因为照英文的惯用法，enough用来修饰形容词、副词或动词时，是要放在那些字的后面的，例如：

It’s not good enough.（这不够好。）

It is boiled just enough.（煮得火候恰好。）

Have you played enough？（你玩够了吗？）

以上是把enough当作副词用的。如果当作形容词用时，放在它所修饰的名词前面或后面都可以，例如：

I have time enough for the purpose.

（也可以说）I have enough time for the purpose.

不过放在名词的前面时，意思多少要加强些，有时在发音上可把强意表示出来，如：

There is enough food for everybody.

There is food enough for everybody.

第一句把enough重读，第二句把food重读。在collocation（字的配置）上，enough后面常接用不定词，例如：

Acquaintance：a person whom we know well enough to borrow from，but not well enough to lend to.（所谓熟人是熟到够向他借钱的人，而不是熟到借钱给他的人。）

此字又可作名词，例如：

You have done more than enough.（你做的足够有余。）

We have had enough of everything.（酒醉饭饱，一切都足够了。）

We had enough to do to catch the train.（好不容易才赶上了火车。）

Enough of that.（够了呀！）

35. 无冠词的普通名词加enough的用法

“He was fool enough to marry her.”一句中，在fool前，为什么没有冠词？请将理由说明。

【解答】上举英文句意为“他愚笨得竟和那个女人结了婚”，或“他和那个女人结婚，真是愚不可及”。句中的fool一字，并不是指具体的人，而是表示名词fool所包含的那种性质，实际就是等于形容词的foolish，正如说“He is no fool.”=“He is very clever.”句中fool的用法一样，不是指的“愚人”而是指的“愚笨”。这种前无不定冠词下接enough的表现法，都不是指人而是指事，字典上和文法书上没有说明，初学者应特别注意。现再举例如下：

He was not man（= manly）enough to admit his mistake.（他不像大丈夫一般肯认错。）

I am not philosopher enough to think out a solution to this problem.（我没有足够明哲的思考力对这个问题想出一个解决的办法来。）

I am not poet enough to have such sentiments.（我没有发生那种情绪的诗心。）

He was gentleman enough to help her.（他够绅士派头地帮助了那个女子。）

He was scholar enough to read the inscription.（他有足够的学识能读懂那个碑文。）

He was not blunderer enough to repeat his mistake.（他不贰过。）

36. young enough和old enough

“She is young enough to get married.”和“She is old enough to get married.”两句在意义上有何不同？

【解答】“She is old enough to get married.”意为“及笄之年”，即女孩子长到十五六岁可以结婚了。至于“She is young enough to get married.”，则是指四十岁前后的女人，还够年轻可以结婚。至于说“She is too young to get married.”，意思便是“她太年轻还不能结婚”。这句话如果不用too . . . to . . . ，而换用 . . . enough to . . . 的造句法时，不能说“She is not young enough to get married.”，而要说“She is not old enough to get married.”才对。因为not young enough是指“不够年轻”意即太老了，说not old enough才是说年纪太小，还没有到结婚的年龄。初学者必须注意由too . . . to改成enough to时，是要用相反的形容词的，但是用so . . . that时，就和enough to一样，如：

You are old enough to understand such things. = You are so old that you can understand such things.（你的年龄已经够大了，应该能够了解这些事情。）

37. 不可以说“I am glad enough to see you.”

为要强调“I am glad to see you.”一句，只能说“I am very glad to see you.”，为什么不能说“I am glad enough to see you.”呢？

【解答】作副词用的enough，并不是在所有的形容词后都可以用的，通常后面可采用enough的形容词有bad、brave、careless、clever、courageous、cruel、dangerous、foolish、good、high、honest、imprudent、kind、large、long、low、old、old-fashioned、patient、poor、prudent、rich、sensible、shrewed、silly、strong、tall、weak、well、wide、wise、young，等等。

在形容词与不定词之间，在什么场合要用enough，在什么场合不要用enough，有一条这样的规则可以应用：凡是可以用so . . . as to . . . 的场合，就可以用enough，否则，就不要用enough，例如：

We are so old as to be able to study for ourselves.（我们的年龄够大，可以自己读书了。）

这句话就可以用enough来说：

We are old enough to be able to study for ourselves.

但在问题中所举出的例句，就不能说：“I am so glad as to see you.”。所以也不能说“I am glad enough to see you.”。在上面举出的那些形容词是两种说法可以通用的，如：

Will you be kind enough to tell me the way？= Will you be so kind as to tell me the way？

但要注意的，是这二者虽可通用，却不能混用，你不可以说“Will you be kind enough as to tell me the way？”。

有的句子可以加用enough，也可以不加，不过结果是使含义多少有些变化，例如：

（a）He is lucky to have such a son.

（b）He is lucky enough to have such a son.

我们比较研究一下两句的语气，就可知道在意义上是有些差异的，即（a）的意思是“他有这样一个儿子是幸运的”，而（b）则为“他幸而有这样一个儿子”。

38. 部分否定

“Both（of them）are not my brothers.”译作“他们两个都不是我的兄弟”。为什么不对？这句英文的正确含义到底是什么？反过来，上面说的中文句，英文应怎样表达？

【解答】Both（of them）are not my brothers. = One is not my brother，but the other is. 意为“他们两个当中，只有一个是我的兄弟”。如果要说两个都不是的话，英文应说“Neither of them is my brother.”。比较下面三句的含义：

I know both of them.（他们两个我都认识。）

I do not know both of them.（他们两个我只认识一个。）

I do not know either of them.（他们两个我都不认识。）

注意：both是指两个，either、neither也是限于两个，所以是有关连的；用法上所不同的，前者用于部分否定（Partial Negation），后者用于全部否定（Total Negation）。什么叫作部分否定呢？凡all、both、every等字，与否定副词not同用时，便成为部分否定，例如all not的意思，不是“全不是”，而是“不全是”。比较：

I know all of them.（他们我全认识。）

I do not know all of them.（他们我不全认识。）

I do not know any of them.（他们我全不认识。）

莎士比亚的名句“All that glisters（= glitters）is not gold.（闪耀的未必都是黄金。）”，如果要说“闪耀的都不是黄金”的话，就应说“None that glisters is gold.”，用none才是全部否定。又如“Every man cannot be a poet（= Some can be poets，while others cannot.）（非人人都可成为诗人。）”，如果要全部否定，便是“No man can be a poet.（无人可成为诗人。）”。兹再就这种部分否定的用法，分类举例说明如下：

（a）You can’t fool all the people all the time.（你未必能够老是愚弄所有的人。）

One would not，like Lear，“give everything.”——Charles Lamb（一个人不见得能像李尔王一样把一切都给人家。）

（b）He is not always so sad.（他并不是经常这样悲伤的。）

This is not found everywhere.（这并不是到处都可找到的。）

（c）Women are never to be entirely trusted——not the best of them. ——Conan Doyle（女人不可以完全信任，哪怕是品德最好的女人。）

Joanna was not altogether satisfied with the sailor. ——Thomas Hardy（乔娜对于那个水手并不完全满意。）

Somehow the old house is not quite what it should be. ——Charles Lamb （不晓得怎样的，那老屋子并不十分合乎理想。）

39. 两种形容词

为什么我们只能说“That is a wooden house.”，不能说“That house is wooden. ”呢？

【解答】英文的形容词可分两类，一类叫作叙述形容词（predicative adjective），另一类叫作限定形容词（attributive adjective）。什么是叙述形容词呢？那就是用在述语的后面来修饰主语的。什么是限定形容词呢？那就是用在名词前面，以限定其意义的。不过大多数的形容词，既是叙述的，同时也是限定的，例如：

He is old.（叙述用法）

He is an old man.（限定用法）

但有某些形容词，却只有一种作用，叙述的不能用作限定的；限定的也不能用作叙述的，否则就是错误。这就是“That house is wooden.”一句之所以不通的道理。英文wooden一字是限定形容词，只能用在名词之前，不能用在动词之后，所以只能说“That is a wooden house.”，不能说“That house is wooden.”。如果一定要拿that house做主语，说那房子是木造的，就可以说“That house is built of wood.”。

限定形容词可分下列各种用法：

A kind man.

An early riser.（= a man who rises early）

A natural philosopher.（= a person who studies natural philosophy）

The poor law.

For your lovely sake.（= for the sake of you who are lovely）

限定形容词原则上是放在名词前，但在下列各种场合，就要放在名词后面去：

（1）法文及拉丁文系统的形容词：Poet Laureate、China proper、Henry the Fourth、heir apparent、God Almighty等。

（2）修饰呼唤格的headword时：Father dear；my Lady sweet，arise（莎剧）。

（3）以something、anything、somebody等为headword时：

There was something noble about the man.（那人气度很高尚。）

Nothing great was ever achieved without enthusiasm. ——Emerson（没有一件伟大的事不是热心做成的。）

（4）以-able、-ible终结的形容词：

Paris is one of the most delightful places imaginable.（巴黎是可设想得到的最愉快的地方之一。）

We get all the assistance possible.（我们得到一切可能的帮助。）

（5）连用两个以上的形容词时：

A man poor but contented is to be envied.（一个贫而乐的人是可羡慕的。）

I never heard a tale，so sad，so tender，and so true.（我从来没有听见过一个故事，有这样悲哀，这样温柔，又这样真实的。）

（6）其他：

It is not so，honour bright.（绝无其事，我可以发誓。）

I will come on Sunday next.（我下星期日来。）

叙述形容词最常用的有ill、well、bound、content、unable、worth，以及字首为a-的字，alive、asleep、afraid、ashamed、awake、alone、aware等，例如：

He is ill.（他生病。）不能说an ill man。

I am afraid.（我恐怕。）不能说an afraid man。

He was content with the result！（他对那结果很感满意！）

（比较限定用法的）A contented person is happy with his status quo.（知足常乐。）

His words are worth notice.（他的话值得注意。）

（比较限定用法的）We must live a worthy life.（我们必须要有品德。）

叙述形容词如变成限定形容词的话，就要放在名词后面来用，例如：

We saw nothing alive.（我们未见一个生物。）

I have a diamond worth thousands of dollars.（我有一粒价值数千元的钻石。）

40. when的七种用法

“他没有告诉我他什么时候回来。”译成英文“He didn’t tell me when he would have been back.”为什么不对？请说明when的用法。

【解答】这句英文的错误，关键在when一字，因为作“疑问副词”用的when是不能与perfect tense连用的，我们不能说“When have you come back？”，只能说“When did you come back？”。同样的理由，问题中的句子，应作“He didn’t tell me when he would be back.”才对。这是完全指的过去，与现在无关，所以不能用现在完成时态，因为这种时态是与现在有关系的。

英文的when一字，虽也可以用作名词（如“He told me the when and the why of it.”）或代名词（如“Since when has he been ill？”），但主要是用作疑问副词（Interrogative Adverb）及关系副词（Relative Adverb）。疑问副词作“何时”（at what time）解，而关系副词就作“当时”（at the moment）解，疑问副词说时要强调，关系副词不要强调。一般用疑问副词的子句为名词子句，用关系副词的子句为副词或形容词子句。把关系副词前的先行词略去，那个关系副词就变成疑问副词了，如：

I don’t know the exact time when he will arrive.（关系副词）

I don’t know when he will arrive.（疑问副词）

将第一句中的先行词the exact time去掉，这个形容词子句when he will arrive，就变成know的宾语，即名词子句了，所以关系副词的when也就变成疑问副词的when了。疑问副词的用法是最简单的，例如：

When shall we go？（我们何时去？）

I don’t know when it was.（我不知那在何时。）

有人把它看作连词的关系副词的用法，就复杂得多了。我现在想分为七项举例说明如下：

（1）当……之时（at the moment）：

He didn’t tell me when he went out.（当他出外时他未告诉我。）

（2）正当（and just then）：

We were about to start，when it began to rain.（正当我们出门时，天下起雨来了。）

（3）每当（whenever）：

It is cold when it snows.（每当下雪，天气很冷。）

（4）当……之后（after the time that）：

He will go when he has finished his dinner.（他吃过晚饭后就去。）

（5）虽则（although）：

We have only three books when we need five.（我们仅仅只有三本书，虽则我们需要五本。）

（6）只要（if）：

You shall have it when you say，“please”.（只要你说一句“请给我”，你就可以拿去。）

（7）想到（considering）：

How can I refuse when refusal means death？（想到一拒绝就没命了，我怎能拒绝呢？）

41. India paper和Indian paper

有种极薄而不透明的纸，中国通称为圣经纸，英文叫作India paper，为什么不称为Indian paper呢？用名词和用形容词作修饰语，有什么不同？

【解答】英文字典或《圣经》或烟卷所用的那种薄纸，只能称为India paper，不可以称为Indian paper，因为它并不是印度所造的纸。那种纸之所以称为India paper，只是因为经由印度而传入英国的缘故，实际是中国的制造法，应该说是中国纸才对。法文就叫作中国纸（papier de Chine），中国写字的墨，英国人也把它称为India ink，理由相同。

英国人爱喝下午茶（afternoon tea），喝的是China tea（中国茶），但不是中国出产的茶（Chinese tea），而只是依照中国制法，在中国以外的国度生产的茶。

英文用名词来作形容词（attributive use of noun），是近来很流行的办法，Lord Dunsany发表过一篇《英语的状态》（England Language Conditions）的文章，说形容词逐渐被名词所取代，如不用hostile而用enemy；不用central而用centre，不用English而用England之类，英文正统的用法未免受到破坏，他很担心英语的颓丧。其实他是杞人忧天，英语的这种发展只丰富了英语的表现，一点也没有妨害它的发展。例如伦敦《泰晤士报》派一名通讯员到罗马去，便称他为“罗马通讯员”（Rome Correspondent），如果不用名词Rome，而用形容词的Roman的话，说Roman Correspondent，就变成罗马人担任的通讯员了。二者之间的分别很大，如果不用名词作修饰语，许多情况都无法表现了。

我们不妨再举些例子来说明一下：说gold watch才是真的金表，如果说golden watch也许是铜的，只是金色罢了。“铁石心肠”只能说a stony heart，不可说a stone heart；“石工”只能说stone-worker，不能说a stony worker，是各有其固定的含义的。

某些组织或机构的名称，大都是采用名词的，如伦敦的“中华协会”叫作China Institute，在第二次世界大战时，有所谓China Theater，是指的中国战区。“音乐教师协会”为Music Teachers Association，“战犯调查委员会”为War Crime Commission。

42. never的位置

Have you ever seen a whale blowing？——No，I have never. ——No，I never have.

问：你见过鲸喷水吗？答：我从未见过。上举答案的两种说法，是否一样？抑或有生熟之分？请就never的位置详为说明。

【解答】对上举问句否定的回答，完整的文句应为：“No，I have never seen a whale blowing.（没有，我从来没有见过鲸喷水。）”。但简略地回答时，则为“No，never.”或是“No，I never have.”。如单用“No，never.”时，则重音在No和never的第一个音节。如答“No，I never have.”，则重音在no 和have二字上，因为要把have加强地来说，所以要把它移到句末，说时可使音调好听些。凡要加重一个字的分量，就得把它移到一句话的尾上。

依照一般的惯例，像never这类的副词，是应放在单独动词之后或复合动词（本书中一般指“助动词+主要动词”的搭配——编注）的中间，如果在平常的情况下，例如：

I hope never to see him again.（我希望不再见到他。）

（= I do not hope ever to see him again.）

I intend never to see him again.（我不想再见他。）

（= I do not intend ever to see him again.）

I expect never to see him again.（我打算不再见他。）

（= I do not expect ever to see him again.）

I plan never to see him again.（我计划不再见他。）

都是放在单独动词之后，在普通情形应避免放在动词的前面去，至于复合动词则应作：

He has never failed me in my need.（我穷困时他总是接济我。）

I will never consent.（我决不允诺。）

I have never been in London.（我从未到过伦敦。）

但“You never can tell.”是一个例外。这完全是音调的关系，大概因为can never两个“n”，念时会连在一起而不清楚的缘故。

其他，never如不放在平常的地位上，就是加重的说法，后面的主语和动词常要因之而颠倒，例如：

Never shall I see him again.（我不会再见到他。）

Never in my life have I heard of such a thing.（我生平没有听到过这样的事。）

Never has he seen her before.（他从来没有见过她。）

Never was there a time when crops were so bad.（收成从来没有这样坏的。）

如果不是把副词的never放在句首，虽同是加强语气，也不必颠倒主语和动词，如：

I never saw him before.（我以前没有见过他。）

He never has failed me in my need.（我穷困时他总是接济我。）（较前举者语气为重。）

此外，never应置于分词（Participle）和不定词（Infinitive）的前面，如：

Never having seen him before，I did not know what he looked like.（我从未见过他，不知他是一个什么样子。）

I am under a promise never to taste strong drink.（我誓守永不饮烈酒的约束。）

He claims never to have seen her before.（他声称从来没有见过她。）

如说成“Having never seen him before，I . . . ”或是“He claims to have never seen her before.”都是不正常的。

43. 副词not应置于分词knowing之前

试将“As I did not know what to say，I remained silent.”一句改为分词造句时，可说成（a）（b）两种形式，不知何者为宜？

（a）Not knowing what to say，I remained silent.

（b）Knowing not what to say，I remained silent.

【解答】（a）的形式为宜。照惯用法，在分词造句中，否定副词的not，应该放在分词之前。

Not receiving an answer，I wrote again.（没有接到回信，我再寄一封信去了。）

另举一例，如将下举复句改为单句时，还是应将not放在分词前的：

As I had not seen him for a long time，I was unable to recognize him.（好久未见到他，我不认识他了。）（复句）

Not having seen him for a long time，I was unable to recognize him.（单句）

上例虽则是用了完成式的分词，仍不宜照完成式正动词（Main Verb〔即主要动词，与助动词相对——编注〕）的说法，把否定副词放在have been之间，即把上句说成Having not seen him for a long time，因为分词造句是与独立句不同的。否定字如不用not而用never时，也是一样。

As he had not realized his hope，he returned desperate to England.（希望没有实现，他绝望地回到了英国。）（复句）

Never having realized his hope，he returned desperate to England.（单句）

也不要说成“Having never realized his hope， . . . ”。

44. 有-ly的副词和没有-ly的副词

英文的副词（adverb）大半都有-ly的字尾，但也有没有的，令人困惑的是同一个字，如close to the station中的close及to watch closely中的closely，都是副词，不知用法上有何不同？

【解答】同一字而有两种形式的副词，常具有不同的含义，如near（靠近）、nearly（几乎），及dead（非常）、deadly（致命），等等。至于二者为同一意义的，其分别就在一表方法，一表状态。有-ly的副词是表示“方法”的，没有-ly的副词是表“状态”的。所谓状态，在自动词时是指行动当时的主语的状态，或是行动后的感觉；在他动词时就是指动作结果所及的宾语的状态。

The sun shines bright.（阳光照耀。）

一句中的bright是副词的用法，不过也不妨把它看作一个形容词构成的补语（Complement），因为shine中潜在着有be的意味，上句实系间接地来叙述：

The sun is bright.（太阳是光耀的。）

正好像我们说“The sun shone glorious.（阳光灿烂。）”时的glorious为形容词（补语）一样。可是如果把shine改为进行式时，它便失去了Copula（系词）的作用，因而bright就非改成brightly不可，如：

The sun has been shining brightly day after day.（太阳日日照耀不息。）

也好像说：

The sun shines brightly in spring.（春天阳光和煦。）

同样地是说春天太阳照耀的方法，而不是叙述一时的状态，所以要用有-ly的副词。试看下面“方法”与“状态（感觉）”两种用法的比较：

cut it clean一刀两断（结果的状态）

live cleanly洁身自好地过活（方法）

wash it cleanly务必洗个干净（方法）

fight fair公平地战斗（战斗后的感觉）

copy it fair誊正（结果的状态）

act fairly行为公正（方法）

speak plain说得明白（说过后的感觉）

write it plain写得清楚（结果的状态）

exhibit one’s thoughts plainly把想法明白表达出来（方法）

This photograph has not come out clear. 这相片模糊不清。（现出后的感觉）

remember it clearly记得很清楚（方法）

buy it cheap买得便宜（结果的感觉）

get the books too cheaply便宜买来（方法）

sell it dear善价而沽（结果的感觉）

sell one’s life dearly使对方付出高价而牺牲其性命（方法）

open one’s mouth wide大张其口（结果的状态）

It is widely known. 广为世人所知。（方法）

stand close靠近站着（状态）

cut one’s hair close头发剪得很短（结果的状态）

print it closely挤紧着印（方法）

talk quick说话口快（感觉）

grow quickly长得很快（方法）

speak slow慢慢地说（感觉）

walk slowly慢慢走（方法）

talk loud大声说话（感觉）

call him loudly大声叫他（方法）

又，修饰主语或在动词前用有-ly的副词，修饰宾语或在动词后则用无-ly的副词：

Lighthouses must be very strongly built.（修饰主语）

build it strong（修饰宾语）

The wool is cleanly washed.（修饰主语）

scrub the floor clean（修饰宾语）

He rightly guessed that it was safe.（动词前）

He guessed right.（动词后）

the wrongly spelled words（动词前）

He spelled the words wrong.（动词后）

I cannot rightly recollect.（动词前）

If I remember right . . . （动词后）

45. 数字的修饰语

在数目字的前面，如果要加修饰字的话，不知有些什么字样可以用的？

【解答】通常用于数目字的修饰词，不外是“仅仅”“足足”“整整”等意味的字眼，表示数字所示的数目以上，用full、good、solid、cool、odd等；在数字所示的数目以下，则用mere、bare、scant等，大致是那个数目，就用estimated一字。对于时间表准定用sharp，表十足用flat或clear，当然其他的字也是同样好用的。

（1）置于复数名词前的数目字前面，冠词之后：

It was a mere two years ago.（那不过是在两年前。）

The father died when the child was a bare two years old.（孩子刚到两岁，父亲就死了。）

The world hardly knew his name a scant three months ago.（就在三个月以前，世人还不知道他的名字。）

He got a solid 500 votes，just 104 short of a majority.（他得了足足的五百张票，比多数票只少了一百零四张。）

It requires a full six months of hard study in some library.（那需要在某间图书馆拼命用六个月的苦功。）

The President departed from tradition by announcing his plans a good three weeks before his estimates were to be sent to the new Congress.（总统打破往常的传统，在预算送国会前三个礼拜，就把他的计划发表了。）

He lost a cool thousand.（他整整丢了一千元。）

An estimated 1000 guerrillas still roamed the jungles.（大致有一千名游击队员仍然在森林中跑动。）

（2）置于数字之后或复数名词之后：

It happened thirty odd years ago.（那发生在三十多年前。）

It will cost twenty dollars odd.（那要花二十多块钱。）

Can they keep the conversational ball bouncing from four full days toge-ther？（他们能使那谈话整整持续四天不停吗？）

It allows him to sleep seven solid hours each night.（那使他每晚可足足地睡上七小时。）

He covered the 110 miles from Norwich to London in 30 hours flat.（从诺维奇到伦敦那一百一十英里路程他整整花了三十小时。）

The opening must measure three feet clear.（那洞口足足有三英尺大。）

I have an appointment at one o’clock sharp.（我在正一时有一个约会。）

〔注〕①good = not less than（不少于），例：

It is a good three miles from here.

（或）It is three miles good from here.（离此足有三英里路远。）

②clear = net或without deduction（净额；不折不扣），例：

a clear ＄1000（整一千元）

three clear days（足足三天）

He jumps five feet clear.（他跳得正五英尺高。）

（3）置于名词后的形容词，实有副词的性质，有时索性用有-ly的副词：

He kept rigid hours，smoked exactly four cigarettes a day.（他严格规定一天只抽四支香烟。）

The ship unloaded approximately 6000 tons of arms at the port.（船在那港口大约卸下了六千吨军火。）

For nearly eleven months not a train nor a truck entered West Berlin.（差不多有十一个月没有一辆火车，也没有一辆卡车驶进西柏林。）

This amounts to roughly 6 to 9 cents off each dollar previously paid.（预付的每元可减少约六至九分钱。）

Fully 300 Alabama National Guardsmen had cordoned off the block on Lee Street.（足足有三百名阿拉巴马国民卫队队员在李街布下了一条警戒线。）

It fell at barely 100 yards from our house.（那落在离我们的屋子不过一百码远处。）

（4）由于说话者的心理状态，对时间的看法不免有长有短：

For five long years the Chillingworth case remained a mystery.（足足搞了五年之久，奇林沃思一案仍是一个谜。）

One short month from now，the colony will become an independent state.（再过短短的一个月，那殖民地就可成为一个独立国了。）

He spent an anxious 24 hours at the hotel.（他在那旅馆里度过了忧虑不安的一天。）

They talked over the matter for an unprecedented five hours.（他们史无前例地谈论那问题达五小时之久。）

The luxury liner took a leisurely ten days for its crossing from Genoa.（那豪华的轮船优游地花了十天工夫才从意大利热那亚海港渡来。）

The Washington temperature stood at a biting 12 degrees last Saturday morning.（华府的气温上星期六的早晨冷到严寒刺骨的华氏十二度。）

46. 形容词地位的先后

“这是一部中国有名的小说。”译作“This is a Chinese famous novel.”据说错了。请将形容词用法的先后顺序详为说明。

【解答】这句话应译作“This is a famous Chinese novel.”才对。因为国籍的形容词必须放在最靠近名词的地方，除非是另外有一个用作形容词的名词存在它才让位（如Chinese wood oil）。在名词前面同时可用各种各样的形容词，其先后的次序有一定的原则。凡冠词（the、a），属格形容词（my、your、his等），指示形容词（this、that等），不确定数目的形容词（any、some、many、much等）一类的字，要最先说。序数要放在基数的前面，如first three pages（头三页）。一般描写的形容词放在色彩形容词的前面，如：

He wears a bright red coat.（他穿着一件鲜红的衣。）

最普通的顺序是（1）代名形容词（2）量（3）质，如those three young men（那三个青年人）。如果是同类的形容词，次序不定，全以声调为准，不过短的字最好说在前面，如：

Alfred was a learned，valiant，and much loved king.（阿尔弗雷德原是一个有学识、有勇气而为人民所爱戴的国王。）

除上述的国籍形容词外，他如young、old、little等字，常要和名词合成一辞，如青年、少女、老人等等，所以它们总是靠近名词来用的，如：

an easy and interesting French novel

a graceful and romantic English girl

these three lazy young fellows

The lame and blind old man was led by a pretty little girl.

英文的形容词在下列六种情况下，也可以放在名词的后面去：

（1）用其他的字句把原有的形容词加以扩大时：

a victory so complete and decisive（a complete and decisive victory）

a circumstance most favourable to the enterprise（a favourable circumstance）

a loss too heavy to be borne（a heavy loss）

by efforts successively repeated（by repeated efforts）

a man worthy of confidence（a worthy man）

This is a custom the most barbarous and the most absurd that has ever disgra-ced a nation.

（2）在anything、something、nothing、everything、one等字上：

anything nice　something good　like one dead

She fell into his arms like one more dead than alive.

（3）在某种用with开头的片语中，也可以把形容词放在名词之后，如with one’s eyes open等。

（4）在下列各种形容词的造句中：

Alive：——Catch the robber alive.

Worth：——a diamond worth a hundred pounds

Present：——the people present

Opposite：——The houses opposite were mere phantoms.

Proper：——China proper

Possible：——We tried all means possible.

Old：——a boy twelve years old

Long，wide：——a room twenty feet long and fifteen feet wide

Next：——on Friday next

Last：——on Sunday last

Following：——on the day following

（5）有些从法文输入的片语：

Heir apparent，notary public，postmaster general，ambassador extraor-dinary，poet laureate，court-martial，sum total，things eternal.

（6）在固有名词后的头衔，如Alexander the Great、Asia Minor等。

47. pretty的比较级

英文的形容词pretty一字，构成比较级和最上级时为prettier和prettiest。但有人说二音节以上的字，应该用more和most来形成比较级和最上级，即应说more pretty和most pretty才对，不知何者为正确的说法？

【解答】二音节的形容词或副词，可能有两种形式的比较级，即可用-er、-est的屈折比较变化，或是用more、most的委婉比较变化。一般上有-er、-le、-y、-ly、-ow、-some字尾的二音节字，多采用屈折比较变化，例如：

bitter | bitterer | bitterest
clever | cleverer | cleverest
gentle | gentler | gentlest
able | abler | ablest
angry | angrier | angriest
busy | busier | busiest
empty | emptier | emptiest
early | earlier | earliest
happy | happier | happiest
hollow | hollower | hollowest
handsome | handsomer | handsomest

但是eager、proper通常则用more、most（见Curme的Accidence p. 184及Jespersen的M. E. G. VII第十项第二条）。据Palmer在其Grammar 193—197条上所说，angry、foggy、holy、dingy也要采用more、most的形式。又据Porter G. Perrin在他著的Writer’s Guide and Index to English p. 550上说，一般三音节以上的形容词、副词及二音节多数的字，是采用more、most的形式的，不过也不是绝对的，而且甚至是单音节的字，也有用的。他举出下列各例：

empty | emptier | emptiest
或 | more empty | most empty
able | abler | ablest
或 | more able | most able
often | oftener | oftenest
或 | more often | most often
pretty | prettier | prettiest
或 | more pretty | most pretty

单音节的字也用more、most，那时并不是专对那个形容词或副词说的，而是修饰整个的述语的：

Fly，brother，fly！More high，more high. ——Coleridge（飞呀，兄弟，飞呀！飞得更高，更高。）

Their arms more white than milk.（胳膊比牛乳还白。）

He is more busy than they had ever known him. ——Macaulay（他们从来没有看见过他有这样忙的。）

形容词用于限定用法（Attributive）时，比较变化为-er、-est的，到了用作叙述用法（Predicative）时，很可能又采用more、most的变化了，例如：

By degrees I felt myself more firm.（慢慢我觉得更为坚定了。）

He was far more sad than she was.（他比她要忧愁得多了。）

为加强语气，有时也可以more、most代替-er、-est，例如：

There never was a kinder and juster man.（普通说法）

There never was a man more kind and just.（强调说法）

此外为着配合前后文中已有用到more的处所，而把应该用-er比较变化的，同样地改用more的比较变化的时候也是有的。

48. 作愚笨解的fat

在火车上听到有人说“Get that great big suitcase over your own fat he-ad.”，不知应怎样翻译？我们通常说肥胖，只说身体，为何说头也用fat？

【解答】这是一种骂人的话，全句的意思是说“把这口大箱子放到你笨头顶的架子上去”。火车两旁客人的座位顶上，有网架可供旅客放置随身携带的行李等物，如果放在座位旁边有碍交通，所以同车的旅客就会毫不客气地叫你移放到架子上去。口语中有fathead一字，意为a dunce或a dullard，中文可译作“冤大头”“笨蛋”“傻子”等等，骂人的时候说：

You fathead！（你这笨蛋！）

但问题句中不是一字，而是将fat单独作形容词用，构造与上述名词不同。

中国人虽称赞别人发胖为发福，实际却是一种病态。肥胖而能有杨贵妃那样美的女人世上少有，外国人说的a fat woman，是专供展览的“胖婆娘”，自然是肥得难看，胖得可笑的。总之，作肥胖解的fat，决不是一个好字眼，给人的联想是肥笨猪。英文辞典有此一解：dull、stupid、incompetent、slow-witted，即“愚笨”“迟钝”之意，如a fat smile（傻笑）。

有人把英、法、德、意、西五国的骂人的话语，编成一部辞典，名叫：The Insult Dictionary，小标题作How to Be Abusive in Five Languages，其中对于fat一字的用例即有：

Move your fat behind.

这是在戏院里或什么会场上，叫人挤紧一点坐过去的意思。句中用的fat自然是指身体说的。

Get your fat finger off the scales.

这是说有些不诚实的商人磅货物的时候，把手指头揿在磅上，自然就增加重量了。被顾客看出来，就叫他把手指头拿开时说的。

这一类的用法，单译作“愚笨”或“迟钝”是不够的。有时候是不能照字面来译的。中国话当中实在没有这一类的表现法。

英国作家Aldous Huxley在他所写的After Many a Summer中说：

I’ve always wondered why people have always made fun of fatness. Per-haps there is something intrinsically wrong with fat. For example，there isn’t a single fat saint——except，of courses，old Thomas Aquinas.（我常常觉得奇怪，为什么人们老是喜欢拿肥胖来开玩笑。也许肥胖在本质上是有什么不对的地方。例如，圣徒当中就没有一个是肥胖的——当然，托马斯·阿奎那是例外。）

49. 副词的位置

英文的副词，在文句中的位置，常不一定，有时在动词前，有时在动词后，有时在一句之首，有时又在一句之末，不知有无原则可循，请详细举例说明。

【解答】关于副词的位置，原则是放在最靠近它所修饰的字句的地方，不过或前或后，还是有不少须加注意之点，兹分条说明如下：

（1）修饰形容词时，放在那形容词紧前：

He is very fastidious.（他非常的考究。）

但enough是例外，通常都要放在那形容词的后面，如：

It isn’t big enough for me to wear.（这个我穿太小了。）

（2）修饰副词片语或副词子句时，放在那片语或子句前：

He came long before the appointed time.（他在约定的时间很久以前就到了。）

I hate him simply because he is wicked.（我只是因为他太坏才讨厌他。）

（3）修饰自动词时必须放在动词之后：

He runs fast.（他跑得很快。）

He sleeps soundly.（他睡得很熟。）

（4）关于时间的副词，如always、generally、usually、ever、never、frequ-ently、often、sometimes、rarely、seldom等，以及关于程度的副词，如almost、hardly、scarcely等，通例是放在动词（自他不问）之前：

He never comes on time.（他从来不会准时到的。）

He always speaks the truth.（他从来不说假话。）

但如系动词be的话，就要放在be的后面：

He is always busy.（他总是忙的。）

（5）修饰他动词时，就放在他动词前，或是宾语之后，如果宾语太长时，也可以置于动词与宾语之间：

He fluently speaks English. He speaks English fluently. | （他英语说得流利。）

He has been writing carefully the New Year’s cards ordered by his master.（他在仔细地写着主人交下的贺年片。）

（6）如果是复合动词，就放在助动词与动词之间：

You should always obey your parents.（你随时都要听父母的话。）

He has flatly refused the offer.（他断然拒绝了那个提议。）

（7）如果是修饰整句的话，就放在句首：

Fortunately he succeeded in it.（幸运地他成功了。）

Truly it is an important affair.（这确是一件重要的事。）

但也常有置于主动词之前的事：

He will probably come next week.（他大概下星期会来的。）

（8）用有not来修饰动词时，就放在第一助动词的后面，或不定词、分词、动名词的前面。那否定副词的not，如果不是修饰动词，而是修饰别的字眼时，就放在那字眼的紧前：

I shall not have read through it by that time.（我到那个时候为止，还不能把那个读完。）

I remained there not to see him.（我不打算见他，就一直留在那里。）

He cried，not knowing where to go.（他哭了，不晓得要到哪儿去。）

He insisted on not going at once.（他坚持不要立刻就去。）

Not he，but I，did so.（这样做的，不是他，是我。）

（9）副词only通例是修饰它后面的字，不过由于语调的变化，也可以修饰前面的字的：

Only he saw me. = He only saw me.（只有他看见我。）

I only saw him；but I did not speak to him.（我只看到他，没有和他说话。）

He saw only me. = He saw me only.（他只见到我。）

（10）副词的on、off、in、out、up等与他动词结合而构成一个片语时，其宾语如系名词，则通例置于副词之后，不过偶尔也有副词放在宾语之后的，如系代名词的话，则必须置于副词之前：

He cut down the tree.（或“He cut the tree down.” ）（他把那树砍倒了。）

He cut it down.（不可以说“He cut down it.”）（他把那树砍倒了。）

（11）同时用上好几个副词时，就要照情形、地点、时间来分先后：

He arrived safely here yesterday.（他昨天安全地到达此地。）

（12）为要加强副词起见，就把它放在句首：

Yesterday he went to see the manager.（昨天他去见了经理。）

〔注〕在略带文言的句法时，如将副词放在句首，跟着后面的主语和动词就要颠倒：

Never shall I forget your kindness.（我永不忘你的帮忙。）

Up rose the men at my words.（那些人听我一说都起身了。）

（13）修饰不定词的副词，通例是放在不定词之前或后，如放在不定词中间就称为分隔不定词（Split Infinitive），是为文法家所非难的，不过有时由于文义或腔调的关系，也不得不这样说：

I endeavoured to strongly influence him.（我努力想要大大地感化他一下。）

（14）在“the +比较级”的形式中，副词放在句首：

The sooner you come，the better it will be.（你越来得早越好。）

50. especially和specially

英文的副词有specially和especially二字，意义相似，不知用法上有何不同？

【解答】这二字的用法和意义都是不同的，也跟它的形容词special（专门的，非广泛的）和especial（特别的，非寻常的）的不一样。Treble and Vallins在Dictionary of English Syntax and Idiom上有很简明扼要的解释：specially = for one purpose and no other，而especially = to an exceptional deg-ree。习惯上都是把这二字分别得清清楚楚，不可混用，有时在especially前加上and或and more的字样，其实是不必要的。

I came specially to see you.（专诚拜访。）

A committee has been specially appointed to look into the matter.（专门成立一个委员会来调查那事情。）

The essays have been specially selected for the book.（专为那书而选定的一些文章。）

The weather has been especially cold lately.（天气近来特别冷。）

Dirt carries sickness，especially the kind of sickness that is catching.（污物带来疾病，尤其是那种有传染性的。）

Conditions are especially encouraging.（情况非常令人鼓舞。）

All contributions，especially those from school teachers，will be welcome.（所有的捐助，尤其是学校教师的捐助，特别欢迎。）

现把这二字同时用在一个句子中，以资比较。

Though the weather was especially unfavorable，they came specially for the meeting.（虽则天气特别不好，他们还是专诚来出席会议了。）

He is sorry you don’t like what he has done，especially as he did it spe-cially for you.（他很遗憾你不喜欢他所做的，尤其是他专门为你而做的。）

51. long与for a long time的分别

英文的long作副词用，意为for a long time，二者不知在用法上有何不同？又，作副词用的long除作“长久”解外，不知还有其他什么意思？

【解答】英文的long、for long、a long time、for a long time都是同样的意思，虽则单独用是副词，在介词后是名词，在名词前是形容词，不过当作一个片语来看，是都可以当作副词用的。其中a long time，当然是for a long time的省略形，并非另外的一个片语。

至于问题中所提出的用法，一般都认为可以通用，其实要分别还是有分别的。

在问句及否定句中确实二者可以通用，但在肯定句中，则须用片语，不宜用单独的副词，例如：

Did she stay long（或for long或for a long time）？（她待得很久吗？）

No，she didn’t stay long（或for long或for a long time）.（没有，她没有待好久。）

Yes，she stayed（for）a long time.（是，她待了很久。）

He lived in New York（for）a long time.（他在纽约住了很久。）

在句当中说“She has long been ill.（她病了很久。）”当然是可以的；不过用在句尾就不大好。

至于意义上的不同，只有在how的后面才可表现出来：

How long did you live there？（意为“For how many years did you live there？”）（你住在那儿有多少年？）

How long have you been ill？（意为“Since when have you been ill？”）（你从何时开始生病的？）

How long are you going to stay here？（意为“Till when are you going to stay here？”）（你预备在这儿住到什么时候为止？）

又，long作副词或形容词用时有long before，及作名词用时有before long，二者意义不同，用法亦异，兹举例说明如下：

I had not been waiting long before he came.（副词）（我没有等待好久，他就来了。）

It will not be long before we know the truth.（形容词）（真相不久就会明白的。）

I shall be seeing you before long.（不久我们再见。）这个long是名词，before意为before a long time has passed ，或soon，是说“不久以后”，不是“不久以前”。

52. everyday和every day

“我每天工作八小时”一句话，译成英文为“I work eight hours everyday.”。据说是错了，请改正并说明理由。

【解答】句中的everyday是一个形容词（adjective），而这里应该用副词（adverb），所以是错了。如果我们把这字分开，写成every day二字，就变成副词了，说得更正确一点，就变成一个副词片语（adverbial phrase）了。

This is an everyday occurrence.（这是一件平常的事。）

I want to learn everyday English.（我要学日常说的英语。）

He comes to see me in his everyday clothes.（他就是穿着普通衣服来看我的。）

He comes to see me every day.（他每天来看我。）

Such things do not happen every day.（这种事不是每天发生的。）

I study everyday English every day.（我每天学习日用英语。）

注意：分开写成两字的every day并不一定是副词片语，也可以把every看作修饰名词day的形容词，例如：

Every day seemed a year.（度日如年。）

Every day counts.（每天都不可错过；要爱惜光阴。）

又，every day当中还可加另外的字，如other等：

He comes to see me every other day.（他每隔一天就要来看我的。）

I go there every three days.（每隔三天我要到那里去一次。）

此外every与day相关联的还有一个谚语：“Every dog has his day.”，意为“谁都有其得意时代”，但好景不长，有如白驹过隙，正是莎翁说的：

Let Hercules himself do what he may，

The cat will mew，and dog will have his day.

53. sometime和sometimes

英文的sometime和sometimes都是副词，意思似乎也相差不远，不知用法上有何不同？

【解答】副词的sometime有两个意思：（1）在任何时候（at one time or another），（2）在不固定的某个时候（at some indefinite time）。

Come over and see me sometime.（随便什么时候，请过来坐。）

I will see you again sometime.（我下次再来看你。）

I’ll come to see you sometime next week.（下个礼拜之内我要来看你。）

It happened sometime last month.（此事发生在上月某一个时候。）

Tea is served sometime between four and six in the afternoon.（下午四至六时有茶供应。）

后面接有时间的，为上述第二义。现在我们再看副词sometimes，意为有时、间或（at times、now and then、from time to time），例如：

Sometimes a ship takes fire.（有时船上起火。）

I sometimes think that it is a great mistake.（我有时想这是一个大错。）

Sometimes she is happy，and sometimes she is sad.（她有时快乐，有时忧愁。）

I visit the art museum sometimes.（我有时去参观美术馆。）

又，sometime一字还可作形容词用，意为“以前的”“昔时的”，如：

Miss Wang，a sometime pupil of our school，is now a teacher here.（王小姐从前是本校的学生，如今是这里的教员了。）

此外some time分开来写成二字，意为“短时”，如：

He left Singapore for Taipei some time ago.（他不久以前离开新加坡去台北了。）

Ⅳ 冠 词

54. 选举的总统名词前不用冠词，议员前须加冠词

“他被选为议员。”译成英文为：“He was elected councilman.”。据说是错误的，为何“他被选为市长”译作“He was elected mayor.”又对了呢？

【解答】“他被选为议员。”应译作“He was elected a councilman.”才对，译文中的不定冠词是不可少的。举凡市议会（city council）、立法议会（legislative council），乃至美国的国会即众议院（Congress）、英国的议会（Parliament）等处的议员在英译时都要加不定冠词，说成a councilman、a congressman、an M. P.（即a member of Parliament）。而翻译某人被选为总统、市长、主席等时，就不要加上冠词，例如：

Washington was elected president of the United States of America.（华盛顿被选为美国的总统。）

He was elected chairman.（他被选为主席。）

He is appointed Deputy Postal Commissioner.（他被任为副邮务长。）

上面这两种说法，我们可以简单地说：那职位当地只有一个的，如国内不能有两个总统，一市不能有两个市长，会议只有一个主席等，所以就不要冠词，至于议员决不止一人，某人被选为议员，不过是选为许多议员当中的一个，所以要加不定冠词，表示是其中之一。

又，定冠词也常是限于一个的，如：the sun、the world之类，所以有时也可以用于一职一人的场合，如：

He was elected mayor of Paris.（他被选为巴黎市长。）

（也可以说）He was the mayor of Paris.（他原是巴黎市长。）

55. 说某人是议员，则有加冠词和不加的两种用法

（a）His father is professor of Yale University.

（b）His father is a professor of Yale University.

这两句英文都是翻译“他父亲是耶鲁大学的教授”。据说两句都是对的，但不知到底有何差异？

【解答】凡职位名称用作补语（complement）时，通常都要将它前面的冠词略去，例如：

His father is Foreign Minister.（他父亲是外交部长。）

He was elected mayor of Nanking.（他被选为南京市长。）

等等，都是不加冠词的。尤其是当作补语用的那名词，表示一时只限于一人做的官职或地位的话，一般都要将冠词略去。这种场合的职位，侧重在抽象的观念，而颇含有形容词的意味，故将那限定的冠词the略去了（注意略去的不是a而是the）。问题中的（a）例便是如此。至于（b）例的a professor，是指具有那职位的个人而言，意即“许多教授当中的一位”，不过其中之一而已。（正如我们说a man、a student、a book等一样。）下例的情形也是一样的：

（a）He is councilman for this city.

（b）He is a councilman for this city.

（他是本市的议员。）

职位名称用于固有名词之前时，如Queen Elizabeth，或用作固有名词同格时，如Dr. Chang、Professor Wang of Yale University，通常也是要略去冠词的。

又，例“Long afterwards，when the boy became the president of the United States，he . . . ”一句中，表官职的president用作补语，但仍未将冠词the略去，是因为它具有“著名的”特殊意义，这个the实等于是说the famous呢。

56. people和a people

“中国人是刻苦耐劳的民族。”译成英文时作“The Chinese are hard-working and industrious peoples.”，为什么不对？

【解答】译文是不对的，因为英文的people一字有两大含义：一作“人”解，这本身是一个复数字，要两个人以上才能用的，不可以再加〔s〕的语尾；一作“民族”解，指因有共同文化，共同观念，以及由共同责任和利益所产生的团结心而结合的一群人，如果说几种民族时，就用复数形的peoples，照英文的原则，一个普通名词既可以加〔s〕变成复数，在用作单数时就必须加冠词，所以问题中的译文应改正为“The Chinese are a hard-working and industrious people.”才对，又如：

The French are a gay people.（法国人是欢乐的民族。）

The English are said to be a reserved people.（英国人据说是很慎言的民族。）

The Chinese are a great people.（中国人是大国民。）

这个people一字如用作“人”解时，则说：

Southern people will never rebel again.（南人不复反矣。）

English people love liberty.（英人爱自由。）

注意：English people（英格兰的人）；the English = the people of England（全体的英格兰人）（集合的名称）；an Englishman（一个英国人）。例如：

The English belong to the white race.（英国人是白种人。）

Those are Englishmen.（那些人是英国人。）

英文的people、race、nation三字都有“民族”的意思，people的含义已如上述；race为种族，即强调生理方面，具有相同的血统和身体上共同的特征；nation强调政治上的统一，指在一个政府下团结一致的人群，例如：

Americans are a people and a nation，but not a race.（美国人是一个民族，一个国民，但不是一个种族。）

Hawaiians were a people，not a nation.（从前夏威夷人就是一个民族，可不是一个国家。）

57. 复数名词前加用不定冠词

在上一问的解答中，我们知道普通复数名词后面是可以接不定冠词的，如“The English are a people.”。但不知在普通名词的复数形前面，能不能也加用不定冠词？

【解答】在下列四种情形中的复数名词的前面，也可以加用不定冠词：

（1）在那复数名词的前面，用有good many或great many的字眼时，例如：

I’ve been there a good many times.（我到那里去过好几次。）

There were a great many students in the street.（街上曾有许多学生。）

（2）当那名词本身具有复数形时，例如：

The place became a shambles.（那地方变成屠杀场。）

注意：shambles = slaughterhouse（屠场），并不是shamble = clumsy walk（蹒跚）的复数形，这是完全不相干的两个字。这个语尾有〔s〕的名词，前面并不一定要加不定冠词，如turn cities into shambles（化城市为屠场），但“The city has been turned into a shambles.（把那城市变成一个屠场。）”，便要有冠词了。

（3）当名词的形式虽变成了复数，但意义仍是单数时，例如：

A hundred miles is a good distance.（一百英里是相当远的距离。）（a hundred miles意即the distance of a hundred miles。）

A thousand kisses buys my heart from me.（一千个吻足够收买我的心。）

I am well studied（= inclined）for a liberal thanks which I do owe you. ——Shakespeare（我很想要对你表示充分的谢意。）

The Washington，D. C. National Airport is a world crossroads.（华府国家机场是世界的交通要道。）（crossroads，歧路或十字路口，并非指几条路，而是一个有分歧的地点。）

I made a hundred dollars.（我赚了一百块钱。）

There is a fine Zoological Gardens in our town.（本城有一个很好的动物园。）

What this country needs is not a good five-cent cigar，or a good five-cent cup of coffee，but a good five cents.（这个国家所需要的，不是五分钱一支的好雪茄，也不是五分钱一杯的好咖啡，而是一枚值价的好的五分钱。）

（4）有些名词原来就是一对或多数构成的，所以复数形也是指的单数，如a pincers、a tongs、a tweezers、a bagpipes、a thick-lips等皆是。

He is a sly-boots.（他是一个淘气的孩子。）

A sliver scissors was given to him.（给了他一把银剪刀。）

Here comes a buttons.（来了一个侍役。）

58. 物质名词前加用冠词变成普通名词

普通名词除复数加〔s〕外，单数时一定要加冠词，只有物质名词等则规定不加冠词，但有时仍有加的，不知在何种情况之下才要加冠词？

【解答】照文法规定物质名词确是不要加冠词的，如：

The gas is as transparent as air.（那气体如空气一般的透明。）

He spent money like water.（他用钱如水。）

The dish is made of paper.（这碟子是纸做的。）

当我们要表示数量时，就得另加其他的片语上去，因为我们不能说：“Give me a paper，please.”。必得说：

Give me a piece of paper，please.（请给我一张纸。）

或是说成复数：

Give me a few sheets of paper，please.（请给我几张纸。）

这个补充进去的片语，是要随着情形而改变的，a cup of tea（一杯茶）、a spoonful of sugar（一匙糖）、a lump of sugar（一块糖）、a loaf of bread（一卷面包）、a piece of chalk（一支粉笔），等等。说复数则把〔s〕加在cup、spoonful、lump、loaf、piece等字上，不可以说a tea，也不可以说teas 等等。（口语中虽有“Two teas，please.”“What about a whisky？”，是two cups of tea和a cup of whisky短缩的说法。）但有时也竟有加冠词或变复数的时候，那就是变了性的结果，那个物质名词已变成普通名词了。物质名词要在什么时候，才可以拿来当作普通名词用呢？那只有在表示：（1）种类，（2）制成品，（3）发生的事件的场合才会变成普通名词，比较下例：

May I trouble you for another cup of tea？（麻烦你再给我一杯茶好吗？）此tea为物质名词，不加冠词。

This is an excellent tea.（这是一种极好的茶。）此tea为普通名词，表示种类，故加冠词。

Paper is made from pulp.（纸是纸浆做的。）此paper为物质名词，不加冠词。

This is a good paper for young people to read.（这是供年轻人读的一份好的报纸。）此paper为普通名词，表制成品，故加冠词。

Be careful about fire.（小心火烛。）这是物质名词。

There was a big fire last night.（昨夜发生大火。）这是普通名词，表发生的事件，故加冠词。

普通名词既可以加冠词，也就可以用复数，如：

We produce various teas.（我们出产各种茶叶。）

Hand in your papers.（把你的卷子交来。）

Fires are not so frequent as in former days.（火灾没有以前那样频繁了。）

59. catch cold和catch a cold

“伤风”译成英文时，有时说catch cold，有时又说catch a cold，不知有冠词与无冠词是否一样？

【解答】用动词catch或take时，有冠词与无冠词完全一样，但用have时就必须加冠词（have a cold），因为那是表示状态的。还有如在cold前用有形容词时，前面的冠词也非有不可（catch a bad cold）。

I have a slight cold.（我有一点儿伤风。）

He has a bad cold.（他重伤风。）

He is suffering from a severe cold.（他患重伤风。）

I have caught（或taken）cold.（我伤风了。）

Mind you don’t catch cold.（当心你伤风。）

It is foolish to go out without a coat in this weather；you’ll catch（a）cold.（这样冷的天气出门，愚笨得连上衣都不穿，你一定会伤风的。）

He stayed away from school because he had a cold.（他伤风了，所以未来上学。）

He is in bed with a bad cold.（他伤风睡在床上。）

I easily take a cold.（我容易伤风。）

You’ve given me your cold.（你把伤风传给我了。）

Most people have two or three colds a year.（大多数的人一年有两三次的伤风。）

60. We had heavy rain和We had a heavy rain

（a）We had a heavy rain last night.

（b）We had heavy rain last night.

上面这两句话，一句有冠词，一句没有，是否可要可不要？

【解答】原则上rain、snow、wind等是物质名词，是不可以加不定冠词的，不过如有形容词的话，也可以加上冠词，并不为错。文法家说明是由于形容词的关系，而分别出大雨、小雨、霪雨、甘雨等等情况来，加上不定冠词，正可表示“一场”的意思。

问题中所举出的两个例句，意义并不一样，冠词并非可有可无。句首不说We had，而说There was也成：

（a）There was a heavy rain last night.

（b）There was heavy rain last night.

（a）句的意思是“昨夜下了一场大雨”。（b）句的意思是“昨夜下了大雨”。一般字典上举例多是用的（a）句，不过（b）句的说法，是把重点放在“持续不断地下了大雨”一点上的。再看：

（a）We had a heavy snow last year.

（b）We had heavy snow last year.

（a）是说去年曾下过一场大雪，（b）是说去年冬天下了很大的雪。

61. go to school和go to the school

“上学”一词译成英文为go to school。在学校这字的前面不可以加冠词，说go to the school就错了，但为什么说“I’ll go to the school to tell him.（我到学校里去告诉他。）”，又可以加冠词呢？

【解答】一个普通名词用作抽象的意味时，每每要把定冠词略去。学校的抽象意味是施教，从学生方面来看是去求学，去读书。所以英文解释这种作用时说：“The training given in a school，education.（在学校所给的训练，也就是教育。）”。在这种情况之下，在school前是不要加the的。例如：

We go to school in order to learn.（我们为学习而上学。）

He goes to school by bus every day.（他每天坐公共汽车上学。）

My brothers are at school.（我兄弟都在读书。）

You send a boy to school.（你送孩子上学。）

Have you ever attended school？（你进过学校没有？）

He left school very young.（他很早就辍学了。）

They come home from school at three.（他们三点钟放学回家。）

Come home directly after school.（放学后立刻回家。）

What do you do before school？（上学前你做点什么？）

School begins at eight.（学校从八时起上课。）

种种说法，都是学校的本意、通常的含义。不过你如果把学校一词，不当作本意用，而把它看作一个地方，指校舍或建筑物来说的话（a place for teaching and learning，the building or buildings of a school），它便成了一个具体的东西，失去了抽象的意味，此时便非加用定冠词不可，例如：

I went to the school to see the results of the entrance examination.（我到学校去看入学考试的成绩。）

You will find them in the school between 8 A. M. and 4 P. M..（在上午八时到下午四时你在学校里可以找到他们。）

He lives opposite the school.（他就住在学校对面。）

The school stands near the church.（学校靠近教堂。）

I always take my lunch at the school.（我在学校吃中饭。）

英文很多普通名词都有这种抽象的用法，一个要加冠词，一个不加冠词，我们必须加以分别。现再举别的字例，以供比较研究：

Church is over.（礼拜做完了。）

I pass before the church on my way to school.（我上学经过教堂。）

He is now in hospital.（他现在进了医院。）

He is one of the patients at the hospital.（他是那医院里的病人之一。）

Mother has gone to market.（母亲买菜去了。）

Is it far from here to the market？（从这里到菜场远吗？）

He was sent to prison.（他被监禁了。）

I visited the prison yesterday.（昨天我去参观了监狱。）

They were at table when I went in.（我进去时他们正在吃饭。）

The supper is on the table.（晚饭上桌。）

但也有例外，如到戏院去看戏，虽是戏院的本意，但仍要加the，而说成go to the theatre（去看戏），go to the cinema（去看电影），go to the movies（去看电影）。

62. Americans和The Americans

我们说的英语是English，前面不可加任何冠词，如果加上定冠词说成the English，就变为英国人的意思了。但常见分明是指的国民，而仍然不加冠词，不知何故？

【解答】英语是the English language，简单说成English一字；至于英国人就个体来说，单数是an Englishman，复数是Englishmen，说成the English是指英国民全体来说的。至于虽是说的国民，而仍然不加冠词的时候也是有的，现先请看下表：

固有形容词 | 语言名称 | 国民总称 | 个体名称
American | American | The Americans | An American（Americans）
Chinese | Chinese | The Chinese | A Chinese （Chinese）
Dutch | Dutch | The Dutch | A Dutchman （Dutchmen）
English | English | The English | An Englishman（Englishmen）
French | French | The French | A Frenchman（Frenchmen）
German | German | The Germans | A German （Germans）
Greek | Greek | The Greeks | A Greek （Greeks）
Italian | Italian | The Italians | An Italian （Italians）
Spanish | Spanish | The Spanish | A Spaniard （Spaniards）
Swedish | Swedish | The Swedes | A Swede （Swedes）
Turkish | Turkish | The Turks | A Turk （Turks）

固有形容词多半是从国名转化而来的，如Chinese是从China变来的，但有些只取国名的一部分，如American则只采用The United States of America国名的最后一字，至于Dutch则并不是从Holland一名而来，也不是从the Netherlands而来，而是从Dutsch、Deutsch（意为德国的，因Germany即德国，德文为Deutschland）变来的。

如果是指某一国的国语，原则上不要加冠词，如汉语为Chinese；马来话为Malay，唯说某个特殊的字或著作时，仍可加the，如：

“Hund”is the German for“dog”.（德文“狗”叫“Hund”。）

This is translated from the German.（这是从德文直译的。）

美国与英国虽为同文国家，照讲美国人也是说的English，不过他们要有独立的美语，所以说是American English并不满意，而要说Americanism，简略为American，如口头美语为spoken American。

用来指国民的时候就比较复杂了：

（1）“the +固有形容词”（作复数用）=全体国民：

The Chinese are an industrious people.（中国人是勤勉的国民。）

The English are a mercantile people.（英国人是商业的国民。）

The Swiss have their mountains，the French their Paris，the English their home.（瑞士人有山，法国人有巴黎，英国人有家。）

The Americans are very social.（美国人好交际。）

（2）个体的国民，有单复同形的，也有单复异形的，如：

He is a Chinese. ——They are Chinese.

He is a Frenchman. ——They are Frenchmen.

We hated all the French people we met there. ——Jespersen（我们在那儿所遇到的那些法国人，都很讨厌。）

There were staying in the hotel two Japanese，three Portuguese，four Italians，five Poles，six Danes.（那旅馆中住得有两个日本人，三个葡萄牙人，四个意大利人，五个波兰人，六个丹麦人。）

（3）通常说国籍时，会把冠词略去：

I am Chinese.（我是中国的国民。）

（比较）I am a Chinese.（我是中国人。）

He is Italian.（他是意大利的国民。）

They are Italian.（他们都是意大利的国民。）

（比较）They are Italians.（他们是意大利人。）

A thing you would certainly think twice about before doing in public，if you were English. ——William Plomer（如果你是英国国民的话，这确是一件你要三思而后行的事。）

（4）说个体的多数与说整体不同的地方，就是一则无定冠词，一则有定冠词：

Americans think that they can win the war in Vietnam.（美国人以为他们可在越南战胜。）

The Americans are an active people.（美国人是活跃的民族。）

说美国人是活跃的民族，当然是指整个的美国人而言，至于说美国人以为他们可在越南战胜，不过是一部分鹰派的人的看法而已。

普通名词亦复有这种分别，例如：

The students of our school are very diligent.（我们学校里的学生都很用功。）（The students = All the students）

They are students of our school.（他们是我们学校里的学生。）（stu-dents = some students）

有时也可以把some说出来，如：

Some students of our school speak English very well.（我们学校有些学生英语说得很好。）

63. in a family way和in the family way

Robert Penn Warren在他著的A Christian Education中有句云：“I can remember the ladies talking about how Mrs. Nabb just couldn’t get in a family way no matter what she tried.”。通常说怀孕是用定冠词的，为何他用不定冠词？

【解答】美国脱离英国这么久，离开英国这么远，在美国使用的英语，要和在英国使用的英语发生歧异，这是理所当然的。英文表现法中原有的许多分别，到现在美国话中都消失了。问题中所提出的表现法，在英国话中原来是有不同的含义的，即：in a family way = without ceremony，不拘礼节，无所隐秘。in the family way = pregnant、with child，身怀六甲，有孕。例如：

She speaks to me in a family way.（她对我说话和一家人一样。）

She is now in the family way.（她现在正怀着身孕。）

凡是英国的辞典，乃至牛津系统的辞典，都是有这种分别的，可是到美国就变了，美国韦氏系统的辞典，尤其是人们用得最多的一部辞典，即Webster’s New World Dictionary of the American Language，p. 525的family项下，只举出一条：in a family way〔Colloq.〕，pregnant；with child。不但把用不定冠词的这个成语，限于“怀孕”一义，而且根本不提另外那个用定冠词的成语。在稍古的韦氏大辞典上，还提到in a family way和in the family way二者都有“怀孕”的意义，逐渐地在美国已由in a family way一个表现法来独占，而把另外一个打倒了。Warren是美国作家，当然要采用这种美国用法的。

64. in spring和in the spring

英文说春夏秋冬四季的时候，有时前面加定冠词，有时又不要冠词，在意义上全无分别，不知在用法上有无规定？

【解答】表季节的字在原则上是不要定冠词的，例如：

Spring has come.（春天来了。）

Winter comes after autumn.（秋去冬来。）

不过如用在介词in的后面，就常有加上定冠词的时候，尤其是美国话如此。在英国凡是说到过去的事的场合，也多加用定冠词，这是有限定的意思，指过去某一年的春天（或夏、秋、冬）。或是因句中有when及其他前后文的关系而加以限制，才用这个定冠词的。

在同一人的笔下，在同一节的文句中，又同在介词in的后面，时而加冠词，时而不加，例如美国的历史学家Francis Parkman在其代表作The Oregon Trail一书中说：

With all these changes，the water is so changed with mud and sand that，in spring，it is perfectly opaque，and in a few minutes a sediment an inch thick in the bottom of a tumbler. The river was now high；but when we descended in the autumn it was fallen very low，and all the secrets of its treacherous shallows were exposed to view.（哪怕有这样的变化，水中还是充满了泥沙，所以到春天的时候，简直变得浑浊不堪，放在玻璃杯中不到几分钟，杯底就可以有一寸厚的沉淀。河水现在高涨了；但是当我们在秋天下河去时，便是水落石出，河中那些危险的浅滩原形毕露了。）

他说in spring并不奇怪，因为季节名是以不加冠词为原则的，现在只消检讨加用了冠词的场合就好了。句中说in the autumn，无疑地是因为在when后的关系。再看其他的例子：

It had begun that tune during the last term at school，in the summer. ——D. Richardson（那是在夏天，在学校里最后一个学期中，才开始唱那个曲子的。）

The snow man they both made in the winter. ——Ibid（他们二人在冬天所做的雪人。）

The clouds that had hung in high puffs for so long in the spring were dissi-pated. ——John Steinbeck（在春天像长烟似的高挂天空的云散去了。）

The forest had been green in the summer when we had come into the town . . . ——E. Hemingway（夏天当我们来到镇上，森林望去一片绿色。）

在季节名字后接用of时，则前面必须加用冠词，如in the spring of 1967（在一九六七年的春天）。当英国人说all the summer的时候，美国人则说all summer，例如：

Gradually he became aware of the one particular odor he had missed all summer. ——E. Caldwell（慢慢地他注意到了一种特别的香味，那是整个夏天他都没有闻到的。）

如果和表持续的介词连用时，则英美两国都是要用冠词的，如during the summer、through（out）the summer。

65. 不定冠词的用法

常有人说我们学了多年的英文，连一个“a”字的用法都没有学会，似非虚言。请将不定冠词的用法，分条举例说明一下。

【解答】不定冠词的用法，可分为下列九种：

（1）表示“或”的意思，讲话时第一次提到的名词冠以“a”，再提时便冠以“the”，如：

One day a wolf fell in with a fox. The wolf was all skin and bones，while the fox was as fat as he could be.（有天一条狼遇到一只狐狸。那条狼瘦得只剩皮包骨，而那只狐狸却非常肥胖。）

用于此意时，复数形常加some、any的形容词，比较：

I saw a bird flying. It was a crow.（我看见一只鸟在飞。那是一只乌鸦。）

改成复数则为：

I saw some birds flying. They were crows.

（2）表示“one”的意思：

He came here a week ago.（他在一星期前来此。）

He will return in a day or two（= in one or two days）.（他将在一两天内回来。）

They were all killed to a man.（他们被杀得片甲不留。）

A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush.（多得不如现得。）

（3）表示“any”的意思，可代表一个族类：

A horse is a useful animal.（马是有用的动物。）

I like a dog，but don’t like a cat.（我喜欢狗，不喜欢猫。）

A cat may look at a king.（一个人无论身份怎样低下，都有相当的权利。）

这个用法和作“或”解的时候不同，在其复数形前面不能加用some的字样，只能说“I like dogs，but don’t like cats.”。表整个族类的，除a dog、dogs外，还可以说the dog，不过口语中最常用的是dogs一个形式。下面一个略近文言的表现法，也应归入此项。

Of late he gets up late of a morning.（近来他起身很迟。）

It was his custom of a Sunday to sit in the garden.（礼拜天他惯常坐在公园里。）

（4）表示“a curtain”的意思：

There is a Mr. Lee waiting for you downstairs.（楼下有位李先生在等你。）

That is true，in a way.（从某一方面看来，那也是真的。）

（5）表示“the same”的意思：

They were of an age.（他们都是同年的。）

Birds of a feather flock together.（物以类聚。）

No two men are of a mind.（没有两个人是同一条心的。）

（6）表示“per”的意思：

The postman calls twice a days.（邮差每天送两次信。）

His income is three thousand dollars a month.（他的收入每月三千元。）

The car was running at forty miles an hour.（那车每小时以四十英里的速度在跑着。）

（7）用于固有名词前有“像那样的人或物”的意思：

A Newton cannot become a Shakespeare at will.（一个牛顿那样的人不能随意变成莎翁那样的人。）

这样说的a Newton = a great scientist like Newton，a Shakespeare = a great dramatist like Shakespeare。

（8）在下面这样的片语中，也是要用“a”的。

to take（have）a walk（rest，bath，smoke，etc.）（散步、休息、入浴、抽烟等）

with a view to（旨在，为着要）

in a passion（fury）（生气）

of a sudden（= suddenly）（突然）

a few（少数）

a little（一点）

a good many（许多）

（9）普通不可数的（Uncountable）名词，当作可数的（Countable）来用的时候，就得利用不定冠词了：

（a）a piece of（一件）

an instance of（一例）

a portion of（一份）

a stone（一块石头）cf. stone（石料）

a fire（起火）cf. Fire burns.（火是会燃烧的。）

a murder（谋杀案）

a kindness（亲切的行为）

a beer（一杯啤酒）

an aspirin（一片阿斯匹林药片）

to have a swim（泅一回水）

（b）Asparagus is a grass.（芦筍是一种草。）

There was a long silence.（沉默了很久。）cf. Silence is golden.（沉默是金。）

（c）表结果或制成品：

an invention（发明的东西）cf. invention（发明）

a building（建筑物）cf. building（建筑术）

66. 定冠词的用法

请就定冠词的用法，分条举例说明。

【解答】定冠词the和that同一语源，指特定的事物，其用法可分下列各项：

（1）再提到前所说过的名词时：

I met a gentleman and a girl in the park，I thought the gentleman must be the father of the girl.（我在公园里遇见了一位绅士和一个女孩，我相信那绅士就是那女孩的父亲。）

（2）虽为第一次出现的名词，但所指的东西很明显时：

Shut the door，please.（请关门。）

He is the principal of our school.（他是我们学校的校长。）

We sent for the doctor.（我们去请医生了。）

Who is to take the chair tonight？（今晚谁做主席？）

（3）在独一无二的东西前：

The earth moves round the sun.（地球绕着太阳转动。）

Long live the King！（国王万岁！）

The Bible is being kissed by him.（他正吻着《圣经》宣誓。）

（4）由于后面的修饰语而得确定那名词何所指时：

I remember the time we first met.（我记得我们初次相逢的时候。）

Look at the dog by the gate.（你看门口的那条狗。）

I like the view from the window.（我喜欢从窗口看出去的景色。）

She is the girl that showed me the way.（指示我路径的就是这个女子。）

有时因冠词的有无而发生意义上的差别。比较：

They are the students of our school.（全体学生。）

They are students of our school.（部分学生。）

（5）在代表某一种类的名词前：

The whale is a mammal.（鲸是哺乳动物。）

The English farmer is fond of grumbling.（英国农夫一般喜欢喃喃地诉苦。）

The dog is the friend of man.（狗是人类的伴侣。）

（6）加在普通名词前造成抽象名词：

The pen（= the power of a pen）is mightier than the sword（= the power of a sword）.（文胜于武。）

What is learned in the cradle is carried to the grave.（婴孩时学到的东西至死不忘。）

She felt the mother rise in her breast.（她感觉到母性爱涌上心来。）

（7）加在形容词前造成复数普通名词或抽象名词：

The wounded were all taken to a neighbouring hospital.（伤者都送到附近的医院去了。）

The rich（= rich people）are not always happy.（富人并不一定幸福。）

The accused was taken out of the court.（被告从法庭被带走了。）

The beautiful（= beauty）is loved by all.（美是人人爱的。）

（8）在名词有序数或最上级的形容词或有only一类的字为修饰语时：

That is at the fifth page.（那是在第五页。）

He is the richest man in our town.（他是我们城内最阔的人。）

He is the only boy that solved the problem.（他是解答了那问题的唯一的学生。）

（9）在特殊的固有名词前：

（a）江河、海洋、山脉、群岛、船舰等：

The Thames，the Pacific，the Alps，the Philippines，the Queen Mary，etc.

（b）家族、国名、国民、国语等：

The Browns（布朗一家人或夫妇），the United States of America（北美合众国），the Americans（美国全体国民），the English language（英国语文），etc.

（c）书报杂志、公共建筑物、爵位等：

The Times（泰晤士报），the Year Book（年鉴），the English Fortnightly（英语半月刊），the Hotel Singapura（新加坡旅馆），the Globe Theatre（地球戏院），the University of Tokyo（东京大学），the Duke of Windsor（温莎公爵），etc.

（10）在如下的片语中：

in the morning，in the right，in the country，by the hour，by the pound，etc.

He patted me on the back.（他拍了我的背。）

The right man in the right place.（适人适任。）

Keep to the left.（行人靠左。）

Ⅴ 动 词

67. She will make him a good wife

She will make him a good wife. 在英文中发现这样的句子，译作“那女人要使那男人成为好妻子”。似乎讲不通，请指示应如何译法？

【解答】英文的动词有四种，即完全自动词，不完全自动词，完全他动词，不完全他动词。句中make后面接有宾语的him一看便知是他动词。但同一他动词，有时用作完全他动词，有时又用作不完全他动词。完全他动词后面接一个或两个宾语，不完全他动词后面接上宾语，还是不完全，必得再加上一个补语，才能表出一个完全的意念。

God made the country，and man made the town.（上帝造乡村，人造城市。）

是后接一个宾语的他动词make；至于：

Mother made me a new suit.（母亲为我做了一套新衣。）

是接两个宾语的他动词make。这都是完全他动词。若说：

I make it a rule to take a nap after lunch every day.（我每天午餐后照例睡一下。）

这就是不完全他动词的make，因为在宾语it后接的a rule不是宾语，而是补语。问题的例句中的make，是完全他动词，今被视作不完全他动词，所以译成中文就讲不通了。

She will make him a good wife.（她将成为他的好妻子。）

= She will make a good wife for him.（她要为他而做好妻子。）

句中有两个宾语，前面的him为间接宾语，后面的a good wife为直接宾语。同样的造句还有：

She made herself a new dress.（= She made a new dress for herself.）（她为自己做了一件新衣。）

I’ll make you some tea.（我要为你去泡茶。）cf. She made tea for all of us.（她为我们大家泡了茶。）

利用make这个他动词，我们还可以造出这样一个妙句：

She made him a good husband because she made him a good wife.（因为她成为他的好妻子，所以也使他做成了好丈夫。）

句中第一个made是不完全他动词，第二个made是完全他动词。

68. She will make a good wife

She will make a good wife. 句中的make到底是他动词呢，还是自动词？有的书上作为自动词举这个例，有的又把它作为他动词的例句举出。

【解答】这个例句中的make，最好是当作他动词用，因为在造句和意义上都以作他动词为妥当。说它是自动词，当然也讲得通，即是make = became，而把后接的wife看作补语，全句意为“她将要成为一个好妻子”。但最好还是把后面这wife看作宾语，make作他动词用，含义为“发展成为”，develop into或prove to be，代表的例句就是：

She will make（him）an excellent wife.（她将成为〔他的〕一个最好的妻子。）

有him的（见问题句）和没有him的分开，一样用make作他动词，不过有him的是把make作dative verb（授与动词）用，没有的就用作普通的他动词，后接一个宾语。

英文中的make这个动词，是用途最大、含义也多的（有三十几种不同的意思），而且在意思上常有极其微妙的差别，值得我们细心检讨。现就完全他动词举出几个例句，以供参考：

（1）The children made a toyboat.（孩子们做了一只玩具船。）

（2）The children made a circle around the fire.（孩子们围着火画了一个圆圈。）

（3）The books made a heap on the floor.（书本在地板上堆积如山。）

（4）Cold tea makes an excellent drink in summer.（冷茶成为夏天极好的饮料。）

（5）He will never make so great a scholar as his father.（他决不能成为他父亲那样的大学者。）

我们看了这些例句，便知道make的基本意义，还是当“做”解，作他动词用，至于什么时候，才要译作“成为”，那就要看那句话的前后关系，以及中国的惯用句法了。例（1）是显然地只能译“做”，例（2）及（3）是两者都可以译，可以说做了一个圈，也可以说成为一个圈；做了一个山或堆成一个山。至于例（4）及（5），就只能译作“成为”，但在本质上仍然和（1）（2）（3）是一样的，“She will make a good wife.”，仍然可译作“她要做一个好妻子”。

69. 借电话的说法

“我想跟你借个电话好吗？”一句话，译成英文：“May I borrow your telephone？”。为什么不对呢？

【解答】这句英文本身并没有错，不过不适宜于这种场合之用罢了。因为这句话，并不表示想要借电话打一下，而是说要借用电话机，把机子拿走，可见borrow一字是不能拿来直译许多中国话的，比方说中国话的“借光”，只能译作Excuse me，若果直译为borrow the light，就无人能懂了。我们说借电话，实际是使用一下别人的电话，重在“用”，而不在“借”。因此，英文要把借字译成用字，才合乎他们的说法，即：

May I use your telephone？

如果是一支笔的话，借与用是相同的，即是借去使用，所以二者都可以说：

May I borrow your pen？

May I use your pen？

（你的笔借我用一下好吗？）

中国话中的借字有时是用得很妙的，如“借问”（May I ask you？）、“借宿”（to ask for lodging）、“借重”（to seek the assistance of）、“借酒浇愁”（to drown care in the wine bowl）、“借故”（to make use of any thing as a pretext for）等等，都不宜直译。

70. 接电话的说法

“昨晚我接到了他的电话。”译为：“I received a telephone from him last night.”。为什么不可以呢？

【解答】这句英文，仍然和上项的情形一样，在句子本身并不为错，只是译得不恰当罢了。我们说收到他的信，可译成receive a letter from him或hear from him，所收到的确有一封信，电话只是收到几句话，如果说receive a telephone，便是收到一架电话机，不是对方打来的电话。所以问题中所举出的那句话，应英译为：

I had（或received）a phone call from him last night.

也可以改变主语而成：

He called me up last night.

He telephoned（to）me last night.

又关于打电话的英文表现法，还有下面种种：

I’ll tell him by telephone.（我将用电话通知他。）

They talked over the telephone.（他们在电话中交谈。）

You’re wanted on the phone.（或）A phone for you.（你有电话。）

71. 不可以说“The school has many students.”

“这学校有三千个学生。”我英译为：“The school has three thousand students.”。英国人说不通，把它叫作Chinese English，又说“It is not English to say so.”。但他们为什么又能说“A week has seven days.”呢？

【解答】中文的“有”字，英文有许多译法，have只是其中的一个译法，此外还有there + be、contain、hold、possess、own、comprise、consist、keep等等。问题中提出的句子，错在have一字，这时的“有”，不可译作have，而应译作there are才对，全句应作：

There are three thousand students in the school.

为什么能说a week has，又不能说the school has呢？这问题不是一言两语可以解答的，我们应该先把have一字的用法弄明白才行。作“有”解的have有下列三义：

（1）物质上的所有：

I have a very good library.（我有一个很好的图书室。）

He hadn’t any money.（他没有钱。）

I have a large family.（我有一个大家庭。）

He has a lot of friends.（他有许多朋友。）

（2）身心上的具有：

I have a poor memory.（我的记忆力很坏。）

He has a bald head.（他头秃了。）

Irishmen have red hair.（爱尔兰人头发是红的。）

Has she blue eyes or brown eyes？= Are her eyes blue or brown？（她的眼睛是蓝色还是棕色？）

（3）构成上的含有：

A week has seven days. = There are seven days in a week.（一周有七天。）

That room has only two windows. = There are only two windows in that room.（那房间只有两个窗子。）

Have you any pain here？= Is there any pain here？（这里痛不痛？）

How many days has February？= How many days are there in February？（二月有多少天？）

Has the house a garden？= Is there a garden at the front（back，etc.）of the house？（那屋有花园吗？）

这第三种含义及用法，和我们问题中的句子最为相近，因为它正是由have变成there are的。我们为什么不能说：“The school has three thousand students.”，而一定要说“There are three thousand students in the school.”呢？这牵涉到逻辑上的问题。第一，学校之于学生，不能说是“物质上的所有”，因为学生并不是学校的私有财产。其次，学校之于学生，更不是身心上所具有的，因为不是它身心上的特质。只有第三点的“构成上的含有”颇为相近，但仍是似是而非，因为学校是一个地点，一个机构，学校与学生的关系，不是不可分离的，例如假期中没有学生，学校仍然存在，不像一星期少了一天就不成，房间的窗子是构成房间的必要部分，不可分离的。至于there + be的原意是“存在”，存在于某处因而变成“有”的意思，学校既是一个地点，正好用得上这种“有”了。

72. speak、say、tell等字的意义及用法

英文中作“说话”解的字极多，最普通的speak、say、tell三字，意义及用法上有些什么不同？

【解答】英文作“说话”解的字眼确是很多，有speak、say、tell、talk、state、remark、relate、narrate、recount、converse、gossip、chat、chatter等，但最常用的还是头上的三个字，现在我们应该把这三字的用法，仔细地检讨一番。

Speak：此字的意思只是发出话语的声音，不管内容是什么，小孩子牙牙学语，说些什么谁也听不懂，我们就说：

A child begins to speak the moment it opens its lips to utter any ack-nowledged sound.（小孩子刚会张嘴叫出声音时，他就开始牙牙学语了。）

A dumb man cannot speak.（哑巴不能说话。）

We speak languages.（我们说各种语言。）

Don’t speak nonsense！（不要胡说！）

To speak the truth，I don’t like it.（老实说，我不喜欢这个。）

He did not speak at the meeting.（开会时，他未发言。）

Say：用语言传达思想感情时就说say，所以是有内容的，是有意义的。小孩子初期只能speak，要到相当大的时候才能say。在直接或间接引用句前后，通常都用say，如：

He said，“I will go.”

“I won’t come，” said William.

与间接宾语同用时在say后要再加一个to字，如：

He said something to me.

不可把say用在作宾语或补语的不定词上，即不可说“They say him to be mad.”，但可以说成被动：

He is said to be mad.（= It is said that he is mad.）

祷告及功课说say，如to say prayers、to say one’s lesson。美国话中say有特殊的用法：

The teacher says（= tells us）to come early.（老师要学生早点到校。）

Tell：传言，告诉用tell，不明说出所speak的事来，便不能用tell，即不说as I spoke to you yesterday，而要说as I told you yesterday。说真话说假话都用tell，即to tell the truth或to tell a lie（不能说to speak a lie）。说故事是tell a story，报时间是tell the time，看相算命卜未来也说tell fortunes（算命的人为fortune-teller）。现在我们不妨把以上三字作一比较：

He tells everybody that a councilman often gets up to speak and says nothing.（他对大家说，议员常站起来说话而不知所云。）

You say something，and you tell somebody something.（你说点什么，你对人说点什么。）

She said the movie was good.（她说那电影好。）

She told me the movie was good.（她告诉我那电影好。）

现在再看看其余的字：

Talk：谈话，座谈，持续地说话。例：

We talked over a cup of tea.（我们喝茶谈话。）

State：述说，详细地说出理由来。例：

The advocate stated the facts.（律师申述各种事实。）

Remark：一言，陈述意见。例：

Allow me to remark.（让我说一句。）

Relate：详述（比tell要正式的字眼）。例：

The author saw it all happening so—saw it，and therefore relates it.（作家目击一切，看在眼里，所以能详述出来。）

Narrate：讲故事（较文言的字，比relate更为正式）。例：

I narrated briefly what had occurred since I had seen her last. ——Conan Doyle（我把最后一次见到她以来所发生的事简要地说了一遍。）

Recount：详述（这是一个最dignified的字眼）。例：

Her character has been sufficiently shown in recounting the events in which she took part. ——Creighton（她在详述她参加的事件时充分地表现出她的性格来了。）

Converse：谈话（相当正式的字眼）。例：

Two or three men，conversing earnestly together，ceased as he appro-ached. ——Bret Harte（有两三个人正在热心地谈话，当他走过去，他们便停止了。）

Gossip：喋喋，闲谈，街谈巷议。例：

He had been trying to be light and flippant and gossiping about people. ——Anthony Hope（他正打算要很轻浮而毫不客气地来品评人们。）

Chat：谈笑（无特别目的地愉快亲切地talk）。例：

Clara came along chatting and laughing with Colonel de Craye. ——G. Meredith（克雷娜走过来和狄克雷上校谈笑。）

Chatter：喋喋不休，说话很快又讲个不停。例：

Mrs. Titwing，why do you stay chattering there？——Watts-Dunton（狄太太，你为什么要留在那里讲个不停呢？）

73. “Care killed the cat.”中的过去动词

“Care killed the cat.”一句英文，为什么有人译作“忧能伤人”？cat分明是猫，怎可译作人？还有原文为什么要用过去动词？

【解答】世人相信猫有九条命，可是忧虑都可以使它丧命，何况人只有一条命呢？这句劝人不可忧虑的话，正好用中国的成语“忧能伤人”来翻译，比照字面译为“忧虑杀死了猫”要明白多了。

至于原文为什么要用过去动词，简单的答复是：英文的过去动词所有的用法的一种。英文的过去动词共有五种用法，即：

（1）表过去的动作或状态：

I arrived yesterday.（我昨天到达。）

Didn’t you feel happy？（你不觉得快乐吗？）

（2）表过去、现在、未来共通的不变的真理：

Care killed the cat.（忧能伤人。）

（3）代替过去完成动词用：

He dropped the letter before he went.（他去以前就把信写好了。）

（4）在间接说法中代替现在用：

He told me that she spoke English admirably.（他告诉我说她的英语讲得漂亮。）

（5）用于假设语气（即虚拟语气——编注）中：

I wish I had money enough to pay you.（我希望我有足够的钱可以还你。）

上举五种用法中的第二种，也许是从拉丁文的gnomic perfect的用法遗传下来的。Jespersen把它叫作Generic preterite（一般的过去），Sweet、Poutsma诸人又称之为Neutral preterite（中立过去），无非是说它是跨有过去、现在、未来三个时候，来表示eternal truth（不变的真理）而使用的。其他的例，还有：

Men were deceivers ever.（人总是好欺骗的。）（出自莎剧Much Ado About Nothing二幕三场六十五行。）

Faint heart never won fair lady.（胆小的人绝找不到漂亮的太太。）（谚语）

The course of true love never did run smooth.（好事多磨。）（出自莎剧Mids. N. D. 一幕一场一百三十四行。）

74. “one of +名词”后面附句中的动词的数，要以那名词为准

“李白是中国的最伟大的诗人之一。”译成英文为“Li Po is one of the greatest poets that has ever lived in China.”。译文据说错了，不知错在何处？

【解答】应改为“Li Po is one of the greatest poets that have ever lived in China.”才对，因为that指poets，不是指one，所以要接复数动词。当然依照文法来看，of the greatest poets，原是一个形容词一般的修饰语句，不能视为主语字的，例如：

She was watching some pieces of linen cloth which were stretched out on the grass for the purpose of bleaching.（她正在看守着一些晒在草地上来漂白的麻布。）

句中were就是接承pieces的动词，如果接cloth的话就要用was，可见of the cloth是用来修饰pieces的形容词，主体还是pieces呢。只有“one of +名词”是一个例外，后面附句中的动词的数，不以one，而以of后的名词为准，这在文法上虽讲不过去，但在逻辑上是极其合理的。因为one of the poets是其中之一，他是诗人，其余的人也都是诗人，不能把他看作例外的。我们也可以说one与poets是有同一性的，但pieces与cloth却是判然不同的两件事物。再请看下列例句：

There are many breaches of custom which are not condemned by law or by religion，but which are forbidden by public opinion and punished by the disapproval of the community.（有许多破坏习俗的行为，并不受法律或宗教的指责，而是受舆论所禁止，因大众的非难而受到处罚。）

It was one of those trains which give you an understanding of eternity. ——A. G. Gardiner（那是使人懂得什么是永远的那种火车之一。）

但如果在one之前加有冠词等的话，情形就完全不同了，例如：

This is the one of the books on the subject that has ever been written in Chinese.（这是关于这个问题用中文写的一本代表作。）

She is the only one of the few girls of my acquaintance that is acquainted with the old poet.（她是我认识的极少数的女子中与那老诗人相识的唯一的一个。）

在以上二例中，第一句中的that是指the one不是指books的，所以动词用has；而第二句中的that是指the only one，不是指girls的，所以动词用is。这是特别加重the one及the only one的缘故，才使得后面的动词与之一致的，说话者的心目中只有那一本书，或那一个女子，其观念是单一的，自然用的动词也变成单数了。有时甚至不加冠词，也不能说是绝对的错，因为至少在文法上是说得过去的。

75. 动词后接表示动作的字可分三种

A travel agency announced not to accept any more bookings for tourist travel to China.（旅行社公告不再接受前往中国游览的订票。）这句英文据说是错误的，但不知错在什么地方？

【解答】英文的动词后面表示动作时接什么字句是一定的，大约可以分为三类：第一类是接不定词，第二类是接名词子句或名词，第三类是二者皆可。例如：

（1）He agreed to go at once.（他同意立刻去。）

（2）He admits that the accusation is just.（= He admits the justice of the accusation.）（他承认这种控告是正当的。）

（3）He likes to read（or reading）novels.（他喜欢读小说。）

问题中的announce一字是属于第二类，现当作第一类来接不定词的to accept，当然不对，应改为：

A travel agency announced that it would not accept any more bookings for tourist travel to China.

这是接的名词子句，如果换上单纯的名词则成为：

A travel agency announced its decision not to accept any more bookings for tourist travel to China.

在上句中是接的decision这个名词。此字作动词用时，是属于第一类，如：

It had been decided，a travel agency announced，not to accept any more bookings for tourist travel to China.

“通知开饭”是announce dinner，“通知客到”是announce guests，“宣布结婚”是“It has been announced that Mr. A and Miss B will be married next Sunday.”。

76. 自动词的被动语态

All the guests are arrived. 句中的动词arrive是自动词，照规则不可以用被动语态（Passive voice），因为说“所有的客人都被到达了”是不通的。请将这种用法详为解说。

【解答】被动语态在英文中是有很奇妙的用途的，例如，同是一个Passive，它又可分为Statal Passive（状态的被动）和Actional Passive（动作的被动），而在意味上发生差别，现例解如下：

（a）He was dressed in the latest fashion.（他穿得最时新了。）

（b）The children were dressed every morning by their mother.（孩子们每天早晨由母亲为他们穿衣服。）

（a）His bills are paid，so he owes nothing now.（他的账全部付清，现在他一文钱都不欠人家的了。）

（b）His bill are paid regularly on the first of every month.（他定规在每月一日付账。）

上举的（a）例表示状态的持续，（b）例表示动作的完成。前者是静态的，后者是动态的。在后者句中通常是带得有副词，如上例中的every morning及regularly等等。又如：

He is buried at Westminster.（表状态）

He was buried yesterday.（表动作）

She was dressed in black.（表状态）

She dressed herself in black.（表状态）

他动词用被动语态的形式是很普通的用法，但在意味上有这种区别是值得注意的。自动词本来是没有被动语态的，但有某些特定的自动词，却具有“be +自动词的过去分词”的形式，用来表示事物的状态（state）或结果（result）。

He was married.（= He married.）（他结婚了。）

The train was stopped.（= The train stopped.）（火车停止了。）

We were agreed to go.（= We agreed to go.）（我们都同意去。）

I was determined to go.（= I determined to go.）（我决心去。）

如最后一例，两种说法虽则用了等号，但要加以分别的话，也可以说：I determined只是表示单纯的决心而已，I was determined则表示毅然决然的样子，因为早已在那种决心的状态中了。我们决不可把它作为被动语态看待，最好把那个“自动词的过去分词”当作一个形容词，就好解释了。例如：

The sun is risen.（= The sun has risen and is now in the sky.）（太阳出来了。）

The sun is set.（太阳落山了。）

My money is gone！（我的钱都完了！）

She found that her strength was gone.（她发觉她的气力都没有了。）

Spring is come.（春满人间。）

All the guests are arrived.（客人都到齐了。）

We are gathered here this morning.（今天早上我们大家聚集一堂。）

He is dressed elegantly.（= He dresses elegantly.）（他衣着华丽。）

77. My uncle remembered me on my birthday

“My uncle remembered me on my birthday.”一句，译作“我叔父记得我的生日”。为什么是错了？英文remember一字除作“记忆”解外，还有其他什么解释？请举例说明。

【解答】英文的动词remember，通常有四种含义，即：

（1）想起，例如：

I do not remember your name.（我想不起你是姓什么的。）

（2）记忆，例如：

I shall always remember your kindness to me.（我将永远记得你对我的好处。）

（3）致意，例如：

Remember me to your mother.（令堂前乞代请安。）

（4）赠物，致酬，给奖品，付小费，例如：

Remember a child on its birthday.（送小孩生日礼物。）

Remember the waiter.（付侍者小费。）

My uncle remembered me in his will.（我伯父在遗嘱中分了遗产给我。）

问题中的文句，应作上举的第四种解释，译作第二种的意思自然错了。原意是“我叔父在我生日时送了我一个礼物”。

英文的remember一字，后面可接用动名词，也可接用不定词，不过产生的意义有别，宜加注意。比较：

（a）I remember seeing him once.（我记得见过他一次。）

（b）I remember to see him tomorrow.（我明天一定要去找他。）

接用动名词的是指过去，接用不定词的是指未来。不过如果你用了完成不定词，当然也就是指的过去了，所以（a）例可改写为“I remember to have seen him once.”或是“I remember that I saw him once.”。（b）例也可改写为“I remember that I must see him tomorrow.”。

和remember相反的字forget，也有同样的用法，例如：

（a）I forget going = I forget that I went.

（b）I forget to go = I forget that I must go.

Evans说，在forget一字后应接用不定词，如果要接用动名词时，就得再加一个about字样，例如：

I forgot to mail the letter.（或是说）I forgot about mailing the letter.

但一般的英文学者都认为forget后面是可以直接接用动名词的，如Hornby在Patterns and Usage p. 19中即有“Shall you ever forget hearing her sing？”的例句。Zandvoort在Handbook p. 27中也有“I shall never forget seeing her stand on the balcony of the palace.”的例句。Kruisinga在他的Hand-book p. 381中也有“Well，if you think going to dinner will help you to forget going to church. ——Cotes，Cinderella”。

78. 不可以说“I am having money.”

照文法的规定，“我现在正有钱”只能译成英文的“I have money.”，不可以说“I am having money.”，为什么又可以说“He is having his supper.”的呢？

【解答】动词have作“所有”解的时候，是表示状态，而非表示动作的，所以用在这种意义上是没有进行式的形态的，例如：

1. 他有结实的身体。

He has a good constitution.

2. 他有大的抱负。

He has a great ambition.

以上即令是表示状态也不能用进行式的动词。但是说“He is having his supper.”确是可以说的，因为is having是等于is taking，而没有“所有”的意思，is taking即is eating 所以是可以用进行式的。动词的have，只要不作“有”字解，就可以用进行式。通常have被用作“享受”（enjoy）或“饮食”（partake of）的意思，或其他的惯用句，在那种场合，是无妨用进行式的。现再举几个例来看：

1. 今年夏天非常的热。

We are having a terribly hot summer this year.

2. 我听说他在那里玩得非常痛快。

I hear he is having a wonderful time there.

3. 父亲现在正在洗澡。

Father is now having a bath.

4. 天气很好呀。

We are having good weather.

此外表示状态的动词，即是通常不用进行式的动词，还有下举一类的字：

1. 你的父亲我只是面善而已。

I know your father only by sight.

2. 她与其说像她父亲不如说更像她母亲。

She resembles her mother than her father.

3. 你记得我吗？

Do you remember me？

4. 学校在山脚下。

The school stands at the foot of a hill.

5. 叔叔住在市郊。

Uncle lives in the suburbs of the city.

以上的动词普通的情形都是不用进行式的。其他还有possess、belong、love、like等字，原具有持续的性质，所以通常也不用进行式，但live和stand却是可以有下面这样的进行式的用法的：

1. 我的父母都健在。

Both my parents are still living.

2. 她那时正站在她母亲身边。

She was standing close to her mother.

即是live不作“住”解，而作“活着”解；stand不作“在”解，而作“站立”解。还有“看见”（see）、“听见”（hear）等字也没有进行式，只有“看”（look at）和“听”（listen to），才可以用进行式。

1. 你看见那里有什么？

What do you see there？

2. 你看什么？

What are you looking at？

3. 你没有听见我说的吗？

Don’t you hear me？

4. 他在听无线电。

He is listening to the radio.

当see、hear表一度的视听（知觉行为）时，便不用进行式，如果作为一个句子表持续的动作时，又可以用进行式了：

1. 叔父现正在新加坡观光。

Uncle is seeing the sights of Singapore.

2. 他正在大学里听讲。

He is hearing lectures at the university.

79. 时态的一致和不一致

在世界书局出版的《四用英汉辞典》上，对would一字的用法所举的例句中，有句云：“Even if I know，I would not tell.”。在那条件句中的动词，为何不用Subjunctive Past的knew？既用了Indicative Present的know，为何在主句中又用would而不用will？

【解答】辞典上的这个例句，虽与“时的一致”不合，但也并不为错误。在普通条件句中时态前后呼应的规则，略如下表：

| Antecedent（前） | Consequent（后）
（a） | Indicative Present or Past | Ordinary Form
| Subjunctive Future | Ordinary Form
（b） | Subjunctive Future | Ordinary Form or Simple Conditional Form
（c） | Subjunctive Past Perfect Subjunctive Past | Simple Condition Form Compound Conditional Form

条件句为什么要分（a）（b）（c）三种句型呢？因为如果那条件是表示真实的（true）事，则动词必须用Indicative Mood，例如：“Even if he is poor，he is honest.（= It is true that he is poor，but he is honest.）”。又如“If he was severe，he was just.（= Though he was severe，yet he was just.）”。这是属于（a）型的用法。

如果那条件是表示可疑的（doubtful）事，则动词就要用Subjunctive Present or Future，例如：“If he be guilty，（or If he should prove guilty，）he ought to be punished. If I should fail，I would try again.”。这是属于（b）型的用法。

如果那条件是表示虚伪的（false）事，则动词就要用Subjunctive Past or Past Perfect，例如：“If he were guilty，he would not speak so boldly.”，又如“If he had been guilty，he would not have spoken so boldly.”。这是属于（c）型的用法。

通常用even if（= though或although）的句中，前后都是用现在时态，如：

I’ll do it，even if it takes me all the afternoon.（即令要花上整个的下午，我还是照做。）

I’ll lend you the money，even if I have borrowed it myself.（那笔钱我一定借给你，即令我自己也要向人家去借来。）

Even if my watch is right，we shall be too late.（即令我的表不错，我们也赶不上。）

上举三例都是用的现在时，不过这种条件句用过去时也是很普遍的，例如：

I would not do it，if I were in his place.（如果我是他的话，我就不会那样做的。）

Even if I were rich I would work.（纵使我富有，我也要做事。）

以上所说的种种，都是一些基本规则，但文法是可以活用的，时常有变则发生，如问题中的例句就是一个变则，因此前后不能获得“时的一致”。据英文学者Sweet说，这种过去时与现在时连用，可称为a Compulsive mood，是条件句的一种pure mood，而英文辞典名编纂者Fowler说得更为明白：他说在普通的情形下，当然前后都用过去时，但如欲表示生动，条件句中就用现在时，例如：

I should not wonder if he came.（normal）

I should not wonder if he comes.（vivid）

如大家知道的，would是will的过去，但有时也可用于现在，以表示客气，尤其是在请求句中说得客气些（in polite requests）不用will you而用would you，当然是由于uncertainty而来的说法。我们不常说“Will you come here for a minute？”，而常说“Would you come here for a minute？”，是因为说would的可靠性比说will的要少，故显得客气，如果说成你非来不可的口气，那就成了命令，而不是请求了。在“Even if I know，I would not tell.（即令我知道，我也不一定要说。）”一句中，用would比用will要来得弱，只表示纯然的假设罢了。如果说成“Even if I know（或knew），I will not tell.（我就知道，我也不说。）”就表示坚定的意志，来得更为现实而没有缓和的余地了。

80. 假设语气的用法

The Week Magazine刊载Doroth van Doren的一篇文章中有句云：“St. Francis of Assist，hoeing his garden，when asked what he would do if he were suddenly to learn that he was to die at sunset that day. He sad，‘I would finish hoeing my garden.’”。请问同在一句假设语气的文句中，为何前用he were，后又用he was呢？又假设语气的文句，通常分前后句，其中动词时态的呼应，是否有一定的规矩？

【解答】句中代表假设语气（Subjunctive mood）的只有were一字，其后附属的子句，不应再用假设的字眼，所以只可以说that he was to die（命定要死），或that he would die（将死），而不能再用that he were to die，为着时态的前后呼应起见，句中既用了假设过去的were，后文也要用过去时态的动词才行。

假设语气的文句，通常由条件句（Protasis）及归结句（Apodosis）而构成，前后句中的动词，须前后呼应，不过这种呼应系由习惯语法所使然，并不一定过去接过去，现在接现在，未来接未来。兹就假设语气最常用的四种时态，举例说明如下：

假设现在（Subjunctive Present）：条件句中的动词用be或其他动词的现在形，第三人称单数现在也不加语尾的〔s〕；归结句接（1）直陈语气（Indicative Mood）现在或（2）未来；又可接（3）命令语气（Imperative Mood）。例如：

（1）If this be true，I am sorry for it.

（2）Though he confess，I will not pardon him.

（3）Whatever be our fate，let us not add guilt to our misfortunes. ——Goldsmith

假设未来（Subjunctive Future）：条件句用should be；归结句接（1）shall（或will等）be，（2）should（或would等）be，（3）命令语气，例如：

（1）If it should be true，I shall be very happy.

（2）If I should fail，I would try again.

（3）If he should come，please give this to him.

假设过去（Subjunctive Past）：条件句用were或其他的过去动词;归结句接（1）should（或would等）be，（2）should（或would等）have been。例如：

（1）If I were a bird，I would fly to you.（又）If I tried，I could do it.（又）If I did not obey him，I might be punished.

（2）If we lived in those days，I should have been a knight. ——Mere-dith

假设过去完成（Subjunctive Past Perfect）：条件句用had been，归结句接（1）should（或would等）have been，（2）should（或would等）be。例如：

（1）If he had been young，he would have gone.（又）If I had drunk it，I should have died.（又）If I had not obeyed him，I might have been punished.

（2）If he had worked hard in his youth，he would be a rich man now.（cf. If he had worked hard in his youth，he would have made a fortune.）

81. 假设语气的时态和实际时间的比较

假设语气也分现在、过去、未来种种时态，但和我们实际时间上的现在、过去、未来并不一致，常使初学者感到混乱。请就假设语气的时态与实际的时间作一比较，详细加以说明。

【解答】英文动词时态的现在、过去、未来的用法，和实际的时间是大致相符合的，但英文中有一种特别的时态是中文所没有的，那就是完成时态（Perfect Tense）。完成时态中又分现在、过去、未来三种，现在完成时态是表示从过去到现在为止的一段时期；过去完成时态则是表示过去的过去，如讲故事的人都是用过去时态来讲述当时发生的事情的，如果说到那以前发生的事情就须用过去完成时态。至于未来完成时态，则是用于说到了未来某个时候就可以完成的事。

英文的假设语气，原有两大作用：一为用来表达不确实的事情（Uncertainty），乃至怀疑的事情（Doubt），另一为用来表达想象的事情（Supposition）。说实际时候的现在，可用假设现在（Subjunctive Present）来表示怀疑或不确实的事情。例如：

If a man once fall，all will tread upon him.（落井下石。）

If your desires be endless，your cares will be so，too.（欲望无穷，忧亦无穷。）

又可用假设过去（Subjunctive Past）来表想象的事情，例如：

If I were a bird，I would fly to you.（我要是一只鸟我就飞到你跟前来了。）

I would to Heaven I had your potency. ——Shakespeare（我希望我要有你那样的能力就好了。）

说实际时候的过去，可用假设现在完成（Subjunctive Present Perfect）或假设未来完成（Subjunctive Future Perfect），以表怀疑或不确实的事情，例如：

If you have done with the book，please return it to me.（那本书看完了，请还给我。）

If he should have finished his work，tell him to come at once.（他的工作如果做完了的话，你要他马上来。）

又可用假设过去完成（Subjunctive Past Perfect）来表想象的事情，例如：

If you had come ten minutes later，I should have been out.（你要迟来十分钟，我就出去了。）

He looked as if he had seen a ghost.（他的样子好像碰了鬼一样。）

说实际时候的未来，可用假设现在（Subjunctive Present）或假设未来（Subjunctive Future）来表怀疑或不确实的事情，例如：

If this be true，I am sorry for it.（如果这是真的，就太可惜了。）

If I should fail，I would try again.（如果我失败了，我要再来一次。）

又可用迂回说法的假设未来（Periphrastic Subjunctive Future）来表想象的事情，例如：

If I were to ask him，he would consent.（我去找他，他就会同意的，不过我不愿意去找他罢了。）

Even if the sun were to rise in the west，my resolution would be unch-anged.（即令太阳从西边出来，我的决心也不会改变的。）

82. 完全他动词和不完全他动词

“我想这是对的”一句话译成英文时为“I think it is right.”。但又可将is去掉，而说成“I think it right.”。这两种说法不知有何不同？

【解答】“I think it is right.”是一个复句（Complex Sentence），其中I think是主要子句，（that）it is right是附属子句。主要子句中的动词think是一个完全他动词（Complete Transitive Verb），所以附属子句（that）it is right是它的宾语（Object）。至于第二种说法“I think it right.”，是一个单句（Simple Sentence），其中的think是一个不完全他动词（Incomplete Transitive Verb），it是它的宾语，right是不完全他动词所必需的补语（Complement）。这种不完全他动词，英文有一个专门名称，叫作Factitive Verb（作为动词），意思是说对它的宾语有所作为。例如：

He made her his wife.（他使她做他的妻子。）

这是用名词补语的，同时也是宾格补语（wife与her为同一人），由作为动词的made，对宾语的her发生作用，使之成为his wife。

He made her happy.（他使她快乐。）

这是用形容词补语的，同时也是宾格补语（happy的即是her），由作为动词的made，对宾语的her发生作用，使之快乐。

现在再举几个完全他动词与不完全他动词的比较如下：

Keep your eyes upon him.（完全）

Keep your eyes open.（不完全）

I will make a man of him.（完全）

I will make him my companion.（不完全）

I make a custom of doing so.（完全）

I make it a custom to do so.（不完全）

I believe the untrue report.（完全）

I believe the report untrue.（不完全）

Keep him company.（完全）

Keep him busy.（不完全）

They chose him a wife.（完全）

They chose him king.（不完全）

She will make him a good wife.（完全）

She will make him a good husband.（不完全）

在完全他动词say的造句中，可用各种不同的不完全他动词，如call、express、describe等来替代：

Everybody says that honey is sweet.（完全）

Everybody calls honey sweet.（不完全）

He said that the statement was false.（完全）

He declared the statement false.（不完全）

The jeweller said that the diamond was genuine.（完全）

The jeweller pronounced the diamond genuine.（不完全）

He said that he was satisfied with the arrangement.（完全）

He expressed himself satisfied with the arrangement.（不完全）

I must say that I am unequal to the task.（完全）

I must own myself unequal to the task.（不完全）

He says that he is guilty.（完全）

He has confessed himself guilty.（不完全）

He says that he is a Christian.（完全）

He professes himself a Christian.（不完全）

He says I am his superior.（完全）

He acknowledges me as his superior.（不完全）

They say that he is their lawful master.（完全）

They recognize him as their lawful master.（不完全）

They say that she is a beautiful woman.（完全）

They describe her as a beautiful woman.（不完全）

He says that the state of the country is deplorable.（完全）

He represents the state of the country as deplorable.（不完全）

83. dative verb的用法

英文动词只分自动词和他动词两种，为何又有什么dative verb呢？这种动词与自动词或他动词有什么不同？

【解答】授与动词（dative verb）是他动词的一种。凡需要有宾语的动词就是他动词。一般的他动词只要有一个宾语便行，但这种他动词，需要有两个宾语，一为直接宾语，一为间接宾语。这种需要两个宾语的他动词，就叫作授与动词。

兹举例说明如下：

授与动词可由含义的不同，大别为五类：

（1）表授与之意的：

I have given him a month’s notice.（我在一个月前通知他了。）

Your letter has afforded me much pleasure.（接奉来函，至为欣慰。）

Will you please reach me that book？（请把那本书递给我一下。）

I’ll lend you all the assistance in my power.（我将尽力来援助你。）

He has promised me an appointment.（他答应帮我找事。）

（2）表告知之意的：

He has told me a secret.（他告诉了我一个秘密。）

Will you please sing us a song？（你给我们唱一支歌好吗？）

Professor Wong teaches us English.（王教授教我们的英文。）

I asked him a question.（我问了他一个问题。）

He answered me nothing.（他什么也未回答。）

（3）表贡献之意的：

He has rendered me a great service.（他帮了我一个大忙。）

Exercise will do you good.（运动对你有益。）

Will you do me a favour？（麻烦你一下。）

To do him justice，he is not a bad man.（公平地说，他并不是一个坏人。）

He paid me a high compliment.（他很尊敬我。）

（4）表得失之意的：

I will get you a ticket.（我去替你买票。）

This ticket will gain you admission.（凭这张票入场。）

I will secure you a position.（我要替你找一职位。）

I will try to procure you the best terms I can.（我要尽力去争取有利的条件。）

The book won him a reputation.（那本书使他出了名。）

His slowness lost him the chance.（他太迟钝，失去了机会。）

（5）其他可用授与动词的：

Passengers are allowed 30 lbs. of luggage.（旅客只许携带三十磅行李。）

I have forbidden him my house.（我不许他进我的屋子。）

They deny me justice.（他们对我太不公平了。）

Can you spare me a few minutes？（耽误你两三分钟好吗？）

Her landlord charged her no rent.（她房东不收她的房钱。）

We willingly forgive him his faults.（我们愿意恕免他的过错。）

They grudged me even my pittance.（他们连最少的报酬都不给我。）

How I envy you your good health！（我多么羡慕你的健康呀！）

I owe you one thousand dollars.（我欠你一千元。）

He does not bear any one malice.（他对任何人都不怀恶意。）

I wish you every happiness.（祝你幸福无量。）

另外还有一种变则的授与动词，是只有间接宾语，而无直接宾语的，例如：

The dress becomes you very well.（这件衣你穿了很适合。）

It behooves you to be careful.（你应当心。）

I am prepared for the worst that can befall me.（我准备好应付最坏的事情发生。）

This house cost me thirty thousand dollars.（此屋花了我三万元。）

How long did it take you to master English？（你把英文学好花了多少年工夫？）

This coat has lasted me five years.（这衣穿了五年。）

Skill would avail us nothing against number.（在敌人的数目过多时，我们的技术也要失去效用的。）

This room serves me for a study.（此室我用作书房。）

My heart failed me at the sight.（一见那光景我就失去了勇气。）

My knowledge of English stood me in good stead.（我的英文知识发挥了很大的用途。）

〔注〕这种变则的授与动词是不能用作被动态的。上举例句中的to be careful、thirty thousand dollars、to master English、five years、nothing（against number）等都是副词，不可误作直接宾语。

84. factitive verb的用法

英文在自动词和他动词外，听说还有什么factitive verb；这到底是一种怎样的动词，请举例加以解说。

【解答】英文动词大别只有自动和他动两种，细别起来则有完全自动词和不完全自动词；完全他动词和不完全他动词四种。文法家对于不完全他动词另外给了一个专门名称，叫作factitive verb，中译为“作为动词”。凡他动词都要有宾语，有的在一个宾语之外，还需要有补语，才能表达出一个完整的意念来，所以它是不完全他动词，要有补语补足，使之变为完全的。例如：

He made her his wife.（他使她成为他的妻室。）

He made her happy.（他使她快乐。）

上例中的He是主语，made是他动词，her是宾语，his wife和happy便是补语。再看下举二例：

（a）I think it is right.（我想这是对的。）

（b）I think it right.（我想这是对的。）

在（a）句中I是主语，think是完全他动词，it is right 是宾语，但在（b）句中的think是不完全他动词，因为除了宾语的it外，还需要一个补语的right。再比较下二例：

（a）He has become rich by diligence.（他因勤致富。）

（b）Diligence has made him rich.（他因勤致富。）

在（a）句中说He has become（他变成），意思是不完全的（因为become是一个不完全自动词），必须加补语rich才成句，至于在（b）句中Diligence has made him（勤快使他成为），意思也是不完全的（因为make在此为不完全他动词），必须加补语rich才成句。这是不完全自动词与不完全他动词的比较。

兹将不完全他动词举例说明如下：

Who made you judge between us？（谁要你做我们的裁判？）

What do you call this flower？（这花叫什么名字？）

They elected him chairman.（他们选他做主席。）

I thought him a fool.（我认为他是一个傻子。）

Keep your eyes open all the time.（时时要注意看。）

He left me her guardian.（他立遗嘱要我做她的监护人。）

Do you find the book easy？（你觉得那本书容易读吗？）

另外有一些不完全他动词，是带得有一个介词的，补语要接在那个介词后面，如regard as、mistake for等等皆是，我们不可把那冠有介词的补语，误认为是用作副词的介词片语。例如：

（a）Please make yourself at home.

（b）They spent their honeymoon at home.

（a）例中的at home是不完全他动词make的及宾语yourself的补语，而（b）例中的at home则是修饰完全他动词spent的副词。再举他例比较如下：

（a）I esteem him as a very honest man.（补语）

（b）He enters the contest as a professional.（副词）

（a）I mistook him for my brother.（补语）

（b）I bought it for my brother.（副词）

（a）Please keep everything in perfectly good condition.（补语）

（b）I remember having met him in a semiconscious condition.（副词）

（a）He has set a new scheme on foot.（补语）

（b）I crossed the bridge on foot.（副词）

再看下面这些带有介词的补语：

He is regarded as quite a rich man.（他被看作一个很有钱的人。）

They acknowledge him as an authority in these matters.（他们承认他是这方面的权威。）

We acknowledge it as binding.（我们承认此约有效。）

They recognized him as their chief.（他们承认他是首领。）

They describe her as a beautiful woman.（他们把她描写成一个美女。）

I took all his stories for truth.（我把他所说的全部视为真实的。）

She chose him for her husband.（她选定他做丈夫。）

At first sight I mistook him for a servant.（初起我误认他是仆人。）

Keep it in mind.（记在心上。）

He was left out in the cold.（他受冷遇。）

Don’t leave him in the lurch.（不要使他陷于困境。）

We hold him in esteem.（我们尊敬他。）

A project has been set on foot for establishing a department store to sell Chinese goods.（设立百货公司出售中国货物的计划已在进行中。）

You must put it in practice.（你必须把那个付诸实行。）

85. be going to的用法

D. H. Lawrence在他著的Rainbow一书中有句作“I’m going to go.”。为什么已经说了going，还要说to go？请就这个be going to的用法加以说明。

【解答】英文的be going原是go的进行式，但现在口语中已离开原意很远，而由向着某种动作或状态进行中那个意思，转变而有表示未来的助动词的作用了。这个be going to go的形式，英国一般人避免用它，在美国口语中却用的极多。在美国going to发音也略有变化，常被记录为gonna。它有四种用法：

（1）叙述最近的未来将要发生的事情：

It is going to rain.（就要下雨了。）

He is going to be punished.（他将受罚。）

Your dog is going to kill that cat in a minute.（你的狗就要把那只猫咬死了。）

There is going to be a circus here next week.（下星期这儿会有一个马戏班要来。）

This show is going to attract a good deal of attention.（这戏会很卖座的。）

（2）叙述最近的未来将要做的动作。在这种情况，多半包含得有一种企图，或表示一种计划或预定，有时也可表示决心：

I am going to write a letter.（我预备要写一封信。）

He is going to be married this autumn.（他打算今秋结婚。）

What are you going to be when you are grown up？（你长大了想做个什么样子的人？）

My father was a sailor and I am going to be a sailor，too.（我父亲是一个水手，我也想要做一个水手。）

（3）叙述未来可能有的事情：

You are going to see a lot of me.（今后你会常见到我。）

（4）这个形式有时也可以用来表示命令：

John，you’re going to bed early tonight.（约翰，今晚你要早点睡觉。）

〔注〕用will表示命令时较为温和，如：

You will do nothing of the sort.（你不要去做这样的事好吗？）

这种be going to的表现法，是充满着情感的，意义也比will为强烈，例如说“We’re going to sell the car.（我们打算把车子卖了。）”，就比说“We will sell the car.”要强调得多，而近乎be intending to的意味了。说“You’re going to regret this.（你要后悔的。）”，也比说“You’ll regret this.”威胁性要来得重多了。你配了一副新的眼镜带上感觉很不自然，可是一听到为你配镜的人说：“You are going to see much better with your new glasses.（你戴上这副新眼镜就会看得更清楚的。）”，你好像就获得了保证而安心了。

We’re going to show you the town while you’re here.（你停留在此地的时候，我们要带你到本城观光。）

这句话的语气当中，可以听得出来，他们已经很有准备，有计划地要带客人去观光当地的名胜古迹呢。

说be going to可以增进感情的要素，不像说be about to是毫无感情色彩存乎其间的。完全客观的描写可用be about to，如要表示主观的情感时就非用be going to不可。E. Wallace在其所著The Man at the Carlton中有一个对话，很可供我们研究。

She looked up at him quickly，and was about to speak，but apparently changed her mind.

“You were going to say——？”

She shook her head hesitantly，and looked at him again——a long，searching scrutiny.

（她很快地抬头望着他，好像想要说什么似的，可是显然她又不想说了。“你刚才不是想说什么话吗？”她犹豫地摇着头，重又望着他——长久而又详审地。）

不说are going to say，而用过去动词是表示那动作实际并未曾发生。

86. It is a dream come true

It is a dream come true. ——Blondie. 在这个句子中为何可以连用两个动词？这个come是否为不定词to come省略了to的形式？

【解答】在古代英文中，所谓完成式（Perfect tense）只有他动词才用“have +过去分词”的形式，自动词是要用“is +过去分词”的形式的，如“He is cumen.”。尤其是表示运动的自动词，如come、go、arrive等，一直是这样用的，如“Spring is come.”。不过现在同时又有“Spring has come.”一个完成式的形式存在，于是只好在意义上加以分别，即以“is +自动词的过去分词”表状态（state），以“has +自动词的过去分词”表动作（action）。

因为这是古代完成式的遗留，我们决不可以把它视为被动的语态（Passive Voice），如春天是不可以被人呼来唤去的。这种颇古的用法而今变成attributive的形式，来修饰前面的名词，现在在英语中用得极多，我们把它当作一个形容词看待，在用法上和意义上都不会成为问题的，如片语的in days gone by（往日），a gentleman returned from abroad（外国回来的绅士），a guest just arrived from America（一个刚从美国到临的客人）等等，我们都可以把它当作形容词来翻译。

这都是省略了relative + be的，如问题中的句子，实为“It is a dream that is come true.（实现了的梦。）”的省略说法。他例如：

Here’s a gentleman come to talk to you. ——E. V. Lucas（这里有位先生要来跟你谈话。）

After a bit，I should have thought it was a curse come again，if it had drove you from me. ——J. Eliot（过一会儿，我就会感觉到那是一种第二次降临的灾祸，如果那把你从我这儿赶走了的话。）

上引的gentleman come为gentleman who is（= has）come，而curse come为curse that was come之略。

Ⅵ 助动词

87. “Have you？”和“Do you have？”

在英文中有“Have you？”和“Do you have？”两种不同的说法；及“Have you to do？”和“Do you have to do？”两种不同的说法，不知每二者之间有何差异？

【解答】第一，我们应该明白，英国的英文和美国的英文是有些不同的。例如have这个动词，在用法上就大有差别，用作“所有”解时，在疑问句中，英国的英文是无需要加助动词do的，在美国的英文中便要加do而把have看作和其他的动词一样：

Have you any brothers？（英）

Do you have any brothers？（美）

Has she blue eyes？（英）

Does she have blue eyes？（美）

How many children have you？（英）

How many children do you have？（美）

但是have如不作“所有”解时，在英国的英文中也是要加do来发问的，如：

Do you have（= take）lunch out every day？（你每天都在外面吃午饭吗？）

至于have to与do——have to两种说法，美国也是并行不悖，随便怎样说都可以的，但在英国仍然有些分别，据Hornby说，这句表示“必须”的have to，有“特殊的”与“习惯的”两种用法，如指极近的未来（immediate future）或过去的未来（future-in-the-past）当中的活动，便是特殊用法，如：

Have you to go to the dentist’s this morning？（你今天上午要去看牙齿吗？）

如系指经常的或习惯的活动，就说：

Do you often have to go to the dentist’s？（你经常要去看牙齿吗？）

在以上两种情形中不一定要正式的疑问句才行，请参看下例：

You haven’t to go to school today，have you？（特殊）

You don’t have to go to school on Sundays，do you？（习惯）

在口语中常将have got to代替have to用：

What have you got to eat？（特殊）

What do you have to eat？（习惯）

He hasn’t got to work.（特殊）

He doesn’t have to work.（习惯）

在会话时，尤其是在美国，常将have省去，只说got，如：I got to（= must）write a letter.

又，have to的过去有下列各种表现：

had to（肯定）

did you have to had you to had you got to | （疑问）
didn’t have to had not to | （否定）

但had got to只有英国人说，美国人是不这样说的。

88. It is . . . that . . . should中should的含义

在It is . . . that . . . 的句型中，常接用should，那个should应该怎样翻译才对？

【解答】在这种句型中用的should，到底是表示一个什么意思，文法家颇有不同的意见，有的说是一种临时的假设语气，不把那事看作事实，而只是当作一个思考上的问题提出而已。至于It is后所接的形容词或名词，那才真正是对那事的判断或批评的表示。例如：

It is natural that you should count the days before coming home.（如果你要计算归期，我认为也是当然的。）

另外一种意见，就认为这个should的意思是含有“正当”或是“意外”或“遗憾”的成分在内。我觉得这个说法很对，请看下面的这些实例，同时注意翻译的方法：

（1）表示“正当”的：

It is proper that you should pay for it.（= You ought to pay for it.）（你应当付钱。）

It is necessary that men of this calling should remain single.（干这种职业的人是应该终身不结婚的。）

It is natural that I should dwell rather upon his successes than upon his failures. ——Doyle（我自然应当详说他的种种成功，而不说他的种种失败。）

It is not well that there should be a difference among the members of a family.（在一个家庭中发生不同的意见是不好的。）

It is impossible you should need any assistance. ——Cowper（你不至于要什么帮助。）

Is it really possible that you should be so careless？——Doyle（你真会这样不当心吗？）

注意：只有在It is impossible . . . 及Is it possible . . . 后面才可以接should或can，若是说It is possible时，后面就要接may了，如：

It was possible that I might spend the night there. ——Doyle（我很可能在那里过夜。）

It is impossible that this can be true.（这绝不可能是真的。）

Is it possible that he can have forgotten me？（他竟会把我忘记了吗？）

（2）表示“意外”或“遗憾”的：

It is strange that he should say so.（他居然会这样说，真是奇怪。）

It is a pity that he should live at such a distance.（他住得那样远，真是一件憾事。）

It is singular that on this particular night he should have been up. ——Doyle（在那天晚上他竟会起来是很奇怪的。）

在why及I am surprised、I regret、I am sorry、I wonder等等的后面用的should，也是表“意外”的，例如：

There is no reason why we should not succeed.（我们没有不成功的理由。）

I am surprised that you should not be able to explain it.（你不能解释这个，我很惊异。）

I regret that it should have come to this.（我很遗憾它会变成这个样子。）

89. can not、cannot、can’t

“He cannot do it.”和“He can not do it.”两种说法，不知有无分别？另有一个省略形的can’t，不知是否用法一样？请就这个否定字的用法加以说明。

【解答】有人说把cannot写成一个字的是英国式，把can not写成两个字的是美国式。不过Perrin在Writer’s Guide and Index to English上说，cannot的形式是more common。而Nicholson编的A Dictionary of American-English Usage上也说：“除了特别加强的场合，通常都是把cannot写成一字。”Wood在Current English Usage上说得更明白：“美国英语允许将can not写成二字，但英国英语则写作一字，只在特别加强否定时，才分开来写。”由此可见cannot是英美两国现在通用的形式，不加强意思是不分作二字的。

You ask if you can go to Alaska？No，you certainly can not！I’ve never heard of anything so foolish.（你问你是不是可以到阿拉斯加去？不行，绝对不行！我从来没有听到说过这样愚笨的话。）

在美国分开来写不但是加强意思，而且多少带得有一点文言的味道。在英国甚至是要加强否定，也可以不分开来写，而只是把not一字印成斜体罢了，例如：Dickens在David Copperfield中即有“I cannot say——I really cannot say.”的例子。

至于省略形的can’t是口语的用法，在极要好的朋友间通信时也可以用。不过写作时是决不用的。

在口语中常以cannot代替must not用，例如美国文法家Curme即举有这样的例句：

Children，you cannot play in the street.（孩子们，不可以在街上玩。）

这个can的含义，原有“能力”“许可”“可能”三种，当否定与“可能”连用时，意即“不可能”，通常可译作“不会”，例如：

He cannot be over fifty.（他不会超过五十岁的。）

He cannot have seen her yesterday.（他决不会在昨天见过她的。）

在cannot后接完成式动词，是对过去的事表示惊异或怀疑时用的，与它本身用过去式意思不同，如：

He could not see her yesterday.（他昨天没有能够见到她。）

下列几点值得我们注意：

（1）cannot . . . too，意为“无论怎样也不为过”，即“越……越好”。

Drinking water cannot be too pure.（饮用的水越是纯洁越好。）

You cannot be too careful.（你无论怎样小心，总不会过分。）

Not too much can be said about the value of early rising.（早起的好处是说不尽的。）

I cannot speak too highly of its value.（其价值之高无论怎样说也不为过分。）

I cannot too much impress upon your mind that labour is the condition which Nature has imposed on us in every station in life.（无论怎样深刻地铭记在心也不会过分，需知在我们人生每一阶段中，大自然所要我们做的就是劳动。）

（2）cannot接用but时，是把助动词后的主动词do或choose省略了。

I cannot but try. = I can do nothing but try.（我不得不试试。）

I cannot but tell her the truth.（我不得不把真相告诉她。）

（3）应说more than you cannot help的，通常却不用否定。

I don’t do more than I can help.（我能够不做的我就不做。）

Don’t tell him more than you can help.（能够不说就不说。）

90. must的主要用法

英文助动词的must，有现在形和过去形两种用法，关于现在形有些什么用法，请分条例解。

【解答】助动词must有下列各种主要的用法：

（1）表必要（Necessity）或义务（Obligation）时，后接有意志的动词。其否定为need not，而不是must not（这是may的否定）。

You must pay the money，but you need not do so now.（你必须付钱，不过不必现在就付。）

Must I take his place？——No，you need not.（一定要我代替他吗？——不一定，你不必代替他。）

One must eat to live.（人为生存必得饮食。）

I must have your answer at once.（请你立刻回答。）

（2）表命令（Command）或劝告（Advice）：

You must go.（你去吧。）

You must come to the office every day.（每天你要来上班。）

You must tell me at once.（马上讲给我听。）

You must really see Pompeii when you are in Italy.（你到了意大利，一定要到庞贝古城去看看才是。）

（3）表坚持（Insistence）：

He must always have his own way.（他老是很任性的。）

I must know（= insist on knowing）your reason.（你必须把你的理由说给我听。）

（4）表不可避免的事（Inevitability）：

It must rain soon.（一定就要下雨了。）

You must（= are certain to）lose，whichever happens.（无论转向何方，你都要损失的。）

We must all die sometime.（总有一天我们都要死的。）

（5）表必然的推测（Obvious Inference）时，后接无意志的动词。其否定为cannot。

He must be rich.（他一定很有钱。）

He cannot be rich.（他一定不会有钱的。）（否定）

Such a house must belong to some family above the common.（这样的房子一定是属于一般以上的家庭的。）

You must succeed in the entrance examination this time.（你这次一定会考取的。）

（6）“must have +过去分词”，有三种意思，即：

（a）谅必曾经：

You must have seen him yesterday.（你谅必在昨天曾经见到他。）

（b）谅必曾经（实在不曾）：

You must have seen him if you had been here yesterday.（你昨天要在此的话，你一定见到他了。）

（c）必须曾经：

Any applicant for this position must have practised for five years.（对于这个职位的任何申请人，必须曾经实习过五年。）

（7）must not是表禁止（Prohibition）的。其反对语为may。

You must not go.（你不可以去。）（允许去时说“You may go.”。）

You must not sit here talking.（你不要坐在这里聊天。）

91. must和have to的分别

英文的助动词must，只有现在形，过去要用had to代替，但had to的现在形为have to；这样一来，便有了两个现在形了，不知这两个现在形，在用法上有何分别？

【解答】同为现在形的must和have to，在一般的情形上是通用的，不过用have to的场合较多，尤其是在美国。

You must（或have to）do as you are told.（你一定要照着吩咐的做。）

We must（或have to）sell our house.（我们必须卖去我们的房子。）

I am sorry to say that for unavoidable reasons we shall have to（或must）dispense with your services from next year.（由于不可避免的理由，从明年起我们无法继续请你帮忙，十分抱歉。）

I always have to（或must always）work hard.（我必须经常努力。）

这二者在用法上的差别：用have to是表示客观的必要，用must是表示主观的必要，如说：

I have to go to the airport to see him off.（我必得到机场送行〔因为他是我的顶头上司〕。）

I must go to the airport to see him off.（我必得到机场送行〔因为他是我最好的朋友。〕）

用于否定时，二者在意义上也有很大的分别，如：

You have not to say that.（你用不着那样说。）

You must not say that.（你决不可那样说。）

第一句的you have not to say = you need not say；第二句的you must not say = you are not allowed to say。

还有have to的否定有两种表现法，一则加用do，一则不加do，指常习的事情用don’t have to，指特定的场合用haven’t to，例如：

We don’t have to work on Saturday afternoons.（通常在星期六下午我们不上班。）

We haven’t to work this afternoon，because it’s Saturday.（因为是星期六，今天下午不上班。）

宾语放在不定词的前后都是一样：

I have a letter to write.（或）I have to write a letter.（我有一封信要写。）

92. must用于过去时态

英文助动词must的过去形是had to，但常见在过去动词后的子句中仍然接用must，而不用had to，是不是must也可以当作过去动词用？

【解答】是的，must在某种条件之下是可以当作过去形用的。兹分别举例说明如下：

（1）在间接说法（indirect speech）中，仍保留直接说法时的must，以表示那种主观的决心，如：

He said he must speak with his master. = He said，“I must speak with my master.”（他说他一定要跟他老板谈一下。）

She told them that they must get everything ready themselves. = She said to them，“You must get everything ready yourselves.”（她要他们必须自己把一切准备好。）

（2）虽无间接说法的形式，却有间接说法的意味时，也要用must，如：

He could not be idle；he must always be doing something. = He said to himself：“I must always be doing something.”（他觉得他不能懒惰，他必须不停地做事。）

They saw that they must awaken the public conscience.（他们明白他们必须唤醒民众的良心。）

（3）在条件句中，must可用作过去假设，而含有would be bound to之意：

If he had looked，he must have seen the light of the approaching train.（= If he had looked，he would have been bound to see / he would be bound to have seen . . . ）（如果他看了的话，他一定看到了那奔驰而来的火车的灯光。）

Had it been otherwise，I must long ago have perished.（要不然的话，我一定早就死去了。）

If he knew her real nature，he must hate her.（如果他知道她真实的性格的话，他一定会恨她的。）

（4）在附属子句中有时也用must：

He knew suddenly who the woman must be. ——Jespersen（他突然明白了那女人一定是谁。）

There was a friend whom I must call on immediately.（有一个朋友我必须立刻去拜访。）

（5）在表示事情的悖逆反常时也可以用must，中文的意思为“偏偏”“偏巧”：

Just when we were ready to go away for the holidays，the baby must catch measles！（正当我们准备动身出去度假时，偏巧婴儿出疹子。）

Just as I was busiest，he must come worrying.（正当我最忙的时候，他偏要跑来麻烦。）

As I was sitting down to supper，the telephone must ring.（我一坐下来吃饭，偏偏电话就来了。）

注意：在假设语气中只有表“推测”的才用must，其余表“必要”或“义务”时，仍得用had to或be obliged to，例如：

If all this was true，he would have to resign his office.（如果这些是事实的话，他必得辞职的。）

If I had to support my family，I would leave school without finishing the course.（如果我要养家的话，我就得不毕业离校了。）

93. would和used to的分别

英文的助动词would和used to，同为表达过去的习惯，但不知在用法上二者有何分别？

【解答】英文表示现在的习惯，多用动词的现在时态（Present Tense）或是助动词的will；表示过去的习惯，则用used to或will的过去式would。常与will、would同用的，是often、sometimes等副词。至于表示过去习惯的used to和would，在用法上到底有何分别呢？有人说would是表示不规则的习惯，used to是表示规则的习惯，但什么情形是有规则的，什么情形就是不规则，实在没有具体的标准，因为既然称为习惯，就多少是有规则的了。

最明确的分别，也许是这样的：would表示一种“回想的心情”，used to表示“过去与现在的对比”。

（1）would的用例：

He would often sit for hours，book in hand.（他常要手不释卷地坐上好几个钟头不动。）

Sometimes the boys would play a trick on their teacher.（孩子们有时要给老师开开玩笑。）

He would often climb a mountain when young.（在年轻时他常要去爬山。）

After he had finished his work，he would read and study by the fireside.（他在做完工作之后，常坐到火炉旁边去读书或研求。）

They used to nod to each other when they met，and now and then they would exchange a word or two.（当他们遇见时彼此点头招呼一下，也时常要交换一言两语。）

（2）used to的用例：

He used to play tennis before his marriage.（在结婚以前他常打网球〔现在不打了〕 。）

People used to think that the sun went round the earth.（从前的人以为太阳是围绕着地球走的〔现在当然谁也知道是地球绕太阳走的〕 。）

Used you to have this sort of thing in your young days？——Calsworthy（你年轻的时候常有这种事吗？）

He doesn’t hate her as much as he used to.（他现在不像从前那样地恨她了。）

（3）used可和表示状态的动词一起用，如：

There used to be a church here.（这儿以前有一座教堂。）

When I was a boy，I used to like chocolate（but I don’t like it any more）.（我小时候喜欢吃巧克力糖，〔但现在早已不爱了〕 。）

这种用法是不可以换用would的，因为说“When I was a boy，I would like chocolate.”是不通的，因为I would like chocolate意为“我想吃巧克力糖”。上述（2）（3）两项，如改用单纯过去动词，意思也不会相差太远的，如说“There was a church here.”，意思也是“这里曾有一座教堂”，不过现在是否还存在就没有提及了。附带可注意的是used to（= formerly did）与be used to（= be accustomed to）二语，不可混乱。比较：

I used to sit up late at night.（我以前常迟睡。）

I am used to sitting up late at night.（我现在已习惯于迟睡。）

94. “Used you to do？”和“Did you use to do？”

英文助动词used to用于问句时，到底应说“Used you to do that？”，还是“Did you use to do that？”？

【解答】英文的助动词现在仍然可以在一个句子中当作正动词用的，只有ought to、have to、used to三个了。其中have是现在式自无问题，ought虽则原是owe的过去式，但现代英文已不用它，而改用owed作过去式了。唯有used一字仍然和use的过去式同形，所以免不了要使人们发生混乱了。遇到问句时，照一般过去式动词的用法，就得说：“Did you use to do that？”动词use在自动词时，有“常做”“习以为常”的意思，即英文说的be accustomed、be wont，不过这个意思现在只限于用作过去式，即是现在式的use，已不具此意了。所以说成“Did you use to . . . ”是失去了惯常之意的。字典上把used作为一个独立的自动词列出，其含义也和他动词的use不同。在英国问句是通常不用did的，除非是未受教育的人，但现今受过教育的人，在口语中也有用did的倾向了，但不是美国式的“Did you use to do？”，而是“Did you used to do？”。因为used to和use to的发音同是〔ju：stə〕，所以容易混同；不过在did后又接上一个过去式动词是不合乎英文语法的，自不能称为good English，在纽约1966年出版的Bernstein所著 The Careful Writer：A Modern Guide to English Usage一书中，就说这种说法是不合理的，等于是说“He didn’t went to school.”一样的不通。

在1962年伦敦出版的F. T. Wood著的Current English Usage一书中居然也说：

I used not to think so.（我原不作如是想。）

否定用used not to，而不用didn’t use to，但问句则如：

I think I have seen you somewhere. Didn’t you use to live in Birming-ham？（我想在什么地方见过你的。你从前是不是住在伯明翰呢？）

一般是要用didn’t use to的。此人平日对美国说法是很反对的，可见他不是受了美国话的影响，而且他还负责English Language Teaching刊物上的疑问解答（Question Box），对英文用法的解答，是多少带点保守性的，可见英国现在也说“Did you use to？”了。

1962年在纽约出版的Bryant著Current American Usage一书上说，在问句和否定句中是有用did的必要的。此基于广泛的调查，富于统计的资料，曾举有下列三种用法的例句：

Did there use to be owls here？（这里原来有猫头鹰吗？）

Didn’t you use to like her？（你原来不喜欢她吗？）

据Advanced Learner’s Dictionary of Current English上说附加问句（tag question）是两种说法都可以用的，即：

You used to smoke a pipe，use（d）n’t〔didn’t〕you？（你从前是抽烟斗的吧？）

There used to be some trees in this field，use（d）n’t〔didn’t〕there？（这田里原是有些树木的吧？）

95. shall和will的用法

英文的助动词shall和will用法极为复杂，现又加上英美用法的分歧，更使人无所适从，请将现在的用法，加以扼要的说明。

【解答】从前英国人挖苦爱尔兰人说错英文时，有笑话讲到一个掉到海里的爱尔兰人求救说：

Nobody shall save me. I will be drowned.

于是没有人去救他，终于溺毙。因为第三人称的主语加shall，为表示说话者的意志，第一人称的主语加will，也是表示说话者的意志，所以上述两句英文，意即：“不许任何人来救我。我决心要淹死。”那正当的说法，应为：

Nobody will save me. I shall be drowned.（没有人来救我。我就要淹死啦。）

这当然是开玩笑的，实际在那种场合，英美人只会叫出“Help！”或是“Somebody help！”（救命呀！哪个快来救命呀！），没有人会说“Nobody will save me. I shall be drowned.”一类的话。

一般说英语的国民，对这两个字的用法，也多闹不清楚，教养差的人就一概说成I’ll，以示是说shall或will任何一字，作为说错时的遁辞（其实I’ll只能代表I will）。美国人说：“In this country the truth is that nobody cares.（在这个国度里，实际的情形是谁也不介意这二字在用法上的分别。）”。（见Flesch著的Readable English）英国人的见解也相差不远，他们说：“The foreign student might well not bother too much with subtle distinctions between ‘shall’and ‘will’ for these are not used by most English people.（外国学生顶好不要过分注意shall和will之间的微妙的分别，因为大多数的英国人也不管这些的。）。”（见Tennant著的A Handbook of English Usage）英国近百年来人们对于这二字用法上的区别已经混乱不清，好像要进入will的全盛时代似的。文学家兼政治家的Macaulay在1837年即曾夸张地说，当时在伦敦一万个人当中懂得shall和will正当用法的连一个人也没有。F. L. Lucas说得比较保守：“One Londoner in a hundred observes those rules today.（现今一百个伦敦人中只有一个人是遵守这二字在用法上的规则的。）。”（见Lucas著的Style一书p. 41）

美国更是用will的大本营，美国人使用shall和will的频率，据调查的统计是：用shall的6. 5次，用will的93. 5次，可见用will的，实为压倒的多数。（见Bryant著的Current American Usage，p. 182）除了探问对方的意志和表示劝诱时用的“Shall I（we） . . . ？”，例如：

Shall I（= Do you want me to）close the window？（要我关上窗子吗？）——Yes，please do.（或）No，please don’t.

Shall we stop here？（= Let’s stop here，shall we？）（就在此地停下来吧。）——Yes，let’s do that.（或）No，let’s not do that.

此外，其他的场合都是用will，英文原来绝对应当用shall的，也都用will兼代了，例如：

How old will you be on your next birthday？（到你下回生日你就有几岁了？）

I will be sixteen next year.（明年我就有十六岁了。）

Will you be in time if you start now？（你现在就动身的话，你会赶得上吗？）

I will graduate in June next year and enter high school in September.（我将在明年六月毕业，九月进中学。）

美国人因为把原是表意志的I will，当作表单纯未来用了，所以到了要表意志的时候，就只好倒过头来用shall了，如第二次世界大战中有名的故事，联军统帅Douglas MacArthur被日本人赶出菲律宾时，他表示他一定要再打回去的决心时说：“I shall return.（我一定要再回来的！）”。

代替说“I am willing or am resolved to see him tomorrow.”，而说“I will see him tomorrow.”，实为一种最简洁有力的表现法，可惜现在多被误用来表示单纯未来了。近来在英美的倾向，是用be going to来表达单纯未来，也许将来有一天又会恢复用I will来表示意志的吧。

一位怕老婆的人说：“My wife always says‘You shall’and I always say‘I will’.（我老婆始终是对我下命令，而我一定是服从的。）”。这是颇有古风的说法。（参考“You shall love your neighbor as yourself.”）

96. 用will、would表示现在推量

“You will be Miss Cook，I suppose.（你是柯小姐吧。）”一语，分明是指现在，为什么不说现在动词的are，而要用未来动词的will be呢？

【解答】这是从未来用法变化出来的，早已不含有未来的意思，而只是表示现在的推测，在日用英语中用得很多。例如：

This will be our train，I fancy.（我想这就是我们要坐的车。）

Will they be able to hear at such a distance？（离得这样远，他们能听得见吗？）

This’ll be the house we are looking for.（这大概就是我们要寻找的屋子。）

It will be snowing now in London？（伦敦现在正下着雪吧？）

There is a ring at the door. It will be Father.（门铃有响。是父亲回来了。）

He is waiting for us downstairs. He will be wondering where we are. ——Walpole（他在楼下等待我们。他会觉得奇怪不晓得我们到哪里去了。）

过去时的would，也同样有此用法：

I suppose she would be about fifty when she died.（我想她死时已有五十岁了。）

Would you be to hear at such a distance？（离得这样远，你能听见吗？）

I don’t know who it would be.（不晓得那到底是谁呀？）

I thought that it would be just as well that I should not be disrespectful in the future.（我觉得最好还是不要在将来有所失敬。）

如用“will + have +过去分词”的形式，就是对现在完成时的推测，或是对过去的推测，如：

You will have heard the news.（那消息你一定听到了吧。）

He will have left his house before you arrive there.（在你到达那里之前，他早已离开了他的家里吧。）

You will have seen from my postcard that I was at Oxford.（你从我的明信片上就可以看得出来我曾到牛津去了的。）

97. ought to的用法

英文助动词ought意为有义务，如“人民有爱国的义务”，可译成“People ought to love their country.”。但另见有句云：“He ought to have succeeded.”。成败非个人意志所能左右，更无义务可言，请就此种用法，加以阐述。

【解答】助动词ought，原为动词owe的过去式，现在英文已将owed用作owe的过去式了，而让ought专作助动词，用于表义务（Duty或Obligation）的直觉的意义上，尤其是“道义上当然应做的事”（moral obligation）。动词owe现在主要含义虽为“负债”，但仍可作“负有（义务）”解，如“We owe our duty to our country.（我们对国家应尽义务。）”。我们用should也可表道义上应做的事，不过用ought则表示最强烈的义务观念。

You ought to respect your parents.（你应当尊敬父母。）

One ought to pay what one owes.（欠别人的钱有归还的义务。）

You ought not to promise what you cannot perform.（做不到的事不应当答应。）

Such things ought not to be said in company.（这样的事不应当众来说。）

Your father ought to know it.（= You ought to tell your father.）（此事理应告诉你父亲。）

这些例句都是用于ought的原意的，但ought还有一个引申的用法，它可转变为推量（Inference）的意思，即是“道理上当然必有的事”（Natural necessity），表示那样的结果是应当有的。问题中所提出的“He ought to have succeeded.”便是这种用法，他如：

He is an Englishman；he ought to know English.（= It is quite natural that he should know English；No wonder that he should.）（他是英国人，当然懂英语。）

He ought to be there if he started at six.（他如六时动身应该已经到达那里了。）

I have lived here all my life，so I ought to know the neighbourhood well.（我一生住在此地，我当然熟悉这地方的情形。）

If you cannot do it，how ought I？（你都办不到，我怎么行？）

We ought to have fine weather after this long rain.（下了这么久的雨，也应该晴了。）

在ought后既可接用单纯式（Simple Form），也可接用完成式（Perfect Form）。完成式ought to have done的原意是应做而未做，有未能尽应尽的义务，或怠忽应有的义务（Omission of Duty），或受到行为不当（Commission of Impropriety）的谴责，例如：

Have you not paid him？You ought to have paid him.（= You did wrong not to pay him.）（你还没有付钱给他吗？这是不应该的。）

Why did you not go？You ought to have gone.（你为何不去？你去了就好了。）

Have you not begun it？You ought to have begun it long ago.（你还未开始吗？你早应该开始的。）

这个ought to have done也可由转变意思的“推量”而具有理论上当然的结果，其不然者实不合理。

He ought to have arrived by this.（= It is quite natural that he should have arrived by this.）（现在他应该已经到了。）

Has he failed？Such a hard worker ought to have succeeded.（他失败了吗？他那样用功理应成功，失败诚出意外。）

Has he succeeded？Such an idle fellow ought not to have succeeded.（他成功了吗？以他那样懒惰的人，理应失败，成功诚出意外。）

98. need的用法

He doesn’t need to be told. He needn’t be told. 两句不知意义和用法上有何不同？这个need可作正动词用，又可作助动词用，请将其用法上的区别举例说明。

【解答】“He doesn’t need to be told.”意为“他已经知道，用不着告诉他”，是强调现状的说法。“He needn’t be told.”意为“他知道的，用不着告诉他”，是强调今后的行为的说法。

关于正动词need的用法，和普通动词一样，第三人称单数现在要加“s”，过去式要加“ed”，字前可加用助动词，例如：

Each of us needs to master such a foolish fear.（我们每个人都必须把这样愚蠢的恐怖心理加以克服。）

She did not need to be told twice.（对她只消说一遍就行了。）

He has never needed to hurry more than now.（他从来没有现在这样需要急忙的。）

I may need to come in again in a few days.（也许过几天我还得再来。）

Not needing to hurry，I walked along leisurely.（既不用忙，我就很悠闲地慢慢走去了。）

I made them much bigger than I need to have done. ——Jespersen（我把它们做得比必要的大多了。）

That does not need accounting for. = That needs no accounting for.（那个不必解释。）

关于助动词need的用法，照文法上的规则，是在问句和否定句中，need要拿来当助动词用，即是主语第三人称单数现在不加“s”，不用Do-Form，后接无to的不定词，不过也常有例外。

Need he hurry？（他必须赶快吗？）这句改用正动词也是一样的意思：“Does he need to hurry？”。

You need not have given yourself such trouble.（你原用不着这样给自己找麻烦的。）

It need not be true.（这不一定是事实。）

助动词的need，过去式和现在式一样，形式不变，即是不要写成needed的形式，例如：

The children were told that they need not stay. ——A. S. Hornby（告诉孩子们没有留下的必要。）

如上例所示在Reported Speech（转述的话）中，这个现在式的need可作过去式用，至于在问句或否定句中可以有这种用法，更不待言。

Need he go yesterday？= Did he need to go yesterday？（在昨天他有去的必要吗？）

He need not go yesterday. = He did not need to go yesterday. = He needed not to go yesterday.（他昨天没有去的必要。）

He need not have any help from us yesterday. = He need have no help from us yesterday. = He did not need to have any help from us yesterday. = He needed not to have any help from us yesterday. = He needed to have no help from us yesterday.（昨天他不需要我们的任何帮助。）

有些句子多少含有否定或疑问意味的，都适用上述的用法，如：

He need only（或but）have a little help from us yesterday.（他昨天只消我们稍予帮助就好了。）这句也可以说：“He needed only（或but）to have a little help from us yesterday.”。

All he need do was to inquire.（他只消问一声。）

She wanted me to tell her whether she need copy her composition again.（她要我告诉她看她的作文要不要重抄一遍。）

I wondered if he need wait any longer.（我急想知道他是否有再等的必要。）

不单是指过去，现在时也是一样，如：“All he need do is to inquire.”及“I wonder if he need wait any longer.”等。不过这些句子中的need也可改为needs to，正如上述过去时可改用needed to一样。

这个加否定用的need后接不定词时，可译作“不必……才能……”或“也许不……而也能……”，如：

You need not be（或do not need to be）rich to help others.（你不必富有才能帮助别人；你也许不富有而也能帮助别人。）

One need not be（或does not need to be）a poet oneself to teach poetry.（教诗不一定要诗人。）

99. dare的用法

英文的dare一字，可作正动词用，又可作助动词用，在下面的文句中到底是正动词呢，还是助动词？I have never dared speak to him.（我从来不敢对他说话。）I wonder how he dares say that.（他怎敢那样说呀？）请说明dare的用法。

【解答】问题中的两个句子，dare都是作正动词用的，在speak和say之前省略了不定词的to，当然我们把它说成to speak和to say也是可以的。英文有些动词，有略去后接的不定词的to的倾向，如help wash the dishes（饭后帮忙洗碗），go buy a ticket（去买一张票）之类都是。

作正动词用的dare有好些意思，例如：

I dare you to jump over the stream.（我赌你敢跳过溪流去。）dare = challenge（挑战）

He dared a leap.（他冒险地跳了。）dared = risked（冒险）

I dared his anger and told him the truth.（我不顾他生气还是把事实告诉他了。）dared = defied（不顾）

He dares to do everything.（他什么事都敢做。）dared = ventured （胆敢）

We lay still，scarcely daring to breathe.（我们躺着不动，连大声出气都不敢。）daring = venturing（冒昧）

He does not dare to tell us.（他不敢告诉我们。）does not dare = is afraid（不敢）

但作助动词用的dare是第三人称单数现在不加“s”，后接没有to的不定词。助动词多用于问句或否定句，不过在问句或否定句中用正动词也是一样的。如：

I dare not do it.（这个我不敢做。）

He does not dare（to）answer. ——Palmer（他不敢回答。）

Dare she do it？（她敢做这事吗？）

动词dare的过去式，下面两种说法都可以用：

She dared not tell（或to tell）him.（她不敢告诉他。）

She did not dare tell（或to tell）him.

助动词dare用在否定句中，现在式可代过去式用，例如：

He could plan what another man dare not do，and he could do what another man dare not plan. ——Doyle（别人不敢做的他敢于来计划，别人未敢计划的，他也敢于来做。）

现在的倾向是由用助动词改为用正动词了（见H. E. Palmer著的A Grammer of Spoken English）。

He daren’t speak. →He doesn’t dare（to）speak.

在dare后接的不定词，要将to略去，是古老的用法，如莎士比亚的文句中即有这种说法：

I dare do all that may become a man；Who dares do more is none.（只要是适合一个人做的事情我都敢做，做那以外的事的就不是人。）

作为一个助动词dare可加“s”或加“d”，也可不加，如“He dares go.” “He dared go.”“He dare go.”。它可用作现在式，也可用作过去式，如“He was afraid，and dare not go.”。

说“Do you dare to . . . ？”常有“胆大妄为”的意思，说“Dare you . . . ？”常有“冒险”的意思，例如：

Do you dare to tell such a lie？

Dare you tell the sick old woman that she has only a few days to live？

说“How dare you . . . ？”也是含有“胆大妄为”之意的：

How dare you say such rude things about him？

成语I dare say或写作I daresay，意为“我以为”“在我看来”“大概”“或者”（I am prepared to believe，I do not deny，I presume，perhaps，probably，maybe）。在这成语后的子句通常略去连词that，例如：

You are right，I dare say.（= very likely或probably）

I dare say（= probably）it is a mere lie.

Ⅶ 准动词

100. megafeps

“I finished to read the book last night.”系“我昨夜把那本书读完了”的英译，据说译得不对，请将译错的地方指出，并加详细说明。

【解答】这个英文句子确是错了，错在不定词的to read，应该改成动名词的reading才对，整个句子改正如下：

I finished reading the book last night.

英文的动词后面再接准动词的宾语时，可分三种，即：

（1）后接不定词或动名词皆可的，如begin等动词，例：

She began to cry.（或）She began crying.（她开始哭起来了。）

（2）后面只能以不定词作宾语的，如agree等动词，例：

He agreed to go.（他同意去。）

（3）后面只能以动名词作宾语的，如finish等动词，例：

I finished reading the book last night.（我昨夜把那本书读完了。）

在这三种动词中最要注意的是第三种，因为我们惯常都喜欢拿不定词接在动词后面，所以如come to see一类的用法极其普通，而上述的第二种用法，也为数极多。第一种既是二者皆可，自无问题，因为随便怎样说都不会错。只有第三种不许接不定词，偏偏我们又用惯了不定词，所以最容易发生错误，虽英美人亦所不免，于是他们便有所谓Megafeps的说法。所谓“霉咖啡不是”，就是说属于“霉咖啡不是”一类的动词后面不是接不定词。霉咖啡不是的动词，又是一些什么动词呢？最常用的有下列十字，而“霉咖啡不是”，就是从它们的头一个字母拼合而成的：

M（mind，miss），enjoy，give up，a（admit，avoid），finish，escape，practice，stop.

我们只消记得“霉咖啡不是”，用到这些字时便可注意不要接不定词，而要接动名词，例如：

The teacher did not mind explaining the problem again.（老师对于那个问题不惮烦地再加解释。）

You cannot miss seeing the statue on your way.（你在途中一定会看见那座雕像的。）

We enjoyed talking about old times.（我们很愉快地谈了些往事。）

I gave up smoking last month.（我上个月戒烟了。）

The man admitted having broken into the house.（那人承认破门而入。）

You must avoid calling on others on Sunday.（你必须避免在礼拜天去拜访人家。）

Have you finished studying for your examination？（你完成了为考试做的准备吗？）

By some means or other he escaped being punished.（他想办法逃避了处罚。）

You should practice playing the piano regularly.（你应经常练习弹琴。）

As long as you live，your heart never stops beating.（在你活着的时候，心是不会停止跳动的。）

最后一个动词stop，并不是绝对不可以接不定词，不过接不定词时，便不是宾语，而是副词，而且意味上也大有差别。比较如下：

He stopped smoking.（戒烟，不吸了。）

He stopped to smoke.（他停下来吸烟。）

前者为stop的宾语，意为把吸烟那回事停止了，自然是戒烟不吸了。至于后者是说把手头的工作停止一下，为的是要吸一支烟，这个to smoke = in order to smoke，是修饰stop那个动作的副词。再比较下例：

I remember posting your letter.（我记得替你发了信。）

Remember to post your letter.（记得发信呀。）

前者是remember的宾语，即记得有那回事，指过去。后者是副词，意为要记得去做，等于说don’t forget to post，指未来。

101. I am afraid的三种不同的接法

I am afraid + Infinitive

I am afraid + of Gerund

I am afraid + that-Clause

以上三种表现法，在意义上有何不同？

【解答】这三种用法大致相同，不过在意义上可能有些微妙的差别，那多半可从前后文的语气上揣摩出来。例如：

（a）He is afraid to die.

（b）He is afraid of dying.

（c）He is afraid that he will die.

（a）句的意思是“他怕死”，即对死怀着恐怖（“He is afraid of death.”）。（b）句的意思有时与（a）同义，有时又可解作“怕他自己会死”，即担心他自己要死亡，结果又等于（c）句“He is afraid that he will die.”的意思了。在这三种场合，句中的afraid一字，都是作“怕”“恐惧”解，并未怎样改变原义，但在普通口语中，I am afraid的说法，已经与“怕”无关，而变成一种委婉的言辞了。例如：

“Let’s go to the movies.”（我们同去看电影吧。）

“I’m afraid I can’t.”（我恐怕不能去呀。）

分明是“不能去”，却说“恐怕不能去”，不说得那样肯定，无非是避免决断的语气罢了。又如：

“Will it rain tomorrow again？”（明天还会下雨吗？）

“I am afraid so.”（恐怕还会要下。）

这表示天意难测，不敢断定，只好加上“恐怕”“或许”“也未可知”的字样，来避免决定性的表示。又如：

“Will he recover？”（他会复原吗？）

“I’m afraid not.”（恐怕很难。）

这是不愿直接说出“He will not recover.”，加上I’m afraid时，语气就缓和多了。

凡用到I am afraid的场合，都是想避免告人以不好的消息，或拒绝的话语，成为修辞学上所谓euphemism的一种。有次一个美国人作为读者投书写信到报馆去问：“‘I’m afraid I can’t come.’这句话，当我们说时到底怕的什么？”Bergen Evans加以解答说：“这是‘I am afraid 〔of causing you inconvenience or disappointment but〕I can’t come.（恐怕要引起你的不便，或是会使你失望，但我却不能来。）’的省略说法。”这可算是一种最合理的说明了。

102. 无to的不定词

在见闻、感觉等动词后不定词是要略去to的，如“I saw him come.”“I heard her sing.”“He felt his hands tremble.”。此外在make后也要略去，如“That makes me feel better.”。此外还有什么时候要略去不定词的to？

【解答】动词help后的不定词是可以略去to的，不过OED上说help后无to是vulgar，而美国文法家C. Fries又说help + to是vulgar English，另外一位美国文法家G. Curme就说help后有to，是especially in careful language。早在1829年英国人就说“I help maintain . . . ”，1838年还见有人说“I help throw . . . ”，到1827年就是二者同时并用，到二十世纪可以说是完全不用to了。其他的动词后省略不定词的to，在美国最通用的有come和go二字，在会话中固不待言，在文学作品中亦频频出现。

I think I’ll go look for snakes. ——S. Lewis（我想我要去找蛇了。）

Go wash them hands. ——W. Faulkner（去洗手。）（俚俗语them = their）

美国人说go get，是表示“获得”“入手”的意思，而go-getter就是“活动家”，例如：

The thing to do then，as a live bunch of go-getters is to capitalize cul-ture. ——S. Lewis（作为活跃的活动家，其次要做的事，就是把文化也资本化起来。）

在1930年以后，美国人说的话，都很少在动词后不定词上用to了，但Sinclair Lewis是活跃于1920—30年代的作家，那正是过渡时期，所以在他的作品中，二者同时并用，例如：

All you have to do is to go and say . . . （你只消去说……）

All we do is cut each other’s throats.（我们所要做的就是割断彼此的喉管。）

在现今的美国话当中，把不定词的to省略的，除come及go后面的以外，还有下列几种形式：

The only thing（to do）

All（we can do）

What（you got to do） is go at once.

The one thing（to do）

The first thing（to do）

is go at once.

我们只消注意听听美国人说话，或看看美国人的写作，便随时可以发现这样的句子：

All you got to do is press a damn button.（我们只消按一下电钮就行了。）

The one thing I hate to do is go to bed when I’m not even tired.（我最讨厌的一件事情，就是我一点也不疲倦的时候就去睡。）

美国话的make believe不是“使人相信”，而是“假装”或“虚构”的意思。英国话也有此意，不过他们说make to believe = pretend。《牛津大辞典》上的例句都是有to的。

I make believe read my French books. ——S. Lewis（我假装读我的法文书。）注意：在make believe这个动词后接的不定词read也省略了to。

Sometimes when children play they make believe they are grownups.（孩子们有时在游戏时装作大人。）

这字又可作名词或形容词用：

Say，gee！I didn’t expect of tell you all this make-believe. ——S. Lewis（喂，哎呀！我原不打算把这一切虚构全告诉你的。）

He’d write her a make-b’lieve letter from a duke. ——S. Lewis（他想要写一封假冒是一位公爵写的信给她。）

103. 不可以说after the war being over

“战争结束以后，我就出洋去了”一句，译成英文为“After the war being over，I went abroad.”。不知有没有错误？

【解答】译文是有错误的，因为依据英文的造句法用了独立分词（Absolute Participle）的时候，前面就不要再加连词或介词了。独立分词也有不带主语的，但这儿是指的带主语的独立分词，即“意味上的主语+分词”的形式。这多用于写作方面，口头说话很少用到，口语可用表理由或条件的字眼来代替它，参考下列各例，括弧内的字句是口语。

The sun having set（= As the sun had set），we started for home.（太阳落山了，我们动身回家。）

He being here（= Since he is here），there is no danger.（因有他在此，我们没有危险。）

This done（= When this has been done），depart in peace.（把这个做完，就安静地去吧。）

问题中提出的英文翻译，照写作时可改正为：

The war being over，I went abroad.

依说话方式，则可改正为：

After the war was over，I went abroad.

凡是分词的意味上的主语（Sense-Subject）和主句中文法上的主语（Grammatical Subject）不一致时，就须采用这种独立分词的表现法，使整个的附句变成副词（Sentence-Adverb），来修饰主句（是修饰整句，不是修饰一个动词）。这个意味上的主语又称独立主格（Nominative Absolute）。

104. “be +不定词”的用法

“我将要去”一语，可译作“I shall go.”或“I am going.”或“I am to go.”等形式，不知有何分别？尤其是“be +不定词”的用法，请详为说明。

【解答】表示未来时态的，说“I shall go.”是基本的形式，但现在美国几乎是用I am going来代替shall以表未来了，如果要说“去”时，他们便说“I am going to go.”。可见going一字已失去了“去”的意义，而只是表示未来罢了。至于“be +不定词”是不定词的叙述用法，好像形容词一样。英文的这种表现法，有种种不同的意味，分别举例说明如下：

（1）表预定：

We are to go to town this afternoon.（我们打算今天下午上街去。）

He is to arrive at seven in the morning.（他预定早晨七时抵埠。）

The meeting is to be held on Sunday.（定了礼拜天开会。）

We are to meet again on Sunday evening.（我们礼拜天晚上再见。）

（2）表可能：

Not a sound was to be heard.（一点声音都未听到。）

In the sky not a cloud was to be seen.（青天无片云。）

Every misfortune is to be subdued by patience.（一切不幸都可由忍耐克服。）

Her feelings as she read the letter were scarcely to be defined.（她看信时的心情不可名状。）

The twins are to be distinguished by their voices.（双生子可以由他们的声音辨别出来。）

“I am all astonishment. How long has she been such a favourite？——and pray，when am I to wish you joy？”——Jane Austen（“我真个吓倒了。她被你看中有多久了？请你告诉我，什么时候我可以庆贺你们的订婚呢？”）

（3）表义务：

You are to post this letter at once.（你马上去把这封信发了。）

She asked him what she was to do.（她问他看她要做点什么。）

Let me know everything that I am to know without delay.（我需要知道的事赶快都告诉我吧。）

You are to come with me.（你须和我同去。）

You are to stay here till I come back.（你得待在此地等我回来。）

（4）表假设：

If he were to come，say that I am absent.（万一他来了，只说我不在家。）

Certain skills must be learned if one is to use English effectively.（如果想要有效地使用英语，某些技巧是必须学得的。）

If it is to be done at all，do it well.（如果一定要做的话，就好好地做吧。）

（5）表目的：

This house is to be let or sold.（这房子要出租或者出售。）

Not an instant is to be lost.（一秒钟也不要浪费。）

And the augurs were as clever as are politicians，who also must practise divination，if ever they are to do anything worth the name. ——D. H. Law-rence（现代的政治家也和古代的占兆家一样不得不实行占兆，如果他们想要做点名副其实的事情的话，所以古代的占兆家也和现代的政治家一样的聪明呢。）

（6）表结果：

He was to blame for not locking the door.（没有锁门是他的过错。）

Am I to understand that you have engaged yourself to this young gen-tleman？——Shaw（你是说你已经和这个青年男士订了婚吗？）

（7）表运命：

The Prince of Wales has been touring the worldwide dominions of which，some day，he is to be the crown head. ——H. G. Wells（将来命定要做英国领土之王的皇太子，去周游了遍及全世界的领土回来了。）

美国的文法家Curme说，“be +不定词”的形式，常用来代替must、should、ought to、have to等等，这就是指上面说的第三项。

凡自动词用is to do，他动词用is to be done，但他动词的blame是一个例外，通常并不说to be blamed，也许这是受其含义的影响，因be + to blame是“应负责”（有自动的意味），例如：“Who is to blame for the disaster？（这灾难谁负责呀？）”。

105. 名词后接用的不定词

以前曾解答动词后接不定词或动名词的用法，现在拟请再就名词后接不定词或动名词的用法，加以详解。例如“我并不想到美国去”一句，应译（a）“I have no intention to go to America.”或是（b）“I have no intention of going to America.”。

【解答】在名词后面并不一定要接“介词+动名词”，有很多场合是可以，或甚至必须接“不定词”的。当然二者皆可的是最便于我们学习了。但英文的这两种准动词的用法，实在是够复杂的。现在单就名词后的用法，分成三类，例解如下：

（1）在way、time、chance、opportunity等名词后，接不定词或动名词都可以的：

（a）什么是学习外国语最好的方法？

What is the best way | to learn of learning | a foreign language？

（b）我近来连读书的时间都没有。

I have no time，nowadays， | to read. for reading.

（c）我简直和他交谈的机会都没有。

I had no chance | to speak of speaking | to him.

（d）我几乎没有研习英文的机会。

I have little opportunity | to study of studying | English.

（2）通常只接用不定词的有ability、tendency、resolution、determination等名词：

（a）他决心要出洋去。

He made a determination to go abroad.

（b）我坚决地要戒烟。

I have made a firm resolution to give up smoking.

（c）近来颇有耽于奢侈的倾向。

A tendency to indulge in luxury is seen lately.

（d）他有鱼一般的游泳本领。

He has the ability to swim like a fish.

注意：最后一例，不可以说成“He has the ability of swimming like a fish.”。又如“the ability of the sovereign nations to combine for collective security in the United Nations Organization”一句仍是接的不定词，即ability to combine，至于of the sovereign nations是修饰ability的，并非接在ability后的动作。

（3）在intention、idea、habit、objection、method、purpose等名词后，通常要接用动名词，如：

（a）我不想当医生。

I have no intention of becoming a doctor.

（b）我没有想到你会来。

I had no idea of your coming.

（c）我有早起的习惯。

I am in the habit of rising early.

（d）你反对我去吗？

Have you any objection to my going？

（e）他教英文的方法很新。

His method of teaching English is novel.

（f）她到意大利学习音乐去了。

He has gone to Italy for the purpose of studying music.

根据以上的原则，问题中所提出的，应以（b）译为宜。又如：“It is his habit to walk for half an hour before breakfast.（他在吃早饭以前有出去散步半小时的习惯。）”。为何在habit后面又可以接不定词呢？通常在habit后是要接“介词+动名词”才对，即如：

His habit of walking for half an hour before breakfast keeps him healthy.（他在早饭前散步半小时的那种习惯使他保持健康。）

确实，在habit后应该接用介词加动名词，这原是一般的法则，不过英文写来常有变化，因造句的关系，就不能死守着法则不放，还是要理解文句的构造，才不致为法则所制。“It is his habit to walk for half an hour before breakfast.”一句中的不定词to walk并不表示那种习惯的动作，从文法上讲，它是一个名词，不是动词，所以与habit毫无关系。句中的It是填补词，是假主语，真正的主语为to walk for half an hour before breakfast，因为主语太长，放在动词之前显得尴尬，所以用it来代替主语，而把意味上的真正的主语移到后头了。To walk既是主语，当然是名词了。这句的意义不是说“散步的习惯”，而是说：“早饭前散步是他的习惯。”至于“His habit of walking for half an hour . . . ”，才是指的“散步的习惯”，二者是判然不同的。

106. so as to do和so . . . as to do

（a）We started so early as to get there before noon.

（b）We started early so as to get there before noon.

上面这两句英文在意义上有何不同？

【解答】（a）可译作“我们很早动身，所以在正午以前就到达那里了”。（b）可译作“我们要在正午以前赶到那里，所以很早就动身了”。这个so as to的造句，如果分开是表“结果”之意，如果连在一块儿，就是表“目的”的了。即是（a）与so . . . that相同，而（b）则与so that . . . may相同，所以问题中的例句可以改写如下：

（a）We started so early as to get there before noon.

= We started so early that we got there before noon.

（b）We started early so as to get there before noon.

= We started early，so that we might get there before noon.

现在再举一两个类似的例子，以资研习：

（a）他大为生气，连话都说不出来了。

He was so angry as to be unable to speak.

He was so angry that he could not speak.

（b）早点来可以占到好位子。

Come early so as to get a good seat.

Come early so that you may get a good seat.

Come early in order to get a good seat.

（c）她轻移莲步，不使有一点声音。

She walked softly so as not to make any noise.

She walked softly that she might not make any noise.

She walked softly in order not to make any noise.

又这个so as to还可以代替副词用，如：

（a）他很好，借了那笔钱给我。

He was so kind as to lend me the money.

He kindly lent me the money.

（b）他很好，回答了我的问题。

He was so kind as to answer my question.

He kindly answered my question.

这个表结果的so . . . as to，除了可改写为so . . . that外，又可用enough to来代替，说出来都是一样的意思：

He was so kind as to help me.

= He was so kind that he helped me.

= He was kind enough to help me.

107. too . . . to do

英文的too . . . + Infinitive一个表现法，后面的不定词有否定的意思，但有时译成否定时句子便讲不通了。请就有关的各种句型详为解说。

【解答】这个表现法可分成三类来加以说明：

（1）从字面上看，凡在not、only、all、but等字后面的too，其句中的不定词是没有否定意思的，如：

English is not too difficult to learn.（英文并不太难学。）

I shall be only too pleased to help you.（我极高兴帮助你。）

They are all too satisfied to take the opinions of others without the pain of thought for themselves.（他们都太满意于接受别人的意见，自己懒得去想。）

You know but too well to hold your tongue.（你十分知道少说话的好。）

这些句中的too都可以解释为very。

（2）从构造上看，不定词如系修饰too后面的字而非修饰too时，即不含否定的意思，如：

She is too ready to speak.（她太多言了。）

He is too ready to promise.（suspect）（轻诺。）（易疑。）

Beginners are too apt to make mistakes.（初学者容易弄错。）

We are too apt to overlook our own faults.（我们很容易忽视自己的过错。）

这种句中的不定词是修饰too后面的ready一类的字的，也可以说too是修饰ready to speak的，所以第一句的“She is too ready to speak.”=“She is too talkative.”。

（3）当不定词用来修饰前面的too时，才含有否定的意思在内，说：

She is too young to marry.

= She is so young that she can not marry.

= She is not old enough to marry.

（她太年轻，不能结婚。）

句中的to marry是修饰前面的too或too young的。再举数例如下：

The news is too good to be true.（消息太好，恐不可靠。）

The flower is too beautiful to last.（花太美，难经久。）

You are too young to understand such things.（你太年轻，不懂得这些事。）

I was too excited to speak.（我兴奋得说不出话来了。）

把上面三种用法了然于怀，即令遇到字面构造完全相同的句子，也能分别其不同的含义了：

（a）He is too angry to speak.

（b）He is too ready to speak.

（a）句中的不定词是修饰too的，而（b）句则是用too来修饰不定词的。所以（a）的意思是“不能说话”，而（b）是“多言”。换言为（a）“He is so angry that he cannot speak.”是通的，但（b）“He is so ready that he cannot speak.”就说不通了。

附带地说一下，在too . . . + for + Object的形式下，也含有否定的意思，如too beautiful for words（美得言语不能形容）、too fat for beauty（太胖就不美了）。

108. 不定词的否定

（a）I told him not to speak the truth.

（b）I did not tell him to speak the truth.

这两句英文在意义上有什么不同？

【解答】（a）句的意思是“我叫他不要说真话”。（b）句的意思是“我并没有叫他说真话”。如果要对不定词的意思加以否定的话，就得把not放在不定词的紧前面，所以（a）中的not是否定to speak the truth的，相反地在（b）句中的not是与did合起来否定该句中的动词tell的。

我们无论是翻译或写作，都要注意，否定不定词的否定字，总是要紧靠在不定词的前面的，例如：

It will need much time，not to speak of the expense.（这需要很多时间，不要说费用了。）

He left home，never to return.（他离开家乡以后，就再没有回来过。）这个不定词是表示结果的。

He pretends not to know.（他假装不知。）

凡否定词与不定词或分词并用时必居其前，兹再举一个分词的例如下：

Not knowing what to do——he pretends not to know.（不晓得要怎样办——他就装作不知。）

109. not too . . . to do和too . . . not to do

（a）It is not too late to mend.

（b）He is too wise not to see that.

上面这两句英文，（a）是not too . . . to，（b）是too . . . not to，一个否定在前，一个否定在后，二者不知有何不同？

【解答】（a）句的意思是“只要肯改过，决不会嫌太迟的”。句中的not可改说never，意义较重。（b）句的意思是“以他的聪明，岂有不知那事的道理”。（a）句的not，是用以否定is的，而（b）句的not，便是修饰不定词to see的。这两句英文的构造完全不同，如果不了解，把（a）句中的not认为是修饰too的，翻译出来就会大错特错。如说：

It is too late to mend. = It is so late that we cannot mend.

意即：“时已太迟，无法改正。”再加上一个否定字，变成：

It is not too late to mend.

若译作“时不太迟，无法改正”，就不通了；应译成“你要改过，现在并不为迟”，或是“现在还来得及改”。

至于（b）句中的not是只管to see的，换写so that时，即是：

He is so wise that he cannot but see that.

意即：“他是那样聪明，必然会知道那事情的。”又如：

This was too great an honour not to excite the envy of his rivals. = This was so great an honour that it excited the envy of his rivals.（这是一种很大的荣誉，必然要惹起他对手们的嫉羡的。）

He is too angry not to say that.（他盛怒之下也不免要说出那样的话。）

110. but +不定词

（a）I did nothing but go home.

（b）I desired nothing but to go home.

上面这两句英文同是在but后面，为什么一句接有to的不定词，一句又要接无to的不定词呢？他如在than后面，似乎也有同样的现象，是否有一定的规则可循？

【解答】问题中所提出的两句英文，意义为：（a）“我除了回家之外，别无办法。”（b）“我只希望回家。”这个but = except。至于在but后何时要接用有to的不定词，何时要接用无to的不定词，有一条很简单的法则，那就是前面有do〔did，done〕的时候，在but后面就接没有to的原形不定词。据Jespersen和Curme的说法，在连词but、except、save、than、as等字后，都是同样的情形。如果句中是用了其他的动词，后面的不定词就要加上to了。现分别举例说明如下：

（1）前面用有动词do时，在连词but等后接用无to的不定词：

He did nothing but laugh.（他只是笑。）

She did nothing but cry all day.（她整天只是哭。）

What could he do but take back what he had said？（他除了收回他说的话以外，还有别的什么办法？）

I cannot but admire his courage.（我不得不佩服他的勇气。）这是把cannot后面的do anything的字样省略掉了的缘故，还是等于用有动词do的。这是写作的说法，如果口头的说法，便成为“I cannot help admiring his courage.”。但美国人把这两种说法混合在一起，而说成“I cannot help but admire his courage.”。

She seemingly has done nothing but accomplish the impossible.（她的神气好像是做成功了一件不可能的事。）

I did no more than make a beginning.（我只开了一个头罢了。）

She did nothing else than cry all day.（她终日只是哭泣。）

He did not so much as say he was sorry.（他连一声对不起都没有说。）

（2）前面用do以外的动词，在连词but等后就要接用有to的不定词：

Nothing remains but to die.（除死以外，别无办法。）

We had no choice but to turn back.（我们除了转回头以外，别无办法。）

You ought to know better than to believe all the gossip you hear.（你应该明白，不会只相信你所听到的一切谣言。）

I am sure we had nothing to do but to fight the battle out.（我确信我们只有抗战到底之一法。）

They desire nothing but to enjoy the present moment.（他们只希望今朝有酒今朝醉。）

附带地说一句，在had better之后，也是要接无to的不定词的，例如：

You had better do it yourself.（你最好自己去做。）

这句话可以解释为“You would have it better to do it yourself.”。这个had better，原来和would rather及may as well等表现法，差不多都是同义的，例如：

I had（或would）rather die than yield.

= I had（或would）sooner die than yield.

= I had（或would）as soon die as yield.

（宁死也不投降。）

但现代英文对had better及would rather，在惯用法上产生了不同的含义，如：

They would rather die than go to the workhouse.（他们宁死也不进贫民院。）这个would rather是表选择（choice）的。

If they would rather die，they had better do so.（如果他们想死，死去也好。）这个had better是表忠告（advice）的。

111. say +不定词

英文的惯用法不说“He says to go.”，而要说“He says（that）he will go.”。为什么我在书上又读到“The teacher says to come early.”的用法呢？

【解答】这是美国话和英国话不同的地方。英国话在动词think后面可以接不定词，而美国话则不允许。美国话在动词say后面可以接不定词，而英国话则不允许。

I never thought to see you here！（英）

= I never thought I would see you here！（美）

Who would have thought to meet you here？（英）

= Who would have expected to meet you here？（美）

He thought to deceive us.（英）

= He intended（或planned）to deceive us.（美）

美国话的say to do = tell a person to do是含有命令语气的口语用法，如“He said to tell you not to come.”，意为“他要我告诉你不要来”，可以在said后，to tell前，补入for me二字来解释。如问题中所提出的句子。

The teacher says to come early.（美）

= The teacher tells us that we must come early.（英）

美国话的这种用法，是间接的命令法，英文是用tell来表达的，如“He told me to come at once.（他要我马上来。）”。如美国口语用say时，便要把后面的作为宾语的人称代名词略去，例如：

“We always placed it here.”“Kashkin never said to put it there.”——Hemingway：For whom the Bell Tolls，XXI（“我们总是把它放在这里的。”“卡西金从来没有说要我们把它放在那里。”）

It was the photographer in the lobby. Tyler said to come right up. ——John Dos Passos：Number One（在休息室里照相师已经来了。泰勒要我马上到这里来。）

他们有时候也把for me的字样说进去，使得say后面的不定词有个确定的意味上的主语，意义表达得更明白些，例如：

“She said to. She said for me not to stay here.”——Faulkner：Sanctu-ary（她说就这样做吧。她说要我不要待在此地。）

“Gown，she said for me not to be here after dark. She said to ask him. He’s got a car . . . ”——Ibid（“她要我不要在天黑后呆在这里。她要我去找他。他有一辆车……”）

这也有用第一人称的例子：

So I’d count. I said to count fifty at first，then I thought it as still too soon，and I’d say to count fifty more. ——Ibid（所以我要数。最初我要数五十，可是后来觉得那还是太快，于是就再数五十好啦。）

这句中的I said to count有let me count的意味，也还是属于命令法的范围之内的，可算是命令法的变体。这种表现法也许是从Irish English传来的，例如：

“You said not to answer your letter.”——R. Knox（“你叫我不要回你的信。”）

112. 美国话中的现在分词的用法

美国话中用现在分词来造句的极多，请举例说明其用法。

【解答】英文用法中许多动名词（Gerund），到美国话中好像都变成现在分词（Present Participle）了。美国话喜欢省略介词，动名词前的介词一经略去，那动名词就变成现在分词了。因此，这种分词的用法，在美国话中特别发达。当然，除此之外，还有从其他方式转变来的分词也不为少。兹分为四类，例解如下：

（1）省去介词而变成分词的：

（a）省去in的：

We made much better time going east（= in going east）than we had made going west. ——Day：Life with Father（我们向东去比我们原来的西行走得更快。）make time = go fast

. . . the arched and overhanging rigging，where they had just been engaged securing（= engaged in securing）a spar . . . ——Melville：Moby Dick（拱形地悬在上面的船的缆索，他们刚在那儿装好了一根帆桅。）

（b）省去by的：

Most people just ruin scissors trying（= by trying）to sharpen’em. ——Steinbeck：The Chrysanthemums（大多数的人想要把剪刀磨快，结果都磨坏了。）

He started in stealing（= by stealing）sheep and horses and ended up robbing（= by robbing）stages. ——Steinbeck：The Pastures of Heaven（他开始是偷羊偷马，最后就去偷驿马车了。）

（c）省去with的：

When he was through talking（= through with talking）he got up and went to his own desk. ——Saroyan：The Human Comedy（当他讲完了，他就站起身来，走向他自己的书桌去了。）句中的through是副词，不是介词，he was through（他做完了）加现在分词的talking为原有的造句，如改为he was through with talking，则talking当然变成一个动名词了。

When we had got through eating（= got through with eating）we would go look at our two horses. ——Anderson：The Man Who Became a Woman（等我们吃完了饭，我们就要去看我们那两匹马。）get through = finish（vi.）；get through with = finish（vt.）.

Will you never be done getting（= be done with getting）me into trouble. ——L. M. Montgomery：Anne of Avonlea（你决不要把我卷入漩涡。）be done = finish（vi.）；be done with = finish（vt.）

（d）省去of的：

What’s the use talking（= of talking）？——Anderson：Poor White（空谈有什么用？）

What’s the good bragging（of bragging）？——Ibid（瞎吹有什么用？）

（2）代替不定词而用的分词：

（a）美国话常爱用现在分词来代替表示目的的不定词，主要是用在动词go和come的后面，用在其他动词后面当然也行：

Don’t go over there doing（= to do）anything like that. ——Caldwell：Country Full of Swedes（不要到那边去做任何那一类的事。）

Pappy ran out to the gate and told him not to come fooling（= to fool）around there no more. ——Faulkner：Soldier’s Pay（巴匹跑出到大门口去，叫他不要再到这儿来游荡。）

Don’t bother answering（= to answer）this. ——J. G. Huneker（不必麻烦回信。）

（b）美国话的get talking及get starting等也用以代替get to talk及get to start而流行着。这个get + -ing的形式还可以应用到别的动词上：

We got talking about a matter just before I left. ——Howells：The Rise of Silas Lapham（在我要离开的时候，我们曾谈论到一件事。）

I’ve got them all talking about noses，haven’t I？——Saroyan：The Hu-man Comedy（我使得他们都在谈论鼻子。）

Come on and get going. ——Caldwell：Big Buck（来开始吧。）

If I get lying awake tonight，I shan’t. ——De Morgan：Joseph Vance（今晚我睡不着觉的话，我就不去。）

（c）此外，不定词用以修饰其前之名词时，也可用现在分词：

You got no call foolin’（to fool）around. ——Steinbeck：Of Mice and Men（你无权在此游荡。）

I hadn’t any business interfering（= to interfere）. ——Tarkington（我无权干预。）

（3）与副词同用的分词：

现在分词多与表示动作地点的副词out、off等连用：

You can see him out taking a walk. ——E. Welty：Old Mr. Marblekall（你可以看见他出去散步。）

I bet you children were out eating Welsh Rabbit，that’s why you are so late. ——Dos Passos：1919（我可以打赌，你们这些孩子们一定是出去吃威尔斯兔子〔涂在烤面包上的一种烘溶的混有啤酒的干酪〕，所以你们回来得这样迟。）

A farmer noticed his neighbor out chopping wood. ——Reader’s Digest（一个农夫注意到他的邻人出去砍柴。）

Mule，off seeing the world，while I deserved a gingerbread man. ——Capote：The Grass Harp（缪尔出外看世界去了，而我活该做一个银样镴枪头。）

（4）go and +动词= go + -ing：

That’s the kind of a fool I was and I was a bigger fool to go telling（= go and tell）the story. ——Anderson：Poor White（我就是那种傻子，我更傻的是还要到处去说。）

113. want和need后接动名词或不定词

“这机器要修理了”一句话，译成英文的“The machine wants being repaired.”，据说是错误的，请予改正，并详细说明理由。

【解答】应改正为“The machine wants repairing.”。英文的Gerund和Infinitive的用法，意思分明是被动的，文字却要用自动的来表达，如云“中头奖很难”，则说“The first prize is very difficult to win.”（意思当然是to be won）。例题中说的机器要修理，当然是机器被人修理，可是英文却要用自动的repairing，不可以说被动的being repaired。

动名词和不定词的用法常有不同。他动词的want后面接动名词时，尽管意思是被动的，字面一定要用自动的形式，如：

My shoes want mending.（我的皮鞋要修理了。）

It wants careful handling.（这个要小心处理。）

These boxes want numbering.（这些箱子需要编号。）

不用动词want，而改用动词need也是一样的，如：

This house needs repairing.（这屋子要修理了。）

又：

This chapter needs rewriting.（这一章要重新写过。）

又谚语：

The best horse needs breaking，and the aptest child needs teaching.（即使是最好的马也需要加以驯服，即使是最聪明的孩子也需要加以教导。）

这些句中needs后接的Gerund都不能改为Passive Voice，也和want后接的Gerund一样。

在want或是need后除接用Gerund外，还可以接用Infinitive，这个Infinitive，就不像动名词之限于自动，它是自动被动都可以的。如果主语是人的话，就可接自动或被动的不定词；主语是物的话，就只能接被动的不定词了。例如：

He wants to buy a watch.（他要买一只表。）

You want to have your tooth out.（你该把你的牙齿叫人拔掉。）

One wants to be very careful in handling poisons.（处理毒药要特别当心。）

He wants to be notified beforehand.（他要预先收到通知。）

Children want to be whipped.（小孩子不打不成器。）

It wants to be handled with care.（这要小心处理。）

The machine wants to be repaired.（机器要修理）

The watch needs to be wound up.（表要开了。）

This sentence needs to be explained.（这个句子需要加以解释。）

You need to explain this sentence.（你得把这个句子解释一下。）

This chapter needs to be rewritten.（这一章要重新写过。）

英国的用法在want后可接名词、动名词或不定词，如：

He wants a holiday.（他该去度假了。）

It wants some doing.（这有稍加努力的必要。）

You want to see a doctor at once.（你要马上去看医生。）

而在want和不定词之间又可再加上一个宾语，如：

She wants me to go with her.（她要我同她去。）

但美国话在want后可接用that-Clause，如：

I want that he should go at once.（我要他马上就去。）

英国人说的“I want you to come for a moment.”，美国人却要说“I want for you to come for a moment.”，意思同为“我要你来一下”。

Ⅷ 连 词

114. because、for、since、as

英文连词since、as、for、because、now that等都可作“因为”解，但不知用法上有何不同？

【解答】这些都是表原因（cause）或理由（reason）的连词。在用法上各有不同，除for为对等连词外，其余都是不对等连词。在分量上，because最重，其次是since，再次是as，至于for呢，则并不成其为原因，至多只是一种理由而已。在对话时用强硬的字眼，等于强硬的态度，是不客气的，所以用柔弱的字显得有礼貌些，与其说“I will come because you request it.”，不如说“As you request it I will come.”。

用because时应注意是否真正的原因，此字表示产生那种结果的必然有的因果关系。例如说，“天亮了，因为鸟在叫”，译成“The day breaks because the birds are singing.”就错了，因为鸟叫不是天亮的原因，要日出才能破晓，所以只能说，“The day breaks because the sun is rising.”。鸟叫不过是天亮的结果，鸟之所以叫，其理由是天亮了，这种倒果为因的说法，英文只能用for，即是我们可以说“The day breaks for the birds are singing.”，决不可用because来译。

又because指的是道德的或自然的原因（moral or physical cause），而for则指的是逻辑上的理由（logical reason），请看下举两例：

The river has risen，because it has rained much of late.（河水涨了，因为近来下了许多的雨。）（原因）

It must have rained much of late，for the river is so high.（近来一定下了许多的雨，因为河水涨得这样高。）（理由）

据Palmer说，for一字在会话体（conversational style）中是不用的，例如“They ate their food uncooked，for the use of fire was unknown.（他们茹毛饮血，因为那时还不知道用火。）”这句话如果改为对话时，则变成：

“Why did they eat their food uncooked？”

“Because the use of fire was unknown.”

这句答案如果用for就是错误的。在回答why的问题时，一定要用because，不可用for。又附属子句有必要说明原因时，也是要用because的，例如：

He is disappointed because he did not get the position.（他感到失望，因为他没有得到那个位置。）

He will succeed because he is capable as well as confident.（他是要成功的，因为他又有能力又可信赖。）

如上面已说明过的，for表理由，because表原因，所以用for时是说明前面所讲的话，造句的方式常要把结果先说出来，例如：

It is going to rain，for the barometer is falling.（天要下雨了，因为晴雨计正在下降。）

I’m not able to begin the work at once，for I am about to start on a journey.（我不能够马上开始工作，因为我就要出发去旅行了。）

再比较下面二例：

He is beloved of all because he is honest.（他因诚实为大家所喜欢。）（原因）

He must be honest，for he is beloved of all.（他一定是很诚实，因为大家都喜欢他。）（理由）

至于since通常是放在句首，对既知的事实表示一种理由，如：

Since you say so，I suppose it is true.（你既然这样说，我想这是真的。）

Since you are going，I will accompany you.（你既然要去，我就陪你去吧。）

Since the earth is round，why do we not fall off？（地球既是圆的，我们为什么不会从它上面掉下去呢？）

连词as通常也是放在句首的，有时可改用so，放在原来的主句之前，比较：

As I am about to start on a journey， I shall not be able to begin the work before I return.（因为我就要出发去旅行了，在回来以前我不能开始那个工作。）

I am about to start on a journey，so I shall not be able to begin the work before I return.（我就要出发去旅行了，所以我回来以前我不能开始那个工作。）

As it is raining，I will not go out.（因雨我不出去。）

She was well paid，as she had done the work well.（因为她工作得好，所以薪给亦高。）

Now that和as差不多，通常放在句首，如：

Now that you are a big boy，you must behave better.（你现在已经大了，要学点礼貌。）

Now that he has passed his examinations，they treat him better.（他现在已考取了，他们对他好些了。）

115. because与否定

“I didn’t go because I was afraid.”这句话，我译作：“我没有去，因为我怕。”分明是一个否定的句子，为什么有人又说是肯定，实际是“去了”，还是“没有去”？到底应如何译出才对？

【解答】英文的否定原有两种：一是单字的否定，名为Special Nega-tion，例如“She is unhappy.”；另一是文句的否定，名为Nexal Negation，例如“She isn’t happy.”。通常是没有什么大的意义上的差异的，如上举的两句都作“她不快乐”解，但是如果加上别的字的时候，意思就大不相同，比方说，在上例中加一个very进去，

She is very unhappy.（她很不快乐。）

She isn’t very happy.（她并不太快乐。）

关于这种文句中的否定，英文中文有时都不免含有肯定在内，例如：“I don’t think he will come.”。中文可译作：“我不认为他会来。”实际说：“我认为他不会来。”（I think he will not come.）又如“I don’t complain of your words，but of the tone in which they were uttered.（= I complain not of . . . ，but of . . .）”中文也可译作“我并不抱怨你说的话，而是抱怨你说那话时的声调”。当然，这个I don’t complain（否定），实际是I complain（肯定）。在否定句中加上一个because的字样进去，问题更麻烦了。通常not . . . because = not . . . though；例如：

You should not despise a man because he is poor.（不要因别人穷就轻蔑他。）

Don’t be vain because you are goodlooking.（不要因你长得漂亮就虚荣起来。）

这个because既作though解，翻译时当不会译错，直译即可，即意译为“虽则他穷，你也不要轻蔑他”“虽则你长得漂亮，也不可有虚荣心”也未尝不可，但如果遇到不作though解的because时，就得特别当心了，D. H. Howe＆B. Smith合著的Practical English for the Certificate（Oxford University Press，1963）第一部分上有这样一个例句：

He did not do it because he was afraid.

解释说，这个句子包含两种可能的意义：（1）他没有做这个，理由是他怕；（2）他没有做这个，但不是因为他怕，而是别的理由。该书编者把两个意义，都解释为he did not do it，我认为是没有说明白的，使读者还是不能彻底了解，我现在想拿问题中所提出的例句，用中、英文来详细解说一番，也许使人可以更加明白这一个表现法的含义了。

I didn’t go because I was afraid.

=（1）I didn’t go，and the reason was fear.（我怕所以我没有去。）

=（2）I went，but the reason was not fear.（我不是因为怕才去的。）

第一义是“没有去”，第二义是“去了”。这个句子根本就有这样两种相反的，即一个否定一个肯定的含义，当我们写出来的时候，可以在go字后加上一个Comma来表示第一义，但在说话时，标点失去了作用，就只好靠字句的重音（stress and intonation）来表示了。

116. though和although

英文的already一字，据说是从all + ready而来，但意思及用法都有了分歧：already为副词，意为“已经”；而all ready为形容词片语，意为“完全准备好”，如“The men were all ready to start their next job.（人们已完全准备好，可开始下一工作。）”“It is lighted already.（灯火已经点亮了。）”。同样，although是由all + though所形成，但它与though在意义上却完全一样，不知用法上有无不同？

【解答】although和though都是连词，意思都当“虽则”解，彼此常可互相换用，但Fowler在他的名著Modern English Usage一书上说：although用于（1）较正式的文章（formal style）中，（2）文句的头上，（3）陈述不单是假定，而是既定的事实时。

Although通常认为是though加强的形式，正好像upon是on的加强形，until是till的加强形一样，但人们用时并不一定注意及此，常由个人的嗜好及口气而定取舍。大概说来，although是置于一句的头上，后接上一个子句，而though则是用于跟在主句（principal clause）后面的附句（dependent clause）之首，即是为引导出一个附句而用的。

Although也好，though也好，是不能和but同用的（因为现代汉语，有“虽然……但是……”的表现法，每易误译为although . . . but），但为Emphasis起见，至多可接用yet（或still、nevertheless）的字样，当然不加用这些字是最普通的句式。

Although比though来得正式而语气也要重些，不及though的通俗，不过在美国是不加辨别地随便用的，如New York Times Weekly某一期上就把although用了十一次（句首七次，句中四次），though反而只用了一次。似乎近年好用although的人突然多起来了。

Although所引导的子句，通常指事实而不指假设，如下面第一句里用though，第二句里用although：

He would not be unhappy though he would have to live alone.（他即使不得不离群索居，也不会不快乐的。）

He was not unhappy although he had to live alone.（他虽然不得不离群索居，却并不觉得不快乐。）

下面两句也因同样的理由不可改为although：

Let’s start as arranged though it rain（不用rains）tomorrow.（明天即令下雨，我们也要照预定出发。）

Though everybody desert（不用deserts）you，I will not.（即令大家都不理你，我也不会。）

还有在as though、even though、young though he is等表现法中，是不能把though改为although的。

此外，though有时可作副词用，那也不能换用although的，如：

He will probably agree；you never know，though.（他大概会同意的，不过谁也不能确实知道。）

He said he would come；he didn’t，though.（他原说要来的，不过他终于没有来。）

有时在文句中虽同是用的though一字，但因章法不同，而语气有轻重之分，例如：

（a）Though she was a child，the actress was drawing a crowd.

（b）Child though she was，the actress was drawing a crowd.

（a）The book，though it is a masterpiece，is far from popular.

（b）The book，masterpiece though it is，is far from popular.

每组中的（b）句都较（a）句语气为重，注意（b）句中的child和masterpiece前面没有冠词。

117. though的误用

“虽则他病了好几年，现在却完全好了”一句，译成英文为“Thou-gh having been ill for years，he is now quite well.”。据说是错了，但不知错在何处，请详为解说。

【解答】译文确是错误的，应将though改为after或根本去掉，因为though是一个连词（Conjunction），后面必须接上一个子句（Clause），而after 虽则也可作连词用，但主要是介词（Preposition）。例如说“I cannot do it like he does.（我不能照他那样做。）”就是错误的，因为like是介词，后面不能接子句，必须改成连词的as才行，如要保留介词的like，就要把后面的子句he does，改为单字的him：

I cannot do it like him.

I cannot do it as he does.

由于同样的原因，问题中的句子，也应改正如下：

Though he has been ill for years，he is now quite well.

After having been ill for years，he is now quite well.

Having been ill for years，he is now quite well.

再看下面一例：

After all my care（= Although I was so careful），it was broken.（我非常当心，但它还是破了。）

句中after是介词，although是连词。

118. after用作连词或介词

After walking about an hour，we arrived at the place.（走了差不多一小时之后，我们达到目的地了。）句中的after一字，到底是连词呢还是介词？

【解答】在上举文句中的after一字，最好把它看作是介词，walking为动名词。也像一个现在时的动词一样，一个现在时的单纯动名词（Simple Gerund）也有现在、过去、未来三种时态的用法，例如：

I have no doubt of your being able to speak English well.（= I have no doubt that you are able to speak English well.）（现在时态）

The students were glad of the examination being over.（= The students were glad that the examination was over.）（过去时态）

I have no doubt of your succeeding.（= I have no doubt that you will succeed.）（未来时态）

由此可知问题中的walking一字也是可以表过去的，我们应把它看作一个动名词，而不是现在分词。像after一般的这种介词的用法，我们还可以举出下面的种种例句来：

On arriving in London，I sent him a telegram.（一到伦敦我就打了一个电报给他。）

Before leaving the place，I mean to see all the sights worth seeing.（离开那里以前，我打算要去看看一切值得一看的风景。）

After ringing（having rung）the bell，he retired into the shade.（摇过了铃，他就躲到阴处去了。）

上面问题中提出的句子，还可以变成下面种种说法：

（1）After having walked an hour，we arrived at the place.

（2）After an hour’s walk，we arrived at the place.

（3）After we had walked an hour，we arrived at the place.

上举（1）（2）句中的after为介词，（3）句中的after为连词。

现在我们可以再进一步地来检讨一下另外两个相关的问题：

While staying in London，I made the acquaintance of Mr. Thomas.（当我在伦敦时结识了托马斯先生。）

上例中的while是连词，staying为现在分词。这是一种所谓省略的构造（Elliptical Construction），在staying的前面省略了I was（主语和述语）二字，实际仍然是一个完整的子句，所以while是连词。他例如：

When going to school，he had his watch stolen.（当他去上学时，表被偷走。）

上例中的when有人把它当作连词看待，实际是关系副词，具有连接两个子句的作用，在going前省略了he was二字，所以going是现在分词，不是动名词。

学者必须注意这个附句中的“-ing-form”，到底是动名词呢还是现在分词，能够辨别这个，才能决定它前面的字是连词还是介词。这是第一个有关的问题。其次是“介词+动名词”以代替分词构造（“Prep. + Gerund” instead of Participle Construction）。这种除极少数的情形外（如上举的“Before leaving the place . . . ”等例），大都是可以把介词略去，让动名词变成现在分词的：

By holding on to the rope firmly，I came safe to land.（= Holding on to the rope firmly，etc.）（紧握住那根绳子，我安全到达陆地。）

In going down town，I met an old friend.（= Going down town，etc.）（到市中心商业区去时，我遇到一个老朋友。）

After having finished my work，I went to bed.（= Having finished my work，etc.）（做完事，我就去睡了。）

119. doubt后的连词用whether或是that

在doubt后面接上子句（Clause）时，连词有时用whether，有时用that，不知有无规定？在动词或名词的doubt外，还有形容词的doubtful，后接子句时，是否都可用whether作连词？

【解答】基本原则是肯定句用whether、if、when、what等作连词，否定句或疑问句就用that、but、but that作连词，二者不可混乱。动词、名词、形容词，都是一样，例如：

1. 我怀疑此事是否真确。

I doubt It is doubtful whether it is true. There is a doubt | whether it is true.

2. 此事真确无疑。

I don’t doubt I have no doubt that it is true. There is no doubt | that it is true.

3. 谁会怀疑此事是否真确？

Who doubts that it is true？

你能怀疑他不会赢吗？

Can you doubt that he will win？

连词that有时略去，whether则应保留。在否定句的no doubt后面有时可再加about it的字样，但要不要意思一样，如：

There is no doubt about it that he will win. = There is no doubt that he will win.

比较：

I doubt whether he will come soon.

（我想他不会很快就来。）

I doubt whether he will not come soon.

（我想他很快就会来。）

作名词用的doubt，可说a doubt或no doubt，如“I have no doubt about it.”都是用的单数，但无冠词或否定字时，则必须用复数，如“I have doubts about it.”。又in doubt一个片语，有“怀疑”或“迷惑”二解，如：

It was still in doubt.（那还是有疑问。）

I am in doubt what I ought to do.（我不晓得要怎样办。）

这个动词doubt不作“怀疑”解，而用作“恐怕”（fear、be afraid）之意的，是古语的遗留，例如：

I doubt we are late.（我们恐怕迟了。）

I doubt he is a greater rascal than we know.（我恐怕他比我们所知道的更要卑鄙无赖。）

在用作“恐怕”解时，虽是肯定，后面也不要接用whether的字样。

又doubtless一字现在只用作副词，很少用作形容词了。它的意思与no doubt同。例如：

I shall doubtless see you tomorrow.（明天多半会见到你的。）

He is doubtless respectable.（他确是可尊敬的。）

Doubtless you know best.（你一定知道得最清楚。）

120. and和数目字

英文数目字的读法，常要加一个and进去，譬如“二十五”读成five and twenty；“二百五”读成two hundred and fifty。这个and的用法，是否有一定的规则？请细为举例说明。

【解答】说数目字加用and，原则上是只加在hundred一字后面的。英文虽有一个“千”字，但可说成多少“百”，英文没有“万”字，也没有“亿”字，但都可以用“百”来表示。凡是遇到英文的“百”字，后面就得加上and，在几千的后面，可直接接上几百，但千数后如无百数，只有单位或十位的数字时，也得用上一个and。例如：

271 = two hundred and seventy-one.

308 = three hundred and eight.

1321 = one thousand three hundred and twenty-one.

3062 = three thousand and sixty-two.

6005 = six thousand and five.

12，516 = twelve thousand five hundred and sixteen.

793，641,572 = seven hundred and ninety-three million，six hundred and forty-one thousand，five hundred and seventy-two.

问题中提出的five and twenty是比较古的表现法，现在的英文多改为twenty-five的说法了。

凡是十位数从21，22，23，24，25 . . . 99，读成twenty-one，twenty-two，twenty-three，twenty-four，twenty-five， . . . ninety-nine，在十位与单位数字之间，写时要加上一短横（hyphen）。

从1000到1999之间的数字，读时可以用十百代千，例如，1898可读成eighteen hundred and ninety-eight。又如公元1968年通常说nineteen（hundred and）sixty-eight，当然也可以说one thousand nine hundred and sixty-eight。

英文的hundred、thousand、million等字，作数字用时不可加〔s〕作成复数，除非把它当作名词用才可加〔s〕，比较下面的例句：

Singapore has two million inhabitants.

Singapore has two millions of inhabitants.

Singapore has a population of two million（s）.

Taiwan has a population of ten million two hundred thousand.

China has a population of seven hundred million.

New York City contains seven million population.

Amongst the eight million are a few hundred to whom this does not apply.

在英文数目字中所加用的and，美国话常略去不用。

121. 中文连词“而”字的译法

中文连词的“而”字有时又用作毫无意义的语助，如“而已”或“已而”，又如“三十而立”等，在翻译成英文时，对于这个“而”字，不知应如何译法？

【解答】中文的“而”字不但使洋人却步，就是对中国人也是很难学习的一个字。从前有位滥竽的启蒙老师，教小孩读《论语》，开卷便解释说：“学而第一的意思，是说你们读书第一要学的就是而字。”这笑话证明“而”字的难解和难学。“而”字用法变化莫测，含义复杂离奇。先说含义计有：

（1）胡须：——《说文》段注：“而为口上口下之总名，分之则口上为髭，口下为须。戴先生云：‘鳞属颊侧上出者曰之，下垂者曰而。’”

（2）汝：——《左传》：“余知而无罪也。”《书经》：“而康而色。”

（3）与：——《墨子》：“闻善而不善，皆以告其上。”

（4）如：——《孟子》：“而居尧之宫，逼尧之子。”

（5）以：——《庄子》：“其风窢然，恶可而言。”

（6）能：——《国策》：“齐多知，而解此环不？”

（7）则：——《荀子》：“玉在山而草木润。”

（8）又：——《孟子》：“子既烹而食之。”

（9）乃：——《论语》：“而谋动干戈于邦内。”

（10）然：——《论语》：“其为人也孝弟而好犯上者鲜矣。”

（11）兮：——《论语》：“已而已而，今之从政者殆而！”

以上这些除最后一个作“兮”字解的语助词外，都是不难翻译的。语助词或称虚字，是英文所没有的用法，翻译也就最难。据朱熹说，欧阳修为韩琦作《相州昼锦堂记》，开头两句原来做的是“仕宦至将相，富贵归故乡”，文稿送出后又追回来，改成“仕宦而至将相，富贵而归故乡”，才认为满意了。加“而”字，意义还是一样，作者为什么一定要加呢？这完全是声调问题，“仕宦至将相”五字全是仄声，念起来平板局促，毫无抑扬，加上一个“而”字，声调就大不相同了。“而”字还可用在主语和动词之间，如“匹夫而为百世师，一言而为天下法”等句，除了声调之外还有强意的作用。文中的这类虚字，是极难翻译的，与其译错，不如不译。美国的汉学家Dr. Walter Simon说“而”字在动词前作那动词的宾语用时，能表出更加正确的思想来。这简直是胡说八道。聪明的译者，都避免不译，如“三十而立”一句，James Legge译作：

At thirty，I stood firm.

后来的Arthur Waley也另译成：

At thirty，I had planted my feet firm upon the ground.

孔子说的“辞达而已矣”句中“而已”一辞，通常译作“That’s all.”。但整句似不宜译作：“To say what you mean. That’s all.”。又有人译作“Get the meaning across and then stop.”。对“而已”不肯轻易放过，且看：

In language it is simply required that it convey the meaning.（Legge译）

In official speeches all that matters is to get one’s meaning through.（Waley译）

It is enough that one’s words express fully one’s thought.（Ware译）

他们都没有把“而已”二字直译出来。

作为连词来用的“而”字，就不难翻译了，例如：

小红低唱，而我吹箫。

I played on the flute，and Hsiao Hung sang to it.

你现在必须去，而下次可再来。

You must go now，but you may come again.

油尽而灯干。

The oil must be out，for the lamp has gone out.

他很聪明，而他的妹妹却很愚笨。

He is clever whereas his sister is foolish.

我弟弟发了财，而我还照旧穷。

I have remained poor，while my brother has made a fortune.

他是一个聪明人，而仍不免常犯错误。

He is a wise man，nevertheless（或none the less，或and yet）he often makes mistakes.

他正想要用脚跟踏碎那株小草，而一个新的念头使他停下来了。

He was about to crush the plant with his heel，when a new thought made him stop.

他穷而正直。

Though he is poor，he is honest.

Ⅸ 介 词

122. “假期从明天开始”不可译作“The vacation begins from tomorrow.”

“假期从明天开始。”

The vacation begins from tomorrow.

这样英译为何不对？说：“Dr. Wong’s consultation days will begin from next Monday.（王医生下周一开诊。）”。为何又可以呢？

【解答】上举的例句确实是错的，应译作“The vacation begins tomo-rrow.”才对。中国话的“从明天开始”句中的“从”字，英文有许多译法，或者不译，例如：

（1）新学期从四月开始。

The new term begins in April.

（2）新学期从四月五日开始。

The new term begins on the 5th of April.

（3）茶会从六点开始。

The tea party begins at six o’clock.

（4）教育从一个人的出生开始。

Education begins with a man’s birth.

而上例“假期从明天开始”的“从”字就不要译出，因为它后面接的tomorrow是一个副词，而副词前是不用介词的。英文的介词from，是指“某种行动开始的起点”，但用时常要把那种行动的终点一并说出来，例如：

I have been ill from yesterday morning till this evening.（我从昨天早上起到今天晚上一直在生病。）

Coolies work from morning to night.（苦力从早做到晚。）

此外，from还可以用于“某种行为继续着而没有中断的时候”（when the action is continuous）。例如：

He has been blind from childhood.（他从小就瞎了眼睛。）

I have known him from a child.（从他是小孩子时候起我就认识他。）

至于在问题中所提出的那种begin from的用法，是表示“某种行为不断反复的时候”（when the action is constantly repeated）的，例如：

I draw full pay from the date of arrival.（我从到职之日起就支领着全薪。）

这表示支薪是每周或每月都有一次，经常反复做着的事。这不必要有起讫，单说一个起头即可，因为一时是找不出一个终点来的。

现在附带把from的类似字since的用法，也来说明一下：since是表示“继续到现在为止的事的起点”，作连词用时，后面常要接过去动词，例如：

Since（= From the time when）you went out this morning，I have had ten visitors.（自从你今晨出外到现在，我已接待过十个客人了。）

It is two years since we parted.（别来已经两年了。）

123. from、since、for三个说时间的介词

在上一问中解答时有一例句说：“I have known him from a child.”。既然用的现在完成时态，为何不用since而要用from呢？

【解答】不错，现在完成时态，是表示从过去到现在为止的状态，而since也是用来指过去到现在的时间的起点（to measure time from a particular point of time in the past），在上举例句中似乎不用from而用since更为适合，不过语文是注重惯用法的，用“from +普通名词”或“since +抽象名词”，正是惯用的说法，所以上例是不能把from改为since的，仍然要说：

I have known him from a child.

不过也不是绝对的，如果要用since的话，就说：

I have known him since his childhood.

意思还是一样。介词from是表时间的起点的，除上举的from a child 外，还可说from a boy、from olden times及from（one’s）childhood等等，这些表达都可以和现在完成时态同用，但用过去时态也未尝不可，例如：

They have been friends from（或since）childhood.（他们从幼时起就成为朋友了。）

They have loved each other from their childhood.（他们从幼时起就相爱了。）

From a boy he was fond of study.（从幼时起他就好学。）

He was studious from his childhood.（他自髫龄即好学。）

From olden times men have been making use of fire.（从古昔开始人们就一直在用火。）

英文的since作介词用时还有：

I have been here since four o’clock（Friday，February，1964，your last visit，etc.）（我从四点钟起就在这里。）

这个since的意思是“从那时以来”（during the time subsequent to）。有时也可以说：

I have been here since six months ago.（我从六个月以前开始就在这里。）

如改说“I have been here for six months.（我到这里已经六个月了。）”，当然更为常用，for是表示时间的期限。比较下面二例：

There has been no great Italian painter since the eighteenth century.（从十八世纪以后，意大利就没有伟大的画家了。）

There has been no great Italian painter for two hundred years.（意大利有两百年没有产生伟大的画家了。）

124. 介词的宾语

英文文法中常说介词的宾语，意即在介词后面要接名词，但如without fail等为何又可以接动词呢？介词的宾语除名词外，还有些什么词类？

【解答】介词是用于名词之间的媒介语，所以有所谓介词的宾语，因为宾语必须是名词或名词同等语。在问题中举出的without fail一个成语中，那个fail也是名词，不是动词，在古代造字不多，动词和名词，形容词和副词，常共用一字。

介词后面是不能用动词作宾语的，除动词外其他差不多都可以用，现将基本的名词及代名词放下不提，只就其他的词类分别举例如下：

（1）形容词：

It is far from possible.（这绝不可能。）

He is given up for dead.（认为他已死而放弃了搜寻工作。）

John was a schoolboy of fourteen years old.（约翰是一个十四岁的学生。）

There are three fine silken threads of six inches long.（有三根六英寸长的细丝线。）

（2）分词：

He reported for lost（或missing）.（报告说他已失踪。）

I took it for granted that he would fulfil his promise.（我认为他当然会践约的。）

I consider the problem as settled.（我以为那问题已经解决了。）

（3）副词：

From where shall we start and up to where shall we go？（我们要从何处动身，到何处去？）

他如from here（there）、from abroad、from now（then）、till now（then）、for long、by far等都是。

（4）动名词：

He came near being killed.（他几乎被碾死。）

I don’t feel like laughing today.（今日我不想笑。）

He succeeded in solving the problem.（他把那问题解决了。）

（5）不定词：

He was about to start.（他行将出发。）

Nothing remains but to die.（除死无他办法。）

He never did anything but read newspapers.（他只管看报，什么都不做。）

（6）介词片语：

Young ladies of from sixteen to twenty-six years of age. ——Dickens（从十六岁到二十六岁的年轻姑娘。）

他如from under the table、from behind the curtain、from of old、since be-fore the war、for above（over）two years等皆是。

（7）子句：

He differs from us in that he dislikes most games.（in that = in the following fact that）（他跟我们不同的地方是他对于普通游艺都不喜欢。）

In that he is ill， he feels unable to do it.（in that = because）（他因为生病，他觉得不能作此。）

It will do except that it is too long.（这个可以用，就是稍长一点。）

Next comes the question of what you want it for.（下面的问题就是你要这个做什么？）

125. except和excepting的分别

英文的except和excepting两字都是介词，不知用法上有何不同？又在except之后，有时要再加一个for字，有时不要，不知有何规定？

【解答】作介词用的except，比介词but的意味较强，更为积极，例如：

Everyone is ready except you.（大家都准备好了，只等你。）

He works every day except Sunday.（除礼拜天以外，他每天都要工作。）

此字作介词用时，后面不但可接名词或代名词，而且可接介词或副词，例如：

He has always been in good health except in the past few days.（他一向都是很健康的，只有这几天有点不舒服。）

He has always been in good health except quite recently.（他除了最近几天之外，一向都是很健康的。）

又可接用that及when等引导的子句，如：

He has always been in good health except that he has had a slight headache in the past few days.（他除了过去几天略为有点头痛以外，一向都是很健康的。）

He has always been in good health except when he had a slight headache.（他除了略为有点头痛的时候以外，一向都是很健康的。）

有时在except后还可以接不定词，如：

He could do little except write.（他除了写以外，什么都不行。）在do后省略了to write的to，这和“I did nothing but go home.”的情形一样。

至于except与except for在用法上的区别，有人说否定句用单独的except，肯定句则用except for，不过同一含义若将否定字换去，而改用别的说法时，也就算是肯定了，例如：

She has nothing on except a Bikini suit.（她除了三点式泳装以外，什么也没有穿。）

She is naked except for a Bikini suit.（她除了三点式泳装以外是裸体的。）

He has no clothing except a loin-cloth.（他除了一个围腰外没有穿衣服。）

He is naked except for a loin-cloth.（他除了一个围腰外是裸体的。）

This book has no blunders except a few mistakes.（这本书除了一点小错之外没有大错。）

This book is interesting except for a few blunders.（这本书除了有些错误之外，是很有趣味的。）

不过这种区别并不够分明，最显著的是：前后有相称的同类语时就用except，否则用except for，例如：

We come to school every day except Sunday.（我们除星期天外天天到校上课。）句中every day与Sunday为相称的同类语。

They all went there except me.（他们都到那里去了，只有我没有去。）句中they与me为相称的同类语。

I looked everywhere except in the bathroom.（除浴室外我什么地方都看过了。）句中everywhere与in the bathroom为相称的同类语。

Lionhead Hill has nothing to see except its old temples.（狮头山除古庙外没有什么可看的。）句中nothing to see与its old temples为相称的同类语，如改说成“Lionhead Hill is not worth seeing except for its old temples.（狮头山除古庙外没有值得看的。）”，句中not worth seeing与its old tem-ples不相称，非同类语，所以要用except for。

又如：

The dress is ready except for the buttons.（衣服全做好了，只差钮扣未缝。）句中ready与the buttons不相称，非同类语。

The purse was empty except for some coppers.（钱包是空的，只有几个铜板。）句中empty与coppers不相称，非同类语。

Your composition is very good except for a few spelling mistakes.（你的作文除有几个字拼错外，其余都很好。）句中very good与a few spelling mistakes不相称，非同类语。

凡用“except for +单字或片语”的句子，都可以改为“except that +子句”，如：

This will do except for the length. = This will do except that it is too long.（这很好，只是长一点。）

It is right except for the omission of the accents. = It is right except that the accents are omitted.（除了未标重音外，一切都对。）

至于excepting一字，则只用于句首，或用于not、without、always字样之后，如：

Excepting his son，they are all right.（除了他儿子以外，他们都平安。）

Excepting Sundays the stores are open daily.（除星期日外，商店每天都开门。）

All my brothers are married，not excepting the youngest.（所有我的兄弟都结婚了，连最小的一个也是。）

All my brothers come here every day，always excepting the youngest.（所有我的兄弟每天都来这里，除了最小的一个以外。）

126. government of the people是主格作用还是宾格作用

英文介词的of，作属格用时，常可发生两种作用，即主格作用和宾格作用，如the love of God（神爱〔世人〕）是主格作用，God’s love of man（神爱世人）是宾格作用，因前者God是主格，后者man是宾格。美国总统林肯的名言：“Government of the people，by the people and for the people.”。句中的of the people到底是主格作用呢，还是宾格作用？

【解答】这是一个颇引起争执的问题，因为它可以解释为主格作用的“人民治理的”，也可解释为宾格作用的“治理人民的”。中国译作“民治、民有、民享”，当然是照主格作用翻译的，但林肯的原意似乎是用作宾格作用的。我们不妨找些文献来小心求证。美国的政治家兼演说家Daniel Webster（1782—1852）在1830年所作的演说中，说有这样的话：

The people’s government，made for the people，made by the people，and answerable to the people.（人民的政府，是为人民组织的，由人民组织的，向人民负责的。）

美国的神学家、传教师，主张废止奴隶的Theodore Parker（1810—1860）在The American Idea（美国观念）中说：

A democracy，——that is a government of all the people，by all the peo-ple，for all the people . . . （一种民主政体，那就是由全体人民组织，为全体人民服务，代表全体人民的政府。）

Parker在1854年及1858年曾经一再使用上述同样的语句，林肯曾把他第二次说教时所说的这句话，加以铅笔的标记，可能就是林肯在1863年的Gettysbury Address中所主张的这个字句的来源。

Parker的说教中又再进一步地解释“民主”时说：

Democracy is direct self-government，over all the people，by all the people，for all the people.（民主政体是由全体人民，为全体人民，而统治全体人民的完全的自治政府。）

从over一字看来，应知“全体人民”是“被统治的”一点，Parker已经把它解释得很明白了。

The American’s Creed（《美国人的信条》）的著者William Tyler Page（1868—1942）把government一字写成大写，使之由“政府”更进一步而具有“国家”的意义了：

I believe in the United States of America as a Government of the peo-ple，by the people，for the people，whose just powers are derived from the governed； . . . （我相信美利坚合众国是一个人民的国家，由人民组织，为人民服务，它的正当的权力来自被统治者的人民……）

1918年4月3日美国众议院（House of Representatives）曾经采用了Page的说法，可见这是美国一般人所接受的对于of the people一语的解释。

林肯在1861年7月4日对国会致词（Lincoln’s Message to Congress in Special Session）时说：

And this issue embraces more than the fate of these United States. It presents to the whole family of man the question whether a constitutional republic or democracy——a Government of the people by the same people——can or cannot maintain its territorial integrity against its own domestic foe.

可见林肯本人对democracy所下的定义是“a Government of the people by the same people”，即是“一个人民自治的民主国”，人民是主，同时也是宾，以by表“主”，以of表“宾”，是毫无疑义的。林肯故意还加上一个same的字眼，以表示同一人民。

由以上各种文献看来，林肯说的of the people一语，还是应该解释为宾格作用才对。这也很合理，因为人民本身不能统治人民，实际统治人民的，是人民选举出来的几个代表呢。

127. dependent on和independent of

英文的形容词或动词，无论怎样变化，后面接用的介词，多是固定不变的，但有些肯定字与否定字后面接的介词常有不同，如dependent on anyone和independent of anyone，不知有此变化的，还有些别的什么字，请举例句说明。

【解答】介词的用法是变幻莫测的，只能一字一字地加以记忆，实无通则可循。例如full of和rich in；to teach anything to anyone和to instruct anyone in anything之类，都是有一定的，不能任意改变；有些肯定字后面接的介词和同义的否定字后面接的介词，确有不同，现举若干例句如下，以资比较研究：

fruitful——in anything

fruitless——of anything

China is fruitful in natural resources.（中国富于天然资源。）

This is an enterprise fruitless of profit.（这是一种没有利益的事业。）

to persuade——of anything

to dissuade——from anything

I am almost persuaded of his honesty.（我几乎相信他是诚实的。）

They dissuaded him from going.（他们劝阻他不要前往。）

sensible——of kindness

insensible——to kindness

He was sensible of your kindness.（他深为感谢你的好意。）

Mars is never insensible to the glance of beauty.（英雄好色。）

a liking——for something

a dislike——to something

I have no particular liking for chocolate.（我并不特别爱吃巧克力糖。）

They have taken a violent dislike to him.（他们非常嫌恶他。）

to hope——for something

to despair——of something

A newspaper has to win the confidence of the reading public before it can hope for success.（一份报纸要想成功，必须先获得读者的信任。）

He began to despair of success.（他开始感到成功无望了。）

to join——one thing to another

to disjoin——one thing from another

He joined himself to the opposite party.（他加入了反对党。）

They disjoined the sick chickens from the hen.（他们把生病的小鸡跟母鸡隔开。）

以上所举不过数例，而且也并非绝对的用法，因肯定字后原接的介词到底是基本字，否定字后接的是变则，如insensible除接to外仍可接of，我们可说“He is insensible to shame.”，也可以说“He is insensible of shame（恬不知耻。）”。又dislike除to外也仍可以接for，我们既可以说“He has a dislike to bananas.”，也可以说“He has a dislike for bananas.（他嫌恶香蕉。）”。

128. 被动语态后接用的介词

英文说“The room was lighted by electricity.”是正确的，为什么说“The room was lighted by electric light.”就错了呢？

【解答】关于被动语态（Passive Voice）是把主动的人或物改为动作的对象，在主动者（或行为者）的前面加用一个by字为媒介而构成的。例如：

Columbus discovered America.（哥伦布发现美洲。）

America was discovered by Columbus.（美洲为哥伦布所发现。）

表示行为者或理由的这个by字，并非固定不移的，有时也可换用别的介词，在古代英语中不用by，而用from或of，如“He is beloved of all.（他为大家所爱戴。）”一语，便是古文的遗留，到后来才改为by的，在过渡时代的人甚至在同一句中用了by又用of，如：

They think that those fears are wrought by the devil， though indeed they are wrought of God. ——Bunyan（他们以为那种恐惧不安的情形是恶魔搞出来的，实际却是上帝的作为。）

在be known之后又以接to字为普通的用法，如：

How long has he known of this？Well，it was known to him this morning early. ——Hardy（他知道这个有多久了？啊，就在今天一早。）

A man’s intimate friends for years are often quite unknown to his wife.（一个男人多年的好朋友，常常他的太太都不知道。）

一般的原则是行为者用by，工具则要用with，如：

The bear was killed by a hunter with a gun.（那熊被一猎人用枪打死。）

不过行为者与工具之间的分别，有时也并不怎样明显，因为虽不是行为者的人，却有行为者的意味，如：

He was killed by lightning.（他为雷电殛死。）

The building was destroyed by fire.（那房子为火烧毁。）

以上也可以说是“理由”，即因雷殛而死，因火而烧毁，不必一定看作某种被动的行为。问题中的“The room was lighted by electricity.（房间由电照明。）”也可以视为房间大放光明的理由，至于“The room was lighted by electric light.”一句，就应改成“The room was lighted with electric light.（房间用电灯照明。）”，因为电灯显然的是工具呢。他例如：

His clothes were soiled with mud.（衣服满是泥。）

The bird was killed with a stone.（用石头杀鸟。）

The palace is surrounded with a moat.（皇宫有御沟环绕。）

129. “Money cannot buy happiness.”的被动语态

“Money cannot buy happiness.”一语，改为被动语态时，说“Happ-iness cannot be bought by money.”为何不对？

【解答】“金钱不能买到幸福”一句话，原是拟人化（personification）的说法，我们只消仔细想一下，便会觉得这句话意思是不完全的，完全的说法应该是：“我们不能用金钱买到幸福。”（We cannot buy happiness with money.）再把这句英文变成被动语态时，便是“Happiness cannot be bought with money.”。问题中说的by money，当然是错的。

在被动语态中所用的介词，主要有by和with两个，by用于行为者或行为的主体（Active Agent），with用于工具（Passive Instrument）。用于工具的动词，主动的形式或被动的形式都可以，如：

His enemy killed him with a sword.（他的敌人用剑杀死了他。）（主动的形式）

He was killed with a sword.（他死于剑下〔即被剑刺死〕。）（被动的形式）

行动的主体一般是人，但也有人以外的事物的，例如：

The steam-engine was invented by James Watt. = James Watt invented the steam-engine.（蒸汽机是瓦特发明的。）

The city was destroyed by an earthquake. = An earthquake destroyed the city.（城市毁于地震。）

在行动的主体用by的原则下，却有一些例外，这是因动词（或形容词）的不同而来的：

He is known to everybody. = Everybody knows him.（大家都认识他。）

He was seized with an illness.（他生病了。）

The house was surrounded with trees.（房子周围都是树木。）

Her eyes were filled with tears.（她眼中充满泪水。）

He was greatly interested in this work.（他对这工具大感兴趣。）

He was devoured of a long dragon. ——Bacon（他被一条长龙吞噬。）（古文）

He was seen of all the apostles.（他被所有的门徒见到。）（古文）

Did he say so？ It is very kind of him to say so.（他这样说过吗？他这样说是很亲切的。）（这him也是表示行为的主体的，即“He is kind.”。）

现就by和with加以比较如下：

The house was destroyed by fire. = Fire destroyed the house.（屋子被火烧掉了。）（句中fire是行为的主体。）

The house was destroyed with fire. = They destroyed the house with fire.（他们用火烧掉屋子。）（句中fire是工具。）

130. 作“用作”解的as与for

“这种材料可用来做地毯。”翻译为英文时，既可说“This material can be used for a rug.”，也可说“This material can be used as a rug.”。不知介词as和for，在这种意义下的用法，有何不同？

【解答】作“充任”“担任”“当作”“用作”（in the character or capacity of）解的as和for，并不都是可以通用的，除问题中的例句外，他如：

The room serves as（或for）an office.（这房间现用作事务所。）

They chose him as（或for）their leader.（他们选他为领袖。）

It was built for（或as）a pleasure boat.（这船造作游艇之用。）

等句，是可以通用的，但下列各句便不可更换：

He worked as an interpreter.（他担任通译。）

The actor who appeared as Romeo was his good friend.（扮演罗密欧的演员，是他的好朋友。）

She was respected as a teacher.（作为一名教师，她受人尊敬。）

He wants a position as teacher of English.（他求一英文教师的职位。）

注意：as后的名词若为官职或职位等，则不用冠词，他例如：

Who will act as go-between？（谁做媒？）

He has relinquished his position as manager.（他放弃了经理的位置。）

但：

As a teacher of English，he has no equal.（作为一个英文教员，无人能及。）

He lives as a saint.（他洁身自好，有如圣徒。）

As（= When）a boy，he used to dream about the possibility of flying.（幼小时他常梦见他飞行空中的可能性。）

They were sold for slaves.（他们被当作奴隶出卖。）

She won’t do for a teacher.（她做教师不行。）

I took his story for truth.（我把他的话当真。）

He was taken for a spy.（他被当作奸细。）

至于as和for，在用法上的分别，我们可以说，as是表示“资格”的，而for则是表示“用途”的，例如：

He became famous as a writer.（他以作家的资格成名了。）就不能说成for a writer，因为这是要表示资格，而不是表示用途的。

He is famous for his learning.（他以饱学著称。）

Those are horses for riding.（那些是作骑用的马。）便是表示用途的。

在as和for后不一定要接名词，有时也可接形容词或分词。如：

Children look upon middle-aged persons as quite old.（孩子们把中年人看得很老。）

The Chinese classics are regarded as essential to the making of an edu-cated man.（中国的经典是被看作成为一个有教养的人所必需的东西。）

His pulse was so weak that the doctor gave him up for dead.（他的脉搏那般微弱，医生觉得已经没有救了。）

I know for certain.（我确实知道。）

I took it for granted that you would consent.（我姑认为你是会同意的。）

131. 表示附带状况的with

“睁眼睡觉法”翻译为英文的the art of sleeping with open eyes，为什么一定要改正为with one’s eyes open？请就这种用介词的with来表示附带状况的说法，举例解释一下。

【解答】介词with可以表示一种状况，用来结合主句（Principal Statement）和随伴着的情形（Attendant Circumstance）。如我们把“How were they running？（他们怎样跑的？）”一问，和其答案“They had their ears erect.（他们竖起耳朵。）”结合为一，则成为：

They were running with their ears erect.（他们是竖起耳朵跑的。）

这种表附带状况的with，有时候可附带一个由“名词+补语”构成的复合宾语（Complex Object），其中补语的内容可以是（a）形容词，（b）副词，（c）分词，或（d）片语。现即依照这四类来分别举例说明：

用（a）形容词为补语的：

She was lying in bed with the window open.（她打开窗子躺在床上。）

Don’t talk with your mouth full.（不要在吃东西吃得满口时说话。）

用（b）副词为补语的：

She followed her guide with her head down.（她低着头跟着她的向导走。）

What a lonely world it will be with you away.（你要走了，这个世界会变得多么寂寞呀。）

用（c）分词为补语的：

She looked in my face with tears streaming down her face.（她凝视着我，热泪横流。）

He was listening to the music with his eyes（half）closed.（他〔半〕闭着眼睛在听音乐。）

用（d）片语为补语的：

He was standing with a pipe in his mouth.（他口里衔着烟斗，站在那里。）

The dog slunk away with his tail between his legs.（狗夹着尾巴偷偷地走开了。）

这种句法有时候可以将with略去，便成为独立分词的构造了。如“With night coming on， we started for home.（夜幕下降，我们就动身回家了。）”一句，改说成为“Night coming on，we started for home.”的独立分词句，意思还是一样。又如（d）型第一例句，也可简化为下列两种形式：

He was standing，a pipe in his mouth.

He was standing，pipe in mouth.

在这种用法的with后可接用带所有格的名词（如with your mouth），单独用的名词（如with tears、with night），带冠词的名词（如with the window、with a pipe），或代名词（如with you）。

132. what with和what by

英文的惯用句中有时在what后接with或是接by，不知应怎样翻译，二者有何不同？

【解答】这种形式的what是一个副词，含有partly（部分地）的意义，与with结合时表示“原因”，与by结合时则表示“手段”或“方法”。通常是在一句中重复地使用，但有时也可以把第二次要用的略去，于义无损，读者也明白是省略了的。

What with overwork and（what with）poor meals，she became very ill.（她因过劳，又吃得不好，终于病倒了。）

What with good medical care and（what with）his natural strength，he recovered very quickly.（一则因有好的医药照顾，一则因为他自己的体力很强，所以他很快地就复原了。）

What with chagrin and what with bad diet，she found herself reduced to a skeleton.（半因心中懊恼，半因营养缺乏，她觉得自己瘦得不成人形了。）

What with his studies and what with his sports，the school-boy has no time left for idle thoughts.（半以功课，半以运动，使学生无暇作怠惰的想法。）

In less than a minute the storm was upon us——in less than two minutes the sky was entirely overcast and what with this and the driving spray it became suddenly so dark that we could not see each other in the fishing boat.（不到一分钟暴风雨就向我们袭来了——随即乌云蔽天，半因昏黑，半因溅水，突然一下黑暗得使我们在渔船上彼此都看不见人了。）

What by bribes and what by extortions he made money.（或由贿赂，或由勒索，他发了财。）

What by policy and what by force he finally accomplished his design.（或由策略，或用暴力，他终于完成了他的阴谋。）

这个“What with . . . and what with . . . ”有时可以换成“What between . . . and . . . ”，例如：

What with drink and what with fright，he did not know much about the facts. = What between drink and fright，he did not know much about the facts.（半因酒醉，半因恐惧，他对于事实的真相所知不多。）

133. There is something vulgar about him

“There is something vulgar about him.”一句，应如何译法？尤其是句中about一字的含义及用法，请为详细说明。

【解答】这句英文可译作“他有点俗气”。句中的about有in或with之意，中文可译成“在某人身上（边）”。介词about的基本意义是“在周围”，由这个意义而发展成为“在某人身边”，再进而有“在某人身上”。我们先将那基本意义举例来看：

She looked about her in surprise.（她惊异地环顾四周。）

He had a comforter about his neck.（他在颈上围绕着一条毛线织的围巾。）

He planted trees about the house.（他种树于屋的四周。）

进一步而用于“在某人身边”的意义：

I don’t have any change about（= with）me.（我身边没有一分零钱。）

This is all he had about him.（这是他所带着的全部财物。）

由这种有形的周遭（身边），再进而用于无形的方面（身上），而发展成下面的说法：

There is something noble about him.（他有点高贵的气概。）

There is something about him that displeases me.（他有点什么地方使我很不喜欢他。）

介词about还有一个与此相似的意思：“四处”“遍于”（in various places in or on），不可与此混同。

There are idle men standing about the street corners.（有些游手好闲的人站在街角上。）

He went begging about the town.（他在城里到处乞食。）

134. listen to、listen for、listen in的分别

在Maugham的Of Human Bondage一书第四章中有云：“Mrs. Carey knowing by what train they were coming，waited in the drawing-room and listened for the click of the gate. When she heard it she went to the door.”。通常在listen后都是接to，为什么在此接for，二者有何不同？

【解答】在自动词listen后接的介词最普通的是to，此外还可以接for，也可以接in。我们收听广播，或窃听别人讲话（尤其是在电话中），就说listen in，如：

When I called on him he was listening in on the radio.（当我去看他时，他正在听广播。）

We were listening in to the Prime Minister’s speech.（我们正在收音机旁听总理的广播演说。）

I like to listen in to symphonies and chamber music（on the radio）.（我爱收听交响乐和室内乐。）

唯有listen to和listen for这两个说法，意思近似，要注意加以分辨，以免用错。listen for含有“期待”的感觉，listen to则无此意，而只是对已存在的声音倾耳去听而已。说listen to the footsteps是对已经发生的脚步声倾耳去听，而listen for the footsteps则是还未听到任何足音，只是期待着而用心在听。又listen to除通常作“倾听”解外，还另有“听从”“服膺”的意思，如：“A man of character always listens to reason on all occasions.（一个有品格的人在任何场合都是服从理性的。）”。

兹再就这两种说法举例如下：

It is a mother who always listens for a baby’s cry.（时时刻刻都在注意婴孩哭声的就是母亲。）

Please listen carefully for the telephone bell while I’m upstairs.（当我到楼上去了的时候，请你注意听着电话。）

He kept still，listening for any more noise to come.（他保持静默，用心在听是不是会再发出什么声音。）

It is a matter of course that you should listen to the lecture of your teacher.（当然在课室里你应该用心听讲。）

You must listen to the suggestions of wisdom.（你必须倾耳来听智者之言。）

He won’t listen to me.（他不要听我说的。）

Listen to the advice of your father and mother.（听父母的话。）

在listen to的后面接指人的词和不定词，不过通常那不定词的to不要，如：

He listened to us talk.（他听了我们的谈话。）

She liked to listen to children talk.（她爱听孩子们谈话。）

在上二句中都不说to talk，凡是用无to的不定词的场合，多半都可以用现在分词，即：

He listened to us talking.（我们正在谈话时他在旁静听。）

这个不定词的talk或现在分词的talking，也可以说成名词的talk，即：

He listened to our talk.（他听了我们的谈话。）但不可以说“He lis-tened to our talking.”。

135. as against、as by、as concerning、as from、as of

Simeon Potter在他著的Our Language中说，“Such language was cer-tainly effective in his day when he held large congregations as by a spell.”。请说明as by，以及其他as against、 as concerning、as from、as of等等的用法。

【解答】这些都可以把它看作Group-preposition的一种，因为是在介词as后再接用另外一个介词的缘故。这是用as来限制后接的另一介词的意义的。兹分别例解如下：

（1）as against（对比则为）：

The business done this year amounts to ten thousand dollars as against eight thousand dollars last year.（今年生意的总数为一万元，去年则为八千元。）

（2）as by（如由）：

Though the Ghost sat perfectly motionless，its hair，and skirts，and tasseles，were still agitated as by the hot vapour from an oven. ——Dickens（虽则那鬼坐着一动也不动，可是它的头发，衣裾，以及饰缝，仍然好像是被锅炉中发出的热汽所激动似的不断地在摇摆着。）

（3）as concerning = as touching（关于）：

As touching the subject of our conversation，I should like to keep a secret.（关于我们谈话的内容，我想暂守秘密。）

As concerning their retired allowance，they are rather anxious about it.（关于他们的退休金，他们是很关怀的。）

（4）as from =（美）as of（从……月开始或废止）（on and after）主要用于法律、契约、公告等文件上：

The library will be open to the public as from 15 March，1968.（图书馆将在一九六八年三月十五日起开放。）

（5）as of（美）（在当时的）：

the U. S. Cabinet as of Sep. 1，1958（在一九五八年九月一日当时的美国内阁）

The editor has brought the material up to date as of May，1968.（编辑把资料弄成直到一九六八年五月那时为止。）

又as of =（英）as from（从……开始）。

136. know of him和 know him

英文的许多动词可作他动词用，同时又可作自动词用，尤其是加介词of而变成自动词用法的特别多，请就“I know him.”与“I know of him.”一类型的句子，分别说明。

【解答】这个介词of和about相同，有“关于”（concerning）的意思，日常用得极多，如know of、hear of、read of、talk of、speak of等，现在分别加以说明如下：

I know him.（我认识他。）

I know of him.（我知道他。）

I know of him，of course；but I don’t know him.（我当然知道他，不过我不认识他。）

第一句是“直接的，个人之间的相知”，第二句是“间接的，只在报纸上知道的”。第三句比较用法，分别更为显明。这样加上of在动词后，使动作对宾语的直接性变得稀薄，而只有间接的作用了。

I read the book.（我读了那本书。）

I read of the book.（我读到关于那本书的介绍。）

其他的动词可加of的，还有treat、treat of，allow、allow of，admit、admit of，permit、permit of，dispose、dispose of，approve、approve of，remember、remember of等，不过加of的时候，使用范围较窄，多具文言的色彩，有的甚至带有古风，除在美国或方言中已少见了。例如admit通常是用作let in（许入）的意思：

This ticket admits one person.（此票只准一人入场。）

Only three hundred students are admitted every year to our school.（我们学校每年只收三百学生。）

如改用admit of，便成为文言了。在主语专限于事物，不说人的时候，现代英语中当然也可将之作为自动词用，而含有“容许”之意，例如：

Circumstances do not admit of delay.（情形不容许耽搁。）

It does not admit of doubt.（此事不容疑惑。）

The words admit of no other meaning.（这些字没有其他的意义。）

Her son’s conduct admitted of no apology.（她儿子的行为毫无辩解的余地。）

他如treat、treat of，permit、permit of，allow、allow of也可以同样地加以处理：

What subject did he treat？（他做的是什么题目？）

He did not treat the subject very fully.（他没有很充分地论述这个问题。）

This essay treats of the progress of medical research.（这篇文章论述医学研究的进步。）

至于“Did you taste of it，smell of it，feel of it？”的形式，在英国已不用，只在美国英语中存在。这个of是所谓partitive “of”，含有“some of”之意：

He tasted slyly of the wine.（他偷偷喝了葡萄酒。）

Can you taste anything strange in this soup？（你尝到这汤里面有点奇怪的味道吗？）

A man tastes of death but once.（人只能死一次。）

He has tasted of success.（他尝到成功的滋味了。）

They partook our triumph.（他们分享了我们的胜利。）

Let us partake of a meal before we part.（让我们在分别之前一同吃一餐饭吧。）

The teacher looked at John’s work and approved it.（老师看了约翰的工作后表示赞许。）

Her father will never approve of her marrying such a poor man.（她父亲决不会赞成她嫁这样一个穷人。）

137. believe in a person和believe a person

英文可以说believe a person，也可以说believe in a person，不知二者在意义上有无不同？

【解答】这两种表现法在意义上是大不相同的，单说believe a person，意为相信某人说的话，至于在动词后加用介词in，再接宾语的believe in a person的意思，就是信赖其人，也就是信赖他的人格，所以我们可以把两种表现法同用在一句中：

I can believe him，but I cannot believe in him.（我可以相信其言，但我不能信赖其人。）

信教和信神都要用附有介词的表现法，如：

I believe in Christianity.（我信基督教。）

You should believe in God.（你应信神。）

在《圣经》中除believe in God外还说believe on God：

Jesus said unto her，I am resurrection，and the life：he that believeth in me，though he were dead，yet shall he live. ——John 11：25（耶稣对她说，复活在我，生命也在我。信我的人，虽然死了，也必复活。）

And many believed on him there. ——John 10：42（在那里信耶稣的人就多了。）

另外一个类似的字trust，也是一样，可说trust、trust in、trust on。我们所说的信神，是相信其存在的意思，我们说要相信冥冥之中有神存在，然后才能believe in God。不怕鬼的人是不相信世界上有鬼的存在的。

Do you believe in ghosts？（你相信有鬼吗？）

I don’t believe in future life.（我不相信来生的说法。）

由于相信其存在，进而相信其价值：

I believe in this method of teaching.（我觉得这种教授法是有价值的。）

You don’t mean to say that you believe in cheiromancy？——Wilde：Lord Arthur Savile’s Chime（你莫非是说你相信看手相吗？）

When I am ill，I believe more in diet than in drugs.（当我生病的时候，我相信与其吃药，不如注意饮食。）

They believe in the philosophy of “Eat，drink，and be merry，for tomo-rrow we die.”（他们相信人生苦短及时行乐的哲学。）

有时候这两种表现法几乎是同义的，如：

I refused to believe the evil rumour.（我决不相信那种恶意的谣言。）

I refused to believe in the evil rumour.（同上）

138. 介词的省略

“我来这儿有五年了。”译成英文时为“I have been here for five years.”。但又常有人说“I have been here five years.”。将介词略去的和保留的，两种句子不知有何不同？又，什么介词可以略去，什么介词不能略去，请举例说明。

【解答】A. S. Hornby在Idiomatic and Syntactic English Dictionary上介词for第一条有关空间时间的解释项下说：在for the past six weeks、for the next three hours、for more than four years等句中的for常被略去。又说“I haven’t been there for five years.”一句话，如果作“It is five years since I was there last.（从我上次到那儿去过以来已经五年了。）”解时，则for不可略去，但如果表示为时没有五年，也许只有四年或三年，就可以把for略去，而说成“I haven’t been there five years.”。

至于说到什么介词可略，什么介词不能省略，也是有规则可循的。大体说来，总以不伤害词意为原则，所以凡是多少带点形式化，而音价又低的介词可以省略。在单纯介词中，常被略去的是用得最多的at、in、of、on、to等字。在这一类介词中，如after和till等，表示比较重要的意义，如省略时难免不引起误解，所以就保留了。此外，如about及against等复合介词，如concerning、during、past、except派生介词，以为加强语气而用的集群介词等，是绝对不能省略的。

此外由于省略介词，单留下一个名词作副词用，造成所谓副词的宾格（Adverbial Accusative），也是常见的，如（at）any moment、（at the）same time、（at）full length、（on）Sunday等。从美国名作家中，这种例子，俯拾皆是：

It was quite light and any moment now the sun would rise. ——Heming-way（天已经很亮了，太阳马上就要出来。）

But same time，Ted，you know how advertisers exaggerate. ——S. Lewis（但同时，泰德，你知道广告商是多么夸大的。）

They had butched their marlin out and carried them laid full length across two planks. ——Hemingway（他已把那些小马林鱼剖了，整条的平放在两块木板上。）

I’ll go any place any time you wish. ——Hemingway（你随时想到什么地方去我都去呀。）

I’ll be extra nice to Nelly at the picnic Sunday. ——S. Lewis（礼拜天去野餐时，我会对芮利特别好的。）

还有一种所谓副词的属格（Adverbial Genitive），也是由于省略介词而来的。例如不说at night，而说成nights，与always、sometimes同一源流，在英国要在带点古文气味的文章中才有，在美国却广泛地被采用着。这种语法是表示时的反复（repeated time），即说明次数之多。它大概就是古代表示副词属格的“s”，在今日便成为复数的符号了。有时在night后再加上一句every night，无非是加强意思罢了。

He wanted to work nights，every night. ——S. Lewis（他要晚晚工作，每晚都要。）

I’d study nights and I’d work as a waitress in the daytime. ——Stein-beck（我要晚上读书，白天就去做女招待。）

Daytimes we paddled all over the island in the canoe. ——Mark Twain（白天我们总是坐着独木舟环岛到处划船。）

He gets mad，if you’re ten minutes late，mornings. ——E. Rice（如果你早上迟来十分钟，他就要发狂了。）

Evenings she went with her husband to the motion pictures. ——S. Lewis（晚上她总是跟她丈夫一道去看电影。）

I went over there afternoons. ——Hemingway（每天下午我都到那里去。）

Let’s go out and go places. ——T. Wilder（我们出去吧，到一些地方去玩。）

Don’t you worry about long times. ——Steinbeck（不要老是忧虑。）

139. at、in、of、on、to等省略的用例

请就惯常省略介词at、in、of、on、to等字的用例，分类说明一下。

【解答】介词是英文八大词类之一，在英文的表现法中占有极为重要的地位，它不是可有可无的，美国话中常把它省略，并不表示它不存在，如果是写作的话，就不应该省略。兹分别举例如下：

（1）省略了at的：

What time will you start？（你何时动身？）

My wife telephones me six o’clock from the mountain’s hotel.——B. Tarkington（我太太六点钟从山中旅舍打电话来给我。）

You must find board and room some place. ——Ibid（你必须在什么地方找到食宿之处。）

美国口语中常爱用some place、every place、any place、no place来代替somewhere、everywhere、anywhere、nowhere。单说some place，也不说at some place。

“I want to go somewhere，”was his answer. It was the same answer each time she asked him. ——Caldwell（“我要到什么地方去，”便是他的回答。每次她问，他都是同样的回答。）

（2）省略了in的：

You do it all your own way. ——Steinbeck（你把庭园完全照你自己的意思布置起来。）

因为用了all、every、any、that等加强语气的字，而要略去介词，毋宁是当然的事，下例两种语法同时出现，是一个好的对照：

There was a dance at the George Hall every Tuesday night，and the moving-pictures every Friday night，but there was no place to go during the rest of the week. Mary Jane went to the pictures on Friday night.——Caldwell（每周二的晚上乔治厅有跳舞，每周五的晚上有电影，其余的日子就无处可去了。马丽·珍周五晚上去看电影了。）

“Did pretty well out West，didn’t you？”asked the policeman. ——O. Henry（“你在西部搞得不错吧？”那警察问。）〔这是out in the West之略。〕

. . . back of young Ames the Negro woman cried shrilly from the corner. ——W. D. Edmonds（从角落上那黑妇的背后高声地叫出来。）〔这是in back of（= behind）之略。〕

It was going just the way he thought it would. ——Hemingway（那正是照他想的那样进行了。）

这种省略了介词所留下的名词，又可当连词用，是一个值得注目的近代英语的倾向：

“Nels，you are welcome to come back any time you want to”，she begg-ed unashamedly. ——Caldwell（“芮尔斯，你随时愿意回来，我们都是欢迎的。”她厚颜无耻地乞求道。）

The laughter had disappeared from his face and eyes the moment his laughing voice ceased. ——Steinbeck（他的笑声一停，他脸上的笑容就消逝了。）

“Have you got a dime in your pocket to spare，son？” he whispered to me. “I’ll pay it back to you the first chance I get.”——Caldwell（“喂，你身上有一毛钱借给我吗？”他细声地问我。“我一搞到钱马上就还你。”）

（3）省略了of的：

Is there no force on this side the creek？——Bierce（在小溪的这边没有军队吗？）

He passed the Fourth of July on board the Quaker City，in mid-ocean. ——Mark Twain（他在大海中教友城邮船上度过美国国庆日。）

Maybe a couple years. ——Albert Maltz（也许两三年。）

She fluttered out the door and down the stairs to the street. ——O. Henry（她匆匆跑出门去，走下楼梯到街上去了。）

She went out into the garden and found the shears，and then she looked in the window，into the living room. ——Steinbeck（她走出到庭院中，找到了镰刀，然后从窗口望了一下屋内的起居室。）

这个in the window为in through the window之略。美国话的in，常用来代替in through或into的，参看下例，那是以in代into的：

He was nervous and restless when he came in the house. ——Caldwell（当他回到家里的时候，有点神经过敏而感到不安的样子。）

（4）省略了on的：

I’ll see him Sunday. ——Bronfenbrenner（我在礼拜天会看见他。）

Here Abraham Lincoln was born February 12th，1809. ——W. M. Thayer（一八零九年二月十二日林肯出生于此。）

The day of his coming Majorie was awake long before the sun rose. ——Caldwell（在他来的那天，玛逑利在太阳出来好久以前就起身了。）

（5）省略了to的：

I wish I could be more like you. ——Mitchell（我希望我能更像你就好了。）

Of course，Columbus thought that the island was near to India，but in fact it was near the American Continent.（当然哥伦布以为那岛是靠近印度，但事实则是靠近美洲大陆。）

Opposite me sat a young woman. ——Bierce（在我对面坐的是一位年轻的女人。）

在near、like、opposite后略去了to时，有人把它们看作Quasi-preposition（疑似介词）：

It is not worth a penny.（不值一文。）〔worth to（the extent of）a penny〕

Admission costs fifty cents.（入场票价五角。）〔to（the extent of）fifty cents〕

140. “以上”“以下”“以前”“以后”“起”“讫”等的译法

英文通常用介词to、till、until等来表示“到”“为止”；above、below来表示“以上”“以下”及before、after来表示“以前”“以后”等等，请就这些与数目有关的表现法举例说明一下。

【解答】在普通谈话行文中不必怎样精确，可以随便用字来表达，但在商场中就非绝对正确不可，在通报时也不能使读者有丝毫疑惑，宁肯重复，必求明白确定，才不致发生误会。兹将各种可能情况举例如下：

两镑或两磅以上 | ￡2，or over
五十打或五十打以上 | 50 dozen or up（ward）
一百桶或一百桶以上 | 100 drums or more
五百吨或五百吨以上 | 500 tons or above
定购百罗及以上 | an order of not less than 100 gross
从百分之五到百分之十 | 5% up to 10% both inclusive
百分之五以上到百分之十 | over 5% up to 10% inclusive（不含5%）
百分之三及以上的超额 | not less than 3% over the amount（含3%）
百分之三以上的超额 | any excess over 3%；any amount overand above 3%；a sum exceeding 3%
百元或百元以下 | ＄100 or less
在指定价或以下 | at or below the price named
每磅不超过五角的定价 | at a price not exceeding 50 cts per lb.
每五百吨及尾数 | every 500 tons or fraction thereof
六月十日以前 | on or before June 10
六月十日以后 | on or after June 10
九月一日以降 | from and after September 1
从本日起 | from and inclusive today（或this date）
从十月一日起 | as from October 1（as from = on and after）
十月二十日止 | up to and including October 20
三月一日起十五日止 | as from the 1st to the 15th of March inclusive（或from the 1st to the 15th of March both inclusive）
从四月一日至三十日的 | during the period beginning on April 1
期间内 | and ending on April 30，both dates inclusive
1968年至1970年之间 | for the years 1968 to 1970 inclusive
从周一到周四 | from Monday to Thursday inclusive（美国话则说from Monday through Thursday）
大小从六毫米到十毫米 | all sizes ranging from 6mm up to and including 10mm
从二十号到二十五号的样品 | specimens of Nos. 20 to 25 inclusive
从一百零一磅到千磅以下 | from 101 pounds to under 1000 pounds
二月二十日当时的 | as of February 20
五月末 | about（或towards）the end of May
五月末日 | at the end of May（= on May 31）
七月上旬 | within the first ten days of July
七月中旬 | within the second（或middle）ten days of July
七月下旬 | within the last eleven days of July
从发信日算起（不算发信日）的五日间 | for five days inclusive（exclusive）of the day of despatch
星期日除外十五日间 | for 15 days exclusive of Sundays

所谓as from、as against、as between等表现法，是法律中常用的，这个as是限制的，有无as，对意义上并无多大的差别。美国话常以as of用为as from的意思。

141. at the beginning和in the beginning

英文at the beginning，又说in the beginning，二者在意义上有何不同？其他许多情形，at和in也都可用于某些名词之前，如at a word、in a word，at court、in court，at hand、in hand，at peace、in peace，at play、in play，at school、in school，at work、in work等，请说明二者的含义。

【解答】凡有关星期、年月、学期、季节等的开始，就说at the begin-ning（= at the start），如果是一件事情的开端，或表起初之意，便说in the beginning（= at first）。

At the beginning of the term，our teacher addressed us in an eloquent speech.（在学期开始的时候，老师以如簧之舌向我们说了很多的话。）

The entrance examination for admission to Nanyang University will take place at the beginning of April.（南洋大学的入学考试将在四月初举行。）

Adverbial phrases are emphasized by being placed at the beginning of a sentence.（副词片语置于句首是为加强意思的。）

In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth.（起初上帝创造了天地。）

You will find it rather difficult in the beginning.（开头你会觉得有一点难。）

同性质的end、middle的用法也和beginning是一样的，at the end = at last，而in the end = after all、finally。又，at the middle = between beginning and end、halfway，而in the middle = in the midst，例如：

At the end of the term we shall have another examination.（在学期尾我们还有一次考试。）

In the end he found out all the secret.（他终于把所有的秘密都发觉了。）

At the middle of July，the school breaks up.（七月半放假。）

In the middle of the night he woke up and began to shout.（他在半夜醒来大叫。）

I have often been stopped in the middle of a speech. ——Jowett（在讲演中常被阻止。）

此外at和in在用法上是不同的，由于后接的名词而发生不同的意义，如在age一字前，at指年龄，in指时代，例如at the age of seventy（七十岁）、in old age（老年时代）。再看下例：

She asked him for employment in his office，but he refused it at a word.（她要到他事务所找一份工作，但他一句话就拒绝了。）

In a word，they are tired of studying.（总而言之，他们对于读书感到厌倦了。）

The lady is said to have served at court for many years.（那个女人据说在宫廷中奉职多年。）

The matter is still pending in court.（那事情仍在法院辩论中。）

As the examination is at hand，we must study heart and soul.（考试已近，我们必须拼命用功。）

His proposal has no reference to the subject in hand.（他的提议和我们正在讨论的问题无关。）

We are now at peace with all the nations of the world.（我们现在和世界各民族和平相处。）

If you show kindness to them all，you will be able to live in peace.（你和他们大家表示亲善一点，你就可以和平安乐地过活。）

The boys and girls you want to see are at play in the park.（你要看的男女孩子们都在公园里玩。）

Please don’t take it ill，as I said it in play.（请你不要见怪，我是开玩笑的。）

Those boys are now at school.（那些学生正在上课。）

That young fellow is still in school.（那个青年仍在读书。）

He is at work in the office just now.（他现正在事务所工作。）

The majority of the workers are still in work，but some of them have been thrown out of work.（大多数的工人都仍然未失业，但有些就被开除了。）

此外at the corner（在转角处）、in the corner（在角落上）、on the corner（在建筑物外面的角上），例如：

The said church is situated at the corner of A and B streets.（所说的教堂在甲街与乙街的转角处。）

Please put it over there in the corner of the room.（请放在房间的角落上。）

The placard is posted on the corner of the department store.（那招贴贴在那百货公司的角上。）

Ⅹ 文句及表现法

142. 名词放在主句，代名词放在附句

“我哥哥在大学毕业之后，就出洋深造去了。”我译成英文为“After my brother had left college，he went abroad for higher studies.”。有人说应该将my brother和he对调才好。我不懂为什么要改。

【解答】这并不是正误的问题，原译从文法上讲，是正确无误的。但照英文的惯用法，是要把he放在前面，把my brother放在后面的。跟中国话的次序相反，由中文译成英文时，最要注意的就是这些地方。中国话很难分别合句或复句，但在英文中这就很明显，一点不含糊的。在英文的复句中，只有一个子句是主句，其余的是附句。既称主句，当然是最重要的，所以要把正式的名词安放在主句中，而把那分量较轻的代名词移到附句里去。这也许就是要这样改正的唯一的理由了。现在再举几个类似的例子，以供参考：

Busy as he is，my father never seems in a hurry.（我父亲虽则很忙，他从来没有匆促的样子。）

After his graduation Paul worked in New York.（保罗毕业以后，就在纽约工作。）

In spite of his wealth，the miser is still unsatisfied.（那守财奴很富有，而仍不满足。）

After he had written the answer to one problem，Milton raised his hand to attract the teacher’s attention.（米尔顿答好了一个问题，就举手想向老师发问。）

但是也有不要改变的，如：

When the dog saw the stranger，it began to bark.（狗一见生人，就开始吠。）

143. I am sorry、Thank you、Pardon三个口头语

听说只要会说英文的I am sorry、Thank you、Pardon三语，就可以在英美通行无阻，已够应付一切，这是真的吗？

【解答】要生活在说英语的国度里，当然应具备相当的英语知识，问题中所提出的，虽则是一个笑话，然而也未尝没有它的理由。那就是说，这三句话确是在英美社会中用得最多的了，尤其是前面两句，在美国认为是进入社会时最要紧的话语，家长们常要对他们的子侄们说：“Don’t be afraid to use these two expressions often when you can do so sincerely.（当你们能够诚心诚意地对人表示抱歉或道谢的时候，不要怕应该尽量多多地使用这两句话。）”。

这原是他们一天到晚挂在嘴上的话语。例如你做了什么冒犯人家的事，要求原恕时，只消说声I am sorry，对方也就不会再来追究了。那时所谓道歉了事，他们所要求的，也不过是你口头说的一声I am sorry而已。他们常对冒犯的人说“Say you are sorry，and I will forgive you.”。可见他们原恕的条件，不过是sorry一字。至于Thank you一语，简直是人与人之间有任何交道时所免不了的话，父母对儿女，主人对仆人，都是要说的。你到店子里买了东西，付钱交货，顾客和店家彼此都说声“Thank you.”也是有的。最特殊的用法是一位法国人所报道的。当我们赞美法国女子的美丽时，她回答说：“You’re mad.（你发疯啦。）”。如果是英国女子的话，她就回答说：“Don’t be silly.（不要傻。）”。遇到美国女子的场合，她的回答便是：“Thank you.（谢谢你。）”。求人原谅或宽恕时说的Pardon即I beg your pardon的省略，但你没有听清楚别人说的话，要别人再说一遍时，也只消说声Pardon就行了。有了这三句话，就可应付各种情况，也是不错的。

144. charade

英文的文字游戏（charade），有谜语，例如：哪个是英文中最长的字？答：Smiles。（因在两个［S］之间有一英里远。）此外不知还有些什么花样，请举例说明。

【解答】谜语还是占大多数，如：

（1）Which is the smallest room in the world？

Answer：Mushroom.（菌子。）

What kind of money do girls covet the most？

Answer：Matrimony.（婚礼。）

（2）There is a word of seven letters，take away five，a male remains，take away four，a female，take away three，you have a brave man，while the whole is a brave woman.

Answer：He，her，hero，heroine.

（3）My first means equality；My second inferiority；And my whole superiority.

Answer：Matchless.

因前半为均等match（匹敌）；后半为劣等less（较少）；全部为优越matchless（无匹）。

（4）Glasgow大学的Professor James S. Blackie有次对他的学生贴出一张公告如下：“Professor Blackie will meet his classes tomorrow.”。

意思是说，他明天要来上课，他班上的一个顽皮学生把布告上的classes一字的第一个字母擦去了，变成了lasses，意为布教授明天要和“女孩子”相会，那位教授看到了不以为忤，进而索性再擦去一个字母，而变成asses（驴子们）了。英文“驴子”的另外一个解释是“愚人”，到头来学生还是斗智斗不过老师，最后被看作愚人了。这也是英文的文字游戏的一种，另有专名叫作decapitation（砍头）。中国也有这种办法。从前有一个附庸风雅的俗人，发了财之后，新建居室，落成时在大门外挂一块匾，上面写着“文献世家”四个字，附近恶作剧的人，在夜里去把他匾上的首尾两字用纸贴去，只剩下“献世”二字，等到主人发现洗去之后，第二天夜里，又来把“文”字头上一点及最后的一个“家”字贴去，变成“又献世”。这也可算是中国“砍头式”的文字游戏吧。

145. It is . . . that-Clause后的假设语气和直陈语气

在It is . . . that的句型中，后面不用should或其他的助动词是否一样？凡是It is . . . that型的句子，后面是否都可以接should？

【解答】It is . . . that后不用should的，并不一定是省略的说法，用should是假设语气，不用是直陈语气，在现代英语中用假设语气的虽很通行，但不用的也很普通，如对于那事情认为确实，而不把自己意见加入时，都可用直陈语气。用假设语气是表示感情如惊奇和遗憾之类，正等于加重的说法，用直陈语气则是表示实事求是的普通说法，毫无个人的感情包含在内，比较：

It is strange that you have pardoned him.（你饶了他是奇怪的。）

It is strange that you should have pardoned him.（真奇怪你居然饶了他。）

Strange that I have heard nothing of it. ——Watts-Dunton（奇怪，我一点也没有听到。）

It is quite impossible that he has deceived me. ——Doyle（说他欺骗了我是不可能的。）

至于在It is . . . that的句型中，是否都可以在后面加should的字样，答案是否定的。有些这种形式的句子是不可能加用should的，例如：

It is a long lane that has no turning.

It is an ill wind that blows nobody good.

等谚语中，就没有人要把has、blows改为should have、should blow的。另外一些为加重句中的某一部分而用了It is . . . that的句子，更是不能用到should的，例如：

It is the boy that makes the man. 此系将“The boy makes the man.”一句中的the boy加重的说法。

It is you that are responsible for it. 此系将“You are responsible for it.”一句中的you加重的说法。

凡附句中没有主语的，似乎都不可以加用should呢。但如下面的例句是附句中有主语的，也不能加should：

It is seldom that he works.

原为“He seldom works.”的加强副词seldom的说法，等于把“He works here.”加强地说成“It is here that he works.”一样。再如：

It is certain that he will come.

换写为“That he will come is certain.”。两句不同的地方是在it的有无，不若“It is here that he works.”为“He works here.”的加强说法，两句不同的地方，则在it is . . . that的有无了。

同是假设语气也不限于用should一字，有时也可以用would，例如：

It is altogether natural that her face would be pale from fear，tension，and nervous apprehension.（她的面孔要因恐怖、紧张和兴奋过度的不安而变得苍白，也是极为当然的事。）

A person’s native language has a powerful influence on him . . . . His family，his friends，even complete strangers——everyone around him uses that language. Under such circumstances，it is only natural that a person would have the feeling that his language is the most beautiful，the most perfect，the most logical of all languages.（一个人的母语对他有强大的影响……他的家人，他的朋友，甚至他全不相识的人，即是他周围所有的人，都使用那种语言。在这种情形之下，一个人当然会感觉到他的语言是一切语言中最美丽，最完善，而又最合理的了。）

在上举二例中的would，虽同是假设语气，但与should的含义颇有不同。兹就第二例来看，如果用should的话，意为：“感觉到自己的母语是最美丽，最完善，又最合理的，是极为当然的事，要不那样感觉，就不算是正常的人了。”至于用would的场合，意为：“在那种情形之下，要具有那种感觉，认为他的母语是世界上最美丽，最完善，又最合理的语言，也是极为当然的。”

146. It is + that-Clause和 It is + Infinitive

It is + that-Clause的句型，常可改为It is + Infinitive的句型，不知二者在意义上有无差别？是否每个这样的句子，都可以互换？

【解答】英文的that-Clause是可以改写为Infinitive的，例如：

He works hard that he may become rich.

= He works hard in order to become rich.（他为求富有而努力工作。）

这种句子在意义上是没有什么区别的，因为that he may是表目的，而in order to也是表目的，所以不妨换用。在一些it开头的句中，也可把that-Clause换成Infinitive，因为it是可以代表二者的，不过有时候用子句就非有主语不可，意义便受了限制，说来未尽妥善，这时最好改用不定词就不受主语的限制了。例如：

It is dangerous that you put your head out of the window of the train when it is running.

这样的句子就是有欠妥善的，应改写为：

It is dangerous to put your head out of the window of the train when it is running.

因为在这种句子中，所谓危险的是“把头伸出窗外”，而不是“你把头伸出窗外”，即是危险的重点在伸头，而不在何人伸头，因伸头窗外发生危险的，并不限于“你”一人，“他”或“我”或“任何人”，都是一样危险，所以应该把人的成分撇开不提，单说“It is dangerous to put . . . ”就好了。但是如果说成：

It is dangerous if you put your head out of the window when the train is moving.

又可以了，因为if-Clause并不是接承it的，而接承it的是隐藏在if-Clause中的to put . . . 。又如果说成：

Don’t put your head out of the window of a moving train！It is dangerous.

也是可以的，因为it不是接承Don’t put . . . ，而是接承其中包含的to put . . . 。把It is dangerous一句说成It is dangerous for you也可以，意即“It is dangerous for you to put your head out of the window of a moving train.”。在这场合的you与that you put的you是不相同的，因它不是文法上的主语，而是意味上的主语，是可以与to put分开来看的。

我们再看看其他同类的例句：

It is necessary that you exert yourself.

It is necessary（for you）to exert yourself.

第一句中的you决不可指他人，而只能指“你”，因为后面的yourself把它限定了。所以如果要用来指任何人，就得说第二句。

再看“It is irresponsible（for us）to make a promise . . . ”是要不得的，因为irresponsible的，既不是接承to make a promise的it，也不是接承that we make a promise的it，而是we，所以it is irresponsible不通，应改为we are irresponsible才对。别的字如faithful、beautiful等也是一样，只能说“A dog is faithful.”或“A flower is beautiful.”，不能说It is faithful（或beautiful）to do（或that-Clause）。

147. You don’t say和Don’t tell me

美国口语中常用的You don’t say及Don’t tell me二句，照字面翻译，似乎讲不通，不知应如何译法？

【解答】这两句美国话，在电影中时常听到，含义几乎是相同的，都是听到对方的话，表示轻微的惊异而使用的。有时用动词say，有时用动词tell，在用say的场合比较简单，只说“You don’t say！”，至多加一个so字上去，而成为“You don’t say so！”就够了，但在用tell时，后面就要接用许多别的字，增加另外的意思，通常都是再接上一个that-Clause。两句中都包含得有don’t 一字，可知全是否定的，而且是相当强烈的否定，略同英文通常说的by no means、on no account、surely not之类的意思，或是整句的“You really didn’t mean it！”，中国话可译为“绝无其事”“绝不至于”“那怎么会”“我（你）（他）不会的”，等等。

You don’t say！= Well，I never！

且看电影A Song to Remember中的对话：

M. Chopin：He’s been going to secret meetings.（他近来常去参加秘密集会。）

Elsner：You don’t say.（他绝不会的。）

在电影Mrs. Miniver中的对话也有：

Vin：I’ve rather changed my whole outlook on things.（我的人生观相当地改变了。）

Clem：You don’t say.（那怎么会。）

至于Don’t tell me则是用在文句的头上，似乎可译作“绝不会是这样的吧”“不会有这样的事吧”“你骗我的吧”等等。例如：

Don’t tell me you’ve fallen in love with her.（你总不会一下子就爱上了她的吧。）

Don’t tell me you’ve given up smoking.（你哪里可以一下子就戒掉了烟的呀。）

再看下面电影中的对话：

Oh，don’t tell me it’s gone！（你绝不是说那个已经卖掉了吧。）——Mrs. Miniver

Isabelle：Don’t tell me you’ve forgotten that.（你绝不会把那个忘记了的吧。）

Elsner：No，no，no，certainly not.（不，不，不，绝不会。）——A Song to Remember

Miss Thwaites：Don’t tell me you are coming to live in No. 9？（你会搬到九号来住吗，你骗我。）

Paula：Yes.（真的。）——Gaslight

Tracy：But you weren’t at the party！（但是你昨夜并没有参加我们的舞会呀。）

Dexter：Oh，now don’t tell me you don’t remember.（你绝不要说你是忘记了呀。）——The Philadelphia Story

148. “I am So-and-so.”和“My name is So-and-so.”

说“ I am So-and-so.”和说“ My name is So-and-so.”有什么不同？

【解答】英语学者Harold E. Palmer在他的名著Conversational English And How To Learn It中，说“I am So-and-so.”的说法“sounds absurd”（“听来有点荒谬”），最好是说“My name is So-and-so.”。但在美国“I am So-and-so.”的形式，用得非常的多，“My name is So-and-so.”的形式也常用，但意思稍有不同。即，说“I am So-and-so.”的时候，似乎认定对方早已知道了自己的名字，现在只是把实际的人和那个名字配合起来罢了。至于说“My name is So-and-so.”就多少带得有一点孩子般的天真在内，好像小学生自己报告姓名一样。

现就美国人用的实例提供研究：

“I’m Sonny Carrington，”said Sonny，surprised. “You must know me.”——L. Paul：The Girl Who Wasn’t For Sale（“我就是桑尼·卡林顿”，桑尼惊异地说，“你一定知道我的。”）

“Who are you？”“Don’t you remember . . . I’m Peggy.”——The Best Years of Our Lives（Samuel Goldwin）（“你是谁呀？”“你忘记了吗？我就是佩琪。”）

“I’m Mrs. Harper Maxwell，” she said. “My husband often used to speak of you.”——A. Train：Mr. Tutt Corners A Fox（“我是哈泼·马克斯威尔太太，”她说，“从前我丈夫老是讲到你的。”）

“Better be careful！” returned the stranger threateningly. “I’m Frank Upsher. Another month and I’ll be ordering you off！”——A. Train：Colonel Tutt Of Savannah（“你当心一点，”那个陌生人以威胁的口吻回答说，“我是佛兰克·亚甫雪。再过一个月，我就会把你赶走的！”）

再看两者成为对照的用法：

“Pardon my intrusion，” said the lawyer，“but I have lost my way. My name is Tutt——Ephraim Tutt. I am trying to find my friend，Judge Culpepper.” “You mean Uncle Josh？He lives almost next door. I’m Elsie Beaufort.”——A. Train：Colonel Tutt Of Savannah（“请恕免我跑进来，”那律师说，“我是走错了路。我的名字叫达德——伊夫来孟·达德。我是来找我的朋友卡尔佩白法官的。”“你是说乔西叔吗？他差不多就是住在隔壁。我是艾尔西·波福特。”）

由上例可以看出，在初会面的两个陌生人间，对方已经用了“My name is So-and-so.”的时候，另一方就只好说“I am So-and-so.”了。

149. There + be的表现法

英文句子中的字序（word order），最普通的变则是在句首用there，以临时取代其动词后的真正主语，在这种表现法的后面，不知可接用一些什么词儿？

【解答】There + be的句式是英文最通行的用法，很少有人说“A pen is on the table.”，而大家都爱说“There is a pen on the table.”。但回答指定的事物时，“The pen is on the table.”又可以说了。

用there与不用there的两种说法，从文法上讲都是不错的，含义略有不同，即：

“What is there？”——“There is a temple.”

用there的句式时是表示“有无”的问题的。不用there时，则物的有无不在话下，而只注意到那物在什么地方，所以是以表“地点”为主的。例如说“A pen is on the table.”，意即说明not in the drawer，or in the pocket。

用于句首的there，与it同为填补词（expletive），所不同的是there代表后面的名词，而it则代表后面的不定词或子句，所以只能说：

There is no disgrace in failing once.

It is no disgrace to fail once.

而不能说“There is no disgrace to fail once.”。

（1）基本句法后接名词：

There was no wind.（无风。）

There is no pencil here.（这里没有铅笔。）

There is a garden there.（那里有一个花园。）

What is there to say？（有什么可说的吗？）

There is often a rainbow after rain.（雨后常有虹。）

There is a bus coming.（巴士来了。）

There’s no love lost between them.（他们之间毫无爱情可言。）

（2）也可以接动名词：

There is no accounting for taste.（人各有所好。）

There is no denying the fact.（事实不容否认。）

There is no knowing what may happen.（谁也不知道将要发生什么事。）

There is no trusting to appearances.（外表不足信。）

There is no doing. = It is impossible to do.（不可能做的。）

（3）也可以接不定词：

It was too late for there to be any taxis.（太晚没有计程车了。）

It’s impossible for there to be any more.（不可能再有了。）

They say there is going to be war.（听说要打仗。）

Would you like there to be a picture on the wall？（你喜欢墙壁上挂一张画吗？）

I do not want there to be any misunderstanding between us.（我不要我们之间有什么误会。）

（4）也可以接现在分词：

I never dreamt of there being a picture on the wall.（我做梦也没有想到墙壁上挂画。）

I was wrong about there being some misunderstanding between us.（说我们之中有误会是我的错觉。）

There being nothing else to do，we went home.（没有什么事了，所以我们就回家了。）

（5）也可以接过去分词：

There was born a child to them.（他们喜获麟儿。）

Here，there were found various relics of Franklin’s expedition.（这儿可以发现富兰克林探险的各种遗迹。）

（6）在这种造句中常将关系代名词省略：

There is a man at the door wants to speak to you.（门口有人要跟你说话。）

150. 作understatement用的rather

“She is rather good-looking.”一句英文，译为“她颇（有几分）漂亮”。有人说译错意思了，不知rather一字还有什么别的意思？

【解答】rather一字通常有五种意思，即“宁愿”“更为合理”“更正确”“有几分”“相反地”。但除此以外，在英国的口语当中，还可用作反语，以加强肯定的回答，有Yes、without doubt或certainly、assuredly的意思，例如：

“Do you like this？”——“Rather！”（“你喜欢这个吗？”——“不但是喜欢，简直是极其爱好呢！”）

还有英国人用此字时，常带有所谓understatement（作较轻或较弱的陈述），实际是比字面上的意思要强烈得多，所以Jespersen说“She is rather good-looking.”是对女人最高的赞词了，在会话中确是如此。Eric Partridge说，英国的上等人都很含蓄，不愿完全表露感情，所以说话及态度都不肯太露骨。写文章时没有办法，只好照字写出来，说话则每多婉曲或留些余地，因为说话的声调使文字显示更多的意义出来。现在我们来看看几个实例吧：

“Yes，she said she couldn’t stand the life. And then she married Jim-mie Welldon-Burns.”“People were rather surprised，weren’t they？”（“是呀，她说她受不了那种生活。于是她就和吉米·威尔顿彭结婚了。”“人们大为惊异。”）

上例是毛姆的短篇小说The Human Element中的句子，she是指的Betty，Duke of St. Erth的独生女Elizabeth，而Jimmie便是指的男爵Sir John Welldon-Burns的长男James。

毛姆把rather一字常用作这种意思，如果我们翻开Heinemann版毛姆的The Complete Short Stories Vol. Ⅱ时，在963、1002、1003各页上都可以发现这种用法呢。

151. Mrs. + 丈夫姓名

对既婚妇女的称呼，英文一般情形是在丈夫姓名前冠以Mrs的字样，女子出嫁即从夫姓，但名字仍可保留，如王玛丽小姐嫁了张大卫先生，她便成为Mrs. David Chang，不知在何时才可以用Mrs. Mary Chang的名号。

【解答】别人称呼既婚妇女，都是用她丈夫姓名冠以Mrs. ，但她自己常要在夫姓前写她本人的小名以代替丈夫名，例如写信时署名为Mary Chang，在写给不相识的人时，则下加（Mrs. David Chang）。在美国的既婚妇女用她本名的时候比较多，如那位生长在中国，获得诺贝尔文学奖金的美国女作家Pearl Buck，就是大家都知道的，Buck是她丈夫的姓，Pearl是她自己的名字。凡是在丈夫死后做寡妇时，就不能再用丈夫的名字，必须写成Mrs. Mary Chang。在美国没有落籍的外国人（aliens），每年要去登记一次，如张大卫夫妇同时去登记时，丈夫的记名是Mr. David Chang，太太的记名是Mrs. Mary Chang。

又，他们夫妇同时要开车，各有各的开车执照（License），太太的执照上也是写的Mrs. Mary Chang，不完全用丈夫的姓名。

美国签订某些合约（如租房子）时，常是夫妇两人都署名，这时做太太的也只好用自己的小名（如Mrs. Mary Chang）来签字了。

152. 用不定词或动名词取代子句

Everyone should have a hobby that he considers a recreation，because in this way he can really relax.（人人都应该有一个可供娱乐的嗜好，因为那样才可以得到身心上真正的轻松。）这句英文似嫌累赘，不知可否将关系代名词的子句省略？

【解答】文字最要紧的一点就是简明，拖沓总是不好的，用that-Clause等，是不得已而写，能省则省，例如下举各例，与其用（a），不如用（b）：

（a）I hope that I shall pass this time.

（b）I hope to pass this time.

（a）He is not a man who tells a lie.

（b）He is not a man to tell a lie.

（a）I am certain that I shall give you satisfaction.

（b）I am certain of giving you satisfaction.

（a）They were surprised when they heard him confess.

（b）They were surprised to hear him confess.

问题中所提出的英文句子也可简化如下：

Everyone should consider his hobby a recreation，because in this way he can really relax.

这样一来就比原来的简洁多了，而意思还是一样。

153. be supposed to的译法

He is not supposed to clean the table. 译成“他不被假定去清除桌子”似乎不像中国话，而且意义也不明白。不知这句英文应怎样翻译才好。

【解答】记得笔者从前到伦敦去游学的时候，有天被朋友约往Albert Hall听讲，事前既不知道什么人演讲，也不知道他讲的什么内容。我到达亚尔伯大会堂的时候，为时尚早，几乎听众都没有来，只有第一排上坐着有一个人，我不免要走近他去，和他闲谈几句。当我问到今晚是谁来演讲时，他回答说：

I am supposed to be the speaker tonight.

我当时马上感觉到这句英文的表现法太好了，中国话找不出这样简明委婉的说法来。如果说“I am the speaker tonight.”，就多么唐突生硬而缺乏含蓄呀。从那以后我就留意到英文的be supposed to的用法、含义和译法。我发现这时的suppose是自动词；自动词怎样可以用被动的形式呢？原来是另有含义的，例如：

（a）Spring has come.（春到人间。）

（b）Spring is come.（春满人间。）

（a）句是用的现在完成式的动词，表示春来了，那个来的动作（action）已经完成。（b）句是自动词具被动形式，表示莺飞草长，江南三月那种春满人间的状态（state）。现在说的be supposed to，也正是表示成为那一个状态的。这个表现法有下面两种含义：

（1）= be expected to，有推测，预定，应该，作为当然而期待等等意思：

He is supposed to come at eight，but as a matter of fact he never comes before nine.（他应该在八点钟到此的，但事实上他从来没有在九点以前到过。）

You are supposed to be here at eight every day.（你须每天八点钟来此上班。）

You are supposed to read this to the class. It’s from the library.（这是个图书馆的通知，请念给你班上的学生听。）

When the bell rings，we’re supposed to go！（铃子一响，我们就走。）

（2）= be obligated to，有应该那样做成的义务：

He is not supposed to clean the table.（他没有收拾吃饭桌子的义务〔因为他是客人〕。）

Everybody is supposed to know the law.（人人有明了法律的义务。）

You are not supposed to shine the shoes for me.（你没有替我擦皮鞋的义务。）

154. “Do you know who he is？”和“ Who do you think he is？”

（a）Do you know who he is？

（b）Who do you think he is？

上面这两个问句，同是问who he is，为何（a）要把who置于动词之后，而（b）又置于动词之前呢？

【解答】英文的问句可大别为两类，一类是要用Yes或No来回答的，一类是不可以用Yes或No来回答的，（a）便是前者，（b）便是后者。

（a）你知道那人是谁吗？

回答不外是：“Yes，I do.”或“No，I don’t.”。

（b）你以为那人是谁？

回答可以作：我以为是张三，或我以为是李四。

（a）句中的who he is一个子句（Clause）是Do you know的宾语（Object），但（b）就等于问“Who is he？”一样，do you think是插入句，所以回话只能说“I think he is John（或Charles等）.”。

现在让我们再来研究下列各例，对文法就会更加明白了：

Where did he find it？（那是他在哪里找到的？）

（a）Do you know where he found it？（你知道他是在哪里找到那个的吗？）

（b）Where do you think he found it？（你以为他是哪里找到那个的呀？）

Which way did he go？（他走哪条路去的？）

（a）Do you remember which way he went？（你记得他是走哪条路去的吗？）

（b）Which way do you imagine he went？（你料想他是走哪条路去的呢？）

What time will he start？（他将在何时动身？）

（a）Does the letter tell what time he will start？（信上说到他在何时动身吗？）

（b）What time does the letter say he will start？（信上说他何时动身？）

在上举（b）例的造句中，常用的动词除think外，还有imagine、suppose、believe、say等等。

155. Who do you think is the best player？

我们如将do you think的字样，插入疑问句的“What did he say？”时，便成为“What do you think he said？”。因为用了“What do you think？”的疑问句法，原来的“What did he say？”的疑问句法，为避免重复计，就改成平叙句法的he said了。这是一般的语法，为什么下文要在一句中用双重的疑问句法呢？Who do you think is the best player？为什么不说the best player is？

【解答】照原则上说，是应该把is放在the best player的后面才对，不过常因声调、文义、轻重等关系，而有变化，即不依照普通的字序，要颠倒来说的时候，也习见不鲜。

在前一则中我们已说明了在“Who is he？”一问中插入do you think，而成为“Who do you think he is？”的道理，那是因为重点移到do you think的上面去，he和is在分量上就轻了，所以变成普通平叙句的字序了。

但有时为着主语太长，或是为着要加强主语起见，便把它移到句尾去，例如问题中的：

Who do you think is the best player？（你觉得打得最好的是谁？）

以及：

What do you think is the population of Hong Kong？（你以为香港有多少人口？）

如果我们依照普通说法，把is放在the best player和the population of Hong Kong的后面时，那既不能加强player和population的说法，而且句子的声调也就差多了。

由于同样的理由，在间接说法中也仍然要保留直接说法的字序，如：

She said to me，“What is the matter with him？”

一句改成直接说法时，照规则是要把问句改成平叙句，即“What the matter with him is.”。但因主语太长，就不得不保留原来的形式，而说成：

She asked me what was the matter with him.（她问我他有何困难。）

感叹句也并不老是照平叙句一样先说主语后说动词的，有时因种种关系也可以改变字序，照问句一样把动词放在主语前去，例如：

What a poor fool was I！（我做了一件多么愚笨的事呀！）

How persuasive are his words！——Sheridan（他的话多么动听呀！）

How often have I played under these trees as a boy！——Irving（我在儿童时代老是在这些树下玩耍的！）

What a piece of work is man！——Shakespear（人是多么巧妙的作品呀！）

至于说“How bright are its waters，playing over the stones！（在石头上流动的水波，多么的光耀！）”，就是为要避免把修饰语的playing，说成动词的are playing的关系而将字序颠倒的。

156. I don’t think的句型

“我想他不会来。”译成英文为“I think he will not come.”。但据说英文的惯用语法，应说成“I don’t think he will come.”才对。不知照中文直译的句子是否错误？

【解答】通常确实是要以“I don’t think he will come.”，来代替“I think he will not come.”。这似乎不及中国话的合逻辑，不过，英文已成惯用，“I don’t think . . . ”早构成一种句型，不容推翻的了。在英美名作家的笔下，我们也常发现有把否定放在think之后的，但似乎都有其特殊的理由。例如：

（1）I wish you were here，then I think I should not feel like this. ——D. H. Lawrence

（2）I should have thought sometimes you couldn’t help thinking of the past. ——Maugham

（3）I think you ought not to walk at night alone，Mrs. Moore. ——E. M. Forster

（4）I think you need not be impolite to her，as well as to her son. ——E. M. Forster

（5）“I think the angels are not at all in heaven，” Mr. Esmond said. ——Thackeray

（6）Oh，she thinks there’s nothing like Rome. ——Henry James

（7）I think Blanche didn’t just love him but worshipped the ground he walked on！——Tennessee Williams

（8）I think I’m just not smart enough to make any sense out of it for you. ——Arthur Miller

（9）“You think she’s not much like you？”Gerald asked. ——D. H. Lawrence

（10）But I think that Elizabeth was not quite so certain of it as I. ——Aldous Huxley

（11）I should think you never have seen many . . . ——D. H. Lawrence

（12）I thought you wouldn’t stand that . . . ——Galsworthy

（13）I thought we mightn’t get here. ——Greene

（14）I thought you didn’t want to hear，my dear. ——Dickens

（15）I thought that my Lord Castlewood had no brother. ——Thackeray

（16）I thought it explained nothing. ——Maugham

上举例句（1）中的I think是插入句，可看作与其他部分无关。（2）~（5）由于cannot help -ing、ought not、need not、not at all等成语的集团（colony）力量，而把I think隔离了。（6）成语there’s nothing like Rome（与home同音的关系而套用的），故不便拆散。（7）~（10）因not just . . . but、 just not . . . enough、not much、not quite等以not为核心的副词片语的影响，也不便把否定拿到think的前面去。可见到此为止的（1）至（10）各例句，都是不能换成I don’t think那种形式的，即能换写也写不出漂亮的句子来。

问题是（11）~（16）各句，这些句子原是可以换写成I don’t think形式的，不过或因句中（a）含有no、never、nothing、nobody等的不定字，或因（b）用了过去动词的thought，所以都不合乎I don’t think的pattern。

157. had better、would better，had rather、would rather

英文中有had better、would better，had rather、would rather的说法，不知有何不同，请细为辨别详加解释。

【解答】had better、had rather，意为“最好……”，或“还是……的好”，用于劝解或间接命令，而had rather、would rather则用以表示偏爱、嗜好。例如：

You had better go home at once.（你最好马上回家去。）

I would rather eat than dance.（我宁吃不舞。）

这都是英文的惯用语，后面接用无to的不定词。

Krapp认为would better是不正确的（incorrect），因为把You had better省略为You’d better时，世人不察，以为You’d是You would之略，故产生would better的说法。其实任何一国的语言中，都有以讹传讹的惯用字句，只要用惯了，不通的也通了。美国人更干脆，索性说成You better，不管它had也好，would也好，一笔勾销，痛快是痛快，只可惜对于文法更讲不通了。

至于had rather和would rather，到底哪一个形式是正确的，就更难说了，通例都是说I’d rather，正好像人们不知道应该是说I shall或I will的时候就说I’ll一样，根本说的省字，被看作had既可以，被看作would也可以，所以McMordie认为孰是孰非，莫衷一是。Krapp则认为常用had rather取代would rather，也是主张had为正的。Abbott和Bain等人，确认had better、had rather是几百年来许多大作家都用了的惯用句。有人比Krapp更激烈，认为“I would better go.”是绝对不合文法的（positively ungrammatical）。因为had better = would find it wiser（或better）to，所以“You had better go home.”就被说成“You would（find it）better（to）go home.”了，是由假定说法而使得had变成would的。大家都说had better的形成比would better要更受欢迎（preferable），对于第一人称尤其不喜欢（undesirable）用would better。现举几个例子来看：

You had better go.（= You would do better to go.）

You had better go back——the risk is great. ——Thomas Hardy

The boys had better cease shouting. ——McMordie

When he proposed to fly across the Atlantic，I said “You had better not try！”——Kirkpatrick

You had better not take away any wine，because it would disagree with you. ——Kruger

这个had better有时可以说成had best，不过没有前者的普通（far less common）。例如：

I’d best go and settle the score. ——Thackerary

I had best start for home.

又had better还有一种过去形，不过不大用。例如：“You had better do it.”的过去形，即“You had better have done it.”；而“It had better be done.”的过去形，即是“It had better have been done.”。在Crowell的Dictionary of English Grammar中举有“You had better stayed here（= You would have done better to stay here）.”一例，其实那是应该视为“It would have been better（for you），if you had stayed here.”——一个条件句的省略说法。英国诗人Tennyson的诗句，“Hadst thou been braver，I had better braved all.”中的“I had better have braved all.”也属于这一类。据Modern English Usage的著者Fowler说，这种过去形当中的have（即had better have done及had better have been done）是不可以省略的，可是英美人却常要犯这种错误。为什么不能省呢？例如would have taken被省为would taken一样，其理自明，毋庸多说。

再看下例更可证明would rather或had better后接的过去动词是另一个条件句的省略的说法：

Unfortunately，many a foreigner gets the distinct impression that the U. S. would rather he stayed home.（不幸的是许多外国人都得到一个明确的印象：美国并不怎样欢迎他们去观光。）

这是1960年12月19日美国出版的Time上的句子，句中用了would rather he stayed home的字样，即是一反平常在would rather后接原形动词，如“I would rather stay home.”的说法，其实这只是条件句的省略，这个stayed即等于说if he stayed home。他例如：

I would rather I went.（我宁愿去。）

这种假设语气也可以用在现在动词的后面，如：

It’s time I went.（我要走了。）

在had better或had best的后面，现代英文规定要接没有to的不定词，但在Older English中这个不定词的to还保存着，例如Richardson就写过这样的句子：

——He knew not whether he had best to run or to stand his ground.

但现代英文是不可以把不定词的to保留的。

158. 美国语中the way的用法

美国话中常见有the way的用法，例如：“It was pitiful the way he kept complaining to his wife.”。不知应如何译法？

【解答】way的意义由“道路”引申而为“方法”，如：

The way she spoke hurt me.（她说话的方式伤害了我。）

the way I know（用我所知道的方法）

在the way之前省略了一个in字。在美国口语里说的the way多少受了一些爱尔兰语的影响，所以跟英文原来的用法又有些不同了。美国话用the way来引导出一个副词子句时，便有as（有如）或according as（依照）的意思，例如：

I don’t see how he can act the way he does.（我不懂得他怎样能够那样做的。）（the way = as）

It was fated I should meet you the way I did this evening. ——A. Christie：Poirot Investigates（像今晚这样我和你的相遇，都是命中注定的呀。）（the way = as）

I been thinking about them for years，the way a kid thinks of vacation. ——Long Valley（我对于那些东西，像小孩子想望假期一样想望了好多年了。）（the way = as）

此外the way还可以作how（怎样）、how much（多么）、since（因为）等等意思来用，例如：

The way you pronounced her name. And the way you looked. ——Love Letters（你怎样叫她的名字的，以及你那一副眼色。）（the way = how）

问题中的句子亦复如此：

It was pitiful the way he kept complaining to his wife.（可怜他不断地向他太太抱怨。）（the way = how）

And the way she walks. The way she fancies herself. ——H. E. Bates：The Enchantress（以及她走路的样子。她自命不凡的样子。）（the way = how）

No one . . . can understand the way I miss Dave.——F. Baldwin：A Time to Mourn（谁也不知道我是多么想念黛佛的呀。）（the way = how much）

No wonder that girl despises me，the way you encourage her. ——Gaslight（难怪那位女郎瞧不起我，原来是你在那里鼓动她。）（the way = since）

The way I look at it，it’s not what you do that matters so much. ——E. Rice：The Street Scene（依照我所看见的，你所做的并不是非常重要的事。）（the way = according as）

But the way I figured it out. ——You see，I’m not interested in these dinky reforms. ——Sinclair Lewis：Main Street（但是依照我的想法——你知道，我对于这些不重要的改革是不感兴趣的。）（the way = according as）

The way Mr. Thompson ate，I don’t think he would have had a square meal in months. ——Reader’s Digest（依照汤生那种狼吞虎咽的样子看起来，我想他一定有好几个月没有吃饱过了。）（the way = according as）

再如：

It’s a sin the way he keeps on doing it. ——E. Caldwell：Big Buck（他不停地这样搞真是罪过。）（用the way引导出一个以it作为形式主语的真正主语的名词子句。）

The way girls fell for anyone with the gift of the gab——that was what embittered Constable Plimmer. ——P. G. Wodehouse：The Romance of an Ugly Policeman（女孩子总喜欢那些嘴巴甜的男人，这是使得卜利麦警官最感头痛的事。）（用the way引导出一个同格的子句。）

159. 同一意义的26种表现法

同样一个意思，有种种不同的说法，有的说得客气，有的说得鲁莽，有用平叙句，有用命令句，甚至有用疑问句，但不知英文有多少不同的句法，可用来表示同一个意思的？

【解答】因表达的方式不同，通常总有十几种不同的说法可用来表示同一个意思的。例如M. M. Bryant在他著的《英语的心理》（Psychology of English）一书中，就把“把门关上”一个意思用二十一种不同的方式表达出来，即：

Close the door.

Please close the door.

Do close the door.

Would you mind closing the door？

Will（或Would）you please close the door？

Could you close the door，please？

Would（n’t）you like to close the door for me？

Won’t you close the door？

Do you want to close the door？

Would you care to close the door？

Might I ask you to close the door？

Let me beg of you to close the door.

I should（或would）be glad if you would close the door.

May I trouble you to close the door？

Please do me the favor of closing the door.

Let me request you to close the door.

Close the door，if you please.

I would（或should）like you to close the door.

May I suggest you closing the door？

Would it be too much to ask you to close the door？

Would you be good（或kind）enough to close the door？

在Bryant这二十一种说法之外，我们至少还可以加上下列几种句式：

Would you be so good as to close the door？

I wish you’d close the door.

If you only close the door.

How happy I should be if you would close the door！

What a favor it would be if you’d close the door！

这样一来，就有二十六种不同的说法了。

160. 海明威说的“They were as old as erosions in a fishless desert.”句中erosion一字的译法

在Hemingway的名作《老人与海》中有句云：“But none of these scars were fresh. They were as old as erosions in a fishless desert.”。有人译作：“这些伤痕没有一个是新的。他们都老得像无鱼的沙漠里的腐蚀地带一样。”我们只知沙漠里有“绿洲”，未闻有“腐蚀地带”，海明威用此比喻，究系何意？请详为解说。

【解答】海明威（Hemingway）的文章以简练著称，前人一句可长到一百五十字，而海明威每句平均只有十二字。经此千锤百炼而造成的句子，一定是用字极少，而含义颇多的。我们单就字面来翻译，多难达意，若不能把作者所用的字的涵义，完全了然于怀的话，翻出来自己也不懂，要避免错误就更难了。例如问题中的句子所用的erosion一字，确是费解的。此字我们查字典（《综合英汉大辞典》），得到四种意义，即：（1）浸蚀，腐蚀；（2）〔医〕溃疡；（3）〔地质〕浸蚀作用，水流之冲毀；（4）浸蚀区域，腐蚀部分。上面所说的那位译者，采用了第四义，似乎是合理的，因为其他三义都不合用。这样译出，虽则字句较为通顺，然而仍然是不正确的。我们还是应该采用第三义，才能符合原意，即是erosion，不是“腐蚀地带”，而是“浸蚀作用”。这个erosion必须与下面的fishless发生联想，用法实带有措词上的nuance，沙漠与鱼全无关系，与鱼有关的是水，现在必须使沙漠与水发生关系，则唯有经过浸蚀作用，才能使高山变成溪谷，或是使海洋变成沙漠。在今日的内陆或高山上，我们常能发现贝壳之类，就可证明那些地方在太古时代原是海洋呢。沙漠在今日干枯得没有一滴水，自然更没有鱼的存在，可是在亿万年前，它却是一个浸在水里，鱼类丰富的泽国。由有鱼的泽国，变成无鱼的沙漠，其间所经过的年代，古老得无法算计，只好用erosion一字来代表。作者以此为喻，无非是要来加强说明“古老”罢了。我们懂得了作者的用意之后，才好进行思考翻译的方法。我认为这是不宜直译的，只能意译。如果采用中国的“沧海桑田”一个成语的话，就可译作：

这些伤痕没有一个是新的。它们都古老得好像那还未变成桑田的沧海一样。

161. tag question的表现法

It’s a nice day，isn’t it？这句英文据说不能翻译成为问句；它的构造据说是主句为肯定，附加问句就要用否定，如主句是否定，则附加问句就要用肯定，不知道对不对？

【解答】英文的这种附加问句（tag question），确实不算是一个正式的问句，翻译时自应采用平叙句的形式，如问题中的句子，内容有关天气的好坏，这是有目共睹的摆在每个人眼前的事实，谁也用不着去问谁的，所以不可译作：“今天天气好，是不是？”（这样译时，就仿佛是说“你是人，是不是？”一样地冒犯对方了。）而应译成“今天天气好呀”才是道理。

第二点疑问是“肯定+否定”或“否定+肯定”的构造形式，在一般的情形，这也可以说是相当正确的。例如：

I don’t have to go to Sunday School，do I？（我不必去主日学校呀。）

You feel cold here，don’t you？（你觉得冷吧。）

He didn’t take long to do that，did he？（他没有多久就把那个做完了。）

That is not important，is it？（那个不重要。）

You have seen him，haven’t you？（你见过他的。）

不过这不是唯一的形式，如表示加重语气的时候，就可以采用“肯定+肯定”或“否定+否定”的方式，例如：

Oh，you do，do you？（啊，你是这样的吧。）

Oh，Shirley said something，did she？（啊，雪妹子跟你说了什么吧。）

“So I’ve found you at last，my beauty，have I？” she began. ——Dickens（“我的美人儿，我终于找到了你呀！”她开口说了。）

“And he wouldn’t be persuaded by the ladies，wouldn’t he？”said Sam. ——Dickens（桑姆说：“他不会听太太们的话的。”）

这种前后一致的构造所表现的，除加重语气外，还有惊奇的意思，例如：“He is Tom，is he？（真想不到他就是汤姆呀。）”。这种附加问句的表现法，在英美人的口头上用得最多，而且现在越来越盛行了。到第二次世界大战以后，又产生了第三种形式，即：

He is Tom；or is he？（他是汤姆吧，不错的吧。）

说这话的人，在他开口之前，实则早已确信他所说的正确无误，可是为着要证实一下，或是由于突然发生的疑惑，所以在停顿一会儿之后，又用上一个or的连词，再说出那附加问句来，其间所表现的心理过程，从字面上也不难察觉得出来了。例如：

She is pretty，or is she？（她漂亮，岂止漂亮而已哉。）

这种强烈的断定，也可用“肯定+ or +肯定”来表现，是值得注意的。战后的这种新句型，还可以单独地用，即是在主句之后不用逗号（comma）或分号（semicolon），而用句号（period），变成单独一句来说，也是可以的，在B. Malamud著的The Magic Barrel一书中便有下面这样的例句：

He ate listlessly. A man had to live. Or did he？When had he felt this low？Probably never.（他没精打采地吃了饭。一个人总是要活下去的。谁也不肯饿死呀。他何时变得这样颓丧的？也许从来没有过。）

在上例中前头的主句是“A man had to live.”，附加问句似应作“Or had he？”才能一致，但作者却把它说成“Or did he？”。这并不是语言上的转讹，现在一般用这种附加问句的人，都不大注意主句中的述语，而有一概采用do、did的倾向了。再举N. C. Hunter在其所著Waters of the Moon一书中的用例来看：

Evelyn：Did you think I was rude，Mrs. Whyte？I didn’t mean to be. Or did I，perhaps？I don’t know.（伊佛林说：怀德太太，你觉得我太鲁莽吧？我并不是有意的。也许我确曾那样，我自己却不知道。）

现在甚至还有把最普通的第一型和战后出现的第三型混合来用，而说成“He is Tom，isn’t he，or is he？”的例子也见到了。也许这是现代英语的最新发展吧。

162. do with的三种意义及understatement

I could do with more leisure time. 译作：“我能消磨更多闲暇的时间。”不知对不对？请就前半句的习惯用法，详为解说。

【解答】英文的do with一个片语，有三种意义：

（1）处理（deal with，manage）：

I don’t know what to do with my leisure.（闲得无聊）。

（2）忍受（get on with，endure）：

I can’t do with his indolence.（他太懒惰，我受不了。）

（3）满意（be satisfied with）：

Can you do with cold meat for dinner？（晚饭吃冻肉你可以吗？）

问题中的句子可采用第三义，全句应译“要再多有一点闲暇就好了”。句中的could是表示假设语气的。下面的对话，也是这种用法：

“Lovely day.”（“天气真好呀。”）

“〔We〕Can do with plenty of these days from now on.”（“今后要继续有这样的天气就好呀。”）

这句话就等于说“We would like to have plenty of these days from now on.”一样。但不明说We would like to have，而要说We can do with，是英国人说话的一种态度，即所谓understatement（轻微的说法，不尽说出）。轻微说法是夸大说法的反面，如：“They exaggerate the enemy’s losses and understate their own.（他们夸大敌人的损失，而把自己的损失说得很轻微。）”。

Jespersen在他著的Growth and Structure of the English Language一书中说，英语是一种男性的语言，就举出这种understatement的倾向作为例证之一。照他说“That isn’t half bad.”及“She is rather good-looking.”算是英语中最高的赞美的话了。欧洲大陆的人，如法国人，所说的“极度”“无限地”，英国人只用very、rather、pretty等字来表达。

英文惯用句中的quite a few book，实际是说a large number of books，也算是一种understatement。匈牙利人George Mikes是一位幽默家，平日说的话多为夸大之词，但是提到英国人说话不肯说到十分，而只是出之轻描淡写的一点是千真万确的。他说别国人听到有人说了假话，一定当面斥责“You lie.”，可是英国人则只说“Oh，is that so？”，或是“That’s rather an unusual story.”。说一个女人怀孕，英文常不直说“She is with child.”或“She has become pregnant.”，而要说“She is in the family way.”或“She is in a delicate condition.”，便是understatement。他例如：

It wouldn’t hurt the lawn if you watered it more often.

照字面可译作：“你要常浇点水，对草地是没有害处的。”其实并不是说有害与否，而只是劝人多浇水而已，略等于说“You might as well water the lawn more often.”。

在谈话的场合，有音调、表情及手势的帮助，比较对英文的这种unders-tatement不大会发生误解，如果是读书的时候，我们要特别当心，否则是很容易要把意思弄错的。

163. 主语和动词在数上的不一致

曾见有“Every pains has been taken.（费尽苦心。）”的说法，为什么一个复数主语，要接单数动词？主语的数和动词的数，在何种情形之下，才可以是不一致的？

【解答】名词的pain一字，单数作“疼痛”“苦痛”解，复数作“辛苦”“苦心”解。因为意义不同，所以从前的人就把它当作两个不同的字看待，于是在pains的前面，就加上单数意义的修饰语（如every、this等），后面接用单数形的动词，除问题中举出的句子外，还可以说：

All this pains was for nothing.（这一切劳力都白费了。）

不过现代英文早已把这句话改说成：

All these pains were for nothing.

再举一个也是当作复数来处理的例句如下：

No pains were spared to ensure success.（为确保成功而不辞劳苦。）

英文的规则是主语名词的数要和它的动词的数一致，不过有许多例外，因为有些名词表面上看去是单数，实际却是复数，如cattle即是（因是集合名词），要说“Cattle feed on grass.（牛吃草。）”。有些名词表面上看去是复数，实际却是单数，如news即是，要说“No news is good news.（没有消息就是好的消息。）”。还有许多复数形的名词，都是当作单数用的，如：

I want him to make a full amends for my loss.（我要他充分赔偿我的损失。）

Every means has been tried.（各种手段都试过了。）

Her whereabouts was discovered.（她的行踪已被发现。）

Measles is decidedly infectious.（麻疹确实是传染的。）

Mathematics is not his strong point.（数学不是他的所长。）

The wages of sin is death.（罪的代价就是死。）

Tomorrow is the sessions.（明天开庭。）

One summer holidays was spent with his mother.（有一个暑假是跟他母亲一块儿过的。）

There is a fine botanic gardens in Singapore.（新加坡有一个很好的植物园。）

有时把复数作为一个整体，而不作为个体看待时，也要接单数动词，如：

A hundred miles is a good distance.（一百英里是一个相当远的距离。）

句中的miles虽是复数形，其意义则为the distance of a hundred miles，即百里之遥，并未含有复数的观念在内，接用单数动词，毋宁更为适合。同样地：

Thirty minutes is sufficient for a good sermon.（一个好的说教有半个钟头也足够了。）

Five dollars is the limit.（五块钱顶多了。）

It is six months since he died.（他死去半年了。）

A thousand kisses buys my heart from me.（一千个吻就把我的心收买去了。）

Two is company，three is none.（两个和尚抬水吃，三个和尚没水吃。）

凡用and连起来的两个名词而构成一个东西时，也要接用单动数词，例如：

Curry and rice is his favourite dish.（他喜欢吃咖喱饭。）

A cart and horse was seen at a distance.（远远地看见一部马车来了。）

All work and no play makes Jack a dull boy.（专门读书不玩一下，变成书呆子。）

Bread and butter is my usual breakfast.（我通常早餐吃的是涂有牛油的面包。）

Our secretary and treasurer is coming.（我们的秘书兼会计来了。）

A pink and white tulip is in blossom.（一朵红白相间的郁金香开了。）

A needle and thread was given her，but she could not sew the button on.（给了她一根穿好线的针，但她仍不能把扣子缝上去。）

Every man and every child was filled with joy.（大人小孩皆大欢喜。）

Each boy and girl was invited.（每个男孩和女孩都被邀请了。）

164. DRINKA PINTA MILKA

在英国到处见有广告文字：DRINKA PINTA MILKA DAY。这不知是说的什么纪念日？请详为解说。

【解答】这是由发音而影响到文字拼写的一则广告，最后的Day，和普通常见的May Day、Arbor Day、Poppy Day等等节日不同，并非是什么纪念日。全文用普通英文来写出时，便是“Drink one pint of milk a day.”，是劝人每天喝一瓶牛奶的广告。

现就这种照发音写出的文字，逐字解说一下。量液体的单位为：1 gallon（加仑）= 4 quarts（夸脱）；1 quart = 2 pints（品脱）；1 pint = 4 gills（及耳）。中国翻译的“品脱”实际是译错了音的，应译作“派恩特”才对，这是余话。英文说一个pint的容量，应说one pint，正如我们买一磅的重量，就说one pound一样，不说a pint或a pound，因为是指单位的缘故。但此地的drinka，分明是drink a二字拼成的，为什么会由one变成a的呢？一则是因为英国普通牛乳瓶的大小，都是装一品脱的，而pint的第二个含义是“一品脱的容器”，正是这种牛乳瓶，所以应说a pint，正好像说a cup、a bottle一样。第二为着要配合后面的pinta milka的发音型，也得把one pint改说成a pint，这便是drinka一字的来历。

再看pinta一字。把pint of照发音记下来，而写成pinta是很普通的，因为of的子音〔v〕是不大听得见的，所以只剩下一个母音的〔ə〕了。至于第三字的milka，是为求与上面二字一致，而把milk a拼成一字了。

由于这个广告的流行，pinta一个新型的字，竟成为牛奶的代名词了。例如在报上说牛乳涨价时，便说pinta has gone up，分明是牛奶的广告，可是在广告中竟看不见milk的字样了。

到了冬天我们所看到的宣传喝牛奶的广告是：

A Winta puts roses in your cheeks.（在冬季每天喝一瓶牛奶，使你红光满面。）

简单的就是Drinta Winta Pinta的三字经。广告图案中绘有满杯的牛奶，引人注目而已。到圣诞节，更是商界最好的宣传季节，所以卖生牛奶的人也决不肯轻易放过，于是又见到这样的广告文：

Extra Pintas——Warma Winta.（多喝几瓶牛奶，使你冬天更为温暖。）

所谓warma winta当然是warmer winter的录音，而pinta居然可以加上复数了。在圣诞节的假期中，人们喝得醉醺醺的去驾驶汽车，在英国也和在美国一样，要造成许多的车祸。牛奶公司的广告也利用了这些机会，说：

Drive safely on milk.（喝牛奶开车是安全的。）

对于假日气氛，他们也说：

Drinka pinta——have fun！（喝了牛奶，驾车真开心！）

伦敦的冬天实在阴沉得难受，人们心中都期待春天早日到来，于是牛奶公司也登出迎春的广告：

Welcome pinta.

在这文字下面是绘着一满杯的牛奶，和黄色的水仙花，象征着春天的到临，使人见了发生安心的快感。

Ⅺ 单字研究及辨异

165. awake、awaken、wake、waken

英文中当“觉醒”解的字有awake、awaken、wake、waken四个之多，在用法上不知有些怎样的分别？

【解答】这四个字确很混乱，先看看它们的形式上的变化：（1）awake的过去为awoke（偶也有用awaked），过去分词为awaked（偶也有用awoke）；（2）awaken的过去及过去分词都是awakened；（3）wake的过去为woke（偶也有用waked），过去分词为waked（偶也有用woke或woken）；（4）waken的过去及过去分词都是wakened。

这四个字都可以作自动词或他动词用。但（1）与（3）的awake及wake多用于自动，wake后常加up用；而（2）与（4）的awaken及waken多用于他动。

在用法上awake比wake up要来得formal，例如说“I awoke about mi-dnight.（我半夜醒来了。）”，比说“I woke up about midnight.”要正式些。

而awake及awaken则通常用于比喻（figurative）的意思，如“The nati-onal spirit awoke（or was awakened）.（国魂觉醒了。）”。但awaken及waken二字，因容易和过去分词混淆，所以人们爱拿它用于passive voice（被动态），即通常多说“I was wakened by it.（我被惊醒。）”，而少说“I was waked（或woke、woken）by it.”。其实waken为awaken的变形，用法与awaken相似。

兹再分别例解如下：

Awake：

I awoke one morning and found myself famous. ——Lord Byron（我一朝醒来，发觉我已成名了。）

They awoke to their dangers.（他们觉察到有危险。）

I awoke a little after four o’clock. ——Gissing（我在四时过后一点就醒了。）

He awoke from an illusion.（他从幻想中醒来了。）

此字如作形容词用时，则为asleep的反义词，如：

I was wide awake all night.（彻夜清醒未能入睡。）

He is always awake to his own interest.（他对自己的利益是始终注意的。）

He was fully awake to the dangers.（他充分觉察到危险。）

Awaken：

He was awakened to a sense of his position.（他注意到了他本身地位的重要性。）

He had awakened that morning from a sleep as deep as annihilation. ——Hardy（他那天早晨从死了一般的熟睡中醒来。）

Let’s awaken him to the importance of the affair.（让我们把这事情的重要告诉他，以免怠忽。）

Wake：

It is time for you to wake up and attend to your business.（现在你要起来去上班啦。）

At last one morning when they woke up they saw a ship at anchor in the bay. ——Swift（终于有天早晨他们起来时看到了一条船停泊在海湾里。）

All nature seemed suddenly to wake.（整个的大自然好像突然醒来了。）

Please wake me（up）at six.（请在明晨六时叫我起来。）

I was waked by the sound.（我被那声音惊醒。）

He was too dull to be waked by these words.（他太笨了，这些话也听不懂。）

Waken：

I was wakened by a bustle. ——Stevenson（我被那声音吵醒了。）

He who sleeps in continual noise is wakened by silence. ——W. D. Ho-wells（在不断吵闹中睡去的人会因突然的静寂而惊醒。）

I wakened（up）early.（我很早就醒来了。）

Please waken me at six.（请在明晨六时叫我起来。）

“Wake up，honey！Here we are！” He moved，but didn’t waken.（“醒来呀，亲爱的！我们到了！”他动了一下，但是并没有醒。）

166. simulate和dissimulate

英文的simulate和dissimulate二字，都作“假装”解，如说“He simulates fear.”，意思是“他假装害怕”。而梁实秋编的《最新实用英汉辞典》586页上有to dissimulate fear一语，也译作“假装害怕”，这样两字岂不是毫无分别了吗？

【解答】所询二字意义大不相同，simulate = make pretence of = feign，所以说simulate madness就是“装疯”。Pride may simulate humility.（骄傲常伪装为谦逊。）至于dissimulate = dissemble = conceal，意为“隐藏”“掩饰”，例如：

She dissimulated her anger with a smile.（她以笑来掩饰她的愤怒。）

这个dissimulate不如dissemble来得通俗，但与simulate对比的场合，习惯上都用dissimulate，后者加上了反义前缀的dis-，不是毫无意义的。

现比较下面两句的含义：

He simulates fear.（他实在不怕而假装得怕。）

He dissimulates fear.（他实在是怕而假装得不怕。）

可知dissimulate一字，意在隐匿真相，假装别的样子来掩饰，不是单纯无作用的假装而已。

167. habit和custom

Low prices draw custom. 译作“廉价买卖成为风习”。不知可否？又个人习惯说habit，社会的习惯说custom。是否有此分别？

【解答】要分辨两者是可以这样说的，不过habit和custom二字常是互相混用的，如“习惯为第二天性”一句谚语，就有两种说法：“Habit（或Custom）is a second nature.”。又如：

It is his habit to mock at religion.（嘲笑宗教是他的习性。）

I am in the habit of rising early.（我有早起的习惯。）

He has a bad habit of arguing with other persons about trifles.（他有好与人辩论琐事的恶习。）

It was his custom to rise early.（早起是他的习惯。）

It is the custom for Englishmen to raise their hats to ladies.（英国人有对妇女脱帽为礼的习惯。）

It is the custom with（或of）foreigners to change gifts at Christmas.（外国人有在圣诞节交换礼物的习尚。）

I made it a custom to get up at six.（我惯常六时起床。）（= I made a custom of getting up at six.）

由以上诸例看来，个人的习惯或社会的风习是都可以用custom的，不过habit则是专用于个人的。通常商店里的顾客说customer，是从名词custom（作“主顾”或“惠顾”解）加人称接尾语而变来的，问题中的“Low prices draw custom.”，应译作“廉价招揽生意”才对。他如：

That shop has plenty of custom.（那店生意很好。）

I withdraw my custom from that shop.（我不再去那店家购买东西了。）

商人的习惯（the custom of merchants）即是商人的法律（law merchant），也就变成商法（commercial law）了。

这个名词又可作“关税”或“海关”解，但多用复数，例如：

It took us an hour to get our luggage through the customs.（我们的行李花了一个钟头才通过海关的检查。）

此字作形容词用时，意为“定制的”，如custom shoes（定做的皮鞋）、a custom suit（一套定做的衣服）。

168. “This is mere apology for soup.”句中的 apology

This is mere apology for soup. 译成：“这只是为羹汤道歉。”似乎不通，不知应怎样翻译才对？

【解答】英文apology一字，通常作“道歉”或“谢罪”解，但它另外还有两个意义：一为“辩解”，一为“代替物”。例如：

I made an apology to the host for my lateness.（我因迟到特向主人道歉。）

This is an apology for the Christian religion.（这是为基督教辩解的。）

而问题中的例句正是此字的第三种意义：

This is a mere apology for soup.（这个实在不成其为羹汤。）

意即有名无实。英国人吃茶考究，有时在茶馆里吃的茶太不够味，他们就要骂，说那个哪里是茶，简直是猪食（hog-wash）。美国的总统Abraham Lincoln，讨的太太不贤慧，有泼妇之名，弄给他吃的茶简直吃不得，于是林肯说：

If this is coffee，please bring me some tea；but if this is tea，please bring me some coffee.（如果这是咖啡，就请拿杯茶来给我；如果这是茶，就请拿杯咖啡给我。）

可知他太太拿给他吃的，只是a mere apology for tea（or coffee），实在不成其为茶或咖啡呢。再如：

He devises apologies for window curtains.（他设法用他物代替窗帷。）

It is a sad apology for hat.（这是一个勉强的帽子代用品。）

169. business、calling、employment、occupation、profession、trade等作“职业”解的字

作“职业”解的英文有business、calling、employment、occupation、profession、trade等，不知用法上有何分别？

【解答】Business是由“终日忙着在做”的事，变成职务，再由职务变成职业，通常指以营利为目的的职业，例如：

What is your business？（你的职业是什么？）

There is a man who makes a business of it.（有人以此为专业。）

Calling原义为“天职”，同vocation一样颇为崇高的字，唯来源不同，calling是条顿字，而vocation是由拉丁文来的。此字原有上帝所命的职业那种意思，但后来也用作赖此为生的普通的职业了。例：

A man of letters follows the noblest calling which any man can pursue. ——W. M. Thackeray（文人从事于人皆可为的最高尚的职业。）

Employment是由“雇佣”而转变成的“职业”，常有雇佣的关系存在，此字比occupation显得要短暂些（more temporary business），例如：

The fisheries are important，giving employment to 5000 persons. ——Statesman’s（渔业是很重要的，可以使五千人获得职业。）

Occupation是指一般人日常所从事的事业，不问种类如何，一时的或经常的（temporary or regular employment）皆可。例如：

She is a typist by occupation.（她是打字员。）

Teaching is an unprofitable occupation.（教书是无利可图的职业。）

He has no fixed occupation.（他没有固定的职业。）

Profession意为有专门知识的需要，应用智力的职业（intellectual pur-suits），原来只限于神学、法律、医学有关的职业，才可称为profession，但后来科学发达，属于专门知识的范围增广，此字也就用得更广了，如律师、医师、教师、僧侣、作家、工程师、军人、伶人等皆可以用。

Nagao was the son of a physician，and was educated for his father’s pro-fession. ——L. Hearn（永雄是一位医师的儿子，也学了继承父亲的职业。）

Trade是指工商方面的手艺（manual training and skill）上的职业，以营利为目的的，如bookseller’s trade（书业），一般指木工、石工、泥水匠、铁匠、烤面包的商人、订书匠、屠夫等等。

They fished as if they had been brought up to the trade. ——J. A. Frou-de（他们钓鱼的本领颇佳，俨然是他们从小学会的本行一样。）

此外可作“职业”解的，还有pursuit、craft、avocation等字，一并说明如下：Pursuit此字常用复数形，意为专心从事或一心去研究的学业，如literary pursuits或commercial pursuits、daily pursuits等。

Fishing and hunting were their universal pursuits.（渔猎是他们一般的职业。）

He devoted himself entirely to literary pursuits.（他全力从事文学生涯。）

Craft是指需要有极其熟练的手艺之职业：

The workshop is the only real school for a handicraft. ——T. H. Huxley（一种需要手工技术的行业只有在实际工作的工场里才可学到。）

Avocation原是指的“副业”“嗜好”说的，不过通俗常把此字用作“本职”“职业”。

Mr. Brown is a lawyer，but writing stories is his avocation.（布朗先生是一个律师，但写故事是他的副业。）

170. in the dark和 in the darkness

“猫在黑暗里也能看见”一语，译作“The cat can see in the dark-ness.”固可，但改为“The cat can see in the dark.”更好。不知为什么可用形容词的dark代替名词的darkness？

【解答】英文的形容词有好几种情形是可以作名词用的，问题中的dark便是名词，不是形容词。至于为什么宜用dark的名词，代替darkness的名词，在解答这个问题之前，须先把dark和darkness两个名词的含义弄个明白。两字皆有“黑暗”“秘密”“无知”“暗色”等义，唯dark一字独具“夜（night）”及“日暮（nightfall）”的意思，所以上句要改成in the dark（= at night），正是为此。猫在夜里极微弱的光中把瞳孔放大，便能见物，如果到了完全的黑暗中，它也是什么都看不见的。在下列各句中的dark全是作“日暮”解，不可以改为darkness：

They will come home before dark.（他们将于日暮前回家。）

I don’t go out after dark.（夜间我不出门。）

Turn the light on at dark.（天黑时开灯。）

问题例句中的in the dark，是一个成语，有“在黑暗中”“一无所知”的意思，例如：

Nobody teaches me and I have to grope about in the dark.（无人教我，只得暗中摸索。）

The blind are destined to live forever in the dark.（盲人命定要在黑暗中过一辈子。）

The young man is in the dark regarding his father’s plans for educating him.（那青年全然不知他父亲打算怎样来教育他。）

Keep him in the dark about the matter.（那事不要让他知道。）

强调黑暗的意思时则多用darkness，例如：

We walked together in the darkness.（我们同在黑暗中走路。）

The stars shine brilliantly in the darkness.（在黑暗中益见星光灿烂。）

This is different as light from darkness.（天渊之别。）

在《圣经》的《马太福音》第二十五章第三十节有：“And cast ye the unprofitable servant into outer darkness：there shall be weeping and gnashing of teeth.”。中文《圣经》翻译为：“把这无用的仆人，丢在外面黑暗里，在那里必要哀哭切齿了。”这似乎是译错了的，因为这个outer为utter（完全）的古写，不应译成“外面”，虽则utter和outer同为out的比较级，但根据英美文人引用时的用法，就可明白其含义，例如：

It was at once one of the shames and one of the privileges of gardening，she thought，that one was put in this godlike position of judgement，deciding upon what should live and what should be cast into outer darkness，delivering moral judgement and analogies. ——A. Wilson

这是说决定让什么花草留下，把什么花草拔去（即照字面说的“投入完全的黑暗〔地狱〕中去”）。E. M. Forster把它说成“those nasty Bolshies come and take it off again and thrust me aside into the outer darkness”。至于Aldous Huxley则只保留outer darkness二字， 而说成“only to disappear again almost instantly into the void of outer darkness”。这儿所说的darkness，当然不止是“黑暗”而已。

凡指经常的情况则用dark，指一时的情况则用darkness，例如：

Most children are afraid of the dark.（大多数的小孩子都怕黑暗。）

I could not see the house properly because of the darkness.（因为黑暗，我没有看清楚那屋子。）

171. a horse、the horse、horses、the horses

英文的普通名词，不能像中文一样地单用，必须在前面加冠词，或在字尾加成复数，但这样一来就有了四种不同形式。请将这四种形式的用法及含义举例说明。

【解答】当我们把“书是有用的”一句中国话译成英文时，若译成“Book is useful.”就错了，必须加上一个不定冠词，改成“A book is useful.”才对。或者说成复数的“Books are useful.”也行。如果我们说到某一本特殊的书，我们就得换用定冠词，因为定冠词有特定的意思，使那一本书从普通一般的书中分开，而特别提示出来，如“The book is useful.（这本书是有用的。）”。不提别的书，单就这本特殊的书来说的。如果特别指定的不是一本书，而是好几本书时，就可说 “The books are useful.（这些书是有用的。）”。这儿举出的a book、books、the book、the books，便是问题中所说的四种不同的形式。

名词前面加的冠词是可以把它当作形容词看待的。如a或an是代表one说的，说one语气重，说a、an时语气就轻了。定冠词the是代表this或that的。我们如果不用冠词，而改用其他指示形容词当然也可以，如“Give me some books to read.（给几本书我读。）”。句中的some是代表一个未定的数目，你想要把数目指定，当然亦无不可，如“Give me two or three books to read.（给我两三本书读。）”。

有了这种基本知识，我们不妨进一步来探讨引申的用法：

（a）A horse is a useful animal.

（b）The horse is a useful animal.

（c）Horses are useful animals.

（d）The horses are useful animals.

（a）例是以一匹马以概其余，表示任何一匹马都是同样的有用。（b）例用的定冠词，是代表一个族类，意指凡是马都是有用的。（c）例用复数是马的“总称”，当然指的是所有的马，和（b）例说的“凡是马”的意思一样。（d）例的说法实较之（c）例更为精确，是将（b）（c）两种用法合并在一块儿的。这个有“总括”的意思，通常较为少见。但说horses和说the horses，到底有什么不同呢？据R. B. Long著的The Sentence and Its Parts（1961年出版）一书上说：“有定冠词的复数普通名词和无定冠词的复数普通名词，其分别不太明显，人们不常感觉得到，但在基本上它们是有差异的。例如说‘The Germans have had trouble with all their neighbors.’，是指的德国全国的人，就国民的整体来说的（a national grouping），不含有个人的意思（individual Germans）在内。如果说‘Germans are good workers.’，就是指的所有的个人，不是对德国一般人的看法，而是就个别来看的。这样说，并不是说所有的德国人（every German）都是a good worker，自然是包含有例外在内的。”（p. 295）

172. turtle和tortoise

Mark Twain在他的自传体小说The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn一书中，说他小时常去找turtle eggs来吃。这个turtle是指乌龟呢，还是指斑鸠？又turtle与tortoise同是乌龟，二者有何不同？

【解答】英文的turtle一字，一般人都认为是指海龟，即所谓鳖的。最有名的海产物玳瑁，英文便叫作Hawksbill turtle。《综合英汉大辞典》上对turtle的解释：（1）雉鸠，（2）蠵龟。把鸟放在第一义，这是不大妥当的。美国通用的《韦氏新世界辞典》上说，“sea species are usually called turtle，and land species are usually called tortoise”，意即海产的叫turtle，陆产的叫tortoise。还有，这辞典指明作斑鸠解的是古老的用法（archaic）。

Mark Twain生在密苏里州的乡下，那儿离海岸起码有一千公里之远，绝不可能有海龟生长的，所以有人认他所吃的不是海龟蛋，而是斑鸠蛋。这种说法也不一定可靠，应当还是译作乌龟蛋比较正确。因为美国作家对turtle和tortoise，并不一定遵守海产和陆产的分别来使用，而常要随便混用，试就现代作家John Steinbeck为例，他说海龟时用的是tortoise，说陆龟时又用了turtle，全与辞典上的说法相反。例如：

Henry pointed to a great tortoise asleep on the surface，“And what is the table of the turtle？” he asked.（见Steinbeck作的Cup of Gold第二章中海员在航海时的谈话。）

And over the grass at the roadside a land turtle crawled， . . . The turtle entered a dust road and jerked itself along， . . . （见Steinbeck作的The Grapes of Wrath第三章。）

至于辞典上说turtle = turtledove（斑鸠）是古老的用法，只是因为它见诸《圣经》“所罗门之歌”（第二章第十二节）：

For，lo，the winter is past，the rain is over and gone；the flowers appear on the earth；the time of the singing of the birds is come，and the voice of the turtle is heard in our land.

用法虽出自古书，但不能阻止今人不引用它，如英国的剧作家John van Druten在1943年发表的一个剧本就题名为“The Voice of the Turtle”（《斑鸠处处闻》）。总之，turtle是指乌龟还是指斑鸠，要看前后文才能决定，而turtle与tortoise二字，也时常混用，并没有多大的区别。不过to turn turtle（底部朝天翻转过来）一个成语（参考O. Henry说的helpless as a turtle on its back），却不能改为to turn tortoise，而北美产的一种供食用的龟terrapin，也不能说作turtle或tortoise，因为种类不同呢。

173. difference和 discrepancy

“这章《论语》有两种不同的解释”一句，释成英文为“There is a difference between the two interpretations of the same chapter of Confucian Analects.”，不知译文是否正确？

【解答】译文尚可，不过如将difference一字换成discrepancy就更恰当了。英文的difference是作“不同”“差异”解的一般的用语，例如：

There are many differences between English and Chinese.（中英文有很多的差异。）

There is a difference in John’s and Tom’s height.（约翰和托孟的身高不同。）

至于discrepancy则是指的二者间应同而不同的地方，应该是协调的而竟发生矛盾，例如一个人的收支应该是相抵的，现在弄得入不敷出，就说“There is a discrepancy between my expenses and my income.（我的收支不平衡。）”。《论语》章句的含义原应只有一种，今竟发生两种解释，也是不应该的，所以最好是说：

There is a discrepancy between the two interpretations of the same chapter of Confucian Analects.

Smith说difference是最不一定的（indefinite），Crabb说difference是表示原因上的差异的。则discrepancy原是有一定的，不应有任何差异的原因存在，孔子说的话，绝无模棱两可的地方，只是后人不了解他的原意，才发生解释上的差异。

174. rise、 arise、raise、rouse、arouse

英文动词有rise、arise、raise、rouse、arouse五个字，意思都差不多相同，不知用法上有些什么差别？

【解答】现分别举例说明如下：

Rise：为不规则变化的自动词，过去式为rose，过去分词为risen，反义词为fall，可译作“上升”“升起”，用于继续向上升的场合，比说get up要正式些（more formal）。说日、月、星辰、鸟、云、雾、热气、地势、寒暑表、物价等的上升时，或坐着的人起立，睡着的人早上起床，生病的人发烧，微官升到高位等时用的：

I used to like seeing the sun rise. ——J. Ruskin（我从前很喜欢看日出。）

He rose to welcome.（他起身来迎接。）

Qomolangma RK. rises to the height of 29，002 feet.（珠穆朗玛峰高达二万九千零二尺。）

Sugar has risen a cent a pound.（糖一磅涨一分。）

The people rose against the oppression.（人民起而反抗压迫。）

Arise：为不规则变化的自动词，过去式为arose，过去分词为arisen，可译作“发生”，是一个庄严的字，也是一个较古的字，主要在比喻时用，今多用于诗及夸张的文体中。说日月东升，风起云涌，波澜翻动，乃至事态、问题、困难、疑虑，迫害、结果等发生时用：

Soon he arose and left the room. ——T. Hardy（随即他起身走出房间去了。）

Accidents arise from carelessness.（事故多由不小心而起。）

Many great men have arisen from humble beginnings.（许多伟大的人物出身微贱。）

Many new facts have arisen.（发生了许多新的事实。）

Raise：为规则变化的他动词，可译作“举起”。普通常用的字，但较lift略庄严些，屡用于比喻上，说眼、头、手、帽、石头、重物、梯、柱、纸鸢、沉船、物价、税率、名誉、反语等时用：

Raise your right hand.（举起你的右手。）

The motorcars raise a cloud of dust.（汽车扬尘。）

He raised his glass to his lips.（他举杯到唇边。）

The sunken ship was raised to the surface of the sea.（沉船已经捞起到海面来了。）

The joke raised a laugh.（那笑话引起哄笑。）

He raised an objection.（他提出异议。）

Raised in a small Midwestern town，he went to New York at the age of eighteen.（他成长于中西部的一个小镇，十八岁时前往纽约。）

Our soldiers raised the siege of the fort by driving away the enemy.（我军逐退敌人，而将要塞解围。）

Rouse：为规则变化的他动词，可译作“唤醒”“惊起”。此字发源于狩猎，用叫喊及打拍等去把躲藏在巢穴或矮树中的野兽惊起，故常有因惊恐或打扰而受激励，起而活动的意思：

Every tent roused by that clamour dread. ——Shelley（每个营幕都为那可怕的呐喊声所惊起。）

Antony had spoken words which roused the mob to fury.（安东尼说的话，使群众大为愤怒。）

I was roused by the telephone.（我被电话闹醒。）

The dogs roused a deer from the bushes.（猎犬把躲在矮树丛中的鹿赶出来了。）

Her curiosity was roused.（她的好奇心被引起了。）

The insult roused him to anger.（那侮辱使他生气。）

Arouse：为规则变化的他动词，可译作“激动”“唤起”。前述的rouse用于具体的意味，而arouse则用于比喻的意味，如果要塞的守军在深夜听到一个声音，只能把他从梦中惊醒（arouse），使他恢复意识，如果他更进一步要去追寻那声音的来源，立即自己武装起来，准备对敌，那时就说那声音rouse him，而不单是arouse him了。

Her pretty clothes aroused us.（她漂亮的衣服唤起我们的注意。）

Their terrible suffering aroused our pity.（他们的苦难引起我们的同情。）

175. worth和 worthy

英文的worth和worthy二字，同为形容词，意义又同是“值得的”，不知在用法上有何分别？

【解答】英文的形容词大别为两类，一类叫作predicative adjective（叙述用法），另一类叫作attributive adjective（限定用法）。大部分的形容词是兼两种用法的，如old便是（例如说“He is old.”是叙述用法，说“He is an old man.”是限定用法），但有某些形容词是只限于一种用法的，如afraid则限于叙述用法，我们只能说“He is afraid.”，不能说“He is an afraid man.”。问题中的worth与worthy两个形容词用法上最大的分别即在此。现分别例解如下：

（1）Worth为叙述形容词，后可接用宾语（Object）。

①意为“值得”：

His words are worth notice.（他的话值得注意。）

The game is not worth the candle.（值不得去做。）

A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush.（多得不如现得。）

②意为“可值（若干）”：

I paid five dollars for this picture，but it’s worth more.（我花五元买的这幅画，但它值更多的钱。）

It is not worth a cent.（不值一文。）

③意为“有价值多少的财产”：

He is worth a million dollars.（百万富翁。）

He died worth millions.（他留下几百万的财产死了。）

④常下接动名词用：

This book is worth reading.（这书值得一读。）（reading意味上的宾语为本句主语的book。）

New York is a city worth visiting.（纽约值得一游。）（visiting意味上的宾语为a city。）

Life wouldn’t be worth living without friendship.（没有友谊人生是值不得过活的。）（living意味上的宾语为本句主语的life。）

Whatever is worth doing at all is worth doing well.（凡是值得做的事，就值得做好。）

⑤偶然也有下接不定词用的时候：

It is as much as my place is worth to let him see it.（让他看见了，我的饭碗就保不住了。）

⑥后面又可接用“while、one’s while、while +动名词”：

Do something worth while.（做点有用的事。）

He will make it worth your while.（他会使之不至浪费你的劳力的。）

It is worth while seeing the museum.（那博物院有看的价值。）这句与说“The museum is worth seeing.” 同义。但不可说“It is worth seeing the museum.”或“The museum is worth while seeing.”。

在worth while后通常接用动名词，但在worth one’s while后则通常接用不定词。比较：

It is worth while seeing the museum.

It is worth your while to see the museum.

又worthwhile写作一个字时也可作限定形容词用，如：

a worthwhile book（值得一读的书）

a worthwhile effort（值得付出的努力）

You ought to spend your time on some worthwhile reading.（你应该花些时间去读有价值的书。）

但如作叙述用法，则必须分开作为二字，如：

All this fussing is hardly worth while.（这一切麻烦是不值得的。）

（2）Worthy为限定形容词，后可接它所修饰的名词，也可接用of，或“of +动名词”，或不定词：

①意为“有价值的”“可敬的”：

He helps only the worthy poor.（他只协助那些可敬的穷人。）

Opportunities were provided by which poor but worthy students could work out all cost of living.（穷苦而可造就的学生可获得机会工读，赚到全部的生活费用。）

〔注〕这种用法常用于反语，如a worthy enemy（不值一击的敌人）、a worthy gentleman（大好佬）等。

②意为“值得的”“应得的”“相宜的”，后面常接用of：

The place is quite worthy of a visit.（那地方值得一游。）

He is a man worthy of praise.（他是一个值得称赞的人。）

Li Po is a poet worthy of the name.（李白是一个名副其实的大诗人。）

③下接“of +动名词”：

The event is worthy of being remembered.（那事值得记忆。）

〔注〕“worthy of +动名词”与“worth +动名词”的两种形式，不可混乱，在worthy后要用Passive的Gerund，而在worth后就要用Active的Gerund，但其意义仍然是被动的。比较：

The book is worthy of being read.（不可以说worthy of reading）

The book is worth reading.（不可以说worth being read）

④下接不定词：

This is a matter worthy to be considered.（这事值得考虑。）

He is worthy to lead（= to take the lead）.（他够资格做领导人物。）

176. 关于“水”流的声音和动态的字

日常见到或用到的“水”流的声音或动态，英文表现这些情形的字眼各有不同，请分别举例说明。

【解答】从人身上说起，“汗流浃背”是wet through with perspiration，“泪如泉涌”是“The tears flowed like a fountain.”。“在雨中淋湿一身”是get drenched，“淹死”是be drowned。“河流泛滥”叫inundate或overflow或flood，“泉水起泡”叫bubble。“小波纹”是ripple，“大波浪”是wave或surge，或billow。“波涛汹涌”是the dashing of waves，“浪花飞溅”是“The sea sprays splashed on the beach.”。“流鼻涕”是snivel，而“涕泗交流”则说“Both tears and snivel run down the face.”。“小儿吃液体食物吃得满脸都是”就叫作dribble-puss（= a face with dribbles on it）。人的“口水（唾液）”叫saliva，“流口水”便说drool。“浇花”是sprinkle flowers，“濡笔”是dip the pen in ink。“洒泪”是shed tears，“洒水”是spill water，“覆水难收”是“It is no use crying over spilt milk.”。“他在淌汗”是“He is oozing sweat.”，“伤口出血”则说“The wound oozed blood.”。“下牛毛雨”叫drizzle，“下大点雨”就说“Rain fell in big drops（或torrents）.”。俗语说“It is raining cats and dogs（= pitchforks）.”，“阵雨”就说shower。形容“雨声”说pattering或dripping。“水的一滴”是a drop，但持续不断地滴就可把石头滴一个洞，那时英文说“Constant dropping wears the stone.”。在日常说话中形容少量的液体也说a drop，如：

Husband：May I have some more coffee？

Wife：I’m sorry. There’s just a drop left. Shall I make some more？

Husband：No，don’t bother.

持续不断一点一点在滴的就说dripping，是从动词drip来的，如果“屋漏”（leak）就是“The rain water is dripping through a crack on the ceiling.”，那时你可以听到dripping noise。通常下大雨时，“水从屋檐上落下来”就说“The water drips from the eaves.”。

“细水长流”或“涓涓细流”英文是trickle，如：

The brook trickled through the valley.（小溪在峡谷间细细流去。）

Tears trickled down her cheeks.（泪流满面。）

由水流而引申到人潮等的流动，如：

An hour before the show people began to trickle into the theatre.（开演前一小时人们开始三三两两地进入戏院。）

Subscriptions are trickling in.（订单源源而来。）

The information trickled out.（情形慢慢地泄漏出来。）

用水冲洗就说flush，所以“抽水马桶”叫flush toilet，用过之后用水冲洗就说flushing the toilet，母亲常要对孩子们说：

Be sure to flush the toilet when you are through.（你解过手记着要冲马桶。）

水从某一个地方冒出来就说gush，例如：

The water gushed out of the break in the pipe.（水管破了，有水冒出来。）

流水潺潺的声音叫gurgle，但声音更响的就用gargle，如我们早起漱口（rinse the mouth），但喉咙痛时就得用药水漱口，如：

A：I have a sour throat.

B：That’s too bad. Did you try gargling Listerine？

A：No. I didn’t.

B：That might help.

喷出来的水由小而大的有spit—squirt—spirt—spout，如“吐口水”叫spit，小孩子玩的“水枪”叫squirt gun = water pistol，喷水小一点的说squirt，大一点的说spirt = spurt，如公园中给游人喝的自来水涌出的情形。喷水喷得更大的就说spout，如鲸的喷水，或喷水池的喷水。

177. content和contents

中文说的“内容”英文译作content或contents，但不知单数与复数在用法上有何分别？

【解答】此字通常是用复数，意为：（1）内面所有的东西、内容、囊中物，例如：the contents of a room（房间里面的东西），the contents of a box（箱子里的东西），the contents of a bag（囊中物），the contents of a bottle（瓶中物）等。（2）书籍、报纸、杂志、公文等的内容，或内容的目录，例如：the contents of a book（书的内容），a table of contents（目录），“A complete contents is to be found in Volume I.”（第一卷有全部目录）等。

用单数时，意为：（1）要旨（essential purport），真义（real meaning），例如：the content of a chapter（一章的要旨），the content of a statement（声明要旨）等。（2）与形式（form）对称的内容（substance），例如：the emotional content of a poem（一首诗的感情丰富的内容）。

The content of his speech was good，but the form was not.（他的演讲词内容很好，但结构不佳。）

The Chinese are inordinately fond of the drama，and the ideals and much of the content of plays are classical in character.（中国人是极其爱好戏剧的，一些戏剧的理想及大半的内容都是合乎正统的。）

The contents of the works used by a “talker of books” were written and studied by scholars.（说书人所用的话本，内容都是由文人撰写而加以研究过的。）

此字的单复数在用法上还有一种分别，即单数多用于抽象的内容，如：the content of the course（课程的内容），而复数则用于具体的内容，如：“A bag with its precious contents was missing.（一个内有重要物品的皮包不见了。）”。但对同一物有时用单数来指“容量”，用复数来指“内容”也是可以的，如量米的斗，它的content（容量）是一斗，里面也许只有五升米，我们就说它现在的contents（内容）是五升。又如张其春著的《翻译之艺术》一书，它的content（内容）是谈的翻译，而它的contents（目录）则是三章，每章七节。

说一本书或一份报的内容（即“思想内容”或“形式和内容”）也要用单数才对。

The French newspaper is always six pages in content.（法国报纸内容有六页。）

The essay is excellent both in form and in content.（那篇文章形式与内容都很好。）

The content of the article is not clear.（此文含义不明。）

The story has plenty of thought content.（这篇故事很有思想内容。）

We must base our judgement on the content of the book.（我们必须以此书的内容为基准来下判断。）

178. 名词单复数的意义不同

英文有些名词因单复数的不同，而形成意义上的差异，请把这种名词的一些常用的字，举例说明一下。

【解答】单复数意义不同的名词，常用的有下面这些字：

（单数） | （复数）
advice忠告 | advices消息
air空气 | airs神气
beef牛肉 | beeves牛
colour色彩 | colours旗帜
compass范围、指南针 | compasses圆规
content满足 | contents内容
custom风俗 | customs关税
draught草稿 | draughts西洋棋
force力量 | forces部队
good善 | goods货物
ground土地 | grounds根据、理由
iron铁 | irons镣铐
letter文字、书信 | letters文学
manner态度、方法 | manners礼貌、习俗
nerve神经、胆力 | nerves神经过敏
pain苦痛 | pains辛苦
part部分 | parts才能
physic药品（特指泻药） | physics物理学
premise前提 | premises房屋
quarter四分之一 | quarters宿舍
return归还、回来 | returns赢利、陈报
salt盐 | salts盐类
sand沙 | sands沙原
scale尺度 | scales天平
spectacle光景 | spectacles眼镜
spirit精神 | spirits心境
work工作 | works工厂、机械、工事

现举数例如下：

Let me give you a piece of advice.（容我给你一个忠告。）

They received advices from foreign countries regularly.（他们经常收到国外的消息。）

Don’t give yourself airs.（不要神气。）

He passed his examination with flying colours.（他成功地通过了考试。）

Mr. A is a man of letters.（A先生是文学家。）

He does not know good manners.（他不懂礼貌。）

He took great pains in the education of his children.（他对于儿女的教育很辛苦了。）

He is a man of parts as well as a man of nerve.（他是一个有才干又有胆量的人。）

You must quiet his nerves first.（你第一得镇定他过敏的神经。）

He is in good spirits.（他很愉快。）

You mustn’t be in low spirits.（你不可意气消沉。）

179. 表“群”的字

在英文中见到有school of whales和college of bees的名称，不知指的是什么学校？

【解答】任何一个学校或学院都是集合多数人在一起的，所以school和college二字，都有“群”的意思在内，问题中的a school of whales是说“一群鲸”，a college of bees是说“一群蜜蜂”，并非指学校或学院而言。表示“群”的意思的英文字眼，由名词不同而有各种不同的说法，兹分类举出一些常见的用法如下：

关于人的：

a group of people（人）

a crowd of people（人）

a throng of people（人）

a concourse of people（人）

a multitude of people（人）

a galaxy of beauties（美女）

a gang of workmen（工人）

a gang of slaves（奴隶）

a gang of prisoners（囚犯）

a gang of thieves（小偷）

a gang of robbers（强盜）

a posse of police（警察）

a bench of scholars（学者）

a college of translators（翻译者）

a bench of bishops（牧师）

a bench of judges（法官）

a bench of magistrates（县长）

a board of directors（董事）

a regiment of soldiers（士兵）

a troupe of minstrels（行吟者）

a troupe of dancers（跳舞家）

a troupe of actors（演员）

a troop of horsemen（骑士）

a cloud of horsemen（骑士）

a horde of savages（野蛮人）

a tribe of Arabs（阿拉伯人）

a pack of thieves（小偷）

关于物的：

a collection of relics（遗物）

a collection of curiosities（珍奇）

a host of activities（活动）

a group of islands（岛屿）

a series of events（事件）

a galaxy of stars（星宿）

a cluster of stars（星宿）

a sea of clouds（云海）

a grove of trees（树木）

a clump of trees（树木）

a belt of trees（树木）

a chain of mountains（山峦）

a range of mountains（山峦）

a range of hills（小山）

a cluster of houses（房屋）

a huddle of houses（房屋）

a batch of bread（面包）

a bunch of grapes（葡萄）

a bunch of flowers（花）

a bundle of hay（干草）

a bundle of sticks（柴枝）

a bouquet of flowers（花束）

a chest of drawers（五斗柜）

a clutch of eggs（鸡蛋）

a fleet of cars（汽车）

a flight of steps（阶梯）

a flight of stairs（楼梯）

a flight of airplanes（飞机）

a sheaf of grain（谷物）

a sheaf of wheat（小麦）

a sheaf of arrows（箭）

a quiver of arrows（箭）

a stack of corn（谷类）

a stack of wood（木头）

a stack of arms（武器）

a heap of stones（石头）

a nest of beakers（敞口杯）

a pack of cards（纸牌）

a pack of lies（谎言）

a pack of troubles（麻烦）

a park of cars（汽车）

a park of artillery（大炮）

a peal of bells（钟声）

a rope of pearls（珍珠）

a string of pearls（珍珠）

a string of beads（珠子）

a shoal of facts（事实）

关于鸟的：

a cloud of birds（鸟）

a bevy of quails（鹌鹑）

a brood of grouse（松鸡）

a building of rooks（白嘴鸦）

a cast of hawks（鹰）

a covey of partridges（鹧鸪）

a desert of lapwings（田凫）

a drove of turkeys（火鸡）

a fall of woodcock（山鹬）

a flock of geese（鹅）

a gaggle of geese（鹅）

a herd of cranes（鹤）

a master of peacocks（孔雀）

a nide of pheasants（雉）

a sedge of herons（苍鹭）

a stand of plovers（千鸟）

a watch of nightingales（夜莺）

a wisp of snipe（鹬）

a flock of chickens（鸡）

a brood of chickens（鸡）

a flight of doves（鸽）

a flight of birds（鸟）

关于兽的：

a band of dogs（犬）

a pack of hounds（猎犬）

a pack of wolves（狼）

a pride of lions（狮）

a skulk of foxes（狐）

a flock of sheep（绵羊）

a flock of goats（山羊）

a drove of cattle（牛）

a herd of cows（牛）

a herd of buffaloes（水牛）

a herd of deer（鹿）

a herd of giraffes（长颈鹿）

a herd of ponies（小马）

a herd of swine（野猪）

a herd of elephants（象）

a cate of badgers（獾）

a down of hares（兔）

a leash of hares（兔）

a kindle of kittens（小猫）

a leap of leopards（豹）

a litter of pups（小犬）

a litter of pigs（猪）

a farrow of pigs（猪）

a nest of rabbits（家兔）

a pace of asses（驴）

a sleuth of bears（熊）

a sounder of hogs（野猪）

a stud of horses（马）

a troop of monkeys（猴）

关于虫的：

a nest of ants（蚁）

a swarm of ants（蚁）

a swarm of bees（蜂）

a college of bees（蜂）

a swarm of flies（苍蝇）

a swarm of locusts（蝗虫）

a flight of locusts（蝗虫）

a cloud of locusts（蝗虫）

a hive of bees（蜂）

关于鱼的：

a shoal of herrings（鲱）

a school of whales（鲸）

a run of whales（鲸）

a troop of whales（鲸）

180. 关于“雨水”的字

据说学习一种语文的方法，就在多识字和多造句，要做到这两点，必须就有关某一事物的词汇和表现法，集中学习，则可收事半功倍之效。现请就与下雨有关的字句为例，作一介绍。

【解答】关于雨的情形，我们可以分好几方面来说，但不外是摹声拟状，及我们对雨的感觉。讲究生活艺术的中国人，特别重视“听雨”，如“欲知白日飞升法，独坐焚香听雨中”，“留得残荷听雨声”，“悲欢离合总无情，一任空阶点滴到天明”之类，不胜枚举，而洋人则少有这种情趣，对于“雨声”只说drip（点滴），dripping（滴落、滴下），pitter-patter（啪哒啪哒声），drumming（重重打击声），splash（激溅声）等等。例如：

We heard the drip，drip，drip of the rain.（我们听到滴答滴答的雨声。）

The drumming on the roof is heard all night.（终夜听到大雨打在屋顶上的声音。）

我们也最能欣赏“雨景”，如张志和的《渔歌子》：“青箬笠，绿簑衣，斜风细雨不须归。”晏几道的：“落花人独立，微雨燕双飞。”苏东坡的“山色空蒙雨亦奇”。他如“淡烟疏雨”，白乐天说的琵琶声弹得像“急雨”，杜牧说：“南朝四百八十寺，多少楼台烟雨中。”倪瓒说的“烟雨空蒙”，英文只用些简单的字来形容，毫无诗情画意。英文说的light、soft、gentle、fine是指“微雨”“细雨”“疏雨”说的，至于heavy、hard、driving、pounding则是指“大雨”“豪雨”“急雨”。说a light rain意指落在我们身上，我们几乎感觉不到。a pounding或driving rain就是说重重地打击我们的雨。

A sharp rain was beating against the window-panes.（急雨敲窗。）

When the sun shines through a light rain，it makes a rainbow.（太阳射过细雨时，便有彩虹出现。）

A gentle rain is falling on the grass.（微雨洒在草地上。）

A soft rain fell like tears.（轻柔的雨有如落泪。）

A heavy rain visited the city.（市上曾有豪雨。）

A summer rain often forms a rainbow.（夏季的雨常使彩虹出现。）

All plants grow quickly when the soft spring rain comes.（春雨日时，草木怒生。——《庄子》）

此外还有a constant（continuous）rain（霪雨），a copious rain（大雨），a drenching rain（豪雨），a hard stanting rain（斜降的暴雨），a drizzling rain（牛毛雨）， a fine rain（细雨）， an intermittent rain（断续的雨），a pluvial rain（大雨，大量的雨），a welcome rain（令人欢迎的雨）等等。

说到“雨量”的，英文有slight（疏），a little（微），a lot（多），not very much（不多），occasional rains（断续的雨）， rained often（时常下雨）， fine（或good）weather for ducks（雨天）等等。又scattered rains原指有的地方下雨，有的地方不下，但有人又拿来说有时下，有时不下的雨：

It never rains but it pours.（不雨则已，一雨倾盆。/祸不单行。）

We had a torrential rain last night.（昨夜下了一场暴雨。）

After lightning and thunder came a heavy downpour.（雷电过后，大雨倾盆而下。）

It rains cats and dogs（或pitchforks）.（大雨猛烈地下降。）

The night rains on Mount Pa swell the autumn pool.（巴山夜雨涨秋池。——李商隐）

The crops are suffering from deficient rain.（农作物的雨量不够。）

The river rises after heavy rains.（大雨之后河里的水涨了。）

Meet held in case of slight rain.（下小雨运动会照常举行了。）

Little rain falls in a desert.（沙漠中几乎是不下雨的。）

We have had a great deal of rain this spring.（今年春季下了不少的雨。）

We have been without rain for a long time.（好久没有下雨了。）

再说下雨时间的长短，则有a little while（落一下子）、all day（整天）等：

It has rained all the week.（下了一个礼拜的雨了。）

It has been raining for three days.（一连三天不断地在下雨。）

The rain has abated.（雨停了。）

The rain has passed over（= off）and the sky cleared up.（雨过天青。）

雨的大小、慢急、疏密等的不同，而名称有异。如drizzle是指牛毛细雨：

It drizzles on and off.（牛毛雨时下时停。）

A cold rain was drizzling down.（冷雨蒙蒙地下个不停。）

又sprinkle是下微雨，好像我们浇花一样：

It began to sprinkle.（开始下小雨了。）

参考：

We sprinkle the lawn / sprinkle clothes before ironing.（我们在草地上洒水。或是在烫衣时洒水。）

突然而来又突然停止的雨叫shower（骤雨），也可叫作a sudden down-pour，有的叫a cloudburst，在某些地区又称a gully-washer。热带地方的大雷雨（a tropical rainstorms）常随季候风（monsoon）而来，故称monsoon rain。

热带地方当太阳光线直射的时候，便是雨季（raining season），新加坡的雨季是在年尾到年头。在雨季时人们都备有“雨具”。《论衡》上说：“孔子出，使子路齐雨具，有顷，天果大雨。”雨具有雨伞（umbrella），雨衣（raincoat或shicker），雨帽（rainhat），雨鞋（rain shoes，boots，rubbers， galoshes），披肩（rain cape）等，都是可防雨的（water proof）。

The coat is proof against rain.（此衣可以防水。）

Take an umbrella with you in case of rain.（带把伞去，以防下雨。）

有人出门忘记带雨具，于是：

He got caught in the rain.（遇雨。）

They were caught in a downpour and were all drenched to the skin.（他们出门遇到大雨，淋得一身通透。）

The campers were drenched with（或by）rain.（露营的人被雨淋湿。）

They were soaking wet and dripping when coming home.（他们好像从水缸出来的样子，回到家来一身都在滴水。）

可是有人却满不在乎，喜欢在雨中行走：

He tramped in the mud and slush of the roadway through the pouring rain.（他在倾盆而降的大雨中踏着满道泞泥，漫步而行。）

大雨之后地上有行潦（一潭潭的积水），一个不当心：

I stepped in a puddle.（踏进一潭水中。）

Look out for the puddles！（当心踏入行潦。）

181. offer的译法

某大学学生所修课程中有云：“Candidates must offer Translation.” 一语，其中offer一字辞典上的意义皆不合用，不知在此是什么意思？又如“Thank you for your kind offer of help.”，这种用法的offer，也不知应如何译法？

【解答】此字可作他动词，也可作自动词，也可以作名词用。它的用法也很多，中文确实没有一个意思相当的字。譬如说，有人想请你去担任一个职务来征求你的同意，英文就说这是他对你的offer，再如他出月薪一千元，也说是他的offer，前者译作“提议”，是既生硬又不客气；后者译作“出价”，更是商业气味太重了，都未能表达原文的意思。此字的基本含义为“贡献”或“奉呈”，那是非常谦逊的。

问题中所提出的是说“学生必须修翻译课”。例如：

The boy or girl who offers Chinese runs no risk of falling into the same error.（修中文的学生就没有犯同样错误的危险。）

第二问如果是说“Thank you for your kind help.（谢谢你的帮忙。）”就好译了。现在说的是offer of help，只表示要帮忙，并未实际帮忙，所以只能译作“谢谢你表示给我帮忙的好意”。这个kind offer译作“好意”，当然也不是辞典上所能找到的。现在就此字的各种用法举例说明如下：

（1）他动词，意为“奉呈”“贡献”“呈请”“提供”“建议”“表示”“施以”“出价”等等。但实际翻译时，并不一定能用这些字眼来译：

They offered me a position.（他们给了我一份差事。）

He offered me a bribe.（他向我纳贿。）

She offered a few ideas to improve the plan.（她提出几点意见来改进那个计划。）

Each age offers its own men of parts.（江山代有才人出。）

I offer you a cup of wine.（我敬你一杯酒。）

He offered to lend me the money.（他愿借钱给我。）

He offered to go at once.（他主张立刻就去。）

He offered to buy my used car.（他说要买我的旧车。）

I can give you no assistance，neither will I offer you any obstacle. ——Trollope（我不能帮你忙，也不会妨害你。）

She offered no response. ——Arnold Bennett（她没有反应。）

He was not afraid of their offering him any harm. ——H. Melville（他不怕他们害他。）

When they offered to depart he entreated their stay. ——Dr. Johnson（当他们表示要走，他就恳求他们再坐些时。）

（2）自动词，意为“供奉”“发生”“呈现”“企图”等：

I shall come again when occasion offers.（遇有机会，我将再来。）

I will not offer at that which I cannot do.（我做不到的事决不尝试。）

Take the first opportunity that offers.（抓住第一个出现的机会。）

He is ready to shoot me if I should offer to stir. ——Swift（如果我想动，他就开枪。）

Miss Pole had a cousin， who had offered to Miss Matty long ago. ——Mrs. Gaskell（白小姐有一个表哥，他很久以前就向马小姐求过婚了。）

（3）名词，意为“提议”“求婚”“出价”“企图”等：

She has refused several offers of marriage.（她拒绝了好几次的求婚。）

He jumped at my offer.（他欣然接纳我的主张。）

His offer of protection was declined.（他所提出的保护的建议已遭拒绝。）

No offer of less than a hundred dollars will be received.（出价不足百元决不接受。）

The modern way of girls，who count their lovers and offers as an Indian does his scalps. ——Mrs. Stowe（摩登女子把她们的爱人以及男人的求婚不当回事，好像印第安人收取敌人的头皮当作胜利品似的。）

Ⅻ 中英不同的表现法

182. “我有三姊妹”英文说“I have two sisters.”

“我有三姊妹——安、玛丽和我。”译成英文的“I have three sisters——Ann，Mary，and me.”，为什么不对呢？

【解答】英国女作家Jane Austen写的一篇小说《说服》（Persuasion），是说的三姊妹的故事。大姊Elizabeth为小说的第一人称的I，二妹为Ann，三妹为Mary。在这种情形下，如果有人问Elizabeth有几个姊妹时，她的回答一定是：“I have two sisters——Ann and Mary.”。

这便是中国人的思路和西洋人的想法不同的地方。中国说的姊妹，是把父母生下的女性全部包括在内，自己自然不在例外；而英文则重在“你有的”，一方为持有者，一方为被持有者，当然不能把自己也列入被持有者的一伙中去，说“I have two sisters.”，把I加上two，结果会成为三人是一定的。如果说“I have three sisters.”，把I加three岂不凭空多了一人，而变成四姊妹了吗？从前有人讲过这样一个笑话，孩子在学校里学了算术，回家吃饭时，便向父母炫耀一番。他说他能把食桌上的两只烤鸡变成三只，父母大为惊奇，就要他证明。于是他指着第一只鸡说，“这是一只”，又指着另外一只鸡说，“这是两只；一只加两只不是三只吗？”父亲大笑着回答说：“孩子，你真聪明！好吧，现在你妈妈吃一只，爸爸吃一只，你就吃那第三只鸡吧。”这第三只鸡，就等于上述的第四个姊妹，是根本不存在的，所以说“I have three sisters.”是错误的，我们不难明白了。

中国人对于家族观念很看重，所有语言文字上也表现出来，有兄有弟，有姊有妹，而英文却只有兄弟不分的brother，姊妹莫辨的sister，一定要加上形容词的elder或younger，才能表出长幼来。他们平日又喜欢直呼其名，有时你读完整个一部小说，还搞不清楚谁是兄谁是弟，谁是姊谁是妹。尤其是英文的cousin一字，甚至连性别都不分，姨表兄弟姊妹，一概都叫cousin，有时连辈分都不管的。一方面他们对于brother一字，却限制很严，一定要是同父同母的才是brother，同父异母，或同母异父的，都只算half brother呢。

183. 不可以说“It is faithful for you to do so.”，但又可以说 “It is necessary for you to do so.”

我们不可以说：“It is faithful for you to do so.”。为什么又可以说：“It is necessary for you to do so.”呢？

【解答】例句中的faithful（忠实的）是要以“人物”为主语才行，即：

He is faithful to his duties.（他忠于职守。）

His servant is faithful and honest.（他的仆人既正直又忠实。）

A dog is faithful to its master.（狗对它主人是忠实的。）

至于“It is faithful for you to do so.”之所以不通，是因为it是代表to do so的，即成为“To do so is faithful for you.”。还是不知道“忠实的”是谁，因为主语不是“人物”，所以没有一个“忠实”的主动者。我们把这句英文照字面译出，便成为“这样做对你是忠实的”，但谁这样做呢？也许我们可以说you是意味上的主语，应可译作“你这样做是忠实的”，但对谁忠实，对什么忠实，还是不明白呢。

至于“It is necessary for you to do so.”，为什么又可以说呢？不同的地方就在这两个形容词，faithful的场合不能说It is faithful，必须说You are faithful，但到了necessary的场合，恰恰相反，我们不能说You are necessary，必须说It is necessary。如果详细说明的话，it同是代表后面不定词的，可以换成“To do so is necessary for you.（这样做对你是有必要的。）”。这句话的意思，已明白地表示出，“你这样做是有必要的”了。既然you是这句话意味上的主语，为什么不能说you are necessary呢？因为这意思不是说，“你有必要去做什么”，而是说“你这人是必要的”，或“你是一个必要的人”，与to do so毫无关系了。

184. “It is necessary for you to do so.”和“It is very kind of you to do so.”

（a）It is necessary for you to do so.

（b）It is very kind of you to do so.

句型相同，为何一用for you，一用of you呢？采用不同的介词，区别何在？

【解答】（a），（b）两句都是以you作为不定词（to do so）的意味上的主语。（b）句可以换成以you为主语的造句：“You are very kind to do so.”。但是（a）句却不能换为“You are necessary to do so.”。因为这样一来，主语和you后面接的不定词（to do so），完全脱离了关系（注意：原句的主语it是代表后面的不定词的），而且you are necessary的意思是“你这人是必要的”，所以这个句子就不能构成一个完全的意念了。

（b）句原本应说You are kind，现改说It is kind of you，无非是为着要加强kind的意思，才把主语的you移到后面去说，而把那具体的亲切的行为作为主体了。

关于for you与of you的不同，现再加说明如下：（b）句是说“你的行为是亲切的”，也就是说“行为者的你是亲切的”。但在（a）句就是说“你的行为是必要的”，却不能说什么“行为者的你”，表解起来的便是：

（a）necessary的是“行为”而已。

（b）kind的是“行为”，同时也是“行为者”。

（b）句的意思是“他这样做是亲切的”，同时也是“这样做的人是亲切的”。但（a）句则只能说“这样做是必要的”，却不能说“这样做的人是必要的”，因为那样一来，变成必要的是“人”而不是“事”了。因此我们现在更明白了：我们只能换说“You are kind to do so.”，不能说“You are necessary to do so.”。

同样的情形，再举一例比较一下：

（a）It was impossible for him to go alone.

（b）It was foolish of him to go alone.

（b）句可以换说“He was foolish to go alone.（单独一个人去，他是太愚笨了。）”，还是一样，没有什么不可。但（a）句原意为“要他一个人去是不可能的”，却不能改说为“He was impossible to go alone.”。因为这样一来，变成“他这个人（的存在）是不可能的”，这当然不成话。再如另一个形容词Unbearable（不堪忍受的），也是属于这一类的。若说“这样热做工我受不了”，应译作“It is unbearable for me to work in this dreadful heat.”，而不可以说“I am unbearable to work in this dreadful heat.”。因为I am unbearable是说“我这个人使别人受不了”呢。

属于（b）类的，即可以换人作主语的形容词，最常用的有下列的一些字：

bold | brave | careful | careless
clever | cruel | foolish | good
honest | kind | nice | polite
rude | silly | thoughtful | stupid
wicked | （un）wise | wrong | thoughtless

再举几个例来看：

It was careless of him to leave his umbrella in the train.（他不小心把伞忘记在火车上了。）= He was careless to leave his umbrella in the train. = How careless（it was）of him to leave his umbrella in the train！

It was stupid of her（= She was stupid）to make such a mistake.（做出了这样的错误，她真愚笨。）

It was wrong of you（= You were wrong）to borrow his bicycle without asking his permission.（不问他就骑走他的脚踏车是你不对呀。）

It is wise of him（= He is wise）not to accept their offer.（不接受他们的建议，他是聪明的。）

It is good（= kind）of you to send me a nice present.（谢谢你送我这样好的礼物。）

注意：我们不能说“It is kind to do so.”或“It is kind for you to do so.”，因为这是不通的。我们只可以说：

It is good to do so.（这样做是好的。）

It is good for you to do so.（你这样做是好的。）

It is good of you to do so.（你这样做是亲切的。）

185. 可以说“How kind of you！”，但不能说“How beautiful of her！”

我们可以说“How kind of you！”，为什么不可以说“How beautiful of her！”呢？

【解答】当我们说“How kind you are！”的时候，觉得在kind与you are之间，似乎有些距离，而脱了节的样子，若改说“How kind of you！”就会发现of you与kind有着密接的关系，是不可分离的。这就是因为：

How kind you are！（General）

How kind of you！（Special）

一般泛泛之交毕竟不能与个人的私交相比。《孟子》上说：“至于子都，天下莫不知其姣也！”遇到了她，人人都会说：“How beautiful she is！”。但没有人能说“How beautiful of her！”，因为“她美”是有目共睹的general事，不能当作special的来加以处理呢。

我们平日说的“It is good of you to do so.”，句中的good = kind，作“亲切”解，不作“好”解。因为“亲切”是属于个人的（special），而“好”是一般性的（general）。一定要是special的，才能用of什么人，否则只好用for什么人，参阅184的解答。

句中用了how当然更是加强kind的说法，说“You are kind.”要点在you；说“It is kind of you .（= It is a kind thing done by you.）”，把kind先提出来，自然加强了它的意义。至于说“How kind of you！”，即“How kind（it is）of you！”，句中的kind再上how，所表现的意义，算是最强的了。

186. 不可以说you are convenient！

“你方便的话，请在六点钟来。”译作“Please come at six if you are convenient.”。为什么不可以？请说明文法上有何错误。

【解答】英文的惯用语法是不允许说you are convenient的，必定要说it is convenient to you才行。因为英文说的you are convenient，意思是“你是个方便的人”，指人而不指事。他如necessary、possible、impossible、unbearable一类的字，都是不可以用代表人身的名词作主语的，一定要用impersonal的it作主语才可以。这和中国话完全不同，一个不当心，就会弄错的。

现就convenient、necessary、impossible三字分别举例说明如下：

（1）Convenient：这字容易用错的原因，是中国话极少以impersonal（非人称）的字作主语，而英文偏偏要用非人称的字作主语。我们只说“你方便的话”，英文则必须说If it is convenient for you，决不可以用表人称的字作主语。在convenient后接的介词，用for或用to皆可。

I’ll call on you tomorrow evening if it’s convenient to you.（如果你方便的话，我明晚来看你。）

Will it be convenient for you to start tomorrow？（明天动身你方便不方便？）

This is a very convenient tool for opening cans.（= This tool is very co-nvenient for opening cans.）（这是开罐头很方便的工具。）

（2）Necessary：“你需要马上出发”，常被误译为“You are necessary to start at once.”。这是中国式的英文，照英文的惯用语法来说，应作：

It is necessary for you to start at once.（你需要马上出发。）

Air is necessary to support animal life.（空气是维持动物生存所必要的。）

Food is necessary to nourish the body.（食物是养身所不可少的。）

To sleep is necessary to health.（睡眠是健康所必要的。）

Your help is absolutely necessary.（绝对需要你的帮助。）

Heat is a necessary result of friction.（摩擦必然产生热。）

（3）Impossible：“要我们明天把它做完是不可能的”或是“我们明天绝做不完”，常被误译为“We are impossible to finish it by tomorrow.”。这是直译“我们不可能”为英文的，是中国的语法，英文则必须以impersonal的字作主语，这句话英文正当的说法为：

It is impossible for us to finish it by tomorrow.

Nothing is impossible to a willing mind.（精神一到，何事不可为。）

That is impossible to me.（= It is impossible for me to do that.）（那个我决不能做。）

再看这个例句：“他父亲一死，他出洋的事便告吹了。”译成英文的“The death of his father has made him impossible to go abroad.”便错了，应译作：

The death of his father had made it impossible for him to go abroad.

187. “亡羊补牢”的英译

中国的成语“亡羊补牢”，最近中华书局出版的《通用汉英辞典》上译作“Repair the sheepfold after the sheep is stolen.”及too late to mend。前者是从中文直译成英文的，后者是英文现存的同义语。除此两种译法外，不知是否还有更适合中文的英文成语。

【解答】出自《战国策》上的“亡羊而补牢，未为迟也”一语，原意指事后的补救，现在一般只截取了上半句的“亡羊补牢”，表示太迟的意思，故《通用英汉辞典》上才会译成too late to mend的英文习用句。在美国哈佛大学出版的Mathews’ Chinese-English Dictionary上，则翻译了原文的整句：

It is not too late to repair the fold after the sheep has strayed——it is never too late to mend.

这是说事后再来补救，还不为迟。但一般通俗的用法是多少有点歪曲的，而变成了未免太迟的意思。把这句中文直译出来介绍给说英语的人士，他们就字面看也是可以了解的，无需另加注释。不过在英语中与此类似的隐喻成句，也并不是没有，所不同的是我们说羊，他们说马，即：

Lock the stable door after the horse has been stolen.

马已被人偷走了，才来锁马廐的门，当然是太迟了。时代天天在进步，用马作为交通工具，早已落伍，马车已被汽车取而代之了，尤其是在美国，因此这句成语到了美国也就随着时代而有了修正。有人去考察美国的教育，就听到向导者介绍说：

The school has a sex education class，though this might seem like loc-king garage after the car has been stolen.（这学校开有一门性教育的课，虽则不免有人讥诮汽车被偷之后，才来锁汽车间。）

“亡羊补牢”一句成语的通俗用法，用英文来表现时，这也许是最新的合乎时代的说法了。

188. “逆来顺受”的英译

中国成语有“逆来顺受”一语，意为遭遇逆境也处之泰然。不知英文怎样翻译才对，因查所有的《汉英辞典》都未收有这句。

【解答】中华书局版《学生成语词汇》中收有这个句子，解释为“遇有横逆之来，只可顺而受之”。人生不如意事常八九，实在不应该遇事忧烦，自寻苦恼，所以要好自为之，逆来顺受，才是道理。英文说make the best of a bad bargain（或job）或是make the best of one’s ill fortune是说“善处逆境”，能利用不幸的境遇，使之转祸为福。英文解释，可说bear adverse circumstances in the best possible way，例如：

We must make the best of a bad bargain.（我们应在不利的情况中尽量往好处做。）

He who can make the best of a bad job is always happy.（善处逆境的人是常乐的。）

但英文另有一句成语，似乎更接近中文的“逆来顺受”的说法，那就是needs must when the devil drives（万不得已遇到恶魔开车也只好屈服），见《英华习语大全》，例如：

“What，you are in your tantrums again！” said she. “Come along，Sir，needs must when the devil drives.”——C. Reade（“怎么啦，你又发脾气了！”她说。“不要这样吧，最好逆来顺受呀。”）

句中的needs为一个副词，在现代英语中，只能与must连用，通常needs must（do）= cannot help（doing）；（is）compelled to do（必需；万不得已；必不可缺）。这个needs must不可与must needs = must of necessity（必须，必需）混同，后者常含有讥讽的（sarcastic）意思，如：

He must needs go away just when I wanted him.（正当我要他的时候，他偏偏要离去。）

至于谚语的“What cannot be cured must be endured.”，也是逆来顺受的意思，照字面译时，可作“无可救药的事只好忍受”。

189. “乔迁之喜”的英译

祝贺友人迁入新居，我们常用成语“乔迁之喜”，不知英文应如何说法？

【解答】有过翻译经验的人，都知道成语是不能直译的。到了非直译不可的时候，也得加上许多的注解，才能使读者明白。中文说的“乔迁之喜”这句成语是出自《诗经》的典故。《诗·小雅·伐木》：

伐木丁丁，鸟鸣嘤嘤，出自幽谷，迁于乔木。

后人就用“乔迁”一辞，来祝贺人们的迁居，有时也用以称做官的人升官，与“左迁”相同。张籍《赠殷山人诗》便说：

满堂虚左待，众目望乔迁。

《孟子·滕文公上》，也引用了《诗经》的这个典故，说：

吾闻出于幽谷，迁于乔木者，未闻下乔木而入于幽谷者。

这段话Legge译作：

I have heard of birds leaving dark valleys to remove to lofty trees，but I have not heard of their descending from lofty trees to enter into dark valleys.

这是照字面直译的，读者把它当作一种比喻，也未尝不能了解其中的大意。如果再用《孟子》的典故，而说成“下乔入幽”一语，不懂得来历的人，就不会明白它是说舍高就卑的意思了。

“乔迁”意译时，只说to remove就够了，要说得多一点，就是to remove to a new house（迁入新居）。如果要把这个“乔”字的原义也翻译出来，则可说to remove from a dwelling place as a bird flies from the dark valleys into the lofty trees。

所谓“乔迁之喜”当然是一种祝贺之辞，在英文中当祝贺时习用的字眼是congratulations（恭喜）。如：

I beg to offer my congratulations on the New Year.（恭贺新年。）

Please accept my sincere congratulations on your recovery from illness.（祝贺你康复。）

贺“乔迁之喜”也同样可用此字，说“Congratulations on your removal to a new house.”。如果仕途的升迁，说法就多少都带得有点中国味道，西方人如乔迁志喜，大开宴席，便叫作housewarming。此字《韦氏新世界辞典》的定义是a party given by or for someone moving into a new home，而《新世纪大辞典》则解释说an entertainment given in a house to celebrate the beginning of one’s occupancy，意思都是为庆贺新居所举行的宴会，和我们说的“乔迁志庆”实在很接近呢。

ⅫⅠ 成语的意义和用法

190. shock absorber

为着不使听话的对方吃惊或失望，除了以前讲过的I am afraid之外，还有其他什么同类的日常用语？

【解答】在英文的日常谈话中，确是常用到一种所谓shock absorber（缓冲语），那就是I am afraid、I fear、I am sorry之类，其中尤以I am sorry一个表现法，用得最多。它表现抱歉或叹惋（mildly regretful）之意时，便是一种缓冲语了。在这场合，说得更完善的是I am sorry to say。例如：

I am sorry to say that I can not help you.（我不能帮助你，说来很是抱歉。）

I am sorry to say that I cannot come.（很抱歉我不能来。）

I’m sorry to say that your daughter will have to spend about a month in the hospital.（令媛恐怕要在医院里住一个月的样子。）

不带to say字样的，也同样可以发挥这个作用，如：

I am sorry to give you trouble.（给你麻烦，很是抱歉。）（比较“I am sorry to trouble you.〔对不起打扰你。〕”。）

I’m sorry（that）you can’t stay longer.（你不能多留，真是遗憾。）

I’m so sorry I can’t accept your kind invitation.（真是遗憾，我不能接受你的邀请。）

说I fear（是I hope的反对），也有这种缓冲的作用，不过在口语中大家更爱说的还是I am afraid。

I fear I shall fail.（我恐怕会失败。）

I fear he will die.（我恐怕他会死。）

Is he going to die？——I fear so.（他会死吗？——恐怕会呀。）

I fear（that）we are too late.（我恐怕我们太迟了。）

I fear I said something to hurt you.（我深恐说了什么触怒了你的话。）

中国话说的“我很冒昧地说……”，英文就是“It may be rude but . . . ”，或“If you don’t mind my asking . . . ”，或“Excuse me，but . . . ”等，都是属于这一类的口头英语。

191. Diamond cut diamond

英文的谚语有“Diamond cut diamond.”一句，不知是什么意思？为什么第三人称单数现在不用cuts？

【解答】这句谚语的意思，是“强中更有强中手”。至于为什么不用cuts，而用cut，是要很多说明的，因为这是一个看去不合乎普通文法的句子，瑞士的Heinrich Straumann把它称为block language，说这是一种inorganic的结合，字与字之间并无文法的联系，只在表达一个意念上凑在一块儿（block）罢了。美国的Wallace W. Smith认为这种写法并不普通，只可用于速记（shorthand）。它不是对事实的陈述，而是近乎假想的表现。从形式上看是“主语动词+宾语”，但主语与动词之间有一个break，只能由说话时的声调来弥缝。在现代英文中为加强语气或代表对照起见，在命令句上加说主语的情形和这个表现法颇为相似，例如：

You take that seat，John，and someone（= one of you present）fetch a few more chairs.（约翰，你先坐下吧，有人会再去拿些椅子来的。）

Oh，please，someone go in and tell her.（啊，请你们哪个进去告诉她一声吧。）

Everybody go home！（大家都回去吧。）

主语和动词之间的有机的关系是不存在的。不过这一类的句子主语都是you的变形，命令句说出主语you来也是常事，但问题中的例句，那主语并不是you，而是第三人称，情形与上不同。我们在文学作品中，也可发现有采用这种形式的字句，例如：Virginia Woolf夫人的名著To the Lighthouse中，Ramsay就说过这样的一句话：

Life stand still here.（在这儿的人生是静止的。）（见Hogarth Press版pp. 249—250）

这不是一般的statement，其作用为暗示时间的进行已停止了的另一空间。同时可看作instruction的说法，在说话者的意志中带有假定的感觉。

我们再看instruction的例：

Boy drop on left knee. Girl of uneven couple drop end of ribbons， take one step forward and face partner Each dancer turn 1/4 to own left.（Osbourne McConathy：The Music Hour—Teacher’s Guide for the Fifth Book. 〔Silver Burdett，N. Y.，1931〕）

在现代英语表示惊讶或怪异时所发出的疑问中，也可以找到类似的表现法，比命令句更要近似，因为主语也是第三人称，例如：

Lewis marry Blanche. ——Shakespeare（路易士要跟布兰芝结婚。）

An Englishman betray his country.（一个英国人叛国。）

这种句子我认为可以看作略去to的不定词的造句，原来是保留着不定词的to的，如：

He to deceive me！（他欺骗我！）

192. a Chinaman’s chance

He doesn’t stand a Chinaman’s chance of winning this election. 句中所谓a Chinaman’s chance，是怎样的一种机会？

【解答】这里虽用了机会一语，实际却是说的没有什么机会（have an extremely poor chance），全句的意思是说：“他在这次选举中没有当选的希望。”为什么这句英文要说“中国人”呢？这就是因为在十九世纪中叶，美国西部加利福尼亚州发现黄金，于是大家一窝蜂似的西去淘金，那些白人淘金过后所剩下来的渣滓，已经无人过问了，才轮到当地的华工，再拿来拼命去加以淘滤，他们能淘到黄金，发财的机会，真是微乎其微，差不多等于没有，所以白人就把这个叫作“中国人的机会”。

这个成语除表示没有机会外，还暗讽中国人过去在国际上没有地位，一切落在人后，甚至还可引申指中国人哪怕是在自己本国，也因政治不良，人口过多，生活艰难，出头不易，同是一个中国人跑到外国就很容易发财，学问事业上有成就，在国内因环境关系，不知要埋没多少人才。

在抗战时林语堂双关地说：

Japan hasn’t got a Chinaman’s chance of winning this war.

虽是说“日本无获胜希望”，同时又可解为“日本胜利的机会不及中国”。即照字面解为日本没有中国人一样的获胜机会。

这是纯粹的美国话，英国是不大通行的，兹再举出二例如下：

I always did want to find out what it’d be like to get friendly with you. I never had a Chinaman’s chance before. ——E. Calawell：Episode in Palmetto（我确曾很想知道跟你做朋友到底是什么味道。可是在这以前，我一直没有这样的机会。）

I’m sorry to have to tell you that you haven’t a Chinaman’s chance of raising that money in Boston. Give it up， Court——it’s a bad deal. ——F. Yerby：A Woman Called Fancy（我很抱歉地不得不告诉你，在波士顿你别想赚到那笔钱。放弃这种企图吧，这不是一笔好交易。）

193. jam tomorrow

C. P. Snow在《两种文化及科学革命》一书中，有“Common men can show astonishing fortitude in chasing jam tomorrow.”一语，不知应如何译法，又，jam tomorrow有何出典？

【解答】在C. P. Snow著的The Two Cultures and The Scientific Revolution一书第四章中，果然发现有下列语句：

. . . common men can show astonishing fortitude in chasing jam tomorrow. Jam today，and men aren’t at their most exciting：jam tomorrow，and one often sees them at their noblest.

现试译如下：

普通人对追求“明日的果酱”显示出异常的坚忍。对于“今日的果酱”，他们反而并不太兴奋。我们常见到他们只对“明日的果酱”表示出极其崇高的姿态。

译虽然译出来了，恐怕读者还是不会满意的，因为什么今日明日的果酱，还是不知所云，必得再加详细说明才好。

Snow说的今日明日的果酱，原是一种比喻的用法。典故出在《爱丽丝梦游奇境记》一部书上。这是英国一部儿童文学的名著，其中一些字句都成为英语的一部分了。据说当日英国的女王读了这本书大为欣赏，下令去把作者其他的著作全部买来，可是买来的都是一些高深的数学书，女王一点也看不懂。原来这本儿童名著的作者Lewis Carroll（1832—1898）是牛津大学一位数学讲师Charles Lutwidge Dodgson的笔名，除“爱丽丝”一个故事外，未写过其他的文学作品。

数学家是喜欢玩弄难题，以测验智力的，在“爱丽丝”这部故事中也到处可以遇见作者对文字的游戏，上面所讲的果酱，正是作者舞弄文字的一例。那就是在Alice续篇Through the Looking-Glass第五章上，女王说jam every other day原意是要隔一天吃果酱，作者故意把这个成语照着字面加以曲解，即是说在“所有其他的日子”才吃果酱，today isn’t any other day（今天并不是其他的日子），当然不吃果酱，这样一来，就永远吃不到果酱了。所以说：

The rule is，jam tomorrow and jam yesterday——but never jam today.（那规定是明天和昨天都吃果酱，只有今天不吃。）

英文另有一句成语说：

A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush.（手里的一只鸟比树上的两只鸟值钱。）意即多得不如现得，明天的一百还不如今日的五十。

两者有一脉相通的地方，虽则说法相反，照Alice看来手中的东西，永远是等于零，所以不在话下。讽刺一般人不知珍惜今朝，把握今朝，老是寄望于明日，不免一事无成，徒伤老大。

194. take a person for granted

英文成语take . . . for granted意为“把……看作当然”。在take后面常接it一字或其他事物名词，但偶见有接“人”者，殊难索解，请举例说明。

【解答】英文的take . . . for granted = assume . . . as true，我们译作“视为当然”“假定事实”，是并无确实证据即信以为真的意思。这个granted分明是一个分词，在此权充介词的宾语，如果把它看作前面省掉了being一字，也就好解释了。我们常见到的是take it for granted的形式，这个it为形式上的宾语（formal object），真正的宾语为后面的子句（clause）。例如：

I take it for granted that they have arrived there already.（我臆断他们早已达到那里了。）

We took it for granted that you knew the whole matter.（我们以为那件事情你完全知道。）

I took it for granted that you would consent.（吾谓君自必承认。）

We all knew Lily had intended running away with a man，and we took it for granted it was Mike Greco. ——B. Benson（我们早知道丽莉想跟一个男人私奔，我们断定那人就是迈克·格雷可。）

以上四个例句中的it，都是代表后面的that-Clause的，这是我们常见及常用的一种极普通的形式，但也有不用it，而直接用其他事物名词的，如说to take nothing for granted，意为“不把什么事物看作是当然的”或“不把任何事物看作没有问题”。又如：

I took his qualifications for granted.（我姑认为他的资历是真实可靠的。）

Although he was a Tory by habit and conviction，there were few institu-tions which he took for granted. Marriage was certainly not one of these. ——I. Murdoch（虽则他在习惯上和信念上原是一个保守党员，但有几种风俗他却视为当然。结婚的习俗确不在内。）

I took for granted the innumerable little jobs she did for me. ——Sieg-fried Sassoon（我把她为我做的那些无数的小事视为当然。）

Physical and intellectual miracles we take for granted. ——M. B. Johns-tone（我们把心身的奇迹视为当然。）

以前这个成语的用法不过于此，可是最近美国方面又增加了一种新的用法，在《韦氏国际大辞典新版》（Webster’s Third New International Dictionary）上，我们发现了增加的新义：to pay inadequate attention to or value too lightly（as a possession， right，or privilege），即是对地位、权利或特权，不加重视，或不十分注意（带有瞧不起的意思）。辞典上举例说：

She began to take her husband for granted until he threatened to leave her.（她开始有点瞧不起她丈夫的样子，直到她丈夫声称要离家出走，她才改变态度。）

另外我还可以举出这样一个例句：

I went there as a kid and grew up with the place. They took me for granted. ——Elizabeth Wilson（我小孩子的时候到那里去，一直在那个地方长大的。所以那里的人们并不怎样重视我的存在。）

195. all Greek to me

英文成语有It is all Greek to me，字典上解释为“不懂”或“不解”，查希腊为文化古国，文哲名作甚多，未尝不能理解，为何在此成语中将希腊文视为难解的事物呢？

【解答】提到这句成语，就使我想到莎士比亚的名句：

Cassius：Did Cicero say any thing？

Casca：Ay，he spoke Greek.

Cassius：To what effect？

Casca：Nay，an（= if）I tell you that，I’ll ne’er look you i’（= in）the face again：but those that understood him smiled at one another and shook their heads；but，for mine own part，it was Greek to me.

——Shakespeare：Julius Caesar，I. ii，281 ff

凯：西塞罗说过些什么？

开：嗯，他说的是希腊话。

凯：怎么说的？

开：嗳哟，要是我把那些话告诉了您，那我以后再也不好意思看见您啦；可是那些听得懂他话的人，都互相瞧着笑笑，摇摇他们的头；至于讲到我自己，那我可一点都不懂。

（朱生豪译）

莎士比亚是1564年生，1616年死的，据《牛津大辞典》所载，英文使用这It is Greek to me这句成语，最早发现的例子，是在1600年，莎士比亚正是那个时候的人，说不定就是从他创始的。B. Jonson在他写的To the Memory of My Beloved，the Author Mr. William Shakespeare中，就说到莎士比亚只懂得一点点拉丁文，希腊文更是一窍不通。所以希腊文对他确是不能理解而一无所知的（quite incomprehensible or unintelligible to him）。他用这句话是很恰当的。从前英国人对拉丁文虽未尝间断地一直在用，可是对希腊文到中世纪时就中断，完全把它丟掉了，故上述成语在中世纪还没有人使用呢。

好像我们对于看不懂的文字称为天书一样，英国人当时对于完全不了解的文字，称为希腊文也是合理的。欧罗巴洲的语言大部分都属于条顿或拉丁文系统，唯有俄文是斯拉夫系统，它有另外的字母，所以现代作家用俄文来取代希腊文，用意正同：

. . . as for sloops，yawls，cutters，ketches and brigantines，they were simply the Russian alphabet to me. ——Lynd：On Knowing the Difference（谈到单桅帆船，纵帆快艇，单桅快船，双桅小船，以及两桅船各种舟艇，我真是一无所知。）

英国人在口语中又常使用double Dutch一辞，来表示完全不懂的语文，其中Dutch只是用以代表一种外国话，加上double一字，以表示此外国话还要加倍的难懂。如果大家语言相通，不问是说的什么不同的语言也行。比方在新加坡生长的人，说英语、华语、巫语都可通行，就好像说的同一种语言一样。

I now believe that if I had asked an even simpler question， . . . not more than one in ten of the highly educated would have felt that I was speaking the same language. ——C. P. Snow：The Two Cultures and the Scientific Revolu-tion（我现在相信如果我发出一个更加简单的问题，……受过高等教育的这些人中，也只有不到十分之一会觉得我是说的和他们同样的语言。）

The best of the communications an author has to make is to his own generation，and he is wise to let the generation that succeeds his choose its own exponents. They will do it whether he lets them or not. His language will be Greek to them. ——W. S. Maugham：A Writer’s Notebook（一个作家必须与之尽力交换意见的，原只限于他自己的一代，而他要让后继的一代去选择他们自己的代表者，是明智的办法。不问他要不要，他们终归会是这样做。他所说的这一套，他们是不会懂得的。）

文人王尔德（Oscar Wilde）说得更加调皮：

Greek and Latin were English to me.（希腊拉丁我都精通）。

他的意思是说那难懂的外国文，对他简直像自己的国语一样。把莎士比亚的话做个翻案，原说完全不懂的，现在变得没有什么不懂了。

以上所谓all Greek to me，是专指语文而言的，现在用法指什么都可以，只要是不懂的东西什么都用得着这句成语，例如：

“Yes.”

That “yes” tickled Ashurst. It was so crisp and graceful，so conclusive，and politely acquiescent in what was evidently Greek to her.

——Galsworthy：The Apple Tree

“是呀。”

这个“是呀”使阿雪感到愉快。那表示非常明确而合度地，且又非常决断地，对她那显然是很不了解的事，很客气地予以默认了。

That science is all Greek to me，I cannot follow it at all.（那种科学我是一窍不通。）

196. at large

美国说的an ambassador at large是怎样的一种外交使节？又at large一个片语到底是什么意思？应怎样翻译才对？

【解答】an ambassador at large是“无任所大使”，政府派往外国协办外交，不固定驻在某一国，所以他没有确定的任所，在英国则说an ambassador plenipotentiary unattached，与内阁中的不管部大臣（a minister without port-folio）相似。至于at large一个片语，含义颇多，没有一定的译法，要看用在什么地方，才知道怎样翻译，现就其七种用法分别举例如下：

（1）逍遥法外、在逃（free，not in jail）：

The culprit is still at large.（犯人仍未捕获。）

（2）详细地（at full length，in complete detail）：

He discoursed on the subject at large.（他详细讨论了那个问题。）

（3）胡乱地（at random）：

He scatters imputations at large.（他乱骂一阵。）

（4）全体、一般（as a whole，in general）：

Badminton is now popular with the nation at large.（羽毛球现在在一般国民中颇为流行。）

（5）未定、未决（unsettled）：

They purposely leave the matter at large.（他们故意让那问题久悬不决。）

（6）无特定的任务、无固定的职业（without regular position，out of work）：

Mr. A is an ambassador at large.（A先生是一位无任所大使。）

He is a gentleman at large.（他无固定职业；他失业。）

（7）美国不分选区而为全州选出的（representing an entire State）：

He is a representative at large.（他是全州选出的议员。）

197. Scotch on the rocks

“I’d like Scotch on the rocks.”一句，英文译作“我喜欢在岩石上的苏格兰人”。似乎意义不明，不知道这句话到底是说的什么？

【解答】on the rocks是一个成语，当然是由航海用语而来的。如rocks ahead原意为“前面有暗礁”，转而成为“危险当前”的意思。同样地，on the rocks，原意是说“触到暗礁”，转而成为“床头金尽”“身无分文”“穷困不堪”的意思，例如：

“Can you lend me five dollars？” “I am sorry that I am on the rocks my-self just now.”（“你能借我五块钱吗？”“对不起，目下我本人也穷得要命。”）

I heard by accident he was on the rocks；that’s how I make him that all-owance. ——Galsworthy（我偶然听说他非常穷困；所以我要给他那笔津贴。）

This sounded rather ominous. Perhaps he was on the rocks again. ——Isherwood（这个听来不是好的兆头。也许他又破产了。）

在Webster’s New World Dictionary of the American Language上，对于这个成语有三个解释，即（1）in or into a condition of ruin or catastrophe；（2）without money；bankrupt；（3）served unmixed over ice cubes，as whisky。第一义为“进入毁灭或灾祸中”，第二义为“穷困；破产”，这和英国的意思没有两样，唯有第三义却是美国的特殊用法，意为“酒不掺水而加上冰块来喝”，正是问题中的例句的含义：

I’d like Scotch on the rocks.（我要威士忌加冰，不要掺水。）

美国人把ice cubes称为rocks，而英国人则将硬的糖果（hard candy）称为rocks，例如Brighton Rock、Edinburgh Rock都是的。还有英国人称rock是“岩”，如Concise Oxford Dictionary对于rock的解释为large，detached stone，boulder，但美国人却对于任何大小的石头都可说作rock，如：

They began tossing rocks and bricks at the cops.（他们开始对警察投掷石块和砖头。）

中国有“安于磐石”的话，英文就用rock一字来翻译“磐石”，旧约《圣经·以赛亚书》二十六章四节上，说耶和华是the Rock of Ages，现在我们也用来说最安稳可靠的事或人。

198. as follows

He made the statements as follows.（他发表声明如下。）句中的as，依照文法解释，是一个关系代名词，后面接的动词，在数上应与前面的名词符合，名词既系复数的statements，后面为何不接用as follow？

【解答】依照文法规定，问题中所举的例句，自然是改成“He made the statements as follow.”较为合理，也确曾有人这样改写，不过还是采用as follows的形式为妥，因为这是古文遗下来的成语，follows原是一个非人称动词（Impersonal Verb），不问主语是单数或复数，通例都是用第三人称单数现在时态的形式。例如：

His words were as follows.（他说的话是这样的。）

The reply will run as follows.（回答将是下面这样。）

Just before the battle，the general addressed his army as follows.（在开仗前不久，将官向他的军队训话如下。）

The terms and stipulations are as follows. ——Clarence Stratton（条件规定如下。）

在现代英语中，已亡失it的非人称动词的字句，还留着有methinks、meseems、as regards、as follows等。methinks等字中是把宾语的me移到字的头上去了。古文methinks和meseems，现在惯用的形式为it seems to me。

John B. Opdycke说“The items are as follows.”，原为“The items are such as those that follow.”之略。又Lois Irene Hutchinson也认为照字面看似应写成“The items are as follow.”的形式，不过一般都是说as follows，虽则偶然也见到as follow的例，但那是违背历史源流的。如果懂得它的历史背景的话，就会觉得用as follows是合理的呢。

我们现在常说的if you please一个片语，也是同样的情形。一般人以为you是please的主语是错误的，从历史的演变看，you是非人称动词please的宾语，即if you please实系从if it please you变来的，因系假设语气，所以说it please，不说it pleases。我们不妨比较下例：

And thus，if it please me， I may sit all day long. ——Gissing（这样，我高兴的话，可以坐上一天不动。）

英文中常见的句子，如：

He was absent，as is often the case.（他照例不到。）

You have done more than is necessary.（你比必要的还做得更多。）

这些句中的关系代名词as等字后面的动词，也是用的非人称动词，即是说as的先行词为it（it代表He was absent一句）。

199. give the cold shoulder to

Dickens在他著的Old Curiosity Shop一书中，有“He gives me the cold shoulder on this very matter.”一句，不知应如何译法？请就give the cold shoulder这个成语，详为说明。

【解答】这句英文可译作“他在这件事情上待我冷淡”。凡是给人冷淡的待遇，表示对之厌恶或不喜欢，或者轻蔑，不理睬，就叫作give the cold shoulder to him。生于美国后改入英国籍的作家Henry James在他的名著Daisy Miller一书中说：

“What will they do to me？”（他们会怎样对待我呀？）

“They will give you the cold shoulder. Do you know what means？”（他们会“给你冷肩”吧。你懂得那是什么意思吗？）

这是书中美国青年Winterbourne给一个美国少女的忠告，因为她跟意大利人Giovanelli同游，而引起在罗马的美国人的闲话。所以这里说的“给以冷肩”是指对某人的交游齿冷（to have a distaste for her company），或嗤之以鼻的意思。也许她从前的好朋友现在也因为她交上了那个外国流氓而不理睬她了，就说：“The old friends she had once known so well gave her the cold shoulder.”。再看别的文人对这个成语的采用情形：

From that time his degeneration was rapid. The white people gave him the cold shoulder. They were only prevented from cutting him completely by disdainful pity. ——W. S. Maugham：The Trembling of a Leaf（从那时起他堕落得极为迅速。白人都对他持敬远态度，他们之所以没有完全与之绝交的，只是因为有点可怜他。）

Let me see the man who should give the cold shoulder to anybody I chose to protect and patronise. ——Dickens（我打算要来保护和照顾的人，谁要对他表示轻视的态度的，不妨出面给我看看。）

这个成语的来源为the cold shoulder of mutton（一块冷的羊肩肉），后来略去了后面二字，而成现在的这个形式。原意是有些不速之客到来，坐着不走，到吃饭时，只好开饭给他吃，主妇对这不受欢迎的客人一肚子不高兴，碍于情面，随便拿点冷东西给他吃（an unappetizing dish），以免他下次再来打扰。因为后来把成语中的“羊肉的”字眼略去了的关系，世人不察，就把那原来的羊肩当作人肩看待，因此又产生了turn a cold shoulder on的一个说法，我们再看W. S. Maugham的短篇集Cakes and Ale书中的这个用法：

Than Roy no one could show a more genuine cordiality to a fellow nov-elist whose name was on everybody’s lips， but no one could more genially turn a cold shoulder on him when idleness， failure， or someone else’s success had cast a shade on his notoriety.（对于一个家喻戶晓的小说家同行，谁也不及拉伊那样表示真纯的热诚，但当懒惰、失败、别人的成功在这小说家的名声上投上一条暗影时，则拉伊比谁都要乐意地对他加以冷遇。）

从受到冷遇者的立场来说，便有：

She would be laughed at as a peasant or， even worse， receive the cold shoulder as a Puritan or prig. ——E. V. Lucas：A Visit to Nicotina House（她会被人当作一个乡下农妇而嘲笑的，或是更糟的，当作一个清教徒或拘守礼教者而不予理睬。）

单说“冷肩”，前面什么动词都不说也是可以的，如：

Sick of the eternal cold shoulder of the academic world， the young man is arranging for the publication of a worthy work.（厌恶学术界对他永远的冷淡，这青年正安排着出版一本有价值的著作。）

在十九世纪中叶以后，人们甚至把cold-shoulder当作动词来用了。

The young writer with fresh ideas was cold-shouldered. ——A. A. Milne：Secret Papers（那个有新观念的青年作家受到了冷遇。）

200. a number of和the number of

在Advanced Learner’s Dictionary of Current English的665页上，有“A number of books（= some books）is missing from the library.”一例，为什么要接单数动词呢？括弧内说主语等于some books，这分明是复数，自应接复数动词才对。请就a number of的用法，加以说明。

【解答】依照Webster’s New World Dictionary of the American Language上的解释是：a number of = several or many，意为“许多”，所以它后面必须接复数名词或代名词；既然是指的数，而且是指的多数，不是指的量，动词自然也应该用复数动词才合理，但老派的英国人因受a的牵引，也有用单数动词的，如问题中所提出的例子。不过多数的文法家，都认为用单数动词不算正当，因为逻辑上说不通。如能自圆其说，也就勉强可被接受了。例如：

（a）An increasing number of students have made use of the library.

（b）An increasing number of students has made it necessary to keep more copies of the same books.

第一句的（a）例着重在“更多的学生”，第二句的（b）例着重“学生数的增加”。

在The New Century Dictionary上举有a number of complaints were made一例。又在Concise Dictionary of American Grammar and Usage（by Whitford & Foster，1955）及Writer’s Guide and Index to English（by P. G. Perrin， 1965）上都说a number of应接复数动词，the number of后面才要接单数动词，并举有例句如下：

A number of members are absent.（会员多数未到。）

The number of members is alarming.（会员人数可惊。）

这用法是比较合理而又正确的。若有人问我“What is the number of your house？”，我便将回答说：“The number of my house is 28.”。所指的是一个数目，当然应接单数动词，再举其他的例：

The number of jobless people grows.（失业人数增多。）

The number of deaths was very high.（死亡数很高。）

The number of collectors is growing apace.（搜集者的人数激增。）

Fortunately the number of the killed was fewer than imagined.（侥幸死亡人数没有想象的多。）

现在我们再举几个a number of的例：

There are a great number of parks in the city.（在那个市中有许多的公园。）

A large number of foreigners visit Singapore every year.（每年有许多外国人到新加坡来游览。）

A number of people were traveling in a horse carriage.（有不少的人曾用马车旅行。）

A number of students were absent yesterday.（昨天曾有许多学生缺席。）

这个a number of的表现法，又可改为numbers of，后面还是接复数动词，例如：

Numbers of people come to see the exhibition every day.（每天有许多人来看展览会。）

但a number of如不用在主语上，便不会发生接用单复数动词的问题，如：

We have received a number of letters complaining about our services.（我们接到了许多抱怨我们服务不周的信件。）

出版后记

我们相继出版的《翻译的基本知识》和《翻译的技巧》，受到了众多读者的欢迎，这让我们颇感欣慰。钱先生一生心血凝结而成的著作，得以泽被众多今日的英语学习爱好者，这是它们应得的命运和荣誉。

读者手中这本《英文疑难详解》和另一本《英文疑难详解续篇》，与前面两本书在形式上略有不同，但同样是极其优秀的英语学习读物，这几本书一并曾在台湾的大学中被广泛采用作为教材。

相较于前两本专著系统处理一个主题，这两本疑难详解以问答的形式处理了将近400个英语具体问题。这些问题按照从字词的使用到语法及表达方式，再到语言的文化层面加以分类处理，方便读者由浅及深阅读学习，而非散乱地堆积在一起。钱先生在回答具体的问题时，每每将与问题相关的知识点系统讲透，这样，《翻译的基本知识》与《翻译的技巧》中由于篇幅或体裁所限而没有谈到的知识点，在这两本疑难详解中得到了延伸和补充。

书中提出的问题，有很多都是我们在学习英语的过程中都碰到过的，往往我们会被告知，这是语言习惯使然。但是在钱先生的解释中，我们可以看到这种习惯的形成的来龙去脉，令我们不得不佩服钱先生的博学和钻研精神。这是我们从这两本书中学到具体的知识之外，更应该细心揣摩和学习之处。

希望这两本书能够为读者带来与《翻译的基本知识》和《翻译的技巧》同样的收获与喜悦。

服务热线：133-6631-2326　188-1142-1266

服务信箱：reader@hinabook.com

HL
2017年12月

英文疑难详解续篇

钱歌川　著

版权信息

书名：英文疑难详解续篇

作者：钱歌川

书号：978-7-5596-2166-5

版权：后浪出版咨询（北京）有限责任公司

目录

Ⅰ 名 词

1. company的含义及用法

2. 废物的英文

3. commitment的译法

4. rain、a rain、the rain

5. 大数字的名称

6. honours 作形容词

7. 固有名词的普通化

8. morning、afternoon、evening、night的时限

9. information 等不用复数

10. 对美国的称呼

11. 美国钱的俗称

12. have no brother及have no brothers

13. 各国人的诨名

Ⅱ 代名词

14. Objective “it”

15. oneself的六种用法

16. 关系代名词的位置

17. 国家的代名词用she或it

18. oneself前加介词构成的片语

19. 关系代名词的省略

Ⅲ 形容词、副词

20. 虚设的否定字

21. already和yet

22. Indirect Negation

23. few、a few，little、a little

24. right bank of the river的方位

25. ever和once的用法

26. a many（men）和 many a（man）

27. more than的用法

28. 色彩的含义和用法

29. Adverbial Accusative

30. not so . . . as，not as . . . as

Ⅳ 动 词

31. 被动语态的两种意义

32. 动词read的各种用法

33. 自动词、他动词用法的混淆

34. succeed in doing

35. know better

36. 以现在时态表未来

37. lay作lie用，lay = coitus

38. 某些过去动词+完成不定词

39. lose = forget

40. 现在完成时态与过去副词同用

41. “He is the stingiest man I ever met.”和“He is the stingiest man I have ever met.”

Ⅴ 助动词

42. may、may well、may as well

43. won’t的来历

44. “We did not need to hurry.”和“We need not have hurried.”

45. Let’s not、Don’t let’s、Let’s don’t的区别

Ⅵ 准动词

46. 动名词主语的格

47. Object + Infinitive

48. be interested in doing和be interested to do

49. go on doing和go on to do

50. like doing和like to do

51. the shoes to mend和the shoes to be mended

Ⅶ 连 词

52. though和but不能同用

53. until（till）的用法

54. while连结的复句有两种译法

55. hardly . . . when，no sooner . . . than前后都用过去时态

56. and不作连词译

57. as if的用法

58. 连词since前后的时态

Ⅷ 介 词

59. around和round

60. “的”字的各种译法

61. of的用法

62. hear of、hear from

63. 表接触的on

64. in the morning of a day

65. to the east、in the east

66. 用于地点的at、in、on

67. 用于时间的at、in、on

68. be known后用to，鲜用by

Ⅸ 成 语

69. on the side of the angels

70. go west的来历

71. 英文的典故

72. a favorite son

73. simile和metaphor

74. 放屁、撒尿、拉屎的英文

75. 报时法及about forty-five seconds

76. not for one’s health

77. 少见的反义语

78. the writing on the wall

79. if you please的含义

80. as such的用法

81. at a crossroads

82. this my son

83. linger I ever so late

84. snap one’s fingers

85. 分词+ the moment

86. rest home、rest house、rest room

87. this side of

88. pull up your socks

Ⅹ 文 句

89. Your Majesty后接第三人称

90. tag-question的动词和主句中的不一致

91. 美国的zip code

92. 新加坡的本地英文

93. 主句中有decide等字时附句用假设现在

94. It’s up to you的译法

95. 英美学校用语不同

96. 同格的属格

97. 宕辞

98. 喜怒哀乐的说法

99. Nobody will be the wiser

100. Do you know of a hotel？

101. It is an ill wind that blows nobody good

102. 表现特性的加强形容法

103. 女人也称呼为man

104. 美国话的简略

105. 单句、复句、合句彼此转换

106. 混合而成的句法

107. 男人说成女人

108. 宗教是民众的鸦片

109. 俗体字句

110. 新闻英语的表现法

111. written English和spoken English

112. O Diamond！Diamond！Thou little knowest the mischief done！

113. 一句英文两种含义

114. 句否定和字否定

115. Here you are

Ⅺ 中英不同的表现法

116. “贤内助”“守活寡”的英译

117. “长舌妇”的英译

118. “显亲扬名”的英译

119. “乌鹊”的英译

120. 英国人说的east wind不能直译

121. 杜诗《春望》英译之误

122. 大鼻子的英译

Ⅻ 字句研究及辨异

123. back-formation

124. imaginable、imaginary、imaginative

125. sensible、sensitive、sensual、sensuous

126. his room和his company

127. 关于“笑”的英语

128. 关于“猪”的英语

129. 代become用的其他的字

130. record的用法

131. classic和classical的区别

132. 美国话中hell的用法

133. 英美政府首长名称的不同

134. being的用法

135. produce、product、production的分别

136. auding、mim-mem-com、idiolect的含义

137. “说”的十八种译法

ⅩⅢ 发 音

138. 英文分音法

139. 同化作用

140. 动静异音

141. 滋生字重音的转变

142. 前缀的轻重音

143. 后缀的轻重音

ⅩⅣ 标 点

144. hyphen的有无

145. 限制用法不可加comma

146. comma的用法

147. 两种括弧的用法

148. apostrophe的用法

149. dash的用法

150. quotation marks的用法

出版后记

返回总目录

Ⅰ 名 词

1. company的含义及用法

“If you can neither receive nor bestow benefit，you had better leave that company at once.”一句译成“如果你既不能得到好处，也不能给与好处，你最好马上离开那家公司”。不知对否？又，请将company的含义及用法举例说明。

【解答】问题中的英文句子应译作“如果你交的朋友对你无益，你也不能对他有所帮助，你就得马上离开他”。因为句中的company一字，意为交友而误为公司，所以因一字之差而全文皆错。

英文的company有下列九种用法：

（1）一群人（a group of people），例如：

　　A great company came to the exhibition.（许多人来看展览会。）

（2）为某种目的而集合的人（a number of people combined，esp. one with a common purpose），例如：

The company are now enjoying a feast.（会众正在宴会中。）

（3）同伴，陪伴（companionship），例如：

He kept me company.（他陪伴了我。）

（4）交友（companions），例如：

A man is known by the company he keeps.（看他所交的朋友，就可知道一个人的好坏。近朱者赤，近墨者黑。）

His father asked him to avoid bad company.（他父亲要他别交损友。）

（5）宾客，来宾（a number of invited guests），例如：

We are expecting company next week.（下星期我们要请客。）

We have company today.（我们今日请客。）

（6）公司，行号（a business organization），例如：

We organized a publishing company.（我们组织一家出版公司。）

（7）（陆军中的）连（the part of an army commanded by a captain），例如：

This company commanded the passage to the fortress.（这连军队控制住通往要塞的路。）

（8）全体船员（a ship’s crew），例如：

The ship’s company assembled on deck for inspection.（全体船员在甲板上集合，以备检阅。）

（9）戏班（a party of actors playing together），例如：

The play was staged by a theatrical company.（那出戏由一个戏班子演出。）

中国请帖上说的“敬备菲酌，恭候光临”，英译时也用得着company一字，即—— request the pleasure of your company at dinner，或request the honour of ——’s company at dinner，或简单地说—— request the company of —— at dinner。

Company在用作“宾客”解时，前面不加冠词，不问来客有多少人，也不能用复数的companies，只能说：

We have company at dinner.（请客吃饭。）

He always has company on Saturday evenings.（他礼拜六晚上总要请客。）

作“公司”解的company的用法，也有需要注意的地方。把company看作单数或复数都可以，如：

The cinema company is（或are）holding its（或 their）annual meeting.（电影公司正在召开年会。）

在company（普通略作Co.）的前面，＆的有无随便，如Smith和另外的一些人合资经营一种商业，普通叫作Smith ＆ Co.，但也可以叫作The Smith Company。凡有＆的，前面不可加the（不可说The Smith ＆ Co.）。如没有＆，则前面用the或不用the皆可。没有姓的公司名，决不可以用＆，即不可以说The Cinema ＆ Co，只能说The Cinema Company。至于The Smith ＆ Jones Company是可以的，因为＆并不在company字前，而是用来联结两个人名的。

单独一个公司不可说成复数，但几个公司则是要用复数的，如：the “Big Three” vehicle producing companies（三大汽车制造公司），affiliated companies（有密切联系的诸公司）。

现再就作“友伴”解的company举例说明一下。首先使我想到的是培根（F. Bacon）在《谈友谊》（On Friendship）一文中说：

A crowd is not company，and faces are but a gallery of pictures . . . when there is no love.（群众并不是友伴，要是没有爱的话……那些人的面孔不过是画廊中所见到的肖像画罢了。）

从前的政治家和现在民主时代的不同，他们那时还不知要捉住群众的心，而加以利用呢。现代的政治家决不会说群众不是友伴的话的。

王尔德（Oscar Wilde）说：

In married life three is company and two none.（在婚姻生活中，没有孩子是寂寞的。）

王尔德说的这句话是从一句英文Proverb套出来的逆说。那谚语说：

Two is company，but three is none.（两个和尚抬水吃，三个和尚没水吃。）

最后请看R. Lynd在The Shy Father一文中说的：

It is not that I dislike the company of women and children；on the whole，I think it the best company in the world. But，as Bacon has said，a crowd is not company，and the loneliness of a man entirely surrounded by women and children surpasses even the loneliness of a man isolated in the middle of the Sahara.（并不是我不喜欢有女人和孩子作伴；大概说起来，我想这是世间最好的友伴。不过培根却说群众并不是友伴，由女人和孩子完全包围着的男人的孤寂，比独自一人在撒哈拉沙漠当中的男人的孤寂尤有过之。）

2. 废物的英文

在清洁运动声中，街上到处都设置有废物箱以免人们乱丢东西。这种在街上或公园里随意乱丢的东西叫litter，不知是否可以译作“废物”？英文表示“废物”的，还有些什么其他的字？

【解答】litter并不真是废物，而是用后散置的“杂物”，即英文说的零零碎碎（odds and ends），或索性说是残余物（leavings），例如：

Always pick up your litter after a picnic.（野餐后务将一切杂物收拾起来。）

进而有“杂乱”“零乱”的意思，如云：

This room is in a state of litter.（这房间零乱得很。）

此字还可作动词用，意即在房间里把东西弄得四散（litter things about a room），或使地方不整洁（make untidy up），例如：litter a room（或 table）up。我们常听人说：

Your room is all littered（up）with books.（你房间里零乱地堆满了书籍。）

真正说到“废物”，英文应作waste，如“废物篓”（waste paper basket），“废物利用”（utilization of waste material）等等。美国人则把废物说成trash，此字也有“残屑”或“垃圾”的意思，如美国人说的trash can，即英国人说的dustbin，都是指的“垃圾箱”。美国人把他们南部的穷苦白人称为the（poor）white trash，可知此字又可作“无价值的人或物”解，如“That book is mere trash.（那本书毫无价值。）”。英国人则说“That book is all rubbish.（那本书毫无价值。）”。作“废物”解的rubbish，是用得很多的，又可用作惊叹词“Rubbish！（胡说！）”。

厨房每天的残屑，就叫kitchen refuse，或简称refuse。此字当然也有“废物”“无用之长物”的意思，即指一般固形的废物，不能由沟渠排泄的“垃圾”。抛置垃圾的地方叫a dumping ground或a dumping-place for rubbish或a rubbish dump或dump yard。“禁倒垃圾”则说“No dumping.”。因为dump的意义为“倾弃”“倒下”，例如：

Where can I dump this rubbish？（垃圾可以倒在什么地方？）

You must not dump there.（你切勿倒在那里。）

上面说过无用的东西是废物，无用的人也是废物，凡是社会上的寄生虫，人间的渣滓，就叫作human waste（= debris）、dregs of population、off-scourings of humanity、dross of mankind、the scum of society、a-good-for nothing等等。美国人说的hobo（流氓，无业游民），当然也是指的这种寄生虫，至于说过了气的人，便是：

He is now a “has-been”.（他现已成废物。）即是说他已经outlived his usefulness。

原为“破烂物”之意的junk，俚语中也可以作“垃圾”或“废物”解，如：

His writing is all junk.（他的作品一文不值。）

He junked all his old furniture before moving into his new home.（他在搬入新屋之前，把旧的家具当作废物全丢掉了。）

3. commitment的译法

美国约翰逊总统在美国教育周的文告中说：“In the last decade，however，we have sought to fulfill the goal with greater zeal，greater commit-ment，and greater success than at any period in our history.”。句中的commit-ment一字，不知应如何译法，因字典上的解释似乎都不适用呢。

【解答】commitment是动词commit变来的名词，意义有：

（1）犯，行，作，如：commit a crime（犯罪），commit a blunder（犯错），commit adultery（犯奸），commit murder（杀人），commit suicide（自杀）等。

（2）委托，付诸，如：

commit a thing to a friend for safekeeping（托友保管）

commit some funds to the care of trustees（委托资金于保管委员）

commit a body to the earth（flames）（埋葬）（火葬）

commit a bill（议会将议案交付委员审查）

commit thoughts to writing（将思想写出来）

commit something to memory（暗记）

commit a man to prison（下狱）

Liu Pei committed his son to the care of Chu Ko-liang.（刘备托孤于诸葛亮。）

The man was committed to a lunatic asylum.（那人已被送入疯人院。）

（3）承担，如：

If you agreed to give a number of lectures，help to pay your brother’s school expenses，and give your wife ＄500 a year for clothes，you have quite a lot of commitments.（如果你同意去作一连串的讲演，答应给弟弟的学费，又说定给太太每年五百元添置新衣，那么，你就有了不少的负担。）

（4）（由束缚身体之意转为）牵累，陷入，献身（devote oneself wholly to），如：

Do not commit yourself.（勿自陷累，不要束缚自己。）

commit oneself to a promise（受诺言的拘束）

He would not commit himself in any way.（他不愿受任何方面的约束。）

He has committed himself to the cause of education.（他献身于教育事业。）

上面第四种解释，正是问题中所需要的。全句可译作：“在过去十年中，我们比历史上任何时期都要更加热心地，更加献身地，更加成功地，想要来达成这个目标。”

新加坡的李光耀总理为新加坡人所下的定义说：

A Singaporean is a person who feels committed to upholding society as it is—multi-racial，tolerant，accommodating，forward-looking—and who is prepared to stake his life for the community.（一个新加坡人就是一个对现存的多元种族，容忍互助，而又能高瞻远瞩的社会，以献身的精神来支持它，并准备为它付出生命的人。）

句中用了committed一字，报纸上把它译成“献身的”，是译得很正确的。

I believe that both candidates should make it absolutely clear that they share a basic commitment to the success of the negotiations now taking place in Paris. ——Democratic presidential nominee Hubert Humphrey

（我相信两党的总统候选人，都应绝对明确地表示，他们对于促成现在巴黎举行的商谈成功，具有基本的言约。）因候选人非当权者，目下当无权问政，只能用言语约束。“言约”为中国成语，见《后汉书·徐登传》。

Mr. Roy Wilkins said “I definitely think we’re on our way to a national commitment” to full social justice for Negro Americans.

（美国黑人促进总会主席威尔金斯说“我确实认为我们正走向一个举国一致的信诺”，要使黑种美国人充分得到社会的公平待遇。）这是说大家都答应这样，所以译为“信诺”。

The second imperative of our policy for peace is that we must meet our commitments and keep our promises to use our strength to oppose aggression. ——President Johnson

（我们的和平政策的第二条诫命，就是我们必须尽我们的义务，守我们的诺言，竭尽所能，反抗侵略。）

Vietnam may be a bitter hoax or it may be a major commitment in the defense of freedom，but it will not go away because we yell “foul”；it will not fade because we blow retreat. ——Republican vice presidential nominee Agnew

（越南可能是一种痛苦的玩笑，也可能是在保卫自由中的一个大的牵累，它不会因为我们大叫讨厌而走开，也不会因为我们鸣金收兵而消失。）美国在越战中进退维谷，故译“牵累”。

The report said that new commitments of U. S.＄50.7 million during fiscal year 1968 raised total investments of the International Finance Corporation（I. F. C.’s）in private enterprises in its member countries to U. S.＄271.8 million in 39 countries.（一九六八会计年度新的投资计有五千零七十万美元，使得国际金融公司在其会员国的私人企业中的总投资额，三十九个国家共达二亿七千一百八十万美元。）

（又）IFC’s commitment consists of a 12-year loan of U. S.＄2.45 million and a share subscription of U. S.＄1.01 million.（国际金融公司的投资包括为期十二年的二百四十五万美元的借款，及加入一百零一万美元的股金。）交付的资金，故译为“投资”。

The Japanese have faithfully observed their surrender commitments.（日本人忠实地遵守了投降的条件。）投降时规定要做的，故曰“条件”。

其他如an all-out commitment（全面的约束），to give a precipitate com-mitment（给以轻率的言约），the commitment of a petition for consideration and report（请原书交给委员会去审查并作出报告）。

4. rain、a rain、the rain

说到下雨，英文有时说rain，有时说the rain，甚至还可以用不定冠词的a，来放在rain的前面，这些说法到底有什么分别？

【解答】一般是把“雨”当作物质名词（Material Noun）看待，所以前面不加冠词，单说rain就行了。如Maugham（毛姆）的一个短篇小说的题名就是“Rain”。英文的water、air、smoke 等都是物质名词，rain算作物质名词，自然也很合理。不过物质名词常可变成普通名词，变性之后就可以加用不定冠词或说成复数，如hair、hairs，cake、cakes，poison、poisons，food、foods，gas、gases，brick、bricks等，但gold、platinum、oxygen、hydrogen等字，则从来不会变成普通名词的。

为什么有时又加用定冠词的the呢？我想这大概是受了the sun、the sky用法的影响，但大都又绝不是限定的意思，所以“微雨”译作：“Rain is falling lightly.”或“The rain is falling lightly.”都可以，当然最好是说：“It is raining lightly.”。

在rain前如果用形容词的时候，就一定要加用不定冠词的a了。“大雨”或“豪雨”说a heavy rain，实为a heavy fall of rain的节约说法。例如：

I put off my departure on account of a heavy rain.（我因大雨而延期出发。）

在rain前可用的形容词，容在下面举例说明。至于中国话的“甘霖”，可译作a welcome rain，“红雨”可译作a rain of falling blossoms，“弹雨”译作a rain of bullets。“泪如雨下”，固然可译作a rain of tears，同时英文也可以说“雨如泪下”，即“A soft rain fell like tears.”，这当然有冷雨孤衾，静悄悄暗中流泪的感觉。

英文的rain一字虽是从古英文regn而来的，但它却有一个希腊种的形容词hyetal，许多学术名词都用得着它，如hyetology（雨学）、hyetometer（雨量表）等。在rain or shine一个片语中的rain = rainy weather（雨天）。用成复数时的rains = shower（骤雨）。the rains则指热带的雨季（the rainy season）。We have the rains in early winter.（雨季在初冬。）

下雪（snow）的用法和rain一样，但storm（暴风雨）前可以直接接a，如：

A storm was raging all along the coast.（沿海岸一带正刮着暴风雨。）

如用the便有限定的意思，如：

Many trees in the park were blown down by the storm（of）the other day.（昨日发生的暴风雨，把公园里的许多树木都吹倒了。）

现就rain的无冠词及有冠词的三种用法分别举例如下：

（一）不加冠词的：

It looks like rain.（好像要下雨的样子。）

Rain has set in.（下起雨来了！）

Rain was scarce.（雨量缺少。）

We shall have rain.（要下雨了。）

The farmers want rain.（农人要雨。）

Rain came down in torrents.（倾盆大雨。）

We will start before daybreak，rain or shine.（不问天晴下雨，我们都要在天亮前动身。）

We’ve had too much rain this summer.（今年夏天的雨水太多了。）

We have been without rain for a long time.（好久没有下雨了。）

The coat is proof against rain.（这衣是防雨的。）

Take an umbrella with you in case of rain.（带把伞去，怕下雨。）

Don’t get wet with rain.（不要被雨淋湿。）

We must take shelter from rain.（我们必须避雨。）

（二）加用冠词the的：

Here comes the rain！（雨来了。）

I was caught in the rain.（我遇到雨了。）

The rain cleared off.（雨停了。）

The rain has left off.（雨停了。）

The rain stopped suddenly.（雨突然停了。）

The rain pelted against the windows of my car.（雨打在我汽车的窗子上。）

The rain poured（down）all day.（终日倾盆大雨。）

The rain has subsided.（雨小了。）

The rain shut us up in the cabin.（因雨只好关在小屋里。）

The hut is barely able to keep out the rain.（小屋仅能御雨。）

The rain has abated.（雨停止了。）

（三）加用冠词a的：

A sharp rain was beating against the window-panes and the quilt was not warm enough.（冷雨敲窗被未温。）

A rain now came on，which continued for two or three hours，and made the road slippery and toilsome.（现在下了一场雨，一连下了两三个钟头，使得路上泞滑难行。）

A cold rain was drizzling down.（冷雨蒙蒙而降。）

A heavy rain visited the city.（城里下了大雨。）

A gentle rain is falling on the grass.（和雨降在芳草上面。）

When the sun shines through a light rain，it makes a rainbow.（太阳照过细雨，便要现出彩虹来。）

在rain前既可以加不定冠词的a，自然也可以变成复数了，例如：

The river rises after heavy rains.（几场豪雨之后河水高涨。）

It was visited by abundant rains.（遭受大雨袭击。）

5. 大数字的名称

现在常把极大的数字，称为天文数字，但我们只知说到万或亿，英文则可说到百万（million），不知对于百万以上的大数目，应该怎样说法？

【解答】英文没有“万”字，只能说“十千”，现在新加坡人常说“十二千”，不说“一万二千”，便是从英文直译过来的。中国在万以上的数字也不少，不过一般也只用到亿而已。北周甄鸾著的《五经算术》一书上说：“黄帝为法，数有十等。亿、兆、京、垓、秭、穰、沟、涧、正、载是也。及其用也，乃有上中下三等。下数，十十变之，中数，万万变之。上数，数穷则变。”《风俗通》上说：“十载谓之极。”普通是以万万为亿，万亿为兆，万兆为京。这样以万进，到了“载”的时候已经是天文数字了。

此外还有从印度传来的数目名，如《翻译名义集》一书上说：“那由他，此云万亿。”《金刚经》上说：“得值八百四千万亿那由他诸佛，悉皆供养承事。”又有所谓“阿僧只”，也是梵语，意译为“无数”，是指极大之数，非寻常心力所能计算，故曰无数，实有如恒河沙数。

美国的物理学者George Gamow著有《从一到无穷大》（One Two Three . . . Infinity）一书，在第一章中第一节How High Can You Count?（《你能计算到多大的数目？》）上说，非洲霍屯督族（Hottentot tribes）对于数目只能数到三为止，以上就数不出来了。在英文中却有不少表现巨大数目的字，不过英美的算法不同罢了。在million（百万）以上的数字，两国的算法都有差异，如billion在美国为十亿（1，000，000，000），在英国为万亿（l，000，000，000，000）。现将英文的表巨大数目的字，就英美的不同，分别举出如下：

billion美国一字后加九个圈（1 followed by 9 noughts），英国一字后加十二个圈。

trillion美国一字后加十二个圈，英国一字后加十八个圈。

quadrillion美国一字后加十五个圈，英国一字后加二十四个圈。

quintillion美国一字后加十八个圈，英国一字后加三十个圈。

sextillion美国一字后加二十一个圈，英国一字后加三十六个圈。

septillion美国一字后加二十四个圈，英国一字后加四十二个圈。

octillion美国一字后加二十七个圈，英国一字后加四十八个圈。

nonillion美国一字后加三十个圈，英国一字后加五十四个圈。

decillion美国一字后加三十三个圈，英国一字后加六十个圈。

undecillion美国一字后加三十六个圈，英国一字后加六十六个圈。

duodecillion美国一字后加三十九个圈，英国一字后加七十二个圈。

tredecillion美国一字后加四十二个圈，英国一字后加七十八个圈。

quattuordecillion美国一字后加四十五个圈，英国一字后加八十四个圈。

quindecillion美国一字后加四十八个圈，英国一字后加九十个圈。

sexdecillion美国一字后加五十一个圈，英国一字后加九十六个圈。

septendecillion美国一字后加五十四个圈，英国一字后加一百零二个圈。

octodecillion美国一字后加五十七个圈，英国一字后加一百零八个圈。

novemdecillion美国一字后加六十个圈，英国一字后加一百一十四个圈。

vigintillion美国一字后加六十三个圈，英国一字后加一百二十个圈。

centillion美国一字后加三百零三个圈，英国一字后加六百个圈。

最后是一加六百个圈，虽说有数，实则大得不能计算了。大数目用文字念出来也有英美之分，美国每四位数，英国每七位数，就要变更单位的名称（denominations），兹以1，100，230，010，000为例，美国念成：

One trillion one hundred billion two hundred（and）thirty million（and）ten thousand.

英国则念为：

One billion one hundred thousand two hundred and thirty million and ten thousand.

在一般的数学书上有将million一字重复用的，也无非是表示多数，如D. Pedoe著的The Gentle Art of Mathematics上便有“ . . . greater than a thousand million million.”的说法。也有人说成multimillions，口语中又有模仿million、billion的字形而新造出zillion一字，也是指indefinitely large number（无限度的大数目），至于说a googol则等于一字后加一百个圈。

6. honours 作形容词

用英文的honour一字为什么有时要写成honor？写成复数的honours时，为什么又可作形容词用？

【解答】honour是英国的拼法，而honor是美国的拼法。美国在十八世纪由辞典学者Noah Webster（1758—1843）以The American Spelling Book（1783）一书问世，大事改革英文的拼法，将许多不发音的字母都去掉，以简化写法。英文的后缀-our变成-or，便是其中代表的美国改良的拼法。除上举的honour一字外，我们可以再举出下列十二个常用的字。前英后美。

armour—armor（甲胄）

behaviour—behavior（行为）

colour—color（颜色）

endeavour—endeavor（努力）

favour—favor（恩惠）

humour—humor（幽默）

labour—labor（劳动）

neighbour—neighbor（邻居）

odour—odor（气味）

parlour—parlor（客厅）

vapour—vapor（蒸气）

vigour—vigor（精力）

但Saviour（救世主）及glamour（魅力）二字在美国也仍旧用-our。又凡有-ation、-ific、-ize、-ous等后缀时，在英国也要用-or-，而不用-our-，例如coloration、colorific、vaporize、vaporous等等。但有-able、-er、-ite、-less等后缀时，英国则仍要保留-our-，例如honourable、endeavourer、favourite、colourless等等。

至于复数名词作形容词用的时候，一般是去掉字尾的复数符号，如billiards作形容词用时，应说a billiard table，但许多字是要仍然保留复数的形式来作形容词用的。例如：

an honours student（优等生）

an electronics firm（电子工业公司）

a savings bank（储蓄银行）

the human relations problems（人事关系问题）

a goods train（货车）

a scissors grinder（磨剪刀者）

a big arms budget（大的军事预算）

此外还有许多复合字也是不能去掉〔s〕的，如：

statesman（政治家）

thanksgiving（谢恩）

kinsman（亲族）

sportsman（户外运动者）

spokesman（发言人）

saleswoman（女店员）

townsfolk（城里人）

hartshorn（鹿角精）

a six weeks residence（六星期居留）

有时候保留复数或改为单数都可以，如：

a custom（s）house（税关）

a trouser（s）pocket（裤袋）

a sport（s）car（竞赛车）

有时在某种情形下用复数，在某种情形下又要用单数，如：

a communications satellite（通讯卫星）

communication engineering（通讯工程学）

a wages policy（工资政策）

wage negotiations（工资谈判）

7. 固有名词的普通化

She founded an ursuline college in 1950. 这不知是一种什么学校？Ursuline字典上查的不对，不知应作何解？

【解答】这是固有名词普通化的用法。Ursula为女子名，英国的传说，有一位女殉道者Saint Ursula，当匈奴（Huns）侵入时，在Cologne地方，和其他一万一千个处女共同被害。由固有名词变成形容词时，可加后缀（suffix）的ine。如Byzantine、Caroline、Levantine等皆是。1537年创立的天主教女子修道会，会员以看护病人，教育少女为宗旨，以圣乌尔苏拉为守护神，故Ursuline即指那会员，问题中的句子，应译为“她在一九五零年创办了一个女子学院”。

现在我们在报纸上常见到的“沙文主义”（chauvinism），意指盲目的爱国主义（blind patriotism），也就是盲目的排外主义，也是从人名来的。从前法国有一个把拿破仑看作神一般的士兵，Nicholas Chauvin便是此“沙文主义”的来历。

所谓“黑色剪影”（silhouette）是由一位法国部长Etienne de Silhouette（1709—1767）的名字转来的，因为他身居要职，全不胜任，好像一个影子一样的无能。

从前希腊的大哲学家柏拉图（Plato），有个朋友名叫Academus，很慷慨地让柏拉图到他家里去设帐讲学，这就是我们现在说的academy（研究专门学术的学校）一字的来源。

现在我们吃的三明治（sandwich）源于十八世纪英国的一个赌徒Earl of Sandwich（三明治伯爵），因为他的赌瘾极大，哪怕是用餐都不愿离开赌博台子，而叫人拿几片面包夹点肉送来给他吃，所以这种面包夹肉的吃法是他发明的，为纪念他，就拿他的名来称这种食品。

我们对新鲜牛奶的低温杀菌法（以摄氏三十六度光景煮半小时），及对狂犬病预防接种法，所称的pasteurization或pasteurism，便是从法国十九世纪的科学家Louis Pasteur一个人名而来的。

希腊哲学家Epicurus以享乐为至上善，于是我们便把享乐主义者叫作epicurean或epicure，而好享乐或讲究口福的主张便是epicurism了。

由固有名词而变成普通字的，不限于人名，地名来的亦复不少，如动词to shanghai = to kidnap，是指用酒灌醉或用药麻醉后，带上船去，作为水手，实有拐带之意。

美国Nevada州西部的一个城市名叫Reno的，因在那里的法院容易判决离婚，所以go to Reno就是说“离婚”。据Maurice H. Weseen编的A Dictionary of American Slang上有Reno-vated = divorced（离婚了）一个动词，但要注意字中的短划及发音，因为没有短划而第一音节读短音时，便是另外一个意为“革新”的字。

8. morning、afternoon、evening、night的时限

“他每天上午工作四小时”，英文译成“He works four hours every day in the forenoon.”，不知对否？中文把一日分为早晨、上午、下午、夜晚四段时间，英文是否一样？

【解答】译文并不错，不过“上午”译成forenoon，略嫌太正式了一点，应改为常用的意义相同的morning一字：

He works four hours every day in the morning.

英文把一日也是分为四段，不过和我们的分法略有不同。原来上午下午，应当是以forenoon对afternoon来说的，而forenoon的原意也是从日出到正午，但后来的习惯用法，就把它看作从八、九点钟到正午了，也就是一般人视为上午或午前的含义。

提到morning我们心目中只会想到早晨，如“He came to see me on Sunday morning.（他礼拜天早上来看了我。）”。又如晨星为morning star，晨祷为morning prayer，早报是morning paper等，都是指的早晨。比喻用法则为初期，如the morning of life（生命的初期，青年时代）。但此字的原意实为由黎明到正午，故整个上午都包括在这字的范围之内，早晨只是它的一部分而已。

He works in the morning and plays in the afternoon.（他上午工作，下午玩耍。）

What have you been doing all morning？（你整个上午做了些什么？）

至于下午的afternoon是指从正午到五点钟光景的那一段时间。例如：

He came yesterday afternoon.（昨天下午他来过了。）

I saw him on Sunday afternoon.（我在星期天下午看见他。）

I shall be busy this afternoon.（今天下午我会很忙。）

When a guest comes to see you in the afternoon，you say “Good after-noon” to him.（午后有客人来，你向他道“午安”。）

从下午五点以后到晚上九、十点光景的这一段时间，英文叫作evening，是属于夜的初期（early part of the night），此字中文可译作“晚”“夕”“暮”“黄昏”。例如：

The evening is very cool.（晚间很凉快。）

He passed a merry evening with his friends.（他快乐地和朋友们共度了一个晚间。）

After the evening it is night.（在黄昏之后就是夜了。）

All shops are closed at eight o’clock in the evening.（晚上八点钟所有商店都关门了。）

On an autumn evening we enjoy the moonlight.（我们在秋夜赏月。）

英文的night原意为从日没到日出的一段时间，但一般都是把它看作九、十点钟以后的夜间，但此字又是day（白日，日间）的对称。

He came home very late at night.（他夜里很迟才回家。）

During the night we sleep；during the day we work and play.（我们在夜里睡觉，在白天工作和玩耍。）

Did anybody come last night？（昨夜有人来吗？）

I shan’t be back before tomorrow night.（明天夜里以前我不会回来。）

夜校说evening school或是night school都可以，因为那通常是从七点起到九、十点钟为止，跨着evening和night两段时间的。一般应该用evening school才对，因为以起始的时间为准，不过night school是对day school而言的。

在一日之内早晚不同的时候见面或分手，英文都有一定的语句来说，如Good morning（早安），Good afternoon（午安），Good evening（晚安），至于分手时在白天说Goodbye（再会），在夜间则说Good night（再会）。Good day译为“日安”的话，Good night又可译为“夜安”了。

9. information 等不用复数

“他供给我许多有用的情报”，英译为“He gave me a lot of useful informations.”。不知有错误否？

【解答】译文的最后一字应改为单数才对，全句译为：“He gave me a lot of useful information.”。英文的information一字，现在只有单数一个形式，如作主语用时，则接单数动词。

Information has been received that riots have broken out.（接到发生暴动的消息。）

此字在十八世纪时，是可以用为复数的，不过意思不同罢了，如Swift 有句云Some informations from an eminent person（一位知名之士的指教）。

与此字在用法上完全相同的，最通用的字就是furniture，如：

Furniture has gone up since the end of the war.（家具在战后涨价了。）

There is little furniture in the room.（那间房间内家具很少。）

A chair is an article of furniture.（椅子是一件家具。）

这种只有单数，后面只能接单数动词的集合名词，可以把它当作物质名词一般看待。Jespersen就索性归入物质名词一类，二者确实是很难分别的。兹再举他例如下：

People living in cold countries need much clothing.（住在寒冷的国家的人们需要很多的衣服。）

The tailor makes coats，trousers，and other articles of clothing.（裁缝做衣裤及其他的衣类。）

Food is essential to life.（食物是生活必需的。）ALD上说除了说食物的种类（kind of food）以外，food是不可数（uncountable）的名词。

Lions are generally found where game is plentiful.（狮子通常出现于猎物多的地方。）

The factory contains much machinery.（那工厂中机器很多。）

How much new machinery has been installed？（装置了多少新的机器？）

Merchandise has no charm for us.（我们对商品没有兴趣）。

Much produce of the factory is sent abroad.（那工厂的大部分产出都是运到外国去的。）

The produce of the sea is no less than the produce of the land.（海产物并不弱于陆产物。）若非限定之意通常不加冠词。

现在让我回到问题中的information，用例句来说明它的用法：

I accumulated much information both from him and from other sources.（我从他那里和别的源流搜集了许多情报。）

I shall bring together information scattered through various books and periodicals.（我要把散见在书籍杂志上的资料搜集拢来。）

The information has been confirmed.（那情报被证实了。）

The book contains much useful information，imparted with great clearness and impartiality.（那书中载有许多既明了而又公平的知识。）

From what source do you derive their information？（你从哪方面可以获得有关那些的知识呢？）

These scholars have given no new information to the world.（那些学者并没有给世人什么新的知识。）

Pick up all the information you can while travelling.（游历的时候务必尽量采集见闻。）

More exact information follows by mail.（更多正确的报导容即交邮寄上。）

10. 对美国的称呼

我们一般说美国为America，但有人说这是美洲，不是美国，如北美洲和南美洲就说two Americas。此说对否？

【解答】美利坚合众国，简称美国的正式名称为the United States of America。单说America 确有不分南北之嫌，不过也好像他们用England来称呼“英国”一样，一般人不免也要拿America来称呼“美国”。这理由很简单，英伦三岛中以英格兰最强盛，故由它来代表，南北美以美国为霸主，自然提到America，就知道是指它。例如：

said from America to England——C. G. Fry

The common people of Japan need all the help America can give them. ——Christian Science Monitor（日本的一般人都需要美国的全面援助。）

据Krapp说，作形容词用除American外没有第二个字。一般新闻杂志上，以American作为“美国的”的意思用得极为普遍。如American aid to Saigon（美国对西贡的援助），an American citizen（美国公民），the Americans（全体的美国人），American English（美国英语）等等不胜枚举，可见一般以America来说美国，也不算错。

不过作形容词用一定非说American不可，也不尽然。就用United States还是可以的，如：

Europe needs the money from United States imports.（欧洲需要从美国输入的货物上赚钱。）

这当然也可改说为American imports或imports of the United States。有一点值得注意的是United States作形容词用时，前面的the就得去掉，再看下例：

. . . public opinion wanted the support of United States policy.（舆论想要支持美国的政策。）

至于在国外的美国人称美国时常略成the States，如：

Have you been to the States？（你回过国了吗？）

这个 the States = the United States，如：

We live in the United States.（我们住在美国。）

The U. S. today enjoys the highest living standards. ——Coronet（今日美国享有最高的生活水准。）

略语的U. S.普通常加定冠词，反而U. S. A.则多将定冠词略去。如：

to demand equality of tonnage with Great Britain and U. S. A. ——London Times Weekly（要求英美同等吨数。）

这种略语除新闻杂志外，正式的文章中则必须避免。

以前对于典型的美国人称为Brother Jonathan，不过现在通称Uncle Sam了。

11. 美国钱的俗称

很多国家的货币都以元（dollar）为单位，但美元则为世界货币的基准。正式名称应作US＄，以别于其他的＄，但说话却不这样说，而用俗称来表示。请将美国各种货币的名称及其代用语，详为说明。

【解答】在说到美国钱的俗称之前，似乎得先说明一下美国货币的种类。

美国的硬币（coin）共有六种，即一分，五分，一角，二角五分，五角，及极少见的一元。

一分的是铜币，表面（obverse，俗称head）是林肯的像，并铸有IN GOD WE TRUST（我们信仰上帝）及LIBERTY（自由）的字样，另外还有发行的年号。背面（reverse，俗称 tail）铸有ONE CENT的金额及UNITED STATES OF AMERICA的字样，并且还有一个各种货币上都有的拉丁文的motto，即E PLURIBUS UNUM（= one out of many众中之一）。币值虽是one cent，但普通俗称，却仍沿用英国殖民时代的铜币penny 的名字，复数则为pennies（但不说pence，如论值则用cents），例如：

Have you got five pennies？（你有五个一分钱的铜板没有？）

No，I’ve only got a nickel.（没有，我只有一个五分的镍币。）

五分的是镍币，故称nickel，在若干年前，表面是一个印第安人的头部，背面是水牛，后来才改变为美国第三届总统Thomas Jefferson的像，及其在Virginia州的Charlottesville的邸宅Monticello的图。例如：

The waiter was coming with the drinks，and when he got to the table Artic gave him a quarter and told him to put five nickels in the phonograph. ——John O’Hara（侍者拿着饮料来了，当他走到桌边时，阿狄交给他一个二角五分的银币，要他去换成五个镍币，从slot投入juke-box，好让那自动留声机可以唱起来。）

一角的是银币，表面是一个女像，背面铸有ONE DIME的字样。所谓dime是和decimal同一语根的字，意为十分之一。最近的dime上，已铸有在第二次世界大战中死去的Franklin D. Roosevelt总统的肖像了。例如：

Haystack in again under suspension with cold weather coming on and not a dime in his pants pocket. ——Damon Runyon（冬天到了，赫斯塔又没有领到钱，裤袋里一毛钱都没有。）

二角五分的也是银币，上面铸有华盛顿的像和鹰，又有QUARTER DOLLAR的字样，所以通称为quarter。例如：

At this time I do not have as much as two white quarters to rub together in my pants pocket. ——Damon Runyon（目下我连可以放在裤袋里弄得响的两个二角半的银币都没有。）

在美国西南部一带又常用two bits来代替quarter用，例如：

“You’re the doctor，”he says.“Give me what you think is right. I’ll take any thing from two bits to a million，dollars.”——Joseph Mitchell（“你是有学问的，”他说，“给我你认为好的就行了。从两角半到一百万元我都可以付出的。”）

这bit字也不限于指二角半的银币，如short bit是指一角，long bit指一角半。

五角的也是银币，一面有女立像，一面有HALF DOLLAR的字样，通称为half dollar。因为是two bits 的一倍，所以又称为four bits。

一元的银币，现已不再铸造了。在西南部一带，至今还在流通，至于东部纽约一带，则早已不见踪影。这普通叫sliver dollar。例如：

Her face is dead white，and she wears a smudge of rouge the size of a silver dollar on each cheek. ——Joseph Mitchell（她的面色苍白，两颊上涂着一块银元大的胭脂。）

美国除了上述这些通行的硬币外，大量使用的是纸币（paper money）。纸币共有十一种，大小都是一样，印刷的色调和单位的名称（denomina-tion），也无差别。唯票面的价值和所印的人像，有一定的规定。即George Washington（一元），Thomas Jefferson（二元），Abraham Lincoln（五元），Ale-xander Hamilton（十元），Andrew Jackson（二十元），Ulysses Grant（五十元），Benjamin Franklin（一百元），William Mckinley（五百元），Grover Cleve-land（一千元），James Madison（五千元），Salmon Chase（一万元）。

附带可以说明的，就是美钞的纸张、大小、颜色，全相仿佛，所以极易将小票改为大票，鉴别改票，第一当然是要注意人像与票值的连带关系，其次就应注意发行地点和暗记号码，再次就是学会号码的算法。第一点已如上述，第二点则发行地名和英文字母印在正面人像左边的圆圈内，而暗记号码则四角都有，即A1 Boston，B2 New York，C3 Philadelphia，D4 Cleveland，E5 Richmond，F6 Atlanta，G7 Chicago，H8 St. Louis，I9 Minneapolis，J10 Kansas，K11 Dallas，L12 San Francisco。第三点计算号码先得知下表：

A | B | C | D | E | F
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6
G | H | I | J | K | L

计算方法是将美钞号码除六数，得余数，再看正面左上角或右下角的小英文字母，例如余数为4，则英文字母必为D或J，否则就是伪钞了。美钞现有三种，绿印为本国正票，红印是海外军票，另外还有Hawaii票。

美钞背面是绿色，所以我们对美钞总称为greenback，但各种价值的货币，各有其日常用的诨名，兹举若干用例如下：

一元，在美国普通都叫作buck。例如：

“How much you going to pay me？”demanded Mr. Mallay，licking his lips.“One buck，”said Mr. Digby. “You give me two bucks last year，”said Mr. Mallay. ——Douglass Welch（“你预备给我多少钱？”马雷问，舔着他的嘴唇。“一块钱。”狄格碧回答。“你去年是给我两块的。”马雷说。）

美国对于一元，除电影中说得最多的buck外，还有ace、boffo、can、slug、dough、smacker或smackeroo等等说法。例如：

And I said，“Joe，let’s sue those sons of bitches for a million dollars”. So Joe said all right，and so that’s what we’re doing，Connie. We’re suing you for one million smackeroos. ——John O’Hara（于是我说：“乔，我们不妨对那些狗养的家伙，提起一百万元的诉讼吧。”乔答应好，而完全接受了，康尼。所以我们预备对你提起一百万元的诉讼呀。）

又如：

So he hires her at twenty-five slugs per week to start with and raises her to half a C and makes her a principal the second night. ——Damon Runyon（因此他雇用了那个女子，最初是二十五元一星期的薪水，可是第二天晚上就加到了五十元而提升为主事。）

例句中的C是century之略，即指一百元。又如：

In fact，Rose Viola has so little to say that there are rumors is some quarters that she is a trifle dumb，but personally I would not mind being dumb myself at four hundred boffoes per week. ——Ibid.（实际上，罗斯是不爱说话的，所以谣传她有一点儿哑，但是一个星期收入四百元就叫我不说话我也满不在乎。）

一元的纸币既称为ace，于是二元的便是deuce了。五元的叫fiver，十元的叫sawbuck，或tenner，二十元就是double sawbuck或略称double saw，一百元除上述的C以外，还可称为yard，一千元是叫作grand或略为G，如五千元即说five grands或five G’s也可以。

“Well，Willie，you win the sawbuck. ——One，two，three，four，five，six，seven，eight，nine，anduh tenner. Ten bucks，Willie，”said Mr. Ginsburg. “Well，what are you gonna do with all that dough？”——John O’hara（“喂，威利，你赢了十元——一，二，三，四，五，六，七，八，九，看啦，十元。威利，十块呀，”金斯白说，“呃，你拿了这笔钱要怎样办呀？”）

句中的anduh只是and拖长的说法，gonna = going to，至dough虽可作dollar解，但这里是指money，例如“I am wondering how much dough I get where I am going next season.（我不晓得等到下一季我可以拿到多少钱。）”。

“Three things，”said Maccam. “Jack—all you get of it； the key to that sixteen-cylinder job in your garage；and clothes.”——Richard Connell（“三件事，”马罕说，“钱——你所有的钱；汽车间里那部十六汽缸的汽车钥匙，还有衣服。”）

所谓Jack也和dough一样，是money的俗语，而job在此，意为mechanical vehicle，即指汽车而言。

12. have no brother及have no brothers

请说明下列三句英语的不同及在no后接名词时单复数的用法。

（a）I have no brother.

（b）I have no brothers.

（c）I have not a brother.

【解答】Palmer有明白的规定，说在no后接不可数（uncountable）的事物时，是用单数，并举例句说“I have（or there is）no water（money，bread，hope，difficulty）.”。所以凡是不可数的名词，一概都用单数。成为问题的是那些可数的名词（countable noun），如问题中提出的brother之类。

在“no +名词”而成为动词have的宾语时，也有种种不同的情形，现分别加以说明如下。

例如一把茶壶普通只有一个壶盖，在这种情形下，说“这茶壶没有壶盖”时，当然是以用单数为原则：

This teapot has no lid.

同此类的，都用单数，如：

That cat has no tail.

He has no father.

普通一个人只带一只手表，出门只带一架照相机：

I have no watch.

He has no camera.

至于树上的叶子必然是很多的，飞蚂蚁的翼翅必然是成双的，人的牙齿也有三十个以上，所以当然都要用复数名词：

That tree has no leaves.

The ant has no wings.

My grandmother has no teeth.

说到 brother 这样的名词，就很难讲了，因为有人只有一个哥哥或一个弟弟，有人则有好几个兄弟，实在没有一定，所以问题中的（a）例既可以说，（b）例也可以说，没有一点什么不同。把no后接的名词，用作单数或复数，全在说话者当时的感触，如果他觉得对方只有一个兄弟他就用单数名词，如果他觉得对方可能兄弟很多他就用复数名词。二者并没有不同之处，只是反映说话者的意识而已。再举同样情形的例如下：

She has no child（or children）.

I have no sister（or sisters）.

We have no egg（or eggs）left.

至于（a）及（b）“I have no brother（s）.”与（c）“I have not a brother.”两句，意思是有些不同的。（a）或（b）句只是说“我无兄弟”，而（c）句则语气要强得多，可译成“我连一个兄弟也没有”。

There is no（= not any）man who can do it.（普通）

There is not a man who can do it.（强调）

I have no book（s）.（普通）

I have not a book.（强调）

There was no egg in the nest.（普通）

There was not an egg in the nest.（强调）

如果不是用在动词have之后，或由there is开头的句中，而是用于be动词的场合，意思又不同了。

He is not a teacher.意为“他不是教书的”，他可能是公务员，也可能是商人等等。

He is no teacher. 意为“他不是一个好教师”，他教书简直不成。这句比上句意思强得多。

He is not a poet.（他不是诗人，可能是小说家等。）

He is no poet.（他算不得什么诗人。）

He is not a fool.（他不是一个笨人。）

He is no fool.（他很聪明。）

It is not a joke.（这不是笑话。）

It is no joke.（这可不是开玩笑的。）

He is not a scholar.（他不是学者。）

He is no scholar.（他不学无术。）

I am not a coward.（我非胆怯。）

I am no coward.（我很胆大。）

在there is之后，“no +名词”的单数或复数，和在动词have后的情形一样，可单可复，例如：

There is no stove in my room. 因一间房子中通常只装一个炉子，所以用单数。

There are no books on the shelf. 因书架上通常要放许多本书，故用复数。

如果那名词的数，通常可单可复，则说“There is no bottle on the table.”或“There are no bottles on the table.”皆可。

在have以外的动词，也可照此原则办理，例如：

I saw no dog（s）.

He wears no tie.

She wears no earrings.

13. 各国人的诨名

英美各国的国民，除正式的名称外，还有一种诨名式的称呼，如英国人叫作John Bull（约翰牛）之类。请举出各国人这一类的绰号。

【解答】谁都知道Uncle Sam是美国人的绰号，而典型的英国人就叫作John Bull，但很少有人知道来历的。Uncle Sam既可以代表美国人，又可以代表美国政府，据说这是U. S.演绎出来的。这个绰号发生于1812年的独立战争时期，地点是在纽约州的Troy和Albany一带，当时政府的仓库管理员名叫Samuel Wilson，在Troy地方都叫他作Uncle Sam。他曾在军队的食粮桶上盖上U. S.的字样，以示检验放行，所以后人考证Uncle Sam就是这样来的。至于John Bull，则出自1712年Dr. John Arbuthnot的讽刺句“Law is a Bottomless Pit；or the History of John Bull”，但这名字是Arbuthnot所创造，抑系当时一般人通用的绰号，就不得而知了。

Brother Jonathan也可代表美国人，其来源出自华盛顿的知交革命志士Jonathan Trumbull（1710—1785）。华盛顿尝向他请教，而且曾亲口唤他作Brother Jonathan。

在俚俗语中代表英国人的又有Johnny Bono的说法。叫美国人就通称Yankee（或Yank），据说这是印第安人对English的转讹。

苏格兰人就叫作Sawney、Sandy（= Alexander）、Jockey，因为这些都是苏格兰最普通的人名。爱尔兰人就称Paddy、Pat（= Patrick），美国又叫他们作Mick（= Micky）、Murphy。

一般叫Wales人作Taffy，这是出自一支通俗的摇篮歌（nursery rhyme），其全文如下：

Taffy was a Welshman，

Taffy was a thief.

Taffy came to my house，

And stole a piece of beef.

I went to Taffy’s house，

Taffy wasn’t at home；

Taffy came to my house，

And stole a marrow-bone.

I went to Taffy’s house；

Taffy was in bed；

I took up the marrow-bone，

And flung it at his head！

这个Taffy原是威尔斯对Davy（即David）一名的读法。正同俄国人把John读成Ivan一样。

Cornwall的人通称cousin Jack；Liverpool的人通称Dicky Sam；生在Lancashire的人就叫作Tim Bobbin，这可能是由于纺织而来的。美国俗语叫New England人作Johnny-Cake，不知是不是因为他们会做那种饼的关系。

澳洲人就称Aussie，当然是Australian的省略，又因当地产袋鼠而被称为Kangaroo，至于 Digger当系由挖金矿而来的。

法国人好吃青蛙，就叫他作frog-eater或Froggy。至于Gaul及Jean（Johnny）Crapaud，当然系由人名而来。现代的法国兵称为Poilu，是因为他们毛发丛生的关系。

德国人通称Hun，又称Fritz或Jerry或Bosch。所谓Hun实为匈奴，因第一次世界大战时，德国兵横行欧洲，正像第四、五世纪时匈奴横行欧洲一样，故借用此名。英国人又呼德国人为Cousin Michael。

Don Diego是指西班牙人，至于西班牙种的美国人，俗称Dago。

加拿大人叫作Canuck；意大利人就称Wop；日本人叫Jap，有时故意读成Yap，以示轻蔑。

Tannikin是指荷兰女人，Gin是澳洲女人，Bridget（Biddy）是爱尔兰的使女。

荷兰人被叫作Nic Frog或Mynheer；瑞士人是Colin Tampon；称俄国人为A bear；称土耳其人为Infidel。

Knickerbocker是指纽约市民，出自Washington Irving的History of New York by Diedrich Knickerbocker，大概是因为在New England的荷兰移民穿短裤的关系吧。伦敦人则被称为Cockney。

Ⅱ 代名词

14. Objective “it”

“英文要写得好很难，要说得好更难”一句，译成英文“It is very difficult to write English well，but it is still more difficult to speak well.”，据说错了，应在speak后加it一字才对，请就it的宾语用法扼要说明。

【解答】这也是中英两种语文不同的地方。中文常把他动词的宾语略去，而英文则非得说出不可。如问题中的英译句，write和speak都是他动词，write后有English一个宾语，speak后还得再说出宾语来，现为避免重复用English一字，改用代名词it来代替。下列各句同样的用法，值得注意，因为中文的宾语常被略去。

We would have appreciated it better if you had written to him personally.（如蒙亲笔去函，尤为感激。）句中的it是指“如蒙亲笔去函”，在中文应略，而英文则非要不可。

When you have received a letter，you must answer it as soon as possible.（接到别人的信，须马上回复。）英文在answer的他动词后，必须加上代表 letter的it字样，否则不通。

I never rely upon his word，for he never makes a promise with the will to keep it.（我从不信任他说的话，因为他总是轻诺而不履行。）

They say he has left town，but I do not believe it.（据说他已离开本市，但我不信。）英文在他动词believe后必须加代表he has left town的it一个宾语不可。

现就Objective “it”，举例如下：

The Japanese lorded it over the natives of Taiwan.（= played the lord with；domineered over）（日本人曾威凌台湾人民。）

The actress is starring it in the provinces.（= attracting great attention）（那女伶在各地方演出大为卖座。）

You’ll catch it ！（= You’ll be scolded，punished，etc.）（你将要受到处罚，挨骂。）

He is too old to rough it.（他年纪太大，过不了这种艰苦生活。）

He tried to swim it.（他努力想游过去。）

We must fight it out.（我们必须奋斗到底。）

Let us make an evening of it.（让我们愉快地过一个晚上。）

He had the best of it.（他成功了。）

He had the worst of it.（他失败了。）

We had nothing for it（= no alternative left）but to rough it out.（= face and overcome any difficulties that might arise）（我们没有别的办法，只好面对事实，克服困难。）

They are making a jolly life of it.（他们生活得非常愉快。）

You are in for it.（= You are caught in a critical situation，and can not escape.）（你现陷于困境，不得脱身。）

It’s very near，so you can walk it.（很近，你可以走去。）

现再就美国两位作家，一新一旧，对it的特别用法，例示如下：

Bob：I was at the appointed place on time. When you struck the match to light your cigar I saw it was the face of the man wanted in Chicago. Somehow I couldn’t do it myself，so I went around and got the plain clothes man to do the job. ——O. Henry：After Twenty Years（鲍布君：我准时到达了指定的地点。当你擦燃火柴来点雪茄时，我就看到了那个面孔正是芝加哥警方所要追捕的人。可是我自己不好意思拘捕你，所以我便走开去，而找了一个便衣警察来干这件事。）作者不说arrest you而用do it和do the job来代替，因为前文已经说明白了。

All he did was keep talking about some babe he was supposed to have had sexual intercourse with. Every time he told it，it was different. One minute he’d be giving it to her in his cousin’s Buick，the next minute he’d be giving it to her under some boardwalk. ——J. D. Salinger：The Catcher in the Rye（他只一味继续讲述和他发生过肉体关系的女孩子的事情。每次他说的时候，都有所不同。有时他是在从他表哥处借来的汽车里和她干那回事，有时他又在海滨木板铺成的步道底下来干。）

15. oneself的六种用法

“王先生和我本人都要到会的”一句，译成英文的“Mr. Wong and myself will be present.”，为何不对？请将myself的用法详为说明。

【解答】在古代英语中，曾经以me、him、them等单纯代名词，当作myself、himself、themselves来用，使之具有反身的意味（Reflexive Meaning），如Shakespeare说的“I have writ me here a letter.（我在此写了一封信。）”，及Byron说的“To their salutations he bends him slightly.（对于他们的敬礼，他略为弯身回答。）”。反过来具有-self的字，却用于没有反身的意思（non-reflexively）了，如“I am inviting yourself and your wife.（我要招待你和你的太太。）”。

所以问题中翻译的英文句子，在古代是通的，但现代英语却不许这样说了，必须改为“Mr. Wong and I will be present.”才可以。同样“They invited my wife and myself.”，句中末字也要改为me才合乎现代英语的语法。

现在且说这种-self代名词的正当的用法又是怎样的。

（1）用作他动词的宾语，句中主语和宾语为同一人或同一物时：

The child has burnt itself.（那孩子烫了自己。）

Jesus called himself the son of God.（耶稣叫他自己为上帝之子。）

Don’t excuse yourself.（不必道歉。）

（2）“他动词+反身代名词=自动词”时：

I seated myself（= sat down）beside him.（我在他旁边坐下了。）

Don’t overeat yourself.（勿过食。）

I have enjoyed myself very much.（玩得很愉快。）

（3）成为介词的宾语时：

You must take good care of yourself.（你必须善自珍摄。）

The door opened of itself.（门自开了。）

He always lives by himself.（他总是独居。）

You must do that for yourself.（你得自己做。）

He looked at himself in the mirror.（他对镜自照。）

Our captors left us to ourselves.（俘虏我们的人让我们自由行动，不加管束。）

（4）用于主语、宾语、补语的同格，以加强其意义，不加时意思也一样。

The matter itself is very clear.（事情本身很明白。）

He wrote the letter himself.（他亲笔写的信。）

Napoleon himself could not do it.（拿破仑本人也不能做到。）

Even the very gods themselves weep over the slavery of wisdom to folly. ——Carlyle（见到贤人为愚人所酷使，鬼神也为之哭泣。）

The old gentleman is hospitality itself.（那老人客气极了。）

（5）用于避免发生误会时：

She asked for a ticket for herself.（她为她自己买了一张票。）如用for her则可能是指别人。

（6）在比较时，用有than、like、so、as 时：

She is much taller than myself.（她比我高得多。）

The photo is not in the least like myself.（那照片一点也不像我。）

They are quite as well educated as myself.（他们和我一样受过高深的教育。）

比较：（a）He himself did it.

（b）He did it himself.

（a）近乎文言，（b）为口语；（a）有点装腔作势，（b）有点回想（after-thought）意味，这是根据Jespersen说的。

16. 关系代名词的位置

英文的关系代名词，应紧接在其先行词之后，但常见关系代名词与先行词之间，另加入其他的字，使二者有了距离。请就关系代名词的位置举例说明。

【解答】英文中的关系代名词（relative pronoun）是负有两重任务的，既作代名词用，同时又用作连词。作连词用的关系代名词，实和真正的连词完全一样，应置于其所连接的子句的头上是毫无疑义的。同时从它的代名词的机能看来，又得要最靠近它的先行词（antecedent），所以置于从属子句的头上，更是必然的事。

可是等到实际行文时，常因种种理由，不能完全照这样办，只好把它置于另外的字后面去，例如：“a man than whom there were few better fellows in the world（世界上没有几个比他更好的人）”。又如“I was brought to the place beyond which there lay the sea.（我被带到靠海不远的地方。）”。我们无法把句中的than和beyond移到别的地方去，非置于关系代名词之前不可。

他如during、considering、opposite、except等具有形容词性质的介词，也是如此。普通的介词，如of，亦莫不皆然，例如the mountain the top of which is covered with snow（山顶积雪），虽可说成the mountain of which the top is covered with snow，但决没有办法把of移到which的后面去，除非我们把of略去，即是不说the top of which，而说whose top，但这种对人的代名词，用于对物，也是要遭受非难的。

还有，我们说the top of which或of which the top，二者是没有什么分别的，但在别的情形时，换动一下，意义上就要发生变化了，例如：“He had two daughters，of whom one married a judge.（他有两个女儿，一个嫁了法官。）”，就与说“He had two daughters，one of whom married a judge.”有所不同，因为我们说of whom one married a judge就令人有一种预感，以后我们必将继续说and the other的，若说one of whom married a judge，就不会给人这种印象（Jespersen：M. E. G，Pt. III p. 188）。

在关系代名词前加用介词一类的字是很普通的，如加用不定词，就会使文章生硬，例如：“Moreover，there are books which are no books，and to read which is mere waste of time.（而且，有些无聊的书，去读它简直是浪费时间。）”。这个关系代名词，成为Infinitive的Object了。把这个不定词的to read，移到关系代名词的which的后面去，说成which to read is mere waste of time，也并不是不可以，不过最natural而又colloquial的说法，便是which it is mere waste of time to read的形式，这才是所谓good English。

如果在关系代名词的子句中，用上两个不定词，而同为关系代名词的宾语，其中一个置于宾语之前时，就要使其意义含糊不明了。英诗人Tennyson有句云：“Such a one do I remember，whom to look at is to love.（我记得这样一个人，令人一见倾心。）”。如果说成to look at whom is to love的话，其中的whom就不晓得是不是to love的宾语，如果说成whom it is to love to look at，也同样地意义不明，可见两个不定词用在一块儿，容易惹起观念上的混乱，是一种很拙劣的表现法。

17. 国家的代名词用she或it

国家的代名词有用she的，又有用it的，不知何者正确？

【解答】这两种用法都是正确的，何时用she，何时用it，才是我们要研究的问题。据文法书上说，地理的用it，而政治的就用she，但什么是地理的，什么是政治的，常不容易辨明，最好把政治的解释为人文地理的，地理的解释为自然地理的，也许比较明白达意，不过用法很不一定，人文地理的场合也有用it的例子。

把国家当作女性看待，是拉丁文法上性别（Gender）的遗留，现在已嫌古老，而倾于使用it了。所以与其说“Hangchow is famous for her scenic beauty.（杭州以湖光山色之美著名。）”，不如说“Hangchow is famous for its scenic beauty.”更合乎现代人的说法。但用she和her的例子还是不少。请看下举的例：

For two centuries Japan remained outside the main current of history. She lived on in a state of picturesque feudalism.（有两百年日本都待在历史主流之外，生存在一种如绘的封建制度的状态中。）

Ancient Rome subjected most of Europe to her rule.（古罗马使大部分的欧洲都归她统治了。）

England may well be proud of her poets.（英国要夸耀她的诗人也是有道理的。）

Great Britain has a fairly good climate. Its summers are not very hot，and its winters are not too cold.（大英帝国的气候很好。夏天不太热，冬天也不太冷。）

In 1948，two months after the treaty with Jordan was signed，Palestine became too hot a potato for Britain to hold any longer. She relinquished her mandate.（在1948年与约旦签订条约两个月之后，巴勒斯坦对英国变成了一个十分棘手的问题。英国便放弃了她的委托统治权。）

The government of the Republic of Vietnam has announced in Saigon that its forces currently are conducting operations in the Parrot’s Beak area along the Cambodian border.（南越政府在西贡宣布它的军队现正沿着柬埔寨边境鹦鹉嘴一带进行军事行动。）

18. oneself前加介词构成的片语

代名词oneself前加各种不同的介词，据说可产生各种不同的意义，请分别例解。

【解答】和oneself有关的常见的片语，计有for oneself、by oneself、of oneself、beside oneself、to oneself、in oneself六种，兹分别将其含义加以解释，并举例说明其用法如下：

（1）for oneself独力；自立。ISD上说without help from others and in order to benefit oneself，意即没有别人的帮助，为着自己的利益。例如：

You have opened for yourself the way to success.（你独力开辟了成功的道路。）

There are some things one can’t do for oneself.（有些事是自己不能独力做的。）

He is old enough to do for himself.（他年龄已大，足以自立了。）

He has built a house for himself.（i.e. for his own use）（他为自己建造了一幢屋子；他独力建成。）

If you had an eye in your head，you might see what she is for yourself.（如果你有眼睛的话，你就看得明白她到底是一个怎样的女人。）

照字面的本义来解释，当然是可以的，如：

This one I shall keep for myself.（这个我自己留下。）

又for itself = for its own sake（为其本身），例如：

He loves labour for itself.（他为着劳动而爱劳动〔不是为钱，也不是为体力运动〕。）

（2）by oneself独自，无伴，分开，退隐。alone，unaccompanied，apart，sequestered。例如：

She likes to take a walk by herself.（她喜欢独自散步。）

He did not like to leave his daughter by herself.（他不喜欢让他的女儿独自一人。）

It is a virtue by itself.（那本身就是一种美德。）

（3）of oneself自然地出于自动，自愿。spontaneously，in its own nature，separately considered，without the instigation or aid of another。例如：

He woke up of himself.（他自己醒来了。）

The door opened of itself.（房门自开。）

The candle went out of itself.（蜡烛自熄。）

Cholera，small-pox，etc. cannot originate of themselves. ——Avebury（霍乱，天花等不能自己发生。）

Books，she thought，grew of themselves. ——V. Woolf（她认为书籍是会自然增多的。）

London seems like a world of itself.（伦敦本身好像是一个世界。）

The league can do nothing of itself；it is nothing of itself.（联盟单独什么也不能做；它本身什么也不是。）

（4）beside oneself发狂，精神错乱。wildly excited，mad，out of one’s senses，crazy。例如：

His wife was almost beside herself with joy.（他的妻子欢喜若狂。）

He is beside himself with anger. ——Kirkpatrick（他盛怒忘形。）

Cathy，beside herself，gave the chair a violent push. ——E. Bronte（凯西发狂地把椅子用力一推。）

（5）to oneself私自，窃，心中。inwardly。例如：

I had kept the belief to myself. ——L. Bromfield（我把那个信念藏在自己心中。）

I chuckled to myself. ——Stevenson（我暗自发笑。）

He was chuckling to himself over what he was reading.（他对所读的书觉得有趣而不免私自发笑。）

I must write as though I were a person of importance；and indeed，I am—to myself，to myself I am the most important person in the world. ——Maugham（我一定要把我写成一个伟大的人；对我自己来说，我诚然是一个伟大的人呀。对我自己来说，我是这世界上最伟大的人了。）

下例中用的to oneself = by oneself、alone（独自），和上面的意思又有所不同了。

Life’s a wonderful thing，Kate，a thing one can’t live all to oneself，a thing one shares with everybody. ——Galsworthy（人生是奇妙的，凯特，是不能完全独自过活的，是要和大家分享的。）

Read that letter to yourself. ——Hornby（默读那信吧。）（to yourself = silently）

Left to himself，Mr. Hutton got up and began to wander round the room. ——A. Huxley（留下他一个人的时候，赫顿先生就站起身来，开始在室内走来走去。）

But，this，he acknowledged to himself，was a thing he had never done before. ——Lawrence（但是他自认这件事，是以前他从来没做过的。）

（6）in oneself 其本身，本来，不靠外力。independently of extraneous influence，apart from what is not essential to it。例如：

Lack of confidence in himself made him hesitate.（缺乏自信使他犹豫不决。）

A fine courtesy is a fortune in itself.（好的礼貌其本身就是一笔财产。）

These substances are not poisonous in themselves.（这些物质本身无毒。）

The charity in itself is admirable.（慈善本身就是可赞赏的。）

Diamond is hard in itself.（钻石本来是硬的。）

Our very existence is a miracle in itself.（我们的生存本身就是一个奇迹。）

19. 关系代名词的省略

There’s many people want to do the same.（很多人都想要做同样的事情。）在这句话中，为什么用了动词is，又用动词want，岂不是一句中用上两个动词了吗？

【解答】依照文法的规则，一句中只能有一个主语（Subject）和一个述语（Predicate，即一般所谓谓语——编注）。述语就是动词，如果一句中要用两个动词的话，就要用连词的and或or连起来，再不然就让第二个动词变成不定词（Infinitive）。前者如“He comes and goes.（他来来去去。）”，后者如“He come to see me.（他来看我。）”。但问题中提出的句子却不是这样，因为那原来是两个句子构成的，省去了一个关系代名词罢了。那句话本来应作 ：

There’s many people who want to do the same.

这是一种古老的说法，莎翁时代是很普通的，一直流传下来，在今日的口语中仍很通用。使我们感到一句中有两个动词的，是主格关系代名词省略的结果，至于宾格关系代名词也常省略，但我们不会觉得有什么异样，只认为更加简明，例如：

The book（that或which）I bought yesterday is very interesting.（我昨天买的那本书非常有趣。）

Buy it back from the man（whom或that）you sold it to.（从你卖给他的那人手里再买回来。）

不管是主格或宾格的关系代名词，只有在限定用法的时候才能省略。兹将主格关系代名词各种省略的形式，分别举例说明如下：

（1）关系代名词为补语时：

She is not the cheerful woman〔that〕 she was before she married.（她已不是结婚前那样快乐的女人了。）

I’m not the fool〔that〕 you thought me（to be）.（我并不是如你所想的那种傻子。）

（2）以There’s、Here’s开始的文句：

There’s a man at the door〔who〕 wants to see you.（门口有人要见你。）

There’s a gentleman〔who has〕 come to talk to you.（有位先生来跟你谈谈。）

Here’s a lady〔who〕 called about a cat.（有位太太为着猫的事来访。）

There’s lots of people〔who〕 would give a bit to know that.（很多人都极想知道那个。）（在口语中常以there is代there are用，本句中的a bit原为a little之意，但现作反语用，意为very much。正式用there are的当然不错，如“There are many surprising things〔that〕 happen in this world.”。）

There’s a lot〔that〕 goes on abroad this ship that I don’t like.（在这船上有很多事我不喜欢。）

（3）加强语气的It is . . . that 的句型：

It’s not everybody〔that〕 knows the right way to test perfume.（并不是人人都知道正当的试验香水的方法。）

It was I〔that〕 bought these flowers for Miss A.（为A小姐买了这些花的人是我呀。）

（4）在关系代名词后出现there is（are）时：

She taught me the difference〔that〕 there is between what is right and what is wrong.（她教了我好坏的区别。）

The number of mistakes〔that〕 there are in this homework is simply astounding.（在这份课外作业中错误多得惊人。）

I have seen all〔that〕 there is left to see in the city.（在市内未看完的东西我全部看了。）

（5）有插入句I know、we think等时：

She is just the type〔that〕 I always knew would attract him.（她确是能吸引他的那种典型的女性。）

Many of those qualities〔that〕 we think are typical of Americans in general were the result of this frontier life.（可认为是美国人一般的特征的许多那样的性质，是从边疆拓荒生活而产生出来的。）

（6）关系代名词为主语或宾语时：

The hinge is loose and the first wind〔that〕 comes along will blow the whole door off.（铰链很松，第一次刮风就会把整个的门吹掉的。）（主语）

I landed one once〔that〕 weighed two and a half tons.（我有一次钓到一条有两吨半重。）（宾语）

Ⅲ 形容词、副词

20. 虚设的否定字

有人说英文有时把肯定句改成否定句，意思还是一样。不知确有其事否？请举例说明。

【解答】在英文的表现法中确有这种现象。如云：

Do you like durians？

Don’t you like durians？

二句，同是问人爱不爱吃榴梿。

又有所谓修辞的疑问句，也是肯定和否定同义的，如云：

Can’t man change the world？

Man can change the world.

这是说人是可以改造世界的，修辞疑问中则加上否定字进去，实则意思是肯定的。又如：

What Tom has suffered！

What has Tom not suffered？

第一句为感叹句，意为“汤姆受了好大的苦呀！”。

第二句为修辞疑问句，意为“什么苦汤姆没有受过呢？”，当然是说他什么苦都受过了。

双重否定时，其中有一个否定字也是虚设的，如：

I shouldn’t wonder if it wasn’t the gin again. ——H. Green（哪怕又是毒酒我也不会感到惊异。）句中if it wasn’t = if it was。

There’s not a woman but doesn’t get an eye for illness.（没有一个女人对病痛不有识别力的。）这个but = who does not，所以but后的否定是虚设的。

Lawrence在Lady Chatterley’s Lover中说，I doubt you can’t实际的意思是I doubt you can。

再则因字义有不同的解释，故加上否定还是不影响原来的意思，如：

He excused my going there.

He excused my not going there.

这两句话，第二句加入not一字，意思还是和第一句一样。因为第一句中的excuse = dispense with（免除），而第二句中的excuse = pardon（原谅）。第一句是说免除他去，第二句是说原谅他不去，所以二者结果变成同样的意思了。

再看下面这两句：

What was my astonishment . . .

What was not my astonishment . . .

二者都是“使我吃惊的是”的意思，因为第一句是表示how great was my astonishment，而第二句则表示出no astonishment could be greater than mine was之意。

这种虚设的否定字不但英语中有，其他语文中也是常见的。英语还有与此相反的现象，即应说not的地方却不说，而说成肯定句，最有名的一句就是：

Don’t tell him more than you can help. = Don’t tell him more than is necessary.（能够不说就不说。）在more than以下本应作否定的you cannot help，但习惯上都用肯定的形式。

再举一例：

We don’t have guns through traffic more than we can help. ——Kipling（在街上走能够不带枪就不带枪。）

21. already和yet

下面两句英文在意义上不知有何不同？

（a）Have you seen it already？

（b）Have you seen it yet？

【解答】照一般规则，yet用于问句，already用于平叙句，如果把already也用在问句中，往往有惊讶的意味。（b）例是普通问句的说法，是问对方是否已经看过，而（a）例则表示惊讶，为什么这样快就看过了。例如马戏班来此表演刚第一天见报，而你就已经看过了，真想不到。

代替yet用于问句或否定句中的already，意思还是一样，不过多表示一点惊讶而已，再举例句如下：

Is he back already？（already = thus early）（他这样早就回来了吗？）

Is it 10 o’clock already？（已经就有十点钟了吗？）

You’re not leaving us already，are you？（你这样早就要走了吗？）

再看already正常用法的例：

The train has already left.（already = by this time）（火车已经开走了。）

When I called，he was already dressed.（already = by that time）（当我到他家时，他已经穿好衣服了。）

I’ve been there already，so I don’t want to go again.（already = previ-ously；before now）（那里我已经去过，所以我不想再去了。）

至于yet的普通用法，可分下列各种：

The work is not yet finished.（在否定句中yet = up to now、so far）（那工作还没有完工。）

We have had no news from him yet.（我们到现在还没有接到他的信息。）

Need you go yet？（你就一定要去了吗？）

Can’t you tell me yet？（yet = now）（你不能就告诉我吗？）

Have you learned to swim yet？（你已经学会了游泳吗？）

Be thankful you are yet alive.（yet = still）（你还活着，真是谢天谢地。）通常多用still。

I have yet（= still）more exciting news for you.（我还有更好的消息报告你。）

It’s the best yet found.（到现在为止还没有见到比这更好的。）

The enemy may win yet（= at some future time；before all is over），if we relax our efforts.（如果我松懈下来，敌人还是可以得胜的。）

As yet（= up to now or then）we have（had）not made any plans for the holidays.（我们至今〔或到那时为止〕还没有做出什么度假的计划。）

We shall not employ him nor yet is brother.（我们不雇用他，而且也不雇用他的兄弟。）

You must work yet（= even）harder.（你必须要再接再厉才行。）

I offered him still more，and yet he was not satisfied.（我对他说可以再多给些，而他还是未能满足。）

The logic seems sound，but yet it does not convince me.（尽管说得有理，但我还是不能信服。）

22. Indirect Negation

英文的一些否定句，并不一定有否定字的no或not，也不一定有准否定字的hardly、seldom、little、few等，请就这种不明显的否定句举例说明。

【解答】在英文中表示否定的方法有两种，一种是从字面上可以看得出来的，一种是从字面上看不出来的。前者句中多包含得有not、no、never、none、little、hardly等否定的字样，或单字本身头上或尾上接有dis-（disinterested、discomfort、disappear、disbelief、disadvantage、discourage），in-（inability、incapable、inconvenient、informal），non-（nonsense、nonstop、nonchalance），un-（unable、uninterested、uninteresting、uncomfortable），-less（aimless、matchless、penniless）等的字汇，而后者便完全没有这种否定字的出现，只在含义上表示出否定来，如：

Catch me doing it？（= I shall not do it.）

He a gentleman？（= He is not a gentleman.）

Am I my brother’s keeper？（= It is not my duty to keep my brother.）

What do I care？（= I don’t care.）

Have I money enough？（= I haven’t enough money.）

If ever I heard the like！（= I never heard the like.）

It is beyond my power to sell it cheaper.（= I cannot sell it cheaper.）

I am far from blaming him.（= I am not blaming him.）

His manners are anything but pleasant.（= His manners are not plea-sant.）

The beauty of the place is more than I can describe.（= I cannot de-scribe the beauty of the place.）

In April the metropolis is free from fog and mist.（= In April there is no fog and mist in the metropolis.）

She is not nearly so handsome as her sister.（= She is far from being so handsome as her sister.）

如上举各例所示不包含negative word的否定，便叫作Indirect Negation（间接的否定），这是属于修辞范畴的一种语言现象，在英文的表现法中，用例极多。

Am I a fool？（= I am not a fool.）

Who knows？（= No one knows.）

What should it know of death？——Wordsworth（= The child does not know of death.）

所谓nominative with infinitive（主语连不定词用）的构造，也是间接否定表现法的一种：

“What！” he（Utterson）thought，“Henry Jekyll forge for a murder-er！”——Stevenson：Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde

I to marry before my brother，and leave him with none to take care of him！——Blackmore：Lorna Doone

由conditional clause（条件句）来表达间接否定的也不乏名家的用例，及口头用语的字句，如：beshrew me、hang me、damn me、I’ll be hanged、I’ll be damned、the devil take me等，俯拾皆是。在莎翁的剧本中也到处可以看到I am a villain（a rogue，Jew，rook，etc.）的表现法。在口语中省略main clause而只说if-clause来表否定是极普通的。在剧本的对话中这种形式也是常见的。

Well，if I couldn’t sew at your age，Peachy，without pricking my fin-gers！——Galsworthy：Joy（呀，我在你这样的年龄，是不会拿起针来缝衣服就刺了手指的！）

Well，I’m sure！If this is English manners. ——Shaw：John Bull’s Other Island（这确不是英国的礼仪作法。）

As if Maurice would be a director if it wasn’t？——Galsworthy：Joy（如果不是这样毛利斯也不会当总裁的。）

Of course！What rubbish，Tom！As if any one ever invested money without making sure. ——Galsworthy：Joy（当然，真傻！不弄清楚就投资下去，有这样的人吗？）

I shall rise to the occasion，see if I don’t.（= surely I shall）——Giss-ing：The New Grub Street（到时候我一定会的。）

Catch me going with Annie Frost！——Priestley：Mr. Smeeth and His Family（我怎也不会跟安妮·弗罗斯特同去的。）

在口语中又常用反语来表否定，如说“Much I care.”，即为“I don’t care（much）.”之意，他例如：

Much good that would have done. ——Galsworthy：Strife（那大大有用。）〔反语〕

又the devil、the deuce也可表示否定：

“Sit down，my good people.” But the deuce a bit would they sit down. ——Hardy：The Return of the Native（“诸位请坐。”但是他们怎也不肯坐下。）

23. few、a few，little、a little

请就few和a few的分别，little和a little的分别，以及这两组的分别，加以例解。

【解答】这四者在意义上都是表示“少”的。few和a few是表不定的少数，与复数普通名词连用，而little和a little就是表不定的少量，与物质名词或抽象名词连用。a few和a little 是表示“有一点”，few和little则表示“几无”，有冠词的重点在“有”，无冠词的重点在“无”。这些字除了原来的形容词用法外，又可作副词或名词用，容在下列举例说明。

据COD的解释，few是表many的反对意念，a few是表none的反对意念。在ALD上的解释是few = not many；a few = a small number（of）。有人认为a few是指two or three是不对的，应当更多一点才对。例如with few exceptions（几无例外）、those of few years（年少者）、a man of few words（寡言的人）、a few people（少数几个人）、a few nights later（几个晚上以后）、a few weeks honeymoon（几个礼拜的新婚旅行）、a few dozen mines（几十个地雷）、a few hundred million dollars（数亿元）。little = not much，而a little = some though not much〔COD〕，同指数目的字一样，前者为否定，后者为肯定，用法也同。现分别加以例解。

A. 形容词。

Few people live to be 100 and fewer still live to be 110.（没有几个人活到一百岁的，活到一百一十岁的人更少。）

Which of you made the fewest mistakes？（你们谁错得最少？）

Have you a few minutes to spare？（我可以耽搁你几分钟吗？）

His books have not a few（= many）readers.（他的书有不少的读者。）

I have little money left.（我没有剩下几文。）

The doctor says that he has a little chance of recovery.（医生说他稍为有点恢复的机会。）

He has made not a little（= much）money on account of the business activity.（他因为生意发达赚了不少的钱。）

The children themselves，with little or no prompting，will suggest that . . . ——W. W. Sawyer（对他们什么鼓动的话都不说，孩子们自己也会提出要……的。）

We were a little ahead of schedule.（比预定的稍为快了一点。）

B. 名词。

A few of the children were desperately frightened.（有几个小孩吓得很厉害。）

A faithful few remained.（只剩下少数几个忠实份子。）

I know a few of these people.（这些人当中我有几个是认识的。）

He has seen little of life.（他没有见过世面。）

I know a little about it.（此事我知道一点。）

She did precious（= extremely）little to save herself.（她为自救可以说什么都没有做。）

C. 副词。

Won’t you stay a little longer？（你请多坐一会儿吧。）

Little did I dream of succeeding so well.（我做梦也未想到会有这样大的成功。）（注意）little 与dream、expect、think等动词连用时，有完全否定的意思。

在few或little前不用不定冠词的a，而改用定冠词的the，以及one’s、only、too、very 等字也是可以的。在few前还可以用these、those等限定词。例如：the few songs that they knew（他们知道的那几支歌）、these few days（这几天）、Fred’s few hobbies（佛来德的几种癖好）、every few years（每数年）、the same few popular pieces（同样几本适合一般人看的作品）。the few = the minority，是对the many = the majority说的。the chosen few是指选定的少数人。

To the idle few dress is a business；to the busy many it is a hobby.（对少数有闲的人，服饰是一件大事；对多数繁忙的人，服饰是一种癖好。）

I have seen only a few Russian films.（我只看过很少几部苏联的片子。）only a few与few 略同。

Very few people know it.（没有几人知此。）

There were too few of them.（他们为数太少。）

I see very little of him.（我很少见到他。）

The little of his work that I have seen seems excellent.（我只看过他极少一点儿作品，觉得很好。）

24. right bank of the river的方位

太阳出的方向是定在东方，因而帮助我们来决定东西南北的方位，我们北向站着，右手为东，左手为西，是很容易分辨的。至于左右之分，似乎就没有标准了；两人面对着，甲的右就是乙的左，甲的左就是乙的右。英文说一条河的right bank，到底是怎样来决定方位的呢？

【解答】所有的地图都是以北上南下右东左西为定位的，美国的大河密西西比河（the Mississippi）是由北向南流入墨西哥湾的，这从地图上看当然有一个左右之分。但中国的情形就大不相同，所谓“大江东去”，扬子江是由西向东入海的，地图上根本没有所谓左岸右岸。虽然如此，中国却有“江左”“江右”的说法。这是就地域来说的，不是指大江说，所谓江左，是指长江最下游一带地方，即现在的江苏省等地。《晋书·温峤传》上说：“峤见王导共谈，欢然曰：‘江左自有管夷吾，吾复何虑？’”因为那时东晋的都城是建康（即今南京），所以这样说。据魏禧著的《日录杂说》上解释：“江东称江左，江西称江右，盖自江北视之，江东在左，江西在右耳。”现在称江西省为江右，就是这样来的。中国的长江只有南北岸，而无东西岸，所以称江南江北才是最实际的说法。

现在我们撇开地图的方位不说，再来看看一般实际的情形。密西西比河在地图上的右岸，如果坐在下水船上来说时，左岸又变成右岸了。同样地，在长江中坐下水船的人，当然是把南岸视为右岸的。

问题中的right bank，本是可以由说话的人临时指定的，如果我们在书本上遇到这种说法，而又不能确定那河是横流的，还是直流的话，要找出正确的方位就很困难了。据1957年出版的M. Nicholson编的A Dictionary of American-English Usage上的说明是这样的：“说河的right bank是指一个人面向下流时右手的岸而言。”如巴黎人说的“右岸”，正是指Seine河的北岸而言。因该河是向西北流去的，略与我国东流入海的长河相反，右岸在长江则为南岸。至于美国由北向南的密西西比河，右岸乃其西岸。

从前有个笑话，在中国推行 “行人靠右”（keep to the right）的时候，有人就担心街的左边没有人走了。街也像河一样，是没有固定的左右的，去的人的右边，也就是来的人的左边呢。

英文有一句成语说give a person the right hand of fellowship，意为对人伸出友谊之手。中国人抱拳作揖，外国人就是伸出右手来与对方握手。为什么握手一定要用右手呢？这是因为西方人佩剑时总是用右手拔剑，如果互相握住右手，自然不能再来拔剑，这样友善自然表现出来了。

25. ever和once的用法

“我晓得我曾经遇见过他。我想那是两个月以前的事。”译为英文的“I know I ever met him. I think it was two months ago.”，有人说ever用的不对，请就此字用法，详为说明。

【解答】英译句中的ever，应改为once才对，因为once = at some time in the past或 formerly（往昔），在肯定句中常与过去时态的动词同用。例如：

Once there lived a queer fellow in the village.（从前村里有一个怪人。）

She was once very miserable.（她一度很悲惨。）

Egypt was a once powerful nation.（埃及曾经是一个强国。）

I was very fond of him once.（我往昔很喜欢他。）

至于ever一字，用于现在时态、现在完成时态及过去时态的疑问句中，才有“曾经”的意思；用于条件句及否定句中，则有“无论如何”的意思。

Did you ever go（= Have you ever been）abroad？（你出过洋没有？）

Have you ever met him？（= Did you ever meet him？）（你见过他没有？）

Is he ever at home？（他随时都在家吗？）

Nothing ever happens in this village.（在这村子里从来没有发生任何事。）

If you ever go there，be sure to visit the museum.（无论何时，你若到那里去，一定去参观博物馆。）

If you should ever come up this way，don’t fail to look in.（万一你走过我们这里，务请进来坐坐。）

在疑问句中ever常用来加重语气，含有“究竟”“到底”“的确”一类的意思，例如：

Why ever didn’t you go？（你到底为什么没有去？）

Which ever way did you go？（你到底要走哪一条路？）

What ever do you want？（你到底要什么？）

Who ever wants this？（谁会要这个？）

Where ever does she live？（她到底住在哪里呀？）

How ever has he done it？（他怎样做成的？）

又，英语中常用ever来代替always，意为“永远”。

You will find me ever at your service.（你会发现我永远是为你服务的。）

It ever has been so，and ever will be so.（过去如此，将来还是如此，永远不变。）

这个ever的字有时还含有否定的意思，几乎和说never一样了。例如：

He was the greatest sage that we had ever had.（= We never had a greater sage than he.）（他是我们曾经有过的最大的圣人。）

Never do it.（= Don’t ever do it. 口语）（永不要这样做。）

习语有seldom if ever = seldom or never，意为“难得地”，或“绝无仅有”，例如：

She seldom if ever goes to the pictures.（她难得去看电影。）

有时加上ever不过语气重一点，不加意思也是一样。如作“自从”解的ever since，单说 since也行。作“几乎不”解的hardly ever，单说hardly也是一样，不过语气为强。

I’ve known him ever since he was a boy.（从他孩提时起我就认识他了。）

I hardly ever see him nowadays.（近来很少看见他。）

26. a many（men）和 many a（man）

在书上看到有many a和a many两种说法，不知意义有何分别？many是复数，a是单数，单复不同，如何可以联在一块儿来用？这种表现法，现在是否还通行？

【解答】这两种说法都是比较古老的，含义却是一样。many a book = many books，可见不要冠词单说many时，也就是现代英语了。至于a many，如果加上great或good的字样到a与many之间，而成为a good many或a great many时，又成为现在颇为通行的说法了。a great many（很多）比a good many（相当多）语气要来得重些。例如：

In my mouth，there are a good many teeth.（我口里有相当多的牙齿。）

There we saw a great many interesting things.（在那里我们看到许多有趣的东西。）

many a = many times a（屡次有一个），each one of many（几多，多数中的每个），是文言文的表现，不过现代文中仍有时见到，如：

Many a man has tried to get rich without success.（许多人力求发财都未成功。）

Many a mickle makes a muckle.（集腋成裘。）

Many a true word is spoken in jest.（谐谑中易出真言。）

a many的说法就更古了。在表多数的many一字前，加上不定冠词的a，岂不变成“一个许多”了，初初看去，好像很矛盾似的，其实语文这东西，是只重习俗，而不重理智的，许多不合逻辑的说法，只要看惯了，也就不觉得有什么不通了。例如few也是表多数的，为什么说a many你觉得奇怪，说a few就不觉得奇怪了呢？这不过是习惯使然罢了。

a few的用法是从十三世纪开始的，大约是由此类推的结果，到了十六世纪时，便有a many这个说法的出现。Shakespeare就有不少a many的用例，如：

I do know a many fools.（Merchant of Venice，Ⅲ，v，73）（我知道有许多傻子。）

A many merry men.（As You Like It，I，i，121）（许多快乐的人们。）

A many men refused to recognize his authority.（许多人都不承认他是权威。）

英诗人Tennyson在Miller’s Daughter一诗中，也有：

They have not shed a many tears，Dear eyes.（那双眼睛并没有流出多少泪来。）

在牛津大辞典上说，“a many” is now somewhat rare in literary use（在文学上也少用了），不过我们知道在俚俗语（vulgar speech）中，却仍然在用，如：

“No，”says he，“I’m too old，b’sides I’m a many sizes too large.”——Dickens：Pickwick Papers（“不，”他说，“我太老了，而且我在许多尺寸上都太大了。”）

I don’t think you’ll see a many such. ——Dickens：Master Humphrey’s Clock（我想你不会见到许多这样的情形。）

They go to a many places. ——Ibid.（他们要去许多地方。）

27. more than的用法

英文的more than one除基本意思“较多”外，还有许多别的意思和用法，很难翻译，请举例说明。

【解答】所谓more than从文法上来说，是more than one的意思，它后面到底应该接单数动词还是复数动词，颇有讨论的余地。在《袖珍牛津辞典》上，特别注明要接单数动词，而文法权威Jespersen也说more than one writer，意思上很明显的是复数（the idea is clearly plural）；不过动词常易为其靠近的名词所吸引而说成单数，如：

More than one woman has been known to like her.（喜欢她的据说不止一个女人。）

美国文法家Curme就说，在这种情形，动词用单数是很普通的，不过用复数也可以，因为more可认为是一个plural indefinite pronoun（复数不定代名词）。他举例说：

More than one has（or have）found it so.（觉得这样的不止一个人。）

作“多”解的more，要给我们一个plural的观念是当然的；所以接在其后而用的代名词常为they、their，而不用单数的字样。不过如把more than看成一个phrase，而用作副词时，便有not merely的意思，而其动词便要与one一致而成为单数了。

《英文习语大全》上说，more than与形容词连用时，作“非但……尤有甚焉；更加，大大的”（not only . . .，but more than this）解，如“It is more than probable that he will fail.（十有八九他将失败。）”。至于与动词连用时，就作“深为”“岂特”（to do more than to）解，如“He more than hesitated to promise that.（他对答应那件事岂特踟蹰而已。）”，有简直是拒绝之意。

把more than用于形容词、动词或名词的前面，原是文法上一种破格的用法，尤其是用在动词前值得留意，以免译错。现就这些特殊的用法，举例如下：

You have already more than repaid me. ——Stevenson（你已经报答我绰绰有余了。）

He more than satisfied me.（他不只是使我感到满足而已。）

He is more than pleased with the result.（他对那结果深为满意。）

Roose’s cheeks were more than touched by the sun. ——Gissing（露丝的面颊深受太阳的伤害。）

He has more than 10，000 dollars—more than enough.（他有万元以上——钱多得绰有余裕。）

He more than smiled，he laughed outright. ——Rowe（他岂特是微笑，简直是大笑了。）

He has more than repaid my kindness.（他岂只是报答了我的帮助而已。）

She was dressed more than simply.（她穿得岂只是朴素而已〔简直近乎破烂了〕。）

I prayed to heaven in my heart that my boy，my more than son，might live. ——Haggard（我私自心里祷告，求上苍让我的孩子，我那心肝的儿子，活下去吧。）

Oh，great Sciolto！Oh，my more than father.（啊，伟大的西奥图！啊，我那单说是父亲还嫌不足的亲爱的人。）

这个more than又可置于to和infinitive之间，如to more than hint their knowledge in surmise（超过暗示他们臆测的知识）。在现代文中more than用得非常普遍，无非是要加强它所修饰的字。

28. 色彩的含义和用法

美国话说“He has a yellow streak in him.（他胆小。）”。美俗语说的yellow，有“懦弱的、卑怯的”的意思。正规英文的颜色字，除指色泽外，也应有其特殊的含义及用法，请举例说明。

【解答】彩虹七色，混合而成白昼，其中无黑色，故Dr. Jonson谓黑为夜色，是单独地和白日相对的。虹的色彩，实为七种基本色，但每色皆有浓淡明暗之分，同一颜色，可分出无数的shades来。英文所谓hue是指暗色或淡色，至于tint，则系指带一点那样的色泽（tinge）而言，例如说red with a blue tint，意即带蓝色的红色，通常又可说bluish red。

black除了为夜之色而外，又为煤炭、煤烟之色，有时又以 jet、pitch、raven来形容黑色。黑色为悲哀的颜色，所以在西方成为丧服之色。寡妇穿的丧服，英文叫作widow’s weeds，系全身漆黑。又黑为罪恶之色，例如：

For black is the color of evil. ——James Baldwin

所以英文说black deeds或crime of blackest dye，至于所谓atrocity（残暴）的atro-也是black 的意思。邪道的魔术，叫作black art，即necromancy。

The monks looked black. ——Browning：Fra Lippo Lippi（和尚们的脸色很可怕）。

所以这种black是令人嫌恶的（forbidding）。

white是雪、乳、象牙的色。

Upon a lowly Asse more white than snow.

Yet she whiter.

——Spenser：Fairy Queen

（骑在一匹比雪还白的矮小的白马上，可是她更要白些。）

白又是欢喜之色，白圭一般的纯洁无瑕之色，所以在西方，一生只穿一次的新娘结婚礼服（bridal gown），只限于白色。西方的风气和我们的不同，我们以白为丧服，是空白的意思，他们以白为婚服，是取其纯洁。不存心欺骗的无害的谎言，叫作white lie。这white是black的反义，有时也成为红的对照，所以有红色恐怖（red terrorism）和白色恐怖（white terrorism）的说法，以红为白的对照，正是中国的传统。

The White Terror，the rule of reactionaries.——Daily Herald（白色恐怖，反动者的统治）。

同一笔法，还有White Bolshevism及whitemail等等字眼。所谓whitemail是由勒索和敲诈的blackmail一字仿造出来的，意即如中国《水浒》上的侠义大盗，取人不义之财，以济善良。

The “white hope” of the Anti-Bolshevists. ——Observer（反布尔什维克的虚白的希望。）

意即面上涂一重白色的肤浅之物，正如whitewash之有specious（金玉其表的，似是而非的）之感一样。

To blanch and varnish her deformities. ——Milton（在她丑陋的地方涂上白色以作掩饰。）

又，whited sepulchre（白冢）中之whited一字，用法与gilt（镀金）相同。

red为虹的最上部的颜色，也就是血色，或红宝石（ruby）的颜色。vermilion是纯赤，crimson是倾于紫色的红色，scarlet则稍含黄色。

It was a fine morning and the sun lighted up to a scarlet glow the crim-son Jacket she wore . . . ——Hardy（那是一个晴天早上的事，她穿的深红色的上衣，被太阳照得出现一种猩红色的光彩……）

淡红色的有rose、pink、coral等。红色之成为革命之色，是起源于法国大革命时所用的红旗及Phrygia帽（bonnet rouse），而在十七世纪时，英国海军开始战斗所用的信号，也是举的红旗。总之红色是令人联想到斗争、危险等不稳的颜色。orange是chromatic flame（彩色的火焰色），由orange、melon、salmon、flesh这样慢慢地淡下来。

yellow是卑怯者的形容词，美国俚语常爱以yellow代cowardly，如yellow dog指可鄙的人。黄色又令人联想到死尸的cadaverous（如尸的灰白色的）的嫌恶的颜色。sallow是sickly 的颜色，所以疾病中以黄疸病（jaundice）最使人嫌忌。ochre是黄土色，略带红色。

green是绿宝石（emerald）的颜色，葱茏的树色，apple green则包含了大量的黄，所以成为淡黄色。green是一种青春之色，同时又是未成熟之色，带有gullibility（可欺）的意味，所以生手叫作greenhorn。这green有时又可表示嫉妒，所以jealousy的别名，叫作green-eyed monster。有名的Lincoln green是往时Lincoln地方染的鲜绿色的布料的颜色。

blue是天色，水色，碧眼儿的眼色。又是许多花的颜色。

The geranium is a pure divine（or human）blue. ——W. H. Hudson（天竺葵的颜色是人类灵魂之窗的蓝颜色。）

英国海军服为蓝色，英文说Navy blue，或译作海军蓝。所以bluejacket代表水兵。blue 又表示忧郁（blue-devils），我们可以说“She looks a bit blue tonight.（今晚她稍有忧色。）”。因为从前的几位女文人爱穿蓝色的袜子，所以bluestocking竟成为女学者的代名词，而blue women也是说有学问的妇女。但a blue talk却是猥亵之谈。

sapphire是一种透明的青玉，所以常用以形容沧海。lapislazuli（玻璃）也是青宝石，所以和有苍天之意的azure同源。indigo Indian（dye）蓝是deep blue，也可以形容夜色。中国所谓“青出于蓝，而胜于蓝”，意为弟子胜过老师，英文却无此种赞词，唯较之尤甚之意，则可译作out-Herod或out-Hamlet。英文blue一字，令人有高贵之想，如bluest blood，即指noblest family而言。blue ribbon有最荣誉之意，因而是Garter勋章之绶的颜色。

violet是虹最下部的颜色，中文对于那种英国诗人最爱的小花，叫作紫罗兰，实为紫蓝和青蓝之间的一种颜色。purple是一个富于弹性的名称，大致为牡丹色，与其说紫，实近于红。

The pale purple even

Melts around thy flight；

——Shelley：To a Skylark

（淡红色的黄昏，溶化在你飞翔之中；）

美国现今的royal purple，由黑（10%）红（17%）青（73%）的百分率而合成，古代的Tyrian purple以及英文《圣经》中译的purple，实为crimson之意。lilac为紫藤花色，淡一点的叫作mauve，即mallow（葵花）色，更淡的有lavender及heliotrope。

He believed the prominent note of it（Miss Durward’s costume）to be purple，or as some would say，lilac，and others mauve. ——Conad O’Rior-dru：In London（他相信德瓦得小姐所穿的衣裳的主调是紫色，有人说是紫丁香花的颜色，又有人说是艳紫色。）

brown是褐色，茶色，棕色，其浓者为dark brown、chocolate、coffee，其淡者为dun、drab、unbleached、tawny、buff等。maroon，为brownish crimson，即褐红色、栗色。terra-cotta 为红砖色，即焦土之色。russet系同一系统之色，为赤褐色，入冬的苹果，即系这种颜色。马的毛色有chestnut、bay、sorrel、roan，都是赤褐色即栗色。auburn是golden brown，西洋女人的头发，常用此字形容。tan为yellowish brown，即黄褐的皮色。

grey（美国拼作gray）是灰色（ashen），又是铅色（leaden、livid），而dark grey则带青（bluish）色。silver grey、dove grey、pearl grey、cafe-au-lait都是灰色系统的色泽。原来grey 是冷色，若带黄或红色时则变成温色了。

29. Adverbial Accusative

美国话说的“I saw him Monday.（我在礼拜一见到他。）”，句中Monday一字，分明是名词，为何可作副词来用呢？

【解答】应说on Monday副词片语的，而将介词省略了去，结果剩下的只是一个名词，美国这种把名词作副词用的办法，初初看去似乎是很不合理的，但研究一下所谓副词的宾格（Adverbial Accusative），就知道同类的用法，在英文中也是很多的。

凡表示时间、距离、数量、程度、手段、方法、模样、尺度等，在名词前不要介词，即可作副词用。如：

She has worked five years for nothing.（她白做了五年工。）

Mr. Lim’s class will not meet next Monday.（林先生下星期一不上课。）

There were plenty of empty seats the night I went.（我去的那晚空位很多。）

They walked ten miles.（他们步行了十英里。）

This will go a long way（= will be very helpful）in overcoming the difficulty.（这在突破难关时是很有帮助的。）

This stone weighs twenty pounds.（这块石头重二十磅。）

He stands six feet two.（= He is six feet two inches tall.）（他身高六英尺二英寸。）

He is every inch a gentleman.（他无论从哪方面看去，都可说是一个漂亮的绅士。）

Do it your own way if you don’t like my way.（如果你不喜欢我的办法，就照你自己的做吧。）

They sat tailor fashion.（他们两脚交叉地盘坐了。）

We always travel third class.（我们旅行老是坐三等舱。）

Can I have this book sent air mail？（我可以把这本书航空寄出吗？）

It’s getting warmer day by day.（一天一天地暖和起来了。）

They came face to face in crowd.（他们在人群中竟至对面碰到了。）

What time did you go to bed last night？（昨晚你何时就寝的？）

这些句子大都可以加上一个介词，而构成有副词作用的介词片语，如：

At what time did you go to bed last night？

Mr. Lim’s class will not meet on next Monday.

We always travel in this class.

She has worked for five years.

副词的宾格的用法，来源甚古，但说今日这种用法完全是继承古代的，实不足以说明，因为如“Bind him hand and foot.”一句中的hand and foot，在古代英语中就不是accusative，而只是dative。在现代英语中，宾格（objective case）可包含宾格（accusative case）和与格（dative case）二种，那就是说有种动词（完全他动词）可具两个宾语：一为直接宾语（direct object），一为间接宾语（indirect object）。直接宾语的格就叫宾格，表示间接宾语的才用与格。例如“I gave the boy a dollar.”或“I gave a dollar to the boy.”，其中a dollar是直接宾语（宾格），the boy是间接宾语（与格）。

普通文法书上把它作为adverbial objective看待，自然就没有accusative或dative的问题发生了。在介词发达了的中世以后的英语中，为什么还保留了这种以名词作副词的用法，也是很不容易说明的。英语中的dative case（与格）是有史以前的instrumental case（助格）或locative case（处格）的代用品也未可知，因为根据语言的发展史，文法上的某种形式消失的时候，必有他种形式代之而兴，不过使用的范围极其缩小，用法大有限制，所以dative也只限于用在时间、距离等方面了。

为什么它只限于用在时间、距离等方面呢？这当然是一个不容易回答的问题，不过我们就adverbial accusative的用例，仔细研究一下，便可发现一种共通的措辞法，那就是在名词之前，必有某种限定词，而那限定词和名词虽结合在一起，但各自在意义上都有相当的分量。如three（限定词）weeks（名词）；the next（限定词）morning（名词）等，二者都很重要，几乎难分轩轾。意义上的重要性，是由于加上限定词而产生出来的。

因为限定词的关系而增加了意义的重要，与介词的用否无关。“He returned the next morning.”已经很明白了，用不着要说on the next morning。所以这种说法，得保留下来成为adverbial accusative。但“He is older than I six years.”就非在six years前加上一个by字不可，否则意义不明，所以这种形式不能存在，除非说成“He is six years older than I am.”才行。如果没有this或next或数词等限定词时，在run errands、go a long way（walk）等语中，就很容易被视为同族宾语（cognate object），而把errands视为run的宾语，把way或walk视为go的宾语了。

30. not so . . . as，not as . . . as

照文法上说as . . . as的一种表现法，如为否定时前面的副词as应改为so，例如：“You are not so strong as I am.”。但在文人的笔下，常见not as . . . as的说法，不知not as . . . as和not so . . . as二者有何不同？

【解答】英文的as . . . as是表示同等比较的，否定时则常将第一个as（副词）改为so，成为not so . . . as，不过不改，而仍说成not as . . . as的，也习见不鲜。现代作家的笔下即常出现，例如：

I’m not as lucky as some people. ——Chandler：The Little Sister（我没有人家那样幸运。）

But she is not as old as you are. ——Maugham：Cakes and Ale（但她没有你这样老。）

He isn’t as handsome as my grandfather. ——Alcott：Little Women（他没有我祖父漂亮。）

Man is not as completely social as ants and bees，who apparently never have any impulse to behave in an anti-social manner. ——Russell：Has Man a Future？（人类不像蚂蚁和蜜蜂那样完全群居的，它们显然从来没有任何冲动想要做出一种反群居的行为。）

I may not be as strong as I think. ——Hemingway：The old Man and the Sea（我也许不如我所想的那样强壮。）

I’ve never been as sober as I am now. ——Caldwell：God’s Little Acre（我从来没有现在这样冷静。）

至于说到这个not as . . . as和not so . . . as的差异，多少是有的，不过只是微妙之差而已。简单地说一句not so . . . as比not as . . . as要来得强调一点，原因是so这个副词，原本就比副词as，意义来得强些。所谓强弱之分，看去好像是量上的不同，其实so和as之间是有其质的差异的。试就tall这个形容词，分别地冠以so和as来作实例的说明时，as tall，意为“同等高”，在比较上看来是静的，例如“Ned is as tall as Frank.（内德和胡兰同高。）”，是以Frank的身高为基准的，而Ned的身高只不过是和这个基准的高度相同而已。这时在观察者（即说话的人）的眼中，只见二人的头顶在同一水平上移动着。

现在再看so tall，便不是“同等高”的意思，而是“那般高”的意思。读者当易分别“同等高”和“那般高”之间的不同吧。“同等高”的比较方式是静的，而“那般高”的比较方式却是动的。心中先有一定标准的高度，然后“达到那样高”的意思。仿佛是从低处观察，而有达到那般高的感觉，观察者的眼睛与其说是水平地在移动，不如说是垂直地在移动，更能体味出这种差异来。

He has to go through the doorway with his head down. He is so tall.（他要低着头才能走过那门口。他是那样的高个子。）

上面这句话是不能说成He is as tall的。

以上只是将肯定的so tall和as tall之间的微妙的不同，乃至质的，而非量的不同，略加说明了一下。至于否定的not so . . . as和not as . . . as之间的情形也和这相像，同是质的不同。举实例来说明时，便是：

（a）Tom is not so tall as John.

（b）Tom is not as tall as John.

在（a）例的意思是Tom的身高没有达到John那种程度。而（b）例的意思则为Tom的身高和John的身高不同，所谓不同，从逻辑上来讲，本可以表示Tom高过John，不过英语中用not来表示否定时，一般都是说的不如，不是超过，所以现在说的不同，只是说不如他高的意思。

在（a）例的场合，观察者的眼睛是由下向上移动的，在（b）例的场合则相反，观察者的眼睛是由上向下移动的。我们在这里说的眼睛上下移动或是水平和垂直移动，都是象征的说法，并非真个那样移动，这只是心理的动，而非物理的动，读者不可误解。所以以上所说只是心情的作用，而非客观的事实。例如John身高六英尺，Tom才五英尺半，具有这样的客观的事实，说话的人仍然是可用主观的心情，以（a）例或（b）例的方式来表示的。

Ⅳ 动 词

31. 被动语态的两种意义

英文他动词的被动语态，据说除了表示被动作用之外，还另有含义，请就这种用法举例说明。

【解答】“be +他动词的过去分词”这个被动语态的形式，确有两种不同的含义。一则表单纯的被动行为，一则表被动的状态。例如：

（a）The gate is shut at ten o’clock.（大门十时关闭。）

（b）The gate is shut.（大门关着。）

在（a）句中所表现的被动语态，只是表动作而已。所以叫作Actional Passive（动作被动语态）；而在（b）句中虽同样地是表被动，但和说“The gate has been shut.”一样，意为“大门正关着”，是表状态的。所以叫作Statal Passive（状态被动语态）。在（b）的场合，shut一字，多少带得有点形容词的作用，我们由下举的例子更容易看得出来。

The gate is opened at six o’clock.（六时开门。）

The gate is open.（门开着。）〔形容词〕

通常用（a）式的文句有：

He is easily taken in.（他容易受骗。）

Foreign names are easily forgotten.（外国名字容易忘记。）

I am called every morning at six.（每天早上六时有人叫醒我。）

通常用（b）式的文句有：

The key is lost.（钥匙丢了。）

She is dressed in white.（她穿着白衣。）

His signature is attached to the document.（文件上有他的签名。）

He is tired.（他疲倦了。）

His gun is loaded.（他的枪上了子弹。）

His leg is broken.（他腿断了。）

He is married.（他结婚了。）

The matter is settled.（事情解决了。）

I am prepared.（我准备好了。）

比较：

Our house is painted every year.（我们每年都要油漆房子。）

Our house is painted.（我们房上的油漆未干。）

His bills are paid regularly every month.（每月付账。）

His bills are paid，so he owes nothing now.（他账单已付清，所以他现在不欠人一文钱了。）

Here in 1823，the Indians were surrounded by the English.（1823年印军在此曾被英军包围。）

The house is surrounded by firs and birches.（屋子周围都是树木。）

The whole city is illuminated on such occasions.（此际全城都被照亮了。）

The whole city is illuminated tonight.（今宵全城灯火如昼。）

The children were dressed every morning by their mother.（每天早上母亲为孩子穿衣。）

He was dressed in the latest fashion.（他穿着最时髦的服装。）

They were married last year.（他们去年结婚。）

At the time，we were not yet married.（那时我们还未结婚。）

I am afraid we may never be married.（我恐怕我们不能够结婚。）

They may not be married.（他们大概还未结婚。）

We have just been married.（我们刚结婚。）

They have only been married a week.（他们才结婚一个礼拜。）

如以上所举各例，（a）（b）同一形态，有时为着使之有所不同，常将（a）句中的be改为become或get（主要是口语），这样一来，就变成单纯的动作了。

Our house gets painted every year.（每年要油漆一次）

His mind is filled with a fervour of anger.（变得满怀忿怒）

I don’t know when I got acquainted with him.（不知何时认识他的）

A lot of people got killed.（死了许多人）

Those who kill snakes get killed by snakes.（杀蛇者常被蛇咬死）

Why don’t you get married？（为何不结婚）

You will soon get used to it.（很快就习惯）

32. 动词read的各种用法

“这读来奇怪。”英文说：“It would read oddly.”。请就read的这种特殊用法，及其他不作“读书”解的用法，举例说明。

【解答】“It would read oddly.”句中的read是自动词，意为affect the hearer when read。他例如：

This book reads interesting.（这书读来有趣。）

This play reads better than it acts.（这个剧本上演不如阅读有趣。）

This autobiography reads like a novel.（这本自传读来像小说一样有趣。）

How does the sentence read now？（现在改过了，你看这句子何如？）

作自动词用的read除“阅读”一义外，还有下列各种用法：

（1）读知：“I have read of the accident in the newspapers.（我在报上读到那事故的报道。）”。

（2）研读：“He is reading for Master’s degree.（他在读硕士学位。）”。

（3）有某些字样：“The sentence reads as follows.（此句文字如下。）”。

（4）有某种解释：“The rule reads two different ways.（这规则有两种解释。）”。

（5）写明：“This ticket reads to Paris via Siberia.（票上写明经由西伯利亚到巴黎。）”。

自动词read的past participle，又可作形容词用，如下例中所用的一样：

He is deeply read in English literature.（他对英国文学有深湛的研究。）

There is no one so widely read but that he may make pleasant discover-ies among authors that are new to him.（没有谁有他那样博览群书的，哪怕是对他很生疏的作家，他都可能有新的发现。）

作他动词用的read，也有几种用法值得注意的：

（1）勘误：“For ‘fail’，a misprint，read ‘fall’.（fail为 fall 之误。）”。

（2）校订：“For ‘China’ another version reads ‘India’.（另外一个本子上面，不作China而作India。）”。

（3）在议会中提出：“The bill was read for the first time.（议案已付第一读。）”。

（4）表示度数：“The thermometer reads 80 degrees.（寒暑表上华氏八十度。）”。

（5）宣布原因加以除名：“For that reason he was read out of the party.（他就为着那个原因被开除党籍。）”。

（6）判断：“Your silence will be read as consent.（你不作声就会被看作是同意的。）”“He can read a dream.（他会判梦。）”。

（7）理解：“You must read something between the lines.（你必须理解字里行间的意思。）”。

（8）阅读：“The Bible is the most read of all books.（所有的书中以《圣经》读的最多。）”。

33. 自动词、他动词用法的混淆

“人们对于物价高涨频出怨言”一句话，英译为“People often complain high prices.”，不知有何不对？

【解答】英译句中把自动词用作他动词了，错误就在动词上。自动词是不能直接接宾语的，如一定要接宾语就得有介词为媒介，正确的译文为：

People often complain about high prices.

中英观念不同，我们说他动而英文要说自动；我们说自动，而英文又要说他动，因而翻译时不免有错。现将这一类容易弄错的英文动词，自动或他动，择其要者举例说明如下：

（A）易误用作他动词的自动词：

（1）“他不同意女儿的婚事。”英译为“He did not consent his daughter’s marriage.”就错了，因为consent是自动词，后面应加介词to才能接宾语，即“He did not consent to his daughter’s marriage.”。

（2）“生病是他缺席的理由。”英译为“His illness accounts his absence.”便错了，作“说明（理由）”解的account是自动词，不能无介词就接宾语，全文应改正为“His illness accounts for his absence.”。

（3）“那贮水池将增加本市的美观。”英译为“The reservoir will add the beauty of our city.”是不对的，因为add在此为自动词，后面须加一个介词to，如用increase就不必要介词，全句应作“The reservoir will add to the beauty of our city.”。

（4）“他所有的努力均归无用。”英译为“All his efforts avail nothing.”是错的，因avail在此为自动词，应说“All his efforts avail to nothing.”。

（5）“我们对这样一个伟大的人逝世同感悲伤。”英译为“We all grieve the death of such a great man.”。句中的grieve在此为自动词，故后须接用一个介词才通，在此可接at或over或for都可以。

（B）易误用作自动词的他动词：

（1）“你要去开会吗？”英译为“Are you going to attend at the meeting？”是不对的，因为作“出席”解的attend是他动词，后面不可接用介词at，应说“Are you going to attend the meeting？”。作自动词用的attend，意为“照顾”（与to连用），如“I have my business to attend to.（我有自己的事情要照顾。）”。

（2）“我们讨论那问题直到深夜。”英译为“We discussed about the problem far into the night.”。应将句中的about去掉才通，因为discuss是他动词。

（3）“她在做菜上要胜过我。”英译为“She excels over me in cooking.”是错的，因为“胜过”的过字不需译出，应从句中将over删去。

（4）“他和一个有钱的女子结婚了。”英译为“He married with a rich girl.”。句中作“和”字解的with应删去，因为marry在此为他动词。

（5）“他在桌上敷了一张白布。”英译为“He covered over the table with a white cloth.”是不对的，应将句中的over删去，因为cover在此为他动词。

（C）易误用的自动词：

英文有些自动词，是可能用作被动的，如：

Everybody laughed at him.（自动）

He was laughed at by everybody.（被动）

但另有少数的自动词，是不能用作被动的，如下面四句都是错的：

（1）Great advantages are accrued from this measure.

（2）What will be ensued on this？

（3）The plan was proved a failure.

（4）The ship has been attempted to be salved.

作“结果”解的accrue，作“随着发生”解的ensue，作“变成”解的prove等是只能用作自动，不能用作被动的。各句应改正为：

（1）Great advantages accrue from this measure.

（2）What will ensue on this？

（3）The plan proved a failure.

（4）It has been attempted to salve the ship.

最后一句更好的说法是“An attempt has been made to salve the ship.”。至于“The ship has been attempted to be salved.”，虽有人说，实际是不通的，因为the ship并不是have attempted的宾语，所以不能成为相应的被动的主语。动词have attempted的真正的宾语是to salve the ship，所以只好用填补词it来作形式上的主语，以避免用the ship作主语，不过这两个被动构造都是不妥的，如能改为an attempt has been made，以代替it has been attempted就通顺多了。

（D）易误用的他动词：

（1）“我建议你整个重新做一次。”英译为“I suggested you that you should do the whole thing over again.”。句中的他动词suggest，不是dative verb（授与动词），所以不能以you为间接宾语（参考：“I told her that she was right.”。句中her为间接宾语，that she was right为直接宾语），应改为“I suggested to you that you should do the whole thing over again.”。

（2）While I was laying there trying not to think，I heard old Stradlater come back from the can and go in our room. ——J. D. Salinger（当我躺在那儿尽力不想事的时候，我听见老史从厕所回来，走进我们同住的房间了。）美国口语中常将他动词的lay误作自动词的lie来用，正如Evans说的：“At present the verbs lie and lay are hopelessly confused in many people’s minds.（在许多人的心目中，现在用lie和lay两个动词时混淆得不成样子。）”。

34. succeed in doing

“人类完成登月壮举。”英译为：“Man succeeded to land on the moon.”。有人说译错了。请指示正确的译法，并说明上句错误的所在。

【解答】译文确是错了，因为作“成功”解的succeed是一个自动词，不可作他动词用。即是说，在succeed后不可接用宾语的to land，而应用介词作媒介才可接宾语，所以这句话的翻译，应该是：“Man succeeded in landing on the moon.”。或更正确地，“Man succeeded in achieving the unpre-cedented feat of landing on the moon.”。

在succeed in的后面不一定要接动名词，接名词也是可以的，如succeed in everything（做什么事都能成功），succeed in life（立身，成就，发达），succeed in one’s business（营业发达，事业成功）。但如果接动词的话，就得用动名词，因为是置于介词in的后面，成为介词的宾语，自然非名词或动名词不可。

这个succeed不一定要说“人”，说“事”也是可以的。说人时指他的“成就”或“成功”，说事时指事“成”，或“有成效”或“收效”。如succeed in doing something（做事获得成就）。

英文说的succeed in，中文有时可以不译，如“He succeeded in winning the first prize.” ，译为“他获得首奖”（见《英汉模范字典》），用不着要译为“他成功了获得首奖”，反而有欠流利。也许有人要说，如果丢掉succeed不译的话，则和说“He won the first prize.”又有什么分别呢？不译确是没有把原文的意思完全表达出来。查succeed in，据Advanced Learner’s Dictionary of Current English的解释为“do what one is trying to do；gain one’s purpose”（做一个人想做的事；达到目的）。再看New Century Dictionary的解释，则为“accomplish what is attempted or intended；be successful in an endeavor or undertaking”（完成企图或想做的事；在努力或事业上成功）。我们现在明白了加上succeed in和不加用时，在意义上确是有点不同的。说“He won the first prize.”，只是说他获得了首奖，可能是侥幸，也可能是未遇到敌手，绝没有表出他曾下过苦功，或努力争取的意志，唯有加上succeed一字进去，即说成“He succeeded in winning the first prize.”，才能表出这种完成企图或达到目的的意思，所以这句话如果要把原意译出的话也许不妨译为：“他获得首奖，如愿以偿。”又如美国人这次登月成功，绝非侥幸所致，而是努力了多少年的结果，所以不可用单纯的过去动词，必须说成succeeded in landing才能表出这种成就不是轻易得来的。

I hope you succeed in passing the examination.（我希望你考取〔则努力没有白费〕。）

They succeeded in reaching the top of the mountain.（他们终于到达山顶了。）

He succeeded in solving the problem.（他终于把那问题解决了。）

He is fortunate in not belonging to those who，in seeking to be every-thing，succeed in being nothing.（他幸而不是一个什么都想做结果什么都不成的人。）

I have succeeded in persuading him.（我对他的劝说成功了。）

I have not yet succeeded in seeing him.（我还没有能够见到他。）

这个succeed in不一定指有意做的事，如：

He tried to win us over to his side，but succeeded in helping us to see through his trick.（他努力想争取我们到他那一边去，但结果却让我们看穿了他的诡计。）

成功固然是好事，但succeed in并不一定指好的事，如：

She somehow succeeded in giving him the impression that he was in her way.（她反而使他感觉到他自己是在妨碍她。）

35. know better

Don’t you know any better？翻译为“你不知道更好一点吗？”似乎不通，不知应如何翻译才对？

【解答】know better照字面译为“知道更好”，是不对的，因为know better = be wiser。依照《英文习语大全》的解释为：“know that it is not as it seems or is represented；have learnt better from experience；hence，be more prudent or discreet（than to do something）”（知其与表面所见者有异，知其不然，由经验而知之较详，故较为审慎）。这还算是基本意思。我们要讨论的虽是know better，但不妨从know better than说起。Jespersen说“比较级+ than”与too 同义，“He knows better than to do.” = “he is too clever to do.”。这种表现法在than后多用不定词，且多半用有“to”的不定词，但偶也有用无“to”的不定词的。例如：

We now know better than to make such concession.（现在我们已经不这样愚笨地让步了。）

Gwen knew better than to argue the point. ——Walford（格文再也不愚笨地去议论那一点了。）

They knew better than come to my front door. ——A. Bennett（他们聪明地没有来到我的门前。）

I know better than to do such a thing.（我不做这样的蠢事。）

You should have known better than to trust such a man.（你不应愚蠢到来信任他。）

He should know better than to quarrel with his bread and butter.（他不应蠢到来和他自己的衣食父母作对。）

You should know better than talk nonsense.（你不应这样胡说。）

现在再来看没有than的说法。

You should know better at your age.（以你的年龄，不应再做这种蠢事。）

He is too much of a man of the world not to know better.（如彼精通世事的人，当无做此事之理。）

Let him take a good-sized stick，and not scruple to use it，and she will soon know better. ——Arabian Nights（让他拿一根粗大的棍子，而毫无忌惮地去使用它，她马上就会停止的。）

Fools may believe you，but I know better. ——F. M. White（傻子也许会相信你，但我决不会。）

Such a man as he ought to know better.（像他那样的人应该不会做此蠢事的。）

The block-head should have known his company better.（那个傻瓜要能早认清他的同伴就好了。）

说I know better，在日常的谈话中，可作一种委婉说法用，意即“随便你怎样说，我是不会受骗的”（I am not deceived）。

此外，对于别人的行为失检，也常说：“He doesn’t know any better.（他居然有这样笨）。”。有人一言不合，就口角起来，我们可以对他说：“Don’t you know any better？（难道你不能理智一点吗？）”。

36. 以现在时态表未来

英文表示未来，常不用未来时态的动词，而采用现在时态的动词，这种用法是否正确，请予指示。

【解答】英文常用现在时态表示未来，兹分述如下：

（A）表示未来的Present Tense：

用现在时态来表示未来，本是一种古代的用法，现今还是颇为盛行，不过常要加上一个未来的副词，以表示时态而已。

为要决定那样一个句子的时态，只有从它的前后文，或前后文中的一两个字来判断。它可以用副词或副词的系词（Adverbial Adjunct）来表示未来，例如：

“Well，”he said at last，“if you must go，you must. When do you start？”——Galsworthy（“好吧，”最后他说，“你一定要去，也没有办法。什么时候动身呢？”）

He muttered his faith. “It comes. It surely comes. Tomorrow I be-gin.”——Wells（他含糊地说出了他的信心：“那会来的。那一定会来的。明天我就开始。”）

We’ll walk to the station，but I don’t know when the train comes.（我们走到车站去吧，但我不晓得火车什么时候到。）

I wonder if he tries again.（他是不是会再来一次。）

它又可以用 Conditional Clause（条件子句）来表示未来，例如：

If you cry out，I kill you. ——Kipling（你要叫喊的话，我就杀死你。）

I don’t intend you to marry him. If you do，you ruin him. ——Bennett（我并不打算要你跟他结婚。如果你跟他结婚的话，你就会把他毁了。）

If I fail，I pay the penalty，not he. ——Compton Mackenzie（如果我失败了，我受处罚，而不要他受处罚。）

它又可以用前后文，或支配的动词（the governing verb）来表示未来，例如：

I am not going home with you tonight，mother，I sleep at Connie’s. She will not refuse me a bed. ——Locke（妈，今晚我不跟你回家去了，我住在康尼那里。她会留我住的。）

I wonder he doesn’t retire. ——Bennitt（我亟想知道他到底会不会引退呀。）

Mr. Wang and Mr. Li had a bet；I wonder who wins.（王先生和李先生打了赌，不晓得是谁胜。）

I hope she plays one of Mozart’s sonatas.（我希望她弹一曲莫扎特的长调。）

I hope he doesn’t forget all about it.（我希望他不要把这一切都忘了。）

（B）表示未来的Present Progressive：

现在进行并不一定是表示动作的继续，而常可用来表示未来，如I am going（coming、leaving、sending）等等表运动的动词，自不待言，即其他的动词，也可有那种用法。

（1）用副词或副词的系词来表示未来的：

I’m addressing a big meeting in South London on Sunday night. ——McKenna（我在星期天晚上要到南伦敦一个大的集会上去演讲。）

I’m dining with him this evening. ——Locke（今晚我将和他共餐。）

“What are we doing after lunch？”asked the Commodore. ——Galswor-thy（“吃过午饭之后，我们要做什么？”司令官问。）

We’re having a party in our rooms tonight. ——Mackenzie（我们今晚在我们的屋子里开茶会。）

I’m planting a lot of acorns this autumn too. ——Kipling（今年秋天我们也要来栽种许多橡树的种子下去。）

I’m sleeping here tonight，you know，for the first time. ——Mackenzie（你知道，今晚我是第一次在这里睡。）

Guy，they are only staying a week. ——Ibid.（盖伊，他们只住一个礼拜。）

（2）用前后文来表示未来的：

“I’ll see if life is any sweeter at your supper-party，doctor，”he re-marked，“I suppose you’re not cancelling my invitation，are you？”——McKenna（“博士，让我看看在你府上的晚餐会中的人生，是不是会更要美满些，”他说，“我希望你不要取消对我的招待。”）

“What are you going to do，Daphne？” asked her mother impatiently. “Your father and I are dining out，and you’ll be alone if you dine here.” ——Ibid.（“达芙尼，你要怎么办？”她母亲不耐烦地问。“你父亲和我都要出去吃饭，如果你要在这里，你就是一个人吃饭。”）

Yes，Mrs. Soames was in，but the maid did not know if she was seeing people. ——Galsworthy（是呀，苏夫人那时虽在家，但女仆不知道她是不是见客。）

“When are you coming？”she interrupted，“Not for a day or two，”I answered regretfully. “I’m spending Whitsun with the Rodens.” ——McKenna（“你什么时候来？”她插嘴问。“一两天之内不行，”我遗憾地回答，“我要去罗亭家过圣灵降临节。”）

这种用法近来好像很流行，新作家McKenna特别喜欢这样用，尤其是对于dine、do、see一类的动词为然。

现在一切求单纯化，许多复杂的动词形式都尽量少用，而采用最基本的现在式来代表，这也许是现代英语的一个倾向吧。

37. lay作lie用，lay = coitus

美国作家J. D. Salinger在他著的《麦田里的守望者》一书中有句云：“While I was laying there trying not to think，I heard old Stradlater come back from the can and go in our room.”。为什么不说lying，而要用他动词的laying，不是违反文法吗？

【解答】Salinger此书是用美国俗语写的，在美国俗语中，常将他动词的to lay，当作自动词的to lie来用，例如问题中所引用的句子，正规的英文自然应说while I was lying there才对。请看下列用法：

（自动词）I lie　I lay　I am lying　I have lain

（他动词）I lay　I laid　I am laying　I have laid

报纸上的英文，也不是正规的英文，常爱用一些新字、外国字及俗语，也不讲究文法，且泛滥着美国的英文，例如1970年4月18日新加坡的The Straits Times上，就载有一则路透社伦敦消息：

A mother of 11 children told a divorce court judge here yesterday：“I’ve had enough of sex.”

And the Judge replied，“I’m not surprised.”

The judge rejected a plea for divorce by Mrs. Margaret Bushaway’s husband，Mr. Ronald Bushaway，who alleged that his wife committed adultery with a coloured man in a forest outside London.

Mr. Justice Faulks commented：“I don’t believe that she was so bursting for sex that she would lay down on her back in Epping forest with a coloured man 12 years younger than herself.”

Mrs. Bushaway was granted a decree on the ground of cruelty by her husband，which he had denied.

消息中说法官不相信一个有了十一个孩子的母亲，还会那样情不自禁，要到森林里去和一个比她小十二岁的黑人去苟合的。原文说“she would lay down on her back . . . with a coloured man”，当然是she would lie down的俗语说法，“仰卧”一定是自动，不应该用他动词，但美国俗语，却是以lay来代lie用的。

据Wentworth和Flexner合编的Dictionary of American Slang上说，他动词的lay = coitus（性交），所以说lay a woman down，就是说和她性交。例如C. Willingham著的End as a Man 上说：

She went to a doctor and found out the truth，then rushed to General Draughton and named the man：Pete Layne. But Layne immediately pro-duced five cadets who swore they’d all layed the girl one night on Jamaica Shore.

可注意的是他不说laid，而说layed。lay如作名词用，意为性交的女人（a female considered only sexually），例如：

Both agreed that the two girls looked like swell lays. ——J. T. Farrell

38. 某些过去动词+完成不定词

“I had intended to call on you.”和“I intended to have called on you.”二句有何不同？含义怎样？

【解答】这两句话的含义是一样的，一则是把过去放在主动词上，一则是把过去用完成不定词来表达，结果都是说过去想做的事未能实现。一般常用的表现法是“过去动词+完成不定词”。

完成不定词用于hope、expect、intend、mean（= intend）、want等动词过去时态之后，是表示未实现的过去的希望、期待、意图、欲求等，如：

I intended to have called on you，but was prevented from doing so.（我原想来看你，但因事未果。）

普通只消说“I intended to have called on you.”就够了，不必说后面的“but was prevented from doing so”，意思已然很明白了。

I expected to have met him here last night.（昨夜我以为在此可以见到他的。）

We meant to have stayed there a week.（我们原打算在那里待一个礼拜的。）

I wanted to have seen you ever so much.（我真想能见到你。）

I thought to have written a line to her，but forgot to do so.（我原想写封信给她的，不意忘记了。）

说 “was〔were〕+完成不定词”，也是表示未实现的过去的决定，如：

We were to have met at six o’clock.（我们原定六点钟碰头的。）

39. lose = forget

看到美国一家帽子店的广告说：“Don’t Lose Your Head—It’s The Best Part Of Your Body.”。为什么说“不要失去理智”，帽子与理智何干？

【解答】查《英文习语大全》627页lose one’s head这个成语，有下列解释：（1）照字面解为“be beheaded ”（授首，被斩，身首异处）；（2）引申意义为“become confused”（慌张，狼狈周章，仓皇）。最新《实用英汉辞典》也举有这个成语，但只有一个意义，即“lose one’s head（= get excited）”（失去理智；情感冲动）。但这些解释在此都不适用。帽子店的广告，决不会说什么砍头或失去理智一类不好听的话，脑袋都搬了家，还用得着帽子吗？广告上说的这个lose是“have slip from sight，hearing，attention，etc.”（从视、听、注意等中溜走）的意思，简单地说，就是“忘记”（forget）。整句的意思是：“不要忘记你的头——那是你身体上最重要的一部分。”他例如：

I have lost my French.（我的法文已忘记了。）

I’ve just lost his name.（我一下想不起他姓什么了。）

40. 现在完成时态与过去副词同用

照文法规定，表示过去的副词如ago、yesterday、last night等，是不能和现在完成时态同用的，如我们不可以说“He has left two days ago.”。为什么Maugham在Christmas Holiday 中又有“It’s been decided long ago that the only liberty worth anything is the liberty to do right.”的说法呢？

【解答】表肯定过去的副词，如 yesterday、last year、two days ago、in 1969等等，诚然是不可以和现在完成时态同用的，我们不可以说“He has left two days ago.”，只能说“He left two days ago.”，或“He has left for two days.”，意思都是一样。原因是现在完成时态是表从过去到现在的一段时间，如果加上过去副词，就不能延展到现在了。但笼统地说过去，而不局限于过去的某一时日，则是可以和现在完成时态同用的。上举毛姆的文章，便是“从古以来就决定了”（has been decided long ago），没有指出过去某一时，某一日或某一年来，单说“老早”是漠然地指过去，所以是可以和现在完成时态同用的。属于这类笼统说法的还有before、formerly、previously、in past times、in the past、in former times，例如：

To understand this，we must know that in past times the earth has gone through great changes.（为要了解这点，我们必须知道地球在过去是经过大变迁的。）

I’ve helped you in the past . . . Why don’t you help me now？——Cronin：The Northern Light（我以前帮助过你……为什么你现在不肯帮助我一下呢？）

The historians must find out the events that have occurred in the past. ——World Book Encyclopedia（历史家必须找出过去所发生的事情。）

Militarists，in the past，have often been able to achieve their aims. ——Russell：Psychology and East-West Tension（黩武主义者在过去，时常能够达成他们的目的。）

There have been many dreadful tyrannies in past history. ——Russell：Has Man a Future？（在过去的历史上，有过许多可怕的残暴行为。）

It seems to me that I have heard these charming names before. ——Forster：Coordination（我好像以前听到过这些可爱的名字。）

I’ve seen many a gentleman drunk formerly. ——Thackeray：Penden-nis（我以前看到过许多上等人喝得醉醺醺的。）

An anabaptist is one who baptizes over again，whether frequently as a point of ritual，or once as a due performance of what has been ineffectually performed previously.（OED，“Anabaptist”）（一个再洗礼派教徒是要再受一次洗礼的，不论它常被当作一种仪式，或是认为以前婴儿时的洗礼无效，要在成人时再正式来过一次。）

41. “He is the stingiest man I ever met.”和“He is the stingiest man I have ever met.”

英文说的“He is the stingiest man I ever met.”和“He is the stingiest man I have ever met.”二句，在意义上不知有何不同？

【解答】在普通的用法上是没有什么不同的，用过去动词似乎比用现在完成动词还要普遍些。不过要仔细研究起来，二者之间还是有些细微的分别的。第一句单用过去动词的说法，是“直观的”，就目前的某种事实，而不假思索地感觉到世界上再没有他这样吝啬的人了。第二句用现在完成动词的说法，是“冷静”的，含有“继续”的意味，断定直到现在为止，在所认识的各种各样的人们当中，此人算是最吝啬的了。以上两种说法的实例很多，现在随便举出一些如下：

第一种：

You’re the oddest fellow I ever saw. ——Alcott：Little Women（你是我见到的最奇怪的人。）

You are the rudest person I ever met. ——Wilde：The Remarkable Rock-et（你是我遇到的最无礼的人。）

It’s the most ridiculous thing I ever heard in my life. ——Maugham：The Bread-winner（这是我生平所听到的最好笑的事。）

I’d say you were the loveliest and most beautiful girl that ever lived. ——Hemingway：Across the River and Into the Trees（我想你是世界上最可爱而又最美丽的姑娘了。）

第二种：

She’s the most charming young lady I’ve ever seen. ——Henry James：The Portrait of a Lady（她是我所见过的最娇媚的少女。）

He was the kindest soul I had ever met. ——Allingham：No Love Lost（他是我曾经遇见的最亲切的人了。）

It was the longest speech I had ever heard. ——Ibid.（这是我曾经所听到过的最长的演讲。）

He is the most thoughtful，considerate and sentimental man I have ever known. ——Mamie Eisenhower（他是我所认识的最能体贴别人、顾虑周到、感情真挚的人了。）

This is the most violent form of exercise I’ve ever taken.（这是我做过的最激烈的运动。）

I did the silliest thing I have ever done in my life. ——Allingham：Op. cit.（我做了一件一生中最傻的事。）

She sobbed with the most miserable feeling she had ever had in her life. ——Caldwell：Episode in Palmetto（她带着生平曾未有的最悲惨的感情啜泣了。）

Ⅴ 助动词

42. may、may well、may as well

请将下面例句中的may well和may as well的差异说明一下，并略述助动词may的用法。

（a）She may well be proud of her son.

（b）You may as well begin at once.

【解答】在这种用法中的may，是表示辩护理由的，而well则为with good reason的意思，当may和well连用时，则意为have good reason to（这样也是有理由的，无怪）。（a）例的意思是“她以自己的儿子为荣是应该的”或“她有这样的儿子是足以骄傲的”。这句话又可以倒过来说成：

She is proud of her son，and well she may.（她以自己的儿子为荣也是应该的。）

句中的“well +主语+ may”（= and with reason），意为“那也是应该的”，有时不说may，单用一个well，也能表with good reason之意，如：

We cannot very well refuse him.（我们没有好的理由来拒绝他。）

不过一般的常见的用法，是may和well连用，如：

You may well say so.（你很有理由这样说。）

至于（b）句则是一种比较的形式，为“You may as well begin at once（as not）.”的省略，意为 “马上着手与不马上着手的理由同样充分，所以还是马上着手的好”，简单地翻译为“你宜早着手”，因为may as well . . .（as）= had better . . .（than），也像had better后的than 不说出来一样，may as well后的as也是不常说的，但不是不可以说，如：

You might as well throw money away as spend it in gambling.（你把钱花在赌博上不啻把钱丢掉。）

One may as well not know a thing at all as know it but imperfectly.（一知半解还不如完全不知。）

One may as well be hanged for a sheep as a lamb.（与其盗小羊而受绞毋宁盗大羊而受绞。/窃钩毋宁窃国。）（谚语）

这个may as well的表现法是和may well意思不同的。第一人称的I may as well与第二人称的You had better相当。普通单用，略去后面的as not时，可译作“为宜”“你最好那样”“还是那样做的好”。如果后面加有as的子句时，就可译作“不啻”“犹之”“可与相等”，这是一种极力否定的说法。

至于助动词may的用法，可分下列七条：

（1）表许可（Permission）：

May I trouble you to pass the salt？（请把食盐递给我一下好吗？）

Might I ask your name？（请教大名。）句中用might比用may更为客气。

You might just let me see.（请你给我看看吧。）

这个“You might . . .”原义为“请你……”，但有时变作“你该……而竟不……”的意思，如：

You might make a little less noise.（你不要这样闹好吗？）

不过在这场合当然以用You might have done的形式更好，意即“你本该……而竟不曾……”如：

You might have told me earlier.（你应该早告诉我的。）

在回答“May I go？”一问时，英国式肯定答“Yes，you may.”，否定答“No，you must not.（不可以去）”；美国式的否定则为“No，you cannot.”或“No，you may not.”。如：

I can play the piano，but I may not（或 am not allowed to do）during the school hours. ——Kirkpatrick（我可以弹琴，不过在上课的时候就不可以。）

（2）表可能（Possibility）或不确实（Uncertainty）：

It may be true.（可能是真的。）

It might be true.（或许是真的。）不确实。

（3）代can用（= perhaps can）：

A man may be known by the company he keeps.（近朱者赤，近墨者黑。）

You may take a horse to the water，but you cannot make him drink.（你可以把马带到水边去，但不能要它喝水。）

（4）表辩护的理由（Justification）：

He may（或might）well ask that. = Well he may（或 might）ask that. = Well may（或 might）he ask that. = He asks that，and well he may.（他要问是应该的。）

You may as well go there today（as not）. ——Palmer（你最好今天去那里。）

（5）在让步的副词子句中：

Whoever may say so，it is true.（不管谁说，那总是对的。）

Go where you may，there’s no place like home.（无论什么地方都没有家里好。）

（6）在假设语气（Subjunctive Mood，即虚拟语气——编注）中：

（a）在祈愿句（Optative Clause）中：

May you be happy！= I wish you may be happy. = You be happy！= Happiness to you！（祝你幸福。）

（b）在主句中有expect、fear、hope、desire、think、wish等动词的，对附句的内容具有确实信心时通常用shall、will，如：

I hope you will be able to come.（我希望你能来。）

但信心不强时则改用may。

I desire that it may not die. ——Buton’s Diary（我愿望它不死。）

I fear（= am afraid）he may take cold.（我担心他会伤风。）

I hope he may succeed.（我企望他成功。）

（c）在表目的的副词子句（Adverb Clause）中：

We eat（in order）that we may live.（为生而食。）

（7）表对过去的推测——may have +过去分词（也许曾经）：

It may have been true.（也许曾经是真的。）

比较：

（a）

He may have seen her yesterday.

（他也许曾经在昨天看见她。）

He might have seen her yesterday.

（他本来可以在昨天看见她的〔但实在不曾见到〕。）

（b）

You might（= ought to，yet do not）offer to help.

（你该给与帮忙，而竟不给。）

You might have offered to help.

（你本该给与帮助，而竟不曾给与。）

43. won’t的来历

字典上说won’t是will not的缩写，但为什么〔i〕变成了〔o〕呢？shall not的缩写为shan’t，只略去了两个〔l〕，母音（即元音——编注）并没有改变。在用法上有人说won’t有时并不完全等于will not，这说法对不对？

【解答】这确是一个很难听到有人发出的疑问，一般学习英文的人，都只接受事实，而不要去钻研文字结构的。我们在劝诱别人喝茶时说：“Won’t you have some tea？”。在表示决心时说：“I won’t do it again.”。在表示拒绝时说：“This door won’t open.”。我们说这些话时，并不怀疑won’t不是will not的缩写，并不因为它是〔wo〕而不是〔wi〕，而感到奇怪。早把它当作不规则动词的变化，而接受不疑了。

但我们如果要追究起来，就查出这个won’t的变化，是由中世英语（Middle English）而来的。所谓中世英语是指1150年至1500年那一段时期的英语而言，英国由于诺尔曼人的征服（Norman Conquest），使语言上发生了极大的改变，即是完成了所谓字尾屈折的标准化（levelling of inflexions）。

且说中世英语的现在时直陈式单数（Present Indicative Singular）是以will为第一人称，wilt为第二人称，wille为第三人称的，但除此形式外，又有用母音〔o〕的形式，即第一人称为wolle（或wole、wol），第二人称为wolt，第三人称为wole（或wol、wulle），后来与not结合构成一个缩写字时，便成为won’t了。我们现在知道won’t是由ME wol + not而变成的。

英文的won’t在意义上并不完全与will not相等，例如说“I won’t see him again.”就比说“I’ll（= I will）not see him again.”在意志上就表示坚决得多呢。“will +否定”= refuse to，尤其是用于人以外的主语时，如：

This wood will not burn.（这木头是烧不燃的。）

44. “We did not need to hurry.”和“We need not have hurried.”

“We did not need to hurry.”和“We need not have hurried.”二句，都是指过去没有赶快的必要，不知意义上有何分别？

【解答】是的，两句都是指过去说的，似乎可以照下面这样来译：

（a）We did not need to hurry.（我们并没有急。）

（b）We need not have hurried.（我们真用不着那样急的。）

第一句（a）的意思是“我们没有赶快的必要，所以我们并没有急”。第二句（b）的意思是“我们没有赶快的必要，而我们都急急忙忙地赶快做了”。（b）句用英文解释说便是：

“We have hurried，but now we see that it wasn’t necessary.”（我们急急忙忙地赶快做了，现在发觉实无此必要。）

如果是说现在或未来，就说“We need not hurry.（我们不用着急。）”，意即没有急忙的必要。如果是说过去，就可在主动词上表现出这种时态来，即句中的did not need，或是用过去的不定词来表示，即句中的have hurried。注意（a）句中的need是主动词，（b）句中的need是助动词。（a）句中用了助动词的did，正等于（b）句中的助动词的need。

表过去的完成不定词，不但可用于助动词need之后，也可以用在其他助动词之后，同样是表现“在过去未实现的事”，含有惋惜之意，比较下例：

You should do it.（那你应该做。）

You should have done it.（那你应该做而未做。）

You should have seen that movie.（那个片子可惜你没有去看。）

She ought to have been more careful.（可惜她没有当心。）

45. Let’s not、Don’t let’s、Let’s don’t的区别

英文可说Let’s not，又可说Don’t let’s，又可说Let’s don’t，三者不知有何分别？

【解答】let’s与否定连用时，在英国说Let’s not go，是很正式的说法，通常只说Don’t let’s go。在美国则通常说Let’s not go，至于Don’t let’s go便是俗语的说法。在美国要加强语气时才说Let’s don’t go。

原来let的否定，文言和口语的说法不同。即是口语加用助动词的do，文言则不加，但是口语中不加的时候也有，如Let’s not go便是美国人口头常说的。

Don’t let the bird fly away.（不要让这鸟飞走了。）

美国Texas大学教授Ralf B. Long说，Let’s not 和Don’t let’s，都是正常（normal）的说法，只有Let’s don’t才是破格（anomalous）的说法。Don’t let’s更是带有感情（emotional）的。

美国的语言学家C. C. Fries把Let’s列入他所谓Function words（作用字）之一，他说从历史上看，Let’s是从Let us产生出来的，但现在Let’s和Let us已大有分别了。他又说否定形的Let’s don’t是一般确立的惯用语。

据调查结果，Don’t let’s（或 let us）的形式，用得相当的多，Do not let’s（或let us）则比较少见。而Let’s（或Let us）not的形式也不少。Let’s don’t的形式不过四五次被文法学者引用，而且都是出自美国作家的笔下。

“Let’s go，shall we？”的用法，固然不错，但用得极少。

Ⅵ 准动词

46. 动名词主语的格

“他坚持要女儿读博士。”译成英文的“He insists on his daughter taking a doctoral degree.”，有人说应该用daughter’s才对，不知孰是，请就二者的分别详为解说。

【解答】这涉及动名词主语的格（Case）的问题，详细地说，动名词的主语用通格（Common Case），还是用属格（Possessive Case）的问题。首先，我们必须明白：动名词是可能有主语的。不过是意味上的主语（Sense Subject）或一般人称（Generic Person）的用法，例如：

I am afraid of hurting his feelings.（我恐怕伤他的感情。）这个hurt-ing意指my hurting。

The pain in my throat made speaking difficult.（我因喉痛难于说话。）句中有my throat一语，故知speaking的人为谁。

Doing nothing is doing ill.（小人闲居为不善。）这是一般人称，你、我、他皆可的。

有明显的主语时则多用属格，例如：

Who told you of your wife’s being there.（谁告诉你的，说你太太曾在那里。）

动名词的主语为普通名词时，在发音上分不出是单数属格还是复数属格，因而有避免用属格而改用通格的倾向，请看：

He explained about his daughter’s（或daughters’不如干脆说成daugh-ters）being absent.（他说明了他的女儿〔或女儿们〕缺席的理由。）

It ended in the doctor being sent for.（结果是弄到请医生来。）

主语为代名词时用属格的机会较多：

My daughters undertook to adorn the walls with pictures of their own designing. ——Goldsmith（我的女儿们打算用她们自己设计的图画，来装饰墙壁。）

I insist on your all meeting me there.（一定要你们大家都到那里来接我。）

代名词除you及her以外，主格和宾格有不同的形式，因而有属格和通格之分，通常强调动名词的主语时用属格，强调动名词时用通格，例如：

There was nothing to prevent my going there.（没有什么能阻止我前往的。）如系her going则通格属格形式一样。

I don’t like him coming here so soon.（我不喜欢他很快到这里来。）

在口头英语中，动名词前面的主语，多用通格；有时因句子的构造关系不便或不能用属格时，也要用通格。与人称代名词连用时亦复如此。

No one would have dreamed of there being such a place.（谁做梦都没有想到有那样的一个地方。）

I remember each one of them saying it.（我记得他们每个人都曾那样说。）

除开极少数的例外，无生物名词和抽象名词一般是不用属格的：

In the event of a breeze springing up . . .（设若起了微风……）

但有时却要说：

On the permission’s being granted she left the room.（经允许之后她就走出房间去了。）

文法家如Curme、Onions、Kellner等人都说通格的用法是很古老的，Jespersen则说1700年的时候用得最多。《牛津大辞典》举莎翁为例，说时至1600年，属格的记号就已经开始被放弃了。

通格和属格表现法虽有不同，意义却没有两样，为求简便起见，自然大家有采用通格的倾向，何况它还是有英语独自的潜在力（Potentiality）呢。

现就十八世纪的英国小说家Henry Fielding（1707—1754）的三部作品（Joseph Andrews，1742；Jonathan Wild，1743；Amelia，1752），来检讨一下这种通格的用法，便发现下列四种造型（Structure）：

（1）Noun + Preposition + Common case + -ing

（2）Verb + Preposition + Common case + -ing

（3）Adjective + Preposition + Common case + -ing

（4）Preposition + Common case + -ing

第一型的用例有：“Mr. Booth began to felicitate her upon the news of the wounded gentleman being in a fair likelihood of recovery.”。（Amelia）句中的gentleman是living being（有生物）的common case（通格）。在Amelia一书中有七个用通格的例，五个是living being，两个是lifeless thing（无生物）。在Jonathan Wild一书有两个用通格的例，都是无生物。

第二型的用例有：“He insisted on the servants introducing him directly into the room.”。（Joseph Andrews）句中servants为有生物通格的例。在这本书中另有一个无生物的例，在Jonathan Wild中有一个无生物的例，在Amelia中也有一个无生物的例。

第三型的用例有：“the lawyer，who was afraid of some mischief happening to himself”。（Joseph Andrews）三书中只有这样一个无生物的例。

第四型的用例有：“He marched out of the room without making any excuse，or any one daring to make the least Demant.”。（Jonathan Wild）句中的any one是有生物的例，用介词without的有四例，有生物与无生物都有。用介词by的也有二例。在Fielding这三部作品中，以有生物表通格的有14例，以无生物表通格的有10例。

包含通格的四种造型中所用的字眼，类别如下：

第一型中的名词为fact、hope、idea等约四十字，介词则用of的有压倒的多数。

第二型中的动词为hear、tell、think等约三十字，介词则因动词不同而有变化，不过of仍然是用得很多的。

第三型中的形容词为afraid、desirous、worthy等约十字，介词仍以of为多。

第四型中的介词为by、without、after等约十字，也有用介词片语的。

不过采用属格的动名词主语，当然更多，在这三本书中几乎多了一倍，即使用通格的例共为二十四句，而使用属格的例则达四十七句之多。

47. Object + Infinitive

Frank Craven的文章中，有“Look at that horse go.”一句，我不解为什么不说that horse goes，请就这种horse go的用法说明一下。

【解答】这是所谓Accusative with Infinitive（带有不定词的宾格），在普通的文法书上，叫作Object + Infinitive，如：

He heard the bell ring.（他听到了铃响。）

Report declared him to be dead.（报告说他已死。）

等句中的bell和him是Accusative或Object，而ring和to be便是Infinitive。

凡Object和Infinitive来到一块儿的时候，不外乎下列两种情形：一是那不定词成为他动词的宾语（也有人将不定词解释为补语的）；一是那不定词出现于自动词之后，但其前要加for及宾语在自动词与for之间，可用名词，也可用形容词，例如：

It is time for us to be up and doing.（我们起来行动的时候到了。）

It is good for a man not to touch a woman.（一个男人不碰女人总是好的。）

在自动词与for之间，也可以不用任何其他的字，例如：

I waited for her to return.（我等待她回来。）

Some men must die for others to live.（为了别人生存，有些人必得死去。）

在这个for后面的宾语，实际就是那不定词的意味上的主语（Sense Subject），和前面的动词并没有多大关系。如上面说的“I waited for her to return.”，要回来的人是“她”，而不是“我”。

由本文头上所举的两个例句看来，在宾语后用的不定词，有带to的，有不带to的两种情形。这到底是怎样的呢？是不是他动词和自动词的不同，而使后接的不定词有异呢？这应由动词的性质，而不由自动或他动来决定，如用在知觉动词，即see、hear、feel、listen to、look at、notice、observe、watch等动词的后面，通常是要用原形不定词（Bare Infinitive）的。此外，就是用在使役动词的后面，如“I’ll have someone bring it to me.（我要叫人去拿给我。）”。当然还有一些惯用的动词，如make、let、bid、help等，后面也是要接原形不定词的。

普通自动词的后面，多接有to的不定词。例如：

Mr. Bowles sat grimly waiting for him to finish. ——J. P. Marquand（鲍先生冷酷无情地坐着等他做完。）

I sat up there in the apartment waiting for the girls to come back. ——E. S. Gardner（我在那房间里坐着不睡，等待那些女孩子回来。）

There is no book for him to read.（这里没有他读的书。）

但也有用原形不定词的，在十九世纪中叶，英国常有这种说法，近代美国作家也习用不鲜。例如：

This certainly is some rain. Listen to it pound against the roof of the car. ——E. S. Gardner（这确是在下雨。你听打在汽车顶上的声音。）

I listened to him come in. ——Cornell Woolrich（我听到他进来的。）

I saw（或looked at）him run.（我看了他跑的。）但要说“I saw it to be a mistake.（我看到这是一个错误。）”。

48. be interested in doing和be interested to do

我们说对做什么事感兴趣英文是be interested in doing something，如： “I am interested in collecting stamps.（我对集邮感兴趣。）”。在be interested 后通常是接介词in，再接名词或动名词，但偶然看到有人接用不定词，说成be interested to do，不知是否错误？

【解答】在普通的字典上interest一字作名词或动词用，甚至变成过去分词作形容词用，后面都是加介词的in再接名词或动名词的，例如：

He has no interest in such matters.（他对这种事没有兴趣。）

I do not interest myself in politics.（我对政治不感兴趣。）

He is interested in studying American English.（他对研究美国英语很感兴趣。）

但在be interested in doing这种常见的用法之外，还有be interested to do这种常见的用法，二者之间，存在微妙的差别。前者表现在性质上或习惯上常常具有这种兴趣的抽象的含义，而后者则是说到从此即将付诸实行的具体的行为。例如：

（a）He is interested in buying this gramophone record.

（b）He is interested to buy this gramophone record.

（a）句的意思是“他常对购买这张唱片感兴趣”，比方说贝多芬的《月光曲》吧，不问是谁弹的，只要他遇到是《月光曲》的唱片他就要买，他都有购买的兴趣。这对于他成为一种习惯的行为了。至于（b）句的意思则为“他对购买这张唱片很感兴趣”，或是“他很想要买这张唱片”（= He is inclined to buy this gramophone record.）。这种接不定词的用法，虽很少见，但并不新奇，远在十八世纪英国历史家Edward Gibbon（1737—1794）所著《罗马帝国衰亡史》（The Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire）中就写得有：

The emperor himself was interested not to deface the splendour of his own cities.（皇帝本人都很当心不要毁坏了他自己的那些城市的壮丽。）

晚年定居在美国的英国小说家James Hilton（1900—1954），在Time and Time Again一书中也写得有：

Anderson said he thought she knew it was something we’d be interested to hear.（安德森说，他以为她知道这是一件我们高兴听到的事。）

在几年前刚逝世的英国小说家Evelyn Waugh（1903—1966）在Decline and Fall一书中也有这样的句子：

I shall be interested to hear what your experience has been over the matter.（我很想听到关于这件事情的你的经验。）

美国的大作家Theodore Dreiser（1871—1945）在Albertine一作中也有：

But having seen her again I was interested to learn of the state after these several years.（但在再见到她以后，我变得很想知道这些年来的情况。）

还有在Lofting写的The Voyage of Doctor Dolittle一书上也发现有下列的文句：

I was tremendously interested to see how a ship could be steered into a port at night with nothing but light-houses and a compass to guide you.（我非常想要看看一条船怎样能在黑夜只凭灯塔的光和罗盘针的指示而驾驶进入海港的。）

49. go on doing和go on to do

英文说go on talking，又说go on to talk，都作“继续说”解，不知二者有何分别？

【解答】这两种说法含义上是有分别的，go on doing意为“继续”，而go on to do则意为 “接着”，例如：

Casting a glance at me，he went on reading the letter.（抬头看了我一眼，他又继续看信去了。）

After finishing reading the letter，he went on to write a reply.（看完了信，他接着就来写一封回信。）

第一句中的reading不能改为to read，第二句中的to write也不能改为writing，改换便是错误。因为第一句是继续原来的动作，第二句是改变上一个动作。第一句说他本来在看信，中途望我一眼，仍然继续看他的信；第二句说他本来在看信，一直把信看完了，又开始另一个动作，来写回信。

现在我们不妨来看看它的文法构造，go on doing和go on to do二者中的on都是副词，发音上应加重来说。有人以为是介词，因而把它后面的doing看作动名词，这是错误的，应该把doing看作现在分词才对，正好像He came running中的running是现在分词一样，因为came是主要的动作，即主动词，running是附属的动作，是现在分词，不妨视为补语。He came running（他跑着来了），是一种向空间展开的动作，He went on reading（他继续读了）是一种向时间展开的动作，具体地说，即“经过长久的时间一直在读着”这样一个动作，再加以分析时，又可分为go on（继续）及reading（读着）两个动作，前者为主，后者为副，所以reading是和running一样的现在分词，reading表示状态，running表示方向。

至于go on to do中的不定词，我们也不妨把它当作补语看待。go on一个动作与doing一个动作，紧连在一块儿，融合为一，几乎是同时发生，但go on的动作与to do的动作，就没有那样紧密相连了。它是一个接一个而发生的动作，现在分词表示同时的动作，不定词表示后继的动作，二者之间的差异十分微妙，有人把不定词称为未来分词（future participle），与现在分词（present participle）的分别，一为现在，一为未来，时间上是有些不同的。go on doing的doing是表同时动作的补语，而go on to do的to do是表后继动作的补语，这样的想法是颇为中肯的。

现在让我们来看作家们笔下的用例：

The barber lathered my face and shaved. He was very solemn and refrained from talking. “What’s the matter？Don’t you know any news？” I asked. “What news？”“Any news. What’s happened in the town？”“It is time of war，”he said，“The enemy’s ears are everywhere.”I looked up at him. “Please hold your faces still，”he said and went on shaving. ——Hemingway：A Farewell to Arms（理发师把我脸上涂满了肥皂，来为我剃胡子。他板着面孔，闭口不发一言。我问道：“怎么啦？你没有听见什么新闻吗？”“什么新闻？”“任何新闻。城里发生了什么事吗？”他说，“这是战时呀。到处都是敌人的耳朵。”我抬头望着他。“请不要动呀，”他说着继续为我修面。）

I slipped along the passage to his room. He was lying in bed reading and smoking a pipe. He put down his pipe and his book and moved over to make room for me . . . When I left him I had the feeling that I should be grateful to him . . . As I closed the door I saw him take up his book and go on reading from where he had left off. ——Maugham：The Razor’s Edge（我沿着走廊溜到他的房间里去了。他正躺在床上看书，同时抽着烟斗。他把他的烟斗和书放下，并让出地方来给我坐。……当我离开他的时候，我觉得我应该感谢他才是。……我关上房门出来的时候，我看见他又拿起他的书，在原先停下的地方继续读下去。）

He began to tell her how Larry had cured him of the headaches that had incapacitated him and went on to say how much he had depended on him and how much he owed him. ——Maugham：Op. cit.（他开始告诉她拉利怎样医好了他那使他什么事都不能做的头痛病，接着又说他是何等的依赖拉利，何等的感谢他呀。）

We thought it over，but it seemed too hazy for argument，and I went on to ask if there had been any discoveries at Baskul. ——Hilton：Lost Horizon（我们把那件事细细地想过了，但那好像太模糊而无法提出辩论，于是接着我问是不是在巴斯古尔有什么发现。）

When I was saying good-bye to Mrs. Bradley she told me that next day Isabel was having a few of her young friends in to dinner and they were going on to dance afterwards. ——Maugham：Op. cit.（当我和布拉德雷夫人道别的时候，她告诉我第二天伊莎贝尔请了几个她的年轻朋友来吃晚饭，接着还有跳舞晚会。）

50. like doing和like to do

英文说“I like playing badminton.（我喜欢打羽毛球）”，又可说“I like to play badminton.”。不知这两种说法，到底有无不同？

【解答】英文对两个动作连在一块儿时的说法，除用连词and外，还可把后一动作改用不定词或动名词。普通的动词对后面接用什么词，须视每个动词而定，有的只能接不定词，有的只能接动名词，有的二者皆可，唯含义可能不同。如like这个动词，便是既可接不定词，又可接动名词的。一般人以为：

（a）I like playing badminton.

（b）I like to play badminton.

两句英文，在意义上是没有分别的。其实在本质上是有所谓nuance的细微差异的。用动名词的（a）句，意为始终爱打羽毛球，在这场合，打羽毛球的那个动作，并不是说就要去打的那种具体的行动，而只是抽象地说及罢了。至于用不定词的（b）句，意为现在想要去打羽毛球，在这场合打羽毛球的那个动作，即令不是说已经实现了的动作，也是说的一种具体的行动。

英文的like一字，原有两个意思，一为喜欢或爱好（be fond of；have a taste for），一为想要，愿意（used to indicate a wish）。上例的（a）句就是第一个意思，而（b）句则为第二个意思。所以（a）例可译为“我爱打羽毛球”，（b）例则应译为“我想打羽毛球”。现分别举例如下：

（a）“like +动名词”的用法：

I’m out for a walk. I like walking at night. Nobody stops you and says silly things，and I like the stars，and things smell better and everyday things look all mysterious. ——Christie：The Moving Finger（我现在正出来散步。我喜欢在夜间散步。没有人要拦住你，和你说些愚蠢的话，还有我喜欢那些星星，一切都发出香气，日常的东西都变得神秘起来。）

I don’t like being avoided. ——Ibid.（我不喜欢被人规避。）

She liked being in Paris. ——Maugham：The Razor’s Edge（她喜欢待在巴黎。）

（b）“like +不定词”的用法：

That’s why they like to work in Paris. ——Maugham：Christmas Holiday（那就是他们为什么想到巴黎去工作的原因。）

I like you. I like to be with you. ——Ibid.（我喜欢你。我想要跟你在一块儿。）

I badly wanted a cigarette，but did not like to light one. ——Maugham：The Razor’s Edge（我曾极需要吸一支香烟，但又不想去点燃它。）

If anyone likes to say I behaved like a cad，they’re welcome to say so！——Christie：Death on the Nile（如果有人想说我的行为卑鄙，就让他去说吧！）

He never troubled to answer Mrs. Simpson. They understood one an-other. She liked to talk and he liked to be silent. ——Greene：It’s a Battlefield（他懒得麻烦去回答辛普生夫人。他们彼此都很了解。她想要说话，而他却只想沉默。）

He did not like to be connected with the woman who had painted those pictures. ——Ibid.（他并不想要和画那些画的那个女人接触。）

同在Greene的这本书上，同一个女人说的话，时而用“like +动名词”，时而用“like +不定词”，值得我们细心阅读，加以体味。

（a）I don’t like signing things.（我不喜欢老是签订文件。）

（b）I don’t like to sign anything without asking Arthur’s brother.（我不想没有和亡夫的兄弟商量就签订任何文件。）

上面（a）例是说不喜欢签订文件那回事，这是一向以来的心情，至于（b）例则是说不想去签订什么文件，是现在的心情。

又“like +不定词”的用法，前面常冠有should、would的字样，说成should like to do或would like to do，但“like +动名词”的用法，则决不加should、would一类的字样。理由看意义就可以明白，无需详说。

51. the shoes to mend和the shoes to be mended

在下面两句英文中，一则用主动的不定词，一则用被动的不定词，不知有何不同？

（a）He had no boots and shoes to mend.

（b）His heart was filled with joy，whenever he looked at the boots and shoes to be mended.

【解答】上举两句中的不定词是有分别的。（b）句中的to be mended是不能换用to mend 的，而（a）句中的to mend也不能改为to be mended。两个不定词，都是用作形容词，以修饰它前面的名词的。这可分主动与被动，一则是就人的立场来说，一则是就物的立场来说：一则说人去修理皮鞋，一则说皮鞋被人修理。

先就（a）例来研究：句中用的动词have，是关键所在。另举一例说，“I have nothing to eat.（我没有东西吃。）”。执行to eat这个动作的是“I”，依照文法上的解释，to eat的意味上的主语是“I”。这个叫作“I”的人物，把to eat这个动作，加诸“nothing”之上（nothing可看作to eat的宾语），主动在人，而不在物。再举一例：“He has a lot of books to read.（他有许多书要读。）”。He为主动者；to read为主动者的动作；books为受动者。虽说受动对象的书是被读，但以主动者那人的立场来说，是主动的读，而不是被读，要以书的立场来说，才可说是被读。现句子的主语是人，而不是书，所以应以人为主，把动作说成主动的to read，而不可说成被动的to be read。

再看（b）例：句中用的动词是look at。主动者是“he”这个人。他所look at的对象是the boots and shoes。这个动作是非常重要的，上述句中动词have的动作，其重要性远不及它，所以have在句中读轻音，不定词要加重来说；look at便要重读，后面的不定词说得很轻。第一，因为to be mended 这个动作的主动者并不是“he”这个人，“he”的动作只到look at为止，至于修理皮鞋的当另有人在，必然是“he”以外的什么人。那人是谁，不在讨论范围之内。从皮鞋的立场来说，它是在接受那种动作的状态之中，换句话说，皮鞋是在将被修理的状态之中，所以要说to be mended，不能说to mend，改用关系代名词时便可改写为：“He looked at the boots and shoes which were to be mended.（他看着那些有待修理的皮靴和皮鞋。）”。在 which以下的形容子句，是说明皮鞋的状态的，和句中的主语“he”无关，和主要动词的look at也无直接关系，因看的对象是boots and shoes，看的人是主，看的东西是宾，至于宾的状态如何，自然无关重要了。附带地说一句，（a）句是不可以把形容不定词改为关系代名词子句的，即不可以说“He had no boots and shoes which were to mend.”。

一般的动词都是像look at一样重要的，很少像have那样轻微的，我们现在不妨换用其他动词以取代look at：

He brushed the boots and shoes to be mended.

He washed the boots and shoes to be mended.

He hid the boots and shoes to be mended.

He took up the boots and shoes to be mended.

He threw away the boots and shoes to be mended.

还有许许多多其他的动词可以换用的，都同样地是以“he”这个人为主动，而to be mended仍是说皮鞋的状态，而不是“he”的动作。

英文中有用“there is”开头的一种特殊的表现法，后面可接用主动的不定词，也可接用被动的不定词，即是我们可以说：

（a）There were several boots and shoes to mend.

（b）There were several boots and shoes to be mended.

在（a）例用主动不定词的，虽没有明说出来，实则有那么一个修理皮鞋的人呼之欲出，所以不妨增二字而说成“There were several boots and shoes for him（or us）to mend.”，是说him或是说us，可从前后文（context）或情形（situation）看得出来。至于（b）例用被动不定词。便不能在其前加用for him一类的字样，那句的意思单是说有几双皮鞋要修理，至于是谁来修理却不在话下。（a）的重点在人，（b）的重点在物。

There was no light to be seen anywhere，and only a few dim stars were shining overhead. ——Caldwell（任何地方都看不见什么光，只有几点暗淡的星光在头上闪耀。）

The Biscuit walked to the window，and looked out. There was nothing to see，but he remained there，looking，for some considerable time. ——Wodehouse：Big Money（“饼干”〔人的诨名〕走到窗前，向外望去。虽然什么也看不见，但他仍待在那儿，望了相当长的时间。）

在街头可以看到（a）offices to let和（b）offices to be let的招贴。（a）是就事务所主人的立场说的，（b）是就事务所本身的立场说的。前者多半是自己贴出的广告，后者多半是由广告公司代为贴出的。

Ⅶ 连 词

52. though和but不能同用

“他虽然有钱，但是并不大方。”译成英文的“Though he is rich，but he is not generous.”，为何不对？请就此等连词的用法说明一下。

【解答】这句英文是完全照中国语句直译出来，所以不对。在“虽然”后面接上“但是”的这种现代白话文的表现法，是不可以直译为英文的，因为这句白话文的说法本身是重复了的，单说“虽然”已经够了，“虽然他有钱，他还是不大方”，有时也可把它分开来用，如“他虽有钱，然不大方”。我们如采用洗练的白话文作为蓝本来翻译的话，也就不会发生上述的这种误译了。英文的although或though，正是中文“虽然”的意思，例如：

虽然当时天正下雨，他还是到那里去了。

Though it was raining，he went there.

他好了一点，虽则还未痊愈。

He is better，though not yet cured.

如果要把“虽”“然”分开来用，英文也有办法表达的，如：

Though he is young，yet he is prudent.

他虽年轻，然很审慎。

不过这个yet是可有可无的。在though一字中既已包含有“虽然”的意思，当然用不着再加用别的转折词，though和but是势不两立的，用了though就不能再用but，用了but，就不能再用though，因此下面三句意思是相仿佛的：

Though he lives alone，he is happy.

Though he lives alone，yet he is happy.

He lives alone，but he is happy.

第一、二句用了不对等连词的though，所以是复句（Complex Sentence）；第三句用了对等连词的but，所以是合句（Compound Sentence）。合句是用连词将两个主要子句连结起来，而复句则是用连词引出附属子句，另外则为主句，在复句的主句前面原是用不着要有类似连词的副词存在，不过偶然还是有人要用，如yet、still、nevertheless等字，要用是可以用的，为简洁计仍以不用为宜。

凡用though引出的附属子句，多含有让步之意，所以又称让步的子句（Concessive Clause）。

这种让步的子句通常是用平叙语气，如：

Though he is poor，he is happy.（他虽穷然很快乐。）

Though he apologize，I will never forgive him.（即令他道歉，我也决不会原谅他。）

由上例可以看出，though 除作“虽然”解外，还可以作“即令”解。再举一例：

Though I fail，I shall try again.（即令我失败，我将再试一下。）

用在此意下的though又可译作“纵然”，如：

Though I were starving，I would not ask a favour of him.（我纵然饿死，也不去向他求助。）

53. until（till）的用法

英文说“I shan’t do that until（或 till）you come back.”，句中的连词until或till，字典上译作“直到”，这句可译为“直到你回来，我不会做那事”，译语不佳，但尚可解，至于“You need not wait till I come back.（直到我回来，你不必等待。）”就很费解了。请就until或till最适当的译法加以说明。

【解答】作连词用的until或till，照字面的意思有三种译法：

（一）为“直到……时候”，例如：

Let’s wait until the rain stops.（等到雨停了再说吧。）

（二）为“直到……地方（程度）”，例如：

Go straight on until you come to a large red building.（一直往前走，直到你走到一座大红屋子为止。）

He worked until he was too tired to do more.（他一直工作到累得不能再做的程度为止。）

（三）为主句中有否定的，可译为“在……以前”，例如：

That baby did not stop crying until he was fed.（那婴儿在吃饱前没有停止哭泣。）

问题中的第一例句，正是第三种用法，until = before，不过不必这样照字面来翻译，最好把否定去掉不译，改译为肯定句，较接近中国的语法，例如：

He did not come back until after sunset.（他直到日落以后方始回来。）

No man really becomes a fool until he stops asking questions.（人要停止发问就会变得愚笨的。）

People do not know the blessing of health till they lose it.（人们要等到失去健康才知道健康的可贵。）

He did not arrive in India till more than a year after he had left England.（他离开英国一年多才到达印度。）

It was not until the next day that I learned the truth.（到第二天我才明白事情的真相。）

We shall never prosper till the system is wholly changed.（要等到这制度完全改变过后我们才会发达的。）

有时只包含否定的意思，并无否定的字眼，也可以照这样来翻译，例如：

I remained in ignorance of it until lately.（我直到最近才知道这事。）

在until或till的前面加上逗号的时候，就可以译作“终至于”“毕竟”，例如：

I kept standing under a burning sun for a long while，till I had sun-stroke.（一直站在炽热的太阳底下晒得很久，终至于中暑。）

They were busily engaged in gathering chestnuts，till the last rays of the setting sun were fading away.（他们忙着从事于采撷栗子，终至到了日落西山的黄昏时候。）

问题中的第二例句所用的not，又与上举各例中的否定有所不同，因为在这场合的not是用以否决Subordinate Clause的till I come back的整句的，所以全句应译为：“你用不着要等我回来。”至于not . . . till的意思属于前者（即否定主句的动词），或是属于后者（即否定整个的附句），就要由Context来决定，没有原则可循。

till和until二字，意义和用法都没有什么分别，如英国近代作家Charles Dickens、Conan Doyle等爱用until，而Thomas Hardy则爱用till，至于一般人因till短简所以通常说话用得较多，until则多少带点强调，故常用于句首，如：

Until he told me，I had no idea of it.（在他告知我以前，我一无所知。）

美国人似乎有喜欢用until的倾向。此字作介词用时，译法有时也是一样的。

54. while连结的复句有两种译法

有连词while构成的句子，据说有两种译法，一为照英文的顺序翻译，一为颠倒译法，即先译后面的子句，再译前面的子句。不知这说法对不对？请举例说明。

【解答】如果把连词while用在两个子句的中间，这种说法是正确的。在while前没有逗号（Comma）时，应从后面译过来；在while前有逗号时，则依原文顺序译下去。这两种用法的意思是不同的：

，while = 当……的时候（during the time that，as long as）

While = 虽然（although），而（whereas）

在while前没有逗号的时候，它是从属连词，所以要从后面倒译过来；至于在while前有了逗号时，它就是等位连词，所以要依原文的顺序来翻译。请看下例。

Make hay while the sun shines.（趁着太阳晒草。/不要失掉机会。）

John saves his money，while George spends all he gets.（约翰储蓄，而乔治则用光。）

如果while所引导的子句的主语，和主要子句的主语相同时，便可把while的主语连同be动词一起略去，如：

While（I was）reading I fell asleep.（我正在读书的时候就睡着了。）

He retained the consciousness of it while（he was）asleep.（他就在睡着了的时候，也还是保持知觉的。）

We are safe while（we are）in his care.（在他的照顾之下，我们是安全的。）

He hurt himself while（he was）playing football.（他在踢足球时受了伤。）

While（he was）fighting in Vietnam，he was taken prisoner.（在越南战役中他被俘虏了。）

前后两个子句中的主语不相同时，便不能省略，如：

While she spoke，the tears were running down.（当她说话时，两泪直流。）

It was raining while we were out.（我们出门在外的时候，天正下雨。）

While there is life there is hope.（有生命就有希望。）

He took my place while I was ill.（我生病时请他代理。）

While I am writing this，you can be doing something else. ——Palmer（当我在写这个的时候，你可以做点别的什么事。）

Please be quiet while I am talking to you.（当我对你们说话的时候，请不要作声。）

至于while的第二个用法，即作等位连词的用法，请看下列各例：

While I like the colour of the hat，I do not like its shape.（我虽然喜欢这帽子的颜色，可是不喜欢它的式样。）

He went out，while I stay at home.（他出去了，而我留在家中。）

While I admit his good points，I can see his bad.（我承认他的优点，也知道他的缺点。）

While I grant his honesty，I suspect his memory.（对于他的诚实我是没有异议的，而他的记忆力我却感到奇怪。）

While I have no money to spend，you have nothing to spend money on.（我没有钱花，而你却有钱无处花。）

Jones lost an arm，Brown a leg，while Robinson had both amputated.（琼斯失去一臂，布朗失去一腿，而鲁滨逊的手脚都被切断了。）

While this is true of some，it is not true of all.（虽有一部分是真的，但不见得全都是真的。）

55. hardly . . . when，no sooner . . . than前后都用过去时态

用有hardly . . . when或no sooner . . . than的复句，照普通的惯用法，因时间有先后，即前一子句发生的时间在后一子句发生的时间以前，故前用过去完成时，后用过去时。但发现有前后皆用过去时者，不知是否有误？

【解答】我不敢说这是错误的。事实上有很多人这样说。也许是由于意义上的关系而有这种说法的。说话的人为要表示两个动作紧接着发生，故不愿分为一前（过去完成时）一后（过去时）。原来的意思也是“随即”（immediately when or after），其实hardly . . . when，scarcely . . . before，no sooner . . . than乃至as soon as都是一样的意思，不过as soon as的惯用法是前后都用过去时的动词罢了。除as soon as一个表现法外，前三者多少是夸张的说法，而且多半是笔端英语（written English），尤其是把hardly等字置于句首更是文言，如：

Hardly had we arrived when it began to rain.（我们一到就下雨了。）

普通的说法为“We had hardly arrived when it began to rain.”。以before代when，也是文言的说法。辞典及文法书上所刊出的例句，都是“过去完成时+过去时”的形式，如：

I had hardly got into the car when I heard a man call my name.（我刚一踏进车子，就听见有人叫我。）

He had scarcely seen it when he started back home.（他一见到那个，立刻就动身回家去了。）

He had no sooner arrived home than he was asked to start on another journey.（他刚一到家，又要他出发另外一个旅程。）

No sooner had he got well than he left the hotel.（他一好马上就离开了那旅馆。）

We had hardly started from home when the engine gave out.（我们刚一出门，汽车的引擎就坏了。）

He had scarcely begun his speech before the audience was deeply af-fected.（他刚一开始演说，听众就大为感动。）

No sooner had I opened the cage than out flew the little bird.（我刚把鸟笼打开，那小鸟一下就飞出去了。）

She had no sooner seen it than she began to cry.（她一见到那个，就哭起来了。）

比较：

As soon as she saw it，she began to cry.

The moment she saw it，she began to cry.

Immediately she saw it，she began to cry.

现在一般人受着上例as soon as的影响，也不愿麻烦去用两种时态，而一律改用过去时了，如：

He was no sooner left alone than he began to feel angry.（他到了一个人的时候，立即就生起气来了。）

No sooner the lesson was over（或No sooner was the lesson over）than he awoke from his doze.（功课刚一结束，他就从假寐中醒来了。）

The words were hardly out of his mouth when he began to cough.（话刚出口，他就咳嗽起来了。）

No sooner did they feel safe than they forgot their dependence upon him.（他们一感到安全了，就忘记了对他的依赖。）

以前的英国文人如狄更斯，现在的美国摇笔杆的人，甚至前后都用现在动词：

You no sooner come，Mr. Weller，than you go again. ——Dickens（韦雷先生，你一来就要走。）

Scarcely has a foreigner set foot in the United States before they ask him what he thinks of the country.（一个外国人刚一踏上美国的国土，他们就要问他对美国的观感如何。）

The order of steam is hardly established before electricity invades it.（蒸气的常态刚一建立起来，而电力的应用便侵入进来了。）

Electricity hardly gains a fair start before the internal combustion engine overtakes it.（电力刚获得一个好的开头，而内燃机又赶上了它。）

可见不但不用过去完成和过去动词，而且用了现在完成和现在动词。这样一来，更可表示二者之间，为时极暂，简直是相接连了。

在hardly后接when，在no sooner后接than的两种表现法，因为含义相同，故人们常夹缠不清，如MEU（《现代英语惯用法》）的著者就说，普通错成hardly . . . than的实有惊人之多。美国Copperud在1964年刊行的Dictionary of Usage and Style上便举有这样的例：

Hardly had the words been uttered than〔→when〕 the crowd melted away.（那句话刚一说出来，群众就纷纷散去了。）

56. and不作连词译

英文的连词and，在一般的情形是翻译为“和”“跟”，或近乎文言的“与”“及”等，但许多英文片语虽用有连词and，却不能用以上的中文连词来翻译，如bread and butter，便不能译为“面包和牛油”，请问这些情形，应如何翻译才对？

【解答】如果是表示一个合体的东西或观念的话，虽是用and连接起来的两个名词，也不能用“和”等连词来翻译，如：

Bread and butter is what I want.（我要的就是涂了牛油的面包。）

因为这是一个合体的东西，如果说的是两件东西，就应作：

The bread and the butter are stale.（面包和牛油都是陈的。）

这种合体的用法在英文中极多，一个不当心就要译错，我们必须注意那后面接的名词不是对等的（coordinate），而是附从的（subordinate），所以bread and butter不可译为“面包和牛油”，必须译为“涂有牛油的面包”；watch and chain不可译为“表及链条”，必须译为“系有链条的表”，同样的combination，还有不少，如：

a lock and key（附有钥匙的锁）

a needle and thread（穿有线的针）

a cup and saucer（放在茶碟上的茶杯）

a rod and line（钓竿）

a hook and line（系有钓钩的钓丝）

a carriage and pair（两匹马拖的马车，pair = a pair of horses）

a chaise and four（四匹马拖的马车）

a coach and six（六匹马拖的马车）。

Technique is not the aim and end of art.（技巧非艺术的终极目标。）

This is the sum and substance of his opinion.（这便是他的意见的要点。）

I shall move bag and baggage.（我将把所有的一切全部搬走。）

在饮食中这种说法尤多，如英国早餐时常见的bacon and eggs = a rasher（或slice）of bacon with one or two poached eggs，即在一片腊肉上载着一两个煎得半熟的鸡蛋。同样，toast and wine，是在葡萄酒内浸过一下的烤面包。strawberry and cream是上面淋有乳酪的草莓。salt and water是盐开水。brandy and soda是掺有苏打水的白兰地酒。

关于and后接名词的特殊用法，就讲到此为止。继续要讲的是and后接动词的情形。例如“I will try and teach him.”一句，其中try和teach两个动词，并不是coordinate的各自独立的关系，而是一主一副的有重有轻，即teach一字等于一个不定词，和说“I will try to teach you.”相同，也是表目的的。这种用法除try一个动词而外，通常还有come、go、send等行动动词，以及be sure、mind、look等字。

He may go and hang himself for all I care.（他就是去吊颈我也不在乎。）

I am inclined to go and have a fling with them. ——Hardy（我想去和他们一同跳一回舞。）

See what you’ve been and done. ——Dickens（看你做的什么事。）

You will come and see us sometimes，won’t you？（你得空就来玩吧。）

Send and fetch it.（你去拿来吧。）

When you hear that I am dead，you must be sure and not grieve. ——Bronte（你听到我的死讯，一定不要悲伤。）

I’ll be sure and go. ——Wetherell（我一定去。）

She should learn and indulge his habits. ——Trollope（她对于丈夫的癖好，不得不放任不管。）

Fret must make haste and get well. ——Eliot（佛莱德非赶快好起来不可。）

I shall write and thank him. ——Marryat（我要写信去谢谢他。）

Mind and write to me.（不要忘记写信给我。）

Look and see where it is likely to be.（去找找可能在的地方看看。）

I will try and find it.（我要找找看。）

最后一句如改为过去的“I tried and found it.”，两个动词便成为coordinate的意思了。如要保存原来的意思，又要说成过去的话，则只好不用-ed的形式，而用did，例如：

Nor did Dobbin try and convince him that Amelia’s happiness was not centred in turtle-soup. ——Thackeray（达宾也没有想要说服他，爱米丽亚的幸福并不完全在水鱼汤上。）

现在再看and后接形容词时所形成的subordinate的关系。这个在现代英语中主要是限于nice and . . .，fine and . . .，good and . . .，lovely and . . .等固定的表现法。第一个形容词并不是修饰主语的，而是define后面一个形容词所表示的quality，好像是一个adverb一样，所以COD辞典上索性将nice and解释为satisfactorily，并举例说：

The house stands nice and high.（地位颇高。）

The car is going nice and fast.（跑得够快。）

再看其他的例句：

This cloth is nice and soft.（= nicely soft）（这布很柔软。）

That will make you nice and warm.（那会使你很温暖。）

I wish your eyes would always flash like that，for it looks so nice and manly. ——Doyle（我希望你的眼睛老是像那一样地炯炯有光，因为它看去很有大丈夫的气概。）

Yes，Mr. Caudle，you’ll be nice and ill in the morning！——Jerrold（是呀，柯先生，你喝得这样醉明天还是会不舒服的呀！）

The grass is fine and tall.（草长得很高。）

These peaches are good and ripe.（= well ripe）（这些桃子很成熟了。）

A lovely and warm day.（= a delightfully warm day）（一个温暖可爱的日子。）（女性用语）

But I was rare and hungry. ——Stevenson（但是我已饥肠辘辘了。）

I shall go into business bright and early in the morning. ——Mrs. Stowe（明天一早我就要开始工作。）

这些用and结合两个字来表示一个意思的，修辞学上称为hendiadys，通常是一正一副，形容词时为前者修饰后者，名词时为后者修饰前者，如goblets and gold = golden goblets；death and honour = honourable death。

57. as if的用法

中文说的“俨然”可用英文的连词as if来译，如“他说话的神气俨然是一个学者”，英文便可译为“He talks as if he were a scholar.”。但有人在as if后接用现在时态的动词，是否错误？请说明as if的用法。

【解答】as if的说法，别的文字也有，如德文有als ob，法文有comme si，意思完全一样，说as though是只有英文才有的表达。据NED、Fowler、Curme、Pence等，都认为as if和as though二者完全一样，用法上毫无差异，不过口语则多半要用as if，取其短简。as if原是as would be the case if之略，如“It looks as if it would rain.”，即是“It looks as would be the case if it would rain.”之略。既然是假设语气（Subjunctive Mood），其后自应接过去式的动词为妥，不过现在的用法，似乎什么都可以接，尤其是接现在时态的动词，如as if I am都可以的。George Oliver Curme在他著的A Grammar of the English Language第三卷中说，as if后接用直陈语气现在，是为着表示greater confidence（更大的信心）而用的。

一般的情形是后面接子句，而那子句中的动词，就大有变化，除用假设语气外，又有直陈语气。在假设语气中用过去完成时态时的可能性最少，在直陈语气中则用现在时态、现在完成时态、未来时态以表现确实性。假设语气至多只有一点可能性，而直陈语气则表现出确实性来。直陈语气具有可能性自不待言。

在as if后接if I were，是与现在的事实相反的假定，接if I had been，是与过去的事实相反的假定，这和它前面主句的时态无关，所以说“He looks as if he were ill.”是现在看他像生病，说“He looked as if he were ill.”是以前看他像生病。主句中动词的时态虽有现在、过去的不同，但as if的子句中动词的时态不变。我们又可以说，“He looks as if he had been ill.（他现在看来好像过去生了病的样子。）”，以及“He looked as if he had been ill.（他以前看来好像过去生了病的样子。）”。在as if的子句中用过去完成时态，表示“意外”（unexpectedness）或惊异（surprise）等，即所谓感情的主观性（emotional subjectivity），当然，不说had been，而换用were，也是没有什么不可以的。

And the voice of Nature said：“This is a new world for you！”As when a man gets up at four o’clock and goes out into a summer morning，and beasts，birds，trees stare at him as if all had been made new. ——Galsworthy（于是听到大自然的声音说：“对你这是一个新的世界呀！”比如一个人在早上四点钟起身，走出到夏天的早晨中去，而各种飞禽走兽，乃至树木，都来望着他，宛如一切都变新了。）

It will be as if we were born again. ——Stanley Kauffmann（那好像我们重新出生过了。）

When I think about religion at all，I feel as if I would like to found an order for those who cannot believe. ——Oscar Wilde（假使我想到宗教的话，我觉得好像我想要为那些不能信教的人建立一个教团似的。）

“It looks as though you’ve fallen into a trap，Father.”“Yes，it does，doesn’t it？”——E. Bronte（“爸爸，你好像落入一个陷阱了。”“是呀，可不是吗？”）

It is beginning to look as if we are hemmed in by bears and cougars. ——Betty MacDonald（我们开始感觉到好像被熊和豹所包围了的样子。）

There he is to the life，looking as if at any moment he will slowly open those large grey heavy lidded eyes，stare at us solemnly for a minute，and then declare that “really he hasn’t the least idea.”——J. B. Priestley（这是写生画出来的他的肖像，看上去现在还好像他会慢慢地睁开那大而灰色的，眼皮重重地垂下着的两眼，严肃地望着我们，一会儿之后，就会说出：“我真是一点也不知道呀。”）

在as if后接的子句，有作补语用的，有作形容词用的，有作副词用的。

It seemed as if the spot was unoccupied by a living soul. ——T. Hardy（那地方好像一个人也没有住过似的。）as if以下的子句是作补语用的。

There was in his eye a look as if he would annihilate me. ——Curme（在他的眼中有他将消灭我的神色。）as if以下的子句是作形容词用的。

They stood upon a bleak and desert moor，where monstrous masses of stone were cast about，as though it were the burial-place of giants. ——Dickens（他们站在一个荒凉寂寞的旷野，那儿巨大的石块散满一地，俨然是巨人葬身之所。）as if以下的子句是作副词用的。

在as if之后，可以不接子句，而接形容词、分词、不定词及介词片语等，例如：

She forced down her upper lip as if afraid that to smile was not polite. ——Hardy（她好像生怕笑出来失礼似的，勉强把上嘴唇压下来。）

He raised his hand as if to command silence.（他把手举起来，好像命令不要再说话了。）

She hurriedly left the room as though angry.（她好像生气似的匆匆走出房间去了。）

His shoulders were bent as though under a weight. ——A. Huxley（他的肩背好像负着重荷似的弯曲了。）

Ella sat for a while as if stunned. ——Hardy（艾拉简直好像昏晕了似的坐了一会。）

Seven friends，indeed，（were going）to give a party for Danny！It is as though to say Danny had only seven friends！——Steinbeck（真的只有七个朋友来为丹尼开一个舞会！那简直就像丹尼一共只有七个朋友似的。）在to say前可视为省略了one were的字样。

在as if后甚至有插入that一字的，如：

It seems to me，as if，hunted by calamity as I have been，that I should never recover any cheerfulness again. ——Shelley（灾难一直在追迫着我，好像我再也不会恢复愉快的心情了。）

58. 连词since前后的时态

“一别十年。”译成英文时通常说“It is ten years since I saw you last.”。在连词since后的动词要用过去时，在其前子句中的动词则通常是用现在时。这个since既然是表起点，用过去动词来表示自很适当，唯前句所表示的时间是从过去到现在所构成的，用现在完成时态，不是更为合适吗？

【解答】这是一个很有意思的问题，而事实上英文的口语（colloquial style）早已说成“It has been ten years since I saw you last.”了。原来这句话的意思是“I saw you last ten years ago.”。表示时间如用It做主语则习惯上接用现在动词，如直说出时间而用作主语时则习惯上接用现在完成动词，例如：

It is ten years since . . .

Ten years have passed since . . .

有人认为口语说的It has been ten years since . . .是上面这两种表现法的混合（blending）所构成的。这种用法在名作家笔下习见不鲜，例如：

My digestion and my heart have got much worse since I saw you last. ——A. Huxley：Happily Ever After（别后我的消化和我的心脏都坏多了。）

I have never seen him since I closed the door. ——T. Hardy：The Three Strangers（自从我关了那门以后我就再没有见到他了。）

Since her mother had died，a year before，leaving her the organ as her sole legacy，she had lived mainly by that instrument. ——E. Dowson：Souvenirs of the Egoist（自从她母亲在一年前死后，留下给她一架风琴作为她唯一的遗产，她主要靠那乐器维持生活。）

但在since句中以现在完成代过去的，似乎更多，而形成一种倾向了。

Since I have known you，I have become aware that there are things of value in human existence. ——B. Russell：Satan in the Suburbs（自从我认识你以来，我就注意到在人类的生存中是有不少富有价值的东西的。）

It’s been a long time since I’ve seen you. It’s been nearly a year，hasn’t it？——Caldwell：God’s Little Acre（许久不见了。快有一年了吧。）

It’s been a long time since I’ve seen him so excited. ——Caldwell：Epi-sode in Palmetto（好久没有看见他这样兴奋的了。）

I’ve had hardly any appetite since I’ve been here. ——Henry James：The Portrait of a Lady（我自从到这里以来，几乎没有一点食欲了。）

Fortunately there’s never been any trouble since I’ve been with her. ——Christie：Death on the Nile（自从我和她在一起以来，幸而没有发生一点什么麻烦。）

How have you been amusing yourself since we have been away？——Forster：The Story of a Panic（我们走了以后，你怎样自寻乐趣的呢？）

I’ve had the deepest affection and respect for you ever since I’ve known you. ——Christie：Appointment with Death（自从我认识你以来，就对你非常的敬爱。）

Not ten people have called to inquire since I’ve been laid up. ——Maugham：The Razor’s Edge（自从我卧病以来，来探问的不到十人。）

Since I’ve been here I haven’t dreamt once. ——Maugham：Christmas Holiday（我来此以后没有做过一次梦。）

由上述种种表现法看来，“我来到本城已十年了”这句话，可以有下列各种译法：

Ten years have passed since I came to this town.（文言的说法）

It’s been ten years since I’ve come to this town.（口语的说法）

It’s been ten years since I came to this town.（口语的说法）

It is ten years since I came to this town.（正规的说法）

It is ten years since I’ve come to this town.（普通的说法）

下面的译法便是错误的：

It has passed ten years since I came to this town.

Ten years passed since I had come to this town.

I have come to this town since ten years ago.

注意下面两句意思的不同：

He has written to me frequently since I was ill.（自从我病愈以来，他屡次写信给我。）

He has written to me frequently since I have been ill.（自从我生病以来，他屡次写信给我。）

Ⅷ 介 词

59. around和round

英文的round和around二字意义相同，不知在用法上有何分别？美国一般似乎都是用 around一字，请就此字的美国用法，举例说明。

【解答】这两字在英语中原来是有分别的：around表示静的周围，round表示动的周围，即around是围坐，围炉，围着不动的意思，而round便是环绕着走，所以round要和表动作的动词连用，而around则和表不动的动词连用。例如：

We sat around the fire.（我们围炉而坐。）

The earth moves round the sun.（地球绕日而行。）

不过这种分别也并不显著，因为混用的时候很多，尤其是在英国用round的场合美国惯用于around，例如《环游世界八十天》这部美国电影，便名为Around the World in 80 Days，英国是应该用round the world的，如说“Drake sailed round the world.”之类。又英国人说的“He lives just round the corner of this street.（他就住在这街的转角处。）”，美国人也要说成“He lives just around the corner of this street.”。

代about用的时候仍是美国用around英国用round，如：

He will be back round（美around）noon.（他将在中午光景回来。）

He is ready to pay somewhere round（美around）＄3000 for a car.（他准备随时付出三千元左右买一辆车。）

至于around一字在美国话中作介词的用法有：

（1）规避，回避。

How can we get around that regulation？（我们要怎样才能规避那条规则呢？）

许多动词和around结合时，都可发生“回避”的意思。如detour around（迂回绕道），squeak around（侥幸避开），shunt around（回避），shy around（避开），squirm around（扭曲）等等。此外说find〔see〕a way around（找寻规避的方法），take a way around（采取回避步骤）等，也是表同样意思的片语。例如：

A legal way around the situation would be found.（大概可以找到规避这种情形的法律上的手段。）

Is there any way around or through the dilemma？（有什么可以规避或突破这种难关的方法吗？）

Farmer Washington did not approve of slavery；he inherited it，like the land，and couldn’t find a way around it.（农夫华盛顿原是不赞成奴隶制度的；只因这种制度像土地一样，他从先人继承了下来，无法摆脱。）

F-86 jets，built in Canada around United States engines and instru-ments，will go to England.（避免采用美国的机器和器具，在加拿大建造的F-86型喷气机将送往英国去。）

But while his brain was taking the long way around his body was work-ing fast.（但是当他的头脑正在想着怎样脱离险境的时候，他的身体也敏捷地移动了。）

（2）服务，工作。

Birdie has been around the major league for 15 years and knows the hitter far better than I do.（白蒂在职业棒球协会服务了十五年，知道击球者的情形胜我多多。）

In return，Belcher helped Stanley around the government，helped his friends get licences for construction work on a resort hotel . . .（作为报答起见，贝尔邱帮忙斯坦利到政府供职，又帮忙他的朋友获得休养地旅馆建筑工程的执照……）

（3）近于；在近处；近……时；差不多；到处。

It（= investigation）may enable the citizen to find his way around the government bureaucracy without either a guide or a guardian.（市民们仔细调查一下，没有指导者或监督人也能理解官厅的情形。）句中to find one’s way around意为理解。

He’d make a good ambassador. He certainly knows his way around there.（他会成为一个好大使的。他确是熟知那边的情形。）句中to know one’s way around（英国说to know one’s way about）意为熟悉，精通。

It was the face of a man around sixty.（那是一个六十岁光景的人的面孔。）

He likes to roam around the country.（他喜欢在田野间到处漫步。）

His father left him around a million dollars.（他父亲遗给他差不多有一百万元。）

He asked me to come here around ten o’clock.（他要我十点左右来此。）

Don’t come around here.（不要到附近来。）

（4）关于。

There will be a debate around this problem.（将举行这问题的讨论会。）

附带地我们看看around一字在美国作副词用时，有些什么意义：

（1）交际。

He wasn’t a comfortable person to be around.（他不是一个交际时让人感到愉快的人。）

（2）居留。

They act like people who don’t plan to be around very long.（他们的行为好像那些不打算长住的人们一样。）

（3）存在。

His night club and Japanese partner are still around.（他的夜总会仍然存在，那日本人的帮手也仍然在职。）

（4）饱经世故；经验丰富的。

The most common occupational disease of movie actresses—especially those who have been around as long as Stanwyck—is megalocephalia，other-wise known as swelled head.（女电影明星的最普通的职业上的疾病，尤其是像斯坦威克那样的经验丰富的女明星，就是巨头症，这是自大狂的别名。）

60. “的”字的各种译法

“他给了我一张一百元的支票。”英译为“He gave me a check of＄100.”。为何不对？中文的“的”字除译作“of”外，还有什么别的译法？

【解答】中文的“的”字决不限于译作“of”，由其含义不同，而有种种译法。兹分别例解如下：

（1）“属于” of：

a friend of his（他的朋友）

the nest of a bird（鸟的巢）

the cover of a book（书的封面）

the value of money（钱的价值）

a man of ability（能干的人）

the children of a family（一家的孩子）

（2）“关于” on；in；of：

a book on algebra（关于代数的书）

a teacher of English（教英文的老师）

an examination in English（英文的考试）

an authority on biology（生物学的权威）

a poem in praise of the Yangtze River（歌颂长江的诗）

a genius in poetry（诗的天才）

（3）“对于” for；to：

the bill for last month（上月的账单）

a cure for headache（头痛的药）

a medicine for a cough（咳嗽药）

a check for one thousand dollars（一千元的支票）

a preface to the book（书的序文）

the entrance to the house（房子的入口）

a talent for music（音乐的天才）

the key to the back-door（后门的钥匙）

a disgrace to the family（家门的耻辱）

（4）“所在” at；in；on；over；from：

the cherry blossoms at Washington（华盛顿的樱花）

my daughter in New York（我在纽约的女儿）

a house on the river（河上的人家）

the winter in Taipei（台北的冬天）

a school at Queen’s Street（女王街的学校）

a friend at Shanghai（上海的朋友）

stations on the Nanking-Shanghai line（沪宁线上的车站）

a businessman of Singapore（新加坡的实业家）

pears from Australia（澳洲的梨子）

a visitor from home（故乡的来客）

a bridge over a river（河上的桥）

（5）“材料”〔built，made〕 of：

a ring made of gold = a gold ring（金戒指）

a bridge built of stone = a stone bridge（石桥）

（6）“执笔” by：

a play by Shakespeare（莎翁的剧本）

a novel by Dickens（狄更斯的小说）

a painting by Chih Pei-shih（齐白石的画）

a poem by Tu Fu（杜甫的诗）

（7）“人的关系” by；with；between；to：

the relations between teacher and pupil（师生的关系）

the difference between the two（二者的不同）

nephew to Mr. Wong（王君的侄儿）

a private secretary to the Premier（首相的秘书）

He is a favourite with his uncle.（他是叔父的宠儿。）

He has two children by his former wife.（他有两个前妻为他生的儿子。）

（8）“其他的关系” in；of；with：

the cherry blossoms in full bloom（盛开的樱花）

the man in question（有问题的人）

a man in adversity（处逆境的人）

a woman in red（穿红衣的妇人）

a letter in English（用英文写的信）

a man short in stature（矮小的人）

one’s proficiency in the Chinese language（中文的熟练）

a girl of sixteen（十六岁的少女）

an old man of eighty（八十岁的老人）

Chih Shah adorned with autumnal tints（红叶装点的栖霞）

问题中的句子应改正为：“He gave me a check for＄100.”。

61. of的用法

“战舰现在是用钢铁建造的。”英译为“Warships are now built by steel.”。据说译文中的by应改为of才对。请就of的用法，举例说明。

【解答】英文惯用法，关于“材料”要用of，“原料”则用from，如一张木桌子，制成之后，我们仍可看出是木头做的，所以这是以木头为“材料”的，要用of，例如：“The desk is made of wood.”。又如一瓶葡萄酒，虽是葡萄做的，但我们在酒中看不出葡萄来，它是以葡萄为“原料”而已，这时便得用from来表示，如“Wine is made from grapes.”。战舰用钢铁建造，造成后仍然看见钢铁，所以是“材料”的用法，自然应说“Warships are built of steel.”才对。

至于of的用法，重要的有下列各种：

（1）表“分离”，如除去，剥夺之类。

The man robbed me of my purse.（那人抢走了我的钱包。）

They cleared the sea of the robbers.（他们肃清了海盗。）

Astonishment deprived me of my power of speech.（我惊讶得说不出话来了。）

Religion disarms death of its terrors.（信教使人不再畏死。）

We have rid a house of vermin.（我们把家里的老鼠一扫而光。）

The doctor cured him of his chronic disease.（医生把他的痼疾治好了。）

（2）表“根源”“原因”等。

He died of stomach cancer.（他死于胃癌。）（死因）

The house is built of stone.（那屋子是石造的。）

Each sentence consists of（或is composed of；is made up of）two parts.（每个句子都是由两部分组成的。）

May I ask a favour of you？（我请求你一件事好吗？）

He borrowed a large sum of the bank.（他向银行借了一大笔款项。）

I learned of the accident only this morning.（我在今天早上才听到那意外事件的。）

（3）表“部分关系”。

I know some of them.（我认识他们当中的一些人。）

His pronunciation is none of the best.（= is not very good）（他的发音不太好。）

It’s none of your business.（不干你的事。）

（4）表“形容关系”。（of +抽象名词=形容词）

He is a man of action.（活动家。）（= He is an active man.）

It is of great importance.（这是极重要的。）（这个“be + of +名词”的be of = have。）

A poem of my own composing.（自己做的诗。）

This road is of your own choosing.（这是你自己选择的道路。）

Is this of any use to you？（这对你有什么用吗？）

（5）表“所有关系”。

Is she any relation of yours？（她是你的亲戚吗？）

He is a friend of mine.（她是我的朋友。）

（6）表“同格关系”。

The city of London（伦敦市）

The Mount of Omei（峨眉山）

The Cape of Good Hope（好望角）

（7）表“动作关系”。

Have you heard of the news？（你听到那个消息了吗？）

To think of you makes me old.（思君令人老。）

I will inform him of the event.（我要把这事通知他。）

He reminds me of his brother.（他使我想起他的哥哥。）

又，英文中，“be +形容词+ of”的形式，特别的多。这是可以代他动词用的。例如：

I was ignorant of（= did not know）the fact.（我不曾知道那事。）

I am afraid of（= fear）it.（我怕那个。）

I am fond of（= like）reading.（我好学。）

他如to be apprehensive of（= apprehend）（悬念）；to be productive of（= produce）（生产）；to be decisive of（= decide）（决定）；to be doubtful of（= doubt）（怀疑）；to be guilty of（= commit）a crime（犯罪）；to be innocent of（= not to commit）a crime（无罪）等等。

另外还有是没有相当动词的，如：

The subject is full of interest.（这题目充满趣味。）

The subject is devoid of interest.（这题目毫无趣味。）

He is proud of his learning.（他自夸博学。）

She is ashamed of her poverty.（她以贫穷为耻。）

The purse is empty of its contents.（钱包空了。）

I am tired of reading.（我读书读厌了。）

62. hear of、hear from

（a）I have not heard of him ever since.

（b）I have not heard from him ever since.

这两句英文，不知含义有何不同？

【解答】（a）从那以来我就再没有听到他的消息了。（b）从那以来我就再没有接到他的信了。

（a）句中的hear of = receive a report about；get news of（获得消息，知其动静，问及某人的存在或某事的发生）。例如：

I have never heard of a Mr. White in this neighbourhood.（我从来没有听说过这附近住有一位怀特先生。）

I was shocked to hear of his sudden death.（突然听到他的死讯，我实为震惊。）

He left home ten years ago and has not been heard of since.（他离家十年，迄无音讯。）

I have never heard of him.（我从未听说过他。）

I won’t hear of it.（= I won’t allow it; I refuse to it.）（不许；不予考虑；不赞同。）

Every one has heard of the nightingale，though very many have never heard it sing.（人人都听说过夜莺的名字，但很多人都未曾听到它的歌声。）

Be sure and let me hear of your safe arrival.（一定要把你平安抵达的消息通知我。）

Of the seven children，all told，that had been born to them，three had died；one girl had gone to Kansas；one boy had gone to Sioux Falls，never even to be heard of after；another boy had gone to Washington；and the last girl lived five counties away in the same State，but was so burdened with cares of her own that she rarely gave them a thought. ——Dreiser（他们之间一共生了七个孩子，有三个死了；一个女孩到堪萨斯州去了；一个男孩到南达可塔州的苏瀑去了以后，消息杳然；另外一个男孩到华盛顿去了；而最后一个女孩虽住在同一州内，相隔五郡，但她因本身苦劳的重荷，很难得有机会想到她的父母。）

至于（b）例中的hear from = get a letter，etc. from（接到信件等）。例如：

Let me hear from you now and then.（请你时常写信给我。）

I have not heard from him since.（从那以后我就未接到他的信了。）

I hear from America every week.（我每星期都有来自美国的信。）

I’ve heard nothing from him.（= I haven’t heard anything from him yet.）（我还未接到他任何信息。）

I should be glad to hear from you on the subject.（关于那个问题我很高兴接到你的回信。）

63. 表接触的on

“杭州是在西湖的湖畔。”译成英文为“Hangchow is at the shore of West Lake.”，据说译错了，应将at改为on才对。为什么“在”要译作on呢？请将这个on的用法，举例详为说明。

【解答】英文介词的on，是表示“接触”的，意为“在上”，如：

The book is on the table.（书在桌上。）

同有“在上”之意的over，便是不接触的，如：

The electric light is over the table.（桌子上头悬有电灯。）

例句中说的“杭州是在西湖的湖畔”，意即那城在湖上，表示与湖岸线相接触，故有用on的必要。基本的概念是表面的接触，所以：

There is a lizard on the ceiling.（天花板上有一只壁虎。）与天花板的下面接触。

She has a ring on her finger.（她手指上戴着戒指。）与手指接触。

We live on the earth.（我们住在地球上。）与地面接触。

A picture hangs on the wall.（墙上挂的有一张画。）与墙壁接触。

以上等等用法，都是属于此一范畴。这种接触进而适用于平面上的接触，有“接近”及“朝向”之意，例如：

Paris is on the Seine.（巴黎在塞纳河上。）

The house is on the river.（河上人家。）

The door opens on a lawn.（门开向草地。）

The sun shines on the porch.（太阳晒进门廊。）

You must have pity on the needy.（你对穷人要有怜悯之心。）

There are trees on both sides of the street.（街道的两旁都有树木。）

On the south of Malaysia lies Singapore.（新加坡在马来西亚之南。）接界，境界相接。

Taiwan faces the Pacific on the east.（台湾东边面向太平洋。）

They are the countries on the Pacific.（它们是太平洋沿岸的国家。）

On my left was a brook.（在我的左手边就是一条小溪。）

再看下面几个抽象用法的例句：

I was on the point of telephoning you.（我正要打电话给你了。）

Unfortunately he died on the eve of taking over a large business.（他在承接一个大企业的前夕不幸逝世。）

She was on the verge of bursting into tears.（她几乎要哭出来了。）

此外表示“同时”（at the time of）的on，也可以解释为“一个动作和另一动作，在时间上的接触”。现分二项例解如下：

（1）on +动名词一般可用as soon as或when开头的副词子句来改写。

On hearing（= As soon as he heard）the news，he turned pale.（一听到那个消息，他脸就白了。）

On arriving（= When he arrived）at the airport he was greeted by the Prime Minister.（一到飞机场，他就受到内阁总理的迎接。）

On reaching home，I called him up on the telephone.（一抵家门，我就打了电话给他。）

（2）on +（动作）名词（由动词变来的名词）：

On his arrival（= When he arrived）at the airport he was greeted by the Prime Minister.（一到飞机场，他就受到内阁总理的迎接。）

I will pay the money on receipt of the goods（= as soon as I received the goods）.（货物收到即付款。）

On my entrance into the room（= When I entered the room），he stop-ped talking.（我一进屋，他就不说了。）

On closer examination（= When we examined the pearl more closely）we found that the pearl was a mere imitation.（仔细检查一下，我们发觉那粒珍珠原是假的。）

Cash on delivery.（货到付款。）

64. in the morning of a day

在morning、afternoon、evening等字前的介词，英文惯用in，如in the morning之类，但据说指某一天的上午时，in就要改为on，而不可以再保留in的用法，如on the morning of Sunday（星期日上午），不知确否？

【解答】依据介词的惯用法，是在上、下午等之前用in，如in the morning；in the afternoon；in the evening皆是；在某日之前就要用on，如on Sunday；on July 4，1969；on the day when Japan surrendered。说某一天的上午，如果把两个片语排列在一起，而成in the morning on Sunday，则未能把“的”的意思表达出来，即两者之间没有联系，应当用of（的）连起来才对。于是用于日子前的on，就得移到morning的前面去，代替原用于上午前的in，再用of把上午和那一天连起来，而说成on the morning of Sunday，我们现在明白了为什么要用on来代替in，那原来是指的那一天，而不是指的那个上午。

不过这种规则也不是绝对的，早在三四十年前，荷兰的一位英文学者Hendrik Poutsma就发现了许多例外。他是一位中学的英语教师，自己研究英语，很有成就，享到国际的声誉。他说某天上午（下午或晚间）是可能有in the morning（afternoon，etc.）of a day的形式的，尤其是前面用有early、late等副词时，更是要用in，而不用on，因为early等副词与in the morning等片语结合起来更要自然，即令后面接有of-phrase，介词仍保留原来的in。

经这位荷兰人这样加以指点之后，我留意到在英美人的笔下，果然有这种用法，而且多是出自名家之手，如：

In the evening of this day of this last day of expectation，which was the twenty-third of December，Eustacia was at home alone. ——Thomas Hardy（期待着的十二月二十三日那最后一天的晚上，优斯苔夏独自一人留在家里。）

Late in the afternoon of a chilly day in February，two gentlemen were sitting alone over their wine，in a well-furnished dining-parlour in the town of P. ——Mrs. Stowe（二月的某一个寒冷的下午很迟的时候，两位绅士独坐在P城一家有着漂亮家私的餐厅中，喝着葡萄酒。）

It was early in the morning of April 29，1947. ——Reader’s Digest（那是在一九四七年四月二十九日的早上。）

Early in the afternoon of the next day，looking along the horizon before us，we saw that . . . ——Francis Parkman（在第二天早早的下午，望着前面的地平线，我们便看到了……）

. . . in the late morning of March 7. ——Life（……三月七日傍午时分。）

Soames Forsyte emerged from the Knightsbridge Hotel，where he was staying in the afternoon of the 12th of May，1920. ——Galsworthy（索姆兹·福赛特从他所暂住的骑士桥旅馆出现的，是一九二○年五月十二日的下午。）

有人又举出一点，说凡有时间的就要用in，如“十月五日的早上五点钟”，就说at five in the morning of 5th Oct，而不用on，这个at five也等于early一样的意思，不过把时间说得很清楚罢了。

我们把重点放在某日就用on，把重点放在那个上午、下午或晚上，就用in，这说法也是合理的。

65. to the east、in the east

英文说方向是in the direction of，又可说in the south等；还有to和towards也是指方向的，如“He went to the south.”。说“柔佛在新加坡之北”，应译“Johore is in the north of Singapore.” 还是“Johore is to the north of Singapore.”？请问何者为对？理由为何？

【解答】应说“Johore is to the north of Singapore.”才对，因为在某一地域的领土内的方向就用in，在某一地域以外的方向就用to，柔佛不在新加坡的领域内，故不能用in，而要用to。

Johore is in the south of Malaysia.（柔佛在马来西亚的南部。）

Johore is to the south of Kuala Lumpur.（柔佛在吉隆坡的南边。）

由上二例比较一下，对此二字的用法，当无疑义。总之，to是表“方向”的，而in是指的“内部”。in指“方向”时，原为“在其中”之意，如in the distance（在远方）范围之内，in the east（在东方）范围之内，in a western direction（向西方）范围之内。由此扩大而用于in one’s sight（视界之内），in my opinion（在我的意见中），the latest thing in cars（最新型的汽车）等的，也都是指范围或领域说的。有时可将to the略去，单说east of即可。

Japan lies（to the）east of China.（日本在中国之东。）

Tainan is about 500 miles（to the）south of Taipei.（台南在台北约五百英里之南。）

In a little district west of Washington Square the streets have run crazy. ——O. Henry（在华盛顿公园之西的那一带地方，街路纷乱破裂。）在west前省略了to the二字。

最简单的只用东西南北一个字，意思也是一样，为加强意思则可用towards或in the direction of，如：

He went east. / He went to the east. / He went towards the east. / He went in the direction of the east.（他到东方去了。）

Barking is seven miles to the east of London.（巴金在伦敦之东七英里。）to the east of = in an eastward direction from

在to the east of（向东方）之外，还有at the east of（在东边），in the east of（的东部）及on the east of（的东端）三种说法，应加辨别。

Japan is in the east of Asia.（日本在亚洲的东部。）

There was a big battle at the north of the Liaotung Peninsula.（在辽东半岛的北边会有一场大战。）

Russia is in the north of Europe.（俄国在欧洲的北部。）

Ceylon is an island at the south of India.（锡兰是在印度南边的一个岛。）

It is bounded on the south by France.（南与法国接壤。）

It is a famous street in the south of London.（那是伦敦南部一条有名的街。）

China faces the Pacific on the east.（中国东临太平洋。）on有接触的意思。

The country is bounded on the west by a sea.（那个国家西方与海接界。）

On the north of Singapore lies Malaysia.（新加坡之北是马来西亚。）

66. 用于地点的at、in、on

英文的介词at、in、on三字，都可以用来指示地点，请将它们不同的用法，分别举例加以说明。

【解答】英文介词用于地点的at、in、on，有下列种种用法，说at比in的意思要来得广，如说at the church，意思就是说in or near the church，可知at不像in的只限于内部而已。现分别来看这三字的用法。

At：（1）用于小城市，村落，建筑物，公共团体等的前面。例：

He was born at Fengshan.（他生在凤山。）

She was educated at Taiwan University.（她是在台大毕业的。）

There are hot springs at Wulai.（乌来有温泉。）

（2）单只当作一个地点看时，虽大都会也用at。例：

An English King was crowned at Paris. ——Macaulay（有一位英王在巴黎即位。）

但由远地来看他本国的首都，或他自己所居住的都市，就要用in，而不用at。

（3）在船碇泊或寄靠的港名或地名前用at。例：

The steamer will touch（或 call）at Keelung.（轮船将在基隆停泊。）

The ship called at Japan.（船在日本停靠。）

There are always several foreign ships in the harbour at Singapore.（在新加坡海港中，总有几条外国轮船停泊着。）

（4）活用场所的一点时也可用at。例：

We made a circle，with him at the center.（我们以他为中心，画了一个圆圈。）

There’s someone at the door.（门口有人来了。）

We got off at the wrong station.（我们弄错站下车了。）

We arrived at our destination before dark.（我们在天黑以前到达目的地了。）

He entered the house at the back door.（他从后门进入屋中了。）

He received a good treatment at the hands of highly skilled doctors.（他在非常熟练的医生手上接受治疗。）

I got the information at first hand.（我得到直接情报。）

What the teacher says often goes in at one ear and out at the other.（老师的话这个耳朵进那个耳朵出。）

He threw a stone at the dog.（投石于犬。）

We all laughed at him.（我们都笑他。）

The waterfall may be heard at a distance of two miles.（瀑布在两英里外可以听到。）

She kept him at arm’s length.（她对他保持相当的距离。）

In：（1）用于国家，大都会，及其他政治上或地理上的大区分的前面。例：

We live in Singapore.（我们住在新加坡。）

Taiwan University is in Taipei.（台大在台北。）

（2）用于包含在其中的意味时（不论市、镇、村等皆适用）。例：

There are two Buddhist temples in that village.（那村中有两个佛庙。）

His residence is in Tanlin.（他家住在东林。）

What is there in that bed in the garden？（花园里那花床中种的什么？）

（3）用于street（街道），但美国用on。例：

He lives in Park Lane.（他住在公园路。）

He lives on Park Lane.〔美国用法〕

I bought it at a shop in that street.（我在那条街上一家店中买的。）

（4）凡某场所或地点的当中也用in。例：

There is not a cloud in the sky.（青天无片云。）

I live in the north of Singapore.（我住在新加坡的北部。）

He didn’t mind going in the rain.（他不介意在雨中走。）

The cat was lying in the sun.（猫睡在太阳当中。）

On：（1）表地点的接触。例：

We laid a carpet on the floor.（我们在地板上铺了一张地毯。）面上的接触。

Look at the picture on the wall.（请看壁上的画。）垂直面的接触。

There are many lizards on the ceiling.（天花板上有很多壁虎。）面下的接触。

（2）表地方的接壤。例：

London is situated on the River Thames.（伦敦位于泰晤士河上。）

Toronto is a large city on the shore of Lake Ontario.（多伦多是安大略湖畔的大城市。）

这个on比at的意思更狭，例如：

There is a big pine-tree on the top of the hill.（在山顶上有一株大松树。）其中的on = on the very summit，如果说at the top of the hill，则at = somewhere near the top。

同是用于地点的at与in，一般的分别是大地方用in，小地方用at，如：

I arrived at Shanghai in China.（我到达中国的上海。）

I arrived at Lunghwa in Shanghai.（我到达上海的龙华。）

还有自己居住的总觉得是大地方，离开了以后就认为它变小了，例如：

I am in Tainan now.（我现在在台南。）

I was at Tainan ten years ago.（十年前我在台南。）

比较at、in、on在场所上的不同，如：

He is standing at the corner.（他站在角上。）这个at是指地点的，如街的转角处。

I found the pin in the corner of the room.（我在房间的角上找到了那大头针。）这个in是指角的内面，和上述at指外面的不同。

There is a drugstore on the corner.（街角上有家杂货店。）这个on是指表面的，所以换用at也是可以的。用on是因为店子是角的本身，不是内面。也不是外面，而是内外兼有的。

67. 用于时间的at、in、on

英文的介词at、in、on 三字，都可以用来指示时间，请将它们不同的用法，分别举例加以说明。

【解答】英文介词at、in、on，都可用于时间，at用于时间的一点（point of time），in用于时间的期间（period of time），on用于时间的一日（day），或表示时间的接触的地方，故几点几分，天明，中午，日出，日没，始，终等概用at；日期，午前，午后，月，季，年，世纪等则概用in；某日，星期几，某日的或某周日的朝夕，某场合等则概用on。

At：在下列短语中用at。

at half past ten（十时半），at daybreak（破晓），at daylight（黎明），at high noon（正午），at sunrise（日出），at sunset（日没），at the beginning of the month（月初），at that moment（那会儿），at that time（那时候），at this time of day〔year〕（在一天〔年〕的这个时候）。例：

The game starts at seven o’clock.（比赛七点钟就开始了。）

The mine may explode at any moment.（地雷随时都可能爆发。）

Don’t do two things at a time.（不要同时去做两件事。）

He read through the book at a sitting.（他一口气把那本书读完了。）这是把行为转移为一个时间了。

They were surprised at the strange sight.（他们见到那奇异的光景颇为吃惊。）这是同时显示出喜怒哀乐的感情来。

In：在下列短语中用in。

in the daytime（在白昼），in the morning（上午），in the afternoon（下午），in the evening（晚上），in a week（一星期内），in July（在七月内），in summer（在夏天），in the 4th year of the Republic of Singapore（新加坡共和国建国第四年），in the twentieth century（二十世纪），in〔the middle of〕 the night（夜里）。例：

Tokyo was the site of the Olympics in 1964.（东京是一九六四年奥林匹克运动会的举办地。）

He met many famous men in his time.（他在一生中会见了不少的名人。）指期间。

I’ll be ready in a minute.（我马上就准备好了。）指经过。

She will be able to get about in a week or so.（她再过一星期光景就可以走动了。）指经过。

I haven’t seen him in years.（多年不见他了。）这是美国话，英国说for years。

On：在下列短语中用on。

on Sunday（在星期天），on the 9th of August（八月九日），on Sunday morning（星期天的早上），on the morning of the 15th（十五日的早上），on New Year’s Eve（除夕），on one occasion（在某一次，曾经），on the occasion of his graduation（在他毕业的时候）。例：

I was born on the 1st of September.（我在九月一日出生。）

He never comes here on week days.（他在星期一到星期六，从来不到这里来。）

He comes here on Sundays.（他常在星期天来此。）

I am leaving on the evening of the 11th.（我在十一日晚上动身。）

I met Mr. Watson on several occasions.（我见过沃森先生好几次。）

On coming up to them（= When he came up to them），he made a polite bow.（当他走到他们跟前时，深深一鞠躬。）这是把地点上的接触应用到时间上去。

On his return to England（= As soon as he returned to England）he began studying law.（他一回到英国就开始研读法律。）

比较：

in the middle of the month（月之十日到廿日左右）

at the middle of the month（月之十五日前后）

注意下面的说法：

He arrived early in the morning.

He arrived early this morning.

He arrived late yesterday morning.

He arrived late in the morning yesterday.

He arrived the day before yesterday morning.

He arrived in the morning the day before yesterday.

He arrived early on Monday morning.

He arrived early in the morning on Monday.

He arrived on the morning of the 15th.

He arrived in the morning on the 15th.

再分别下面的含义：

On Sunday = This（Next）Sunday

On a Sunday = Any Sunday

On Sundays = Every Sunday

Next Sunday = On Sunday next

Of a Sunday = At sometime on Sundays

最后一例是口语体：

He will come of a Sunday.（他在星期天常来。）

It will happen of a morning.（这是早上常发生的事。）

又at用于hour、minute、second；on用于day；in用于year、month、week。凡用in的，必加冠词the，用at的则不加，这大概是因为at的〔t〕音和冠词the的〔t〕音会发生音的同化作用所致，如at night，in the night；at least，in the least；at sight of，in the sight of等等。

68. be known后用to，鲜用by

英文动词一般都可说成主动与被动两方面，如主动说“Everybody loves the child.（人人爱那小孩。）”，被动说“The child is loved by everybody.（那小孩为人人所爱。）”。但如动词 know，就不能说be known by，而要说be known to，不解何故？

【解答】英文的动词可分为两种，一种是动作性的动词，如“America was discovered by Columbus.（美洲是哥伦布所发现的。）”，这个 discover 的动词，是一种动作。另一种是状态性的动词，如“The child is loved by everybody.（那小孩为人人所爱。）”，这个love的动词，就是一种状态。上面都是用被动语态说的，如改为主动语态时，便成“Columbus discovered America.”及“Everybody loves the child.”。大部分的被动语态都可以说出动作的主体（agent），如by后面的“人”，但有些被动语态，称为“孤立的被动语态”，因为只表现出动作的结果，而不说明动作者是谁，如：

The door is shut now.（门现在关着。）

单说门现在是关着的状态，至于是谁造成这种状态的，即谁关上的，全然不在话下。因此这种被动语态，是不能改为主动语态的。我们不知是谁把门关上的，所以称为孤立的被动语态。句中的shut虽是过去分词，但在本质上实应看成一个形容词，由反义的句子中便可看得出来：“The door is open now.（门现在开着。）”。因为有形容词的本质，所以不说opened，而索性用形容词的open。不问是动作性的动词或是状态性的动词，都可以用作孤立的被动语态。由那动词所表现的结果而产生出一种状态来，门由“被关上”而产生出“关着”的状态，动作的主体完全消失了，所以无法再加上by什么人，而要改用其他的介词，这就是be known to的成因，他例如：

I am pleased with the boy.（我很喜欢这少年。）

He was absorbed in reading.（他专心读书。）

He is determined to have his own way.（他毅然决然要为所欲为。）

以上这些文句也都是不能加by，或改为主动语态的。同样地，我们说：

This book is known to everybody.（这本书人人都知道。）

英文的know这个动词，原来是状态性的动词，现成为状态性的被动语态，我们也可以把这个过去分词当作形容词看待（如上述is shut的shut，与is open的open相当），自然也成为孤立的被动语态之一了。句中的to决不可以换为by，因为know一个动作，并无动作的主体（agent），句子只说“这本书大家都知道”，并没有说是“谁”使大家知道的。它只表出大家都知道的那种状态而已。这个known既然与形容词相似，它后面的to，也就跟用在正式形容词后的to一样，例如“He is attentive to his teacher.（他用心听讲。）”“She is blind to her son’s faults.（她对儿子的过失盲无所见。）”是决不能把它改为by的。同时这两个句子自然也不能改为主动语态。

但英文中是有be known by的说法的，例如，《圣经·马太福音》十二章三十三节上，就有the tree is known by his fruit（看果子就可以知道树），现在一般说成“A tree is known by its fruit.”，意指观其言行可知其人。同样还有一句常言说道：

A man is known by the company he keeps.（视其所与交游可知其人之善恶。）

以上这两句中的by，都不是被动语态的by，而只是表示“手段”的一个介词。在known之后，by之前，不妨加to us二字进去，说成“A man is known to us by the company he keeps.”就更明白了。在by前的known，实有realized（了解）或distinguished（辨别）的意思，而by则有判断之意。偶然也见有用be known by作为被动语态的，如：

He lives alone，in poverty，scarcely，known by his neighbours. ——Maugham：A Writer’s Notebook（他在邻人们几乎不知道的状态下，穷苦孤寂地生活着。）

Of corse（= course），his affair with Mabel Dunston would never have got to be known by me but for my great use to Bradwell in carrying notes. ——E. Phillpotts：The Human Boy（当然，高班同学布拉威和丹斯顿校长的女儿梅贝儿的恋爱，我恐怕永远也不会知道，如果不是他要我代他传递情书的话。）

但这种表现是不足为法的。正规的用法还是be known to，这才是现代英语的表现。

It is known to few men.（少有人知道。）

He is quite unknown to me.（我一点也不知道他。）

I don’t think he’s known to anybody here.（我想这儿没有人认识他。）

Many had been personally known to Scrooge. ——Dickens：A Christmas Carol（许多人都和史克隆基有私交。）

A young man very slightly known to any of us. ——Austen（一个和我们任何人都很少往来的青年。）

How long has he known of this？Well，it was known to him this morn-ing early. ——Hardy（他知道这事有多久了？呃，今天一早他才知道的。）

Ⅸ 成 语

69. on the side of the angels

Aldous Huxley说的“When an artist deserts to the side of the angels it is the most odious of treasons.”不知应如何译法？句中the side of the angels是否为一成语？出典如何？

【解答】赫胥黎说的这句话，应译作“艺术家逃亡到传统派去的时候，便是最可恨的叛逆了”。为什么我要把the side of the angels译作“传统派”呢？这是需要很多的说明的。这个片语照字面翻译时是“天使一方面”，怎么艺术家逃到天使一方面去时，就是最大的叛逆呢？这据常情是讲不通的。我们必须找出这句话的出典，才能着手翻译。

话说英国维多利亚女王的朝代，出了一位卓越的政治家，他的名字叫作迪斯雷利（Benjamin Disraeli，1804—1881）。他曾两度出任首相，又做过财政大臣。他也是一位小说家，著有好几部小说，流传至今。当他在1864年从财政大臣的职位挂冠下来，乐得无官一身轻，正好寄情山水。恰在那年11月末，在牛津地方举行一个有关宗教的会议，迪斯雷利也被邀出席。主要的议题是讨论进化论冒犯宗教的问题。

达尔文（Charles Darwin，1806—1882）于1859年11月24日问世的《物种起源》（The Origin of Species）一书，还没有到预定的出版日期，1250本的初版书早已抢购一空。当然读者是有反应的，有人把他这书看作宗教论文，有人又把它看作反宗教的论文。他在剑桥大学的老师，不许图书馆购买此书，以免学生阅读。别的还可以忍受，唯有说人是猴子变的这一点，那些老教授们是怎样也忍受不了的。全国都把达尔文看作一个宗教的叛徒，幸亏有几个年轻的朋友声援他，其中最有力的就是赫胥黎（Thomas Henry Huxley，1825—1895，为Aldous Huxley的祖父）教授。辩论达到最高潮是在1860年6月27日，不列颠协会（British Association）在牛津开会，与赫胥黎教授对抗的是牛津有才干的主教威尔伯福斯（Samuel Wilberforce）。这位主教事先曾找到一位博物学者帮忙，获得了一些有关猩猩等的脚形和脑的大小种种知识，但是他得意忘形，竟出语轻薄地问赫胥黎到底是从父系还是从母系由猴子变成。赫教授回答说：“我并不以由猴子变成为可耻，但我感到可耻的是一个有天赋才能的人，竟滥用他的天赋，来谈论他自己所不懂得的事，以偏见和迷信的灰尘投入一般人的眼中。”那位主教便再没有话说了。进化论的学说问世五年之后的1864年，可说是攻击达到最高潮的时候（十年之后达尔文才获得胜利，世界的人都信服了）。在牛津举行的那一次会议上，有人问到迪斯雷利关于进化论的意见时，他便说出了这样一句名言：

The question is this：Is man an ape or an angel？I，my lord，am on the side of the angels.（问题是这样的：人是猴子还是天使？我却是站在天使的一边。）

他所谓“站在天使的一边”，是传统的看法，意谓他不认为人是从下等动物进化而来，而应是上帝造出来的，所以人是靠近天使的。从他说了这句话一百年来，科学昌明，不见得人们还会同意他的见解，不过他说的这句话，“on the side of the angels”，却成为典故，被人时常引用，而具有“传统的见解，正确的立场”的意思了。即是对于一个未决的问题以传统而更可喜的意见加以接受（agree with the orthodox and more pleasant view of a moot question）。

请看下面The Pattern of English书中的例：

“Different from”，reminds the reader that whatever other man have done and，indeed，whatever he himself said in his own note（that “different” can only be followed by “from” and not by “to” is a superstition），Fowler himself is on the side of the angels. ——G. H. Vallins（different from的表现法，使读者想起别人所做的，以及Fowler本人在笔记中所说的——他说different后只能接用from，不能接用to是迷信——Fowler本人是传统派。）

70. go west的来历

英语说“死”有说go west的，不知出自何典？

【解答】go〔gone〕 west 一辞据说是起源于第十六世纪，但成为一般通用的俚语，则是在第一次世界大战的时候。在十九世纪以前，英国和大陆国家战争，只能说是向东或向南，只有在第一次世界大战中，才有所谓西线，是战争最激烈，死人最多的地方。一个德国兵战后把那惨状描写出来的《西线无战事》这部小说，风行一时。The New Century Dictionary（有英国版也有美国版）上说：“（Colloq.）first in British soldiers’ use”（最初是英国兵用起来的）。一般的字典上都注明这是军中俗语。美国《韦氏国际大辞典》上说，“probably from earlier American gone west into unorganized territory”，认为大概由于美国西部未开发时，去那里的美国人少有生还的关系而有此说法的。这当然是根据美国人的立场来说的。

Lynn Thorndike著《世界文化史》（第二编第四章）上说，古代埃及俄塞里斯的神话，曾说到俄塞里斯死后成神，统治尼罗河以西的土地，而为冥王，故欧美一直沿用往西为死云云。

又据Brewer’s Dictionary of Phrase and Fable所载，也说go west一辞，通用于第一次世界大战期间，其起源应与“日落于西”有关，太阳西沉，表示死去，这可说是人类最早的想法，在希腊的谚语中，早已提到过了。上述辞典中对于这个成语的解释分为：

（1）说人时，意为死去。

（2）说事物时，意为失去，或床头金尽，或永得不到，例如：

My chance of promotion has gone west.（我永无晋升的机会了。）

我国也有“归西”的说法，是指死后升天，到西天去的意思。至于作“死”解的“没”字上冠以一个“西”字，也足证以太阳西没来表示人的死，是中外一致的。胡曾《咏史诗》有这样的句子：“陆机西没洛阳城，吴国春风草又青。”

71. 英文的典故

读尊著《论翻译》一文，知道“破釜沉舟”这样的一个典故，可译成英文to cross the Rubicon and burn one’s boats，因为罗马凯撒大帝渡过卢比孔河，即焚舟以示有进无退的决心，事与中国秦末项羽所为正同，故可对译。可见英文中也有典故。请将最通用的英文典故略举数例。

【解答】是的，英文中也有典故，用得恰当时，比译成一大堆的字句要精彩得多。现就常见者举出如下：

（1）Gordian knot：the knot tied by Gordius，ancient King of Phrygia. It was cut by Alexander the Great. 希腊神话弗里吉亚国王的难结，按神谕能解此结者，即可为亚细亚王，后亚历山大大帝以剑砍断之。所以后人说cut the Gordian knot有“困难迎刃而解”的意思。例如：

The knot which you thought a Gordian one will untie itself before you.（你所认为困难之点，将自然解决。）

It is the enthusiasm of youth that cuts the Gordian knot which age can-not untie.（老年人所不能解决的难题由青年人的热忱而获得解决。）

（2）Helen of Troy：Greek Legend，the beautiful wife of King Menelaus of Sparta，whose abduction by Paris caused the Trojan War. 希腊传说中古代斯巴达王墨涅拉俄斯的绝色妃子，后为帕里斯所诱拐，因此发生“特洛伊城之战”，终致特洛伊城之毁灭，今引申以喻美女。

For my part，if I do not expect to have a Helen of Troy，I do not think I shall be able to put up with an ugly woman.（就我来说，纵使我不希望娶一个西施一般的美女，我想我也不能忍受讨一个嫫母。）

（3）Adonis：a handsome young man loved by Aphrodite（Venus）.希腊神话中为维纳斯女神所钟爱的美男子。

He is quite an Adonis.（他真是一个潘岳似的美男子。）

A short-lived pleasure is called Adonis garden.（转瞬消歇的快乐就叫作美少年的花园。）

（4）Sherlock Holmes：英国小说家Arthur Conan Doyle所作的侦探小说中的名侦探，中国译作福尔摩斯。

It didn’t take a Sherlock Holmes to answer that question.（不需要福尔摩斯来解决这个问题。）

（5）Alice’s magic looking glass：英国作家Lewis Carroll（为牛津大学数学讲师Charles Lutwidge Dodgson的笔名）著有Alice in Wonderland及Through the Looking Glass两部童话，一举成名。

It was like Alice’s magic looking glass. I saw myself fresh and new and different. ——Judy Garland（好像在爱丽斯的魔镜中一样，我看见了新的不同的我。）

72. a favorite son

在美国杂志中见有a favorite son这个名词，但不能作“宠儿”解，因文理不通，不知另外还有什么含义？

【解答】这是一句美国话，普通英文辞典少有收载。原为对美国国父华盛顿的敬称（commendatory title given to George Washington），后来便应用到其他的人身上了。这个名词现在有两种含义。一为在其本乡本土，因有卓越的成就，而为人所尊敬颂扬的名人（a famous man honored and praised in his native city or State，because of his achievements）。一为受到他家乡的市或州的政治领袖们所眷顾，而予以提名为高官，尤其是总统的候选人（a candidate favored by the political leaders of his own state，city，etc. for nomination to a high office，especially the presidency）。当美国总统竞选的年头，报章杂志上提到此语的时候，多半是指上举的第二种含义。例如在1968年8月的时候，对总统及副总统提名竞选，正进入白热化，在美国新闻处的报道中，便有下列一类的文句出现：

Late August 26，another favorite son withdrew his candidacy，in favour of Mr. Humphrey.（在8月下旬的26日，又有一位候选人退出，以支持汉弗莱副总统竞选。）

Senator George A. Smathers of Florida said he would not be placed in nomination and that he was throwing his 57 votes in the Florida delegation to the Vice President. This leaves seven favourite sons with some 350 votes still holding firm.（上述退出提名竞选的佛罗里达州州长斯马瑟斯参议员说，他不要提名，所以他可以把佛罗里达代表的五十七票用来支持副总统汉弗莱竞选。这样一来，便只剩下七位候选人，仍然共掌握着约三百五十张选票。）

Iowa’s Governor Harold Hughes had withdrawn his favorite son candi-dacy 12 days ago and shortly afterwards announced his support for Mr. Mc-Carthy.（爱荷华州长休斯在十二天前退出候选，随后不久就宣布他支持麦卡锡竞选。）

现在再看作家James Bryce笔下用到favorite son的文句：

Tremendous efforts are made to get the second Favorite’s men to aban-don their chief and “swing into line” for some Dark Horse or Favorite Son，with whose votes they may make head till other factions rally to them.（费了极大的劲才使得第二号喜爱者的部下放弃他们的首领，而转向一个意外获得提名的人或是一个众望所归的候选人，有了他的选票，他们便可以进行，直到别的小党派都来帮助他们为止。）

73. simile和metaphor

英文的simile和metaphor都是“比喻”，不知二者在用法上有何分别？

【解答】simile是明喻，metaphor是隐喻。把明喻紧缩起来，便成隐喻，把隐喻敷衍一下，便成明喻。明喻的字数多，而隐喻惯常只有一个字。例如：“All flesh is grass.（Isa. xl. 6）（凡有血气的尽都如草。）”是隐喻，而“In the morning they are like grass which groweth up.（Psal. xc. 5）（早晨他们如生长的草。）”便是明喻了。明喻和隐喻不同，可从其中看出一个作家的文艺技巧来。任何作家都有他独特的明喻，英国作家从莎士比亚以来，不知写出了多少新鲜奇特的明喻，使他们的彩笔生花。

在明喻的前面，通常用得有like或as的字样。在修辞上拿另外一个人或一样东西来相比，无非是想加强语气，所以这种用法，又叫加强的明喻（intensifying simile）；它有两种形式，其一为用一定的对象来比拟的，如black as a raven（像乌鸦一般的黑），另一为没有一定的对象作比的，如as glad as anything（高兴已极）；as proud as proud（can be）（骄傲已极）。这种加强的明喻有时简直毫无意义，如as cool as a cucumber（冷静如黄瓜）；as dead as a door-nail（死寂如门钉）等，并不是拿什么来比较，实在是不成比较，完全为加强语气而使用罢了。另外是普通实际可以比拟的，所谓记述的明喻（descriptive simile）如snow like wool（像棉花似的白雪）；as alike as snow-drops（像初春开白花的雪花莲一般的相似）；as bitter as gall（像胆一样苦）；as brave as a lion（其勇如狮）；as bright as a dollar（雪亮如银元）；as brisk as a bee（活跃如蜜蜂）；as firm as a rock（安如磐石）等等。

现在引用作家们所用的明喻，必然更加出色：

Heaven truly knows that thou are false as hell. ——Shakespeare（天公确实知道你是虚伪已极的人。）

He was moderately truthful towards men，but to women lied like a Cretan. ——Hardy（他对男人说话还相当真实，但对于女人却满口谎言。）

He wished he might be blasted if he wasn’t as dry as a limebasket. ——Dickens（他说他真是口渴得不得了。）

She’s forty，and as tough and as sour as this bit of lemon peel. ——Thackeray（她年已四十，而顽强乖戾得像这块柠檬的皮一样。）

“What’s up with you？”asked Dennant；“you look as glum as any mon-key.” ——Galsworthy（“你怎么啦？忧郁得像猴子一样。”邓南特问。）

They are as tall as a tree and as big round as a church. ——Mark Twain（那些精怪高得像树一样，身围大得好似一座教堂。）

But none of these scars were fresh. They were as old as erosions in a fishless desert. ——Hemingway（这些伤痕没有一个是新的。它们都古老得好像那还未变成桑田的沧海一样。）

The cold winds . . . whistling like a madman breathing through clenched teeth. ——Caldwell（那寒风就好像一个狂人咬紧牙关在呼吸似的呼啸着。）

明喻是怎样一回事我们都明白了，接着我们再来看看隐喻的真相。例如：

The curtain of Time has dropped long since upon that scene.（那发生的事情早成陈迹了。）

句中的curtain就是一个隐喻。他如a snake in the grass（看不见的危险，隐匿的敌人）；cool one’s heels（使之久待）；a square peg in a round hole（枘凿不入）；burn the candle at both ends（浪费精力）；make both ends meet（量入为出）。又如：

He embarked early on the sea of public life，where he climbed at last to the very summit of success.（他很早就登上了社会的海船，终于爬上了成功的顶点。）

莎士比亚在《麦克白》一剧的第五幕第五场中有一段话，是以拟人化的笔法，说出最深刻的隐喻，特引用在此，作一结束。

To-morrow，and to-morrow，and to-morrow，

Creeps in this petty pace from day to day

To the last syllable of recorded time.

And all our yesterdays have lighted fools

The way to dusty death. Out，out，brief candle

Life’s but a walking shadow，a poor player

That struts and frets his hour upon the stage

And then is heard no more：it is a tale

Told by an idiot，full of sound and fury，

Signifying nothing.

（明天、明天、又明天，光阴就这样一天一天的移步向前爬，直到时间的记录之最后的一字；每一天都照耀着愚人走上归尘的死路。灭了罢，灭了罢，短短的烛火！人生不过是个人行动的阴影，在台上高谈阔步的一个可怜的演员，以后便听不见他了；不过是一个傻子说的故事，说得激昂慷慨，却毫无意义。）（梁实秋译）

74. 放屁、撒尿、拉屎的英文

关于“放屁”“撒尿”“拉屎”的英文，在书本上很难学到，不知英美人是怎样说的？

【解答】关于屎尿屁一类的话，从前只有吴稚晖先生大胆地形诸笔墨，一般文人学士都不敢挂齿，认为粗鄙，太不雅了。其实尽管不说，谁都不能不有此作为；尽管说来不堪入耳，学习英文的大人先生们，也不妨自己知道一下。

试查《汉英新辞典》，放屁译成break wind，撒尿作pass urine和make water，至于拉屎，这部辞典不载，《马修汉英辞典》则译为go to stool。我们知道在卑语中，撒尿还可以说piss（见《综合英汉大辞典》 942页），或是pump ship（见《英文习语大全》816页），但我们很少听见外国人说，在书报上也很少见，他们到底是不是像辞典上所载的那样说呢？现就个人所读过的有限的书上，举出下列一些文人笔下所描写的例子，以资谈屎尿屁之一助。

Craxi and Borth were alone quite drunk. When the fat Craxi saw the Major，he said to Borth：“Shall we relieve nature on the leg of the Mister Major？”Borth said：“Have you any left？”Craxi said boastfully，beating himself on the chest：“If I wanted. I could relieve myself for two hours，and then I would still be able to pass wind for fifteen minutes. Shall we do it on the leg of the Mister Major？”——John Hersey：A Bell for Adano（只剩下克拉西和鲍斯两人在那里，已经喝得烂醉了。当那肥胖的克拉西看见了少校的时候，他就对鲍斯说：“我们撒一泡尿在少校先生的脚上好不好？”鲍斯说：“你还有尿好撒吗？”克拉西拍着胸脯，大吹大擂地说：“如果我要撒的话，我可以一连撒两个钟头不停，撒过了尿之后，我还可以放十五分钟的屁。我们要不要在少校先生的脚上来一下？”）

上举对话中所谓relieve nature（解放自然），就是因为大小便是人生不可免的事，有时说得更明白一点，则为answer nature’s call或answer the call of nature（应付自然的要求），即是说我们要大小便是出于自然，我们无法支配它的。请再看下面的例：

The next morning，Tuesday，Ligget got awake with an average hang-over，the kind that reminded him of mornings after football games and boat races，except that after a night’s drinking like last night’s he could not count on partial recovery within a few minutes after answering the call of nature，and after a day of strenuous athletics nature does not always call，at least not before he was at top form. ——John O’Hara：Butterfield 8（第二天星期二的早上，李格特醒来的时候，照例带着几分宿醉，使他想起在足球比赛或是划船比赛之后的第二天早上的情形，除非是像昨夜那样喝了一夜的酒，他才不能够在拉过屎之后就恢复一半精神的，而在猛烈地运动了一天之后，第二天早上便不一定拉得出屎来，至少在他完全恢复以前是拉不出来的。）

除此之外，又可说natural necessity（自然的需要），或是certain necess-ary function of the body（肉体上某种必要的作用），如下例：

She thought I had gone there out of a natural necessity，but it was not true. ——Sherwood Anderson：A Story Teller’s Story（她以为我是到矮树后面去解手的，其实不然。）

When pressed by a natural necessity they relieved themselves in the open street without regard to the passers-by. ——Maugham：Don Fernando（当便急的时候，他们也就顾不得被过路的人看见，只好当街拉屎了。）

There was the yard without any grass and at one side，by a high board fence，a long wooden shed into which we went to perform certain necessary functions of the body. ——Anderson：A Story Teller’s Story（那院子里没有长一点草，在以高的木板隔开的一边，有一个长的木造搭棚，我们就到那里面去大小便。）

还有所谓number one和number two的说法，例如：

She was holding Little Catherine. Little Catherine was like a doll，only she was heavy，and a doll never wet her diapers like Little Catherine did. You could hold a doll forever，and never be wet from number one. ——James Farrell：A World I Never Made（她正抱着小卡莎林。小卡莎林好像一个洋囡囡一样，只是她比洋囡囡要重些，而洋囡囡决不会像小卡莎林一样，把她的尿布弄湿的。你可以永远抱着一个洋囡囡，决不会被尿弄湿一身的。）

这是说Margaret抱着她的小妹妹Catherine的情形。其中所谓第一号（number one）是指撒尿。第二号（number two）就是拉屎。如下例是Margaret告诉她妈妈说她的小弟弟Dennis不乖，拉了屎在裤子里。

“Mama，Dennis is bad. He did number two in his pants.”（妈妈，岱尼斯不乖。他把屎拉在裤子里了。）

对于第一号或第二号的行为，动词除用do以外，还可以用make，如：

“I want to go to the pot and make number one，”Catherine said，“You are big enough to do that for yourself，”Lizz said. ——Farrell：No Star Is Lost（卡莎林说：“我要去撒尿呀。”莉莎说：“你这样大了，自己都不会去撒尿吗？”）

句中说的pot，当然是指piss-pot（便壶）而言。所谓第一号、第二号的说法，并不是美国人所特有的，在英国Partridge编的A Dictionary of Slang and Unconventional English中也收得有，而且并不一定是小孩子说的话，例如同为美国作家的John H. O’Hara在其长篇小说A Rage to Live中，就有下面这样的描写：

Karl’s bladder trouble was no secret；everybody in the Senate and the Assembly knew about it . . . but they didn’t treat him like a little baby that was going to wet its pants if he didn’t do Number One the minute he got out of the car after an eleven-mile ride.（卡尔的膀胱病已经不能保守秘密了；在参议院和众议院中人人知道……但是他们并没有把他当作一个要尿湿裤子的婴孩看待，即令他在坐了十一英里路的汽车之后，一下车就立刻把裤子尿湿的话。）

英文的放屁，除普通说的break wind外，还有俗语的lay fart，如：

The only good part of his speech was right in the middle of it. He was telling us all about what a swell guy he was，what a hot-shot and all，then all of a sudden this guy sitting in the row in front of me，Edgar Marsalla，laid this terrible fart. It was a very crude thing to do，in chapel and all，but it was also quite amusing Old Marsalla. He damn near blew the roof off. Hardly anybody laughed out loud，and old Ossenburger made out like he didn’t even hear it，but old Thurmer，the headmaster，was sitting right next to him on the rostrum and all，and you could tell he heard it . . . We tried to get old Marsalla to rip off another one，right while old Thurmer was making his speech，but he wasn’t in the right mood. ——J. D. Salinger：The Catcher in the Rye（他演说中的高潮发生在他讲到正当中的时候。他正在讲给我们听他是怎样一个漂亮的人物，怎样地吃得开，讲得眉飞色舞，于是突然一下，坐在我前排那个名叫艾德加·马沙拉的家伙，放了一个其臭无比的屁。在礼堂大庭广众之中大放其屁，确是一件尴尬不堪的事，不过也很有趣。老马那个家伙可真厉害，一屁放出，几乎把屋顶都轰掉了。没有一个人敢笑，欧森白那家伙装作没有听到的样子，但是就在讲坛上欧森白旁边的塞默校长，大家都知道他确是听到了的。……我们很想要老马在校长训话的时候，再放那么一个响屁，可惜他那时没有那种雅兴。）

75. 报时法及about forty-five seconds

“现在已经两点四十五分了；他还没有来。”英译为“It is forty-five minutes past two；he hasn’t come yet.”。不知译的对不对？

【解答】译文从文法上看，从意义上看，都是对的，只是不合惯用法而已。照英语的惯用法，应译为“It is（a）quarter to three；he hasn’t come yet.”。英文说的a quarter to（或past）three中的a，通常都被略去不说。

英文说几点几分，通常是这样说的：five minutes past three（三点过五分），ten minutes past three（三点过十分），quarter past three（三点一刻），twenty minutes past three（三点二十分），twenty-five minutes past three（三点二十五分），half past three（三点半）。过半之后，就说下一个时辰，如twenty-five minutes to four（三点三十五分），twenty minutes to four（三点四十分），quarter to four（三点四十五分），ten minutes to four（三点五十分），five minutes to four（三点五十五分；差五分打四点）。报时以半点为分水岭，过半则属于下一时辰了。这好像太阳一直升到了顶点（apex），过此即逐步下降。英文的climax便是指的绝顶，最高潮，如the climax of a dramatic action（戏剧的最高潮），be at the climax of one’s fame（声誉的顶点）。过此便称anticlimax，即逐渐走下坡路。人生不满百，最壮盛有为的就是四五十岁。孔子说一个人到了四五十岁，还没有出人头地，有所成名，那个人就没有什么可怕的了。由此可见，人是以四五十岁为顶点的，过此就走下坡。中国有句俗语曰：“人过中年万事休。”中国是以四十岁为中年的。成大功，立大业的，都是四十岁以前的人，老年人只有老智可用，老成谋国，做个参谋人员还勉强可以。

且说如果不是报时，而是说时间的长短，就可以说three quarters of an hour（三刻钟之久）。又成语中有所谓about forty-five seconds的说法，也是说四分之三分的时间。英文成语中所用的数字，差不多都有一定，不能随便更动的，比方说 “矮子”叫forty foot，“胖子”叫forty guns，“假寐”叫forty winks，都是用的四十这个数字，既不能说五十，也不能说四十五，而只能说四十。这个数字古代用得很多，如《天方夜谭》中就有阿里巴巴四十大盗。美国口语中有like forty的说法，意为like anything或at a great rate（以非常的势力；以极大的速度），也许是说人生四十，如日当中，正是壮年，力量最盛的时候，何事不可为？因此便用四十这个数字来形容强盛的事物也未可知。

由这些数字构成的惯用句（idiomatic expressions）中最有趣的，就是about forty-five seconds。这意思是说a little less than a minute（不到一分钟），但为什么要说forty-five，而不说fifty-five呢？也许是从three quarters of an hour（四分之三的一小时）而来的，three quarters of a minute，不就是forty-five seconds吗？对一小时的四十五分钟可说three quarters，对一分钟就只好用forty-five了，虽则数目是一样的。兹举一二作家的用例如下：

In about forty-five seconds，I found myself again in the waiting-room with the compassionate secretary，who made me sign more documents. ——Conrad（不到一分钟我发觉我跟那有同情心的秘书又进入了那等待室，他要我签订了更多的文件。）

He rang the bell again and waited. He pressed the bell hard. He held his thumb on the bell for about forty-five seconds. ——James Farrell（他再揿了一下门铃，等待着不见人来。他用力去按门铃。他把他的拇指按在门铃上差不多有一分钟之久。）

76. not for one’s health

“I am not here for my health.”这句美国话，译成“我并不是为健康而来此的”，为何不对？

【解答】这是一句不可照字面来翻译的美国成语。“I am not here for my health.”一句，应译为“我并不是漫无目的地来到这里的”。not for one’s health = not for nothing = with a definite object，意为“有一定的目的；并非徒然”。据Joseph A. Weingarten编的An American Dictionary of Slang and Colloquial Speech上解释说：“‘for one’s health’—Used negatively to indicate that a person is acting for monetary gain（加否定用时是说一个人为赚钱而活动）”。这原来是用于一个人的政治活动的，后来才广泛地用于一般的情形上。这样做是有打算的，并不是为着一时的怪念头而出此，实是想要从中获得利润。现在且看一些现代作家用这成语的实例。

Now，you are an ambitious man；I can see that. You’re not in politics for your health—that I know. Tell me exactly what it is you want and whether I can’t get for you as quick if not quicker than those other fellows？——T. Dreiser（却说，你是个野心勃勃的人，我看得出来。你在政治上是很想活动一下的，那我也明白。请告诉我，你要的确是什么，也许我能比别人更快，至少也会同样的快，为你谋求到手的。）

What do you think a guy in business is？Like he says，he ain’t in it for his health. That’s what business is. ——J. Steinbeck（你以为一个生意人是什么样子的？正如他说的，他是以赚钱为目的的。做生意就是这个样子。）

“How many new potatoes have you sold？”

“Oh，I don’t know，but several pounds.”

“Several pounds！But you ought to have sold several hundredweight，at least，or several tons if you want to persuade the Inspector that you’re not in business for your health.”——L. P. Hartley

（“你卖掉了多少新收成的马铃薯？”

“啊，我不知道，总有好几磅吧。”

“几磅！你至少应该卖掉了几百磅，或是几吨才是，如果你想要说服那视察官，你是为赚钱而做生意的话。”）

77. 少见的反义语

许多表现法是相对的，如内外、上下之类，不知是否所有的表现法都有正反两面？有些反义字句用的颇不合理，如climb意为“上升”“攀登”，应该是往上走，但又用来指向下行，说成climb down，是否不对？

【解答】语文是由习惯而成，不一定合乎逻辑。英文的climb意为攀登，既系登当然是向上的，所以有时为加强向上的意思，而说成climb up（向上爬）。一般人认为既有up，自然也就有down，所以climb down（向下爬）也就应运而生了。

We climbed down from the wall. ——Hemingway（我们从墙上爬下来了。）

再看zoom意为“陡直地上升”，如“The airplane zoomed.（飞机陡直地向上飞升。）”。但居然有人用为向下急降，如：

Albert zoomed down the incline in two minutes flat.（艾伯特断然地以两分钟的时候倾斜急降下来。）

又，stand up（起立）的反义语为sit down（坐下），这是合理的，但竟至有stand down的说法。我们只能“站起来”，不能“站下去”，似乎是不通的。殊不知这个说法另有含义，即是要证人退席的意思，如：

Witness was ordered to stand down.（证人已被令退席。）

Judge Lankershim’s voice showed impatience. “Very well. You may stand down，Lieutenant，and the witness Lunk will again take the stand.”——E. S. Gardiner（郎法官的声音表示他很不耐烦。“好吧，警官，你可以退席啦，兰克证人可再上证人席来。”）

此外in与out of是相对的，如说in danger（在危险中）和out of danger（脱离危险），in the window（窗内）和out of the window（窗外）。可知有in的，差不多都可以用out of改为相反的意思。我们说“坠入情网”，英文是fall in love，相反地，是不是也可说成fall out of love呢？若说“掉到情网之外去”，通不通呢？《英文习语大全》上，只收得有fall out of flesh（消瘦），和fall out of lease（租期已满）两个成语，而不见fall out of love一种说法。不过这种说法是可以存在的，因为fall out of = cease to practise（停止那样做），fall in love为“相恋”的话，fall out of love，就是“不复相恋”。这当然和“失恋”（be disappointed in love）不同，是不待详说的。青年男女在一起时，互相热恋，远别之后，彼此淡忘，而不复相爱了。如果是失恋的话，就是指某方正在热恋中，而他方早已弃之不顾或移情别恋了。

且说fall out of love这个说法，是不是有人用呢？有的，英国现代作家毛姆（W. S. Maugham）就用过，在他作的The Hour Before the Dawn中，就有下面的一句：

They had fallen in love because they were thrown in daily contact with one another；well，when that contact ceased mightn’t they fall out of love？（他们因为每天在一块儿的关系，所以彼此坠入情网；那么，等他们两人不再在一块儿的时候，他们会不会就冷淡下来，不复相恋了呢？）

在毛姆作的另外一篇文章Cosmopolitans中，也有这样的一个用例：

Then on a sudden，he fell out of love. I do not know why. It could hardly have been that he grew tired of her conversation for she had never had any conversation. Perhaps it was merely that this pathetic look of hers ceased to wring his heart strings.（于是，突然一下，他不喜欢她了。我不晓得为什么会这样？那不会是因为他对于她的谈话发生厌恶所致，因为她从来就没有什么正式的谈话呢。也许那只是为着她那种幽怨的表情，不复扭动他的心弦罢了。）

78. the writing on the wall

某电台播送的Bertolt Brecht的诗：“Written On The Wall”，解释的人把这诗题译为“大字报”，不知正确否？

【解答】照字面来看，诚然会使人想到是贴在墙壁上的新闻，用大字报一个新名词来翻译，似乎有妙手偶得之的感觉。但这句话是西洋典故，不能照字面来翻译的。如果你问“何典”，我就可以告诉你：这是出自《圣经·旧约》的典故，含义为：迫在眉睫的大灾祸的预兆（a sign or warning of impending disaster）。

《旧约·但以理书》（Daniel 5：5-25）上说：

In the same hour came forth fingers of a man’s hand，and wrote over against the candlestick upon the plaister of the wall of the king’s palace：and the king saw the part of the hand that wrote . . . And this is the writing that was written，MENE，MENE，TEKEL，UPHARSIN.（当时忽有人的指头显出，在王宫与灯台相对的粉墙上写字。王看见写字的指头……所写的文字是弥尼、弥尼、提客勒、乌法珥新。）

此事发生于伯沙撒王设筵纵饮的当中，只见指头在墙上写字，看不见写字的人，王惊惶失措，恐怖万分。谁也看不懂墙上所写的字是什么意思，后来请了被掳的犹太人中的但以理来，才得明解：“弥尼就是上帝已经数算你国的年日到此完毕。提客勒就是你被称在天平里显出你的亏欠。乌法珥新就是你的国分裂，归与玛代人和波斯人。”

由此可知the writing on the wall是亡国的征兆。现在人们常用作警惕来说：

Don’t you see the writing on the wall？（你要这样做，难道你不明白毁灭就在目前吗？）

You see the writing on the wall.（灾祸临头。）

有时把on the wall略去，单说“Don’t you see the writing？”，意思也是一样。

The writing on the wall is clear：if Man behaves like an animal and allows his population to increase while each nation steadily increases the complexity and range of its environment，nature will take her course and the Law of the Jungle will prevail. ——J. Gray（大难临头已很明显：若果人类像动物似的不知节育，让人口继续增加下去，同时每个民族就一定会使其环境错综复杂和扩大界限，于是大自然就会顺应因果的过程，而野蛮的厮杀也就要大行其道了。）

In this house of his there was writing on every wall. His business-like temperament protested against a mysterious warning that she was not made for him. ——J. Galsworthy（在他的这个家里，危机四伏，他那实事求是的气质，使他没有感觉到那神秘的警告，说他的太太并不是上帝为他而造的。）

79. if you please的含义

英文的please（请），据说是从if you please（如君愿意）省略而来，通常也就把if you please翻译为“请”，如“I will have another cup，if you please.（请你再给我一杯。）”。但“Now，if you please，he expects me to pay for it！”，译为“现在，请，他想要我来付出代价！”就不通了。请问应如何译才对？

【解答】英文if you please是古代传下来的一种说法，一般人以为you是please的主语，其实you是please的宾语，这个please为Subjunctive Present（假设现在），意为be agreeable，省去了主语，原为if it please you = if it be agreeable to you。起初把主语的it去掉，变成if（it）please you，后来再一变而把you移到please的前面去，成为今日固定的形式if you please了。在稍稍古一点的文章中，还可以看出此种转变的痕迹，如十九世纪的英国文人Gissing，著有The Private Papers of Henry Ryecroft一书，中有句云：

And thus，if it please me，I may sit all day long.（这样，我高兴的话，我可以坐上一整天。）

英文成语if you please，大致有三种含义：（1）就是我们日常用得最多的“请”（please）；（2）是“麻烦你一下”“你允许的话”（with your permission）的意思，据COD说，这是为请求别人稍为效劳时说的客气话（as polite form of request especially for trifling services）；（3）作为插入句用，有反语的意味（ironically），这就是问题所提出有待研讨的那一类的句子，可译为“真想不到”“出人意外”“岂有此理”。有这种反语意味时，常与now连在一起，据ISD说，now，if you please = an ironical phrase meaning “What do you think of that？”（implying that something is surprising or extraordinary），即这个反语的意思为“那你觉得怎样？”，含义指某事物令人吃惊或是有点异常。那辞典还举出实例如下：

And now，if you please，I’m to get nothing for all my work！（你看，好不气人，我做这么多的工，一点报酬也没有！）

问题中提出的句子，也可照译了。

And now，if you please，he expects me to pay for it.（你想有这样的道理吗，他居然想要我来付出代价。）

另外再看别的例句。

He must travel first class，if you please，like his betters.（这怎么可以，他一定要和他长辈或地位学识高过他的人一样坐一等车。）

And now，if you please，she left us at the dead of night.（真想不到，她竟在深更半夜离家出走。）

I thought I had lost my pen，which，if you please，was in my pocket all the time.（我原以为我的笔掉了，想不到竟然一直是在我口袋里。）

Instead of paying me the money he owed me，he wanted me，to lend him more，if you please！（他不但不还我的钱，而且还要再向我借，真岂有此理！）

At five-thirty Mr. Haymaker returned，no unsatisfactory word having come in the interim，and there she was，resting on a raised pillow，if you please，and looking so cheerful，more like her old self than he had seen her in some time. ——T. Dreiser（在其间没有听到一点什么不好的消息，所以赫麦克先生在五点半就回家来了，出人意外的是他的妻子还在那里，躺在高高的枕头上，看去很愉快的样子，比他近来所见到的她，更要精神充沛，完全和她从前一样。）

80. as such的用法

在《展望》第八期上，读到关于“英语进修”的文章中，说“To-morrow is a public holiday；as such，school will be closed.”一句中的as such用错了。请将理由说明一下，以助了解。

【解答】作为反复代名词用的such，现除as such一个用法外，似乎没有别的了。反复代名词通常是用one，如“He wants a radio，but he has no money to buy one.（他想要一架收音机，但无钱买。）”。但在as后就不要用one，而要用such，因而产生as such的用法。

英文的as such含义有二。一为“照其资格”（in that capacity），另一为“其本身”（in itself或in themselves）。不能用这两个意思来解释的，当然就是有误。如问题中提出的句子，两个意思都不适用。Tomorrow is a public holiday；as such，school will be closed.“明天是公共假期”和“学校不上课”这两句话，是不能用“照其资格”或“其本身”连接起来的，只能用“所以”一类的字眼来连接才通，由此我们便知道这句英文是错的。

现分别例解如下。

（1）照其资格。

He is a child，and must be treated as such.（他是一个小孩，必须把他当作小孩看待。）

He is the master，and as such must be obeyed.（他是主人，因此必须服从他。）

He was a foreigner and was treated as such.（他是一个外国人，所以被当作外国人看待。）

Witty men are apt to imagine they are agreeable as such. ——Steele（机智的人易于想象作为一个机智的人是令人愉快的。）

He is the judge appointed to hear the case，and as such you must not speak to him before the trial.（他被任命为审判那案子的法官，作为法官，你决不可以在审讯时跟他说话。）

I am a gentleman，and will be treated as such.（我是上等人，将获得上等人的待遇。）

He is a friend and I treat him as such.（他是一个朋友，故我以朋友待之。）

It was as a physician that he presented himself，and as such was cordially received. ——Hawthorne（他以医师的身份在这儿出现，而大家便热诚地把他当作医师来接待了。）

（2）其本身。

History as such is too often neglected.（历史本身常被忽视。）

Wealth，as such，doesn’t matter much.（单是有钱，算不得什么。）

In country places strangers are welcome as such.（在乡下，外来的人，就因为这个理由，而大受欢迎。）

81. at a crossroads

Reader’s Digest上有“an American MP stood at a crossroad（一个美国的宪兵站在十字路口）”的例子，可是又见人说成at a crossroads，在单数的a后用复数名词，是否错误？

【解答】在英国的Advanced Learner’s Dictionary of Current English上，是分为两字列举的，即：

cross-road n. road that crosses another；road that joins two main roads.（叉路；连接两条大路的路）

cross-roads n.（sing. vb.）place where two roads cross.（十字路）

中国世界版《四用辞典》上，只列cross-road一字，但有两个解释：一为“横路；交叉道路”，二为“（复）十字街”。

又《最新实用英汉辞典》上，也只列crossroad一字，但有三个解释：一为“交叉路；叉路；歧途”；二为“（pl.）十字路口”；三为“乡村的集市”。

在美国的Webster’s New World Dictionary of the American Language上，此字有三个解释，即（1）a road that crosses another road（交叉路），（2）a road that connects two or more main roads（连接两条大路以上的路），（3）（usually pl.）the place where two or more roads intersect：often regarded metaphorically as the gathering point of the near-by rural inhabitants（〔通常用复数〕两条以上的路交叉的地方：常隐喻地视为附近乡村居民聚会之点）。该辞典上又附有一个成语：at the crossroads，解作at the point where one must choose between different courses of action（面临抉择；临歧）。

在上述的ALD上，也举有这个成语，解释为：（fig.）at a critical turning-point（in one’s life，etc.）（〔比喻的说法〕在人生或事情的紧要关头。）

问题中的at a crossroad，虽名词与单数的冠词相符，但并不常见，因为crossroads形复意单，故可说at a crossroads，而且这是最常用的形式。用定冠词是固定的成语，更没有冠词和名词不一致的情形了。那用法是stand（或用动词be）at the crossroads（站在歧路上）。但把它作形容词用时，则形式可单可复，例如，a crossroad（s）store（十字路口的商店）。

At a crossroads near Port Allegany，Pa.，an elderly lady climbed on the bus. ——Reader’s Digest（在宾夕法尼亚州的亚雷加尼港附近的一条十字路口，有一位年长妇人爬上了公共汽车。）

at this crossroads of America and Asia——Reader’s Digest（在美洲与亚洲的这个十字路口。）

Thirty-six hours later he let her off at a crossroads in the moorlands. ——Thurman L. Hood（三十六小时以后，他在荒野的一个十字路口，把她扔下了。）

82. this my son

新约圣经《路加福音》二十四节上说：“For this my son was dead，and is alive again；he was lost，and is found.（因为我这个儿子，是死而复活，失而又得的。）”。句中的this my son据说是古文，现代英语已经不用了。现代英语应说this son of mine，不知确否？

【解答】据英国的英语学者Henry Sweet在他著的New English Grammar上说，“In the earlier Modern English possessives may be preceded by the demonstratives this and that；but in the present English such constructions as this our friendship，these my children occur only in the higher literary style，the colloquial language using the periphrastic constructions—this friendship of ours—by the analogy of partitive constructions described above.”。意即只有在高度的文言文体中才有，在口语中要用纡说的构造（这是指例如用of man，而不用man’s）。我觉得他这种说法，也不完全正确。英文也和中文一样，现代语体文中仍然时常要掺杂着一点文言的字句，不用纡说的两重属格，而仍保持这种“指示代名词+所有代名词+名词”的用法，还是不少。文言的好处就是简洁，书的题名多采用《圣经》或莎翁的成句即是因此。书名必须简洁，古文比口语简洁得多，所以某书题名为“This Our World”（我们的这个世界），而不用“This World of Ours”。另外还有一个原因，就是句中已经有了of-phrase，若再加上of ours或of yours等，句子就太啰嗦了，所以要说in this our hour of danger或in this your day of salvation。据研究英语代名词的H. Spies说，在十六世纪初叶，this thy son的形式，比this son of thine要更为常见。《圣经》上对纡说的构造虽未见使用，然同时代的Shakespeare，就是两个形式并用的，这说明了两点，一是莎翁不喜欢这种两个代名词连在一块儿的用法；二是现代英语的纡说法已经产生，那时正是过渡时代，所以莎翁新旧两种语法交替采用了，例如：

And tell the pleasant prince，this mock of his

Hath turn’d his balls to gun-stones；and his soul

Shall stand sore charged for the wasteful vengeance

That shall fly with them：for many a thousand widows

Shall this his mock mock out of their dear husbands.

（Henry V. I，ii，281-286）

（请告诉那喜欢戏曲的太子，他的这种戏弄使他的皮球变成了炮弹；而对那和其炮弹齐飞的破坏的复仇心，应负严厉之责的，便是他的灵魂：因为由于他的这种戏弄，数千个女子要失去她们亲爱的丈夫而成为寡妇。）

在现代的杂志上及文人的笔下，不用口语的纡说法，而经采用文言表现的，俯拾皆是。在英国广播电台的刊物The Listener上就有on this our anniversary、this my journal、on this our twentieth birthday等句；文人学者笔下也有：

this our brother（G. Greene）

this his honorary appointment（M. Dickens）

this here sea（Conrad）

in this our wonderful century（Partridge）

在The Listener上又有用逗号的说法，如“this，his last，incarnation”及“those，my last words”等，据Abbott的解释，因逗号的使用，显示出this、these等“指示代名词”和“所有代名词+名词”是同格关系，前者变为指示形容词了。

the populous centre of this the greatest commercial city——A. Huxley（成为最大商业都市的本城人口稠密的中心）

So on this my second day，I should try to probe into the soul of man through his art. ——Helen Keller（所以在我眼睛能够看见的第二天，我将经由人类的艺术，试图探索人类的灵魂深处。）

seeing that this my book was inspired by Holy Spirit——Lafcadio Hearn（鉴于我的这本书是由圣灵所启示而写的）

He could not bear that she . . . should be exposed to curious observation in this her great grief. ——Thomas Hardy（让她在如此巨大的悲哀中接受好奇眼光的探测……他是受不了的。）

83. linger I ever so late

英国作家Gissing在他著的The Private Papers of Henry Ryecroft一书中，用有linger I ever so late一语，不知应如何译法？

【解答】Gissing这句话的全文是这样的：

It matters not how long I wander. There is no task to bring me back；no one will be vexed or uneasy，linger I ever so late.（我无论出去逍遥多久都不要紧。没有什么工作要等我回去做的；我无论在外面耽搁到多晚，也没有人要恼怒或不安的。）

所谓linger I ever so late，即是“无论我耽搁到多晚”的意思，原为一种表示让步的子句，其中的ever so，在古代也说成相反的never so，但意思不变。这个ever so，只是一种加强的表现法，现今在“Thank you ever so much.”一语中，及大多数的妇女们的口头上，仍然保持着这种说法。据《牛津大辞典》（OED）的解释，ever so有vastly及immensely的意思。

现在的问题倒不是在ever so，而是在主语和述语的颠倒。有一部分的让步句，是述语动词用在主语名词之前的，这种说法和

Be that as it may，we can not now take it into consideration.（不管那是怎样，我们现在也不能加以考虑。）

Should it be wet，I shall stay at home.（如果下雨的话，我就待在家里。）

Were I a king，I should not be able to do that.（我就是国王，那个我也不能做。）

等条件句或让步句，同样不用连词。所谓假设过去（Subjunctive Past），也和过去完成（Past Perfect）及should、would、could 后接不定词的所谓复合动词（Compound Verb）中的助动词一样，是可以出现于主语之前，而将连词省略的。至于假设现在（Subjunctive Present），因为没有助动词，通常又不能将动词本身搬到主语的前面去，所以除了固定的几种说法，例如：

Be it ever so humble，there’s no place like home.（无论怎样简陋，还是自己的家好。）

Be the matter what it may，I won’t go.（不管是什么事我都不去。）

等句中be的场合，或是

Come what may，I am prepared for it.（无论变得怎样，我都准备好了。）

Say what you will，I don’t like it.（不管你怎么说，那个我总是不喜欢的。）

等之外，是很少用的。问题中所提出的linger I ever so late，也是其中之一，与ever so结合时，才采取这个形式，而表示让步的意思。

如上述的场合，像be、come、say等可用于主语前的动词，因为和命令形相同，所以也有人把它看作命令句的，那当然是错误的，应当是假设现在才对，而且那动词一定是置于主语之前的。

为什么动词在主语之前呢？为什么这样就有假设的意味呢？这正是现在打算要加以研讨的。如果把结论先说出来的话，那就是一种加强语气的说法吧。

一般把动词放在主语之前的，都不是正常的办法，除问句外，大都是想要唤起对方的注意，使他把意识集中到这个动词上来。问句之所以要把主语与动词颠倒，是表示与平叙句的不同。假设时要把主语与动词颠倒，也无非是想要使人有一种意外的感觉。能够有意外之感的地方，必能发生特殊的意味，但意识若不集中，便不能有意外之感。

意识的集中常发生于不正常的地方，所谓不正常，除地位颠倒以外，还有省略或加用强调的字，rich as he is，即为as（或though）he is rich as he is的省略，至于however rich he may be中的-ever，便是加用的强调字。在这种场合，就是希望读者或听者把意识集中到rich及however rich上来。那种相当于连词意味的字，便成为意识集中的焦点，与下面主句结合时，才发生连词作用。

假设语气的动词置于主语之前，便有一种连结的力量（conjunctive force），因为语文是愈简单才愈有力的。如果说得太啰嗦，便要减低表现的力量了。如本项所讨论的linger I ever so late，就比说though I linger ever so late要有力多了。这不仅有那种所谓连结的力量，而且那表现力也大不相同呢。

84. snap one’s fingers

厉颚游西溪词中名句“凭高一声弹指，天地入斜晖”，其中弹指，既能发声，是否可译为英文的成语snap one’s fingers？

【解答】中文的弹指是说时间的短暂，如苏轼诗“一弹指顷去来今”即是，但此辞源于佛经，它在佛经中有三个不同的意思，即（1）表许诺，（2）表欢喜，（3）表警告。通常在中国诗文中却不用这些意思。而只用来表短暂或瞬息，上举厉词亦复如此。弹指在《通用汉英辞典》上译作“a very brief space of time”是意译，又有“to snap the fingers”则近乎直译了。在《麦氏汉英辞典》上除“to snap the fingers”外还有“to fillip”一个译法。我们可以做成名词，译作a snap of the fingers或to make a fillip，都是可以的。

至于英文成语的to snap one’s fingers，则万不可用，因为这另有含义，与弹指无关。中国说的弹指，是将中指在拇指接触下弹出去，而英文这句成语的意思，据Advanced Learner’s Dictionary of Current English上解释说：make a cracking noise by flicking a finger audibly against the thumb（usu. to show contempt）。意即将一个指头从拇指上摩擦出破裂声来，以表示轻蔑。下例对这个意思表示得特别明显：

“I’m not jealous in the least of Hermione，she is nothing to me，not that！”And Ursula snapped her fingers. ——D. H. Lawrence：Women in Love（“我一点儿也不嫉妒赫米奥娜，她在我看来屁都不值，真是一点也不！”于是厄秀娜打响她的指头，以示轻蔑。）

再看下面的用例：

But Shawhead was quite content and could afford to snap his fingers—a customary gesture！—in the face of local gossip. ——A. J. Cronin：Ad-ventures in Two Worlds（但是萧赫德十分满意，不愿在当地人的闲话前面表示出轻视的样子。）

When feeling is the gauge you can snap your fingers at logic，and when your logic is weak that is very agreeable. ——W. S. Maugham：Of Human Bondage（以感情为衡量的标准，你就会瞧不起逻辑，而当你的逻辑脆弱时，那是很令人愉快的。）

附带地说一下，莎翁在Romeo and Juliet一剧中，说有世仇的Montagne和Capulet两家的仆人，狭路相逢，也不免要表示一点敌意，如第一幕第一景48行中说：

Sam. ： . . . I will bite my thumb at them；which is a disgrace to them，if they bear it.（萨：……我要对着他们咬大拇指；如果他们能够隐忍，那就丢脸啦。）（梁实秋译）

句中的to bite one’s thumb at a person，也和to snap one’s fingers at a person一样，是表轻蔑的。

85. 分词+ the moment

英文成语at the moment的类似句颇多，而意思皆不一样，请分别举例说明。

【解答】关于moment与介词结合的成语，除at the moment外，还有for the moment、in the moment、of the moment、on the moment，及to the moment。现分别解释并例示如下：

1. at the moment = just now

I am very busy at the moment.（我目下很忙。）

2. for the moment = temporarily

Let’s set aside for the moment the question of expense.（关于经费的问题暂时搁在一边。）

3. in the moment = in case

Try to be calm and sensitive in the moment of danger.（在危险当头，要放镇静，感觉灵敏。）

4. of the moment = important at the present time

He is one of the men of the moment.（他是当今要人之一。）

5. on the moment = on the spot；all at once

She burst out crying on the moment.（她当场哭出来了。）

6. to the moment = with absolute punctuality

The clock is timed to the moment.（那钟非常准时。）

86. rest home、rest house、rest room

英文说的rest home、rest house、rest room，三者不知是否一样？

【解答】三者意思完全不同，不可混淆不清，闹成笑话。现分别说明如下：

rest home = a residential establishment that provides special care for conva-lescents and aged or infirm persons.（Random House Dictionary）一种疗养院，可供病后体力虚弱，或年老者休养之用。

rest house = an empty house for the accommodation of travelers.（Complete Dictionary of English Phrases）旅客憩息处，休息所，歇凉亭。这原是起源于印度的，如果是在车站附近，就叫作dawk bungalow（车站附近的旅店）。此语在美国俗语中，又用来指舒服的刑务所。

rest room =（U.S.）a room or rooms，esp. in a public building，having wash-bowl，toilet，and other facilities.（Random House Dictionary）厕所，洗手间。

87. this side of

美国有一则广告说Say Corby’s Smoothest Whisky this side of Can-ada。其中的say及this side of Canada，不知应如何译法？

【解答】这个say不可译成“说”，应译成“指名”，如“Say：‘Coca-Cola，Please.’（请指名要可口可乐。）”。问题中说是Say Corby’s Smoothest Whisky this side of Canada，意为“在加拿大的这边请指名要可比最合口的威士忌”。所谓this side of Canada 是说“不是在加拿大，而是在美国”。通常说this side of the Pacific，意为“太平洋的这边”，如系中国人说的，当然是指中国，而把美国说为that side of the Pacific（太平洋的彼岸）。还有on this side of heaven或on this side of the grave，意为“在这世间”即“在坟墓的这边”，即in life的意思。

不过如在美国说“The most spectacular revue this side of Paris！”就比较费解了，因巴黎不像加拿大为美比邻，而是在另外一个大洲上，所以说这边和那边，未免隔得太远了一点。但美国人这样说，大概是将纽约与巴黎对比吧。我们可以勉强翻译为“在巴黎的这边，最豪华壮丽的轻松歌舞”。

这个this side of还可以作before（“以前”“在……之前”）解，例如：

He’ll buttonhole you，and you won’t get away this side of midnight.（他会强留你谈话的，不到半夜你别想走。）

I hardly think I shall be back in Singapore this side of Christmas.（我想在圣诞节以前我是不会回到新加坡来的。）

88. pull up your socks

英文成语pull up your socks，照字面译为“拉起你的袜子”，是讲不通的，不知到底是什么意思？

【解答】这是一句英国的成语，美国似乎不大通行。在SOD（《牛津节约辞典》）上的解释是“to brace oneself for an effort”，意为“鼓起勇气努力去做”，或“振作精神努力工作”。另外一部The Kenkyusha Dictionary of Current English Idioms的辞典上则解释说“to prepare to make a special effort”，意为“准备特别奋力而为”。请看下面的用例：

Sunday was the day for the job share-out. It was “It’s your work on the stairs，and yours on the sitting room，and yours on making the beds”. And it was the day for recrimination：“The stairs were only cleaned down twice last week，you’d better pull up your socks.”——The Student Times，Sep. 18，1970，Bernadette Devlin：The Price of My Soul（礼拜天是分配工作的日子。“这礼拜轮到你扫楼梯，收拾客厅，整理床铺。”而礼拜日也是姊妹们互相指责的日子：“上个礼拜楼梯只扫过两次，你最好特别努力一点。”）

This little girl Doreen she’d always had a turn for dancing，so she pulled up her socks and took to it for a living. ——R. Lehmann：Invitation to the Waltz（朵林这个小姑娘，她生来有跳舞的天才，所以她努力去做，利用跳舞谋生。）

We’re the only party who can save the Empire and that’s exactly we’ve got to pull our socks up. There’s too much attachment to individuals，that’s the trouble. ——A. Wilson：The Wrong Set，“A Story of Historical Interest”（我们是能够救国的唯一的团体，所以就是为了这个缘故，我们非加倍努力不可。麻烦的是私人的情感不易消除。）

Ⅹ 文 句

89. Your Majesty后接第三人称

君主国的臣民对他们的国王称His（女王则用Her）Majesty，当面则称Your Majesty（陛下）。为什么当面称呼的人，一下子又变成第三者了？因为常见在Your Majesty后要接用his或her呢。

【解答】这是由人称不同而发生的错觉。称对方为you是第二人称，称对方为Your majesty便变成第三人称了。中文的陛下，乃至阁下之类，也是同样的情形，为着礼貌起见，不敢冒犯地直说“你”，而改称“你的阶前”“你的屋子下面”，这样一来当然成为第三者了。例如：

Your Majesty forgets.（陛下忘了。）

Your Majesty has given his consent to the proposal.（陛下同意这个提案。）

在英文的所谓Concord（人称、性、数、格等的一致）上，这是很合理的，“陛下”既系第三人称，自然不可以接用第二人称的动词和属格形容词。英文的主语和动词之间，确实有些很费解的惯用法，值得我们注意。兹举数例如下：

H. W. Fowler在他著的Modern English Usage一书中说：“‘More than one’，though its sense is necessarily plural，is treated as a sort of compound of ‘one’，following its construction，and agrees with a singular noun and takes a singular verb.”。既然是不止一个，在一个以上，为什么不接用复数动词呢？平常连一个半（one and half）都要接复数动词，现在一个以上至少两个，反而要接单数，岂不是怪！例如：

More than one has been dismissed.（开除的不止一个。）因为在one后省略了man，有了这个单数名词，必然地非接用单数动词不可。

More than one fireman has overcome.（一名以上的消防员都因力尽而倒下了。）

More than one recent writer has drawn a comparison between Lord Nuf-field and Carnegie. ——Prof. R. W. Seton-Watson（有一个以上的晚近作家都曾将菲尔德勋爵和卡内奇作过一个比较。）

美国的文法家Curme和Kurath共著的文法书上则说，这本应该与单数动词一致的，但如果把more看作一个Plural Indefinite Pronoun时，也未尝不可作复数看，所以他们举例说：“More than one has（或 have）found it so.（有一个以上的人都觉得是这样的。）”。显然我们可以看得出来，在more than one的后面，如果要接用复数动词，哪怕是在美国，前面是不可以说出单数名词来的。

请再看下面的例：

I，your master，command you.（我命令你，我是你的主人。）

句中的your master是第三人称，说话者的I是第一人称。因为是同格的关系仍在第一人称上求动词与主语的一致。

如果有否定字接在第二个主语上时，也不要作算，如：

I，not you，am to blame.（= I am to blame，not you.）（只要怪我，不怪你。）

又有这样的说法：

Neither Isabel nor I are timid people. ——Wells（伊莎贝尔和我都不是胆怯的人。）

Neither she nor I were met. ——C. Bronte（我和她没有见面。）

但在现代美国作家笔下又可发现这样的句子：

Neither you nor I is necessary to the progress of that great Methodist Church. ——S. Lewis（对于那个卫理公会的进展，你我都无能为力。）

90. tag-question的动词和主句中的不一致

英文的tag-question，例如“It is a nice day，isn’t it？”附加问句中的动词，是和主句中的动词一致的。偶见有前后动词不一致的句子，不知是否正确的用法？

【解答】说“You feel cold，don’t you？”前后是一致的，因为do是feel的代动词。又如“That is not important，is it？”，附加问句不说“is that？”，因为it是this、that的代名词。复数的these、those，则用they来取代，例如：“These apples look very good，don’t they？”。还有“I must not go any further，may I？”也算是一致的。因为否定说must not，肯定就说may，如“May I come in？—Yes，you may. No，you must not.”。以上在字面上看去，前后所用动词似不相侔，其实是一致的。

但这种口语句型的表现法中，确有前后动词不一致的时候。现分别举例解答如下：

美国的文法家Curme举出这样一个例句：

Come down quickly，can’t you？（你快点下来嘛。）

通常附加问句中的助动词，是要采用主句中的助动词的，不过例外很多，例如：

Stop that noise，will you？（你不要吵闹好吧。）

Let’s go for a walk，shall we？（我们去散散步吧。）

We had to learn everything for ourselves，didn’t we？（什么都得自个儿来学习呀。）

I’m big and strong，aren’t（或ain’t）I？（我已经够大够壮了。）

You must come another day，will you？（你下次再来好吧。）

Let me say I’ll think it over，may I？（我要好好想一下，这样说好吧。）

There’s one favour I should like you to do me，will you？（我有件事情想麻烦你一下。）

上面某些例句中的“will you？”“shall we？”“may I？”等附加问句，是询问对方的意向的，故不必用同样的助动词。

再看一些名作家的笔下，也有不少这样的例句：

We can go to another country，shall we？——Lawrence：Lady Chatterley’s Lover（我们到外国去吧。）

I might make the breakfast and eat it up here；should I？——Lawrence：Lady Chatterley’s Lover（我可以就在这里烧早餐等来吃的呀。）

I fair can’t live without yer，Liza—won’t yer？——Maugham：Liza of Lambeth（丽茶，我没有你就活不下去呀。你怎么样？）

Oh，I’m tired of it，aren’t I？——Galsworthy：Forsyte Saga（啊，那个我厌倦了呀。）

I’m a swine，aren’t I？——Maugham：Sanatorium（我是一个鄙贱的人呀。）

Hang it all，I’m practically grown up，aren’t I？——Maugham：Cakes and Ale（他妈的，我已经算是个大人了。）

当然也有用“am I not？”，不过这似乎带有文言的气味，例如：

I am to see her in church，am I not？——Meredith：Rhoda Fleming（我去做礼拜时可以看到她吧。）

I am a princess，am I not？——Alcott：Little Women（我是一位公主呀。）

至于used to的question-tag，据W. S. Allen和A. S. Hornby二人的说法，有两种形式可用，一为“usedn’t you？”，一为“didn’t you？”。

She used to be that bonny，didn’t she？——D. H. Lawrence：Lady Chat-terley’s Lover（她素来是那般漂亮的呀。）

91. 美国的zip code

美国人说的“Use zip code numbers.”，不知指的是什么电码？查zip一字，各种辞典上的解释似乎都不适用，不知本句中的此字，果作何解？

【解答】查美国最通用的《韦氏新世界美语辞典》，对zip一字的解释是，〔名〕（1）a short，sharp hissing or whizzing sound，as of a passing bullet；（2）energy，vim。意为如弹丸飞过天空时的嗤嗤声；能力，活力。〔自动〕（1）to make，or move with，a zip；（2）to act or move with speed or energy。意为发出嗤嗤声驶过，或突飞猛进。〔他动〕to fasten with a slide fastener。 意为用拉链拉紧。确实的，辞典上这些解释，都不适用于问题中的例句。有时辞典上找不到适当的解释时，就得另想办法，从有关的书本上去找寻资料。

问题中的文句是从美国邮政信箱上抄来的，可知必与邮务有关。现在全世界各文明国家，为求邮送迅速计，都要分成邮区，用数字来标记。英国伦敦是老早就有这种办法，把邮区号码规定为地名的一部分，如No. 3，Parliament Hill，N. W. 3，London（伦敦西北三区，国会山三号）。新加坡邮局常在信封上盖上“Do use Singapore district numbers.（请用新加坡邮区号码。）”的字样。例如The University of Singapore，Singapore 10（新加坡第十邮区新加坡大学）。美国在这方面当然也不甘落后，近年正在大力推行地区改进计划（Zone Improvement Program），把全国各州各市分划为许多邮区。编定五个数字的号码，前三字为州及城市，后二字为邮区。这便叫作zip code。

这个在zip code中的zip，和辞典上的zip一字完全无关，而是从Zone Improvement Program的起首字母拼合而成的，所以最初是写成：

ZIP code

后来才改用小写的zip code的。因此问题中的“Use zip code numbers.”一句，意为“请用邮区号码”。在美国的街头上到处都可以看到灰色的邮政信箱，那上面多半有些标语，如：

U. S. Mail（美国邮政）

Use zip code numbers.（请用邮区号码。）

Mail early in the day.（早早投邮。）

另外的地方则写着：

Zip Code Belongs in Every Address.（每一地址都应加上邮区号码。）

美国的zip code numbers是管州与市的，所以应写在州名的后面，如：

Mr. and Mrs. Michael Yu

610 West 141 St. Apt. 5J

New York，N. Y. 10031

U. S. A.

近来接到在澳洲的友人来函，地址上也附上了邮区号码，如：

Mr. S. Y. Liu

92 Neerim Road

Castle Cove，N. S. W. 2069

Australia

在日本，地名上附邮区号的，似乎是最近的事。

Mr. Cheng Tin-an，

5-52，3 Chome，

Minami-Azabu，

Minato-ku，Tokyo 106

Japan.

92. 新加坡的本地英文

全世界说英语的民族共有二亿五千万人，据说各地说的英语，如有一亿四千万人的美国，就跟英国人说的英语不全相同，澳洲有澳洲的英语，加拿大有加拿大的英语，不知新加坡是否也有新加坡的英语？

【解答】新加坡立国不久，政府励精图治，百废俱兴，为使人民效忠国家，凡事以本地公民为主，无此条件，则不免处处碰壁，因而奖励本地文物，文学，音乐，艺术，都标榜本地作家，栽培不遗余力。语文自然也不在例外，我相信新加坡是有所谓本地英文的存在的。例如新加坡大学发给教职员的一份通告上说：

The University of Singapore Co-operative Bookstore Society Limited has been established. It aims to open its bookstore in Bukit Timah Campus in time for the new academic year.（新加坡大学合作社主办的书店已经组成，打算在新学年开始时即在武吉智玛校园内正式开业。）

在大学校园内，美国说on the campus，英国说in the grounds of the university，上文说的 in Bukit Timah Campus，既非英国话，也非美国话，应该是新加坡的本地英文了。我敢担保这绝不是疏忽的笔误，而是本地很流行的说法。署名发出上述通告的人，是大学里数一数二的人物，他虽是华人，但不会说华语，甚至连祖传的方言也不会说，家中小孩牙牙学语，即学的是英语，可知英语已成为他的母语，是决不会有错的，因而我断定这是本地英文的一种表现法。

不久以前我看到一位本地华人发出的一份英文请帖内容是这样的：

Mr. ＆ Mrs. Ng Wee Ooi

request the pleasure of the company of

Mr. Tan Chin Chan

for dinner

at 21 Cherry Orchard

on 29 Feb. 1969 at 7：30 p. m.

请客的主人，是英校出身，在家夫妇间说话都是英语，可知他的英语到了家，是无可怀疑的。在上面的请帖中所用的for dinner一个说法，我敢断定是本地英文的一种表现法，因为在英美一般都是用at dinner的，偶有用to tea的时候，但用for则少见。下面是英美常见的请帖上的字样：

Mr. ＆ Mrs. David Johnson

request the pleasure of

Mr. James White

at dinner on Friday

April the twenty-fourth

at seven o’clock

120 Hillside Road

Mr. John Brown

requests the company of

Mr. Bill Smith to tea

on Wednesday evening

at 4 o’dock

May fifteenth

28 Cherry Avenue

在新加坡某学院的毕业典礼上，我听到院长请理事会主席颁发学生学位时说：

May please the Chairman of the Council to confer . . .

这种说法我相信也是本地英文的表现法，否则不会在那样隆重的毕业典礼上，袍笏登场，当着七八百位中外贵宾，高声宣唱的。照英文的惯用法是只能省去助动词，而不能省去主语的，例如只能省去God前的助动词may，说“God bless you.”，而不能省去主语God说成“May bless you.”。所以上面那句话，英美人通常省去助动词而保留主语，说成：

It please the Chairman . . .

既不是英语，也不是美国语，加拿大不这样说，澳洲也不这样说，当然是新加坡的本地英语了。

从印度文变成英文的bungalow一字，英国人编的ALD上解释说，house with only one storey（无楼的平房），美国人编的WNWD上解释说，a small house or cottage，usually of one storey（通常无楼的小屋）。但在新加坡的本地英语中，此字通常指有楼的住宅，如海滨的“吃风楼”之类。

在新加坡的本地英语中，madam一字有特殊的意义。那就是对已婚的妇女，仍用她未婚的姓名时，冠用madam一字，表示她已婚，而无须提到她丈夫的姓名。

又如比赛打成平手，不分胜负，在新加坡他们说level，在正式的英文是应该说draw才对的。

新加坡既有本地英文，当然也有本地华语。凡医生的诊所（clinic）都说成药房，如“张氏药房”（Chang Clinic）。在中国说药房是西药店，可以为病人配药的，大都贩卖成药。

菜场叫作“巴刹”似乎也是本地吸收了马来语的华语。此外血库称为“血液银行”，而毫无银钱关系。不说“国立初级学院”而说“国家初级学院”，不说三万八千，而说三十八千，以上似乎都是受了英文的影响而构成的本地华语，但十点一刻说成十点三个字，十点半说成十点六个字，十点三刻说成十点九个字等，便好像是本地的创作了。

93. 主句中有decide等字时附句用假设现在

在Reader’s Digest上有一句说“We ask that a part of this power be apportioned to our needs.（我们要求把这种权力的一部分按我们的需要来分配。）”。在句中be字前面，是否省略了一个助动词？

【解答】在回答这个问题之前，我要反问一句：你要的是英国话，还是美国话？如果你要的是英国话，答案是肯定的；如果你要的是美国话，答案就变成否定的了。

在主句中用有advisable、advise、appeal、arrange、ask、beg、bid、concern、declare、decide、demand、desirable、desire、determine、dictate、dictum、expect、hint、imperative、important、insist、look to it、necessary、offer、on condition that、order、plan、pray、prefer、propose、recommend、refusal、request、require、see、set forth、suggest、urge、urgent、want、wish等字句时，附句在美国话中要用假设语气现在时（Subjunctive Present）的动词，而在英国话中就要用shall、should、may、might的助动词，现就美国的这种特殊用法来举例如下：

He deemed it advisable that a general announcement be made to the staff. ——Dreiser（他认为最好通知大家一声。）

M.’s advice to Th . . .. that she offer herself to young B. is unfriendly. ——Telfer（M.对Th.的忠告是她献身给年轻的B.是有敌意的。）

She must find work or arrange in some way that he do something for her. ——Dreiser（她必须找到工作做或是设法安排要他帮帮她的忙。）

They asked that he be brought to Washington.（他们要求把他送到华府去。）

Her parents had begged that her body be brought there. ——Dreiser（她父母曾请求把她的尸体送到那里去。）

Letters of him are read bidding with feigned affection that Imogen meet him at Milford Haven. ——W. W. Lawrence（他的信件被读出来，假情假意地邀请伊莫根到米福海汶去见他。）

At the same time he was greatly concerned lest Clyde get the notion that the family was much concerned. ——Dreiser（同时他又非常关心，生怕克莱德想到家族挂念。）

Committee members decided that the organization be discharged.（委员们决定把那组织解散。）

He demanded that her shoes be changed. ——Dreiser（他命令她换鞋。）

There was a most urgent desire that he be overtaken and captured. ——Dreiser（迫切地希望把他追捕到案。）

She had been determined that he marry her.（她早决心要嫁给他。）

His conscience was dictating that he give up Suzanne and return to An-gela. ——Dreiser（他的良心命令他放弃苏姗回到安吉娜那儿去。）

She expected his dictum that she leave alone. ——Dreiser（她料想他会断言要她单独一个人去。）

Never was it to be expected that one seek to make anything come to pass. ——Dreiser（决不要期待一个人企图使什么事情发生。）

She now began to hint to her sister that she be introduced to some men of character and standing. ——Dreiser（她现在开始来暗示她妹妹，要把她介绍给一些有品德有地位的男人。）

He should make it appear imperative that he go at once. ——Dreiser（他要使它显得他有立刻去的必要。）

It was so important that he see T. and B.. ——Sinclair Lewis（他要去见T.和B.是非常重要的。）

Can’t you ever be tired and jumpy without insisting that everyone a-round you be the same way？——Sinclair Lewis（你周围的人如果不和你一样，你能不感到疲惫和神经兮兮吗？）

Look to it the unsocial individualist be not permitted. ——Dreiser（注意不要让那些不好社交的个人主义者进来。）

It is not necessary that he be able to distinguish them in each and every case. ——George Sarton（不一定要他能一一辨别。）

The girl on condition she be allowed to phone to Eugene . . . consented. ——Dreiser（那女郎同意的条件是允许她打电话给尤金。）

Something must be said of his cruel order that she be put to death. ——W. W. Lawrence（他残酷地下令要把她处死的事必得提到一下。）

It remained to secure an injunction . . . praying that its rights be not in-terfered with. ——Dreiser（仍然有待获得命令，请求不要妨害它的权利。）

It was proposed that he go. ——Dreiser（建议要他去。）

Clyde was moved to request of him that he try to induce the warden to allow him. ——Dreiser（克莱德也被感动得去请求他，要他劝保护人允许他。）

The president set forth in the statement that the cessation of hostilities be arranged between the armies of the national government and the Chinese communists.（美总统在文告中宣布安排中国国民政府军队与共产党军队的停战。）

Also she suggested that they take a steamer back to America tomorrow. ——S. Lewis（她又提议他们明天乘轮船回美国去。）

Suppose it was God’s wish that he interfere. ——Upton Sinclair（假定他来干涉是天意呢。）

94. It’s up to you的译法

英文说up-to-date是指“最新式的”，如an up-to-date store（最新式的商店），其中的up to 有“直到”“以至”的意思，但常听人说“It’s up to you.”，则不能译成“直到你”，不知这句话，应怎样翻译才对？

【解答】英文的副词“up”加上介词“to”时有六种意义，问题中所提出的，只是其中两种而已。现分别举例说明如下：

（1）直到，以至，以迄。如：

up to this time（直到此时为止）

from a pauper up to a prince（从贫民以至王侯）

I stood up to my knees in the water.（水深及膝。）

School attendance is compulsory for all children up to the age of four-teen.（到十四岁为止的儿童实施强迫教育。）

This cigar is not up to much.（这雪茄不太好。）

（2）胜任，能作。如：

He is not up to his job.（他不能胜任他的工作。）

（3）匹敌，及得上。如：

This new book of Green’s isn’t up to his last.（格林出的这本新书不及他前一本书好。）

He is not up to his father as a scholar.（他的学问不及他的父亲。）

I could not get up to him.（我不及他。）

（4）适于，适合。如：

I don’t feel up to a long walk today.（我今天不适于作长途散步。）

I don’t feel up to going to work today.（我今天不适于工作。）

（5）〔口语〕正在做，从事。如：

What is he up to？（他正在做什么？）

He’s up to mischief.（他正在捣蛋。）

What tricks has she been up to？（她一直在玩什么把戏？）

He’s been up to his old game again.（他故态复萌。）

（6）〔口语〕应由（某人）担任或负责。如：

It’s up to us（= it is our duty）to give them all the help we can.（我们理应尽我们所能来帮助他们。）

It’s up to me to do so.（我有义务这样做。）

It is up to you to finish the task.（把那工作做完是你的义务〔责任〕。）

“It’s up to you.”一句惯用的话，正是最后第六种意义，在英国这句话用得极多，用途也极广，翻译时决不可死抱着“义务”或“责任”一个说法来译，应临机应变，配合说话时的情形，来采用适当的译法。例如在英国租房间住，不像中国以月计算，而是以周计的。房客每周付房东的租金，原是规矩。我们付惯了月租的，反觉每周来付有点麻烦，便向房东表示愿意一月一付，房东却回答说：“It’s up to you.”。照字面的意思是“那应由你负责来决定怎样做”，但不妨译成：“看你怎样方便吧。”

当我们回国之前想先到欧洲各国去游览一番，于是就到旅行社去研究旅行计划，看走哪条路线最为经济合算，当然各有利弊，最后那旅行社的职员给我们的答复，也是一句：“It’s up to you.”。这仍然不可以译作 “那应由你自己负责去决定”。最好是译成：“你高兴怎样走就怎样走好了。”

又如我们去凭吊客死伦敦的某世界名人的坟墓时，守墓的老人非常亲切地向导游览，并细加说明，之后不免要对他表示一点谢意，因无人可问，又无规定，只好去问他本人应谢他多少钱。他的回答，仍然是“It’s up to you.”一句老话。当然也不能直译为“那应由你自己负责去决定”。最好是译成：“随便好了！”

95. 英美学校用语不同

“中学”的英译为middle school或high school或secondary school，究竟以何者为正确的翻译？又英美学校用语是否相同？

【解答】问题中对“中学”的三种英译名都是正确的，middle school用于中国和日本一带，high school用于美国，secondary school用于英国。至于英美学校用语是否相同，答案是否定的。两国的语言愈来愈不同了，不但单字不同，连语句也有别。兹将一些重要的字句，对照地举出如下：

A. 单字对照表。（前者为英，后者为美）

a podder；a smug—a grind；a dig 死用功的学生

assembly hall—auditorium 大礼堂

break—intermission 放假

chancellor—president；prex（俗语）大学校长

class room；lecture room—recitation room 教室

college grounds—campus 校园

college—liberal arts college 文科大学

college staff—faculty 大学教授团

competitor—contestant 选手，竞争者

council school；board school—public school 公立（中、小）学校

denominational school—parochial school（教区附属的）宗教学校

diploma—sheepskin 文凭（因为从前的文凭是用羊皮纸的）

elementary（school）teacher—grade-teacher 小学教师

examination—quiz 试验，临时考试

exercise book—composition book 作文簿

failure；plough—flunk 考试落第

first-year student—freshman 一年级的学生（大、中学校的）

form（中学）；standard（小学）—grade（中、小学的）年级

fourth-year student—senior 四年级的学生（大、中学校的）

girl（woman）student—co-ed 男女同校的女学生

gymnasium exercises—gym work 体操

gymnasium—gym（室内）体育场

half-year—semester 学期（一年分两学期）

hall of residence；hostel（大学）；house（中学）—dormitory 宿舍

higher elementary school—grammar school 高等小学

howler—boner 大错特错

Installation—Inauguration（大学校长等的）就职典礼

lesson period—recitation period（教室中的）授课时间

mixed education—co-education 男女同校

non-provided school—private school 私立学校

post-course of tuition—correspondence course 函授

post-tuition school—correspondence school 函授学校

preparatory school—prep school；fitting school 预备学校

schoolmaster—principal 中、小学校长

schoolmistress—schoolma’am 中、小学女教师

school prospectus—school catalog 中、小学校历

speech-day—commencement 毕业典礼

second-year student—sophomore 二年级学生（大、中学校的）

select school—exclusive school 纨绔学校（只收富人子弟的）

theological college—theological seminary 神学校

third-year student—junior 三年级学生（大、中学校的）

to be late—to be tardy 上课迟到

to bully—to haze 拖尸（大学老生对新生的恶作剧）

to coach—to tutor（预备入学考试的）个人教授

truant—hook（e）y 时常旷课的学生

university（college）calendar—university（college）catalog 大学校历

varsity man—college boy 大学（研究）生

win his cap—win his letter 成为选手

B. 文句对照表。（前者为英，后者为美）

Candidates must have completed a secondary school course. —Candidates have to be high school graduates.（报考资格中学毕业）

Chancellor Smith delivered the diplomas to the two hundred graduates. —President Smith delivered the diplomas（或sheepskins）to the two hundred gradu-ates.（校长授予毕业证书）

He completed his secondary school course a few years ago. —He was gradu-ated from high school a couple of years ago.（中学毕业）

He delivered（或 gave）a graduating address. —He made a baccalaureate address.（对毕业生致训词）

He had no more than elementary education. —His education was limited to the grades.（仅受小学教育）

He has failed to win his football colours. —He has failed to make the football squad.（足球竞赛失败）

He is a graduate of a neighbouring university. —He is an alumnus of a near-by university.（附近大学的毕业生）（女则说“She is an alumna . . .”。）

He is preparing for the university. He is reading for the matriculation. —He is fitting for college.（准备考大学）

He is swotting up his Greek. —He is boning up his Greek.（拼命在学希腊文）

He often plays truant. —He often plays hook（e）y.（旷课）

He scored high marks in his examination. —He won high ratings in his ex-ams.（考得很高的分数）

He took history. He specialised in history. —He majored in history.（专攻历史）

I graduated at Oxford University in 1935. —I was graduated from（或at）Columbia University in 1935.（大学毕业）

I spent ten years as a teacher. —I taught school for ten years.（教了十年书）

I took my degree in the same class as he. —I was in the same class with him.（大学同班毕业者）

I took pupils for a few years. —I tutored for a couple of years.（个人教授）

Is Latin compulsory or optional？—Is Latin required or elective？（必修还是选修？）

John is making up the subjects in which he has failed. —John is working off his conditions.（重修不及格的科目）

My rooms are out of college. —I room away from the campus.（住在校外）

On Saturday there will be the general meeting of the Old Boys’Association. —On Saturday there will be the general meeting of our Alumni Association.（毕业同学会）

One thousand two hundred students have entered their names for the summer school. —Twelve hundred students have registered for the summer session.（注册了一千二百名）

Professor Smith has marked essays（或compositions）. —Professor Smith has graded themes.（给论文打分数）

The graduation ceremony will take place on the 15th of June. —The com-mencement（exercises）will be held on June 15.（举行毕业典礼）

The school curriculum includes no fancy subjects. —There are no frills in the school program.（没有不切实用的科目）

This school makes a special feature of music. This school pays special atten-tion to music. —This school features music.（注重音乐）

This year there was the largest number of freshmen in the history of the uni-versity. —This year there was the largest entering class in the history of the uni-versity.（今年新生人数最多）

96. 同格的属格

She is an angel of a woman. 译为“她是妇女的天使”，意义不大明白，请详为解释。

【解答】an angel of a woman = a woman like an angel。所以上句应译为“她是一个天使一般的女人”。这叫作“同格的属格”（Appositive Possessive），在“of”前后的名词，指同一人或同一物，所以a woman = an angel，天使就是指的她并非别人。这种用法我们平常见得最多的为说地方及行为等，如the city of Paris，意为“巴黎市”，前后两个名词是同格的，the city = Paris，那市就是巴黎，巴黎就是那市。例如：

He writes under the name of Stranger.（他以“陌生者”的名字撰稿。）

He has a habit of scratching his nose.（他有搔鼻的习惯。）

由这种相等的表现法而变化另外一种加强的表现法出来，即上述的an angel of a woman一样，虽仍有相等的意思，但更有加强的意思，比说an angelic woman要强调得多。在意义上“of”前的名词（an angel）为“of”后的名词（a woman）的性质或形状等的一种特别强调的说法。这一表现法和上一表现法（如the city of Paris）不同的地方，就在appositional “of”后出现的名词前面，必须加不定冠词，哪怕是固有名词也不能省，除非名词用复数，如：

That old cripple of a Henn. ——Sean O’Faolain（那个残废的亨老头。）

She was much better educated than that fool of a Beatrice. ——A. Huxley （她比那个愚笨的彼特利斯受过更好的教育。）

This huge lunatic warren of a London. ——J. B. Priestley（这个巨大狂人收容所一般的伦敦。）

Down with the Bourbons，and that great pig of a Louis XVIII！——V. Hugo（打倒波旁皇族，和那个大肥猪路易十八！）

最普通的有a devil of a man、a rascal of a fellow、to catch a death of a cold等idiomatic的说法，原可解释为：a devil of等就像a kind of、a sort of一样的表现法。从文法上看，devil、kind等是主体（principal），“of”以下为附属（adjunct），即所谓modifier；但从意义上看，则恰恰相反，kind of、devil of的“of”可视为前一字的后缀（suffix），不妨将a devil of a man，改写为a devilish man，将a rascal of a fellow，改写为a rascally fellow，将a death of a cold，改写为a deadly cold。

Her father is a brute of a man（= a brutal man）.（她父亲是一个横蛮残酷的人。）

She is an awful fool of a woman（= an awfully foolish woman）.（她是一个非常愚笨的女人。）

Those pigs of girls（= piggish girls）eat so much.（那些像猪一样的女孩子吃得那么多。）

Where is that fool of a driver（= that foolish driver）？（那个笨车夫哪里去了？）

The boat disappeared in a mountain of a wave（= a wave like a moun-tain；a mountainous wave）.（小船在如山一般高的大浪中消逝了。）

Thackeray在他的名著Vanity Fair中有所谓her old sharper of a father（她那骗子的老父）。此外常用的还有a treasure of a son（宝贝儿子），an angel of a wife（天仙妻子），a palace of a house（宫殿似的房屋），your fool of a husband（愚夫），an old blackguard of a woman（老毒妇）。

He was a fine figure of a young man.（翩翩佳公子。）

Mr. Wong lives a hell of a long way off.（汪先生住得远哉遥遥。）

97. 宕辞

当我们一时想不出适当的话语来回答对方时，我们多半默不作声，但不开腔对英美人来说是最不好的，因为他们可能怀疑我们是不予理睬，或未听懂，所以在任何情形之下都得回答，但不知那时应说些什么？

【解答】是的，不开腔是最不好的，无论是对方说的话我们没有听懂，或是对方的问题难于回答时，我们都得开腔。如一时想不出适当的话语来，我们只好用一种不相干的字句来延宕一下，以免引起误会。这一类的宕辞，可列举下列三十种：

（1）Eh.（呃。）

（2）Well.（嗯。）

（3）Oh，well.（啊，嗯。）

（4）Well，let me see.（嗯，等我想想看。）

（5）In fact.（事实上。）

（6）As a matter of fact.（实际。）

（7）The fact is . . .（事实却是……）

（8）By the by.（可是。）

（9）By the way.（附带说一句。）

（10）In any case.（无论如何。）

（11）Anyhow.（总之。）

（12）For instance.（例如。）

（13）You know（或see）.（你知道的。）

（14）Now I come to think of it.（现在我想起来。）

（15）I might say.（也许可以说。）

（16）For my own part.（至于我呢。）

（17）I tell you what.（我告诉你那要怎样。）

（18）I mean to say.（我想说的是。）

（19）As I was saying just now.（如我刚说过的。）

（20）What I meant to say was . . .（我的意思是说……）

（21）At least I think so.（至少我是这样想的。）

（22）That reminds me.（那使我想起来。）

（23）Or something of that sort.（或是那一类的东西。）

（24）Or words to that effect.（或是那种意思的字。）

（25）I don’t quite know what you call it.（你们叫什么，我不大清楚。）

（26）It’s like this，you know.（那就是这样的，你知道。）

（27）Joking apart.（不要开玩笑。）

（28）Apart from that.（和那不同。）

（29）First of all；above all.（第一；尤其是。）

（30）Not to mention.（不消说。）

98. 喜怒哀乐的说法

听说西洋人是善于表情的，遇到喜怒哀乐的时候，都有话可说，但不知说的什么？

【解答】我们到了感情的极致常说不出话来，但西洋人却不然，总是有话好说的，现分别例示如下：

A.喜的表现：

（1）Thank God！（谢天谢地。）

（2）How happy I am！（我真高兴。）

（3）How pleased I am！（我真快乐。）

（4）I’m so glad.（我非常喜欢。）

（5）Oh，how glad I am！（呀，真高兴。）

（6）I am glad of it.（那使我很高兴。）

（7）How lucky！（多么幸运。）

（8）Nothing gives me so much pleasure.（再高兴没有了。）

（9）Nothing could make me happier.（我快乐极了。）

（10）I am highly pleased with it.（我非常满足。）

（11）I am beside myself with joy.（欢喜若狂。）

（12）I have nothing more to desire.（我满意极了。）

（13）This is all that I can desire.（愿望止此。）

（14）I cannot contain myself with joy.（快乐死了。）

B.怒的表现：

（1）Gosh！Golly！Gee！Hell！Damn it！Hang it！God damned. Dash it.（该死。）

（2）The deuce（或devil）take you！（该死的家伙。）

（3）Shame on you！（羞耻呀。）

（4）What a shame！（多么可耻。）

（5）Are you not ashamed？（你不羞耻吗？）

（6）Are you not ashamed of yourself？（你不自惭吗？）

（7）You ought to be ashamed of yourself.（你应知耻。）

（8）I am ashamed of you.（我为你羞耻。）

（9）That makes my flesh creep. That gives me the creeps.（使我悚然。）

（10）Do you want to make me angry？（你要使我发脾气吗？）

（11）I am very angry with you for it.（你这点使我很生气。）

（12）This is beyond endurance. This is the limit. This is the last straw.（使我受不了。）

（13）I have no patience with you.（你使我受不了。）

（14）I am out of patience with you.（我对你再不能忍受了。）

（15）No excuse！（用不着请原谅。）

（16）Don’t argue！None of your lips！（不用强辩了。）

（17）Get out of my sight！Beat it！（你走吧，不要再留在此地。）

（18）Scram！（滚你的蛋。）

（19）Get you gone！Get the hell out of here！（你滚吧。）

（20）What a bore！What a nuisance！（讨厌。）

（21）Clear out of the house！（出去。）

（22）Mind your own business！（不要你管。）

C.哀的表现：

（1）Alas！（哎呀。）

（2）Oh，dear！（啊，天啦。）

（3）Ah，poor fellow！（呀，可怜。）

（4）What a sad thing it is！（多么可悲。）

（5）My grief is too deep for tears.（欲哭无泪。）

（6）I feel as if my heart would break with sorrow.（心痛欲裂。）

（7）The sorrow is more than I can bear.（悲不自胜。）

（8）I’m so sad that I could cry.（伤心欲哭。）

（9）My heart bleeds to think that this may be our last meeting.（想到我们难于再见，心痛已极。）

D.乐的表现：

（1）Well done！Bravo！（好极了。）

（2）Attaboy！（好呀。）

（3）Excellent！（了不得。）

（4）Capital！Great stuff！（顶好。）

（5）We are proud of you！（值得骄傲。）

（6）Wonderful man（或girl）！（了不起呀。）

（7）This is just fine. Oh，we have a fine time.（这很好呀。）

（8）We are very happy，indeed.（真是快乐。）

（9）There’s nothing more enjoyable.（再快乐没有了。）

（10）That’s meat and drink to me. I love on it！（再没有更快乐的了。）

99. Nobody will be the wiser

英文说的“Nobody will be the wiser.”，译成中文的“谁也不会更为聪明”，据说是错了，不知错在什么地方？

【解答】对于一些极其普通的字，翻译时每易出毛病，原因是我们自以为知道，而不肯去查字典，实则我们只知其一，而不知其二，例如wise一字，我们都知道是作“聪明”解的，如“事后聪明”便说“It’s easy to be wise after the event.”。又如“他不肯在酒醉后去开车是够聪明的”：“He was wise enough not to drive when he was drunk.”。殊不知此字又可作“知道”“了解”“明白”解，问题中的此字，便应作此解，现译成“聪明”，所以不对。这句英文应译为“谁也不懂得”才是正确的。他例如：

We are none the wiser for his explanations.（听了他的解释以后，我们还是不明白。）

He came away none the wiser.（= He came away as wise as he went；knowing no more than before.）（他离开时仍旧不懂。）

句中的none the wiser = no wiser than before；as wise as before，意为“照旧”。

If you hold your tongue，no one will be any the wiser.（你要不开口的话，谁会知道呀。）

与none the wiser用法相同的，英文还有none the worse的表现法，不过意义不同罢了。现在不妨一并讲解一下。这个bad的比较级worse，可以作形容词用也可以作副词用。none the worse = not less，兹就形容词及副词两种用法举例如下：

He fell into the river but is none the worse.（他掉在河里但没有事。）

I like him none the worse for being outspoken（= bold of speech）.（哪怕他直言无忌，我还是很喜欢他。）

I think none the worse of him because he accepted their offer.（他虽接受了他们的建议，我仍旧是很尊敬他的。）

I am none the worse for a single failure.（一度失败我并不灰心。）

My shoes are the worse for wear.（= My shoes are badly worn as the result of long wear.）（穿得太久的结果，破烂不堪。）

This old hat is certainly the worse for wear.（这顶旧帽子确是破烂不堪了。）

句中的the worse for wear，意为“穿破或用坏，破烂不堪”。同样的用法还有：

He was plainly the worse for drink（或liquor）.（明显地他喝醉了。）

100. Do you know of a hotel？

“你知道这附近有清静一点的旅馆吗？”英译为“Do you know a quiet hotel around here？”。为什么不对？

【解答】翻译出来的英文句子确是不对的，因为句中的know是用了他动词，应改为自动词才对，全句应作：

Do you know of a quiet hotel around here？

为什么不可以说Do you know，而一定要说Do you know of呢？因为原文说的“你知道这附近有清静一点的旅馆吗？”的意思，是问旅馆的有无，而不是问知否那旅馆内部的设备，乃至其他一切的详情。说到这里，我们实有必要把know的他动词和自动词两种含义，先弄清楚一下。

A. know vt.

（1）have clearly in mind 知悉

（2）understand thoroughly 彻底了解

（3）recognize 认出

（4）be personally acquainted with 相知

（5）have experience of 经历

B. know vi.

（1）understand 知道

（2）与分词连用时，如：

know about = have knowledge or information concerning 听别人说过

know of = know the existence of 知其存在

如果是问Do you know那一定要彻底了解，对于那旅馆有亲自住过的经历才可以，若单是知其存在与否，则就得说Do you know of方为适合呢。这个know of实和hear of差不多，如：

I know（= have heard）of a shop where you can buy things like that.（我听说过有一家商店，在那里你可以买到那样的东西。）

再看看其他的例子：

Do you know of any good doctor near here？（你知道附近有什么好医生吗？）

This is the best method I know of.（这是我所知道的最好的方法。）

I know of an excellent little restaurant near here.（我听说这附近有一家很好的饮食店。）

I don’t know the man you mention，but of course I know of him.（= I’m aware of his existence.）（你说的那人我虽不相识，但我当然听说过他。）

“Has Smith been ill？”—“Not that I know of.”（= I’m not aware of his having been ill.）（“史密斯病了吗？”——“我一点也不晓得。”）

How did you come to know of it？（你怎样知道这个的？）

I knew of his presence in the other room.（我已知道他在另外一个房间里。）

I want to buy a pair of shoes；do you know of a good store anywhere？（我要买一双皮鞋，你知道什么地方有好的鞋店吗？）

Do you know of any teacher who would suit me？（你知道有谁是适合我程度的老师吗？）

101. It is an ill wind that blows nobody good

It is an ill wind that blows nobody good. 译为“歪风吹得没有一个人舒服的”，据说译得不对，不知错在什么地方？

【解答】照字面上看这样翻译是不错的，例如“勤能补拙”可英译为“It is diligence that makes up for deficiency.”。可是问题中提出的句子，是一句比较古老的谚语，莎士比亚时代的用法，和现代英语的用法是不同的。例如莎剧The Merchant of Venice第二幕第二景第八十一行有句云：

It is a wise father that knows his own child.

梁实秋译《威尼斯商人》（文星版三十五页最后一行）中译为“聪明的父亲才能认识他自己的儿子呢”，也是译错了的。在梁译若干年前问世的朱生豪译本（世界版该书二十二页）也作“只有聪明的父亲才会知道他自己的儿子”，他同样未注意到这句特殊的表现法，而照字面直译了。中国虽有“知子莫若父”的一句古话，但莎翁这句英文的意思却适得其反，而是说“无论怎样聪明的父亲也不见得知道他自己的儿子”。这里说的“知道”是辨认（recognize）或认出（identify）的意思。所以也可译为“父亲离开久了，并不一定能认出自己的儿子”，同样的情形又可以说“It is a wise child that knows its own father.（孩子只认识母亲，并不一定认识父亲。）”。

问题中所引用的“It is an ill wind that blows nobody good.”一句，也不可以照字面来翻译，而应译为“无论是怎样的歪风，也不见得每个人都吹得不舒服”，即是说不好的事未必人人都受损害，有损者必有得者，害于此者利于彼，如人病利于医生，人死利于殡仪馆等。

现在再举出几个同类的例子如下：

It is a good workman that never blunders. 这句也不可译为“一个好的工人是决不犯错误的”，而应译为“智者千虑必有一失”。

It is a long lane that has no turning. 不是永不转弯的长巷子，而是“任何长径必有转弯”，即凡事必有变化，不会永远一成不改，也可译作“否极泰来”。

It is a good horse that never stumbles. 意为 “凡马皆有失足者”，即“凡人皆有缺点”“无人不有过失”“天下无无弊之利，亦无无利之弊”“天下无绝对的美，亦无绝对的恶”“一得一失在所不免”。

It is a good divine that follows his own instructions. 意为“能说者未必能行”。

102. 表现特性的加强形容法

英文的stupid是一个形容词，如a stupid person（愚人），为什么又见有人说You are a stupid，是否句尾略去了person一字？

【解答】这是表现特性的加强形容法的一种，stupid在此作名词用，故后面不要加person的字样。人们感到用单纯的形容词或副词太弱，不够力量，为加强语气计，不得不想其他的办法来表达想说的意思。这种加强的形容法，约有下列十种方式。

（1）以形容词作名词用：

You are a dear.（你是一个可爱的人儿。）

You are a silly.（你是一个傻子。）

（2）以形容词最上级作名词用：

It is the clearest of proofs.（这是最显明的证据。）

The plot is of the thinnest.（显而易见的阴谋。）

He was killed in the thickest of fight.（他是在战斗最激烈的时候战死的。）

（3）用限定的所有格：

Your fool of a husband did it.（是你那笨老爷做的。）

It’s no use telling our idiot of a maid.（告诉我们那个白痴似的女佣人是没有用的。）

（4）用隐喻，尤其是常以devil、hell等字来说：

I say，this fire’s the devil. ——Galsworthy（这火真炙手得很。）

What the hell are you doing？（你到底在搞什么？）

Since I came in the ocean of life，I have learned many things.（自从我进入人生的海洋以来，我学了不少的东西。）

（5）以“all +抽象名词”作形容词用：

Cleanliness is all importance.（清洁第一。）

“Mr. Darcy is all politeness，” said Elizabeth，smiling. ——Jane Austen（“达西先生是个极其客气的人。”伊丽莎白带笑地说。）

“I am all astonishment. How long has she been such a favourite？—and pray，when am I to wish you joy？”——Jane Austen（“我真个吓倒了。她被你看中有多久了？请你告诉我，什么时候我可以庆贺你们的订婚呢？”）

（6）用意思重复的字句：

safe and sound（安然无恙）

wail and weep（哀哭）

might and main（努力）

patronage and privilege（特权）

tender and delicate（娇柔）

sanity and reason（理由正当）

（7）用复数形：

Thanks so much.（真谢谢你。）

It is a thousand pities.（真可惜。）

He was left to the tender mercies of his step mother.（他被继母虐待。）

（8）用相当的抽象名词来表示特性的概念：

（a）用补语：

He was not a success.（他失败了。）

The play was a partial failure.（此剧部分失败了。）

He is a very good fun.（他很有趣。）

（b）用属格：

Her life had always run pretty smoothly through the simplicities of joy and sorrow.（她的生活在单纯的悲喜交集中顺利地度过。）

She was in a simmer of distress. ——Hardy（她在沸腾的苦恼中。）

He walked the length of wakeful Fleet-street. ——Galsworthy（他走完了夜间工作的舰队街。）

（9）用介词和抽象名词构成的副词：

He answered with impatience.（他不耐烦地回答了。）

He answered with meaning slowness.（他回答得很慢，但很有力。）

（10）用表示色彩的抽象名词：

These are deeds of darkness.（这些都是秘密的勾当。）

They are in a world of complete whiteness.（他们在一个纯白的世界中。）

103. 女人也称呼为man

“女孩子初入大学，还是很天真的”一句的英译是“She is an unsophisticated freshman.”。分明说的女孩子，为什么要英译为男人（man）呢？大学一年级的女生，没有女性的字眼吗？

【解答】一年级的女生可以说a first-year girl，但这并不一定指大学。若说a female student则不一定是指一年级的新生。通常说的a schoolgirl则更是指中学生。要确定为大学一年级的学生，虽为女性，也只能用freshman一字，当然在美国，freshman也可以指中学生，不过一般都是指大学一年级学生。要说得更确定一点，则不妨说“She is a freshman at college.”就错不了。

英文用男人来说女性的，实在习见不鲜。在开会时如果是女人担任主席，我们就称她为 Madame Chairman，因为没有chairwoman一字。对男人的主席，当然称他为Mr. Chairman（男主席的太太是Mrs. Chairman）。

如果在会场中有人提议或由某种情形的需要，成立一个由五位女性组织的五人委员会，去调查某项妇女问题。这个委员会仍然要用男人，而说成a five-man committee， 不说a five-woman committee。

又，我们去看画家或雕刻家的个人展览会，不问男女，一概要称为one-man show。如：

I have been to the one-man show of Miss Mary Smith’s oils at the Tate Gallery.（我曾到泰特美术馆去看了史女士的油画个展。）

再看英美作家笔下所描写的情形，就更广泛了。美国得过诺贝尔文学奖金的Sinclair Lewis，著有Cass Timberlane一书，书中女主人公Virginia Marshland说话时，常自称为man，例如：

“Will you—please give us your，uh，your name and profession and ad-dress，please？”

“Jinny Marshland —Virginia Marshland. I’m draftsman and designer for the Fieland Fancy Box and Pasteboard Toy Manufacturing Company and a kind of messenger—man of all work.”

（“请你把你的姓名、职业、住所说出来。”检察官说。

“我叫基尼·马西兰——维基尼亚·马西兰。我是菲兰化妆盒和厚纸玩具制造公司的制图员和设计者。同时又做着一种信差似的工作——打杂的人。”）

“I didn’t have any brothers or sisters，so they let me have the attic all to myself，and up there I was the busiest man of affairs.”（“我既无兄弟，又无姊妹，所以他们让我一个人独占着顶楼，在那里我真是一个最忙的事务家了。”）

“I’d been feeling as if I were set aside from all normal people；as if I were a condemned man，with no hope . . .”（“我觉得我和普通的人完全不同了；简直好像是一个没有希望的，判了死刑的囚犯一样……”）

又如英国作家Maugham在他写的短篇Promise中，说一个年长的妇人和一个年轻得像她儿子似的男子结了婚，后来她丈夫另有了爱人，她便自动引退，别人问她为什么这样老实，她说有约在先，因为两人的年龄相差太远，所以在十年前结婚时，她就答应他随时可以离异的，现在应当守约。她说：

“Oh，I must，you know. One must behave like a gentleman.”（“啊，你知道，我必得如此。一个人的作为必须有君子风度。”）

另外英国一位天主教的作家Graham Greene，在他所著的Brighton Rock中，也有“I don’t know her from Adam.”（我完全不认识她。）的文句，《圣经》中说世界上第一个男人是Adam（亚当），第一个女人是Eve（夏娃），这两位人类的始祖是谁也没有见到过的，所以遇到生人，我们就说像亚当一样，从来没有见过他，他对我实与亚当无异，即强调不认识的意思。但对女人也惯于拿亚当来比，而不说夏娃。英文中既有女性始祖的Eve，又有gentleman对称的gentlewoman，但即令是出自女人口中，也不说“I don’t know her from Eve.”，或“One must behave like a gentlewoman.”。

最后请比较下面两句：

She is the greatest author of the age.（她是当代最伟大的作家。）

She is the greatest authoress of the age.（她是现代女作家中最伟大的。）

104. 美国话的简略

听说美国话和英国话不同的地方，主要的一点就是简略，但不知简略到什么程度，哪一类的字被他们简略掉了？

【解答】简略是美国话的一个特点，许多长一点的字，他们都把它略短了，如ad（= advertisement），exam（= examination），co-ed（= co-educational college girl）等等，还有就是把一句话中文法上必要的字眼略去，兹分类举例如下：

（1）略去and或of等的：

two miles a half；two miles and a half（美）= two and a half miles（英）两英里半

a pair trousers = a pair of trousers 一条裤子

two trousers = two pair of trousers 两条裤子

one coffee = a cup of coffee 一杯咖啡

one pack（age）cigarettes = one pack（age）of cigarettes 一包香烟

two cartons cigarettes = two cartons of cigarettes 两条香烟

one bottle beer = one bottle of beer 一瓶啤酒

（2）略去主语的I、You或It等的：

Been to Mount Ali？= Have you been to Mount Ali？（你到过阿里山吗？）

Never seen real Chinese home life. = I have never seen real Chinese home life.（我从未见过真正的中国家庭生活。）

Be careful when enter your room. = Be careful when you enter your room.（你进房间时要当心。）

Going downtown？= Are you going downtown？（你们进城去吗？）（有时说“You fellows going downtown？”。）

Going up，sir. = I’m going up，sir.（电梯）（现在上去。）

Looks like real coffee. = It looks like real coffee.（这好像是真正的咖啡。）

Sounds funny，ain’t it？= It sounds funny，isn’t it？（听来好笑。）

Where going？= Where are you going？（你到哪里去？）

When coming back？= When are you coming back？（你要什么时候回来？）

When laundry come back？= When will my laundry come back？（我洗的衣服几时洗好？）

How soon pick’em up？= How soon can I pick them up？（什么时候我来接他们？）

See？= You see？（你懂了吗？）

Say！= I say！（喂！）

Bet！= I bet you！（确实。）

Get it？= Do you understand？（你懂吗？）

Got the time？= Have you got the time？= What’s the time？（什么时候了？）

Better go out right away. = You had better go out at once.（你最好马上出去。）

Where you room？—Up on 5th floor，502. = Where do you room？—（I do）up on the 5th floor，502.（你住在哪里？——五楼五百零二号。）（即502 roomer）

Lots of fun！= I have lots of fun.（很有趣。）

（3）略去动词或助动词等的：

What you say？= What did you say？（你说什么？）

Speak English？= Do you speak English？（你能说英语吗？）

Busy？= Are you busy？（你忙吗？）

How much I owe you？= How much do I owe you？（我欠你多少钱？）

What’s the racket？—Something wrong，I guess. = What is the mat-ter？—Something is wrong，I think.（他们闹什么？——我想一定出了什么事。）

Any news？= Is there any news？（有什么消息吗？）

（4）略去宾语的it或them的：

Let me see. = Let me see it.（让我看看。）

Let me have a look. = Let me have a look at it（或them）.（让我看一下。）

Understand？= Do you understand me？（你懂吗？）

（5）略去冠词the的：

Get me up of 7th floor，please.（我要到七楼。）（= the 7th floor）

First January = early January，at the beginning of January.（一月初旬。）Cf. Jan. 1st.

（6）略去介词的：

I’m expecting him up here Sunday morning（= on Sunday morning）.（我期待他礼拜天上午来。）

See you again Monday（= on Monday）.（礼拜一再见。）

Is he home？= Is he at home？（他在家吗？）

I stayed home all day yesterday. = I stayed at home all day yesterday.（我昨天一整天都在家里。）

105. 单句、复句、合句彼此转换

英文由构造上的不同而分为单句、复句、合句三种形式，彼此转换时，不知有无规则可循？

【解答】英文的所谓单句（simple sentence），复句（complex sentence），合句（compound sentence），只是一些不同的表现方式，可以用来表达同一意义。例如：

I am too tired to go.（单句）

= I am so tired that I cannot go.（复句）

= I am very tired，so I cannot go.（合句）

（我很疲倦不能去。）

She took his place on account of his illness.（单句）

= As he was ill，she took his place.（复句）

= He was ill and she took his place.（合句）

（他生病由她代理。）

可见三种形式中任何一种都可以用来表达我们的意思，至于三种形式彼此转换，并无一定的规则，须看文句内容的需要，而采取适当的字眼。例如由复句或合句转变为单句时，就可用不定词或分词或动名词或片语来取代原有的子句。现例解如下：

（1）合变单：

（a） | He must confess his fault or he will be fined. He must confess his fault to escape being fined. （他必须自白以免受罚。）

（b） | The robber saw the policeman and took to his heels. Seeing the policeman，the robber took to his heels. （一见警察那强盗就逃跑了。）

（c） | He was in bad health，and so he could not work. Owing to bad health，he could not work. （因为健康欠佳，他不能工作。）

（2）复变单：

（a） | He is not a man who tells a lie. He is not a man to tell a lie. （他不是一个撒谎的人。）

（b） | I am certain that I shall give you satisfaction. I am certain of giving you satisfaction. （我一定可以使你满意。）

（c） | They were much surprised when they heard him confess. They were much surprised to hear him confess. （听他自白，他们大吃一惊。）

（3）复变合：

（a） | He was always honest，though he was poor. He was a poor man，but he was always honest. （他虽穷苦，然素诚实。）

（b） | If you press the button，the bell will ring. Press the button，and the bell will ring. （按那电钮，铃就会响。）

（c） | Unless you keep quiet，I will punish you. Keep quiet，or I will punish you. （不要吵闹，否则我将处罚你。）

如果我们对这些转变，一定要找出什么规则的话，那么:

（1）在复句变单句时:

①把名词子句改写，如：“That he died so young（改为His death at so young an age）is much to be regretted.（他死得那么早真是遗憾。）”。

②把形容词子句改写，如“The gift which Mary received from John（改为Mary’s gift from John）was a necklet.（玛丽由约翰赠送的礼物是一个颈链。）”。

③把表时间的副词子句改写，如“When she saw the blood（改为At the sight of the blood），she drew back in horror.（她一见到血，就吓得退缩了。）”。

④把表原因、理由的副词子句改写，如“The firm had to lay off some of their workmen，because orders were slackening.（因为来定货的很少，那公司不得不把一部分员工解雇。）”，改为“Owing to slackening of orders，the firm had to lay off some of their workmen.”。

⑤把表目的、结果的副词子句改写，如“Lucky took a job so that her husband could continue studying（改为for her husband to continue studying）.（为使丈夫可以继续求学，她出外去工作了。）”。

⑥把让步的副词子句改写，如“Although he pretended to be French（改为Despite his pretension to be French），his German accent gave him away.（哪怕他冒充是法国人，他的德国腔调一下就听出来了。）”。

⑦把表假定、条件的副词子句改写，如“If it were not for the generosity of his father（改为But for the generosity of his father），he would be badly off.（要不是他父亲慷慨的接济，他生活早陷于困境了。）”。

⑧把其他副词子句改写，如“As is the case with most educated people（改为Like most educated people），he prefers classical music to jazz.（他也和大多数有教养的人一样，喜欢古典音乐，不喜欢爵士音乐。）”。

（2）在合句变单句时:

①可利用分词，如“It was Sunday，so（改为It being Sunday），the shops were all closed.（那是礼拜天，商店都关门。）”。

②可利用不定词，如“The good old days are gone and will never return（改为never to return）.（好日子一去不复返。）”。

③可利用副词片语，如“He said nothing and（改为Without a word he）went on with his dinner.（一言不发，他继续吃他的饭。）”。

（3）在合句变复句时：

①用有连词and时，如“Take my tip，and（改为If you take my tip，）you’ll make a lot of money.（你听我的话，就可以赚很多的钱。）”。

②用有连词but时，如“The food is good at this hotel，but（改为Though the food is good at this hotel，）the service is poor.（这旅馆的餐食很好，但招待不行。）”。

③用有连词or时，如“She was already engaged，or（改为If she had not been engaged，）she might have accepted him.（她已订婚，否则也许她会接受他的。）”。

④用有其他连词时，如“He has tried all sorts of cures，yet（改为Although he has tried all sorts of cures，）he is still ill.（虽则他试过种种的疗法，然而他仍是病着。）”。

106. 混合而成的句法

英文说“Let us do away with all unnecessary ceremonies.（让我们取消一切不必要的礼节。）”，据说句中do away with something是从古语的do away something与away with it（！）两个说法混合而成的。现在的英语中是否也有混成的字句？

【解答】在口语中，这种混合而成的新句法，自然也是有的。单字方面的混成字（Blending）最多，由两种句法混杂起来，而构成一句新的说法，也是常见的现象。现举几个代表的例。

（A）由cannot but do及cannot help doing混合而成的cannot help but do，应为首屈一指的好例子。这个混血儿，在英国是视为没有教养的，但在美国却堂而皇之载诸美语的大辞典中，成为美国的正式的国语。他们的辩解是“英国人把help当作avoid解，所以觉得不合理，我们将help仍作‘帮助’解，所以这样说，就没有什么不合理了”。P. G. Perrin以美国人的立场，在他的Writer’s Guide and Index to English一书上说：

（1）Formal：I can but feel sorry for him.

（2）General：I can’t help feeling sorry for him.

（3）Colloquial：I can’t help but feel sorry for him.

据J. N. Hook的说法，can but的表现法是extremely formal。普通文章中是决不用的，他又将下面三种说法的细微的差异指示我们：

I can but die for my country. = I can only die for my country.

I cannot but die for my country. = I can do nothing except die for my country.

I cannot help dying for my country. = I cannot avoid dying for my country.

受着种族歧视的美国黑人作家R. Wright在他的名著The Man Who Went to Chicago中有下面心声的表现，尤其是其中could not help but hate与could not help having对照的用法，值得注意。

. . . in the act of hiding his self-hate，he could not help but hate those who evoked his self-hate in him. So each part of his day would be consumed in a war with himself，a good part of his energy would be spent in keeping control of his unruly emotions，emotions，which he had not wished to have，but could not help having.（……在他隐藏自己憎恶的那种动作中，他不禁要憎恶在他心中引起自己憎恶那种感情的那些人。所以每天的时间都消耗在跟他自己作战的上面，而他大部分的精力也花在设法去控制他那难于控制的感情上。那种感情是他并不想要有的，但是他却无法摒弃，使他非有不可。）

（B）正确的英文应说different from的，在俚俗语中，英国有different to的说法，而美国则说成different than，特别是接子句时来得简略，例如“This is different than I expected.（这和我所指望的不同。）”，就比说“This is different from what I expected.”要省字些。在这个形式中的than，一般是把它当作介词看待的。看下面的对话，就可知道英国人对这种语法的感觉了。

“And tell me please，do you find German girls different than English girls？”I blushed. “Do you find German girls . . .” I began to correct her and stopped，realizing just in time that I wasn’t absolutely sure whether one says different from or different to. “Do you find German girls different than English girls？”she repeated，with smiling persistence. I blushed deeper than ever. “Yes，very different，” I said boldly. ——C. Isherwood（“请你告诉我，你觉得德国女孩子跟英国女孩子有些不同吗？”我为之赧颜了。“你觉得德国女孩子……”我开始想来改正她，但又停止了，及时地觉悟到我也不十分确定到底要说different from或是different to才对。“你觉得德国女孩子跟英国女孩子有些不同吗？”她重复地问了，微笑地坚持到底。我比以前脸红得更厉害了。“是呀，很不相同。”我大胆地说了。）

这是一个英国人跟一个德国女孩子的对话，英国人自己也弄不清楚正确的英文说法，所以无从改正她。M. M. Bryant曾就这三种说法，加以合理的解释，使之可以并存不悖。他说用than是比较（comparison），用to是对照（contrast），用from是表示不同（dissimilarity）。

（C）“Grow the biggest carrot of anybody.（培养出比谁都要大的萝卜来。）”，便是grow bigger carrots than anybody else和grow the biggest carrot of all两种说法的混成句。同样地“He is the biggest of any.”也是“He is bigger than any other boy.”和“He is the biggest boy of all.”混合而成的。这种现象在口头英语中是常见的，当然写文章时必须避免。

Those who condemn him seek the basest goal of any people on the face of the earth. ——R. Wright（谴责美国黑人的人，是比这地球上的任何国民所追求的目标都要来得卑鄙。）

（D）I am busy writing原是I am busy和I am writing的混血儿，这样一来使原是现在分词形的动词的一部分变成动名词了。这应看为进行式的加强说法，下例更使人有此感觉。

Constable Plimmer did not reply. He was busy silently hating the milk-man. ——P. G. Wodehouse（卜利默警察没有回答。他正暗自在憎恨那送牛奶的人。）这是说听人在称赞他的情敌——那送牛奶的人，自然不愿回话。

（E）由how come（= why）和what for（= why）混合而成的“how come . . . for？”。如：

How come you looking at me that way for？（你为什么要那样来望着我呀？）

107. 男人说成女人

关于女人被叫作男人（man）的英文表现法，前已有详细的解答。现请问男人是否也可叫作女人（woman）呢？

【解答】莎士比亚说：“Frailty，thy name is woman.”。（弱者，你的名字是女人。）这就是因为女性有一种weak character（懦弱的性格）。如果一个男人，也带有这种女性的性格时，就要被称为woman了。英国有一个批评家曾说过一句这样的话：

Women of both sexes in the Parliament made a big noise against the bill.（议会中两性的女人们都对这法案大嚷大叫地加以反对。）

他这句话真够讽刺了，对那些因循苟且，办事不积极的议员们，哪怕是男性，他也一概括之把他们通叫作women了。这不是把男人叫作女人了吗？此外还可以说：

He is an old woman.（他是一个婆婆妈妈的人。）

所谓婆婆妈妈，正是女人的代表，她不但拖泥带水，而且气量窄狭，胆小如鼠，假如一个男子汉也具有娘儿们的这种性格，他自然就会被称为女子了。

普通说温柔的女性，应说womanly或是feminine，不可说womanish，因为这是含有轻蔑之意的。The Advanced Learner’s Dictionary of Current English上对于womanish解释说，（of a man）like a woman（in feeling，behaviour，etc.），意即说一个男人在感情或行为等上像女人一样。

英文中形容“金发”的一个字，是从法文来的，所以男性应该说blond，女性说blonde，字尾的〔e〕是表女性的，他如Louis为男子名，Louise为女子名。但一般说英文的人，并不一定照法国原来的规矩，常将blond用来指男或女，不分性别，如：

A shapely 25-year-old blond has admitted that she shot and killed a 71-year-old furrier.（一个姿态姣好的二十五岁的金发女郎，承认她开枪打死了一个七十一岁的皮货商人。）

上面是说当作名词用的如当作形容词用时，也是一样。有时反而爱把女性的blonde来形容男性，虽大作家亦所不免，如：

He was a thin man with brown eyes，and a short blonde beard. ——Arnold Bennett（他是一个有褐色眼睛，金黄色短发的瘦子。）

He was a handsome blonde red-face young man. ——Katherine Winsor（他是一个金发红面孔的漂亮青年。）

He was a virgin if ever I saw one. ——J. D. Salinger（他是一个我从未见过的处子。）

以上都是把男人说成女人的。

108. 宗教是民众的鸦片

“Religion is the opium of the people.”这句话的真正意思是什么？最初是谁说的？

【解答】这是Karl Marx的一句名言，是他批评黑格尔的哲学时说的。原文为：

Die Religion ist das Opium des Volkes.（= Religion is the opium of the people.）（宗教是民众的鸦片。）

含义是人们想要逃出受压迫的现实世界，从事幻想，藉宗教来自我陶醉。他既对此加以指摘，所以主张必须从幻想中，即是从宗教中把人解放出来。希腊的哲学家赫拉克利特（Heraclitus）老早就说过：“宗教是一种疾病，一种高贵的疾病。”意大利的法西斯独裁者墨索里尼也说：“宗教是精神病的一种。”但都没有马克思说得干脆利落，比之吸毒，较任何病都厉害。

Aldous Huxley在他著的Brave New World Revisited（《重游辉煌的新世界》）中也提到马克思的这句名言，而且加以反扭过来：

Religion，Karl Marx declared，is the opium of the people. In the Brave New World this situation was reversed. Opium，or rather Soma，was the people’s religion.（卡尔·马克思会说，宗教是民众的鸦片。在这辉煌的新世界中，情形恰恰相反。鸦片或是说得正确一点，苏摩才是民众的宗教。）苏摩原是古代印度用于宗教祭典中的圣酒，据说能给予生命的力量。用大写时指万能的大神。

Ernest Hemingway在他著的短篇小说The Gambler，the Nun，and the Radio（《赌徒、修女和收音机》）中也提到这句话：

“No，”said the thin one. “It is alcohol that mounts to my head. Religion is the opium of the poor.”（“不，”那瘦个子墨西哥人说，“使我头脑发昏的是酒精。宗教是穷人的鸦片。”）

“I thought marijuana was the opium of the poor，”Frazer said.（“我还以为大麻是穷人的鸦片呢。”弗雷泽说。）

在这篇小说快结束之前，对这句名言还有更多的发挥，是借弗雷泽的思索而表现的。

Religion is the opium of the people. He believed that，that dyspeptic little joint-keeper. Yes，and music is the opium of the people. Old mount-to-the-head hadn’t thought of that. And now economics is the opium of the people；along with patriotism the opium of the people in Italy and Germany. What about sexual intercourse；was that an opium of the people？Of some of the people. Of some of the best of the people. But drink was a sovereign opium of the people，oh，an excellent opium . . . Ambition was another，an opium of the people，along with a belief in any new form of government. What you wanted was the minimum of government，always less government，. . . Bread is the opium of the people.（宗教是民众的鸦片。他相信那人的话，那个忧郁的下等私酒店的老板。是呀，音乐是民众的鸦片。那个老是说头脑发昏的家伙，可没想到这点。还有经济学也是民众的鸦片；加上德意两国的爱国主义，也是民众的鸦片。那么，性交呢，莫非也是民众的鸦片？是某些民众的。某些第一流民众的。但是酒确是民众一种最高无上的鸦片。啊，那是一种最优秀的鸦片。……还有野心也是民众的一种鸦片，对任何新形式的政府加以信仰，也是一样。你所要的是管束最少的政府，总是越管得少越好。……面包才是民众的鸦片。）

109. 俗体字句

在英文报上的漫画中及连环图画（comic strips）里面。常见一些拼得古怪的英文，不容易猜出意思，请就此种俗体，举例说明。

【解答】这种俗体字的形成，是有两种源流的。一为由发音而来，一为由省略而来。兹分别举例说明如下：

（1）由发音而来的。

Hoo-zat？= Who is that？（那是谁？）

Ah dunno = I don’t know.（我不知道。）

Lez go = Let’s go.（我们走吧。）

Cabk = Com’back. = Come back.（回来。）

Maybe he can’t cabk in time.（也许他不能准时回来。）

Gimme a dime，will ya？= Give me a dime，will you？（给我一毛钱吧。）

C’meer = Come here.（到这里来。）

Ware-zee？= Where is he？（他在什么地方？）

Suh = Sir.（先生。）

dey’s = they are.（他们是。）

Mebbe = Maybe.（也许。）

Siddup all o’ you = Sit up all of you.（大家坐下。）

Lemme see = Let me see.（让我看看。）

Sez you！= Says you！（你说的。）

Sez I = Says I.（我说。）

T’s matter？= What is the matter？（什么事？）

T’ank you = Thank you.（谢谢你。）

Ool right = All right.（好的。）

Betcha any money I’m right. = I bet you any money I am right.（我一点不错。我确是对的。）

meetcha = meet you.（遇见你。）

Howdy，Jim？= How do you do，Jim？（吉姆，你好吗？）

gonna = going to.（进行。）

I’m gonna do it today.（我今日就去做。）

gotta = got to.（必须。）

I gotta go home now.（我现在非回家不可。）

outa = outta = out of.（外边。）

Get outa here！（出去！）

don’tcha = don’t you.（难道你。）

Don’tcha think I know it？（你不以为我知道吗？）

wanna = want to.（要。）

What’s that？Do you wanna scrap with me？（那是什么？你要和我吵架吗？）

otta’ = oughtta = ought to.（应该。）

Oh，well，tell her she otta’ keep up her strength，she’s got two kids to feed，you know.（啊，好吧，你告诉她要她多保存一点力量，你知道她有两个孩子要喂养。）

Wait’ll = wait until = wait till.（等到。）

Wait’ll I come down，ya Bum！（等我下来，你这穷叫化子！）

zat = that. dat = that. dat’s = that’s.（那个。那个是。）

What . . . why，dat’s an insult，I’m a married man.（什么……哼，那简直是侮辱，我是一个结了婚的人。）

das = this.（这个。）

Das too much for me.（这个我受不了。）

t’git = to get.（获得。）

So’s mine. I’m tryin’ t’git it done right now.（我也如此。我正努力使它马上做好。）

How long been over here？= How long have you been over here？（你来此有多久了？）

（2）由省略而来的。

’course = of course.（当然。）

’cuse me = excuse me.（对不起。）

’bacco = tobacco.（烟草。）

’ere’s = here is.（这里是。）

T’ank you，meeses Jones，’ere’s for you a nice，fresha ice cream cone. （谢谢你，琼斯太太，这里是一支新鲜美味的冰淇淋卷要请你吃的。）

cole = cold.（冷。）

Brrr . . . It’s terrible cole.（呵呵呵……好冷呀。）

kine = kind.（亲切的。）

You know him—that kine old teacher.（我认识他——那个亲切的老教师。）

thou = though. althou = although.（虽则。）

Some New York college，I guess，thou I couldn’t see their banner.（我想是纽约的一个大学，虽则我没有看见他们的旗帜。）

thru = through.（通过。）

brot = brought.（带来了。）

Columbia brot them along，I hear. They rooted for the eleven quite a bit.（我听说是哥伦比亚带他们来的。他们相当地应援了十一号足球队。）

’em = them.（他们。）

Hold’em up！Stick’em up！（把他们拦住！阻止他们上路！）

110. 新闻英语的表现法

一般人以为看英文报，就可以把英文学好，不知对不对？新闻英语和普通英语有无不同之处？

【解答】英语是一种活的语言，自然因时代的递嬗而有所改变。在英语的发展和变迁史上看来，大致可分为三个时期，即古代英语（Old English），中世英语（Middle English）和近世英语（Modern English）。最后一个时期的形容词，英文是“modern”，不免使人有“新的”“现代的”的联想，其实已经有四百年的历史了，就拿生在1564年的Shakespeare来说吧，他所写的Modern English，实在令人费解，和我们今日在书报上所读到的英文，表现法和字义都大不相同。所以我们把present-day English，叫作modern English，总有点不大适合，因此一般人便改称为Current English（当代英语）。这并不是专指二十世纪的英语，莎士比亚称他写的英语，也可叫作Current English，现代人说的Current English，就当然是present-day English了。

在当代英语中，我们又可再分为两类：一是一般用的英语，如文学作品、学术论文所用的英语，另一是专门用以报道时事的英语，即所谓新闻英语（Journalese）。这种新闻英语和普通英语是有些不同的，因为等着要排印出来；绝无余裕来字斟句酌，文章草率，甚至不通，也是难免的，人们瞧不起新闻英语，就是这个原因。

新闻英语当然也有它的特色，那就是语句的简洁化，用最少的字句写出最多的内容，时常创造新字，以新耳目。现拟就新闻英语主语的特征，在文法上和字句上的不同，分别举例说明如下：

一、文法上的特征

（1）多用片语（Phrase），少用子句（Clause）。

这就是避免用动词表现，而多用名词表现。简洁是行文的首要；并不限于新闻英语为然，因为这种简洁的名词表现，在新闻英语中用得特别多，姑作为它的特征最先举出。

No longer are the swarming peoples of Asia and Africa sunken，as for centuries past，in a passive acceptance of their lot. ——New York Times（在亚洲及非洲那群集的各民族，早已不再如过去数世纪的情形一样，陷于被迫接受他们的命运的境况之中了。）

Actual working hours in Japanese industry are growing longer these days although the latest world trend is toward shorter working time. ——The Japan Times（在日本工业上实际的工作时间，近来逐渐加长。虽则最近的世界趋势，正朝向工作时间的减短呢。）

Last week，by way of belated recognition of Goddard’s pioneering gen-ius，the U. S. Government settle a patent infringement claim by his widow and the Guggenheim Foundation. ——Newsweek（上个礼拜，美国政府意在给予戈达德作为先驱者的天才一个迟来的承认，解决了由他的未亡人及古根海姆基金所提出的专利侵害赔偿的要求。）

（2）省去述语动词（尤其是be），以逗号（Comma）代替。

The first question is，of course，what are the needs. The second is what is being done，and the third，what should and could be done. ——N. Y. Times（第一个问题，当然是必要为何。第二个问题是所做为何，而第三个问题是应做者及能做者为何。）

（3）用冒号（Colon）代替述语动词。

From the age of nine he smoked two to five packs of cigarettes a day. His brands：King Bee and Picayunes. ——Time（他从九岁起就吸烟了，一天吸上两包到五包。他常吸的香烟牌子是蜜蜂王和小钱币。）

He has accumulated valuable data for studying his planet’s insides. The hitch：Most of the facts have never been released. ——Newsweek（人类为研究自己所住在的地球内部的情形，贮积了不少贵重的资料。那障碍就是大部分的事实完全没有公开。）

（4）并不严格遵守时态的一致。

Dr. Harry Green testified that the case against smoking has not been proved. He said he smokes，even when he has a chest cold，because it brings on a “productive cough” that ceases the pain in his chest. ——Time（哈利·格林博士宣称吸烟有害的事还未得到明证。他说他自己也是吸烟的，甚至当他胸部伤风时都不停吸，因为吸烟产生咳嗽，可以使他胸部不痛。）

Paris announced that the General will visit Brazil as the guest of Presi-dent Goulart during the latter part of this year. ——N. Y. T.（法国政府发表戴高乐总统在今年的下半年，将作为古拉尔总统的贵宾访问巴西。）

（5）联用三个名词以上的片语。

To keep government career men from straying to higher-paying commer-cial jobs，the Dutch government showers them with new titles and decora-tions to raise their social status. ——Time（为防止有资历的公务员改就高薪水的商行职务，荷兰政府对他们不断颁发新的头衔和勋章，以提高他们的社会地位。）

二、字句上的特征

（1）以简洁的方法表出人物的性格及特色，不用关系代名词的句子，也不用同格修饰语，而只是在人物或人名前，加用某种形容词而已。

A quiet，tubercular physicist named Robert Hutchins Goddard appeared before a board of military-weapons experts. ——Newsweek（一个沉静而患有结核病的物理学家罗伯特·哈金斯·戈达德，在兵器专家委员会上出现了。）普通英文表现法，多半要用关系代名词的句子（A quiet physicist named Goddard，who was tubercular），或用同格修饰（A physicist，a quiet and tubercular man，named Goddard）。

Sandy-haired John B. Swainson，the youthful ex-governor of Michigan，was sick and fretful. ——Newsweek（密歇根州年轻的前州长，浅黄头发的约翰·斯温森，生了病感到焦急。）

（2）不用介词of来表属格，而采用短简的属格符号（apostrophe）。

The International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics’ twelfth general as-sembly. ——Newsweek（测地学及地球物理学国际联合会第十二届大会。）普通英文用of，即The twelfth general assembly of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics。

Idaho’s Democratic Senator Frank Church. ——Time（爱达荷州选出的民主党参议员弗兰克·丘奇。）

（3）“have” members，“have-not” members，etc.，把引用的字句作形容词用，以代替关系代名词的句子。

Its No. 1 goal—to act as a nuclear bank，receiving deposits of fissiona-ble materials and nuclear equipment from “have” members and distributing them among “have-not” members for peaceful projects. ——N. Y. T.（其第一个目标，即是作为一个核子库，执行从“有”的国家接受核子分裂的物质及核子装备的存货，来分配给“没有”的国家，作为和平用途。）

In his book Hazlitt takes to task the “creeping inflation” school which holds that a little inflation is a good thing. ——Newsweek（赫兹利特在他的书中，责备那些以为少许一点慢慢来的通货膨胀不足重视，而且是一件好事的一派。）

They marked off the area with large “Restricted” signs. ——Newsweek（他们用“禁止入内”的大字标记把那区域分划开了。）

（4）由属格符号的活用，而省去许多字句。

Even the Soviet Union recently permitted mention in its press of a 15-year-old boy’s hammerkilling of an old woman in Moscow. ——N. Y. T.（甚至苏联近来都允许其报纸提到莫斯科一个十五岁的少年用铁槌打死一个老妪的事。）

111. written English和spoken English

有人说现代英语虽是文白一致都采用白话，但written English（笔端英语）和spoken English（口头英语）毕竟有些不同，不知是否如此？

【解答】这正好像我们口说的话和手写的白话文，并不完全一致的情形一样，英语当然也有口头和笔端的分别。笔端英语比较上等、整洁，合乎文法，而口头英语，就比较零乱、简略，常不合文法，或由于惯用，而无理由来加以说明的。先看下面的例子：

（a）It is I.

（b）It is me.

（a）Whom do you want？

（b）Who do you want？

（a）The bell is ringing.

（b）There goes the bell.

（a）You must accord me credence when I state to you that I have found it impossible to endure the heavy burden off responsibility . . . without the assistance and co-operation of the lady upon whom I have be-stowed my affection.

（b）You must believe me when I tell you that I have found it impossible to carry the heavy burden of responsibility . . . without the help and support of the woman I love.

以上（a）是笔端英语。（b）是口头英语，其中有的不合文法，有的不合逻辑，但这一类的说法，也许就是口头英语的特征了。现再就口语和笔端英语不同的特征分别例解如下。

一、力求平易的表现

平易确是口语的特色，例加说According to the reports of newspapers或It is stated in newspapers，绝不算错，不过在说话时，只说I see by the papers或The papers say就行了。

1. 她盛装着。

She is in her stately regalia.（笔端）

She is（或 is dressed）in her best.（口头）

2. 那我不曾知道。

I was not aware of that fact.（笔端）

I didn’t know that.（口头）

3. 他拒绝了。

He refused（或rejected it）.（笔端）

He said no（或turned it down）.（口头）

4. 他谴责了我。

He reproached me.（笔端）

He scolded me（或said it wasn’t nice）.（口头）

5. 他很孝顺。

He is dutiful to his parents.（笔端）

He is good to his parents.（口头）

二、颠倒字句的次序

1. But who he is，I don’t know.（但是他是谁，我不知道。）

2. Very generous of her，I must say.（她真是很慷慨呀。）

3. And good stuff it is.（那是好东西。）

4. I know the boy well. Wonderful to his mother，they tell me.（那个男孩子我很知道。据说他对母亲很孝顺。）

5. Oh，you’ll like the people Junius did send，I’m sure.（啊，琼尼亚斯送来的人，你一定会喜欢的。）

6. The people Junius did send，did you say？（你是说琼尼亚斯送来的人吗？）

7. Is Miss Bridget at home，do you know？（你知道布小姐在不在家？）

8. Will he play well tonight，do you think？（你觉得他今晚会演奏得很好吗？）

9. Don’t act so outraged，would you mind？（请你不要那样大发脾气吧。）

以上这些颠倒的句子，都是从电影对白中取来的。口语的这样说法，也不是漫无标准的，只有某些字句才可颠倒，并不是任何句子都可以的，大凡You know、I think、if you please、I tell you、believe me、I assure you、after all等等，是可以这样用的。

三、单字的缩短

在口头英语中许多助动词或动词等，都要缩短来说，书上分明写的I have，念起来便成为I’ve了。说I do not know，似乎太书卷气，口语只说I don’t know；而You will come变成 you’ll come。这个缩短的〔’ll〕并不一定是will，例如wait’ll就是wait till的缩短。又his、is、us三个字，都可缩成〔’s〕，而had、should、would、could都可缩成〔’d〕，现且看电影对白中的例：

1. If I’d met in ordinary times，in an ordinary way，we’d just be telling each other what schools we went to.（如果我们是在平常的时候，以平常的方式相逢的话，我们就会互相告知我们从前各人进的是什么学校吧。）

2. There’d be nothing I could do about it，anyway.（总之，我似乎无能为力。）

3. Doctor，if you’ll tell me the amount of your fee，I’ll leave a check with your secretary.（医生，如果你能把诊费告诉我的话，我就会开张支票放在你的秘书那里。）

4. Wait’ll you hear where it is.（你等一下以便问明那在什么地方。）

5. I don’t want any of your impudence. I’m telling you，you’ve got to stop it.（你不要说那种厚颜无耻的话，我老实告诉你，你非把它停止不可。）

6. Weren’t you scared here in the dark by yourself？（你一个人躲在这黑地方不怕吗？）

7. Abigail—no one’s called me that since—（亚庇格尔——自从那以来，没有谁这样叫过我——）

8. Maybe that’s what’s the matter with you.（也许那就是你不对的地方。）

9. Let’s say Mr. Grogan，over there，was sent a birthday greeting. Let’s see how you’d do it.（比方说，那边的格罗冈先生打了生日的贺电来。你又预备怎样呢？不妨做来试试看。）

下面几点是值得注意的。

（1）问句缩短，答句也缩短；问句不缩短，答句也不缩短，例如：

What’s wrong with Jack？—He’s cold.

Is he really？—Yes，he is.

（2）可缩短的只有否定的答案，肯定的答案便不缩短，例如：

Hey，will you wait a minute？—No，I won’t.

We’re not afraid. —Well，I am.

（3）把aren’t当作am not的缩短形，是英国的俗语，所以在《魂断蓝桥》那部以英国为背景的片子中，就有这样的话：

Aren’t I right？（不是我说的那样吗？）

（4）在英国没有受教育的人中间，不但把ain’t作为am not、are not的缩短形，而且作为is not、has not、have not缩短形来用。如“Ain’t he terrific！（他真可怕呀。）”“I ain’t seen him tonight.（我今晚没见到他。）”。但这种下等话，我们决不可学。

四、字句的省略

Can’t tell you how much we appreciate it.（感激之忱，无以言宣。）（前略I）

Seems strange not to discuss it with you.（没有跟你谈论一下，好像觉得奇怪似的。）（前略it）

Anything else I can do for you？（还有什么要我替你做的吗？）（前略is there）

Looking for your friends？（你是在找你的朋友吗？）（前略are you）

Well，there were one or two thing rather surprised me.（是呀，有一两件事使我吃惊了。）（略去关系代名词）

I saw a play last week，had a character in it reminded me of Jonathan.（上个礼拜我看了一出戏，戏中有一个角色，使我想起乔纳珊来。）（略去关系代名词）

You’ve seen so much corruption you’re cynical.（你见过太多的腐败贪污的情形，所以你变得愤世嫉俗了。）（略去that）

That’s why you are so healthy.（那就是你为什么这样健康的原因。）（why前略去the reason）

I’ll come see you later.（回头见。）（略and）

There is nobody home.（无人在家。）（略at）

It’s more interesting that way.（那样更有趣）（略in）

All we can do is wait.（我们只有等待。）（略to）

Want to go for a ride？（想坐车出去玩玩吗？）——Very much.（很想去。）（略去I want to go for a ride）

112. O Diamond！Diamond！Thou little knowest the mischief done！

英国文学家毛姆（Maugham）写的短篇小说Neil Macadam中，描写婆罗洲的博物院，为观察昆虫的生态，作实验的重要材料的幼虫，被一只脱链逃走的长臂猿完全打翻了。年轻的助手急得哭起来，年长的主任却抱住那长臂猿说：“Diamond，Diamond，you little know the damage you have done.”，为什么要突然把那闯祸的动物，称为宝贵的金刚钻呢？

【解答】这是有来历的，那长臂猿与Diamond本毫无关系，不过在闯祸的情形上，却有一脉相通之处。这个Diamond并不是金刚钻，而是一条狗的名字。它的主人是鼎鼎大名的牛顿（Isaac Newton，1642—1727）。见苹果落地而发现地心引力的正是他。这是每个小学生都知道的事。他是英国杰出的数学家和物理学家，在人类的科学研究上，留下了巨大的足迹。他曾任英国皇家学会（Royal Society）的会长，达二十五年之久，对科学界的贡献很大。他对研究的专心致志，真是达到废寝忘餐的地步。有一天，一个朋友来和他一同吃饭，菜已上桌，而牛顿还没有从他的书房出来。他的朋友素知牛顿的习性，就不等他，而自己先动手吃了。把一碟鸡吃完，只剩下一碟鸡骨头，他随手把那银制的盖子盖好，自个儿走了。几点钟之后，牛顿才从书房出来，感觉得很饿，便坐下来用餐。刚好他坐在他朋友坐过的位子上，预备去吃，等他把银盖子揭开一看，碟子里面只剩下一堆鸡骨头，他一时不免吃惊。可是当他回头看了一下壁上的时钟，察觉到已过他通常用餐的时候很久了。自言自语道：“我以为我还没有吃饭，原来我早就吃过了！”于是起身离开餐桌，再回到书房工作去了。

牛顿养得有一条狗，取名叫Diamond，很是宠爱。有天晚上，牛顿因事走出他的书房去了，将他长年研究的结果所构成的论文摆在书桌上，没有把它收起来。等他转来一看，那论文的原稿早已化为灰烬，因为当他不在时，Diamond跳到他的书桌上去，将燃着的蜡烛弄倒，引起火来，把桌上的纸张都烧毁了。牛顿见此情形，想到多年苦心的劳作付之一炬，内心的伤痛可想而知，然而他还是抑制住悲痛的心情，抱起他的爱犬，对它说道：

O Diamond！Diamond！Thou little knowest the mischief done！（啊，岱曼德！岱曼德！你不晓得你闯了好大的祸呀！）

问题中说的Maugham小说中，那主任对长臂猿说的话，叫它作Dia-mond，正是模仿牛顿的口吻说的。这便是Diamond一名的来历。

附带地说一句，当你游历英国时，也许会到林肯县（Lincolnshire）的格兰桑（Grantham）附近牛顿出世的屋子去看看，那时，你便可看到诗人蒲柏（A. Pope，1688—1744）有名的诗句：

Nature and Nature’s laws lay hid in night：

God said，Let Newton be！and all was light.

（大自然和大自然的法则，藏在夜暗之中：

上帝说，让牛顿出现吧，于是一切都光亮了。）

这是刻在大理石上的名言隽语（Epigrams），为牛顿故居增色不少。此诗是套用《圣经·创世记》（1：3）的名句：“And God said，Let there be light：and there was light.”。（上帝说，要有光，就有了光。）

113. 一句英文两种含义

听说英文不如法文的明确，有些英文句子，是可以有两种不同的含义的，此种说法对不对？

【解答】有些英文句，即令你对文字的含义，已经彻底了解，仍然不能确定它的意思的时候也是有的。这是因为英文原是一种含糊的语言（ambig-uous language），我们要真正了解其含义，单靠语言的知识是不够的，必须加以理智的判断，才能获得结论。这种句子的含义虽然不在字句以外，但需要译者运用理智，加以抉择，如果轻率地就字面的某一种含义译出，可能会完全译错的。例如：

They were entertaining women.

一句英文，如果把were entertaining看成一个进行式动词的话，意为“他们在款待女客”；如果把句中的entertaining women看成一个有修饰语的名词时，意为“她们是女招待”。再看：

His object is not to eat.

一句，如果我们把否定字的not看作是修饰动词is时，意为“他的目的不在吃饭”，即是“志不在温饱”；如果把否定字的not看作是修饰后面的不定词时，意为“他的目的在不吃饭”，即是“绝食”。还有：

The man turned out an impostor.

如果把turn out看作他动词时，意为“他赶走了一个骗子”；如果把turn out看作自动词时，意为“他毕竟是一个骗子”。

再看下面这句话：

Look out！There’s the train coming.

如果你不了解look out在此作“当心”解的话，而照字面的意思，认为是“看外面”，而把头伸出到火车的窗外去看，你可能就要遭到危险了。

下面这些句子，都可能有两种解释：

Not much music entertained us.

（a）为招待我们而演奏的音乐不多。

（b）为使我们娱乐，用不着太多的音乐。

Not many books filled the shelves.

（a）那些书架上没有几本书。

（b）要放满那些书架不用太多的书。

He lives very near.

（a）他就住在附近。

（b）他生活贫苦。

I found him out.

（a）我找出他来了。

（b）我发现他不在家。

114. 句否定和字否定

英文的否定副词not，可以用来否定一个文句，也可以用来否定一个单字，请就二者的用法，举例说明一下。

【解答】英文的句否定（Sentence-negation）和字否定（Word-negation），是有不同的用法和意义的。凡否定主语和动词的关系的，就是句否定，至于否定某特定的字（有时为片语或子句）的，就是字否定。句否定的构造是将not放在动词之后（is not，isn’t），或助动词之后（do not，don’t）。字否定的构造则是将not置于所要否定的那个字的靠近的前面，如not happy或no fool等，有时在那字的本身加上否定的前缀，如unhappy 等。

Many of us didn’t want the war.（我们多数人都不要战争。）句否定。

Not many of us wanted the war.（我们没有多少人要战争。）字否定。

现在我们再来比较一下下面这三种形式：

1. He isn’t a liar.

2. He’s not a liar.

3. He is no liar.

第一句中的否定是修饰全句的，它要跟它前面的动词或助动词结合，而成为isn’t或don’t，这是没有加重语气的说法。但作为修饰某一单字的否定副词，如第二个例句中的not，便是加重语气的说法。在口语中把He is not，说成He’s not，因而第一句和第二句，含义是有些不同的。第一句只是说他不是一个撒谎者，而第二句则极力否定他不撒谎，意思是说他不但不撒谎，而且非常诚实。第三句和第二句的意思一样，在no后的名词，被no完全否决，甚至表示相反的意思。如no fool = very clever。

He is no coward.（他不但不胆怯，而且是一个勇敢的人。）

It’s no joke.（这不是儿戏，而是重要的事。）

It’s no distance from here.（就是附近。）

在那名词前加有形容词时，就是极力否决那形容词的意思，进而表示相反的意思，如：

He is no ordinary scholar.（他绝不是普通的学者。/他是一个非凡的学者。）

He found no small delight in their society.（他和他们交际感到极为愉快。）

即使在否定疑问句中not也是置于动词或助动词的后面的，如平叙句说的“John is not going to the concert.（约翰不去听音乐会。）”改为疑问句时，英美人不说“Is not John going to the concert？”，而要说“Isn’t John going to the concert？”。如果要改为字否定，则为“Is John not going to the concert？”。

115. Here you are

英文惯用语句中有“Here you are.”一句说法，照字面的意思应为“你在这儿”，但辞典上却解释为“你所要的东西在这里了”（见《最新实用英汉辞典》947页）。不晓得这个意思是怎样来的？

【解答】这句话辞典上只有解释，都没有说明来源，如Wyld的Univer-sal English Dictionary的说明是：

Here you are，（colloq.）this is what you want.

OED副词here第14项上的说明便是：

Here we（you）are. Here is what we（you）want. colloq.

唯有Hornby的A Guide to Patterns and Usage in English一书中，在说明Here（There）×Subject×Verb一个句型时，附带地提到了一下，对我们却有很大的帮助。他说：

The exclamation “Here you are！” may mean，according to context，ei-ther “you are here，you’ve arrived”，or “Here is what you need，what you were asking for，etc.”（感叹句“Here you are！”依照前后文的关系，可以解释为“你在此地，你已到达”，也可解释为“这就是你所要的东西，你所寻觅的东西”等等。）

这个基本的意思，你在此地，即你已经到达此地，也就是到了你所要到的地方。这样一来，所谓这就是你所要到的地方，不就是你所要的东西吗？演变出这样一个意思也是很合理的。

We walked down the corridor. The carpet was worn. There were many doors. The manager stopped and unlocked a door and opened it. “Here you are. A lovely room.”——Hemingway：A Farewell to Arms（我们走下走廊去了。地毯已破损。那儿有许多门。经理停下来，用钥匙开锁，打开了一张门。“这就是你要的。一间好房间呀。”）

“I’m very sorry，Moddom and Mister，”he said politely，“but we close at Seven. Rules，you know. May I show you the Way Out？” . . . Just then the Waiter stopped in front of them，beside a large white doorway that looked as though it were made of thick chalk lines.“Here you are！”he said. “This is the Way Out.”——Travers：Mary Poppins（“两位男女贵客，”他很客气地说，“真对不起，我们七点打烊。这是规矩，没有办法。我可以带两位到出口的地方去吗？”……就在那时候侍者在他们前面停下来了，旁边便是一个白色的大出入口，那看上去好像是用许多粗的白垩线条构成的一样。“到了！”他说。“这就是出口。”）

They drove in silence till they reached the hotel. It was late now and the door was shut. Rowley made no attempt to get out. “Here we are，”said Mary. ——Maugham：Up at the Villa（他们两个一言不发地把车子直开到那旅馆的门口了。时已夜深，而旅馆的门已关闭了。罗列简直没有打算要下车的样子。“我们到了。”玛利说。）

“No，this is February，”Jerralds said. “Now where the devil did I put the January slips？Let me think，”and again the finger touched his temple，hesitated there until the light of inspiration crossed his bearded face，and then zoomed like a Stuka to a new target. He opened the second carton and pulled out a sheaf of sales slips. “Here we are，” he said. ——McBain：Give the Boys a Great Big Hand（“不是，这是二月份的。”詹拉尔兹说。“一月份的传票我到底把它放到哪里去了呀？让我想想看。”他又把指头放在太阳穴上，犹豫不决，直到灵感之光闪过他那满是胡须的面孔时，他才好像一架俯冲的轰炸机轰向一个新的目标去。他打开了第二个纸盒子，抽出一束售货的传票来。“在这里呀。”他说。）

不用here，而代之以there，也是可以的。Hornby在上面引用文的下边还说：

In the same way the exclamation “There you are！” may mean，“There is what you need，what you were asking for，etc.”（同样地，那感叹句“There you are！”可以解释为“那就是你所要的东西，你所寻觅的东西等等”。）

这样的例子也是常有的。

The doctor took out three pound notes and gave them to the station-master. “There you are，Davies！”he said. ——Waugh：Decline and Fall（博士取出三张一英镑的钞票，交给站长说：“戴维斯，这个请收下吧。”）

Ⅺ 中英不同的表现法

116. “贤内助”“守活寡”的英译

中国对于女人有“贤内助”的称呼，与丈夫分居时有“守活寡”的说法，不知这两种语词，英文应如何表达？

【解答】在中国说别人有一位好太太（a good wife），相夫教子，治家井井有条，堪称贤妻德配（a worthy wife），就当面恭维他有一位贤内助。这典故出在《宋史》的《孟后传》上：“宣仁太后语帝曰，得贤内助非细事也。”英文没有适合的说法，勉强要找，只有better half略近，而且这个better的意思并不是“好”或“贤”，而是“大”呢。来源是出在莎士比亚。他写的十四行诗（Sonnet）第三十九首，一开头便说：

O，how thy worth with manners may I sing，

When thou art all the better part of me？

啊，你是我的较佳一半的全部，

我怎能适当的赞美你呢？

——梁实秋译

我不懂梁先生为什么要译为“较佳一半的全部”，他可能是心目中先有了一个better half的概念，才能译出“较佳一半”来的。但既是一半，为什么又叫“全部”呢？在平常人的逻辑中，只有全部的一半，没有一半的全部。照我看莎翁的诗句应该是“啊，我要怎样有礼貌地来歌颂你的德行呢，当你确实是我的较大的部分时？”的意思。

一对理想的夫妇，必然是同心同德，两位一体的，莎翁用了part一字，即part of a whole之意，夫也好，妻也好，都不是单独的一个人，不过只是半个人而已。莎翁说的better part是指合为一体的夫妇，妇的部分较夫的部分为大，这种比重的不同，正表示对妻子的重视。虽则中年以后的太太们，都比丈夫要肥胖得多，但莎翁并不是指体重说的，他所谓较大的部分，实指精神上的分量呢。

我们说的“贤内助”是对她那丈夫说的，而英文的better half（即莎翁的better part的变形）原是夫妻间互相可用的，但现在口语的用法，则变成夫对妻专用的代名词了，如my better half，我为什么说这个better不是“较佳”而是“较大”呢？因为one’s better part = one’s more than half。再看the better part of也是大半的意思，例如：

I waited the better part of an hour（= the greater part of an hour）.（我等了大半点钟。）

He spends the better part of his earnings in eating and drinking.（他把他所得的大部分花在饮食上面。）

I think it is now better than five-and-twenty years ago. ——Lamb（我想那有二十五年以上了。）

有时可用最上级的best，意思也是一样，如：

The best part of the land and its natural resources was the monopoly of a small class of landlords. ——A. Huxley（土地和天然资源的大部分，为少数地主阶级所独占了。）

这里说的the best part也不是说“最好的部分”，而是说“最大的部分”。即是说不是表质，而是表量的，best实有largest的意思。不过best也好，better也好，有这种含义的，是在与part连用的时候。

这个better half的反义词是worse half，是太太们用来指丈夫的，可以说是“戏称”吧。如：

It would be a nice amusement for some of these long evenings，and the preparations would serve to occupy our time，whilst our worse halves are out shooting. ——Florence Marryat（对这些漫长的下午，这是很好的娱乐，因为它要花上很多的准备工夫。那时我们的丈夫们都出去打猎了。）

Joey Adam写的笑话书（Joke Book）上说：

Would you say your wife is your bitter half？（你说你的老婆是痛苦的一半吗？）

把better half，改说成bitter half实在太妙了。好丈夫遇到悍妇，只有苦在心头的呢。

至于说“守活寡”，英文似可译为a grass widow，这多半是指一些英国人到印度去谋生，而把妻子留下在家乡，多年不理睬，使她们穷苦无依，成为怨妇。为什么说“草”呢，据说是指她们穷得只好睡在草床上（a woman in a bed of grass or straw），例：

A grass widow finds herself in need of consolation for the cruel absence of her liege lord . ——The Mistletoe Bough（一个守活寡的人是觉得需要有人给以安慰的，因为她的丈夫残忍地抛下了她。）

此字又有“被人遗弃的情妇”之意，或是如我们现在在报上常见到的“未出嫁的妈妈”，但那孩子的父亲，却鸿飞冥冥，不知道到哪里去了。

117. “长舌妇”的英译

中国话有“长舌妇”一个名称，意思非仅指多言，而在说张家长李家短的当儿，就不免有搬弄是非的嫌疑。不知英文应该如何译法？

【解答】中文单说“长舌”，似乎并没有什么不好的意思，如刘岩夫与段校理书上说的，“又欲掉长舌于公卿间”，但所谓“长舌妇”一辞，就不是什么美称，而是一种贬辞了，因为这辞的出典不好的缘故。在《诗经·大雅·瞻卬》上说：“妇有长舌，维厉之阶，乱匪降自天，生自妇人。”既说女人好说话，成为祸根，这至少有搬弄是非的嫌疑（carry tales；gossip；make mischief），进而有造谣中伤，背后诽谤的可能（backbite）。“长舌”英文也有这种表现法，所以“长舌妇”似可直译为long-tongued woman（这个long-tongued = talkative）。不过多言总不是好事，记得从前有一个英国人立下一份遗嘱，把全部财产遗给他的太太，但附得有一个条件，每年在她丈夫的忌日，她必得到街上去大声地说三遍：

If my tongue had been shorter，my husband’s life might be longer.（我的舌头要短些的话，我丈夫的寿命也许就会长些。）

这样才可以从监护人手里领取一部分遗产。她当然算得一位长舌妇，虽则她并不一定要去搬弄别人的是非，私下诋毁别人，然而她在丈夫跟前日夜不断地喋喋不休（gab）或是怨言百出（murmur），也是使人吃不消的。如云：

The old crone gabbed all day.（这老太婆整日喋喋不休。）

我们生有两只耳朵一张口，造物者原是要我们多听少说的，而人们不爱听，偏爱说，不但“多言必失”，而且说得多不免变成废话。

The tongues are wagging.（人言喋喋不休。）

结果是talk a lot of nonsense（废话连篇），或babble about trifles（空谈些琐碎的事情），或talk a person’s head off（谈得使人讨厌）。这种人至少可称为一个chatterbox（饶舌者）。只要一个人：

He never talks about others behind their backs.（不在背后说人坏话。）

我们就可以说他是多言的（talkative，loquacious），有时还可以恭维他“口若悬河”（speak glibly，having a glib tongue），十分健谈（voluble），或“辩才无碍”（have a fluent tongue，the gift of eloquence），只要他不到与人争辩（wrangle）的程度就好了。如果刘姥姥从大观园出来，我们听她谈起那些开眼界的事（eye-opener），“She prattled of her visit to Ta Kwan Yuan.”倒也是有趣的。

118. “显亲扬名”的英译

曾子说的“显亲扬名”有人译作to bring glory to one’s relatives and to spread one’s good name，又有人译成glorifying relations and spreading fame，不知译得对否？又，relatives和relations二字在意义上有何不同？

【解答】上面两种译法，可说是错误的，至少是不正确的。因为《孝经》上说的显亲的亲字，是限定指父母，不包含其他亲属在内，《三字经》上不是解释得很明白吗？“扬名声，显父母。”所以这个亲字，必须译成parents才对。Mathew’s Chinese-English Dictionary上就把它译成“to bring glory to one’s parents”。

至于relation和relative二字通常都是当作亲戚解的，即relationship by blood or marriage，而relative比relation要更疏远些，所以“远亲”英文就说a distant relative。据Webster’s New World Dictionary上记：relative = a person connected by blood or marriage（亲戚）。relation = a person connected with another or others by blood or marriage（亲戚）；member of the same family（家人）。它特意加上“家人”一个解释，表示直系亲属。

英文说的亲戚和我们中国人的观念有些不同，他们只有父系和母系两方面的人才是亲戚，如我们的所谓瓜葛亲，他们是不认为亲戚的。例如你的姊夫（brother-in-law）当然是你的亲戚，可是你那位姊夫的姊夫，就不算是你的亲戚（relative）了。作亲戚或亲属解的relative和relation一般是可以换用的，但下列三句中的relation则不能换成为relative字样：

Is he any relation to you？（他是你的亲戚吗？）

What relation is he to you？（他和你是什么亲戚？）

He is no relation（to me）.（他不是我的亲戚。）

最后一句可作“他和我同姓不同宗”解。注意句中要用“no”和“to me”，如把“no”改说“not”时则后面的“to me”也得改说“of mine”才行，全句变成“He is not a relation of mine.”，意思还是一样：“他不是我的亲戚。”又如“He’s a near relation of mine.（他是我的近亲。）”。

我们说到relative或relation，就想到我们家人以外的亲戚，其实英文这字是包括父母子女，祖孙伯叔，侄儿侄女在内的。说his relations或his relatives，通常指“他的家属”。说母子关系（the relation between mother and child），父子关系（the relation of father to son），师生关系（the relation between them as teacher and pupil）等时要用单数的relation，意思是 connexion；what there is between one thing，person，idea，etc. and another or others。所以“天气与收成的关系”就是the relation between weather and the crops，至于有dealings；affairs；what one person，group，country，etc.，has to do with another之意时则通常用复数的relations，例如：

The relations between father and son are of the best kind.（父子之间的关系是最好的。）

We have very pleasant relations with the firm.（我们和那商店的关系极好。）

The article tells the world the friendly relations between my country and yours.（那篇文章向世界说明我国与贵国间的友善关系。）

他如public relations（公共关系），human relations problems（人事关系问题）等也是要用复数的。

I have broken off all relations with that fellow.（我跟那人已经断绝了一切关系。）

119. “乌鹊”的英译

魏武帝作的《短歌行》，“月明星稀，乌鹊南飞，绕树三匝，无枝可依”。苏东坡撰《赤壁赋》，又引用了首二句。其中说的乌鹊，到底是指什么鸟？英文应怎样翻译才对？

【解答】英国名汉学家Herbert H. Giles翻译《赤壁赋》（An Excursion Below the Red Wall）时，把这两句诗译成：

The stars are few，the moon is bright.

The raven southward wings his flight.

台湾师范大学教授李杏村译《赤壁赋》（An Excursion to the Scorched Cliff）时则译成：

When the stars are few

And the moon shines brightly，

Magpies and ravens are winging their way

Southward . . .

前者将“乌鹊”译为“乌鸦”，后者译为“乌鸦”和“喜鹊”，可以说两人都译错了。Giles把“喜鹊”误为“乌鸦”，弄成另外一种鸟，可谓大错特错。李杏村分明译对了，但他不该画蛇添足，又加一个“乌鸦”上去，于是原只一种鸟的，平空变成两种鸟了。他未注意这个“乌鹊”的“乌”字是一个形容词，因为鹊本是乌族，鹊的羽毛也是黑的，而带青紫色的光泽。所谓“乌鸦”也可细分为两种，纯黑而哺者谓之乌，小而腹下白，不反哺者谓之鸦（《小尔雅·广鸟》）。乌鸦既是另外的鸟，不在我们讨论之列。我们要谈的是鹊。何以见得“乌鹊”一定是指“鹊”，而不是指“乌”呢？《庄子》上说：“至德之世，其禽兽可系羁而游，乌鹊之巢，可攀援而窥。”

又《荀子》上说：“乌鹊之巢，可俯而窥也。”

这便可知乌鹊是一种鸟，因为绝不会有两种鸟同巢的。虽则《晋书》上有“乌鹊争巢，鹊为乌杀”的话（《凉后主传》），也没有同巢而居的事。至于《隋书》上说的“乌鹊通巢” 也和“犬豕同乳”一样只是一种比喻，极言郭隽一家的和睦，不能相容的动物，都能平和相处。

《淮南子》的《人间训》上说：“夫鹊先识岁之多风也，去高木而巢扶枝，大人过之则探鷇，婴儿过之则挑其卵，知备远难，而忘近患，故秦之设备也，乌鹊之智也。”这也看得出来是指一种鸟说的。

我们既已确定诗中说的“乌鹊”即指鹊而言，英文应译作magpie，不可译作raven。现在我们不妨来研究一下中国的鹊和英文的magpie两者的异同何在。

据ALD上说，magpie = noisy black-and-white bird which is attracted by，and often takes away，small，bright objects（吵闹的黑间白羽毛的鸟，常被鲜艳物件所吸引，而把它衔去）。

《章氏新世界美语辞典》上说，any of a number of birds of the crow family，related to the jays and characterized by black-and-white coloring，a long，tapering tail，and a habit of noisy chattering（乌族的许多鸟中之一，与樫鸟同类，特色为羽毛黑中间白，有逐渐尖细的长尾巴，有噪闹的习惯）。

《辞海》上说，鹊尾长六七寸，与身相等。背黑有紫绿色光泽。肩腹及翼下羽皆白色。嘴脚皆黑。俗以其鸣声为吉祥，故称喜鹊。

《禽经》上说：“灵鹊兆喜。”注云：鹊噪则喜生。所以中国诗词中都提到这点，如杜甫诗：“浪传乌鹊喜。”黄庭坚诗：“慈母每占乌鹊喜。”宋之问诗：“破颜看鹊喜。”但英文的magpie不但不报喜，而且要报凶，一般认为此鸟为不吉的征兆，而讨厌它。如诗人John Clare说：

And magpies that chattered，no omen so black. ——The Village Min-strel（鹊噪为最坏的兆头。）

120. 英国人说的east wind不能直译

英国人说的east wind，我们把它译成中文的“东风”应当是很正确的。为什么又有人说这样翻译是不妥当的呢？

【解答】east wind译成“东风”，照字面上看来是再正确也没有了。任何英汉辞典上，east 也只有“东”一个译法，绝不能翻成别的字。但翻译是不能单看字面的，还有许多其他的因素都不得不注意。其中之一，就是风土（气候与土宜）。从前齐国的晏子至楚，楚王故意要侮辱他，所以叫人缚一个强盗来告诉他说，那是齐国人。晏子便回答说：“婴闻之，橘生淮南则为橘，生于淮北则为枳，果徒相似，其实味不同，所以然者何？水土异也。今民生长于齐不盗，入楚则盗，得毋楚之水土，使民善盗邪？”所谓橘化为枳，是说同一物因地域不同也要变成两样的。同是一种“东风”，因东西方位不同，自然也可能变质呢。

东方人说的东风，是温暖的，能使草木萌芽，仿佛和春风相似。唐德宗的诗有“东风变梅柳，万汇生春光”的句子，便可证明。明朝的蓝茂也说：“东风破早梅，向暖一枝开，冰雪无人见，春从天上来。”可见东风和春天，是有连带关系的。美国加州大学教授Henry Hart把《西厢记》中的“闲愁万种，无语怨东风”译为：

I am saddened by a myriad petty woes

And，though I speak not，

I am angry

At the breezes from the east.

他自己也觉得把“怨东风”直译出来，西洋人是不会了解其中含义的，所以他又赶忙加上注译说：“The east wind is symbolic of spring，with its urge to love and mating.”。（东风是春天的象征，有促进爱情及婚媾的作用。）

英国的east wind，是从欧洲大陆北部吹来的寒冷的风，和我国的西风，乃至北风相似。如果我们不够大胆地把这个east wind译作字面相反的“西风”的话，也不妨译作“朔风”，以避免字面的矛盾，实为最恰当的译法。英国文人笔下在east wind前所用的形容词，都是极其凛冽的，如：

a keen east wind（James Joyce）

biting east winds（Samuel Butler）

a piercing east wind（Kirkup）

等等，大有寒风刺骨的味道。再看下面的文句：

A sort of spiritual east wind was at that time blowing；neither Butler nor Gray could flower. ——Matthew Arnold（那时刮着一种精神上的东风，所以诗人文士如巴特勒和格雷，都不能有生花之笔出现。）

How many winter days have I seen him，standing bluenosed in the snow and east wind！——Charles Dickens（在许多的冬日我都看见他，鼻子冻得发紫，站在飞雪和东风之中！）

It whistled just over my cap like an east wind. ——Conan Doyle（那就在我的帽子上头像东风一样地呼啸而过。）

现在我们再来看看英国的west wind吧。那正等于我国的东风或是春风，是极为温暖而受人欢迎的和风，英国1967年逝世的桂冠诗人John Masefield写有一首《西风歌》（The West Wind），怀念他的故乡Herefordshire，诗是这样的：

It’s a warm wind，the west wind，fun of birds’cries；

I never hear the west wind but tears are in my eyes，

For it comes from the west lands，the old brown hills，

And April’s in the west wind，and daffodils.

（那是一种温暖的风，西风吹时，万鸟争鸣；

一听西风起，我眼眶中泪盈盈，

因为它是来自西土，那褐色的故山边，

春天就在西风中到来，还有水仙。）

熊式一翻译的《西厢记》中有名句：

碧云天，黄叶地，西风紧，塞雁南飞，

晓来谁染霜林醉，尽是离人泪。

Grey are the clouds in the sky and faded are the leaves on the ground，

Bitter is the west wind as the wild geese fly from the north to the south.

How is it that in the morning the white-frosted trees are dyed as red as a wine flushed face？

It must have been caused by the tears of those who are about to depart.

译者不够大胆，他不敢离开字面的意思，所以竟把中国肃杀的西风，译成英国温和的west wind，英国的读者是无法会得原意的。可惜我去伦敦时，他译的《西厢记》业已杀青；否则我便会劝他用east wind，来译这儿的“西风”的，以便跟前面的形容词bitter配合。如果他要保留对原文的忠实，至少也得为英国的读者加上一个注释，说这是大陆的西风，如英诗人Shelley在欧洲大陆的翡冷翠时所遇到的那种秋天的凛烈的西风一样。

121. 杜诗《春望》英译之误

杜甫《春望》诗中有一联说“感时花溅泪，恨别鸟惊心”，牛津大学教授David Hawkes在1967年出版的A Little Primer of Tu Fu一书中译成“The flowers shed tears of grief for the troubled times，and the birds seem startled，as if with the anguish of separation.”是否正确？

【解答】译者把“花”“鸟”，看作主语（据他说明“In this couplet the subjects〔“flowers”，“birds”〕 come in the third place in the line.”）是最大的错误。W. J. B. Fletcher译此诗时也犯了同样的毛病，他译的是这样的：

In grief for the times，a tear the flower stains.

In woe for such parting，the birds fly from thence.

第一句他说a tear stains the flower以tear为主语，第二句说the birds fly也是以birds为主语，所以和问题中所举出的Hawkes一样，他们都不了解杜甫这两句诗的意思，于是只好照字面翻译了。其实这两句诗的原意是“想起时事，连见了好花也叫人掉泪；和家里人隔离很久，听到鸟声，也叫人心神不安”（见“古典文学普及读物”《唐诗一百首》第三十五页），这里说的“见了”和“听到”，当然前面省掉主语的“我”，即诗人自己。花鸟在平时可以娱目赏心，但在忧乱伤春的时候，不免见花开而洒泪，闻鸟鸣而惊心了。

中文多省略句子的主语，有字数限制的诗句，尤其是这样的，译成英文时则非将主语一一补入不可，如Bunner译司徒曙《贼平后送人北归》诗中的“世乱同南去，时清独北还，他乡生白发，旧国见青山”时，每句都补上一个主语：

In dangerous times we two came south；

Now you go north in safety，without me.

But remember my head growing white among strangers.

When you look on the blue of the mountains of home.

以上四个除my head改成our head可能要好些外，其补上的主语都很恰当。但是译者在下面一联中忘记补入主语就出了毛病：

The moon goes down behind a ruined fort，

Leaving star-clusters above an old gate.

原诗为“晓月过残垒，繁星宿故关”，译者说The moon goes down，把月当作主语，实际“过”和“宿”的主语都是应该译成you的。“晓月”和“繁星”只是副词而已。

又刘长卿《逢雪宿芙蓉山主人》诗中有句云：“柴门闻犬吠，风雪夜归人。”是诗人自己听到柴门前的犬吠，知道是风雪中有人回来了，可是W. J. Fletcher在Gems of Chinese Verse一书中译为：

The house dog’s sudden barking，which hears the wicket go，

Greets us at night returning through driving gale and snow.

变成“家里的狗听到门响，突然叫起来，欢迎我们在大风雪的夜里回家来了”的意思了。杜牧的“二十四桥明月夜，玉人何处教吹箫”，如经那些英美的大汉学家英译出来，一定变成“妓女在什么地方教人吹箫”呢。

122. 大鼻子的英译

我们在日常谈话中，所谓“大鼻子”，几乎成了俄国人的代名词，但它本身固有的意义，当然仍是存在的，请问英文对一个人的大鼻子是怎样说的？

【解答】这个“大”字，英文有好几种译法：可说large，也可说high，又可说prominent，还可以说long。用一点典故来说，甚至还可以说Roman nose（鹰嘴式的鼻子也可以说aquiline nose，即鹰钩鼻。照中国的传说，生有这种鼻子的是邪恶的人）。不过在欧美人看来，大鼻子或高鼻子是美的，所以常连用high and well-shaped nose（长得美好的高鼻子）。十八世纪的一本奇书，Laurence Sterne著的The Life and Opinions of Tristram Shandy，9 vols（1760—1767）中，就有a long nose（高鼻子）和a short nose（矮鼻子）的说法。矮鼻子我们又叫塌鼻子（flat nose）或狮子鼻（snub nose）。所谓狮子鼻是扁短而向上的，很不合西洋的审美标准。请看作家们笔下的高鼻子是怎样说的。

He sent in a neat card of the correct shape and size，deeply bordered in black，upon which under his name was printed Professor of Comparative Mo-dern Literature. He turned out to be a young man，small，with tiny elegant hands，with a larger nose than you see as a rule in the Chinese and gold-rimmed spectacles. ——W. S. Maugham（他递进来一张形式大小很合适，干净的卡片，印着宽的黑边，在他的名字下面印得有“近代比较文学教授”的字样。我接见他之后，发现他是一个年轻人，个子矮小，两手极细，而鼻子却比较大，是你所见到的，戴着金丝眼镜的一般中国人所少有的。）

He was tall，he had a dark serious face，thick lips，on the verge of smil-ing but melancholy，thick lashes，sad eyes，a large nose. ——W. Saroyan（他很高，有一张肤色很黑而表情严肃的面孔，嘴唇很厚，濒于微笑但又带着忧郁，睫毛很浓，眼色忧愁，鼻子很大。）

His face was thin and high-nosed，with a broad forehead and a “firm-ness” of the chin and jaw which is said by these having it to denote resolu-tion. ——Ambrose Bierce（他的面孔细长，鼻子很高。额头宽大，下颚有一种稳定的感觉，那些生有这种下颚的人们，常自负地说，这是表示他们具有坚决的意志。）

The grandmother was a wrinkled woman，about sixty，wearing a black velvet band around her head. The mother，young Mrs. Wen，was tall and a little thin，still a pretty woman，somewhere around thirty-five，with an un-usually high，well-shaped nose and a small sensitive mouth. ——Lin Yutang：Famous Chinese Short Stories（那祖母是一个满面皱纹的老媪，年约六十，头上戴着一条黑绒的昭君带。那母亲，年轻的文太太，身材颇高，相当清瘦，仍不失为一个漂亮的女人，年在三十五岁光景，有一个特别高而端正的鼻子，和一张玲珑的小嘴。）

His nose was prominent，high-bridged，and supported bowless glasses. ——Erie Stanley Gardiner（他的鼻子很大，鼻梁很高，戴着一副夹鼻眼镜。）

Turgis looked at her with disgust. Silly old geezer！At last the waitress came. She was a girl with a nose so long and so thickly powdered that a great deal of it looked as if it did not belong to her. ——J. B. Priestley（突吉斯带着厌恶望着她。他真是一个奇怪的老头儿。终于那女侍来了。她是一个高鼻子的女郎，鼻子上搽的粉又那么多，看上去简直是那鼻子泰半不是她的一般。）

Camelia had a very beautiful face，or rather a face beautiful save in re-pose. In repose one was startled to discover that the nose was long and thin，the mouth tired and a little childish，the eye unsatisfied. ——Thornton Wil-der（茶花有一张很美的面孔，或是说得正确一点，除了在安息时以外，她的面孔是很美的。在安息时你发现她的鼻子又高又窄，嘴巴疲惫而带有一点稚气，眼睛老是感到不满足的样子，你就会大吃一惊的。）

The Europeans have a quite different idea of beauty from us. When I reflect on the small-footed perfections of an Eastern beauty，how is it pos-sible that I should have eyes for a woman whose feet are ten inches long？I shall never forget the beauties of my native city of Nangfew. How very broad their faces！How very short their noses！How very little their eyes！How very thin their lips！How very black their teeth！——Oliver Goldsmith（欧洲人的审美观念，和我们的完全不同。当我想到具有东方美的小脚的完美，我怎样能够欣赏那十英寸长的大脚女人呢？我将永远不能忘记我故乡南埠的美女。她们的面庞多宽！她们的鼻子多矮！她们的眼睛多小！她们的嘴唇多薄！她们的牙齿多黑！）

They’d look like they had big noses or their ears stuck out. ——J. D. Salinger（他们的相片看上去就好像他们生着大鼻子或是耳朵突出。）

Ⅻ 字句研究及辨异

123. back-formation

在Spoken English中有一个动词laze意为“懒散”“怠惰”，如“He’s been lazing all afternoon.”或“He lazed away the afternoon.”。这个动词是由形容lazy反造成的，请就这种back-formation的情形加以说明。

【解答】语言学上所谓back-formation（逆成法），是指这种造字的情形，也可用来指所造成的字，例如“Typewrite is a back-formation from type-writer.（打字是从打字机而来的逆成字。）”。这种造字的方式在英文中由来已久，在美国话中更为盛行。

通常增造新字，多是就原有的字前加接头语，或后加接尾语而形成的，但也有把原有的字切除（clipping）一部分而逆成的，如中国字的“青”字，可加接头语而成“菁”，接左而成“清”，接右而成“静”等的普通造字法，但也有逆成的，如广东话的“冇”字即是去掉“有”字的一部分而构成作“没有”解的另外一个字。

这种逆成字，多由不懂字源的民众而倡导出来的，如editor、beggar，并非由动词edit、beg加上接尾语的-or、-ar而形成的，而是由名词除尾而成的动词，因editor原是由拉丁动词edere变成的名词，beggar则是由OF （古法语）beghard变成英文的begar，再变成beggar的。再如peddle（v.）（＜pedlar），grovel（＜grovelling），sidle（＜sidling），darkle（＜darkling），diagnose（＜diagnosis），rove（＜rover），donate（＜donation）等是完全被接受，而被用作单独的字眼了，但如jell（＜jelly），enthuse（＜enthusiasm），emote（＜emotion），orate（＜oration），butch（＜butcher）等，则还没有脱离卑语、俗语，甚至滑稽语的地位，不为识者所接受。

在意义上也有逆成的字，如bay原是指猎犬追获猎物时的叫吠声，现在却由at bay（处于穷途之境），bring to bay（围困），keep at bay（阻止敌人不便前进）等成语的含义，而使bay一字反过来具有“困难”“抵抗”，即穷途反噬的状态，这种意味了。此外，由on the score of（因为），on more score than one（因种种理由）的成语，而使score一字也具有“理由”“缘故”的意味了。如云：

You need have no anxiety on that score.（你用不着为那个担心。）

He was rejected on the score of ill health.（他因健康不佳而遭拒绝。）

现就一些美国常见的逆成字举例如下：

When does the bishop bish？（主教何时就任？）bish = officiate as bishop（执行主教职务，司祭）

He bached all his life.（他终身未娶。）bach = lead a life of a bachelor（过独身生活）

How can anyone be enthused about radio serials？（听众对电台的连播节目怎么会热心来收听的？）enthuse = be enthusiastic；make enthusiastic（狂热，使之狂热）

I don’t want to listen to your bunk.（我不要听你说那些无意义的话。）bunk = bunkum，buncombe = meaningless or idle talk（无意义的废话）

It makes me reminisce very much.（那使我不胜其怀旧。）reminisce = be reminiscent（怀旧，往事不堪回首）

以外，还有下列诸字：to cack＜cackle，（indulge in）glib noisy incon-sequent talk；peeved＜peevish；mutt＜mutton；simp＜simple；to blatt＜blatter，to talk with noisy assurance and bluster；fact＜in fact 等等，不及备举。

124. imaginable、imaginary、imaginative

You didn’t see a ghost—it was only（imaginable，imaginary，imagi-native）. 这句最后一字，不知应采用三字中哪一个字方为正确？并请将此三字的意义及用法上的区别举例说明。

【解答】先得把这三字的含义分别清楚，才能研究它们的用法。imagi-nable是“被想象得到的”；imaginary是“只存在于想象中的”，即并非实际有的意思；imaginative是“关于想象力的”或“富于想象力的”。其中imagi-nary和imaginative二字最容易相混，现把它们用于同一句中以资比较：

Don Quixote was so imaginative that he fought many imaginary battles.（唐吉诃德是极其富于想象力的，所以他打了许多想象中的仗。）

再看：

an imaginary man（一个只存在于想象中的人；一个并非实在的人），例如红楼梦中的贾宝玉。

an imaginative man（一个富于想象力的人），例如《红楼梦》的作者曹雪芹。

至于imaginable一字，则通常用在名词的后面，尤其是那名词前有all、every、only一类的字眼时，或有最上级的形容词时是如此。例如：

all the wealth imaginable（能想象得到的财富）

every resource imaginable（能想到的一切资源）

the only reason imaginable（能想到的唯一理由）

the greatest difficulty imaginable（能想到的最大的困难）

有时单用最上级而把名词略去的时候也是有的，例如：

The house in which we passed the night was the smallest imaginable in that large city.（我们曾在那里过夜的屋子是在那大城市中意想不到的小屋子。）

现再举三例来比较这三字的用法：

It was the most shocking sight imaginable.（那是几乎意想不到的最骇人的光景。）

A dragon is an imaginary animal.（龙是想象中的动物。）

He is an imaginative poet.（他是一个富于幻想的诗人。）

问题中的例句，意为“你实未会见到鬼——那只是幻想出来的”。所以应该采用imaginary 一字，因为此字意为“只存在于想象中的”“并非实际存在的”（existing only in imagination；unreal）。

现就同类型的难于分辨的形容字再举两三实例如下：

（1）dependable（可信赖的）；dependent（依赖的）

He is a dependable man.（他是一个可信赖的人。）

He is not dependent on his father.（他不依赖父亲。）（= He is inde-pendent of his father.）

（2）desirable（合意的，悦意的，愿望的）；desirous（渴望的，切望的）

It is highly desirable that he should attend the conference.（极为愿望他出席会议。）

Everybody is desirous of something better and higher.（人人渴望获得更好更高的东西。）

（3）favourable（有利的，好意的，顺利的）；favourite（宠爱的，喜欢的）

Circumstances were entirely favourable to us.（一切情况完全对我们有利。）

Who is your favourite English novelist？（你最喜欢的英国小说家是谁？）

125. sensible、sensitive、sensual、sensuous

sensible和sensitive同是“敏感的”，sensual和sensuous同是 “感官的”，不知它们的意义和用法有何不同？

【解答】（1）sensible由“能感觉得到的”基本含义，如a sensible differ-ence（能感觉得到的分别），变为“明智的”，如a sensible idea（明智的意见），a sensible man（明智的人），再变而有“感知的”“知觉的”之意，兹举例如下：

I am very sensible of your kindness.（我深感你的好意。）

I am sensible of pain.（我觉疼痛。）

He is very sensible of his defects.（他深知自己的缺点。）

The ear is sensible to sound.（耳能听声。）

It was very sensible of him to do so.（他这样做是贤明的。）

No sensible change has taken place.（并未发生可以觉察的变化。）

（2）sensitive意为“易于感觉的”“敏感的”“能辨好坏的”，一个神经过敏的人，就叫a sensitive person，含羞草叫sensitive plant，感光纸叫sen-sible paper。

The ear is sensitive to sound.（耳之于声是敏感的。）

My skin is very sensitive.（我的皮肤是敏感的。）

He is sensitive to abuse.（他易感侮辱。）

He is morbidly sensitive to any unfavourable criticism of his book.（别人对其著作任何不利的批评他都感到痛心疾首。）

Sensitive people are quickly touched by some thing beautiful or sad.（敏感的人对美丽或悲伤的事物很快就能感触得到。）

（3）sensual是“肉体方面（而非精神或智力方面）的”“耽溺于肉欲的”，如“好色的人”为a sensual man，“肉体上的快乐”为sensual pleasures，如：

His health failed as a result of his sensual excesses.（他因逞欲过度把身体弄坏了。）

She has a sensual attraction.（她具有肉感美。）

A glutton derives sensual pleasure from eating.（贪食的人从吃中得到肉体上的享受。）

There are only sensual affections between them.（他们之间只有肉欲的爱情。）

（4）sensuous是“感官方面的”“诉诸感觉的”“引起美感的”，这永远有好的含义，形容人对于美或感官与感情上的快乐特别敏感，但永远不指贪欲所给予人的快乐。例如：

She derives sensuous delight from old church music.（她从古老的教堂音乐中获得快感。）

Keats is a famous sensuous poet.（济慈是一位诉诸感觉的诗人。）

I got some sensuous impressions of the city.（我对那城市获得了一些感官上的印象。）

现在再看看另外的类似字。

（1）practicable（可实行的），如a practicable plan（可行的计划）；prac-tical（实用的），如a practical plan（实用的计划）。

Television did not seem practicable before the war.（电视在战前好像并未能用。）

So many of our soldiers were killed that our victory was a practical de-feat.（我们的士兵牺牲过多，故我们的胜利实为一种失败。）

关于上举二字还可再加说明如下：practicable指某种计划或目标是可以实行的，不过还没有发展到那样的程度，或是还没有人去付诸实行。practical指由于实际的经验而考案出来以配合实际的用途。此字又有实际从事的意思，转而有实地经验的，如practical politician（有经验的政客）。

（2）respectable（有声望的）；respective（个别的）；respectful（有礼貌的）

Such behaviour is hardly respectable.（这种行为是可耻的。）

He is poor but respectable.（他虽贫穷但人品端正。）

The students went off to their respective rooms.（学生回到各人的房间里去了。）

They were chosen according to their respective merits.（他们被选拔出来系根据他们各人的优点。）

You should stand at a respectful distance from him.（你对他应取敬远态度。）

You should be respectful toward your parents.（你应尊敬父母。）

126. his room和his company

“I would rather have his room than his company.”，译为“我宁肯要他的房间，不要他的公司”似乎不通，不知果应如何译法？

【解答】这句英文应译为“我宁愿他不在此”。句中的room和company二字，中文都无适当的译语，所以不宜直译。现就此二字分别研究如下：

（1）room：（一）房间；（二）屋内的人；（三）余地，机会；（四）pl.住所。

此字原来的意思是“空间”，隔断的空间便是房间。作“房间”解时，是一个普通名词，前面必须加用冠词或字尾写成复数（a room，many rooms），但作“余地”解时，则通常不加冠词，并要用单数。现就上列四种含义举例如下：

This is a very pleasant room.（这是一间很令人愉快的房子。）

How many rooms are there in this house？（这栋房子有多少房间？）

Come and see me in my rooms this evening.（你今晚到我的住所来谈谈吧。）

He set the room in a roar.（他使室内的人哄堂大笑。）

Is there room for me in the car？（车内有我坐的地方没有？）

This table takes up too much room.（这张桌子占地方太多。）

There is little room to move in a crowd.（在一群人之间没有移动的余地。）

There is room for improvement in your work.（你的工作还需改进。）

There is no room for dispute.（没有争论的余地。）

We have no room here for idlers.（我们这里不要闲人。）

There is plenty of room to move.（大有周旋余地。）

Let us make room for the lorry to pass.（让我们站开容货物通过。）

（2）company：（一）交友；（二）一群，一队；（三）伴侣；（四）宾客，来宾；（五）公司。

此字的原义为“共同进食的人们”，分析起来，为com（= together）和panis（= bread），即一同来吃面包的人。由此出发而变为“交结”（being together with another or others）之意的抽象名词。至于请帖上说的to request the company of a person dinner，更是最接近此字的原意了。

Keep company with your equals.（毋友不如己者。）

I will keep you company.（我将和你作伴。）

Among the company was an old man.（这群人中有一老者。）

He is fond of company.（他喜交际。）

He sees no company.（他谢绝会客。）

I came in company with him.（我和他结伴而来。）

Will you favour me with your company this evening？（今晚务请光临。）

A man is known by the company he keeps.（凭其交友即知其人。）

He was laughed at in a large company.（他在许多同席的人中遭受嘲笑。）

He is too ill to receive a great deal of company（= visitors）.（他因病不能接见太多的客人。）

We organized a publishing company.（我们组织了一个出版公司。）

I cannot bear his company.（和他同席我受不了。）

问题句中的company便是此意。那句中的his room，说“他的空间”，意即“空了他”，也就是说他不在，所以全句译为“与其跟他同席宁愿他不在场的好”，简译为“我宁愿他不在此”。

127. 关于“笑”的英语

听说要读懂一份星期版的《纽约时报》，约需知道四万个字，可见要学好英文，多记生字，实有必要，但不知要怎样才可丰富我们的词汇，请就学习方法，试举一例。

【解答】单是死记生字是不够的，最低限度必须知道那字的一、二种用法。这样才能造出句子来。我们必须明白，学习英文是以句为单位，而不是以字为单位的。学会了一个字的用法后，就得进而研习与此字意义相近似的字类，以资比较。这样一来词汇自然就增加了。兹将英文中表示“笑”这个意思的字类为例，详述如下：

（1）laugh（笑）

They all laughed loudly.（他们都大声笑了。）

He laughs best who laughs last.（别高兴得太早。）

（2）smile（微笑）

He smiled his consent.（他微笑以示同意。）

She smiled to see the children so happy.（她看到孩子们这样快乐，也为之莞尔。）

（3）grin（露齿而笑）

He was grinning with delight.（他高兴得露齿而笑。）

The boy grinned from ear to ear when I gave him an apple.（当我给那孩子一个苹果时，他咧着嘴笑了。）

（4）chuckle（含笑；咯咯地笑；低声轻笑）

He was chuckling to himself over what he was reading.（他对所读的东西觉得有趣，因而暗自发笑。）

（5）giggle（傻笑；格格地笑）

The silly school girls giggled.（女学生们傻笑。）

I heard them giggle when I passed by the girls.（当我走过那些女孩子身边时，我听到她们格格地笑。）

（6）snicker（忍笑；暗笑）通常有不敬的成分。

On hearing his absurd opinion，I went snickering.（听了他那荒谬的意见，我忍笑而去。）

（7）simper（假笑；痴笑）

He simpers at my word.（他闻我言而痴笑。）

When I told him the thing，he simply simpered.（当我把那事告诉他时，他只假笑了一下。）

（8）smirk（傻笑；得意地笑；假笑。）

He smirked at everyone that passes.（他对过路的每个人傻笑。）

An innocent smile of a child is much above the artificial smirk of a per-son in social intercourse.（一个小孩子的天真的微笑，实远胜于社交场中的假笑。）

（9）titter（窃笑；忍笑）

The girls tittered（= giggled）.（女孩子们格格笑了。）

He told me that with a titter.（他笑着告诉我了。）

（10）roar（哄笑；大笑）

His jokes set the table in a roar.（他的笑话使一座哄笑。）

They roared with laughter.（他们哄然大笑。）

（11）guffaw（喧笑；狂笑；捧腹大笑）不高尚的。

Everybody in the room surprised at him as he guffawed on the occasion.（当他在那场合捧腹大笑时，房间里的人都吃了一惊。）

The crowd laugh and guffaw as soon as they see the ridiculous manner of the buffoon.（大家一见小丑那种滑稽样子，立刻哄堂大笑。）

（12）cachinnate（放声大笑）

He cachinnated till his sides ached.（他笑得肚皮都痛了。）

（13）horselaugh（高声大笑）如马嘶一般。

He burst out into a horselaugh.（他突然高声狂笑。）

（14）cackle（呵呵大笑）如母鸡生蛋后的叫声。

Those cackles from young male throats，the cultivated whoops from the girls，and the throb of the record player could only mean another of the im-promptu parties.（那些男孩子们的呵呵笑声，女孩子们的训练有素的呼啸声，以及留声机上发出的跳动声，适足以说明这又是一次临时的舞会。）

（15）chortle（欢笑；咯咯地笑）

The children chortled all the time.（孩子们始终欢笑不止。）

（16）ridicule（嘲弄；讪笑）

Doctors are often ridiculed in the plays.（医生们常在戏剧里被嘲弄。）

（17）deride（讥笑）

They all derided his foolishness.（他们都讥笑他的愚笨。）

（18）mock（嘲笑）

The students mocked the seriousness of his expression.（学生们模仿他严肃的神色来嘲弄。）

The naughty boys mocked the blind beggar.（淘气的孩子们愚弄那瞎了眼的乞丐。）

（19）taunt（笑骂）

He taunted me beyond endurance.（他笑骂我不能忍受。）

They taunted him into taking the dare.（他们揶揄笑骂他使之接受挑战。）

（20）twit（揶揄；挖苦）

He twitted her with her timidity.（他揶揄她的胆怯。）

（21）scoff（嘲笑）

It was a great invention but at first many people scoffed at it.（那是一个伟大的发明，但起初许多人都加以怀疑的嘲笑。）

（22）banter（戏谑；愚弄）

We bantered him on the subject of marriage.（我们在婚姻题目上戏谑了他。）

（23）rally（挖苦；嘲笑）古语。

The boys rallied John on his short haircut.（孩子们嘲笑约翰剪光头。）

（24）chaff（戏弄；恶作剧）

The boys chaffed the French boy about his mistakes in speaking Eng-lish.（这些孩子们由于那个法国孩子说错了英语而开他的玩笑。）

（25）jeer（讥笑）

You may jeer，but can you do any better？（你固然可以讥笑，但你也不能做得更好。）

（26）gibe，jibe（讥笑；嘲弄）

They gibed at his singing.（他们嘲笑他唱的歌。）

（27）sneer（讥诮）

The proposal was sneered down.（那建议被人以讥诮摒斥。）

“Bah！” he sneered with a curl of his lips.（“呸！”他嘴唇一撇地讥诮着。）

（28）jest（取笑；开玩笑）

Many a true word is spoken in jest.（很多认真的话都被当作笑话讲了。）谚语。

Don’t jest about serious things.（正经事不要开玩笑。）

（29）joke（开玩笑）

I was only joking.（我只是开玩笑的。）

They often joked him on his baldness.（他们常揶揄他的秃头。）

（30）scorn（嘲笑；轻蔑）

They laughed him to scorn.（他们嘲笑他。）

He is a scorn to his neighbors.（他是邻人嘲笑的对象。）

（31）flout（嘲笑；侮慢）

Don’t flout at me.（不要笑我。）

He often flout at religion.（他常嘲笑宗教。）

当作“可笑的”解的形容词有下列各字：

（1）risible（能笑的）

Man is the only risible animal.（人类是唯一能笑的动物。）

（2）laughable（可笑的）

It is a laughable story.（好笑的故事。）

（3）ludicrous（滑稽可笑的）

What a ludicrous thing it is！（多么可笑的事！）

（4）absurd（荒谬可笑的）

Isn’t that absurd？（那岂不可笑？）

128. 关于“猪”的英语

在家畜中，任何一种都有牝牡之分，大小之别，决不能用一个字代表，如“猪”我们只知道英文叫pig，请举出其他猪名，并详为区别。

【解答】家畜中不能为人效劳，只能给人口福的就是猪。不论是中文，或是英文，对这种美味的动物，都有许多不同的名称。

中文俗称的猪，文言作豕，《孟子》上有“豕交兽畜”的说法，是指待人没有礼貌说的。

猪原是指的豕子，但后来变成豕的通称了。南楚叫猪为豨，如封豨，原来是指猪行走的样子，《说文》段注说：“以其走貌，名之曰豨。”公猪叫豭，母猪叫豝，又作䝏，大猪叫豜，又作䝈，小猪叫豚，又作豵或豯。阉割的猪叫豮。豪是野猪的一种，豪猪就是山猪，又称豲或豲𧱬。腹干头足都短，长着红黑色的短毛的猪，便称为豱。

至于英文的猪名，也可举出下列六种：

（1）pig猪的通称，又有小猪的意思，如粤菜中的烤猪，英文叫roast pig，便是用的生下不久的乳猪。

（2）hog指长成的大猪，是一种去势的雄猪，特指屠宰用的大肥猪。

（3）boar指没有去势的雄猪。wild boar野猪。

（4）sow母猪，作为繁殖用的。

（5）porker肥的小猪，供食用的猪。这猪的肉便是pork，是一般对猪肉的说法，如猪排便叫pork chop。

（6）swine猪的总称，为文学用语，单复同形。英美人骂人时爱用此字，如“You swine！”。

兹就与猪有关的字句举例如下，以供参考：

piggish 贪食的，不洁的

pig-headed 冥顽不灵的

pig-pen 猪圈

pig-skin 马鞍；足球；手套（原意为猪皮）

pig-sticking 猎野猪

pig-sty 猪圈；肮脏的地方

pig-wash 猪食；劣酒，坏汤，稀薄的咖啡

make a pig of oneself 吃得过多；狼吞虎咽

pigs might fly 不可信的事

bring one’s pigs to a pretty market 大失所望；大蚀本

buy a pig in a poke（或bag）粗心购物，不免上当

go（the）whole hog 有始有终，贯彻到底

hog in armour 沐猴而冠者

call one’s hogs to the hill 打鼾

as drunk as David’s sow 泥醉如猪

get the wrong sow by the ear 认错人或物，见解错误，论断错误

make a silk purse out of a sow’s ear 向狗嘴里找象牙；坏材料做不出好东西来

grease a fat sow 向财阀行贿，大可不必

129. 代become用的其他的字

英文表“变成”之意的是become，例如“他变成一个很有名的人了”，则译为“He has become quite a famous man.”。但不知除become一个动词外，还有其他什么动词也可表出同样的意思。

【解答】英文表“变成”之意的，除become外，还有许多其他的动词，如grow、turn、get等等皆是，不过一定要用作不完全自动词时，才能表达此意。现将这类的动词，造成文句，举例如下：

He grew alarmed and turned pale.（他大吃一惊，面色变成苍白了。）

You will soon get used to it.（你很快就会习惯的。）

I should like to get rid of him.（我真想摆脱他。）

The train has got clear of the station.（火车已经出站了。）

Look out！Don’t get hurt.（当心！不要受伤。）

You must not get drunk as you are going to drive.（你不可喝醉呀，回头你还要开车。）

He has got plucked again.（他又名落孙山。）

He turned traitor to his country.（他变成了卖国贼。）

The maple leaves are beginning to turn red.（枫叶开始变红。）

The boat turned bottom upwards.（小舟颠覆了。）

He has turned Christian.（他变成了基督徒。）

What are you going to be？（你将来要做个怎样的人？）

I am sure you will make a good soldier.（我相信你会成为一个好军人。）

A good daughter will make a good wife.（一个好女儿会成为一个好妻子。）

When will he come of age？（他何时成年？）

He comes（或falls）short of my expectation.（他有负我的期望。）

If all goes well，I shall start tomorrow.（假如一切顺利，我明天出发。）

The dog went mad.（狗变疯了。）

His sons run wild.（他的儿子们变得放荡起来了。）

The sea will run high by noon.（正午海将起潮。）

We ran short of drinking water.（我们的饮水变得不够了。）

He fell a victim to the dagger of an assassin.（他成为刺客的刀下鬼。）

The wind suddenly fell calm.（风突然静下来了。）

This disease sometimes proves fatal.（此病有时成为致命的绝症。）

The book proved of no use.（此书无用。）

This proved a big mistake.（这是大错。）

He was well educated and has turned out a very able man.（他受了好教育，成为一位干才。）

I hope they will turn out as we expect.（我希望他们会成为我们所期望的一样。）

I least suspected it would turn out like this.（一点也没有想到会变成这个样子。）

Our country will come off victorious.（我国将获胜。）

He came off a loser.（他成为失败者了。）

How did you come to do such a thing？（你何至于做出这样的事来？）

How come you to be so intimate with him？（你怎么会和他变得这样亲密的？）

He began to understand English better.（他更懂得英文了。）

He begins to beg.（= He becomes a beggar.）（他开始讨饭。）

The voice waxes faint.（声音变得微弱了。）

Some day you will come to understand.（将来你会明白的。）

The accident resulted in his death.（这意外事件使他终于死去。）

Eating too much often results in sickness.（过度饮食常招致疾病。）

He is developing into a good citizen.（他进步成为一个好公民。）

Land animals are believed to have developed from sea animals.（陆地动物被认为是由海中动物进化而成的。）

130. record的用法

英文有cut the record和cut a record两种说法，不知在意义上有何不同？又，名词的record一字，有些什么含义？用法如何？

【解答】说cut the record是英国话，意为“破纪录”，而说cut a record则为美国话，意为“灌唱片”。

至于record一字是从拉丁文来的，原意为to call to mind（记起）。此字作名词用时，有下列各种含意：

（1）登记；记录（written note）。如a court of record（记录厅；记录保存审判厅）；a matter of record（有记录的事实；有案可稽的事件）；the records of medieval life in the British Museum（在大英博物馆中的中世纪生活的记录，如图画、雕刻等）；the greatest earthquake on〔upon，in〕 record（亘古未有的大地震）；leave〔place，put〕 on record（留下记录）；It is on record that . . .（记录上载得有；有先例可循）。

（2）证据；证言。如bear record to（为之作证；证实）。

I can bear record to his previous good character.（我可以证明他过去品格优良。）

（3）官方记载；案卷（register），会议记录（minutes）。

The secretary kept a record of what was done at the meeting.（那秘书保存着有会议经过的案卷。）

（4）留下记录可资纪念的东西，纪念物（memorial，monument）。

（5）履历（personal history，career）；前科（criminal record）。a family re-cord（家谱）；police records（犯罪记录）；one’s previous criminal record（个人的前科）；have a good〔bad〕 record（履历好〔坏〕）。

His record is against him.（他的履历不好。）

（6）学校成绩，如school records（学业成绩）；make fine records at school（在校成绩优良）。

（7）运动纪录，如hold the world’s record（保持世界纪录）；break〔beat，cut〕 the record（破纪录）；set（up）a new record（作出新的纪录）。

The output reached a record in 1969.（生产量在一九六九年达到最高纪录。）

The crowd was a record.（空前的人众。）

（8）留声机的唱片，如long-playing record（慢转唱片）；cut a record（灌唱片）。

What I am going to say is off the record.（我预备要说的话是非正式的，不可以公开呀。）

I am afraid my words travel out of the record.（我的话似乎说出轨了。）

I don’t want to go〔place myself，put myself〕 on record.（我不想公开发表意见。）

It has a record of 40 years behind its reputation.（那名气后面有四十年的纪录。）

The motorboat has a fine record.（汽船的发动机表示出优良的成绩。）

He has left a clean record while in our service.（他在我们这里任职的时候，留下了清白的记录。）

Unquestionable records show that he is 131 years old.（正确的记录表示他活了一百三十一岁。）

He had an indifferent academic record.（他的学业成绩很是平凡。）

Films are of value as documentary record.（胶卷作为文献是有价值的。）

There are only two cases on record of Frenchmen having made large for-tunes in London.（在伦敦发了财的法国人有记录可考的只有两个。）

February shattered all previous production records of the company.（二月突破了那公司以前的生产纪录。）

The railway has a proud record of infrequency of accidents.（那铁路有可夸的纪录，证明发生事故最少。）

You’re on record as wanting to marry a well-heeled man of mature years. ——F. H. Herbert（大家都知道你想要嫁一个富有的盛年男子。）be on record as〔for〕 = be in the position of having publicly declared oneself as 〔for〕.

131. classic和classical的区别

The Derby is a（1. classic，2. classical）race.括弧中两个字，不知应该选取何者为是？又同是形容词，有结尾为-c的，又有结尾为-cal的，意义上有何区别？

【解答】上面的句子应说“The Derby is a classic race.”。因为classic的意思为famous because of a long history（见Advanced Learner’s Dictionary），即因有长远历史而著名的，就英国来说，如牛津大学、剑桥大学的划船比赛（boat race），以及赛马（Derby，为1780年有位名叫Derby的伯爵所创立，每年六月在伦敦的Epsom举行）等等都可称为classic event（有历史性的著名事件）。至于后面多al二字的classical这个形容词，便没有上述的意思，它的含义据ALD解释为：of proved value because of having passed the test of time（经过长时期的考验而证明是有价值的）。我们通常把它译为“古典的”，如古典音乐（classical music）。年纪大一点的人还是爱听贝多芬、舒伯特、肖邦、巴赫一些老大家的音乐，而不爱听流行歌曲（popular songs）。不但艺术方面有些分别，其他方面亦复有古典派，如Adam Smith和Ricardo，便是古典派经济学者的代表。

现在让我们再看看其他的字例。上面提到经济学者（economist）是研究经济学（economics）的人。与此有关的有两个形容词，一为economic，一为economical二者的意思也是不同的。

The present（1. economic，2. economical）position of Japan is strong.（目下日本的经济情况很强大。）

You had better use an（1. economic，2. economical）stove.（你最好采用经济炉子。）

第一句应该用economic，因为这是指of economics（经济学的）。政府的经济政策为the government’s economic policy， 对某一国或某一地，如罗德西亚的经济封锁便是an economic blockade。美国总统在年头送给两院的经济报告便是the Economic Report。不应把经济力量集中在某几个城市，应该加以分散，英文便说the Economic Decentralization。这些都是指的实际的经济。

至于第二句中则应该采用economical才对，因为这和经济无关，而是指的“节省燃料的火炉”，所以实际的意思为“节省的”（saving），“节俭的”（thrifty）。

An efficient engine is economical of fuel.（效率高的机器节省燃料。）

He uses the economical methods of teaching.（他用经济的教学法。）

再看另外一个字例。由电力（electricity）一字而发生两个形容词：一为electric，一为electrical，再看ALD的解释。electric = of，worked by，charged with，capable of developing，electricity，指的是实际有电的，如电灯（electric light）实际无电便不能发亮。the electric chair，让重罪犯人坐下便可触电致死的电椅。electrical = relating to electricity是实际没有电，只是与电有关的，如电力工程便是electrical engineering，发电机本身并没有电，故云electrical machine。照相的传真叫作electrical transmission。用录音片广播，便说electrical transcription。

132. 美国话中hell的用法

美国话中对于 “地狱”（hell）一字用得极多，颇难翻译，如“The hell you say.”一句译为“你说地狱”，实在不通，不知应如何翻译才好？并请就美国话中的hell一字的用法说明一下。

【解答】在美国出版的《读者文摘》上有一则故事，正提到“The hell you say.”一句话，现抄在下面，以供研究。

In a midwestern city I went to the transportation company to pick up a bus schedule. The girl in charge was exceptionally courteous and charming. She had just started to help me when the phone rang. Even I could hear the strident male voice. As he went on and on，I realized that he was being very unreasonable and skirting close to insult. But the girl never lost her poise or her smile. She answered sweetly whenever she could get in a word and in between times kept scribbling on a pad. I edged a little closer and peeked. Over and over she was writing，“The hell you say，the hell you say，the hell you say.”——Helen Campbell

现在让我把这故事，尤其是问题中的句子，译成中文吧。

在中西部的一个城市中，我到一家运输公司去查巴士车的时间表。管理这事的女职员异常的有礼貌，长得也十分可爱。她正开始来告诉我的时候，突然电话铃响了。一种粗暴的男子声音，甚至我站在一旁也能听得出来。那人继续地说个不停，我听得明白，他简直是无理取闹，破口乱骂，近乎侮辱了。但是那位女职员却始终态度和蔼，面带笑容。只要有机会让她回话的时候，她总是很温和地回答一声，而在静听对方乱骂的当儿，她便不停地在一本拍纸簿上乱写着。我侧身靠近一点，去窥看了一下，原来她却一再反复地在写着：“你不是认真说的吧。你不是认真说的吧。你不是认真说的吧。”

在美国话中，hell一字几乎无往不利，其滥用的程度，没有一个其他的字所能及。它原是名词，现又被用作动词、形容词、副词、感叹词，几乎什么都行。现将其用法，分别举例讲解如下：

（1）作为否定副词，意思极强。

The hell you say！（= You don’t say！）

Like hell I will. = I will like hell.（= I will not.）

这个hell是表否定的，比说not的意义要强得多。说“You don’t say.”或“You don’t say so.”意思还是一样，是表“惊异”或“不相信”的意思。句中的say = mean to say（认真说的）。

（2）在副词的用法中，又有than + hell和as + hell的表现法，前者为comparative degree，后者为positive degree。

It’s colder’n（= colder than）hell on them prairies.（在那些草原上冷得要死。）

You’re crazier’n hell，kid.（= You are mistaken.）（你完全错了。）

That White Center pitcher is wild as hell today.（今天那个白色中锋棒球投手简直近乎疯狂了。）

（3）没有否定意思的like hell，仍作副词用。

Run like hell，or he’ll catch you.（快跑，否则他就要捉住你了。）

I hate like hell to do this.（我恨死了做这个。）

（4）原来应作in hell的，现在却常说成in the hell，或单说the hell了。

What in hell is his name？（他到底叫什么名字？）

Where in the hell are you going？（你到哪里去呀？）

Who the hell says so？（这是谁说的呀？）

这个in hell等，等于标准英文的on earth或in the world。那些粗人有时这样说还嫌不够，而要再加上一个咒语，如：

What the god-damned hell are you doing now？（你现在他妈的到底在干嘛？）

（5）单说一个“Oh，yes.”等就够了的普通说法，他们偏要改为：

Hell，yes.（是呀。）

Hell，no.（不对。）

（6）为表示不快或邪恶之念，更要用到这字：

Now if that was to happen，wouldn’t it be hell？（如果变成那样，就真糟了。）

Get away！Well，that’s a hell of a note.（滚你的蛋！那是什么狗屁调子。）

You sure chose a hell of a time to quit.（你确曾选了一个最坏的时候离开。）

但a hell of a time是既可表时间的长，也可表时间的短：

The trucks all got stuck in the ditch，and we had a hell of a time with them.（货车都陷入沟中，我们也一同陷入很久的时间。）

We blew in all our wages，and had a hell of a time.（我们把所有的工资挥霍浪费，一下就用完了。）

（7）作为形容词的用法，比副词少得多：

She is a hell cat.（= a pugnacious or fiery-tempered woman）（她是一个好吵架的脾气暴躁的女人。）

He made hell bent for Paris.（他不顾一切地到巴黎去了。）

He is hell bent on starting it at once.（他坚决地要立刻着手。）

通常来说，应该可以有一个hellish的形容词，但不常见，而代之以hellishin’（= hellishing），有“非常”“真个”等很强烈的意思。

He seems to be in a hellishin’ hurry about something.（他好像有什么事仓促得要命。）

This is a hellishin’ fine time to tell us about it.（把那件事情告诉我们，这是一个最好的时候。）

（8）作为感叹词用的最简单的为“O hell！（天啦！）”。

Hell and tarnation.（该死！讨厌！）

Hell fire and damnation！（该死！）

（9）最后再将其余种种用法举出如下：

Hell don’t know . . .（= Nobody knows . . .）（天晓得！）

As much chance as a snowball in hell.（有屁个机会。）

Scarce as ice-water in hell.（绝无的事。）

因想到“地狱之火”，自然冰炭不容，无非是表绝少之意，此外还有till hell freezes over（待河之清）；hotter than the hinges of hell（火海似的地狱，其门上的铰链烧得火热，现在这却比它更热）；raise hell（引起大骚动）或let hell loose（引起大混乱）。

133. 英美政府首长名称的不同

英美虽是同文国家，但同一政府部门及其首长，名称不同。请将两国政府的首长们及政府各部门的名称，分别举出，以资对照。

【解答】英国的国家元首是国王（King）或女王（Queen），而美国的国家元首就是总统（President）。两国重要的行政部门，都是内阁（Cabinet）。

A.英国内阁的首脑为首相（Prime Minister），内阁组成分子如下：

（1）Prime Minister，First Lord of the Treasury（首相，第一财政大臣）

（2）Secretary of State for Foreign Affairs（外交大臣）

（3）Lord President of the Council（枢密院大臣）

（4）Lord Chancellor（大法官）

（5）Secretary of State for the Home Department and Minister for Welsh Af-fairs（内政大臣和威尔士事务大臣）

（6）Chancellor of the Exchequer（财政大臣）

（7）Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster（兰开斯特公爵领地事务大臣）

（8）Lord Privy Seal and Leader of the House of Commons（掌玺大臣兼下院领袖）

（9）Minister of Defence（国防大臣）

（10）Secretary of State for Commonwealth Relations（联邦关系事务大臣）

（11）Secretary of State for the Colonies（殖民地事务大臣）

（12）Secretary of State for Scotland（苏格兰事务大臣）

（13）Minister of Labour and National Service（劳工大臣）

（14）Minister for Housing and Local Government（住房及地方政府事务大臣）

（15）Minister of Town and Country Planning（都市及乡村计划大臣）

（16）Minister of Health（卫生大臣）

（17）Minister of Education（教育大臣）

（18）President of the Board of Trade（贸易大臣）

（19）Minister of Agriculture and Fisheries（农渔大臣）

（20）Minister of Pensions and National Insurance（年金及国民保险大臣）

此外还有非内阁阁员的政府部会首长：

（1）First Lord of the Admiralty（海军大臣）

（2）Secretary of State for War（陆军大臣）

（3）Secretary of State for Air（空军大臣）

（4）Minister of Fuel and Power（燃料电力大臣）

（5）Minister of Transport（运输大臣）

（6）Minister of Supply（供应大臣）

（7）Minister for Economic Affairs（经济事务大臣）

（8）Minister of Food（粮食大臣）

（9）Minister of Civil Aviation（民航大臣）

（10）Minister of Works（工程大臣）

（11）Minister Without Portfolio（不管部大臣）

（12）Paymaster General（主计总监）

（13）Postmaster General（邮政总监）

（14）Attorney General（检察总长）

（15）Solicitor General（检察次长）

（16）Lord Advocate（苏格兰检察总长）

（17）Solicitor General for Scotland（苏格兰检察次长）

（B）美国总统以下设十个行政主管，分掌国政，形成一个内阁：

（1）Secretary of State（国务卿）

（2）Secretary of the Treasury（财政部长）

（3）Secretary of Defense（国防部长）

（4）Attorney General（检察总长）

（5）Postmaster General（邮政总监）

（6）Secretary of the Interior（内政部长）

（7）Secretary of Agriculture（农业部长）

（8）Secretary of Commerce（商业部长）

（9）Secretary of Labor（劳工部长）

（10）Secretary of Health，Education and Welfare（卫生、教育及福利部长）

国务卿主持国务院（Department of State），在他下面有两位副国务卿（Under-secretary of State），副国务卿下面还有一位副国务卿，通常译为“副国务卿助理”。重要的有九位助理国务卿（Assistant-secretary of State），好像我国外交部的司长一样，分掌各部门的实际业务。

主持国防部（Department of Defense）的国防部长，是规定要以文人充任的。他下面有联合参谋本部的主席（Chairman of Joint Chiefs of Staff）、陆军部长（Secretary of the Army）、海军部长（Secretary of the Navy）和空军部长（Secretary of the Air Force）。

134. being的用法

（a）Defeated in the election，he retired from politics.

（b）Being defeated in the election，he retired from politics.

以上两个句子不知有何分别？是否所有的被动式分词的造句，都有这种情形？又请详示being的用法。

【解答】（a）（b）两个句子完全一样，没有什么分别，因为（a）句只是（b）句的省略说法。在分词造句中，用了过去分词，一见就知是被动，单说defeated如（a）句，便知是be defeated，所以句首的being是可以略去的。任何以过去分词开头的分词造句，都可以在前面加上一个being的字来解释，不过没有此字，意思还是一样。

关于being的用法，先得明了这不过是动词be的现在分词或动名词而已。动词be的原义是“存在”，这点我们应该记牢。在be上加-ing，变成现在分词或动名词之后，这基本意义，来得更加显明。许多学生说，他们一直读到大学，对于being的意义和用法，还是弄不清楚，也只是因为忽略了这基本意义的缘故。进行式中用being，表示“正在”，不也是这意义的应用吗？

现在我就用being这字做个代表，来看看这-ing形式的字，到底有些什么用法。我们只要把这个being的各种用法完全弄明白了，对于其他一切动词加-ing的用法，也就再不会有什么疑问了。

这being的用法一共可分为五个项目，举例说明如下：

（1）作为名词（Verbal Noun）：

He is only a human being.（他也是一个人。）

This is some strange being.（这是一个怪物。）

（注）这个being的用法，完全与名词无异，前面可以加冠词，本字又可以加-s做成复数。在下二项中，则不能加-s做成复数。

（2）作为被动的动名词（Passive Gerund）：

I don’t mind being laughed at.（我不在乎别人笑骂。）

Being made a fool of is no proof that one is a fool.（被人愚弄的并不见得就是愚人。）

（注）在这种用法中可注意的，就是在being这个名词之后，一定要接上一个过去分词，以构成被动的成分。

（3）作为完全的动名词（Perfect Gerund）：

She is proud of being the mother of eight children.（她很骄傲她是八个孩子的母亲。）

He knew that being punctual meant being on the point of time.（他知道准时到达就是守时。）

（注）这个being虽然也是用作名词，但后面并不接过去分词，所以其中不包含被动性。

（4）作为形容词（Qualificative Adjective）：

He serves on trial for the time being.（他暂时是试用性质。）

His clothing being in shreds he presented a sorry sight.（他衣衫褴褛，现出一副可怜相。）

（注）这个being既非名词，也非动词，而是形容词，第一句形容“时间”，第二句形容“衣服”。

（5）作为现在分词（Present Participle）：

He was being held prisoner in the Legation.（他正被囚禁在公使馆里。）

The work is being done.（这工作正在进行。）

（注）这个being之后虽然也接的过去分词，但being是动词的一部分，表示进行式。

135. produce、product、production的分别

produce、product、production三字都作“出产”解，不知用法上有何分别？

【解答】作名词用的produce统指一切农产物、天然产物或工业产物。这是一个永远保持单数的集合名词，不可以说a produce，也不可以说produces。

When they conquered Sicily they took a tenth of the field produce. ——Lord Avebury（当他们征服了西西里时，他们夺取了整个农业作物的十分之一。）

The farmer sells his produce at the public market.（农人把他的出产在公共市场发卖。）

There is a new emporium opened for the sale of Chinese produce.（有一家售中国货的新百货公司开张。）

The market for Chinese produce is very brisk.（贩卖中国货的市场非常兴隆。）

Much produce of the factory is finding a very large market all over the world.（那工厂的大部分产品在全世界各地找到很大的市场。）

这个produce可作田地生产的总称，如the produce of the field，但谷类、蔬菜、水果等，一般又称为products of the earth。这个product是普通名词，前可加冠词a，字尾又可加复数的-s，说a product是指一件（天然、农业、工业的）产物，products是指多件这样的产物，如a product of the soil（土地产物），products of manufacture（制成品）。agricultural products是农产品，aquatic products是水产品，industrial products是工业产品，marine products是海产品，natural products是天然产品，raw products是未制成的原料品，forest products是林产品，garden products是花、蔬菜等，a native product是国产品，a human product是人造物，literary products是文艺作品。

Man is the most complex of the products of nature.（人类是大自然最复杂的产物。）

Man is the flower and chief of all the products of Nature. ——Henry More（人类是大自然所有产物中的精华和主体。）

The factory’s entire product for the past year exceeds that of any two other factories of the same kind.（那工厂去年整个的生产，超过其他两个同类工厂任何一个的产量。）

Dickens was not an academic product.（狄更斯不是学校出身的。）

This is the co-operative product of several authors.（这是好几个作家的共同作品。）

The egg is a perishable product.（鸡蛋是容易腐败的产品。）

He was the product of his period.（他是他那个时代的产物。）

至于production（生产），它是与consumption（消耗）对称的。工厂最新的出品就说the newest production of the factories。此字主要是表示生产的动作（act），由心身的劳动而产生的东西。a production是一件（文学或艺术的）作品，productions则为多件那样的作品。如a production of genius（天才的作品）及the artist’s early productions（那艺术家早期的作品）。说the literary products of the age和the literary productions of the age都是通的，前者把products用在譬喻里，把作品看作产品。

Production is used to denote all things manufactured or grown to satisfy human wants.（生产品是用来指为满足人的需要而制造或培植的一切东西。）

This is the age of mass production.（这是大量生产的时代。）

由这名词而形成的动词为mass-produce，如：

It is being mass-produced in the MIG factories in Moscow. ——News-week（正在莫斯科的米格厂中大量生产着。）

Rice production is the mainstay of one billion Asiatics.（米的生产是十亿亚洲人民的主要的依靠。）

Gas is now largely used for the production of heat.（瓦斯为生产热大量使用着。）

It is a production of his chisel.（这是他的雕刻。）

The work is one of the highest productions of literature.（这部作品是水平最高的文学作品之一。）

136. auding、mim-mem-com、idiolect的含义

关于语言方面的术语，有auding及mim-mem-com二字，不知作何解释？又idiolect一字，辞典上也查不出来，均请说明。

【解答】idiolect在Random House Dictionary上的解释为a person’s individual speech pattern，可释作“个人语”，是Bloch的用语，见于他所著的A Set of Postulates for Phonemic Analysis一书中。意指一个说话的人，在某一时期，采用某种语言，传达给另外一个说话的人时所有发语的总和。一个人学语的过程，最小时由父母兄姊，三四岁以后由同玩的小朋友，逐渐形成一种个人语。个人语是完全属于某一个人的，不可能有两个人完全具有同样的发音，采用同样的字句说话的。据Sapir说：“住在同一个时代，同一个地域，采用同样的方言说话，在同一社会中活动着的两个人，其语言习惯，也并不完全相同。”方言（dialect）就是多数人说的话，有时代、地理及社会之别，从时代讲可分现用语（current）、古语（archaic）、废语（obsolete）。从地理讲也可分地理的方言（geographical dialect）、地域的方言（regional dialect）、地方的方言（local dialect）。从社会讲则有上流社会、中流社会和下层阶级，又可分为有教养的英语（cultivated speech）、普通英语（common speech）、无教养的英语（folk speech）（Kurath的分法）。所谓个人语（idiolect）的概念，是从语言的本质着眼，以应付研究上的必要，而构想出来的。

在最近美国教授法学者们，对于auding一字，颇为通用，意指listening comprehension，不只是听，而是听懂。在1969年秋天举行的语言学研究会上，夏威夷大学的Plaister教授，提出宣读的论文题为“Four Skills or Two？”。内容是说，如果是母语的话，就不用Four Skills，有Two Skills就行了。意即母语时，hearing（listening）和speaking二者，不成其为skill，是不知不觉（unconscious）中所具备的本领，说母语的人随口能说（speaking），也完全能听懂（auding）别人说的话，无需要什么skill，只有阅读（reading）和写作（writing），才需学习训练，始能达成，所以说two skills，即指的这两种。

学习外国语时，就非有four skills不可，因为speaking要从头来学，auding更要有相当训练才能办到，reading及writing也都要下一番工夫才能奏效的。这四方面，虽同属语言技巧（language skills），但有程度上的分别。教学auding和speaking，与教学reading和writing，方法完全不同，前者是要养成习惯，后者是重在训练，和下苦功。

所谓mim-mem-com是mimicry-memorization-communication的头三字，勉强可译为“模记传达法”。即第一步是“模仿”，其次是“记忆”，然后便可“传达”与别人了。语言是communication的means，人与人之间传情达意的工具，不外语言文字，但要怎样才能充分运用这种工具，由模仿到记忆，正是学外国语文的阶段呢。

137. “说”的十八种译法

听说同是一个字，在不同的文句中，便有不同的译法，不知确否？请以“说”字为例，详为说明。

【解答】是的，同一字在不同的文句中，常有不同的译法。这和惯用法有关，如不合英文的惯用法，即令意思相同，文法不错，也是不对的。现就中文的“说”字，举例如下：

1. 他“说”英语。He speaks English.

2. 他“说”谎。He tells a lie.

3. 他“说”他忙。He says he is busy.

4. 不要胡“说”。Don’t talk nonsense.

5. 我“说”不出来。I am unable to express.

6. 这个“说”不得。It must not be mentioned.

7. 我替他“说”个人情。I appeal to you on his behalf.

8. 他们“说”相声。They mimic sounds and voices.

9. 故就汤而“说”之。He therefore went to Tang and urged him.

10.“说”大人则藐之。those who give counsel to the great should despise them。

11.“说”而罢之。persuade him to cease hostilities。

12.“说”于桑田。stop among the mulberry trees and fields。

13. 学而时习之，不亦“说”乎。Is it not pleasant to learn with a constant perseverance and application？

14. 我心不“说”。My heart is dissatisfied.

15. 民莫不“说”。The people are all pleased.

16. 无所不“说”。nothing in which he does not delight。

17. 近者“说”。those near are made happy 。

18. 异端邪“说”。heretical doctrines。

ⅩⅢ 发 音

138. 英文分音法

英文写到一行的尾上，所剩的地方不多，不能再写完一个整字，只好写出那字的一部分，而将余下的一部分移到第二行去写，这种分开写的时候，不知有无一定的规矩？曾见同是present一字，有人分写为pres-ent，有人又分写为pre-sent，应以哪种分写法为对？

【解答】英文有所谓分音法（syllabification），是把一个字分做两行来写，但在何处分开是一定的，不能随便乱来，把英文的单字分得支离破碎，不成形状。现在简单地来谈一下分音的法则。

英文的单字是一些字母拼成的，有的短，有的长，短的包含一个音节（syllable），长的可包含五六个音节。音节是一个音的单位，语文就是由这些元素（音的单位）而构成的；我们听人说话，就要听取这些音节，才能发生意义。写在纸上的文字和说在口里的话语一样，由音的成分而构成意义，音是不变的，如果把字母写颠倒了，就可能完全失去它所代表的音，也随之而失去了它所代表的意义。不仅把字母错乱颠倒不行，有时甚至分开都要完全变性。神（god）写颠倒了就变成狗（dog），圆顶（dome）分开来便成为do和me二字，与原来的字风马牛不相及了。

多音节的字在不得已时要分开的话，也不宜完全依照字源来分，而要以发音为准。兹将普通的分音法，分条举出如下：

（1）单音节的字不可分开。如ago为二音节可分为a-go，但age为单音节就不能分。长的单音节字如strength、through、breadth等，都不能分开。

（2）双音节以上的字就可依照音节来分，如able只能分成a-ble，不能分成ab-le或abl-e。

（3）有前缀（prefix）的字可从字根分开，如a-bove、be-fore、re-turn、mis-spell、de-scribe、ex-change等。但以短母音结尾的前缀，而又有重音（accent）的话，就要把后面的子音（即辅音——编注）放到前面来再分，问题中所提出的字例，正是由于这种原因而产生出来的分音的方法。present一字作名词或形容词用时，发音是〔preznt〕，即前缀有短母音〔e〕，又有重音，所以分写时应为pres-ent。此字如作动词用时发音是〔pri'zent〕，重音在第二音节，分音应写成pre-sent。可见两种写法都是对的。他例如：rec-ord（名）、re-cord（动）。

（4）以子音开始的后缀（suffix），可从字根分开，如use-ful、kind-ness、hope-less等。

（5）-ed、-ing、-er、-est等，可从字根分开，如wed-ding、want-ing、great-er、great-est等。但这种后缀如果是接在“单母音+单子音”的字上时，必得再重复一个子音，那时这个重复的子音就要分在后面的后缀一块儿，即run-ner、run-ning、hot-ter、hot-test等。又，字根以两个同样的子音结尾时，则不可分开，现以adding及wedding二字为例，add-ing（dd不分）及wed-ding（dd要分）。

（6）以母音开始的后缀，有时要从字根上取一字母过来再分，如den-tal、ac-tor、abun-dant、igno-rance、accep-table、respon-sible等，但-er和-or同为“行为者”之意，而分音的方法不同。比较：mak-er、au-thor。

（7）后缀如-tion、-sion、-cial、-cian、-cious、-tive、-sive、-ism、-cism、-tress、 -ture、-sure、-geous等都可分开，例：men-tion、pen-sion、so-cial、physi-cian、pre-cious、ac-tive、posses-sive、national-ism、criti-cism、ac-tress、na-ture、pres-sure、coura-geous。

（8）后缀为另外一字所构成的，即-sphere、-graphy、-logy、-scope、-phone、-meter等也可分开，例：hemi-sphere、photo-graphy、idiomo-logy、tele-scope、grama-phone、speedo-meter等。

（9）有重音的长母音，可以分开，如fa-ther、wa-ter、i-dle、e-ven、ho-ly等。

（10）有重音的长母音后接有〔n〕或〔l〕时，则将此子音一同分在前面，如an-cient、sol-dier、fal-ter等。

（11）两个母音相连而不是发同一音的时候，可在那两个母音之间分开，如li-on、re-al、ru-in等。

（12）有重音的短母音，后接有子音时，则将此子音一同分在前面，如nev-er、vis-it、bus-y等。

（13）有重音的短母音，后接有“子音+ le”时，可在那短母音和子音之间分开，如trou-ble、cou-ple、tri-ple等。

（14）有重音的短母音，后接有〔t〕、〔d〕、〔s〕、〔z〕等子音时，则将此子音一同分在前面，如nat-ural、cas-ual、az-ure等。

（15）有重音的母音，后接有子音〔n〕或〔l〕时，则将此子音一同分在前面，如un-ion、on-ion、val-iant等。

（16）有重复子音的字，可在重复子音的地方分开，如：sug-gest、gram-mar、com-merce、suc-ceed、traf-fic、spot-ted、fit-ted等。但加有前缀或后缀时，则否，如：im-pressed、oc-curred、call-ing、miss-ing等。

（17）复合字原已有短划者，即在其短划处分开，如rail-way、self-control、air-tight等。

（18）缩写字如couldn’t、haven’t、shouldn’t、wouldn’t、don’t等不可分开。

（19）省写字，如 U. S. A. ，C. O. D.，M. A.，M. P. 等不可分开。

（20）阿拉伯数字也不可分作两行。

139. 同化作用

英文的片语used to中used一字的发音，照字典的注音应为〔ju：zd〕，但常见有人注作〔ju：st〕，不知是否错误？

【解答】字典上所注的英文单字的发音是单独存在时应有的发音，等到这个单字和别的单字连在一块儿的时候，它的音可能发生变化。例如am一字，在“Yes，I am.”句中读原来的重音，到了“I am here.”句中就念得很轻了。又如her一字，在“I’m speaking to her，of course.”句中要重读，到了“This is her book.”句中就要轻读了。此外，声音每每发生同化作用（Assimilation），如过去动词中的-ed，本应读〔d〕的音，但接在ask一字的后面，就受到〔k〕音的同化，而要读成〔t〕的音了。

问题中的used一字也是一样，有时读原有的音，有时因后接有to的关系，而使〔d〕音变成〔t〕音，〔d〕既变成了〔t〕，那么〔d〕前的浊音〔z〕，也跟着变成清音的〔s〕了，所以整个的字便由〔ju：zd〕变成了〔ju：st〕。

现举实例说明如下：

He has used up all his strength.（他把力量用尽了。）句中的used应读原来的〔ju：zd〕的音，因为后面接的up一字，不发生同化作用。

This tool is used for many purposes.（这工具有许多用途。）句中used一字跟后面接的for many purposes一个片语，多少有点距离，不是紧相接着的。所以也不受同化作用的影响，仍读〔ju：zd〕。

In those days a flint was used to make fire.（在那个时候是用火石相击来生火的。）句中used仍应发〔ju：zd〕的音，因为在发音上used并不和后面的to（make fire）直接结合在一块儿。

You will soon get used to it.（你很快就会习惯的。）句中的used（= accustomed）和后面的to在发音上发生同化作用，所以要读〔ju：st〕。

That is where I used to live when I was a boy.（那是我少年时代住过的地方。）句中的used因后接to的关系，自应读〔ju：st〕的音。

有时在句中虽则把used和to隔开来，但文气上仍是接连在一起的，所以还是要读〔ju：st〕的音，如：

Used you to know him？（以前你就认识他的吗？）

和used to的助动词相类似的发音现象，还有have to、has to、had to，即〔v〕、〔z〕、〔d〕的音要变成〔f〕、〔s〕、〔t〕的音，自然都是受后接to的同化作用的影响。

140. 动静异音

作“礼物”解的名词present，重音在第一音节，作“送呈”解的动词present，则重音移到第二音节。这种重音的变动，不知是否有一定的规则？

【解答】一般同一意义的名词或形容词重音多在前面的音节上，而动词则在后面的音节上，这正是中国音韵学上所谓“动静异音”，中外语文都是一样。现将常见的字列举如下：

’absent（形）缺席

abs’ent（动）

’abstract（名、形）抽象

abstr’act（动）

’attribute（名）属性

attr’ibute（动）

c’onduct（名）行为

cond’uct（动）

c’onflict（名）冲突

confl’ict（动）

c’onsort（名）配偶

cons’ort（动）

c’ontest（名）竞争

cont’est（动）

c’ontract（名）契约

contr’act（动）

c’ontrast（名）对照

contr’ast（动）

c’onvert（名）改变信仰者

conv’ert（动）

d’ecrease（名）减少

decr’ease（动）

d’etail（名）详细

det’ail（动）

d’igest（名）摘要

dig’est（动）消化

d’iscord（名）不和

disc’ord（动）

’export（名）输出

exp’ort（动）

’extract（名）拔萃

extr’act（动）

fr’equent（形）频繁

frequ’ent（动）

’import（名）输入

imp’ort（动）

’increase（名）增加

incr’ease（动）

’insult（名）侮辱

ins’ult（动）

’object（名）目的

obj’ect（动）反对

p’erfect（形）完全

perf’ect（动）

p’ermit（名）许可

perm’it（动）

pr’esent（名、形）礼物、现在

pres’ent（动）送呈

pr’oduce（名）产物

prod’uce（动）

pr’ogress（名）进步

progr’ess（动）

pr’otest（名）抗议

prot’est（动）

r’ecord（名）记录

rec’ord（动）

s’ubject（名、形）主语、服从于

subj’ect（动）使服从

s’uspect（名、形）怀疑

susp’ect　（动）

s’urvey（名）纵览

surv’ey（动）

t’orment（名）苦恼

torm’ent（动）

tr’ansfer（名）转任

transf’er（动）

tr’ansport（名）运输

transp’ort（动）

由以上诸字看来，可知一般的情形是“名前动后”的，但在含义不同时，发音也有改变，或同为名词，或名词与形容词，都是发音不同的。现再举出下列各例，以见一斑。

c’ontent（名）容量（单数形），内容（复数形）

cont’ent（名、形、动）满足

d’esert（名、形）沙漠

des’ert（名）应得的赏罚；功劳。（动）遗弃

’invalid（名）病人

inv’alid（形）无效

m’inute（名）分（时间的）

min’ute（形）细微

r’efuse（名）垃圾

ref’use（动）拒绝

141. 滋生字重音的转变

英文由名词变成形容词，或由动词变成名词种种变化出来的字，重音都有改变，请就常用的字举例说明，以资辨别。

【解答】英文单字，有时虽同出一源的字，而因词性不同，重音每有改变，例如同为动词act所滋生出来的形容词active，重音在第一音节，而名词的activity，则重音又移到第二音节去了，请比较下列诸字。

adm’ire羡慕

’admirable可慕羡的

’advertise做广告

adv’ertisement广告

’anxious挂念的

anx’iety悬念

adv’antage利益

advant’ageous有利的

’author作家

auth’ority权威

’autumn秋天

aut’umnal秋天的

’botany植物学

bot’anical植物学上的

bi’ography传记

biogr’aphical传记的

c’apable可能的

capab’ility能力

c’eremony仪式

cerem’onial仪式的

c’ertain确实的

ascert’ain决定

c’ertify证明

cert’ificate证件

Ch’ina中国

Chin’ese中国的

ch’aracter性格

character’istic特征

cig’ar雪茄

cigar’ette纸烟

c’ommerce商业

comm’ercial商业的

c’ompany交游，公司

comp’anion伴侣

comp’are比较

c’omparable可比较的

comp’arative比较的

c’ontemplate默想

comtempl’ation默想

c’ourage勇气

cour’ageous有勇气的

c’urious奇怪的

curi’osity好奇的

d’emocrat民主党

dem’ocracy民主政治

democr’atic民主的

dr’ama戏剧

dram’atic戏剧的

dr’amatist剧作家

’educate教化

educ’ation教育

ec’onomy节俭、经济

econ’omic经济上的

e’conomist经济学者

el’ectric电的

electr’icity电力、电学

’element元素

elem’entary本质的，初步的

’emphasis强调

emph’atic强调的

empl’oy雇佣

employ’ee雇员

’energy能力

energ’etic元气旺盛的

’engine机器

engin’eer工程师

’error错误

err’oneous错误的

’essence精髓

ess’ential本质的

est’eem尊敬

’esteemable可尊敬的

exc’el超越

’excellent优越的

f’amily家庭

fam’iliar熟知的

famili’arity精通

fam’iliarize惯于

f’amous著名的

’infamous声名狼藉的

h’abit习惯

hab’itual习惯上的

h’armony和谐

harm’onious和谐的

h’ero英雄

her’oic壮烈的

h’eroine巾帼英雄

h’istory历史

hist’oric历史上有名的

hist’orian历史家

hor’izon地平线

horiz’ontal水平的

h’uman人的

hum’anity人性、人类

ign’ore忽视

’ignorance无知

’influence影响

influ’ential有势力的

’industry工业、勤勉

ind’ustrial工业的

ind’ustrious勤勉的

’intellect智能

intell’ectual聪明的

l’uxury奢侈

lux’urious奢侈的

maint’ain维持、供给

m’aintenance保持、生活费用

m’emory记忆

mem’orial纪念的

m’ystery神秘

myst’erious神秘的

negl’ect疏忽

n’egligent怠慢的

n’ecessary必要的

nec’essity必要

’office职务、办公处

off’icial文官、官式的

’origin起源

or’iginal原来的

origin’ality原始

p’atriot爱国者

patri’otic爱国的

p’icture图画

pictur’esque历历如绘的

pict’orial图画的

ph’otograph照相

phot’ographer照相师

photogr’aphic写实的

p’olitics政治学

pol’itical政治的

polit’ician政客

pref’er宁取

pr’eferable更好的

prefer’ential优先的

prod’uce生产

pr’oduct产物

resp’onsible负责的

responsib’ility责任

r’idicule讪笑

rid’iculous可笑的

s’atisfy满足

satisf’actory满足的

sc’ience科学

scient’ific科学的

s’ocial社会的

soc’iety社会

social’ist社会主义者

s’ympathy同情

sympath’etic同情的

’universe宇宙

univ’ersity大学

v’ictory胜利

vict’orious胜利的

142. 前缀的轻重音

英文单字的前缀（prefix）大部分都没有重音，但少数是有重音的，请举例分别加以说明。

【解答】普通英语无重音的前缀，常见的字如下：

a-：a’wake唤醒

ac-：ac’count计算

ad-：ad’mire艳羡

af-：af’ford给与

ag-：ag’ree同意

al-：al’lude暗指

am-：am’ong在（多数）之中

an-：an’noy烦扰

ap-：ap’peal诉诸

ar-：ar’range整理

as-：as’sist帮助

at-：at’tract吸引

be-：be’cause因为

col-：col’lect收集

com-：com’plain抱怨

con-：con’nect联络

cor-：cor’rect改正

de-：de’cide决定

di-：di’rect指导

dis-：dis’cover发现

e-：e’dition版本

ef-：ef’fect结果

el-：el’ect选举

em-：em’ploy雇佣

en-：en’large放大

es-：es’cape逃走

ex-：ex’cuse原谅

for-：for’get忘记

il-：il’lusion幻影

im-：im’mense极广大的

in-：in’clude包括

inter-：inter’national国际

ir-：ir’regular不规则的

mis-：mis’fortune灾祸

o-：o’mit省略

ob-：ob’lige强制

oc-：oc’cur发生

of-：of’fend冒犯

op-：op’press压迫

out-：out’wit以机智胜过

over-：over’take追及

par-：par’ticular特别的

per-：per’form行为

pre-：pre’fer宁取

pro-：pro’duce生产

re-：re’peat反复

sub-：sub’mit提出

suc-：suc’ceed成功

sup-：sup’pose推测

sur-：sur’prise惊异

sus-：sus’pect怀疑

there-：there’of属于它的

trans-：trans’form变形

un-：un’happy不快乐的

under-：under’stand了解

where-：where’as然而

with-：with’out沒有

下列各字前缀是有重音的：

any-：’anyhow无论如何

by-：’bygone已往的

every-：’everyone所有的人

no-：’nobody无人

some-：’something某事，某物

143. 后缀的轻重音

英文单字的后缀（suffix）大都无重音，但也有少数是要重读的，请举例说明。

【解答】普通的后缀都是没有重音的，例如：

-able：’eatable可吃的

-age：’carriage马车

-al：’natural自然的

-ar：’beggar乞食

-dom：’freedom自由

-ed：cor’rupted腐败的

-en：’wooden木头的

-er：’narrower较窄的

-est：’narrowest最窄的

-or：’governor总督

-ess：’lioness牝狮

-fold：’threefold三倍的

-ful：’beautiful美丽的

-hood：’boyhood童年

-ic：ener’getic精力充沛的

-ical：’musical音乐的

-ing：be’ginning开头

-ish：’childish孩子气

-ism：’heroism英雄主义

-ist：’novelist小说家

-ize：’naturalize归化

-less：’hopeless无望

-let：’booklet小册子

-like：’ladylike贵妇似的

-ling：’duckling小鸭子

-ly：’happily幸福地

-ment：’movement运动

-ness：’happiness幸福

-ship：’friendship友谊

-some：’troublesome麻烦的

-tive：’motive动机

-ure：en’closure封入之件

-ward：’homeward朝向家去

-wise：’otherwise不然的话

-y：’honesty诚实

有重音的后缀如下：

-ade：cas’cade小瀑布

-ee：a’gree同意

-eer：ca’reer前程

-ese：Chi’nese中国人

-esque：pictu’resque如画的

-ette：ciga’rette纸烟

-ine：ma’rine海的

-oo：bam’boo竹

-oon：bal’loon气球

-ose：sup’pose推测

ⅩⅣ 标 点

144. hyphen的有无

在书上常见有时写to-day、to-morrow，有时又写today、tomorrow，不知这两种写法到底有何不同？并请说明hyphen（短划）的正确用途。

【解答】在英文的写法上，有由繁趋简的倾向，原来是两个单字，进一步用短划把它们连在一块儿，最后索性把它们写成一个字，如head ache，head-ache，headache及school house， school-house，schoolhouse等皆是。可知除去hyphen而写成一字的，是最后发展出来的形式。在某英文课本上有句云：

One is a steamship and the other is a sailing-ship.（一个是汽船，另一个是帆船。）

句中的steamship是已经发展到最后阶段，变成一字了，而sailing-ship则还在中途，只是将两个单字用短划连结为一个复合字罢了。fountain-pen也是同样的情形，分为二字写似已过时，写成一字又还太早。现在年纪比较大点的人，多少带点保守性，喜欢to-day、to-morrow、to-night的形式，但年轻的一辈就爱摒弃hyphen而简单地写成一字了。英国的语文学者Fowler说，现在hyphen的使用，实陷入混乱（chaotic）状态中，是有根据的。因为《牛津大辞典》及Shorter Oxford上是用的to-day的形式，到了Concise上则将today、to-day并举；到了Pocket则只剩today一个形式了。同是牛津系统的辞典就有此不同。COD和POD上也有schoolhouse和school-house的区别。同一人编的辞典尚且如此，其余可想。从hyphen-compound，如 note-paper（信纸），到non-hyphen-compound，如notebook（笔记本），其间是要经过一段长久的时间的。

至于hyphen的用法，可分下列各条来说明：

（1）形成复合字：

如brother-in-law，go-between，hanger-on，home-made，good-for-nothing，stick-in-the-mud，尚有极端的例如：“There is a sort of Oh-what-a-wicked-world-this-is-and-how-I-wish-I-could-do-something-to-make-it-better-and-nobler.”。

（2）将好几个字联成一个形容词：

如four-month-old baby，the never-say-die party，go-as-you-please methods，devil-may-care expression，up-to-date information，a twenty-dollar-a-week clerk，a when-I-was-in-the-States attitude。

（3）接合形容词与名词，而产生字面以外的意义：

如 black bird（黑色羽毛的鸟）变成 black-bird（或blackbird）（山鸟）。red coat（红衣）变成red-coat（英国兵）。

（4）两个分别发音的，相同的母音之间：

如co-opt、pre-empt、re-elect、co-operation。

（5）当re-加上动词，避免和有此前缀的复合字混同，如：

recover（恢复） recreate（休养）

re-cover（再覆盖） re-create（再造）

（6）在固有名词前加前缀时：

如pro-Chinese、pre-Christian、anti-Christ。

（7）把用文字写出的数目字分开：

如twenty-three、thirty-fifth、ninety-nine、five-and-twenty，但one hundred and one却不要。

（8）当分数用文字写出时：

如five-sixths、five-fourteenths、four and two-thirds。

（9）用a作前缀加在动名词前时：

如：a-fishing、a-sighing、a-sobbing。

（10）当一个字分成两行写时：

如know-ledge、re-ported、state-ments、ac-tion。

145. 限制用法不可加comma

“我认识昨天跟你说话的那个人。”译成英文的“I know the man，who spoke to you yesterday.”，为什么不对？

【解答】译文只消将man后的逗号（comma）去掉，就正确无误了。英文的字句，尤其是有关系代名词的子句，有限制的用法（Restrictive Use）和无限制的用法（Non-Restrictive Use）两种。在限制的用法中，决不可用逗号将先行词（antecedent）分开，问题中的译文即错在此。“I know the man who（= that）spoke to you yesterday.”一句是不可分割的，如果单说I know the man意思就不完全，因为the man不知指谁，所以who spoke to you yesterday必须紧密地结合在the man那个先行词上才行。至于“I met a man in the village，who（= and he）told me the road to take.（我在村里遇见一个男人，他告诉了我应走的路。）”就是无限制的用法，所以在关系代名词who之前要用逗号，因为who told me the road to take并不是限制先行词a man的，没有这个子句，单说I met a man in the village也能成立的。

我们写英文时应注意的就是逗号不可随便乱用，遇到限制的子句或字句时，决不可加上逗号，例如：

This is the house that Jack built.（这是贾克造的房子。）

I want to know many things which only you can tell me.（我要知道只有你能够告诉我的许多事情。）

Perhaps I am the only man in the world who can boast of such good fortune.（能夸说有这样好运气的人，也许世界上只有我一人。）

上面三例中的that Jack built、which only you can tell me、who can boast of such good fortune，可说是各句中必要的一部分，自然不能用逗号来加以分割呢。

有时句中的子句并没有上举的这种严格限制，它可以解释为限制的用法，也可解释为无限制的用法，那时写作者必须清楚地加以标点，使读者才能明白他想要表达的意思，例如：

（1）The lumber，which had been lying on the porch，was warped.

（2）The lumber which had been lying on the porch was warped.

这同样的一句话，因标点的关系而产生不同的意思出来。（1）句主要是说的木板弯曲了，附带地提到那木板的所在地。（2）句隐指着另外还有别的木板，而那块放在门廊上的已经弯曲了。

（1）We finally solved the problem，which had given us a good deal of trou-ble.

（2）We finally solved the problem which had given us a good deal of trou-ble.

第一句是料定读者早已明白所解决的是什么问题，第二句用限制子句便表示出所解决的问题就是那曾经给了我们许多麻烦的问题。

146. comma的用法

请说明下列二句意义有何不同？

（1）I have said nothing yet.

（2）I have said nothing，yet.

又逗号有些什么重要的用法？

【解答】第（1）句是平实无华的，事实的叙述，没有加入一点个人的感情进去；而第（2）句，多了一个逗号，神气就大不相同了。那意思是虽则我很忍耐地到现在为止，还是一句话都没有说，可是等到我忍无可忍的时候，一开口恐怕就要冲突起来。在说yet一字以前，停顿一下，却有说不尽的意思。这是用标点来表现的修辞学和加重语气的说法。

兹将逗号的二十种用法，简单地例解如下：

（1）用以分开呼告词：

Tom，be quiet.（汤姆，不要闹。）

Frailty，thy name is woman. ——Shakespeare（弱者，你的名字是女人。）

（2）用以分开同格的字句：

Abraham Lincoln，America’s best-beloved president，was one of the homeliest men who ever ruled a great nation.（美国人民最爱戴的总统林肯，是曾经统治过一个大国的元首中最朴素的人。）

（3）用以分开有主语的独立分词片语：

The sun having risen，they continued their journey.（太阳出来了，他们继续上路。）

（4）用以分开直接叙述的引用句：

He said，“I am your friend.”（他说：“我是你的朋友。”）

“It is not true，”I told him.（我告诉他：“那不是真的。”）

（5）用以分开没有连词而连接的同等字句：

Horse，foot，and marines were in one camp.（骑兵、步兵和水兵，同住一营。）

They were all well armed，in good spirits，and eager for the fight.（他们都全副武装，精神百倍，亟欲一显身手。）

（6）用以表示省去的字：

To err is human；to forgive，divine.（人总是要犯过失的，神就可以恕免。）

You will go to Hunan；and I，to Shensi.（君向潇湘我向秦。）

（7）用以分开插入的字句：

They did not，however，succeed in their attempt.（然而他们的尝试并未成功。）

He died，appropriately，on the eve of the Revolution.（他适死在革命的前夜。）句中appropriately一字是修饰整句的，故用逗号隔开，在修饰动词的时候，就无需用逗号分开，如“Your letter has apparently been lost.（你的信显然是遗失了。）”。

（8）用以分开副词子句：

He won the prize，because he worked diligently.（他因为工作勤勉，所以得奖。）在短句中可略去逗号，如“Pay me before I go.（在我走以前付给我吧。）”。

（9）用以分开无限制的子句：

The secretary of the club，who spoke next，advanced a better argument.（俱乐部的秘书其次发言，他发出了更好的议论。）如系限制的子句就决不用逗号：“This is the man that came yesterday.（这就是昨天来的那个人。）”。

（10）用以分开不照平常次序排列的辞句：

On the arrival of the general，the troops formed up and presented arms.（在将军到来时，军队整队举枪敬礼。）

（11）用以分开一个长的主语：

To have gone there without asking her to accompany us，would have been ungrateful.（去到那里而没有邀她同去，未免对她不住。）

（12）用以分开同等的子句：

He first studied the rudiments of language，and then investigated its vari-ous dialects.（他起初学了语言的基本原理，随后又研究各种方言。）

（13）用以分开名词前的两个介词或形容词：

He studied hard for，and came out first in，the examination.（他很努力地准备了考试，而得名列前茅。）

Synonyms have a similar，but not an identical，meaning.（同义字有相类似但不完全相同的意义。）

（14）用以分开第一个以后的子句：

He is a man who is never satisfied with what he has，who is always crav-ing for more，and who is determined that he will get it.（他是一个总不满足，贪得无厌，而一定要得到才甘心的人。）

（15）用以分开主语前的长的辞句：

In spite of every precaution known to the most skillful scientists of all the world，the experiment failed.（尽管全世界所有优秀科学家用尽了各种预防的方法，那实验还是失败了。）

（16）用以分开引导的辞句：

This book，in other words，made a way for itself before all others.（换言之，这本书不胫而走，比其余的书都销得好。）

（17）用以分开句中形式相同但属于另一类别的字：

Whatever is，is right.（无论什么都是对的。）

（18）用以防止意义的混乱：

John James and Harry have come.（约翰·詹姆斯和哈利两个孩子来了。）句中John James是一个人，姓James名John。

John，James and Harry have come.（约翰呀，詹姆斯和哈利来了。）句中John为呼告词，而John和James为两个人。

John，James，and Harry have come.（约翰、詹姆斯、哈利三个孩子来了。）句中是说三个人同来了。

（19）用以分开日与年，但月后不要用逗号：

July 25，1969，但July 1969。

（20）数字倒数每隔三位加一逗号：

l,865　28,453　1,453,869　190,000,000。

147. 两种括弧的用法

括弧英文叫parentheses，又叫brackets，二者不知有何分别？用法是否一样？

【解答】英文的parentheses是圆括弧，而brackets是方括弧，二者形式有异，而用法也有不同。括弧的作用，和破折号（dash）相反，破折号是用于加强的，而括弧便是用于减轻的说法（de-emphasize）。括弧必须成对地使用。正式文章中务必少用括弧。普通常用的是圆括弧，要特殊的情形才用方括弧。兹分别例解如下：

A.圆括弧的用法。

（1）括住一个不重要的字句：

He gained from heaven（’twas all he wished）a friend.——Gray（他从天得到一个朋友，那正是他所指望的。）

He did say（though he never really meant it）that he intended to be an actor.（他确曾说过他想要作一个戏子，虽则他并不是认真说的。）

The book（I can’t remember the title）was about Singapore.（那本书是关于新加坡的，书名我忘了。）

（2）当文法上不重要的字插入句中时：

The best value（in the long run）will be found in a more expensive brand.（最有价值的毕竟是高价牌子的货物。）

The question he asks（and only partly answers）is not so much “Where are we？” as “Whither are we going？”（他所问的，以及仅回答一部分的问题，并不在“我们现在何处？”，而在“我们要往何处去？”。）

（3）隔开说明的字句：

I will come on the 15th（Thursday）at 10 o’clock.（我在十五日星期四上午十点钟来。）

Lest we forget；lest we forget！（The “we” refers to the English.）（唯恐我们忘记；唯恐我们忘记！——“我们”在这里是指英国人。）

（4）注明人的生卒之年：

Louise Pasteur（1822—1895）was a French chemist and bacteriologist.（巴士特是法国的化学家和微生物学者。）

试比较下列三句的用法。

His father（a general in the Air Force）retired at an early age. 减弱的说法。

His father a general in the Air Force，retired at an early age. 惯用的说法。

His father—a general in the Air Force—retired at an early age. 加强的说法。

B.方括弧的用法。

（1）引用者或注释者（而不是原作者）所加的说明：

Noyes writes，“The papaya〔a kind of tropical fruit〕 is the finest expe-rience in taste known to mortal man.”（诺衣斯撰文云：“木瓜〔一种热带水果〕有人类所知的最美的味道。”）如果不用方括弧而用圆括弧时，就可能是原作者自己加的说明。

Lest we〔the English〕 forget；lest we forget！（唯恐我们〔指英国人〕忘记；唯恐我们忘记！）

（2）在已用圆括弧的句子中：

We have mentioned before〔see page 50（foot-note）〕 that . . .（我们在五十页的脚注上已提到，……）

（3）注明字的发音时：

Leicester〔’lestə〕 is a place name.（莱斯特是一个地名。）

148. apostrophe的用法

“动物常要为它的幼兽而死。”译成英文的“An animal will often die for it’s young.”，据说错了，应将it’s改为its才对。Apostrophe “s”不是表属格的吗？请就这种Apostrophe的用法例举说明。

【解答】这句英译确是错了，如果不改的话，意思便是“动物常因年幼而死”。缩写号（Apostrophe）加“s”是可以表属格的，不过只能用于名词之后，如Webster’s Dictionary句中it是代名词，故不能用。代名词本身有其属格，如my、his、her、its等。这个it’s = it is的省略，for it’s young = for it is young（因为它年幼）。

这种缩写号是1680年前后诞生的标点符号，从那以后二百年间一直使得印刷者感到使用上的困难，而伤透了脑筋。英国的剧作家Bernard Shaw最讨厌这种缩写号，曾经通知他的出版家在他著作中缩写号全部取消不用。可是结果也有行不通的地方，如I’ll = I will，取消缩写号后变成ill（生病的）了；we’d = we would（should，could，had），取消缩写号后变成wed（结婚）了；he’ll = he will取消缩写号后变成hell（地狱）了。

近年对于这种缩写号的使用略见减少。美国的交通信号不用红绿灯，而改用“WALK”“DONT WALK”的字样的，已习见不鲜。这个DONT便未用缩写号。

用了缩写号文意也并不是绝对明显的，例如：

A：I haven’t seen your girl friend yet. What’s she like？

B：Expensive clothes，night clubs，and fancy cars.

在这个短简的对话中，便可看出缩写号的暧昧不明的地方，因为“What’s she like？”可解释为“What is she like？（她像什么样子？）”，又可解释为“What does she like？（她喜欢什么？）”。

缩写号有下列四种用法。

（1）表示单字中省去一个或几个字母：

Can’t（cannot），don’t（do not），’phone（telephone），’plane（airplane），’bus（omnibus）等。

When you’re a married man，Samivel，you’ll understand a good many things as you don’t understand now；but whether it’s worth while goin’ through so much to learn so little，as the charity boy said when he got to the end of the alphabet，is a matter of taste. I rather think it isn’t. ——C. Dickens（萨米味尔，等你结了婚，你就会懂得你现在所不懂得的许许多多的事；不过好比那个慈善学校的男学生，在学完了二十六个字母之后所说的一样，这是不是值得花这许多工夫来学这么一点点东西，那就要看各人的趣味了。我有点觉得是不值得的。）

（2）表示名词的所有格：

Like snow upon the desert’s dusty face.（好似沙漠灰沙面上的雪。）

The chairman’s speech is moving.（主席的演说很是动人的。）

（3）在下列字的复数时：

Dot your i’s and cross your t’s.（在你写的“i”字上要加点，“t”字上要画横。）

Mind your P’s and Q’s.（当心。）

He has written down three 7’s.（他写下了三个七字。）

Don’t use so many and’s.（不要用许多and。）

I grew tired of hearing his “when’s” and “where’s”.（我听厌了他的“在何时”和“在何处”。）

（4）数字的复数及公元年数的简说：

The 1960’s is an eventful decade.（二十世纪的六十年代是一个多事的十年。）

We write ’52 for 1952.（我们只写五二以代表一九五二年。）

149. dash的用法

偶见“‘D—n！’ cried the scoundrel.”的说法，不知D—n是什么意思？请就dash的用法说明一下。

【解答】D—n为damn的省略，因damn是咒骂语，如“Damn you！（该死！）”，故不愿明说出来，而用破折号来表示。有时写作“D— you！”=“God damn you！”。一般把这种破折号读成blank，如Mr. — of — place读Mr. Blank of Blank place（某地的某君）。俗语中把blank一字代替damn或damned，这种时候用的破折号，除blank外，又可读作blanky、blanked、blankety等，俚语中的blankety-blank为damned的幽默婉曲语，如the blankety-blank boy（那该死的孩子）。

标点符号之一的破折号（dash）有下列各种用法：

（1）用于插入句的前后以代替括弧：

At the age of ten—such is the power of genius—he could read Greek with facility.（在十岁时——这就是所谓天才的能力吧——他就能轻易地读懂希腊文。）

（2）补正已说的话：

This type is rare—rarer than it used to be.（此型少见——比以前更为稀罕。）

（3）有“即是”之意，常与that is或i.e.同用：

The hatter talked to me on the subject that really interested him—that is，the subject of hats and heads.（帽店老板和我谈论他最感兴趣的事——那就是谈帽与头的问题。）

（4）指示句中意外的转折或突然的破裂：

We counted them at break of day—And when the sun set，where were they？（在破晓时我们数过他们——到日落时，他们就不见了。）（拜伦）

（5）增强反复的力量：

She dwells with Beauty—Beauty that must die.（她和美同住——那终将死去的美。）（济慈）

（6）随在冒号之后，引导出一个引用句：

Hear Shakespeare：—Frailty，thy name is woman.（听莎翁说得妙：——弱者，你的名字是女人。）

（7）表示字句的省略：

G—d（= God），d—d（= damned），Mr.—（某先生），the little village of T—（叫作 T的小村庄）。

What you say is true，but—（你说的不错，不过——）

（8）表示意外的事情：

He is very generous—of other men’s money.（他很大方——对于别人的钱。）

（9）表示两人的对话：

Do you like papayas？—Yes，I do.（你喜欢吃木瓜吗？——是，我喜欢。）

（10）表示起讫：

Read pages 15—20.（读十五到二十页。）

He lived in London，1936—1939.（他在一九三六年到三九年住在伦敦。）

（11）表示说话迟疑：

I hope so—but—that is—well，I will give it a trial.（我希望是那样——但是——那就是——啊，我来试一下吧。）

（12）详开各细目的前后：

Everything is lost—money，health，friends，reputation.（一切都完了——金钱，健康，朋友，名誉。）

（13）指示一个显著的停顿，以加重后来的话：

There is only one way of treating “men”— with the iron hand.（对付职工只有一个办法——那就是采用铁腕。）（高尔斯华绥）

（14）修辞的效果：

And this great man is criticised by—you.（而这个大人物，竟被你批评了。）

150. quotation marks的用法

从书本上看到的较长的引用文，分段时段末常没有引号（quotation marks），不知是否错误？请说明引号的正确用法。

【解答】在介绍标点用法的专著中，对于各种标点的用法，都有很详细的说明及例子，但例子都是采用短句，没有分段的长文，因此问题中提出的引号的用法中，确实有所遗漏，一般人对于此点，常常发生疑问，自属难免。

现在先答复问题，然后再来说明引号的用法。如果引用的文句很短，或是至长也不过一段时，所采用的引号是不会有问题的。如果引用文至少分成两段，或两段以上时，引号的用法，就有些不同了，即是第一段只有头上要用引号，尾上的引号则须略去，只有在末段的尾上才要加上引号，以表示引用的结束。

H. G. Wells的科学小说《时间机器》（The Time Machine），书中主角“时间旅行者”（Time Traveller）可在时间中自由航行，时而航到未来，时而航到过去，时而又航回现在。这部小说的百分之九十五以上，都是这位航时家的独白，八十万年以上的这个世界的见闻记。全书分成好几百段，都加上引号。要研究引号的用法，最好是看这部小说。

引号通常有下列五种用法：

（1）表示直接叙述：

“What is the meaning of this uproar？” he demanded.（他问：“什么事情这样喧闹？”）

（2）介绍一个引用句：

Revolutionists should remember that wise Chinese proverb：“He who rides on a tiger can never dismount.”（革命家应记住那句中国的常言：“骑虎难下。”）

（3）表示间接叙述中采用直接叙述的字句：

He remarked that the “bold originality” of this policy was not so appar-ent as its author believed.（他说这政策的“大胆的独创性”，并没有它创制者所相信的那样显明。）

（4）表示俚俗的表现法，或用作新奇或特殊意义的字：

The fruit had a “moreish” flavour.（那水果有一点多余的香味。）

（5）书名、剧名、曲名、报纸名、船名等，以代斜体字：

Shakespeare’s “Hamlet” is a tragedy.（莎翁的《哈姆雷特》是一个悲剧。）

Last night’s performance was of “The Tales of Hoffman”.（昨晚所上演的戏是《霍夫曼的故事》。）

I saw the advertisement in the “Morning Post”.（我在《晨报》上看到了那广告。）

The “Empress of Japan” arrived yesterday morning.（“日本皇后”号昨天早晨到了。）

出版后记

延续《英文疑难详解》一书的问答形式，本书作为续篇，处理了14类150个英语问题。虽然比《英文疑难详解》少了50个问题，但是页码却几乎没有减少，足见钱歌川先生在具体回答每一个问题上下了更足的功夫，讲解得更为详细。

另一方面，也是由于这部续篇选入了更多牵涉社会文化背景的问题，是以讲解起来更易敷演成长篇文化散论。我们于其中可以再次感受到钱歌川先生在西学方面的深厚学养，也能令我们明白，要想学好英语或任何一门语言，必须深入到语言所生发的历史环境中去，才不致一知半解。另外，续篇中的“发音”与“标点”两类问题是《英文疑难详解》中没有涉及的，这也是我们在语言的日常应用中常常轻视的盲点，这两类中所包含的十来个问题足以说明，其中也是大有学问的。这样，两本疑难详解基本涵盖了英语学习过程中常见难点的大项，我们从中不仅可以学到具体的英语知识，更应学习治学的方法与态度。

至此，我们重新出版的钱歌川先生的英语学习著作已经出齐，读者的热烈反应超出我们的预料，这是对钱歌川先生和我们的工作的一种鼓励和支持，我们会继续挖掘出版优秀实用的书籍，以飨读者。

服务热线：133-6631-2326 188-1142-1266

服务信箱：reader@hinabook.com

2018年6月